Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
FEED and Basic Design Services for Low Cost Creeping Expansion of
BORL, Bina
TENDER DOCUMENT
(Document No : A702-TENDER_DOC-A702-029-82-41-PF-T-4070)
Table of Contents
Document Number
A702TENDER_DOCA702-029-82-41-PFT-4070
A702-029-82-41-PFT-4070
A702-029-82-41-SI4070
A702-029-82-41-CL4070
A702-029-82-41-LP4070
A702-029-16-51-CF4070
A702-029-81-41TCL-4070
A702-029-82-41SOW-4070
A702-029-79-DS1806
A702-029-79-41-PID1199
A702-029-82-41-SP4070
A702-029-16-50-SP4070
A702-029-16-51-SP4070
A702-029-81-41-SP0014
A702-000-79-41PLS-01
A702-029-16-43-DP4070
A702-029-16-50-SL4070
A702-029-16-51-SL4070
A702-029-16-43-SK4070
A702-029-82-41-DS4070
A702-029-16-50-DS4070
A702-029-16-50-DS4071
A702-029-16-50-DS4072
A702-029-16-50-DS4073
A702-029-82-41-VR4070
A702-029-16-50-VR4070
A702-029-16-51VDR-4070
Page 2 of 1744
Rev.
Document Title
Page
Number
7
TENDER DOCUMENT
316
317
326
COMPLIANCE FORMAT
331
TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE
333
336
MISCELLANEOUS
359
362
363
JOB SPECIFICATION
377
JOB SPECIFICATIONS
381
402
412
SPARE LIST
463
465
467
468
DATA SHEET
474
DATA SHEET
476
DATA SHEET
477
DATA SHEET
478
481
489
494
320
461
Table of Contents
Document Number
Rev.
A702-029-16-43VDR-4070
A702-02-41-ODB-01A702-029-16-50-OD4070
A702-999-16-47EDB-1001
A702-999-16-48EDB-1001
A702-000-16-54-DB0001
A702-6-44-0005-A1
A702-6-44-00054070
A702-6-44-0005
A702-6-44-00064070
A702-6-44-00164070
A702-029-16-513170
A702-029-16-513171
A702-000-16-4700001
A702-000-81-414140
A702-000-81-4144701
A702-029-81-41-DR4070
6-12-0030
6-48-0002
6-61-0014
6-36-0002
6-78-0001
6-78-0002
7-76-0103
1
1
6-51-0014
6-51-0031
6-51-0051
6-51-0064
6-51-0093
6-81-1014
6-81-1031
6-81-1032
6-81-1051
7-51-0103
7-51-0116
6-52-0052
6-52-0040
4
5
6
1
4
3
3
5
3
5
6
3
2
Page 3 of 1744
Document Title
Page
Number
497
0
A
568
592
615
A
A
618
630
A
A
670
696
717
DRAWING
730
DRAWING
731
732
MISCELLANEOUS DRAWING
733
734
735
7
6
3
3
1
738
757
771
779
790
500
566
797
806
813
819
837
847
859
869
873
879
885
891
892
893
967
Table of Contents
Document Number
Rev.
Document Title
7-52-0001
7-52-0002
7-52-0035
7-52-0036
A702-029-81-41-SS4020
6-68-0021
4
4
3
3
0
6-68-0022
6-68-0033
6-82-0001
6-82-2700
6-65-0016
6-65-0017
6-65-0018
6-65-0019
6-65-0021
6-68-0002
6-68-0003
6-68-0004
3
3
4
5
6
6-68-0062
6-66-0004
7-68-0417
7-68-0501
7-68-0506
7-68-0507
7-68-0552
7-68-0553
7-68-0557
7-68-0697
7-65-0006
7-65-0103
7-65-0272
7-65-0404
6-44-0002
0
7
7
6
7
7
7
5
3
4
3
4
3
5
6-44-0012
6-44-0013
4
4
6-44-0051
6-44-0052
6-44-0053
6-44-0054
6
6
6
6
Page 4 of 1744
Page
Number
1003
1007
1010
1013
1014
1017
1047
1061
1077
1164
1201
1207
1219
1230
1240
1245
1260
1273
1303
1310
1315
1322
1330
1336
1339
1347
1352
1355
1363
1364
1367
1368
1369
1422
1437
1446
1456
1476
1483
Table of Contents
Document Number
Rev.
6-44-0056
6-44-0057
6-44-0066
6-44-0067
7-44-0303
4
4
2
1
5
7-44-0304
7-44-0350
7-44-0351
7-44-0353
7-44-0354
7-44-0400
7-44-0403
7-44-0477
7-44-0478
7-44-0479
7-44-0480
7-44-0481
7-44-0482
7-44-0483
7-44-0484
7-44-0486
7-44-0487
4
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
A702-029-81-41-IS4020
7-75-0041
7-75-0036
7-65-0207
6-75-0004
7-75-0071
6-65-0027
4
4
6-75-0010
7-75-0004
7-75-0029
7-75-0063
6-65-0006
7-75-0027
6-75-0005
6-75-0012
4
4
4
3
4
5
0
6-75-0013
7-75-0064
7-75-0003
7-75-0049
6-75-0008
6-75-0003
0
4
4
0
5
5
Page 5 of 1744
4
5
3
6
Document Title
Technical notes for gaskets.
Technical notes for bolts and nuts.
Technical notes for steam and air traps
Technical notes for strainers
T-strainer type-1 2"-4" (150CL RF, 300CL RF & RTJ, 600CL RF &
RTJ)
`T' strainer type-1 6" to 24" ( 150# RF, 300# RF & RTJ, 600# RF
& RTJ)
Vent & drains (on lines 1 1/2" & below).
Vents and drains (on lines 2 and above).
Wells installation 1 1/2" dia taps (up to class 600).
Pressure tappings (PA, PG, PC, PT, PIC etc).
Steam trap assembly STA-1 (closed system).
Drip leg for steam lines.
Butt welding end preparation.
Fillet weld details.
Welding details for branch connections (not breaking into).
Butt weld details (dimensions).
Butt weld details (sequence of welds).
Welding detail for branch connections (stub in).
Branch connection (breaking into).
Branch connection (not breaking into).
Tolerances for fabrication.
Method of cutting & dimensions of field manufactured eccentric
reducers.
LIST OF INSTALLATION STANDARDS
False ceiling details with aluminium grid.
Pipe handrail with square up right type.
Valve pit (RCC) type-V for dia 2" to dia 6" valve
Standard specification for steel / aluminium doors, windows and
ventilators.
Steel door (pressed steel) double shutter.
Standard specification for underground and above ground G.I.
pipeline system (water services)
Standard specification for false ceiling, false flooring underdeck
insulation & partitioning
Dado detail (with BK. Wall & RCC col.)
Steel windows section details.
Urinal fixing detail.
Standard specification for earthwork for underground piping.
Steel windows / ventilators general specifications.
Standard specification for plastering and pointing.
Standard Specification for external facade system with structural
glazing
Standard specification for UPVC doors, windows & ventilators
Wash basin fixing detail.
Skirting detail (with RCC column).
False flooring
Specification for roofing.
Standard specification for wood works
Page
Number
1492
1497
1502
1509
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1524
1525
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1543
1544
1545
1546
1555
1556
1561
1572
1573
1574
1575
1582
1583
1592
1605
1615
1616
1617
1620
1628
Table of Contents
Document Number
Rev.
7-75-0091
7-75-0015
7-75-0002
6-75-0011
0
4
4
1
7-44-0404
7-75-0065
7-75-0068
7-75-0093
6-75-0001
7-75-0043
7-75-0062
6-75-0009
7-75-0032
7-75-0054
6-75-0007
4
4
4
0
5
4
4
5
4
4
5
7-75-0028
7-65-0403
6-65-0013
7-75-0031
7-75-0070
7-75-0014
6-75-0002
6-75-0006
7-75-0060
6-68-0017
4
3
3
4
4
4
6
5
4
0
7-75-0066
Page 6 of 1744
Document Title
Metal sheet flashing detail
Glazed aluminium window.
Skirting detail (with brick wall).
Standard specification for fire check / fire resistant doors, windows
& partitions
Pipe sleeves details for insulated lines under roads & dykes
Plinth protection (with building drain)
Roof drainage and water proofing.
Stainless steel tubular handrail
Standard specification for architectural works general.
Aluminium panel false ceiling (tray type).
European type W.C. (fixing detail).
Standard specification for sanitary fittings and fixtures.
Steel windows fittings and fixtures.
Steel gate (for entrances upto 6.0m width).
Standard specification for white washing, colour washing
distempering, painting and polishing
Steel windows / ventilators use of sections.
Details of barbed wire fencing (with angle iron post).
Standard specification for chain link fencing.
Steel windows / ventilator (with louvers).
Steel door (pressed steel) single shutter.
Glazed aluminium door.
Standard specification for floor finishing.
Standard specification for roof treatment.
Orissa pan W.C. (fixing detail).
Standard specification - civil & structural works - bipolar concrete
penetrating corrosion inhibiting admixture
Wooden panel door (toilet door).
Page
Number
1636
1638
1639
1640
1649
1650
1652
1655
1659
1666
1668
1669
1675
1676
1678
1693
1694
1695
1702
1703
1704
1705
1720
1729
1730
1744
Page 7 of 1744
BIDDING DOCUMENT
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Prepared by:
Page 8 of 1744
BIDDING DOCUMENT
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Part - I: COMMERCIAL SECTION
Prepared by:
Page 9 of 1744
COMMERCIAL SECTION
S.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
NO. OF SHT.
1.
Cover Page
2.
Master Index
3.
4.
20
i)
1+15
5.
Proposal Forms
30
6.
37
7.
Annexure to SCC
i)
Time Schedule
ii)
iii)
10
iv)
22
v)
vi)
Reconciliation of materials
10
vii)
Terms of Payment
viii)
Performance Guarantee
ix)
33
x)
xi)
8.
9.
76
(PRICE PART)
S.
NO.
1.
2.
DESCRIPTION
Cover Page
Schedule of Prices (Preamble, FORM SP-0 to FORM SP-10)
NO. OF SHT.
1
17
Note: Documents as per Master Index (Technical) is attached separately with the Technical Part.
103-A702-1006-MI
Page 1 of 1
Page 10 of 1744
From 18.05.2016
The detailed Notice Inviting Bid (NIB) & Bidding Document can be viewed and downloaded from EIL website
http://tenders.eil.co.in or Central Public Procurement Portal https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app. All amendments,
time extension, clarifications, etc., if any, will be uploaded in these websites only and will not be published in
newspapers. Bidders should regularly visit the above websites to keep themselves updated.
Contact Person: DGM (C&P), EIL Office Complex, Tower-I, 1st Floor, Sector-16, Gurgaon, Haryana, India.
Telephone: +91-124-380-2180, 2181, 2180 E-mail: atul.kumar@eil.co.in / amitkr.gupta@eil.co.in/
deepak.malik@eil.co.in.
DGM (C&P), EIL, GURGAON
Page 11 of 1744
E-Tendering
1.0
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Bharat Oman Refineries Limited (BORL) is a joint venture company promoted by Bharat
Petroleum Corporation Limited (BPCL) and Oman Oil Company S.A.O.C., Sultanate of
Oman (OOC). BORL is engaged in crude procurement, crude oil refining & storage and
despatch of petroleum products. The Company operates a six million metric tonnes per annum
(MMTPA) capacity refinery in the hinterland at Bina, Madhya Pradesh.
1.2
BORL intends to augment the processing capacity of Bina Refinery from existing 6.0 MMTPA
to 7.8 MMTPA under Revamp and Capacity Enhancement Project. Project involves revamp of
process units, utilities, offsites and product dispatch facilities.
1.3
Engineers India Limited (EIL) on behalf of BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED (BORL),
invites e-bids for VPSA OXYGEN PLANT under single stage two bid system from competent
agencies with sound technical and financial capabilities fulfilling the Bidders Qualification
Criteria (BQC) stated in paragraph 6.0 below.
2.0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2 (Two) Nos.
182 TPD (as 100% of Oxygen)
50% of Chain capacity with no O2 venting
90 (min.)
1.5 (minimum)
Ambient
( - ) 46 deg. C at atm. Pressure
One (1) number Roots Air Blower with Electric Motor drive.
One (1) pair of Adsorber vessel.
One (1) number Vacuum Pump with Electric Motor drive.
One (1) number O2 Surge Tank of required volume to meet continuous demand of O 2.
Two (2) numbers Reciprocating Oxygen compressors (1W+1S) with Electric Motor Drive
to supply O2 at specified pressure at the battery limit.
The plant shall be accommodated within the plot area available for this purpose (approximately
40m x 80m).
For complete details, refer Bidding Document.
3.0
NIB REV 0
Page 1 of 8
Page 12 of 1744
4.0
AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
b)
Bidding Document
availability on Website.
c)
30.05.2016
d)
e)
f)
g)
EMD submission
NIB REV 0
i)
j)
k)
Page 2 of 8
Page 13 of 1744
l)
If any of the dates, except for due date for submission of bid indicated above happen to be a
declared holiday in EIL Gurgaon, the next working day shall be considered.
4.1
There will be no waiver of EMD for Public sector Undertakings of Central / State Government
Undertakings and Micro & Small scale Enterprises (MSEs).
4.2
Bidder shall download the Bidding Document in his own name and submit the bid directly. The
Bidding Document is non-transferable.
5.0
5.1
Bids must be accompanied with Earnest Money Deposit/ Bid Security for amount mentioned at
4.0(j) above.
5.2
EMD/ Bid Security shall be in favour of Bharat Oman Refineries Limited in the form of crossed
demand draft payable at Bina, Madhya Pradeshor non-revocable Bank Guarantee on nonjudicial stamp paper of appropriate value and in the prescribed pro-forma, from any Indian
scheduled bank; or from any Indian branch of an International bank.
5.3
Earnest Money Deposit/Bid Security shall be valid up to 2 Months beyond the period of
validity of bids.
5.4
If the Bank Guarantee towards EMD is not in the required proforma, but acceptable otherwise
(considering amount & issuing bank) the Bidder would be asked to resubmit the same in the
required proforma. Such Bids would however, be taken up for evaluation.
6.0
6.1
6.1.1
The Bidder shall be a regular supplier of VPSA (Vacuum Pressure Swing Adsorption) Oxygen
Plant for industrial application and shall be the single point responsibility vendor (SPRV) for the
complete Package.
6.1.2
Bidder shall have designed, engineered, supplied, erected and commissioned in last Ten (10)
years, at least One (1) number VPSA Oxygen Plant having single chain capacity of minimum 55
TPD (as 100% of Oxygen) with purity of 90 % (Vol) or better, which shall have been in
satisfactory operation for a minimum period of One (1) year as on bid due date.
6.1.3
In case the bidder does not possess experience to meet the requirement of Cl. No. 6.1.2 above
on their own, in terms of design and engineering but meets the criteria in terms of supply,
erection and commissioning, the bidder can still be considered provided
6.1.4
a)
The bidder engages a technical collaborator for design and engineering, who meets
the requirements of clause 6.1.1 and 6.1.2 above.
b)
The bidder shall have executed at least one VPSA Oxygen Plant Project with similar tie
up with the proposed technical collaborator in the last Ten (10) years, which shall have
operated satisfactorily for a minimum period of One (1) year as on bid due date.
c)
The bidder shall furnish a MOU with the proposed technical collaborator to this effect
along with the bid, wherein the MOU shall meet following requirements, as a minimum:
I.
The MOU shall define responsibility scope matrix between the bidder and proposed
technical collaborator for the offered VPSA Oxygen plant. The MOU shall confirm
that the proposed technical collaborator shall stand guarantee for the performance
of the offered VPSA Oxygen Plant.
II.
The MOU between the bidder and the proposed technical collaborator shall be valid
at the time of bidding & shall also continue to remain valid at-least up-to Three (3)
years after the delivery of the VPSA Oxygen Plant.
NIB REV 0
Page 3 of 8
Page 14 of 1744
6.2
FINANCIAL CRITERIA
6.2.1
Annual financial turnover of the bidder in at least one of the immediate preceding 3 (three)
financial years as per the audited annual financial results up to the due date for submission of
bids should be not be less than the value as mentioned in the table below:
6.2.2
Networth of the bidder as per the immediate preceding years audited annual financial results should
not be less than the value as mentioned in the table below:
Net-worth shall be calculated as per the provisions of the Companys Act 2013.
6.2.3
Working Capital of the Bidder as per the immediate preceding years audited annual financial results
should not be less than the value as mentioned in the table below:
Working Capital shall be Current Assets minus Current Liabilities plus any unencumbered long term
deposits maintained with scheduled banks.
In case bidder is unable to meet the working capital requirement as above, the bidder can
supplement the working capital requirement with a line of credit from any scheduled bank in India.
Bidder shall furnish a certificate from any scheduled bank on banks letter head for availability of line
of credit for the value mentioned above, in the format enclosed as Annexure-A.
Note: In case of Foreign Bidders, if Audited Financial Report is in currency other than US
Dollars, the respective/desired figure for calculation of above details shall be converted into
equivalent US Dollars considering the conversion factor indicated in Bidders Audited Financial
Report. In case the same is not indicated, the conversion rate of USD as on last date of Bidders
financial year shall be considered based on RBI reference Rates.
6.3
GENERAL
6.3.1
Experience of only the bidding entity shall be considered. A job executed by a bidder for its own
plant/projects cant be considered as experience for the purpose of meeting requirement of BQC
of the Bidding Document. However, jobs executed for Subsidiary/ Fellow subsidiary / Holding
company will be considered as experience for the purpose of meeting BQC subject to
submission of tax paid invoice(s) duly certified by Statutory Auditor of the bidder towards
payments of statutory tax in support of the job executed for Subsidiary/ Fellow subsidiary /
Holding company. Such bidders to submit these documents in addition to the documents
specified in the Bidding Document to meet BQC.
6.3.2
A job completed by a bidder as a sub-contractor shall be considered for the purpose of meeting
the experience criteria of BQC subject to submission of following documents in support of
meeting the Bidders Qualification Criteria :
NIB REV 0
Page 4 of 8
Page 15 of 1744
In case audited annual financial statements including balance sheets and profit and loss account
for the immediate preceding financial year is not available for bid closing date up to 31st
December, the Bidder has an option to submit the same for the three previous years
immediately prior to the last financial year. However, for bid closing date after 31stDecember, the
bidder has to compulsorily submit the audited annual financial statements for the immediate
three preceding financial years, for evaluation and his qualification with respect to financial
criteria. In any case the date (i.e. the financial period closing date) of the immediate previous
years audited annual financial statement should not be older than eighteen (18) months from
the bid due date.
6.3.4
In case bidder is having wholly owned subsidiaries but only a single consolidated annual report
is prepared and audited which includes the financial details of their wholly owned subsidiaries,
consolidated annual report shall be considered for establishing the financial criteria subject to
statutory auditor/ chartered accountant of bidder certifying that separate annual report of bidder
(without the financial data of subsidiaries) is not prepared and audited.
6.3.5
Further in case of a bidder being a subsidiary company if separate annual report is not published
and only consolidated annual report of the Parent Company is available, consolidated audited
annual report shall be considered for establishing financial criteria subject to statutory auditor/
chartered accountant of bidder certifying that separate annual report of bidder is not prepared &
audited.
7.0
7.1
Bidder shall complete and submit the Proven Track Record Proforma enclosed as
Annexure-I to NIB to establish that the bidder meets the Bidder Qualification Criteria as per
clause no. 6.1 of NIB.
ii.
In case, bidder tie-up with a Technical Collaborator in line with clause no. 6.1.3, bidder shall
submit the MOU conforming all the requirements given in clause no. 6.1.3 (I) & 6.1.3 (II)
along with the bid.
7.2
Bidder shall also submit all necessary documentary evidence such as copies of work
order(s)/contract agreement(s) clearly indicating scope of work and value of the contract,
completion certificate(s), one year successful operation certificate(s),MOU with proposed
Technical Collaborator, if any, Complete audited annual financial statements including audit
reports, balance sheets, profit & loss account statements and all other notes & schedules etc. for
the immediate preceding three financial years, in the first instance itself in support of their
fulfilling Bidders Qualification Criteria.
7.3
All documents furnished by the bidder in support of meeting the experience and financial criteria
of BQC shall be:
Either
duly Certified by Statutory Auditor of the bidder or a practicing Chartered Accountant (not being
an employee or a Director or not having any interest in the bidders company / firm) where
audited accounts are not mandatory as per law.
Or
duly notarized by any Notary Public in the bidders country. In case of notarization, Bidder shall
also submit an Affidavit in the enclosed format enclosed (Annexure-II to NIB) signed by the
authorized signatory of the Bidder.
7.4
With regards to financial documents, in case Bidder submits original of bound published and
audited annual financial statements including balance sheet, profit & loss accounts and all other
schedules for the preceding three financial years, the same shall be considered without
certification of Statutory Auditor/Notarization of Notary Public.
NIB REV 0
Page 5 of 8
Page 16 of 1744
However, in case the bidder submits either a photo copy of published financial statement or a
translated copy of the published financial statements, the same shall be submitted duly certified
either by statutory auditor or Notary Public, in original, as per 7.3 above.
7.5
In case of Foreign bidder, if the documents submitted in support of meeting BQC, such asWork
Order, Completion Certificate, One year successful operation Certificate, duly audited Balance
Sheet, Annual Reports, Purchase Order, Inspection Release Note etc., are not in English
language, then the English translation copy of the same shall be furnished duly certified,
stamped and signed by Local Chamber of Commerce along with the copy of original version of
Work Order, Completion Certificate, One year successful operation Certificate, duly audited
Balance Sheet, Annual report, Purchase Orders, Inspection release Note etc. with the unpriced
bid. This requirement of certification of English translation by Local Chamber of Commerce is
additional to the requirement of authentication stipulated in 7.3 above.
7.6
Submission of authentic documents is the prime responsibility of the bidder. Wherever BORL /
EIL has concern or apprehension regarding the authenticity/ correctness of any document,
BORL / EIL reserves the right of getting the document cross verified from the document issuing
authority.
7.7
In the event of bidders failure to meet the above, BORL/ EIL reserve the right to complete the
evaluation based on the details furnished by the bidder in the first instance along with their bid
without seeking any additional information.
7.8
Bidders shall submit the required documents for meeting Bidders Qualification Criteria
(BQC) in a separate book let in original within 7 (Seven) days from the date of opening of
Un-priced Bid in sealed envelope titled Documentation against Bidder Qualification
Criteria for Bidding Document No. AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006 with proper index and
page numbering. However, bidders are required to upload the scanned copy of all BQC
documents on E- Tendering website along with the e-bid.
8.0
8.1
Bidders are requested to attend a pre-bid meeting at Engineers India Limited, EIL Office
Complex, Sector-16, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana. Pre-bid meeting shall be attended by
competent representative(s) of the bidder.
8.2
Bidders are requested to submit Pre-bid queries through e-mail in the format prescribed in
Bidding Document to reach EIL on or before date indicated in Bidding Document.
8.3
BORL/EIL reserves the right not to entertain pre-bid queries received after last date of
submission of pre bid queries as mentioned in the Bidding Document.
8.4
Record notes of meetings, including the text of questions raised (without identifying the source of
the query) and the responses given will be transmitted to all the Bidders. Any modification of the
Bidding Document, which may become necessary as a result of the pre-bid queries/ pre-bid
discussion, shall be intimated to all bidders through the issue of an Addendum/ Amendment.
8.5
Non-attendance of the pre-bid meeting will not be a cause for disqualification of a bidder. Offer of
the bidder who has not participated in the pre-bid meetings, may be considered for evaluation
only if their offer is in line with the bid requirement without any deviations.
8.6
9.0
9.1
NIB REV 0
Page 6 of 8
Page 17 of 1744
9.2
Various links such as Help for Contractor, Information about DSC, FAQ, Resources
Required,
Bidders
Manual
Kit
etc.
are
available
on
home
page
of
https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app facilitating vendors to participate in the bidding process.
Bidder are advised to download & utilize the available information/documents under these links
for activities like Registration in CPPP, obtaining User ID & Password, uploading & submission
of e-bids etc.
9.3
Bidders are advised in their own interest to carefully go through Instructions for E-tendering and
other related document available against various help links so as to ensure that bids are
uploaded in E-tendering website well before the closing date and time of bid submission.
Bidder is required to complete certain activities like Registration in e-tender website, obtaining
User ID & Password, enabling of Vendor and mapping of Digital Signature Certificate etc. before
they can load their e-bid on website.
In the event of failure in bidders connectivity with CPPP website during the last few hours on
account of problem on bidders account, they are likely to miss the deadline for bid submission.
Due date extension request due to this reason will not be entertained. In view of the same,
bidders are advised to upload their bid in advance.
9.4
No physical Bids / Offers shall be permitted. The Offers submitted through e-tendering system
shall only be considered for evaluation and ordering. Bids submitted through Fax/email/courier/computer floppy/CD/Pen Drive shall be rejected.
9.5
Bid should be valid for 4 (four) months from the due date of submission of Bids.
10.0
GENERAL
10.1
Notification of Corrigendum/Addendum/Bid Due Date Extensions, if any, to the NIB & Bidding
Document will be uploaded in EIL and CPPP websites only and will not be published in
newspapers. Hence bidders shall view the EIL / CPPP websites regularly.
10.2
BORL/EIL reserves the right to reject any or all the bids received at its discretion without
assigning any reason whatsoever and to annul the Bidding process at any stage.
10.3
In case any Bidder is found to be involved in cartel formation, his Bid will not be considered for
evaluation / placement of order. Such Bidder will also be debarred from bidding in future.
10.4
For detailed specifications, terms and conditions and other details, refer complete Bidding
Document.
10.5
Techno-commercial part of the Bids shall be opened at 1400 Hrs. (IST) on the due date for
submission of Bids. Bidders may witness the Bid opening through e-tendering portal at
https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app remotely at their end.
10.6
10.7
BORL/EIL shall not be responsible for any expense incurred by bidders in connection with the
preparation & delivery of their bids, site visit, other expenses incurred during bidding process
and regardless of the conduct or outcome of the bidding process
10.8
BORL/EIL reserve the right to assess bidders capability and capacity to execute the work using
in-house information and by taking into account other aspects such as past performance etc.
10.9
Bidder submitting his bid should not be under liquidation, court receivership or similar
proceedings.
10.10 Canvassing in any other form by the bidder or by any other agency on their behalf may lead to
disqualification of their bid.
10.11 Unsolicited clarifications to the offer and/or change in the prices during its validity period would
render the bid liable for outright rejection.
10.12 Bid submitted by the bidder, who is on Holiday list of BORL/BPCL/EIL, shall not be considered
for bid opening and further evaluation. Bidder shall give a self-declaration mentioning that they
are not blacklisted or on Holiday List of BORL/ BPCL/EIL in the proforma attached with tender
document.
10.13 EIL/BORL reserves the right to complete the evaluation based on the details furnished (without
seeking any additional information) and / or in-house data, survey or otherwise.
NIB REV 0
Page 7 of 8
Page 18 of 1744
10.14 Telephone No., Fax No and e-mail address of DGM (C&P)/ Manager (C&P)/ Sr. Engineer, EIL,
Gurgaon are as under:
Telephone- +91-124-3802081/2180/2181,
E-mailatul.kumar@eil.co.in / amitkr.gupta@eil.co.in/ deepak.malik@eil.co.in
DY. GENERAL MANAGER (C&P)
ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED, GURGAON, INDIA
NIB REV 0
Page 8 of 8
Annexure-I to NIB
PROVEN TRACK RECORD PROFORMA (FOR BIDDER QUALIFICATION / TECHNICAL COLLABORATOR) FOR SIMILAR
SUPPLY OF GOODS/WORKS/SERVICES
PROJECT- REVAMP AND CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT PROJECT OF BORL REFINERY
EIL JOB NO- A702
ITEM/ PACKAGE- VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
SL.
NO.
PARAMETER
INFORMATION ON INFORMATION
ON
PROPOSED
REFERENCED PACKAGE
PACKAGE (FOR THIS (BIDDER
WITHOUT
PROJECT)
TECHNICAL
COLLABORATOR)
For Bidder
1.0
Is the Bidder, a regular supplier of VPSA Oxygen Plant and Single Point
Responsibility Vendor (SPRV) for the complete package? - Yes/No.
For Technical
Collaborator
For Bidder
-----For Bidder
2.0
3.0
Page 19 of 1744
-----------
-----
For bidder having tie-up with a Technical Collaborator:Name of Technical Collaborator and address
Is the Technical collaborator, a regular supplier of VPSA Oxygen Plant
?
Yes/No
Package
and Single Point Responsibility Vendor (SPRV) for the complete
Package? - Yes/No. (If yes, indicate supporting reference also)
-----------
------
------
Place:
Date:
Page 1 of 5
Annexure-I to NIB
PROVEN TRACK RECORD PROFORMA (FOR BIDDER QUALIFICATION / TECHNICAL COLLABORATOR) FOR SIMILAR
SUPPLY OF GOODS/WORKS/SERVICES
PROJECT- REVAMP AND CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT PROJECT OF BORL REFINERY
EIL JOB NO- A702
ITEM/ PACKAGE- VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
SL.
NO.
PARAMETER
INFORMATION ON INFORMATION
ON
PROPOSED
REFERENCED PACKAGE
PACKAGE (FOR THIS (BIDDER
WITHOUT
PROJECT)
TECHNICAL
COLLABORATOR)
For Bidder
------
Has the Bidder executed at least one (1) number VPSA Oxygen Plant with
similar tie up with the proposed Technical Collaborator of VPSA Oxygen
Plant Package in the last Ten (10) years, which shall have operated
satisfactorily for a minimum period of One (1) year as on bid due date. (Yes/No). (If yes, indicate supporting reference also)
4.0
4.1
No. of chains
Single chain capacity
Total Capacity
4.2
Page 20 of 1744
Place:
Date:
------
------
For Technical
Collaborator
For Bidder
For Bidder
------
------
2
91 TPD (as 100%
of Oxygen)
182 TPD (as
100% of Oxygen)
90
Page 2 of 5
Annexure-I to NIB
PROVEN TRACK RECORD PROFORMA (FOR BIDDER QUALIFICATION / TECHNICAL COLLABORATOR) FOR SIMILAR
SUPPLY OF GOODS/WORKS/SERVICES
PROJECT- REVAMP AND CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT PROJECT OF BORL REFINERY
EIL JOB NO- A702
ITEM/ PACKAGE- VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
SL.
NO.
PARAMETER
INFORMATION ON INFORMATION
ON
PROPOSED
REFERENCED PACKAGE
PACKAGE (FOR THIS (BIDDER
WITHOUT
PROJECT)
TECHNICAL
COLLABORATOR)
For Bidder
4.3
-----
4.4
-----
4.5
-----
4.6
Has the VPSA Oxygen Plant Package completed ONE Year of satisfactory
operation, as on bid due date? - Yes/No
4.7
-----
4.9
-----
-----
4.11
Page 21 of 1744
For Bidder
For Bidder
---------
4.8
4.10
For Technical
Collaborator
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS:
Place:
Date:
Page 3 of 5
Page 22 of 1744
Annexure-I to NIB
PROVEN TRACK RECORD PROFORMA (FOR BIDDER QUALIFICATION / TECHNICAL COLLABORATOR) FOR SIMILAR
SUPPLY OF GOODS/WORKS/SERVICES
PROJECT- REVAMP AND CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT PROJECT OF BORL REFINERY
EIL JOB NO- A702
ITEM/ PACKAGE- VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
1.
This proforma duly filled-in, stamped and signed shall be submitted along with the Bid.
2.
Copies of Letter of Awards/ Order/ Work Orders and completion certificate (In case of Works/Services) or IRN/Proof of Delivery
(In case of supplies), as applicable to be enclosed. If necessary, additional documents such as approved technical
documents/drawings shall also be submitted to establish bidder meeting qualification criteria.
In case of Technical Collaboration, the above stated documents including copy of MOU as mentioned in the Bidders
Qualification Criteria shall be furnished separately for Bidders referenced packages as well as for Technical Collaborators
referenced packages.
3.
The Supply/Work/Services completed beyond Ten (10) years need not be indicated here.
4.
The list of Supply/Work/Services, not of similar nature shall not be indicated here. Failing to comply aforementioned instructions may
lead to rejection of bid.
5.
Since the information requested in this proforma shall be utilized to assess the Bidders capability, it is in the interest of the Bidder to
pick those cases out of total list of references which most closely match with the Bid requirement. The Bidder shall also ensure that all
information asked for is furnished and the same is correct and complete in all respects. Incomplete information could lead the bid
being considered ineligible for further evaluation.
6.
Incorrect information furnished in this proforma shall render the bid/order liable for rejection at any stage of evaluation/ work
execution, at the risk and cost of the bidder and the bidder shall be blacklisted.
7.
For the referred installations, the bidder shall indicate the name of the Purchaser/ End Users contact person (along with his address,
telephone no., fax no., e-mail id etc.) who may be contacted by the Purchaser/End User, if felt necessary.
Place:
Date:
Page 4 of 5
Page 23 of 1744
Annexure-I to NIB
PROVEN TRACK RECORD PROFORMA (FOR BIDDER QUALIFICATION / TECHNICAL COLLABORATOR) FOR SIMILAR
SUPPLY OF GOODS/WORKS/SERVICES
PROJECT- REVAMP AND CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT PROJECT OF BORL REFINERY
EIL JOB NO- A702
ITEM/ PACKAGE- VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
8.
Bidder shall also submit standard reference list (his own and that of Technical collaborator, if any) for VPSA Oxygen Plant.
9.
Place:
Date:
Page 5 of 5
Page 24 of 1744
Annexure-II TO NIB
AFFIDAVIT
(TO BE SUBMITTED ON A NON JUDICIAL STAMP PAPER OF APPROPRIATE VALUE)
AFFIDAVIT OF ..................................., S/o D/o _________________, resident of
____________
EMPLOYED
AS
____________________
AS..........................
WITH.................................................
HAVING
OFFICE
AT..........................
PIN............................
I, the above named deponent do hereby solemnly affirm and state as under:1.
2.
Document Reference
No. &Date
Document subject
Issuing Authority
3.
That the document(s) submitted, as mentioned above, by M/s ...........alongwith the Bid
Document for meeting the Bid Qualification Criteria thereunder, vide covering letter
no. .... dated ......., towards Tender No. ...... for ................ are authentic, vide covering
letter of their originals and have been issued by the issuing authority mentioned above
and no part of the document(s) is false, forged or fabricated.
4.
That no part of this affidavit is false and that this affidavit and the above declaration in
respect of genuineness of the documents has been made having full knowledge of (i)
the provisions of the Indian Panel Code in respect of offences including, but not
limited to those pertaining to criminal breach of trust, cheating and fraud and (ii)
provisions of bidding conditions which entitle the Owner / EIL to initiate action in the
event of such declaration turning out to be a misrepresentation or false representation.
5.
I depose accordingly.
DEPONENT
VERIFICATION
I, .......................the deponent above named do hereby verify that the factual contents
of this affidavit are true and correct. No part of it is false and nothing material has been
concealed there from.
Verified at ..............on this ........... day of .................20....
DEPONENT
Page 25 of 1744
Annexure-A to NIB
Page 26 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 27 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL ....................................................................................................... 4
1.1
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 4
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
3.0
3.1
E-Tendering .................................................................................................................. 7
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.9
3.10
3.15
3.16
3.17
4.0
SUBMISSION OF BID................................................................................... 17
5.0
6.0
6.1
6.2
Page 28 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
7.0
7.1
Negotiation .................................................................................................................. 19
7.2
7.3
8.0
9.0
ENCLOSURES:
ANNEXURE-I TO ITB: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR E-TENDERING 03 PAGES
Page 29 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
Introduction
1.1.1
BORL intends to augment the processing capacity of Bina Refinery from existing 6.0
MMTPA to 7.8 MMTPA under Revamp and capacity Enhancement Project. Project
involves revamp of process units, utilities, offsites and product dispatch facilities.
1.1.2
M/s Bharat Oman Refineries Limited (BORL) hereinafter referred to as "Owner" has
appointed M/s Engineers India Ltd. (EIL) as Project Management Consultant (PMC).
EILon behalf of BORL invites bids through E-tendering from eligible bidders, for VPSA
OXYGEN PLANT under single stage two bid system .
1.1.3
1.1.4
Scope of Bid: The scope of Bid shall mean the entire scope covered under the Bidding
Document (hereinafter for the purpose of these instructions collectively referred to as the
WORKS)
1.1.5
Throughout this Bidding Documents, the term Bid and Tender and their derivatives
(Bidder/Tenderer, Bid/Tendered/Tender, Bidding/Tendering, etc.) are synonymous,
and day means calendar day. Except where the context requires otherwise, words
indicating the singular also include the plural and words indicating the plural also include
the singular.
1.1.6
1.2
Eligible Bidders
1.2.1
A bidder may be a firm or a company, who, have been issued the Bidding Document on
Limited Competitive Basis and intends to submit Bid, or have submitted bid in response to
Invitation for Bids (IFB) on Open Competitive basis.
1.2.2
In case of limited competitive bidding, the bidding is open only to the bidders to whom
Bidding Document has been issued.
1.2.3
1.2.4
In case of Limited enquiry, bidder shall fulfil the Qualification criteria (Experience and/or
Financial), if applicable as per Bidding Document.
1.3
1.3.1
1.4
Confidentiality of Document
1.4.1
Bidder shall treat the Bidding Document and contents thereof as confidential.
1.5
Cost of Bidding
1.5.1
All direct and indirect costs associated with the preparation and submission of bid
(including clarification meetings and site visit, if any), shall be to Bidders account and
Owner/ EIL will in no case be responsible or liable for those costs, regardless of the
conduct or outcome of the bidding process.
1.6
Page 30 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Site Visit
1.7.1
The Bharat Oman Refineries Limited is located at Bina, District Sagar, Madhya Pradesh.
1.7.2
Bidder is advised to visit and examine the site on the date mentioned in IFB/LIB, its
surroundings and familiarise himself with the existing facilities and environment, and
collect all other information including applicable laws, which he may require for preparing
and submitting the bid and entering into the Contract. Claims and objections due to
ignorance of existing conditions or inadequacy of information will not be considered after
submission of the bid and during implementation.
The Bidder and any of his personnel or agents will be granted permission by the Owner to
enter upon his premises and land for the purpose of such inspection, but only upon the
explicit condition that the Bidder, his personnel or agents will release and indemnify the
Owner and his personnel and agents from and against all liability in respect thereof and
will be responsible for personnel injury (whether fatal or otherwise), loss of or damage to
property and any other loss, damage, cost and expenses incurred as a result thereof.
1.7.3
Bidder may contact the following person at site for site visit purpose:
Mr. Ashok Chaudhary (Vice President-Projects)
Revamp and Capacity Enhancement Project,
Bharat Oman Refineries Limited,
Vill& PO: Agasod, Bina, Dist. Sagar,
Pin-470113 (M.P.)
Contact No. - 07580-226322/276322
Email id: chaudharyar@bharatpetroleum.in
2.0
2.1
Bidding Document
2.1.1
The Bidding Document shall be read in conjunction with any amendment issued
subsequently.
2.1.2
The Bidder is expected to examine the Bidding Document, including all instructions,
terms, specifications and drawings in the Bidding Document. Failure to furnish all
information required as per the Bidding Document or submission of a bid not substantially
responsive to the Bidding Document in every respect could result in rejection of the Bid.
2.1.3
Bidding Document is non-transferable and shall at all times remain the exclusive property
of Owner/EIL with a license to the Bidder to use the Bidding Documents for the limited
purpose of submitting the bid.
2.1.4
The
complete
Bidding
Document
is
available
on
the
EIL
website:
http://tenders.eil.co.in/newtenders/,
Central
Public
Procurement
Portal
http://eprocure.gov.in/cppp. Bidder can view / download the documents from any of the
websites mentioned above. However, the bid shall be submitted only through Central
Public Procurement Portal website http://eprocure.gov.in/cppp.
2.1.5
All amendments, time extension, clarifications, etc. will be uploaded in the EIL website:
http://tenders.eil.co.in/newtenders/ only. In case of press enquires the same will not be
published in newspapers. Bidders should regularly visit the above websites to keep
themselves updated.
2.1.6
Page 31 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
2.2
2.2.1
Bidders authorized representative(s) shall attend the pre bid meeting on the prescribed
day at the given venue specified in IFB/ LIB. During the pre-bid meeting, all the technical
and commercial issues shall be discussed and concluded to ensure that the bid received
subsequent to pre bid meeting shall be without any deviations to terms and conditions.
Hence, bidders shall treat the pre bid meeting as utmost important and depute competent
& senior person capable of taking on the spot decision to sort out all the technical and
commercial issues.
However, in case any bidder does not attend the pre bid meeting, it shall be understood
that the bidder has a clear understanding of the scope, terms & conditions of the bidding
document and does not have any comments/ deviations to the requirements of the
bidding document.
2.2.2
In order to ensure fruitful discussions during pre-bid meeting, the bidder is requested to
submit any queries/clarification/information pertaining to Bidding document in writing
delivered by hand or by e-mail in the format provided in Bidding Forms so as to reach
two days prior to Pre-bid meeting. These queries shall be replied during pre-bid meeting.
The editable soft copies of the queries shall also be e-mailed to concerned persons
specified in NIB/LIB, to enable EIL to prepare replies to the queries in the same format
expeditiously.
2.2.3
The bidders are required to participate in the pre-bid meeting after going through the
entire bidding document alongwith BQC. Bidder shall come with all technical and
commercial points on which they need clarifications and also to ensure that they possess
all the supporting documentation for meeting the BQC. In case of any doubt, they may
discuss the same during the meeting to avoid any techno-commercial clarifications/
discussions post bid.
2.2.4
2.2.5
Any modification of the Bidding Document, which may become necessary as a result of
the pre-bid discussion, shall be intimated to all bidders through the issue of an
Addendum/Amendment. The response of EIL shall not form part of the Bidding Document
unless issued as an Addendum/ Amendment.
2.2.6
2.2.7
Any failure by Bidder to comply with the aforesaid requirement shall not excuse the
Bidder, after subsequent award of Contract, from performing the Work in accordance with
the Contract.
2.2.8
A bidder may seek clarifications regarding the Bidding Document provisions, bidding
process and / or rejection of his Bid. Owner/EIL shall respond to such requests within a
reasonable time.
2.3
2.3.1
Owner/ EIL may, for any reason whether at his own initiative or in response to the
clarification
requested
by
the
prospective
bidder(s),
issue
modifications/changes/clarifications in the form of Amendment through EIL website
http://tenders.eil.co.in only, during the bidding period. Any Amendment thus issued shall
become part of Bidding Document and Bidder shall upload along with their bid, the
scanned copy of the Amendment duly signed and stamped as a token of his acceptance.
Page 32 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
3.0
3.1
E-Tendering
3.1.1
3.2
Bidders are advised in their own interest to carefully go through Instructions for Etendering and other related document available against various help links so as to ensure
that bids are uploaded in E-tendering website well before the closing date and time of bid
submission.
Bidder is required to complete certain activities like Registration in e-tender website,
obtaining User ID & Password, enabling of Vendor and mapping of Digital Signature
Certificate etc. before they can load their e-bid on website.
In the event of failure in bidders connectivity with CPPP website during the last few hours
on account of problem on bidders account, they are likely to miss the deadline for bid
submission. Due date extension request due to this reason will not be entertained. In view
of the same, bidders are advised to upload their bid in advance.
3.3
No physical Bids / Offers shall be permitted. The Offers submitted through e-tendering
system shall only be considered for evaluation and ordering. Bids submitted through
Fax/e-mail/courier/computer floppy/CD/Pen Drive etc. shall be rejected.
3.4
3.4.1
This enquiry is issued on Zero Deviation Bidding basis wherein no post bid
correspondence of any nature shall be entertained. Bidders in their own interest are
advised to take part in the pre-bid meeting by deputing their competent personnel. This
will help bidder not only to cut short of the evaluation time leading to requirement of
shorter bid validity but also enable them to submit their best prices based on the clear
techno-commercial scope.
3.4.2
For cases where Bidders are required to meet Bidder Qualification Criteria (BQC)/
Financial Criteria (in case of LIB) for their qualification against Bidding Document, Bidders
may carry their qualification documents, which they feel are meeting the BQC/ Financial
Criteria, for discussion with EIL officials during the pre-bid meeting. However, Bidders
qualifications shall be based on qualification documents submitted in the Bid.
3.5
Language of Bid
3.5.1
The Bid, as well as all correspondence and documents relating to the bid exchanged by
the bidder and EIL, shall be in the English language. Supporting documents and printed
literature that are part of the Bid may be in another language provided they are
accompanied by an accurate translation of the relevant passages in the English
language, in which case, for purposes of interpretation of the Bid, such translation shall
govern.
3.6
3.6.1
The offer must be complete in all respects, leaving no scope for ambiguity. Bidder is fully
responsible for the bid submitted and no relief or consideration can be given for errors
and omissions.
3.6.2
3.6.3
The Bid shall be submitted in three parts viz. Part-I, Part-II & Part-III in respective folders
provided in the website.
Page 33 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
PART-I
PART-II
PART-III
3.6.4
PART-I: Techno-commercial / Un-priced Bid shall contain the following documents duly
stamped & signed by Bidder:
Section-I:
Section-II:
Section-III:
Section-IV:
Section-V:
Section-VI:
Section-VII:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Section-VIII:
Section-IX:
Section-X:
i)
i)
i)
ii)
Page 34 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
For convenience, the Bid shall be compiled in the form of specific Sections conforming to
the above. In case of non-submission of above documents or submission of incomplete
documents, the OWNER reserves the right not to evaluate such offers further and not to
enter into correspondence in this regard after opening the Techno-commercial / Unpriced
Bid.
Note: The above shall be uploaded in PREQUAL/ TECHNICAL folder in e-tendering
portal.
3.6.5
PART-II: Priced Bid shall be submitted separately and shall consist of the following:
i)
Total Schedule of Lump sum Prices as per formats (SP-0 to SP-10) given in the
Schedule of Prices, duly filled-in with prices, stamped & signed on each page,
complete in all respects, shall be submitted.
This part shall not contain any condition whatsoever failing which the Bids shall be liable
to be rejected. No stipulation, deviation, terms & conditions, presumption, basis etc. shall
be stipulated in Price Part of the bid. Any condition if stipulated shall be treated as null
and void and shall render the bid liable for rejection.
Note: Part-II shall be uploaded in FINANCE folder in e-tendering portal.
3.6.6
EMD/Bid Security, in the form of Crossed Demand Draft (DD) / Bank Guarantee
of requisite amount in favour of BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED
payable at Bina, Dist. Sagar, Madhya Pradesh, India, as stipulated in LIB/ NIB,
shall be submitted in the following manner:
3.6.7
Original EMD (in physical form): not later than Seven (7) days from the
date of Un-priced Bid Opening
Copy of Original EMD: Scanned & uploaded in E-Tendering Portal
alongwith Un-priced Techno-commercial Bid. Scanned copy of Bid
security shall be uploaded in FEE FOLDER in e-tendering portal.
Bidders shall submit the following documents in ORIGINAL within Seven (7) days
from the date of Un-priced Bid Opening:
(i)
(ii)
c)
If the envelope is not sealed and marked as above, the Employer will assume no
responsibility for the misplacement or premature opening.
Page 35 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
3.7
Bid Prices
3.7.1
Unless otherwise permitted in the Bidding Documents, the bid shall be for the whole
works.
3.7.2
Bidder shall quote price after careful analysis of cost involved for the performance of the
work considering all parts of the Bidding Document. In case any activity though
specifically not covered in description of item under SOR/SOP but is required to complete
the work as per scope of work, scope of supply, specifications, standards, drawings,
GCC, SCC or any other part of Bidding Document, the prices quoted shall be deemed to
be inclusive of cost incurred for such activity. Schedule of Prices (SOP) and Schedule of
Rates (SOR) have been used interchangeably in this document and shall mean the same
thing.
3.7.3
The Bid price is to be filled in the formats given in Schedule of Prices/ Rates.
3.7.4
The Total Lump sum Price shall be quoted in the FORM SP-0 of the SOP comprising the
total of the Lumpsum prices quoted in FORM SP-1, SP-2 and SP-3.
3.7.5
Lumpsum prices given in FORM SP-1, SP-2 and SP-3 shall be quoted based on detailed
break-up quoted in FORMS SP-4, SP-5 and SP-6 respectively.
3.7.6
Each Bidder shall separately indicate in FORM SP-8 the lumpsum amounts that it has
considered and included in its bid as payable towards
a)
Excise Duty,
b)
c)
d)
e)
Additional Import Duty (AID)/ SAD/ Additional CVD for Imported Items,
f)
Service tax
g)
h)
i)
MP VAT
j)
k)
Such amounts shall be calculated and included at the present applicable rate of the
taxable value of such sale/service.
The lumpsum amounts indicated in FORM SP-8 shall form the basis for calculating the
variation (increase or reduction) in taxes and duties payable by the OWNER to the
CONTRACTOR or refundable by the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER, as the case may
be, in accordance with the provisions in this behalf in the Special Conditions of Contract.
3.7.7
The quoted prices shall remain firm, fixed and valid until completion of the Contract
performance and will not be subject to variation on any account except as otherwise
specifically provided in the Bidding Document.
3.8
3.8.1
The price for Residual Design & Detailed Engineering component quoted in FORM SP-1
shall not exceed 10% (Ten Percent) of Total Lumpsum Price quoted in FORM SP-0.
3.8.2
The prices for Supply Component (FORM SP-2) shall not exceed 60% (Sixty Percent) of
Total Lumpsum Price quoted in FORM SP-0.
3.8.3
In case the price(s) quoted exceed the limits specified under clause 3.8.1 and/or 3.8.2
above, the excess amounts shall be paid in the Final Bill provided the Total Lumpsum
Page 36 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Price (Quoted in FORM SP-0) does not increase on account of such payment.
3.8.4
The bidder(s) must indicate CIF value & rate of customs duty considered in the Price
Schedule. The bidder shall consider merit rate of customs duty for the imported materials.
Bidder shall ascertain the applicable merit rate of customs duty and shall be solely
responsible towards applicability and correctness of such rates. The evaluation and
ordering shall be carried out based on the merit rate of customs duty considered by the
bidder. Variation in price due to customs duty rate will be dealt with separately after
receipt of materials at site against documentary evidence.
3.8.5
If bidder has considered customs duty for import materials other than the merit rate of
customs duty in their offer, then statutory variation on the customs duty will be payable
extra on the merit rate of custom duty or the rate of custom duty considered by the bidder,
whichever is lower.
3.9
3.10
It shall be the duty of the CONTRACTOR to duly observe and perform all laws, rules,
regulations, orders and formalities applicable to Excise Duty, Sales Tax, VAT, Service
tax, Swachh Bharat Cess, Customs Duty, Countervailing Duty, Additional Import Duty etc.
on the import, manufacture, sale and/or supply of any material to the OWNER and
performance of the works under the Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall keep the
OWNER indemnified from and against any and all claims, demands, prosecutions,
actions, proceedings, penalties, damages, demurrages and/or other levies whatsoever
made or levied by any Court, Tribunal or the Customs or other Authorities with respect to
any alleged breach, evasion or infraction of such duties, taxes, charges or levies or any
breach or infraction of any applicable laws, rules, regulations, orders or formalities
concerning the same and from the consequence thereof.
3.11
The price of materials is divided into two parts, the Foreign Currency component and the
Indian Rupee component.
3.12
Bidders quoted lump sum price shall be for the entire scope of work as specified in the
Bidding Document on Lumpsum Turnkey Basis (LSTK) WITH SINGLE POINT
RESPONSIBILITY, in the SOP format given alongwith Bidding Document as follows:
3.12.1
Indian Bidders:
I) Design and Detailed Engineering services (FORM SP-1):
Lump sum price shall include all costs related to Design and Detailed Engineering
services as per the requirement of Bidding Document.
II) Supply of Finished Goods (FORM SP-2):
Lump sum price of indigenous materials shall be indicated in Indian Rupees. Bidder is
expected to include ex-factory value of indigenous materials, anticipated cost of
procurement & profits, as applicable, towards procurement and supply of indigenous
materials.
However, where only ex-factory value is applicable, Bidder shall ensure that Goods are
consigned to OWNER from dispatch point and cenvatable documents w.r.t. Excise duty
are furnished and sales tax amount is charged accurately. Where the sale to the OWNER
is deemed to take place by endorsement/transfer of Railway Receipt or Truck/Lorry or
any receipt during transit, the Bidder shall consider the sales tax payable on aggregate of
ex-factory value of materials, anticipated cost of procurement and profits, as applicable,
Page 37 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
towards supply of indigenous materials. The Bidder shall accurately charge Excise duty
on ex-factory value of materials and furnish cenvatable documents w.r.t. same.
Similarly, Bidder is expected to indicate the anticipated CIF value of the imported
materials (Foreign Currency component) covering the price of materials as represented
by the Suppliers invoice(s), the anticipated freight on the shipment of the imported goods,
Marine cum transit Insurance and anticipated cost of procurement and profits.
All necessary handling equipment, cranes, tools tackle etc. for handling and loading of
goods at Bidders works/ despatch point shall be arranged by Bidder at his own cost.
Prices of materials for Civil, Structural and General civil, Architectural, Painting works and
all consumables for testing, Pre-commissioning, commissioning & PGTR shall be
included in prices for Construction/ Installation quoted in FORM SP-3.
III) Services related to Inland Transportation, port & customs clearance, handling and Site
Works i.e. Construction, Installation, Testing, Commissioning etc. (FORM SP-3) :
Inland Transportation, port & customs clearance:
Total quoted price shall include port & customs clearance, handling, forwarding, loading
on to trucks etc. and transportation charges from Port of Entry in India and / or from any
other place / works in India up to Project Site. Total quoted price shall also include
provision of all handling equipment including cranes, tools/ tackle etc. required for
handling of goods at Port of Entry/ Bidders despatch point in India, as applicable and at
all intermediate stations/ points up to Project Site and also for unloading at site, at
Bidders own cost. All demurrage, wharfage and other expenses incurred due to delayed
clearance of goods, or for any other reasons, either at Indian port of entry, or at any
clearing point, shall be to Bidders account. Bidder shall be solely responsible for making
all necessary arrangements for complying with all necessary formalities at the Indian port
of entry.
The prices shall include Indian customs duties on the goods offered from outside India
and despatched directly to site. Customs duties on such goods shall be paid directly by
the Bidder to the Indian Customs Authorities and Owner will reimburse the Custom Duty
paid by the Bidder as per provisions of this document. All customs clearance formalities,
including payment of port levies/charges are in the scope of Bidder and shall be borne by
him. Bidders shall indicate break-up of Indian Customs Duty considered and included by
them in SOP.
Construction/ Installation etc.:
Unloading of material at site, storage at site, handling, transportation to store and from
store to work site, , assembly at site, erection, hook up with existing equipment/system
testing, pre-commissioning, painting, insulation, commissioning, performance guarantee
test run etc. as specified in the Bidding Documents.
However, prices of materials for Civil, Structural and General civil, Architectural, Painting
works and all consumables for testing, Pre-commissioning, commissioning & PGTR shall
be included in prices for Construction/ Installation quoted in FORM SP-3.
Foreign Bidders:
3.12.2
I)
Page 38 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Manufacture, procurement, testing and supply price of all goods on CFR Basis i.e. FOB
(International port of exit) plus firm ocean freight charges shall be quoted by the Foreign
Bidder for transportation through sea up-to Port of Entry in India. In case a foreign
Bidder proposes to supply certain goods from India, the prices for such goods shall be
quoted on ex-factory value of indigenous materials.
Prices of materials for Civil, Structural, and General civil, Architectural, Painting,
Insulation, Acid/Alkali, Fire proofing works and lubricants/chemicals / consumables shall
be included in prices for Construction/ Installation quoted in FORM SP-3.
III) Port & Customs Clearance and Inland Transportation:
The prices shall include Indian import duties on the goods offered from outside India and
despatched directly to site. Import duties on such goods shall be paid directly by the
Bidder to the Indian Customs Authorities and Owner will reimburse the Custom Duty paid
by the Bidder as per provisions of this document. All customs clearance formalities,
including payment of port levies/charges are in the scope of Bidder and shall be borne by
him. Bidder shall indicate break-up of Indian custom duty considered and included by
them in SOP.
All demurrage, wharfage and other expenses incurred due to delayed clearance of goods,
or for any other reasons, either at Indian port of entry, or at any clearing point, shall be to
Bidders account. Bidder shall be solely responsible for making all necessary
arrangements for complying with all necessary formalities at the Indian port of entry.
Transportation charges of all goods from Port of Entry port and / or from any other place /
works in India up to Project Site(s) including port & customs clearance, handling,
forwarding, loading on to trucks etc. shall be included in quoted Price.
The transportation price shall also include provision of all handling equipment including
cranes, tools/ tackle etc. required for handling of goods at Port of Entry/ Bidders
despatch point in India, as applicable and at all intermediate stations/ points up to Project
Sites and also for unloading at site(s), at Bidders own cost.
IV) Site work:
Unloading of material at site, storage at site, handling, transportation to store and from
store to work site, , assembly at site, erection, hook up with existing equipment/system
testing, pre-commissioning, painting, insulation, commissioning, performance guarantee
test run, training etc. as specified in the Material requisition & RFQ documents.
Prices of materials for Civil, Structural, and General civil, Architectural, Painting,
Insulation, Acid/Alkali, Fire proofing works and lubricants/chemicals / consumables shall
be included in prices for Construction/ Installation quoted in FORM SP-3.
3.13
3.13.1
Bidders quoted prices shall be inclusive of all taxes, duties and levies etc. as applicable
on the goods and services / works under the Contract till complete execution of the
Order/Contract, all insurance such as transit, storage cum erection etc. and Owner shall
not have any liability whatsoever on this account, except for statutory variation in taxes,
duties and levies etc. specified elsewhere in the Bidding Document.
3.13.2
Indian Bidders quoted prices shall take into consideration CENVAT benefits available to
indigenous manufacturers/ suppliers on account of Excise Duty on inputs and CVD and
Additional Import Duty (AID) paid by the vendor on in-built import components.
3.13.3
Page 39 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Sawchh Bharat Cess and Krishi Kalyan Cess (rates and amount) included in quoted
price.
3.13.4
EIL shall provide all requisite inspection services for all indigenous equipment / bulk
material procured for the project as part of EPCM services at no additional cost. In the
case Indian bidder sourcing materials from abroad, the inspection shall be arranged
through Third Party Inspection agency (i.e. LRIS/BV/DNV/TUV/CEIL) in the country of
origin & charges of the same shall be included in quoted prices.
3.13.5
Bidder shall furnish list of recommended spares for Two years operation and
maintenance (FORM SP-7) indicating itemwise unit price and quantity.
3.13.6
Per diem rate for Vendors participation in Hazop Study to be conducted on VPSA
Oxygen Plant at EIL, New Delhi shall also be quoted (in FORM SP-10) as per Terms &
Conditions for Vendors participation in Hazop Study enclosed with Bidding Document.
3.14
3.14.1
Foreign Bidders shall quote their prices in freely convertible Foreign Currency and in
Indian Rupees only (for that component of his price, which the Vendor expects to spend
in India).
3.14.2
It must be clearly understood by Foreign Bidders that prices of such goods, if any, which
the Bidder proposes to supply from India, shall be quoted in Indian Rupees only. Further,
such component of Bidders price for services like Construction/ Installation etc. to be
performed in India, which the Bidder expects to spend in India, shall also be quoted in
Indian Rupees only. However, such part of services in India which shall be rendered by
Vendors foreign personnel only may be quoted in foreign currency. Only one order for
Complete Scope shall be placed on the Foreign Bidder, which shall explicitly define
the order values in foreign currency as well as Indian currency portion as quoted
by the bidder. Overall responsibility towards the contractual obligations like
delivery, order execution, performance guarantee etc., shall be with the Foreign
Bidder only.
3.14.3
Foreign Bidders quoted prices shall be inclusive of all taxes, duties, levies etc. including
Indian Imports Duty as applicable in India and outside India, on the goods and
services/Works under the Contract, till complete execution of the Order/Contract,
including all insurance such as Marine, Transit, Storage, Erection etc., and Owner shall
not have any liability, whatsoever, on this account except for statutory variation in taxes,
duties and levies etc. applicable in India specified elsewhere in the Bidding Document.
3.14.4
Foreign Bidders quoted prices shall also be inclusive of export licensing charges/ fee, if
any, applicable for export of goods/services to India, withholding tax and any other
charges applicable in bidders country.
3.14.5
For supplies sourced within India & directly despatched to Site, the Foreign bidder shall
quote firm price for Indian supply in Indian rupees on ex-factory value basis inclusive of
all taxes & duties payable up to Project Site.
3.14.6
Details of Indian customs duties included in quoted price of the goods offered from
outside India and despatched directly to site.
b)
Details of Excise Duty & CST/VAT on the finished goods, Entry Tax, Service Tax,
Sawchh Bharat Cess and Krishi Kalyan Cess (rates and amount) included in quoted
price.
3.14.7
In case any of the foreign bidders receipt against the order is subject to tax deduction at
source in India, the Bidder to quote prices gross of Indian income tax and indicate
applicable rate of same in the offer.
3.14.8
Custom Duty applicable on construction equipment, tools and tackles imported by Seller,
for use during execution of work and for re-export after use, shall be fully borne by Seller
as applicable.
Page 40 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
3.14.9
a.
The bidder must ascertain and confirm along with supporting documents in the bid, if any
Customs Duty exemption / waiver is applicable to the products being supplied by him
under any multi-lateral / bi-lateral trade agreement between India and bidder's country.
b.
The bidder shall be liable to provide all documentation to ensure availment of the
exemption / waiver. In case the bidder defaults on this due to any reason, whatsoever, he
shall be liable to bear the incremental Customs Duty applicable, if any.
c.
Any Customs Duty applicability on account of any change in the bi-lateral / multi-lateral
agreement shall be to bidder's account.
Documentation to be furnished for availing the exemption / waiver of Customs Duty shall
be specifically listed in the Letter of Credit also as the pre-requisite for release of
payment against shipping documents and this documentation shall necessarily form a
part of shipping documents.
d.
3.14.10
Foreign vendors shall include third party inspection charges of Third Party Inspection
agency (i.e. LRIS/BV/DNV/TUV/CEIL) in the country of origin. In the case of foreign party
sourcing items from India the inspection shall be by EIL, no additional charges shall be
payable to seller on account of the same.
3.14.11
Bidder shall furnish list of recommended spares for Two years operation and
maintenance (FORM SP-7) indicating itemwise unit price and quantity.
3.14.12
Per diem rate for Vendors participation in Hazop Study to be conducted on VPSA
Oxygen Plant at EIL, New Delhi shall also be quoted (in FORM SP-10) as per Terms &
Conditions for Vendors participation in Hazop Study enclosed with Bidding Document.
3.15
3.15.1
For the purpose of this clause and any other relevant provisions in Bidding Document,
Foreign Currency shall mean and be limited to US Dollars / Euros / GBP/ Japanese Yen.
3.15.2
However, maximum no. of currencies of quote shall be limited to two currencies (1) Indian
Rupees and (2) Any one of the allowed Foreign Currencies mentioned above.
3.15.3
Bidders may quote prices for materials to be imported into India either in Indian Rupees
or in Foreign Currency or in a combination of Indian Rupees and a Foreign Currency.
3.15.4
Bidders shall quote the price for Indian materials, services and for expenses to be
incurred in India only in Indian Rupees.
3.15.5
Bidders may quote the prices for materials to be imported into India in Foreign Currency.
Such bidders quoting in foreign currency shall separately indicate in a list the materials to
be imported into India and the Foreign Currency price payable for such materials.
However, for evaluation purposes, the bid price shall be converted to Indian Rupees by
converting the Foreign Currency into Indian Rupees at the Bill selling rate of State Bank
of India, New Delhi prevailing on the day of opening of the price bid.
3.15.6
3.15.7
Bidders who have indicated materials to be imported into India, and who have indicated
the Foreign Currency price for such materials in their bids as specified above, shall on
proof of payment be paid the Rupee equivalent of the Foreign Currency paid for the
relevant materials imported into India limited to the maximum of the Foreign Currency
indicated in the priced bid in relation to such supplies at the TT buying rate for concerned
foreign currency of the State Bank of India prevailing on the date of payment to subvendor, with the intention that the risk of fluctuations in the exchange rate between the
concerned foreign currency and the Indian Rupee to the extent indicated above shall be
borne by the OWNER. If as a result, there shall remain any unutilized foreign currency
indicated in the priced bid relevant to the formation of the Contract in relation to such
supplies, these shall be considered to be the Bidders fee for the relative procurement, as
the case may be, and shall be added to and paid for separately, in the Final Bill, in
addition to the price of services, in Indian Rupees equivalent of such unutilized foreign
currency balance(s) converted at the currency Bill Selling rate of the concerned foreign
Engineers India Limited
New Delhi
Page 41 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
currency of State Bank of India prevailing on the date of price bid opening or at the TT
buying rate of the concerned foreign currency of State Bank of India prevailing on the
date of Mechanical Completion, whichever is less.
3.16
Bid Validity
3.16.1
The Bid shall remain valid for acceptance for a period of Four Months from the due date
of submission of the bid. The Bidder shall not be entitled during the said period to revoke
or cancel his bid or to vary the bid except and to the extent required by Owner/ EIL in
writing.
3.16.2
Owner/EIL may request the bidder for extension of the period of validity of bid. If the
bidder agrees to the extension request, the validity of Bank Guarantee towards EMD/Bid
Security shall also be suitably extended. Bidder may refuse the request of extension of
bid validity without forfeiting his EMD/Bid Security. However, bidders agreeing to the
request for extension of validity of bid shall not be permitted to modify the bid because of
extension, unless specifically invited to do so.
3.17
3.17.1
Bids must be accompanied with the Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) for an amount
indicated in LIB/IFB. EMD shall be submitted in form of Crossed Demand Draft in favour
of M/s BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED payable at Bina, Dist. Sagar, Madhya
Pradesh, India or Bank Guarantee in the prescribed Pro-forma (provided in GCC) from
any Indian scheduled bank; or from any Indian branch of an international bank.
3.17.2
Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) shall be valid for a period of 6 (Six) months from the final
due date of opening of Techno-commercial Bids.
3.17.3
Bidder should upload the scanned copy of Earnest money deposit (EMD) in E-Tendering
website. The original EMD should be submitted in a sealed envelope titled Earnest
Money Deposit against Bidding Document No. AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006 at
address mentioned at Sl. No. 3.6.7 above, on the last date of bid submission. However,
in case of non-submission an additional seven days shall be provided for submission of
original hard copy. Bidders to ensure that the original hard copy of EMD (in the
prescribed format) sent should match with the details available in the scanned copy,
otherwise the uploaded bid will be summarily rejected. EMD shall be submitted within 07
days of last date bid submission. In case the Bidder fails to submit the same in original
within 7 days, his bid shall be rejected, irrespective of their status / ranking in tender and
notwithstanding the fact that a copy of EMD was earlier uploaded by the Bidder.
3.17.4
(d) If the Information/ documents forming basis of evaluation submitted by the bidder in
the bid is found to be false/ forged in accordance with relevant provisions provided in
Bidding Document.
3.17.5
Owner/ EIL may at any time cancel or withdraw the enquiry without assigning any reason
and in such cases the earnest money submitted by Bidder will be returned.
3.17.6
After acceptance of order by successful Bidder, Owner/ EIL will return the Earnest Money
Deposit to all unsuccessful bidders.
Engineers India Limited
New Delhi
Page 42 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
3.17.7
Earnest Money Deposit shall be returned to the successful Bidder after he has furnished
the Security Deposit to Owner.
4.0
SUBMISSION OF BID
4.1
For submission of Bid, please refer instructions to bidders for e-tendering enclosed as
Annexure-I to this ITB. Due date and time for submission of bids have been mentioned in
the Letter Inviting Bid (LIB)/ Notice inviting Bid (NIB).
4.2
For documents comprising the Bid, please refer Clause No. 3.6 above.
5.0
ALTERNATIVE BIDS
5.1
A bidder (i.e., the bidding entity) shall, on no account submit more than one bid either
directly (as a single bidder or as a member of consortium) or indirectly (as a subcontractor) failing which following actions shall be initiated:
i)
All bids submitted by such bidder (say A) directly & indirectly, shall stand rejected
and BID SECURITY, if any, in case of direct bid submitted by bidder A shall be
forfeited.
ii)
6.0
6.1
6.1.1
Techno-Commercial (Un-priced) Part (Part-I) and EMD (Part-III) will be opened on the
scheduled date and time. In the event the specified date of bid opening being
declared/happen to be a holiday for EIL, the bid shall be opened by the appointed time
and location on the next working day.
6.1.2
Bidders can witness bid opening by logging on to the E-Tendering Portal through their
system using their valid digital signature/certificate.
6.2
6.2.1
Bidder should submit all the details called for along with their bid. However, Owner/EIL
may give opportunity to the bidders to submit missing details or clarifications within
certain stipulated time. Offer of bidder will be evaluated based on available details within
such stipulated time.
6.2.2
During evaluation, Owner/EIL may request Bidder for any clarification on the Bid,
additional or outstanding documents. Bidder shall submit all additional documents in
Original and 1 copy.
6.3
6.3.1
Prior to detailed bid evaluation, the EIL/OWNER will determine the substantial
responsiveness of each bid with respect to the Bidding Documents. EIL/BORLs
determination of a bids responsiveness is to be based on the contents of the bid itself, as
defined in Clause 3.6 of ITB.
6.3.2
A substantially responsive bid is one, which conforms to the terms, conditions and
specification of the Bidding Documents (including Technical and Commercial
Amendments, if any) without any deviation. Bidder shall submit duly signed stamped
Total Compliance statement/ Letter of waiver of conditions/ deviations.
6.3.3
All documents furnished by the bidder in support of meeting the Bidders Qualification
Criteria shall be duly certified and authenticated as mentioned in NIB.
6.3.4
The recommendation for price opening shall be formulated after taking into account the
Page 43 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
following aspects:
a)
b)
c)
d)
6.4
6.4.1
Priced commercial part of only those bidders, whose bids are considered technocommercially acceptable, shall be opened. Bidders can witness bid opening details by
logging on to the E-Tendering Portal through their system.
6.5
6.5.1
The Total Lumpsum Price quoted by the bidder in FORM SP-0 as per the Schedule of
Prices (SOP) shall be considered for evaluation and determining L1 Bidder, subject to
provisions as mentioned below.
6.5.2
The bidder shall fill the Schedule of Lumpsum Prices both in figures as well as in words in
the SOP forming part of the Bidding Documents, in such a way that interpolation is not
possible. The tendered amount for the work shall be entered in the SOP and duly signed
by the bidder.
6.5.3
When there is a difference between the prices in figures and words, the price in words
shall prevail.
6.5.4
In case of any contradiction between the Total Lumpsum Price(s) in FORM SP-0 or Lump
sum price(s) in FORM SP-1, SP-2 and SP-3 or total of break-up prices indicated in FORM
SP-4, SP-5 and SP-6, the Lump sum Prices quoted shall prevail in following order:
(1) Total Lump sum Prices quoted in FORM SP-0
(2) Lump sum Prices quoted in FORM SP-1, SP-2 and SP-3
(3) Total Prices quoted in FORM SP-4, SP-5 and SP-6.
6.5.5
Total Lumpsum Price quoted in FORM SP-0 shall govern in case of contradiction and
further break-up of prices shall be corrected accordingly.
6.5.6
To arrive at the evaluated prices, loading / adjustment on Total Lumpsum Price, wherever
applicable, shall be done as per following:
6.5.7
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
Loading on account of differential operating cost of plant as per Doc. No. A702029-82-41-LP-4070 attached in Technical volume of Bidding Document.
vii)
Loading on account of quoted per diem rate for bidders participation in HAZOP
Study for total 4 (four) Mandays
viii)
Page 44 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
6.5.8
While arriving at the final evaluated prices of all the Bidders, any suo-moto /lump sum
percentage or adhoc reduction by the Bidders after submission of the priced bid shall not
be considered for evaluation. However, if such bidder happens to be lowest after
evaluation, such rebate shall be taken into account for award of work.
6.5.9
Any suo-moto /lump sum percentage or adhoc increase by the Bidders after submission
of the priced bid shall result in rejection of Bid.
6.5.10
If for any of Taxes & Duties mentioned above the bidder has quoted rates at variance to
the rates specified in the Statute/Rules, the correct rate as per the prevailing
Statute/Rules shall be taken for evaluation.
The Ceiling amount on which such tax/ duty is applicable as quoted by the bidder in the
Form SP-8 of Schedule of Prices shall be taken for evaluation.
6.5.11
Prices quoted for recommended spares for two years operation and maintenance shall
not be considered for evaluation.
6.6
6.6.1
6.7
6.7.1
Owner reserves the right to accept a bid other than the lowest and to accept or reject any
bid in whole or part, to annul the bidding process or to reject all bids with or without notice
or reasons. Such decisions by Owner shall bear no liability whatsoever consequent upon
such decisions.
7.0
7.1
Negotiation
7.1.1
In the opinion of Owner, if the total price or certain item rates quoted by the Lowest
Bidder are considered high, Owner may invite the Lowest Bidder for price negotiation.
Lowest Bidder shall attend such negotiation meetings and if requested by Owner, bidder
shall provide the analysis of rates/ break-up of amount quoted by him for any or all items
of Schedule of Prices/ Rates to demonstrate the reasonability.
7.2
Award of Work
7.2.1
7.2.2
The Bidder, whose bid is accepted by Owner, shall be issued Letter of Acceptance (LOA)
prior to expiry of bid validity. Bidder shall confirm acceptance by returning a signed copy
of the LOA.
7.2.3
Owner/ EIL shall not be obliged to furnish any information/ clarification/explanation to the
unsuccessful bidders as regards non-acceptance of their bids. Except for refund of EMD
to unsuccessful bidders, Owner/ EIL shall correspond only with the successful bidder(s).
7.3
Contract Document
7.3.1
The successful Bidder shall be required to execute a formal Agreement as per the Form
of Contract, with Owner within the specified period. For execution of the Agreement, the
successful bidder shall provide Stamp Paper of appropriate value. The cost of non-judicial
stamp paper shall be borne by the Contractor.
7.3.2
ii)
Letter of Acceptance
Engineers India Limited
New Delhi
Page 45 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
iii)
iv)
Bidding Document.
v)
vi)
8.0
8.1
Within 30 (Thirty) days from the date of Notification of Award of works by the OWNER,
the successful bidder shall furnish a Contract Performance Guarantee in line with Clause
No. 3.5 of GCC.
9.0
FRAUDULENT PRACTICES
9.1
The OWNER requires that Bidder/Vendor/ Contractor observe the highest standard of
ethics during the award/execution of Contract. Fraudulent Practice means a
misrepresentation of facts in order to influence the award of a Contract to the detriment of
the OWNER, and includes collusive practice among bidders ( prior to or after bid
submission) designed to establish bid prices at artificial non-competitive levels and to
deprive the OWNER of the benefits of free and open competition.
9.2
The OWNER will reject a bid for award if it determines that the bidder recommended for
award has engaged in fraudulent practices in competing for the Contract in question.
Bidder is required to furnish the complete and correct information/ documents required for
evaluation of their bids, if the information/ documents forming basis of evaluation is found
to be false/ forged, the same shall be considered adequate ground for rejection of bids
and forfeiture of Earnest Money Deposit.
9.3
9.4
In case, this issue of submission of false document comes to the notice after execution of
work, OWNER shall have full right to forfeit any amount due to the
Bidder/Vendor/Contractor along with forfeiture of CPBG/Security Deposit furnished by the
Bidder/Vendor/Contractor.
9.5
Further, such Bidder/Vendor/ Contractor shall be put on Blacklist /Holiday/ Negative List
of OWNER debarring them from future business with OWNER and EIL for a time period,
as per the prevailing policy of OWNER and EIL.
Page 46 of 1744
Annexure 1 to ITB
E-TENDERING METHODOLOGY
Instructions for Online Bid Submission:
The bidders are required to submit soft copies of their bids electronically on the CPP Portal (URL:
http://eprocure.gov.in) only, using valid Digital Signature Certificates. The instructions given below are
meant to assist the bidders in registering on the CPP Portal, prepare their bids in accordance with the
requirements and submitting their bids online on the CPP Portal.
More detailed information useful for submitting online bids on the CPP Portal may be obtained at:
https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app .
REGISTRATION
1) Bidders are required to enroll on the e-Procurement module of the Central Public
Procurement Portal (URL: https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app) by clicking on the link Click
here to Enroll on the CPP Portal is free of charge.
2) As part of the enrolment process, the bidders will be required to choose a unique username
and assign a password for their accounts.
3) Bidders are advised to register their valid email address and mobile numbers as part of the
registration process and submit in EIL tender portal for updation of records
(http://tenders.eil.co.in) . These details would be used for any communication from the CPP
Portal.
4) Upon enrolment, the bidders will be required to register their valid Digital Signature
Certificate (DSC) (Class II or Class III Certificates with signing key usage) issued by any
Certifying Authority recognized by CCA India (e.g. Sify / TCS / nCode / eMudhra etc.), with
their profile.
5) Foreign Bidders have to refer DSC details for foreign Bidders for Digital signature
Certificates
requirements
which
comes
under
Download
Tab
at
https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app and the remaining part is same as above and below.
6) Only one valid DSC should be registered by a bidder. Please note that the bidders are
responsible to ensure that they do not lend their DSCs to others which may lead to misuse.
7) Bidder then logs in to the site through the secured log-in by entering their user ID / password
and the password of the DSC / e-Token.
SEARCHING FOR TENDER DOCUMENTS
1) There are various search options built in the CPP Portal, to facilitate bidders to search active
tenders by several parameters. These parameters could include Tender ID, organization
name, location, date, value, etc. There is also an option of advanced search for tenders,
wherein the bidders may combine a number of search parameters such as organization
name, form of contract, location, date, other keywords etc. to search for a tender published
on the CPP Portal.
2) Once the bidders have selected the tenders they are interested in, the same can be moved
to the respective My Tenders folder. This would enable the CPP Portal to intimate the
bidders through SMS / e-mail in case there is any corrigendum issued to the tender
document.
Dated02062014
Page1
Page 47 of 1744
3) The bidder should make a note of the unique Tender ID assigned to each tender, in case
they want to obtain any clarification / help from the Helpdesk.
PREPARATION OF BIDS
1) Bidder should take into account any corrigendum published on the tender document before
submitting their bids.
2) Please go through the tender advertisement and the tender document carefully to
understand the documents required to be submitted as part of the bid. Please note the
number of covers in which the bid documents have to be submitted, the number of
documents - including the names and content of each of the document that need to be
submitted. Any deviations from these may lead to rejection of the bid.
3) Bidder, in advance, should get ready the bid documents to be submitted as indicated in the
tender document and generally, they can be in PDF / XLS / RAR / DWF formats. Bid
documents may be scanned with 100 dpi with black and white option. However, Price
Schedule / SOR shall be strictly in RAR format without altering any contents of the
formats uploaded by EIL in their Bidding Document.
4) To avoid the time and effort required in uploading the same set of standard documents which
are required to be submitted as a part of every bid, a provision of uploading such standard
documents (e.g. PAN card copy, annual reports, auditor certificates etc.) has been provided
to the bidders. Bidders can use My Space area available to them to upload such
documents. These documents may be directly submitted from the My Space area while
submitting a bid, and need not be uploaded again and again. This will lead to a reduction in
the time required for bid submission process.
SUBMISSION OF BIDS
1) Bidder should log into the site well in advance for bid submission so that he/she upload the
bid in time i.e. on or before the bid submission time. Bidder will be responsible for any delay
due to other issues.
2) The bidder has to digitally sign and upload the required bid documents one by one as
indicated in the tender document.
3) Bidder has to select the payment option as offline to pay the tender fee / EMD as
applicable and enter details of the instrument.
4) Bidder should prepare the EMD as per the instructions specified in the tender document. The
original should be posted/couriered/given in person to the Tender Processing Section, with
in 7 calendar days of the date of Unpriced bid opening. The details of the DD/any other
accepted instrument, physically sent, should tally with the details available in the scanned
copy and the data entered during bid submission time. Otherwise the uploaded bid will be
rejected.
5) A Price Bid format has been provided with the tender document to be filled by all the bidders.
Bidders are requested to note that they should necessarily submit their financial bids in the
format provided and no other format is acceptable. Bidders are required to download the
Price Bid file, open it and complete the cells with their respective financial quotes and other
details (such as name of the bidder). No other cells should be changed. Once the details
have been completed, the bidder should save it and submit it online, without changing the
filename. If the Price Bid file is found to be modified by the bidder, the bid will be rejected.
Dated02062014
Page2
Page 48 of 1744
6) The server time (which is displayed on the bidders dashboard) will be considered as the
standard time for referencing the deadlines for submission of the bids by the bidders,
opening of bids etc. The bidders should follow this time during bid submission.
7) All the documents being submitted by the bidders would be encrypted using PKI encryption
techniques to ensure the secrecy of the data. The data entered cannot be viewed by
unauthorized persons until the time of bid opening. The confidentiality of the bids is
maintained using the secured Socket Layer 128 bit encryption technology. Data storage
encryption of sensitive fields is done.
8) The uploaded tender documents become readable only after the tender opening by the
authorized bid openers.
9) Upon the successful and timely submission of bids, the portal will give a successful bid
submission message & a bid summary will be displayed with the bid no. and the date & time
of submission of the bid with all other relevant details.
10) The bid summary has to be printed and kept as an acknowledgement of the submission of
the bid. This acknowledgement may be used as an entry pass for any bid opening meetings.
RETENDER
1) Please note that if Tender has been retendered, than it is mandatory for the bidder to
submit their offer again on CPP Portal.
ASSISTANCE TO BIDDERS
1) Any queries relating to the tender document and the terms and conditions contained therein
should be addressed to the Tender Inviting Authority for a tender or the relevant contact
person indicated in the tender.
2) Any queries relating to the process of online bid submission or queries relating to CPP Portal
in general may be directed to the 24x7 CPP Portal Helpdesk. The contact number for the
helpdesk is 1800 3070 2232.
Dated02062014
Page3
Page 49 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
PROPOSAL FORMS
Page 50 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. FORM OF BID ........................................................................................................ 3
II. INFORMATION ABOUT BIDDER ......................................................................... 4
III. DECLARATION BY THE BIDDER ............................................................................ 5
IV. DEPLOYMENT SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT ........................ 6
V. DETAILED EXECUTION PHILOSPHY PROPOSED FOR JOB UNDER
CONSIDERATION ................................................................................................ 9
VI. DETAILS OF PROPOSED ORGANISATION ...................................................... 10
VII. BIO-DATA OF KEY PERSONS HANDLING THIS JOB ....................................... 11
VIII. DEPLOYMENT SCHEDULE OF SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL ........................ 12
IX. COMMERCIAL QUESTIONNAIRE .......................................................................... 18
X. FORMAT OF LETTER OF WAIVER OF CONDITIONS / DEVIATIONS ..................... 23
XI. DETAILS OF P.F. / E.S.I/SERVICE TAX /SALES TAX REGISTRATION/ PAN .......... 24
XII. BANK MANDATE FORM ........................................................................................ 25
XIII. CHECK LIST (COMMERCIAL). ................................................................... 26
XIV. FOR BIDDERS PRE-BID QUERIES ....................................................................... 30
Page 51 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
FORM-A
Serial No.
To
FORM OF BID
(To be filled by the Bidder)
Date:
Page 52 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
FORM-B
INFORMATION ABOUT BIDDER
1
IN CASE OF INDIVIDUAL
1.1
Name of Business.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Whether he pays
Rs.10,000/- per year.
2.0
IN CASE OF PARTNERSHIP
2.1
Name of Partners
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Age of Partners
3.
3.1
3.2
Name of Directors
3.3
3.4
4.
GENERAL
4.1
4.2
4.3
Income
Tax
over
Page 53 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
FORMC
We _______________________ (Name of the Bidder) hereby represent that we have gone through and understood the Bidding Documents
(including but not limited to) the Commercial & Technical Requirements/ Specifications and that our Bid has been prepared accordingly in
compliance with the requirements stipulated in the said documents.
We are submitting the Table of Contents of Bidding Documents and amendments, if any, as part of our Bid duly signed and stamped on each
page in token of our acceptance. We are submitting the total Bidding Document as part of our Bid & undertake that all parts of the Bidding
Documents shall be deemed to form part of our bid and in the event of award of work to us, all the parts shall be considered for
constitution of Contract Agreement. Further, we shall sign and stamp each page of these documents as a token of Acceptance and as a part
of the Contract in the event of award of Contract to us.
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER
: ____________________________
NAME OF BIDDER
: ____________________________
COMPANY SEAL
: ___________________________________
NOTE:
This declaration should be signed by the Bidders representative who is signing the Bid.
Page 54 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
FORM-D
DEPLOYMENT SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
SL.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
DEPLOYMENT SCHEDULE
CAPA-CITY
CRANES
1.1
(BIDDER TO SPECIFY)
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.9
2
DIESEL GENERATORS
2.1
(BIDDER TO SPECIFY)
2.2
2.3
3
COMPRESSORS
3.1
(BIDDER TO SPECIFY)
3.2
4
WELDING M/CS
4.1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
TOTAL
Page 55 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
SL.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
DEPLOYMENT SCHEDULE
CAPA-CITY
4.2
DIESEL GENERATOR
4.3
WELDING
TRANS
FORMERS/REC-TIFIERS
4.4
RADIOGRAPHYM/CS
TEST PUMP
10
WATER PUMP
11
TRANSPORTATION EQPT
11.1
TRACTOR -TRAILOR
11.2
TRUCKS
11.3
BUS
12
JACKS
12.1
MECHANICAL
12.2
HYDRAULIC
13
CIVIL
13.1
EXCAVATORS
13.2
DUMPERS
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
TOTAL
Page 56 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
SL.
NO.
DEPLOYMENT SCHEDULE
CAPA-CITY
DESCRIPTION
13.3
BATCHING PLANT
13.4
13.5
TRANSIT MIXER
13.6
MIXER
13.7
VIBRATORS
13.8
COMPACTORS
13.9
THEODOLITES
14.0
OTHERS
14.1
INSULATION
EQUIPMENT
14.2
SECONDARY
TESTING KIT
14.3
METERS,
TOOLS
TACKLES ETC.
14.4
CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT
14.5
14.6
MULTI
METERS
CALIBERATORS ETC.
TESTING
INJECTION
&
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER
_______________________
NAME OF BIDDER
_______________________
Engineers India Limited
New Delhi
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
TOTAL
Page 57 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
FORM-E
NAME OF WORK
: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
S. NO.
DESCRIPTION
2.
3.
PROCUREMENT
4.
EXPEDITING
5.
INSPECTION
6.
CONSTRUCTION
7.
TESTING,PRECPMMISSIONING,COMMISSIONING ASSISTANCE
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
1.
8.
NOTE:
(i)
Bidder to give a detailed write-up on all above activities chapter wise and will be
evaluated by OWNER/EIL.
Page 58 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
FORM-F
NAME OF WORK
: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER
________________________
NAME OF BIDDER
________________________
Page 59 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
FORM-F1
BIO-DATA OF KEY PERSONS HANDLING THIS JOB
(DESIGN, PROCUREMENT, PROJECT MANAGEMENT, QUALITY, SITE SUPERVISION)
NAME
DESIGNATION
TECHNICAL QUALIFICATION
KNOWLEDGE OF CODES/STANDARDS
LIST OF SIMILAR JOBS EXECUTED
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF RESPONSIBILITY
ROLE IN PREVIOUS ASSIGNMENTS
Bidders Name:
_________________________________________
_________________________
____________________________________
Page 60 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
FORM-G
DEPLOYMENT SCHEDULE OF SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
SL.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
1.1
PROJECT MANAGER
1.2
PLANNING MANAGER
1.3
PLANNING ENGINEERS
2.1
PROJECT ENGINEERING
MANAGER
2.2
ENGINEERING
COORDINATOR
2.3
2.3.1
CIVIL STRUCTURAL
(i)
ENGINEERS
2.3.2
PRESSURE VESSELS
(i)
ENGINEERS
2.3.3
MECHANICAL
EQPT/ROTARY EQPT.
(i)
ENGINEERS
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
TOTAL
Page 61 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
SL.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
2.3.4
PIPING
(i)
ENGINEERS
2.3.5
ELECTRICAL
(i)
ENGINEERS
2.3.6
INSTRUMENTATION
(i)
ENGINEERS
2.3.7
MISCELLANEOUS
PROCUREMENT
3.1
PURCHASE
3.1.1
PURCHASE MANAGER
3.1.2
PURCHASE
COORDINATOR
3.1.3
PURCHASE OFFICER
3.2
INSPECTION
3.2.1
INSPECTION MANAGER
3.2.2
INSPECTORS
3.3
EXPEDITING
3.3.1
EXPEDITING
COORDINATOR
3.3.2
EXPEDITORS
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
TOTAL
Page 62 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
SL.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
3.4
CUSTOM CLEARANCE,
IMPORT LICENCE
TRANSPORTATION
PERSONNEL
SITE CONSTRUCTION
4.1
PROJECT MANAGER
4.2
CONSTRUCTION
MANAGER
4.3
CIVIL STRUCTURAL
4.3.I
LEAD ENGINEER
4.3.2
SITE ENGINEER
4.3.3
SUPERVISORS
4.4
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.4.I
LEAD ENGINEER
4.4.2
SITE ENGINEER
4.4.3
SUPERVISORS
4.5
PIPING WORK
4.5.1
LEAD ENGINEER
4.5.2
SITE ENGINEER
4.5.3
SUPERVISORS
4.6
ELECTRICAL WORK
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
TOTAL
Page 63 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
SL.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
4.6.1
LEAD ENGINEER
4.6.2
SITE ENGINEER
4.6.3
SUPERVISORS
4.7
INSTRUMENTATION
WORK
4.7.1
LEAD ENGINEER
4.7.2
SITE ENGINEER
4.7.3
SUPERVISORS
4.8
QUALITY
ASSURANCE/QUALITY
CONTROL
4.8.1
QC/QA MANAGER
4.8.2
INSPECTOR (CIVIL)
4.8.3
INSPECTOR (PIPING)
4.8.4
INSPECTOR (MECH
EQPT)
4.9
SAFETY ENGINEER
4.10
SITE ENGINEERING
WORKS
4.10.1
ENGINEERS
4.10.2
SUPERVISORS
4.11
COMPUTER ENGINEER
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
TOTAL
Page 64 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
SL.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
4.12
ADMINISTRATION
MANAGER
4.13
MISCELLANEOUS
4.14
WAREHOUSE
PERSONNEL
4.15
MATERIAL MANAGER
4.16
COMMISSIONING
i)
COMMISSIONING
COORDINATOR
ii)
COMM. ENGINEER
(SHIFT- IN-CHARGE)
iii)
CONTROL ROOM
COORDINATOR
iv)
FIELD SUPERVISOR
v)
TECHNICIAN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
TOTAL
_____________________________________
Page 65 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
FORM-H
COMMERCIAL QUESTIONNAIRE
Page 17 of 30
Page 66 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
COMMERCIAL QUESTIONNAIRE
Bidders reply/ confirmation as furnished in the Commercial Questionnaire (CQ) shall supersede the
stipulations mentioned elsewhere in their bid.
SL.
No.
BIDDERs REPLY/
CONFIRMATION
EILs QUERY
1.
2.
3.
4.
documents
are
Schedule of Price
a)
b)
c)
6.
7.
8.
9.
Page 67 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
SL.
No.
BIDDERs REPLY/
CONFIRMATION
EILs QUERY
the material specifically identified as that to be
issued by OWNER, CONTRACTOR's scope shall
include supply of all materials required for
completion of Work irrespective of whether such
materials are mentioned in the Bidding Document
or not.
10.
11.
12.
i)
ii)
Insurance
as
per
Bidding Document.
provision
of
13.
15.
16.
DG Sets
Compressors
Test pumps
Page 19 of 30
Page 68 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
SL.
No.
BIDDERs REPLY/
CONFIRMATION
EILs QUERY
-
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Toe
boards
to
scaffolding platforms
Excavations to be properly
slopped
be
provided
in
shored/
Page 69 of 1744
SL.
No.
EILs QUERY
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
BIDDERs REPLY/
CONFIRMATION
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
Page 21 of 30
Page 70 of 1744
SL.
No.
EILs QUERY
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
BIDDERs REPLY/
CONFIRMATION
31.
32.
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER
__________________________
NAME OF BIDDER
__________________________
COMPANY SEAL
___________________________
Page 22 of 30
Page 71 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
FORM- K
: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
We
*
hereby agree to fully comply with, abide by and accept without variation,
deviation or reservation all technical, commercial and other condition whatsoever of the
tender documents and all Addenda / Corrigenda / Clarifications issued by Bharat Oman
Refineries Limited.
We further hereby waive, withdraw and abandon any and all deviations, variations,
objections or reservations whatsoever hereto set out, given or indicated in our offer,
clarifications, correspondence, communications, or otherwise with a view that the final price
bid submitted may be treated to conform to, in all respects, with the terms and conditions of
the said tender documents including all Addenda / Corrigenda.
**
For & on behalf of
Authorised signatory
* Here fill in the name of bidder.
** The Letter of Waiver must be signed by the person (s) authorised to sign.
Page 23 of 30
Page 72 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
FORM-L
DETAILS OF P.F. / E.S.I/SERVICE TAX /SALES TAX REGISTRATION/ PAN
:
:
:
:
We hereby confirm that the above PF Account is under operation presently and shall be used for all PF related activities for the labour engaged
by us in the present work (if awarded to us).
Bidder shall be solely responsible to fulfil all the obligations of PF and ESI registration without any additional financial liabilities / implications to
EIL / OWNER
SERVICE TAX REGISTRATION NO.:
SALES TAX (MPVAT) REGISTRATION NUMBER:
PAN No.:
(SIGNATURE OF BIDDER)
Page 73 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
FORMM
BANK MANDATE FORM
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bidder Name
:
Bidder Code
:
Address of the Bidder
:
Particulars of Bank Account of Bidder
:
a. Name of the Bank
:
b. Name of the Branch and Address of the Branch
:
c. Branch Code
:
d. 9-Digit MICR code Number of the Bank & Branch
(As appearing in the MICR Cheque issued by the bank)
(Please do not give multicity cheque book code
Number)
e. Type of account (Saving Bank, Current or Cash Credit) :
f. Account Number
:
g. RGTS/IFSC Code (11 digit)
:
h. NEFT Code No.
:
5.
E-mail address of the Bidder
:
6.
Contact Person(s) of the Bidder
:
I/we declare that the particulars given above are correct and complete and I/we
accord our consent
for receiving all our payments through Electronic Mechanism.
______________________________________________________
(Signature and designation of the Authorised person(s) of Bidder)
Official seal of the Bidder
Place :
Date :
BANK CERTIFICATION
Certified that the particulars furnished above are correct as per our records.
Place :
Date :
_____________________________________
Signature of the Authorised Official of the Bank
Banks Stamp
Page 74 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
FORM-N
CONTENTS OF BID
AND
CHECK LIST (COMMERCIAL)
Page 75 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
UNDER SECTION-I
Letter of submission & Synopsis of the Proposal.
Submitted
(A.2)
(A.3)
(A.5)
(A.8)
(A.9)
(B)
(B.1)
(B.2)
(B.3)
(B.4)
(B.5)
(C)
(C.5)
UNDER SECTION-III
Partnership Deed in case of partnership firm, Consortium
Agreement in case of Consortium and Memorandum & Articles of
Engineers India Limited
New Delhi
Page 76 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
(D)
UNDER SECTION-IV
(D.1)
(D.2)
(E)
UNDER SECTION-V
(E.1)
(E.2)
(E.3)
(F)
UNDER SECTION-VI
(F.1)
(G)
UNDER SECTION-VII
(G.1)
(G.3)
(G.4)
(H)
UNDER SECTION-VIII
(H.1)
(I)
(I.1)
UNDER SECTION-IX
Quality Assurance: A brief description of the Bidder's QA system
Engineers India Limited
New Delhi
Page 77 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
UNDER SECTION-X
Check- List as per FORM-N.
Submitted
Page 78 of 1744
Proposal Forms
FORMP
FOR BIDDERS PRE-BID QUERIES
SL.
NO.
Page
No.
Clause
No.
BIDDER'S QUERY
OWNER'S REPLY
Subject
Pre-bid queries shall be furnished strictly in above format (editable file) within cut-off date mentioned in
RFQ/LIB/NIB. Owner/EIL reserves the right not to consider any queries submitted after cut-off date.
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER
NAME OF BIDDER
:
:
___________________________
___________________________
Engineers India Limited
New Delhi
Page 79 of 1744
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------
SPECIALCONDITIONSOFCONTRACT
(SCC)
Page 80 of 1744
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------TABLEOFCONTENTS
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
20.0
21.0
22.0
23.0
24.0
25.0
26.0
27.0
28.0
29.0
30.0
31.0
32.0
33.0
34.0
35.0
36.0
37.0
38.0
39.0
40.0
41.0
GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 4
SCOPE OF WORK & SUPPLY OF MATERIALS ............................................................. 5
SINGLE POINT RESPONSIBILITY ................................................................................... 5
WORKS CONTRACT ........................................................................................................... 5
CONSTRUCTION WATER, CONSTRUCTION POWER AND LAND FOR
RESIDENTIAL ACCOMMODATION ................................................................................ 5
CONTRACT AGREEMENT ................................................................................................. 6
PERFORMANCE SECURITY DEPOSIT ............................................................................ 7
TIME SCHEDULE ................................................................................................................. 8
UNDERGROUND AND OVERHEAD STRUCTURES .................................................... 8
SUB-CONTRACTING .......................................................................................................... 8
CO-ORINATION WITH OTHER AGENCIES ................................................................... 8
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AND ORGANIZATION .............................................. 8
PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES .................................................................... 10
DRAWINGS ......................................................................................................................... 10
LEADS .................................................................................................................................. 12
QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMME ................................ 12
MAKE OF MATERIALS .................................................................................................... 13
CONDITIONS FOR ISSUE AND RECONCILIATION OF MATERIALS .................... 13
CERTIFICATE OF VERIFICATION & GOOD CONDITION ........................................ 14
TEMPORARY WORKS ...................................................................................................... 15
EXCAVATION BY BLASTING ........................................................................................ 15
CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................................... 15
GENERAL GUIDELINES DURING AND BEFORE ERECTION ................................. 16
ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................ 16
TESTS AND INSPECTION ................................................................................................ 17
INSPECTION OF SUPPLY ITEMS/ MATERIALS ......................................................... 18
FINAL INSPECTION .......................................................................................................... 18
ADDITIONAL WORKS/EXTRA WORKS ....................................................................... 18
TITLE OF OWNERSHIP .................................................................................................... 19
TERMS OF PAYMENT ...................................................................................................... 19
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE ....................................................................................... 19
ROUNDING OFF ................................................................................................................. 19
INVOICE & PAYMENT ..................................................................................................... 19
COMPUTERISED CONTRACTORS BILLING SYSTEM ............................................ 19
FIXED AND FIRM PRICE ................................................................................................. 20
ESCALATION ..................................................................................................................... 20
TAXES, DUTIES AND LEVIES AND STATUTORY VARIATIONS ON TAXES AND
DUTIES................................................................................................................................. 20
CONSIGNEE ........................................................................................................................ 25
INSURANCES ..................................................................................................................... 26
INSURANCE IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES ....................................................................... 26
STATUTORY APPROVALS .............................................................................................. 26
Page 81 of 1744
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------
42.0
43.0
44.0
45.0
46.0
47.0
48.0
49.0
50.0
51.0
52.0
53.0
54.0
55.0
56.0
57.0
58.0
59.0
60.0
61.0
62.0
:
:
ANNEXURE-III
ANNEXURE-IV
ANNEXURE-VA,
VB &V C
ANNEXURE-VI
ANNEXURE-VII
ANNEXURE-VIII
ANNEXURE-IX
ANNEXURE-X
ANNEXURE-XI
:
:
:
:
:
:
TIMESCHEDULE
QUALIFICATION AND EXPERIENCE OF KEY SUPERVISORY
PERSONANELS
QUALITYMANGEMENT SYSTEM
SPECIFICATION FOR DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTROS AND SPECIFICATION FOR DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM SUPPLIERS
METHODOLOGY FOR PROCUREMENT OF STRUCTURAL STEEL, CEMENT AND TMT
BARS BY THE CONTRACTORS
RECONCILIATION OF MATERIALS
TERMS OF PAYMENT
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
HEALTH,SAFETY&ENVIRONMENT GUIDELINES FOR CONTRACTOR
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR RADIOGRAPHY & OTHER NDT
CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS OF MONITORING AND MEASURING
DEVICES AT CONSTRUCTION SITE
Page 82 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
SPECIALCONDITIONSOFCONTRACT (SCC)
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
The materials, design, and workmanship shall satisfy the applicable relevant
Indian Standards, the Job Specifications contained herein and Codes
referred to. Where the Job Specifications stipulate requirements in addition to
those contained in the Standard Codes and Specifications, these additional
requirements shall also be satisfied.
1.6
Contract Agreement
Detailed Letter of Acceptance along with its enclosures.
Fax/Letter of Intent/Acceptance.
Schedule of Rates as enclosures to Detailed Letter of Acceptance.
Scope of Work/Supply/ Job/Particular Specifications.
Drawings
Technical/Material Specifications.
Special Conditions of Contract
Page 83 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
ix)
x)
xi)
Instructions to Bidders
General Conditions of Contract.
Other Documents
1.7
It will be CONTRACTORs responsibility to bring to the notice of Engineer-InCharge any irreconcilable conflict in the contract documents before starting
the work (s) or making the supply with reference to, which the conflict exists.
1.8
2.0
3.0
4.0
WORKS CONTRACT
The entire work as per Scope of Work covered under this contract shall be
awarded on single contractor.
5.0
5.1
5.2
CONSTRUCTION POWER
Clause 2.4 of the General conditions of Contract stands modified as follows:
Subject to availability, construction power maximum 150 kW shall be provided
by OWNER free of cost through 2 nos. of 125 A feeder from sub-station(s)
Page 84 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
near the site. Further onward power distribution from above location(s) shall
be arranged by the CONTRACTOR at their cost. However, non-availability of
construction power due to delay in commissioning of OWNERs construction
power system or due to any reasons shall not entitle the CONTRACTOR for
any claim on OWNER on account of time and cost implications.
The construction power shall be made available to the CONTRACTOR
subject to grid distribution, and no time extension or compensation shall be
payable on this account. Therefore, the CONTRACTOR shall within the
quoted price make alternate arrangement to cope with such eventuality.
Additional power, if required, to meet the contractual requirements, shall be
arranged by the CONTRACTOR at its own cost. The CONTRACTOR shall
ensure at his cost that all electrical lines and equipment and all installation
are approved by the State Electricity Inspector. The OWNER shall not be
liable for any loss or damage to the CONTRACTORS equipment for any
reason whatsoever.
5.3
5.4
LAND FOR
WORKSHOP
CONTRACTORS
FIELD
OFFICE,
GODOWN
AND
The OWNER shall provide the CONTRACTOR open land within refinery
area, free of any liability to pay license fee (but otherwise subject to the terms
and conditions specified in Clause 2.5 of the General Conditions of Contract)
to establish a temporary site office, Godown & Workshop. However, all such
temporary facilities to be demolished/dismantled, area to be cleared of debris
& handed over to Owner on completion of the job. Additional land, if any,
shall be arranged by the CONTRACTOR on his own outside the Refinery
Complex within the quoted prices.
Please note that the CONTRACTOR shall only use porta cabins for their
Site office.
6.0
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
6.1
Page 85 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
6.3
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Page 86 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
TIME SCHEDULE
The work shall be executed strictly as per time Schedule mentioned in
Annexure-I to SCC. The period of completion given includes the time
required for mobilization as well as testing, rectifications, if any, retesting and
completion in all respects to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
9.0
10.0
SUB-CONTRACTING
If the CONTRACTOR is required to engage a Sub-CONTRACTOR for any
part of work, then such Sub-CONTRACTORs shall have prior proven
experience of similar work and shall require specific approval by
OWNER/Engineer-In-Charge after award of work.
Following the notification of acceptance of Bid, the CONTRACTOR will
submit to the OWNER for approval the details of Sub-CONTRACTORs.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that very competent and resourceful agencies
with proven track record and performance should be proposed for the work to
be sub-contracted.
11.0
12.0
12.1
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
Page 87 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
SITE ORGANISATION
Subject to the provisions in the contract document and without prejudice to
CONTRACTORs liabilities and responsibilities to provide adequate qualified
skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled personnel on the work, CONTRACTOR
shall deploy supervisory personnel and augment the same as decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge depending upon the site requirement & the exigencies of
work so as to complete all works within the contracted time schedule and
without any additional cost to OWNER.
Qualification and experience of Key Supervisory Personnel to be deployed
for this work shall be as per given in the Annexure-II to Special Conditions
of Contract.
12.3
Page 88 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
12.4
12.4.1 The Key Supervisory Personnel shall be mobilized within 15 days of written
instructions for mobilization given during Kick-off-meeting or by Engineer-incharge based on front availability at site. In case of delay in mobilization or
shortfall in Key personnel manpower, penal recovery shall be levied from 16th
day onwards as per the recovery rates specified in Annexure-II to SCC, till
the date of mobilization of Key Supervisory personnel at site.
12.4.2 Deduction under this clause is in addition to Price adjustment for Delay
applicable pursuant to GCC clause no. 3.9. The provisions of GCC clause no.
3.9 shall have no bearing on this clause.
12.4.3 Price adjustment for non-mobilization of key manpower shall be limited to 3%
(three percent) of the total executed contract value.
13.0
14.0
DRAWINGS
The drawings accompanying the Bidding Document are generally indicative of
scope of work and are issued for bidding purpose only. Final construction
shall be carried out as per the drawings prepared by the CONTRACTOR and
reviewed by the OWNER or the OWNERs CONSULTANT during the course
of execution.
Page 89 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
Page 90 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
LEADS
For the various works, in case of contradiction, leads mentioned in the
Schedule of Rates shall prevail over those indicated in Technical
Specifications.
16.0
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
Page 91 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
16.7
16.8
17.0
MAKE OF MATERIALS
17.1
17.2 The CONTRACTOR shall purchase Steel & Cement in line with following
clauses:17.2.1 Cement: The methodology for procurement and supply of cement by the
CONTRACTOR from manufacturers shall be as per Annexure-V A of this
SCC.
17.2.2 Structural Steel: The methodology for procurement of structure steel shall be
as per Annexure-V B of this SCC.
17.3 HSD re-bars/TMT bars: The list of approved manufacturers and the
methodology for obtaining rebate, in case TMT bars are procured by the
CONTRACTORs from reputed manufacturers other than the approved
manufacturers, shall be as per Annexure-V C to this SCC.
18.0
18.1
Issuance of Free Issue Materials (FIM), if any, from OWNER's stores or other
issue points of OWNER and its reconciliation shall be carried out as per terms
and conditions set forth in the Annexure-VI of SCC.
18.2
Page 92 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
18.3
Every month, CONTRACTOR shall submit an account for all materials issued
by OWNER in the proforma prescribed by the Engineer-in-Charge. On
completion of work the CONTRACTOR shall submit Material Appropriation
Statement for all materials issued by the OWNER.
18.4
18.5
All pipes shall be issued in available lengths/shapes and no claims for extra
payment on account of issue of non-standard length/shape will be
entertained. Pipes shall be issued on linear measurement basis.
19.0
Page 93 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
TEMPORARY WORKS
All temporary works, ancillary works, enabling works, including dewatering of
surface and subsoil water, preparation and maintenance of temporary drains
at the worksite, preparation and maintenance of approaches to working
areas, wherever required, for execution of the work, shall be the responsibility
of the CONTRACTOR and all costs towards the same shall be deemed to
have been included in the quoted prices.
21.0
EXCAVATION BY BLASTING
Blasting will not be permitted inside refinery premises.
22.0
CONSTRUCTION
The CONTRACTOR shall within the scope of work observe in addition to
specifications, all national and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulation
and requirements pertaining to the work.
Various procedures and methods to be adopted by CONTRACTOR during
the construction as required in the respective specifications shall be submitted
to OWNER in due time and well in advance of the specific work for approval.
The CONTRACTOR shall carryout required supervision as per Quality
Assurance Plan and furnish all assistance required by the OWNER in
carrying out inspection work. The OWNER will have authorized
Page 94 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
representatives present who shall have free access to the work at all times. If
an OWNERs representative notifies the CONTRACTORS representative of
any deficiency in any work or in the supervision thereof, the CONTRACTOR
shall make every effort to carry out such instructions consistent with best
industry practice.
23.0
24.0
ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT
All erection shall be carried out by deploying a crane(s) of suitable capacity.
Erection by derrick shall not be permissible. The CONTRACTOR shall submit
erection schemes for erection of critical equipments to Engineer-in-Charge for
Page 95 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
not
allowed,
25.1
The CONTRACTOR shall carry out the various tests as enumerated in the
technical specifications of this bidding document and the technical
documents that will be furnished to him during the performance of the work.
25.2
All the tests either on the field or at outside laboratories concerning the
execution of the work and supply of materials by the CONTRACTOR shall be
carried out by CONTRACTOR at his own cost.
25.3
25.4
25.5
25.6
All results of inspection and tests will be recorded in the inspection reports,
proforma of which will be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. These reports
shall form part of the completion documents.
25.7
For imported items, the acceptable Third Part Inspection Agencies (TPIA)
shall be as under:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
M/s LRIS
M/s BV
M/s DNV
M/s TUV
M/s CEIL
25.8
For indigenous items, the Third Part Inspection Agencies (TPIA) shall be by
EIL.
25.9
Inspection and acceptance of work shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from
any of his responsibilities under this Contract.
Page 96 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
26.0
26.1
All inspection and tests on bought out items shall be made as per the
specifications forming part of this contract. The CONTRACTOR shall submit
a categorization plan of all the supply items indicating the type of inspection
required for review by BORL/TPIA. Various stages of inspection and testing
shall be identified after receipt of Quality Assurance Programme from the
CONTRACTOR/ Manufacturer.
26.2
26.3
The CONTRACTOR shall ensure full and free access to the inspection
Engineer of OWNER/CONSULTANT at the CONTRACTORs or their subCONTRACTORs premises at any time during contract period to facilitate him
to carry out inspection and testing assignments.
26.4
26.5
Where facilities for testing do not exist in the CONTRACTORs/ subCONTRACTORs laboratories, samples and test pieces shall be drawn
by the CONTRACTOR/ SUB-CONTRACTOR in presence of Inspection
Engineer of a OWNER/CONSULTANT and duly sealed by the later and sent
for testing in Government approved Test House or any other testing
laboratories approved by the Inspection Engineer at the CONTRACTORs
cost.
27.0
FINAL INSPECTION
After completion of all tests as per specification the whole work will be subject
to a final inspection to ensure that job has been completed as per
requirement.
If any defects noticed in the work attributable to
CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR at his own cost shall attend these, as
and when the OWNER brings them to his notice. The OWNER shall have
the right to have these defects rectified at the risk and cost of the
CONTRACTOR if he fails to attend to these defects immediately.
28.0
Page 97 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
TITLE OF OWNERSHIP
29.1
29.2
30.0
TERMS OF PAYMENT
Payments shall be made to the CONTRACTOR as per the Terms of
Payment as defined in Annexure-VII to SCC.
31.0
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the performance of the
systems/equipment/materials supplied by them in terms of the parameters
mentioned in the data sheets/ other documents attached with the Bidding
document, the guaranteed mechanical performance as laid down in Process
Package. Bidder to refer Annexure-VIII to SCC for Provision for loading on
account of guaranteed power consumption figure quoted by them in FORM
SP-9 of Schedule of Price & penalty on a/c of not meeting guaranteed power
consumption.
32.0
ROUNDING OFF
All payments to and recoveries from the CONTRACTORs bills shall be
rounded off to the nearest Rupee. Wherever the amount to be paid/recovered
consists of a fraction of a Rupee (Paisa), the amount shall be rounded off to
the next higher rupee if the fraction consists of 50 (fifty) paisa or more and if
the fraction of a Rupee is less than 50 (fifty) paisa, the same shall be ignored.
33.0
34.0
Page 98 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
36.0
ESCALATION
36.1
37.0
37.1
The CONTRACTOR shall accept full and exclusive liability at his own cost for
the payment of any and all taxes, duties, cess and levies howsoever
designated, as are payable to any government, local or statutory authority in
any country including India which are now in force or as are hereafter
imposed, increased or modified and as are payable by CONTRACTOR, his
agents, SUBCONTRACTORS and its/their respective employees for or in
relation to the performance of this CONTRACT. The CONTRACTOR shall be
deemed to have been fully informed with respect to all such liabilities and
considered the same while submitting the offer.
37.2
Price quoted by the Bidder shall be inclusive of all applicable taxes, duties,
cess, levies etc. such as Sales Tax, Excise duty, Service tax, Swachh Bharat
Cess, Krishi Kalyan Cess, MPVAT for works contract, withholding tax, royalty,
design & engineering cess (if any) and Octroi, Entry tax in the State of
Madhya Pradesh (MP) India, taxes & duties on construction equipment /
LEVIES
AND
STATUTORYVARIATIONS
Page 99 of 1744
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
37.4
OWNER shall claim Input Tax Credit (ITC) of MP VAT on supply of materials
which are eligible for Input Tax Credit as per MP VAT act. The input tax credit
amount shall be paid to CONTRACTOR upon production of all relevant
documents necessary to claim Input Tax Credit by OWNER on supply of
materials which are eligible for Input Tax Credit as per VAT act and OWNER
is able to take VAT Credit in accordance with the provisions of VAT Act and
Bidding Document. CONTRACTOR shall submit all MP VAT Clearance
Certificate issued by Commercial Tax Department to BORL before
submission of pre-final RA bill. If the CONTRACTOR does not submits MP
VAT Clearance Certificate along with the pre-final RA bill then BORL shall
recover MP VAT paid to the CONTRACTOR along with applicable interest
and penalty.
37.5 Bidders to quote MP VAT and Service Tax as per valuation Scheme and
on quoted value of Material and services respectively. It may be noted
that composition scheme for both MP VAT and Service TAX should not
be adopted by the bidders.
37.6 CONTRACTOR shall submit valid necessary supporting documents for the
above taxes and duties within 3 months from the date of Invoice, to enable
OWNER to claim relevant benefits/ payments.
Notes:
a) The supporting documents for ED/CVD/AID shall include Excise invoice,
Importer Invoice, Proof of Material Receipt in Factory, Proof of Material
used in Project &CONTRACTORs undertaking that they have not
claimed Cenvat benefit for the same etc.
b) The relevant documents for MP VAT shall include Original Tax Invoice.
37.7 The amounts of Cenvatable Excise Duty, Cenvatable Countervailing Duty,
Cenvatable Additional Import Duty, Service tax, Cenvatable Krishi Kalyan
Cess and MP VAT eligible for ITC included in the lumpsum price will be
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
Owner. Form-C shall not be provided for bought-out items sourced from Subvendor including supplies by the way of sale in transit.
37.13 CONTRACTOR shall have full and exclusive liability for payment of all
TAXES arising directly or indirectly out of the performance of the WORK and
CONTRACTORs obligations hereunder.
37.14 All TAXES levied and imposed on CONTRACTOR and his employees will be
for the account of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall also be liable for
interest and/ or all penalties arising due to non-payment or late payment of
any applicable TAXES. In the event OWNER pays or is required to pay any
TAXES, interest and/ or penalty due to default of CONTRACTOR,
CONTRACTOR shall forthwith reimburse such amounts to OWNER. If
CONTRACTOR fails to reimburse such amounts to OWNER within fourteen
(14) days of receipt of a demand from OWNER, OWNER shall be entitled to
deduct such amounts from any payments due and payable by OWNER to
CONTRACTOR under the CONTRACT.
37.15 Any costs, expenses or losses arising due to the re-export of the imported
goods or re-import of goods, shall be for the account of CONTRACTOR.
37.16 CONTRACTOR shall indeminify and keep harmless OWNER against liability,
losses or damages suffered by OWNER arising due to the failure of
CONTRACTOR or any of his employees or SUB-CONTRACTORS to pay any
TAXES, including interest and penalties in relation thereto or comply with any
of the provisions of any tax laws under the CONTRACT.
37.17 CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for all TAXES payable by his
SUB-CONTRACTOR (S) and their employees including but not limited to
Indian corporate TAXES.
37.18 If after the due date of submission of last price bid / price implication, any new
taxes or duties are levied or any increase occurs in the applicable rate(s) of
Central Sales Tax (CST) & MP VAT on supplies, Excise duty, Basic Custom
Duty, Countervailing Duty, Additional Import Duty,Customs Educational Cess
and Customs Secondary & Higher Education Cess, Entry Tax in Madhya
Pradesh, Swachh Bharat Cess, Krishi Kalyan Cess and Service tax as a
result of Statutory amendment, the OWNER shall reimburse the
CONTRACTOR the said new taxes & duties as well as the increase in the
resultant CST &MP VAT on supplies, Excise duty, Basic Custom Duty,
Countervailing Duty, Additional Import Duty, Customs Educational Cess and
Customs Secondary & Higher Education Cess, Entry Tax in Madhya
Pradesh, Swachh Bharat Cess, Krishi Kalyan Cess and Service tax as the
case may be, on CONTRACTOR furnishing satisfactory proof of payment
including copy of Govt. Regulations etc. Conversely, if there is any reduction
in the rates of CST &MP VAT on supplies, Excise duty, Basic Custom Duty,
Countervailing Duty, Additional Import Duty, Customs Educational Cess and
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
37.22.1 The classification of goods as per Central Excise/ Custom tariff should be
correctly done to ensure that CENVAT benefit is not lost by the OWNER on
account of any error on the part of the CONTRACTOR. It is the responsibility
of the CONTRACTOR to ascertain the applicable rules and follow the
provisions of the Excise Act/ the Excise Rules applicable from time to time
and in case of lapse in following the appropriate procedure/submission of
appropriate documents, which may result in disallowance of OWNERS
Cenvat claim, the OWNER reserves the right to withhold the payment of
Cenvatable duties as per the provisions of sub-clause no. 37.22.2 below.
37.22.2 The OWNER shall withhold payment of Cenvatable Duties (Central Excise
Duty and/or CVD & AID) and Cenvatable Service Tax & Krishi Kalyan Cess if
the relevant documentation is not made available to OWNER, to enable
OWNER to claim CENVAT benefit for the amount indicated in Schedule of
Prices due to the fact that the item is not cenvatable by nature or by its use,
the item is supplied with wrong classification or wrong documentation etc.
37.23 WITHHOLDING, ACCOUNTING AND TAX REQUIREMENTS
37.23.1 Tax shall be deducted at source by Owner from all sums due to
CONTRACTOR in accordance with the provisions of the Income Tax Act,
1961, as in force at the relevant point of time
Owner shall issue a Tax deduction or withholding certificate to the
CONTRACTOR evidencing the Tax deducted or withheld and deposited by
Owner on payments made to the CONTRACTOR to enable the
CONTRACTOR to claim the credit of the Tax deducted or withheld by Owner.
37.23.2 The CONTRACTOR shall withhold from wages and salaries of its agents,
servants or employees all sums required to be withheld by the laws of India,
and to pay the same promptly and directly when due to the proper authority
(ies). The CONTRACTOR further agrees to comply with all accounting and
reporting requirements under the laws of India, and to pay and bear the cost
of such compliance. Upon request by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR will
furnish OWNER evidence of payment of applicable withholding taxes in India.
37.23.3 Subject to above, other provisions of taxes and duties under Section-VII of
the GCC (General Conditions of Contract) shall also be applicable. Bidders to
consider same in the quoted prices.
38.0
CONSIGNEE
38.1
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
INSURANCES
39.1
39.2
39.3
40.0
40.1
The CONTRACTOR shall at his own cost arrange, secure and maintain
separate insurance cover from the reputable insurance companies, for all
such amounts and for such periods as may be necessary to protect the
works, CONTRACTOR and sub- CONTRACTORs personnel and the
interests of the OWNER/CONSULTANT as per applicable laws of land.
40.2
The form and the limit of insurance cover taken by CONTRACTOR shall be
satisfactory to OWNER/CONSULTANT and one copy of all insurance policies
and related documents shall be submitted to OWNER/CONSULTANT,
immediately on execution.
CONTRACTOR shall inform OWNER
/CONSULTANT at least 60 days before any insurance policies expire or are
cancelled or changed.
41.0
STATUTORY APPROVALS
41.1
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
Statutory fees paid, if any, for all such inspections and approvals by
authorities shall be deemed to be included in the quoted prices, if not
specified otherwise.
41.3
41.4
All statutory approvals other than specified under 41.1 above shall be
obtained by OWNER and provided to the CONTRACTOR.
42.0
42.1
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
LABOUR RELATIONS
44.1
44.2
45.0
LABOUR LICENCE
45.1
46.0
46.1
The CONTRACTOR shall ascertain the availability of local SUBCONTRACTORs and skilled/unskilled manpower and engage them to the
extent possible for performance of works.
46.2
The CONTRACTOR shall not recruit personnel of any category from among
those who are already employed by the other agencies working at the site but
shall make maximum use of local labour available.
47.0
47.1
The CONTRACTORs labourers must leave the location of the project site
after the work is tapered/completed to avoid creation of slum in the areas
adjoining the project site.
48.0
WORKING HOURS
CONTRACTOR shall mobilize sufficient workforce, machinery, and
equipments etc. so as to complete the job by working in normal working hours
prevailing at Site of OWNER.
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
ESI / EPF
The CONTRACTOR shall cover all employees engaged by him or through
SUB-CONTRACTORs under ESI as well as EPF Acts as per provisions of
Acts and shall submit necessary records and returns in proof of compliance
of these statutory enactments. CONTRACTOR shall defend, indemnify and
hold the OWNER harmless from any liability or penalty which may be
imposed by the Central, State, Local or other statutory authority for any
violation of labour enactments or any other enactments, by the
CONTRACTOR or his sub-CONTRACTOR.
50.0
PROVIDENT FUND
The CONTRACTOR shall strictly comply with the provisions of Employees
Provident Fund Act and register themselves with RPFC before commencing
work.
The CONTRACTOR shall deposit Employees and OWNERs
contributions to the RPFC every month. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish
along with each running bill, the challan /receipt for the payment made to the
RPFC for the preceding months.
In case the contractor does not submit the challan / receipt confirming
payment of provident fund made to the RPFC for the preceding month along
with their running bill, then suitable amount shall be hold/retained by the
Owner while processing the payment. Such hold/retained amount shall be
released after receipt of the above mentioned challan / receipt by BORL. No
interest shall be paid by BORL on such hold/retained amounts.
51.0
52.0
ENTRY
PASSES,
GATE
AND
SAFETY REGULATIONS
PASSES,
WORK
PERMITS
Entry Passes
The CONTRACTOR shall follow regulations of OWNER for arranging entry
passes for his workers and staff.
Access Control system has been introduced in Refinery to strengthen security
measures. Labour entry is strictly through biometric access. Access Control
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
cards shall be issued to labour for monitoring entry & exit of labour in
Refinery. All labours to be presented to ACS for capturing photo, palm
reading & personal details and entry is also subject to personal search /
frisking and will pass through metal detector then they have to swipe the card
and shall pass through palm readers.
Contractor, on award of job has to complete all formalities of compliance cell
i.e. submission of Form-V to labour commissioner / license to work in the
premises, ESIC/Insurance, PF details etc, complete fire & safety induction
programme, obtain Police clearance & health certificate.
On closure of contract, contractor shall return all access cards issued to his
labours. Nominal fees for access card will be charged of Rs.300/- per card
through bank DD in favour of BORL and Rs.250/- per card shall be refunded
on return of access card.Rs.50/- per card shall be deducted as processing,
printing & stickers cost etc.
The works under this contract are to be carried out in areas within the LPG
Plant area adjacent/ adjoining to the existing operating units. As such,
CONTRACTOR is required to abide by safety and security regulations of
OWNER enforced from time to time.
Gate Passes and Shipping Memos
To bring materials/equipments/tools/tackles etc. inside the plant for
construction work, the CONTRACTOR has to produce
challans/proper
documents to OWNER's personnel at gates. The materials shall be checked
thoroughly by OWNER's personnel at Gate and recorded in their register
before allowing any material to be brought inside the Refinery area by
CONTRACTOR. It shall be CONTRACTOR's responsibility to ensure that
the recorded entry no., date, signature of OWNER's authorised
representative with stamp are recorded on challans/supporting documents
signed by OWNER's personnel at gate during entry. Shipping Memos issued
by OWNER shall be preserved by CONTRACTOR and enclosed while
returning the materials to OWNER.
Work Permits
When work is to be carried out in hazardous areas, hot work permit are to be
obtained before start of work for all the jobs which are capable of generating
flame, spark, heat etc. namely, Gas cutting, grinding, welding, use of any
electrical/diesel/petrol/battery operated prime mover/ machine tools/
equipment/ generator sets/ mixer machine/ drilling machine/ pumps/ crane/
forklift/ truck/ trailer/ chipping/ breaking of rocks/concrete/hack saw cutting
and drilling, etc. Cold work permits are to be obtained for all the jobs.
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
According to the nature of work and use of various types of equipment and
tools the CONTRACTOR has to apply for cold and hot permits in a prescribed
format at least two days before the work is planned to start. No work permit
shall be issued by OWNER unless proper arrangement is made by
CONTRACTOR to ensure safe performance of work inside the plant.
Jobwise and areawise permits shall be issued to CONTRACTOR and
against each permit at least one construction supervisor and one safety
supervisor of required level shall always be made available at site by
CONTRACTOR.
Vehicle Permits
Permits are to be obtained separately for entry/use of vehicles/ trailers etc.
inside the plant. The following requirements are to be met to obtain vehicle
permit:
Vehicle/Equipment etc. should be brought to site in good condition.
Valid Road tax certificate, fitness certificate and insurance policy from
competent authority.
Valid operating/driving licence of driver/operator.
Trailers used at site shall have valid RTO registration.
Hydra with operating cabin behind the lifting boom is not allowed.
Validity of the Permits
Permit is valid for one shift of 08 (Eight) hours.
No permit is valid if it is not renewed by the shift in-charge/shift
representative in shifts (Morning & Evening).
The permit shall be issued for a maximum period of one month and if
extension is required, CONTRACTOR has to apply for fresh permit.
No permit is valid on holidays unless special permission is obtained from the
competent authority.
Safety Regulations
Regarding Work Permit:
The work shall be carried out inside Operating Plant area as per OWNERs
Safety rules and Regulations and instructions of BORL issued from time to
time. Many times it may happen that the working hours shall be drastically
reduced or increased to meet certain safety requirements and
CONTRACTOR shall meet these requirements without any schedule or
financial implications. To obtain work permit and to satisfy all conditions laid
down therein, shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. No claim for idling
of machinery, plant, manpower etc. for safety reasons or non-issuance of
work permit shall be admissible.
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
The CONTRACTOR shall abide by all safety regulations and ensure that
safety equipment for specific job as stipulated in the factory act/safety
handbook is issued to workers during execution of work, failing which all the
works at site shall be suspended.
Regarding Hot work:
When doing hotwork CONTRACTOR must ensure that the fire hose is hooked
up with the firewater system and extended to the work spot. Fire extinguisher
must be kept near the working spot. Area around and below the hot working
place must be adequately protected from falling/coming out of sparks/hot
metals from the booth made of asbestos cloth/sheet and wetting them with
water. CONTRACTOR must arrange sufficient number of fire hoses and
firefighting equipment of approved quality at his own cost to carry out hot job
inside the plant. Welding and electrical cables should be of approved quality,
and no jointing and loose connection shall be permitted. At the end of the
working day CONTRACTOR must inform the Electrical section to switch off
power at sub-station end. CONTRACTOR must provide cotton dress, safety
shoe, safety helmet, safety belt, hand gloves of approved quality to his
workers to meet the safety requirement of various jobs.
Regarding use of Vehicles:
Vehicles shall be allowed to run at site after taking all safety measures with
the permission of concerned authority of site. Vehicle must not ply on any
road within the plant at speed exceeding 20 KM/hr. Mobile crane/loaded
trucks/trailers must not exceed speed limit of 15 KM/hr inside the plant. No
crane is allowed to move inside the plant with load. No vehicle is allowed to
park inside the plant.
Work Permit System:
During execution CONTRACTOR is required to obtain work permit from the
operation department of OWNER. For issuance of work permit, OWNERs
instructions shall be followed.
53.0
53.1
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
CHANGE IN LAW
54.1
Change in Law means the occurrence of any of the following after the
Base Date i.e. last date for submission of the Bid/revised Bid, if any:
a) The enactment of any new law in India;
b) The repeal, modification or re-enactment of any existing Indian law;
c) The commencement of any Indian law which has not entered into effect
until the date of signing of the Contract;
d) Change in the interpretation or application of any Indian law by
Government Authority via issuance of circulars/ clarifications or by a court
which has become final conclusive and binding;
e) Increase/ Decrease in the rate of Taxes in force after the Base Date;
f) Change in the basis of computation of Taxes in force after the Base Date,
in such a manner that it has a material effect (positive or negative) on the
Contract.
Notwithstanding anything mentioned above, Change in Law will not include
any change in direct tax laws (which include income tax, corporate tax,
profession tax and wealth tax or any other taxes, duties, levies etc. which
were not declared as included in its quoted price) for which the
CONTRACTOR is the responsible party.
54.2
54.3
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
55.0
56.0
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
ii)
Request for Employment Visa for jobs for which large number of
qualified Indians are available, is not considered.
iii)
Bidders are advised in their own interest to check latest Visa rules from
Indian Embassy / High Commission in their country in case foreign nationals
are required to be deputed to India during execution of the Contract.
57.0
57.1
The CONTRACTOR shall carry out the radiography and other nondestructive tests as per the requirements specified in the Annexure-X to
SCC.
58.0
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
58.1
(c)
(d)
(e)
For any damage to any third party, including death or injury of any third
party caused by the CONTRACTOR or any person or firm acting on
behalf of the CONTRACTOR in executing the Works.
58.2
Neither Party shall be liable to the other Party for any kind of indirect or
consequential loss or damage including, loss of use, loss of profit, loss of
production or business interruption which is connected with any claim arising
under the Contract
59.0
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
into this agreement solely on its own behalf and not on behalf of any other
person or entity. In particular, it is expressly understood and agreed that the
Government of India is not a party to this agreement and has no liabilities,
obligations or rights there under. It is expressly understood and agreed that
the OWNER/CONSULTANT is an independent legal entity with power and
authority to enter into contract, solely in its own behalf under the applicable
laws of India and general principal of Contract Law. The CONTRACTOR
expressly
agrees,
acknowledges
and
understands
that
the
OWNER/CONSULTANT is not an agent, representative or delegate of Govt.
of India. It is further understood and agreed that the Govt. of India is not and
shall not be liable for any acts, omissions, commissions, breaches or other
wrongs arising out of the contract. Accordingly, CONTRACTOR hereby
expressly waives, releases and foregoes any and all actions or claims,
including cross claims, impleader claims or counter claims against the Govt.
of India arising out of this contract and covenants not to sue to Govt. of India
as to any manner, claim, cause of action or thing whatsoever arising of or
under this agreement.
60.0
61.0
62.0
62.1
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
FORMAT
FOR
CONTRACTORS/
62.2
i.
ii.
Clause No. 5.1 of GCC- Second para The Contractor ----------------------provision of a separate toilet stands deleted.
iii.
iv.
TIME SCHEDULE
(ANNEXURE I TO SCC)
________________________________________________________________________________
Engineers India Ltd
Page 1 of 2
NAME OF WORK
15
Months
for
Mechanical
Completion plus 2 Months for
Commissioning from the date of
Letter of Acceptance (LOA).
Notes:
1.0
The time schedule of completion shall be reckoned from date of award of Contract,
which shall be the date of Letter of Acceptance.
2.0
The time indicated is for completing all the works in all respects as per specifications,
codes, drawings and instructions of Engineer-in-Charge.
3.0
It should be noted that the period of completion of all works given above includes time
required for mobilisation at Site, carrying out the works as per the requirements of
Contract documents, demobilisation, preparation of all reports in requisite quantities as
mentioned in the Bidding Document, rectifications, if any, rework, etc. complete in all
respects to the entire satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
________________________________________________________________________________
Engineers India Ltd
Page 2 of 2
fry
NGINEERS
INDIAA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD No.
7-82-0003 Rev. 0
Page 1 of 5
31-4Wa
rr-{
amit-n
0
Rev.
No
12.06.2015
Date
Issued as Standard
Purpose
RK
MD
Prepared Checked
by
by
SC
Standards Standards
Committee
Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
'=1 ENGINEERS
Og aiElf5reg INDIA LIMITED
k31
STANDARD No.
7-82-0003 Rev. 0
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
CV
Curriculum Vitae
EPC :
EPCC :
ISO
NDT :
QA/QC :
RT
Radiography Testing
UT
Ultrasonic Testing
Members:
t31
9-ae..1e-IMENGINEERS
STANDARD No.
7-82-0003 Rev. 0
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.
2.
0
-11aeleiffAH ENGINEERS
Et5leg 1410 INDIA LIMITED
-
STANDARD No.
7-82-0003 Rev. 0
Page 4 of 5
Resident Construction
Manager/ Resident
Engineer/Site-In-Charge
Degree holders
5 yrs
10 yrs
15 yrs
Diploma holders
8 yrs
13 yrs
20 yrs
--
Lead Welding/
NDT Engineer
Degree holders
5 yrs
10 yrs
Diploma holders
8 yrs
13 yrs
Degree holders
5 yrs
10 yrs
Diploma holders
8 yrs
13 yrs
lo
also):
> 20 Cr. Works
Experience
10 yrs of construction
experience of which 3 years
in QA/QC.
5 yrs.
8 yrs.
As per specification for HSE Management at construction sites enclosed elsewhere in the bid.
Diploma in Engineering or Diploma in Materials Management or Graduate in any stream with
min. following experience in Warehousing/ Stores Management:
Contract value (Rs)
Experience
5 yrs.
10 yrs.
Degree holders
2 yrs.
5 yrs.
Diploma holders
5 yrs.
10 yrs.
1f
kit
Sift!' kiltift
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of lode Undertaking)
STANDARD No.
7-82-0003 Rev. 0
Page 5 of 5
Penalty for non-mobilization per day per person after the contractual mobilisation period /
mobilisation schedule agreed during Kick off Meeting / jointly agreed between contractor
and PMC / owner based on front availability etc.
-
Rs. 3000/- for Lead QA/QC Engineer, Lead Planning Engineer, Warehouse In-charge Lead
Discipline Engineer, Lead Welding/ NDT Engineer and the Quantity Surveyor
ENGINEERS
lakgINDIA LIMITED
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 7
Rev.
No
General Revision
12.03.15
04.06.09
Purpose
Date
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
MPJ
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
SCT
Prepared by
Checked
by
SC
Standards
Committee
Convener
ND
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
lft2
(AG'"ind'Undelt6ung)
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
CV
Curriculum Vitae
ISO
MR
Material Requisition
PO
Purchase Order
PR
Purchase Requisition
QA
Quality Assurance
QMS
Members:
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Igar
Oiren
llks
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
'A
Govt
Clause
No.
Title
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 DEFINITIONS
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
4.0 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM GENERAL
5.0 QUALITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
6.0 AUDITS
7.0 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
Page
4
4
4
4
4
7
7
$1g-zg
IA GOVt of
120.2 .I J40.9)
India Undertaking)
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 7
SCOPE
This specification establishes the Quality Management System requirements to be
met by BIDDER for following purpose:
2.0
DEFINITIONS
2.1
Bidder
For the purpose of this specification, the word "BIDDER" means the person(s), firm,
company or organization who is under the process of being contracted by EIL /
Owner for delivery of some products (including service). The word is considered
synonymous to supplier, contractor or vendor.
2.2
2.3
Owner
Owner means the owner of the project for which services / products are being
purchased and includes their representatives, successors and assignees.
3.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
6-78-0002
6-78-0003
4.0
5.0
5.1
faReg
own
1.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
el
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gavt of India undertaking'
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 7
BIDDER shall identify all specified or implied statutory and regulatory requirements
and communicate the same to all concerned in his organization and his sub
contractor's organization for compliance.
5.3
BIDDER shall deploy competent and trained personnel for various activities for
fulfillment of PO / contract. BIDDER shall arrange adequate infrastructure and work
environment to ensure that the specification and quality of the deliverable are
maintained.
5.4
BIDDER shall do the quality planning for all activities involved in delivery of order.
The quality planning shall cover as minimum the following:
Resources
Product / deliverable characteristics to be controlled.
Process characteristics to ensure the identified product characteristics are
realized
Identification of any measurement requirements, acceptance criteria
Records to be generated
Need for any documented procedure
The quality planning shall result into the quality assurance plan, inspection and test
plans (ITPs) and job procedures for the project activities in the scope of bidder.
These documents shall be submitted to EIL/Owner for review/approval, before
commencement of work.
5.5
5.6
BIDDER shall plan and carry production and service provision under controlled
conditions. Controlled conditions shall include, as applicable
the availability of information that describes the characteristics of the product
the availability of work instructions
the use of suitable equipment
the availability and use of monitoring and measuring devices
the implementation of monitoring and measurement
the implementation of release, delivery and post-delivery activities
5.7
BIDDER shall validate any processes for production and service provision where
resulting output cannot be verified by subsequent monitoring and measurement.
This includes any process where deficiencies become apparent only after the
product is in use or service has been delivered.
5.8
ei
lge.ji id5fez
Oren erRRIZ .71.1.113,70
5.9
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India
undettaking)
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 7
BIDDER shall identify, verify, protect and safeguard EIL / Owner property (material /
document) provided for use or incorporation into the product. If any Owner / EIL
property is lost, damaged or otherwise found to be unsuitable for use, this shall be
reported to the EIL / Owner.
5.10
5.11
BIDDER shall establish system to ensure that inspection and testing activities are
carried out in line with requirements. Where necessary, measuring equipments
shall be calibrated at specified frequency, against national or international
measurement standards; where no such standard exists, the basis used for
calibration shall be recorded. The measuring equipments shall be protected from
damage during handling, maintenance and storage.
5.12
BIDDER shall ensure effective monitoring, using suitable methods, of the processes
involved in production and other related processes for delivery of the scope of
contract.
5.13
5.14
BIDDER shall establish and maintain a documented procedure to ensure that the
product which does not conform to requirements is identified and controlled to
prevent its unintended use or delivery
5.15
5.16
All deficiencies noticed and reported by EIL / Owner shall be analyzed by the
BIDDER and appropriate corrective and preventive actions shall be implemented.
BIDDER shall intimate EIL / Owner of all such corrective and preventive action
implemented by him.
5.17
5.18
5.19
All project records shall be carefully kept, maintained and protected for any damage
or loss until the project completion, then handed over to EIL / Owner as per contract
requirement (Refer Specification Nos. 6-78-0002 - Specification for Documentation
Requirements from Contractors and 6-78-0003 - Specification for Documentation
Requirements from Suppliers), or disposed as per relevant project procedure.
ei
IftJr
kif51ft.
wirer riraxem3Tmil
6.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Goof of India UndertakIngi
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 7
AUDITS
BIDDER shall plan and carry out the QMS audit for the job. Quality audit programme
shall cover design, procurement, construction management and commissioning as
applicable including activities carried out by sub-vendors and sub-contractors. This
shall be additional to the certification body surveillance audits carried out under
BIDDER'S own ISO 9001 certification scheme.
The audit programmes and audit reports shall be available with bidder for scrutiny
by EIL / Owner. EIL or Owner's representative reserves the right to attend, as a
witness, any audit conducted during the execution of the WORKS.
In addition to above EIL, Owner and third party appointed by EIL/Owner may also
perform Quality and Technical compliance audits. BIDDER shall provide assistance
and access to their systems and sub-contractor / vendor systems as required for this
purpose. Any deficiencies noted shall be immediately rectified by BIDDER.
7.0
DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
BIDDER shall submit following QMS documents immediately after award of work
(Within one week) for record / review by EIL / Owner.
Organization chart (for complete organization structure and for the project)
Project Quality Plan/Quality Assurance Plan
Job specific Inspection Test Plans, if not attached with PR
Job Procedures
Inspection/Test Formats
In addition to above QMS documents, following documentation shall be maintained
by the BIDDER for submission to EIL / Owner on demand at any point of time during
execution of the project.
Quality Manual
Certificate of approval for compliance to ISO: 9001 standard
Procedure for Control of Non-conforming Product
Procedure for Control of Documents
Sample audit report of the QMS internal and external audits conducted during
last one year
Customer satisfaction reports from at least 2 customers, during the last one
year
Project QMS audit report
Technical audit reports for the project
Corrective action report on the audits
Documents as specified above are minimum requirements. BIDDER shall submit
any other document/data required for completion of the job as per EIL/Owner
instructions.
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS
(ANNEXURE-IV TO SCC)
ENGINEERS
101
** el!2RAfi'aA
Meavow INDIA LIMITED
IAIRON
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 8
51(t)01
-4-4-<R1
tr-g 1-4-4vr
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
FROM CONTRACTORS
12.03.15
General Revision
04.06.09
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
MPJ
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
SCT
Prepared
by
Checked
by
SC
ND
Standards
Committee
Standards
Bureau
Convener
Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
k311 ei
51g-a 015teg
1.1FA
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India
2IETIN
undertaking)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 8
Abbreviations:
DCI
eDMS -
FOA
Fax of Acceptance
HOD
IC
Inspection Certificate
IRN
ITP
LOA
Letter of Acceptance
MOU
Memorandum of Understanding
QMS
URL
Members:
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 3 of 8
CONTENTS
Clause
Title
Page
No.
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
3.0
4.0
DEFINITIONS
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
4
4
4
4
Attachments
Format for completeness of Final Documentation
1.0
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 8
SCOPE
This specification establishes the Documentation Requirements from Contractors
All documents/data against the Tender / Contract shall be developed and submitted
to ElUOwner by the contractor for review / records, in line with this specification.
2.0
DEFINITIONS
2.1
Contractor
For the purpose of this specification, the word "CONTRACTOR" means the
person(s), firm, company or organization who is under the process of being
contracted by EIL / Owner for delivery of some products and services. The word is
considered synonymous to bidder, supplier or vendor.
2.2
Owner
Owner means the owner of the project for which services / products are being
purchased and includes their representatives, successors and assignees.
3.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
6-78-0001
4.0
DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
4.1
4.1.1
The contractor shall submit the documents and data against the Tender/Contract as
per the list specified in respective Tender/Contract.
4.1.2
Review of the contractor drawings by EIL would be only to review the compatibility
with basic designs and concepts and in no way absolve the contractor of his
responsibility/contractual obligation to comply with Tender/Contract requirements,
applicable codes, specifications and statutory rules/regulations. Any error/deficiency
noticed during any stage of manufacturing/execution/installation shall be promptly
corrected by the contractor without any extra cost or time, whether or not comments
on the same were received from EIL during the drawing review stage.
4.1.3
4.1.4
- 1week
- 2weeks
- As per approved Drawing/Document Control
Index/Schedule
ei
acs
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 8
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
Before submitting the drawings and documents, contractor shall ensure that the
following information are properly entered in each drawing:
Tender Number
Name of Equipment / Package
Equipment / Package Tag No.
Name of Project
Owner
Main Contractor (if work is sub-contracted)
Drawing / Document Title
Drawing / Document No.
Drawing / Document Revision No. and Date
4.3
4.3.1
4.4
Document Category
4.4.1
Review
Category
Review Code 2
Review Code 3
Void
4.5
4.5.1
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
tra
4.5.2
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 8
Submission of Drawings/Documents
Drawings/documents and data shall be uploaded on the EIL eDMS Portal. The detail
guidelines for uploading documents on EIL eDMS Portal are available on following
URL
http://edocx.ei Lco. i n/vporta I
4.5.3
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
Statutory Approvals
Wherever approval by any statutory body is required to be taken by Contractor, the
Contractor shall submit copy of approval by the authority to EIL.
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
4.5.7
Ogof
IOM
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
0,1.I
(A Govt W
Indio Undertalung)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 8
Note: Non fulfilling above requirement shall result into appropriate penalty or withholding of payment as per conditions of Tender/Contract.
4.6
Final Documentation
4.6.1
As built Drawings
Shop/Site changes made by contractor after approval of drawings under 'Code 1' by
EIL and deviations granted through online system , if any, shall be marked in hard
copies of drawings which shall then be stamped 'As-built' by the contractor. These
'As-built' drawings shall be reviewed and stamped by EIL Inspector/Site
engineer/TPIA also. Format for completeness of final documents (Format No. 3-780004) is attached with this specification. Contractor shall prepare scanned images
files of all marked up 'As built' drawings. Simultaneously contractor shall
incorporate the shop/site changes in the native soft files of the drawings also.
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
laraeles ENGINEERS
4.6.5
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 8 of 8
Contractor shall get the completeness of final documentation verified by EIL/TPIA and
attach the Format for Completeness of Final Documentation (Format No. 3-78-0004)
duly signed by EIL or TPIA as applicable to the document folder.
fEr) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$afg7:11 tel5leg
Men eRali 4,30.0
COMPLETENESS OF FINAL
DOCUMENTATION
Name of Supplier/Contractor
Customer
Project
EIL's Job No.
Purchase Order No./
Contract No.
Purchase Requisition No./
Tender No.
Rev. No. :
Certified that the Engineering Documents/ Manufacturing & Test Certificates submitted by the
supplier are complete in accordance with the Vendor Data Requirements of Purchase
Requisition.
Signature
Signature
Date
Date
Name
Name
Designation
Designation
Department
Department
Supplier/Contractor
EIL/TPIA
arTilittl/APPROVED
gTffTeR/ Sig
eilegiltk
tvi .
...........
.....
..................
31
ENGINEERS
ligar lafgesW INDIA LIMITED
(411W1 292,51V MIJ10571)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 8
irewufat
*mat t feitu
affr
74ER
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
FROM SUPPLIERS
C)(415----2
1
12.03.15
General Revision
04.06.09
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
Prepared
by
Checked
by
SC
SCT
Standards
Comm ifte
Convener
ND
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
(t,ft. ENGINEERS
efiTIWAnowAl
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 8
Abbreviations:
DCI -
eDMS -
FOA
Fax of Acceptance
HOD
IC
Inspection Certificate
IRN
ITP
LOA
Letter of Acceptance
MOU
Memorandum of Understanding
MR
Material Requisition
PO
Purchase Order
PR
Purchase Requisition
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
QMS
TPIA
URL
Members:
ei
Oaez idiWIeg
011E71 ewaxedaagem)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaking)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Page 3 of 8
CONTENTS
Clause
No.
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
Title
Page
SCOPE
DEFINITIONS
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
4
4
4
4
Attachments
Format for completeness of Final Documentation
dol
5'gzir
tlf5ltu
I.VOM
1.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Intha Undertakongt
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 8
SCOPE
This specification establishes the Documentation Requirements from Suppliers.
All documents/data against the PO / PR / MR shall be developed and submitted to
EIL/Owner by the suppliers for review / records, in line with this specification.
2.0
DEFINITIONS
2.1
Supplier
For the purpose of this specification, the word "SUPPLIER" means the person(s),
firm, company or organization who is under the process of being contracted by EIL /
Owner for delivery of some products (including service). The word is considered
synonymous to bidder, contractor or vendor.
2.2
Owner
Owner means the owner of the project for which services / products are being
purchased and includes their representatives, successors and assignees.
3.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
6-78-0001
4.0
DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
4.1
4.1.1
The Supplier shall submit the documents and data against the PO/PR/MR as per the
list given in respective PO/PR/MR.
4.1.2
Review of the supplier drawings by EIL would be only to review the compatibility with
basic designs and concepts and in no way absolve the supplier of his
responsibility/contractual obligation to comply with PR requirements, applicable
codes, specifications and statutory rules/regulations. Any error/deficiency noticed
during any stage of manufacturing/execution/installation shall be promptly corrected
by the supplier without any time and cost implications, irrespective of comments on
the same were received from EIL during the drawing review stage or not.
4.1.3
4.1.4
'7f 11
I OfiTt cYeawlnn
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India UndenakIngi
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 8
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
Before forwarding the drawings and documents, contractor shall ensure that the
following information are properly mentioned in each drawing:
Purchase Requisition Number
Name of Equipment / Package
Equipment / Package Tag No.
Name of Project
Client
Drawing / Document Title
Drawing / Document No.
Drawing / Document Revision No. and Date
4.3.1
Review Category
Following review codes shall be used for review of supplier Drawings/Documents:
Review Code 1
Review Code 2
Review Code 3
Void
4.5
4.5.1
r1.7
-14
51g-a feff5leg
1.17,124ifflsrefloJOORI1
4.5.2
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 8
Submission of Drawings/Documents
Drawings/documents and data shall be uploaded on the EIL eDMS Portal as per DCI.
The detail guidelines for uploading documents on EIL eDMS Portal are available on
following URL
http://edocx.eil.co.in/vportal
4.5.3
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Statutory Approvals
Wherever approval by any statutory body is required to be taken by Supplier, the
Supplier shall submit copy of approval by the authority to EIL.
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
4.5.7
0151jeg
Ogell
1.127, owtore o43frosso
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Unclettalong)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 8
Note: Non fulfilling above requirement shall result into appropriate penalty or withholding of payment as per conditions of PO/PR/MR.
4.5.8
Transportation Plan
Transportation Plan for Over Dimensional Consignments (ODC), if any, shall be
submitted within 2 weeks of receiving FOA/LOA, for approval. Consignment with
parameters greater than following shall be considered as over dimensional.
Dimensions: 4 meters width x 4 meters height x 20 meters length
Weight
: 32 MT
4.6
Final Documentation
4.6.1
As Built Drawings
Shop changes made by Supplier after approval of drawings under `Code 1' by EIL and
deviations granted through online system , if any, shall be marked in hard copies of
drawings which shall then be stamped 'As-built' by the supplier. These 'As-built'
drawings shall be reviewed and stamped by EIL Inspector/ TPIA also. Supplier shall
prepare scanned images files of all marked up 'As built' drawings. Simultaneously
Supplier shall incorporate the shop changes in the native soft files of the drawings
also.
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
lig
(L:ED'D ENGINEERS
C,'
INDIA UMITED
ar idf5les
I MT
riernfO7IJOCFAI
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Page 8 of 8
In addition to hard copies, Supplier shall submit electronic file (CD-ROM) covering soft
copies of all the final drawings and documents, all text documents prepared on
computer, scanned images of all important documents (not available as soft files), all
relevant catalogues, manuals available as soft files (editable copies of drawings/text
documents, while for catalogues/manuals/proprietary information and data, PDF files
can be furnished).
All the above documents shall also be uploaded on the EIL eDMS portal.
4.6.5
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
fEr) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$afg7:11 tel5leg
Men eRali 4,30.0
COMPLETENESS OF FINAL
DOCUMENTATION
Name of Supplier/Contractor
Customer
Project
EIL's Job No.
Purchase Order No./
Contract No.
Purchase Requisition No./
Tender No.
Rev. No. :
Certified that the Engineering Documents/ Manufacturing & Test Certificates submitted by the
supplier are complete in accordance with the Vendor Data Requirements of Purchase
Requisition.
Signature
Signature
Date
Date
Name
Name
Designation
Designation
Department
Department
Supplier/Contractor
EIL/TPIA
arTilittl/APPROVED
gTffTeR/ Sig
eilegiltk
tvi .
...........
.....
..................
ANNEXURE-II
CONTRACT CLAUSE FOR ACCEPTANCE OF CEMENT MANUFACTURERS
1. Cement manufacturers having valid BIS certificate and listed in the BIS website as on date of
procurement of cement shall be allowed for supply of cement and contractor shall procure
cement from them with prior intimation to Engineer-in-charge.
2. Test after receipt of cement at site: Each batch of cement (week wise as mentioned on cement
bags) supplied by the contractor after delivery at site shall be subjected to the tests and
analysis required by the relevant Indian Standard Codes. The contractor shall carry out and
bear the cost of all tests and analysis to ensure quality of cement before using in actual works.
$fg-ar
,>iwn
STANDARD No.
311
Jw9.-11
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 9
ffl"ilaT V"4'
2Tg'
CONDITIONS FOR ISSUE AND
RECONCILIATION OF MATERIALS
j .04"
1
24.01.2014
SM
DJ
21.05.2008
AS
GKI
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
RKD
Checked
by
XN"fr..
SC
SCB
VC
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
011eg
ENGINEERS
CONDITIONS FOR ISSUE AND
INDIA LIMITED RECONCILIATION OF MATERIALS
STANDARD No.
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
MS
Mild Steel
OFC
OTDR
Members :
01
*
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ol Indo Undertakmg)
STANDARD No.
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
3.0 CEMENT
6.0 EQUIPMENTS
7.0 CABLES
8.0
LINE PIPES
J11
$garfffl
Erdg
1.12,1
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo Underlakingt
STANDARD No.
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 9
1.1
Necessary indents shall be raised by the Contractor as per procedure laid down by the
Engineer-in-Charge from time to time, when the materials are required for incorporation in
permanent works.
1.2
Materials shall be issued only for permanent works and not for temporary works, enabling
works etc. unless specifically approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
1.3
The Contractor shall bear all other cost including lifting, carting from issue points to work
site/Contractor's store, custody and handling etc. and return of surplus/serviceable scrap
materials to Owner's storage points to be designated by the Engineer-in-Charge. No separate
payment for such expenditure shall be made.
1.4
No material shall be allowed to be taken outside the plant without a gate pass.
1.5
The Contractor shall be responsible for proper storage, preservation and watch & ward of
the materials.
All unused/scrap materials shall be the property of the Owner and shall be returned in good
and acceptable condition category wise by the Contractor at his own cost to Owner's Store(s).
2.2
No credit shall be given to the Contractor for return of scrap. The Contractor should quote the
rates accordingly. Contractor shall make his own arrangements for weighing the cut offs to be
returned to Owner's stores.
2.3
In case the Contractor fails to return unused materials/ accountable scrap, then recovery for
such quantity of materials, not returned by the Contractor shall be affected at following penal
rates from the Contractor's bilis or from any other dues of the Contractor to the Owner:
S.
No.
Material
(a)
(b)
(c)
(a)
(b)
1.
2.
NOTE : 1)
Penal Rates
Landed Rate shall be arrived from the latest Purchase Order of respective
material received at site by Owner/EIL.
5fg-ar 2154--cg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
2)
STANDARD No.
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 9
In case more stringent penal rates have been indicated elsewhere in the
Contract (based on Project requirement), the same shall supersede the above
rates.
3.0 CEMENT
3.1
3.2
The Contractor is required to submit the design mix for different grades of concrete, keeping
in view the requirements stipulated in IS:456 and IS 10262, specifically regarding durability,
slump and water cement ratio and specific gravity of materials brought to site as analyzed in
the laboratories. The design shall be based upon absolute volume method and theoretical
consumption of cement shall be worked out on this basis. For other than concrete items, the
coefficients for consumption of cement shall be adopted as per CPWD practice.
3.3
The permissible variation between Cement actually used on the job and theoretical
consumption worked out on the basis stipulated in above para 3.2 and as determined by
Engineer-in-Charge shall be 3% (Three percent only).
If the actual consumption is more than 103% of the theoretical consumption, then recovery at
the penal rates for the quantity of cement beyond the limit of 103% of theoretical consumption
shall be affected as per clause 2.3 above.
3.4
Unused quantity of cement shall be returned by the Contractor to the Owner's stores in good
condition only.
3.5
The Contractor shall maintain a good store for storing cement issued to him. The flooring of
the storage house, the clearances of cement bags from the side walls/ floor & stack height etc.
shall be as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.6
The contractor shall maintain a Cement Register in prescribed format and update the entries
on daily basis.
3.7
The cement store shall be offered for inspection and verification by the Engineer-in-Charge or
his authorized representative at any time when the Engineer-in-Charge feels the need to do so.
3.8
Empty cement bags shall be the property of the Contractor and shall have to be disposed off
by him.
The scrap allowance for the reinforcement bars/structural steel including steel plate issued by
the Owner, shall be total 3% (2.5% accountable and 0.5% unaccountable) of the actual
consumption as incorporated in the works.
4.2
$Igu
g
--,112-,,-,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt ot Ind(o Itoeonotoo9)
STANDARD No.
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 9
to Contractor's account and Contractor is deemed to have considered the same at the time of
bidding.
4.3
Reinforcement bars/structural steel/steel plates shall be issued only for those items where
Owner's supply has been specifically mentioned in Schedule of Rates/ Scope of Supply. The
storage of these items shall be done in such a way so as to avoid rusting/ damage to any kind
to the materials.
4.4
All reinforcement bars/structural steel (except M.S. Plates) in length of 2 meters and above
shall be considered as serviceable materials provided the material is in good and acceptable
condition. Reinforcement bars/structural steel section (except M.S. Plates) in lengths less than
2M shall be treated as scrap.
The contractor shall strive to avoid generation of cut pieces of length 2m and above, as far as
practicable, by effectively planning & executing the construction works.
4.5
For the purpose of accounting of the plates, all plates measuring not less than 1 Sq.m in area
and having any dimensions not less than 200mm when returned to Owner's store, shall be
considered as serviceable material. All other pieces shall be treated as wastage/scrap. The
Contractor shall prepare a plate cutting diagram in such a way that the minimum scrap is
generated. Also the cut plates should be used at proper places to reduce the scrap.
4.6
The serviceable cut pieces as mentioned in 4.4 & 4.5 above shall be considered as unused
material for reconciliation purpose.
4.7
Material appropriation shall be done and wherever applicable, the recovery at penal rates as
per clause 2.3 above shall be affected from the contractor.
All serviceable pipes shall be issued in available lengths/shapes and no claims for extra
payments on account of issue of non-standard length & shape shall be entertained. Pipes shall
be issued on linear measurement basis. All valves, flanges, fittings etc. shall be issued on
number(s) basis. Contractor shall store the materials in such a way so as to avoid mixing of
different types of material and shall maintain complete identification and traceability at all
times.
5.2
The scrap allowance for pipes issued by the Owner shall be 3% (2.5% accountable + 0.5%
unaccountable) of the actual consumption as incorporated in the works.
5.3
All pipes in length of 2 meters and above shall be considered as serviceable material provided
the material is in good and acceptable condition and has clear identification and traceability
(Manufacturer's name, heat number/batch number and test certificates). Pipes in lengths less
than 2M shall be treated as scrap.
The contractor shall strive to avoid generation of cut pieces of length 2m and above, as far as
practicable, by effectively planning & executing the construction works.
5.4
All unused/scrap pipes, valves, flanges, forged fittings like elbows, reducers tees shall be
returned by the Contractor category wise duly cleaned, greased and spec. marked at his own
cost to Owner's stores.
5.5
Material appropriation shall be done and wherever applicable, the recovery at penal rates as
per clause 2.3 above shall be affected from the contractor.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
,31 --1
ft2s
(~ C1,01,,
1,
1 .345n.
STANDARD No.
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 9
6.0 EQUIPMENTS
Various equipment/materials intended for the installation shall be received by Owner in
unpacked, skid mounted, crated, packed or loose condition and shall be stored in the
warehouses and open yards. In general, materials shall be issued to the Contractor in `as
received' condition. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to draw, load and transport all
materials from Owner's designated places of issue to the point of installation and return all
packing materials like steel frames, wooden boxes/scrap etc. to Owner's stores.
All materials supplied by the Owner shall be duly protected by the Contractor at his own cost
with appropriate preservative like primer, lacquer coating, grease etc. as required.
7.0 CABLES
Appropriation of cables shall be done as follows:
7.1
Al1 the surplus and serviceable cables out of the cables quantity(ies) issued by the Owner to
the Contractor shall be returned by the Contractor to the Owner's store in good condition and
as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
7.2
The Contractor shall be allowed a cutting/wastage allowance (accountable scrap) of 1.5% for
power cables and 3% for the control cables. This cutting/wastage allowance shall be
computed on the length of cables actually laid, measured and accepted.
7.3
All cables being returned to store should carry Aluminium sheet tags indicating the size &
type of cable. Cables of less than 15 meters length shall be termed as scrap. Cables of lengths
15M and above shall be termed as serviceable material & shall be returned size wise and
category wise to the Owner's store in wooden drums. Cables of serviceable length being
returned to stores in drum(s) shall be accepted only after Megger value continuity test and
physical measurement is carried out by the Contractor to the satisfaction of Engineer-inCharge. Empty cable drums and major packing material (as decided by Engineer-in-charge)
shall be Owner's property and shall be returned to Owner's Store/designated place without
any additional cost.
The contractor shall strive to avoid generation of cut pieces of length 15m and above, as far as
practicable, by effectively planning & executing the construction works.
7.4
While carrying out material appropriation with the Contractor, the above points shall be taken
into account. All serviceable materials returned by the Contractor (size wise & category wise)
shall be deducted from the quantity(ies) issued to the Contractor for the respective sizes.
Scrap generated for power cable and control cable shall also be returned to Owner's store on
Lot basis. Wherever applicable, the recovery at penal rates as per clause 2.3 above shall be
affected from the contractor.
8.0
LINE P1PES
8.1
All bare/ coated line pipes as per Line Pipe specifications shall be issued on linear
measurement basis. The serviceable line pipes shall be issued in available lengths and shapes
and no claim for extra payment on account of issue of non-standard length and shape shall be
entertained. Contractor shall store and maintain the line pipes in proper manner to avoid
mixing of different classes of pipes. Contractor shall maintain complete identification and
traceability at all times. Al1 cut pieces when returned to Owner's storage points after beveling,
shall be considered as serviceable material provided:
a)
k5-1
1 2,zi&
Nyry
$1g-ar 22rt~dgb)
ENGINEEFZS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt ol Indo Undettakingt
STANDARD No.
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
RECONCILIATION OF MATERIALS
Page 8 of 9
Pipe pieces have pipe specifications, manufacturer's logo/name and heat number duly
authenticated with hard stamp of the authorized inspector as per approved procedure.
A11 cut pieces of pipes measuring less than 2 M shall be treated as wastage/scrap.
The contractor shall strive to avoid generation of cut pieces of length 2m and above, as far as
practicable, by effectively planning & executing the construction works.
8.2
For the purpose of accounting of bare/ coated line pipes, following allowances shall be
permitted:
a)
Unaccountable wastage
upto 100 Km
101 to 500 Km
beyond 500 Km
0.1%
0.07%
0.05%
b)
0.25%
c)
0.5%
The percentage allowance shall be accounted on the basis of pipe book chainage for main
pipeline.
8.3
Material appropriation shall be done and wherever applicable, the recovery at penal rates as
per clause 2.3 above shall be affected from the contractor.
For the purpose of accounting of optical fibre cable, all cut pieces measuring in length of 40 m
and above when retumed to Owner's storage points shall be treated as serviceable materials.
All cut pieces of cable measuring less than 40 M shall be treated as scrap.
For the purpose of accounting of OFC (Optical Fibre Cable) following allowances shall be
permitted:
a)
b)
c)
Unaccountable wastage
Scrap (A11 cut pieces of cables measuring less than 40 M)
Serviceable material (measuring 40m to 750m)
0.5%
0.25%
0.25%
The percentage allowance shall be accounted on the basis of pipe book chainage for main
pipeline.
Cables returned in original drum (measuring 750m and above) with Optical Time Domain
Report (OTDR) shall be considered as unused material.
9.2
The contractor shall strive to avoid generation of cut pieces of length 40m and above, as far as
practicable, by effectively planning & executing the construction works.
9.3
Material appropriation shall be done and wherever applicable, the recovery at penal rates as
per clause 2.3 above shall be affected from the contractor.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo Undertaking)
STANDARD No.
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 9 of 9
TERMS OF PAYMENT
[ANNEXURE-VII TO SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT]
1.0
MOBILIZATION ADVANCE
1.1
2.0
2.1
3.0
ON ACCOUNT PAYMENTS
These payment terms shall be utilized only for the purpose of making progressive
payments to the contractor. Progressive Payments shall be released to Contractor
against running account bills duly certified by Engineer-in-charge after affecting
the necessary deductions/recovery if any including interest charges accrued
thereon. The basis for payment against various items shall be below:
4.0
TERMS OF PAYMENT
The basis and terms of payment for various items of Schedule of Lump sum
prices, without prejudice to any other mode of recovery available to OWNER, shall
be as follows:The CONTRACTOR shall submit further breakup for various activities of WORK
for the purpose of billing for each discipline such as civil and structural,
Mechanical, Piping, Electrical, Instrumentation, Insulation, Painting etc. including
breakup
for
Basic
Design,
Engineering,
Detailed
Engineering&
procurement/supply which will be reviewed and approved by Engineer-in-charge
within 60 days of submission of complete document in this regard by
CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall be paid running account bills at stages
of completion of individual item/work, based on the value assessment by
Engineer-in-charge in the following manner after deductions of necessary dues
payable by CONTRACTOR to the OWNER in accordance with various provisions
made elsewhere in this document.
Sr.
No.
1
Category of
Work
Payment Terms
Design &
Engineering
SUPPLIES:
2a)
Procurement &
Supply
Sr.
No.
Category of
Work
Payment Terms
- 5% upon successful MECHANICAL COMPLETION of Works.
- 5% upon successful COMMISSIONING of Works.
- 5% upon successful PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE TEST RUN and on
completion of all jobs and issue of COMPLETION CERTIFICATE.
CONSTRUCTION/ INSTALLATION:
3a)
U/G Piping
Measurement in
Running Meter
10% on fabrication.
b. CARBON STEEL
SUPPLIED
CEMENT
LINED
PIPES
CONTRACTOR
10% on fabrication.
Structural steel
works
Sr.
No.
3c)
3d)
3e)
Category of
Work
Reinforcement
steel
Precast
concrete Item/
Block
Structural Steel
Painting Works
Payment Terms
-
Composite
items.
3g)
Composite
items.
3h)
Composite
Sr.
No.
Category of
Work
items.
Payment Terms
-
3i)
Architectural
works.
Steel / Aluminium / Glazed Glass / PVC etc. Doors, Windows & Ventilators
-
Roofing
-
Modular Furniture
-
Sr.
No.
Category of
Work
Payment Terms
identification of similar items shall be binding on the Contractor.
3j)
Other Civil,
Structural &
Architectural
works
MECHANICAL WORKS
3k)
3l)
Piping Worksfabrication at
site
Equipment
Erection
45% after transportation from stores / storage points to erection site and
placing in position.
18% after final alignment, shaft alignment after pipe hook-up, dowelling,
initial fill of lubricants, mounting of accessories and completion of piping.
ELECTRICAL WORK
3m)
3n)
For Supply
Items
For Erection
Sr.
No.
3o)
Category of
Work
Items
Payment Terms
For Items
involving both
Supply &
Erection
INSTRUMENTATION
3p)
3q)
For Supply
Items
For Erection
/Installation
Items
Sr.
No.
3r)
Category of
Work
Payment Terms
a. Items not requiring loop checking
3s)
3t)
3u)
Calibrations
Main
Instruments
Miscellaneous
Works
Painting
Insulation/
Proofing Works
Sr.
No.
Category of
Work
Payment Terms
Months claim period
3w)
3x)
PreCommissioning
&
Commissioning
Performance
Guarantee Test
Run
NOTES:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
(ANNEXURE VIII TO SCC)
________________________________________________________________________________
Engineers India Ltd
Page 1 of 1
Page 1 of 33
1.0 Introduction:
BORL believes that all the manufacturing and related activities should be conducted
in a safe way to ensure the safety of people working in its premises.
It is to be ensured that contractors, who work for BORL, comply with HSE
standards as per the companys policy and observe safe practices & procedures at
work to protect health and safety of their employees and others.
Safety of the contract personnel needs enhanced focus due to constant change of
persons leading to lack of awareness. Statistics and experience show that an
additional benefit from improved HSE performance leads to overall effectiveness in
the execution of contract work.
In particular, the contractor has an independent responsibility for his own HSE
performance. BORL is responsible for clearly communicating its HSE requirement to
the contractor and for monitoring the contractor's performance with respect to
HSE. HSE standards of the contract employees should be in line with the BORL
employees and any violation observed will be dealt with strictly (including
termination of the contract).
These guidelines are applicable to all contracting agencies, O&M operators, other
service providers, etc. who work for Bharat Oman Refineries Limited.
1.1 Definitions:
Owner / Company shallmean Bharat Oman Refineries Limited.
Agreement shall mean the contract agreement between owner and contractor for
activities assigned to the contractors.
Contractor shall mean the person/persons, firm or company whose tender has
been
accepted
by
the
Competent
Officer
of
BORL
or
contractors
legal
Page 2 of 33
i.
Before planning the posting of the worker to BORL, the concerned supervisor
shall have a general overview that the person is not physically or mentally
incapacitated for the planned job.
ii.
The contractor shall arrange the medical examination of the workers as per
the BORL policy.
iii.
The contractor shall produce the certificate of medical fitness of the worker at
the time of gate pass application on the format as required by BORL.
iv.
The contractor shall ensure the compliance to the completion of the various
specific medical examinations (SME) as per the BORL policy. At present the
SME is required for the following jobs
Work at Height
Work in SRU
Work in CPP
Canteen work
v.
vi.
The contractor shall ensure that the posting of the workers in the jobs
requiring SME or Form-32 shall be in accordance with the fitness status in
the medical examination.
vii.
The contractor shall follow-up with the workers for the medical
recommendation as suggested on the medical fitness certificate / Form 32.
viii.
The contractor shall ensure timely renewal of the medical certificate, that is
Within one year for:
Periodic Medical Examination for all the workers (if not specified)
Confined space entry (Specify if inert space entry)
Work at Height
Canteen work
Work in SRU
Work in CPP
Page 3 of 33
ix.
The cost of all these medical examinations (if any) should not be directly or
indirectly recovered from the workers & shall be borne by the contractor
company.
x.
In case of any medical related dispute BORL will be the final authority to
arrive at a decision.
The contractor shall periodically educate, train, motivate & supervise the
workers at the opportunities of tool box talk or during the job on the
possible health hazards, risks involved in the job & the good safety
practices for prevention of such workplace injuries / exposures.
The contractor shall ensure that in case of any such incident, the person is
sent to Occupational Health Centre (OHC) along with his/her supervisor for
the treatment & the documentation.
The contractor shall cooperate, arrange & ensure that:
The injured gets the complete treatment as advised,
The injured gets the medical attention on the recommended frequency at
the govt. approved hospitals / clinics.
The person is brought to the OHC for fitness certificate in all (except the
First Aid cases), for the medical examination & fitness, before resuming the
duties.
The injured gets all required rehabilitative care.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
2.2
2.2.1 Responsibilities
i.
ii.
iii.
Page 4 of 33
No one shall enter any part of the complex, including the work site except
for undertaking the work assigned.
Smoking is strictly prohibited. Anybody found smoking would be
immediately removed from the complex. Such a person shall be barred from
working for any other contractor employed by BORL.
ii.
iii.
No fire or naked light, matches, cigarette lighters or any apparatus that can
cause ignition, shall be allowed in the complex.
iv.
v.
Contractor should
PPE Type
1.
Safety Helmet
Specification
Quantity
Frequency
EN:397,
Yearly
Quarterly
IS:2925
2.
Safety Goggles
EN:166,
ANSI: Z 87.1
3.
Polka Dotted
2 Pairs
Weekly
4.
Boiler Suit
Cotton
3 Sets
Yearly
5.
Safety Shoes
EN-345,
1 Pair
Yearly
IS:15298
Page 5 of 33
ii. The contractor/ sub-contractor shall also provide following PPEs as per job
requirements such as but not limited to:
S No.
PPE Type
1.
2.
IS/EN/EU
Quantity
Frequency
Monthly
Weekly
IS: 3521
Job Specific
Need Base
EN:166.1.B.3
.9
Job Specific
Need Base
EN-374(JKL) AND
EN-388-CE,
EN-374-CE
1 Pair
Weekly
EN-345
1 Pair
Half Yearly
CE-0493
1 Pair
Monthly
Job Specific
Need Base
Yearly
need base)
EN 352-2,
ANSI: Z3.19,
EN-352-1
Dust Mask
IS:9473,EN149
3.
Full
Body
Harness
Face Shield
5.
PVC/Nitrile/Rubber
gloves
(For
Chemical/Civil
Jobs)
6.
Gum
Boots
(Civil
Jobs)
7.
Leather
Gloves
for
Welders
8.
Leather Apron
EN-398,
EN-
407
9.
10.
Helmet
mounted
IS:2925 ,EN-
welders shield
166
Chemical
ANSI: Z 87.1
Quarterly
EN-166,
Quarterly
Splash
Over
Spectacles
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
EN-
170, EN-172
Page 6 of 33
2.3
ix.
x.
xi.
ENVIRONMENT:
2.3.1 The contractor shall perform their jobs in an eco-friendly manner and in
consonance with the objective of BORL Environment Management System. The
contractor
shall
inculcate
environmental
awareness
among
their
workmen/personnel and strive for enhancement of systems and skills for
minimizing the environmental impact out of their activities/services.
2.3.2 The contractor shall avoid wastage of water, compressed air, electric power,
steam, etc. supplied to them from owner's source of supply for execution of the
job.
2.3.3 The
contractor
shall
ensure
that
while
carrying
out
Modification/Repair/Replacement jobs of any equipment or pipeline, the spillage
of Hydrocarbon, Oily Sludge etc. are cleaned and routed to nearby OWS, at
regular interval as well as after completion of jobs.
2.3.4 Before attending any blinding/de-blinding jobs, during pipeline transfer operation
all tools, tackles &spares shall be kept ready at site in order to minimize
Hydrocarbon spillage.
2.3.5 Should there be a discharge or escape of appreciable quantity of pollutants or
contaminants during performance of its obligations under this Contract which
occurs as a result of activities of Contractor or its sub-Contractor, the Contractor
shall immediately take all action necessary to contain, control, recover or
disperse the substance and to eliminate the safety and environmental risks and
correct the damage resulting there from.
2.3.6 The contractor shall clear and level the work site and remove all metallic and
nonmetallic surplus materials, scrap, debris and other waste materials generated
out of his job, from time to time as well as after completion of job. The
contractors shall not throw away cut gaskets, used electrode pieces, hand
gloves, cotton bags, polythene bags, etc., into open channel drains or pipelines
system. They are to be collected and to be deposited in bins/waste collectors
earmarked for the purpose or disposed off in the areas as per the direction of
Engineer-in-Charge. The contractor is responsible for keeping his place neat and
clean. Also all temporary office shall be maintained in a healthy and hygienic
condition.
2.3.7 Contractor shall return all surplus materials & scrap to the owner's stores.
Page 7 of 33
2.3.8 Contractor's vehicles, trucks, tractor, cranes and other portable equipment e.g.
Air Compressor, DG Set, Dewatering Pumps etc. used inside refinery premises
(where Hydrocarbon is used as fuel) for execution of the job must be
mechanically sound and have an exhaust complying pollution norms. The
contractor shall ensure to avoid idle running of vehicles and equipment used for
execution of the job.
2.3.9 Special precautions and personal protection shall be taken as per refinery HSE
procedures during the following jobs:
i.
Handling of Hazardous Chemicals, Gases & Materials etc. (e.g. Spent
Catalyst/Clay/Carbon/Resins, Acids, Chlorine, Ammonia, Pyrophoric Iron,
etc.).
ii.
iii.
2.3.12 For contracts related to solid material handling such as fly ash, pet-coke, coal,
limestone, sulfur, etc., the contractor is required to take all necessary
precautions so as avoid the dusts getting air borne or spillages on roads &
drains, etc. during transportation and handling of the same. Precaution during
transportation may include use of enclosed vehicles, proper covering of the
consignment with tarpaulin, water sprinkling, etc. as suitably directed by
Engineer-in-charge.
2.3.13 For activities related to generation & handling of E-Waste, spent lead acid
batteries & contaminated chemical drums the contractor is required to ensure
the handling of the same is carried out in line with related refinery Environment
dept. guidelines.
3.0
3.1
Page 8 of 33
3.2
3.2.1 Contractor shall furnish transportation for all of Contractors employees from the
designated entry gate to the job site and return. The BORL Representative will
designate the routes and parking areas to be used by Contractor's vehicles in
BORL premises. Contractor shall observe all of the BORLs traffic regulations at
all times while in the refinery and other BORL premises.
3.2.2 All Contractors owned, rented, or leased vehicles or equipment (i.e. air
compressors, generators, welding equipment, forklifts, cranes, etc.) entering the
Refinery and other BORL premises shall be properly identified and has a valid
Safety Certificate and Gate Pass. Only vehicles required for execution of work are
allowed in the Refinery and other BORL restricted premises; all other vehicles
shall be parked outside the Refinery or BORL restricted premises.
3.2.3 A safety clearance from F&S dept. is required to all the vehicles entering in BORL
operational area. The timings of vehicle inspection is from 09:00 AM to 11:00 AM.
3.2.4 The contractor shall comply with all points of checklist given in Annexure IIof
safety inspection of vehicles before coming for inspection.
3.3
TRAFFIC REGULATIONS
All traffic signs, signals, and road markings must be obeyed. Unless otherwise
posted, the speed limit in BORL facilities is 30 KMPH. In all cases, the low posted
speed limit shall govern.
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
firefighting
equipment.
Page 9 of 33
4.4
4.4.1 All scaffolds shall be erected by competent and qualified personnel and shall
conform to requirements of BORL guidelines and safe work practices for scaffolds
and ladders. These requirements include the mandatory inspection, tagging,
approval, and certification of erected scaffold before use.
4.4.2 Contractors scaffold material samples shall be approved by BORL prior to
procurement. Scaffolding should be regularly inspected by competent person &
provided with inspection tag.
4.5
4.5.1 Only authorized personnel holding valid Radiation Work Permit License issued by
BARC shall handle radioactive material.
4.5.2 Contractor shall comply with all safety precautions and requirements as specified
in relevant clauses of BORL procedures and guidelines.
4.5.3 Contractor shall ensure that the following basic rules are strictly enforced:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
4.6
4.6.1 Contractor shall comply with the BORL requirements for storing, handling and
using of compressed gas cylinders.
4.6.2 Cylinders which are approved by PESO should only be allowed to use in refinery
complex.
4.7
ROAD CLOSURES
4.7.1 No roads shall be barricaded or blocked in any way without written approval from
the BORLs representative & F&S dept. Use of a flag man is required to direct
traffic around congested areas. Road workers and workers on roadsides shall
wear reflective coverall or jacket.
4.7.2 Barricades, temporary walkways, signs, etc. should be provided for the safety of
pedestrians and roadside facilities. Barriers shall be equipped with reflectors or
lights so that it is readily visible at night.
4.8
4.8.1 All vehicles and engine driven equipment entering BORL premises require a
Safety Certificate as such, contractor should meet the following general
requirements:
Page 10 of 33
4.8.2 CONTRACTORS Vehicle or mobile equipment shall be in good condition and meet
the requirements of Vehicle and Equipment Safety. The number of vehicles/
mobile equipment shall be kept to the minimum essential for the site personnel
and work requirements.
4.8.3 Contractors vehicle or equipment shall be provided with the appropriate type and
size of fire extinguisher certified by BORL Fire & Safety dept.
4.8.4 An approved type of spark arrestor shall be fixed to the exhaust of equipment
and vehicles entering hazardous area. Pool cars or buses shall not be allowed to
enter hazardous area. Mobile equipment, lifting appliances and vehicles to load or
unload material shall only be allowed with work permit and prior authorization.
4.8.5 In addition, contractors lifting equipment shall have a valid load test certificate
from a BORL approved third party. Safety valves on mobile equipment shall also
be third party certified.
WORK PERMITS
4.10.1 As a general principle, no work in the BORL premises can be carried out unless
authorized by appropriate work permit, except those specified in the BORL
Guidelines and Procedures for Work Permit System. The nature of work may also
require additional permission, such as permission for radiography & Excavation.
4.10.2 Contractor shall obtain appropriate written work permit (and additional
permission if required) through its BORL representative before starting any work
and an approved copy of the permit must be available atthe job site.
5.0
ii.
iii.
iv.
5.1
5.1.1 Contractor shall secure BORL approved Third Party Test Certificate (before using
any) of the following contractors equipment / equipment accessories:
Page 11 of 33
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Lifting appliances (crane, boom truck, truck, jig lift, forklift, pulley, D
shackle etc.)
Safety valves on mobile equipment, e.g. air compressor, hydro test
machine, vacuum truck etc.
Cargo tank of tank vehicles, e.g. fuel tanker, vacuum tank or pressurized
tank, etc.
All pressure vessels, e.g. compressors air receiver, SMPV, etc.
5.1.2 And also produces test certificate once in year for all lifting appliance, valve
vacuum tank, pressure vessel, & once in six month for lifts, hoist, man basket
etc.
5.2
5.3
5.3.1 Contractor should not store fuel for refueling (vehicles & equipment) inside BORL
premises without BORL Representative approval.
5.3.2 Contractor should not transport fuel on vehicles or containers not approved for
that purpose.
Safety Supervision:
6.1.1 It is the duty of the contractor to supervise his workmen during the job. The
concerned plant personnel shall oversee the supervision of safety, health and
environmental matters.
6.1.2 It is mandatory that contractors supervisor is present within the plant premises
till the job continues. The contractors supervisor will be in the close contact with
BORL Engineer in charge.
6.2
6.2.1 Safety inspection and auditing are important means for monitoring contractor
safety.
employees through regular inspection at the work site. The compliance with work
permit system, mandatory PPEs of personnel, the operational condition of safety
equipment and the reliability, use of tools appropriate for the job, serviceability
and maintenance of work tools and equipment should be established by spot
checks. Concerned contractors safety supervisors shall carry out audit of their
facilities and equipment.
Page 12 of 33
6.2.2 Contractor should participate in half yearly HSE audit conducted by F&S
department of BORL. The result of these audits should be used for setting goals
for future improvements and winners should be awarded accordingly. A written
Inspection report shall be prepared and distributed to top management of the
same. The checklist for half yearly audit is as per Annexure III.
6.3
ii.
iii.
iv.
7.2
Toolbox talks:
The toolbox talks as a part of continuous training for effective use of safety tips
on the job planned for that day. The Supervisor-in-charge of the Contractor
should give a ten to fifteen minutes talk to the Contract employees. This is the
most effective channel of communication as it takes less time, it is at the work
place and it is covering the immediate job they are handling so they can
Page 13 of 33
precisely correlate the training while working. Toolbox talk is the right tool to
boost
the
safety
awareness
and
to
improve
the
Contract
employees
8.1
EMERGENCY RESPONSE
8.1.1 Contractor shall ensure that contractor employees clearly understand their
responsibility for an appropriate emergency response as per the BORL Emergency
Response & Disaster Management Plan through awareness / refresher training
and Safety Talks.
8.1.2 In the event of a major fire/ evacuation, contractor shall move contractors
employees away from the vicinity of the fire and out of the way of firefighting
activities in an orderly manner.
8.2
EMERGENCY SIRENS
There are various sirens to indicate emergency situation in the refinery, as
tabulated below. Proceed upwind, or crosswind if gas release is upwind of your
location, as indicated by wind socks/steam plumes. Proceed to the appropriate
emergency assembly area by the evacuation route as indicated/ communicated.
Page 14 of 33
8.3
Incidents Reporting:
8.3.1 All incidents, property damage and near miss cases pertaining to contractor
activities shall be reported by Contractor to the engineer in charge and Fire &
Safety department.
8.3.2 Contractor employee, in case of any injury shall report to the plant personnel and
if nobody is available, should rush to the Occupational Health Centre for the
treatment. If further treatment is required outside company, contractor will
arrange for the further treatment. In case of lost time injury or fatality, contractor
is responsible for the treatment and compensation of the affected workmen. The
contractor will not only give information during the investigation of the Incident to
the investigation team but also arrange the witness of the same.
9.o
9.1
Responsibilities:
Responsibilities of Contractor:
9.1.1 To ensure that all tools and equipment used by his working crews are maintained
in good working condition and have been tested by the competent authority.
Page 15 of 33
9.1.2 Contractor is required to make safety documents and records available to BORL
Representative upon request.
procedures, training
not
take
representative.
representative. Appropriate
photographs
of
the
BORL
Work Permit
without
shall
be
approval
obtained.
9.1.10 To ensure that his personnel are provided with mandatory personal protective
equipment. Also, contractor should ensure that job specific personal protective
equipment is available to his personnel.
9.1.11 The contractor has to give an undertaking before start of contract on HSE related
aspects as per annexure IV.
9.2
9.2.1 Contractor supervisor is the key person to comply with the HSE standards at work
site. He is responsible for overall coordination of the HSE procedures prescribed
herein:
i.
To facilitate AE/SIC, Fire & safety representative or any other person from
BORL to carry out safety inspections of his site.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Contractors job supervisors also should make daily inspection of their work
areas for the specific purpose of correcting unsafe acts or hazardous
conditions.
v.
vi.
vii.
To ensure the use of mandatory PPEs by working crew under his control.
viii.
To review the work area for unsafe practices and conditions and initiate
corrective actions as required.
ix.
x.
10.0
10.1
managers,
10.1.2 The contractors safety program should also include site safety organization with
respect to the overall site organogram. The contractors employee in-charge of
safety should be among the top in the organogram and should have authority
over other activities. There should be at least one dedicated, qualified and
experienced contractors safety Engineer or Supervisor exclusively responsible for
safety implementation / co-ordination. He shall be free from any other
responsibility and no compensation will be made by the BORL for the deputation
Page 17 of 33
Employee Strength
Minimum Strength
(including sub-contractor)
of Safety Staff
One
Safety
responsibility
full
time
Supervisor
on
full
time
on
Supervisor
Supervisor
on
full
time
10.1.3 The number of employees mentioned above represents the maximum number of
contractor employees estimated to be engaged at the site on any day by the
contractor and their subcontractor. In case of block shutdown or turnaround when
the contractor is required to bring in additional manpower, the number of
contractor safety personnel shall be increased as per above table.
10.1.4 Contractors safety personnel shall possess the requisite qualification and
experience as given below:
10.2
Safety Engineer
Shall be a graduate engineer (Mechanical / Chemical / Electrical/ Civil/ IP/ CTM/
Safety) having a minimum of Two (2) years working experience in the field of
Safety.He should possess a recognized degree or diploma in industrial safety. He
must be able to speak, read and write English very well.
Page 18 of 33
10.3
Safety Supervisor
10.3.1 He shall be a diploma holder in engineering or science graduate having five (5)
years experience in handling construction or maintenance projects in process
Plant. He should possess a recognized degree or diploma in industrial safety. He
must be able to speak, read and write English well.
10.3.2 Curriculum Vitae of contractors safety personnel along with copies of all
certificates shall be submitted for BORLs review and approval before posting at
BORL site. The BORL reserves the right to evaluate the candidate based on
review of CV and verification of original certificates and/or personal interview.
10.4
SAFETY ORIENTATION
10.4.1 New contractors key personnel (i.e. supervisors, engineers and managers) along
with the workforce shall receive safety induction training from BORL F&S
department, as per applicable safety training procedure. In turn, these trained
Contractors key personnel shall conduct orientation to their respective employees
prior to job site mobilization / beginning work in form of tool box talks on regular
basis and generate record for the same. Such orientation should include
provisions of the written safety program and procedures applicable to the
contractors scope of work, and also should include the following:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
10.5
and
the
contractor
Page 19 of 33
10.6
10.7
10.7.1 Records are required to support activities of contractor safety programs for both
control and audit purposes. Records that shall be maintained and retained within
the contract duration at the job site should include the following:
i.
Log of all injury cases reported and treated, showing date, name of
injured, job nature of injury and type of treatment given.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Job site inspection / audit reports and status of the action plans.
v.
vi.
vii.
11.0
12.0
iii.
The safety procedures for working in areas of the work as defined in scope of
work.
All requirements under The Factories Act 1948 and the rules framed thereunder in the M P Factories Rules& Gujarat Factory Rules, as applicable.
Applicable Environment Regulations in force and also the systems and
procedures in M.P/Gujarat state of work.
Page 20 of 33
iv.
13.0
MINOR
FIRST
SECOND
THIRD
Caution
Notice
Penalty
Penalty Rs.
1000/- *
Rs. 500/-
MAJOR
Penalty Rs.
1000/-*
FOURTH
Multiplied
Penalty
Penalty
Rs. 2000/- *
Rs. 5000/- *
Multiplied
* The BORL reserves the right to impose more severe penalty, i.e. suspend/terminate
the employee, his supervisor or the site manager.
Note: - The penalties may be revised from time to time by BORL management.
Page 21 of 33
13.3
Major Violation
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
(Examples)
Page 22 of 33
Page 23 of 33
ANNEXURE II
Contractor
Sr.
No
____________________
Company Name:
Vehicle Reg./Serial
_________________
ITEM
Re-validation:
REQUIREMENT
Y / N / NA
1.
Fire Extinguisher
2.
Exhaust System
3.
Spark Arrestor
4.
All Lights
5.
Available in vehicles where driver cannot see the rear, horn loud enough,
activated by gear lever
6.
Seat Belt
7.
Tyres
Good condition
8.
Battery
9.
Fuel/Hydraulic System
10.
Engine/Rotating part
guards
11.
Wind Shield
12.
Brakes/Parking Brake
13.
Both Side / Rear View in driver cab available and adjustable, no cracks
14.
Body/canopy/booms
Good condition
15.
16.
17.
Limit Switches
18.
19.
ELCB Available
20.
Valid certificate from approved third party for lifting appliances, PSV of
equipment. & tank/vessel/cylinders of tankers
21.
Safety latches
Page 24 of 33
Slings
Operator
&
Page 25 of 33
Time: Hrs
Does the Contractor have adequate number of Supervisors for the jobs?
Are the Supervisors competent to ensure that the work force adhere to all
applicable safety requirements? ( As per the scope of safety guidelines)
Does the contractor know the incident including Nearmiss reporting system
of BORL? Interview any Two Persons ( supervisor& site incharge ).
Whether all the tools / equipment Including PPE's used are meeting the
standards? ( any certification CE, ISI Marked )
Max.
Marks
Marks
Obtained
Whether PPE are being used and in good condition? ( Available with
Workers at field )
Safety Shoes
Safety Helmet
Safety Goggles
MCP,
Page 26 of 33
Remarks
Fire extinguishers,
Safety Shower,
Does the contractor personnel know about the hazard associated with their
job/ chemicals / material handled and precautions to be taken? ( Brief
discussion at field )
10
Are contractor's personnel aware of the various types of permits for different
kinds of jobs?
11
12
13
14
Tools , Tackles
Scaffolds
Cranes
15
16
17
All employee were taken mandatory fire & safety trainings ( record
&interview any two persons)
18
Whether toolbox talk conducted regularly and records kept properly? Record
checked
19
Asked the information from any of worker about tool box talk subject
20
21
Total
Page 27 of 33
Overall Rating :
(Ref. of Rating: 0-50%- Below Avg,51-60% - Average, 60-75% - Satisfactory,
76-85% - Good,86-95% -V Good,96-100% - Excellent )
Name & Signature:
Auditor (BORL)
Auditee (Contractor/Owner)
Page 28 of 33
ANNEXURE IV
UNDERTAKING
We, M/s ____________________ have been awarded contract work order no.
___________ dtd. __.__._____ by M/s Bharat Oman Refineries Ltd.
We hereby
undertake as follows:
1. That we have understood the details of the work to be executed with reference to the
aforesaid work order and the requirements of manpower, equipment, tools/tackles,
safety equipment and other resources necessary to execute the work thereof.
2. That we have got competent supervisors and workers with required qualification,
relevant experience / skills and trained for safe execution of the work.
Our
supervisors are well aware of the work hazards and have got adequate knowledge
and familiarity about the safe work practices / safe work methods, necessary safety
measures and precautions to be taken to avoid accidents during execution of the
work.
3. That we have read and understood the General and Special Conditions of the contract
work order under reference and agree to abide by the same.
4. That we have familiarized ourselves with the working conditions, understood all
necessary requirements for safe execution of the work, including HSE policy and
procedures of BORL and obtained all clarifications regarding the job.
5. That we undertake to ensure and strictly comply with safety procedures and safe
practices / methods relevant to the work for safety of our employees and property of
the company BORL and provide required personal protective equipment to all our
employees, as necessary for safety & to prevent probable injuries to our workers and
as per the safety requirements of the Company (BORL).
We further undertake to
carry out the work in accordance with the HSE policy and procedures of BORL
6. That
we
shall also
comply
with all
applicable
regulations
with
respect
to
environmental protection.
7. That we undertake to deploy competent and trained personnel for the job identified
who will possess requisite skill, certificate / license.
8. That we shall ensure use of right type of tools, tackles & equipment, maintained in
good working condition, suitable to the nature of the job under execution.
9. That we shall be responsible for safety of our employees and other persons at site /
property of the company and accountable for any accident due to negligence / fault
of our employees or our company and shall be ready to accept the responsibilities for
any legal consequences.
Page 29 of 33
Date
Name of Company
Company Seal :
Witnesses:
1. Signature
Name
: ___________________
: ___________________
Date : ___________________
Address
: ______________________
Name : ______________________
Date : ______________________
: ___________________
___________________
2. Signature
Address
: ______________________
______________________
Page 30 of 33
ANNEXURE V
Safety Engineer / Supervisor appointment
Contractors Name: - ...
Nos. of Work force at site:-..
Details of Safety officer / Supervisor
Full Name: - ..
Date of Birth: - .Designation: ...
Contact No :- Email ID: ..
Appointment date: - .
Educational Qualification: 1)....
2)..
3)..
Professional Experience (In Chronological Order)
S.N.
Name of Organization
Period of
Service
From
Designation
Area of
Responsibility
To
Page 31 of 33
DESCRIPTION
THIS
MONTH
CUMMILATIVE
REMARK
Brief Description
Recommendation
No of Participants
Topic
Audit done by
Auditee
NOTE: - Copy of report to be sent to fire & safety on or before 3rd of the following
month.
Page 32 of 33
ANNEXURE VII
PENALTY NOTIFICATION FOR CONTRACTORS SAFETY VIOLATIONS
From
To
Date :
Engineer in Charge
Given below are violation details of Safety Regulations / Site Instructions committed by a contractor
working for your division.
Name :- Cont. Emp. No : Contractor :Location of Violation : -
Vehicle No :
Date :
Time :
Minor
Major
Action recommended:
Written warning
Penalty Rs.____________
Suspension
Dismissal
Other_______________________________________
Signature
VIOLATION
FIRST
SECOND
THIRD
Fourth
MINOR
Caution Notice
Multiplied
MAJOR
Penalty Rs.
1000/-*
Penalty Rs.2000/*
Multiplied
* BORL reserves the right to impose more severe penalty, i.e. suspend/terminate the
employee, his supervisor or the site manager.
Note : The Penalties may be revised from time to time by BORL management.
Engineer in Charge / HOD to forward this notification for further action as per
applicability.
Copy of Receipt from Bank to be submitted to Engineer in Charge by the violator.
Bank Details For Penalty Deposits
Beneficiarys Name: - Bharat Oman Refineries Ltd.
Beneficiarys Bank Name & Branch :- State Bank of India, BINA
Account No / I.F.S.C. Code Number : - 10778895059 / SBIN0001427
Account code: 470315
RECOVERIES-ACCIDENT/ LOSSES/ SAFETY
Cc
151MTRY
*igiriaRteg,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaking)
CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS OF
MONITORING AND MESURING DEVICES AT
CONSTRUCTION SITES
STANDARD No.
7-82-0002 Rev. 0
Page 1 of 5
cHILIA
armeicbdi
CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS OF
MONITORING AND MEASURING
DEVICES AT CONSTRUCTION SITES
0
Rev.
No
28.04.2015
Date
Issued as Standard
Purpose
'3DJ
/k MD
Prepared Checked
by
by
SC
Standards
Committee
Standards
Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F2 Rev. 0
lafaZIE'T
5.ge1105ieg
141R7f ERP12 051.740,71)
CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS OF
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED MONITORING AND MEASURING DEVICES
AT CONSTRUCTION SITES
(AGO
of
In
Undertaking)
STANDARD No.
7-82-0002 Rev. 0
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
ABS
ABS Consultancy
BIS
BV
Bureau Veritas
CELL
DNV
IRS
LRS
NABL
PMI
Members:
CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS OF
MONITORING
AND MEASURING DEVICES
INDIA UMITED
Inda
IAG
AT CONSTRUCTION SITES
ENGINEERS
e.if
fetiaieU
Iffllerr eleasteaxamni)
ovt of
STANDARD No.
7-82-0002 Rev. 0
Undertalong)
Page 3 of 5
Description
Calibration requirements
Civil-Survey
Theodolite
Levels
A.3.
Steel measurement
tapes
A.4.
Cross staff
---
Distomat
Total Station
Remarks
once in a year or
project duration
whichever is earlier
Record to be
maintained
(See note below)
Every use
Record to
be maintained
(See note below)
----
"Freemans"
make or BIS
approved make
shall be used.
Mutilated, or
broken tapes
shall not be
used.
c. Marking on the
tape shall be
legible
---
Same as 3b&3c
above
Records to be
maintained
Record to be
maintained
(See note below)
Actual Physical
Verification at Site
To check for permanent
adjustments by traversing
and observing the closing
error,etc.
Before using
first time at site
once in a year or
project duration
whichever is earlier
Whenever used
Calibration of scales
Once in three
Months
Records to be
maintained
As per
manufacturer
specification or
once a year
whichever is earlier
6 months
Records to be
maintained
Civil Laboratory
B.
balancesMechanical
Weigh
Batcher/Batching
Plant
Cube testing
machine
All
Moisture Meter
Note:
Frequency
Calibration of scales
---
Records to be
maintained
1.27.1eResrv mows
Sl.
No.
CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS OF
ENGINEERS
LIMITED
MONITORING
AND MEASURING DEVICES
INDIA
AT CONSTRUCTION SITES
Description
Calibration requirements
STANDARD No.
7-82-0002 Rev. 0
Page 4 of 5
Frequency
Remarks
Mechanical/ Electrical/Welding
Pressure Gauges
Calibration certificate from
reputed laboratories or
calibrate by dead weight
testers with standard weights
or with master Gauge
Dial gauges
Check for Zero Error
Dead Weight
Calibration from
Tester
manufacturer or reputed
Calibrating agency.
Calibration certificate shall
not be older than one month
from the date of
mobilization.
Vernier caliper/
Check for Zero error
screw gauge
Holiday tester
Calibration from
manufacturer or reputed
calibrating agency or by
calibrating by zeep meter.
Once in 6 months
Records to be
maintained
Whenever used
As per
manufacturer's
recommendation or
once in a six month
whichever is
earlier.
--Records
(Calibration
certificate) to
be maintained
Once in 6 months
Records to
be maintained
C.6
Elcometer
Before use
Records to
be maintained
C.7
Universal Testing
Machine
Records to
be maintained
C.8
Charpy V-notch
Impact testing
machine
C.9
Hardness Testing
Machine
As per
manufacturer's
recommendation or
once a year
whichever is earlier
As per
manufacturer's
recommendation or
once in a year
whichever is earlier
Before use
C.10
Chemical Analysis
,ex :PMI etc.
Various Digital
and Analog
meters
Before use
Records to be
maintained
Records to be
maintained
C.
C.1
C.2
C.3
C.4
C.5
C.11
Note:
Whenever used
Once in Six
Months or as per
manufacturer's
recommendation
whichever is
earlier.
---
Records to be
maintained
Records to be
maintained
lalfteq
eig em Eitateg
1.41V, eleCAU
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
mom)
SI.
No.
C.12
C.13
Description
CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS OF
MONITORING AND MEASURING DEVICES
AT CONSTRUCTION SITES
Calibration requirements
Variable current,
voltage and
resistance
generators
Temperature/
Pressure Recorders
7-82-0002 Rev. 0
Page 5 of 5
Frequency
Remarks
Once in Six
months
Records to be
maintained
Calibration from
manufacturer or any
reputed calibrating
agency
Calibration Certificate
from reputed
laboratories
Manufacturer's Certificate or
Chemical Check
Once in Six
months
Records to be
maintained
To be discarded
in case of damage
or malfunctioning
---
C.15
Temperature
gauges
C.16
Thermocouples
C.17
Vibration probes
Calibration from
reputed laboratory
Once in a year
C.18
Decibel-meter
Calibration from
reputed laboratory
Once in a Year
Note:
STANDARD No.
---
To be discarded
in case of
damage or
malfunctioning
- do -
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
The vendor shall participate during HAZOP study of the package. The vendor shall indicate the cost of
providing the services related to same on per diem basis. Cost for HAZOP participation for total 4
mandays shall be added to the total cost of the Flare Gas Recovery Package for commercial comparison
purpose. However the actual payment for HAZOP participation shall be based on actual man-days
participated by vendor.
Bidder shall quote per diem charges for participation in HAZOP study of the package which shall include
lodging, boarding, medical, local transport, all insurances including Bidders personnel and third party
insurance, all other incidental charges and all taxes & duties except Service tax (for bidders registered in
India) which shall be quoted extra and shall be payable against submission of Invoice as per Service tax
rules.
The Foreign Bidder shall quote prices gross of Indian income tax and bidder shall furnish all requisite
information stipulated elsewhere in the Bidding Document. Applicable rate of withholding tax shall be
indicated in the offer.
Withholding Tax(s) as per Government policy shall be deducted at source by Purchaser while making
payments against each invoice. Any wrong assessment of applicable withholding Tax shall be to Bidders
account.
For Foreign Bidders : To & fro air fare by economy class through most economical route preferably by Air
India and/or AC 2 Tier by Train Fare(*) within India nearest to EIL Office (New Delhi), will be reimbursed at
actual. Local transportation in bidders country shall be to bidders account.
For Indian Bidders: To & fro air fare by economy class through most economical route preferably by Air
India and/or AC 2 Tier by Train Fare(*) nearest to EIL Office (New Delhi), will be reimbursed at actual.
(*)In case a bidder travels by any other mode of transport, the payment shall be made against
documentary evidence subject to maximum of AC 2 Tier train fare.
Per diem charges shall be payable from the day bidders person reaches EIL Office upto the day he
participates in HAZOP study at EIL Office. No payment will be made for travel days/period.
In case bidders representative is not called for during Intervening weekly off/Holidays, the same shall be
payable at the normal quoted rate.
In case bidders representative takes leave, per diem charges for that day shall not be payable.
Working hours prevailing at EIL Office, normally 8 hours/day - Monday through Friday and holidays as
applicable to EIL Office shall apply.
Vendors personnel shall observe/abide by working conditions prevailing at the work place, safety codes,
Indian laws and local laws.
A notice period of 15 days will be given for mobilization of personnel for Hazop Study.
Validity period of per diem rate shall be upto the end of guarantee period.
Payment: 100% against submission of monthly bills and time sheets certified by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Recommendations related to design/scope/etc. pertaining to package arising out during HAZOP study
shall be incorporated / included by the vendor without any time/cost implications to the employer.
Requirement of Employment Visa for Foreign Nationals
All foreign nationals coming to India for execution of Projects / Orders will have to apply for Employment
Visa only and that grant of Employment Visa would be subject to strict adherence of following norms:
i) Employment Visa is granted only for the skilled and qualified professional or to a person who is
being engaged or appointed by a company, organization, Industry or undertaking etc. in India on
contract or employment basis at a senior level, skilled position such as technical expert, senior
executive or in managerial position etc.
ii) Request for employment Visa for jobs for which large number of qualified Indian are available, is
not considered.
iii) Under no circumstances an Employment Visa is granted for routine, ordinary secretarial / clerical
jobs.
Bidders are advised in their own interest to check latest Visa rules from Indian Embassy/ High
Commission in their country in case foreign nationals are required to be deputed to Indian during
execution of the Order.
Signature with Name & Date and
Seal/Stamp of the Bidder
Page 1 of 1
INDEX
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
SECTION NO/
CLAUSE NO.
I
DEFINITION OF TERMS
DESCRIPTION
II
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
GENERAL INFORMATION
Location of Site and Accessability
Scope of Work
Water Supply
Power Supply
Land for Contractors field office, Godown and workshop
Safety standards for Temporary buildings
Collection of Data Tenderers Responsibility
Retired Government or company officers
Signing of Contract
Field Management
Rates to be in Figures and Words
III
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
GENERAL
Interpretation of Contract Document
Singular and Plural
Special Conditionsof Contract
Contractor to obtain his own information
Security Deposit/Contract Performance Guarantee
Time of Performance
Force majeure
Extension of time
Price Reduction due to delay
Sum payable by way of compensation to be considered as reasonable
compensation without reference to actual loss
Forfeiture of security deposit
Action when whole of security deposit is forfeited
Contractor remains liable to pay compensation of action not taken under clause 3.12
Compensation for alteration in or restriction of work
Change in constitution
On Demise of Contractor
Members of the Owner or individually
Owner not bound by personal representations.
Contractor's office at site
Contractor's subordinate staff and their conduct.
Subletting of work
Power of entry
Contractor's responsibility with the Mechanical Electrical, inter-communication
system, air conditioning contractor and other agencies
Other agencies at site
Notices
Rights of various interests
Right of Owner to determine/ terminate Contract
Patents and royalties
Liens
Operation of Contract
Scope and Intent
Type of Contract
Schedule of Quantities
Contract Sum
Contract Bills
Change of Constitution
Owner Not Bound By Personal Representations
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.25
3.26
3.27
3.28
3.29
3.30
3.31
3.32
3.33
3.34
3.35
3.36
3.37
SECTION NO/
DESCRIPTION
CLAUSE NO.
3.38
Cancellation Of Contract In Full Or Part
3.39
Typographical Or Clerical Errors
IV
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21
4.22
4.23
4.24
4.25
4.26
V
PERFORMANCE OF WORKS
Execution of works
Coordination and inspection of work
Work in mansoon and dewatering
Work on Sundays and holidays
General conditions for construction and erection work
Drawings to be supplied by the Owner
Drawings to be supplied by the Contractor
Setting out works
Responsibility for level and alignment
Materials to be supplied by Contractor
Materials procured with assistance of Owner
Materials obtained from dismantling
Articles of value found
Discrepancies between instructions
Alteration in specifications and designs and extra works
Action where no specification issued
Abnormal rates
Inspection of works
Assistance to engineers
Test for quality works
Samples
Action and compensation in case of bad work
Suspension of works
Owner may do part of work
Possession prior to completion
Defect Liability Period from the date of issue of completion certificate
5.10
CONTRACTORS
FIELD
ORGANIZATION/
SUB-CONTRACTORS
AND
EQUIPMENTS
Office accommodation's at site
Contractors field organization and equipment
Equipment and staff assistance from the Contractor
Contractor's subordinate staff and their conducts
Labour
Sub-contracts
Labour regulations
Site order book
Contractor's responsibility with the mechanical, electrical inter-communication
system, Air conditioning contractors and the agencies
Other agents at site
VI
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
SECTION NO/
DESCRIPTION
CLAUSE NO.
6.12
Completion certificate
6.13
Final decision and final certificate
6.14
Certificate and payments no evidence of completion
VII
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
VIII
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
IX
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
9.9.1
9.9.2
9.9.3
9.9.4
9.9.5
9.9.6
9.9.7
9.10
9.11
9.12
9.13
9.14
9.15
9.16
9.17
9.18
9.19
: Proforma of Agreement
: Form of Income Tax Clearance Certificate
: Proforma of Bank Guarantee
: Completion Certificate
: Format of Hypotehcation Bond
SECTION -I
DEFINITION OF TERMS
1.0
In the Contract Documents, as herein defined, where the context so admits, the
following words and expressions will have the following meanings. Any word or phrase
defined in the body of the Contract Documents as opposed to being defined in this
Clause 1.0, Section 1 of the General Conditions of Contract, shall have the meaning
assigned to it in such definition throughout the Contract Document, unless the contrary
is expressly stated or the contrary clearly appears from the context:
1.1
1.2
Applicable Law shall mean all statutes, including the act, codes, ordinances,
decrees, rules, regulations, municipal by-laws, judicial or arbitral or administrative or
ministerial or departmental or regulatory judgments, orders, decisions, rulings or
awards, policies, voluntary restraints, guidelines, or any provisions of such laws,
including general principles of common and civil law and equity, binding on or
affecting the Parties referred to in the context in which such word is used.
1.3
Bidder means the Person who has submitted the Tender to the Owner, for executing
the Work.
1.4
"Contractor" means the Bidder(includes his/ its legal representative, successor and
permitted assigns) whose Tender has been accepted by the Owner pursuant to
delivery of the Fax of Acceptance.
1.5
1.6
"Contract" shall mean the legally binding contract to be entered into between the
Owner and the Contractor in the format prescribed in Annexure [], for executing the
Work, together with all Contract Documents.
1.7
1.8
"Drawings" includes all maps, plans and tracings or prints thereof with any
modifications annexed to the Contract Document Approved in writing by the EIC and
such other drawings as may, from time to time, be furnished or Approved in writing by
the EIC.
1.9
Earnest Money means such amounts as deposited by a Bidder with the Owner, at
the time of submission of its Tender.
1.10
1.11
"Equipment" means all appliances and equipment of whatsoever nature for the use in
or for the execution, completion, operation of / maintenance of the Work unless
intended to form part of the Permanent work.
1.12
"Final Certificate" in relation to a work means the certificate issued by the EIC after
the Period of Liability is over.
.
1.13
1.14
Notice in Writing or Written Notice shall mean a notice in written, typed or printed
characters sent (unless delivered personally or otherwise proved to have been
received) by registered post to the last known private or business address or registered
office of the addressee.
1.15
1.16
"Permanent Work" means and includes works which will be incorporated in and form a
part of the Work to be handed over to the Owner by the Contractor on completion of
the Contract.
1.17
"Period of Liability" in relation to a work means the specified period from the date of
issue of Completion Certificate up to the date of issue of Final Certificate during which
the Contractor stands responsible for rectifying all defects that may appear in the
Works.
1.18
Person means and includes any natural person, limited or unlimited liability company,
corporation (including any non-profit corporation), partnership (whether registered,
unregistered, general, limited or unlimited), sole proprietorship, trust, firm, union,
unincorporated association, joint venture, joint stock company, Hindu undivided family,
estate, court, tribunal, agency, Government, ministry, department, commission, selfregulatory organization, arbitrator, board, or other entity, enterprise, authority, or
business organization whether or not required to be incorporated or registered under
any Applicable Law or any agency or political subdivision thereof or any other entity
that may be treated as a person under Applicable Law.
1.19.
1.20
"Subcontractor" means any person or firm or company (other than the Contractor) to
whom any part of the work has been entrusted by the Contractor, with the prior written
consent of the EIC, and the legal representatives, successors and permitted assigns of
such person, firm or company.
1.21
Site In-Charge shall have such meaning as ascribed to it in Clause 5.2 below.
1.22
"Specification" shall mean the various technical specifications attached and referred
to in the Contract Documents. It shall also include the latest editions, including all
addenda / corrigenda, of relevant Indian Standard Specifications, specifications of the
other countries published before entering into Contract.
1.23
"Tender" means the tender submitted by the Contractor for acceptance by the
Owner.
1.24
The Site" means the areas on which the Works are to be executed or carried out
and any other places provided by the Owner for purpose of the Contract.
1.25
"Work" shall mean the works to be executed in accordance with the Contract or part
thereof as the case may be and shall include extra, additional, altered or substituted
works as required for purpose of the Contract.
SECTION II
GENERAL INFORMATION
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
The Site is located at a distance of 17 km from Bina town/ Bina Railway Junction. The
nearest railway station is Agasod Bina. The nearest port is Kandla, which is approx.
700 km from the Site. The nearest airport is at Bhopal, which is approx.150 km.
2.1.3
2.2
SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work shall be as set out in the Schedule of Rate(s), Special Conditions of
Contract, Scope of Work (SOW) and specifications.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary materials, equipment, labour etc. for the
execution and maintenance of the Work till completion unless otherwise mentioned in
Annexure SOW or other Contract Document All material that go with the Work to be
used by the Contractor shall be Approved by Engineer-in-Charge, prior to procurement
and use. The Contractor shall secure all such Approvals from the EIC at the earliest, so
as to ensure that seeking such Approvals does not delay the execution of the Work by
the Contractor, since time is of the essence of the Contract.
2.3
WATER SUPPLY
Contractor will make his own arrangement for supply of water. All pumping installation,
pipe net work and distribution system will have to be carried out by the Contractor at
his own cost.
2.4
POWER SUPPLY
The Contractor will make his own arrangement for power supply/ Portable generators
as required. All the works will be done as per IEA regulations and passed by the
Engineer-in-Charge. The temporary line will be removed forthwith after the completion
of the work or if there is any hindrance caused to other works due to the alignment of
these lines, the contractor will reroute or remove the temporary line at his own cost.
Owner shall not, however, arrange the supply of electricity.
2.5
Contractor shall forthwith be required to pay all expenses so incurred in this regard and
shall have no claim in respect of any such debris disposed off, as aforesaid.
Notwithstanding anything contained in this Clause 2.5, the Owner reserves the right to
direct the Contractor for security reasons or for material interest or otherwise, at any
time during the pendency of the Contract, to vacate the land provided by the Owner, as
set out hereinabove, by serving a 7 (seven) days notice to the Contractor.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
FIELD MANAGEMENT
2.10.1 The field management will be the responsibility of the Engineer-in-Charge. The
Engineer-in-Charge may also authorize one or more of his representatives to perform
his duties and functions.
2.10.2 Coordination of Work - The Engineer-in-Charge shall coordinate the work of various
agencies engaged at Site so as to ensure minimum disruption of work carried out by
different agencies simultaneously. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to plan
and execute the Work strictly in accordance with the Site instructions and instructions
issued by the EIC, to avoid hindrance to the works executed by other agencies/
contractors.
2.11
The Bidder should quote in English, both in figures as well as in words, the rates and
amounts tendered by the Bidder in the Schedule of Rates of Tender, submitted by the
Bidder for each item and in such a way that interpolation is not possible. The amount for
each item should be worked out and entered and requisite total given of all items be in
both figures and words. The tendered amount for the Work shall be entered in the
Tender, duly executed by the Bidder.
In the event of any discrepancies between the rates in figures and words or the amount
shown in the Tender, the following procedure shall be followed by the Owner, to clear
such discrepancy:
a)
When there is difference between the rates in figures and words, the
rate which corresponds to the amount worked out by the Bidder shall
be taken as correct.
b)
When the rate quoted by the Bidder in figures and words tally but the
amount is incorrect, the rate quoted by the Bidder shall be taken as
correct.
c)
d)
If the total amount written against an item does not correspond to the
rate written in figures and if the rate in words is not written by the
bidder, then the higher of the rates, i.e. higher of the rate worked out by
dividing the amount by the notional quantity or the rate quoted, shall be
considered for evaluation. In the event that such a bid is determined as
the lowest bid, the lower of the rates shall be considered for award of
works.
SECTION III
GENERAL TERMS OF CONTRACT
3.1
3.1.1
Should there be any discrepancy, inconsistency, error or omission in the Contract or any
Contract Document, such discrepancy, inconsistency, error may be referred to
Engineer-in-Charge, who shall give his decisions and issue to the Contractor,
instructions directing in what manner the Work is to be carried out. The Contractor
agrees that the decision of the Engineer-in-Charge shall be final and conclusive and the
Contractor shall carry out Work, strictly in accordance with this decision.
3.1.2
Work shown upon the Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications or described in
the Specifications without being shown on the Drawings shall nevertheless be held to be
included in the same manner as if they had been specifically shown upon the Drawings
and described in the Specifications.
3.1.3
Headings and marginal notes to the clauses of these General Conditions of Contract or
to Specifications or to any other Contract Document are solely for the purpose of giving
a concise indication and not a summary of the contents thereof, and they shall never be
deemed to be part thereof or be used in the interpretation or construction thereof of the
Contract.
3.1.4
3.1.5
The words including, include, in particular and words of similar effect shall not be
deemed to limit the general effect of the words that precede them.
3.1.6
3.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
Notwithstanding the subdivision of the documents into these separate sections and
volumes every part of each shall be deemed to be supplementary to and
complementary of every other part and shall be read with and into the Contract so far
as it may be practicable to do so.
3.3.3
3.3.4
Wherever it is mentioned in the Specifications and/or the Contract Documents that the
Contractor shall perform certain Work or provide certain facilities, it is understood that
the Contractor shall do so at its own cost, risk and expense.
.
3.3.5
The materials, design and workmanship shall satisfy the relevant Indian Standards, the
job specifications contained herein and codes referred to. Where the job specifications
stipulate requirements, in addition to those contained in the standard codes and
specifications, these additional requirements shall also be satisfied.
3.4
3.5
SECURITY DEPOSIT
3.5.1
A sum of 10% of the total Contract Value of the Tender shall be deposited by the
Contractor as security deposit with the Owner (Security Deposit)This may be
deposited initially at 2.5% of the value of contract (referred as initial Security Deposit)
within 10 days of receipt by him of the notifications of acceptance of tender and the
balance 7.5% will be recovered in installments through deductions at the rate of 10% of
the value of each running account bill till the total security deposit amount is collected,
after which no further deductions from bills will be made on this account, subject to
clause 3.5.3 below. The Earnest Money deposited with the Tender shall be adjusted
towards Security Deposit, provided, it is furnished by demand draft Alternatively, the
Contractor may, at his option, deposit the full amount of 10% of the accepted value of
the tender towards the Security Deposit within 10 days of receipt by him of the
notifications accepting his tender.
.
3.5.2
Contractor can also furnish the Security Deposit amount through a Bank Guarantee
from schedule 'A' Bank in the form prescribed under Appendix C to the satisfaction of
the Owner.
3.5.3
If the Contractor / subcontractor or their employees shall break, deface or destroy any
property belonging to the Owner or other agency during the execution of the contract,
the same shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expenses and in default
thereof, the Engineer-in-Charge may cause the same to be made good by other
agencies and recover expenses from the Contractor (for which the certificate of the
Engineer-in-Charge shall be final). These expenses can be recovered from the Security
Deposit if recovery from other sources is not possible.
3.5.4
3.5.5
The Security Deposit / Contract Performance Guarantee shall be held by the Owner, as
security for the due performance of the Contractor's obligations under the Contract,
provided that nothing herein stated shall make it incumbent upon the Owner to utilize the
Security Deposit/ Contract Performance Bank Guarantee in preference to any other
remedy which the Owner may have, nor shall be construed as confining the claims of
the Owner against the Contractor to the quantum of the Security Deposit/Contract
Performance Guarantee.
3.5.6
The Contractor shall ensure that the bank guarantee towards security deposit shall be
kept valid till three months after the expiry of the Defect Liability Period and thereafter
satisfactory completion/ rectification of defects and after making necessary adjustment
for any defect left unattended, the security deposit in Cash or Bank Guarantee as
applicable shall be released.
3.5.7
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Contract, the Parties agree
that any remedies available to the Owner under this Contract for recovery of amounts
claimed by the Owner from the Contractor (including indemnification rights) are
independent of, and in addition to, such other rights and remedies as the Owner may
have under this Contract, law or in equity or otherwise, including the right to seek
damages, specific performance, rescission, restitution or other injunctive relief, none of
which rights or remedies shall be affected or diminished thereby
3.6
TIME OF PERFORMANCE
3.6.1
The work covered by this contract shall be commenced within five working days after
the receipt of the Fax of Acceptance of Bid or the period as mentioned in Fax of
Acceptance of Bid or Receipt of instructions to commence work whichever is later and
be completed in stages on or before the dates as mentioned in the time schedule of
completion of work. The contractor should bear in mind that time is the essence of this
agreement unless such time be extended pursuant to the provision of clause No. 3.8.
Request for revision of Construction time after tenders are opened will not be
considered.
3.6.2
The general time schedule of construction is given in the tender document. Contractor
should prepare a detailed monthly or weekly construction program jointly with the
Engineer-in-Charge within two weeks of receipt of Letter of Intent or acceptance of
tender. The work shall be executed strictly as per the time schedule given in this
document. The period of construction given includes the time required for testing,
rectification's, if any, retesting and completion in all respects to the entire satisfaction of
the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.7
FORCE MAJEURE
3.7.1
3.7.2
Effect of Force Majeure - Should any Event of Force Majeure prevent or delay the
performance by a party of any of its obligations under the Contract then, provided that
notice is given to the party in accordance with the provisions of clause 3.7.4, the party
which is prevented or delayed in the performance of its obligations shall be excused
from performance or performance in accordance with the time specified herein, for so
long as the relevant Event of Force Majeure continues and to the extent that such
partys performance is prevented, hindered or delayed thereby..
3.7.3
3.7.4
Acts of God
Acts of war or the public enemy whether war be declared or not.
Public disorders, insurrection, revolution, rebellion, sabotage, riots or violent
demonstrations; and
Explosions, fires, earthquakes or other natural calamities and
Strikes or lockouts or other industrial action by workers or employees.
3.7.5
Mitigation of delay
The party affected by the Event of Force Majeure shall use all reasonable efforts to
prevent and reduce to a minimum and mitigate the effect of any delay occasioned by
any Event of Force Majeure, including recourse to alternate acceptable sources of
services, materials and supplies and ways of executing the Work and reasonable
adjustment of work activities.
.
3.7.6
3.8
EXTENSION OF TIME
If the Contractor desires an extension of the time for completion of the Work on
grounds of it having been unavoidably hindered in its execution or on any other
grounds due to a Force Majeure Event, the Contractor shall apply, in writing to the
Engineer-in-Charge at the earliest and not later than 7 days of the date of such
hindrance detailing the grounds and reasons on account of which the Contractor
desires such extension. The Engineer-in-Charge shall, if in his opinion (which shall be
final), considers the grounds set out by the Contractor as reasonable grounds,
authorize such extension of time as the EIC may, in his opinion seems it to be
necessary and proper, provided such extension in time is granted only once.
Should the Force Majeure condition continues beyond reasonable period, of which
Engineer-In-Charge will be sole judge, the Owner will be entitled to terminate the
Contract and process final bill based on value of Work already done by the Contractor.
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.12.1 In any case in which under any clause or clauses of the Contract, the Owner shall have
forfeited the whole of the Security Deposit and Contract Performance Guarantee
(whether paid in one sum or deducted by installment) or the Contractor would have
committed a breach of any of the terms contained in the Contract or would have shown
its inability to pay the amounts payable in terms of Clause 3.10, the Owner shall, at its
.
option, have the right, subject to Clause 3.5.7 to adopt any of the following recourses as
the Owner may deem best suited to his interest and investments:
a)
b)
c)
To rescind the Contract (of which rescission notice in writing to the Contractor
under the hand of the Owner shall be conclusive evidence) in which case the
security deposit/ contract performance guarantee of the Contractor shall stand
forfeited and be absolutely at the disposal of the Owner.
To deploy an agency to carry out the Work or any part of the Work, debiting
Contractor with the cost paid to such agency plus 10% (to cover all
departmental charges) for which a certificate of the Engineer-in-Charge shall be
final and conclusive against the Contractor and crediting him with the value of
the work done in all respects in the manner and at the same rates as if it had
been carried out by the Contractor under the term of his contract. The
certificate of Engineer-in-Charge as to the value of the work done shall be final
and conclusive against the Contractor.
To measure up the Work of the Contractor and to take such part thereof as
shall be unexecuted out of his hand to give it to another contractor to complete
in which case any expenses which may be incurred in excess of the sum which
would have been paid to the original Contractor, if the whole Work had been
executed by him (of the amount of which excess, the certificate in writing of the
Engineer-in-Charge shall be final and conclusive) shall be borne and paid by
the original Contractor and may be deducted from any money due to him by the
Owner under the contract or otherwise or from his security deposit or from the
proceeds of sale thereof, of a sufficient part thereof.
3.12.2 In the event of any of the above recourses being adopted by the Owner at its discretion,
the Contractor shall have no claim to compensation for any loss sustained by the
Contractor by reason of it having purchased or procured any materials or Equipment or
incurred or suffered any other expenses or entered into any agreements/ sub-contracts
or made any advances on account of or with a view to the execution of the Work of the
performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall not be entitled to recover or be paid
any sum for any Work actually performed under the Contract unless the Engineer-inCharge certifies in writing, the performance of such work, and the value payable in
respect thereof and the Contractor shall only be entitled to be paid the value so certified
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.13
material seized by the Owner, to be utilized for completing the Work. In the event the
equipments are sold, in the manner set out hereinabove, any additional amount left
with the Owner from such sales, after recovering all its cost and expenses shall be
refunded by the Owner to the Contractor. A certificate of the Engineer-in-Charge in
relation to the value at which the material/ Equipment is sold and/or cost incurred in
completing the Work shall be final, conclusive and binding on the Contractor and no
disputes shall be entertained by the Owner in this regard, except for granting the
Contractor a reasonable opportunity to present its case before the EIC alone.
3.14
3.15
CHANGE IN CONSTITUTION
Where the Contractor is a partnership firm the prior Approval, in writing, of the Owner
shall be obtained before any change is made in the constitution of the firm - Where the
Contractor is an individual or a Hindu undivided family business concern, such
Approval as aforesaid shall likewise be obtained before Contractor enters into any
agreement with other parties where under, the reconstituted firm/ other Person would
have the right to carry out the Work hereby undertaken by the Contractor. In either case
if prior Approval as aforesaid is not obtained, the Contract shall be deemed to have
been allotted in contravention of Clauses 3.21 hereof and the same action may be
taken and the same consequences shall ensure as provided in the said clause.
3.16
ON DEMISE OF CONTRACTOR
Without prejudice to any of the rights or remedies under the Contract, if the Contractor
(being an individual) dies, the Owner shall have the option of terminating the Contract
without compensation to the legal heirs of the Contractor.
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
3.19.1 The Contractor shall, within a period of 7 days from the date of execution of the
Contract, name and depute a qualified engineer having sufficient experience in carrying
out work of similar nature, to whom the equipments, materials, if any, shall be issued
and instructions for works given. The Contractor shall also provide, to the satisfaction of
the Engineer-in-Charge, sufficient and qualified staff to superintend the execution of the
Works, competent sub-agents, foreman and leading hands including those specially
qualified by previous experience to supervise the type of works comprised in the
Contract, in such manner as will ensure Work of the best quality and expeditious
working. Whenever in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, additional properly
qualified supervision staff is considered necessary, they shall be employed by the
contractor without additional charges on account thereof. The Contractor shall ensure
to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge that Subcontractors, if any shall provide
competent and efficient supervision over the work entrusted to them.
3.19.2 If and whenever any of the Contractor's or Subcontractor's agents, sub-agents,
assistants, foreman or others employees are, in the opinion of Engineer-in-Charge,
guilty of any misconduct or are incompetent or insufficiently qualified or negligent in the
performance of their duties hereunder or that in the opinion of the Owner or Engineerin-Charge, it is undesirable for administrative or any other reason for such person or
persons to be employed for executing the Works, the Contractor, if so directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge, shall at once remove such person or persons from employment
thereon or services. Any person or persons so removed from the Works shall not again
be employed or appointed in connection with the Works without the written permission
of the Engineer-in-Charge. Any person so removed from the Works shall be
immediately replaced by the Contractor, at its own expense, by another qualified and
competent substitute, should the contractor be requested to repatriate any person
removed from the works he shall do so and shall bear all costs in connection herewith.
3.19.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper behavior of all its staff and its
Subcontractor(s) staff, foreman, workmen, and others and shall exercise a proper
degree of control over each of them and in particular and without prejudice to the said
generality, the Contractor shall be bound to prohibit and prevent any employees from
tress-passing or acting in any way detrimental or prejudicial to the interest of the Owner
or the community or of the properties or occupiers of land and properties in the
neighborhood and in the event of such employee so trespassing, the Contractor shall
be responsible there for and relieve the Owner of all consequent claims, actions, losses
and/or damages or injury or any other grounds whatsoever. The decision of the
Engineer-in-Charge upon any matter arising under this Clause shall be final and
binding on the Contractor.
3.19.4 If and when required by the Owner, all Contractors personnel entering upon the
Owners premises shall be properly identified by badges of a type acceptable to the
Owner which must be worn by such personnel, all times during the period they are at
the Owners premises.
3.21
No part of the Contract nor any share or interest there shall in any manner or
degree be transferred assigned sublet by the Contractor directly or indirectly to
any firm or corporation whosoever except as provided for in the succeeding subclause, without the consent writing of the Owner.
ii)
Subcontractors for temporary works etc. - The Owner may at its discretion give
written consent to subcontractor for execution of any part of the works at the
site, being entered into by the Contractor provided each individual subcontract
is submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge before entered into and is approved by
him.
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
No remedy for action taken under this clause: No action taken by the Owner
under the clause shall release the Contractor of any of its liabilities under the
Contract or give rise to any right to compensation, extension of time or otherwise
failing which the Owner shall have the right to remove such subcontractors from
the site.
The Contractor shall be responsible to cause its Subcontractors to comply with
all Applicable Laws and permits, and shall assume liability for all acts or
omissions of any Subcontractor as if the acts or omissions were the acts or
omissions of the Contractor. All references to the acts, omissions or negligence
of the Contractor shall be deemed to include a reference to the acts, omissions
or negligence of its Subcontractors.
The Operator shall ensure that all agreements with Subcontractors include
language which will effectively subjugate such agreements to the Contract. The
Contractor shall also ensure that appropriate language shall be included in all
such agreements with Subcontractors which ensures that all rights/ benefits
accruable to the Contractor out of such agreements is irrevocably assigned to
the benefit of the Owner and the Owner shall always have the right to enforce
such beneficial rights.
3.22
POWER OF ENTRY
If the Contractor shall not commence the Work in the manner previously described in
the Contract or if he shall, at any time in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge.
i)
ii)
iii)
suspend the Work or the Works for a period of seven days without authority from the
Engineer-in-Charge or
iv)
Fail to carryout and execute the Works to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge, or
v)
vi)
Commit or suffer or permit any other breach of any of the provisions of the Contract
Documents on its part to be performed or observed or persist in any of the above
mentioned breaches of the Contract for the seven days, after notice in writing shall
have been given to the Contractor by the Engineer-in-Charge requiring such breach to
be remedied, or
.
vii)
viii)
During the continuance of the Contract, become bankrupt, is generally unable to pay
debts as they become due, make any arrangement or composition with its creditors, or
permit any execution to be levied or go into liquidation whether compulsory or voluntary
(including but not limited to appointment of a provisional manager, trustee or liquidator)
not being merely a voluntary liquidation for the purpose of amalgamation or
reconstruction then in any such case.
Then in any one or more instances mentioned above, the Owner shall have the right to
terminate the Contract in accordance with the provisions of this Contract.
The Owner shall have, without prejudice to other rights and remedies available to it
under the Contract Documents, Applicable Laws or in equity, the right to enter upon the
works and take possession thereof and of the materials, temporary works, Equipments
(belonging to the Contractor), and stock thereon, and to revoke the Contractor's license
to use the same, and to complete the works, by its agents, other contractor or
workmen, or to relate the same upon any terms and to such other person, firm or
corporation as the Owner in its absolute discretion may think proper to employ and for
the purpose aforesaid to use or authorize the use of any materials, temporary works,
Equipments and stock as aforesaid without making payment or allowance to the
Contractor for the said material other than such as may be certified in writing by the
Engineer-in-Charge to be reasonable, and without making any payment or allowance to
the Contractor for the use of the temporary said works, Equipments and stock or being
liable for any loss of damage thereto, and if the Owner shall by reason of its taking
possession of the works or of the works being completed by other contractors (due
account being taken of any such extra work or works which may be omitted) then the
Owner shall, without prejudice to the other rights and remedies, have the right to deduct
amount of such excess as certified by the Engineer-in-Charge from the Security
Deposit, Contract Performance Guarantee and/or any money which may be due for
work done by the Contractor under the Contract and not paid for. Any deficiency shall
forthwith be made good and paid to the Owner by the Contractor and the Owner shall
have power to sell in such manner and for such price as he may think fit all or any of
the Equipments, materials etc. constructed by or belonging to and to recoup and retain
the said deficiency or any part thereof out of the proceeds of the sale.
3.23
3.23.1 Without repugnance to any other condition, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
executing the Work in close co-operation and co-ordinate the works with other
contractors at the Site or their authorized representatives.
3.23.2 The Contractor shall conform in all respects with the provisions of any Applicable Laws
or bye-laws of any local or duly constituted authorities or public bodies which may be
applicable form time to time to the Works or any temporary works. The Contractor shall
keep the Owner indemnified against all penalties and liabilities of every kind arising out
of non-adherence to such statutes, ordinances, Applicable Laws, rules, regulations etc.
3.24
3.24.1 The Contractor shall have to execute the Work in such place and condition where other
agencies will also be engaged for other works. No claim shall be entertained to works
being executed in the above circumstances.
3.25
NOTICES
3.25.1 Any notice, letter, documents to be given hereunder by the Owner or the Engineer-inCharge may be served on the Contractor or its duly authorized representative at the Site
or may be served by registered mail direct to the address furnished by the Contractor.
.
Proof of issue of any such notice could be conclusive of the Contractor having been duly
informed of all contents therein.
Any communications to be given by the Contractor to the Owner shall be valid when
given in writing by registered mail and speed post directed to the address furnished by
the Owner.
Any such notices and other documents shall:
(a)
(b)
3.26
3.27
3.28
if delivered by hand, be deemed to have been given and received at the place
of receipt on the date of delivery;
if mailed, be deemed to have been given and received at the place of receipt
on the date of actual receipt. In the event of postal disruption, such notices or
documents must either be delivered personally or sent by facsimile
transmission.
The Owner reserves the right to distribute the Work between more than one
contractor. The Contractor shall cooperate and afford other contractors
reasonable opportunity for access to the works for the carriage and storage of
materials and execution of their works.
ii)
Wherever the Work being done by any department of the Owner or by other
contractors appointed by the Owner is contingent upon work covered by the
Contract, the respective rights of the various interests involved shall be
determined by the Engineer-in-Charge to secure the completion of the various
portions of the work in general harmony.
ii)
Should the Contract be determined under sub-clause (i) of this clause and the
Contractor claims payments to compensate expenditure incurred by him in the
expectation of completing the whole of the Work, the Owner shall consider and
admit such claim as are deemed fair and reasonable and are supported by
vouchers to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. The Owner's decision
on the necessity and propriety of any such expenditure shall be final and
conclusive and binding on the contractor. The Contractors submission of the
Tender shall be considered to be its deemed acceptance of all terms of the
Contract Documents including this clause.
3.28.1 The Contractor, if licensed under and patent covering equipment, machinery, materials
or compositions of matter to be used or supplied or methods and process to be
practiced or employed in the performance of the Contract, agrees to pay all royalties and
license fees which may be due with respect thereto. If any equipment, machinery,
materials or composition of matters, to be used or supplied or methods and processed
to be practiced or employed in the performance of the Contract is covered by a patent
under which the Contractor is not licensed then the Contractor before supplying or using
the equipment, machinery materials, composition method or processes shall obtain such
.
licenses and pay such royalties and license fees as may be necessary for performances
of the Contract. In the event the Contractor fails to pay any such royalty or obtain any
such license, any suit for infringement of such patents which is brought against the
contractors or the Owner as a result of such failure will be defended by the Contractor at
its own expense and the Contractor will pay any damages and costs awarded in such
suit. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner if the Contractor has acquired
knowledge of any plant under which a suit for infringement could be reasonably brought
because of the use by the Owner of any equipment, machinery, materials, process,
methods to the supplied hereunder. The Contractor agrees to and does hereby grant to
Owner, together with the right to extend the same to any of the subsidiaries of the
Owner as irrevocable, royalty-free license to use in any country, and invention made by
the Contractor or its employee in or as a result of the performance of the work under the
Contract.
3.28.2 The drawings, blue prints, tracings, reproducibles, models plans, specification and
copies thereof, furnished by the Owner as well as drawings, tracings, reproducibles,
plans, specifications, design, calculations etc. prepared by the Contractor for the
purposes of execution of works covered in or connected with the Contract shall be the
property of the Owner and shall not be used for any other work but are to be delivered to
the Owner at the completion of the Contract.
3.24.1 Where so desired by Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor agrees to respect the secrecy
of any document, drawings etc. issued to him for the execution of the Contract, and
restrict access to such documents, drawings etc. to the minimum and further, the
Contractor agrees to execute an individual SECRECY agreement from each or any
person employed by the Contractor having access to such documents, drawings and to
any other agency or individual without the written Approval by Engineer-in-Charge.
3.29
LIENS
3.29.1 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Contract, if at any time, there
should be evidence or any lien or claim for which the Owner might have become liable
and which is chargeable to the Contractor, the Owner shall, without prejudice to other
rights and remedies available to the Owner, have the right to retain out of any payment
then due or thereafter to become due an amount sufficient to completely indemnify the
Owner against such lien or claim and if such lien or claim be valid the Owner may pay
and discharge the same and deduct the amount so paid from any money which may be
or may become due and payable to the Contractor. If any lien or claim remain unsettled
after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund or pay to the Owner all moneys
that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien or claim including all
costs and reasonable expenses.
3.29.2 Contractor will not disclose details of the work to any person or persons except those
engaged in its performance, and only to the extent required for the particular portion of
the work being done.
3.29.3 Contractor will not give any items concerning details of the work to the press or a news
disseminating agency without prior written Approval from. Contractor shall not take any
pictures on site without written Approval of Engineer-in-Charge.
3.30
OPERATION OF CONTRACT
impair same, or the right of the Owner or the Contractor, as the case may be, at any
time to avail itself of same.
3.31
3.31.1 Scope: The general character and the scope of the work is illustrated and defined by the
Annexure SOW, the Specifications and the Bills of Quantities herewith attached and the
signed Drawings. If the Contractor shall find any discrepancy in or divergence between
the Drawings and or the Contract Bills he shall immediately give to the Owner a written
notice specifying the discrepancy or divergence and the Owner shall issue instructions
in regard thereto, which shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
3.31.2 Extent: The Contractor shall carry out and complete the work in every respect in
accordance with the Contract Documents, and with the directions of and to the
reasonable satisfaction of the Owner. The Owner may in its absolute discretion and from
time to time issue further drawings, details and/or written instructions, written directions
and written explanations all of which are collectively referred to as Owner's instructions.
All such Drawings and instructions shall be consistent with the Contract Documents, true
developments thereof and reasonably inferable there from.
3.31.3 Intent: The intention of the Document is to include all labour and materials, equipment
and transportation necessary for the proper execution of the Work. All such Drawings
and instructions shall be consistent with the Contract Documents, true developments
thereof and reasonably inferable there from. Materials of work described in words, which
so applied, have a well-known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such
recognized standard.
3.31.4 The descriptions given in the Schedule of Quantities shall, unless otherwise stated, be
held to include wastage on materials, carriage and cartage, carrying and return of
empties, hoisting, setting, fitting and fixing in position and all other labourers necessary
in and for the full and entire execution and completion of the work as aforesaid in
accordance with good practice and recognized principles.
3.32
TYPE OF CONTRACT
3.33
SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES
3.33.1 The Schedule of Quantities given in the Contract Bill is provisional and is meant to
indicate the intent of the work and to provide a uniform basis for tendering.
3.33.2 The Owner reserves the right to increase or decrease the tendered quantities or revise
specifications, drawings, designs of any or every item or delete them at any stage of
work. The successful Bidder claim for compensation or damages on account of these
shall not be entertained. Such deviations will be adjusted at the rates contained in the
Contractor at prevailing market rates, if the rates are not available in the Contract, by
issuing variation order(s). In case it becomes necessary for the Owner to temporarily
suspend or postpone the work, partly, or fully due to unforeseen circumstances, the
Owner shall not be liable for any compensation on account of resultant delays.
3.33.3 Any error in description or in quantity or omission of items from Contract Bill shall not
vitiate the Contract but shall be treated as a variation.
3.34
CONTRACT SUM
3.34.1 The Contract sum shall not be adjusted or altered in any way whatsoever otherwise than
in accordance with the express provisions of these conditions and subject to any error
whether of Arithmetic or not in the computation of the Contract Sum shall be deemed to
have been accepted by the parties hereto.
.
3.35
CONTRACT BILLS
3.35.1 The quality and quantity of the work included in the contract sum shall be deemed to be
that which is set out in the Contract Bills which Bills unless otherwise expressly stated in
respect of any specified item shall be deemed to have been prepared in accordance
with the principles of the standard method of measurement of building works last before
issued by the Indian Standard Institution but same as aforesaid nothing contained in the
Contract Bills shall override, modify or affect in any way whatsoever the application or
interpretation of that which is contained in these conditions.
3.35.2 Any error in description or in a quantity or omission of items from the Contract Bills shall
not vitiate the Contract but shall be corrected and deemed to be a variation required by
the Owner.
3.36
3.37
3.38
3.38.1 The Owner reserves its right to cancel the Contract in the event of one or more of the
following situations, If the Contractor:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
shall offer or give or agree to give to any person in the Owner service or to any
other person on its behalf any gift or consideration of any kind as an inducement
or reward for doing or forbearing to do or for having done or forborne to do any
acting relation to the obtaining or execution of this or any other contractor for the
Owner: or
shall enter into a contract with the Owner in connection with which commission
has been paid or agreed to be paid by him or to his knowledge, unless the
particulars of any such commission and the terms of payment thereof have been
previously disclosed in writing to the Accepting Authority/ Engineer-in-Charge ;
or
shall obtain a contract with the Owner as a result of wrong tendering or other
non bonafide methods of competitive tendering ; or
being an individual, or a firm, , such individual or any partner of the firm (as
applicable) shall at any time be adjudged bankrupt, insolvent, generally unable
to pay debts or have a receiving order or order for administration of his estate
made against him or shall take or become subject to any proceedings for
bankruptcy, liquidation or composition (other than a solvent restructuring or
reorganization) under any Applicable Laws relating to insolvency or bankruptcy
for the time being force or make any conveyance or assignment of his/its assets
or composition or arrangement for the benefit of his/its creditors or purport so to
.
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
3.38.2 The Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy which shall have
accrued or shall accrue hereafter to the Owner, by a notice in writing to cancel the
Contract as whole or only such items of work in default from the Contract.
3.38.3 The Engineer-in-Charge shall on such cancellation by the Ownerhave powers to:
(i)
(ii)
3.38.4 The Owner in the event of cancellation will be entitled to procure the requirement in the
open market and recover excess payment over and above the Contractor's agreed
price, if any, from the Contractor, reserving to itself the right to forfeit the Security
Deposit/ Contract Performance Guarantee, if any, made by the Contractor against the
Contract.
3.38.5 On cancellation of the Contract in full or in part, the EIC shall determine what amount, if
any, is recoverable from the Contractor for completion of the works or part of the works
or in case the works or part of the works is not to be completed the loss of damage
suffered by the Owner on account of the said non performance. In determining the
aforesaid amounts credit shall be given to the Contractor for the value of the work
executed by him up to the time of cancellation, the value of Contractors materials if any,
taken over and incorporated in the work and use of plant and machinery, if any
belonging to the Contractor. The Owner in that event will be entitled to procure the
requirement in the open market and recover excess payment over the Contractor's
agreed price, if any, from the Contractor, reserving to itself the right to forfeit the Security
Deposit/ Contract Performance Guarantee.
3.38.6 The Contractor is aware that the said goods are required by the Owner for the ultimate
purpose of materials production and that non-delivery may cause loss of production and
consequently loss of profit to the Owner. In this event of the Owner exercising the option
to claim damages for non-delivery other than by way of difference between the market
price and the contract price. The Contractor shall pay to the Owner, fair compensation to
be agreed upon between the Owner and the Contractor.
3.38.7 The provision of this clause shall not prejudice the right of the Owner from invoking the
provisions of clause 'Delayed Delivery' as aforesaid.
.
3.38.8 Any excess expenditure incurred or to be incurred by the Owner in completing the works
or part of the works or the excess loss or damages suffered or may be suffered by the
Owner as aforesaid after allowing such credit shall without prejudice to any other
contractor on any account, and if such moneys are not sufficient the Contractor shall be
called upon in writing and shall be liable to pay the same within 7 days.
3.38.9 If the Contractor shall fail to pay the required sum within the aforesaid period of 30 days,
the Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right to sell any or all of the Contractors unused
materials, Equipments, implements, temporary building etc. and apply the proceeds of
sale thereof towards the satisfaction of any sums due from the Contractor under the
Contract and if thereafter there be any balance outstanding from the Contractor, it shall
be recovered in accordance with the provisions of the Contract.
3.38.10 Any sums in excess of the amounts due to the Owner and unsold materials,
Equipments, etc. shall be returned to the Contractor provided always that if cost or
anticipated cost of completion by the Owner of the Works or part of the Works is less
than the amount which the Contractor would have been paid had he completed the
works or part of the works, such benefits shall not accrue to the Contractor.
3.39
3.40
3.41
SECTION IV
PERFORMANCE OF WORK
4.1
EXECUTION OF WORKS
4.1.1
All the Works shall be executed in strict conformity with the provisions of the Contract
Documents, Applicable Laws and with such explanatory detailed Drawings,
Specifications, and instructions as may be furnished from time to time to the Contractor
by the Engineer-in-Charge whether mentioned in the Contract or not. The Contractor
shall be responsible for ensuring that Works throughout are executed in the most
substantial, proper and workman like manner with the quality of material and
workmanship in strict accordance with the Specifications and to the entire satisfaction
of the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.1.2
Wherever it is mentioned in the Specifications that the Contractor shall perform certain
Work or provide certain facilities/ materials, it is understood that the Contractor shall do,
so at its cost, risk and expense.
4.1.3
The materials, design and workmanship shall satisfy the relevant Indian Standards, the
job specification contained herein and codes referred to. Where the job specification
stipulate requirements in addition to those contained in the standard codes and
specifications, such additional requirements shall also be satisfied.
4.2
4.3
4.3.1
The completion of the Work shall entail working in all season including the monsoon
season also. The Contractor must maintain adequate labour force required for
executing the Work and execute the same as per the time schedule prescribed in the
Contract. No extra rate will be considered for work executed in monsoon season.
4.3.2
During monsoon and other period, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to keep
the working Site free from stranded water/ water logging, at its own cost and expense.
4.4
4.5
4.5.1
stoppage of work or restrictions would be paid, and the rates quoted for the various
items of work should cover the cost of all such contingencies and eventualities.
Substantial structures and utilities exist both above ground and underground, adjacent
to the work site. (The Work may get restrained by the existence of such structures and
utilities.) Special care is necessary in transportation, storage, working of Equipments
and other activities to protect the existing features and prevent damage to the Owners
facility. Necessary protective structures, barricades etc. have to be erected at various
places as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. No extra payment for such protective Works
will be made by the Owner unless specially provided in the Schedule of Rates
Approved by the Owner.
Owner will extend all necessary help for co-ordination with external agencies, if any, if
requested for by the Contractor.
4.5.2
The working time or the time of work is 48 hours per week. Overtime work is permitted
in cases of need and the Owner will not compensate the Contractor for the same. Shift
working at 2 or 3 shifts per day may become necessary and the Contractor should take
this aspect into consideration for formulating his rates for quotation. No extra claims will
be entertained by the Owner on any account whatsoever.
4.5.3
The Contractor must arrange for the placement of workers in such a way that the
delayed completing of the work or any part thereof for any reasons whatsoever will not
affect their proper employment. The Owner will not entertain any claim for idle time
payment whatsoever.
4.5.4
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, reports at regular intervals regarding the
state and progress of Work. The details and performa of the report will mutually be
agreed after the award of Contract.
4.6
4.6.1
Where Drawings are attached with the Tender, these shall be for the general guidance
of the Contractor to enable him to visualize the type of work contemplated and scope of
work involved. The Contractor will be deemed to have studied the Drawings and formed
an idea about the work involved.
4.6.2
Detailed working drawings on the basis of which actual execution of the Work is to
proceed will be furnished from time to time by the Owner or the Engineer-in-Charge or
his representative during the progress of the Work. The Contractor shall be deemed to
have gone through the drawings supplied to him thoroughly and carefully and in
conjunction with all other connected drawings and bring to the notice of the Engineerin-Charge, discrepancies, if any, therein before actually carrying out the Work. In case
of such discrepancies, the Operator shall act in accordance with the EICs instructions.
4.6.3
Copies of all detailed working drawings relating to the Works shall be kept at the
Contractor's office of the Site and shall be made available to the Engineer-in-Charge at
any time during the term of the Contract. The Drawings and other documents issued by
the Owner shall be returned to the Owner on completion of the Works. Reference is
also invited to enclosed Drawings and other Contract Documents.
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
Where Approval of Drawings before execution of a Work has been specified, it shall be
the Contractor's responsibility to have these drawings prepared as per the directions of
Engineer-in-Charge and get the same Approved before proceeding with such Work.
Any changes that may have become necessary in these drawings during the execution
of the Work shall have to carried out by the Contractor to the satisfaction of Engineer.
in-charge at no extra cost. All final Drawings shall bear the certification stamps as
indicated below duly signed by both the Contractor and the Engineer-in-Charge.
"Certified true for
.......................................................Project
Agreement No. ...............................................
Signed
CONTRACTOR
ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE
4.7.3
A period of 3 weeks from the date of receipt shall be required for Approval of drawings
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.8
4.8.1
The Engineer-in-Charge shall furnish the Contractor with only the four corners of the
Site and a level bench mark and the Contractor shall set out the works and shall
provide efficient staff for the said purpose and shall be solely responsible for the
accuracy of such setting out.
4.8.2
The Contractor shall provide, fix and be responsible for the maintenance of all stakes,
templates, level marks, profiles and other similar things and shall take all necessary
precaution to prevent their removal or disturbance and shall be responsible for the
consequences of such removal or disturbance should the same take place and for their
efficient and timely reinstatement. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the
maintenance of all existing survey marks, boundary marks, distance marks and center
line marks, either existing or supplied and fixed by the Contractor. The work shall be set
out to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. The Approval thereof or joining in
setting out the work, shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities.
4.8.3
Before beginning the works, the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense, provide
all necessary reference and level posts, pegs, bamboos, flags, ranging, rods, strings
and other materials for proper layout of the Work in accordance with the scheme, for
bearing marks acceptable to the Engineer-in-Charge. The center longitudinal or face
lines and cross lines shall be marked by means of small masonry pillars. Each pillar
shall have distinct mark at the centre to enable theodolite to be set over it. No work
shall be started until all these points are checked and Approved by the Engineer-inCharge in writing but such Approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his
responsibilities. The Contractor shall also provide all labour, material and other
facilities, as necessary, for the proper checking of layout and inspection of the points
while executing the Work.
4.8.4
Pillars bearing geodetic marks located at the Site of units of work under construction
should be protected and fenced by the Contractor.
4.8.5
On completion of works, the Contractor must submit the geodetic documents according
to which the Work was carried out to the Owner/ EIC for its confirmation/ observations.
4.9
4.10
4.10.1 The Contractor shall procure and provide the whole of the materials required for
executing the Work including tools, tackles and Equipments for the completion and
maintenance of the works except the materials which will be issued by Owner and shall
make his own arrangement for procuring such materials and for the transport thereof.
The Owner may give necessary recommendation to the respective authority if so
.
desired by the Contractor but assumes no responsibility of any nature in this regard.
The Owner will insist on the procurement of materials which bear ISI stamp and / or
which are supplied by reputed suppliers borne on DGS & D list.
4.10.2 All materials procured should meet the Specifications given in the Contract Documents.
The Engineer-in-Charge may, at his discretion, ask for samples and test certificates for
any batch of any material procured. Before procuring, the Contractor should get the
Approval of Engineer-in-Charge for any material to be used for the Works.
4.10.3 Manufacturer's certificate shall be submitted for all materials supplied by the Contractor.
If, however, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge any tests are required to be
conducted on the materials supplied by the Contractor, these will be arranged by the
Contractor, promptly at his own cost and expense.
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.15.1 The Engineer-in-Charge shall have power to make any alterations in, omissions from,
additions to or substitution for, the Schedule of Rates, the original Specifications,
Drawings, designs and instructions that may appear to him to be necessary or
advisable during the progress of the Work and the Contractor shall be bound to carry
out such altered, extra, new items of work in accordance with any instructions which
may be given to him in writing signed by the Engineer-in-charge and such alterations,
omissions, additions or substitutions shall not invalidate the Contract in any manner
whatsoever and any altered additional or substituted work which the Contractor may be
directed to do in the manner above specified as part of the Work shall be carried out by
the Contractor on the same conditions in all respects on which he agreed to do the
main work. The time for completion of work may be extended for the part of the
particular job at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge, for only such alterations,
additions or substitutions of the work, as he may consider as just and reasonable. The
rates for such additional, altered or substituted work under this clause shall be worked
out in accordance with the following provisions:
4.16
a)
If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are specified in the
Contract, the Contractor is bound to carry out the additional, altered or
substituted work at the same rates as are specified in the Contract.
b)
If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are not specifically
provided in the Contract, the rates will be derived from the rates for similar
class of works as specified in the Contract. The opinion of the Engineer-inCharge, as to whether the rates can be reasonably so derived from the
items in the Contract, will be final and binding on the Contractor.
c)
d)
Provision contained in sub-clause (a), (b) & (c) above will apply where the
value of alterations, additions and substitutions do not exceed plus or minus
25% of total contract value.
4.17
ABNORMAL RATES
The Bidder is expected to quote rate for each item after careful analysis of cost
involved for the completion of Work, considering all Specifications and conditions of
Contract. This will avoid loss of profit or gain, in case of curtailment or change of
specification for any item. In case it is noticed that the rates for any item, quoted by the
Bidder are unusually high or unusually low it will be sufficient cause for the rejection of
the Tender, unless the Owner is convinced about the reasonableness of the rates on
scrutiny of the analysis for such rate to be furnished by the Bidder on demand and
before the execution of the Contract.
4.18
INSPECTION OF WORK
.
4.18.1
The Engineer-in-Charge will have full power and authority to inspect the Works at any
time wherever in progress either on the Site or at the Contractor's premises /
workshops wherever situated, premises / workshops of any person, firm or corporation
where work in connection with the Contract may be in hand or where materials are
being or are to be supplied, and the Contractor shall afford or procure for the Engineerin-Charge every facility and assistance to carry out such inspection. The Contractor
shall, at all times during the usual working hours and at all other time for which
reasonable notice of the intention of the Engineer-in-Charge or his representative to
visit the Works have been given to the Contractor, either himself be present to receive
order and instructions or post his authorized representative/ Site In-Charge duly
accredited in writing for the purpose. Orders given to the Contractor's agent shall be
considered to have the same force as if they had been given to the Contractor himself.
The Contractor shall give not less than seven days, notice in writing to the Engineer-inCharge before covering up or placing any work beyond reach of inspection and
measurement. In the event of breach of above the same shall be at Contractor's risk
and expenses for carrying out such measurement or inspection.
4.18.2
No material shall be dispatched by the Contractor before obtaining the Approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge in writing..
The Contractor is to provide, at all times during the execution of the Work and the
maintenance period, proper means of access with ladders, gangways, etc. and the
necessary attendance to move and adopt, as directed for inspection or measurement of
the works by the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.19
4.20
4.20.1 All workmanship shall be of the respective kinds described in the Contract Documents
and in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge and shall be
subjected from time to time to such test at Contractor's cost as the Engineer-in-Charge
may direct at the place of manufacturer or fabrication or on the Site or at all or any such
places. The Contractor shall provide assistance, instruments, labour and materials as
are normally required for examining, measuring and testing any workmanship as may
be selected and required by the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.20.2 All the tests necessary in connection with the execution of the Work as decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge, shall be carried out at the field testing laboratory of the Owner by
paying the charges as decided by the Owner from time to time. In case of nonavailability of testing facility with the Owner, the required test shall be carried out at the
cost and expense of the Contractor at Government or any other testing laboratory as
directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.20.3 If any tests are required to be carried out in connection with the work or materials or
workmanship not supplied by the Contractor, such tests shall be carried out by the
Contractor as per the instructions of Engineer-in-Charge and cost of such tests shall be
reimbursed by the Owner.
4.21
SAMPLES
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-in-Charge for Approval when requested or
if required by the Specifications, adequate samples of all materials and finishes to be
used in the Work. Such samples shall be submitted before the Work is commenced and
in ample time to permit tests and examinations thereof. The Contractor shall ensure
that all materials furnished and finishing applied in actual Work shall be fully identical to
the Approved samples.
.
4.22
4.23
4.24
SUSPENSION OF WORKS
i)
Subject to the provisions of sub-para (ii) of this clause, the Contractor shall, if
ordered in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge or his representative temporarily
suspend the works or any part thereof for such period and such time as so
ordered and shall not, after receiving such written order, proceed with the Work
therein ordered to be suspended, until he shall have received a written order to
proceed therewith. The Contractor shall not be entitled to claim compensation
for any loss or damage sustained by him by reason of temporary suspension of
the Works aforesaid. An extension of time for completion corresponding with the
delay caused by any such suspension of the works as aforesaid will be granted
to the Contractor, should he apply for the same, provided that suspension was
not consequent to any default or failure on the part of the Contractor and
provided such extension does not cause any losses to the Owner on account of
shut down of Owners facility for more than the stipulated time.
ii )
4.25
notice. Such possession or use shall not be deemed to be an acceptance of any work
completed in accordance with the Contract. If such prior possession or use by the
Engineer-in-Charge delays the progress of work, equitable adjustment in the time of
completion will be made and the Contract shall be deemed to be modified accordingly,
at the option of the Owner.
4.26
4.26.1 The Contractor shall guarantee the work executed for a period of 12 months from the
date of issue of Completion Certificate. Any damage or defect, that may lie
undiscovered at the time of issue of Completion Certificate, connected in any way with
the Equipment or materials supplied by him or in the workmanship shall be rectified or
replaced by the Contractor at his own cost and expense as deemed necessary by the
Engineer-in-Charge or in default, the Engineer-in-Charge may cause the same made
good by other workmen and deduct expenses (for which the certificate of Engineer-inCharge shall be final) from any sums that may be then or at any time thereafter, become
due to the Contractor or from his Security Deposit / Contract Performance Guarantee.
4.26.2 If the Contractor feels that any variation in work or quality of materials or proportions
would be beneficial or necessary to fulfill the guarantees called for, he shall bring this to
the notice of the Engineer-in-Charge in writing. The work will not be considered as
complete and taken over by the Owner until all the temporary works, labour, Site office
and staff colonies etc. constructed by the Contractor is removed and work site cleaned
to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
4.26.3 Care of Work - From the commencement to completion of Works, the Contractor shall
take full responsibility for the care of all Works including all temporary work, and in case
any damage or loss or injury happens to the Work or any part thereof or to any
temporary work, from any cause whatsoever, the Contractor shall at its own cost and
expense, repair and make good the same, so that at completion the work shall be in
good order and in conformity in every respect with the requirements of the Contract, the
Engineer-in-Charge's instructions and the Contract Documents.
4.26.4 Defects prior to taking over - At any time, before the work is taken over, the Engineerin-Charge shall
a)
Decide that any work done or materials used by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor is defective or not in accordance with the Contract or the
Approval issued by EIC or that the Works or any portion thereof are defective
or do not fulfill the requirements of Contract (all such matters being herein after
called 'Defects' in this clause) and
b)
In the case the Contractor shall fail to do so, the Owner may subject to Clause 3.5.7
take, at the cost and expense of the Contractor, steps such as may in all circumstances
be reasonable to make good such Defects. The expenditure, so incurred by the Owner
shall be recovered from the amount due to the Contractor or from the Security
Deposit/Contract Performance Guarantee. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge with
regard to the amount to be recovered from the Contractor will be final and binding on
the Contractor. As soon as the Works have been completed in accordance unless
otherwise approved by the EIC, in writing. If any defect is not, remedied within a
reasonable time, the Owner may proceed to do the Work at the Contractor's cost, risk
and expense and deduct from the final bill or the Security Deposit such amount as may
be decided by the Owner. If by reason of any default on the part of the Contractor a
Completion Certificate has not been issued in respect of every portion of the Work
within one month after the date fixed in the Contract for the completion of the Works,
the Owner shall be at his liberty to use the Works or any portion thereof in respect of
.
which a Completion Certificate has not been issued provided that the Works or the
portion thereof so used as aforesaid shall be afforded reasonable opportunity for
completing these works for the issue of Completion Certificate.
SECTION V
CONTRACTORS FIELD ORGANIZATION/ SUB-CONTRACTORS AND EQUIPMENTS
5.1
5.2
5.3
provided by the Contractor for the due performance of the Contract and as instructed by
Owner/ EIC. The EIC, Clerk of works or a personnel authorized by EIC may use any or
all measurement instruments or tools belonging to the Contractor as and when he
chooses to, for checking the complete Works as well as the work in progress.
The Contractor will provide all scaffolding and ladders that may be necessary for taking
measurement at Site
The Contractor should provide all the apparatus required for conducting on site tests.
The Contractor shall provide the following Equipments and machinery in good working
condition and in the required number at the Site during the entire period of the Contract,
as and when required:
5.4
(i)
(ii)
The Owner shall not, at any time be liable for the loss of or injury to any of the
Equipment, plant, machinery, temporary works or materials which have been
deemed to become the property of the Owner under sub-clause (i) of this
Clause.
The Contractor, on the date of award of the Contract, shall name and depute a
qualified engineer having sufficient experience in carrying out work of similar
nature to whom the equipments, materials, if any, shall be issued and
instructions for Works given. The Contractor shall also provide, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge sufficient and qualified staff to
superintend the execution of the Works, competent sub-agents, supervisor and
leading hands including those specially qualified by previous experience to
supervise the type of Works comprised in the Contract in such manner as will
ensure work of the best quality and expeditious working. Whenever in the
opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, additional properly qualified supervision staff
is considered necessary, they shall be employed by the Contractor without
additional charges on account thereof. The Contractor shall ensure to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge that Subcontractors, if any shall provide
competent and efficient supervision over the Work entrusted to them.
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.5
All Contractors personnel entering upon the Owners premises shall be properly
identified by badges issued by the Owner which must be worn all times on
Owners premises.
LABOUR :
.
The Contractor shall employ labour in sufficient number either directly or through
Subcontractors, when such subletting is permitted, to maintain the required rate of
progress and of quality to ensure workmanship or the degree specified in the Contract
and to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
The Contractor shall employ no child labour and shall comply with the provisions of
Child Labour (Prohibition and Regulation Act) 1986. If female labour is engaged the
Contractor shall make necessary provisions for safeguarding small children and
keeping them clear of the site of operation. Labours may be permitted to stay at the
designated area at the Site. However any compliance required to be made or any
deposits to be paid with local regulating authorities shall be done / borne by the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for payment of all wages, salaries, allowances and
payments of whatever nature due and payable to the workman, staff, officers, and
technicians engaged by him for the purpose of completion of the Contract, directly
without intervention of any intermediaries and without any liability to the Owner.
The Contractor also undertakes that no amount by way of commission or otherwise is
deducted by him or intermediaries from the wages of the workmen. It is specifically
understood and agreed between the parties that there is no privity of contract between
the Owner and the workmen, staff, Subcontractors and officers engaged by the
Contractor and that it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor for payment of
dues to such workmen, staff and officers. It is further clarified that these workmen,
staff, officers etc., hired by the Contractor shall not have any claims of any nature
against the Owner and all their claims shall lie only against the Contractor or the
Subcontractor, as the case may be.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-in-Charge fort nightly a distributions return
of the number and descriptions by trade of the people employed on the Works. The
Contractor shall also submit on the 4th and 19th of every month to the Engineer-inCharge a true statement showing in respect of the second half of the preceding month
and first half of the current month (i) the circumstance under which they happened and
the extent of damage and injury caused by them (ii) the member of female workers who
have been allowed maternity benefits provided under the provisions of the Maternity
Benefit Act, 1961 and the rules framed thereunder. In the event of any loss/ damages
caused to the Owner on account of the failure on the part of the Contractor to comply
with the applicable provisions of the Labour Regulations as detailed in Clause 5.7 below,
then without prejudice to the other rights available to the Owner under the terms of this
Contact, the Contractor shall be liable to indemnify the Owner and hold it harmless to
the extent of such loss/ damage suffered by the Owner (including payments if any made
by the Owner under and for observance of the Labour regulations). It is clarified that
such liability on the part of the Contractor shall be without prejudice to its right to claim
indemnity from its Subcontractor.
5.6
SUB-CONTRACTS
The whole of the Works included in the Contract shall be executed by the Contractor
to whom the Work is entrusted and the Contractor shall not directly or indirectly
transfer assign or undulate the Contract or any part share thereof or any interest
therein without the prior written consent of the Owner and no undertakings shall relieve
the Contractor from the full and entire responsibilities of the Contract or from active
superintendence of the Works during the progress.
The Contractor or his agent shall be in attendance at the superintend the executions of
Works with such additional assistance in each trade as the Engineer-in-Charge may
consider necessary. Order given to the Contractor's agent shall be considered to have
the same force as if they have been given to the Contractor himself.
The Contractor will be responsible for the complete co-ordination of all the Works
including that of Subcontractors, for arranging runs of all services and working to the
requirements and layouts of the specialists trades for execution of the Works.
.
5.7
(i)
(ii)
LABOUR REGULATIONS :
The Contractor will comply with, carry out, observe and perform all the provisions of
the Contract Labour (Regulations and Abolition Act), 1970(as amended from time to
time) and the rules framed thereunder, the Minimum Wages Act 1948 (as amended
from time to time) and the rules framed thereunder, the Payment of Wages Act 1936
(as amended from time to time) and the rules framed thereunder, the Workers
Compensation Act 1923 (as amended from time to time) and the rules framed
thereunder, the Employees Provident Fund And Miscellaneous Provision Act 1952 (as
amended from time to time) and the rules and the schemes framed thereunder, the
Employees State Insurance Act 1948 (as amended from time to time) and the rules
framed thereunder, the Maternity Benefit Act 1961 (as amended from time to time) and
the rules framed thereunder, the Industrial Dispute Act, 1947 (as amended from time
to time) and the rules framed thereunder, and all other applicable central as well as
state acts, laws, rules, regulations, notifications and orders, as may be in force from
time to time in relation to labour, contract labour, workmen, employees and conditions
of their service(Labour Regulations).
The Contractor shall also ensure and be responsible to see that any Subcontractor to
whom he may have sub-contracted any part of the Work also complies with, carries
out and observes all the provisions of the Labour Regulations.
If the Contractor or the Subcontractor(s) shall fail to comply with, carry out, observe or
perform or shall commit a breach of any of the provisions of the Labour Regulations,
and if the Owner there upon complies with the said Labour Regulations and for that
purpose has to make any payment or payments of any nature whatsoever to the
labour employed by the Contractor or by the Subcontractor or the Owner suffer any
losses, damages, costs, charges and expenses and the Contractor or any
Subcontractor of his fails to comply with, carry out, observe or perform or shall commit
a breach of any of the provisions of the Labour Regulations and as a result thereof the
Owner is prosecuted or any legal or other proceeding are taken against the Owner and
the Owner suffers any other losses or damages then the Contractor shall indemnify
and keep and hold the Owner and all its employees harmless and indemnified against
all such payments which the Owner may be required or may have to make whether to
the workman of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor or to any other party or parties
or authority or authorities whatsoever and against all such fines, penalties,
compensation, damages or other amounts as aforesaid and against all losses,
damages, cost, charges and expenses. It may be clarified that the above shall be
without prejudice to any other rights or remedies which the Owner may have against
the Contractor under the Contract Documents, Applicable Laws or in equity, for the
recovery of the aforesaid amounts mentioned in this Clause. The Owners hall further
be entitled to deduct all such amounts from any payments, that may be or may
become due to the Contractor under the Contract Documents or under any other
contract or otherwise howsoever. The EIC shall certify the amount or amounts to be so
paid by the Contractor to the Owner and his certificate in respect thereof shall be final
and binding on the Contractor.
.
5.8
If the Contractor after receipt of written notice from the EIC requiring compliance within
seven days fails to comply with such Drawings or EICs instructions or both as the EIC
may issue, Owner may employ and pay other persons to execute any such work
whatsoever that may be necessary to give effect to such Drawings on EICs
instructions and all cost incurred in connection therewith as certified by the EIC shall
become due to the Contractor under the Contract or may be recovered as a debt.
5.9
Without repugnance to any other condition, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
executing the Work and to work in close co-operation and co-ordinate the works with
other contractors or their authorized representatives and the Contractor will put up a
joint scheme, showing the arrangements, with other contractors / agencies for carrying
his portion of Work to the Engineer-in-Charge, and get the Approval. The Contractor
before finally submitting the schemes to the Engineer-in-Charge shall have the written
agreement to such scheme of the other agencies. The Engineer-in-Charge, before
communicating his Approval of the scheme, with any required modifications shall get the
final agreement of all the agencies, which shall be binding. No claim in any manner what
so ever shall be entertained on account of the above.
The Contractor shall conform in all respects, with the provisions of any statutory
regulations, ordinances or by laws of any local or duly constituted authorities or public
bodies which may be applicable from time to time to the Works or any temporary
works. The Contractor shall keep the Owner harmless and indemnified against any
and all penalties and liabilities of every kind arising out of non-adherence to any
Applicable Laws.
5.10
SECTION VI
CERTIFICATES AND PAYMENTS
6.1
i)
CONTRACTOR'S REMUNERATION
The price to be paid by the Owner to the Contractor for the whole of the Work to be
done and the performance of all the obligations undertaken by the Contractor under the
Contract Documents shall be ascertained by the application of the respective Schedule
of Rates (the inclusive nature of which is more particularly defined by way of application
but not of limitation, with the succeeding sub-clause of this clause) and payment to be
made accordingly for the Work actually executed and Approved by the Engineer-inCharge. The sum so ascertained shall (excepting only as and to the extent expressly
provided herein) constitute the sole and inclusive remuneration of the Contractor under
the Contract and no further payment whatsoever shall be or become due or payable to
the Contractor under the Contract.
ii )
v)
Schedule of rates to cover taxes and duties - No exemption or reduction of
customs duties, excise duties, sales tax, quay or any port dues, transport charges,
stamp duties or state Government or local body or Municipal Taxes or duties, Taxes or
charges shall be deemed to be included in and covered by the Schedule of Rates. The
Contractor shall also obtain and pay for all permits or other privileges necessary to
complete the work.
vi)
Schedule of rates to cover risks of delay - The Schedule of Rates shall be
deemed to include and cover the risk of all possibilities of delay and interference with
the Contractor's conduct of Work which occur from any cause including orders of the
Owner, in the exercise of his powers and on account of extension of time granted due
to various reasons and for all other possible or probable causes of delay.
v)
6.2
MEASUREMENTS
All measurements shall be in metric system. All the works in progress will be jointly
measured by the representative of the Engineer-in-Charge and the Contractor's
authorized agent progressively. Such measurement will be got recorded in the
measurement book by the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representative and
signed in token of acceptance by the contractor or his authorized representative.
For the purpose of taking joint measurement the contractor's representative shall be
bound to be present whenever required by the Engineer-in-Charge. If, however, he
absents for any reason whatsoever the measurement will be taken by the Engineer-inCharge or his representative and this will be deemed to be correct and binding on the
contractor.
ii)
BILLING
The contractor will submit a bill in approved proforma based on joint measurements in
quintuplicate along with soft copy to the Engineer-in-Charge of the work giving abstract
and detailed measurements for the various items executed during a month, before the
expiry of the 1st week of the succeeding month. The Engineer-in-Charge shall take or
cause to be taken the requisite measurements for the purpose of having the same
verified and the claim, as far as admissible, adjusted, if possible, before the expiry of 10
days from presentation of the bill.
erection against all insurable risks (including explosion) in the joint names of owner and
the contractor. However, such Secured Advance shall not be payable for items defined
in the tender document or where the material is issued by Owner. Recoveries of
payments so made, would not be postponed until the whole of work entrusted to the
contractor is completed. They shall be adjusted from his bill, for work done as the
materials are used, the necessary deductions being made whenever the items of work
in which they are used are billed for. The decision regarding the imperishable nature of
the materials on which the above is applicable, shall be at the discretion of Engineer-inCharge.
iv) DISPUTE IN MODE OF MEASUREMENTS
In case of any dispute as to the mode of measurement not covered by the contract to
be adopted for any item of work, mode of measurement as per latest Indian Standard
Specifications shall be followed.
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.7
RECEIPT OF PAYMENT
Receipt for payment made on account of work when executed by a firm must be signed
by a person holding due power of attorney in this respect on behalf of the Contractor,
except when the Contractor are described in their tender as a limited company in which
case the receipts must be signed in the name of the company by one of its principal
officers or by some other person having authority to give effectual receipt for the
company.
6.8
6.9
6.10
FLUCTUATIONS
The Contractor shall not claim any extras for fluctuation of price and the Contract Price
shall not be subject to any rise or fall of prices.
6.11
Certificate under the Contract for which the Contractor has received payment, such
material and goods shall become the property of the Owner.
6.12
COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
The Technical documents according to which the work was carried out.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
Materials appropriation statement for the materials issued by the Owner for the
works and list of surplus materials returned to the Owner's store duly supported
by necessary documents.
6.13
6.14
SECTION VII
TAXES AND INSURANCE
7.1 INCOME TAX, WORKS CONTRACT TAX, SALES TAX, MISCELLANEOUS PAYMENTS:
a) Royalty:
All royalties etc., as may be required for any Borrow Areas, including right
of way etc. to be arranged by Contractor shall be deemed to have been
included in the quoted prices.
Contractor's quoted rates should include the royalty on different applicable
items as per the prevailing State Government rates. Any increase in
prevailing rate of royalty shall be borne by the Contractor at no extra cost
to Owner.
Royalty, only for free issue materials, if any, shall be borne by Owner.
b) Income tax/ other statutory deductions at the prevailing rate will be deducted
from Contractors bills as per Income Tax Act/ other Applicable Laws.
c) Service Tax:
d)
i.
Refer SCC.
ii.
As per Cenvat Credit Rules 2004, Owner can avail credit on payment of
service tax to the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish the following
information in invoice, bill/ challan issued by him:
Name and address of the Contractor
Service tax registration number/ STC No.
Sr no. of the invoice/ bill/ challan
Date of issue
Description and value of input service
Service tax paid/ payable
Cenvat:
i.
ii.
iii.
The Contractor shall furnish the details of Excise Duty component included in
his Price for the purpose of CENVAT benefit.
v.
e)
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner shall not bear any liability in respect of:
i)
Personal taxes on the personnel deployed by Contractor, his SubContractor and Agent etc.
ii) The Corporate Taxes in respect of Contractor and his Sub-Contractor
and other Agents, Indian or foreign based.
iii) Any other taxes/ duties/levies except for those specified under para a)
to e) above.
f)
Firm Prices:
Contract Price shall remain firm and fixed till the completion of Work in all
respects and no escalation in prices on any account shall be admissible to the
Contractor.
Refer SCC
7.4 INSURANCE
Contractor shall at his own expense carry and maintain insurance with reputable
insurance companies to the satisfaction of the Owner as follows:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv )
v)
rd
I)
II)
Contractor shall be responsible for making good, to the satisfaction of the Owner any
loss of and any damage to all structures and properties belonging to the Owner or
being executed or procured or being procured by the Owner or of other agencies within
the premises of all the work or the Owner, if such loss or damage is due to fault and/or
the negligence or willful acts or commission of the Contractor, his employees agents,
representative or subcontractor.
ii)
The Contractor shall indemnify and keep the Owner harmless of all claims for damage
to property other than Owner's property arising under or by reason of this agreement if
such claims result from the fault and/or negligence or willful acts or commissions of the
Contractor his employees, agents, representative or subcontractors.
SECTION VIII
LABOUR LAWS & SAFETY REGULATIONS
8.1
LABOUR LAWS
The Contractor undertakes to ensure due and complete compliance with all Applicable
Laws including without limitation the Labour Regulations, applicable to the labour,
personnel contract labour, workmen, employees employed / appointed or whose
services are otherwise availed of by the Contractor or the Subcontractor. Applicable
Laws include without limitation, (i) The Minimum Wages Act, 1948 (as amended from
time to time) and the rules framed there under, (ii) the Contract Labour (Regulation and
Abolition) Act 1970 (as amended from time to time) and the rules framed there under,
(iii) The Workmens Compensation Act 1923 (as amended from time to time) and the
rules framed there under, (iv) The Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 (as amended from time
to time) and the rules framed there under, (v) the Provident Fund & Miscellaneous
Provisions Act, 1952 etc.
The consideration payable under this Contract is inclusive of all the amounts payable by
the Contractor to its Subcontractors, its workmen, staff, employees, agents etc. The
Contractor shall keep the Owner harmless and indemnified, for the entire term of the
Contract and thereafter, for and against any and all demands, claims liabilities arising
out of or in relation to such payments or demands from workmen, employees, subcontractors, agents of the Contractor or Subcontractors or any demands or claims of any
statutory and competent authorities of the Central / State Government. Further, the
Owner shall have right, exercisable at its discretion, to inspect the records of the
Contractor / its Subcontractor(s) at any time and prescribe necessary correction or
additional steps in this regard for checking / ensuring compliance with this Clause and
other Applicable Laws and in the event the Contractor failing to effect such compliance
within the time prescribed by the Owner, the Owner shall be entitled to withhold from the
amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor, such amounts as are payable to the
workmen / employees / agents / of the Contractor / Sub-contractors or to Subcontractors under any Applicable Laws including the Labour Regulations and make such
payments to the workmen/ employees/ agents/ Subcontractors.
8.2
8.3
i)
The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner and every member, officer and employee of
the Owner, also the Engineer-in-Charge and his staff against all actions, proceedings,
claims, demands, costs, expenses whatsoever arising out of or in connection with the
matters referred to in these General Conditions of Contract and other Contract
Documents and all actions, proceedings, claims, demands, costs and expenses which
may be made against the Owner for or in respect of or arising out of any failure by the
Contractor in the performance of his obligations under the Contract Documents. The
Owner shall not be liable for or in respect of any demand or compensation payable
under Applicable Law in respect of or in consequences of any accident or injury to any
workmen/ employee/ agent/ Subcontractor of the Contractor or other person in the
employment of the Contractor or his sub-contractor and the Contractor shall indemnify
and keep indemnified the Owner against all such damages and compensations and
against all claims, damage, proceedings, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in
respect thereof or in relation thereto.
ii)
iii)
Employment Liability
a)
The Contractor shall be solely and exclusively responsible for engaging or employing
persons for the execution of the Work. All employees engaged by the Contractor shall
be on his/their pay roll and paid by him/them. All disputes or differences between the
Contractor and his/their employees shall be settled by him/them. The Owner has
absolutely no liability whatsoever concerning the employees of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall indemnify the Owner and keep the Owner harmless and indemnified
against all losses or damages or liability arising out of or in the course of the Contractor
employing persons or relations with his/their employees. The Contractor shall make
regular and full payment of wages and on any complaint by the any employee of the
Contractor or his Subcontractor regarding nonpayment of wages/salaries or other dues,
Owner reserves the right to make such payments directly, to such employee or
subcontractor of the Contractor and recover the amount in full from the bills of the
Contractor, and the Contractor shall not claim any compensation or reimbursement
thereof. The Contractor shall comply with the Minimum Wages Act applicable to the
area with regard to payment of wages or his employees and also of employees of his
subcontractor.
b)
The Contractor shall advise in writing, to all of his employees and the
employees of his subcontractors as follows:It is fully understood that your appointment
and / or deployment is only in connection with the execution of the Contract to us from
the Owner and it does not give you any right of claim for employment by the Owner.
8.4
8.5
SAFETY REGULATIONS
i)
In respect of all labour, directly or indirectly employed in the work for the performance
of Contractor, the Contractor shall at his own expense arrange for all safety provisions
as per safety codes of CPWD, Indian Standard Institution, The Electricity Act, The
Mines Act and any such other acts as applicable.
.
ii)
The Contractor shall ensure that he, his Subcontractor and his, or their personnel or
representatives shall comply with all Fire / Safety regulations issued from time to time
by the Owner or otherwise howsoever and should any injury resulting in death or not or
loss / or damage due to Fire to any property or a portion thereof, occurred as a result of
failure to comply with such regulations, the Contractor shall be held responsible for the
consequences thereof and shall keep the Owner harmless and indemnified.
8.6
ARBITRATION
a)
b)
The award shall be in writing and published by the Arbitrator within 60 days after
entering upon the reference or within such extended time not exceeding further
three months as the Sole Arbitrator shall in writing under his own hands appoint.
The parties hereto shall be deemed to have irrevocably given their consent to
the Arbitrator to make and publish the award within the period referred to herein
above and shall not be entitled to raise any objection or protect thereto under
any circumstances whatsoever. The award rendered shall be a reasoned award
and shall be binding on the parties.
c)
d)
The arbitrator shall have power to make one or more awards whether interim or
otherwise in respect of the dispute and difference and in particular will be
entitled to make separate awards in respect of claims or cross-claims of the
parties.
e)
The arbitrator shall be entitled to direct any one of the parties to pay the costs of
the other party in such manner and to such extent as the arbitrator may in his
discretion determine and shall also be entitled to required one or both the
parties to deposit funds in such proportion to meet arbitrators expenses
whenever called upon to do so.
.
f)
8.7
The language of the proceedings will be English and the place of proceedings
will be Bina, District Sagar (MP).
JURISDICTION
Subject to Clause 8.6 above, Courts of competent jurisdiction in the State of Madhya
Pradesh shall alone shall have jurisdiction to entertain any application or other
proceedings in respect of anything arising under the Contract Documents. Any award or
awards made by the Sole Arbitrator shall be filed, if required, in the Courts of competent
jurisdiction in the State of Madhya Pradesh alone.
8.8
STATUTORYREQUIREMENTS
(a)
The Contractor will be fully responsible for complying with all relevant provisions
of the Contract Labour(Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970 and shall pay rates
of wages and observe hours of work/conditions of employment according to the
rules in force from time to time.
(b)
The Contractor will be fully responsible for complying with the provisions of the
Workmens Compensation Act, 1923 and shall ensure safe working conditions
for his workers as well as workers of his sub-contractors/ agencies etc.
(c)
The Contractor shall comply with provisions of payment of all Applicable Laws,
including without limitation, as per the following acts:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(d)
(e)
The Contractor shall be liable to pay his contributions and his employees
contributions to the State insurance scheme in respect of all labour employed by
him for the executions of the Contract, in accordance with the provisions of the
Employees State Insurance Act of 1948 as amended from time to time. In case
the Contractor fails to submit full details of his account of labour employed and
the contributions payable, the Engineer-in-Charge shall recover from running
bills of the Contractor an amount of the contribution assessed by him. The
amount so recovered shall be adjusted against the actual contribution payable
for Employees state insurance.
(f)
g)
Local labour will have to be engaged to the extent possible and as stipulated by
M. P. State Government.
(h)
The Contractor shall comply to Madhya Pradesh Labour Welfare Fund Act as
applicable during execution of contract and make contribution as per section 9
of the Madhya Pradesh Labour Welfare Fund Act, 1982 and all other applicable
provisions under which it is mandatory to deposit Labour Welfare Fund on
biannual basis at the end of each 6 months period. The present (Jan 2014)
biannual rate of contribution is as under:
i)
ii)
SECTION-IX
SAFETY CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL WORKS
9.1
The safety regulations for working in areas of the work as defined in scope of
work.
b)
All requirements under The Factories Act 1948 and the rules framed thereunder in the M P Factories Rules, as applicable.
c)
Contractor shall follow complete HSE (Health, Safety and Environmental Policy) of the Owner
.
9.2
IMPLEMENTATION OF SAFETY REGULATIONS:
The Contractor shall at his own expense arrange and comply with all safety provisions
as stipulated by the company / Bureau of Indian Standards/the Electricity act/Factory
act/OISD and other acts as applicable, in respect of all personnel, directly or indirectly
employed by the Contractor for the work. The Contractor shall ensure that he, his
Subcontractor and workers employed by him shall comply with all fire/safety/health
regulations issued from time to time by the company.
If he fails to do so, his failure will be a breach of the Contract and Engineer-in-charge
may, at his discretion, stop all works or cancel the Contract. The Contractor shall also
be liable for any pecuniary liability arising on account of any violation by him of the
safety requirements. Should any injury to people or loss or damage due to fire/or
accident to any property or a portion thereof occur as a result of failure to comply with
such regulations, the Contractor shall be held responsible for the consequences
thereof and shall keep the company harmless and indemnified.
9.3
9.4
9.5
MAJOR CONTRACTS:
All contractors who employ more than 50 workers, the following facilities are to be
provided by the Contractor at site at his own cost.
1.
2.
3.
4.
9.7
HEALTH ASSURANCE
Contractors will ensure that a qualified (minimum MBBS) medical practitioner
registered with the State Medical Council has medically examined all his workers
including supervisors, who would be deployed on the job. Only medically sound
persons as certified by the medical practitioner would be allowed on the job.
The medical certificates older by more than six months will not be accepted.
Health Assurance certificates submitted by the contractors may be periodically
checked at random by Engineer In Charge/ Owners authorities.
9.8
9.9
TRAINING
9.9.1
Contractor must ensure that all his supervisors have undergone safety training.
9.9.2
9.10
a)
Contractor must ensure that all his supervisors have undergone safety training
and keep document of such training. He shall also ensure that each of his
employees has received and understood from his supervisors necessary
training on safety for working in the Refinery/ Township premises.
b)
c)
9.11
Do not carry out any work without a valid work permit issued by authorized
persons in the refinery/ township.
b)
After obtaining a valid work permit and before the actual commencement of the
work, also obtain a clearance certificate from the officer of the unit/plant where
.
9.12
9.13
c)
Comply with all the Fire and Safety permit conditions specified in the permit
and the clearance.
e)
Prepare a safety action plan specific to the work before starting the work. Also
ensure that all supervisors and workers involved in the work properly
understand and follow the safety action plan.
f)
REQUIREMENT OF SUPERVISION
a)
Contractor will not carry out any work without having a supervisor present at
site. If it is required to work simultaneously in more than one location under the
same Contract, one supervisor must be put in each of the locations. If a
supervisor has to leave his site for any reason, he must stop his site activities
for that period of time.
b)
Contractor must provide at least one full time on site safety supervisor when the
Contractor has engaged a man-power in excess of 50 in contract activities in the
Refinery. If the manpower is less than 50, the onsite safety co-ordination
responsibilities shall be assumed by any one of the Contractor's other
supervisory staff. In both the cases, the Contractor must specify in writing the
name of such persons to the Engineer-in Charge and Manager safety.
c)
d)
e)
The contractors whose safety records are not satisfactory will be viewed seriously
and necessary action (viz. cancellation of Registration/Contracts) shall be taken
against him.
9.14
HAZARD COMMUNICATION
a)
contract. He in turn will ensure that same information has been passed to his
supervisors and workmen. Proper record of such dissemination of information
must be made by the Contractor and submit to the Engineer-in-Charge on
demand failing which further continuation of work may be withheld.
9.15
b)
In the event of any Contractor's employee spotting a fire or any serious hazards
in work premises, he shall identify himself and report location of FIRE when
Engg In Charge/ FIRE STATION OPERATOR is on the line. He shall wait
until the fire message is repeated by the Fire Operator and location confirmed.
c)
The Contractor must ensure that each one of his employees clearly understand
this Fire Communication requirement. This may be ensured by the Contractor
while providing on the job training.
9.16
a)
Report to the Owner supervisor on the job any injury sustained by any of his
employees or any near miss or any hazardous / dangerous incident at his work
site. Hiding of any accident or near miss would be viewed as serious
misconduct.
b)
c)
Keep and maintain proper records of all such incidents in respect of his
personnel / work site.
d)
e)
9.17
Appropriate display board displaying information as per the Owners Work Site
Display Board specification.
9.19
NOTE
a)
b)
The term supervisor would mean any person who oversees the work of a
group of workmen. All other persons would be considered as workmen.
c)
Violation of any of the above special conditions of safety would attract penal
actions including termination of the Contract/registration.
d)
e)
APPENDIX A (PROFORMA)
CONTRACT AGREEMENT - As per BORLs format to be issued to Contractor subsequently.
APPENDIX - B
FORM OF INCOME TAX CLEARANCE CERTIFICATE
1.
Name and Style (of the company, firm, HUF or individual) in which the applicant is
assessed or assessable to Income Tax and address for the purpose of assessment
______________________________________________________________
2.
Names and addresses of all companies, firms or association of persons in which the
applicant is substantially interested in his individual or fiduciary capacity.
Note: For the purpose of clause (2) above, the words "Substantially Interested" would
have the same meaning as in explanation to section 40A(2).
3.
Income-tax Circle / Ward / District in which the applicant is assessed to Income tax and
the Permanent A/c. no.
4.
Year
Total
Income
assessed
2
1
5.
a)
Tax demanded
3
Tax
Paid
4
Balance
Due.
5
Whether any penalty for concealment has been imposed under the provision of
st
the Income-tax Act, 1961or wealth Tax 1957on or after 1 April, 1975.
i)
If the answer is in affirmative give the date, amount of penalty imposed and
section under which imposed.
ii)
Whether any appeal has been filed against the penalty order before the
Appellate Assistant Commissioner of Income-tax or before the Income-tax
appellate Tribunal. If so, the result thereof along with the date of Appellate
order.
b)
whether convicted for an offence within the meaning of section 277 of the
Income-tax act, 1961 or under Section 36(2) of the wealth Tax, 1957 or
under section 199/200 of the Indian Penal code.
If so, the date of the
conviction order.
c)
6.
In case there has been no Income - Tax assessment for any year, whether returns have
been submitted under section 139(1) and 139(2) and 139(3) of the Income-tax Act, 1961
or tax has been paid in advance under section 210(3) of Income-tax Act, 1961 and if so,
the amount of income returned for each year and tax for each of the four years
mentioned above and the Income-tax Circle/ Ward/District concerned where such
returns have been filed, give reasons for the same.
7.
8.
: ______________________________________________
ii)
The returns of income due from the assesses have been filed.
iii) The assesses has paid all tax demands due other than those which have been
stayed by competent authority.
iv) The assesses has been cooperating with the Department in facilitating the
completion of the pending assessments.
a)
The period of three years has expired from the date of Appellate order of the
Income-tax Appellate Tribunal confirming or partially conforming the penalty
levied on or after 1-4-75 under section 271(1) of the Income tax act, 1961, or
u/s 18(1) of the Wealth tax Act, 1957.
OR
In cases where no appeal has been filed by the assesses against the penalty
imposed on or after, 1-4-75 u/s 271(1) of the Income Tax Act, 1961, or u/s
18(1) of the Wealth Tax Act, 1957, the period of three years has expired from
the date of the imposition of the penalty
b)
The period of three years has expired from the date of the order of conviction on
or after 1-4-75 u/s 277 of the Income-tax Act, or under section 36(2) of the
Wealth Tax Act 1957, or u/s 199/200 of the Indian Penal Code.
Delete whichever is inapplicable.
i)
ii)
Signature of I.T.O.____________________
Circle/Ward/District
Seal : _________________________
APPENDIX-C
PROFORMA OF BANK GUARANTEE
(On non-judicial paper of appropriate value)
To
Bharat Oman Refineries Ltd,
Village+ Post- Agasod
Dist-Sagar - 470113
Madhya Pradesh
Dear Sirs,
M/s...(hereinafter
referred
as
BIDDER
/
SUPPLIER)
(..BIDDERS / SUPPLIERS name and address) have
taken tender for the WORK of ____________________________________________
(Name of work) for Bharat Oman Refineries Limited, Bina with registered office at Admin
Building, BORL Refinery Complex, Bina, Dist-Sagar- 470113, Madhya Pradesh, India
(hereinafter referred as BORL) , Vide Tender / Fax Of Acceptance / Purchase Order
reference ______________________ dated ___________________________
The tender conditions provide that the BIDDER / SUPPLIER shall pay a sum of
Rs.________________(Rupees_____________________________) as Earnest Money /
Initial Security Deposit / Full security deposit in the form therein mentioned.
The form of payment of Earnest Money / Initial security deposit/ Full security deposit
includes guarantee executed by schedule 'A' Bank, undertaking full responsibility to
indemnify BORL in case of default .The said BIDDER / SUPPLIER have approached us
and at their request and in consideration of the premises, we ________________(Bank's
Name) having our Office at _____________________ (hereinafter referred as
"GUARANTOR") have agreed to give such guarantee as hereinafter mentioned
1. GUARANTOR hereby undertake and agree that if default shall be made by BIDDER /
SUPPLIER in performing any of the terms and conditions of the tender, GUARANTOR
do hereby irrevocably bind themselves and undertake to pay to BORL on first demand
in writing by BORL without protest or demur or proof or condition and without
reference to the BIDDER/ SUPPLIER the said amount of Rs. ____________(Rupees
___________________)
2. BORL shall have the full liberty without reference to GUARANTOR and without
affecting this guarantee to postpone for any time or from time to time the exercise of
any of the powers and rights conferred on BORL under the tender with said
BIDDER/SUPPLIER and to enforce or to forbear from endorsing any powers or rights
or by reason of time being given to the said BIDDER/SUPPLIER which under law
relating to the sureties would but for provision have the effect of releasing the
GUARANTOR.
3. BORL
shall
have
the
right
to
recover
the
said
sum
of
Rs.____________________________ (Rupees_______________________) from
GUARANTOR in manner aforesaid and such rights shall not be affected or suspended
by reason of the fact that any dispute or disputes have been raised by the said
BIDDER /SUPPLIER and or that any dispute or dispute are pending before any officer,
tribunal or court.
4. The guarantee herein contained shall not be determined or affected by the liquidation
or winding up, dissolution or change of constitution or insolvency of the said
_____________________________ (BIDDER'S / SUPPLIER'S Name)
5. GUARANTOR'S
liability
under
this
guarantee
is
restricted
to
Rs
_____________________ (Rupees___________________). This guarantee shall
.
The term "Bidder" shall be applicable for the participants in the tender before
finalization of contract for submission of Earnest Money Deposit and for all
correspondence, while the term "SUPPLIER "shall be applicable for successful
bidder to whom job shall be awarded and for deposit of Initial Security Deposit /
Full security deposit as per tender conditions.
APPENDIX-D
PROFORMA OF COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
Name of the Work
Yes/No/Recommended.
Date.
Rs.
Certified that the above work has been completed in all respects as per drawings,
specifications and directions of Engineer-in-Chargeon _________ and has been taken
over from the Contractor.
It is also certified that the Contractor has cleared/cleaned the site (witnessed by the
concerned engineer from the Owner on dated.___________) as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
_____________________
ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE
Name:
Countersigned:
______________________
DEPARTMENTAL HEAD
Name:
APPENDIX-E
FORMAT OF HYPOTHECATION BOND
BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED
Re:
Letter of Hypothecation
Dear Sirs,
WHEREAS Bharat Oman Refineries Limited (hereinafter called "the OWNER" which expression
shall include its successors and assigns) has awarded me*/us* a contract for
_________________________________ (hereinafter called "the works" which expression shall
include any and all amendments and/or variations therein and extra works) on the terms and
conditions stated in the Acceptance of Tender No. _________________________dated
_________________ (hereinafter called "the Contract" which expression shall include any
amendments thereto and/or variations therein and any formal contract executed in supersession
thereof).
AND WHEREAS The OWNER has at my*/our* request agreed to advance (hereinafter called
"The said advance") to me*/us* upto __________________ of the value of
_____________________ (hereinafter called "the said material") brought by me*/us* to site of
works for permanent incorporation in the works upon the conditions, inter-alia of my*/our*
furnishing security and binding myself*/ourselves* in the matter hereinafter appearing.
NOW THEREFORE, the consideration of the premises aforesaid I*/We* ______________
carrying on business in sole proprietor ship*/partnership* under the name and style
of____________________so as to bind myself*/ourself* and my*/our* executors, administrators,
representatives and permitted assigns/ successors and permitted assigns, DO HEREBY
undertake to and agree with the OWNER as follows:
The value of the said materials for the purpose of calculating the said advance shall be
determined by the Engineer-in-charge, whose computation in this behalf shall be final and
binding.
The said advance shall be confined to such of the said materials as are brought to the site of
work for permanent incorporation in the works to meet the reasonable requirements of the works
for the time being as determined by the Engineer-in-charge, whose decision shall be final.
Without prejudice to any other mode of recovery available to the OWNER, the said advance may
be recovered from my*/our* Running Account Bills and Final bill(s) to the extent of the value as
determined by the Engineer-in-charge (whose decision shall be final) of the said materials
incorporated in the works covered by the relative bill(s).
I*/We* shall maintain and cause to the maintained a daily account of the said materials brought
to the site of works for permanent incorporation in the works and or all issue made there from,
and shall fortnightly or oftener as required by the Engineer-in-charge, submit an inventory of the
said materials at site as verified by the Site Engineer.
I*/We* shall forthwith on demand and without protest or demur repay the OWNER the
unadjusted balance of the said advance for the time being remaining unpaid, and shall until
repayment thereof pay interest on the balance demanded at the rate of 17.5% (Seventeen point
five percent) per annum from the expiry of 7 (Seven) days from the date of demand and until
repayment thereof in full.
As security for the said advance and the unadjusted balance thereof remaining from time to time
I*/We* do hereby hypothecate by way of first charge to and in favour of the OWNER the whole of
my*/our* present and future materials which now have been brought to or may hereafter from
time to time during the continuance of this security be brought to or in or upon or about the site
of works for permanent incorporation in the works, the materials herein hypothecated being
inclusive or the said materials, but not confined thereto, AND:
.
I)
Should the unadjusted balance for the time being of the said advance at any time
exceed ____________of the value of the said materials hypothecated to the
OWNER as determined by the Engineer-in-charge (whose decision shall be final)
I*/We* upon being required by the OWNER shall be forthwith provide further
materials approved by the OWNER of a sufficient value to make good the shortfall,
or shall pay the OWNER an amount sufficient to make good the shortfall:
II)
I*/We* shall allow the OWNER and its servants, and agents at all times to take
inspections of the materials hereby hypothecated to the OWNER and of all my*/our*
books and records pertaining thereto and produce as and when required by the
OWNER and/or its servants or agents any and all such evidence as it/they may
require to procure the cost and value of any of the materials hereby hypothecated;
III)
The materials hereby hypothecated shall be kept at my*/our* risk and expense in all
respects and I*/We* shall at my*/our* own expenses during the continuance of this
security keep the said materials in good and marketable condition and insured
against such risks as the OWNER may require for the full marketable or
replacement value thereof in the joint names myself*/ourselves*and the OWNER in
an insurance company or companies to be approved by the OWNER and shall
deliver the policy(i.e.s) of insurance and the receipt for the last premium paid for
every such policy of insurance to the OWNER with exclusive right in the OWNER to
receive all proceeds of any such insurance and undertake on my*/our* part to pay to
the OWNER all proceeds of any policy relative to the materials hereby hypothecated
received by me*/us* during the continuance of this security and undertake to renew
and keep in full force and effect and maintain such insurance throughout the
continuity of this security and to deliver to the OWNER the renewal receipt and
policies therefore, with right in the OWNER to apply all sums received under any
insurance as aforesaid in or towards the liquidation of the said advance or the
unadjusted balance thereof for the time being outstanding;
IV)
It shall be lawful for the OWNER and its servants, agents and nominees at any time
during the continuance of this security and without any notice to me*/us* to enter
into or upon any place or premises where or wherein any of the materials hereby
hypothecated may be situated or kept or stored (and to effect such entry, if
necessary as my*/our* attorney and in my*/our* name for which purpose and to do
all acts, deeds and things deemed necessary by the OWNER in connection
therewith I/WE do hereby appoint and authorize the OWNER and its servants and
gents and nominees), and to inspect, value superintend, dispose of and/or take
particulars of all or any part of the materials hereby hypothecated and to check any
statements, accounts, reports and information relative thereto AND also if I*/We*
shall fail to repay on demand any monies which ought to be paid by me*/us*
hereunder or shall commit any breach of this agreement of under any circumstances
which in the sole judgment for the OWNER is prejudicial to or imperil or is likely to
prejudice or imperil the security created hereunder or if distress or execution is
levied or enforced against any of my*/our* property or assets whatsoever or I*/We*
shall suspend or cease to carry on business or if the said Contract is cancelled or
terminated, then and in any such case, it shall be lawful for the OWNER to take
charge, of seize, recover, receive appoint receivers, remove and/or take possession
of all or any part of the materials hereby hypothecated and either forthwith or any
time and from time to time sell, realize or dispose of the same in any manner
including by public auction or tender or private contract and whether with or without
intervention of the court all or any part of the materials hereby hypothecated or
otherwise deal therewith in such manner and upon such terms and conditions as the
OWNER in its discretion thinks fit;
V)
VI)
Subject to the powers of the OWNER and my*/our* obligations hereunder, I*/WE*
shall be entitled to use the materials here by hypothecated to the OWNER in the
ordinary course of construction/ performance of the works so long as I*/We* an*/are*
not prohibited in writing by the OWNER from time to time.
The materials hereby hypothecated and all proceeds of sales and other realizations and
proceeds of insurance thereof shall always to be kept distinguishable and be held as the
exclusive property of the OWNER specifically appropriable to the security hereby created
and I*/We* shall not without the prior permission of the OWNER create any mortgage or
encumbrance whatsoever upon or over or affecting the same or any part thereof, nor
otherwise suffer or allow to be done anything that may prejudice the security hereby created.
The material hereby hypothecated and presently brought upon, lying, stored or be in or upon
the site of works are my*/our* exclusive and un-cumbered property with full right in me*/us*
to create the security in respect thereof in favour of the OWNER as herein envisaged, and
all future materials which are or shall be brought into, laying stored or be in or upon or about
the site of works for permanent incorporation in the works shall likewise be my/our exclusive
property without any charge, lien or interest in any other person and shall be exclusively
appropriable to the security hereby created in favour of the OWNER.
The OWNER shall not in any way be responsible in respect of the quantity, weight, amount
value, condition and final turn out or otherwise of or for the materials hereby hypothecated to
the OWNER, if the same happen to be in the possession of the OWNER and for any loss,
destruction or deterioration thereof, or damage thereto caused by theft, pilferage, robbery,
fire, riot or civil commotion malicious damage or otherwise howsoever, whatever may be the
circumstances or the reason under or for which the loss, destruction deterioration or
damage, including any act, commission, negligence or default of the OWNER or any of its
nominees, agents or servants.
The security hereby created shall operate and be a continuing security for the unadjusted
balance of the said advance from time to time due to the OWNER notwithstanding that there
may be a nil balance at any time or from time to time and notwithstanding that the said
advance or unadjusted balance may exceed the limits of the said advance as herein
envisaged.
All expressions herein used and not herein defined shall unless repugnant to the subject or
contract thereof carry the meaning assigned to them under the said contract.
Your faithfully,
_____________
Name**
Place:
Date:
NOTE: *Strike out what is not applicable.
** To be signed by all the partners of a partnership firm.
*** Signature(s) is/are not to be witnessed.
APPENDIX-F
INFORMATION FORMAT FOR CONTRACTORS/ CONSULTANTS
1.
2.
Telephone No : Office
Fax No.
3.
: Office
Contract Person
Mobile No.
:
:
Telephone No
:
Fax No.
:
Mobile No.
:
E-mail
4.
5.
6.
7.
:
:
9.
10.
c.
11.
List of machinery,
workshop owned
12.
13.
14.
tools,
equipment,
15.
16
17.
18.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
19.
20.
:
:
22.
:
.
(Give details)
23.
24.
Place: ___________________
Signature: __________________
Date: ____________________
Designation: ________________
COMPANY SEAL
APPENDIX-G
DETAILS OF CENVATABLE EXCISE DUTY (SP3)
SOR NO
Sr No OF SOR
NAME OF
MATERILAS
TOTAL
NOTE :- 1.Total of Cenvatable Excise duty indicated above shall be deducted from Total
quoted price for the purpose of evaluation.
Cenvatable Excise Duty component mentioned in this FORM shall be considered
as mandatory discount and shall be adjusted from all R.A. bills on pro-rata
basis. The Cenvatable Excise duty shall be reimbursed to the Contractor upon
production of documentary evidence to enable owner to claim Cenvat Benefit
subject to the ceiling mentioned in this FORM. Further, such Cenvatable excise
duty shall be reimbursed only for the items, which are eligible for Cenvat
Benefit as per excise ruled and as per SCC. Statutory variation in Cenvatable
Excise Duty shall not have any effect on the mandatory discount mentioned
above.
In case of change in quantity for the above items during execution, the
Cenvatable amount for such items shall be adjusted proportionately.
BIDDING DOCUMENT
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PART-II PRICE SECTION
Prepared by:
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Sl. No.
COVER PAGE
PREAMBLE
3.1
SP-1 (1 Sheet)
3.2
SP-2 (1 Sheet)
3.3
SP-3 (1 Sheet)
1 Sheet
1 Sheet
1 Sheet
SP-0 (1 Sheet)
4.1
SP-4 (1 Sheet)
4.2
SP-5 (3 Sheets)
4.3
SP-6 (2 Sheets)
SP-7 (1 Sheet)
SP-8 (1 Sheet)
SP-9 (1 Sheet)
SP-10 (1 Sheet)
(STAMP & SIGNATURE OF BIDDER)
2.0
The price quoted shall be lumpsum price on turnkey basis. Unless the basic parameter changes or
additional/ extra requirements are made, total payments to be made to the Contractor shall be
limited to lumpsum price indicated, irrespective of the progressive payments made during execution
based on the split up of price.
Obligation of the Contractor is not limited to the quantities that the Contractor may either indicate in
the Breakup of Total Lumpsum Price along with his bid or in further detailed breakup of Total
Lumpsum Price furnished after award of Work. Contractor shall carry out entire scope of
work/supplies/Services as detailed in various sections/volumes of the Bidding Document within the
Total quoted Lumpsum Price.
3.0
Total Lumpsum Price quoted by the Contractor shall include cost of any other supplies/work(s)
/Services not specifically mentioned in the Bidding Document but necessary for the efficient, trouble
free operation of the Plant and to make this package job complete in all respect as per Bidding
Document.
4.0
Contractor to note that breakup of Total Lumpsum Price is for interim payment purposes only and
total price payable under the Contract shall be restricted to the Total Lumpsum Price/Contract Price.
5.0
The Price for Design & Engineering Component quoted in FORM SP-1 shall not exceed 10% (Ten
percent) of the Total Lumpsum Price quoted in FORM SP-0.
6.0
The Price for Supply component (FORM SP-2) shall not exceed 60% (Sixty percent) of the Total
Lumpsum Price quoted in FORM SP-0.
7.0
Spares for start-up/commissioning and mandatory spares required are in CONTRACTOR's scope and
are deemed to be included in their quoted Total Lumpsum Price.
8.0
In case of any contradiction between Total Lumpsum Price quoted in SP-0 and breakup of Total
Lumpsum Price quoted in SP-1, SP-2, SP-3, SP-4, SP-5, SP-6, the following order of precedence shall
apply:
(i) SP-0;
(ii) SP-1, SP-2, SP-3;
(iii) SP-4, SP-5, SP-6;
9.0
FORM SP-0
Bidding Document No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Name of Work: VPSA Oxygen Plant
NAME OF BIDDER:
DESCRIPTION
The scope of work shall cover design, engineering, procurement of materials and bought
out components, manufacture, assembly, insulation, inspection, testing and painting at
works, packing and supply, unloading & storage at site, local handling,
erection/installation, testing & commissioning, painting at site, training of purchasers
personnel, performance guarantee run test at site of VPSA Oxygen plant package as Lump
Sum Turnkey package as per scope of work, P&IDs, drawings, data sheets, standards,
specifications etc.
UNIT
LS
Total LUMPSUM PRICE as per FORM SP-0 is inclusive of all taxes, duties, levies etc.
(ii)
Break up of TOTAL LUMPSUM PRICE (Total Lumpsum Price) has been furnished as per FORM SP-1 (schedule of lumpsum price for design and detailed engineering), FORM SP-2 (schedule of lumpsum price for supply) and FORM SP-3
(schedule of lumpsum price for construction).
(iii)
Further break up of FORM SP-1, SP-2 and SP-3 has been furnished as per FORM SP-4, SP-5 and SP-6 respectively.
(iv)
The above Total Lumpsum Price is inclusive of Pre-commissioning/Commissioning Spares, Mandatory Spares and Engineering Spares/Consumables.
(STAMP & SIGNATURE OF BIDDER)
Page 4 of 17
FORM SP-1
Bidding Document No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Name of Work: VPSA Oxygen Plant
NAME OF BIDDER:
SL. NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
1-A
LS
FORM SP-2
Bidding Document No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Name of Work: VPSA Oxygen Plant
NAME OF BIDDER:
SL. NO.
1-B
DESCRIPTION
Supply of equipments/materials of VPSA Oxygen Plant as per
Bidding Document (other than supply of construction materials
for Civil, Structural and site Painting works, which shall be
included in FORM SP-3 / FORM SP-6).
UNIT
LS
FORM SP-3
Bidding Document No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Name of Work: VPSA Oxygen Plant
NAME OF BIDDER:
SL. NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
1-C
LS
FORM SP-4
Bidding Document No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Name of Work: VPSA Oxygen Plant
NAME OF BIDDER:
SL. NO.
1-A
UNIT
1-A.1
L.S.
1-A.2
L.S.
1-A.3
As Built Documentation
L.S.
1-A.4
L.S.
TOTAL:
L.S.
FORM SP-5
Bidding Document No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Name of Work: VPSA Oxygen Plant
NAME OF BIDDER:
1-B.1
UNIT
i.
Suction filter for air blower unit (1 No. for each chain)
L.S.
ii.
Roots air blower with electric motor (1 No. for each chain)
L.S.
iii.
L.S.
iv.
L.S.
v.
L.S.
vi.
L.S.
vii.
viii.
ix.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
x.
L.S.
xi.
One (1) No. buffer vessel of adequate capacity (common for both
chains) to meet the continuous demand of O2 gas.
L.S.
xii.
L.S.
1-B.2
Page 9 of 17
FORM SP-5
Bidding Document No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Name of Work: VPSA Oxygen Plant
NAME OF BIDDER:
UNIT
1-B.3
1-B.4
L.S.
1-B.5
L.S.
1-B.6
First fill including flushing fluid for all hydraulic oils (for power
packs) and lubricating oils, greases etc. and replenishment of any
loss of these during commissioning.
L.S.
SL. NO.
i.
ii.
iii.
1-B.7
1-B.8
1-B.9
1-B.10
1-B.11
1-B.12
1-B.13
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
Page 10 of 17
FORM SP-5
Bidding Document No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Name of Work: VPSA Oxygen Plant
NAME OF BIDDER:
1-B.14
UNIT
TOTAL:
(i)
L.S.
NOTE:
The minor materials for Mechanical Equipment, Electrical, Instrumentation which are required in connection with site installation activities are included under Construction Portion Form SP-6 in relevant items.
(STAMP & SIGNATURE OF BIDDER)
Page 11 of 17
FORM SP-6
Bidding Document No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Name of Work:
NAME OF BIDDER:
1-C.1.
UNIT
(a)
RCC building with acoustic proof lining for housing air blower,
vacuum pump, valve skid etc.
L.S.
(b)
Structural shed with roof and side sheeting etc. for housing
Reciprocating oxygen compressors alongwith necessary
barricading
L.S.
(c)
L.S.
L.S.
(d)
(e)
(f)
1-C.2
(a)
(b)
1-C.3
1-C.4
1-C.5
1-C.6
1-C.7
1-C.8
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
Page 12 of 17
FORM SP-6
Bidding Document No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Name of Work:
NAME OF BIDDER:
UNIT
TOTAL:
(i)
L.S.
NOTE:
The breakup of prices given above are exclusive of supply of materials covered in FORM SP-5 but are inclusive of materials for Civil, Structural, General Civil, Painting etc.
Page 13 of 17
FORM SP-7
Bidding Document No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Name of Work: VPSA Oxygen Plant
NAME OF BIDDER:
PRICE SCHEDULE OF RECOMMENDED SPARES FOR TWO YEARS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
SL. NO.
DESCRIPTION OF RECOMMENDED
SPARES
UNIT
QTY.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(F)
BIDDER TO SUBMIT THEIR DETAILED PRICE SCHEDULE FOR RECOMMENDED SPARES AS PER BIDDING DOCUMENT.
NOTE:
Contractor to provide itemized priced list of two years Operation and Maintenance (O&M) spares, which is inclusive of all taxes,
duties, levies etc. Prices of O&M spares shall be kept valid for a period of 12 months after Contractual Mechanical Completion.
Owner reserves the right to place the order for such O & M spares.
(STAMP & SIGNATURE OF BIDDER)
FORM SP-8
Bidding Document No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Name of Work: VPSA Oxygen Plant
NAME OF BIDDER:
SL. NO.
DESCRIPTION
3
4
5
AMOUNT ON WHICH
APPLICABLE
(A)
% APPLICABLE
CENVATABLE / VATABLE
PORTION OF TAX/DUTY
ELIGIBLE FOR INPUT TAX
CREDIT AND INCLUDED IN (C)
(B)
(D)
10
11
12
NOTES:
Amounts of Cenvatable Excise Duty, Vatable MP VAT, Cenvatable Service Tax, Cenvatable Krishi Kalyan Cess and Cenvatable CVD &
SAD/AID indicated in Column (D) above shall be deducted from the total Lump Sum price for the purpose of evaluation.
Cenvatable/ Vatable Component mentioned in this FORM shall be considered as mandatory discount and shall be adjusted from
Contractors Invoices on pro-rata basis. The Cenvatable/Vatable amount shall be reimbursed to the Contractor upon production of
documentary evidence enabling Owner to claim Cenvat Benefit/ Input Tax Credit, subject to the ceiling mentioned in this FORM. Further,
such Cenvatable/ Vatable amount shall be reimbursed only for the materials which are eligible for Cenvat Benefit/Input Tax Credit as per
rules and provisions of Bidding Document.
The Service Tax amount indicated by the Bidder in this Form shall include both, namely, (i) the amount of Service Tax payable by the
bidder and reimbursable by Owner (ii) the amount of Service Tax, if any, directly payable by Owner , as applicable to recipient of service,
as per the reverse charge rule of Service Tax.
The Service Tax, if any, to be payable by the Owner under reverse charge rule shall not be reimbursed to the Contractor but shall be
directly submitted to the Service Tax Authorities by Owner. If the same has already been reimbursed / paid to the Contractor for
whatsoever reason, the said amount, as submitted by the Owner to Service Tax Authorities, shall be deducted / recovered / adjusted
from the payment due to the Contractor.
In case a bidder considers more than one rate of any particulat Tax/ Duty then the details above shall be furnsihed for each rate of such
Tax/Duty.
Page 15 of 17
FORM SP-9
Bidding Document No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Name of Work: VPSA Oxygen Plant
NAME OF BIDDER:
SL. NO.
1
DESCRIPTION OF UTILITIES
Total (average) power consumption for working Air
Blowers, working Vacuum Pumps & operating
Reciprocating Compressor.
NOTE:
1 Guaranteed Power Consumption shall be with respect to equipment as per Doc No. A702-029-82-41-LP-4070 and
Annexure -B of Doc No. A702-029-82-41-CL-4070 enclosed in the technical part of the Bidding Document.
2 Loading on account of Guaranteed Power Consumption shall be considered for evaluation as per Doc No. A702-02982-41-LP-4070 enclosed in the technical part of the Bidding Document.
3 All other notes mentioned in Guaranteed Power Consumption Format (Annexure-B) of Doc. No. A702-029-82-41-CL4070 attached with the tender shall be referred.
4 In case of Discrepancy between In Word and In Figures, Guarantee Power Consumption quoted In Words shall
prevail.
(STAMP & SIGNATURE OF BIDDER)
FORM SP-10
Bidding Document No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
Name of Work: VPSA Oxygen Plant
NAME OF BIDDER:
Description
Per Manday charges (Per person) for 8 hours work on normal working day
excluding Service Tax & Swachh Bharat Cess (Currency_________)
Rate in Figure
1.01
Rate in Words
Notes:
The per diem rates for vendor's specialist visit shall be based on "Terms & Conditions for Vendor participation in Hazop
Study" enclosed with the RFQ. Above quoted Per Manday charges for participation during Hazop Study for 4 (Four)
mandays shall be considered for price evaluation.
Swachh Bharat Cess as applicable on Services shall be loaded to bidder's quoted Prices for respective services for
purpose of evaluation being Non Cenvatable.
Cenvatable Service Tax applicable per diem rate for participation in Hazop Study: Extra @ 14%
Non Cenvatable Swachh Bharat Cess applicable per diem rate for participation in Hazop Study Extra @ 0.5%
Cenvatable Krishi Kalyan Cess applicable per diem rate for participation in Hazop Study Extra @ 0.5%
Present applicable rate of Withholding Tax considered by Foreign Bidder: Included @______%
BIDDING DOCUMENT
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Part - II: TECHNICAL SECTION
Prepared by:
Technical Specifications
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SI-4070
Rev A
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO
BIDDERS FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Page 1 of 3
A
Rev.
No
PROJECT
OWNER
BORL, BINA
CONSULTANT
JOB NO.
A702
18/03/2016
ANAND
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
PPP
Checked
by
PPP
Approved
by
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO
BIDDERS FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
1.0
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SI-4070
Rev A
Page 2 of 3
Scope
This document is intended to outline the procedures envisaged for execution of this
enquiry including pre-bid & in-bid requirements.
2.0
Special Requirements
2.1
2.2
Pre-Bid stage:
i)
The bidders shall be invited for an extensive pre-bid meeting after floating of
enquiry. Participation in pre-bid meeting is MANDATORY for all the bidders. The
Pre-bid meeting shall be attended by competent representative(s) of bidder who is
competent enough to discuss and conclude all the technical and commercial
issues.
ii)
In case, any of the bidders is not attending the PRE- BID meeting, it shall be
understood that the bidder does not have any comments/ deviations to RFQ
requirements. In case, any deviations/clarifications are furnished by such bidder in
his Bid or the Bid is incomplete, the complete bid is likely to be rejected.
iii)
iv) Bidder to note that only technically infeasible deviations shall be discussed during
PRE- BID meeting provided a suitable justification for the same is furnished.
Purchasers decision on such deviations shall be treated as FINAL. Deviations,
which can be complied either with extra cost and/or with time implications, shall
not be permitted.
It is in Bidders interest to ensure that all technical deviations are sorted out in the
pre-bid meeting stage only.
v)
vi) Conclusion agreed in PRE- BID meeting shall be issued as Record Notes of Prebid Meeting / Reply to Pre-bid Queries to the bidders present in the pre-bid
meeting and the same shall be considered as part of enquiry document.
vii) In case the parameters and/or scope of certain item(s) included in the TENDER
get revised due to revision in process requirements or discussion during pre-bid
meeting and/or any other reasons, an amendment (clearly identifying the
changes) shall be issued.
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO
BIDDERS FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SI-4070
Rev A
Page 3 of 3
viii) Individual meeting shall also be arranged with each bidder separately to discuss
and finalise the offered system, datasheets, etc. Bidder shall necessarily bring &
discuss/ finalize the following documents during the pre-bid meeting:
(a) Duly filled in Proven Track Record Proforma along with BQC supporting
documents.
(b) Completely filled in equipment datasheet.
(c) Proposed package layout, preliminary PFD / P&ID of the offered system
(d) Basic dimension of acoustic proof building & compressor shed.
(e) Deviations / exceptions / clarifications / conflicts.
(f) Duly filled & signed/stamped Technical Compliance Statements/Technical
Checklists.
(g) Tentative Utility Consumption data including electrical load data, schedule of
lubricants, chemicals & consumables, etc.
ix) Minute of Pre-bid meeting signed with individual bidder, shall be considered as
part of bid and binding on bidder, even if bidder has not enclosed the Minutes of
pre-bid meeting along with the bid. The information contained therein shall be
incorporated into the Purchase Requisition also.
2.3
In-Bid requirement:
i)
ii)
iii)
Duly filled & signed/stamped Technical Checklist (Doc. No A702-029-82-41-CL4070) along with Annexures-A & B.
Duly filled in Proven Track Record Proforma along with BQC supporting
documents.
All documents required to be submitted with bid as per Vendor Data Requirement
(A702-029-82-41-VR-4070)
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-CL-4070 Rev.A
Page 1 of 6
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT
OWNER
BORL, BINA
CONSULTANT :
JOB NO.
A702
18.03.2015
BKD
ANAND
PPP
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-CL-4070 Rev.A
Page 2 of 6
Bidder to note that bidders quotation shall be evaluated (technically) based on bidders
reply/confirmation to this technical checklist only. Bidders offer shall be considered
incomplete and may not be considered for technical evaluation by purchaser if duly
filled-in, signed & stamped check list is not submitted along with bid. Bidder is required to
give categorical reply to each point of this technical checklist, so that bidders offer can be
properly evaluated.
Bidder's reply "Not Confirmed" is not warranted and may lead to technical rejection of their bid.
However, Bidder may provide certain clarification, incase absolutely necessary, without
deviating to bid requirement. Written confirmation shall have precedence over any clarification
whatsoever.
Sl.
Description
BIDDERS
CLARIFICATION
No
ANSWER
(If Any)
(Confirmed /
Not Confirmed)
1. Please note that this is a No deviation bid.
Hence no deviation to the TENDER specification
is acceptable. Bidder to submit all their
clarification during the pre-bid query stage. No
further deviation/clarifications shall be allowed in
the technical offer. Bidder to confirm that there is
no technical deviation in their offer w.r.t. the
TENDER/ agreements in pre-bid query reply.
Bidder is also required to submit duly filled,
signed and stamped Annexure-A of this
document as a confirmation/compliance along
with the bid.
2. Confirm that the bidder has quoted for the total
scope of supply & services as per TENDER
specification and attachments. Any deviation to
this requirement may lead to the bid being
considered as incomplete and liable for
rejection.
3. Bidder will have single point responsibility for
complete scope of work covered under this
requisition. Confirm compliance.
4. Bidder to confirm categorical compliance to all
clauses of Specifications, Data Sheets, Process
Data Sheets, Drawings and other requirements of
requisition.
5. Bidder to note that data sheets, drawings and
other technical details submitted with bid shall be
retained for information only.
Bidders documents/ drawings shall be reviewed
as per the Vendor Data Requirements (Doc No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070) during post order
stage for checking/ensuring compliance with
Tender specification/Contract requirement.
Confirm compliance.
6. Bidder to note that, if any comment arises during
detail engineering from EIL/ Owner (to ensure
compliance with Tender Specification/Contract
requirement), same shall be incorporated by
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Description
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-CL-4070 Rev.A
Page 3 of 6
BIDDERS
ANSWER
(Confirmed /
Not Confirmed)
CLARIFICATION
(If Any)
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-CL-4070 Rev.A
Page 4 of 6
BIDDERS
ANSWER
(Confirmed /
Not Confirmed)
Description
CLARIFICATION
(If Any)
___________
Bidders Seal
_________________________________
Signature of Authorized Representative
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-CL-4070 Rev.A
Page 5 of 6
Annexure-A
TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
(TO BE SIGNED BY VENDOR'S PRINCIPAL CORPORATE LEVEL SIGNATORY ON COMPANY LETTERHEAD)
I, ON BEHALF OF M/s
No.
A702-029-82-41-PF-T-4070
IS
IN
TOTAL
____________
Bidders Seal
___________________________________
Signature of Authorized Representative
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-CL-4070 Rev.A
Page 6 of 6
Annexure-B
S.NO
DESCRIPTION
1.
GUARANTEED POWER
CONSUMPTION ( IN kWhr/hr) AT
MOTOR TERMINALS
Total
(average)
power
consumption for working Air
Blowers, Vacuum Pumps &
operating
Reciprocating
Compressor.
Note:
1) Vendor shall quote the guaranteed power consumption for loading & penality purpose.
Vendor shall submit the guaranteed power consumption along with the Price bid in this
format and submit the copy of the same along with unpriced bid mentioning Guaranteed
power consumption as Quoted.
2) No other power consuming equipment shall be considered for power calculation.
3) During PG test, power consumption shall be measured in respective energy meters of
each motor (Air Blower, Vacuum Pump & Operating Reciprocating compressor) located
in substation. Energy consumption measured in respective energy meters of each motor
shall be added to arrive at the overall energy consumption. As this measurement of
energy also includes losses within cables the same will be subtracted from the overall
energy measured value to arrive at energy consumption at Motor terminals by
measurement & computation method.
4) Guaranteed power consumption shall be quoted in kWhr / hr.
5) Guaranteed power consumption shall be recorded for 72 hrs. and average consumption
of power over 72 hours test shall be considered.
6) No positive tolerance shall be permissible for Guaranteed power value.
7) Vendor to also refer Loading & Penalty criteria (A702-029-82-41-LP-4070) attached with
Tender..
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-LP-4070 Rev.A
Page 1 of 5
PROJECT
OWNER
BORL, BINA
CONSULTANT :
JOB NO.
A702
18.03.2016
ANAND
PPP
PB/RKT
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
DOCUMENT No.
1.0
A702-029-82-41-LP-4070 Rev.A
Page 2 of 5
SCOPE:
This specification describes the Loading & penalty criteria applicable to VPSA Oxygen
Plant.
2.0
2.1
General
This section describes the guarantee requirements which the VPSA Oxygen Plant fulfill,
the penalty for shortfall in guaranteed parameters and the rejection of the plant by Owner.
2.2
Guarantees
Apart from guarantee requirement as stated in General Conditions for Contracts (GCC),
Vendor shall guarantee the following.
2.2.1
Workmanship Guarantee
The Vendor shall guarantee the Owner that the entire plant inclusive of all equipment,
component and items (Mechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation etc.) shall be free from
faulty design, poor workmanship and improper material of construction and that the plant
is of sufficient size and capacity, using the most energy efficient state-of-the-art
technology to fulfill the operating conditions satisfactorily as specified in the bid package.
Should any defect in design, material, workmanship or operating characteristics develop
within the guarantee period, Vendor shall make all necessary alterations, modifications,
repairs and replacement free of charge within one month of notification/detection without
any commercial implication to the Owner.
2.2.2
Performance guarantee
2.2.2.1 General
a) Vendor shall guarantee the performance parameters of the plant as a whole to meet
the plant performance parameters as specified in the bid package.
b) The Vendor shall submit the detail test procedure and methods of computation of
results for review by the Owner/Consultant.
c) The guarantee parameters shall be adjusted to account for variation in ambient
conditions prevailing at site during performance testing. Necessary calculations,
correction curves shall have to be furnished by the Vendor for this purpose during
detail engineering which shall be final.
2.2.2.2
2.2.2.3
a)
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-LP-4070 Rev.A
Page 3 of 5
Product Purity:
Vendor shall guarantee the Oxygen purity as specified below, with maximum negative
tolerance of instantaneous oxygen purity of 1%. However, the average Oxygen purity
shall not fall below 90% in any case over a continuous period of 72 hrs of PG test duration.
Oxygen purity (average)
:
90% (v) min.
b)
Capacity :
Vendor shall guarantee the Oxygen generation capacity of the VPSA Oxygen Plant as
specified below.
Oxygen:
182 TPD (as 100% of gaseous oxygen)
During performance guarantee test, Oxygen generation capacity shall be measured
keeping the Oxygen purity, Dew point of Oxygen & Battery limit pressure of Oxygen at
guaranteed level.
c)
Battery limit pressure of Oxygen gas: - Vendor shall guarantee the minimum pressure of
Oxygen gas as 1.5 kg/cm2 (g) at the package battery limit.
d)
Dew point of Oxygen Gas: - Vendor shall guarantee the dew point of Oxygen gas as
) 46 Deg C at atmospheric pressure.
e)
Electric Power Consumption: Guaranteed Electrical power requirement for VPSA Oxygen
Plant by Vendor to generate 182 TPD (as 100% of gaseous oxygen) Gaseous Oxygen
shall be considered for loading and PG test.
f)
Turn-Down Capacity: 50% of total Oxygen generation capacity without Oxygen venting.
Vendor shall demonstrate the turndown operation of the plant to the satisfaction of
Owner/Consultant for a period of minimum 8 hrs and during turndown operation all other
Process Guarantee parameters (Oxygen Purity, dew point of oxygen & Battery limit
pressure of Oxygen) shall be met.
2.3
(-
Repair/Rectification/Modification
In case the unit fails to meet the guaranteed parameters, the Vendor shall carryout,
necessary repair, rectification and modification within the time frame defined in the
contract or as mutually agreed with the Owner/Purchaser, at his own risk and cost to
establish the guaranteed parameters in the final performance test. All costs involved for
above activities i.e. supply of manpower, materials, consumables and machines etc. shall
be to Vendor's account.
Even after carrying out such works if the guaranteed performance parameters are not
met with, penalty shall be leviable as specified below for shortfall in guaranteed
parameters.
2.4
PENALTY
Price Reduction Due To Non-Fulfillment of Guaranteed Parameters
Price reduction shall be applicable in case of shortfall in product capacity and/or increase
in Electricity consumption. Any shortfall in the product purity shall make the plant liable
for rejection.
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-LP-4070 Rev.A
Page 4 of 5
For every 1% (or part there of) shortfall in Oxygen gas production (provided Oxygen
purity, Oxygen pressure at battery limit & Oxygen dew point are maintained as per
requirement), 1 % of the total contract price shall be deducted.
2.4.2
2.4.3
Vendor shall note that the total reduction in price and penalty on account of para 2.4.1 and
2.4.2 above will not exceed 10% (ten percent) of the order value.
2.4.4
No benefit shall be passed on to the VENDOR in case the guaranteed power consumption
demonstrated by him during performance guarantee run is lesser than the quoted figure in
bid.
2.5
REJECTION
The owner reserves the right to reject the VPSA Oxygen Plant Package under the following
conditions.
2.5.1
If average purity of Oxygen gas is below the specified level (i.e 90% (vol) minimum).
Maximum negative tolerance for instantaneous oxygen purity shall not exceed by 1% (vol).
2.5.2
If the Oxygen pressure at the package battery limit falls below specified value (i.e 1.5 kg/cm2
(g))
2.5.3
If the dew point of Oxygen gas is higher than (-)46 0C at atmospheric pressure.
2.5.4
If the Oxygen production capacity is short by more than 5% of specified guaranteed capacity.
2.5.5
If the total power consumption exceeds by 5 % of the guaranteed value indicated by vendor
in their bid.
2.6
2.6.1
Vendor shall furnish the guaranteed total Electrical power consumption per hour (for Air
Blower, Vacuum Pump & operating reciprocating compressor). The guaranteed power
consumption for guaranteed capacity, as mentioned in the offer by Vendor, shall be
considered for loading purposes for comparison with other offers.
The Differential Operating Cost (DOC) of the plant shall be loaded to the original Oxygen
plant cost quoted by the Vendor. The differential operating cost shall be calculated as per
the formula given below.
DOC
Where;
DOC
PL
PV
CP
DF
DF
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-LP-4070 Rev.A
Page 5 of 5
2.6.2
Loading on account of guaranteed power shall be limited to maximum 10% of quoted order
value.
2.6.3
Vendor shall submit the guaranteed power consumption along with the Price bid in the
format (Annexure-B of Technical Checklist A702-029-82-41-CL-4070) and submit the copy
of the same along with unpriced bid mentioning Guaranteed power consumption as
Quoted.
PROJECT
OWNER
CONSULTANT :
JOB NO.
A702
29.02.2016
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
KP
ASDB
SB
Prepared
Checked
Approved
by
by
by
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
BIDDERS CONFIRMATION /
ANSWER
TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-TCL-4070-Rev. 0
Page 1 of 3
TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE
(STRUCTURAL)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT
OWNER
PMC
JOB NO.
A702
Bidders signature
and stamp
01.02.2016
AKS
AM
DCB
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
SI.
No
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Page 2 of 3
BIDDERS
CONFIRMATION / ANSWER
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-TCL-4070-Rev.0
TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
SI.
No
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-TCL-4070-Rev.0
Page 3 of 3
BIDDERS
CONFIRMATION / ANSWER
Notes: 1. The Bidder shall indicate his reply in the space provided in the Technical confirmation. In case
space provided is not adequate, the reply may be furnished separately under suitably numbered
annexure/ attachments duly referred against the comment / query.
2. The confirmation statements/ Queries are required to be categorically confirmed/answered by the
bidder and the completely filled in Technical questionnaire shall be submitted together with the Bid.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 1 of 23
PROJECT
OWNER
BORL, BINA
CONSULTANT
JOB NO.
A702
MACHINERY DIVISION
A
Rev.
No
18/03/2016
Date
ANAND
PPP
PPP
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
1.0
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 2 of 23
SCOPE OF SUPPLY/WORK
Bidder shall bid for complete scope of supply/work on turnkey basis and agree to take
single point responsibility for the entire scope of the package.
1.1
Scope of supply
The scope of supply shall conform to P&ID (Doc No A702-79-41-29-1199) & Datasheet
for VPSA Oxygen Plant (Doc No A702-29-79-DS-1806) and shall include but not limited
to the following materials and supplies as per the specifications and drawings/
documents/standards enclosed and forming a part of the Tender.
Sl.
No.
1.
Item
Quantity
1 Set
(ii)
(iii)
Intercooler/aftercooler as required
Sl.
No.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 3 of 23
Item
Quantity
(xv) All inter connecting piping, flanges, gaskets, bolts and nuts
and all type of structural supports for all piping as elaborated in
piping specifications. All the piping connections/ tie in points at
the package battery limit shall be terminated with flanged
connection.
2.
(i) One (1) No. buffer vessel of required capacity common for both
chains to meet the continuous demand of O2 gas.
(ii) Two (2) Nos. (1working+1standby) Reciprocating Oxygen
compressor with electric motor drive and other accessories viz.
pulsation damper, intercooler, after cooler etc. as required,
common for both chains.
3.
RCC building with acoustic proof lining for housing air blower,
vacuum pump, valve skid etc.
Lot
5.
Structural shed with roof and side sheeting etc. for housing
Reciprocating oxygen compressors. Necessary barricading shall
also be done to avoid unauthorized access
Lot
Lot
6.
7.
8.
9.
Lot
Sl.
No.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 4 of 23
Item
Quantity
15.
16.
17.
Vendor shall carry-out HAZOP study for the complete VPSA oxygen Lot
Plant system and submit final HAZOP report for records. Package
vendor shall also participate in HAZOP review meeting for VPSA
Oxygen plant conducted at Owner/EIL office at New Delhi. Vendor
shall also provide any hardware/software required based on the
observations/ recommendation made by HAZOP committee without
any commercial implication. The same shall be justified, in case not
required as per Vendors proven experience.
18.
19.
Special tools and tackles for erection and start up of equipment and
for operation and maintenance. Prices for the same shall be included
in the Lump Sum price quoted.
Lot
20.
Lot
21.
22.
Quotation for recommended spares for two years normal operation Lot
and maintenance for complete package. Itemized price list of 2 years
spares along with recommended quantity for complete package
including mechanical, electrical & instrumentation items to be
submitted along with the bid. Owner shall order these spares
separately.
Drawings and Documents as per Vendor Data Requirement (Refer Lot
document A702-029-82-41-VR-4070). Also refer Electrical VDR (Doc.
No A702-029-16-50-VR-4070), Instrumentation VDR (Doc. No A702-029-16-51-VDR-4070) & Piping VDR (Doc. No.-A702-029-1643-VDR-4070).
Any other equipment, materials and supplies within the Battery Limits
so as to make the system complete in all respect for its safe and
efficient operation. Any additional items or feature required, during
23.
24.
Lot
Sl.
No.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 5 of 23
Item
Quantity
Scope of Services
Vendors scope of services shall include, but not limited to the following.
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
Surface preparation, protective coating and painting, including supply of paint at works.
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
Establishment and maintaining the site office in connection with the site work.
1.2.8
All Civil works connected with Construction of Building, pavement, drainage facilities,
cables or pipe trenches, foundation, structural steel works, grouting etc; Piling (if required)
and soil treatment for the foundation. (Refer Annexure-5 of this document for details)
1.2.9
1.2.10
Erection of VPSA oxygen Plant package. The same shall be carried out to the satisfaction
of the purchaser (or his authorised representative).
1.2.11
1.2.12
Commissioning and Performance guarantee test run of VPSA oxygen Plant package.
1.2.13
1.2.14
On-site training at project site to Owners personnel for operation and maintenance.
Bidder shall impart training to Owners operating and maintenance personnel at site for the
offered VPSA oxygen plant including all electrical, instrumentation. The cost towards these
training activities shall be included in the basic cost of the package. Minimum no. of Client
personnel shall be considered as: 10 operators and 4 engineers from Mechanical, Electrical
& Instrumentation. Also refer Annexure -3 of this document.
1.2.15
Preparation and submission of drawings and documents as specified under Vendor Data
Requirement.
1.2.16
Participation of vendor in the HAZOP study to be conducted on the offered VPSA oxygen
Plant (as part of utility system of entire complex) at Engineers India Bhawan (EIB), New
Delhi and incorporation of HAZOP recommendations in the P&ID/System. Per Diem rate for
the above participation shall be indicated by the bidder along with the bid. Total Four (2)
man-days will be considered for evaluation of bids/price comparison.
1.2.17
1.2.18
Vendor shall obtain all applicable statutory clearances, permits from local, statutory and
other bodies.
1.2.19
1.2.20
1.2.21
1.2.22
1.2.23
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 6 of 23
1.3
Exclusions
1.3.1
The following items shall be provided by the purchaser and are excluded from
Vendors scope:
a) Battery Limit isolation valves and downstream flanges.
b) All work outside plant battery limit.
c) Supply of utilities like electric power, service water, cooling water, etc. are
excluded from Vendors scope. However, utilities will be supplied at single point at
battery limit. Further distribution shall be in vendors scope (also refer Annexure-2
for more details).
NOTE: Anything, which is not mentioned in exclusion within the plant battery limit shall be in the
scope of the contractor.
2.0
BATTERY LIMIT
Bidder must furnish dimensioned preliminary plant and equipment layout, along with bid,
taking care of available space.
i.
All battery limit piping shall have flange connection. Flanges rating shall be as per P&ID,
EIL-PMS (Doc No. A702-6-44-0005-4070).
ii.
Operating platforms shall be provided for operation of B/L isolation valves by Package
Vendor.
iii.
Bidder shall supply battery limit valve for each line with all gaskets and fastener.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 7 of 23
Description
1.0
1.1
Horizontal Balanced Opposed Electric Motor Driven Reciprocating Compressor along with
all its accessories and auxiliaries
Rigid Flanged Coupling
All suction and discharge volume bottle/pulsation dampeners for each stage
Relief Valves at discharge of each stage
Non Return Valve, compressor discharge valve type, at final stage discharge
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.5
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
Frame Lube oil System (console type) for the compressor and driver motor (if force feed
lubrication is required for motor) as per API 618
Dedicated CW console for Closed Circuit Cooling water system for the compressor for
cooling of cylinders and packing (as per API-618), including all piping and fittings for
cylinder jackets and Packings/Heat Exchangers.
Packing / Distance piece vent, drain and purging system
Capacity Control system as per P&ID
Machine Monitoring System for continuous monitoring of machine vibration, temperatures,
rod drop etc
All other necessary mechanical, electrical, instrumentation & controls items for safe,
smooth and efficient operation of complete Compressor Train
Wet/Liquid Ring Vacuum Pump (As Applicable)
(Refer also Eqpt. data sheets and related specifications for full details)
Vacuum Pump- electric motor driven along with all its accessories and auxiliaries
Coupling (non-lubricated, flexible metallic type) with spacer and with non sparking guard.
Shaft sealing system (DE / NDE Side) complete with skid mounted seal flushing system,
associated instrumentation & controls and piping for all pumps/compressors.
Suitable automatic spillback/bypass arrangement if required to meet the turndown
requirement.
Relief valve at discharge outlet
Separator along all its accessories
Water Cooler along all its accessories
Recirculation Pump electric motor driven along with all its accessories and auxiliaries, if
required
Fabricated Steel Base Plate: Common for Compressor, Pump, separator and cooler
All other necessary mechanical, electrical, instrumentation & controls items for safe,
smooth and efficient operation of complete Vacuum Pump Unit
Dry Vacuum Pump (As applicable)
(Refer also Eqpt. data sheets and related specifications for full details)
Vacuum Pump- electric motor driven along with all its accessories and auxiliaries
Coupling (non-lubricated, flexible metallic type) with spacer and with non sparking guard.
Shaft sealing system (DE / NDE Side) complete with skid mounted seal flushing system,
Sr. No.
3.4
3.5
3.6
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.10
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 8 of 23
Description
associated instrumentation & controls and piping
Relief valve at discharge outlet
Fabricated Steel Base Plate: Common for Pump & driver
All other necessary mechanical, electrical, instrumentation & controls items for safe,
smooth and efficient operation of complete Vacuum Pump Unit
Blower
(Refer also Eqpt. data sheets and related specifications for full details)
Blower electric motor driven along with all its accessories and auxiliaries
Couplings (Flexible) and non sparking Guard
Shaft sealing system (DE / NDE Side) complete with skid mounted seal flushing system,
associated instrumentation & controls and piping
Inlet and Exhaust Silencer.
Inlet and outlet Bellows (SS).
Acoustic Housing for complete Blower/Motor Package.(if Required)
Pressure Relief valve.
Vibration Isolators for the complete Package.
All other necessary mechanical, electrical, instrumentation & controls items for safe,
smooth and efficient operation of complete Blower Package
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 9 of 23
SCOPE OF WORK
1.1
Vendors scope, shall include sizing, design, engineering, manufacturing, supply, testing at
manufacturers works, packing and delivery at site of all the electrical equipment viz. motors,
local control panels etc. including supply of all commissioning spares, special tools & tackles
as per the specifications and data sheets enclosed with the requisition. The major electrical
equipment for package includes:
1.2
Installation, testing & commissioning at site of the electrical items is included in vendors
scope. Vendors scope shall also include providing all specialised tools & tackles / instruments
required for the above service.
1.3
Scope of 3D modelling shall be as specified elsewhere in the Tender and same shall be in
accordance with EIL spec. 8-76-0022
1.4
Bidder shall furnish the following electrical layout drawings / documents post bid during
detailed engineering :
i) Lighting Layout drawing and Bill of Material
ii) Earthing Layout drawing and Bill of Material
iii) Lightning Protection layout drawing and Bill of Material
2.0
Exclusions
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 10 of 23
Bidder
Purchaser
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1.2.7
1.2.7.1
1.2.7.2
1.2.7.3
1.2.7.4
1.2.7.5
1.2.7.6
1.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.5
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.5
1.6.6
1.6.7
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 11 of 23
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(Note-6)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1.6.8
1.6.9
1.6.10
1.6.11
1.6.12
1.7
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
1.8.4
1.8.5
1.8.6
1.8.7
1.8.8
1.8.9
1.8.10
1.8.11
1.8.12
1.8.13
1.8.14
1.8.15
1.8.16
1.8.17
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 12 of 23
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1.8.18
1.8.19
1.8.20
1.8.21
1.9
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.10
1.10.1
1.10.2
1.10.3
1.10.4
1.10.5
1.10.6
1.10.7
1.10.8
1.10.9
1.10.10
1.11
1.12
1.12.1
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 13 of 23
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(Note-2)
Yes
At site:
Yes
3 days for each batch
(2 batches, 4 persons in each batch)
The training shall include detail operation, configuration, modification,
troubleshooting, preventive/ breakdown maintenance etc. as minimum.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 14 of 23
Notes:
1. Residual engineering includes instrument sizing, Thermowell Wake frequency calculation, utility
consumption, specifying derived data in process data sheets, type and material selection of
instruments wherever required. Residual engineering shall also include actual transfer/
implementation of the information provided in the form of notes in P&ID and instrument data
sheets/ equipment data sheets and other documents provided in bid.
2. Bidder shall provide required assistance to Purchasers instrumentation erection contractor, DCS
vendor during interface between bidders supplied PLC based control system &MMS and
Purchasers DCS.
3. EIL/Owner shall witness testing of any or all items at various stages during manufacture and/or
final stage before shipment as per approved Inspection Test Plan. All system oriented items shall
undergo factory testing and integrated factory acceptance test. Testing shall be carried out as per
approved procedure. No such item shall leave manufacturers works without factory acceptance
test.
4. Any activity specifically not listed in this document, does not absolve the vendor of their
responsibility to include such activities in their scope of work, which otherwise is necessary, to
complete instrumentation work for VPSA Oxygen Plant Package unit. All such activities shall be
carried out by the vendor without any implication. Instrument Job Specification shall be read in
conjunction with scope of work.
5. Any items not covered in this section, which form part of the vendors standard package and are
required for ease of operation, control safety and interlock requirement shall be supplied by
Bidder without any implication.
6. Multipair cables used by purchaser will be 12 pair and 6 pair types only. Bidder shall select
junction boxes and panel cable entries accordingly.
7. Machine monitoring shall be provided for reciprocating gas compressors (driver rating
>=1600KW).For other items e.g. Air blower and vacuum pump, vibration and temperature
monitoring shall be as per manufacturer standard. In case, vibration and temperature monitoring
signals for these other items are not connected to bidders MMS, the same shall be connected to
bidders package PLC.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 15 of 23
All piping in Vendors scope, the Design, Engineering, Fabrication, Inspection & Testing shall
be designed as per ASME B 31.3 and steam & condensate, which shall meet the
requirements of Indian boiler regulation (IBR).
2.
Vendor shall obtain statutory approval from IBR authority for IBR lines coming under his
scope.
3.
Refer P&ID No. A702-79-41-99-1199, Rev.0 and Piping battery limit orientation (piping scope
drawing) for VPSA Oxygen Plant (A702-029-16-43-SK-4070, Rev.A) for scope of work.
4.
The entire package shall consist of various skids of different sizes and there shall be only one
battery limit for the entire skid as per Scope Drawing VPSA Oxygen Plant (Doc. No.- A702029-16-43-SK-4070) and skid layout shall be submitted to OWNER/EIL for review.
5.
Vendor shall note that OWNER/ EIL reserves the right to alter the sequence of lines at battery
limit during engineering design and drawing review and the contractor shall be bound to follow
the changed sequence and location of battery limit interface. No extra claims raised by
Vendor or any extension of time schedule for project completion shall be entertained by
OWNER/EIL on account of the above modification.
6.
All companion flanges along with gaskets and nuts & bolts/studs shall be in bidders scope of
supply and shall be as per attached Piping Material Specification (doc. No.-A702-6-44-00054070).
7.
All other auxilliary systems and drain piping shall be in vendors scope.
8.
Drain piping for CBD, OWS & Condensate shall be joined together in a separate common
manifold to terminate at single point locations for CBD, OWS & Condensate respectively.
These points shall be minimized. CBD points shall generally be 2 and at EL 100100 buttwelded connection. OWS & Condensate shall be funnel points. Vendor shall terminate OWS
& Condensate piping at EL 100050.
9.
10.
Minimum elevation of overhead piping shall be such that a clear gap of 2.2 M headroom is
available below pipe/insulation/supports.
11.
Minimum height of equipment foundations shall be 300 mm from finished grade level.
12.
All open vents to atmosphere shall be vented to safe locations at least 3 M above nearest
operating floor or platform located within a radius of 6 M for steam and 8 M for
hydrocarbon/toxic discharge.
13.
Hydrostatic test, leak test, Non destructive Examination shall be carried out by vendor as per
applicable piping design codes.
14.
Hydrostatic vents and drains shall be provided at High points and Low points respectively as
per approved PMS.
15.
16.
All Bare pipes of size 14 and above shall be supported with corrosion pad.
Adequate space shall be provided for removal of equipment components for routine
maintenance.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 16 of 23
17.
Vendor shall ensure that required operation & maintenance platforms and access are
provided and also ensure that no interference with Owners piping while routing the lines
under their scope.
18.
All instruments and valves requiring attention during normal operation shall be conveniently
operable.
19.
Piping system shall be adequately flexible to cater for thermal expansion/ contraction under
start-up, operating and shut down conditions. Vendor shall carry out the flexibility analysis of
the piping systems as applicable pertaining to vendor scope using CAESAR-II software
package and ensure & confirm that all lines are safe in Design/Operating conditions etc.
20.
All lines shall be anchored at Vendor battery limit (Vendor Scope). Anchor loads shall be
furnished to OWNER/EIL. Provisions shall be kept for loads on account of purchaser piping at
these anchor points.
21.
Battery limit isolation valves along with drains/vents and platform arrangements required for
access of valves is in Vendors scope.
22.
The job piping materials specification as applicable to incoming and outgoing lines is provided
as doc no. A702-6-44-0005-4070. Vendor shall follow these piping classes as shown in
P&IDs. If any other Piping Material Specification is applicable same shall be given to the
successful bidder post order stage. Basic details for valves are provided in the Piping Material
Specification. Detail Valve material specification (A702-6-44-0006-4070) is also attached with
TENDER.
23.
All other incidental / auxiliary / ancillary / accessory or any enabling work / materials not
specifically mentioned in the specifications but necessary for the execution and completion of
work shall be in the scope of the vendor..
24.
Complete engineering, supply of materials & pre fabricated spools, instruments, supervision,
insulation & painting etc., up to battery limit is in VPSA Oxygen Plant Vendors scope.
25.
All piping general arrangement drawings, battery limit tie-in drawing shall be submitted to
OWNER/EIL for review.
26.
27.
Painting and insulation wherever required shall be done as per respective job specifications.
28.
3D model of entire skid shall be submitted to BORL/EIL by vendor for review purpose. 3D
modelling to be done through PDMS VERSION 12.1 SP4 for the entire package as per 3D
modelling specification (Doc. No. A702-029-16-43-DP-4070).
29.
Vendor to submit General Arrangement Drawings (GADs) generated from 3-D model (PDMS)
of all the piping coming under vendor scope.
30.
Design and supply of all pipe supports and the supporting attachments/materials to the pipe
are in vendors scope of supply.
31.
Vendor to complete the Package and comply with the specifications, standards and drawingss
as per list of attachments
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 17 of 23
The building shall be RCC frame structure with brick masonry wall and RCC roof (or sloping steel
roof with precoated galvalume steel sheeting as per clients requirement) and shall comprise of
areas for housing blowers, vaccum pumps, loading/unloading area etc as per functional requirement.
Contractor shall design and construct the building conforming to all bid requirements and standard/
codal requirements as governing.
All sheds shall be steel structure, precoated galvalume steel sheet roofing and side cladding.
Suitable detail engineering layout as per functional requirement of these buildings shall be prepared
and submitted by the contractor.
Any other Building / Shed as required for functional operation of the VPSA Oxygen
Package
All buildings shall be RCC frame structure with brick masonry wall and RCC roof (or sloping steel
roof as per clients requirement)
All sheds shall be Steel structure, precoated galvalume steel sheet roofing and side cladding.
2. Detail Engineering
Detail Engineering shall be based on "Architectural design basis" and approved preliminary
drawings. The Contractor shall prepare construction drawings and submit the same to Owner/PMC
for review/ approval. The requirement of deliverables by the Contractor for detail engineering is
indicated elsewhere.
3. Construction
The Contractor in strict conformity with Owner/PMC reviewed/approved construction drawings, using
materials as per Specifications, Standards & List of Approved Manufacturers as attached in the
Tender Documents shall carry out construction including construction supervision. Construction shall
include supply of all materials, labours, plants, tools & tackles by the Contractor unless specifically
mentioned elsewhere in the Tender Document.
4. Statutory Approvals
The Contractor shall obtain all necessary approvals from statutory authorities such as Factory
Inspector, Local Municipal or Development Authorities as applicable for the design and construction.
The Contractor shall also prepare all drawings, documents as required for obtaining such approvals
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 18 of 23
and perform necessary submissions to the authority concerned. Any changes/ modifications etc. in
design/construction required for obtaining such approvals shall also be done by the Contractor
without any time & cost implication to the Owner or PMC.
5. Scope of Supply
Owners Scope of Supply : NIL
Contractors Scope of Supply:
All architectural materials (consumables/ non-consumables) required for satisfactory completion of
the job shall be supplied by the contractor.
6. Deliverables by the Contractor
Drawings / Documents Required after Award of contract
The Contractor shall submit a detailed schedule of submission of deliverables as indicated herewith
for review by Owner/PMC as per agreed schedule. Such a schedule shall be made in line with the
overall time schedule indicated elsewhere in the Tender Documents. Submission of all deliverables
shall be as per the said schedule as reviewed by Owner/PMC.
All deliverables shall be prepared using Computer software and shall be complete in all respects
including correct titles indicating Owner, Consultant, Contractor, Project name, PMC Job No., Dates,
Issues, Revisions and signatures of Performer, Checker & Approver of the Contractor.
Incomplete, unsigned & unchecked Documents/ Drawings shall not be accepted and shall be
returned.
All revisions shall be clearly pointed out clouded for easy identification/ review.
All deliverables shall be submitted in requisite number of prints as per methodology mentioned
elsewhere in the Tender Documents.
Deliverables by the Contractor shall be as listed herewith.
7. Drawings
A.
Preliminary Architectural Drawings of the buildings in accordance with bid indicating
Plans, Sections & Elevations & Architectural treatment. Such preliminary drawings shall be prepared
after finalisation of sizes & layout of the required spaces/ areas/ rooms and review of the same by the
originating department of PMC.
B.
Construction drawings of all the Buildings shall be prepared incorporating comments etc. on
the preliminary Drawings.
Construction Drawings shall contain the followings.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 19 of 23
Any other Dwg as required for complete understanding of the Design & Construction.
Drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD software of latest (at the time of floating the Tender)
version.
Drawings shall be prepared in 1:100 or 1:50 scale. For Construction details, Door Window Details the
scale shall be 1:20 to 25. For key plans larger but legible scale may be used.
The Contractor shall prepare & submit specifications of materials etc., which are not covered or
attached in the Tender Documents for review by Owner/PMC.
8. Documents/ Drawings for Statutory Approval
The Contractor shall prepare & submit Documents/Drawings for Statutory Approval in accordance
with the statutory requirement for Information/Record of Owner/PMC.
9. As Built Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare & submit As-built drawings both in requisite no. of hard prints as well as
in form of computer files for Information/Record of Owner/PMC.
10. List of Sub- vendors/ authorised applicators for specialised items
List of Approved Manufacturers of Architectural / Building Products LL -1649-0401
Rev 0
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 20 of 23
STRUCTURAL
1. Design, detailing, supply and construction of substructure & superstructure for the following
buildings/sheds/structures mentioned below.
I.
II.
III.
IV.
2. Design, detailing, supply and construction of equipment (Both static and vibratory) foundations
such as pump, tank and any other auxiliary equipment etc.
3. Adequacy check of existing foundation & superstructure and strengthening of the same if
required, wherever existing structure is used. Design, detailing, supply and construction of the
same is in the scope of contractor.
4. Design, detailing, supply and construction of foundation and supporting structures for blowers,
vacuum pumps, adsorber vessels, surge tank, coolers, silencers, oxygen analyser, reciprocating
oxygen compressors, inter cooler/ after cooler for air blower and oxygen compressor, any other
equipment, pumps, exchangers etc..
5. Design, detailing, supply and construction of foundation and supporting structures of cable rack,
pipe supports/ sleepers, operating/ maintenance platforms , rectangular & circular platforms on/
around of equipment and structures, walkways, cross-overs, skids, trenches, pits, sump,
drains(precast RCC covers) etc.
6. Design of foundation of all structures/equipment foundations etc. should be as per the document
of Geotechnical data for VPSA oxygen plant (A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0) attached in the
tender.
7. Monorails or over head cranes of required capacity for operation/maintenance of equipments/
pumps in pipe racks, sheds or other structures if required.
8. Water proofing/ leak proofing and damp proofing construction for UG trenches, liquid retaining
structures, tanks, pits, sumps etc. wherever specified/ directed by engineer-in-charge.
9. Painting/ protective lining/ tilting/ coatings etc are to be done wherever required, as per the job
specification enclosed.
10. Painting to structural steel shall be as per EIL Job specification no. A702-000-79-41-PLS-01.
Environmental classification shall be considered as Industrial.
11. Dismantling and re-erecting of steel structures wherever required.
12. Dismantling/ Demolishing of PCC, RCC & Brickwork etc at all depths below plinth level and at all
heights above plinth level including disposal of unserviceable item outside refinery and stacking &
depositing of serviceable items in Owners scrap yard, location as approved by Engineer-inCharge.
13. Dismantling/ Demolishing of structural steel works and sheeting at all heights above plinth level
including disposal of unserviceable item outside refinery and stacking & depositing of serviceable
items in Owners scrap yard, location as approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
Design, detailing and construction of any barricading arrangement required in or around unit/
worksite considering safety aspects at any stage prior to the commissioning of the plant is in the
scope of contractor.
14. In addition contractor is to dismantle and remove the same from site after completion of the
project.
15. Preparation of fabrication drawings for all structural steel works and bar bending schedules for all
RCC works.
16. Supplying and mixing of approved brand of bipolar concrete penetrating corrosion inhibiting
admixture in concrete in superstructure and substructure for protection of reinforcement against
corrosion as per EIL specification 6-68-0017.
17. Providing and fixing electro-forged hot dipped galvanized MS gratings and Handrails on platform
and stairs.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 21 of 23
18. Obtaining statutory approval from local authorities, Development Authorities or any other
concerned authorities before starting the works at site.
19. Furnishing activity wise work programme and taking necessary approvals from the related
department in the refinery before carrying out any activity.
20. 3-D Modeling of all structures including foundations. The system to be adopted is specified
elsewhere in the document.
21. Monthly/ weekly progress report clearly mentioning BOQ, status of submitted approved & pending
drawings/ documents.
22. Documentation of AS BUILT drawings/ details for all works as specified elsewhere in this
package.
23. Any other Civil Structural & Architectural Works, not specifically mentioned herein, but required for
the satisfactory and successful completion of the project as per directions of the Engineer-inCharge shall also be in the scope of the contractor.
24. All materials (consumables/ non-consumables) required for the execution of Civil Structural works
under this contract shall be in the scope of the Contractor.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 22 of 23
UG GENERAL CIVIL
1. Clearing and stripping of area within battery limit including contractors storage yard, removing
grass, vegetation growth, roots, cutting of trees if any etc. and disposal of unserviceable material
inside Refinery complex.
2. Earthwork in excavation for all depths in all types of soils for civil works, removal and disposing
the excavated unserviceable soil anywhere within refinery limit or as per direction of Engineer-inCharge.
3. Graded site with average FGL (Finished Grade Level) of 417.0 m above MSL shall be handed
over to the contractor for VPSA Oxygen plant. However, micro grading of the area up to required
levels after completion of construction work shall be in bidders scope. Filling/ Cutting required to
bring the site up to the finished levels is in the scope of Contractor. Earth required for micro
grading and make up to RCC paved levels shall be arranged by the contractor at his own cost
from the approved borrow areas. Borrow areas will be identified by contractor anywhere outside
the complex. However, contractor shall have to bear the cost of royalties etc. as applicable.
4. Construction of RCC pavement for the plant as per specifications and drawings for the new
facilities within new PVSA plant battery limit as per final approved equipment layout is in bidders
scope. The HPP of RCC pavement inside Plant shall be 417.3 m above MSL (Mean Sea Level).
Thickness shown in the standards enclosed with tender are minimum. However, contractor to
provide RCC pavement as per actual loading condition.Contractor shall do the earth work under
RCC pavement to make up the levels with approved earth.
5. Design and construction of RCC storm water drains covered with HDG grating inside VPSA
Oxygen plant battery limit / area for the new facilities. Contractor shall provide proper slopes to
collect run off in the drains and connect it to nearest existing drain outside VPSA Oxygen plant
battery limit. The interconnecting drains in unpaved areas shall be of Stone masonry. Hook up
with existing drain shall be provided by the contractor. Existing storm water drains damaged
during construction period shall be reconstructed / made good to original position by the
contractor himself.
6. Portable fire extinguishers for new facilities within new VPSA Oxygen plant shall be provided by
the contractor as per OISD-116. All the equipments connected with fire protection system shall
either be BIS marked or from companies which carry ISO certification.
7. All necessary civil works required for piping, piping supports, mechanical, instrumentation,
electrical works which have not been exclusively covered shall also form part of scope of work.
8. Any temporary work/ activities like roads, approaches, hard stand etc. required to complete the
work shall be provided and constructed by the contractor.
9. Disposal of surplus earth, debris to debris disposal yard located inside the refinery complex.
10. The contractor shall prepare the necessary construction/ fabrication drawing and shall submit to
EIL/ Owner for review/ approval. No execution of any work shall be done without
reviewed/approved drawing. If during review, any changes/ modifications are required to be done,
the same shall be done by the contractor at no extra time and cost implication.
11. Documentation of AS BUILT details for all works as specified elsewhere in this bid package.
12. Setting up of WORKSITE establishment and CONTRACTORS facilities.
13. Any other civil and structural works required/directed by Client / Engineer-in charge for the
satisfactory and successful completion of the project.
1.1 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
1.4.1 STRUCTURAL
Apart from the conditions mentioned in the Doc No.A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
and standard specifications no. 6-68-0021 & 6-68-0022, the following shall be
strictly adhered to.
1.4.1.1
Contractor shall make necessary arrangement for placing the anchor bolts in
position before concreting. Whenever there are more than four foundation bolts,
these shall be fixed by using template. In case bolts are not available at site at the
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 23 of 23
time of casting of foundation, proper pockets shall be left as per direction of the
Owner/Owners representatives Resident Construction Manager.
1.4.1.2
1.4.1.3
For all structures, which are required to be designed as per provisions of the latest
edition of IS: 1893, the recommendations given in Seismic Design Basis (Doc No.
A702-000-16-54-DB-001) shall be followed.
1.4.1.4
All designs, detailing & construction shall strictly conform to enclosed standards,
specifications & drawings.
1.4.1.5
1.4.1.6
Steel structure fabrication for all steel structures shall be of modular construction.
1.4.1.7
1.4.1.8
1.4.1.9
1.4.1.10 Net Safe Bearing Capacity of Soil considered for the design of foundation shall be
mentioned in drawings for all structures and equipments.
1.4.1.11 Payment clauses mentioned in the attached specification standard stand deleted,
since the same are not applicable for Lump sump package.
Document No.
A702-29-79-DS-1806
Rev. No.
1
Page 1 of
3
MISCELLANEOUS
PROCESS DATA SHEET
1
2. CAPACITY OF PLANT
GASEOUS OXYGEN
TURN DOWN
3. SPECIFICATIONS
A
FEED: AMBIENT AIR
:
:
B/L CONDITIONS
OXYGEN
PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE
(NOTE-2)
% VOL
% VOL
KG/CM2 G (NOTE-5)
DEG C
:
:
:
90(MIN) 1
REMAINING
(-) 46 DEGC @ ATM PRESSURE
:
:
:
:
NOTES :
1. EACH CHAIN SHALL CONSIST OF AIR FILTERS,1 BLOWER WITH ELECTRIC MOTOR, 1VACUUM PUMP WITH ELECTRIC
MOTOTR, 1 PAIR OF ADSORBER VESSEL AND ASSOCIATED PIPING & CYCLOMATIC VALVE/CHANGEOVER VALVE ETC.
2. A) ROOTS AIR BLOWER WITH ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVE SHALL BE PROVIDED TO MEET THE REQUIRED
AIR DEMAND. BLOWER SHALL HAVE IT'S DEDICATED SUCTION FILTER.
B) AIR BLOWER SHALL HAVE IT'S INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PANEL INCLUDING ALL INSTRUMENTS
REQUIRED TO ESTABLISH THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PACKAGE.
C) BLOWER SHALL HAVE NON RETURN VALVE AT THE OUTLET.
D) AIR BLOWER SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR THE MAX. HUMIDITY AND MAXIMUM TEMP. CONDITIONS OF BINA.
E) BYPASS ARRANGEMENT WITH AUTO CONTROL VALVES TO BE PROVIDED.
3. ONLINE O2 ANALYSERS TO BE PROVIDED IN THE PRODUCT GASEOUS OXYGEN LINE BY THE PACKAGE VENDOR.
4. THE WASTE GAS CONTAINING NITROGEN, WATER, CARBON-DI-OXIDE SHALL BE DISCHARGE TO AIR THROUGH
SILENCER.
5. PACKAGE VENDOR SHALL PROVIDE 2 NOs (1W+1S) COMPRESSORS WITH ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVE,COMMON FOR
BOTH CHAINS, TO MEET REQUIRED PRESSURE LEVEL AT THE BATTERY LIMIT.EACH COMPRESSOR SHALL HAVE IT'S
DEDICATED PULSATION DAMPNER , INTERCOOLER, AFTER COOLER ETC.
1
6. TWO NOS.( ONE IN ADSORPTION AND ONE IN REGENERATION) ADSORBERS FOR EACH CHAIN WITH MOLECULAR
SIEVE ADSORBENTS SHALL BE PROVIDED. THE MOLECULAR SIEVE SELECTION SHALL BE SUCH THAT PACKAGE
TURN AROUND SHALL NOT HAPPEN IN LESS THAN FOUR YEARS.
7. VACUUM PUMP WITH SEPARATE ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVE SHALL BE PROVIDED
8. ONE O2 BUFFER VESSEL OF REQUIRED VOLUME TO MEET THE CONTINUOUS DEMAND OF O2 GAS SHALL BE
PROVIDED. IT SHALL BE COMMON FOR BOTH CHAINS. OFF SPEC O2 GAS VENTING THROUGH SILENCER WITH
NECESSARY CONTROL VALVES LINKED WITH O2 ANALYSER SHALL BE PROVIDED.
1
0
Rev. No.
14.01.2016
17.09.2015
Date
REVISED AS MARKED
ISSUED FOR ENGG.
Purpose
SGM
PP
SA
Prepared
By
Reviewed
By
Approved
By
MISCELLANEOUS
PROCESS DATA SHEET
PROJECT
UNIT
ITEM NO.
Document No.
A702-29-79-DS-1806
Rev. No.
1
Page 2 of
3
CLIENT BORL-Bina
JOB NO. A702
UNIT NO. 29
SERVICE VACUUM PRESSURE SWING ADSORPTION PACKAGE
9. UTILITIES CONDITIONS
COOLING WATER
SUPPLY TEMPERATURE
SUPPLY PRESSURE
RETURN TEMPERATURE
RETURN PRESSURE
LP STEAM
TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE
SERVICE WATER
TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE
INSTRUMENT AIR
TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE
NITROGEN
TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE
DM WATER
TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE
MINIMUM
NORMAL
MAXIMUM
DESIGN
DEG C
KG/CM2 G
DEG C
KG/CM2 G
33
4.3
(NOTE-19)
33
DEG C
KG/CM2 G
SATD.
3
175
4
190
5
240
7
DEG C
KG/CM2 G
AMB
4
65
14.5
DEG C
KG/CM2 G
AMB
4.5
AMB
6.5
50
7
65
10.5
DEG C
KG/CM2 G
AMB
4.5
AMB
6.5
AMB
7
65
10.5
DEG C
KG/CM2 G
AMB
4.5
40
5.4
45
6.4
65
15.8
65
7
65
7
45
1
0
Rev. No.
411.6(AVG)
936.3(MIN),947.4(NORMAL),954.2(MAX)
tmin= 1.1 degC
tmax:=45.6degC
54@42degC
42 DEGC
23.7DEGC
1.1 DEGC
45.6 DEGC
14.01.2016
17.09.2015
Date
284.5 MM(MAX)
2 km/hr(MIN)-25km/hr(MAX)
WEST TO EAST
45.6 DEGC
REVISED AS MARKED
ISSUED FOR ENGG.
Purpose
SGM
PP
SA
Prepared
By
Reviewed
By
Approved
By
MISCELLANEOUS
PROCESS DATA SHEET
PROJECT
UNIT
ITEM NO.
Document No.
A702-29-79-DS-1806
Rev. No.
1
Page 3 of
3
CLIENT BORL-Bina
JOB NO. A702
UNIT NO. 29
SERVICE VACUUM PRESSURE SWING ADSORPTION PACKAGE
11. NOISE LEVEL FROM THE MACHINES/ PACKAGE SHALL NOT EXCEED 85 dB(A) AT ONE METER DISTANCE FROM ALL
ROTATING EQUIPMENTS APLLICABLE WITHIN THE PACKAGE. SOUND ATTENUATORS, ANTI NOISE BOX, IF REQUIRED
SHALL BE PROVIDED BY PACKAGE VENDOR TO MEET THE ABOVE NOISE LEVEL.
12. PACKAGE VENDOR SHALL CONSIDER SHELTER FOR ALL THE PROCESS MACHINERIES AND OUTDOOR
ATMOSPHERE FOR ALL THE VESSELS.
13. PACKAGE VENDOR SHALL PROVIDE NECESSARY INSTRUMENTS FOR THE MEASUREMENT OF PERFORMANCE
PARAMETERS OF THE PACKAGE AND IT SHALL INCLUDE (AS A MINIMUM) FLOW TRANSMITTER, PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER,TEMP. TRANSMITTER, DEW POINT ANALYSER, O2 ANALYSER ETC. VENDOR TO PROVIDE
NECESAARY CONTROL FOR FLUCTUATING DEMAND OF OXYGEN PRODUCT.
14. MOC:
1. OXYGEN PIPING DOWNSTREAM OF ADSORBER VESSEL SHALL BE SS304L/SS316L.
2.O2 BUFFER VESSEL/COLLECTION TANK SHALL BE SS304L/SS316L.
3. ALL COMPONENTS/PIPINGS OF RECIPROCATING COMPRESSOR IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH OXYGEN SHALL BE
SS304L/SS316L.
4. FOR PIPING OF ALL OTHER SERVICES RELEVANT PMS SHALL BE FOLLOWED.
5..THE MOC OF CYCLOMATIC VALVE/CHANGEOVER VALVE SHALL BE AS PER VENDOR .
15. PACKAGE VENDOR SHALL PROVIDE PLC BASED CONTROL PANEL/ SYSTEM FOR THE TOTAL PACKAGE
16. PACKAGE VENDOR SHALL GUARANTEE THE FOLLOWING PROCESS PARAMETERS:
A) CAPACITY
B) PURITY OF O2 GAS: 90% VOL(MIN) 1
C) DEW POINT OF O2 GAS: (-) 46DEGC AT ATM. PRESSURE.
D) B/L PRESSURE OF O2 GAS: 1.5 KG/CM2(g)
E) UTILITY
- ELECTRICAL POWER
17. PACKAGE VENDOR TO REFER EIL P & ID NO. A702-79-41-29-1199 FOR B/L AND UTILITY PIPING/
INSTRUMENTATION DETAILS.
18. AVAILABLE AREA REQUIRED FOR VPSA TO BE CONFIRMED BY VENDOR.
19. VENDOR TO PROVIDE 1+1 PSVs IF REQUIRED TO PREVENT OVERPRESSURIZATION DUE TO BLOCK DISCHARGE.
20. COOLING WATER PRESSURE DROP WITHIN VENDOR B/L TO BE RESTRICTED WITHIN 0.7 KG/CM2.
1
0
Rev. No.
14.01.2016
17.09.2015
Date
REVISED AS MARKED
ISSUED FOR ENGG.
Purpose
SGM
PP
SA
Prepared
By
Reviewed
By
Approved
By
JOB SPECIFICATION
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 1 of 14
JOB SPECIFICATION
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT
OWNER
BORL, BINA
CONSULTANT :
JOB NO.
A702
18/03/2016
Rev.
No
Date
BKD
ANAND
PPP
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
JOB SPECIFICATION
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 2 of 14
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL .......................................................................................................................................... 3
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................................................... 7
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
CONFLICT ....................................................................................................................................... 14
JOB SPECIFICATION
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 3 of 14
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
The intent of this document is to outline the requirements for the design, engineering,
procurement of materials and bought out components, manufacture, assembly, insulation,
inspection, testing and painting at works, packing and supply, unloading & storage at site,
local handling, erection/installation, testing & commissioning, painting at site, training of
purchasers personnel, performance guarantee run test at site of VPSA Oxygen plant
package as Lump Sum Turnkey package for BORL at Bina, Madhya Pradesh, India.
1.2
The system shall be complete with all mechanical, structural, electrical, instrumentation,
piping, pressure vessels, heat exchangers, pumps, compressors, handling equipment,
other interconnecting and safety items as required for smooth and trouble free operation of
the package.
Package vendor shall be responsible for furnishing all specified equipment and
documentation.
1.3
Detail scope of supply and services shall be as per Scope of Supply/Work for VPSA
Oxygen plant (A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070).
1.4
The system supplied shall be complete in every respect ready for installation and
operation and any item not specifically mentioned in this specification but nevertheless
required for proper design, operation, maintenance and safety of the equipment/personnel
shall be deemed to have been specified by the purchaser and included in the scope of
supply of the vendor.
2.0
2.1
Plant Location
State
Nearest Important Town
Nearest Railway Station
Nearest Port
Nearest Airport
:
:
:
:
:
:
Bina
Madhya Pradesh
Bina
Bina
Kandla
Bhopal
Temperature, Relative humidity and Wind data for the plant site are as follows:
S.
Parameter
No
(A) METEOROLOGICAL DATA
1
Elevation above mean sea level, m
2
Barometric
2
pressure, mbar
3
4
5
Ambient
3
temperature, C
Relative
4
humidity, %
Rainfall
5
data: mm
(a) for 1-hour period
(b) for 24-hour period
6
Wind
6
data:
(a) Wind Velocity, km/hr
(b) Prevailing Wind Direction
(B) DATA FOR EQUIPMENT DESIGN
1
Design
2
wet bulb temperature, C
Minimum
Normal
Average
Maximum
Design
411.6
936.3
947.4
954.2
1.2
16.4
54
45.6
80
284.5
2
W to E
25
42
23.7
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
JOB SPECIFICATION
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
3
4
5
6
2.2
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 4 of 14
Low
3
ambient temperature for Min Design Metal Temperature:,
C
Coincident temperature and humidity for Air Blower and
Air Compressor design:
Design
4
air temperature for air cooled exchangers in general, C
Design
5
air temperature for air cooled exchangers in critical
services not followed by water cooled trim exchangers, C
1.1
42 C & 54
% RH
45.6
45.6
Seismic Data
Seismic forces shall be as per IS: 1893 and site specific seismic spectra (A702-000-16-54DB-0001) enclosed with TENDER.
3.0
3.1
For following items, Vendor may follow EIL Vendor list attached with the TENDER or
propose additional vendor list having satisfactory Proven Track Record (PTR) in similar
service, which shall be reviewed during detail engineering. Clients/EIL decision shall be
final and vendor is obliged to comply with the same without any commercial implication.
Adsorber vessel
Surge tank
Coolers
Silencers
All sub ordered items of this package shall be sourced from Owner/EILs approved
Vendors listed in Master Vendor/ Supplier List attached elsewhere in the TENDER. Any
Vendors if proposed by the bidder for any item where no list is provided in the requisition,
the makes of same shall have adequate Proven Track Record (PTR) in similar application
and shall be subject to OWNER approval during detail engineering without any time and
cost implication to Owner.
4.0
4.1
Purpose
4.1.1
VPSA Oxygen Plant shall be utilized for production of gaseous oxygen by Vacuum
pressure swing adsorption technology as per attached Process Data Sheets (Doc. No.
A702-29-79-DS-1806) and P&ID (P&ID No. A702-79-41-29-1199).
4.2
Process Description
4.2.1
Atmospheric air after filtration is drawn by blower, compressed and fed to the adsorbent
vessel.
4.2.2
The adsorbent, zeolite based Molecular sieve, selectively captures Nitrogen, CO2 and
moisture leaving pure oxygen as a product which is routed to a surge tank.
4.2.3
The surge tank ensures continuous availability of quality product as the beds switch over
from pressure to vacuum.
JOB SPECIFICATION
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 5 of 14
4.2.4
Oxygen compressor shall suck oxygen from the surge tank and compress it to the
desired pressure as per process datasheet.
4.2.5
The adsorbent is then regenerated by sucking (pressure reduction) the entrapped gas of
the vessel by vacuum pump. The residual gas predominantly Nitrogen, CO2 and moisture
is then discharged into the atmosphere.
4.2.6
Thus two bed VPSA system relies on swing in pressure from above atmospheric to below
atmospheric (vacuum) to each bed sequentially from adsorption to desorption.
4.3
Utility System:
4.3.1 All utilities as per P&ID attached with bid shall be provided to Package Vendor at single
point as indicated in the Piping Scope drawing. Pressure and Temperature conditions of
Utilities shall be as per Process Data Sheet (Doc no. A702-29-79-DS-1806) attached with
bid. For quality of utilities, refer Process BEDB Part B (A702-02-41-ODB-01) attached
with the bid. Any additional hardware to suit the utility condition required by Package
Vendor, shall be included by them in their scope. Other requirements of Process BEDB
Part B (A702-02-41-ODB-01) applicable for this Package shall be complied by the
Package Vendor.
4.3.2 Electric Power shall be provided as specified in Electrical Job Specification (Doc. No.
A702-029-16-50-SP-4070)
5.0
DESIGN BASIS
5.1
Vendor shall confirm that their offer completely complies with the bid specification without
any deviation. Deviation if any shall lead to rejection of bids. Vendor to note that Technical
deviations/ clarifications, if any shall be submitted before pre-bid meeting for resolution.
Vendor is not allowed to attach any deviation list along with bid and Vendor shall comply
with bid specification in total without any deviation.
5.2
The equipment and facilities shall be designed to meet the requirements as specified in
this specification and other documents attached with this TENDER.
5.3
Package layouts shall be prepared taking into consideration various factors like
requirement of operability, approach, safety, withdrawal space requirement, maintenance,
foundation requirements etc. for convenient operation and as specified in piping layout
requirements.
5.4
All structure including Pipe rack, compressor shed shall be of structural steel and shall be
designed and engineered by VPSA Oxygen vendor. However minimum size/elevation
shall be as per layouts attached elsewhere in the enquiry document.
5.5
All the applicable Safety Codes, National & local Laws and regulation shall be followed by
the Vendor for the design, engineering and fabrication of the equipment.
5.6
The available space for the complete plant is as indicated in the enclosed scope drawing
(Drg No. A702-029-16-43-SK-4070). Vendor shall furnish preliminary plant and equipment
layout (along with the bid) taking care of the available space.
The oxygen compressors are required to be housed in the separate structural shed in the
allocated plot area in the enclosed scope drawing (Drg. No. A702-029-16-43-SK-4070)
and the size of this oxygen compressor shed shall be accordingly decided and informed
during bidding stage. While sizing the oxygen gas compressor shed, working clearance on
all sides and maintenance space for impellers removal, heat exchangers bundle removal
must be considered. One number EOT crane of adequate capacity shall also be
JOB SPECIFICATION
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 6 of 14
considered for the maintenance of the oxygen compressors. Piping for utilities and
products shall be terminated at the battery limit as indicated in Piping Scope drawing. All
piping shall be provided with isolation valves at the battery limits by Vendor. Exact location
of terminations of all piping shall be decided during detail engineering stage.
5.7
The unit shall be field proven for similar duty and its design shall take into consideration
normal preventive and running maintenance of the unit and their auxiliaries. Prototype or
extensive modifications of basic designs are unacceptable.
5.8
Each systems and sub-systems shall be laid out and constructed for convenience and
safety of operation and maintenance. All equipment shall be oriented to permit servicing in
such a way so as to require minimum dismantling.
5.9
All equipment and structures shall be designed for installation in environmental and
seismic conditions as applicable.
5.10
5.11
5.12
EOT cranes of adequate capacity shall be provided for the maintenance of the vacuum
pumps, air blowers, compressors etc.
5.13
Equipment design and engineering shall incorporate adequate safety features (as per
applicable specifications of respective equipment as well as Health, Safety and
Environment Codes & Standards) to provide protection to operating personnel, equipment
and environment.
5.14
Design of all electrical systems shall be in accordance with the technical specifications of
electrical system attached with this TENDER.
5.15
All instrumentation and controls shall meet the requirement of instrumentation work
specification attached with this TENDER.
6.0
6.1
Pressure Vessels
Piping
Air Blower, Vacuum
Pump and Oxygen
compressor
:
:
OSHA
Other international standards may also be acceptable subject to their being equivalent
or superior with prior approval of Client/PMC.
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1
JOB SPECIFICATION
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 7 of 14
6.2
& standards,
established
6.3
In case of conflict between international codes and standards and ElL specification
and standards, the later shall prevail.
7.0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
7.1
General
7.1.1
The entire VPSA Oxygen Plant shall be as per Process datasheet no. A702-29-79DS-1806 and this TENDER.
7.1.2
The VPSA Oxygen Plant shall be operated by PLC based control system located in
SRR-3 (Satellite Rack Room -3). Also, Bidder shall refer Instrumentation specification
for more details.
7.1.3
The schematic P&ID flow diagram No. A702-79-41-29-1199 attached with this
requisition shall be applicable for the plant. Bidder shall develop a detailed P&ID
incorporating all equipment instruments, line size etc. during detailed engineering.
7.1.4
7.1.5
The plant shall be complete with all equipment, inter connecting piping,
instrumentation, control system, adsorbent charge and shop painting ( Primer+Finish).
The package piping having interface with owners piping shall be brought to the edge
of the package battery limit and terminated with a flange.
7.1.6
7.1.7
7.1.8
All skids along with interconnected piping shall be assembled and match marked at
vendors works for easy assembly at site.
7.1.9
Bidder can provide either bypass control valve or unloading arrangement for feed
blower based on their standard proven practice.
7.1.10
In case of wet type of vacuum pump system, seal soft water (being DM Water) shall be
once through and to be recycled. Bidder shall provide necessary hardware and design
the system for re-utilizing the DM water. Pump configuration shall be 1 working + 1
stand by.
JOB SPECIFICATION
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 8 of 14
7.2
Pressure Vessels
7.2.1
All the pressure vessels including adsorber vessel shall be designed, fabricated,
inspected and tested as per ASME Sec. VIII Div.I & Div.II and ElL standard
specifications for pressure vessels for package item6-12-0030. For design of Oxygen
Buffer vessel PD5500 is also acceptable.
7.2.2
Vessels subjected to cyclic loading shall, in addition, meet the following requirements:
a) Fatigue analysis report for adsorber vessels shall be furnished for information.
b) Killed carbon steel materiel, SA 516 Gr. 60 or superior w.r.t susceptibility to fatigue
load shall be used for Adsorber vessels. MOC for Oxygen Buffer vessel shall be
SS304L/SS316L as per Process Data Sheet.
c) Vessel circumferential and longitudinal welds and nozzle to shell head welded
joints shall be 100% radiographed.
d) All nozzle attachments shall be with full penetration welds.
e) All nozzles shall be self-reinforcing type.
7.2.3
Adsorbers shall be complete with their respective adsorbent bed support and inlet and
outlet nozzle screens. MOC of Bed screens shall be Stainless steel grade.
7.2.4
All vessels shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with codes and
specifications referred in this specification.
7.2.5
Vessels shall be fitted with safety valve, pressure and temperature gauges, manhole,
vent, drain and utility connections, as required.
7.3
Rotating Equipment
Refer Annexure-1 of Scope of work/supply Doc. No. A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 and
job specification for rotating equipment for VPSA Oxygen Plant (A702-029-82-41-SP4070) attached with the TENDER
7.4
Pressurization System
7.4.1
RCC building (with acoustic insulation) housing air blower, vacuum pump etc. shall be
provided with ventilation facility.
7.4.2
7.4.3
Blower room shall also be provided with pressurisation and ventilation system.
7.4.4
The supply air fan capacity shall not be less than 125% of total air requirement
JOB SPECIFICATION
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 9 of 14
7.4.5
A common inlet air filter with air supply fan with motors (1 working + 1 installed standby)
shall be provided for delivering the required quantity of air into the RCC building.
7.4.6
The relevant clauses of standard specification for ventilation/pressurisation plant, std. no.
6-36-0002 shall be followed.
7.4.7
The height of blower room shall be decided considering overhead handling of equipment
for maintenance by a monorail mounted electric hoist with motorized trolley, to be
provided by vendor.
7.5
7.5.1
EOT Cranes-
a.
Package vendor shall refer EIL Standard Specification no. 6-48-0002 for EOT Crane
specification attached with this tender. The crane shall be used for material handling
during maintenance of various machine installed in the RCC building and Compressor
Shed. Package Vendors scope of supply/work for EOT crane shall include the following
as a minimum:
Gantry rail for crane, along with fixtures & welding material, end stoppers at all four
corners for complete bay length as required.
Electrical power supply to the EOT crane shall be through trailing cables hanged
on festoon system travelling on the channels. Power supply live RYB visible
indicator bulbs shall be installed on walkway from where maintenance personal
enters.
Load break switches for power supply (to be installed at shop floor) and cablings.
EOT crane shall be designed as per duty class of M5 as per IS 3177 & IS 807.
b.
The cranes shall be designed, engineered, manufactured, inspected & tested (at
manufacturers work & at site) as per above mentioned standards or equivalent
international standards.
c.
The bridge structure of Overhead Travelling Cranes shall be made from box (double
web) type, plate type, or fabricated from rolled sections. The structure shall be double
girder type.
d.
Cranes shall be designed for minimum head room above the highest hook position and
for closest approach of the hooks to each end stop.
e.
The minimum capacity of EOT crane shall be maximum weight of the component to be
lifted plus 10 % margin.
f.
Package vendor shall select the crane of suitable capacity to meet the maintenance
requirements of compressors, air blowers, vacuum pumps, etc. Auxiliary hoist shall also
be provided in case the selected crane capacity is 15 MT or higher. Capacity of auxiliary
shall be 20% margin of the main hook capacity
g.
Unless otherwise stated, the following hoisting and travel speeds with corresponding
acceleration shall be used:Hoisting: 2.0 m/min, 7 cm/s2
Cross travel: 10.0 m/min, 7 cm/s2
JOB SPECIFICATION
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 10 of 14
Suitable inching (creep) speed mechanisms shall be provided for main hook and
auxiliary hook (if applicable) to facilitate accurate spotting of the load. Creep speed for
main hoist and Auxiliary hoist shall be 10% of the main hoisting speed and Auxiliary
speed respectively.
i.
The end carriage shall be fitted with safety stops to prevent crane from falling more than
one inch in the event of breakage of a track wheel or axle.
j.
k.
l.
DC electromagnetic or Electro hydraulic thrustor brake shall be used for the hoisting
motion. Electro hydraulic thrustor-operated brakes shall be used for the cross and long
travel motions. The brakes shall be such that they are applied when the power supply to
the brake is interrupted or when the circuit breaker is open or when the controller is
brought to off position. Braking torque for LT and CT motion shall not be less than 125%
of maximum torque of selected motor.
m.
n.
Maintenance walkways with suitable access shall be provided on both sides along the
long travel.
o.
One connecting walking way shall also be provided atleast on one gable end.
7.6
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Refer Annexure-2 of Scope of work/supply Doc. No. A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 and
job specification for electrical for Cryogenic Nitrogen Plant (A702-029-16-50-SP-4070)
attached with the TENDER.
7.7
INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
Refer Annexure-3 of Scope of work/supply Doc. No. A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 as well
as Job specification for cryogenic Nitrogen plant (A702-029-16-51-SP-4070) for
Instrumentation works of Package.
7.8
PIPING REQUIREMENTS
Refer Annexure-4 of Scope of work/supply Doc. No. A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070,
Design Basis for piping (A702-029-80-41-0005) & Scope drawing VPSA oxygen plant
(A702-130-16-43-SK-3001) attached with the TENDER.
7.9
8.0
8.1
Inspection:
8.1.1
JOB SPECIFICATION
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 11 of 14
submit Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) before commencement of fabrication. The approved
QAP shall form the basis for equipment inspection.
8.1.2
Vendor shall extend necessary services and facilities in this regard. Third Party Inspection
shall be as per commercial section of TENDER.
8.1.3
8.1.4
For equipment, piping, valves, etc. the following certificates shall be furnished to
Owner/Consultant.
a. Testing certificates
b. Material certificate
c. Shop test for performance
d. Non-destructive examination (DPT, Radiography etc.)
e. Site fabrication test (for piping etc.)
Vendor shall also furnish any other certificates, which are considered essential by
Owners representative. In this connection, see the Vendor Data Requirement also.
8.2
Testing At Site
Testing at site shall be as per the respective Standard Specification/ Job Speciation and
other documents attached/ referred with this bid document.
8.3
8.3.1
Package vendor shall guarantee the performance parameters individually for each
equipment and the plant as a whole to meet the plant performance parameters as
specified in the bid document.
JOB SPECIFICATION
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 12 of 14
8.3.2
Since the complete plant cannot be assembled and performance tested at Package
vendors work, all major equipment shall be individually performance tested at works, and
the final performance testing of the completely assembled plant shall be carried out at site
under the supervision of package vendor, under prevailing site conditions. The Package
vendor shall submit the detail test procedure and methods of computation of results for
review by the Employer/Consultant before conducting the performance testing.
8.3.3
Package vendor shall conduct a performance guarantee test run of the plant after
commissioning and necessary manpower support, labour assistance shall be provided
through mechanical erection contractor available at site. The procedure for Pre
commissioning, commissioning & performance testing shall be submitted for Employer/
Consultants review and shall be mutually agreed.
8.3.4
EIL standard no. 7-76-0103, Instructions to vendor for site performance guarantee
requirements for package units shall be applicable for the performance testing.
Following clause of Standard Specification for Instructions to Vendor for Site
Performance Guarantee Requirements for Package Units (Doc. No. 7-76-0103) stands
modified:S. No.
1.
Clause No.
5.2
Description
Add the sentence to the Clause 5.2 - All calibration
reports/certificates shall not be older than 6 months from the
date of conducting Performance guarantee test.
8.3.5
Package vendor to also refer Loading and penalty criteria for VPSA Plant (Doc No. A702029-82-41-LP-4070) attached with the Tender.
8.3.6
The duration of performance testing shall be maximum 72 hours continuous (or as decided
by Owner/ EIL during PG test procedure review).
8.3.7
VPSA Oxygen system Performance guarantees testing shall be carried out while required
air flow is maintained as per package vendors approved PFD/PDS.
9.0
SPARE PARTS
9.1
Recommended Spares
Vendor shall furnish quotation of recommended spares (Mechanical, Electrical, and
instrumentation) for two (2) years normal operation and maintenance of equipment with
itemized price list, separately for each module along with the Bid. These shall be ordered
by purchaser separately. The un-priced copy of itemized list of spares shall be attached
with technical offer also. The price of these spares shall not be considered for commercial
evaluation/ price comparison.
9.2
Commissioning Spares
Vendor shall supply adequate quantity of commissioning spares, so as to ensure that
commissioning of the system is not hampered for shortage of commissioning spares.
Vendor shall include the cost of the commissioning spares in the lump sum quoted price.
In case, during commissioning, any spare is used from two (2) years operation and
maintenance spares or mandatory spares, the same shall be replenished by vendor
without any cost implication, within a mutually agreed time.
9.2.1
All spares parts shall be wrapped and packaged so that they are preserved in original asnew condition, under normal conditions of storage to be anticipated in India, and shall be
properly tagged and coded so that later identification for intended equipment usage will be
facilitated. The two (2) years recommended spares and commissioning spares shall be
packaged separately and clearly marked as Spare Parts and Commissioning Spares
respectively.
9.3
Mandatory Spares
JOB SPECIFICATION
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 13 of 14
Vendor shall supply the following Mandatory spares for the system. Price of Mandatory
Spares shall be included in the base price quoted.
Mandatory Spares
Sl. No.
Item/ tag no.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Part Description
Quantity Required
Complete set of installed filter 1 set for each chain
elements for suction filter
Switching valves for each type 1 set for each chain
and
size
associated
with
adsorber skid, Air Blower and
Vacuum Pump.
29-LZ-00-1006
Gaskets for each type, size and 2 sets for each chain
rating for piping and vessels.
Gasket for coolers for each joint 4 sets for each chain
Bolts & nuts for each type & size 10 % (subject to min
for piping and vessels
2 nos.) for each chain
Mandatory spares for Instrumentation items as per Instrumentation Doc. No.
A702-029-16-51-SL-1001
Mandatory spares for Electrical items as per Electrical Doc. No. A702-02916-50-MS-4070.
Mandatory spares for Rotating Equipments as per Doc. No. A702-029-16-45SL-4070.
Remarks:
1. The word Set means the quantity required for full replacement of that part in one machine.
2. Vendor shall include all the mandatory spares as defined above & as applicable
to the proposed design of the equipment.
3. Spare parts shall be identical in all respects to the parts fitted on the main
equipment, including dimensions, material of construction & heat treatment
9.4
All spares parts furnished by the vendor shall be wrapped and packaged so that they are
preserved in original as-new condition, under normal conditions of storage to be
anticipated at site, and shall be properly tagged and coded so that later identification for
intended equipment usage will be facilitated. They shall be packaged separately clearly
marked as spare parts and shipped at the same time as the equipment.
10.0
11.0
12.0
a.
JOB SPECIFICATION
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 14 of 14
marked for site erection. Equipment shall also be protected to be suitable for prolonged
outdoor storage of around 12 months in the eventuality of delayed erection.
b.
Attachments, spare parts of the equipment and small items shall be packed separately in
wooden-cases. Each item shall be appropriately tagged with identification of main
equipment, its denomination and reference number of the respective assembly drawing.
The packaging shall be suitable for the shipping through sea transportation.
c.
Detailed packing list in water-proof envelope shall be inserted in the package together
with equipment.
d.
Each equipment shall have an identification plate giving salient equipment data, make,
year of manufacture, equipment number, name of manufacturer.
13.0
14.0
CONFLICT
In case of any conflict among various documents, following order of precedence shall
govern:
Process Package / Process Data sheet / P&ID / Licensor Specification
Scope of Work
This Job specification and Datasheet
EIL Standard Specification
Other Codes & Standard
However all conflicts / discrepancies in the above mentioned documents shall be
submitted to EIL for approval and EIL/Owner decision shall be final without any
commercial Implication to owner/EIL.
JOB SPECIFICATION
(ELECTRICAL)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-16-50-SP-4070
Rev. A
Page 1 of 4
JOB SPECIFICATION
(ELECTRICAL)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
(Tender No. A702-029-82-41-PF-T-4070)
PROJECT:
A
Rev.
No
OWNER :
JOB NO. :
A702
07.03.2016
Date
AKM
VB
ANPS
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
JOB SPECIFICATION
(ELECTRICAL)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-16-50-SP-4070
Rev. A
Page 2 of 4
1.0
General
1.1
1.2
The equipment shall conform to this specification, enclosed data sheets and standard
specifications.
1.3
In case of conflict between requirements specified in various documents, the more stringent
one shall be followed. Owner / PMCs decision shall be binding. The same shall be complied
without any time / cost implication to Owner.
2.0
Scope
Refer Document no A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070.
3.0
Site Conditions
The equipments offered in the VPSA oxygen plant shall be suitable for continuous operation
under the following site conditions:
Design ambient temperature
40 C
1.1 C
45.6 C
1000 M
Relative Humidity
86 %
Atmosphere
The environment is highly corrosive due to presence of chemical vapours; hence all the
equipment shall be provided with anti-corrosive epoxy paint.
4.0
5.0
6.0
:
:
:
415V 10 %
6.6kV 10 %
50Hz 3 %
Utilization Voltage
Motors rated upto 132 kW
Motors rated above 132 kW
Anti-condensation heaters
:
:
:
415V, 3 ph
6.6kV, 3 ph
240V, 1 ph
Special Requirements:
JOB SPECIFICATION
(ELECTRICAL)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-16-50-SP-4070
Rev. A
Page 3 of 4
7.1
7.2
Ammeter on field LCS for motor suitable for 4-20mA signal through transducers.
7.3
All Control cable shall be 1.5 sqmm copper, twisted pair overall shielded type.
7.4
All HT/LT power and control cables shall be XLPE insulated & FRLS type.
7.5
7.6
All power cables 2.5 sqmm to 16 sqmm shall be with copper conductor and above 16 sqmm
shall be aluminium conductor.
7.7
In case of HV Motors, having rating greater than or equal to 1500 kW, 3 numbers class PS CTs
for motor differential protection shall be provided in the neutral terminal box. Exact specification
of CTs (CT ratio, Knee point voltage, Imag, etc.) shall be given during detailed engineering so
that it matches with the corresponding CTs provided on switchgear side. There shall be no cost
& time implication on account of these.
7.8
7.7.1
Local Control Panel shall be used for starting / stopping of motors. Following facilities shall be
provided as a minimum on Control panel
a) Start/Stop push buttons for motor
b) Ammeters for all motors rated above 5.5 kW.
c) Selector switches
Selector switch (Local/Remote, Auto/Manual) shall be provided as per P&ID & operational
requirements.
For all other control and indication requirements refer elsewhere in Tender. Local control
panels/Local control stations shall be provided with FRP canopy.
7.7.2
Separate local control stations shall be provided for motor located away from LCP. Local
control stations shall conform to EIL spec. 6-51-0014 and the same shall be provided with
following facilities as minimum:
a) Start/Stop push buttons for motor
b) Ammeters for all driver motors rated above 5.5 kW.
c) Selector switches (As required)
7.7.3
Local push button control station shall be wired directly from the switchboard installed in the
substation.
7.7.4
Emergency push buttons as required for plant operation and safety etc. shall be provided.
8.0
Spares
8.1
Mandatory spares for electrical system shall be supplied as per doc no. A702-029-16-50-MS4070.
8.2
Vendor shall submit a list with unit prices of recommended spares for two years of normal
operation for all electrical equipment along with their bid.
8.3
Recommended list of maintenance spares for two years operation shall include the following
as a minimum for motors. Vendor shall ensure to quote for the same.
a.) Bearing for DE/NDE-one set
b.) Terminal box cover with screws
JOB SPECIFICATION
(ELECTRICAL)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-16-50-SP-4070
Rev. A
Page 4 of 4
c.) Fan
d.) Terminal block
8.4
Commissioning spares, special tools and tackles, if required shall be supplied by vendor.
9.0
All the electrical items/ equipments, even if not defined here, but required for completion &
commissioning of the VPSA Oxygen Plant Package shall be included in the scope of vendor.
10.0
All power and control cable sizes shall be finalised during detailed Engineering. Provisions as
required in vendors equipment for termination of the same shall be made accordingly without
any cost & time implications to owner.
11.0
Vendor to note that, if there is any requirement of emergency electrical power for the auxiliary
equipments supplied with the main motor/blower, same shall be informed.
12.0
Prefabricated FRP canopy shall be provided for all outdoor electrical equipments.
13.0
Vendor shall supply cable glands and tinned Cu/ Al crimping type lugs for equipment supplied
by them (Material of lugs will be dependent on the incoming cable conductor material, i.e. Al/
Cu lugs for Al/ Cu cables, which will be informed during detail engineering. No cost / time
implication shall be applicable on account of this). For outdoor equipment, double
compression type Nickel plated brass weather proof cable glands shall be supplied. The size
of cable glands supplied shall be appropriate to the size of cable.
14.0
VENDOR LIST
1) List of approved vendors for Electrical equipment/components is as per vendor list attached
elsewhere in the Tender.
2) Additional makes of imported items shall be subject to Owner/EILs approval during detailed
engineering.
3) Vendor may procure material from any of the listed vendors. However current validity and
range of approval as per EIL enlistment letter, workload, stability and solvency need to be
verified by the vendor before placement of order.
15.0
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
Refer document no. A702-029-82-41-LL-4070.
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 1 of 21
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE
PROJECT
OWNER
A
Rev.
No
BORL, BINA
CONSULTANT :
JOB NO.
A702
. 29.02.2016
Date
Purpose
KP
Prepared
by
ASDB
SB
Checked
by
Approved
by
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 2 of 21
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
3.0
4.0
FIELD INSTRUMENTS
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
JUNCTION BOXES
10.0
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT
11.0
MISCELLANEOUS
12.0
SPARES
13.0
14.0
LOGISTIC SUPPORT
15.0
VENDOR LIST
16.0
LIST OF ATTACHEMENTS
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
S. No.
1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 3 of 21
GENERAL
Location of field equipments/
instruments
Area classification
Hazardous area
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 4 of 21
2.5.1
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 5 of 21
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 6 of 21
3.16
Interlock scheme
4.
4.1
FIELD INSTRUMENTATION
Process instrument type for
alarm/ shutdown
Ingress protection for instruments
and enclosures in field
4.2
4.3
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 7 of 21
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.1.1
4.4.1.2
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.3.1
4.4.3.2
4.4.3.3
4.5
a)
b)
c)
d)
For all intrinsically safe equipment manufactured locally (indigenously), the testing
shall be carried out by any of the approved test house like CIMFR / ERTL etc. The
equipment shall in addition bear the valid approval from PESO (Petroleum
Explosives safety organizer) / CCE (Chief Controller of Explosives), Nagpur.
Approvals other than above shall neither be offered nor will these be acceptable.
Transmitters
Type of Transmitter
Smart type with HART protocol
All make and model nos. of Smart transmitter and positioners provided by bidder
shall be suitable for calibration with bidders supplied universal type hand held
Configurator.
Integral LCD type output meter
Required (Display output in user configurable
engineering units) with each transmitter.
Temperature transmitter
Required for all temperature elements except
for bearing temperature element. Field remote
mounted,
but
not
head
mounted.
Thermocouple element shall be used for all
standard applications. RTD shall be used for
motor bearing and winding temperature. Dual
compartment type temperature transmitter
shall be used.
Level Transmitter
Selection of Level transmitters shall be based
on guidelines given below:
Level up to 2400 mm except for
Generally Guided Wave Radar type
services requiring purge or where
liquid might boil
Interface applications
Displacer type (external displacer) type to be
where GWR are not suitable.
Level above 2400 mm and for
Differential pressure type
services requiring purge, or where
liquid might boil
Transmitter accuracy (PT, PDT,
As given Below.
FT, DP LT)
For ranges of 760 mm WC
0.075% within a turndown of 1:10 of the
offered span
For ranges < 760 mm WC
0.15% within a turndown of 1:10 of the
offered span
Dia. Seal type with ranges 500 0.25% within a turndown of 1:10 of the
mm WC
offered span
Dia. Seal type with ranges < 500 0.5% within a turndown of 1:10 of the offered
mm WC
span
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
4.6
a)
b)
c)
4.7
a)
b)
c)
4.8
4.9
a)
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 8 of 21
0.25% of range
0.5% of range
0.75% of range
4.14
a)
4.15
a)
4.16
4.17
4.18
Terminal blocks
4.19
Terminals
b)
c)
4.10
4.11
4.12
a)
b)
4.13
a)
b)
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
4.20
4.21
4.22
4.23
5.
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
6.
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 9 of 21
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 10 of 21
Note-3:
(i) Purchaser will provide one redundant power feeder of 110VAC UPS near
Bidder supplied PLC cabinet at SSR-3. Further distribution of power to various
equipments supplied by Bidder like PLC Engineering PC, Printers, MMS cabinet
etc. at SRR-3 and to any other voltage levels as required shall be carried out by
Bidder.
Purchaser will provide one additional power feeder of 110VAC UPS near Field
(local control panel, Analyzers, etc.).Further distribution, derivation to any other
voltage levels as required in field shall be carried out by Bidder.
(ii) Purchaser shall provide one power feeder for 240 V AC Non UPS near PLC
cabinet in SRR-3 for lighting purpose. Further distribution of same to Bidder
supplied PLC and MMS cabinets in SRR-3 shall be carried out by Bidder.
Purchaser will provide one additional power feeder of 240VAC Non UPS near
Field (local control panel, Analyzers, etc.) for lighting purpose.Further distribution
as required in field shall be carried out by Bidder.
7.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
8.
Bidder shall indicate estimated power consumption for 110 V AC (UPS) & 240 V
AC non UPS along with bid.
INSTRUMENT AIR REQUIREMENT (Note-4)
Minimum Pressure
4.5 Kg/cm2 g
Normal Pressure
6.5 Kg/ cm2 g
Maximum Pressure
7.0 Kg/ cm2 g
Note-4: Purchaser will provide one instrument air connection at battery limit of
VPSA Oxygen Plant Package. Further distribution of instrument air to all items
supplied by Bidder, shall be in Bidders scope.
CABLES & CABLE GLANDS
8.1
8.2
8.3
Cable glands
8.4
8.5
9.
JUNCTION BOXES
9.1
9.2
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
9.3
Type of JBs
9.4
10.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 11 of 21
10.9
10.10
10.12
10.13
10.14
10.15
11.
11.1
10.11
SPECIFICATION No.
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
11.2
Vendor list
11.3
Specialty services
11.4
Painting Requirement
11.5
Logistic Support
12.
12.1
12.2
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 12 of 21
months.
Refer vendor list (Sl.No.15) provided with this
specification .Instrument vendor list attached
is for the make only, and not for any specific
Model. For any item, the offered model for
same must meet specifications and PTR
requirement. For items not appearing in
vendor list, after order Bidder shall furnish
proposed sub-vendor list for purchasers
approval.
For Machine monitoring system installation,
testing & commissioning shall be done under
supervision of respective manufacturers
specialists. Bidder to make specialists
services available.
Painting of installation material, instrument
supports and structural supports shall be as
per painting specification attached elsewhere
in Tender.
Logistic support certificate as per S.No 14,
from the suppliers of PLC and MMS shall be
provided by Bidder along with the offer.
SPARES (Note-6)
Startup & Commissioning spares Bidder shall provide instrument start up &
commissioning
spares
for
successful
commissioning of VPSA Oxygen Plant
Package.
Vendor shall procure these spares as per
recommendation of sub vendors/Suppliers and
these shall be available at the time of
commissioning. These shall include all
instrumentation and control items including for
sub-package items. Bidder shall note that in
case any additional spare is required during
erection and commissioning over and above
erection and commissioning spares, the same
shall be supplied by bidder without any time
and cost implications. Also, if any spares are
consumed
during
commissioning
from
mandatory spares, the same shall be
replenished by bidder without any cost
implication.
Installed Spares
Bidder shall provide installed spares as given
below:
I. For Programmable Logic Controller/MMS:
I/O Level- 20%
Marshalling Level- 20%
Spare Space :
I/O Level- 10%
Marshalling Rack- 10%
II. For each Local Panel
Status lamps, switches, push buttons and
other accessories like relays, MCBs, terminals
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 13 of 21
12.4
12.5
13.
13.1
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 14 of 21
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
2) PRESSURE GAUGES
AN INSTRUMENTS PVT LTD
ASHCROFT INDIA PVT LTD
BADOTHERM PROCESS INSTRUMENTS B.V.
BAUMER BOURDON HAENNI SAS
BRITISH ROTOTHERM CO.LTD
BUDENBERG GAUGE CO. LTD
DRESSER INC.
GAUGES BOURDON (I) PVT. LTD. (GEN.INST)
H GURU INSTRUMENTS(SOUTH INDIA)PVT. LTD
H.GURU INDUSTRIES
MANOMETER (INDIA) PVT. LTD.
NAGANO KEIKI SEISAKUSHO LTD
WALCHANDNAGAR INDUSTRIES LTD(TIWAC DIVN)
WIKA ALEXANDER WIEGAND & CO GMBH
WIKA INSTRUMENTS INDIA PVT LTD
INDIA
INDIA
NETHERLANDS
INDIA
U.K.
U.K.
USA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
JAPAN
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
USA
INDIA
USA
INDIA
JAPAN
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
NETHERLANDS
INDIA
ITALY
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 15 of 21
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
SINGAPORE
INDIA
INDIA
5) CONTROL VALVES
ARCA REGLER GMBH
AST APPARECCHI DI SICUREZZA E TENUTA SPA
CCI VALVE TECHNOLOGY GMBH
CONTINENTAL VALVE LTD
DRESSER PRODUITS INDUSTRIELS
DRESSER VALVE INDIA PVT LTD
EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT CHENNAI LTD.
FLOWSERVE INDIA CONTROL PVT LTD-BANGALOR
FLOWSERVE PTE LTD
FORBES MARSHALL ARCA P LTD.
ITALVALV S.N.C
KENT INTROL UK LTD (FORM. A-718)
KOSO INDIA PVT LTD (FORM.K176)
METSO FLOW CONTROL OY(M700)
MIL CONTROLS LIMITED
MOTOYAMA ENGG WORKS LTD
SAMSON AG MESS-UND REGELTECHNIK
SAMSON CONTROLS PVT LTD
SEVERN GLOCON LTD
SEVERN GLOCON INDIA PVT LTD
SPX VALVES & CONTROLS (FORMERLY DEZURIK)
WEIR VALVES & CONTROLS UK LTD
INDIA
ITALY
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
ITALY
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
JAPAN
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
U.K.
INDIA
ITLAY
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
JAPAN
INDIA
GERMANY
JAPAN
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 16 of 21
INDIA
INDIA
U.S.A.
INDIA
GERMANY
U.S.A.
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
U.S.A.
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
8) SIGNAL CABLES
ASSOCIATED CABLES PVT LTD.
ASSOCIATED FLEXIBLES AND WIRES (P) LTD.
CMI LIMITED
CORDS CABLE INDUSTRIES LTD.
DELTON CABLES LIMITED
ELKAY TELELINKS LTD.
KEI INDUSTRIES LIMITED
POLYCAB WIRES PVT LTD.
RALLISON ELECTRICALS PVT. LTD.
SUYOG ELECTRICALS LTD.
T C COMMUNICATION PVT. LTD.(T243)
THERMO CABLES LTD. (FORM. T-150)
UDEY PYROCABLES PVT. LTD.
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
U.K.
INDIA
FRANCE
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
U.K.
NETHERLANDS
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 17 of 21
SINGAPORE
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
U.K.
ITALY
INDIA
JAPAN
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
FINLAND
JAPAN
INDIA
ITALY
GERMANY
U.S.A.
INDIA.
INDIA
GERMANY
INDIA
INDIA
U.K.
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
U.K.
INDIA
SINGAPORE
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
ITALY
ITALY
INDIA
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
TM TECNOMATIC SPA
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 18 of 21
ITALY
INDIA
INDIA
NETHERLANDS
INDIA
INDIA
U.S.
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
JAPAN
U.K.
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
U.K
NETHERLANDS
INDIA
ITALY
U.S.A
GERMANY
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
ITALY
INDIA
INDIA
GERMANY
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
JAPAN
INDIA
INDIA
ITALY
INDIA
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 19 of 21
CAMERON LTD
CURTISS WRIGHT FLOW CONTROL CORPORATION
DRESSER INC.
LESER GMBH & CO. KG
TYCO SANMAR LTD
WEIR VALVES & CONTROLS FRANCE
U.K.
INDIA
INDIA.
GERMANY
INDIA
FRANCE
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
ITALY
INDIA
JAPAN
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
U.K.
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
ITALY
INDIA
JAPAN
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
U.K.
INDIA
U.K
INDIA
USA
SINGAPORE
INDIA
IRELAND
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
SYSTECH INSTRUMENTS
SECO CONTROLS PVT LTD
SERVOMEX GROUP LTD.
TELEDYNE ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTS
YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
YOKOGAWA INDIA LIMITED
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 20 of 21
UK
INDIA
UK
USA
JAPAN
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
GERMANY
INDIA
USA
JAPAN
INDIA
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 21 of 21
S. No.
1.
Document
Technical
Compliance
No. of
Document No.
Rev.
Dated
A609-029-16-51-CF-4070
29/02/2016
sheets
Statement
2.
A702-029-16-51-VDR-4070
29/02/2016
3.
Mandatory spares
A702-029-16-51-SL-4070
29/02/2016
4.
A702-029-16-51-3170
Machine
monitoring
system
A702-029-16-51-3171
Standard
Specification
for
29/02/2016
1
6-52-0052
Package Units
7.
configuration drawing
6.
29/02/2016
0
16/03/15
74
6-52-0040
30/06/15
36
7-52-0001
27/01/15
9.
Standard
Specification
for
Programmable Logic Controllers
Standard for Inst. Connection on
vessels, standpipes and tanks
Instrument Connection On Pipes
7-52-0002
27/01/15
10.
Thermowell
7-52-0035
3
21/03/12
19/07/11
8.
&
Built-up
Thermowell
11.
Thermocouple/RTD
with Thermowell
Assembly
7-52-0036
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014
Rev.
0
Page 1 of 10
GEOTECHNICAL DATA
FOR
PROJECT :
OWNER :
BORL
PMC
EIL
JOB NO. :
A702
Bidders signature
and stamp
0
Rev.
No
01.02.2016
Date
Purpose
SK
SB
VKP
Prepared by
Checked by
Approved by
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 2 of 10
GENERAL
M/s. BORL proposes to construct a VPSA Oxygen Plant and its associate facilities to
cater the requirements of the Debottlenecking project of Bina refinery at Bina, Madhya
Pradesh.
Subsoil data and foundation recommendations included herein are based on soil
investigations carried out in the near vicinity of proposed plant area. Borehole logs
available in the nearby area are enclosed for reference. Bidder shall carry out
confirmatory soil investigations to check and confirm the soil conditions and/or to
develop additional soil data as required for foundation design purposes and submit
the report to PMC/Owner for their review. However, the recommended bearing
capacities included herein shall not be exceeded in any case. Notwithstanding the
information given herein, no extra claim on time and/or cost shall be entertained by owner
in case of change in any data due to subsoil variations.
2.0
SCOPE OF WORK
2.1
2.2
2.3
It is incumbent upon the bidder to seek all technical clarifications concerning the job prior
to the bid preparation. No such clarifications shall be entertained after the award of job.
Notwithstanding this, the decision of Engineer-in-Charge, in case of any disputes shall be
final. However, it must be clearly understood by the contractor that any extra claim and/or
time extension shall not be granted under any circumstances.
3.0
GROUND TOPOGRAPHY
The proposed area of the VPSA Oxygen plant is graded. Details of Natural Ground Levels
(NGL) as existed prior to accomplishment of general site grading work is varying from RL
416.00m to RL 416.50m and the finished ground level of the area is RL 416.0m. Hence,
filling of 0.5m to 1.0m has taken place in the proposed plant area. However, for exact
details regarding finished ground level and depth of cut/fill in the proposed area, reference
may be made to drawings/documents enclosed elsewhere in the tender.
4.0
SUB-SOIL PROFILE
Available borehole log of boreholes NB-12, NB-13, NB-25 & NB-26 are enclosed for
reference.
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 3 of 10
5.0
6.0
FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS
6.1
Shallow Foundations
Bearing capacities as given in the Table-1 below are recommended for the design of
shallow foundations. Bearing capacities have been worked out based on the available
borehole logs, laboratory test results and broad engineering judgment.
Table-1
Width of
Foundation
(M)
Shape of
Foundation
Depth of
foundation
below FGL/NGL
whichever is
lower (m)
Net Safe
Bearing
Capacity
in Shear
(T/M2)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
L/B1.5
1 to 6
Do
1.0
20
20
20
Raft
1.0
20
20
Note:
6.2
i)
ii)
The above values given in column (iv) may be increased by 25% under wind and
50% under seismic conditions.
iii)
Foundation pit bottom shall be covered with mud mat immediately after completion
of excavation.
iv)
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 4 of 10
Minimum width of foundation shall be 1.0m. Back filling after casting of foundations shall
be done as per the clause no. 11.0.
7.0
8.0
1.
80-100 kg/cm2
2.
1750 kg/m3
3.
K factor
0.17
DEEP EXCAVATIONS
In case of deep excavations, special measures like side supports/proper slope and
appropriate dewatering system may have to be resorted to. It shall be contractors
responsibility to mobilize necessary equipment to carryout deep excavations wherever
required without any extra cost and time implication to the owner.
9.0
10.0
11.0
BACK FILLING
The soil available in this plant area is suitable for back filling. The back filling in
foundations may be done with excavated soil as per directions of Engineer-in-charge. This
shall be laid in layers not exceeding 200mm loose thickness and compacted to 90%
Standard Proctor Density.
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 5 of 10
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 6 of 10
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 7 of 10
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 8 of 10
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 9 of 10
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 10 of 10
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
SURFACE PREPARATION AND
PROTECTIVE COATING
(NEW CONSTRUCTION)
1-5-2015
SAHIL / DHANANJAY
SRIDHAR
P. SAHA
25.03.2015
SAHIL / DHANANJAY
SRIDHAR
P. SAHA
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared by
Checked
by
Approved by
AS
CS
SS
DFT
WFT
ID
IRN
LTCS
MS
NB
OD
RCC
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Alloy Steel
Carbon Steel
Stainless Steel
Dry Film Thickness
Wet Film Thickness
Internal Diameter
Inspection Release Note
Low Temperature Carbon Steel
Mild Steel
Nominal Bore
Outside Diameter
Reinforced Cement Concrete
CONTENTS
SL.
NO
PAGE
NO.
DESCRIPTION
1.0
Scope .
2.0
General
3.0
4.0
Equipment
5.0
Surface Preparation, Shop Primer, Coating Application & Repair and Documentation.
6.0
Paint Materials..
14
7.0
Coating Systems...
19
8.0
Storage..
20
9.0
20
10.0
22
11.0
29
12.0
29
13.0
29
14.0
Guarantee ..... 33
15.0
34
1.0
SCOPE
This specification outlines the technical requirement of protective coating for new
construction. This specification shall be applicable for shop & field painting of equipment,
structures, vessels, piping, storage tanks, vessels, chimneys, under insulation painting for hot
and cold insulation of equipments and piping etc.
This specification shall not be applicable for gratings and structural members which are
galvanized as per other standard given elsewhere in the contract.
2.0
EXTENT OF WORK
2.0.1
All uninsulated Carbon Steel & Alloy Steel equipments like vessels, Columns, storage
Tanks, Exchangers if any, parts of boilers etc.
All uninsulated carbon steel, low alloy and related piping, fittings and valves (including
painting of identification marks), furnace ducts and stacks.
All insulated parts of vessels, boilers, chimneys, stacks, piping and steam piping and if any
other insulated items present.
All structural steel work, pipe, structural steel supports, handrails, platforms etc.
Flare lines, external surfaces of MS chimney with or without refractory lining and internal
surfaces of MS chimney without refractory lining. (If present)
Identification of colour bands on all piping as required including insulated aluminium clad,
SS and nonferrous piping.
Supply of all primers, paints and all other materials required for painting (other than Owner
supplied materials)
Repair work of damaged pre-erection/ fabrication and shop primer and weld joints in the
field/site before and after erection as required.
All internal surfaces of CS storage tanks & vessels and RCC tanks in ETP plant.
2.0.2
Quality control, testing and inspection during all stages of work (surface preparation,
application of coating and testing of furnished coating).
The following surfaces and materials shall not require painting in general. However, if there
is any specific requirement by the owner, the same shall be painted as per the relevant
specifications:
a.
b.
c.
Galvanized steel .
d.
Documents
2.1.1
The contractor shall perform the work in accordance with the following documents issued to
him for execution of work.
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Unless otherwise instructed, final paint coating (i.e., application of field primer, wherever
required, intermediate and top coats) on pre-erection/ shop primed equipments shall be
applied at site, only after all welding, testing on systems are completed as well as after
completion of steam purging wherever required .
2.3
Changes and deviations required for any specific job due to clients requirement or otherwise
shall be referred to EIL for deviation permit.
3.0
3.1
The following standards & codes are referred in this specification. Latest revision of these
shall be referred.
IS-101
IS-2379
ISO-12944 1thru 8
:
:
:
ASTM-Vol 6.01&6.03 :
ANSI A 13.1
:
SSPC
: Steel Structures Painting Council
EIL STANDARD 6-79-0011 : Standard specification for tape coating for underground
plant piping
3.2
The latest editions of any of the following standards shall be followed for surface preparation:
3.2.1
ISO 8501-1 / SIS-05 59 00: ISO standard for Preparation of steel substrates before
application of paints and related products. This standard contains photographs of the various
standards on four different degrees of rusted steel and as such is preferable for inspection
purpose by the Engineer-In-Charge.
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
Various International Standards equivalent to Swedish Standard for surface preparations are
given in Table-I.
3.3
The contractor shall arrange, at his own cost, to keep a set of latest edition of above standards
and codes at site.
4.0
EQUIPMENT
4.1
All tools, brushes, rollers, spray guns, blast material, hand power tools for cleaning and all
equipments, scaffolding materials, shot & grit blasting equipments & air compressors etc.
required to be used shall be suitable for the work and all in good order and shall be arranged
by the contractor at site and in sufficient quantity. The manufacturers test certificates / data
sheets for all the above items shall be reviewed by Engineer-in-charge at site before start of
work.
4.2
Mechanical mixer shall be used for paint mixing operations in case of two pack systems except
that the Engineer-In-Charge may allow the hand mixing of small quantities at his discretion in
case of specific requirement for touch up work only.
5.0
5.1
General
5.1.1
In order to achieve the maximum durability, one or more of following methods of surface
preparation shall be followed, depending on condition of surface to be painted and as instructed
by Engineer-In-Charge. Adhesion of the paint film to surface depends largely on the degree of
cleanliness of the metal surface. Proper surface preparation contributes more to the success of
the paint protective system.
a.
b.
5.1.2
Mill scale, rust, rust scale and foreign matter shall be removed fully to ensure that a clean and
dry surface is obtained. Unless otherwise specified, surface preparation shall be done as per
provisions of relevant tables given elsewhere in this specification.
Before surface preparation by blast cleaning, the surface shall be degreased by aromatic
solvent to remove all grease, oil etc.
5.1.3
Irrespective of whether external or internal surface to be coated, blast cleaning shall not be
performed where dust can contaminate surfaces undergoing such cleaning or during humid
weather conditions having humidity exceed 85%. In case of internal coating of storage tanks,
dehumidifier shall be used, to control humidity level below 60%. Dehumidifier should depress
the dew point of air in the enclosed space, sufficient enough so as to maintain it 3C below the
metal substrate temperature during centre period of blasting and coating application. During
the interval time between application of primer coat and subsequent intermediate and top coats
or between blast cleaning completion and start of application of primer coat, dehumidifier unit
should be in continuous operation to ensure that no condensation occurs on substrate.
Dehumidifier should be able to maintain grain drop (moisture removal) at the rate of 25 grains
per pound of air per hour. Dehumidifier should have capacity of at least 2 air changes per hour
of the enclosed space. All necessary psychometric data should be collected by contractor for
the given site conditions before starting operation of dehumidifier to ensure that desired values
of dew point, moisture content in enclosed scope is achieved.
Dehumidification to be maintained round the clock for surface preparation and painting till the
total coating application is over.
Dehumidifier shall not be stopped under any condition till the entire blasted surface is primed
to the satisfaction of the technical representative of the paint manufacturer interested with
quality assurance for the work. In case the dehumidifier breaks down in middle of the job, the
same shall be replaced at the risk and the cost of the contractor and the entire unfinished work
shall be repeated.
5.1.4
The Engineer in-charge shall have the right to disallow usage of dehumidifier if the
performance is not meeting the specified requirements. Under such circumstances the
contractor shall remove the equipment and replace the same with another equipment to provide
satisfactory results without any additional cost to the owner.
5.1.5
Irrespective of the method of surface preparation, the first coat of primer must be applied by
airless spray/ air assisted conventional spray if recommended by the paint manufacturer on dry
surface. This should be done immediately and in any case within 4 hours of cleaning of surface.
However, at times of unfavorable weather conditions, the Engineer-In-Charge shall have the
liberty to control the time period, at his sole discretion and/or to insist on re-cleaning, as may
be required, before primer application is taken up. In general, during unfavorable weather
conditions, blasting and painting shall be avoided as far as practicable.
5.1.6
The external surface of R.C.C. chimney to be painted shall be dry and clean. Any loose particle
of sand, cement, aggregate etc. shall be removed by scrubbing with soft wire brush. Acid
etching with 10-15% HCL solution for about 15 minutes shall be carried and surface must be
thoroughly washed with water to remove acid & loose particles and then dried completely
before application of paint.
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.3
5.4
Shop coated equipments (coated with Primer & finishing coat) should not be repainted unless
paint is damaged. Repair shall be carried out as per Table 5.0 of paint systems depending upon
compatibility of paint.
5.5
Shop primed equipment and surfaces will only be 'spot cleaned' in damaged areas by means
of power tool brush cleaning or hand tool cleaning and then spot primed before applying one
coat of field primer unless otherwise specified. If shop primer is not compatible with field
primer then shop coated primer should be completely removed before application of selected
paint system for particular environment.
5.6
For Package units/equipment, shop primer should be as per the paint system given in this
specification. However, manufacturers standard can be followed after review.
5.7
5.7.1
Surface shall not be coated in rain, wind or in environment where injurious airborne elements
exists, when the steel surface temperature is less than 5oF above dew point when the relative
humidity is greater than 85% or when the temperature is below 40oF and when the
ambient/substrate temp is below the paint manufacturers recommended temperature of
application and curing. De-humidifier equipment shall be used to control RH and Dew point.
The paint application shall not be done when the wind speed exceeds 20km per hour.
5.7.2
Blast cleaned surface shall be coated with one complete application of primer as soon as
practicable but in no case later than 4 hrs the same day.
5.7.3
To the maximum extent practicable, each coat of material shall be applied as a continuous film
uniform thickness free of probes. Any spots or areas missed in application shall be recoated
and permitted to dry before the next coat is applied. Applied paint should have the desired
wet film thickness.
5.7.4
Each coat shall be in proper state of cure or dryness before the application of succeeding coat.
Material shall be considered dry for recoating when an additional coat can be applied without
the development of any detrimental film irregularities, such as lifting or loss of adhesion of
the under coat. Manufacturer instruction shall be followed for inter coat interval.
5.7.5
When the successive coat of the same colour have been specified, alternate coat shall be tinted,
when practical, sufficiently to produce enough contrast to indicate complete coverage of the
surface. The tinting material shall be compatible with the material and not detrimental to its
service life and shall be recommended by the original paint manufacturer.
5.7.6
Airless spray application shall be in accordance with the following procedure: as per steel
structure paint Manual Vol.1 & Vol.2 by SSPC, USA, Air less spray relies on hydraulic
pressure rather than air atomization to produce the desired spray. An air compressor or electric
motor is used to operate a pump to produce pressures of 1000 to 6000 psi. paint is delivered
to the spray gun at this pressure through a single hose within the gun, a single paint stream is
divided into separate streams, which are forced through a small orifice resulting in atomization
of paint without the use of air. This results in more rapid coverage with less over spray. Airless
spray usually is faster, cleaner, more economical and easier to use than conventional air spray.
Airless spray equipment is mounted on wheels, and paint is aspirated in a hose that sucks paint
from any container, including drums. The unit shall have in built agitator that keep the paint
uniformly mixed during the spraying. The unit shall consist of in built strainer. Usually very
small quantity of thinning is required before spray. In case of high build epoxy coating (two
packs). 30:1 pump ratio and 0.020-0.023 tip size will provide a good spray pattern. Ideally
fluid hoses should not be less than 3/8 ID and not longer than 50 ft to obtain optimum results.
In case of gun choking, de-choking steps shall be followed immediately.
5.7.7
Brushes shall be of a style and quality that will enable proper application of paint.
b.
Round or oval brushes are most suitable for rivets, bolts, irregular surface, and rough
or pitted steel. Wide flat brushes are suitable for large flat areas, but they shall not
have width over five inches.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5.7.8
For each coat the painter should know the WFT corresponding to the specified DFT and
standardize the paint application technique to achieve the desired WFT. This has to be ensured
in the qualification trial.
5.7.9
The paint manufacturers instruction shall be followed as far as practicable at all times for best
results. Particular attention shall be paid to instructions for storage, mixing and thinning and
over coating intervals etc.
5.8
5.8.1
No coat shall be applied until the preceding coat has dried. The material shall be considered
dry for re-coating when another coat can be applied without the development of any film
irregularities such as lifting or loss of adhesion of undercoats. Drying time of the applied coat
should not exceed maximum specified for it as a first coat; if it exceeds the paint material has
possibly deteriorated or maxing is faulty.
5.8.2
No paint shall be force dried under conditions which will cause chalking, wrinkling, blistering
formation of pores, or detrimentally affect the conditions of the paint.
5.8.3
No drier shall be added to paint on the job unless specifically called for in the manufacturers
specification for the paint.
Paint shall be protected from rain, condensation, contamination, snow and freezing until dry
to the fullest extent practicable.
5.8.4
5.9
5.9.1
Where pre erection shop primer has been damaged at isolated localized spots during handling
and transportation, or after erection / welding, the repair of damaged coating of pre-erection /
pre-fabrication or shop primer shall be done as given below and as per the Table 5.0 of this
specification.
5.9.2
5.9.3
Wherever if damaged areas are found extensive and spread over large areas, then entire preerection / pre-fabrication or shop primer shall be removed by blasting to achieve SSPC-SP10 then entire blasted surface shall be primed again with F-9 or F-12 as applicable for the
intended design temp. (See note under table 5.0).
5.10
Paint Application
5.10.1
Shop priming/pre-erection priming with F9 or F12 shall be done only on blasted surface
(SSPC-SP-10)
5.10.2
Shop priming / pre-erection priming with F9 or F12 shall be done only with airless spray.
5.10.3
5.11
Documentation / Records
5.11.1
A written quality plan with procedure for qualification trials and for the actual work including
test and inspection plan & procedure for approval before start of work.
5.11.2
Daily progress report with details of weather conditions, particular of applications, no of coats
and type of materials applied, anomalies, progress of work versus program.
5.11.3
5.11.4
Particulars of surface preparation and paint application during trials and during the work.
5.11.5
5.11.6
5.11.7
DESCRIPTION
VARIOUS INTERNATIONAL
STANDARDS (EQUIVALENT)
ISO 8501-1/ SSPC-SP, NACE,
SIS-05 59 00
USA
USA
3.1
SA 3
SA 2
Commercial Blast
3.3
SA 2
SSPC-SP-2
--
SSPC-SP-3
--
REMARKS
This method is
applied when the
surface is exposed
to
normal
atmospheric
conditions
when
other
methods
cannot be adopted
and also for spot
cleaning
during
maintenance
painting.
Where extremely
clean surface can be
SSPC-SP-5 NACE#1 expected
for
prolong life of paint
system.
The
minimum
requirement
for
chemically resistant
paint systems such
as epoxy, vinyl,
polyurethane based
SSPC-SPand inorganic zinc
NACE#2
10
silicate paints, also
for
conventional
paint systems used
under
fairly
corrosive conditions
to obtain desired life
of paint system.
For steel required to
be painted with
conventional paints
for exposure to
SSPC-SP-6
NO.3
mildly
corrosive
atmosphere
for
longer life of the
paint systems.
Brush-off Blast
3.4
SA 1
SSPC-SP-7
NO.4
3
4
6
7
10
11
P-2
Chlorinated
rubber Zinc
Phosphate
Technical name
primer.
Type and
composition
P-4
Etch
primer/wash
primer
P-6
Epoxy zinc
phosphate
primer
Single pack,
air drying
chlorinated
rubber based
medium
plasticised
with
unsaponifiabl
e plasticizer,
pigmented
with zinc
phosphate.
Two pack
polyvinyl
butyral resin
medium cured
with phosphoric
acid solution
pigmented with
zinc tetroxy
chromate.
Two
component
polyamine
cured epoxy
resin
medium,
pigmented
with zinc
phosphate.
40 3
101
501
783
603
40-45
8-10
40-50
100-125
65-75
8-10
8-10
8-10
6.0-7.2
8-9
1.30.05
1.20.05
1.40.05
1.410.03
2.30.03
30 minutes
2 hrs.
After 30 min.
3 hrs.
30 minutes.
24 hrs
12
8 hrs.
24 hrs.
8 hrs
5days
NA
Min.: 12
hrs.at 20oC
& 50 % RH
Volume Solids
%
DFT (Dry Film
thickness) per
coat in microns
Theoritical
covering
capacity in
M2/coat/ litre
Weight per litre
in kgs/litre
Touch dry at
30oC
(minimum)
Hard dry at
30oC
(maximum.)
Overcoating
interval
Pot life at 30oC
for two
component
paints
Temperature
(Resistance
(minimum)
F-8
Self priming type
surface tolerant
high build epoxy
coating (complete
rust control
coating).
F-9
Inorganic
zinc silicate
coating
A two pack
air drying self
curing
solvent based
inorganic
Two pack epoxy
zinc silicate
resin based suitable
coating with
pigmented and
minimum
capable of adhering
80% zinc
to manually
content on
prepared surface
dry film. The
and old coating.
final cure of
the dry film
shall pass the
MEK rub
test.
Min.: 8 hrs
Min.:8hrs.
Min.: 10 hrs
Not
Applicable
Not applicable
6 - 8 hrs.
90 minutes.
4-6 hrs.
60 oC
Dry service
NA
Dry service
80oC
Dry service
80 oC
Dry service
400 oC
Dry service
DESCRIPTION
Technical name
F-2
Acrylic
Polyurethane
finish paint
F-3
F-6A/B
F-6C
Single
pack
Two-pack
plasticised
aliphatic
chlorinated rubber
isocynate
based medium with
cured acrylic chemical
and
finish paint.
weather
resistant
pigments.
F-6A
Two-pack
Aromatic
amine
cured epoxy resin
medium suitably
pigmented.
F-6B: polyamide
cured epoxy resin
medium suitably
pigmented
40 3
382
603
991
Volume Solids %
DFT (Dry Film thickness)
per coat in microns
30-40
30-40
100-125
200-500
Theoritical covering
capacity in M2/coat/litre
11-15
11-15
5-6
2-3
1.150.03
1.150.03
1.420.03
1.400.03
30 minutes
30 minutes.
3 hrs.
3 hrs.
6
7
9
10
11
Resistance
16 hrs
8 hrs
Min.12 hrs.
6-8 hrs.
80 oC
Dry service
min
8 hrs
5 days
16 hrs
Min.: Overnight
Min.: Overnight
Max.: 5 days
Min.: 8 hrs.
Max.: 48 hrs.
Not applicable
4-6 hrs
30 minutes
60 oC
Immersion service
80oC
Dry service
120oC(Dry service),
50oC (Immersion
service)
Sl.
No
DESCRIPTION
F-11
F-7
F-12
Technical name
Heat resistant
synthetic medium
based two pack
Aluminium paint
suitable upto 250oC
dry temp.
Heat resistant
synthetic medium
based two pack
Aluminium paint
suitable upto 250oC.
Volume Solids %
DFT (Dry Film
thickness) per coat in
microns
380.03
653
202
15-20
100-125
15-20
10-12
5.2-6.5
8-10
Theoritical covering
capacity in M2/coat/
litre
0.950.03
1.400.03
1.000.03
3 hrs.
4 hrs.
30 minutes.
12 hrs
48 hrs
24 hrs
NA
5 days
NA
Over-coating interval
Min. 24 hrs
Min.: 24 hrs
Max.: 5 days.
Min.: 24 hrs
10
Not applicable
4-6 hrs.
Not applicable
11
Temperature
Resistance (minimum)
250oC
Dry service
125oC
Immersion service
500oC
Dry service
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
DESCRIPTION
Technical name
F-14
F-16
F-17
Ambient
temperature
curing Poly Siloxane
coating/High build cold
applied
inorganic
copolymer
based
aluminium coating.
Novalac epoxy
phenolic
coating cured
with
Polyamine
adduct hardner
Suitable
for
under
insulation coating of CS
and SS piping for high
temperature service
Novalac epoxy
phenolic
coating cured
with
Polyamine
adduct hardner
602
98-100
703
Two-component
Epoxy
phenolic
coating cured with
Polyamine adduct
hardner
system
(primer
+
intermediate coat +
finish paint)
Two pack ambient
temperature curing
epoxy
phenolic
coating
system
suitable
for
application under
insulation
of
CS/SS piping
703
100-125
75-100
75-100
125- 150
5-8
4-5
7.0- 9.0
6.5 - 8
1.450.03
1.650.03
1.3
1.7
4 hrs
3 hrs
1 hr
2 hrs
24 hrs
24 hrs
16 hrs
168 hrs (7
days)
Min. 6 hrs
Max.5 days
Min. 36 hrs
Max.21 days
Min.16 hrs
Max. Not applicable
Min. 16 hrs
Max.21 days
4 hrs
4-6 hrs
1 hr
1 hr
up to 600 deg C
-45oC to 150oC
for immersion
service
Polyamine cured
coal tar epoxy
Specially
formulated
polyamine cured
Type & composition coal tar epoxy
suitable
for
application under
insulation
Volume Solids %
DFT (Dry Film
thickness) per coat
in microns
Theoritical covering
capacity in M2/coat/
litre
Weight per liter in
kgs/litre (mix paint)
Touch dry at 30oC
(maximum)
Hard dry at 30oC
(maximum)
Full cure 30oC (for
immersion /high
temp. service)
Over-coating
interval
Pot life at 30oC for
two component
paints
Temperature
Resistance
F-15
-45oC to 125oC
under insulation
And immersion
-45oC to 150oC
under insulation &
immersion
24 hrs
*Paint manufacturers shall furnish the characteristics of all paints materials on original printed
literature, along with the test certificate for all specified characteristics given in this specification.
All the paint materials shall be of first quality and conform to the above general characteristics as per
the Tables 2 and 3.
7.0
COATING SYSTEMS
The coating system should be selected based on the Plant location as given below:
Classification based on Plant Location:
a) Plant located in Inland area (more than 50 km from coast);
Environment Classification Industrial
-
For all unit areas including DM,CPP and Cooling Tower: Table 7.0 to be followed
For offsite area, as well as all unit area including DM, CPP, Cooling Tower: Table
7.0 to be followed
c) For external surface of above ground tanks, table 9.0 to be followed for all locations
(Inland or coastal)
7.1
Internal coating systems for carbon steel and low alloy storage tanks
All Process Units & Off-sites
ANNEXURE 1
Table 5.0
ANNEXURE 1
Table 6.0
ANNEXURE 1
Table 7.0
ANNEXURE 1
Table 8.0
ANNEXURE 1
Table 9.0
ANNEXURE 1
Table 10.0
Coating systems for external side of underground carbon steel plant piping
and underground vessels
Painting under insulation (all environments)
All areas (Process Units & Off-sites) for insulated Piping, Storage Tanks,
Equipments etc (Note-1); (For Carbon Steel, LTCS, Low Alloy Steel & Stainless
Steel)
Coating system for carbon steel components of coolers / condensers (internal
protection) for fresh water service
Fresh Water boxes, channels, partition plates, end covers and tube sheets etc.
Coating system (internal protection) for galvanized or non ferrous or stainless
steel/ duplex stainless steel components of coolers/ condensers for fresh water
service
ANNEXURE 1
Table 11.0
ANNEXURE 1
Table 12.0
ANNEXURE 1
Table 13.0
ANNEXURE 1
Table 14.0
Notes:
1. Repair of Pre-Erection/Pre-Fabrication & Shop priming after erection/ welding shall be done as per
Table 5.0 of ANNEXURE-1
8.0
STORAGE
8.1
All paints and painting materials shall be stored only in rooms to be arranged by contractor and
approved by Engineer-in-charge for the purpose. All necessary precautions shall be taken to
prevent fire. The storage building shall preferably be separate from adjacent building. A
signboard bearing the word PAINT STORAGE NO NAKED LIGHT HIGHLY
INFLAMABLE shall be clearly displayed outside. Manufacturers recommendation shall be
followed for storage of paint materials.
9.0
9.1
IDENTIFICATION
The system of colour coding consists of a ground colour and secondary colour bands
superimposed over the ground colour. The ground colour identifies the basic nature of the
service and secondary colour band over the ground colour distinguishes the particular service.
The ground colour shall be applied over the entire length of the un-insulated pipes. For insulated
lines ground colour shall be provided as per specified length and interval to identify the basic
nature of service and secondary colour bands to be painted on these specified length to identify
the particular service. Above colour code is applicable for both unit and offsite pipelines.
The following ground colour designation for identification of basis classification of various
important services shall be followed.
Post Office Red
Fire protection materials
Off White / Aluminium Steam (all pressures)
Canary Yellow
9.1.1
Secondary colours: The narrow bands presenting the secondary colour which identifies the
specific service may be applied by painting or preferably by use of adhesive plastic tapes of the
specific colour.
9.2
9.2.1
The following specifications of colour bands shall be followed for identifying the piping
contents, size and location of bands & letters. The bandwidth and size of letters in legends will
depend to some extent upon the pipe diameter. Either white or black letters are selected to
provide maximum contrast to the band colour. Bands usually are 100 mm wide and regardless
of band width, are spaced 50 mm apart when two bands are employed.
Colour bands and size of lettering for piping:
Outside diameter of pipe
or covering in mm
19 to 32
38 to 51
64 to 150
200 to 250
Over 250
In addition, ground colour as per specified length should be provided on insulated piping for
easy identification of nature of fluid, on which the colour bands should be painted for
identification of each service. The length of the ground colour should be 3 times the width of
normal bands or 2 meters, whichever is suitable depending on the length of the pipe.
Size of letters stenciled/ written for equipment shall be as given below:
Column and vessel
:
150 mm (Height)
Pump, compressor and other machinery
:
50 mm (Height)
In addition, the contents of the pipe and/or direction of flow may be further indicated by arrows
and legend. If a hazard is involved it must be identified clearly by legend.
9.2.2
Colour bands: The location and size of bands, as recommended, when used, shall be applied to
the pipe.
- On both sides of the valves, tees and other fittings of importance.
- Where the pipe enters and emerges from walls and where it emerges from road & walkway
overpasses, unit battery limits.
- At uniform intervals along long sections of the pipe.
- Adjacent to tanks, vessels, and pumps.
9.2.3
For piping, writing of name of service and direction of flow for all the lines shall be done at
following locations:
9.2.3.1
Offsite Lines: Both sides of culverts, any one side of walkways, near tank dykes, at
tank inlet/outlet points and suction/ discharge of pumps/ compressors.
9.2.3.2
Unit Lines: At the battery limit, suction/ discharge of pumps/ compressors, near
vessels, columns, Tanks, Exchangers etc.
9.2.4
The letters will be in black on pipes painted with light shade colours and white on pipes painted
with dark shade colours to give good contrast.
9.2.5
Only writing of service name shall be done on stainless steel lines. Precautions should be taken
while painting by using low chloride content painting to avoid any damage to the stainless steel
pipes. It is preferable to use adhesive plastic tapes to protect stainless steel pipes.
9.2.6
9.3
For alloy steel/ stainless steel pipes and fittings in stores/ fabrication yard, color band (Minimum
wide) should be applied along the complete length of pipe, bends/ tees, side-curved surface
(on thickness) of flanges as well as valves as per the metallurgy.
9.4
In case of camouflaging requirements of civil defense or any other locational requirements, the
same shall be followed accordingly.
9.5
The specification for application of the complete Piping identification colour code, including
base and bands colours, are presented in the enclosed table.
10.0
SR.
No.
SERVICE
BAND
COLOUR
7012
7012
7012
2011
3001
6010
CRUDE SOUR
CRUDE SWEET
LUBE OILS
FLARE LINES
9006
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
5
6
7
8
9
LPG
PROPYLENE
NAPTHA
M.S.
AV.GASOLINE (96 RON)
10
11
21
22
23
24
25
LAB RS
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
A.T.F.
TOULENE
BENZENE
LAB PRODUCT
FUEL OIL
FULE OIL (Aromatic rich)
ASPHALT
SLOP AND WASTE OILS
SLOP AROMATICS
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
2011
2011
2011
2011
2011 6010
3009
5013
6010
7012
9010 3001
2011
2011
9005
5013
2011
2011
9010
3001
2011
4006
2011
3009
3009
3009
3009
3009
5013
9010
1023
6010
6010
9005
3009
3009
3009
3009
6010
9010
9005
7012
3009
7012
3009
3009
3009
9006
7035
5013
3001
8004
9006
8004
8003
8003
8003
8003
9005
9005
9005
9005
9005
9010
1023
6010
5013
1023
1023
9010
2011
2011
1012
1012
1012
1012
1012
1012
5000
9005
9010
5013
9006
9005
CHEMICAL LINES
40
41
42
43
44
45
TRI-SODIUM PHOSPHATE
CAUSTIC SODA
SODIUM CHLORIDE
AMMONIA
CORROSION INHIBITOR
HEXAMETA PHOSPHATE
46
47
48
49
50
ACID LINES
RICH AMINE
LEAN AMINE
SOLVENT
LCS
1004
1012
1012
1012
1012
3001
5013
5013
6010
7031
WATER LINES
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
RAW WATER
INDUSTRIAL WATER
TREATED WATER
DRINKING WATER
COOLING WATER
SERVICE WATER
TEMPERED WATER
5015
5015
5015
5015
5015
5015
5015
9005
3001
3009
6010
1011
3001
6010
58
59
DM WATER
DM WATER ABOVE 150F
5015
5015
9006
9005
60
61
62
SOUR WATER
STRIPPED WATER
ETP TREATED WATER
5015
5015
5015
1013
5013
3009
3002
SERVICE AIR
INSTRUMENT AIR
NITROGEN
FREON
CHLORINE
SO2
H2S
GAS (Fuel)
GAS (Sour)
GAS (Sweet)
HYDROGEN
6018
6018
6018
6018
1012
1012
2011
2011
2011
2011
2011
3001
9005
2011
1023
3009
9010
3009
9006
9006
3001
6021
9006
9006
9006
9006
1023
3001
2011
6021
5015
9010
HP STEAM
MP STEAM
MLP STEAM
LP STEAM
79
CONDENSATE
80
81
CONDENSATE ABOVE
150F
BFW
5015
3009
5015
3001
Note: For all insulated steam lines, the colour coding shall be follow as given for un-insulated lines with the
specified length of color bands.
INSULATED HYDROCARBON PIPING
82
IFO SUPPLY
83
IFO RETURN
84
HPS
85
BITUMEN
86
CLO
87
VB TAR
88
89
VR AM (BITUMEN / VBU
FEED)
VR BH
90
VAC. SLOP
91
SLOP
92
CRUDE SWEET
93
CRUDE OUR
94
VGO / HCU
95
9005
1023
9005
6010
9005
3001
9005
3001
9005
8004
9005
8004
9005
5013
9005
5013
9005
9010
9005
2011
7012
3001
7012
2011
3009
7011
3009
7011
HEATER STRUCTURE
HEATER CASING
VESSELS & COLUMNS
HYDROGEN BULLETS
LPG VESSELS
SO2 VESSEL
HEAT EXCHANGER
FO TANK AND HOT
TANKS
ALL OTHER TANKS
CAUSTIC / AMINE / ACID
TANKS
SOUR WATER
Steel grey
Heat resistant aluminium
Aluminium
Pink
Oxide red
Canary yellow
Heat resistant aluminium
Black
7011
9006
9006
3014
3009
1012
9006
9005
9006
1004
Sky Blue
5015
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
OUTER SURFACE IN
BOILER HOUSE
COMPRESSORS AND
BLOWERS
PUMPS
MOTORS & SWITCH GEAR
HAND RAILING
STAIRCASE, LADDER
AND WALKWAYS
LOAD LIFTING
EQUIPMENT AND
MONORAILS ETC
GENERAL STRUCTURE
9006
7012
Navy blue
Bluish green
Signal red
Black
5014
5024
3001
9005
Leaf brown
8003
Black
9005
IBR
9Cr-1Mo
5Cr-0.5Mo
21/4Cr-1 Mo
11/4Cr- Mo
SS-304
SS-316
SS-321
Signal red
Verdigris green
Satin blue
Aircraft yellow
Traffic Yellow
Dark blue grey
Dark violet
Navy blue
3001
6021
5012
1026
1023
5008
4005
5014
DANGEROUS
OBSTRUCTION
DANGEROUS OR
EXPOSED PARTS OF
MACHINERY
9005
2008
2008
10.2
Ground Colour
On uninsulated pipes, the entire pipe has to be painted in ground colour., and on metal cladded
insulated lines, minimum 2M long portion should be painted.
10.3
Colour Bands
Location of colour bands:
At Battery Limits
Intersection points & change of direction points in piping
Midway of piping section, near valves, across culverts
At 50 M interval on long stretch pipes
At starting and termination points.
Minimum width:
NB
3 and below
Above 3 to 6
Above 6 to 12
Above 12
Width
75 mm
NB X 25 MM
NB X 18 MM
NB X 15 MM
!!! Note:
For insulated pipes, NB indicates
OD of the insulation
Sequence :
Colour bands shall be arranged in sequence showing Table above and the sequence follows the direction
of flow. The width of the 1st Band to 2nd band is 4:1,
!!! Note : Wherever deemed required by Process Department or Safety, pipes handling hazardous
substances will be given hazard marking of 30 mm wide diagonal stripes of Black and Golden Yellow
as per IS : 2379.
10.4
Special Camouflage Painting for Uninsulated Crude and Product Storage Tanks.
Paint specification shall be as per standards.
Camouflage painting scheme for Defense requirement in irregular patches will be applied with
3 colours
Dark Green
5
:
:
Light green
3
:
:
Medium Brown
2
10.5
150 mm
50 mm
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
Piping
Storage Tanks
10.6.
- Light grey
- Canary yellow
- Natural
- Green
- Red
The painting Status shall be comprehensively updated every 6 months for compliance
10.7
Sl
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10.8
Item
Color
Indicative
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Electrical Motors
Dark Blue
150mm (high)
50mm (high)
40-150 mm
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
Method of Camouflaging
Disruptive painting for camouflaging shall be done in three colours in the ratio of 5:3:2 (all
matte finish).
Dark Green
5
Light Green
3
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
12.0
Once the paint material is supplied to site, In addition to the quality control system as specified
in section 13.0, for each product, the supplier shall organize random sampling and testing in a
third party laboratory as per discretion of the Engineer-in-charge. Failing to meet the specified
quality requirements may cause rejection of the paint products.
.
13.0
13.1
All painting materials including primers and thinners brought to site by contractor for
application shall be procured directly from manufactures as per specifications and shall be
accompanied by manufacturer's test certificates. Paint formulations without certificates are not
acceptable (see section 12.0).
The painting work shall be subject to inspection by Engineer-In-Charge at all times. In
particular, following stage-wise inspection will be performed and contractor shall offer the
work for inspection and approval of every stage before proceeding with the next stage. The
record of inspection shall be maintained in the registers. Stages of inspection are as follows:
(a)
(b)
(c)
13.2
Surface preparation
Primer application
Each coat of paint
Tests for surface finish of blasted surface shall be done by visual inspection using SSPCVIS1. Clear cellophane tape test as per ISO 8502-3 shall be used to confirm absence of
dust on blasted surface. Checks shall be done on each component at least once per 200 m2
of blasted surface and minimum of 3 checks per shift.
Test for presence of soluble salt as per method ISO 8502-9. Maximum allowable salt
content shall be considered 20 mg/m2 (2 mg/cm2). Checks shall be done on each
component at least once per 200 m2 of blasted surface and minimum of 3 checks per shift.
In case salt exceeds specified limit, the contaminated surface shall be cleaned by method
as per Annexure-C of IS 12944-4 (water cleaning). After cleaning surface shall be retested
for salt after drying.
Fill the bottle with potable water, cap and shake the bottle.
Inspect water for oil film/slick. If present, the blasting media is not to be used.
13.3
Primer Application
After surface preparation, the primer should be applied to cover the crevices, corners, sharp
edges etc. in the presence of inspector nominated by Engineer-In-Charge.
The shades of successive coats should be slightly different in colour in order to ensure
application of individual coats, the thickness of each coat and complete coverage should be
checked as per provision of this specification. This should be approved by Engineer-In-Charge
before application of successive coats.
The contractor shall provide standard thickness measurement instrument with appropriate
range(s) for measuring.
Dry film thickness of each coat, surface profile, gauge for checking of surface profile in case
of sand blasting. Holiday detectors and pinhole detector & protector whenever required for
checking in case of immersion conditions.
Prior to application of paints on surfaces of chimneys, the thickness of the individual coat shall
be checked by application of each coat of same paint on M.S.test panel. The thickness of paint
on test panels shall be determined by using gauge such as 'Elko meter'. The thickness of each
coat shall be checked as per provision of this specification. This shall be approved by EngineerIn-Charge before application of paints on surface of chimney.
At the discretion of Engineer-In-Charge, the paint manufacturer must provide the expert
technical service at site as and when required. This service should be free of cost and without
any obligation to the owner, as it would be in the interest of the manufacturer to ensure that
both surface preparation and application are carried out as per their recommendations. The
contractor is responsible to arrange the same.
13.4
10% of coated area which must include weld seams, corners and edges to be holiday tested.
Voltage at which test is to be carried out will depend upon DFT of coating being tested and
shall be as per NACE SP 0188. Any holiday is unacceptable and should be marked and
repaired immediately.
The contractor shall arrange for spot checking of paint materials for Specific gravity, glow time
(ford cup) and spreading rate.
13.5
Testing
- Type and calibration of inspection instruments used
- Type of quality control tests performed, and results
14.0
GUARANTEE
The contractor shall guarantee that the chemical and physical properties of paint materials used
are in accordance with the specifications contained herein/to be provided during execution of
work.
ANNEXURE 1
(COATING SYSTEMS)
TABLE 5.0
REPAIR OF PRE-ERECTION/PRE-FABRICATION OR SHOP PRIMER AFTER
ERECTION/WELDING
Sl.
No.
Design Temp.
in oC
Surface Preparation
Coating System
Total DFT
in Microns (min.)
5.1
-90 to 400
SSPC-SP-3
1 coat of F-9
65-75
Remarks
401 to 550
SSPC-SP-3
1 coat of F-12
20-25
NOTES:
The application and repair of pre-erection/pre-fabrication or Shop Primer given in above tables shall be
done for all the items to be painted. In case the damages to primer are severe and spread over large
area, entire primer shall be removed by blasting to achieve SSPC-SP-10 and surfaces to be primed
again with F-9 or F-12 as applicable.
TABLE 6.0
COATING SYSTEM FOR OFFSITE AREA (INLAND PLANTS)*
Sl.
No.
Design
Temp. oC
Surface Preparation
& Pre-erection/Shop
Primer
6.1
-90 to 15
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-9 @
65-75 DFT/coat
6.2
6.3
-16 to 80
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-9 @
65-75 DFT/coat
81 to 250
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-9 @
65-75 DFT/coat
6.4
251 to
400
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-9 @
65-75 DFT/coat
6.5
401 to
550
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-12 @
20-25 DFT/coat
Coating System
(Post-erection / Field)
Primer
Finish Coat
None
None
Total Final
DFT
in Microns
(min.)
Remarks
65-75
No
overcoating over
F-9
is
allowed
1 coat of P-6
@50 DFT +
1 coat of
F-6B@100
1 coat of F2 @ 50
DFT/coat
265-275
None
2 coats of F11 @ 20
DFT/coat;
(2x20=40)
105-115
None
2 coats of F12 @ 20
DFT/coat
(2x20=40)
105-115
None
60-75
F-12 shall be
ambient
temperature
curing type
*Flare line within unit or offsite areas shall be coated as per Sl.no.7.3 of Table 7.0
NOTES:
1
The list of items given in the heading of the above table is not exhaustive. There may be more items
for a particular contract where these specifications are used. The Contractor is fully responsible for
completing painting including prefabrication primer for all the items supplied and fabricated through
his scope of work as per tender document.
If the Pre-erection/Pre-fabrication & Shop Primer has already been completed, the same shall not be
repeated again in the field. In case the damages of primer are severe and spread over large areas, the
engineer-in-charge may decide & advise re-blasting and priming again. Repair of pre-fabrication/preErection primer, if required, shall be done as per Table 5.0.
In case of coating systems as per Sl. Nos. 6.3 and 6.5, the color bands shall be applied over the
Aluminum paint as per the Color coding requirement for specific service of piping given in Clause 9.0.
All coating system including surface preparation, primer, and finish coat for piping shall be done at
field only.
TABLE 7.0
COATING SYSTEM FOR UNIT AREAS AS WELL AS DM, CPP & COOLING TOWER
OF INLAND PLANTS AND FOR ALL AREAS (UNIT, OFFSITE, DM, CPP, etc.) OF
COASTAL PLANTS (Carbon steel, LTCS & Low alloy steels)
Sl.
No.
7.1
Design
Temp. oC
-90 to -15
Surface
Preparation &
Preerection/Shop
Primer
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-9 @
65-75 DFT/coat
Coating System
(Post-erection / Field)
Primer
Finish Coat
Total DFT
in Microns
(min.)
None
None
65-75
Remarks
a) No over coating on
F-9 is allowed
b) F-12 shall be
ambient temperature
curing type
7.2
7.3
7.4
-14 to 80
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-9 @
65-75 DFT/coat
81 to 400
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-9 @
65-75 DFT/coat
401 to 550
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-12 @
20-25 DFT/coat
1 coat of P-6
@ 40
DFT/coat
None
None
2 coats of F-6B
@ 100
DFT/coat + 1
coat of F-2 @
40 DFT/coat;
(2x100 + 40=
240)
2 coats of F-12
@ 20
DFT/coat
2x20=40
2 coats of F-12
@ 20-25
DFT/coat;
(2x20=40)
345-355
c)
Finish
coat
including
primer
compatible
with
finish coat (i.e. field
primer) shall be
applied at site only.
Finish coating is not
permitted
at
equipment
manufacture shop.
105-115
60-75
NOTES:
1.
The list of items given in the heading of the above table is not exhaustive. There may be more
items for a particular contract where these specifications are used. The Contractor is fully
responsible for completing painting including prefabrication primer for all the items
supplied and fabricated through his scope of work as per tender document.
2.
If the Pre-erection/Pre-fabrication & Shop Primer has already been completed, the same shall
not be repeated again in the field. In case the damages of primer are severe and spread over
large areas, the engineer-in-charge may decide & advise re-blasting and priming again. Repair
of pre-fabrication/pre-erection primer, if required, shall be done as per Table 5.0.
3.
For external surface of RCC Chimney, 2 coats of F-6 @ 100 DFT/coat to obtain total DFT
of 200 shall be applied after proper surface preparation as per guidelines in clause 5.1.6.
4.
In case of paint systems as per Sl. Nos. 7.3 and 7.4, the colour bands shall be applied over the
Aluminum paint as per the Color coding requirement for specific service of piping given in
Clause 9.0.
5.
All coating system including surface preparation, primer, finish coat for piping shall be done
at site/field only.
TABLE 8.0
COATING SYSTEM FOR EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT (ETP)
Sl.
No.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
Design Temp.
in oC
Coating System
Surface Preparation
Primer
Finish Coat
Total DFT in
Microns
(min.)
Remarks
For External Surfaces of C.S./M.S. items: Screens, Walk way bridges, Baffles, Dual media filters, Vertical pumps, piping
in treated effluent sump, bio sludge pump, Screw pump and pump house, CS tanks, sumps and vessels.
2 coats of
F-6A @100
1 coat of F-9 @
DFT/coat + 1
-14 to 80
SSPS-SP-10
305-315
65-75 DFT/coat
coat of F-2 @
40 DFT/coat;
(2x100+40=240)
For Internal Surfaces of CS/MS Items: Bio-sludge sump, Filter feed sump, Process sump, Sanitary sump, Transfer sump,
Sludge, Slop oil tank, scrapping mechanism in Clarifier
3 coats of F-6A
1 coat of F-9 @ @100
-14 to 80
SSPS-SP-10
365-375
Note:1
65-75 DFT/coat. DFT/coat
(3x100=300)
All R.C.C./concrete surfaces exposed to effluent water / liquid such as tanks, structures, drains etc. in Process sump, TPI
separator (Process and Oil), Aeration Tank and Transfer sump etc.
Blast cleaning to SSPCEpoxy screed lining
SP guide lines and Acid
shall be applied as per
-14 to 80
etching with 10-15%
Epoxy Screed lining
3mm
specific manufacturer
HCl acid followed by
and
Engineer-inthorough water washing.
Charge instructions
C.S/M.S Dual media filters (Internal), Chemical dosing tanks(internal) such as Di-Ammonium Phosphate (DAP) and Urea
Natural Rubber lining
shall be applied as per
Natural Rubber Lining
Up to 60
SSPC-SP-10
4.5mm
specific manufacturer
(As per IS 4682, Part 1)
and Engineer-inCharge instructions
NOTES
1. The paint /coating manufacturers shall provide their Quality control test certificate of
coating materials (F-6A) for immersion service of the exposed effluent given in 8.2.
TABLE 9.0
EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEMS FOR UNINSULATED CARBON
ALLOY STEEL STORAGE TANKS
Sl.
No.
Design
Temp. oC
Surface
Preparation
(Field)
Primer
9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.2
9.2.1
Total DFT
in Microns
(min.)
Remarks
All external surfaces of shell, wind girders, appurtenances, roof tops of all above ground tank including top side of external
and internal floating roof and associated external structural works.
-14 to 80
81 to 150
151 to 500
SSPC-SP-10
SSPC-SP-10
SSPC-SP-10
345-355
F-6 should be
suitable for
occasional water
immersion
280
105
or
115
External surfaces of bottom plate (soil side) for all storage tanks.
-14 to 80
9.2.2
81 to 150
9.2.3
151 to 550
9.3
Finish Coat
SSPC-SP-10
SSPC-SP-10
SSPC-SP-10
365-375
F-7 should be
suitable for
immersion
service of the
products given
240
250
1 coat of F-9 @
65-75 DFT/ coat
For underside of the bottom plate (in case tank is not lifted during PWHT) (see Note 2c)
-180 to 650
For CS
SSPC SP-6
Commercia
l Blast
1 coat of inert
polymeric matrix
coating @ 125
2 coats of inert
polymeric matrix
coating @ 125
350-400
For SS
SSPC SP-1
with nonchloride
solvent
NOTES
1.
2.
All paint coating application including primer for tankage shall be carried out at field after erection
and completion of all welding.
For underside of bottom plate :
a) Painting shall be carried out before laying of bottom plate for tanks with Non-Post Weld Heat
Treatment (PWHT).
b) For tanks with PWHT, painting shall be carried out after PWHT.
c) In case tank is not lifted during PWHT then painting shall be applied before laying of bottom
plate, Sl.no. 9.3 shall be followed.
TABLE 10.0
INTERNAL COATING SYSTEMS FOR CARBON STEEL AND LOW ALLOY STORAGE
TANKS & VESSELS
Sl.
No.
Design
Temp oC
Surface
Preparation
(Field)
10.1
10.2
10.2.1
10.2.2
Total DFT
in Microns (min.)
Finish Coat
CRUDE OIL, ATF, TURPENTINE OIL, LUBRICATING OIL AND VEGETABLE OIL
Underside of floating roof, internal surface of cone roof, inside of bottom plate, Internal surfaces of Shell including wetted and free board height, oil side surfaces of deck plates, oil side surfaces of pontoons, roof structures,
structural steel, ladders and other CS internals
1 coat of F-15
intermediate coat @
1 coat of F-15
80 DFT/coat + 1
-14 to 90
SSPC-SP-10
primer @ 80
240-300
coat of F-15 finish
DFT/ coat
coat @ 80 DFT/
coat;
PETROLEUM PRODUCTS & INTERMEDIATES like LDO, HSD , GAS OIL, FEEDS of FCC-PC,
FCC-LCO, VGO-HDT, ISOM, DHDT, REFORMATE, DCU, NHT & GASOLINE, NAPHTHA,
ISOMERATE AND KEROSENE.
Underside of Floating roofs, internal surface of cone roof, inside of bottom plate, internal surfaces of Bare shell
for full height, underside of floating roof, oil side surfaces of deck plates, oil side surfaces of pontoons, support
structures and ladders etc.
-14 to 45
46 to 90
SSPC-SP-10
SSPC-SP-10
1 coat of F-9
@
75 DFT/coat
75
Note 2
1 coat of F-15
primer @ 80
DFT/ coat
1 coat of F-15
intermediate coat @
80 DFT/coat + 1
coat of F-15 finish
coat @ 80 DFT/
coat;
240-300
10.3
10.3.1
1 Coats of P-6
@
100
DFT/coat;
10.4
-14 to 60
SSPC-SP-10
2 Coats of F-6A @
100 DFT/ Coat;
(2x100=200)
300-350
Note-4
10.4.1
-14 to 60
SSPC-SP-10
1 Coats of P-6
@
100 DFT/coat;
10.4.2
61 to 100
SSPC-SP-10
1 coat of F-15
primer @ 80
DFT/ coat
10.5
Remarks
2 coats of F-6C @
200 DFT/ coat;
(2x200=400)
1 coat of F-15
intermediate coat @
80 DFT/coat + 1
coat of F-15 finish
coat @ 80 DFT/
coat;
(80+80=160)
400-450
240-300
-14 to 60
10.6
10.8
10.9
10.9.1
10.10
10.11
10.11.1
None
4.5 mm
-14 to
65
10.7
SSPC-SP-10
Natural Rubber
Lining
(As per IS 4682, Part
1)
SSPC-SP-10
1 coat of F-9 @ 75
DFT/ coat
---
75
NOTES
1.
All paint coating application including primer shall be carried out after erection and completion of
all welding work at site.
2.
F-6A should be suitable and resistant for immersion service for the respective Hydrocarbons.
3.
This system can be used where maximum operating temperature is below 150oC and design
temperature is up to 200oC. For operating temperatures >150 oC, contractor shall propose suitable
coating system for review/approval by owner/PMC.
4
F-6 A shall be suitable for drinking water service and should have competent authority certification.
TABLE 11.0
COATING SYSTEMS FOR EXTERNAL SIDE OF UNDERGROUND CARBON STEEL PLANT PIPING
AND UNDERGROUND VESSELS
Sl.
No.
11.1
Design Temp.
in oC
Surface
Preparation
&
Shop Primer
Surface
Preparation &
Primer
Underground carbon steel plant piping
SSPC-SP-10;
11.1.1
25 to 65
---
1 coat of
synthetic fast
drying primer
25 @ DFT/
coat
SSPC-SP-10;
11.1.2
11.1.3
11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
66 to 150
---
1 coat of F-17
primer @ 125
DFT/ coat
SSPC-SP-10;
Finish Coat
---
-40 to 80
SSPC-SP-10;
1 coat of F-9
@
65-75 DFT/
coat
Total Final
DFT
in Microns
(min.)
Remarks
4 mm
The primer
DFT is not
measurable.
Reconciliati
on primer
shall be
done by
coverage of
maximum
10
sq.m/litre
375
250
---
365-375
81 to 150
SSPC-SP-10;
1 coat of F-17
primer @
125 DFT/
coat
---
1 coat of
F-17
intermediate coat
@
125 DFT/coat + 1 coat
of
F-17 finish coat
@125 DFT/ coat
375
151 to 400
SSPC-SP-10;
1 coat of F-16
primer @
125 DFT/
coat
---
250
TABLE 12.0
PAINTING UNDER INSULATION (ALL ENVIRONMENTS)
Sl.
No.
Design
Temp. in oC
Finish paint
Total Final
DFT
in Microns
(min.)
12.1
Carbon steel, LTCS and low allow steel Piping, Storage tanks, equipments etc
3 coats of F-15 @ 75
SSPC-SP-10;
DFT/coat
12.1.1
-45 to 125
1coat of F-9 @
none
75 DFT/coat
12.1.2
126 to 400
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-9 @
75 DFT/coat for up to
400 oC
none
3 coats of F-12 @ 20
DFT/coat
305- 315
125-135
none
1 coat of F-15
intermediate coat @
80 DFT/coat + 1 coat
of F-15 finish coat @
80 DFT/coat;
(80+80=160)
240
12.2.1
-30 to 125
SSPC-SP-10
(15-25 surface profile)
1 coat of F-15@ 80
DFT/coat
12.2.2
126 to 500
none
250
>500
---
---
---
12.2.3
12.3
-180 to 350
SSPC-SP-10
1 coat of modified poly
siloxane or inert
polymeric matrix
coating*@ 125
DFT/coat
none
250
NOTES
1. The blast cleaning abrasives for SS and Alloy steel surfaces shall be SS grits/shots or
Aluminium oxide grits/shots.
2. For piping with cyclic temperature of -45 to125 deg. C Sr.no 12.2.1 is applicable.
TABLE 13.0
COATING SYSTEM FOR CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS OF COOLERS / CONDENSERS
(INTERNAL PROTECTION) FOR WATER SERVICE
Sl.
No.
Design
Temp. in oC
Surface Preparation
& Pre-erection/Shop
Primer
13.1
Up to 80 oC
SSPC-SP-10
13.2
80 to 140
SSPC-SP-10
Coating System
(Post-erection / Field)
Total
Final DFT
in Microns
(min.)
Remarks
Primer
Finish paint
1 coat of F-15
@ 80
DFT/coat
2 coats of F-15 @
80 DFT/coat
240
---
1 coat of Glass
Fibre Reinforced
Novolac epoxy of
1.5 mm DFT
1500
TABLE 14.0
COATING SYSTEM (INTERNAL PROTECTION) FOR GALVANIZED OR NON FERROUS
OR STAINLESS STEEL/ DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL COMPONENTS OF COOLERS/
CONDENSERS FOR WATER SERVICE
Sl.
No.
Design
Temp. in oC
Surface Preparation
& Pre-erection/Shop
Primer
14.1
Up to 80
Sweep Blasting
14.2
80 to 140
Sweep Blasting
Coating System
(Post-erection / Field)
Total Final
DFT
in Microns
(min.)
Remarks
Primer
Finish paint
1 coat of F-15 @
80 DFT/coat;
1 coat of F-15 @
80 DFT/coat;
160
---
1 coat of Glass
Fibre Reinforced
Novolac epoxy of
1.5 mm DFT
1500
TABLE 15.0
COATING SYSTEM FOR ROLLING & STATIONERY LADDERS, SPIRAL
STAIRWAYS AND HAND RAILS IN ALL LOCATION
Sl.
No.
8.1
Design
Temp. in
o
C
Coating System
Total DFT
in Microns (min.)
Up to 60
NOTES:
1
Repair of the damaged area of galvanized coatings due to welding during erection shall be
carried out as per recommended practice IS 11759 using cold galvanizing spray process.
Organic Paint systems are not acceptable for repair.
After repair of damaged galvanized coating by Cold Galvanized, the repaired area shall be
top coated with paint system as given in Table 15.0 above (i.e., 1 coat of P-6 @ 40
DFT/coat + 1 coat of F-2 @ 40 DFT/coat).
3D-MODELING SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
(29-LZ-00-1006)
0
Rev.
No
PROJECT
LOCATION
PROJECT
: BINA (MP), INDIA
CLIENT
: M/s. BORL
EIL JOB NO
: A702
01/02/2016
SKS
NK
PM
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
Date
Document No.
A702-029-16-50-MS-4070
Rev. A
Page 1 of 2
PROJECT :
OWNER
JOB NO.
A702
07.03.2016
AKM
VB
ANPS
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
Document No.
A702-029-16-50-MS-4070
Rev. A
Page 2 of 2
Bidder shall include the following mandatory spares for Electrical equipments
Sl. No.
1.0
1.1
1.2
2.0
2.1
2.2
Item Description
HV induction motors (one set of spare for each rating &
type)
Bearing ( DE & NDE )
Terminal studs/bushing assembly
Quantity
1 set
1 set each
1 set
1 set each
NOTES:
1.
The word TYPE means the Make, Model no., Type, Range, Size/ Length, Rating, Material as
applicable.
2.
Mandatory spares as indicated above do not cover commissioning spares.
3.
Mandatory spares as indicated above do not cover two year O&M spares.
4.
Mandatory spares shall be applicable for electrical items of motors/sub-packages as per
mandatory spares philosophy specified elsewhere in the bid document.
MANDATORY SPARES
INSTRUMENTATION
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE
REVAMP AND CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT
PROJECT ,BORL
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-16-51-SL-4070 ,REV A
Page 1 of 2
MANDATORY SPARES
INSTRUMENTATION:
1.1
This section defines the Philosophy for mandatory spares to be supplied by the Bidder as
part of the contract.
1.2
Bidder shall supply mandatory spares for applicable Instruments and systems.
1.3
The list below indicates the Minimum requirement for mandatory spares for Instruments/
Accessories and systems. However additional mandatory spares if and as recommended by
Instrument/ System Manufacturer shall be supplied by Bidder without any cost and time
implication.
1.4
Bidder shall also refer notes given at the end of this section for working out mandatory
spares requirement.
1.5
Bidder shall submit a list of these spares as per the percentage of total installed quantity
during detail engineering. The spare list shall not be reviewed during evaluation. This shall
be reviewed and approved by EIL during detail engineering. However any change required to
meet the quantity as per philosophy specified below shall be done without any price and
delivery implication by the vendor
1.6
Mandatory spares shall be quoted and included in Base lump sum price as per the following
table.
S. No.
1.0
1.1
PART DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY REQUIRED
3.0
Field Instruments
Pressure Gauges, Temperature Gauges, Level
Gauge, Differential Pressure Gauges, Field
Indicators, RTD/ Thermocouple (with Thermowell),
Thermowells
Transmitters (Smart) for Pressure, Level (excluding
guided wave radar transmitter and displacer), Flow
(excluding special flowmeter), Temperature &
Differential Pressure (complete transmitter)
Line Mounted Instruments
Control Valves, Shutdown Valves
Soft parts like gasket, O-ring, seal-ring, packing
material
Installation Material
3.1
3.2
Tube Fittings
3.3
3.4
Cables
Cable Glands
4.0
1.2
2.0
2.1
a.i)
Machine
MANDATORY SPARES
INSTRUMENTATION
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE
REVAMP AND CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT
PROJECT ,BORL
S. No.
4.1
PART DESCRIPTION
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-16-51-SL-4070 ,REV A
Page 2 of 2
QUANTITY REQUIRED
Modules used like I/O Cards, all type of processor 5% or minimum one of each
cards, all type of power supply cards, communication type of module including
cards, Interface cards, controller cards etc. as processor module.
required for the System
NOTES:
1. The word TYPE means the Make, Model no., Type, Range, Size/ Length, Rating,
Material as applicable.
2. Wherever % age is identified, Bidder shall supply next rounded figure.
3. The terminology used under Part Description is the commonly used name of the part and
may vary from manufacturer to manufacturer.
4. The above list indicates Predefined Mandatory spares excluding the Consumable spares,
Commissioning spares and installed engineering spares for system-oriented items. The
Commissioning spares like spare fuses, lamps, terminals etc. shall also be part of bidder
scope of supply. The installed engineering spares for Local Control Panels etc. shall be as
per specification 6-52-0052.
5. Bidder can recommend additional spares based on his experience.
6. Upon receipt of order, Bidder to submit finalized list of 2 years operation & maintenance
spares for approval. The list shall indicate all details like part description, reference drawing
no., part no., MOC, quantity, bearing make & no., etc. For instrumentation, make, model,
range must be indicated. The list shall also be submitted in "EXCEL" format.
DATA SHEET
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-DS-4070 Rev. A
Page 1 of 6
DATA SHEET
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT
REVAMP
AND
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT
REFINERY
OWNER
BORL, BINA
CONSULTANT :
JOB NO.
A702
CAPACITY
OF BORL
18.03.2016
BKD
AK
PPP
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
DATA SHEET
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-DS-4070 Rev. A
Page 2 of 6
Client
Item No.
: 29-LZ-00-1006
Unit
: 029
Service
: Oxygen
Enrichment
Location
: Bina, Madhya Pradesh
No. of chains : 2 Nos. each of equal
capacity
SPECIFICATION FOR VPSA OXYGEN PLANT : For Process Specification and other process
related details of VPSA Oxygen plant, Vendor to refer Process Data sheet (Doc. no. A702-29-79DS-1806).
1.0
OPERATING DATA
1.1
CAPACITY
1.1.1
Plant Capacity of VPSA plant
182 TPD (as 100% of oxygen)
1.1.2
Turndown (%) of chain capacity with no
50
oxygen venting of a chain.
1.1.3
Product Specification
90% (Minimum)
Oxygen (Vol %)
1.1.4
Oil Content
NIL
1.1.5
- 46 C
Dew Point @ atm. Press
1.1.6
Capacity of each chain
91 TPD (as 100% of oxygen)
1.2
B/L Conditions
1.2.1
Pressure, kg/cm2 'g'
1.5 (Min)
1.2.2
Temperature, C
*
2
1.2.3
Mech. Design Press, kg/cm 'g'
*
1.2.4
Mech. Design Temp. C
65
1.3
Plant Operation
Automatic with manual override
1.3.1
Type
Suitable for both
1.3.2
Continuous / Intermittent
1.3.3
Location of Plant
Open air with Process Machineries in
building /shed
1.3.4
Utilities available at B/L
As per Process Datasheet (Doc No.
A702-29-79-DS-1806)
1.4
Plot Size
1.4.1
Overall size of plant (L x B), m
*
1.5
Site Data
1.5.1
Altitude above MSL
411.6 M
1.5.2
Ambient Temperature, Deg. C
1.1/45.6 (Minimum/ Maximum)
1.5.3
RH% at 42 Deg. C
54
1.5.4
Design for earthquake & Wind Load
As per Structural spec.
2.0
MANUFACTURER'S DATA (Vendor to fill all information and furnish with
his bid)
2.1
VPSA Oxygen Plant
2.1.1
Make / Model
*
2.1.2
No. of chain
*
2.1.3
Capacity of each chain
*
2.1.4
Turndown (%) of chain capacity with no
*
oxygen venting of a chain.
2.1.5
O2 quantity at outlet, Nm3/hr (or) TPD
*
2.1.6
O2 gas pressure at the B/L, kg/cm 2 'g'
*
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1
DATA SHEET
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.1.1
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
XI.
XII.
2.3.1.2
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
XI.
XII.
2.3.2
2.3.2.1
2.3.2.2
2.3.2.3
2.3.2.4
2.3.2.5
2.3.2.6
2.3.2.7
2.3.2.8
2.3.2.9
2.3.2.10
2.3.2.11
2.3.2.12
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-DS-4070 Rev. A
Page 3 of 6
Product quality
Oxygen Purity, Vol. %
Nitrogen, Vol. %
CO2, Vol %
Carbon Mono oxide, Vol %
Dew Point of Oxygen gas @ atm
.pressure
Equipment specifications
Inlet air system
*
*
*
*
*
Filters
Type/Make
Quantity
Particle size, microns
Filtration efficiency
Filtration area
Material of filtering element
Pr. drop, kg/cm2(normal)
max. allowable pr. drop, kg/cm2
Pr. gauge
Alarm
Insulation type/thickness
Size inlet/outlet piping
Air Blower system
No. of air blowers
Type of air blower
Air Blower make / Model
Capacity of Air Blower, NM3 / Hr
Air inlet Pressure to Blower, kg/cm 2 'g'
Air outlet Pressure, kg/cm 2 'g'
Air inlet Temperature, C
Air outlet Temperature, C
Total Air flow to Adsorption, Nm3/hr
Sound pressure level of Air Blower, dB
(A)
Rated power of Motor, kW & RPM
Material of construction
I.
casing
II.
Impeller
Condenser
Type
Make/model
Fluid Shell Side/tube side
Condensing Temperature, deg C
Heat rejection capacity, Kcal/hr
Water flow rate, M3/hr
Water Temp. in-out, deg C
LMTD, deg C
Fouling Factor, Shell side/Tube side, m2
hr oC/KCal
Water velocity, mps
Pr. drop tube side, m (WC)
No of passes & No of tubes
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Yes
No
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Water/air
Shell & Tube
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
DATA SHEET
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
2.3.2.13
2.3.2.14
2.3.2.15
2.3.2.16
2.3.2.17
2.3.2.18
2.3.2.19
2.3.2.20
2.3.2.21
2.3.2.22
2.3.2.23
2.3.2.24
2.3.2.25
2.3.2.26
2.3.2.27
2.3.2.28
2.3.2.29
2.3.2.30
2.3.2.31
2.3.2.32
2.3.2.33
2.3.2.34
2.3.2.35
2.3.2.36
2.3.2.37
2.3.2.38
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
XI.
2.3.3
2.3.3.1
2.3.3.2
2.3.3.3
2.3.3.4
2.3.3.5
2.3.3.6
I.
II.
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-DS-4070 Rev. A
Page 4 of 6
*
*
*
*
*
*
C/ASME Sec VIII Div I
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
A 516Gr60/70, A 106GrB
A516Gr60/70, A 106GrB
A516Gr60/70, A 106GrB
A516Gr60/70, A 106GrB
SA 516 Gr. 60
Inhibited Admirality brass
SA 193 B7/SA 194 2H
DATA SHEET
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
III.
IV.
2.3.3.7
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
XI.
XII.
XIII.
XIV.
2.3.4
2.3.4.1
2.3.4.2
2.3.4.3
2.3.4.4
2.3.4.5
2.3.4.6
2.3.4.7
2.3.4.8
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
2.3.5
2.3.5.1
2.3.5.2
2.3.5.3
2.3.5.4
2.3.5.5
2.3.5.6
2.3.5.7
2.3.5.8
2.3.6
2.3.6.1
2.3.6.2
2.3.6.3
2.3.6.4
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-DS-4070 Rev. A
Page 5 of 6
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
02 nos. ( 1W+1S )
Positive displacement (Reciprocating)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
SS304 L/SS316L
*
*
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
DATA SHEET
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-DS-4070 Rev. A
Page 6 of 6
*
*
*
*
*
Notes:
Vendor to ensure uninterrupted Oxygen supply at required pressure continuously.
Performance shall be guaranteed and demonstrated as per product specification given
in PDS No. A702- 29-79- DS-1806.
3.0
WEIGHT SCHEDULE
(To be filled-in by the Vendor)
Size (L x B x H)
*
Weight (kgs)
*
3.1
Air filter
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Silencer
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
Others ( specify)
Datasheet No.
A702-029-16-50-DS-4070
Rev : A
Page 1 of 1
DATA SHEET
MV CABLE
PURCHASER'S DATA
Revamp and capacity enhancement project
Project
Client
M/S BORL
A Site conditions
45.6
1 Maximum ambient temperature:
C
1.1
2 Minimum ambient temperature:
C
40
3 Design ambient temperature:
C
B Technical particulars
1 System voltage
Nominal
Highest
415 V
500 V
3.3kV(E)
3.6 kV
3.3kV(UE)
3.6 kV
6.6kV(E)
7.2 kV
6.6kV(UE)
7.2 kV
11kV(E)
12 kV
11kV(UE)
12 kV
22kV(E)
24 kV
33kV(E)
36 kV
2 Frequency
Voltage grade
650/1100V
1.9/3.3kV
3.3/3.3kV
3.8/6.6kV
6.6/6.6kV
6.35/11kV
11/11kV
12.7/22kV
19/33kV
50
Location
Unit
BINA
VPSA Plant
4
5
6
Relative humidity:
Altitude
Environment:
Conductor material
86
MV Power cable
MV control cable
Hz
< 1000 m
Humid & corrosive
No
Applicable spec.
6-51-0051 Rev 6
3%
MANUFACTURER'S DATA
1
2
3
4
5
Name of manufacturer
MR/PR item no.
Cable type/ code
Conductor material
Conductor semiconducting screen (HV cables)
Material
Thickness
Insulation
Type of compound
Thickness
Insulation semiconducting screen (HV cables)
Material
Thickness
Copper tape
Thickness
10
11
12
mm
mm
13
14
15
mm
mm
16
17
18
19
Inner sheath
Type of compound
Thickness
Nominal dia under armour
Calculated dia under armour
Armour
Material
Type
Size
Nominal dia under outersheath
Calculated dia under outersheath
Outersheath
Type of compound
Thickness
Nominal outer dia of cable
Tolerance on outer dia
Weight of cable per km
Maximum drum length
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
%
kg
mtr.
Notes
1
E- Earthed system
UE-Un Earthed system
A
Rev. No.
07.03.2016
Date
AKM
Prepared by
VB
Checked by
ANPS
Approved by
Conductor material
Aluminium
Copper & Aluminium
Armouring
Yes
No
Frequency
60
50
Tolerance
5%
3%
Datasheet No.
A702-040-16-50-DS-4071
Rev.No. A
Page 1 of 1
DATA SHEET
HIGH VOLTAGE SQUIRREL CAGE
INDUCTION MOTOR
PURCHASER's DATA
A. Site conditions
1 Ambient temperature,
2
B.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
minimum:
maximum:
design:
1.1
45.6
40
86
C
C
C
%
Relative humidity:
Technical particulars
Motor tag no.:
Driven equipment name:
Voltage:
6.6. kV 10%
Phase:
Three
Frequency:
50 Hz 3%
Fault level:
40 kA
0.25
Fault duration:
sec.
System earthing:
Resistance Earthed
Duty:
Continuous
Method of starting:
D.O.L.
Cable size:
Later
mm
Cable type:
Al. cond. XLPE insulated
Temperature rise:
80 C
Cooling:
CACA/TETV/TEFC
Insulation class:
F with temp. rise limited to Class B
3
4
5
Atmospheric condition:
Altitude:
Location:
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
Reacceleration:
Diff. protection CTs:
CT specs.:
Color shade:
Thermisters:
RTD: (Note-2)
BTD: (Note-2)
RTD/BTD monitoring device:
29 Applicable specification:
632 as per IS 5
kW
kW
kW
RPM
9 Coupling type:
10 Torque required,
starting:
11
maximum:
12 GD2 of eqpt.,
including flywheel:
excluding flywheel:
13 Maximum thrust:
14 Pulsation rate:
15 Starting condition:
mkg
mkg
kgm2
kgm2
kg
kW
Rating:
19 Space heater - voltage & power:
1Ph 230V AC
Manufacturer:
2
20 Moment of inertia, GD :
Frame designation:
kgm2
21 DE/NDE bearing type & no.:
No. of poles:
RPM
22 Type of lubrication:
Full load speed:
23 Type of main terminal box:
Mounting:
mkg
24 Type of neutral terminal box:
Full load torque (FLT):
% of FLT 25 No. of Terminals
Starting torque:
% of FLT 26 Weight of motor:
kg
Break down or pull out torque:
A
27 Thermisters,
no.
Full load current (FLC):
quantity:
% of FLC
make:
type:
Starting current at 100% voltage: (Note-3)
28 RTD,
no.
Rotation viewed from coupling end:
quantity:
sec.
make:
type:
Starting time at 80%/100% voltage:
29 BTD,
no.
Locked rotor withstand time (cold/hot) at,
quantity:
80% voltage:
sec.
make:
type:
100% voltage:
sec.
30 Shaft voltage:
V
15 Time (Te) for Increased Safety Motor
sec.
31 Critical speed, 1st/2nd stage:
RPM
32 Pressurization panel:
at 100% Voltage
16 Efficiency at
75%/100% Load:
%
make:
type:
17 Power factor at 75%/100% load:
33 Canopy:
18 Heating/Cooling Time Const. (min.)
min
34 Fan rotation Design Universal/Fixed/Can be changed
Notes :
1. Starting time calculations shall be based on operating conditions specified in Material Requisition eg. Open valve
condition/closed valve condition, at no load/under load, as applicable.
2. RTDs and BTDs are required for motors with specfic features/ratings as indicated in clause 7.0 of EIL Spec. 6-51-0031
3. HV motors rated upto 2MW, shall be designed such that the starting current is <= 600% of FLC (incl. of +ve tol.). For
higher ratings same shall be reviewed on case to case basis with purchaser.
A
Rev.
07.03.16
Date
AKM
Prepared
VB
Checked
ANPS
Approved
Datasheet No.
A702-029-16-50-DS-4072
Rev : A
Page 1 of 1
DATA SHEET
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SQUIRREL CAGE
INDUCTION MOTOR
PURCHASER's DATA
A. Site conditions
1 Ambient temperature,
2
B.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Relative humidity:
Technical particulars
Motor tag no.:
Driven equipment name:
Voltage:
Phase:
Frequency:
System Fault level:
Method of starting:
Winding connection:
No.of terminals:
Cable size:
Cable type:
Temperature rise:
Cooling:
minimum:
maximum:
design:
1.1
45.6
40
86
C
C
C
%
3
4
5
6
*
*
415 V 10%
Three
50 Hz 3%
1 sec
50 kA
D.O.L.
Delta
6
Later
mm
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Insulation class:
Hazardous area classification:
Gas group,Temp Class:
Type of explosion protection:
Type of ingress protection:
Color shade:
Thermisters:
RTD:
BTD:
RTD/BTD monitoring device:
80
TEFC
24 Applicable specification:
AYFY
kW
Torque required,
kW
kW
RPM
10 GD2 of eqpt.,
starting:
maximum:
including flywheel:
excluding flywheel:
11 Thrust,
up:
down:
12 Starting condition:
mkg
mkg
2
kgm
kgm2
kg
kg
Rating:
Manufacturer:
No. of poles:
Frame designation:
Full load speed:
Mounting:
Full load torque (FLT):
Starting torque:
Break down or pull out torque:
Full load current (FLC):
Note-3
Starting current at 100% voltage:
Rotation viewed from coupling end:
75% voltage:
Starting time at,
100% voltage:
14 Locked rotor withstand time (cold/hot) at,
75% voltage:
100% voltage:
15 Time (Te) for Increased Safety motors
at 100% Voltage
kW
Notes :
1 Starting time calculations shall be based on operating conditions specified on Material Requisition eg. open valve
condition/ closed valve condition, at no load/full load, as applicable.
2 For motors rated 30kW and above.
The starting current (as % rated current) shall be limited to maximum 600-700% (based on number of poles and KW
3
rating) as per IS 12615:2011, subject to IS tolerance.
* To be filled by vendor.
A
Rev. No.
07.03.2016
Date
AKM
Prepared by
VB
Checked by
ANPS
Approved by
The drawing, design and details given on this format are the property of ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED. They are merely loaned on the borrower's express agreement that they will not be reproduced, copied,
exhibited or used, except in the limited way permitted by a written consent given by the lender to the borrower for the intended use.EIL-1650-1281-A4-210 X 297
NOTES: 1. Vendor shall fill the details of all electrical power consumer loads, which are included in the scope of this Tender and submit with the
same.
Load Data
DOCUMENT NO.
Date
Rev
A702-029-16-50-DS-4073
09.03.2016
The drawing, design and details given on this format are the property of ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED. They are merely loaned on the borrower's express agreement that they will not be reproduced, copied,
exhibited or used, except in the limited way permitted by a written consent given by the lender to the borrower for the intended use.EIL-1650-1281-A4-210 X 297
MOTOR
S.NO
TAG NO.
SERVICE
Make
Type of
enclosure
Applicable standard
for hazardous area
application
Load Data
Motor kW
Duty
(continuous
/intermittent)
No. of
poles
Type
designation
for cooling
DOCUMENT NO.
Date
Rev
A702-029-16-50-DS-4073
09.03.2016
The drawing, design and details given on this format are the property of ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED. They are merely loaned on the borrower's express agreement that they will not be reproduced, copied,
exhibited or used, except in the limited way permitted by a written consent given by the lender to the borrower for the intended use.EIL-1650-1281-A4-210 X 297
TAG NO.
SERVICE
Make
Type of
enclosure
Applicable standard
for hazardous area
application
Load Data
Rated KW
Duty
Voltage
(continuous
/intermittent)
DOCUMENT NO.
Date
Rev
A702-029-16-50-DS-4073
09.03.2016
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070
Rev. A
Page 1 of 8
18-MAR-2016
AK/PL
PPP
PPP
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared by
Checked by
Approved by
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070
Rev. A
Page 2 of 8
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
1.
S.
N
O.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070
Rev. A
Page 3 of 8
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070
Rev. A
Page 4 of 8
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
List of Mandatory Spares (indicating exact
name of the part, part no. and material of
construction)
List of recommended commissioning spares
(indicating exact name of the part, part no. and
material of construction)
List of recommended Special Tools & Tackles
(indicating exact name of the part and part no.)
Test Procedure(s) : Witness tests as specified
in data sheets / other specs enclosed in the
inquiry / MR or as required by approved
ITP/QAP
General Arrangement showing compressor,
drive transmission system (as applicable) &
electric motor driver including all assosciated
auxiliary systems [like sealing system, lube oil
system, local control panel, injection panels (as
applicable) and rundown tank etc.] along with
interface connections/ terminal point details
including their location cordinates, maintenance
space, erection & maintenance weights,
capacity & hook height of maintenance crane
etc.
Foundation drawing of compressor train [i.e. for
compressor, drive transmission system (as
applicable) & electric motor driver] including
details of load points loaction and their details,
foundation load data (static & dynamic),
foundation bolts, their location, foundation bolt
pocket dimensions and recommended type of
grout, grout thickness, make, grade and
quantity.
Utility consumption data including electric load
data.
Schedule of lubricants, chemicals &
consumables with their specifications.
List of Purchaser's interface points with their
connection details
Installation, Operation & Maintenance manuals
for complete compressor package
Precommissioning & commissioning procedure
for complete compressor package
Piping & Instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs) for
Utility & Cooling Water Distribution System
Data Sheets alongwith performance curves for
Compressor
Piping & Instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs) for
Process Air System including Process controls
General Arrangement Drawings (certified
dimensional outline drawing) for Compressor
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
S.
N
O.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070
Rev. A
Page 5 of 8
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
9.
S.
N
O.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070
Rev. A
Page 6 of 8
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
@
@
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
1.
2.
3.
Filled in Technical Check List (Doc. No. A702029-82-41-CL-4070) with bid compliance
statement attached as Annexures-A & B of the
check list
Filled in Data Sheets
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
S.
N
O.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070
Rev. A
Page 7 of 8
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
Refer respective
specification
Notes :
1. "TICK" denotes applicability.
2. Post order, drawing / document review shall commence only after approval of Document Control Index (DCI).
3. All post order documents shall be submitted / approved through EIL eDMS portal.
4. Final documentation shall be submitted in hard copy (Six prints) and soft ( two CDs/DVDs ) in addition to
submission through EIL eDMS.
5. Refer - 6-78-0001: Specification for quality management system from Bidders.
Format No. EIL-1642-1924 Rev.1
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070
Rev. A
Page 8 of 8
Document No.
A702-029-16-50-VDR-4070
Rev. A
Page 1 of 5
10-MAR-2016
AKM
VB
ANPS
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared by
Checked by
Approved by
Document No.
A702-029-16-50-VDR-4070
Rev. A
Page 2 of 5
PACKAGED EQUIPMENT
POST ORDER
S.
N
O.
DESCRIPTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Equipment layout
5.
Cable layout
6.
Sizing calculation
7.
Cable schedule
8.
Interconnection diagram
9.
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
Refer Note-'*'
MV MOTOR
Document No.
A702-029-16-50-VDR-4070
Rev. A
POST ORDER
S.
N
O.
DESCRIPTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Page 3 of 5
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
9.
Refer Note-'*'
HV MOTOR
S.
N
O.
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
1.
2.
3.
Dimensional/Assembly Drawings : GA
Drawings
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
Document No.
A702-029-16-50-VDR-4070
Rev. A
S.
N
O.
Page 4 of 5
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
4.
Refer Note-'*'
Notes :
1. "TICK" denotes applicability.
2. Post order, drawing / document review shall commence only after approval of Document Control Index (DCI).
3. All post order documents shall be submitted / approved through EIL eDMS portal.
Document No.
A702-029-16-50-VDR-4070
Rev. A
Page 5 of 5
4. Final documentation shall be submitted in hard copy (Six prints) and soft ( two CDs/DVDs ) in addition to
submission through EIL eDMS.
5. Refer - 6-78-0001: Specification for quality management system from Bidders.
6. Refer - 6-78-0002: Specification for documentation requirements from Contractors.
7. Refer - 6-78-0003: Specification for documentation requirement from Suppliers.
8. All drawings & documents shall be submitted in A4 or A3 paper sizes. Documents in higher paper size shall
be submitted in exceptional circumstances or as indicated in the MR/Tender.
9. Post order- The schedule of drawing / data submission shall be mutually agreed between EIL & the bidder /
contractor / supplier during finalization of Document Control Index (DCI).
10. "@" indicates submission of documents to Inspection Agency.
11. Bill of Material shall form part of the respective drawing.
12. Also refer other department's VDR :13. Instrumentation
14. Packaged Equipment
15. '*' indicates the following:
a. Equipments whose ITP is attached with Contract -ITP for respective equipment shall be followed. Therefore,
no ITP is to be furnished for review for those equipments.
b. Equipments whose ITP is not attached with Contract-Manufacturer's ITP shall be submitted by Packager/
Vendor/Contractor to respective Regional Procurement Office (RPO) near to manufacturer's works for approval
by EIL Inspection.
16. All technical details and documents furnished with bids shall be treated as data for engineering. These shall
however be subject to Purchasers review after order placement and bidder shall comply to MR/Tender
requirements without any cost & time implication to EIL/Owner.
Document No.
A702-029-16-51-VDR-4070
Rev. A
Page 1 of 3
29-FEB-2016
KP
ASDB
SB
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared by
Checked by
Approved by
Document No.
A702-029-16-51-VDR-4070
Rev. A
Page 2 of 3
S.
N
O.
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Note-12
5.
7.
8.
Logic diagrams
9.
6.
Note-12
Document No.
A702-029-16-51-VDR-4070
Rev. A
S.
N
O.
Page 3 of 3
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
Notes :
1. "TICK" denotes applicability.
2. Post order, drawing / document review shall commence only after approval of Document Control Index (DCI).
3. All post order documents shall be submitted / approved through EIL eDMS portal.
4. Final documentation shall be submitted in hard copy (Six prints) and soft ( two CDs/DVDs ) in addition to
submission through EIL eDMS.
5. Refer - 6-78-0001: Specification for quality management system from Bidders.
6. Refer - 6-78-0002: Specification for documentation requirements from Contractors.
7. Refer - 6-78-0003: Specification for documentation requirement from Suppliers.
8. All drawings & documents shall be submitted in A4 or A3 paper sizes. Documents in higher paper size shall
be submitted in exceptional circumstances or as indicated in the MR/Tender.
9. Post order- The schedule of drawing / data submission shall be mutually agreed between EIL & the bidder /
contractor / supplier during finalization of Document Control Index (DCI).
10. "@" indicates submission of documents to Inspection Agency.
11. Bill of Material shall form part of the respective drawing.
12. These shall be part of respective instruments PR(Purchase requisition).
Document No.
A702-029-16-43-VDR-4070
Rev. 0
Page 1 of 3
10-MAR-2016
SKS
NK
PNR
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared by
Checked by
Approved by
Document No.
A702-029-16-43-VDR-4070
Rev. 0
Page 2 of 3
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
Piping General arrangement Drawings &
Equipment Layout.
Drawings - Battery Limit Interface with valving
arrangement
3D MODEL along with design database in CD 30% Stage
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
Reviewed 3D Models
with Tag points
resolution for 30%
model reviews shall be
provided for records.
Reviewed 3D Models
with Tag points
resolution for 60%
model reviews shall be
provided for records.
Reviewed 3D Models
with Tag points
resolution for 90%
model reviews shall be
provided for records.
Notes :
1. "TICK" denotes applicability.
2. Post order, drawing / document review shall commence only after approval of Document Control Index (DCI).
3. All post order documents shall be submitted / approved through EIL eDMS portal.
4. Final documentation shall be submitted in hard copy (Six prints) and soft ( two CDs/DVDs ) in addition to
submission through EIL eDMS.
5. Refer - 6-78-0001: Specification for quality management system from Bidders.
6. Refer - 6-78-0002: Specification for documentation requirements from Contractors.
Format No. EIL-1642-1924 Rev.1
Document No.
A702-029-16-43-VDR-4070
Rev. 0
Page 3 of 3
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 1 of 66
Debottlenecking Project
Bina Refinery, BORL
07.08.2015
ISSUED AS AGREED
PB
SA
SA
08.06.2015
PB
SA
SA
29.05.2015
PB
SA
SA
20.03.2015
PB
SA
SA
PB
Reena
Purpose
Prepared
by
Reviewed
by
B
A
Rev. No.
16.01.2015
Date
Approved
by
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 2 of 66
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section #
Contents
page #
SECTION 1.0
INTRODUCTION
04
SECTION 2.0
DEFINITION OF PROJECT
2.1
Single Point Mooring
2.2
Onshore Crude Oil Terminal
2.3
Cross-country pipeline
2.4
7.8 MMTPA refinery
2.5
Unit numbers
2.6
Units of measurement
05
05
05
05
05
08
10
SECTION 3.0
PLANT LOCATION
11
SECTION 4.0
METEOROLOGIAL DATA
4.1
Elevation above mean sea level
4.2
Barometric pressure
4.3
Ambient temperature
4.4
Relative humidity
4.5
Data for equipment design
4.6
Rainfall data
4.7
Wind data
4.8
Earthquake design criteria
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
SECTION 5.0
13
13
13
13
SECTION 6.0
UTILITY SPECIFICATIONS
6.1
Utility pressure and temperature levels
6.2
Steam & Condensate systems
6.3
Water systems
6.4
Compressed air and nitrogen systems
6.5
Fuel systems
6.6
Flare systems
6.7
Electrical system
6.8
Caustic system
6.9
Flushing oil systems
6.10 Hot oil system
14
15
17
18
21
21
24
25
26
27
28
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 3 of 66
Section #
SECTION 7.0
Contents
GENERAL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
7.1
Energy integration
7.2
Vacuum design
7.3
Feed, intermediate and product storage
7.4
Aromatics handling
7.5
Metallurgy
7.6
Corrosion Allowance
7.7
Lining and cladding thickness
SECTION 8.0
31
31
32
34
37
39
42
44
47
48
48
SECTION 9.0
INSTRUMENTATION
9.1
Control Philosophy
9.2
General requirements
9.3
Level Instruments
9.4
Flow Instruments
9.5
Startup / shutdown from control room
9.6
Status lamps in control room
9.7
Control valve manifold
9.8
Pressure relief valve
9.9
Control philosophy for vendor packages
9.10 Standard instrumentation
9.11 Critical Exchanger Sparing
9.12 Sampling System
9.13 Strainers
9.14
Utility Battery Limit Isolation
9.15
Battery Limit Isolation
50
50
50
52
52
53
53
53
54
54
54
55
55
55
56
57
SECTION 10.0
SECTION 11.0
SECTION 12.0
SECTION 13.0
SECTION 14.0
SECTION 15.0
58
59
60
61
62
66
page #
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
30
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 4 of 66
1.0
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Bharat Oman Refineries Limited (BORL) is operating a 6 MMTPA Refinery located at Bina,
Madhya Pradesh, India, with associated crude receipt and handling facilities, cross country
pipelines, marketing terminal etc.
BORL intends to augment the processing capacity of the facilities from present
6MMTPA to 7.8 MMTPA considering low cost debottlenecking. In order to minimize the
cost and shutdown time for implementation of project, increase in crude capacity will be
achieved in consideration of minimizing hardware modifications using in-built design
margin. . Engineers India Limited (EIL) have been retained by BORL to provide services
for Project Management Consultancy,
The design basis presented here intends to provide the licensors and engineering
contractors with the technical informaion required to complete the engineering design
specifications of the complex in a uniform and consistent manner.
1.2
Basic Engineering Design Basis (BEDB) for all facilities, containing technical
information agreed between the owner and PMC and specific licensor recommendations
shall be binding on the process design and engineering of units, utility systems and offsite
facilities. The BEDBs for each facility are in two parts:
Part-A:
Unit Design Basis providing necessary data for a specific process unit.
For licensor units, the requirements of Part-A design will be suitably
incorporated in Licensor design basis document.
Part-B:
2.0
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 5 of 66
DEFINITION OF PROJECT:
The project consists of enhancing the crude processing of Bina Refinery from existing
6.0 million tons per annum (MMTPA) to 7.8 MMTPA located at Bina, District Sagar,
Madhya Pradesh. The project comprises revamp of process units, utilities, offsites and
product dispatch facilities. Marketing is excluded from this project definition.
The project comprises the revamp of following facilities also:
2.1
Single Point Mooring (SPM) of CALM type near Vadinar, Gujarat, and associated
offshore and onshore pipelines, PLEM, etc., upto crude oil terminal.
2.2
Onshore Crude Oil Terminal (COT) at Vadinar, Jamnagar district, Gujarat, including
crude tanks, pump station, utilities, control room, and supporting facilities.
2.3
Cross-country pipeline (CCPL) from COT to refinery, which is about 943 km long,
including intermediate pump stations, utilities, offsites, supporting infrastructures at each
pump station, tele-supervisory and communication system (using optical fibre), etc.
2.4
2.4.2 Crude oil assays, selected are latest and recommended in Spiral Crude Manager and are
finalized by Owner:
a) Kuwait Export:
b) Arab Light:
c) Arab Heavy:
d) Basrah Light:
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 6 of 66
FACILITY
Tentative Capacity(Note 1)
PROCESS UNITS
tons/annum
7,800,000
To match CDU
2,625,000/2,372,000
1,822,000
98,000
1,553,000
Isomerisation unit
Catalytic Reforming Unit
620,000
799,200
711,000
179,345
103,252
0
0
0
468 TPH RA
162 TPH
65 TPH
3 x 243 TPD
UTILITY SYSTEMS
Grid=100 MW, STG=3*33
MW
3*50 TPH
4MW
18TPH/22TPH
2*1500M3/HR
760M3/HR
85(NOR)/240(MAX) M3/HR
515M3/HR
190M3/HR
90M3/HR
28000/30000M3/HR
2*8825 Nm3/hr
FACILITY
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 7 of 66
Tentative Capacity(Note 1)
3000 Nm3/hr
Nitrogen system
Flare & Blowdown systems
Flushing oil systems
Utility Boiler
160 TPH
OFFSITE FACILITIES
Crude Oil storage and pumping
4*60000 m3/hr
375 m3/hr
4 MM SCM/Day
INFRASTRUCTURE, etc
Workshop
Laboratory
Fire Station
Fire detection and protection
Communications
Ware house
Medical Centre
EMS/ AMS Station
Administration Building
Documentation Center
Canteen Facility
Training Centre
Security Office / Others
Notes: Unit capacities listed are tentative and are based on 8280 on- stream hours.
2.5
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 8 of 66
UNIT NUMBERS
Sl
FACILITY
UNIT NUMBER
CRUDE RECEIPT
Single Point Mooring
01
Sub-sea Pipeline
02
03
04
11
12
13
14
Isomerisation Unit
15
16
18
19
20
LPG Amine Treating unit (SR LPG & CR LPG & Caustic wash)
21
22
24
27
28
29
31
32
33
45
46
47
34
35
36
37
38
Nitrogen system
39
FACILITY
Flare & Blowdown systems
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 9 of 66
UNIT NUMBER
40
41
42
49
74
51
52
54
55
56
57
58
59
61
62
63
64
71
Workshop
Laboratory
Fire Station
Fire detection and protection
Communications
Ware house
Medical Centre
EMS/ AMS Station
Administration Building
Computer Centre
Canteen Facility
Training Centre
Others
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 10 of 66
2.6
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
2.6.1 All engineering specifications shall be issued in the MKS system of measurement, with
the exception of piping/ tubing sizes which shall be reported in inches. Additionally,
licensor's own engineering standards shall be issuable with extant units of measurement.
2.6.2 System of measurement for this project shall be: mks
mks
Temperature
Pressure (gauge)
Pressure (absolute)
Mass
Length
kg/cm2
kg/cm2(a)
kg
m-mm
sp gr ToC/15oC
kg/m3 at 15oC
kg/m3
Furnace draft
mm of WC
Vacuum
mm of Hg
Flowing mass
kg/hr
Flowing vapor
Nm3/hr
Flowing liquid
m3/hr
Standard vapor
Nm3/hr at 0oC
& 1.033 kg/cm2a
Standard liquid
Sm3/hr at 15oC
Enthalpy
kcal/kg
Heat Rate
106kcal/hr
Viscosity
cP
Kinematic Viscosity
cS
Composition
Power
Vol %
kW
3.0
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 11 of 66
PLANT LOCATION
Refer Engineering Design Basis for complete details of plant location. This section
presents extracts from the referred document which are relevant towards preparing
process engineering specifications in BEDP.
The proposed project is expansion of Bharat Oman Refineries Limited (BORL), located
in Bina, Dist. Sagar in Madhya Pradesh. The site is located approximately at Latitude of
241048N and longitude of 78120E.
The site is well connected by state highways and road network. The nearest important
town is Bina,, which is 15 Km from the site. The nearest airport to the site location is
Bhopal, which is 165 Km away from the Bina Refinery site and the nearest rail junction is
Bina which is situated on the broad guage line between New Delhi to Bhopal.
The power required after post expansion is proposed to be met by utilizing full capacity
of existing CPP (99 MW) and balance from augmented grid (Grid augmentation for 220
kV is envisaged to receive 100 MW power).
The expansion envisaged for various process units is proposed to be done within the
battery limit or in immediate vicinity of the existing units. Thus the administration
building and other associated facilities shall be kept same as that of existing one.
3.1
Site Location
- State
- Nearest Important Town
- Nearest Railway
- Nearest Port
- Nearest Airport
:
;
:
:
:
Madhya Pradesh
Bina
Bina
Kandla
Bhopal
3.2
Source of Water
River Betwa
3.3
Rainy season
June to September
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 12 of 66
4.0
4.1
4.2
936.3
Min,
4.3
Ambient temperature:
1.1oC
Min,
4.4
Relative humidity:
16.4
Min,
947.4
80
411.6 m
Avg
Nor,
954.2
Max
Nor,
45.6oC
Max
Max,
54
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
Design
4.6
Rainfall data:
4.6.1 For a 1 hour period
4.6.2 For a 24-hour period
4.7
Wind data
4.7.1 Wind velocity:
4.7.2 Direction of prevailing wind
4.8
No data
284.5 mm
2 km/hr
Max
Max
Min,
25 km/hr
W to E
Max
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 13 of 66
5.0
5.1
FEED / PRODUCT
LPG
Naphtha
Kerosine
7
8
Coke
10
Sulphur
cif Rs / MT
cif US$/MT
Diesel (Euro V)
UTILITY
UNIT
Power
Kwh
Tons
Tons
Tons
Rs/ Unit
US$/unit
Optimisation criteria
Incremental investment shall be recovered within a 3 year period based on a straightline payback method.
5.3
Plant life
5.3.1 Plant operating life for economic calculation shall be taken as 15 years.
5.3.2 Plant equipment design life shall be considered as follows:
a) 30 years for heavy wall reactors and separators
b) 20 years for columns, vessels, heat exchanger shells and similar services.
c) 10 years for piping, furnace tubes, High Alloy exchanger tube bundles.
d) 5 years for Carbon Steel / Low Alloy heat exchanger tube bundles.
Template No. 5-0000-0001-T2 Rev. 1
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 14 of 66
5.3.3
Health-up checks not required for the equipments run for less than 10 years. Since,
BORL is operating less than 10 years, it is concluded that health check-up will not be
required and hence de-rating of hardware will not be considered.
6.0
UTILITY SPECIFICATIONS
6.1
Utility pressure and temperature levels, as made available at battery limits at grade level
of a process unit, are indicated in Table-6.1.
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 15 of 66
Parameter
Minimum
Normal
Maximum
Mech Design
37
38
40
46
Temperature, oC *
370 (Note8)
380
390
420
Pressure, kg/cm g
16.0
17.0
18.0
22.0
Temperature, oC
260
270
280
350
Pressure, kg/cm g
o
Temperature, C
4
3.0
4.0
5.0
7.0
saturated
175
190
240
2.0
2.5
7.0
90
95
120
CONDENSATE RETURN
Pressure, kg/cm2g
1.5
Temperature, oC
5
Pressure, kg/cm g
o
Temperature, C
5
4.0
NOTE-3
AMB
65
3.5 / 4.3
1.5 / 2.3 0
Supply Temperature C
7.0 (Note-5)
33
Return Temperature C
6
7.0
33
65
45
65
DEMINERALISED WATER
Pressure, kg/cm2g
o
Temperature, C
7
4.5
5.0
5.5
15.8 (Note-6)
Amb
40
45
65
Pressure, kg/cm g
75
Temperature, oC
150
MP BOILER FEED WATER
26.0
29.0
45
Temperature, C
105
110
150
Pressure, kg/cm g
o
PLANT AIR
Pressure, kg/cm2g
3.5
7.0
8.0
10.5
Temperature, oC
amb
amb
50
65
INSTRUMENT AIR
2
Pressure, kg/cm g
o
Temperature, C
10
4.5
6.5
7.0
10.5
amb
amb
50
65
FUEL GAS
Temperature, C
11
3.0
3.5
6.0
amb
40
60
75
10.0
19.6
8.0
2.0
9.0
19.6
13
3.0
2.0
3.5
4.0
11.5
11.5
NITROGEN
Pressure, kg/cm2g
o
Temperature, C
2.5
12
Note:
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 16 of 66
1.
4.5
6.5
7.0
10.5
amb
amb
amb
65
6.
Mechanical design conditions of utility systems will be verified during detailed engineering
based on final hydraulics.
The battery limit pressures for liquid lines at individual unit battery limits will vary depending
up on the location of the unit.
These shall be finalized during detailed engineering.
In view of large elevation difference between SW / BCW pumping facility and process units
(All Process units being at higher elevation), all the service water and bearing cooling water
lines located at higher plateau in the process unit area shall have design pressure of 10.5
kg/cm2g and units (ETP) in the lower plateau shall have deign pressure of 14.0 kg/cm2g.
Supply pressure 3.5 kg/cm2g for DCU and MS block. Other process units it is 4.3 kg/cm2g.
Design pressure for cooling water consumers which are fed from CPP cooling tower is 16.5
kg/cm2g.
The design pressure corresponds to lower elevation units.
7.
8.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.2
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 17 of 66
6.2.1 Steam turbine drives and ejectors shall be rated based on MINIMUM steam conditions.
All other steam consuming equipment shall be rated based on NORMAL steam
conditions. NORMAL steam conditions shall be used for utility estimates, heat and
material balances, battery limits connectivities, etc. All steam generating equipment shall
be rated based on delivering steam at MAXIMUM conditions to the header. However
Licensor of MS block M/s UOP have taken a deviation to this and equipment consuming
steam in UOP designed units will be specified for minimum steam conditions.
6.2.2 Handling condensate at various unit battery limits is as given below :
a)
b)
c)
d)
Condensate coming from the exchangers (Suspect and pure Condensates) which
may be consuming HP, MP or LP steam.
-
b)
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 18 of 66
c)
6.3
Each unit shall have dedicated condensate recovery system for recovering
condensate discharged from process steam traps and tracer / steam traps. Steam
trap / tracer condensate in the respective units shall be recovered in an
atmospheric buried drum by gravity and pumped to CPU through suspect
condensate header.
WATER SYSTEMS
6.3.1 The quality of raw water / filtered water (utility water) / circulating cooling water / oncethrough cooling water / DM Water / Boiler Feed Water are as per Table-6.2 & Table-6.3
Parameter
Filtered Raw
Water
DM Water
Cooling Water
7.5 - 8.0
6.7-7.3
7.5 - 8.0
<1
Nil
10-15
<0.5
200-250
0.1 max
400-650
<0.2
M. Alkalinity, mg/l
95-120
100 - 120
60-75
260-340
154-190
Nil
360-500
<25
<0.01
35 40
<5
Potassium as K, mg/l
20-25
Nil
45 - 60
0.3 - 0.6
35-45
300 - 550
8 - 10
< 0.1
0.02 max
<5
<5
30-40
1-2
20 - 30
1-2
Benzotriazole, mg/l
0.2-0.5
pH
Turbidity, NTU (5 min settled)
Conductivity@20 C, micromho/cm
Note:
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 19 of 66
For further details on water qualities, reference is to be made to respective utility system design basis.
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 20 of 66
UNIT
RANGE
DESCRIPTION
8.8 9.2
9.0 9.4
ppm
0.007
ppm
0.01
ppm
0.005
ppm
0.02
Micro
mhos/cm
ppm
ppm
0.2
0.01 0.02
0.2
10
ppm
Nil
Note: BFW Quality reported is as per existing. Refer Design basis Part A of
package.
PSV
X 1
To Floor
LO
Sc
-1
TI
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 21 of 66
6.4
COMPRESSED AIR & NITROGEN SYSTEMS
6.4.1 The specifications of plant air and instrument air are indicated in Table-6.4. The
HCU/DHT unit shall be served through a dedicated instrument air header originating
from compressed air plant through separate HP instrument air receiver.
Table-6.4: Plant Air & Instrument Air quality
Sl
Parameter
Plant Air
Instr. Air
water-free
(-)40oC
nil
nil
6.4.2 Nitrogen shall be generated from a cryogenic air separation unit with the specifications as
in Table-6.5. The Catalytic Reformer unit in the refinery shall be served through a
dedicated nitrogen header originating from the nitrogen plant through separate liquid
nitrogen storage and vaporiser:
Table-6.5: Nitrogen quality
Sl
Parameter
Nitrogen
(-) 100 oC
99.99
3 max
1 max
nil
nil
6.5
FUEL SYSTEMS
6.5.1 Original design comprises of two separate liquid fuel systems, low sulphur fuel (1.0 wt%)
for CDU/VDU and high sulphur fuel (2.0 wt%) for rest of the refinery operations. Each
fuel system consists of dedicated fuel oil storage tanks in offsites, pumps, piping from
offsites to CDU/VDU, day storage tanks and pumps in CDU/VDU and respective fuel
supply lines.
Current environment requirement is 0.5 wt% sulphur in fuel for CDU/VDU as well as for
rest of the refinery.
Appropriate modification shall be done post revamp.
Two separate liquid fuel systems are specified. The Crude & Vacuum Distillation unit
fuel oil system and Refinery fuel oil system. Low sulphur fuel oil (sulphur is 0.5 wt%
max) is used as liquid fuel in heaters. Liquid fuel composition data are indicated in
Table-6.5. Fuel gas composition data are indicated in Table-6.6. Main burner and pilot
burner fuel gas are same. Natural Gas backup considered for fuel gas in the Refinery.
6.5.2 Burner turndown requirements have to meet at liquid fuel pressures at burner not less
than the normal anticipated return header pressure indicated in Table-6.6. The fuel oil
system shall be designed for a recirculation rate of 2:1.
6.5.3 Fuel gas liquid knockout drums will be common for a group of functionally clustered
Template No. 5-0000-0001-T2 Rev. 1
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 22 of 66
Sl
Note:
1.
2.
BLEND 1
UCO (45.25 wt%)+
HCU Kero
(45.25wt%)+
HCGO(9.5wt%)
BLEND 2
HCU KERO (98.38
wt%) + HCGO (9.62
Wt%)
830
798.6
0.5, max
0.5, max
1.
Name
2.
3.
4.
465
472
5.
<1
<1
6.
<1
<1
7.
8.
Flash Point, oC
48.6
41.32
9.
3.3
0.94
10.
1.4
0.57
11.
142
144
12.
0.04
0.04
13.
LHV, kcal/kg
9500-9850
9500-9850
Refinery current fuel blend is 40 ~ 45 wt% UCO, 40 ~ 45% HCU Kero and balance HCGO in order to
reach sulphur level of 0.5 wt% max.
Provision of VR shall be kept for Fuel Oil Blending.
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 23 of 66
Sl
Parameter
Name
Case #
Composition, mol%
LPG
Low MW
High MW
Startup
Hydrogen
48.72
75.56
42.29
0.0
Carbon Dioxide
0.08
0.05
0.12
Carbon Monoxide
0.0
0.0
0.0
Oxygen
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.2
0.0
150 ppmv
150 ppmv
150 ppmv
4ppmv
0.0
0.07
0.8
Methane
0.55
27.10
13.54
33.74
Ethane
13.86
6.96
15.4
Ethylene
1.03
0.64
1.49
Propane
3.48
1.37
2.33
Propene
0.29
0.18
0.42
i-Butane
0.68
0.26
0.38
0.015
26.0
n-Butane
2.33
1.27
0.46
0.015
35.0
Butenes
0.01
1.84
0.01
0.02
0.07
2.57
0.01
14.65
0.0
0.01
15.05
Water
C5+
NH3
NG
Normal
Hydrogen Sulphide
FG
Molecular weight
LHV, kcal/kg
Nitrogen mole%
12420
7.62
14840
12250
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
92.57
92.77
6.5
0.0
2.0
0.0
0.27
36.0
0.0
0.0
0
0.0
11750
52.7
10980
0.43
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 24 of 66
6.6
FLARE & BLOWDOWN SYSTEMS
6.6.1 Flare systems are separate for normal hydrocarbons and acid gases from Sulphur block.
No separate header for hydrogen rich flare gas is planned.
6.6.2 Apart from the main knock-out drums near the flare stack, individual units shall be
provided with a flare knock-out drum whenever significant liquid relief is anticipated
from the pressure relieving devices. This is a stipulation of OISD standard # 106.
Licensor / unit designer / contractor shall specify a horizontal unit flare KOD, sized to
separate out liquid droplets down to a size of 400 .
6.6.3 Maximum hydrocarbon flare backpressure, to be considered for sizing of pressure relief
devices, is 1.4 kg/cm2g at unit battery limits and 1.7 kg/cm2g at PSV outlet.
6.6.4 Maximum acid gas flare backpressure, to be considered for sizing of pressure relief
devices, is 0.5 kg/cm2g at unit battery limits and 0.7 kg/cm2g at PSV outlet.
6.6.5 All hydrocarbon-bearing discharges of all molecular weights from pressure relief /
pressure control devices shall be discharged to closed flare system. For hydrogen rich
services with relieving temperatures higher than 300oC, the flare gases could have been
vented to atmosphere. However, for BORL, current BEDP data of all licensed and open
art units do not indicate occurrence of such releases in the refinery.
6.6.6 For pressure relief valves on steam services, the maximum allowable overpressure shall
be considered as 5% as per stipulations of Indian Boiler Regulations.
6.6.7 All intermittent non-congealing hydrocarbon drains from equipment shall be routed to a
buried Closed Blowdown (CBD) system while congealing hydrocarbon drains will be
displaced with flushing oil into identified rundown headers. The CBD drum shall be a
horizontal underground vessel, floating with flare header. For physically contiguous
units, CBD vessels can be common, if found suited to equipment layout and underground
piping slope considerations, to be decided during detailed engineering. The drums may
be provided with appropriate heating (with LP Steam) and / or cooling as considered
necessary by unit design. Two vertical submerged centrifugal pumps (one operating and
one installed spare) shall pump out the drum inventory to a slop header at a battery limits
pressure of 5 kg/cm2.
For Vacuum unit & Hydrocracker unit, congealing blow down system shall be employed.
This system consists of evacuation header, congealing blow down header and congealing
blow down pumps. The congealing blow downs are pumped to black slop header after
cooling.
6.6.8 Refer section 6.2 for condensate blow down system.
6.7
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 25 of 66
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Through
< 0.18 kW
0.18 kW
132 kW
> 132 kW
Nameplate
Voltage
Phase
Frequency
(Hertz)
240 V
50
415 V
50
6600 V
50
6.7.2 Licensor shall provide the list of drivers requiring reacceleration feature to ensure faster
start-up and / or to minimise plant down time in case of process disturbances due to
momentary voltage drip or brief interruption (upto 5 seconds) in normal power supply. In
case of very large number of drivers requiring reacceleration facility, stagewise grouping
of such drivers, depending upon permissible time of failure shall be provided by licensor.
6.7.3 Emergency power requirement, if any, for safe shutdown / quick start-up after failure of
normal power supply for duration beyond which reacceleration feature is incapacitated,
shall be provided along with the list of drivers.
6.7.4 Licensor shall indicate auto restart requirement for motors in the datasheet.
6.7.5
For new post-revamp system VFD type drives may be considered if applicable for
process feed control / energy optimization.
6.7.6
Voltage level of all new instruments to be considered as per existing system for proper
integration.
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 26 of 66
Debottlenecking Project
Bina Refinery, BORL
6.8
6.8.1 Commercial caustic of 46% (weight) shall be received by the owner and stored in the
Offsite area. Caustic of 12% (weight) strength shall be prepared and stored in the same
area from where it shall be pumped to process units. Consuming units shall have
necessary facilities to store this caustic and to prepare / store caustic solutions of lower
strength, as needed. Caustic of 20% (weight) is prepared and stored in the same area from
where it shall be pumped to RODM and ETP.
6.8.2 Caustic handling equipment shall be of Carbon Steel construction and stress relieved
whenever required for the operating temperatures selected.
6.8.3 Spent caustic from all units shall be degassed before leaving the unit. The spent caustic
bulk streams shall be pumped out or pushed out under system pressure to the effluent
treatment plant (ETP) or to other potential consumers such as injection into crude.
Residual spent caustic shall be drained into OWS. A common spent caustic oxidator will
be evaluated for processing the spent caustic received at the ETP for reduction of BOD.
6.8.4 Battery limit conditions for caustic distribution are as per Table-6.9.
Table-6.9 : Caustic streams
Sl#
Caustic stream
Operating condition
P, kg/cm2g
20% Caustic
Spent Caustic
T, oC
Mechanical Design
P, kg/cm2g
T, oC
18.0
65
by design
65
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 27 of 66
6.9
FLUSHING OIL SYSTEMS
6.9.1 Three flushing oil systems are envisaged in the refinery:
(i) Normal Flushing Oil (FLO)
(ii) Heavy Flushing Oil (HFLO)
(iii) Instrument/Pump Seal Flushing Oil (IFLO)
(iv) Pressurized Flushing Oil
6.9.2 Normal Flushing Oil: Normal flushing oil (FLO) shall be straight-run light gas oil,
charged to a refinery header from the crude unit to a pressure of 7 kg/cm2 at 40oC. FLO
is also stored in offsites (DHDT feed tanks are used for this purpose) from where it can
be charged as a backup into the same header. This FLO is to be used for startup /
shutdown flush out of heavy oil equipment and also as external flush for pump API seal
plans, instrument flushing as suited. A centralised FLO booster system, as required, will
be implemented during detailed engineering to receive this FLO in an adequately sized
surge vessel and pump it into a higher pressure header, as found necessary. FLO line from
Offsites forms the equipment-flushing header. This is used for flushing of equipments &
lines which normally carry heavy viscous liquids. This system is applicable to
CDU/VDU, DCU and HCU/DHDT units.
6.9.3 Heavy Flushing Oil: Heavy flushing oil (HFLO) shall be straight-run vacuum gas oil of a
cut to be decided by contractor. A centralised HFLO system will be located in Vacuum
Distillation unit, charging to a header at a pressure to be determined by contractor and at a
temperature of around 80 - 110C. This HFLO can be used as external flush for those
pump API seal plans where FLO cannot be used because of vapour blowout possibilities
inside the seals. This system is applicable to CDU/VDU only.
6.9.4 Instrument/ Pump Seal Flushing Oil: Instrument flushing is normally Diesel streams from
crude unit. As a back up flushing oil is also provided.
In CDU/VDU, flushing oil system for instrument/pump seal consists of the following:
Nitrogen blanketed flushing oil drum which normally uses internal GO as
flushing oil and also has back up of FLO from offsites.
LP and HP FLO pumps which receive suction from FLO drum through filters
o
LP flushing oil pump generates flushing oil at three different pressure
levels for effective purging of instruments and pump seals (plan no 32)
o
HP flushing oil pump generates flushing oil at high pressure for purging
of instrument
In DCU, flushing oil system for instrument/pump seal consists of the following:
Nitrogen blanketed flushing oil drum which normally uses internal LCGO as
flushing oil and also has back up of FLO from offsites
LP and HP FLO pumps which receive suction from FLO drum through filters
o
LP flushing oil pump generates flushing oil at three different pressure
levels for effective purging of instruments and pump seals (plan no 32)
o
HP flushing oil pump generates flushing oil at high pressure for purging
of instrument.6.9.5
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 28 of 66
6.9.5 Pressurized flushing oil system FLO from offsites is boosted by pumps (Pressurized
FLO Pumps) for flushing of equipments in heavy congealing services in CDU/VDU,
DCU and HCU/DHDT units.
6.10 HOT OIL SYSTEM
6.10.1 A hot oil system will be installed as a part of MS block. This hot oil is used as
reboiling medium for two reboilers in Penex unit and Naphtha stabilizer reboiler in
Naphtha stabilizer unit.
7.0
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 29 of 66
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 30 of 66
7.5.0 Metallurgy
7.5.1 Metallurgy shall be specified by respective unit designer based on process considerations.
If a unit designer has specific stipulations towards either an associated upstream or
downstream unit for, say, piping metallurgy, exchanger tube metallurgy, etc., the same
shall be identified by unit designer during the finalisation of DB.
7.6.0 Corrosion Allowance
7.6.1 Minimum corrosion allowance shall be as follows :
Service
Min.Corrosion Allowance, mm
- C.S. vessels
3.0
- Alloy Steel vessles
1.5
- Clad/ lined vessels
Clad/ lining thickness
- S.S. vessels
nil
7.7.0 Lining/ Cladding thickness
7.7.1 The minimum lining/ cladding thickness of 3 mm shall be used until different thickness
is required from process considerations.
8.0
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 31 of 66
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 32 of 66
where,
Pdes
Pmax suction
Pmax
g)
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 33 of 66
For a full liquid system at the discharge of a positive displacement pump, the
mechanical design pressure shall be the higher of :
Pdes
Pdes
OR
h) For shell-and-tube heat exchangers, the low pressure (LP) side shall be preferably
specified with a mechanical design pressure at least equal to 10/13 th of high pressure
(HP) side mechanical design pressure, in order to avoid having to install a pressure
relief device on the LP side. The "10/13 th criteria shall necessarily be adhered to in
the following situations:
(1) LP fluid is on the tube side.
(2) Relief discharge cannot be connected to flare header owing to nature of fluid.
(3) Relief discharge is two-phase.
(4) Liquid relief cannot be connected to a closed blowdown system.
(5) When the "10/13 th criteria calls for an increase by less than a factor of 1.5 of the
mechanical design pressure of the LP side as would be calculated from normal
estimation procedures.
However, based on process considerations and designer's own practice, heat
exchanger can be designed without upgrading design pressure by providing tube
rupture pressure relief valve after getting consent on case to case basis from owner.
8.2.2 Mechanical design pressure for storage tanks and atmospheric vessels
a) Design pressure of storage tanks shall be in accordance with API-620, API-650 and
API-2000, as appropriate.
b) Blanketed storage tanks shall have a blanketing pressure of 150 mmwc, unless a
higher pressure is deemed necessary from process considerations. The design
pressure of blanketed storage tanks shall be determined to allow adequate
overpressure for outbreathing and emergency relief devices. The blanketed tanks shall
also be designed for 50mm vacuum.
8.2.3 Mechanical design temperature
a) The design temperatures for vessels operating at or above 0oC shall be equal to the
maximum operating temperature plus 10oC, or, the maximum temperature in
emergency situations at least equal to the temperature corresponding to pressure relief
Template No. 5-0000-0001-T2 Rev. 1
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 34 of 66
:
:
0.5 kg/cm2
190 oC
If a specific equipment requires steam out with MP steam, steam out temperature shall be
specified accordingly.
8.2.5 Minimum Design Metal Temperature (MDMT)
Licensor / designer shall specify MDMT based on international design practice.
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 35 of 66
Cooling Water
Tempered Water
Tube
Carbon Steel
Carbon Steel
Channel
Carbon Steel
Carbon Steel
Channel cover
Carbon Steel
Carbon Steel
8.3.1.3 Lube oil coolers for LO/SO console of compressors shall use SS tubes.
8.3.2
Fouling factors
8.3.2.1 Fouling factors for process streams :
Fouling factors for process streams shall be decided by designer based on past
experience and good design practices. However, owners overriding considerations
towards fouling factors for specific units or process streams shall be the basis of
specifications, if spelt out in respective unit DBs.
8.3.2.2 Fouling factors for utility streams :
a) Cooling Water:
0.0004 hr-m2-oC/kcal
b) Tempered Water
0.0002 hr-m2-oC/kcal
c) Steam
0.0001 hr-m2-oC/kcal
8.3.3 Constraints on tube-side velocities:
Cooling water:
Residues, Heavy oils:
Slurry oils:
Minimum (m/sec)
1.0 @ normal flow
1.0 @ turndown
1.5 @ turndown
Maximum (m/sec)
2.3 @ turnup
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 36 of 66
For new fin coolers, wireless vibration probes with control room indications, alarms shall
be considered Two probes shall be provided at fan bearing and two at motor.
8.3.5 For new Air Fin Coolers , header shall be specified as follows:
a) Cover Type header of all fluids up to design pressure of 50 kg/cm2 (g)
b) Plug Type header of all fluids with design pressure higher than 50 kg/cm2 (g) to
avoid any leakages.
8.3.6 Condensate control for steam consumers
For steam flows < 500 kg/hr to a steam-heated exchanger, steam traps shall be considered
for condensate removal. For larger consumers, condensate shall be collected in a pot
provided with a level control valve for condensate withdrawal. The condensate pot top
elevation shall be 300mm lower than the exchanger geriatrix or bottom tangent line
unless warranted otherwise from a process control scheme consideration.
Figure-8.1
Typical condensate pot control scheme
STEAM
LG
CONDENSATE
8.3.7 The use of compablock, plate type exchangers, helical baffle/tubes or precoated tubes
for appropriate services shall be evaluated as applicable for post revamp scenario.
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 37 of 66
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 38 of 66
l) Coils having horse shoe type bend shall be flanged at their terminal connections (like
cross overs and furnace inlets/ outlets).
m) An adequate number of flanged connections shall be provided for steaming out, water
freeing, steam air decoking and chemical cleaning.
n) Skin thermocouples shall be provided for measuring temperature of furnace tubes. In
each furnace two additional type B thermocouples shall be installed close to the skin
thermocouples for checking purpose. These type B thermocouples shall be
connected to an accessible terminal box for connection to a portable instrument.
o) Furnace very high pressure to trip the furnace.
p) Very high coil outlet temperature to trip the furnace.
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 39 of 66
8.5.0 Vessels
Reference is made to Engineering design basis, Static Equipment section 2.4 document
number: A702-999-16-46-EDB-1001.
8.5.1 Hold-up criteria:
Following is the hold up criteria for new vessels, for existing/modified vessels hold up
time shall be considered on case to case basis.
(a) For feed surge drums, the total hold-up provided shall be at least 10 minutes of design
flow of feed with the hold-up being available between the measured minimum and
maximum levels. Alarm points, if configured, shall allow a hold-up of 1 minute
between the alarm point and the corresponding low or high level. Shutdowns, if
configured, shall allow a hold-up of 1 minute between the shutdown point and the
corresponding low or high level alarm point.
(b) For liquid product accumulators with product to storage, the hold-up provided shall
be at least 3 minutes of design flow between measured high and low levels.
(c) For overhead accumulators, the liquid hold-up provided shall be at least 5 minutes of
the reflux design flow. Additional hold-up shall be provided for the net product,
which shall be 3 minutes of product flow, when the product goes to storage, and 5
minutes of product flow, when the product feeds a downstream tower.
(d) For horizontal vessels, the normal liquid level shall be fixed at 50% of the vessel
diameter.
8.5.2
Nozzle requirements for vessels and towers:
8.5.2.1 Minimum process nozzle size on vessel shall be 2" NB . Minimum instrument
nozzle size for internally lined vessels / towers shall b 3" NB.
8.5.2.2 The following nozzle services shall be specified with at least 300# rating, even if process
conditions call for a lower pressure rating:
(a) All nozzles upto:
2" NB
(b) Pressure relief valve connection:
Yes
(c) Level instrument standpipes:
Yes
(d) All instrumentation connections:
Yes
8.5.2.3 Thermowell nozzles on vessels shall be flanged and will be 2" minimum ID. Nominal
diameter shall be specified to ensure this minimum ID or ID of lining.
8.5.2.4 Steamout connections will be provided on vessels which are stipulated to be steamed out
during normal startups of shutdowns. Steamout nozzles shall be located on the head of
horizontal vessels and at minimum elevation above the bottom tangent line for vertical
vessels.Steamout nozzles shall be hard-piped for all pressure vessels handling
hydrocarbons.
8.5.2.5 For vessels less than 1000mm diameter, where no access is required, hand holes shall be
provided in place of body flanges. Vessels and columns with diameter up to 1000 mm
shall be provided with 450 NB manhole. Vessels and columns with diameter greater than
Template No. 5-0000-0001-T2 Rev. 1
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 40 of 66
Length
(Horizontal vessel)
6.0 - 15.0 m
more than 15 m
Vent nozzle
Drain
nozzle
Ventilation
nozzle
2" NB
2" NB
2" NB
2" NB
2" NB
3" NB
3000 mm - 4500 mm
4" NB
4500 mm - 7500 mm
6" NB
>7500 mm
8" NB
8.5.2.7 Level instrument nozzles (refer also section 9.3, "level instruments") shall be provided as
below, unless BDEP packages indicate other special recommendations:
(a)
When directly mounted on a vessel, two flanged nozzles affording 2" ID shall be
provided. When mounted on a standpipe, two flanged 2" NB nozzles shall be
provided. For ranges greater than 48 inches, differential pressure level
transmitters shall be considered, preferably mounted from the standpipe having
level gages.
(b)
The visible length of the level gauge shall cover the maximum operating range .
When level gauge is used in conjunction with a level instrument, the visible range
of the level gauge shall cover the entire range of level instrument..
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 41 of 66
8.5.3
Vessel size limitations
8.5.3.1 Single-piece heavy equipment such as Reactors considered to be shop-fabricated and
transported to site shall have to be within the following shipping envelope (dimensions
including projections):
a)
b)
c)
8.5.3.2 For general single piece equipment ODC limits, reference is to be made to Engineering
Design Basis.
8.5.4 New coalescer shall be provided with an upstream duplex type filtration system.
8.5.5
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 42 of 66
8.6.0 Towers
8.6.1 Tray selection
Valve trays, in general, will be preferred except for liquid-liquid mass transfer
applications and for services where some extent of fouling is anticipated. Single-pass,
Two-pass and Four-pass trays can be envisaged as appropriate. Three-pass trays are not
preferred.
8.6.2 Tray / packing turndown
All trays and packings shall be designed for the same turndown as defined in respective
unit PDB. In some services, the reflux and reboiler rates may be turned down to a ratio
different from the unit turndown, while still meeting the overall turndown.
8.6.3 Hold-up criteria for tower bottoms & tower draw-offs
The following is the hold up criteria for new columns. For existing/modified columns,
holdup time shall be checked on case to case basis.
(a) When tower bottoms directly feed another tower, the hold-up provided shall be at
least 5 minutes of design flow of net product (excluding circulating flows such as
bottoms quench) between high and low levels.
(b) When tower bottoms go to storage or to a downstream unit having a feed surge drum,
the hold-up provided shall be at least 3 minutes of design flow of net product
between high and low levels.
(c) When a low alarm is configured, the volume between low liquid level and low level
alarm point shall afford a hold-up of 1 minute. This will be in addition to the surge
requirement. When a low-low alarm is configured for shutdown, provide at least an
additional 1 minute of hold-up between the low level alarm point and the low-low
level shutdown point.
(d) When a high alarm is configured, the volume between high liquid level and highlevel
alarm point shall afford a hold-up of 1 minute. This will be in addition to the surge
requirement. When a high-high alarm is configured for shutdown, provide at least an
additional 1 minute of hold-up between the high level alarm point and the high-high
level shutdown point.
(e) Hold up criteria for draw off trays:
8.6.4 For columns of diameter 900mm, flanged column sections shall be used. For such
columns, each set of 15 to 20 (maximum) trays should be approachable from column
manholes one above and one below the set of trays. Each packed bed will have a manhole
each above and below the bed. 300# manholes shall be provided just above the packing
support plates, for removal of packings. These shall be two in number and opposite each
other. In case the column diameter permits, one of the handholes shall be replaced by
manhole.
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 43 of 66
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 44 of 66
8.7.0 Pumps
Reference is made to Engineering Design basis (Rotating Equipment) document number
A702-999-16-45-EDB-1001.
For all rotating equipment, noise level (driver + driver equipment train + auxiliaries) shall
be specified as not to exceed 88 dBA when measured at one-meter distance from the
equipment skid in any direction. This requirement is not applicable for equipment of
infrequent operation such as diesel engine driven fire water pump package/ emergency
DG sets. However, this will not be a criteria for rejecting the pump vendor. Equipment
with noise levels higher than 85 dBA but upto 88 dBA when measured at 1 meter
distance from the equipment skid will technically be accepted.
8.7.1
Spare pumps
Remarks
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 45 of 66
Specification of drives
Motor drives shall be normally specified for pumps. Steam turbine drivers will be
specified as required for criticial services (see section 8.1).
8.7.7
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 46 of 66
8.7.8.1 Warm up bypass across pump discharge for hot pumps shall be as given below.
Globe
3/4"
8.7.8.2 For new systems, isolation valves shall be provided upstream of globe valve.
8.7.8.3 For very high pressure drop (i.e. 15 kg/cm2g or above) across globe valve, a restriction
orifice shall be provided for new systems.
8.7.9
Pumps taking suction from vessels containing greater than 7m3 of LPG, Hot Gasoline
and Hot auto-ignition material will be protected by changing pump suction and
discharge isolation valves to fire-safe remotely actuated valves. The valves to be motor
operated (MOVs) from a safe location. For new systems, MOV safe location shall be
considered 15m.
These pumps shall have a DCS stop facility in central control room along with running
lamp indication.
The MOVs shall have position (open & close) indicators. The new MOVs shall have
position (open & close) indicators and inching facility. Hand switches to close and open
from the field from a safe distance and from control room shall be provided.
Start permissive interlock shall be provided for the pump to start only when suction
valve in open position.
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 47 of 66
8.8.0 Compressors
8.8.1 Selection of type of compressors
(a) Specification of a compressor shall assume installation under a compressor shed.
(b) Centrifugal compressors, conforming to API Standard 617, will be specified where
suitable. Axial compressors are not preferred below capacities of 150,000 Nm3/hr.
Centrifugal compressors shall not be spared but specifications shall be given for a
spare rotor. Driver selection shall be based on process requirements, criticality of
service, capital cost and owner's preference as per respective unit DB.
(c) Reciprocating compressors, conforming to API Standard 618, shall be specified with
adequate spare capacity to allow maintenance of one machine while the plant remains
onstream. Motor drivers shall be specified normally.
(d) Screw compressors, conforming to API Standard 619, can be specified in special
cases where found to have an operating, economic or maintenance advantage over
other choices. Screw compressors shall not be spared but specifications shall be
given for a spare rotor. Driver selection shall be as for centrifugal compressors.
8.8.2 Compressor controls
For compressor controls PLC in control room shall be considered instead of the
conventional relay logics.
8.8.3 Compressor seals:
Owner has preference for only dry gas seal.
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 48 of 66
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 49 of 66
9.0
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 50 of 66
INSTRUMENTATION
Reference is made to Engineering design basis (Instrumentation) document number
6743-15-16-51-DB-01.
9.1
9.1.1
Control Philosophy:
Process Control shall be facilitated through a centralised state-of-art Digital Control
System (DCS). All process interlocks and shutdowns shall be implemented through
Quad Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). Redundancy in the field shall be
provided based on process requirement.
9.1.2
Field bus technology (FF) to be considered for all open/ close loops except safety
systems and complex/critical loops. All transmitters/other field devices for open loops
should have interoperability between FF devices including FF interface card in
host/DCS system.
9.1.3.
PLC should have SIL 3 or TUV AK6 class with sequence of event recording facilities.
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
General requirements:
All symbols in P&ID shall be as per ISA.
Transmitters for shutdown service shall be separate from transmitters for control and
monitoring.
9.2.3
i) All MCC signals will be interfaced through isolating relays and fuse terminals to
PLC/DCS.
ii) All solenoid valve operation shall be through the PLC only, and should be shown
in corresponding logic diagram. No direct operated solenoid valves shall be
considered. Shutdown valves shall be provided with double SOV with 120V DC
Push buttons and status indication shall be realised in DCS except for shutdown
applications. No hardwired indicators/recorders shall be used.
9.2.4
9.2.5
For shutdown valves, requirement of Tight Shut Off (TSO) shall be indicated wherever
applicable. All TSO valve shall be of class V as default as a specific owner
requirement.
9.2.6
Signals of PLC with repeat alarm indication in DCS shall be shown connected to DCS
from PLC through software link.
9.2.7
Nozzle sizes for all instruments shall be 3" minimum for all internally lined vessels.
For others, size of instrument nozzles shall be as per relevant EIL standards.
9.2.8
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 51 of 66
9.2.9
Continuous flushing oil purge (except for bitumen) shall be provided for flow, level and
pressure transmitters in heavy residue services.
9.2.10
All temperature elements shall have minimum line size expansion of 4".
9.2.11
One single tapping point shall not be used for connecting multiple instruments on
process lines.
9.2.12
Where local loop indicators are used in a DCS loop (for repeat indication), such
indicators shall bear a suffixed instrument tag number to distinguish these from the
DCS instruments.
9.2.13
Transmitters for flow, pressure and differential pressure shall be Smart Type (0.075%
accuracy) with HART Protocol. This is not applicable for filed bus type transmitters.
For new systems, wireless transmitters will be used for pump seal plan instruments of
pressure and level measurement and vibration/accelerometers for non-critcal pumps.
9.2.14
Licensor may elect to utilize a 2 out of 3 logic through PLC where deemed
appropriate for unit/equipment shutdown. The following are some of the critical
equipment where 2 out of 3 voting logic is required. LICENSOR to determine other
shutdown logics where it is required to employ 2 out of 3 voting logic.
1
2
3.
4.
9.2.15
9.2.16
ISA type K thermocouples are preferred for General Service. Pt-100 RTDs may be used
in special applications
9.2.17
9.2.18
Licensor to furnish specification for testing requirement for control valves, flanges etc
for H2 service, NACE service.
9.2.19
9.2.20
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 52 of 66
9.2.21
New on/off valves which are used in shutdown application shall be provided with
redundant SOVs.
9.3
9.3.1
Level instruments:
Standpipe, 2" NB shall be considered for only clean, non-viscous and non-crystallising
services. Standpipes shall be used if more than 4 vessels nozzles are anticipated for
mounting all the level instruments in a given practice. Additionally, it is client's
requirement that all standpipes shall be provided with isolation valves.
9.3.2
Standpipe shall not have any instruments other than for measurement of level except
local pressure instruments. Standpipe accommodating level gauge/ transmitterfor
control and indication shall be separate from standpipe / vessel tappings for level
switches for alarm and trip.
9.3.3
Tank Level Gauges shall be Servo type for Feed & Product tanks with Tank Farm
Management System integrated with DCS.
For highly viscous liquids stored in fixed roof tanks, Radar type gauges shall be
considered. Temperature & density measurement with the servo gauges shall be
considered. For temperature measurement of hydrocarbon tanks, average temp
measurement over the entire liquid column in tank should be considered.
For new tankages, two types of level measuring instruments (servo and radar type) shall
be considered as MB Lal committee report. SIL(safety integrity level) of the tank level
control must be improved and independent overfill protection meeting requirement of
Part 1 of EN 61511 shall be provided.
9.3.4
9.3.5
Level instrument tappings shall be from vessel / stand pipe only and not from process
line.
Diaphragm seals shall be indicated for congealing / high viscosity service for pressures
upto 600#.
9.3.6
9.3.7
Guided Wave Radar type level transmitter (instead of external displacer type) may be
used for level measurement up to 1219mm for existing and 2400 mm for new systems
in applications other than liquid-liquid interface cases. Displacer type may be used in
interface application where guided wave radar are not suitable.
9.3.8
Radar type level transmitters shall be used for new underground CBD vessels.
9.4
9.4.1
Flow instruments:
Where flow measurement (except mass flow meters) is stipulated with pressure and
temperature compensation, the pressure and temperature elements shall be shown and
tagged in P&ID.
9.4.2
Where only local flow indication is required, a calibrated differential pressure gauge
across the flow element may be used.
For open Art unit BDEP, instead of modification, orifice plates shall be replaced
9.4.3
9.4.4
9.4.5
9.4.6
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 53 of 66
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.7.1
9.7.2
All control valves shall be provided with 3/4" drain valves close to the upstream flange
of the control valve. The drain valve shall be provided with a blind flange.
[In special cases where a control valve service has to handle a wide variation of flows
and pressure drops, more than one control valve in parallel may be specified as
appropriate].
9.7.3
Block and bypass sizes of control valve shall be based on API standard. Block valve
size shall be same as line size and bypass valve shall be same as control valve size.
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 54 of 66
9.7.4
Shutdown valves shall not be provided with block/ bypass valves unless dictated by
specific designers recommendation or process requirement, depicted in final BDEP or
FEED packages. Shut down valves shall not have any hand-wheel, limit stops . after
shutting off. Fluid pressure to assist in keeping the valve closed. The actuator should be
capable of opening the valve against the full upstream pressure.
9.7.5
9.8
Pressure relief valves (PSV)
9.8.1 All PSVs stipulated for operational failures such as cooling water failure, blocked outlet,
local power failure etc shall have installed spare. For a PSV stipulated for exclusively for
non-operational failure such as external fire or heat exchangers tube rupture, an installed
spare is not essential and has to be evaluated on a case to case basis.
9.8.2 When a spare PSV is provided (except for the case of steam and air services), all PSVs
shall be provided with upstream isolation valves to allow a PSV to be taken off-line.
Downstream isolation valves are not be provided unless required by licensor due to
process requirements. The isolation valves shall be locked open (LO) for the in-line PSVs
and locked close (LC) for the spare PSV.
New PSV shall be provided with upstream and downstream isolation valves with lock
open and lock close facility.
9.8.3 PSVs in steam service (including spare) shall have no isolation, as per IBR. PSVs in
air service shall have only upstream LO/LC isolation valves.
9.8.4 No spare pressure relief valve shall be provided for thermal relief.
9.8.5 Pressure relief valve on spare equipment shall have isolation valve on discharge side
only if connected to closed system.
9.8.6 All pressure relief valves connected to the flare systems or to a closed system shall be
balanced bellows type.
9.8.7 All new PSVs in the hydrocarbon service shall have isolation valves at the inlet and
outlet. (Process Needs to take care in P&IDSs)
9.9
Control philosophy for vendor package items
9.9.1 For all vendor package supplies, monitoring, control and logics shall be implemented in
control room with minimum instrumentation in local panel for startup and shutdowns.
Vibration monitors shall be located in in local panel with purged enclosures with repeat
indications in control room. For new packages, vibration monitors shall be located in
SRR with repeat indications in local panel with purged enclosures. .
9.9.2
For turbine-driven centrifugal compressors and charge pumps, the logic implementation
shall be done through a separate PLC. For other packages, the logic implementation shall
be through a common PLC.
9.10
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 55 of 66
Standard Instrumentation:
(a) Packed towers :
1. Each packed bed in a tower shall be provided with differential pressure
measurement and local indication. Critical sections such as Vacuum Tower wash
oil zone, shall have indication in DCS. These shall be finalised during P&ID
review.
2. Basket strainers shall be provided in feed and reflux lines going to a tower with
packed internals. The strainers shall be 1 operating + 1 standby, each provided
with isolation valves to enable maintenance with the unit on-line. The strainers
shall be located as close as possible to the respective tower inlet nozzle.
(b) Heat Exchangers: As a minimum, the following shall be provided1. Thermowell to facilitate measurement at inlet and outlet of each exchanger for
each process fluid (except utilities) when no other temperature indication is
provided.
2. DCS temperature indication across each heat exchange service.
3. For all water cooled exchangers, the water side instrumentation shall consist of a
local temperature indicator (gage), a sample connection and a PSV for thermal
relief, all installed on the cooling water outlet line, between the exchanger flange
and the downstream isolation valve..
4. All water cooled exchangers shall be provided with inlet and outlet isolation
valves on the water side.
5. A heat exchanger that can be taken out of service for maintenance, without
having to shut down the unit, shall be provided with isolation and bypass facility.
(c) Mass Flow Transmitters (with block and bypass valves ) shall be provided on
common feed & product lines. Ultrasonic flow meters shall be provided in new
flare lines
(d) Local Pressure & temperature Instruments at the battery limit on the feed &
product lines shall not be provided.
(e) In general local pressure instruments on any service except pump discharge line
are not to be provided unless required by process reason.
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 56 of 66
Debottlenecking Project
Bina Refinery, BORL
provided. However for steam service irrespective of line size Y type strainer shall be
provided.
local
PI
MP STEAM
DCS
PI
PAL/
PAH
local
TI
DCS
TI
LP STEAM
Condensate
CW supply
TAL/
TAH
DCS
FI
FAL/
FAH
DCS
FQ
CW return
Instrument Air
PAL
Plant Air
Inert Gas
Fuel Gas
Fuel Oil
DM Water
Service Water
Flare
9.15
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 57 of 66
Battery limit isolation : All incoming and outgoing streams from a unit shall be provided
with double block gate valves with a spectacle blind and bleeder in between, as below.
Figure-9.1
Standard battery limit isolation
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 58 of 66
10.0
10.1
10.1.1 Insulation thickness to be adopted as per EIL standard and the insulation thickness shall
be selected from the insulation thickness tables attached as Annexure I with this
document.
10.1.2 It is mandatory to adhere to stipulations of OISD standard # 118 for minimum interequipment spacing and inter-distance between process unit and offsites. Relevant tables
are included in the referred document.
10.2
EPC contractor will review and incorporate uniform PMS classes into P&IDs of all
facilities for material control during project implementation stage.
10.3
Steam tracing shall be specified for all onplot (ISBL) piping handling congealing
services. Tracing shall be done with Medium Pressure Steam, defined in Table-6.1,
unless specified otherwise. Offsite congealing service piping shall be completely
electric-traced.
10.4
Gear-aided operation shall be as per PMS. For valves of 16" size and above, motoroperated valves can be considered and indicated on P&IDs, if envisaged.
10.5
All special purpose valves shall be tagged in P&IDs or identified in appropriate piping
class. The BDEP shall contain appropriate specifications towards the same.
10.6
All piping within a process unit shall be above ground except for oily water sewer and
closed blowdown, Bearing cooling water systems. Cooling water supply and return
headers and firewater header can be provided underground, if found suited or necessary.
10.7
All condensing vapour lines shall be specified with no pockets, free draining requirement.
10.8
Line shall be designed for steam out conditions for hydrocarbon services.
10.9
Technical staircase shall be provided for vertical equipment for ease for Operation/
Maintenance. Wherever not possible, interconnection of vertical equipment with
neighboring equipment at a height of every 10 meters shall be ensured. Piping/ Structure
needs to take care in their respective EDB/drawing.
10.10 Silencer drain line shall be at least 1 and above. (Process needs to take care in P&IDs).
10.11 Spool between the vessel and isolation valve shall be minimized/eliminated for taking
vessel out for maintenance.
10.12 For new units, instrument air header shall be SS type. 0
10.13 New strainers in HC service shall be hard piped to OWS with isolation valve.
Template No. 5-0000-0001-T2 Rev. 1
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 59 of 66
11.0
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
11.1
Emission and effluent norms should comply with the new standards for oil refinery
industry notified vide G.S.R 186 (E) of 18/03/2008 .
11.2
11.3
SO2 ground level concentration contribution of the refinery shall be less than 40g/m3
outside the fence.
11.4
Noise level :
i) 85 dB(A) at 1 meter from source
ii) 70 dB(A) at the fence
11.5
Total sulphur emission from refinery complex shall be maximum 29.25 TPD.
11.6
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 60 of 66
12.0
SAFETY
12.1
Push buttons for stopping critical motors, if required, shall be provided at a safe location.
This is in addition to usual start/ stop push buttons provided for such motors.
12.2
Emergency lights in plant area and control room shall be provided and these shall be
incandescent type.
12.3
Suction/ discharge valves of suction filter should be close to the pump in order to avoid
hydrocarbon wastage during filter cleaning and pump maintenance.
12.4
Gas detectors shall be provided in the critical process and offsites areas . The number
and location of the gas detectors shall be based on applicable standards. The requirement
of steam / air curtain shall be based on licensor requirement.
12.5
Flare line isolation valve should be installed only in the horizontal line with stem in
horizontal position to avoid free fall of gate and blockage of flare system. Each flare
header leaving a unit shall be provided with such isolation valves to facilitate
maintenance of flare piping and pressure relief valves within the unit.
12.6
12.7
Communication system to cover all areas of plants and offsites shall be provided.
Dip hatch for the tanks should have the aluminium guide extended upto top surface of the
tanks (Short guides may cause serious hazards). Dip hatch cover should be ensured with a
rubber gasket for non sparking.
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 61 of 66
13.0
13.1
The following standard legend P&IDs shall be adhered to across all process facilities:
(1) Standard symbols & nomenclature:
(2) General notes & typical details:
13.2
13.3
14.0
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 62 of 66
NUMBERING SYSTEM
14.1 Equipment Numbering system: Equipment numbering shall be as per BORL requirement.
14.1.1 Existing Equipments: The numbering system is:
17 - EE - AS - 301
Serial number
Sub-cost centre
Cost centre
Unit number
14.1.2 Modified/Replacement of Existing Equipments: Modified/replaced equipment tag
numbers will be followed by (N)
17 - EE - AS - 302(N)
Sub-cost centre
Cost centre
Unit number
14.1.2.1 New Equipment in existing service: New tag number shall be in continuation with the
existing tag number, followed by (N). For example:
For Pumps: 17-PA-CF-301C(N) (when existing pump tags are 17-PA-CF-301A/B)
For Compressors: 17-KA-RP-801D(N) (when existing compressor tags are
17-KA-RP-801A/B/C)
For Vessel: 17-VV-VI-802D(N) (when existing vessel tags are 17-VV-VI-802A/B/C)
14.1.3 New Equipments: New equipments tag number will start from 1001 onwards.
17 - EE - AS - 1001
Serial number
Sub-cost centre
Cost centre
Unit number
14.1.4 The unit numbers have been defined in section 2.5. The Cost and Sub-cost centres
serving as equipment designations, are summarised in Table 14.1, covering the
requirement of basic engineering. The serial number shall be as assigned by unit
designer. Separate series can be used to designate different sections within the same unit.
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 63 of 66
Serial number
Unit number
Designers own
requirement
14.2.2 New PFD/P&IDs will be in continuation of existing PFD/P&IDs numbering following
the existing numbering philosophy.
14.2.3 Dismantle P&IDs: Specific to the numbering of Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams,
the following system shall be adhered to by all licensors / designers:
XXWWW-ZZ 17 - 1112D
Unit number
Designers own
requirement
14.2.4 This numbering essentially ensures that the first part of the drawing number takes care of
a licensor's or designer's own company numbering requirements while the second part of
the number ensures a uniform philosophy for all PFD / P&ID serial numbers which will
then be utilised for numbering instruments and lines as per 14.3 and 14.4 below.
14.2.5 In the four-digit drawing serial number, the digits shall be used as follows:
First digit:
Second digit:
Last 2 digits:
'0' for PFDs and '1' for P&IDs, '2' for PCDs.
'0' for iso size A0, '1' for iso size A1, so forth.
Serial number starting from '11' for P&IDs, from '01' for PFDs.
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 64 of 66
Insulation designation
Serial number
Unit number
Service designation
Line size, inches
14.3.2 Replaced Lines: Serial number shall be followed by suffix N
12" - P - 17 - 1202N - B1A - Ih
Insulation designation
Unit number
Service designation
Line size, inches
14.3.3 New Lines: For Completely new lines (new service), Last two digits of serial number will
start from 101 onwards.
12" - P - 17 - 12101 - B1A - Ih
Insulation designation
Serial number
Unit number
Service designation
Line size, inches
14.3.4 Service designation and insulation designation are listed in legend drawing # A702-02-4100-1191, Rev B, issued along with.
14.3.5 In the four-digit line serial number, the digits shall be used as follows:
First 2 digits:
Last 2 digits:
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 65 of 66
Serial number
Instrument designation
Unit number (not indicated in
P&ID tag but used in instrument
specification / list)
14.4.2 Modified/replaced Instruments: serial numbers will be followed by N
17
PIC - 1202N
Instrument designation
Unit number (not indicated in
P&ID tag but used in instrument
specification / list)
14.4.3 New Instruments: For Completely new instruments (new service), Last two digits of
serial number will start from 51.
17
PIC - 1251
Serial number
Instrument designation
Unit number (not indicated in
P&ID tag but used in instrument
specification / list)
14.4.4 Instrument depiction shall be as per ISA. The relevant table for the alphabetic depiction
of instrument type is included in drawing # A702-02-41-00-1191, Rev B.
14.4.5 In the four-digit instrument serial number, the digits shall be used as follows:
First 2 digits:
Last 2 digits:
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 66 of 66
Debottlenecking Project
Bina Refinery, BORL
Table-14.1: Equipment designation
Cost
Centre
Subcost
Centre
AU
00
CC
00
CC
Description
Cost
Centre
Subcost
Centre
Description
RCC Tanks
LM
00
Fired boiler
Columns, general
LS
00
Flare stock
WI
LW
00
CT
00
Trays, general
LZ
00
CW
00
ML
00
Scraper launcher
CP
00
MR
00
Scraper receiver
EA
00
MT
00
Turbo generator
EA
FN
PA
CF
Pump, Centrifugal
EE
00
PA
DF
Pump, Diaphragm
EE
AS
PA
GR
Pump, Gear
EE
BM
PA
JK
EE
BU
PA
MT
Pump, Metering
EE
AT
PA
RP
Pump, Reciprocating
EE
AL
PA
SM
EE
DP
Double pipe
PA
VT
EP
00
PM
00
FF
00
PT
00
FD
00
PR
00
FP
00
Air preheater
RB
00
FI
00
Incinerator
RM
00
GJ
00
Cyclones
RT
00
R/R trays
GN
00
Filter, general
RP
00
JA
00
Vacuum system
TB
00
Storage bins
JE
00
Evaporator, general
TH
00
Storage hoppers
JS
00
TI
00
Storage silos
JJ
00
TM
00
JM
00
Air mixer
TS
00
Storage spheres
KA
RP
Compressor, Reciprocating
TT
00
KA
CF
Compressor, Centrifugal
TT
FR
KA
SC
Compressor, Screw
TT
CR
KA
LR
VV
00
Vesssels, general
KA
RT
Compressor, Rotary
VV
HI
KA
TL
VV
HW
KA
DF
Compressor, Diaphragm
VV
VI
KM
00
VV
VW
KT
00
VM
00
LA
00
VW
00
LC
00
Refrigeration plant
VP
00
LE
00
DM water plant
WH
00
LF
00
WK
00
LG
00
Chlorinator
WG
00
LH
00
WJ
00
LI
00
WB
00
LJ
00
Air drier
XZ
00
Electrical, miscellaneous
LK
00
Cooling Tower
FA
00
Flame arrestor
15.0
15.1
Standards and Codes shall be as per respective sections of PMC Engineering Design
Basis.
Document No.
A702-029-16-50-OD-4070
Rev. No. A
Page 1 of 2
VENDOR LIST
FOR
ELECTRICAL
PROJECT:
OWNER :
JOB NO. :
A702
09.03.16
AKM
VB
ANPS
Rev. No
Date
Purpose
Prepared by
Reviewed
by
Approved
by
Document No.
A702-029-16-50-OD-5100
Rev No. A
Page 2 of 2
VENDOR
Cables-MV-Power-XLPE
Cables-Control-XLPE
Control Station
MOTOR-INDUCTION-HV (INDL.
TYPE SAFE AREA
MOTOR INDUCTION-MV
(INDL.TYPE SAFE AREA)
Motors imported
NOTES:
1.
Vendor may procure material from any of OWNERs approved vendors. However
current validity and range of approval as per enlistment letter, workload, stability
and solvency need to be verified by the Vendor before placement of order.
2.
For components other than the above, vendor shall submit past track record for the
proposed sub-vendors and obtain written approval from Owner before placing
order.
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 2 of 23
Table of Contents
1.0 SCOPE .................................................. 4
2.0 ABBREVIATIONS, CODES & STANDARDS / PUBLICATIONS .......... 4
2.1 ABBREVIATIONS........................................... 4
2.2 CODES & STANDARDS / PUBLICATIONS ........................ 4
3.0 GENERAL / DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ......................... 8
3.1 MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION ............................... 8
3.2 LOADS ................................................. 10
3.2.1 DEAD LOADS ........................................... 10
3.2.2 IMPOSED LOADS ........................................ 10
3.2.2.1 LIVE LOADS........................................... 10
3.2.2.2 HYDRO-TEST LOAD .................................... 11
3.2.2.3 OPERATING LOAD OF EQUIPMENT ........................ 11
3.2.2.4 BUNDLE PULL ......................................... 11
3.2.2.5 PIPING LOAD.......................................... 12
3.2.2.6 IMPACT & VIBRATORY LOADS ............................ 12
3.2.3 WIND LOAD ............................................ 12
3.2.4 SEISMIC LOAD .......................................... 13
3.2.5 BLAST FORCES ......................................... 13
3.2.6 OTHER LOADS .......................................... 13
3.3 FLOORING DETAILS FOR BUILDINGS & SHEDS .................. 13
4.0 SPECIFIC DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ......................... 14
4.1 FOUNDATION DESIGN ..................................... 14
4.1.1 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS ................................ 14
4.1.2 FACTORS OF SAFETY IN FOUNDATION DESIGN................ 15
4.1.3 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT ............................... 16
4.1.4 MINIMUM COVER TO FOUNDATION BOLT/ POCKET ............. 16
4.1.5 HEIGHT OF PEDESTAL ................................... 16
4.1.6 GROUTING & MINIMUM GROUT THICKNESS ................... 16
4.2 RCC STRUCTURES & FOUNDATIONS ......................... 17
4.2.1 GENERAL/ DESIGN METHODS.............................. 17
4.2.2 CONCRETE ............................................ 17
4.2.2.1 MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT & MAXIMUM WATER-CEMENT RATIO 18
4.2.3 REINFORCEMENT BARS .................................. 18
4.2.4 MINIMUM COVER TO MAIN REINFORCEMENT ................. 19
4.2.5 MINIMUM THICKNESS OF STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ELEMENT.... 19
Template No. 5-0000-0001-T2 Rev. 1
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 3 of 23
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 4 of 23
1.0 SCOPE
This document specifies the design criteria and loads that shall be taken into account for the
civil-structural design of all industrial plant and non-plant structures and buildings pertaining
to the project.
Description
Design basis earthquake
Engineering design basis
Fusion bonded epoxy coating
Finished floor level
Finished grade level
Factor of safety
High point of pavement
Maximum considered earthquake
Material of construction
Not applicable
Plain cement concrete
Reinforced cement concrete
Safe bearing capacity
Thermo-mechanically treated
Units of Measurement
Standards / Codes
IS:73
IS:383
IS:399
IS:412
IS:432
IS:455
IS:456
IS:460
IS:516
IS:800
IS:801
IS:802
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 5 of 23
S.No.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Description
Code of Practice for Design, Fabrication and
Erection of Vertical Mild Steel Cylindrical
Welded Storage Tanks
Code of Practice for use of Steel Tubes in
General Building Construction
Dimensions for Hot Rolled Steel Beam,
Column, Channel and Angle Sections
Cold Formed Light Gauge Structural Steel
Sections
Covered electrodes for manual metal arc
welding of carbon and carbon manganese
steel
Code of practice for use of metal arc welding
for general construction in mild steel
Code of practice for design loads
Code of Practice for Design of Structural
Timber In Building
Common Burnt Clay Building BricksSpecification
Method of Identification of Natural Building
Stones
Method of Test for Determination of Water
Absorption, Apparent Specific Gravity and
Porosity of Natural Building Stones
Recommendations for Dimensions and
Workmanship of Natural Building
Stones for Masonry Work
Recommendations for Dressing of Natural
Building Stones
Steel Tubes for Structural Purposes Specification
Bitumen-Mastic for Flooring -Specification
Steel Tubes, Tubulars and other Wrought
Steel Fittings
Specification for Bitumen Felts for Water
Proofing and Damp-Proofing
Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws and Nuts of
Product Grade 'C' - Part-1: Hexagon Head
Bolts
Technical Supply Conditions for Threaded
Steel Fasteners
Specification for Portland Pozzolana Cement
Specification for Hard-Drawn Steel Wire
Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement
Code of practice for construction of stone
masonry
High Strength Deformed Steel Bars And
Wires for Concrete ReinforcementSpecification
Specification for Hot Applied Sealing
Compounds for Joints in Concrete
Preformed Fillers for Expansion Joint in
Concrete Pavement and Structures (non
extruding and resilient type)
Standards / Codes
IS:803
IS:806
IS:808
IS:811
IS:814
IS:816
IS:875
IS:883
IS:1077
IS:1123
IS:1124
IS:1127
IS:1129
IS:1161
IS:1195
IS:1239
IS:1322
IS:1363
IS:1367
IS:1489
IS:1566
IS:1597
IS:1786
IS:1834
IS:1838
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 6 of 23
S.No.
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
Description
Criteria for earthquake resistant design of
structures
Code of practice for design & construction of
foundations in soil - general requirements
Code of practice for structural use of
unreinforced masonry
Specification for Plain Washers
Hot Rolled Low, Medium and High Tensile
Structural Steel
Specification for Sand for Masonry Mortars
Specification for Concrete Masonry Units
Code of Practice for Brickworks
Code of Practice for Preparation and Use of
Masonry Mortars
Steel Wire Ropes for General Engineering
Purposes - Specification
Specification for Thimbles for Wire Ropes
Bulldog Grips - Specification
Methods of Test For Aggregates for Concrete
(Part-II)
Methods for Sampling of Aggregates for
Concrete
Drop Forged Sockets for Wire Ropes for
General Engineering Purposes
Recommended practice for hot dipped
galvanising of iron and steel
Methods for testing uniformity of coating of
zinc coated articles
Integral Waterproofing
Compounds
for
Cement Mortar and Concrete -Specification
Code of practice for Design and construction
of Pile foundations
Code of practice for design & construction of
raft foundations
Code of practice for design & construction of
machine foundations
Methods of Sampling and Test (Physical and
Chemical) for Water and Wastewater
Specification for Bitumen Mastic for use in
Water-Proofing of Roofs
Specification for Bitumen Primer for use in
Waterproofing and Damp-Proofing
Code of practice for concrete structures for
storage of liquids
Specification for Ballies for General Purposes
Specification for Masonry Cement
Methods of Tests of Burnt Clay Building
Bricks
Steel Chequered Plates - Specification
Specification for Structural Timber in Building
Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts
High Strength Bolts in Steel Structures - Code
of Practice
Standards / Codes
IS:1893
IS:1904
IS:1905
IS:2016
IS:2062
IS:2116
IS:2185
IS:2212
IS:2250
IS:2266
IS:2315
IS:2361
IS:2386
IS:2430
IS:2485
IS:2629
IS:2633
IS:2645
IS:2911
IS:2950
IS:2974
IS:3025
IS:3037
IS:3384
IS:3370
IS:3337
IS:3466
IS:3495
IS:3502
IS:3629
IS:3757
IS:4000
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 7 of 23
S.No. Description
70
Methods of Physical Tests for Hydraulic
Cement
71
Recommendations on Stacking and Storage
of Construction Materials and Components at
Site
72
Code of practice for design and construction of
foundation for transmission line towers and
poles
73
Code of practice for earthquake resistant
design and construction of buildings
74
Hollow Steel Sections for Structural Use
75
Unplasticized PVC Pipes for Potable Water
Supplies -Specification
76
Plywood for Concrete Shuttering Work Specification
77
Criteria for blast resistant design of structures
for explosions above ground
78
Criteria for design of Reinforced concrete bins
79
Criteria for design of RCC chimneys
80
Determination of dynamic properties of soil
81
Cement paint
82
Methods of Sampling of Clay Building Bricks
83
Specification for Bitumen Mastic for Tanking
and Damp-Proofing
84
Code of practice for determination of bearing
capacity of shallow foundations
85
Code of practice for anti-termite measures in
buildings
86
Specification for High Alumina Cement For
Structural Use
87
Code of Practice for Water-Proofing of
Underground Water Reservoirs and
Swimming Pools
88
Code of practice for design & construction of
steel chimney
89
Method for determination of mass of zinc
coating on zinc coated iron and steel articles
90
Specification for Glass Fibre Base Bitumen
Felts
91
Code of practice for damp-proofing using
bitumen mastic
92
Code of practice for calculation of settlements
of foundations
93
Specification for 43 grade Ordinary Portland
Cement
94
Specification for Bitumen Mastic, Anti-Static
and Electrically Conducting
Grade
95
Chlorpyrifos emulsifiable concentrates
96
Concrete Admixtures -Specification
97
Criteria for design of steel bins for storage of
bulk materials
98
Recommendations for metal arc welding of
carbon and carbon manganese steel
Template No. 5-0000-0001-T2 Rev. 1
Standards / Codes
IS:4031
IS:4082
IS:4091
IS:4326
IS:4923
IS:4985
IS:4990
IS:4991
IS:4995
IS:4998
IS:5249
IS:5410
IS:5454
IS:5871
IS:6403
IS:6313
IS:6452
IS:6494
IS:6533
IS:6745
IS:7193
IS:7198
IS:8009
IS:8112
IS:8374
IS:8944
IS:9103
IS:9178
IS:9595
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 8 of 23
S.No.
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
Description
Code of Practice for Design and Construction
of Shallow Foundations on Rocks
Two parts polysulphide based sealants
Provision of Water-Stops at Transverse
Contraction Joints in Masonry and Concrete
Dams - Code of Practice
Specification for 53 Grade Ordinary Portland
cement
Specification for sulphate resisting Portland
cement
Hot Rolled Parallel Flange Steel Sections for
Beams, Columns and Bearing PilesDimensions and Section Properties
Pulverised Fuel Ash Lime Bricks Specifications
Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coated Reinforcing
Bars
Code of practice for ductile detailing of
reinforced concrete structures subjected to
seismic forces
Process control room safety
Fire-proofing in Oil & Gas industry
Standards / Codes
IS:12070
IS:12118
IS:12200
IS:12269
IS:12330
IS:12778
IS:12894
IS:13620
IS:13920
OISD-STD-163
OISD-STD-164
Note: The above list is suggestive and not exhaustive. Apart from these basic codes any
other related code shall also be followed wherever required. All codes & standards shall be
latest revision with all amendments issued there to.
Name of
Structure
Technological
structures
Supporting
process
equipments
Material of
Construction
Level up
to
Fire Proofing
up to
Steel
Top
Steel
Top
As per OISDSTD-164
or
10.0m above
HPP,
whichever is
higher.
Air
cooler
supporting
level.
1.2
Supporting
coolers
2.0
2.1
Pipe Rack
Inside
process RCC
unit (without air
cooler)
air
upto first
tier level
above
HPP
Remarks
Refer Note-a
NA
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 9 of 23
S.No.
Name of
Material of
Structure
Construction
Inside
process Steel
unit (without air
cooler)
Level up
to
Above
RCC
portion
upto top
2.3
Inside
process RCC
unit(with
air
cooler)
2.4
Inside
process Steel
unit(with
air
cooler)
2.5
3.0
Offsite area
All Shed type
structures
e.g.
compressor
house,pump
house etc.
All plant & nonplant
buildings,
including blastresistant
buildings
All
enabling
buildings
e.g.
Warehouse,
cement godown
etc.
Cable trenches
Steel
Steel
upto first
tier level
above
HPP
Above
RCC
portion
upto top
Top
Top
NA
NA
Ref. Note-b
RCC
Top
NA
Ref. Note-c
RCC/ Steel
Top
NA
Ref. Note-d
2.2
4.0
5.0
6.0
Precast/Cast-insitu RCC
Fire Proofing
up to
As
per
OISDSTD164 or 10.0m
above
HPP,
whichever is
higher.
NA
Remarks
Refer Note-a
Air
cooler
supporting
level.
NA
Notes:
a) Blind floor below air cooler shall be in RCC over metal decking (left-in-shuttering)
b)
Roofing & side cladding shall be as per Engineering Design Basis - Architectural.
c) Buildings shall have RCC floors & masonry infill walls, however blast-resistant buildings
shall have RCC walls.
d)
Material of construction for buildings shall be as per Engineering Design Basis Architectural.
e) Electro-forged galvanized grating shall be used for flooring at all operating floors, unless
RCC floor is required from operations considerations (e.g. blind floor below air coolers
supported on technological structure & pipe rack, plant & non-plant buildings), however
chequered plate shall be provided for walkway along crane girders.
f) Fire-proofing material for steel structures wherever required, shall be as follows:
i) Concrete for structures, supporting transfer line & two phase flow line above 6" diameter.
ii) Vermiculite for all other structures, however fire-proofing upto 1.8 m from HPP shall be
in concrete.
Template No. 5-0000-0001-T2 Rev. 1
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 10 of 23
3.2 LOADS
3.2.1 DEAD LOADS
The weight of all permanent construction, including foundation, walls, floors, roofs, partitions,
fire-proofing, stairways and fixed service and other equipments including all fixtures,
platforms, ladders and attached piping but excluding their content. If piping weight is not
indicated separately or included in the weight of the equipment, the same shall be taken as
10% of the weight of the equipment. Component of soil backfill weight over foundation slab
shall be considered as foundation dead load.
The dead load of false ceiling shall be considered as 0.75KN/sqm, wherever required.
The unit weight of materials in general, should be in accordance with IS: 875. Part-1. Also,
the following unit weights should be considered for the purpose of Design:
Reinforced Concrete - 25.0 kN/m3
Plain Concrete - 24.0 kN/m3
Structural Steel - 78.5 kN/m3
Backfill Soil - 18.0 kN/m3
Brickwork - 19.0 kN/m3
Service platform
Vessel/ Tower
Isolated platform (for
valve operation)
Access way
Cross over
Sub-station/
Control
room floors
Panel floor
Value
UOM
5.0
7.5
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
7.5
7.5
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
3.0
2.5
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
2.5
2.0
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
10.0
kN/sqm
Remarks
(or as specified by
machine vendor)
Value
1.0
UOM
kN/sqm
3.0
5.0
5.0
1.0
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
4.0
kN/sqm
3.0
kN/sqm
5.0
kN/sqm
5.0
3.0
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
3.0
2.5
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
3.0
kN/sqm
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 11 of 23
Remarks
Note:
a) Live load on various types of roofs shall be as per the requirements given in IS:875 Part 2.
Project Philosophy
Bundle pull for different types of Exchangers shall be taken as under unless
otherwise specified in the equipment data sheet:
For Fixed type, no bundle pull is considered.
For Kettle type, bundle pull to be considered as 0.3 times the bundle weight.
For all other types, bundle pull to be considered as 0.86 times the bundle weight or
30N/mm of diameter, whichever is greater.
Total Bundle Pull shall be considered on fixed pedestal alone.
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 12 of 23
4.0
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Title / Description
Basic wind Speed, Vb
k1 (Probability factor, risk
coefficient)
For permanent structures
For temporary structures
For
boundary
wall/
barricading
k2 (Terrain,
height
&
structure size factor)
for category
Value
39
UOM
m/sec
1.00
0.9
0.71
-NA-NA-NA-
-NA-
k3 (Topography factor)
Mean probable design life
for computation of wind
forces shall be considered
as follows:
All structures (units & offsite)
temporary sheds, structures
such as those used during
construction operations (for
example, formwork
and
false work),
structures
during construction stages
and boundary walls
buildings and structures
presenting a low degree of
hazard to life and property in
the event of failure, such as
isolated towers in wooded
areas, farm buildings other
than residential buildings.
important buildings and
structures such as power
plant structures.
1.00
-NA-
50
5
Years
Years
25
Years
100
Years
Remarks
Based onVb
-NAClass of structure
(A/B/C) shall be as
per
its
relevant
horizontal & vertical
dimensions.
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 13 of 23
Note: To account for surface area of piping, platforms and other attachments fixed to the
equipment the surface area of the equipment (vessel/ column) exposed to wind shall be
increased by 20% or as specified in the mechanical data sheet of the equipment.
Project Philosophy
Structures subjected to blast forces generated due to accidental blasts from
hydrocarbon ignitions shall be designed to withstand maximum of the following:
Actual blast pressure,
Minimum equivalent static pressure of 3 psi (20.7 kN/sqm) as per OISD-STD-163
As recommended in Rapid Risk Analysis (RRA) Report
Blast proof building shall be designed as per IS:4991 & OISD-STD-163.
Project Philosophy
Apart from the specified live loads, any other equipment load or possible overloading
during construction/ erection/ hydro-test of equipment or piping/ maintenance shall
also be considered in the design.
Design of all structures shall also consider any other relevant and consequential
load/ stress imparted to the structure.
All liquid retaining/ storage structures shall be designed assuming liquid up to the full
height of wall irrespective of provision of any over flow arrangement.
Pressure relief valves or similar pressure relieving devices shall not be made in
underground water retaining/ storage RCC structures.
Water basin in cooling tower shall be designed for the weight of water up to top of
parapet wall.
All buildings/ structures shall be designed to resist the worst combination of the
above loads (in accordance with IS:875 Part-5 - other than earthquake loads).
However wind/ seismic loads shall not be considered in combination together or with
loads during maintenance.
Flooring Type II
To be provided
To be provided
200 mm thick
150 mm thick
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 14 of 23
S.No.
2.1
2.2
Description
Lean
concrete
1:5:10 over sand
layer (mm)
Structural
nonsuspended slab in
M20
Grade
concrete
(Reinforced with 8
mm dia bars @
200 c/c both ways)
over lean concrete
Flooring Type I
50 mm thick
Flooring Type II
50 mm thick
Note:
a) Flooring details as given above shall be adopted for the non-suspended ground floor
slabs for buildings & sheds only as categorized for various flooring types.
b) Flooring Type I shall be considered for Plant Buildings such as Control Rooms, SubStations, Pump Houses, Utility Compressor Houses, Parking Areas, Stores, Porches.
c) Flooring Type II shall be considered for Ware Houses, Workshops, Cement Godowns,
Fire Stations, Process Compressor Houses.
d) Flooring Type III shall be considered for Non-plant Buildings such as Administration,
Laboratory, Canteen, Time Office, Gate House, Training Centre, Guest House, Residential
buildings.
e) Floor finish for all the above three types of flooring shall be as per Engineering Design
Basis - Architectural.
f) Reinforcement steel shall be as per clause 4.2.3 of this document.
g) 20 mm gap to be provided between floor slab and equipment foundation/ column and
shall be sealed using joint sealing compound.
h) Outdoor pavements shall be as per Engineering Design Basis - General Civil.
Project Philosophy
Minimum depth of foundation for all structures/ buildings shall be as per
Geotechnical Recommendations.
Factors of safety against overturning and sliding shall be as per clause 4.1.2 of this
document.
For stability checks the weight of soil as overburden (soil backfill weight over
foundation slab) shall be as per clause 4.1.2 of this document.
The design ground water level shall be as per the Geotechnical Recommendations
and the hydrostatic pressure shall be adequately accounted for in design.
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 15 of 23
S.No.
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
Project Philosophy
Allowable net safe bearing capacity (SBC) of soil for isolated/ raft/ tank foundations
shall be based on the settlement criteria for dead plus imposed load conditions.
For foundations in unit areas, utility areas and foundations for plant
buildings,settlement to be considered as 25mm.
For foundations for Non-plant buildings, settlement to be considered as 40mm
For raft foundations, settlement to be considered as 40mm.
For foundation for cone/dome roof storage Tanks, settlement to be considered as
300mm at edge.
For foundations for cone/dome roof storage tanks, differential settlement to be
considered as 1 in 300 along periphery.
For foundations for Floating roof storage Tanks, settlement to be considered as
150mm at edge.
For foundations for Floating roof storage tanks, differential settlement to be
considered as 1 in 500 along periphery.
Pile capacities(for compression, shear and uplift/tension) shall be per Geotechnical
Recommendations.
For transient loadings, e.g. wind/ seismic, SBC (safe bearing capacity) based on
shear criteria shall be considered instead of considering settlement as design
criteria.
Permissible increase in SBC/ Pile capacities (for compression, shear and uplift/
tension) shall be as per the Geotechnical Recommendations.
Foundation for vibrating equipment shall be kept independent of building
floors/foundations and other adjacent foundations.
Type of
Structure
FOS
OTW/S
(EL) (i)
FOS
OT-NW/S
(EL) (ii)
1.0
All
Structures,
Equipments
in
Units & Offsite
Overhead tank
Flood
Light
Mast
Retaining Wall
Flare supporting
structure
Blast-resistant
structure
Transmission
Tower/ Switch
Yard Structure
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
FOS OTN-W/S
(OL) (iv)
FOS
SL-W/S
(v)
1.5
FOS
OTW/S
(OL)
(iii)
1.5
2.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
-
1.5
1.5
1.5
-
1.5
2.0/1.2*
1.5
1.5/1.2*
1.5
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
1.75
Legend:
(i) OT-W/S (EL) - FOS against Overturning with Wind/ Seismic in Erection condition.
(ii) OT-N-W/S (EL) - FOS against Overturning without Wind/ Seismic in Erection condition.
(iii) OT-W/S (OL) - FOS against Overturning with Wind/ Seismic in Operating condition.
(iv)
OT-N-W/S (OL) - FOS against Overturning without Wind/ Seismic in Operating
condition.
(v) SL-W/S - FOS against Sliding with Wind/ Seismic.
Template No. 5-0000-0001-T2 Rev. 1
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 16 of 23
(vi)
Note:
a) * For Blast Pressure.
b) Minimum factor of safety against uplift shall be 1.2 for all structures (in case of sumps,
lining weight shall not be included)
c) Percentage weight of overburden shall be taken as 100% & to be considered on projected
plan area of footing.
Project Philosophy
The minimum projection of pedestals supporting any steel structure/ column bases
shall be 300 mm/ 150 mm above the high point of pavement/ finished grade/ finished
floor level whichever is higher, for outdoor and indoor located pedestals respectively.
Offsite pipe rack/ pipe bridge/ pipe support pedestals shall be of minimum 500 mm
height above FGL.
The maximum projection of pedestals for staircase/ ladder shall be 200 mm.
S.No.
4.0
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 17 of 23
Project Philosophy
Grouting requirement for machines and equipments are not covered here. The same
shall be governed by vendor's requirement.
4.2.2 CONCRETE
S.No.
1.0
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
3.0
Project Philosophy
The minimum grade of reinforced cement concrete to be used for superstructures
and substructure (unless otherwise specified in Geotechnical Recommendations and
higher of the two shall be followed for substructure) shall be M25(design mix)as per
IS:456 based on moderate exposure condition.
Generally the use of one of the following type of cements shall be considered:
43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) conforming to IS:8112.
Portland Pozzolana Cement (PPC, fly ash based) conforming to IS:1489 Part 1.
Portland Pozzolana Cement (PPC, calcined clay based) conforming to IS:1489
Part2.
Portland Slag Cement confirming (PSC) to IS:455.
Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement (SRC) confirming to IS:12330 shall be used
only for Sulphur Pit and Sulphur Yard of Sulphur Unit.
Minimum cement content for concrete in foundation shall be as per Geotechnical
Recommendations document.
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 18 of 23
Project Philosophy
High strength deformed TMT bars of grade Fe500D conforming to IS:1786 shall be
used as reinforcement for all structures.
18 gauge black soft annealed SWG wire shall be used for binding of reinforcement
bars.
Corrosion protection of reinforcement bars:
Bi-polar concrete penetrating corrosion inhibiting admixture shall be used in all
concrete works.
Minimum and maximum bar spacing for foundations, slabs, stirrups for Beams, Ties
for columns, pedestals, Walls etc. should be 100mm and 300mm respectively. Bar
spacing should be provided in multiples of 25mm.
Minimum bar diameter:
Piles-main bars----------------------------------------- 12mm
Piles Ties----------------------------------------------- 8mm
Major Foundation e.g. Raft --------------------------- 12mm
Block Foundation-Main Bars ------------------------- 12mm
Block Foundation - Tie Bars -------------------------- 12mm
Minor Foundation (Local foundation etc.) ----------- 12mm
Column, Pedestal - Main Bars ------------------------- 12mm
Column, Pedestal Ties --------------------------------- 8mm
Beam - Main Bars ------------------------------------------ 12mm
Beam - Anchor Bars -------------------------------------- 10mm
Beam Stirrups -------------------------------------------- 8mm
Slab & Wall - Main Bars ---------------------------------- 10mm
Slab & Wall - Distribution Bars --------------------------- 8mm
Minor Elements such as Chajjas, Lintel Beams, etc --- 8mm
Slab and Wall for Blast proof building ------------------ 12mm
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 19 of 23
Title / Description
Foundation slab, base slab,
pedestal, plinth beam
Pile Cap
Bottom face
Top & sides
Retaining Wall, Basement
and Pit Wall:
Face in contact with earth
Free face
Column
Tie beam, Floor beam, Roof
beam
Floor
slab,
Roof
slab,
Canopy, Lintel
Liquid retaining structure
Face in contact with liquid
Face away from liquid but in
contact with earth
Free face
Value
50
UOM
mm
100
50
mm
mm
50
30
50
40
mm
mm
mm
mm
30
mm
30
50
mm
mm
30
mm
S.No.
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
4.1
4.2
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
Title / Description
Footings (all types, with or
without beams)
Tapered Footing
Pile Cap
Liquid retaining/ Leak-proof
structure/ Basement/ Pit:
Base slab
Walls
Floor/ Roof Slab, Walkway,
Canopy slab
Cable/
Pipe
Trench/
Launder Walls & Base Slab
Parapet
Louver/ Fin
Louver (in contact with
liquid)
Precast Trench
Cover/
Precast Floor Slab
Value
300
UOM
mm
150(At edge)
300(Average)
500
mm
300
150
150
mm
mm
mm
125
mm
100
100
125
mm
mm
mm
125
mm
mm
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 20 of 23
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
5.1
5.2
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
Project Philosophy
Design, fabrication and erection of the above work shall be carried out in accordance
with the following IS Codes as applicable to the specific structures, viz. IS:800,
IS:801, IS:802, IS:806, IS:814, IS:816, IS:875, IS:1893, IS:6533, IS:9178, IS:9595,
etc. Basic consideration of structural frame work shall primarily be stability, ease of
fabrication/ erection and overall economy satisfying relevant Indian Standard Codes
of Practice. Simple and fully rigid design as per IS:800 shall be used. Where fully
rigid joints are adopted they shall generally be confined to the major axis of the
column member.
All Structural Steel elements continuously exposed to temperatures above 215 DEG
C shall be designed for reduced stress as per Clause 16.4 (Fig 24) of IS:800.
Crane gantry girders shall generally be of welded construction and of single span
lengths. Chequered plate shall be used for gantry girder walkway flooring.
Steel staircases for main approaches to operating platforms shall have channels
provided as stringers with minimum clear width of 750 mm and slope of
approximately 41 degree. The vertical height between successive landings shall not
be less than 2.6 m nor exceed 4.0 m. Treads shall be minimum 230 mm wide made
of electro-forged galvanized grating(with suitable nosing) spaced equally so as to
restrict the rise to maximum 200 mm.
Hand rails 1000 mm high (from top of grating/ top of chequered plate/ FFL), shall be
provided to all walkways, platforms, staircases. Toe plate (100 mm x 5 mm) shall be
provided for all horizontal hand railing (except for hand railing in inclined portion of
staircases). Spacing of vertical posts shall be 1,500 mm (maximum). Two types of
hand railing shall be provided as follows:
For technological structures, walkways, platforms (except platform around/ on
circular/ horizontal vessels), staircases: Top rail, mid-rail and vertical post shall be
NB 32 mm diameter medium grade MS tubes.
For platforms around circular vessels: Top rail shall be NB 32 mm diameter medium
grade MS tubes, mid rail shall be 50x6 MS flat and vertical post shall be of angle
section L50x50x6.
Electro-forged hot-dipped galvanized MS Gratings shall be as per EIL Standard No.
7-68-0697.
Welded connections shall be adopted during shop fabrication, except where only
bolted connections are required (viz. removable members, galvanized electrical
switchyard structures and transmission towers). Field/ site connections shall be
bolted/ welded.
Structural connections shall have minimum two bolts of 16 mm diameter, unless
otherwise limited by the size of members.
Minimum two nuts shall be used for all anchor bolts except for crossovers, platforms
on grade & T- supports.
S.No.
3.4
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 21 of 23
Project Philosophy
Square Hollow Sections (SHS)/ Rectangular Hollow Sections (RHS) as per IS:4923
Project Philosophy
Permissible stresses in structural members shall be as follows:
Hot rolled sections (excluding transmission towers and switchyard structures) as
specified in IS:800
Cold formed light gauge sections as specified in IS:801
Transmission towers & switchyard structures as specified in IS:802
Tubular structures as specified in IS:806
Permissible stresses in bolts shall be as follows:
Hot rolled sections (excluding transmission towers and switchyard structures) as
specified in IS:800
Cold formed light gauge sections as specified in IS:801
Transmission towers & switchyard structures as specified in IS:802
Permissible stresses in welds shall be as follows:
Cold formed light gauge sections as specified in IS:801
Metal Arc Welding as specified in IS:816
Title / Description
Gantry
girder
for
electric
overhead crane (capacity up to
50 T)
Gantry
girder
for
electric
overhead crane (capacity over
50 T)
Gantry girder for manually
operated crane
Girder/ beam for supporting
dynamic equipment/hoist
Purlins supporting any type of
roofing material under (dead load
+ live load) or (dead load + wind
load) conditions
Value
L/750
UOM
Same as 'L'
L/1000
Same as 'L'
L/500
Same as 'L'
L/450
Same as 'L'
L/200
Same as 'L'
Note:
a)
Limiting permissible vertical deflection for grating/chequered plate shall be L/200 or
6mm whichever is minimum.
b)
Limiting permissible vertical deflection for other structures/ structural components,not
covered in the above table, shall be as specified in relevant BIS Codes.
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 22 of 23
S.No.
1.0
Title / Description
Multi storeyed steel structure/
building
Flare
stack
supporting
structure
2.0
Value
H/325
UOM
Same as 'H'
H/200
Same as 'H'
Title / Description
Trusses, purlins, side
girts & bracings
Columns, beams
Gussets in trusses &
girders
upto and including
12m span
above 12m span
Stiffeners
Base plates
Chequered plate
Grating
2.0
3.0
3.1
3.2
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
Value
6
UOM
mm
mm
mm
10
8
10
6
3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Remarks
(on plain)
Notes:
a)
For transmission towers & switchyard structures the minimum thickness of various
structural components shall be as per IS: 802.
b) The minimum thickness for rolled beams and channels shall be mean flange thickness
regardless of the web thickness.
c) The minimum thickness of structural components (except gratings & chequered plates)
which are directly exposed to weather and inaccessible for repainting shall be 8 mm.
d)
Project Philosophy
All electrical switchyard structure and transmission tower shall be of structural steel
with bolted connections and designed as per of IS:802.
2.0
Structural steel members including bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot dip
galvanized in accordance with relevant IS Codes. The Zinc coating on tower
members shall not be less than 900 g/sqm of the surface area.
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 23 of 23
Project Philosophy
All masonry works shall be designed in accordance with IS:1077, IS:1905, IS:1597,
IS:2185, IS:4326, IS:12894 and other relevant IS Codes as applicable.
Brick masonry shall be of Class 5.0 as per IS:1077
All external brick masonry walls shall be of minimum 230 mm thickness respectively
except for fire walls.
4.5.4 BARRICADING
Foundation and super structure shall be designed as per POSD/ General Civil requirements
of location & height, keeping in view the mean probable design life of structure.
Document No.
A702-000-16-54-DB-0001
Rev. No.0
Page 1 of 3
PROJECT
OWNER
: BORL
CONSULTANT
JOB NO.
: A702
27/03/2015
Rev. No
Date
Purpose
MBA
Prepared
by
GGSA
SVRS
Reviewed by
Approved by
1.0
Document No.
A702-000-16-54-DB-0001
Rev. No.0
Page 2 of 3
Table 1: Spectral Acceleration Coefficients (Sa/g) for Design Basis Earthquake (DBE)
Time
Period
(Sec)
0.00
0.05
0.10
0.13
0.20
0.27
0.30
0.40
0.50
0.60
0.80
1.00
1.20
1.40
1.60
1.80
2.00
2.40
2.80
3.00
3.20
3.40
3.60
3.80
4.00
4.20
4.40
4.60
4.80
5.00
1.0
0.052
0.190
0.284
0.291
0.295
0.293
0.289
0.261
0.230
0.198
0.147
0.113
0.092
0.076
0.066
0.056
0.052
0.042
0.037
0.034
0.032
0.030
0.028
0.027
0.026
0.024
0.023
0.022
0.021
0.020
2.0
3.0
0.052
0.135
0.159
0.169
0.172
0.172
0.171
0.162
0.150
0.138
0.109
0.089
0.074
0.064
0.055
0.049
0.045
0.037
0.034
0.031
0.029
0.027
0.026
0.024
0.023
0.022
0.021
0.020
0.019
0.019
0.052
0.127
0.146
0.153
0.156
0.155
0.155
0.146
0.133
0.122
0.098
0.081
0.068
0.059
0.051
0.045
0.042
0.035
0.031
0.029
0.027
0.026
0.024
0.023
0.022
0.021
0.020
0.019
0.018
0.017
4.0
5.0
7.0
0.052
0.118
0.133
0.138
0.139
0.139
0.139
0.130
0.116
0.105
0.087
0.074
0.062
0.054
0.047
0.041
0.038
0.032
0.028
0.027
0.025
0.024
0.023
0.021
0.020
0.019
0.018
0.018
0.017
0.016
0.052
0.110
0.120
0.123
0.123
0.123
0.123
0.113
0.099
0.089
0.077
0.066
0.056
0.049
0.043
0.037
0.034
0.030
0.026
0.025
0.023
0.022
0.021
0.020
0.019
0.018
0.017
0.016
0.016
0.015
0.052
0.100
0.110
0.112
0.113
0.113
0.113
0.105
0.092
0.083
0.071
0.060
0.051
0.044
0.038
0.033
0.030
0.027
0.024
0.023
0.022
0.020
0.019
0.018
0.017
0.016
0.016
0.015
0.014
0.014
The spectral acceleration values for periods greater than 5.0 seconds shall be considered same as that for 5.0 seconds.
Template No. 5-0000-0001-T2 Rev. 1
Document No.
A702-000-16-54-DB-0001
Rev. No.0
Page 3 of 3
NOTES:
1. The spectral acceleration coefficients in Table 1 are in accordance with Section 8.3.1 of
IS 1893(Part 4):2005.
2. The spectral acceleration coefficients for Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCE) shall
be considered as twice of the Design based earthquake (DBE).
3. For methodology of calculation of seismic forces and other seismic design criteria, refer
latest revisions of the following codes:
IS 1893 (Part 1)
IS 1893 (Part 4)
:
:
4. All parameters shall be in accordance with the above mentioned codes. However, in
Table 2, the response reduction factors of some of the structures/equipment specific to
the project are included for guidance. In case of ambiguity between the values
mentioned here and those mentioned in the code, lower value shall be considered in
the analysis/design.
5. When cylindrical storage tanks are designed as per API 650 using site-specific design
methods, the percentage of critical damping and response reduction shall be taken in
accordance with the API 650.
6. An appropriate effect of fluid structure interaction (sloshing) shall be considered while
designing the Horton sphere. The percentage of critical damping for Horton sphere shall
be taken as per Table 4 of IS 1893 (Part 4): 2005.
Table 2: Response reduction factors of some of the structures/equipments
Structure/Equipment
5.0
4.0
4.0
5.0
4.0
2.0
Silos
2.0
Response
Reduction
Factor (R)
S.
No.
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 1 of 12
JOB
PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
GENERAL NOTES
Client
: BORL
A
Rev.
No
06.04.2015
NK
SD
MI
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved by
Date
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 2 of 12
Abbreviations:
AARH
ANSI
API
ASME
ASTM
AWWA
BIS
BSI
BW
CA
DIN
FRP
GOST
HDPE
IBR
JIS
LTCS
MSS
NACE
NDT
PMS
PP
PTFE
PVC
PVDF
RTJ
SW
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 3 of 12
CONTENTS
Sl. No.
Description
Page No.
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
3.0
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
4.0
5.0
PIPES
6.0
FLANGES
7.0
FITTINGS
8.0
9.0
GASKETS
10.0
BOLTING
11.0
THREADS
12.0
VALVES
13.0
NDT SPECIFICATIONS
14.0
WELDING SPECIFICATIONS
15.0
12
11
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 4 of 12
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This specification (PMS) covers the various piping classes for Process and utility Piping.
1.2
Deviations from this specification may be necessary to conform to specific job requirements.
2.0
2.1
All Piping shall be designed in accordance with the Process Piping Code, ASME B31.3. A
particular edition (indicated in Design Basis), once selected shall be followed throughout the
job.
2.2
Editions and addenda (if any) of referred Codes and Standards shall be as per the Job
Engineering Design Basis (Piping).
2.3
For the sake of brevity, the initials of the society to which the codes are referred to may be
omitted in the specification. For example; B16.5 is a code referring to ASME; A106 is a
standard referring to ASTM.
2.4
For JOB PMS, ASME B31.3 & ASME B16.5 have been followed.
3.0
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1
Individual piping Class has been generally designed to cover a set of services operating within
pressure-temperature combination as per ASME B16.5 / B16.34 or part of it.
3.2
The PMS shall be strictly adhered to in the design, requisitioning, purchasing, fabrication and
testing of the piping system. However, deviations of material may occur due to design
conditions and/or availability. All substitutions must be duly approved.
3.3
Unless mentioned otherwise, pipe thicknesses in the specs are for above ground piping.
4.0
4.1
150 Class
300 Class
400 Class
D
E
F
600 Class
900 Class
1500 Class
G
J
K
2500 Class
125/150 Class
UNCLASSIFIED
4.2
The middle number indicates difference in the specifications within the same rating and
material as enlisted in the Table attached.
4.3
Carbon
Carbon Moly.
1.0 % Cr., 0.5 % Moly.
1.25 % Cr., 0.5 % Moly.
2.25 % Cr., 1.0 % Moly.
5.0 % Cr., 0.5 % Moly.
9.0 % Cr., 1.0 % Moly.
3.5 % Ni.
Nickel / Titanum
Stainless steel type 304, 304H, 304L.
Aluminium
Stabilised stainless steel type 316, 316H, 321, 347.
316L
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 5 of 12
Monel / Alloy 20
Hastalloy / Inconel / Incoloy
Lead
PVC & FRP, PP / FRP, PVDF / FRP
Cast Iron / Silicon Iron
Duplex Stainless Steel
Cupro-Nickel
Lined steel (Rubber Lined, Teflon Lined, Cement lined etc).
HDPE / PDVF / Teflon / PVC
5.0
PIPES
5.1
Pipe dimension shall be in accordance with ASME B36.10, IS:1239 & IS:3589 for wrought
steel and wrought iron pipe; to B36.10 / B36.19 for stainless steel pipe and respective ASTM
Standard for non-ferrous and non- metallic pipes.
5.2
Pipe made by acid-bessemer process shall not be acceptable, steel pipe shall be made by
open hearth, electric furnace or basic Oxygen process.
5.3
All pipe threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1 except where otherwise noted.
5.4
Pipe thicknesses not covered in different classes of this specification shall be calculated to
meet specific job requirement based on actual max. design condition to economise on
thickness. However, in such cases the thickness shall be calculated at not less than 80% of
class rating unless defined otherwise in the Job Engineering Design Basis (Piping).
5.5
5.6
Non-standard pipe sizes 1", 2", 3", 5" and 22" shall not be treated as a part of this
specification unless these sizes are separately called out.
6.0
FLANGES
6.1
Flanges shall be in accordance with the following codes, except where otherwise noted:
Upto 24" (150# -1500#)
Upto 12" , 2500#
Above 24"
ASME B16.5
ASME B16.5
ASME B16.47 SERIES 'B' / AWWA / EIL' STD.
Flanges to ASME B16.47 SERIES 'A' or any other standard (e.g. DIN, GOST, JIS etc.) may be
specified to mate with equipment or valve flanges with the corresponding bolting.
6.2
:
:
32 TO 63 in AARH
6.3
Brinnel hardness for RTJ groove shall be at least 20 BHN more than that of corresponding
gasket as specified.
6.4
Fig.8 Fl and SPCR & BLN shall be as per B16.48 up to 24" (150-1500#) & upto 12" for 2500#.
For other sizes, refer EIL Std 7-44-0162.
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 6 of 12
7.0
FITTINGS
7.1
Forged steel SW and threaded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.11, unless
otherwise specified. For items not covered under B16.11, reference may be made to BS 3799
or appropriate MSS-SP-Std.
7.2
7.3
Dimensions of steel BW fittings for sizes not covered in ASME B16.9 shall conform to MSSSP-48.
7.4
8.0
8.1
Miters and Reducers fabricated from Pipe may be used if specified in particular Piping Class.
Miters require higher thickness than corresponding Pipe / Elbow to hold the same pressure
(Refer ASME B31.3).
9.0
GASKETS
9.1
Non-metallic gaskets shall conform to B16.21 (corresponding to B16.5) upto 24", and B16.21
(corresponding to B16.47B) beyond 24", unless otherwise specified.
9.2
Spiral wound gaskets (SP.WND or SPWD) and Ring Joint gaskets shall conform to B16.20.
10.0
BOLTING
10.1
All bolts shall conform to B18.2.1, nuts to be B18.2.2. Reference shall also be made to B16.5
for studs.
10.2
Threads shall be to coarse Thread Series, B1.1, having Class 2A allowances for bolts and
studs, and Class 2B tolerance for nuts.
10.3
Nuts for Bolts and Studs shall be the American Standard Hexagon Heavy Series.
11.0
THREADS
11.1
Threads for threaded Pipes, Fittings, Flanges and Valves shall be in accordance with B1.20.1
taper threads, unless otherwise specified.
11.2
Upto 204 deg.C, threaded joints shall be made with 1" width PTFE joining tape.
11.3
Above 204 deg.C, threaded joints shall be seal welded with a full strength fillet weld.
11.4
All threaded joints irrespective of pressure and temperature on lines carrying toxic fluid shall
be seal welded with a full strength fillet weld.
12.0
VALVES
12.1
Face to Face / End to End dimension of valves shall conform to B16.10 to the extent covered.
For valves not covered in B16.10, reference shall be made to BS EN 558-1 for PN Designated
Flanged valves, BS EN 558-2 for Class designated Flanged valves and BS EN 12627 for Butt
Welding end valves and / or the manufacturer's drawings.
12.2
Flange / weld ends of the valve shall be as per the corresponding Flange / Fitting ends of the
piping class, unless otherwise specified.
12.3
Pressure-temperature rating for flanged and butt welding end valves shall be as per ASME
B16.34 except for ball, plug & butterfly valves. For these valves refer TABLE FOR
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 7 of 12
PRESSURE-TEMP RATING FOR BALL, PLUG AND BUTTERFLY VALVES. Wall thickness
of valve body at different locations should not be less than as calculated as per B16.34.
12.4
Valve
Size
Rating
Des. Std.
Testing Std.
Gate
1/2"- 1-1/2"
800 / 1500
API-598
Globe / Check
-do-
800 / 1500
BS EN ISO 15761
BS EN 12266-1
Gate
2"-24"
API-598
Gate
26"-42"
150 / 300
B-16.34
API 598/ BS EN
12266-1
Globe
2"-16"
150
BS-1873
Globe
2"-12"
300/600
BS-1873
BS 6755 Pt-I/BS EN
12266-1
-do-
Check
2"-24"
-do-
BS-1868
-do-
Gate/
Globe/Check
2"-8"
B-16.34
(Refer 12.6 also)
API 598 / BS EN
12266-1
Ball
1/2"-16"
BS EN ISO 17292 /
API 6D
BS EN 12266-1 / API598
Ball
1/2"-8"
API 6D
API-598
Plug
1/2"-12"
All
Btrfly
All
API-609 / BS EN
593 / AWWA C504
API-598 / BS EN
12266-1/ AWWA
Diaphram
ALL
BS-5156
BS-6755 Pt-I/ BS EN
12266-1
Bronze
RELEVANT IS STD.
RELEVANT IS STD.
Cast Iron
RELEVANT IS STD.
RELEVANT IS STD.
12.5
If not covered in 12.3, the valve shall be as per B16.34 / relevant MSS-SP Standard.
12.6
For details of the valves specifications, refer Job specifications A702-6-44-0006. Features not
covered by A702-6-44-0006 and the relevant code shall be to the manufacturer's standard.
12.7
Unless otherwise specifically called for, up to 600# rating, 2" and larger size steel Gate, Globe
& Check valves in Hydrocarbon and utility service shall have bolted bonnets. Pressure-seal
bonnets or covers shall be used for Classes 900# and above to minimize bonnet leakage.
However, valves with Pr-seal Bonnet shall have wall thickness & stem diameter as per API600, (if required). Welded bonnets or screwed & seal welded bonnets are acceptable for sizes
lower than 2" for Classes 900# & above.
13.0
14.0
For Welding specifications, refer EIL specs. Welding Specification for fabrication of piping (677-0001) & Welding charts for piping classes (6-77-0005).
15.0
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 8 of 12
Carbon Steel
A
CA=1.5
CA=1.5
(IBR)
CA=1.5
(CAT'D)
CA=1.5
(LTCS)
CA=1.5
(Hydrogen)
CA=4.5
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
AlloySteel
B, C, D, E, F, G, H
CA=1.5
CA=1.5 (IBR)
CA=6.0
CA=3.0
CA=1.5
(Hydrogen)>230OC
CA=4.5
CA=1.5
(Vacuum)
CA=1.5
(Conc.Sulphuric Acid)
CA=3.0
CA=1.5
(Offsites)
CA=3.0
(Hardness controlled)
12
13
SS304 / SS304H /
SS304L
K
CA=NIL
(SS304)
CA=NIL
(SS304-CRYO)
CA=NIL
(CAT 'D' SS304)
CA=1.5
(SS304H)
CA=3.0
(SS304H)
CA=1.5
(SS304L)
CA=NIL
(SS304L-Vacuum)
CA=1.5
(SS304L-CRYO)
CA=1.5
(SS304)
CA=NIL
(SS304L)
CA=NIL
(SS304-IBR)
CA=6.0
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
32
33
CA=3.0
(Liquid Sulphur)
CA=4.5
CA=4.5 (NACE)
(NACE)
CA=3.0
(dry Chlorine)
CA=1.5
(Oxygen)
CA=3.0
(Caustic / Amine,
Stress relieved)
CA=1.5
(Jacket for A15A)
CA=1.5
(Tracing)
CA=1.5
(Fire Water)
CA=1.5
(SS304 H2 & CO2)
CA=1.5
(SS304L - NACE)
CA=1.5
(SS321H - H2)
CA=1.5
(SS321 - NACE)
CA=NIL
(SS304L-Oxygen)
CA=NIL
(Tracing)
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 9 of 12
SS316L
NICKEL /TITANUM
J
ALLUMINIUM
N
1
CA=NIL
CA=NIL (NICKEL)
P
CA=NIL (MONEL)
CA=1.5 (CRYO)
CA=1.5 (NICKEL)
CA=1.5 (MONEL)
CA=NIL (TITANUM)
CA=NIL(ALLOY 20)
CA=1.5 (TITANUM)
CA=1.5 H2
CA=NIL (Vacuum)
MONEL / ALLOY 20
7
8
9
10
11
CA=NIL
12
13
14
15
16
CA=1.5(NACE)
17
18
CA=NIL
OXYGEN
(MONEL)
19
20
32
33
NOTE: USE MIDDLE NUMBERS 21 TO 30, 40 TO 79 & 91 TO 99 FOR PROJECT DEPENDENT
CLASSES.
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 10 of 12
Hastelloy /
Inconel /
Incoloy
Q
CA=NIL
(INCONEL 600)
2
3
CA = NIL
(INCOLOY 800)
CA = 1.5
(INCOLOY 800)
PVC / FRP
LINED STEEL
CA=NIL
(PVC)
CA=1.5 (PVC
/ FRP)
CA=NIL
(FRP)
CA = NIL
(TEF LINED)
CA = NIL
(RUBBER
LINED
SOFT)
CA = NIL (RUBBER
LINED SEMI HARD)
30% HCL
CA = 3.0 (<= 2) & NIL
(>=
3)
(CEMENT
LINED) CAT D SEA
WATER
CA = 1.5
(INCOLOY
800H)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
32
33
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 11 of 12
TABLE FOR PRESSURE TEMPERATURE RATING FOR BALL, PLUG & BUTTERFLY VALVES
PRESSURE IN kg / cm2
ITEM
PRESSURE
RATING
(PIPING
CLASS)
SIZE
RANGE
(NB
INCHES)
PLUG
(Soft
Seated)
100
120
19.99 19.58
19.2
17.93
17.2
16.12 15.22
7.03
52.00 51.02
49.8
41.85
37.3
27.4
19.15
7.03
104.1 98.46
91.4
64.61
49.3
38.6
29.68
17.6
19.33
18.63
17.6
43.4
40.0
Upto 16
PLUG
300# (AS PER
(Lubricate
PMS)
d)
600# (AS PER
PMS)
150#
19.3
150
175
200
>200
37.4
35.23
28.1
DO
NOT
19.99 19.58 19.12 18.05 17.28 16.12 15.15 14.28
USE
Upto 12
150# (A3A,
A5Y)
150# (A33A,
A33Y)
50
Upto 8
Butterfly
(Soft
Seat)
-29
TO
38
65
TEMPERATURE IN OC
52.0
51.1
49.96
47.3
46.82
46.1
45.5
44.6
94.7
93.74
92.3
91.1
89.4
DONT USE
16
16
19.99 19.58
16
19.2
7.03
NOTE: IF THE CLASS PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE IS LOWER THAN THIS TABLE, CLASS
PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE TO BE FOLLOWED.
26.4
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 12 of 12
36
44
26.4
36
44
50.2
280
260
AREA C
APPLICATION OF NICKEL ALLOYS TO BE CONSIDERED IN THIS
AREA
240
220
AREA B
200
CARBON STEEL
STESS RELIEVE WELDS & BENDS
TEMPERATURE F
180
160
140
120
AREA A
100
CARBON STEEL
80
NO STESS RELIEF NECESSARY
60
40
20
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 1 of 40
A
Rev. No
28/01/2016
Spec Name :
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Spec Desc. :
Client
BORL
Project
Location
Job No.
A702
Dept/Sec.
16/43
Date
Purpose
SKS
NK
Prepared by
Checked by
PNR
Approved by
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 2 of 40
Abbreviations:
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 3 of 40
CONTENTS
Sl. No.
1
Description
Piping Material Specifications (A702-6-44-0005-4070) Rev.A
Pages
40
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
: BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 4 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
Rating
A1K
150
A22A
150
1.5
A3A
150
A6K
Sl. No
C.A
Spl.
Reqt.
Basic
Material
Remarks
Service
SS 304
CARBON STEEL
SRU+OFFSITES+C
DU/VDU+DCU+HC
U
1.5
CARBON STEEL
UOP-MS-1,
DCU,CDU/VDU
150
1.5
SS 304L
A91A
150
1.5
CARBON STEEL
J3A
150
CS (Galv.)
UOP-MS-2
IBR
SERVICE
Notes :
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 5 of 40
: BORL
Client
Dept./Sect. :
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
CORROSION ALLOWANCE :
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT :
Sheet 1 of 5
A1K
150
SS 304
0
MM
-29
38
93
149
204
260
316
343
371
PRESS
19.33
19.33
16.17
14.41
13.35
11.95
9.84
8.78
7.73
SERVICE
PURE NON CORROSIVE OR MILD CORROSIVE HYDROCARBONS
FLAMMABLE/NON FLAMMABLE & NON LETHAL HYDROCARBONS, LUBE OIL (AFTER FILTERS), CHEMICALS ETC.
NOTES
5
7
FOR PERMANENT 'T' TYPE BW STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0303 & 7-44-0304; AND FOR TEMPORARY
STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0300; FOR SPACER AND BLIND REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0162.
FOR RESTRICTION ON USE OF BALL,PLUG & BUTTERFLY VALVES,REFER GENERAL NOTES.
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
ALL
SW COUPLING
BUTTWELDED
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
DRAINS
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A1K
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 6 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
P P P R R R R R
P P P P R R R R
T
T T
P
H
P
H
P P P P P R R R
H H H H H H H H
R
H
T H
T H
T H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H
H
H
18.000
16.000
14.000
12.000
10.000
8.000
6.000
5.000
4.000
3.500
3.000
2.500
2.000
1.500
T
R
R
R
R
R
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 2 of 5
24.000
T
R
R
R
R
22.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
20.000
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
T R
T P R
T P P R
1.250
1.000
.750
.500
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
T
0.75
T T
0.5 T T T
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
THREADOLET
A1K
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 7 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 3 of 5
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
.5
.75
80S
B-36.19
PE, SEAMLESS
PI33577Z0
PIP
PIPE
1.5
40S
B-36.19
PE, SEAMLESS
PI33577Z0
PIP
PIPE
40S
B-36.19
BE, SEAMLESS
PI33517Z0
PIP
PIPE
10S
B-36.19
BE, SEAMLESS
PI33517Z0
PIP
PIPE
10
24
10S
B-36.19
BE, E.FS.W
PI35513Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
.5
.75
B-36.19
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN33567Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
1.5
B-36.19
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN33567Z0
B-16.5
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
150, RF/125AARH
FWC4127Z0
Flange Group
FLG
FLNG.WN
.5
1.5
FLG
FLNG.LJ
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150,
STK/MAX1000AARH
FLC012EZ0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
.5
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
150, RF/125AARH
FBC4127Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
.5
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
150, FF/125AARH
FGK4121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
10
24
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
150, FF/125AARH
FCK4121Z0
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
SW, 3000
WA642D2Z0
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
.5
1.5
ELB90
ELBOW.90
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-S
BW, 1.5D
WAG874Z10
ELB90
ELBOW.90
10
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-WX
BW, 1.5D
WAG894Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
SW, 3000
WB642D2Z0
ELB45
ELBOW.45
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-S
BW, 1.5D
WBG874Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
10
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-WX
BW, 1.5D
WBG894Z10
TEQ
T.EQUAL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
SW, 3000
WE642D2Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-S
BW
WEG874ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
10
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-WX
BW
WEG894ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
SW, 3000
WR642D2Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A1K
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 8 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 4 of 5
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
TRED
T.RED
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-S
BW
WRG874ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
10
24
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-WX
BW
WRG894ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-S
BW
WUG874ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
10
24
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-WX
BW
WUG894ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-S
BW
WVG874ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
10
24
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-WX
BW
WVG894ZZ0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
.5
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
PBE
WNH426ZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
.5
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
PBE
WPH426ZZ0
CAP
CAP
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-S
BW
WFG874ZZ0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
SW, 3000
WJ642D2Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
SW, 3000
WK642D2Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
SW, 3000
WL642D2Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
SW, 3000
WM642D2Z0
STB
STUB.END
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-S
BW, 125AARH
WSG8741Z0
STB
STUB.END
10
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-WX
BW, 125AARH
WSG8941Z0
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
.5
1.5
51045ZZZ0
GAV
VLV.GATE
24
51345ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
.5
1.5
BS EN ISO
15761
52045ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
16
BS-1873
52345ZZZ0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A1K
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 9 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 5 of 5
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Commodity
Code
Description
Note
No
Valves Group
CHV
VLV.CHECK
.5
1.5
BS EN ISO
15761
53045ZZZ0
CHV
VLV.CHECK
24
BS-1868
53345ZZZ0
BLV
VLV.BALL
.5
16
BS EN ISO
17292
54345ZZZ0
PLV
VLV.PLUG
.5
24
BS-5353
55345ZZZ0
.5
24
B-18.2
BOLT:A193 GR.B7,
NUT:A194 GR.2H
BS40404Z0
.5
24
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL
Bolt Group
BOS
BOLT.STUD
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
GK65072Z0
SPIRAL, 150
Trap/Strainer Group
TSR
STRNR.TEMP
1.5
24
EIL'STD
B:A240TP304;INT:S CONETYPE,
150,FF/125AARH
S304
ST14131Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
.5
1.5
MNF'STD
B:A182GR.F304;IN
T:SS304
SP307D510
PSR
STRNR.PERM
EIL'STD
B:A403GR.WP304S;INT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP15344Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
10
24
EIL'STD
B:A403GR.WP304WX;INT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP15444Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A1K
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 10 of 40
: BORL
Client
Dept./Sect. :
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
CORROSION ALLOWANCE :
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT :
Sheet 1 of 6
A22A
150
CARBON STEEL
1.5
MM
IBR SERVICE
38
93
149
204
260
316
343
371
PRESS
20.03
20.03
18.28
16.17
14.06
11.95
9.84
8.79
7.73
SERVICE
HYDROCARBON,STEAM (IBR), BOILER FEED WATER (IBR) & CONDENSATE (IBR)
NOTES
7
ALL PIPES,FITTINGS,VALVES,FLANGES,TRAPS AND STRAINERS SHALL BE TESTED AND TEST CERTIFICATE IN FORM
III A FOR PIPE AND FORM III C FOR OTHERS SHALL BE REQD. DULY COUNTERSIGNED BY IBR AUTHORITY OR ITS
APPROVED REPRESENTATIVE.
9
CARBON CONTENT SHALL NOT EXCEED 0.25% FOR ALL PIPES,FITTINGS FLANGES ETC. THAT MAY REQUIRE
WELDING. MOREOVER,FOR FLANGES THE SULPHUR AND PHOSPHOROUS SHALL ALSO BE LIMITED TO 0.05% EACH.
73 GATE VALVES OF SIZE 26" AND ABOVE SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH BS-1414 AND FLANGE ENDS SHALL BE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH ASME B16.47 SERIES B.
76 FOR PERMANENT BW STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0303 & 7-44-0304; AND FOR TEMPORARY STRAINERS,REFER
EIL'STD 7-44-0300.
101 NDT REQUIREMENTS AS PER JOB STANDARD A702-6-44-0016.
122 ASBESTOS FREE GASKETS AND STEM PACKING SHALL BE USED FOR ALL VALVES
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
ALL
SW COUPLING
BUTTWELDED
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
DRAINS
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A22A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 11 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
T
T P
T P P
T P P P
T
P
P
P
P
T
P
P
P
P
P
T
P
P
P
P
P
P
T
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
T
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 2 of 6
36.000
34.000
32.000
30.000
8.000
28.000
H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H
26.000
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
24.000
H
H
H
22.000
H
H
H
20.000
T H
T H
T H
18.000
R R R R R R R
H H H H H H H
16.000
P P P P P P P P
H H H H H H H H
14.000
P
H
12.000
P
H
10.000
T
T T
6.000
R R R R R R R
5.000
P P P P P P P P
4.000
3.500
3.000
R R R R R R R
2.500
P P P P P P P P
2.000
1.500
1.250
1.000
.750
.500
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
T
0.75
T T
0.5 T T T
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
THREADOLET
A22A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 12 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 3 of 6
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
.5
.75
S160
B-36.10
PE, SEAMLESS
PI21977Z1
PIP
PIPE
1.5
XS
B-36.10
PE, SEAMLESS
PI21977Z1
PIP
PIPE
XS
B-36.10
BE, SEAMLESS
PI21917Z1
PIP
PIPE
14
STD
B-36.10
BE, SEAMLESS
PI21917Z1
PIP
PIPE
16
36
STD
B-36.10
ASTM A 672
GR.B60 CL.12
BE, E.FS.W
PI2A813Z1
NIP
NIPPLE
.5
.75
B-36.10
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN21967Z1
NIP
NIPPLE
1.5
B-36.10
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN21967Z1
Flange Group
FLG
FLNG.WN
.5
20
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FWC0127Z1
FLG
FLNG.WN
22
22
MSS-SP44
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FWH0127Z1
FLG
FLNG.WN
24
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FWC0127Z1
FLG
FLNG.WN
26
36
B-16.47-B
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FWB0127Z1
FLG/30 FLNG.WN
0
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
300, RF/125AARH
FWC0147Z1
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
.5
20
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FBC0127Z1
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
22
22
MSS-SP44
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FBH0127Z1
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
24
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FBC0127Z1
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
26
36
B-16.47-B
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FBB0127Z1
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
.5
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FGK0121Z1
FEF
SPCR&BLND
10
24
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FCK0121Z1
FEF
SPCR&BLND
26
36
EIL'STD
150, FF/125AARH
FCE6321Z1
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WA602D3Z1
ELB90
ELBOW.90
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WA602D2Z1
ELB90
ELBOW.90
14
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WAG684Z11
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A22A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 13 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 4 of 6
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WAG754Z11
Note
No
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
16
36
ELB45
ELBOW.45
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WB602D3Z1
ELB45
ELBOW.45
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WB602D2Z1
ELB45
ELBOW.45
14
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WBG684Z11
ELB45
ELBOW.45
16
36
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WBG754Z11
TEQ
T.EQUAL
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WE602D3Z1
TEQ
T.EQUAL
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WE602D2Z1
TEQ
T.EQUAL
14
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WEG684ZZ1
TEQ
T.EQUAL
16
36
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WEG754ZZ1
TRED
T.RED
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WR602D3Z1
TRED
T.RED
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WR602D2Z1
TRED
T.RED
14
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WRG684ZZ1
TRED
T.RED
16
36
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WRG754ZZ1
REDC
REDUC.CONC
14
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WUG684ZZ1
REDC
REDUC.CONC
16
36
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WUG754ZZ1
REDE
REDUC.ECC
14
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WVG684ZZ1
REDE
REDUC.ECC
16
36
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WVG754ZZ1
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
.5
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WNH026ZZ1
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
.5
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WPH026ZZ1
CAP
CAP
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SCRF, 6000
WF60283Z1
CAP
CAP
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SCRF, 3000
WF60282Z1
CAP
CAP
36
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ1
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WJ602D3Z1
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A22A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 14 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 5 of 6
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WJ602D2Z1
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WK602D3Z1
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WK602D2Z1
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WL602D3Z1
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WL602D2Z1
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WM602D3Z1
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WM602D2Z1
51002ZZZ1
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
.5
1.5
API-602
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED,STEM13%CR STEEL
GAV
VLV.GATE
36
API-600
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
.5
1.5
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED,STEM13%CR.STEEL
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
16
BS-1873
CHV
VLV.CHECK
.5
1.5
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED
CHV
VLV.CHECK
24
BS-1868
53302ZZZ1
CHV/1
VLV.CHECK
24
BS-1868
53397ZZZ1
BLV
VLV.BALL
.5
1.5
BS-5351
54302ZZZ1
G3V
VLV.PISTON
.5
1.5
MNF'STD
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIM-13%
CR.STEEL
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
51302ZZZ1
73
52002ZZZ1
52302ZZZ1
53002ZZZ1
123
64092ZZZ1
A22A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 15 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 6 of 6
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Commodity
Code
Description
Note
No
Valves Group
YCH
VLV.YSTCHK
24
ANSI-B16.34
65390ZZZ1
.5
36
B-18.2
BOLT:A193 GR.B7,
NUT:A194 GR.2H
BS40404Z0
Bolt Group
BOS
BOLT.STUD
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
.5
20
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL
SPIRAL, 150
GK65072Z0
GAS
GASKET
22
22
B-16.20MSS-SP-44
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL
SPIRAL, 150
GK85072Z0
GAS
GASKET
24
24
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL
SPIRAL, 150
GK65072Z0
GAS
GASKET
26
48
B-16.20ANSI
B16.47B
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL+ I
RING
SPIRAL, 150
GK56272Z0
GAS/30 GASKET
0
.5
24
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL
SPIRAL, 300
GK65074Z0
Trap/Strainer Group
TRP
TRAP.STEAM
.5
1.5
MNF'STD
TR3065531
TSR
STRNR.TEMP
1.5
24
EIL'STD
B:A516GR.70;INT:S CONETYPE,
150,FF/125AARH
S304
ST16831Z1
PSR
STRNR.PERM
.5
1.5
MNF'STD
B:A105;INT:SS304
SP303D511
PSR
STRNR.PERM
24
MNF'STD
B:A216GR.WCB;IN
T:SS304
FLGD, Y-TYPE,
150,RF/125AARH
SP3805531
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A22A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
: BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 16 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
CORROSION ALLOWANCE :
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT :
Sheet 1 of 8
A3A
150
CARBON STEEL
1.5
MM
38
50
65
100
150
186
PRESS
10.55
10.55
10.55
10.55
10.55
10.55
10.55
SERVICE
NON CORROSIVE UTILITIES (ABOVE GROUND) CATEGORY "D" FLUID - COOLING WATER, INSTRUMENT AIR(2" & ABOVE),
PLANT AIR, INERT GAS, CARBON DI OXIDE (DRY), NITROGEN, CONDENSATE & BOILER FEED SUCTION (NON IBR). THIS
CLASS DOES NOT COVER UNDERGROUND PIPING AND THE FIRE WATER SERVICE. FOR SIZES ABOVE 30",
TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RATINGS SHALL BE 70 DEG.C & 7.0 KG/CM2G RESPECTIVELY.
NOTES
6
FOR FABRICATED REDUCERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0485 & 7-44-0487. FOR MITRES, REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0033.
31
64
USE BUTTERFLY VALVES INSTEAD OF GATE VALVES FROM 10" ONWARDS IN WATER SERVICE AND UPTO 70 DEG C.
DESIGN PRESSURE FOR BUTTERFLY VALVES IS LIMITED UPTO 10 BAR.
AWWA C207 CL.D FLANGES SHALL BE OF HUB TYPE.
65
FORGINGS ARE ACCEPTABLE IN LIEU OF PLATE MATERIAL FOR BLIND FLANGES AND SPACER & BLINDS.
76
77
FOR PERMANENT BW STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0303 & 7-44-0304; AND FOR TEMPORARY STRAINERS,REFER
EIL'STD 7-44-0300.
FOR SIZES > 24", SPACER & BLIND SHALL BE DESIGNED BY THE MANUFACTURER AS PER ASME B31.3.
86
BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR THE SPEC ARE PN10 RATED WITH A MAXIMUM PRESSURE OF 10.2 KG/CM2G.
97
USE 5-PIECE 90 DEG. MITRE FOR SIZES FROM 16" TO 44", 6-PIECE 90 DEG. MITRE FOR SIZES 48" TO 68" & 7-PIECE
MITRE FOR SIZES 72" TO 80". 45 DEG. MITRE SHALL REQUIRE ONE PIECE LESS.
FOR SIZES ABOVE 30", TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RATINGS SHALL BE 70 DEG.C & 7.0 KG/CM2G RESPECTIVELY.
98
99
BLIND FLANGES AND SPACER & BLINDS SPECIFIED TO MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR 70
DEG.C AND 7.0 KG/CM2G TO SUIT 150#, FF, 125AARH, AWWA C207 CL.D FLANGES.
101 NDT REQUIREMENTS AS PER JOB STANDARD A702-6-44-0016.
110 IN SIZES ABOVE 48", WHERE WROUGHT ELBOWS ARE NOT AVAILABLE, SHOP FABRICATED MITRES AS PER B31.3
SHALL BE USED.
154 FOR PRESSURE CONNECTION USE GLOBE VALVE INSTEAD OF GATE VALVE IN ALL LINES OF MS BLOCK
(NHT/CCR/ISOM.)
155 FOR TEMP CONNECTION IN MS BLOCK, REFER DOC.NO. A702-7-44-0353.
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A3A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 17 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 2 of 8
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
ALL
BUTTWELDED
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
SW, SH HVY NIPPLE WITH GATE VALVE TO SPEC AS PER EIL STD
7-44-354 (NOTE-154)
DRAINS
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 18 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
T
T R
T P R
T P P R
T
P
P
P
P
T
P
P
P
P
P
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
T
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
66.000
64.000
62.000
60.000
58.000
56.000
54.000
52.000
50.000
48.000
46.000
44.000
42.000
40.000
38.000
36.000
34.000
32.000
30.000
8.000
28.000
H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
26.000
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
24.000
H
H
H
22.000
H
H
H
20.000
T H
T H
T H
18.000
P R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
16.000
P P P P P P P P
H H H H H H H H
14.000
P
H
12.000
P
H
10.000
T
T T
6.000
R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
5.000
P P P P P P P P
4.000
3.500
3.000
R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
2.500
P P P P P P P P
2.000
1.500
1.250
1.000
.750
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
T
0.75
T T
0.5 T T T
.500
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
THREADOLET
A3A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 19 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R R R
R R R
R R R
H H H
72.000
70.000
68.000
H H H
H H H
H H H
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 4 of 8
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A3A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 20 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 5 of 8
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
.5
1.5
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
PE, C.WELDED
PI6D471Z0
PIP
PIPE
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
BE, C.WELDED
PI6D411Z0
PIP
PIPE
12
6.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
14
18
8.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
20
24
10.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
26
48
12.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
50
60
14.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
64
72
16.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
76
80
18.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
.5
1.5
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
PBE, C.WELDED
PN6D461Z0
FLNG.SW
.5
1.5
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FSC0127Z0
FLG/30 FLNG.SW
0
.5
1.5
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
300, RF/125AARH
FSC0147Z0
FLG/30 FLNG.WN
0
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
300, RF/125AARH
FWC0147Z0
Flange Group
FLG
FLG
FLNG.SO
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FNC0127Z0
FLG
FLNG.SO
26
80
150, FF/125AARH
FN40121Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
.5
24
B-16.5
150, RF/125AARH
FBC0127Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
26
48
150, FF/125AARH
FB45321Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
.5
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FGK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
10
24
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FCK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
26
80
MNF'STD
150, FF/125AARH
FCG5321Z0
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WA602D2Z0
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WAG684Z10
ASTM A 105
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
.5
1.5
ELB90
ELBOW.90
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
STD
A3A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 21 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 6 of 8
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WAG754Z10
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WB602D2Z0
Note
No
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
14
ELB45
ELBOW.45
.5
1.5
ELB45
ELBOW.45
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WBG684Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
14
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WBG754Z10
MIT90
MITRE.90
16
80
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW, 1.5D
WDKF141Z0
MIT45
MITRE.45
16
80
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW, 1.5D
WGKF141Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WE602D2Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WEG684ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
48
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WEG754ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WR602D2Z0
TRED
T.RED
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WRG684ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
48
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WRG754ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WUG684ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
14
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WUG754ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
16
80
M, M
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW
WUKF14ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WVG684ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
14
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WVG754ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
16
80
M, M
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW
WVKF14ZZ0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
.5
STD,
STD
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WNH026ZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
.5
STD,
STD
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WPH026ZZ0
CAP
CAP
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SCRF, 3000
WF60282Z0
CAP
CAP
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
CAP
CAP
48
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A3A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 22 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 7 of 8
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WJ602D2Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WK602D2Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WL602D2Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WM602D2Z0
UNN
UNION
.5
1.5
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WQH02D2Z0
51001ZZZ0
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
.25
1.5
GAV
VLV.GATE
24
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
.25
1.5
BS EN ISO
15761
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED,STEM13%CR STEEL
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
16
BS-1873
CHV
VLV.CHECK
.25
1.5
BS EN ISO
15761
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED
CHV
VLV.CHECK
24
BS 1868
53321ZZZ0
CHV
VLV.CHECK
26
48
API-594
BODY-ASTM A 105
/A
216GR.WCB,TRIM13% CR.STEEL
FLGD, 150,
AWWAC207,
FF/125AARH, SHT
NO.- 53316
53316ZZZ0
BLV
VLV.BALL
.5
16
BS EN ISO
17292
54321ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
24
BS EN 593
56321ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
26
48
BS EN 593
56316ZZZ0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
51321ZZZ0
52001ZZZ0
52321ZZZ0
53001ZZZ0
A3A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 23 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 8 of 8
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Commodity
Code
Description
Note
No
Bolt Group
BOS
BOLT.STUD
18
80
B-18.2
BOLT:A193 GR.B7,
NUT:A194 GR.2H
BS40404Z0
BOM
BOLT.M/C
.5
16
B-18.2
BOLT:A307 GR.B,
NUT:A563 GR.B
BM41418Z0
NONASBESTOS
BS7531 GR X
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
.5
24
B-16.21ANSI B16.5
RING, 150, 2 MM
GKBAX52Z0
GAS
GASKET
26
80
AWWA-C207 NONASBESTOS
CL.D
BS7531 GR X
GAS/30 GASKET
0
.5
24
B-16.21ANSI B16.5
NONASBESTOS
BS7531 GR X
RING, 300, 2 MM
GKBAX54Z0
Trap/Strainer Group
TRP
TRAP.STEAM
.5
1.5
MNF'STD
TSR
STRNR.TEMP
1.5
24
EIL'STD
B:A285GR.C;INT:S
S304
CONETYPE,
150,FF/125AARH
ST14431Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
.5
1.5
MNF'STD
B:A105;INT:SS304
SP303D510
PSR
STRNR.PERM
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPB;IN
T:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13344Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
24
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPBW;I
NT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13644Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
TR3065530
A3A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 24 of 40
: BORL
Client
Dept./Sect. :
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
CORROSION ALLOWANCE :
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT :
Sheet 1 of 5
A6K
150
SS 304L
1.5
MM
-29
38
93
149
204
260
316
343
371
PRESS
16.17
16.17
13.71
12.3
11.24
10.19
9.84
8.78
7.73
SERVICE
CORROSIVE PROCESS SERVICE - FLAMMABLE/NON FLAMMABLE, TOXIC/NON TOXIC BUT NON LETHAL - FLARE GAS,
ACID GAS WITH CONDENSATE, REFLUX, CORROSIVE WATER, RICH AMINE, ETC.
NOTES
5
32
FOR PERMANENT 'T' TYPE BW STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0303 & 7-44-0304; AND FOR TEMPORARY
STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0300; FOR SPACER AND BLIND REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0162.
CORROSION ALLOWANCE HAS BEEN ADJUSTED TO SELECT OPTIMUM SCHEDULE. REFER GENERAL NOTES TO PMS.
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
ALL
SW COUPLING
BUTTWELDED
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
DRAINS
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A6K
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 25 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
R R R R R R R R
R R R R R R R R
T
T T
P
H
P
H
R R R R R R R R
H H H H H H H H
R
H
T H
T H
T H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H
H
H
18.000
16.000
14.000
12.000
10.000
8.000
6.000
5.000
4.000
3.500
3.000
2.500
2.000
1.500
T
R
R
R
R
R
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 2 of 5
24.000
T
R
R
R
R
22.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
20.000
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
1.250
1.000
.750
.500
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
T
0.75
T T
0.5 T T T
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
THREADOLET
A6K
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 26 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 3 of 5
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
.5
.75
80S
B-36.19
ASTM A 312
TP304L
PE, SEAMLESS
PI33777Z0
PIP
PIPE
1.5
40S
B-36.19
ASTM A 312
TP304L
PE, SEAMLESS
PI33777Z0
PIP
PIPE
40S
B-36.19
ASTM A 312
TP304L
BE, SEAMLESS
PI33717Z0
PIP
PIPE
10S
B-36.19
ASTM A 312
TP304L
BE, SEAMLESS
PI33717Z0
PIP
PIPE
10
14
10S
B-36.19
ASTM A 358
TP304L CL.1
BE, E.FS.W
PI36213Z0
PIP
PIPE
16
16
10S
B-36.19
ASTM A 358
TP304L CL.1
BE, E.FS.W
PI36213Z0
PIP
PIPE
18
18
6.35
B-36.19
ASTM A 358
TP304L CL.1
BE, E.FS.W
PI36213Z0
PIP
PIPE
20
20
10S
B-36.19
ASTM A 358
TP304L CL.1
BE, E.FS.W
PI36213Z0
32
PIP
PIPE
24
24
10S
B-36.19
ASTM A 358
TP304L CL.1
BE, E.FS.W
PI36213Z0
32
NIP
NIPPLE
.5
.75
B-36.19
ASTM A 312
TP304L
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN33767Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
1.5
B-36.19
ASTM A 312
TP304L
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN33767Z0
B-16.5
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
150, RF/125AARH
FWC4327Z0
32
Flange Group
FLG
FLNG.WN
.5
1.5
FLG
FLNG.LJ
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150,
STK/MAX1000AARH
FLC012EZ0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
.5
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
150, RF/125AARH
FBC4327Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
.5
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
150, FF/125AARH
FGK4321Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
10
24
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
150, FF/125AARH
FCK4321Z0
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
SW, 3000
WA644D2Z0
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
.5
1.5
ELB90
ELBOW.90
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-S
BW, 1.5D
WAG934Z10
ELB90
ELBOW.90
10
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-WX
BW, 1.5D
WAG954Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
SW, 3000
WB644D2Z0
ELB45
ELBOW.45
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-S
BW, 1.5D
WBG934Z10
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A6K
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 27 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 4 of 5
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-WX
BW, 1.5D
WBG954Z10
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
SW, 3000
WE644D2Z0
Note
No
Fitting Group
ELB45
ELBOW.45
10
24
TEQ
T.EQUAL
.5
1.5
TEQ
T.EQUAL
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-S
BW
WEG934ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
10
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-WX
BW
WEG954ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
SW, 3000
WR644D2Z0
TRED
T.RED
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-S
BW
WRG934ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
10
24
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-WX
BW
WRG954ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-S
BW
WUG934ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
10
24
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-WX
BW
WUG954ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-S
BW
WVG934ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
10
24
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-WX
BW
WVG954ZZ0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
.5
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
PBE
WNH446ZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
.5
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
PBE
WPH446ZZ0
CAP
CAP
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-S
BW
WFG934ZZ0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
SW, 3000
WJ644D2Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
SW, 3000
WK644D2Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
SW, 3000
WL644D2Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
SW, 3000
WM644D2Z0
STB
STUB.END
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-S
BW, 125AARH
WSG9341Z0
STB
STUB.END
10
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-WX
BW, 125AARH
WSG9541Z0
.5
1.5
API-602
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
51050ZZZ0
A6K
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 28 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 5 of 5
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Commodity
Code
Description
Note
No
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
24
API-600
51350ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
.5
1.5
BS-5352
52050ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
16
BS-1873
52350ZZZ0
CHV
VLV.CHECK
.5
1.5
BS-5352
53050ZZZ0
CHV
VLV.CHECK
24
BS-1868
53350ZZZ0
.5
24
B-18.2
BOLT:A193 GR.B7,
NUT:A194 GR.2H
BS40404Z0
.5
24
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316L+GRAFIL
Bolt Group
BOS
BOLT.STUD
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
SPIRAL, 150
GK64972Z0
A6K
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
: BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 29 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
CORROSION ALLOWANCE :
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT :
Sheet 1 of 8
A91A
150
CARBON STEEL
1.5
MM
38
50
65
PRESS
10.55
10.55
10.55
SERVICE
CATEGORY 'D' FLUID-A/G & U/G COOLING WATER, U/G BEARING COOLING WATER RETURN.
NOTES
6
FOR FABRICATED REDUCERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0485 & 7-44-0487. FOR MITRES, REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0033.
10
64
USE 4-PIECE 90 DEG. MITRE FOR 8" & 10", 5-PIECE 90 DEG. MITRE FOR SIZES FROM 12" TO 54" AND 6-PIECE 90 DEG.
MITRE FOR SIZES 56" TO 80".(45 DEG. MITRE SHALL REQUIRE ONE PIECE LESS.)
AWWA C207 CL.D FLANGES SHALL BE OF HUB TYPE.
65
FORGINGS ARE ACCEPTABLE IN LIEU OF PLATE MATERIAL FOR BLIND FLANGES AND SPACER & BLINDS.
76
77
FOR PERMANENT BW STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0303 & 7-44-0304; AND FOR TEMPORARY STRAINERS,REFER
EIL'STD 7-44-0300.
FOR SIZES > 24", SPACER & BLIND SHALL BE DESIGNED BY THE MANUFACTURER AS PER ASME B31.3.
86
BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR THE SPEC ARE PN10 RATED WITH A MAXIMUM PRESSURE OF 10.2 KG/CM2G.
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A91A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 30 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 2 of 8
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
ALL
BUTTWELDED
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
SW, SH HVY NIPPLE WITH GATE VALVE TO SPEC AS PER EIL STD
7-44-354 (NOTE 154)
DRAINS
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 31 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
50.000
52.000
54.000
56.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
66.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
64.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
62.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
60.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
58.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
48.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
46.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
44.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
42.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
40.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
38.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
36.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
34.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
22.000
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
20.000
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
18.000
T H
T H
T H
R R R
H H H
H H
H H H
H H H
H H H
16.000
P
H
8.000
P
H
6.000
T
T T
5.000
R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
4.000
R R R R R R R R
3.500
3.000
2.500
R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
2.000
R R R R R R R R
1.500
32.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
30.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
28.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
26.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
24.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
14.000
T
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
12.000
T
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
T
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
10.000
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
1.250
1.000
.750
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
T
0.75
T T
0.5 T T T
.500
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
THREADOLET
A91A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 32 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R R R
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
68.000
70.000
72.000
R R R
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 4 of 8
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
A91A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 33 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 5 of 8
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
.5
1.5
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
PE, C.WELDED
PI6D471Z0
PIP
PIPE
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
BE, C.WELDED
PI6D411Z0
PIP
PIPE
12
6.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
14
18
8.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
20
24
10.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
26
48
12.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
102
PIP
PIPE
50
60
14.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
102
PIP
PIPE
62
64
16.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
102
PIP
PIPE
66
72
16.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.410
BE, WELDED
PI7E319Z0
102
PIP
PIPE
74
82
18.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.410
BE, WELDED
PI7E319Z0
102
NIP
NIPPLE
.5
1.5
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
PBE, C.WELDED
PN6D461Z0
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FSC0127Z0
Flange Group
FLG
FLNG.SW
.5
1.5
FLG
FLNG.SO
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FNC0127Z0
FLG
FLNG.SO
26
90
150, FF/125AARH
FN40121Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
.5
24
B-16.5
150, RF/125AARH
FBC0127Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
26
90
150, FF/125AARH
FB45321Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
.5
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FGK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
10
24
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FCK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
26
90
JOB'STD
150, FF/125AARH
FCF5321Z0
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WA602D2Z0
ASTM A 105
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
.5
1.5
ELB90
ELBOW.90
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WAG684Z10
ELB90
ELBOW.90
48
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WAG754Z10
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A91A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 34 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 6 of 8
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WB602D2Z0
Note
No
Fitting Group
ELB45
ELBOW.45
.5
1.5
ELB45
ELBOW.45
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WBG684Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
48
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WBG754Z10
MIT90
MITRE.90
26
64
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW, 1.5D
WDKF141Z0
MIT90
MITRE.90
66
82
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.410
BW, 1.5D
WDKF241Z0
MIT45
MITRE.45
26
64
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW, 1.5D
WGKF141Z0
MIT45
MITRE.45
66
82
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.410
BW, 1.5D
WGKF241Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WE602D2Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WEG684ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
48
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WEG754ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
50
82
MNF'STD
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WEN754ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WR602D2Z0
TRED
T.RED
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WRG684ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
48
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WRG754ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
50
82
M, M
MNF'STD
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WRN754ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WUG684ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
64
M, M
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW
WUKF14ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
66
82
M, M
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.410
BW
WUKF24ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WVG684ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
64
M, M
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW
WVKF14ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
66
82
M, M
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.410
BW
WVKF24ZZ0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
.5
STD,
STD
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WNH026ZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
.5
STD,
STD
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WPH026ZZ0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A91A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 35 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 7 of 8
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SCRF, 3000
WF60282Z0
Note
No
Fitting Group
CAP
CAP
.5
1.5
CAP
CAP
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
CAP
CAP
48
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
CAP
CAP
50
90
CALC ASME-VIII
BW
WF3J54ZZ0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WJ602D2Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WK602D2Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WL602D2Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WM602D2Z0
UNN
UNION
.5
1.5
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WQH02D2Z0
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
.25
1.5
API-602
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED,STEM13%CR.STEEL
51001ZZZ0
GAV
VLV.GATE
.25
1.5
51001ZZZ0
GAV
VLV.GATE
24
API-600
51321ZZZ0
GAV
VLV.GATE
26
42
BS-1414
51920ZZZ0
GAV
VLV.GATE
46
54
ANSI-B16.34
51921ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
.5
1.5
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED,STEM13%CR STEEL
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
16
BS-1873
CHV
VLV.CHECK
.5
1.5
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
52001ZZZ0
52321ZZZ0
53001ZZZ0
A91A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 36 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 8 of 8
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Commodity
Code
Description
Note
No
Valves Group
CHV
VLV.CHECK
24
BS-1868
53321ZZZ0
CHV
VLV.CHECK
26
48
API-594
53316ZZZ0
BLV
VLV.BALL
.5
16
BS-5351
54321ZZZ0
PLV
VLV.PLUG
.5
BS-5353
55397ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
24
BS-5155
56321ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
26
48
BS-5155
56316ZZZ0
201
Bolt Group
BOS
BOLT.STUD
18
82
B-18.2
BOLT:A193 GR.B7,
NUT:A194 GR.2H
BS40404Z0
BOM
BOLT.M/C
.5
16
B-18.2
BOLT:A307 GR.B,
NUT:A563 GR.B
BM41418Z0
NONASBESTOS
BS7531 GR X
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
.5
24
B-16.21ANSI B16.5
GAS
GASKET
26
82
AWWA-C207 NONASBESTOS
CL.D
BS7531 GR X
RING, 150, 2 MM
GKBAX52Z0
Trap/Strainer Group
TRP
TRAP.STEAM
.5
1.5
MNF'STD
TSR
STRNR.TEMP
1.5
24
EIL'STD
B:A285GR.C;INT:S
S304
CONETYPE,
150,FF/125AARH
ST14431Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
.5
1.5
MNF'STD
B:A105;INT:SS304
SP303D510
PSR
STRNR.PERM
STD
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPB;IN
T:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13344Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
24
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPBW;I
NT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13644Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
26
48
MNF'STD
B:A234GR.WPBW;I
NT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP33644Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
TR3065530
A91A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
: BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 37 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
CORROSION ALLOWANCE :
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT :
Sheet 1 of 4
J3A
150
CS (Galv.)
0
MM
65
PRESS
10.55
10.55
SERVICE
INSTRUMENT AIR (UP TO 1.5")
NOTES
19
THREADED JOINTS SHALL BE MADE WITH 1" WIDTH PTFE JOINING TAPE.
20
21
SURFACES WHERE GALVANISING HAS BEEN BURNT OFF SHALL BE WIRE BRUSHED AND COLD GALVANISED WITH
ZINC COATING COMPOUND.
NO FIELD HYDROSTATIC TESTING IS PERMITTED IN INSTRUMENT AIR SERVICE.
89
FOR SIZES 2" & ABOVE, REFER A3A & A1A CLASSES
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
ALL
UNIONS (SCRF)
ALL
SCREWED COUPLING
DRAINS
ALL
VENTS
ALL
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
J3A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 38 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 2 of 4
2.500
2.000
1.500
T
T
T
1.250
1.000
.750
.500
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
T
0.75
T T
0.5 T T T
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
THREADOLET
J3A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 39 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 3 of 4
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (GALV)
SCRM, WELDED
PI6D599Z0
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
.5
1.5
Flange Group
FLG
FLNG.SCRD
.5
1.5
B-16.5
ASTM A
105(GALV.)
150, FF/125AARH
FTC0721Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
.5
1.5
B-16.5
ASTM A
105(GALV.)
150, FF/125AARH
FBC0721Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
.5
1.5
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A
105(GALV.)
150, FF/125AARH
FGK0721Z0
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WA60882Z0
ELB45
ELBOW.45
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WB60882Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WE60882Z0
TRED
T.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WR60882Z0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
.5
1.5
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A
105(GALV)
TBE
WNH08EZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
.5
1.5
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A
105(GALV)
TBE
WPH08EZZ0
CAP
CAP
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WF60882Z0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WJ60882Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WK60882Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WL60882Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WM60882Z0
UNN
UNION
.5
1.5
BS-3799
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WQH0882Z0
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
.5
1.5
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
.5
1.5
BS EN ISO
15761
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIM-13%
CR.STEEL
CHV
VLV.CHECK
.5
1.5
BS EN ISO
15761
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIM-13%
CR.STEEL
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
J3A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 40 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
Sheet 4 of 4
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Bolt Group
BOM
BOLT.M/C
.5
1.5
B-18.2
BOLT:A307 GR.B,
NUT:A563 GR.B
.5
1.5
B-16.21ANSI B16.5
NONASBESTOS
BS7531 GR X
BM41418Z0
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
J3A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 1 of 26
31/03/2015
Rev. No
BORL
Project
LCEP
Location
Job No.
A702
Date
Client
Purpose
SKS
NK
SD
Prepared by
Checked by
Approved by
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 2 of 26
Abbreviations:
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 3 of 26
CONTENTS
Sl. No.
Description
Pages
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
:BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 4 of 26
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
Piping
Class
Rating
C.A
Spl.
Reqt.
Basic
Material
Remarks
Service
A94A
150
1.5
CARBON STEEL
A95A
150
1.5
CARBON STEEL
A96A
150
1.5
CARBON STEEL
J2A
150
CS (Galv.)
UOP-MS-2
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
:BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 5 of 26
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
CORROSION ALLOWANCE :
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT :
Sheet 1 of 5
A94A
150
CARBON STEEL
1.5
MM
38
50
65
65
PRESS
14.7
14.7
14.7
18.9
14.7
SERVICE
FIRE WATER (ABOVE AND UNDER GROUND)
NOTES
5
65
FOR PERMANENT 'T' TYPE BW STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0303 & 7-44-0304; AND FOR TEMPORARY
STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0300; FOR SPACER AND BLIND REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0162.
FORGINGS ARE ACCEPTABLE IN LIEU OF PLATE MATERIAL FOR BLIND FLANGES AND SPACER & BLINDS.
88
AS PER TAC REQUIREMENTS, 10% OF THE BUTT WELD JOINTS SHALL BE RADIOGRAPHED. HOWEVER, 50% OF THESE
BUTT WELD JOINTS SHALL BE FIELD WELD JOINTS.
111 FOR U/G SERVICES, PIPE WALL THICKNESSES ARE CALCULATED BASED ON SOIL PARAMETERS AND BURIAL DEPTH
OF 1500MM.
122 ASBESTOS FREE GASKETS AND STEM PACKING SHALL BE USED FOR ALL VALVES
151 NDT REQUIREMENT SHALL BE AS PER JOB SPECIFICATION A702-6-44-0016.
154 FOR PRESSURE CONNECTION USE GLOBE VALVE INSTEAD OF GATE VALVE IN ALL LINES OF MS BLOCK
(NHT/CCR/ISOM.)
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
ALL
BUTTWELDED
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
DRAINS
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A94A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 6 of 26
:BORL
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
32.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
36.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
34.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
22.000
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
20.000
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
18.000
T H
T H
T H
R R R
H H H
H H
H H H
H H H
H H H
16.000
P
H
8.000
P
H
6.000
T
T T
5.000
R R R R R R R
4.000
R R R R R R R R
3.500
3.000
2.500
R R R R R R R
2.000
R R R R R R R R
1.500
30.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
28.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
26.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
24.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
14.000
T
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
12.000
T
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
T
R
R
R
R
R
10.000
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
1.250
1.000
.750
.500
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
T
1.0
T T
0.75
0.5 T T T
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 2 of 5
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
THREADOLET
A94A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 7 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
Sheet 3 of 5
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
0.50
1.50
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
PE, C.WELDED
PI6D471Z0
PIP
PIPE
2.00
6.00
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
BE, C.WELDED
PI6D411Z0
PIP
PIPE
8.00
14.00
6.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.410
BE, WELDED
PI7E319Z0
PIP
PIPE
16.00
24.00
8.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.410
BE, WELDED
PI7E319Z0
PIP
PIPE
26.00
32.00
10.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.410
BE, WELDED
PI7E319Z0
PIP
PIPE
34.00
36.00
12.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.410
BE, WELDED
PI7E319Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
0.50
1.50
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN6D467Z0
Flange Group
FLG
FLNG.SW
0.50
1.50
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FSC0127Z0
FLG
FLNG.WN
26.00
36.00
B-16.47-B
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FWB0127Z0
FLG
FLNG.SO
2.00
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FNC0127Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
0.50
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FBC0127Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
26.00
36.00
B-16.47-B
150, FF/125AARH
FBB5321Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
0.50
8.00
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FGK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
10.00
24.00
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FCK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
26.00
36.00
EIL'STD
150, FF/125AARH
FCE5321Z0
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WA602D2Z0
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
0.50
1.50
ELB90
ELBOW.90
2.00
6.00
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WAG684Z10
ELB90
ELBOW.90
8.00
36.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WAG754Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WB602D2Z0
ELB45
ELBOW.45
2.00
6.00
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WBG684Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
8.00
36.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WBG754Z10
TEQ
T.EQUAL
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WE602D2Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A94A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 8 of 26
:BORL
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
Sheet 4 of 5
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
TEQ
T.EQUAL
2.00
6.00
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WEG684ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
8.00
36.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WEG754ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WR602D2Z0
TRED
T.RED
2.00
6.00
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WRG684ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
8.00
36.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WRG754ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
2.00
6.00
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WUG684ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
8.00
36.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WUG754ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
2.00
6.00
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WVG684ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
8.00
36.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WVG754ZZ0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
0.50
3.00
STD,
STD
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WNH026ZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
0.50
3.00
STD,
STD
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WPH026ZZ0
CAP
CAP
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SCRF, 3000
WF60282Z0
CAP
CAP
2.00
6.00
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
CAP
CAP
8.00
36.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WJ602D2Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WK602D2Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WL602D2Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WM602D2Z0
UNN
UNION
0.50
1.50
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WQH02D2Z0
51001ZZZ0
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
0.25
1.50
API-602
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED,STEM13%CR.STEEL
GAV
VLV.GATE
2.00
24.00
API-600
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
51321ZZZ0
A94A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 9 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
Sheet 5 of 5
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Commodity
Code
Description
Note
No
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
26.00
42.00
BS-1414
51397ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
0.50
1.50
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED,STEM13%CR STEEL
52001ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
2.00
16.00
BS-1873
CHV
VLV.CHECK
0.50
1.50
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED
CHV
VLV.CHECK
2.00
24.00
BS-1868
53321ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
3.00
24.00
BS-5155
56320ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
26.00
36.00
BS-5155
56310ZZZ0
0.50
36.00
B-18.2
BOLT:A193 GR.B7,
NUT:A194 GR.2H
BS40404Z0
52321ZZZ0
53001ZZZ0
Bolt Group
BOS
BOLT.STUD
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
0.50
24.00
B-16.21ANSI B16.5
NONASBESTOS
BS7531 GR X
RING, 150, 2 MM
GAS
GASKET
26.00
36.00
B-16.21ANSI
B16.47B
NONASBESTOS
BS7531 GR X
GKBAX52Z0
Trap/Strainer Group
TSR
STRNR.TEMP
1.50
24.00
EIL'STD
B:A285GR.C;INT:S
S304
CONETYPE,
150,FF/125AARH
ST14431Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
0.50
1.50
MNF'STD
B:A105;INT:SS304
SP303D510
PSR
STRNR.PERM
2.00
6.00
STD
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPB;IN
T:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13344Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
8.00
24.00
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPBW;I
NT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13644Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
26.00
36.00
MNF'STD
B:A234GR.WPBW;I
NT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP33644Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A94A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
:BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 10 of 26
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
CORROSION ALLOWANCE :
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT :
Sheet 1 of 6
A95A
150
CARBON STEEL
1.5
MM
38
50
65
PRESS
10.55
10.55
10.55
10.55
SERVICE
CATEGORY 'D' FLUID-U/G AND A/G CRWS / SS
NOTES
6
FOR FABRICATED REDUCERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0485 & 7-44-0487. FOR MITRES, REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0033.
64
65
FORGINGS ARE ACCEPTABLE IN LIEU OF PLATE MATERIAL FOR BLIND FLANGES AND SPACER & BLINDS.
76
77
FOR PERMANENT BW STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0303 & 7-44-0304; AND FOR TEMPORARY STRAINERS,REFER
EIL'STD 7-44-0300.
FOR SIZES > 24", SPACER & BLIND SHALL BE DESIGNED BY THE MANUFACTURER AS PER ASME B31.3.
86
BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR THE SPEC ARE PN10 RATED WITH A MAXIMUM PRESSURE OF 10.2 KG/CM2G.
101 FOR U/G SERVICES, PIPE WALL THICKNESSES ARE CALCULATED BASED ON SOIL PERAMETERS AND BURIAL DEPTH
OF 2500MM.
110 MITRES ARE ALSO ACCEPTABLE IN PLACE OF ELBOWS FOR SIZES 8" TO 24"
122 ASBESTOS FREE GASKETS AND STEM PACKING SHALL BE USED FOR ALL VALVES
151 NDT REQUIREMENT SHALL BE AS PER JOB SPECIFICATION A702-6-44-0016.
300 USE 4 PIECE 90 DEG. MITRE FOR SIZE 8" TO 32" (45 DEG MITRE SHALL REQUIRE ONE PIECE LESS)
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
ALL
BUTTWELDED
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
SW, SH HVY NIPPLE WITH GATE VALVE TO SPEC AS PER EIL STD
7-44-354
DRAINS
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A95A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 11 of 26
:BORL
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
T
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 2 of 6
32.000
30.000
8.000
28.000
H H H H H
H H H H H
H H H H H
26.000
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
24.000
H
H
H
22.000
H
H
H
20.000
T H
T H
T H
18.000
R R R R R
H H H H H
16.000
R R R R R R R R
H H H H H H H H
14.000
P
H
12.000
P
H
10.000
T
T T
6.000
R R R R R
5.000
R R R R R R R R
4.000
3.500
3.000
R R R R R
2.500
R R R R R R R R
2.000
1.500
1.250
1.000
.750
.500
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
T
1.0
T T
0.75
0.5 T T T
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
THREADOLET
A95A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 12 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
Sheet 3 of 6
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
0.50
1.50
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
PE, C.WELDED
PI6D471Z0
PIP
PIPE
2.00
6.00
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
BE, C.WELDED
PI6D411Z0
PIP
PIPE
8.00
10.00
6.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
12.00
16.00
8.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
18.00
20.00
10.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
24.00
28.00
12.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
30.00
36.00
14.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
0.50
1.50
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
PBE, C.WELDED
PN6D461Z0
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FSC0127Z0
Flange Group
FLG
FLNG.SW
0.50
1.50
FLG
FLNG.SO
2.00
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FNC0127Z0
FLG
FLNG.SO
26.00
32.00
150, FF/125AARH
FN40121Z0
FLG/300 FLNG.SO
2.00
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
300, RF/125AARH
FNC0147Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
0.50
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FBC0127Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
26.00
32.00
150, FF/125AARH
FB45321Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
0.50
8.00
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FGK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
10.00
24.00
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FCK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
26.00
32.00
MNF'STD
150, FF/125AARH
FCG5321Z0
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WA602D2Z0
64
64
65
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
0.50
1.50
ELB90
ELBOW.90
2.00
6.00
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WAG684Z10
ELB90
ELBOW.90
8.00
24.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WAG754Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WB602D2Z0
ELB45
ELBOW.45
2.00
6.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WBG684Z10
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
STD
A95A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 13 of 26
:BORL
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
Sheet 4 of 6
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
ELB45
ELBOW.45
8.00
24.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WBG754Z10
MIT90
MITRE.90
26.00
32.00
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW, 1.5D
WDKF141Z0
MIT45
MITRE.45
26.00
32.00
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW, 1.5D
WGKF141Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WE602D2Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
2.00
6.00
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WEG684ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
8.00
24.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WEG754ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WR602D2Z0
TRED
T.RED
2.00
6.00
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WRG684ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
8.00
24.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WRG754ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
2.00
6.00
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WUG684ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
8.00
24.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WUG754ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
26.00
32.00
M, M
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW
WUKF14ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
2.00
6.00
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WVG684ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
8.00
24.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WVG754ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
26.00
32.00
M, M
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW
WVKF14ZZ0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
0.50
3.00
STD,
STD
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WNH026ZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
0.50
3.00
STD,
STD
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WPH026ZZ0
CAP
CAP
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SCRF, 3000
WF60282Z0
CAP
CAP
2.00
6.00
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
CAP
CAP
8.00
32.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WJ602D2Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WK602D2Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WL602D2Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A95A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 14 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
Sheet 5 of 6
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WM602D2Z0
UNN
UNION
0.50
1.50
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WQH02D2Z0
51001ZZZ0
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
0.25
1.50
API-602
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED,STEM13%CR.STEEL
GAV
VLV.GATE
2.00
24.00
API-600
51321ZZZ0
GAV
VLV.GATE
26.00
42.00
BS-1414
51920ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
0.50
1.50
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED,STEM13%CR STEEL
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
2.00
16.00
BS-1873
CHV
VLV.CHECK
0.50
1.50
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED
CHV
VLV.CHECK
2.00
24.00
BS-1868
53321ZZZ0
CHV
VLV.CHECK
26.00
48.00
API-594
53316ZZZ0
BLV
VLV.BALL
0.50
16.00
BS-5351
54321ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
3.00
24.00
BS-5155
56321ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
26.00
48.00
BS-5155
56316ZZZ0
18.00
32.00
B-18.2
BOLT:A193 GR.B7,
NUT:A194 GR.2H
BS40404Z0
52001ZZZ0
52321ZZZ0
53001ZZZ0
Bolt Group
BOS
BOLT.STUD
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A95A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 15 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
Sheet 6 of 6
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
Sch/
Thk
(Inch)
(Inch)
0.50
16.00
B-18.2
BOLT:A307 GR.B,
NUT:A563 GR.B
NONASBESTOS
BS7531 GR X
Commodity
Code
Description
Note
No
Bolt Group
BOM
BOLT.M/C
BM41418Z0
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
0.50
24.00
B-16.21ANSI B16.5
GAS
GASKET
26.00
32.00
AWWA-C207 NONASBESTOS
BS7531 GR X
CL.D
GAS/30
0
GASKET
0.50
24.00
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL+ I
RING
RING, 150, 2 MM
GKBAX52Z0
GK66274Z0
Trap/Strainer Group
TRP
TRAP.STEAM
0.50
1.50
MNF'STD
TSR
STRNR.TEMP
1.50
24.00
EIL'STD
B:A285GR.C;INT:S
S304
CONETYPE,
150,FF/125AARH
ST14431Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
0.50
1.50
MNF'STD
B:A105;INT:SS304
SP303D510
PSR
STRNR.PERM
2.00
6.00
STD
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPB;IN
T:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13344Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
8.00
24.00
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPBW;I
NT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13644Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
TR3065530
A95A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
:BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 16 of 26
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
CORROSION ALLOWANCE :
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT :
Sheet 1 of 6
A96A
150
CARBON STEEL
1.5
MM
-29
38
93
149
204
260
PRESS
15
15
15
15
14.06
11.95
SERVICE
U/G AND A/G OWS
NOTES
5
7
FOR PERMANENT 'T' TYPE BW STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0303 -44-0304; AND FOR TEMPORARY
STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0300; FOR SPACER AND BLIND REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0162.
FOR RESTRICTION ON USE OF BALL,PLUG & BUTTERFLY VALVES,REFER GENERAL NOTES.
73
GATE VALVES OF SIZE 26" AND ABOVE SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH BS-1414 AND FLANGE ENDS SHALL BE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH ASME B16.47 SERIES B.
122 ASBESTOS FREE GASKETS AND STEM PACKING SHALL BE USED FOR ALL VALVES
124 FOR TEMP. CONNECTION IN MS BLOCK(NHT/CCR/ISOM.) , UOP STANDARD 6-108-1 SHALL BE FOLLOWED EXCEPT
THE SIZE OF CONNECTION i.e. 1.5" INSTEAD OF SIZE 1.0" .
151 NDT REQUIREMENT SHALL BE AS PER JOB SPECIFICATION A702-6-44-0016.
154 FOR PRESSURE CONNECTION USE GLOBE VALVE INSTEAD OF GATE VALVE IN ALL LINES OF MS BLOCK
(NHT/CCR/ISOM.)
229 FOR U/G SERVICES, PIPE WALL THICKNESSES ARE CALCULATED BASED ON SOIL PARAMETERS, BURIAL DEPTH OF
2500MM AND LINE CONDITIONS OF 7KG/SQ.CM G PRESSURE & 65 DEG. C TEMP.
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
ALL
SW COUPLING
BUTTWELDED
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
SW NIPPLE WITH GATE VALVE TO SPEC AS PER EIL STD 7-440354(NOTE 154)
DRAINS
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A96A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 17 of 26
:BORL
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
R R R R R R R R
R R R R R R R R
T
T T
P
H
P
H
R R R R R R R R
H H H H H H H H
R
H
T H
T H
T H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H
H
H
18.000
16.000
14.000
12.000
10.000
8.000
6.000
5.000
4.000
3.500
3.000
2.500
2.000
1.500
T
R
R
R
R
R
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 2 of 6
24.000
T
R
R
R
R
22.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
20.000
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
1.250
1.000
.750
.500
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
T
1.0
T T
0.75
0.5 T T T
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
THREADOLET
A96A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 18 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
Sheet 3 of 6
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
0.50
0.75
S160
B-36.10
PE, SEAMLESS
PI21977Z0
PIP
PIPE
1.00
1.50
XS
B-36.10
PE, SEAMLESS
PI21977Z0
PIP
PIPE
2.00
2.00
XS
B-36.10
BE, SEAMLESS
PI21917Z0
PIP
PIPE
3.00
6.00
STD
B-36.10
BE, SEAMLESS
PI21917Z0
PIP
PIPE
8.00
14.00
STD
B-36.10
BE, WELDED
PI2E919Z0
PIP
PIPE
16.00
20.00
STD
B-36.10
BE, WELDED
PI2E919Z0
PIP
PIPE
24.00
24.00
XS
B-36.10
BE, WELDED
PI2E919Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
0.50
0.75
B-36.10
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN21967Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
1.00
1.50
B-36.10
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN21967Z0
FLG/300 FLNG.SW
0.50
1.50
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
300, RF/125AARH
FSC0147Z0
FLG
FLNG.WN
0.50
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FWC0127Z0
FLG/600 FLNG.WN
2.00
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
600, RF/125AARH
FWC0167Z0
FLG/300 FLNG.WN
2.00
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
300, RF/125AARH
FWC0147Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
0.50
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FBC0127Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
0.50
8.00
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FGK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
10.00
24.00
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FCK0121Z0
Flange Group
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WA602D3Z0
ELB90
ELBOW.90
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WA602D2Z0
ELB90
ELBOW.90
2.00
14.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WAG684Z10
ELB90
ELBOW.90
16.00
24.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WAG754Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WB602D3Z0
ELB45
ELBOW.45
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WB602D2Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A96A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 19 of 26
:BORL
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
Sheet 4 of 6
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
ELB45
ELBOW.45
2.00
14.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WBG684Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
16.00
24.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WBG754Z10
TEQ
T.EQUAL
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WE602D3Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WE602D2Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
2.00
14.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WEG684ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
16.00
24.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WEG754ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WR602D3Z0
TRED
T.RED
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WR602D2Z0
TRED
T.RED
2.00
14.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WRG684ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
16.00
24.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WRG754ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
2.00
14.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WUG684ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
16.00
24.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WUG754ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
2.00
14.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WVG684ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
16.00
24.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WVG754ZZ0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
0.50
3.00
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WNH026ZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
0.50
3.00
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WPH026ZZ0
CAP
CAP
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SCRF, 6000
WF60283Z0
CAP
CAP
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SCRF, 3000
WF60282Z0
CAP
CAP
2.00
24.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WJ602D3Z0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WJ602D2Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WK602D3Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WK602D2Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A96A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 20 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
Sheet 5 of 6
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WL602D3Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WL602D2Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WM602D3Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WM602D2Z0
51001ZZZ0
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
0.25
1.50
API-602
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED,STEM13%CR.STEEL
GAV
VLV.GATE
2.00
42.00
API-600
51301ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
0.50
1.50
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED,STEM13%CR STEEL
52001ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
2.00
16.00
BS-1873
52301ZZZ0
CHV
VLV.CHECK
0.50
1.50
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED
53001ZZZ0
CHV
VLV.CHECK
2.00
24.00
BS-1868
53301ZZZ0
BLV
VLV.BALL
0.50
16.00
BS-5351
54301ZZZ0
PLV
VLV.PLUG
0.50
24.00
BS-5353
55301ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
3.00
24.00
API-609/BS5155
56301ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
26.00
48.00
API-609
56315ZZZ0
0.50
24.00
B-18.2
BOLT:A193 GR.B7,
NUT:A194 GR.2H
BS40404Z0
73
Bolt Group
BOS
BOLT.STUD
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A96A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 21 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
Sheet 6 of 6
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
0.50
24.00
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL
SPIRAL, 150
GK65072Z0
GAS/60
0
GASKET
0.50
24.00
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL
SPIRAL, 600
GK65076Z0
GAS/30
0
GASKET
0.50
24.00
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL
SPIRAL, 300
GK65074Z0
Trap/Strainer Group
TRP
TRAP.STEAM
0.50
1.50
MNF'STD
TR3065530
TSR
STRNR.TEMP
1.50
24.00
EIL'STD
B:A516GR.70;INT:S CONETYPE,
150,FF/125AARH
S304
ST16831Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
0.50
1.50
MNF'STD
B:A105;INT:SS304
SP303D510
PSR
STRNR.PERM
2.00
14.00
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPB;IN
T:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13344Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
16.00
24.00
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPBW;I
NT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13644Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
A96A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
:BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 22 of 26
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
CORROSION ALLOWANCE :
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT :
Sheet 1 of 5
J2A
150
CS (Galv.)
0
MM
38
65
PRESS
10.55
10.55
10.55
SERVICE
POTABLE WATER (ABOVE GROUND/ UNDER GROUND ),
FIRE WATER-SPRINKLER SYSTEM AFTER ORIFICE
NOTES
19
THREADED JOINTS SHALL BE MADE WITH 1" WIDTH PTFE JOINING TAPE.
20
SURFACES WHERE GALVANISING HAS BEEN BURNT OFF SHALL BE WIRE BRUSHED AND COLD GALVANISED WITH
ZINC COATING COMPOUND.
111 FOR U/G SERVICES, PIPE WALL THICKNESSES ARE CALCULATED BASED ON SOIL PARAMETERS AND BURIAL DEPTH
OF 1500MM.
122 ASBESTOS FREE GASKETS AND STEM PACKING SHALL BE USED FOR ALL VALVES
124 FOR TEMP. CONNECTION IN MS BLOCK(NHT/CCR/ISOM.) , UOP STANDARD 6-108-1 SHALL BE FOLLOWED EXCEPT
THE SIZE OF CONNECTION i.e. 1.5" INSTEAD OF SIZE 1.0" .
151 NDT REQUIREMENT SHALL BE AS PER JOB SPECIFICATION A702-6-44-0016.
154 FOR PRESSURE CONNECTION USE GLOBE VALVE INSTEAD OF GATE VALVE IN ALL LINES OF MS BLOCK
(NHT/CCR/ISOM.)
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
PIPE JOINTS
UPTO 6"
SCREWED COUPLING
DRAINS
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
SCRD NIPPLE WITH GATE VALVE TO SPEC AS PER EIL STD 7-440354 (NOTE 154)
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
J2A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 23 of 26
:BORL
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
T
T
T
T
T T
T T
T T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 2 of 5
6.000
T
T
5.000
T
T T
4.000
3.500
3.000
2.500
2.000
1.500
1.250
1.000
.750
.500
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
T
1.0
T T
0.75
0.5 T T T
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
THREADOLET
J2A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 24 of 26
:BORL
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
Sheet 3 of 5
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
0.50
6.00
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (GALV)
SCRM, WELDED
PI6D599Z0
PIP
PIPE
8.00
8.00
6.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
(GALV)
BE, WELDED
PI7E219Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
0.50
1.50
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (GALV)
TOE, WELDED
PN6D5G9Z0
Flange Group
FLG
FLNG.SCRD
0.50
6.00
B-16.5
ASTM A
105(GALV.)
150, FF/125AARH
FTC0721Z0
FLG
FLNG.SO
8.00
8.00
B-16.5
ASTM A
105(GALV.)
150, RF/125AARH
FNC0727Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
0.50
8.00
B-16.5
ASTM A
105(GALV.)
150, FF/125AARH
FBC0721Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
0.50
8.00
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A
105(GALV.)
150, FF/125AARH
FGK0721Z0
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WA60882Z0
ELB90
ELBOW.90
2.00
6.00
IS-1239-II
IS-1239(PART-II)
(GALV)
SCRF, NA
WALE98ZZ0
ELB90
ELBOW.90
8.00
8.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W(GALV)
BW, 1.5D
WAG764Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WB60882Z0
ELB45
ELBOW.45
2.00
6.00
IS-1239-II
IS-1239(PART-II)
(GALV)
SCRF, NA
WBLE98ZZ0
ELB45
ELBOW.45
8.00
8.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W(GALV)
BW, 1.5D
WBG764Z10
TEQ
T.EQUAL
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WE60882Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
2.00
6.00
IS-1239-II
IS-1239(PART-II)
(GALV)
SCRF, NA
WELE98ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
8.00
8.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W(GALV)
BW
WEG764ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WR60882Z0
TRED
T.RED
2.00
6.00
IS-1239-II
IS-1239(PART-II)
(GALV)
SCRF, NA
WRLE98ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
8.00
8.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W(GALV)
BW
WRG764ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
0.50
6.00
IS-1239-II
IS-1239(PART-II)
(GALV)
SCRF, NA
WULE98ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
8.00
8.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W(GALV)
BW
WUG764ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
0.50
6.00
IS-1239-II
IS-1239(PART-II)
(GALV)
SCRF, NA
WVLE98ZZ0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
M, M
M, M
J2A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 25 of 26
:BORL
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
Sheet 4 of 5
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
REDE
REDUC.ECC
8.00
8.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W(GALV)
BW
WVG764ZZ0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
0.50
3.00
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A
105(GALV)
TBE
WNH08EZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
0.50
3.00
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A
105(GALV)
TBE
WPH08EZZ0
CAP
CAP
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WF60882Z0
CAP
CAP
2.00
6.00
IS-1239-II
IS-1239(PART-II)
(GALV)
SCRF, NA
WFLE98ZZ0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WJ60882Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WK60882Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WL60882Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WM60882Z0
UNN
UNION
0.50
6.00
IS-1239-II
IS-1239(PART-II)
(GALV)
SCRF, NA
WQLE98ZZ0
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
0.50
1.50
IS:778 CL.2
GAV
VLV.GATE
2.00
8.00
IS:780
BODY-IS 210
GR.FG 200,TRIMIS 320 ALLOY HT2
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
0.50
1.50
IS:778 CL.2
CHV
VLV.CHECK
0.50
1.50
IS:778 CL.2
CHV
VLV.CHECK
2.00
6.00
IS:5312 (PT1)
BODY-IS 210
GR.FG 200,TRIMIS 320 ALLOY HT2
0.50
8.00
B-18.2
BOLT:A307
GR.B(GALV),
NUT:A563
GR.B(GALV)
0.50
6.00
B-16.21ANSI B16.5
BUTYL RUBBER
51380ZZZ0
53380ZZZ0
Bolt Group
BOM
BOLT.M/C
BM41519Z0
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
J2A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 26 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
Sheet 5 of 5
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
8.00
8.00
Sch/
Thk
Description
Commodity
Code
B-16.21ANSI B16.5
RING, 150, 2 MM
GKBAA52Z0
Note
No
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
GRAPHITE WITH
SS316 TANGED
INS
J2A
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 1 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL
FORGED
ASTM A 105
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 105
STEM
RISING
WEDGE DISC
SOLID
STELLITED
RENEWABLE
STELLITED
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
SW 3000 TO B-16.11
BODY
Sheet No. 1 of 1
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
NOTES
1
2
3
4
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
VALVES AS PER API-602 AND TESTING AS PER API-598 ARE ALSO ACCEPTABLE.
02/01/1995
14/12/2000
28/05/2001
30/06/2009
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
51001
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 2 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
API-602
:
: SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
FORGED
ASTM A 105
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 105
STEM
RISING
WEDGE DISC
SOLID
STELLITED
RENEWABLE
STELLITED
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
I.B.R
INTEGRAL
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER API 598 & IBR.
ALL VALVES SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH IBR CERTIFICATE IN FORM-III C.
ALL VALVES SHALL BE PAINTED RED ON BODY-BONNET JOINT.
VALVES TO COMPLY WITH DESIGN REQUIREMENTS OF IBR ALSO.
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007
51002
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 3 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
API-602
:
: SCRF 3000 TO B-1.20.1
MATERIAL
BODY
FORGED
ASTM A 105
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 105
STEM
RISING
WEDGE DISC
SOLID
RENEWABLE
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
INTEGRAL
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
NOTES
1
2
3
4
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER API 598.
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
05/05/2008
51024
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 4 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
API-602
:
: SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
FORGED
BONNET
BOLTED
STEM
RISING
WEDGE DISC
SOLID
STELLITED
RENEWABLE
STELLITED
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
BONNET GASKET
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
INTEGRAL
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
NOTES
1
2
3
4
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER API 598.
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007
51045
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 5 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
API-602
:
: SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
FORGED
BONNET
BOLTED
STEM
RISING
WEDGE DISC
SOLID
STELLITED
RENEWABLE
STELLITED
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
INTEGRAL
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
NOTES
1
2
3
4
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER API 598.
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007
51050
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 6 of 21
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
36.0"
ENDS
API-600
:
: FLGD
CONSTRUCTION
TO B-16.5 RF/125AARH
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
BONNET
BOLTED
STEM
RISING
WEDGE DISC
SOLID/FLEXIBLE
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
REQUIREMENT OF
GEAR OPERATOR
REQUIREMENT OF
RADIOGRAPHY
Sheet No. 1 of 1
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER API 598 & IBR FOR SIZES UPTO 24" AND AS PER BS 6755(PART-1) & IBR FOR SIZES
26" & ABOVE.
ALL VALVES SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH IBR CERTIFICATE IN FORM-III C.
ALL VALVES SHALL BE PAINTED RED ON BODY-BONNET JOINT.
5% VALVE CASTINGS UPTO 24" AND 100% VALVE CASTINGS 26" AND ABOVE SHALL UNDERGO
RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION.
GATE VALVES OF SIZE 26" AND ABOVE SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH BS-1414 AND FLANGE ENDS SHALL
BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASME B16.47 SERIES B.
VALVES TO COMPLY WITH DESIGN REQUIREMENTS OF IBR ALSO.
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007
51302
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 7 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
BONNET
BOLTED
STEM
RISING
WEDGE DISC
SOLID/FLEXIBLE
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
REQUIREMENT OF
GEAR OPERATOR
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
BACK SEAT &
SHOULDER
13% CR STEEL
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
RADIOGRAPHY OF VALVE CASTINGS NOT REQUIRED.
VALVES AS PER API-600 AND TESTING AS PER API-598 ARE ALSO ACCEPTABLE.
14/12/2000
28/05/2001
30/06/2009
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
51321
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 8 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
24.0"
ENDS
API-600
:
: FLGD
CONSTRUCTION
TO B-16.5 RF/125AARH
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
BONNET
BOLTED
STEM
RISING
WEDGE DISC
SOLID/FLEXIBLE
SS 304
RENEWABLE/NONRENEWABLE
SS 304
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
REQUIREMENT OF
GEAR OPERATOR
REQUIREMENT OF
RADIOGRAPHY
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
SS 304
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
Sheet No. 1 of 1
DESCRIPTION
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER API 598.
10 % VALVE CASTINGS SHALL UNDERGO RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION.
ALL CASTINGS SHALL BE SOLUTION HEAT TREATED.
WELD REPAIRS, IF ANY, SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BEFORE SOLUTION HEAT TREATMENT.
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007
51345
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 9 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
24.0"
ENDS
API-600
:
: FLGD
CONSTRUCTION
TO B-16.5 RF/125AARH
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
BONNET
BOLTED
STEM
RISING
WEDGE DISC
FLEXIBLE
SS 304L
NONRENEWABLE/RENE
WABLE
SS 304L
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
REQUIREMENT OF
GEAR OPERATOR
REQUIREMENT OF
RADIOGRAPHY
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
SS 304L
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER API 598.
10 % VALVE CASTINGS SHALL UNDERGO RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION.
ALL CASTINGS SHALL BE SOLUTION HEAT TREATED.
WELD REPAIRS IF ANY SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BEFORE SOLUTION HEAT TREATMENT.
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007
51350
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 10 of 21
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
FORGED
ASTM A 105
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 105
STEM
RISING
DISC
STELLITED
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
STELLITED
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM
HAND WHEEL
RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
OTHERS
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
OS&Y
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITION
INTEGRAL
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
VALVES AS PER BS-5352 AND TESTING AS PER BS 6755(PART-I) ARE ALSO ACCEPTABLE.
02/01/1995
14/12/2000
28/05/2001
30/06/2009
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
52001
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 11 of 21
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
BS-5352
:
: SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
FORGED
BONNET
BOLTED
STEM
RISING
DISC
STELLITED
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
STELLITED
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM
HAND WHEEL
RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
OTHERS
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
OS&Y
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITION
INTEGRAL
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS 6755 (PART-1).
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007
52050
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 12 of 21
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
BONNET
BOLTED
STEM
RISING
DISC
LOOSE PLUG
TYPE/BALL TYP
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM
HAND WHEEL
RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
REQUIREMENT OF
GEAR OPERATOR
OTHERS
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
OS&Y
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITION
BACK SEAT &
SHOULDER
13% CR STEEL
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS EN 12266-1.
RADIOGRAPHY OF VALVE CASTINGS NOT REQUIRED.
VALVE TESTING AS PER BS 6755 (PART-I) IS ALSO ACCEPTABLE.
14/12/2000
28/05/2001
30/06/2009
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
52321
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 13 of 21
Sheet No. 1 of 1
BS-1873
:
: FLGD
CONSTRUCTION
TO B-16.5 RF/125AARH
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
BONNET
BOLTED
STEM
RISING
DISC
LOOSE PLUG
TYPE/BALL TYP
SS 304L
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
SS 304L
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM
HAND WHEEL
RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
REQUIREMENT OF
GEAR OPERATOR
REQUIREMENT OF
RADIOGRAPHY
OTHERS
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
OS&Y
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITION
SS 304L
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS 6755 (PART-1).
10% VALVE CASTINGS SHALL UNDERGO RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION.
ALL CASTINGS SHALL BE SOLUTION HEAT TREATED.
WELD REPAIRS, IF ANY, SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BEFORE SOLUTION HEAT TREATMENT.
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
13/08/2007
52350
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 14 of 21
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
FORGED
ASTM A 105
COVER
BOLTED
ASTM A 105
DISC/PISTON
SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
STELLITED
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
STELLITED
DISC HINGE/HINGE
PIN
COVER STUD BOLT
ASTM A193 GR B7
COVER NUT
ASTM A194 GR 2H
COVER GASKET
TYPE
OTHERS
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
WASHER,NUT,PIN
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
VALVES SHALL BE OF STANDARD BORE DESIGN.
VALVES AS PER BS-5352 AND TESTING AS PER BS 6755(PART-I) IS ALSO ACCEPTABLE .
02/01/1995
14/12/2000
28/05/2001
30/06/2009
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
53001
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 15 of 21
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
FORGED
ASTM A 105
COVER
BOLTED
ASTM A 105
DISC/PISTON
BS-5352
:
: SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
STELLITED
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
STELLITED
DISC HINGE/HINGE
PIN
COVER STUD BOLT
ASTM A193 GR B7
COVER NUT
ASTM A194 GR 2H
COVER GASKET
TYPE
OTHERS
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
I.B.R
WASHER,NUT,PIN
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS 6755(PART-I)& IBR
ALL VALVES SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH IBR CERTIFICATE IN FORM-III C.
ALL VALVES SHALL BE PAINTED RED ON BODY-COVER JOINT.
VALVES SHALL BE OF STANDARD BORE DESIGN.
VALVES TO COMPLY WITH DESIGN REQUIREMENTS OF IBR ALSO.
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007
53002
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 16 of 21
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
BS-5352
:
: SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
FORGED
COVER
BOLTED
DISC/PISTON
BODY SEAT RING
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
STELLITED
RENEWABLE/NONRENEWABLE
STELLITED
DISC HINGE/HINGE
PIN
COVER STUD BOLT
ASTM A193 GR B7
COVER NUT
ASTM A194 GR 2H
COVER GASKET
TYPE
OTHERS
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
WASHER,NUT,PIN
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS 6755 (PART-I)
VALVES SHALL BE OF STANDARD BORE DESIGN.
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007
53045
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 17 of 21
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
BS-5352
:
: SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
FORGED
COVER
BOLTED
DISC/PISTON
BODY SEAT RING
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
STELLITED
NONRENEWABLE/RENE
WABLE
STELLITED
DISC HINGE/HINGE
PIN
COVER STUD BOLT
ASTM A193 GR B7
COVER NUT
ASTM A194 GR 2H
COVER GASKET
TYPE
OTHERS
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
WASHER,NUT,PIN
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS 6755 (PART-I).
VALVES SHALL BE OF STANDARD BORE DESIGN.
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007
53050
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 18 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
24.0"
ENDS
BS-1868
:
: FLGD
CONSTRUCTION
TO B-16.5 RF/125AARH
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
COVER
BOLTED
DISC
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
HINGE PIN
DISC HINGE
ASTM A193 GR B7
COVER NUT
ASTM A194 GR 2H
COVER GASKET
BY PASSES
TYPE
REQUIREMENT OF
RADIOGRAPHY
OTHERS
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
I.B.R
WASHER,NUT,PIN
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS 6755(PART-I)& IBR
ALL VALVES SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH IBR CERTIFICATE IN FORM-III C.
ALL VALVES SHALL BE PAINTED RED ON BODY-BONNET JOINT.
5% VALVE CASTINGS SHALL UNDERGO RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION.
VALVES TO COMPLY WITH DESIGN REQUIREMENTS OF IBR ALSO.
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007
53302
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 19 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
Sheet No. 1 of 1
DESCRIPTION
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
COVER
BOLTED
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
DISC
BODY SEAT RING
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
HINGE PIN
DISC HINGE
ASTM A193 GR B7
COVER NUT
ASTM A194 GR 2H
COVER GASKET
BY PASSES
SWING CHECK TYPE
TYPE
OTHERS
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
13% CR STEEL(NO CASTING)/SS410/SS304
WASHER,NUT,PIN
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS EN 12266-1.
RADIOGRAPHY OF VALVE CASTINGS NOT REQUIRED.
VALVE TESTING AS PER BS 6755 (PART-I) IS ALSO ACCEPTABLE.
14/12/2000
28/05/2001
30/06/2009
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
53321
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 20 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
24.0"
ENDS
BS-1868
:
: FLGD
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
COVER
BOLTED
DISC
TO B-16.5 RF/125AARH
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
SS 304
RENEWABLE/NONRENEWABLE
SS 304
DISC HINGE
SS 304;
HINGE PIN
SS304(NO CASTING)
ASTM A193 GR B7
COVER NUT
ASTM A194 GR 2H
COVER GASKET
BY PASSES
TYPE
REQUIREMENT OF
RADIOGRAPHY
OTHERS
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
WASHER,NUT,PIN
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS 6755 (PART-I).
10% VALVE CASTINGS SHALL UNDERGO RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION.
ALL CASTINGS SHALL BE SOLUTION HEAT TREATED.
WELD REPAIRS, IF ANY, SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BEFORE SOLUTION HEAT TREATMENT.
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007
53345
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 21 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
24.0"
ENDS
BS-1868
:
: FLGD
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
COVER
BOLTED
DISC
TO B-16.5 RF/125AARH
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
SS 304L
RENEWABLE/NONRENEWABLE
SS 304L
HINGE PIN
SS 304L(NO CASTING)
DISC HINGE
SS 304L;
ASTM A193 GR B7
COVER NUT
ASTM A194 GR 2H
COVER GASKET
BY PASSES
TYPE
REQUIREMENT OF
RADIOGRAPHY
OTHERS
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
WASHER,NUT,PIN
SS 304L(NO CASTING)
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS 6755 (PART-I).
10% VALVE CASTINGS SHALL UNDERGO RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION.
ALL CASTINGS SHALL BE SOLUTION HEAT TREARED
WELD REPAIR, IF ANY, SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BEFORE SOLUTION HEAT TREATMENT.
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007
53350
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
OF PIPING
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 1 of 13
Abbreviations:
07/03/2016
SKS
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
PM
Checked
by
PNR
Approved
by
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
OF PIPING
DP/LP :
Dye/Liquid Penetrant
MP
Magnetic Particle
CS
Carbon Steel
AS
Alloy Steel
SS
Stainless Steel
ASTM :
ASME :
IBR
PMS:
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 2 of 13
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
OF PIPING
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 3 of 13
CONTENTS
S.NO
TITLE
1.
GENERAL
2.
VISUAL EXAMINATION
3.
4.
PAGE NO.
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
OF PIPING
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 4 of 13
This specification covers the general requirements for non destructive examination of
shop & field fabricated piping.
1.2
ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Codes, Section V & VIII (Div.1) including
addenda.
b)
ASME B31.3
c)
ASME B16.5
d)
ASME B16.34
e)
f)
g)
h)
ASTM E10
i)
j)
k)
2.
VISUAL EXAMINATION
2.1
Weld shall be visually inspected wherever accessible in accordance with the following
requirements:
a)
Internal misalignment
1.5 mm or less
b)
not permitted
c)
Incomplete penetration
d)
not permitted
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
OF PIPING
e)
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 5 of 13
(Suck up)
f)
2.5 mm or less.
g)
2.5 mm or less.
h)
2.5 mm or less.
i)
Unevenness of bead
2.0 mm or less.
j)
Weld undercutting
k)
Overlap
1.5 mm or less
l)
Bead deflection
2.5 mm or less
m)
External weld reinforcement and internal weld protrusion (when backing rings are
not used) shall be fused with and shall merge smoothly into the component
surfaces. The height of the lesser projection of external weld reinforcement or
internal weld protrusion from the adjacent base material surface shall not exceed
the following limits:
n)
1.6
3.2
4.0
4.8
o)
Flattening
Flattening of a bend, as measured by difference between the nominal outside
diameter and minimum or maximum diameter at any cross section shall not
exceed 5 % of the nominal outside diameter of pipe.
p)
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
OF PIPING
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 6 of 13
2.2
Welds having any of imperfections which exceed the limitations specified in various
clauses of 2.1 shall be repaired by welding, grinding or overlaying etc. Number of times
of repair welding for the same weld, however shall conform to applicable notes to Table
1- Note 6(b) b.5.
3.
3.1
The type and extent of weld examination shall be in accordance with Table-1. All visual
and supplementary methods of girth weld examination shall be in accordance with ASME
B31.3 & the requirements of this standard specification.
3.2
Welds between dissimilar materials shall be examined by method & to the extent required
for the material having the more stringent examination.
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
OF PIPING
4.
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 7 of 13
SERVICE
0
TO
186
AUSTENIC
S.S.
- 29
TO
186
HDPE
---
- 20
TO
50
CURPO
NICKEL
34
10
11
FAB.
WELDS
OF
MITRES /
REDUC.
12
13
A3A, J3A,
A91A
150#
UPTO
10.55
KG/CM2
a)
VISUAL
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
b)
LP (NOTE 4, 6, 9)
---
---
---
10%
10%
- 29
TO
60
2.
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
OF PIPING
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 8 of 13
SERVICE
1
II
2
a)
ALL SERVICES
COVERED
UNDER
INSPECTION
CLASS-I, BUT,
EXCEEDING
CATAGORY 'D'
PR./T EMP
LIMITATIONS.
CARBON
STEEL
- 29
TO
400
150#
b)
ALL SERVICES
CARBON
OTHER THAN
STEEL (IBR)
THOSE
COVERED
UNDER
INSPECTION
CLASS-I BUT
NON-TOXIC, NOT
SUBJECTED TO
SEVERE CYCLIC
CONDITIONS.
TYPE OF
EXAMINATION
GIRTH
BUTT
WELD
a)
VISUAL
A22A
10
11
12
FAB.
WELDS
OF
MITRES/
REDUC.
13
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
b)
RADIOGRAPHY
(NOTE 5,6)
10%
---
---
---
50%
c)
MP / LP (NOTE
4,6,10,11)
---
10%
---
10%
50%
NOTE 7
NOTE 7
NOTE-7
NOTE-7
NOTE-7
d)
HARDNESS
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
OF PIPING
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 9 of 13
SERVICE
III
ALL GENERAL
(CONTD) SERVICES
EXCEPT THOSE
SUBJECT TO
SEVERE
CYCLIC
CONDITIONS.
STEELS
WITH
Cr > 2%
& < 5%
5 ALL
3.5 Ni STEEL
9 - 80
TO
120
AUSTENITIC
STAINLESS
STEEL
8 - 29
TO
371
150#
- 29
TO
500
300#
TO
600#
10
11
FAB.
WELDS
OF
MITRES /
REDUC.)
12
13
150#
TO
600#
a)
VISUAL
A1K, A6K,
b)
RADIOGRAPHY
(NOTE 5,6)
c)
LP / MP (NOTE
4,6,10,11)
d)
HARDNESS
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
20%
---
---
---
100%
---
20%
---
20%
---
NOTE 7
NOTE 7
NOTE 7
NOTE 7
NOTE 7
AUSTENITIC
SS (IBR)
1.
2.
3.
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
OF PIPING
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 10 of 13
Branch welds shall consist of the welds between the pipe & reinforcing element (if any),
nozzles & reinforcing element and the pipe & nozzle under the reinforcing element.
Reinforcing element to be interpreted as pads, saddles, weldolets, sockolets etc.
2.
Seal welds of threaded joints shall be given the same examination as socket welds.
3.
4.
Magnetic Particle & the Liquid Penetrant method of examination shall be in accordance
with Section V of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Article VII and VI
respectively. The entire area of the accessible finished weld surface shall be examined.
Selected root runs, subject to a maximum of 10%, before finished weld, may also be
examined, at the discretion of the engineer-in-charge.
5.
a)
b)
"Random 10%" of Liquid Penetrant / Magnetic Particle test shall mean testing, by
applicable test, one weld for each ten welds or less made by the same welding
procedure or operator or both. Similarly "Random 20%" shall mean testing, by
applicable test, one weld for each five welds or less made by the same welding
procedure or operator or both.
c)
d)
Inspection shall be performed in the welds excluding those for which radiography
has been done.
e)
Girth weld, branch weld, attachment weld & socket weld of 3-1/2% Ni steel shall
be Liquid Penetrant tested only when welded with austenitic material where MP
test has been specified.
Radiography:
a)
"Random 10% or 20% radiography" shall mean examining not less than one from
each 10 welds or less in case of "Random 10% radiography" or one from each
five welds or less in case of "Random 20% radiography" made by the same
welding procedure or welder or both. Irrespective of percentage, no. of welds to
be radiographed shall be minimum 1. However first two welds made by each
welder shall also be radiographed in case of "Random radiography". Welds
selected for examination shall not include flange welds and shall be radiographed
for their entire length. However, where it is impossible or impracticable to
examine the entire weld length of field welds for either random or 100%
radiography, and if the same impossibility is agreeable to EIL site-in- charge, then
a single 120 deg. exposure of the weld length may be given a Magnetic Particle
test or Liquid Penetrant test. However in such cases for ferro-magnetic materials,
only MP test shall be acceptable for classes higher than 600#.
b)
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
OF PIPING
c)
6.
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 11 of 13
Number of radiographs per one circumferential weld shall be as per ASME Sec.V
Articles 2 and 22.
When radiography or other non destructive inspection is specified, acceptance criteria for
repairs or defects shall be as follows:
a)
b)
Two additional examinations of same type shall be made of the same kind
of item (if welded joint, then by the same welding procedure or operator
or both).
b.2
b.3
b.4
If all the items examined as required by b.3 are acceptable, the items
requiring repair shall be repaired or replaced and reexamined as required,
and all items represented by this further examination shall be accepted.
b.5
Number of times repair welding could be done for the same weld before
acceptance shall be as follows:
b.6
Material
3 or less
2 or less
Killed steel
2 or less
2 or less
Austenitic S.S.
2 or less
3.5 Ni steel
2 or less
2 or less
2 or less
Others
2 or less
Welds not found acceptable for allowed number of times of repair as per
b.5 above shall be replaced and reexamined.
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
OF PIPING
b.7
7.
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 12 of 13
Hardness Test:
a)
b)
c)
All welds which are given heat treatment shall be hardness tested.
Hardness test shall be performed after final heat treatment.
d)
e)
f)
The hardness limit applies to the weld and heat affected zone. Following
hardness values shall be maintained:
g)
Maximum
Hardness
(BHN/RC)
CS
238BHN/RC22
CS (NACE), Caustic,
Amine, H2
200BHN
Cr Upto 2%
225BHN
Cr 2.25%-10%
241BHN
18/8 SS (NACE)
RC22
Duplex SS (NACE)
RC28
RC35
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
OF PIPING
8.
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 13 of 13
For IBR service lines, following IBR requirements shall apply in addition to the notes 4, 5, 6,
7, 12 and Table I. In case of conflict between above notes and these requirements, the more
stringent ones shall apply. IBR piping shall be erected of IBR inspector approved material and
construction procedure. Erected piping shall be hydrotested, inspected and approved by IBR
inspector.
a)
b)
Piping 102 mm (4") bore and under, but not less than 38 mm (1-1/2") bore:
Two percent of welds made by each welder on a pipeline with a minimum of one weld
per welder, selected at random, shall be subjected to radiography or may be cut for
visual examination and tests.
c)
d)
Retests:
If any test specimen is unsatisfactory, two further weld specimens for retests shall be
selected from the production welds and subjected to tests. In the event of failure of
any retest specimens, the production welds carried out by this welder subsequent to
the previous test shall be given special consideration.
9.
For fabricated fittings LP test shall be done on the final pass of welding only, in addition to
visual examination.
10.
For mitres and fabricated reducers, LP / MP test shall be done on root pass in addition to
radiography applicable to circumferential joint of respective piping class.
11.
For branch connections, LP/MP test shall be done on root pass and final pass.
12.
10% of the butt weld joints shall be radiographed, however, 50% of these butt weld joints
shall be field weld joints.
13.
In addition to radiography, butt weld joints for NACE classes (A16A, B16A, D16A, etc) shall
be wet fluorescent magnetic particle tested.
14.
For lined specs, testing (MP/LP/Radiography etc.) shall be performed before lining.
15.
Weld deposits should be checked for ferrite content. A Ferrite Number (FN) of not less than
3 percent and not more than 10 percent is required to avoid sigma phase embrittlement during
post weld heat treatment and high temperature service. FN may be determined by use of a
Ferrite scope or may be calculated using Schaeffler or DeLong diagrams (the De Long
diagram should be used if FCAW welding is performed). Ferrite scope measurements must be
made prior to post weld heat treatment to be meaningful.
N55000
N
NOTES :N50000
N45000
N40000
GREEN
BEL
WI
DE
E55000
E50000
N35000
E45000
E40000
IDE
0MW
.
0
0
2
T
EN
BE
LT
200
.0
MW
IDE
A
E-9
RV
4/8
FC
63.9
UR
9T
VE
P-1
-9A
OF
CU
RV
E-9
B
CU
OF
P-1
4/8
37
T
CH
CH
4/9
15.1
4T
F CUR
VE-9C
CH 4/
909.03
SUB - STN-15
CH 4/
987.13
TP
TP-1 O
-2 OF
CURV
E-9C
CH
CH
4/9
42.1
P-2
O
3T
P-2
OF
C
UR
VE
-9B
GR
EE
NB
ELT
200
.0
M
GR
E
NITROGEN PLANT
(BY BOCIL)
SRR-7
(32.5X12.0)
POND
DET-2
EE
GR
LT
BE
0
0.
20
M
E
ID
W
EN
E
GR
LT
BE
0.
20
POND
P.S.
W
SULPHUR YARD
E
ID
GRE
EN
BEL
T2
00.
0M
LIQUID SULPHUR
LOADING GANTRY
WEIGH
BRIDGE
0M
SULPHUR
TANKS
WID
E
D
25
24
B
A
24
28
30
25
DATE
26
30
1.0
16.5
REVISIONS
BY
CHKD APPD
14.5
25
25
45
16.5
24
30
16.5
BHARAT OMAN
REFINERIES LIMITED
12.5
12.5
25.0
16.5
16.5
9.0
JOB NO.
UNIT
DIVN. DEPT.
DWG. NO.
3-1641-0500 REV.2
REV.
A0-1189 x 841
SCALE
1
3
4
4
DRAWINGS
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-DR-4070 Rev.0
Page 1 of 3
DRAWINGS
(STRUCTURAL)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT
OWNER
PMC
JOB NO.
A702
Bidders signature
and stamp
02.02.2016
AKS
AM
DCB
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
DRAWINGS
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-DR-4070-Rev.0
Page 2 of 3
DRAWINGS
STRUCTURAL
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-DR-4070-Rev.0
Page 3 of 3
LIST OF DRAWINGS
S.N.
TITLE
REV
SHTS
A702-000-16-47-0001
A702-000-81-41-34140
A702-000-81-41-44701
DRAWING NO
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
gz:Er OW.5
,
- ovl
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
micico f4f4RM'
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
25/09/14
28/06/13
DS
SPC
PB
DM
07/07/10
SPC
PB
MIUDM
ND
31/07/06
PPP
AK
SMA
VJN
06/05/02
AK
SMA
NN
GRR
23/02/98
PPP
AK
NN
AS
04/02/92
SCM
AK
KNP
RNS
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Rev.
No
Date
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
$'fg- rf 2f51dg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
iA Glrol
of mdra Uncleital,N)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 14
Abbreviations:
BHN
CT
E1L
GA
HTB
IS
LT
MOC
MT
QA
SS
SWL
k31
fa2e5
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
of ifitho
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 14
Contents
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
3.0
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
SPARE PARTS
ANNEXURE-I
.14
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
ENGINEEFZS
INDIA LIMITED
GoA nt Indo UndeitakiN,
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 14
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
This specification outlines the minimum requirements under which the manufacturer shall
design, manufacture, test and supply the Electric Overhead Travelling (EOT) Crane, complete
with al I accessories.
This standard is based on the following Indian Standards, and the standards referred therein,
which shall be deemed to be part of this standard:
IS-3177
IS-807
1S- 15560
IS-5749
IS- 3443
IS-2266
IS-304
IS-305
Latest revision of the above-inentioned standards as on the date of enquiry shall be applicable.
2.2
Other international standards may also be acceptable subject to their being equivalent or
superior with prior approval of purchaser.
2.3
For provisions not covered by the above codes & standards, applicable good engineering
practices and norms of the industry shall be applicable.
2.4
National laws and statutory provisions, together with any Local by-laws for the state wherein
crane is required to be installed shall be complied with.
Clause no. 7.4.8.2 (Addition): For double girder EOT crane, a full-length platform
shall be provided on drive side girder. Two short platforrns shall be provided on nondrive side girder at both ends.
ii)
Clause no. 8.1.1 (Modification): Unless otherwise specified, for crane capacity of less
than 50MT, lifting hooks shall comply with IS 15560 and for crane capacity of 50MT
and above , lifting hook shall be Ramshorn type and shall comply with IS 5749.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
GuN inda
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 5 of 14
i)
iv)
Clause no. 8.3.1 (Addition): Wire ropes shall be either 6x36 or 6x37 construction,
unless specified otherw ise.
v)
Clause no. 8.4.3 (Modification): The drum shall be flanged on both ends.
vi)
Clause no. 8.4.7 (Modification): In case drum is fabricated from seamless pipe, then
the diameter of the drums at the bottom of the groove need not be standardized.
vi i)
Clause no. 8.4.7 (Modification): Cast iron drum shall not be acceptable.
viii)
ix)
Clause no. 8.6.3 (Modification): Wheel hardness value specified is not applicable for
HTB/ Aluminium bronze tyres.
x)
Clause no. 8.6.4 (Modification): The wheel shall be made of forged steel. MOC of
wheel shall be C55Mn75 or superior.
xi)
Clause no. 8.6.11 (Addition): The width of wheel tread shall be 35 mm and 15mm
more than the rail bead, for Long travel and Cross travel wheels respectively, unless
specified otherwise.
xii)
Clause no. 8.7.1 (Modification): All bearings shall be anti friction type with dust proof
seals. Bearings L io life shall be minimum 10000 hrs for M5 duty class and 25000 hrs
for M6-M7 duty class. All bearings shall be of SKF/ FAG/ NTN make only
xiii)
xiv)
Clause no. 8.11.2 (Modification): Spring buffer shall be used. Plastic / Rubber /
Polyurethane buffers are not acceptable.
xv)
Clause no. 8.12.3 (Addition): In case electro-hydraulic thruster type brake is provided
for hoisting motion, the same shall be provided with anti drop circuitry to arrest
dropping of load while brake is applied.
xvi)
Clause no. 8.12.4, 8.12.5 (Addition): Braking torque for LT and CT motion shall not
be less than 125% of maximum torque of selected motor.
xvii) Clause no. 14.5 (Addition): Unless otherwise specified, Radio Remote Control (RRC),
conforming to IS:3177 along with the following additional features shall be provided:
a)
There shall be common push button for siren and START and a separate push
button for ander bridge lights. Crane shall start with time delay after the siren is
blown.
b)
c)
Two sets of long life Nickel Cadmium batteries for the transmitter along with a
battery charger shall be provided ( i.e 1 set installed battery + 1 set spare battery +
1 charger) for each radio remote.
d)
Necessary operating license/ permission for the RRC system on the Crane shall
be arranged by the Vendor from the statutory bodies. License fee, if any should be
borne by the Vendor for the first time on behalf of Owner/EIL.
General (Addition):
a) Crane shall be designed for Mechanism Class "M5" as minimum unless
otherwise specified in datasheet.
flfjreg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
ntiba I lnklettakiir4,
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
For crane with more than 10 MT capacity, LT motion shall be provided with two
speeds. Second speed shall not exceed 50% of main LT speed.
The end carriage shall be fitted with safety stops to prevent crane from falling
more than one inch in the event of breakage of a track wheel or axle.
End carriage/ crab shall be designed so as to enable the track wheels to be
withdrawn readily. jacking pads shall be provided for jacking up the crane for
changing crane wheels.
xx)
3.2
Clause no 22.1 (Addition): Repair cages shall be provided below the end carriage for
maintenance of DSL (shrouded conductor system) and current collectors. The
approach to repair cage will be provided from bridge platform by a ladder.
MOC of wheel shall be solid construction in High Tensile Brass / Aluminium Bronze
or all Wheels shall be provided with High Tensile Brass /Aluminium bronze /SS tyres
on core wheel of forged C55Mn75 or superior MOC. The minimum thickness of tyres
shall be 30mm at the tread.
The minimum core diameter of the wheel on which the HTB/Aluminium bronze tyre is
shrunk, shall be calculated as per the formula given in Clause .no 8.6.6 of IS-3177.
ii)
Wheel hardness value as specified in Clause. no. 8.6.3 of 1S-3177 is not applicable for
Cranes having HTB/Aluminium bronze/SS tyres.
iii)
Main hoisting hook and Auxiliary hoisting hook material shall be of forged stainless
steel / bronze coated forged steel.
iv)
v)
Any mechanism where two non-lubricated parts mate, one of them shall be of nonferrous material like HTB or Aluminium Bronze.
vi)
vii)
3.3
Noise levet shall not exceed 85 dB (A) at one (1) meter distance from the source of noise.
4.0
4.1
Equipment shall be subjected to stage-wise expediting, inspection and testing at vendor's/subvendor's works by purchaser/its authorised inspection agency. Vendor shall submit Quality
Assurance (QA) plan before commencement of fabrication. Approved QA plan shall foffn the
basis for equipment inspection.
4.2
Testing at Works
4.2.1
Vendor shall perfoun tests and inspection necessary to ensure that the material and
workmanship conform to the requirement of Clause 26 and 27 of IS-3177. Load and over load
tests shall also be carried out at vendor's works.
42.2 Any or all the tests, at purchaser's option, shall be witnessed by purchaser/its authorised
inspection agency. However, such inspection shall be regarded as check-up and shall in no way
absolve the vendor of his responsibility.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
of Indu Undeitdk,,,q)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 7 of 14
4.3
4.3.1
A field performance test shall be conducted by the vendor to demonstrate the performance of
the equipment after commissioning in accordance with PG test procedure prepared as per EIL
Standard 7-76-0103.
The procedure of performance testing shall be submitted for Purchaser's review and shall be
mutually agreed between the purchaser and the vendor.
4.3.2 A field performance test shall be conducted by the vendor to demonstrate the performance of
the Crane after commissioning as per clause 28 of IS-3177. Following parameters shall be
guaranteed.
i)
i i)
iii)
4.3.3 All parts of the crane shall operate satisfactorily with no undue friction, noise or display of any
other unfavourable characteristics during the performance test.
4.3.4 All equipment and component parts shall be guaranteed by the vendor against defective
material and design for a period as specified in Purchaser's general purchase conditions.
4.3.5 If any defect occurs during the guaranteed period the Vendor shall make all necessary
alterations, repairs and replacement at their own cost.
4.3.6 Necessary instruments for the performance testing shall be arranged by the vendor, and shall
be tested and calibrated before undertaking the performance test. Only test load shall be
provided by purchaser near test site.
5.0 PROTECTION AND PAINTING
5.1
Unless otherwise specified in job specification, surface preparation and painting system for
fabricated items shall be as below:
Surface
preparation
Primer
SSPC-SP-10
(SA-2)
Finish Paint
polyamine hardener)
DFT/coat
@ 100 gm
Refer Table no. 6.1, 6.2 6.3 & 6.4 attached at the end of this specification for the properties of
different paints (primer/finish paint) as mentioned above.
Refer Annexure-I for the List of recommended manufacturers of paints attached at the end of
this specification.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
140,1 1,1 India lInth,r131.,,,
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 8 of 14
5.2
Surface preparation and paintings for all bought out components shall be as per respective subvendor's standards suitablc for industrial corrosive environment.
5.3
5.4
All machined and bearing surfaces shall be protected against rust with a thick coat of grease.
6.0
6.1
All packaging shall be done in such a manner as to reduce the volume. The equipment shall be
dismantled into major components, suitable for shipment and shall be properly packed to
provide adequate protection during shipment. All assemblies shall be properly match marked
for site erection.
6.2
Attachments, spare parts of the equipment and small iterns shall be packed separately in
wooden-cases. Each item shall be appropriately tagged with identification of main equipment,
item denomination and reference number of the respective assembly drawing.
6.3
Detailed packing list in water-proof envelope shall be inserted in the package together with
equipment.
6.4
Each equipment shall have an identification plate giving salient equipment data, make, year of
manufacture, equipment number, name of manufacturer etc.
6.5
Vendor shall furnish procedure for prolonged storage of supplied equipment/ material at site.
7.0
SPARE PARTS
7.1
Vendor shall submit list of spare parts with recommended quantities and itemised prices for
first two years of operation of the equipment. Proper coding and referencing of spare parts
shall be done so that later identification with appropriate equipment is facilitated.
7.2
Recommended spares and their quantities should take into account related factors of equipment
reliability, effect of equipment downtime upon production or safety, cost of parts and
availability of vendor's service facilities around the proposed location of equipment.
7.3
Vendor shall also submit a list of commissioning spares with quantities. The commissioning
spares shall be sufficient for trouble free commissioning of the system at site. Any
commissioning spares required during commissioning, over and above, the commissioning
spares supplied, shall be made available by the vendor without any cost and time implication to
purchaser. If for any reason, during commissioning, vendor needs to utilise spares from 2
years' operation spares, the same shall be replenished by vendor within a reasonable time
without any cost implication to purchaser. Any unused commissioning spares shall be handed
over to owner.
iaWs
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 9 of 14
P-2
DESCRIPT1 N
P-4
Chleriasted
l
Trchnical nme
priracrish
wa
rubbin- Zill
Phosphate primer. prrner
Sinsit pack, air
Volume ScIids %
Two pack
Iryingcbkirinalett polyvinyl butyral
resin medium
rublier based
curod with
maditun
phowituik; auld
pla:4.-. 1sed vtith
solulion
urisapcnilizble
pigmented with
plagieizen
zinc tetroxy
pignieeted with
chromate.
' c ii i li hate.
.
P-4
Eipy inc
phosphatc prirrier
Two component
polyamine crred
epoxy resin
mediurn,
p[guteuted widi
zinc phesphate,
P-7
21NG A,
LOCKITIE
ZRC
col4 galvonizing
One pook
Synthetic Itesin
based zinc
gairani2ing
lmilatiitinig arliu
92% of electrolync
zinc dust of
99.95%purity.
,
40 3
'
40-45
I 0 I
55 I
8-10
8-10
8-10
8-10
Ituzikg
130d/5
1.219.05
1.44.05
2.67 kg at 15IC
30 minurtes
2 hrs.
Afler 30 min.
10 ntinutes
40-5Dp
macrons
5
6
Theoritical covering
II
..
(maxirnuin.)
Overconting interval
Pot life at 3cre for two
8 hiS.
24 iirS.
8 hrs
24 hrs.
Min.: 8 hrs
Min.:81urs.
Dilin.:4 hrs
corportent painta
Tarrpozture (Resistuce
a
(mnuenum)
bl
Applicae
50C
Dr! service
Not applicable
6 - 8 lu.N..,
Unitirnited
NA
STC
Dry servicee
50C
Dry service
Not
Dry service
02d5
Slil
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
ol
I Indp(1,3king,
rio
DESCRITTION
Technical nane
Type ind
itiQl.'
Voluatc Solids %
DFT (Dry FRIn
thiclutess) per ,....oat in
microns
Thearitical covering
en ` in
F-2
F-3
Acrylic
Odorinatexl
Polyureihane rubber based
fiaish pairt fiaish pai nt
Single pack
plasticised
oblerin.sted
Two-pack
aliplunie
rubber based
rnedium with
isacynate
eared acrylic cheinical and
foish paint. weather
resistant
L.- s.
382
.10 3
F-dAili
F-6C
1-6A
Two-pack
Aroruatic
amine
eurcd epo>y resin
suitably
Inediurn
pigmentedF-6B: peiyarnidle
eured epoxy resin
meclium suitably
.i
nt4e4
6{3
Two
cured
Amiine
Adduct
.act
.,Ick, Two
. . ''''
''' .
_
with poryamute
cured
resin
epoxy
blended
cotalvzed
epor,
r....sin nsedrure,
.
suttably
surtably
,
pittmented
pi
991
653
30-10sr
30-40
100-125a
200-500
100-125p
11-15
11-15
5-6
2-3
,-,
$-L-6,5
1.150.03
1.150.03
1.4210.03
1.40-10.03
1:10:k0li3
30 minutes
30 rninutes.
3 hrs.
3 hrs.
4 hrs.
/r,4 /coatilitre
Weigilt Pes iikr ff'
kgs4itre
Touch dry at 30ee
1-1 d dry at 30C
(max)
Full core ar 30*C (for
inunetsinni high
temperature service)
Over-coatin,g interval
at 30C
Pot lifr..lapprox.) at
10 3.0C for two
canyenent paints
Temperature
Resistante
II (minirnurn)
16 his
8 hrs
r.11;11.12 hrs.
6_8 hr5,
80 'C
Dry service
rein
8 hrs
5 days
48 hrs
16 hrs
5 days
Ivrto.;
everni In
Min,: Overright
Max.: 5 days
iitia,; 8 hrs,
Max.: 48 113.
144in.; 24 hrs
Max.: 5 days.
Nett
applicable
4-6 hrs
10 tninntcs
4-6 lis
80C
Dry service
1120C(Dry
servicc.),
50C
(Imucrsion
service)
II25C
Irnrnersion
.
service
60C
Ilwmion
service
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
in lluN ld
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 11 of 14
hcr
F-A
1 N1
Teclune 1 nasur
position
Klbering to
ari ua I I y
prepared surface
and old coutuag.
ITI
3
4
10
F-12
F-11
ticsM ttsistant
Iner;artit zinc
silicatc contng
tic mrdium
twopnck
Paint
seitahle upta
zerc dry temp.
A tun park air
driing self euring
solvent based
Inot-tanic zhe
Heat tesistant
s)nthetic medium
based
SIlicliteceatmg with
park
. .
.
zinc
miThimum 8"
Alumunum pont
, ,,
conten1 can ary rarn
sutable upto
The Enal cure of
250PC
the dry film diall
pass the MEK mb
test.
3M4O.03
60+3
Iltat rtsistant
silicone
.
, ,
Alurnmann raint
sititable upto
5000c diy tonap_
Single pack
stheaue resm
based medium
with mominium
ankei.
''''
100-125
0.5-75g
15-20g
15-2014
15.0-7.2
8-9
10-12
8-10
1A1+0.03
2340.03
0.95+4.03
1.00+0 03
3 hrs.
30 minmes.
3 hrs.
30 minutes.
24 hrs
12
12 hrs
24 hrs
Sdays
"NA
NA
NA
Ovcr-coatingintental
f'10 hrs
Min. 24 nrs
Min.: 24 hrs
90 minutcs.
4.6 lu.
Nu aapplicxblc
Not applk.ahle
80 C
E:try service
400C
Dry scryke
2 0C
Dry service
500C
Dry service
(rnaxinsum)
78+1
F-9
Temperntire
Rasistance (ux
IA,2A
laWs
Iii
I .0,1 t
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
lindertakmg,
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 12 of 14
DESCR1PTION
Technical name
Volurne Solids Vo
OFT (Dry Film
thickricss)per coat in
uniroos
Theorki cal covering
capacity in M2 feoati
litre
Weight per Itter in
kgsflite (inix palhlt)
Touch dry at 30C
(rnardmurn)
Hard dry ar 301`C
(maximuni)
Fu11 cure 30C (for
immersion ihigh
temp. service)
Over-coating interval
5
6
7
9
10
11
F-14
F-15
Two-corriponent
Epoxy
phenolie
coatin
g cured with
Polyarnine cured Polyarnine adduct
bardner
systern
coal mr epoxy
(primer
+
intermediate coat
+ linisb paint)
Two pack ambient
Spec1ally
temperature curing
fortradatcd
epoxy
phenolic
polyarnin
e
cured
..
system
coatmg
. ..
coal Mr eprocy
suitabie
for
for
suitable
uppliea(ion under
application under inwatiott
of
insulation
CS/SS piping
7 03
703
F-16
F-17
Ambient temperature
unOR Polv Silaxane
'
b id
cn.."-. ,,,,,,
cvs'" .5''' 111 .
cold appbed inorgante
copolymer
based
. .
aluminturn
coating
.
stutable
for under
insulation coating
f
CS and SS piping for
high
temperature
service.
Two
contponent
cninpofte
6012
100-125
75-100E
75-100
125- 150
5-8
4-5
7,0- 9.0
6.5 - 8
1.451-0.03
1,6510,03
1,3
1.7
4 hrs
3 hrs
1 hr
2 hrs
24 hrs
24 hrs
16 hrs
24 hrs
..
Min. 6 hrs
Max.5 days
Min. 36 hrs
fvtax.2I d
Min.16 hrs
Max, Not appl icable
Min. 16 hrs
Max.2 1 days
4 hrs
4-6 hrs
I hr
1 hr
-45C to 125C
under insulation
And irrunersion
g
SIJ1 IMJ e
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 13 of 14
3. All paints shall be applied In accordance with manufacturer's instructions for surface
preparation, intervals, euring and application. The surface preparation, quality and
workmanship should be ensured. In case of conflict between this specification and
manufacturer's recornrnendation, the same shall be clarificd through EIL SMMS
department,
4. Technical data sheets for all paints shall be supplied at the time of subrnission of
quotations.
5. F-I5: Two-component Epoxy phenolie coating cured with Polyamine adduct hardner
system (primer + interrnediate coat + finish paint) suitable upto 225C (Intertherm 228
from M/s Alzzo Nobcl Coatings India Pvt Ltd. Bangalore). For all other companies, the
temperature resistanee shall be a maximum of 1 50C.
6. F-16: Ambient temperature ctxring epoxy poly siloxane Coating or high build cold
applied inorganic co-polymer based aluminiurn coating.
Amereoat 738 from PPG Protective & Marine coatings. Mumbai, is suitable up to
480C for CS surfaces and 600C for SS surfaces.
Intertherm 751 from Akzo Nobel Coatings India Pvt Ltd. Bangalore, Inorganic copolym er cold applied Aluminium spray coaaing iis suitable upto 400C of CS & SS
surfaces.
ul
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
iAi,rM of Indo Undett.31,,n,4i
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 14 of 14
ANNEXURE-I
LIST OF RECOMIE-NDED 3LkNITACTURERS
Indian Vendors
3
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1 0.
11_
12_
13_
14.
15_
16.
1'7.
1. 8_
19.
20_
1.
2.
3,
4_
5.
6.
7.
.
- g chenuc
The fo1iomg are approved vendors for speciality items (phosphatin
1. Mark-chem Incorporated, Mumbai
2_Cbemtreat India Ltd., Nav: Mumbai
ara_.1t4
faf5ieg
rwasrld51,121714,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Go, ,ndia Un.,tak.ng)
11
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
VENTILATION/PRESSURISATION
SYSTEM
11 C1
V
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 11
0:111ct/RICI fl.171
Rev)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
VENTILATION/PRESSURISATION
SYSTEM
10/05/11
AA
APSA
MK"
23/08/05
AN
AJ
PKR
VJN
22/04/98
KLS
MST
NN
AS
18/01/91
KLS
RB
KNP
RNS
Standards
Committee
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
0
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Convenor
DM
Approved by
51
r Egleg
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Gout 0/ India Undertak.91
FOR
VENTILATION/PRESSURISATION
SYSTEM
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 2 of 11
Abbreviations:
AMCA
ASHRAE
ASME
BKW
BS
dB
GI
GSS
IS
SMACNA
UL
Members :
401 q-I
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Ifg-4,
102-eg
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
VENTILATION/PRESSURISATION
SYSTEM
Page 3 of 11
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
11
11
11
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
lafaelei rCft
FOR
INDIA LIMITED VENTILATION/PRESSURISATION
$i ar fafflegW
elea =WO
(A Govl of India Undenalond)
SYSTEM
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
(011M
1.0
frEI
Page 4 of 11
GENERAL
This specification outlines the minimum requirements under which the manufacturer shall
design, manufacture, test and supply the Ventilation/Pressurisation System, complete with all
accessories.
2.0
2.1
Latest editions of the following codes and standards as on the date of enquiry shall govern:
IS:4894
: Centrifugal Fan s
IS:3588
IS:2312
IS:2494 (Part-2)
IS:3142
IS:3103
IS:277
IS:2062
IS 655
BS EN 779
AMCA-210
ASHRAE
: Handbooks of:
- Fundamentals.
- HVAC Systems and Equipments.
- HVAC Applications.
2.2
Other international standards may also be acceptable subject to their being equivalent or
superior to those listed above, with prior approval of purchaser.
2.3
For provisions not covered by the above codes & standards, applicable good engineering
practices and norms shall govern.
3.0
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1
3.2
3.3
The extent of over pressure in pressurised room shall be minimum 3 mm water column, unless
otherwise specified in data sheet/Job specification.
3.4
Centrifugal Fan
3.4.1
Fan casing shall be of heavy gauge steel volute chamber, rigidly reinforced and supported by
structural angles to prevent drumming. The joints shall be sealed airtight.
faigjeg
Igar
lailellakedireanagrok)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
VENTILATION/PRESSURISATION
SYSTEM
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 11
3.4.2
Larger sizes of fans shall have split casing for ease of maintenance of rotor as per manufacture
standard practice.
3.4.3
The fan impeller shall have die-formed backward curved blades welded to the rim and back
plate to have a smooth contour.
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
Fan operating speed shall not be more than 90% of the maximum permissible speed.
3.4.7
Bearings shall be sealed against ingress of dust. Bearings and Plummer block shall be of
SKF/FAG/NTN make only.
3.4.8
Bearings housed in plummer blocks shall be grease lubricated and of air-cooled design. Nipple
for greasing shall be provided.
3.4.9
Fan & driver shall be bolted rigidly on a common steel structural base frame grouted on a precast concrete block floating on neoprene vibration isolators.
3.4.10 All supports, brackets, gaskets, foundation & fixing bolts etc. shall be supplied by vendor.
3.4.11 Torque-speed characteristics of fan and motor shall be matched.
3.4.12 Volume control damper of multi louvered type & flame resistant canvas connection with
metallic flanges shall be provided at fan outlet.
3.4.13 V grooved Taper lock pulleys shall be provided with antistatic belts for drive.
3.4.14 Unless specified otherwise in data sheet, fan outlet velocity shall not exceed 10 m/sec.
3.4.15 Electric motor drivers shall have a maximum continuous rating (MCR) (i.e., service factor
equal to 1) not lower than the following:
Centrifugal fan Rated BKW
Less than 22
125%
22 to 55
115%
More than 55
110%
The motor rating shall also be adequate for operation of centrifugal fan at specified minimum
ambient conditions at rated speed in un-throttled conditions.
3.5
Axial Fan
3.5.1
Fans shall be heavy duty Industrial type suitable for continuous operation.
3.5.2
Fan impeller shall be in metallurgy suitable for the fluid being handled. High efficiency
aerofoil section multi bladed impeller shall be used.
3.5.3
51gar
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Et&
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
VENTILATION/PRESSURISATION
SYSTEM
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 6 of 11
3.5.4
Fan shall be suitable for mounting in duct/wall or as specified in job specifications/ data sheet.
Casing shall be all welded sheet metal construction with flanges on both sides.
3.6
3.6.1
Air Intake into each blower room shall be by provision of suitable opening in the wall through
louvers with bird protection screen.
3.6.2
All ducts shall be made of galvanised steel sheets conforming to atleast grade 120 of IS: 277.
3.6.3
3.6.4
Duct flanges shall be supported with anchor fasteners in the roof. Anchor fasteners shall be
provided by vendor. Duct supporting hangers shall be used at a spacing not exceeding 2
meters.
3.6.5
All flange joints shall have 6mm thick Neoprene packing as gasket stuck to the flanges with
adhesive (viz., resins like Araldite or equivalent).
3.6.6
The entire duct shall be made air tight with the help of sealant (Foster 32:17 or MIRACLE D
617 or equivalent).
3.6.7
3.6.8
Supply air grilles shall be provided fitted with sponge foam tape. Volume control damper shall
be provided with each supply air grille. Volume control damper shall be key operated from the
front of grille. Supply air grilles shall be provided with vertical & horizontal adjustable
louvers.
3.6.9
Grilles shall be of powder coated steel/ anodised aluminium construction with anodised
aluminium angle frame.
3.6.10 Both horizontal branch and low-pressure ducts shall be designed by the "Equal Friction"
method with a pressure drop less than 2.5 mm WG/30 m. Duct velocity shall not exceed 9.2
m/sec for main supply air duct. For branch ducts leading to grilles, velocity shall be restricted
to 5.1 m/sec.
3.6.11 All outlets/Grilles shall be designed with a terminal velocity not exceeding 3.8 m/sec.
Manufacturers' published data shall be taken into account for proper air throw/distribution,
noise, and pressure drop. Selection must be made to ensure sound levels below NC 40. Sound
attenuators shall be installed in ducts, as required.
3.6.12 Where a branch duct takes off from a main supply air duct, an extractor shall be installed.
Each extractor shall be adjustable to a fixed position to divert the required volume of air to
each branch duct.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Igar iEte-eu
2920AZ CMS)
F-r) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undonak.n9)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
VENTILATION/PRESSURISATION
SYSTEM
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 7 of 11
3.6.13 Transition sections should be constructed such that the included angle for a converging section
is less than 15 degrees and for diverging section, less than 10 degrees. When space limitations
require transitions using larger angles, splitters shall be installed in the transition (except for
fan discharge). Duct transition through fire rated wall should not impair the rating of wall.
3.6.14 All damper linkages shall be of SS-304 material.
3.7
Intake Louvers
3.7.1
Intake louvers shall be of 20G G.I. Sheet constructed in plain strips of about 120mm width
and maximum 1000mm length. The edges of the louvers shall be bent to provide lip to restrict
carryover of rainwater falling on louvers.
3.7.2
Louvers shall be riveted at ends and fitted in 18G G.I. sheet channel framework to be fixed
with nuts and bolts on grouting frame in the wall opening.
3.7.3
Intake louvers shall be selected considering maximum velocity across louvers as 2.54 m/sec.
3.8
Filters
3.8.1
Filter media shall be multi mesh (4/5 ply) high-density polyethylene and crimped to form deep
folds with efficiency of 95% to particles of 10 microns unless specified otherwise in data
sheet.
3.8.2
3.8.3
Filters shall be suitable for mounting in carbon steel framework bolted to grouting frame.
3.8.4
Each filter frame shall be fixed with suitable gaskets to ensure proper sealing.
3.8.5
Filter shall be selected considering maximum velocity across filter as 1.78 m/sec.
3.9
Relief Dampers
3.9.1
Relief dampers are required to release excessive positive pressure inside the room beyond
design over pressure.
3.9.2
Relief dampers shall be counter weight actuated louver type with angle iron framework.
Louvers shall be hinged/riveted on rods, which are connected to common operating linkage
system. Operating mechanism should be free from all constraints and easy to get operated
automatically. Excessive air pressure should result in a horizontal force on louvers and torque
created by this force open the damper against counter weight and, when excessive air pressure
is released, it should close by action of counter weight.
3.9.3
Dampers shall be fitted on angle iron framework furnished by vendor complete with fixing
frame. Unless otherwise mentioned in Data Sheet, Damper blades shall be 20 Gauge G.I.
Sheet.
3.10
Fire Dampers
3.10.1 A combination of Fire and smoke dampers shall be installed in supply air path. These shall
conform to UL-555 and UL-555S for 1.5 hour fire rating and smoke leakage class I with
temperature category 176C. Type test certificate for fire dampers (equal or higher size of
same design) shall be furnished.
1092i
1fa
Og ,DI
faa-eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
1.4
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
VENTILATION/PRESSURISATION
SYSTEM
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 8 of 11
3.10.2 The fire dampers shall be provided with limit switches for indication of open/close position of
dampers on vendor's local panel.
3.10.3 Fire dampers shall be electric motorized type with spring return unless otherwise specified by
Purchaser. Fire damper shall be arranged in fail-safe configuration, i.e. damper shall be in
open position when power is ON. In case of power failure, damper shall close by spring
action. Signal from the purchaser's fire and gas panel shall be made available at vendor's local
control panel in the form of potential free contact. The wiring from the contact up to actuator
motor shall be done by vendor. The same signal shall be used for tripping the fans.
3.11 Water Manometer
3.11.1 Water manometer shall be of inclined tube manometer.
3.11.2 Vendor shall include all connections, tubes and stand.
3.11.3 One water manometer is required for measuring over-pressure of room with respect to outside
and the other for measuring pressure drop across filter.
3.12 Air Pressure Switch
Air pressure switch will be provided, if specified in Job specification. Air Pressure switch will
actuate an alarm, in case of failure of pressurisation.
3.13 Specific Requirements for Offshore Applications
3.13.1 All fire dampers shall be pneumatically operated.
3.13.2 Fire dampers shall be automatic, fail safe type (i.e. damper shall automatically close by spring
action in case of failure of pneumatic air supply) and shall operate pneumatically.
3.13.3 All sheet metal duct work shall be constructed of tested quality Stainless Steel (SS-304)
sheets. All ductwork shall be as per SMACNA. Thickness of sheet shall be minimum as per
following table:
Classification of
Duct by Pressure.
Medium
Pressure Duct
and High
Pressure Duct
L < 750
0.5
0.6
L<450
0.8
2200 < L
1.0
1200 <L
1.2
3.13.4 Ventilation for Battery room shall be by means of forced filtered air supply and forced air
exhaust system. Minimum 15 air changes/hr. shall be considered to dilute hydrogen air
mixture below ignitable level. 100% standby shall be provided for supply and exhaust fans for
Battery Room ventilation. All fans shall be provided with a back draft damper to prevent short
circuit of air flow under idle conditions. Electricals for Battery room ventilation equipment
shall be suitable for area classification defined in the data sheet.
Eteez
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
VENTILATION/PRESSURISATION
SYSTEM
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 9 of 11
3.13.5 Ventilation for Emergency Generator room and TG room shall be by means of forced filtered
air supply and forced air-exhaust system. 100% standby shall be provided for supply and
exhaust fans in TG and EG rooms. Air circulation rate is to be calculated based on maximum
room temperature rise of 5C above ambient DBT or minimum 15 air charges/ hr whichever is
maximum.
3.13.6 Mechanical Workshop, Repair room shall be ventilated by means of forced filtered air supply
and forced air exhaust system. 100% standby shall be provided for supply and exhaust fans.
Minimum 12 air changes/hr shall be considered for ventilation.
3.13.7 For all ventilation systems, the air supply may be through ducting with grills, if so required
due to hazardous area in the vicinity. In any case the intake and exhaust shall not be located
on the same side of wall close to each other. The materials shall be selected suitable for
corrosive saliferous environment. In addition, rotating equipment shall be of spark proof
design.
3.13.8 Material of construction of major Ventilation and pressurization equipment shall be as
follows. All other items shall be as per manufacturer's standard design suitable for outdoor
saliferous and humid environment of an offshore platform.
M.O.0
Equipment
Fan Shaft
Filters
SS Mesh
Filter Casing
SS-304
Grilles/Diffusers
SS-304
Duct material
SS-304
Damper Casing
SS-304
Damper Bush
Bronze
SS-304
Fan Impeller
SS-304
4.0
4.1
Equipment shall be subjected to stagewise expediting, inspection and testing at vendor's/subvendor's works by purchaser/its authorised inspection agency. Vendor shall submit Quality
Assurance (QA) Plans before commencement of fabrication. Approved QA Plans shall form
the basis for equipment inspection.
4.2
Testing at Works
4.2.1
Vendor shall perform tests and inspection necessary to ensure that the material and
workmanship conform to the requirement of this specification.
O ar
g
fafku
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
VENTILATION/PRESSURISATION
SYSTEM
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 10 of 11
4.2.2
Inspection & identification of raw materials as per approved quality plan. Test certificates
for materials, shall be produced for EIL Inspection.
4.2.3
4.2.4
General mechanical checks on fan assembly trueness, alignment clearances etc. for fans.
4.2.5
Mechanical running of fans, for 1 hour and general check on mechanical operation including
noise and vibration limits.
4.2.6
Performance test of fans at Manufacturer's Works/at Site as per applicable code depending
on availability of testing facility. However, for offshore application performance test at shop
is mandatory.
4.2.7
Type test certificate of fire damper as per UL-555 and UL-555S shall be furnished.
4.2.8
4.2.9
Any or all the tests may at EIL/Purchaser's option be witnessed by EIL/ purchaser.
However, such inspections shall be regarded as check-up and in no way absolve the vendor
of his responsibility.
4.3
Testing at Site
4.3.1
Inspection of raw materials to be used for fabrication and assembly and inspection of
manufacturer's test certificates.
4.3.2
4.4
4.4.1
A field performance test shall be conducted by the vendor to demonstrate the guaranteed
performance after commissioning in accordance with test procedure to be prepared as per EIL
Std. No. 7-76-0103.
The procedure of performance testing shall be submitted for Purchaser's review and shall be
mutually agreed between the purchaser and the vendor.
4.4.2
The following shall be guaranteed and demonstrated during the performance testing:
Air flow rate across intake louvers & filters.
Pressure drop across filters.
Noise level in pressurized/ventilated room and fan noise.
Air flow rate through each SA grille.
Positive pressure within space.
Functioning of Pressure Relief Dampers.
4.4.3
Necessary instruments for the performance testing shall be arranged by the vendor, and shall
be tested and calibrated before undertaking the performance test.
4.4.4
The performance test shall be for the period of 4 hours of continuous operation.
lfgar 1851-es
(NIPT, FROM' ffA WSW)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt
India Undertaking)
5.0
5.1
Surface preparation and painting shall be done as per Standard Specification for Shop and
Field painting (specification no.6-44-0004).
5.2
Stainless steel surfaces, both inside and outside, shall be pickled and passivated.
5.3
Machined and bearing surfaces shall be protected with varnish or thick coat of grease.
6.0
6.1
All packaging shall be done in such a manner as to reduce the volume. The equipment may be
dismantled into major components, suitable for shipment and shall be properly packed to
provide adequate protection during shipment. All assemblies shall be properly match marked
for site erection.
6.2
Attachments, spare parts of the equipment and small items shall be packed separately in
wooden-cases. Each item shall be appropriately tagged with identification of main equipment,
item denomination and reference number of the respective assembly drawing.
6.3
Detailed packing list in water-proof envelope shall be inserted in the package together with
equipment.
6.4
Each equipment shall have an identification plate giving salient equipment data, make, year of
manufacture, equipment number, name of manufacturer etc.
6.5
Vendor shall furnish procedure for prolonged storage of supplied equipment/ material at site.
7.0
SPARE PARTS
7.1
Vendor shall submit list of spare parts with recommended quantities and itemised prices for
first two years of operation of the equipment. Proper coding and referencing of spare parts
shall be done so that later identification with appropriate equipment is facilitated.
7.2
Recommended spares and their quantities should take into account related factors of
equipment reliability, effect of equipment downtime upon production or safety, cost of parts
and availability of vendor's service facilities around the proposed location of equipment.
7.3
Vendor shall also submit a list of commissioning spares with quantities. The commissioning
spares shall be sufficient for trouble free commissioning of the system at site. Any
commissioning spares required during commissioning, over and above, the commissioning
spares supplied, shall be made available by the vendor without any cost and time implication
to purchaser. If for any reason, during commissioning, vendor needs to utilise spares from 2
years' operational spares, the same shall be replenished by vendor within a reasonable time
without any cost implication to purchaser. Any unused commissioning spares shall be handed
over to owner.
ENGINEERS
lakgINDIA LIMITED
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 7
Rev.
No
General Revision
12.03.15
04.06.09
Purpose
Date
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
MPJ
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
SCT
Prepared by
Checked
by
SC
Standards
Committee
Convener
ND
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
lft2
(AG'"ind'Undelt6ung)
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
CV
Curriculum Vitae
ISO
MR
Material Requisition
PO
Purchase Order
PR
Purchase Requisition
QA
Quality Assurance
QMS
Members:
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Igar
Oiren
llks
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
'A
Govt
Clause
No.
Title
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 DEFINITIONS
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
4.0 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM GENERAL
5.0 QUALITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
6.0 AUDITS
7.0 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
Page
4
4
4
4
4
7
7
$1g-zg
IA GOVt of
120.2 .I J40.9)
India Undertaking)
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 7
SCOPE
This specification establishes the Quality Management System requirements to be
met by BIDDER for following purpose:
2.0
DEFINITIONS
2.1
Bidder
For the purpose of this specification, the word "BIDDER" means the person(s), firm,
company or organization who is under the process of being contracted by EIL /
Owner for delivery of some products (including service). The word is considered
synonymous to supplier, contractor or vendor.
2.2
2.3
Owner
Owner means the owner of the project for which services / products are being
purchased and includes their representatives, successors and assignees.
3.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
6-78-0002
6-78-0003
4.0
5.0
5.1
faReg
own
1.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
el
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gavt of India undertaking'
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 7
BIDDER shall identify all specified or implied statutory and regulatory requirements
and communicate the same to all concerned in his organization and his sub
contractor's organization for compliance.
5.3
BIDDER shall deploy competent and trained personnel for various activities for
fulfillment of PO / contract. BIDDER shall arrange adequate infrastructure and work
environment to ensure that the specification and quality of the deliverable are
maintained.
5.4
BIDDER shall do the quality planning for all activities involved in delivery of order.
The quality planning shall cover as minimum the following:
Resources
Product / deliverable characteristics to be controlled.
Process characteristics to ensure the identified product characteristics are
realized
Identification of any measurement requirements, acceptance criteria
Records to be generated
Need for any documented procedure
The quality planning shall result into the quality assurance plan, inspection and test
plans (ITPs) and job procedures for the project activities in the scope of bidder.
These documents shall be submitted to EIL/Owner for review/approval, before
commencement of work.
5.5
5.6
BIDDER shall plan and carry production and service provision under controlled
conditions. Controlled conditions shall include, as applicable
the availability of information that describes the characteristics of the product
the availability of work instructions
the use of suitable equipment
the availability and use of monitoring and measuring devices
the implementation of monitoring and measurement
the implementation of release, delivery and post-delivery activities
5.7
BIDDER shall validate any processes for production and service provision where
resulting output cannot be verified by subsequent monitoring and measurement.
This includes any process where deficiencies become apparent only after the
product is in use or service has been delivered.
5.8
ei
lge.ji id5fez
Oren erRRIZ .71.1.113,70
5.9
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India
undettaking)
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 7
BIDDER shall identify, verify, protect and safeguard EIL / Owner property (material /
document) provided for use or incorporation into the product. If any Owner / EIL
property is lost, damaged or otherwise found to be unsuitable for use, this shall be
reported to the EIL / Owner.
5.10
5.11
BIDDER shall establish system to ensure that inspection and testing activities are
carried out in line with requirements. Where necessary, measuring equipments
shall be calibrated at specified frequency, against national or international
measurement standards; where no such standard exists, the basis used for
calibration shall be recorded. The measuring equipments shall be protected from
damage during handling, maintenance and storage.
5.12
BIDDER shall ensure effective monitoring, using suitable methods, of the processes
involved in production and other related processes for delivery of the scope of
contract.
5.13
5.14
BIDDER shall establish and maintain a documented procedure to ensure that the
product which does not conform to requirements is identified and controlled to
prevent its unintended use or delivery
5.15
5.16
All deficiencies noticed and reported by EIL / Owner shall be analyzed by the
BIDDER and appropriate corrective and preventive actions shall be implemented.
BIDDER shall intimate EIL / Owner of all such corrective and preventive action
implemented by him.
5.17
5.18
5.19
All project records shall be carefully kept, maintained and protected for any damage
or loss until the project completion, then handed over to EIL / Owner as per contract
requirement (Refer Specification Nos. 6-78-0002 - Specification for Documentation
Requirements from Contractors and 6-78-0003 - Specification for Documentation
Requirements from Suppliers), or disposed as per relevant project procedure.
ei
IftJr
kif51ft.
wirer riraxem3Tmil
6.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Goof of India UndertakIngi
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 7
AUDITS
BIDDER shall plan and carry out the QMS audit for the job. Quality audit programme
shall cover design, procurement, construction management and commissioning as
applicable including activities carried out by sub-vendors and sub-contractors. This
shall be additional to the certification body surveillance audits carried out under
BIDDER'S own ISO 9001 certification scheme.
The audit programmes and audit reports shall be available with bidder for scrutiny
by EIL / Owner. EIL or Owner's representative reserves the right to attend, as a
witness, any audit conducted during the execution of the WORKS.
In addition to above EIL, Owner and third party appointed by EIL/Owner may also
perform Quality and Technical compliance audits. BIDDER shall provide assistance
and access to their systems and sub-contractor / vendor systems as required for this
purpose. Any deficiencies noted shall be immediately rectified by BIDDER.
7.0
DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
BIDDER shall submit following QMS documents immediately after award of work
(Within one week) for record / review by EIL / Owner.
Organization chart (for complete organization structure and for the project)
Project Quality Plan/Quality Assurance Plan
Job specific Inspection Test Plans, if not attached with PR
Job Procedures
Inspection/Test Formats
In addition to above QMS documents, following documentation shall be maintained
by the BIDDER for submission to EIL / Owner on demand at any point of time during
execution of the project.
Quality Manual
Certificate of approval for compliance to ISO: 9001 standard
Procedure for Control of Non-conforming Product
Procedure for Control of Documents
Sample audit report of the QMS internal and external audits conducted during
last one year
Customer satisfaction reports from at least 2 customers, during the last one
year
Project QMS audit report
Technical audit reports for the project
Corrective action report on the audits
Documents as specified above are minimum requirements. BIDDER shall submit
any other document/data required for completion of the job as per EIL/Owner
instructions.
ENGINEERS
101
** el!2RAfi'aA
Meavow INDIA LIMITED
IAIRON
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 8
51(t)01
-4-4-<R1
tr-g 1-4-4vr
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
FROM CONTRACTORS
12.03.15
General Revision
04.06.09
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
MPJ
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
SCT
Prepared
by
Checked
by
SC
ND
Standards
Committee
Standards
Bureau
Convener
Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
k311 ei
51g-a 015teg
1.1FA
2IETIN
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India
undertaking)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 8
Abbreviations:
DCI
eDMS -
FOA
Fax of Acceptance
HOD
IC
Inspection Certificate
IRN
ITP
LOA
Letter of Acceptance
MOU
Memorandum of Understanding
QMS
URL
Members:
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 3 of 8
CONTENTS
Clause
Title
Page
No.
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
3.0
4.0
DEFINITIONS
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
4
4
4
4
Attachments
Format for completeness of Final Documentation
1.0
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 8
SCOPE
This specification establishes the Documentation Requirements from Contractors
All documents/data against the Tender / Contract shall be developed and submitted
to ElUOwner by the contractor for review / records, in line with this specification.
2.0
DEFINITIONS
2.1
Contractor
For the purpose of this specification, the word "CONTRACTOR" means the
person(s), firm, company or organization who is under the process of being
contracted by EIL / Owner for delivery of some products and services. The word is
considered synonymous to bidder, supplier or vendor.
2.2
Owner
Owner means the owner of the project for which services / products are being
purchased and includes their representatives, successors and assignees.
3.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
6-78-0001
4.0
DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
4.1
4.1.1
The contractor shall submit the documents and data against the Tender/Contract as
per the list specified in respective Tender/Contract.
4.1.2
Review of the contractor drawings by EIL would be only to review the compatibility
with basic designs and concepts and in no way absolve the contractor of his
responsibility/contractual obligation to comply with Tender/Contract requirements,
applicable codes, specifications and statutory rules/regulations. Any error/deficiency
noticed during any stage of manufacturing/execution/installation shall be promptly
corrected by the contractor without any extra cost or time, whether or not comments
on the same were received from EIL during the drawing review stage.
4.1.3
4.1.4
- 1week
- 2weeks
- As per approved Drawing/Document Control
Index/Schedule
ei
acs
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 8
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
Before submitting the drawings and documents, contractor shall ensure that the
following information are properly entered in each drawing:
Tender Number
Name of Equipment / Package
Equipment / Package Tag No.
Name of Project
Owner
Main Contractor (if work is sub-contracted)
Drawing / Document Title
Drawing / Document No.
Drawing / Document Revision No. and Date
4.3
4.3.1
4.4
Document Category
4.4.1
Review
Category
Review Code 2
Review Code 3
Void
4.5
4.5.1
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
tra
4.5.2
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 8
Submission of Drawings/Documents
Drawings/documents and data shall be uploaded on the EIL eDMS Portal. The detail
guidelines for uploading documents on EIL eDMS Portal are available on following
URL
http://edocx.ei Lco. i n/vporta I
4.5.3
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
Statutory Approvals
Wherever approval by any statutory body is required to be taken by Contractor, the
Contractor shall submit copy of approval by the authority to EIL.
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
4.5.7
Ogof
IOM
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
0,1.I
(A Govt W
Indio Undertalung)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 8
Note: Non fulfilling above requirement shall result into appropriate penalty or withholding of payment as per conditions of Tender/Contract.
4.6
Final Documentation
4.6.1
As built Drawings
Shop/Site changes made by contractor after approval of drawings under 'Code 1' by
EIL and deviations granted through online system , if any, shall be marked in hard
copies of drawings which shall then be stamped 'As-built' by the contractor. These
'As-built' drawings shall be reviewed and stamped by EIL Inspector/Site
engineer/TPIA also. Format for completeness of final documents (Format No. 3-780004) is attached with this specification. Contractor shall prepare scanned images
files of all marked up 'As built' drawings. Simultaneously contractor shall
incorporate the shop/site changes in the native soft files of the drawings also.
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
laraeles ENGINEERS
4.6.5
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 8 of 8
Contractor shall get the completeness of final documentation verified by EIL/TPIA and
attach the Format for Completeness of Final Documentation (Format No. 3-78-0004)
duly signed by EIL or TPIA as applicable to the document folder.
fEr) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$afg7:11 tel5leg
Men eRali 4,30.0
COMPLETENESS OF FINAL
DOCUMENTATION
Name of Supplier/Contractor
Customer
Project
EIL's Job No.
Purchase Order No./
Contract No.
Purchase Requisition No./
Tender No.
Rev. No. :
Certified that the Engineering Documents/ Manufacturing & Test Certificates submitted by the
supplier are complete in accordance with the Vendor Data Requirements of Purchase
Requisition.
Signature
Signature
Date
Date
Name
Name
Designation
Designation
Department
Department
Supplier/Contractor
EIL/TPIA
arTilittl/APPROVED
gTffTeR/ Sig
eilegiltk
tvi .
...........
.....
..................
ENGINEERS
$ig-ar ffieg INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undeftalongl
SPECIFICATION
FOR HIGH VOLTAGE
INDUCTION MOTORS
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 18
5c1-k111
d-wci
r("R
f~r
SPECIFICATION
FOR
HIGH VOLTAGE
INDUCTION MOTORS
\k.
t
20.11.13
26.09.07
09.04.02
01.02.97
30.01.89
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
'41
., -
CV/'' 7,Q
SA
BRB
UAP/JMS SC
SD
BRB
JMS
VC
UG
AAN
VPS
SKG
AAN
VPS
SG
AS
VPS
VPS
SKG
RCPC
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards Standards
Comm ittee Bureau
Convenor Chairman
Approved by
$1&:1T12-&g
1.1127f c.-WsrxeMIJVCISA)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of incha Undeltaking)
Abbreviations:
BIS
BS
CIMFR
CT
EIL
FM
FRP
IEC
IEEE
IS
JEC
LCIE
LRWT
NEMA
PO
PVC
p.u.
r.m.s
RPM
TETV
UL
VDE
CEA
DOL
VFD
OEM
TPIA
PESO
Mr. UA Patro
Members:
Mr. BR Bhogal
Ms. S. Anand
Mr. Parag Gupta
Mr. A.K. Chaudhary
Ms. N.P. Guha
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Go" of India Undedok,nd)
CONTENTS
.4
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
3.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4.0
OPERATING CONDITIONS
5.0
PERFORMANCE
6.0
CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
7.0
13
8.0
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
14
9.0
NOISE LEVEL
16
10.0
MOTOR VIBRATIONS
16
11.0
CRITICAL SPEEDS
16
12.0
PAINTING
16
13.0
16
14.0
CERTIFICATION
. 17
15.0
4
.5
..5
18
7111~1
$1g-aiffUn
r IMf
6
cv,er+W ,151~)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govl of India Undetalong)
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, packing and supply of high
voltage squirrel cage induction motors.
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS
2.1
The squirrel cage induction motors and their components shall comply with the latest
editions of following standards issued by BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards) unless
otherwise specified:
IS - 5
Colours for ready mixed paints and enamels
IS - 325Three phase induction motors
IS - 1271
Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation
IS - 2071
Methods of high voltage testing
IS - 2253
Designation for type & construction and mounting arrangement of
rotating electrical machines
IS - 2968
Dimensions of slide rails for electrical motors
IS - 4029
Guide for testing of three phase induction motors
IS - 4889
Method of determination of efficiency of rotating electrical machines
IS - 6362
Designation of methods of cooling of rotating electrical machines
IS - 7816
Guide for testing insulation resistance of rotating machines
IS - 8223
Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines
IS 8789
Values of performance characteristics for three phase induction motors
IS - 12065
Permissible limits of noise level for rotating Electrical Machines
IS - 12075
Mechanical vibration of Rotating Electrical Machines with shaft heights
56 mm and higher measurement, evaluation and limits of vibration
severity
IS - 13529
Guide on effects of unbalanced voltages on the performance of three
phase induction motors
IS - 13555
Guide for selection and application of three phase induction motors for
different types of driven equipments
IS - 14222
Impulse voltage withstands levels of rotating electrical machines with
form-wound stator coils
IS - 14568
Dimension and output series for rotating electrical machines, frame
numbers 355 to 1000 and flange numbers 1180 to 2360
IS / IEC60079-0 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres (General Requirements)
IS/IEC60079-1 Equipment protection by Flame proof enclosures "d'.
IS/IEC60079-2 Explosive protection by pressurized enclosure "p"
IS/IEC60079-7 Explosive atmospheres-Equipment protection by increased safety "e"
IS/IEC60079-15 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres Construction, test &
marking of type of protection "n"
IS/ IEC: 60529 Degree of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IS/IEC-60034-1 Rotating Electrical machines Rating & Performance.
IS/IEC-60034-5 Degrees of protection provided by enclosure for rotating electrical
machinery.
IS/IEC 60034-8: Terminal marking and direction of rotation for rotating electrical machinery.
2.2
In case of imported motors, standards of the country of origin shall be applicable if these
standards are equivalent or stringent than the applicable Indian Standards.
2.3
The motors shall also conform to the provisions of CEA regulations and other statutory
regulations currently in force in the country.
SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR HIGH VOLTAGE INDUCTION
Govt of India Undedaking)
MOTORS
t31
$1g-ar fafe5
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
Page 5 of 18
2.4
2.5
The offered equipment shall be brand new with state of the art technology and proven
field track record. No prototype equipment shall be offered.
3.2
Vendor shall ensure availability of spare parts and maintenance support services for the
offered equipment at least for 10 years from the date of supply.
3.3
Vendor shall give a notice of at least one year to the end user of equipment and EIL
before phasing out the product/spares to enable the end user for placement of order for
spares and services.
Ambient Conditions
Motors shall be suitable for operating satisfactorily in humid and corrosive atmospheres
found in refineries, fertilizer, petrochemical and metallurgical plants. Service conditions
shall be as specified in the motor data sheet. If not specifically mentioned therein, a
design ambient temperature of 40C and an altitude not exceeding 1000 meters above
mean sea level shall be taken into consideration.
Frequency and Voltage variations.
4.2
Unless otherwise agreed, motors shall be designed for continuous operation at rated
output under the following conditions:
a)
b)
c)
4.3
The terminal voltage differing from its rated value by not more than 6 % or
The frequency differing from its rated value by not more than 3 %
Any combination of (a) and (b)
Starting
a)
Motors shall be designed for direct on line starting or other method of starting as
specified in datasheet.
b)
Motors shall be designed for re-acceleration with full load after a momentary loss
of voltage with the possibility of application of 100% of the rated voltage when the
residual voltage has dropped down to 50% and is in phase opposition to the applied
voltage.
Motors shall be designed to allow the minimum number of starts on full load
indicated in Table below:-
c)
Up to 500 KW
500 to 1000
KW
Above 1000
KW
$'gar
92es
.417,2~ ,P727.4
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undenaking)
Unless otherwise specified, the locked rotor withstand time under hot condition at
100% voltage (time tE for increased safety i.e. Ex e motor) shall be minimum 5
seconds more than the starting time at 100 % voltage, under specified load
conditions.
d)
4.4
Unless otherwise stated in the motor data sheet, motors shall be suitable for starting at
80% of the rated voltage against the torque speed characteristics of the driven equipment.
a)
Starting torque and minimum torque of the motor shall be compatible with the
speed torque characteristics of the driven equipment under specified starting and
operating conditions.
b)
For heavy duty drives such as blowers, crushers, compressors etc., high starting
torque motors shall be provided.
This shall be checked against the speed torque characteristics of the load and the
thermal withstand characteristics of the motors.
4.5
The pull out torque at rated voltage shall be not less than 175 percent of the rated load
torque with no negative tolerance. In case of motors driving equipments with pulsating
loads (e.g. reciprocating compressors), the minimum value of the pull out torque at 80%
of rated voltage shall be more than the peak value of the pulsating torque and the current
pulsation shall be limited to 40%.
Unless otherwise agreed, the pull out torque shall not exceed 300% of the rated load
torque.
4.6
Direction of rotation
Motors shall preferably be suitable for either direction of rotation. In case unidirectional
fan is provided for motors, direction of rotation for which the motor is designed shall be
permanently indicated by means of an arrow. Any alteration required for obtaining a
change in the direction of rotation such as reversal of the fan, must be clearly specified.
Motors which are suitable for only one direction of rotation shall have this direction of
rotation clearly indicated on the motor together with the phase sequence of the terminals
associated with this rotation in indelible marking. Motors suitable for bi-directional
rotation shall be provided with a double headed arrow. Directional arrow should be
manufactured from corrosion resistant material.
Normally, clockwise rotation is desired as observed from the driving (coupling) end,
when the terminals ABC are connected to a supply giving a terminal phase sequence in
the order ABC. Counter clockwise rotation of the motor shall be obtained by connecting
the supply to terminals so that the phase sequence corresponds to the reversed
alphabetical sequence of the terminal letters. Ample space shall be provided at the
terminal box for interchanging external leads C and A for this purpose.
$1fg-ar 2fai
dg
1.11277 232,7,retTR,~3)
5.0 PERFORMANCE
5.1
Motors shall be rated for continuous duty (S1 ), unless otherwise specified.
5.2
Motors shall have adequate torque to accelerate the load from zero to full speed under the
specified starting and operating conditions.
5.3
Starting current shall be 500% subject to IS/IEC tolerance for motors up to 1000 kW. For
motors above 1000 kW, it shall be agreed with purchaser for each case.
5.4
In particular cases, when the starting current is to be limited, care shall be taken such that
the design values of torque meets the load requirement while at the same time complying
with clause 4.3 above of this specification.
5.5
In particular cases, when the starting with reduced voltage is specified, care shall be taken
such that the design values of torque meets the load requirement while at the same time
complying with clause 4.4 and 4.5 above of this specification.
5.6
Motors fed by variable frequency drive shall additionally meet the following requirements:
5.6.1 The motors shall be suitable for the current wave forms produced by the power supply
including harmonics generated by the drive.
5.6.2 The motors shall be designed to operate continuously at any speed over the range (1
100%) of rated speed or as specified in data sheet. The characteristics shall be based on the
application in terms of constant torque / variable torque as per the driven equipment.
Additional cooling fan shall be provided if required to limit the temperature rise to
specified limits.
5.6.3 The motors shall withstand torque pulsation resulting from harmonics generated by the
solid state power supply.
5.6.4 The motors required to be transferred to DOL bypass mode shall be rated for specified
variations in line voltage and frequency.
6.0 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
6.1
Windings
6.1.1
Motors shall be provided with class-F insulation. The permissible temperature rise above
the specified ambient temperature shall be limited to those specified in the applicable
Indian Standards for class-B insulation.
6.1.2 The windings, along with the stator, shall be tropicalised and shall be vacuum
impregnated(resin poor type).
Winding shall be adequately braced to prevent any relative movement during operation. In
this respect, special care shall be taken for the stator windings of direct-on-line starting
squirrel cage motors. Insulation shall be provided between coils of different phases which
lie together.
6.1.3 Core laminations must be capable of withstanding burnout for rewind at 400C without
damage or loosening.
11
5g-a 1&2e-g
CI,CP1t,
R1~1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Inche Undertahrng)
SPECIFICATION
FOR HIGH VOLTAGE INDUCTION
MOTORS
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
Page 8 of 18
In case of motors driving equipment with pulsating loads, special attention shall be paid
to the joints of rotor bars and end rings to avoid premature failures due to induced fatigue
stresses.
For Ex n and Ex e motors, the conductor insulation must be carried right up to the
terminal clamp.
6.1.4 Motors shall be designed to withstand impulse voltages specified in applicable Indian
Standards/relevant IEC. The wave shape shall be as per IS/relevant IEC.
6.1.5 Windings of motors shall be star connected. For VFD fed motors, the main winding
connected in `Delta' can also be considered acceptable subject to motor manufacturer
having adequate proven track record.
6.2
6.2.1 The ends of the winding shall be brought out into a terminal box. The terminations shall
be by means of clamp type bushing or bushings with adequately sized bolted terminals.
Line terminals shall be properly insulated from the frame with material resistant to
tracking.
6.2.2 The terminal box shall be located on the right hand side viewed from the driving
(coupling) end. Unless otherwise specified, the terminal box shall be suitable for side
cable entry. The size of the cable end boxes shall be large enough to provide a minimum
distance of 600 mm between cable gland plate and terminal lug.
6.2.3 The neutral point of the star windings shall also be brought out to a separate terminal box.
This shall house the current transformers for differential protection of motors wherever
required and shall be located on the opposite side of main terminal box.
6.2.4 The main and neutral terminal box shall be of fabricated sheet steel. The main terminal
box shall be phase segregated type, unless otherwise agreed.
Motors can have elastimold phase insulated terminals in a common box. Ex d type (flame
proof) motors can have phase insulated terminal box of Exd rating whereas Ex p type
(pressurized) motors can have phase insulated terminal box of Ex d/Ex p rating. Ex d
(Flameproof) motors with non phase segregated & non phase insulated flameproof
terminal box duly tested at independent test laboratory can be considered acceptable
subject to motor manufacturer having adequate proven track record.
6.2.5 The terminal box must be of robust construction, with necessary clearance, creepage
distances between live parts and between live parts to earth considering air insulation and
without any compound filling.
6.2.6 The terminal box shall be provided with pressure relief flaps/devices for increase safety
i.e. Ex e motors, non-sparking i.e. Ex n motors and safe area motors, as per
manufacturer's standard.
6.2.7 The terminal box shall be capable of withstanding the fault current for a period of 0.25
seconds specified in the motor data sheet.
6.2.8 Appropriate phase markings as per IS shall be provided inside the terminal box. The
markings shall be non-removable and indelible.
Og-u02eg
1~1rrrmrr
en 3,70.1)
SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR HIGH VOLTAGE 1NDUCTION
MOTORS
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
Page 9 of 18
6.2.9 The terminal box shall be provided with entries for suitable cable glands corresponding to
the size of the specified cables.
Equipment and accessories provided shall conform to the hazardous area classification
and the environmental conditions as specified in the motor data sheet.
6.2.10 An adequately sized earth terminal shall be provided for cable armour termination. It is
essential that all metal parts (mounting rail and cable glands) are bonded and connected to
the earth system. Bonding straps are also required across joints on non-active parts.
6.2.11 Separate terminal boxes shall be provided for space heaters, resistance temperature
detectors and vibration probes.
6.2.12 Main and neutral terminal box covers must be provided with handles to facilitate easy
removal.
6.3
6.3.1
All Motors shall be suitable for installation directly outdoor and must have degree of
protection corresponding to IP-55 as per IS.
6.3.2 All internal and external metallic parts, which can come into contact with cooling air
(Piping, air supply and discharge conduits, protective grills air deflectors, filters and
supports etc.) shall be of corrosion resistant material or appropriately treated to resist
corrosive agents which may be present in the atmosphere. Screws and bolts shall be of
rust proof material or protected against corrosion.
6.3.3 Effective equipotential bonding straps to guard against the occurrence of sparks due to
presence of circulating currents shall be provided in type Ex n, Ex e and Ex p motors.
6.4
6.4.1
Motors shall have grease lubricated ball or roller type bearings or of the manufacturer's
standard type. However, 2 pole motors above 750 kW rating shall be provided with
sleeve bearings as a minimum. Sleeve bearings when provided shall be of proven design.
6.4.2 The bearings shall be chosen to give a minimum L- 10 rating life of 5 yrs. (40,000 hrs) at
rated operating conditions.
(The L -10 rating life is the number of hours at constant speed that 90 % of a group of
identical bearings will complete or exceed before the first evidence of the failure ).
6.4.3 Where bearing supports are attached to the motor casing adequate bracing shall be
provided on these supports to reduce vibrations and ensure long life of the bearings.
Bearings shall be adequate to absorb axial thrust in either direction produced by the motor
itself or due to shaft expansion.
6.4.4 Motor bearings exposed to high temperatures (e.g. motors for hot oil/boiler feed pumps)
shall have adequate provisions for cooling of bearings.
6.4.5 Vertical motors shall be provided with thrust bearings suitable for the load imposed by
the driven equipment.
6.4.6 Motors shall be designed to permit removing/replacement of bearings.
$1g-ar
6.4.7
vnrnav on.intatIO
6.4.8
Sleeve bearings
Sleeve type bearings shall be fitted with oil rings for continuous lubrication. The oil
reservoirs shall have a form suitable for allowing settling of any solids or residual
particles contained in the oil.
The covers shall be provided with suitable openings for adding and draining oil, together
with an overflow plug and level indication. The shaft shall have perfect seals so as to
prevent entry of dust or moisture.
6.4.9
In addition to the pumps, the lubrication system shall be supplied complete with the
following as a minimum:
a)
An oil cooler of shell and tube type with tubes of inhibited admiralty brass.
Internal coolers shall not be accepted. To prevent the oil from being
contaminated, if the cooler fails, the oil side operating pressure shall be higher
than the water side operating pressure.
b)
31
$.1gzff 02&g
1,1,3~
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
Fill connections, reflex type level indicators and breathers suitable for outdoor
use
Sloped bottoms and connections for complete drainage
Clean out openings as large as is practicable
A bypass line that returns below the oil level to eliminate aeration and static
electricity
A thermostat with two electrical contacts for alarm & tripping in case of high oil
temperature
c)
d)
e)
The motor driven auxiliary pumps shall be provided with suction stainer and an
automatic/manual control system arranged to start automatically on low oil
pressure and with manual shutdown only
g)
Temperature gauges (with thermowells) in the reservoir, after the oil cooler and
each bearing drain line
h)
i)
A pressure gauge (valved for removal) for each pressure level and a pressure
differential indicator to measure filter pressure drop
j)
k)
The oil pumps shall have steel casings unless they are enclosed in a reservoir. All
other oil containing pressure components shall be steel.
A control panel shall be provided for operation & control of the lubrication system. The
control panel shall include fuses, electrical contactors and thermal relays for the
protection and operation of the motor driven pumps, push-buttons, auxiliary relays and
timer relays for the automatic and manual starting up and shutting down of the oil pump.
Equipment and accessories provided shall conform to the hazardous area and the
environmental conditions specified in the motor data Sheet.
Armoured cables suitable for high temperature duty shall be used for extemal electrical
connections between the control panel and the lubrication system.
31
51g-ar
051eg
t-Ircort'as JOONO
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
GoN of Indu UnOeflaking)
Cooling System
All motors shall preferably be self-ventilated. Motors with higher outputs having
manufacturer's standard designs using forced ventilation cooling or closed circuit cooling
employing external coolants may also be considered.
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
Motors with closed circuit cooling with water to air heat exchangers
The material of the heat exchangers shall be corrosion resistant (e.g. cupro-nickel alloy,
muntz metal, admiralty brass) and suitable for the type of water used. The heat
exchangers shall be designed for minimum water pressure of 5 kg / cm 2 and with head
losses not greater than 0.5 kg / cm 2 , unless otherwise agreed.
The heat exchangers shall be arranged by the side(s) of the motor, if possible. Screens
shall be provided to protect the motor windings from water leaks or leakage in the tubes.
Suitable drains shall be fitted for draining water in case of leakage. The cooling system
Og'w 42es
(.1127,,,,man.3~1
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of
Undertak,o9)
shall include the trip and alarm devices mentioned in paragraph 7.3 (b). Heat exchangers
for identical motors shall be interchangeable.
6.5.4
Motors with closed circuit cooling with air to air heat exchangers
The heat exchanger tubes shall be of steel or extruded aluminium. All exposed surfaces of
the heat exchanger and of the motors shall be safeguarded against corrosion by
immersion in varnish followed by baking.
Joints between the heat exchanger and the main body of the motor shall be sealed by
weather-proof gaskets.
6.6 Rotor
The rotor shall be of squirrel cage type, dynamically balanced to provide a low vibration
level and a long service Life to the bearings. The accepted values of vibrations for a motor
at rated voltage and speed shall not exceed those given in the IS. The shaft ends shall be
provided with suitably threaded hole or holes to facilitate the assembly or removal of
couplings and bearing races.
6.7
Shaft extension
Motors shall be provided with a single, bare shaft extension with key way and key.
Motor shaft shall be sized to withstand 10 times the rated design torque.
6.8
Lifting hooks
All motors shall be provided with lifting facility (i.e. hooks etc.) of adequate capacity.
6.9
For motors provided with heat exchangers, lifting facility shall also be provided for the
heat exchanger.
Earth terminals
Two earth terminals shall be provided on the frame of each motor at diametrically
opposite points. Minimum size of the stud shall be 12 mm. Necessary nuts and spring
washers shall be provided for earth connection. These earth terminals shall be in addition
to the earth terminals provided in the terminal box for earthing of the armour.
5-fg-ar Ofdl
eg
tmZrt ofsfewfut~)
7.1
7.2
7.3
Two mercury bulb type, indicating dial thermometers for checking of bearing
temperatures.
For motors with output greater than 750 KW, a resistance type of temperature
measuring device shall be provided for bearings with connections terminating in
the common terminal box for winding temperature detectors.
7.4
Current transformers
Unless otherwise specified, motors rated 1500 KW and above shall have differential
protection and shall be equipped with current transformers suitably designed for
installation in the neutral terminal box.
$'gzrr IMfdleg
e../cnfc',
771~1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of looia Undedakongi
SPECIFICATION
FOR HIGH VOLTAGE INDUCTION
MOTORS
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
Page 15 of 18
Unless otherwise specified, the CTs shall be supplied along with the motor and mounted
in the terminal box, which shall be suitable for housing the CTs and providing the
necessary connections. CT terminals shall be brought out to a separate auxiliary terminal
box.
These transformers shall have a secondary current of 1 A, and the characteristics of the
CTs (Vk, RcT and Im) shall be finalized at detailed engineering stage in consultation with
the purchaser. CT ratio shall be as indicated in the motor data sheet.
8.2
8.3
8.4
Motors shall be supplied complete with double compression Nickel plated brass (or
Aluminum, if specifically required) cable glands, crimp type tinned Cu cable lugs for all
power, space heater and auxiliary cables (for the specified cable sizes) and first filling of
lube oil for forced lubricated bearings.
8.5
Auxiliary motors, if any, shall be as per relevant Indian / International standards and shall
be suitable for the hazardous classification as specified in the motor data sheet.
8.6
Name plates
A stainless steel name plate manufactured from series 300 stainless steel and having
information as per IS shall be provided on each motor. In addition to the motor rating
plate, a separate number plate for motor tag number shall be fixed in a readily visible
position. This number shall be as per the motor data sheets.
Additional information as stipulated in applicable Standards shall be included in the name
plate for motors meant for use in hazardous atmospheres.
off
til2R c0vente11
,1,11r0,-.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt 01 In0. Undeltaking)
SPECIFICATION
FOR HIGH VOLTAGE INDUCTION
MOTORS
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
Page 16 of 18
All tests shall be carried out at manufacturer's shop under his care and expense.
13.2
The manufacturer shall submit all internal test records of the tests carried out by him on
the bought-out items, motor sub-assembly and complete motor assembly.
13.3
All the type, routine and other acceptance tests shall be witnessed by EIL Inspector/TPIA
(appointed by OEM supplier.)
13.4
Tests certificates duly signed by the EIL Inspector/TPIA (appointed by OEM supplier.)
shall be a part of final documentation.
The following type tests (on one motor of each rating and frame size) shall be carried out
as per applicable Indian Standards and shall form part of acceptance testing :
Full load test and measurement of voltage, current, power & slip
a)
Measurement of starting torque, starting current, full load torque and pull out
b)
torque
c)
Measurement of efficiency and p.f. at 100%, 75% and 50% load
d)
Temperature rise test
Momentary overload test
e)
f)
Tan delta test
Measurement of noise level
g)
Over speed test
i)
Measurement of radial & axial clearance between fan & stationary parts &
i)
measurement of radial air gap (if provision for measurement is not available in
fully assembled motor stage records/calculations to be reviewed by Inspection)
$ifg-ar
ca
C1,4>T2 Jrcr.4
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Govt of Incha Undertakm91
13.5
13.6
The manufacturer shall submit the following certificates for verification by the
EIL/Owner's Inspector:
Test certificate from recognised testing laboratory for area classification.
a)
BIS
certificate for indigenous FLP motors and accessories as applicable.
b)
CCOE/PESO approved certificates for motors and accessories as applicable
c)
Fault level of terminal box
d)
Degree of protection of enclosure
e)
Impulse test certificate for coils
f)
Hydraulic
test certificate for coolers
g)
13.7
For VFD fed motors, all tests as specified in the VFD specification shall be followed in
addition to the above.
13.8
In case any of the Type & Routine tests mentioned above can not be carried out due to
manufacturer's test bed limitations etc., altematively calculations to establish the required
parameters as per International codes eg IEC, JEC etc. may be accepted which shall be
furnished to attending inspector. However, acceptance of calculations in place of actual
test shall be with prior approval (agreement between motor manufacturer & purchaser).
13.9
Though the motors shall be accepted on the basis of the satisfactory result of the testing at
the shop, it shall not absolve the Vendor from liability regarding the proper functioning of
the motors coupled to the driven equipment at site.
14.0 CERTIFICATION
The motors and associated equipment shall have test certificates issued by recognised
independent test house (CIMFR/ CPRI/ ERTL/ Baseefal LCIE/ UL/ FM or equivalent).
All indigenous motors shall conform to Indian standards and shall be certified by Indian
testing agencies. All motors (indigenous & imported) shall also have valid statutory
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
31
Ogu 2f51-dg
'
,~ s-frcnr2 M,3,1-0.1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt ol InOia Undedaking)
approvals (e.g. PESO, DGMS etc. as applicable for the specified location. All indigenous
flameproof motors shall have valid BIS license and marking as required by statutory
authorities.
15.0 PACKING AND DESPATCH
All the equipment shall be divided into several sections for protection and ease of
handling during transportation.
The equipment shall be properly packed for
transportation by ship/rail or trailer. The equipment shall be wrapped in polythene sheets
before being placed in crates/cases to prevent damage to finish. Crates/cases shall have
skid bottom for handling. Special notations such as Tragile', `This side up', `Centre of
gravity', `Weight', `Owner's particulars', `PO Nos.' etc. shall be clearly marked on the
package together with other details as per purchaser order.
The equipment may be stored outdoors for long periods before installation. The packing
shall be completely suitable for outdoor storage in areas with heavy rains/high ambient
temperature, unless otherwise agreed.
lafsizeigh ENGINEERS
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MEDIUM AND HIGH VOLTAGE
CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 10
an'rgrkv
Iffq 141-44T
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MEDIUM AND HIGH VOLTAGE
CABLES & ACCESSORIES
11.04.11
20.04.09
15/03/04
30/07/98
08/12/92
04/06/84
Rev
No
Date
Purpose
42i4A411
)d. 4CAN DM
AMPS
UAP
PB
UAP
JMS
ND
RKM
MN
VPS
SKG
SKG
RKM
VPS
AS
RKM
SG
GNT
RCD
SG
GNT
Prepared
by
Checked
by
StandardsCommitteeC
onvenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
49.41
-ag,INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertakmg)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MEDIUM AND HIGH VOLTAGE
CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 10
Abbreviations:
ASTM
BIS
BS
British Standard
CEA
DGMS
EPR
FR
Flame Retardant
HR PVC
ICEA
IEC
IS
Indian Standards
NEMA
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
UV
Ultra Violet
XLPE
Mr. UA Patro
Members:
Mr. AK Tickoo
Mr. MP Jain
Mr. BR Bhogal
Mr. Arun Kumar
Mr. KK Gera
Mr. Saeed Akhtar
IJMITED
eiges 0151eg NW INDIA
(A Govt of India Undertaking)
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 10
CONTENTS
SCOPE
2.0
STANDARDS
3.0
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
4.0
CABLE ACCESSORIES
5.0
6.0
1.0
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MEDIUM AND HIGH VOLTAGE
CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
d01
eJ MA ENGINEERS
1.11,E71
1.0
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MEDIUM AND HIGH VOLTAGE
CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 10
SCOPE
This specification along with data sheets covers requirements for design, manufacture, testing
at works and supply of Flame Retardant Medium & High Voltage cables and cable jointing /
terminating accessories for medium and high voltage systems.
2.0
STANDARDS
2.1
The cables and cables jointing & terminating accessories shall comply with the latest edition
of the following standards as applicable:
IS: 209
IS: 1554
IS: 3961(Pt-2) :
IS: 3975
IS: 5831
IS: 6380
IS: 7098
IS: 8130
IS: 10418
IS: 10462 (Pt-1):
IS: 10810
IS: 13573
IEC: 60331-21:
IEC: 60332-3 :
NEMA-WC70 :
NEMA-WC53 :
DIN-53387
ASTM-G-154 :
BS: 7846
2.2
The cables and accessories shall also conform to the provisions of CEA Regulations and other
statutory regulations, as applicable.
2.3
In case of any conflict between requirements specified in various applicable documents for the
project, the most stringent one shall prevail. However, Owner's decision in this regard will be
final and binding.
Ofgtadital ENGINEERS
Igar laPlegvair INDIALIMITED
IMIPM 010=713113,1071)
IA
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MEDIUM AND HIGH VOLTAGE
CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 5 of 10
3.0
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
3.1
The cables shall be suitable for laying in trays, trenches, ducts, and conduits and for
underground-buried installation with uncontrolled backfill and possibility of flooding by water
and chemicals.
3.2
Outer sheath of all cables shall be black in colour and the minimum value of oxygen index
shall be 29 at 27 + 2 C. In addition suitable chemicals shall be added into the PVC compound
of the outer sheath to protect the cable against rodent and termite attack.
3.3
All cables covered in this specification shall be flame retardant (FR). The outer sheath of
cables shall possess flame propagation properties meeting requirements as per IS-10810 (Part62) category AF.
3.4
Sequential marking of the length of the cable in metres shall be provided on the outer sheath at
every one metre. The embossing/engraving shall be legible and indelible.
3.5
The overall diameter of the cables shall be strictly as per the values declared by the
manufacturer in the technical information subject to a maximum tolerance of 2 mm up to
overall diameter of 60mm and 3mm for beyond 60mm.
3.6
PVC/ Rubber end caps shall be supplied free of cost for each drum with a minimum of eight
per thousand metre length. In addition, ends of the cables shall be properly sealed with caps to
avoid ingress of water during transportation and storage.
3.7
The cables meant to be used in mining area under the jurisdiction of DGMS shall comply with
the requirements as specified in the Job specification/ Datasheet.
3.8
3.8.1
All power/control cables for use on medium voltage systems shall be heavy-duty type,
650/1100V grade with aluminium/ copper conductor, PVC insulated, inner-sheathed,
armoured/ unarmoured and overall PVC sheathed.
3.8.2
The conductors shall be solid for conductor of nominal area up to and including 6mm 2 and
stranded beyond 6mm2. Conductors of nominal area less than 16 mm 2 shall be circular only.
Conductors of nominal area 16 mm 2 and above may be circular or shaped as per IS 8130.
Cables with reduced neutral conductor shall have sizes as per Table 1 of IS 1554 (Part-1).
3.8.3
The core insulation shall be with PVC compound applied over the conductor by extrusion and
shall conform to the requirements of type 'A' compound as per IS: 5831. The thickness of
insulation and the tolerance on thickness of insulation shall be as per Table 2 of IS: 1554 (Part1). Control cables having 6 cores and above shall be identified with prominent and indelible
Arabic numerals on the outer surface of the insulation. Colour of the numbers shall contrast
with the colour of insulation with a spacing of maximum 50 mm between two consecutive
numbers. Colour coding for cables up to 5 cores shall be as per Indian standard.
3.8.4
The inner sheath shall be applied over the laid-up cores by extrusion and shall be of PVC
conforming to the requirements of Type ST-1 PVC compound as per IS: 5831. The minimum
thickness of inner sheath shall be as per IS: 1554 (Part-1). Single core cables shall have no
inner sheath.
laraelefah ENGINEERS
3.8.5
IA Govt of
India undertaking)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MEDIUM AND HIGH VOLTAGE
CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 6 of 10
All cables shall be provided with armour except those specifically specified as unarmoured.
For multicore cables, the armour shall be by single round galvanised steel wires where the
calculated diameter below armouring does not exceed 13 mm and by galvanised steel strips
where this dimension is greater than 13 mm. Requirement and methods of tests for armour
material and uniformity of galvanisation shall be as per IS - 3975 and IS -10810 (Part 41). The
dimensions of armour shall be as per method (b) of IS - 1554 (Part -1). For single core cables,
the armour shall be with H4 grade hard drawn aluminium round wire of 2.5 mm diameter.
For mining cables, the size and type of armour shall be such that the combined conductance of
armour shall be equivalent to 75 percent of the conductance of the largest conductor of the
cable.
3.8.6
The outer sheath for the cables shall be applied by extrusion and shall be of PVC compound
conforming to the requirements of type ST-1 compound as per IS: 5831. The minimum and
average thickness of outer sheath for unarmoured cables and minimum thickness of outer
sheath for armoured cables shall be as per IS: 1554 (Part -1).
3.8.7
Where specified, 1100V grade power cables shall also be XLPE insulated and shall meet the
requirement specified in IS-7098 (Part-1).
3.8.8
If heat resisting PVC cables are specified in the data sheet, the following shall be the
requirements:
It shall be possible to continuously operate the cable at a maximum conductor temperature of
85 C. PVC compounds used for HR PVC cables shall be as follows:
c.
3.8.9
Conductor insulation
Inner sheath
Outer sheath
-Type C
-Type ST 2
-Type ST 2
The fire survival cables shall meet the following additional requirements :
The insulation shall be of EPR or equivalent material with glass mica tape below or
above insulation.
The cables shall meet requirement of circuit integrity test for a minimum period of 3
hours at max. Temperature of 9500 C.
3.9
3.9.1
Power cables for 3.3kV up to and including 33kV systems shall be Aluminium/ Copper
conductor, XLPE insulated, sheathed, armoured/ unarmoured and overall PVC sheathed.
3.9.2
The conductors shall be stranded and compacted circular for all cables.
3.9.3
All cables rated 3.8/ 6.6kV and above shall be provided with both conductor screening and
insulation screening. The conductors shall be provided with non-metallic extruded semi
conducting screen.
3.9.4
The core insulation shall be with cross linked polyethylene insulating compound dry cured,
applied by extrusion. It shall be free from voids and shall withstand all mechanical and
thermal stresses under steady state and transient operating conditions. It shall conform to the
properties given in Table-1 of IS: 7098 (Part -2).
st=4-zeigh ENGINEERS
(A Govt of
India undertaking)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MEDIUM AND HIGH VOLTAGE
CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 7 of 10
3.9.5
3.9.6
The conductor screen, XLPE insulation and insulation screen shall all be extruded in one
operation by 'Triple Extrusion' process to ensure perfect bonding between the layers. The core
identification shall be by coloured strips or by printed numerals.
3.9.7
The inner sheath shall be applied over the laid up cores by extrusion and shall conform to the
requirements of type ST 2 compound of IS: 5831. The extruded inner sheath shall be of
uniform thickness. In case of single core cables, there shall be extruded inner sheath between
insulation metallic screen and armouring.
3.9.8
All cables shall be provided with armour except those specifically specified as unarmoured.
For multicore cables, the armour shall be by galvanised steel strips. Requirement and methods
of tests for armour material and uniformity of galvanisation shall be as per IS - 3975 and IS 10810 (Part 41). The dimensions of armour shall be as per method (b) of IS - 7098 (Part -2).
For single core cables, the armour shall be with H4 grade hard drawn aluminium round wire of
2.5 mm diameter.
3.9.9
The outer sheath of the cables shall be applied by extrusion over the armouring and shall be of
PVC compound conforming to the requirements of Type ST 2 compound of IS: 5831. The
minimum and average thickness of outer sheath for unarmoured cables and minimum
thickness of outer sheath for armoured cables shall be as per IS: 7098 (Part-2).
3.9.10 The thickness of the insulation, inner sheath shall be governed by values given in IS: 7098
(Part -2).
4.0
CABLE ACCESSORIES
4.1
The termination and straight through jointing kits for use on the systems shall be suitable for
the type of cables offered as per this specification and shall meet requirements of IS 13573.
4.2
The accessories shall be supplied in kit form. Each component of the kit shall carry the
manufacturer's mark of origin.
4.3
The kit shall include all stress grading, insulating and sealing materials apart from conductor
fittings and consumable items. An installation instruction sheet shall also be included in each
kit.
4.4
The contents of the accessories kit including all consumable shall be suitable for storage
without deterioration at a temperature of 45 C, with shelf life extending to more than 5 years.
4.5
Terminating Kits
The terminating kits shall be suitable for termination of the cables to an indoor switchgear or
to a weatherproof cable box of an outdoor mounted transformer/ motor. For outdoor
terminations, weather shields/ sealing ends and any other accessories required shall also form
part of the kit. The terminating kits shall be from one of the makes/ types mentioned in the
data sheet.
4.6
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MEDIUM AND HIGH VOLTAGE
CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 8 of 10
Jointing Kits
The straight through jointing kits shall be suitable for installation on overhead trays, concrete
lined trenches, and ducts and for underground burial with uncontrolled backfill and possibility
of flooding by water and chemicals. These shall have protection against any mechanical
damage and suitably designed to be protected against rodent and termite attack. The inner
sheath similar to that provided for cables shall be provided as part of straight through joint.
The jointing kits shall be from one of the makes/ types mentioned in the data sheet.
5.0
5.1
Cables
5.1.1
After completion of manufacture of cables and prior to despatch, the cables shall be subjected
to type, routine, acceptance and special tests as detailed below. The test reports for all cables
shall be got approved from the Engineer before despatch of the cables.
5.1.2
All routine tests, acceptance tests, type tests and additional type tests for improved fire
performance shall be carried out as listed in IS: 1554 (Part-1) and IS: 7098 (Part-2) on PVC
and XLPE insulated cables respectively.
5.1.3
The test requirements for PVC insulation and sheath of cables shall be as per latest revision of
IS: 5831.
5.1.4
Test for Resistance to Ultra Violet Radiation: This test shall be carried out as per DIN 53387
or ASTM-G-154 on outer sheath. The retention value of tensile strength and ultimate
elongation after the test shall be minimum 60 % of tensile strength and ultimate elongation
before the test. Test certificates with respect to this test (not older than one year) from
recognised testing laboratory to be furnished for review by EIL before despatch clearance of
cables. In case test certificates are not available, test is to be conducted by vendor at his own
cost in any recognised test laboratory or in house testing laboratory, before despatch clearance
of cables. Sampling for this test is to be done randomly once for each order, provided outer
sheath remains same.
5.1.5
Acceptance tests as per IS-1554 (Part-1) and IS-7098 (Part-2) and the following special tests
to be performed on the cables as per sampling plan for all cables. However these tests are
required to be witnessed by EIL/ Owner for HV cables.
a.
Accelerated water absorption test for insulation as per NEMA-WC-70. (For PVC
insulated cables) and as per NEMA-WC-53 (for XLPE/ EPR insulated cables). Test
certificates with respect to this test (not older than one year) from recognised testing
laboratory to be furnished for review by EIL before despatch clearance of cables. In
case test certificates are not available, test is to be conducted by vendor at his own cost
in any recognized test laboratory or in house testing laboratory, before despatch
clearance of cables. Sampling for this test is to be done randomly once for each order,
provided type of insulation remains same.
ISMZelk, ENGINEERS
Elfaegmw INDIA LIMITED
(041eneiztofoON3M111.1)
(A Govt of Inds
undertaking)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MEDIUM AND HIGH VOLTAGE
CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 9 of 10
Dielectric Retention Test: The dielectric strength of the cable insulation tested in
accordance with NEMA-WC-70 at 75 1 C shall not be less than 50 % of the
original dielectric strength. (For PVC insulated cables). Test certificates with respect
to this test (not older than one year) from recognised testing laboratory to be furnished
for review by EIL before despatch clearance of cables. In case test certificates are not
available, test is to be conducted by vendor at his own cost in any recognized test
laboratory or in house testing laboratory, before despatch clearance of cables.
Sampling for this test is to be done randomly and once for each order.
Oxygen Index Test: The test shall be carried out as per IS-10810 (Part 58). Sampling
to be done for every offered lot/size as per sampling plan.
Flammability Test: The test shall be carried out on finished cable as per IS-10810
(Part 61 & 62). Sampling for these tests is to be done randomly once for each order,
provided outer sheath remains same. The acceptance criteria for tests conducted shall
be as under:
Part-61-The cable meets the requirement if there is no visible damage on the test
specimen within 300 mm from its upper end
Part-62-The maximum extent of the charred portion measured on the test sample
should not have reached a height exceeding 2.5 m above the bottom edge of the burner
at the front of the ladder.
Test for rodent and termite repulsion property shall be done by analysing the property
by chemical method.
5.1.6
The test for circuit integrity for fire survival cables shall be carried out as per [EC-60331
(Part-21).
5.2
Cable Accessories
Type tests should have been carried out to prove the general qualities and design of a given
type of termination/ jointing system as per IS-13573. The type test certificates from
independent testing laboratory shall be submitted before despatch.
6.0
6.1
6.2
On the flange of the drum, necessary information such as project title, manufacturer's name,
type, size, voltage grade of cable, length of cable in metres, drum no., cable code, BIS
certification mark, gross weight etc. shall be printed. An arrow shall be printed on the drum
with suitable instructions to show the direction of rotation of the drum.
6.3
Oftefilk
-, ENGINEERS
ar laRegvir INDIA LIMITED
Inerr zwmuanagins!)
(A Govt
India Undertaking)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MEDIUM AND HIGH VOLTAGE
CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 10 of 10
6.3.1 MV Cables
Multicore Power cables upto 6 mm2
Multicore Power cables from 10 mm2 up to 300 mm2
Single Core Power cables upto 630 mm2
Control cables upto 61 cores
1000 m
500 m
1000 m
1000 m
350 m
1000 m
500 m
However exact drum lengths shall be finalised during order execution. A tolerance of 3 %
shall be permissible for each drum. However overall tolerance on each size of cable shall be
limited to 2%.
k31
$iga fiffleg
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Ind,a Underlaking)
-gurg
d71E.
Wf"kil 11
fqw
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFICIENT
MEDIUM VOLTAGE
INDUCTION MOTORS
Purpose
SS/SHIRALI
SD
Prepared by
KJ
BRB
BRB
JMS
ND
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Checked
by
SC
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
fa;1W5 w INDIA LIMITED
31
1.177T s'1,,
,q51.7~1)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 12
Abbreviations:
AL
BASEEFA
BIS
Aluminium
British Approvals Service for Electrical Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres
BS
CEA
CIMFR
British Standards
Central Electricity Authority
Central Institute of Mines and Fuel Research
CPRI
CT
CU
DGMS
DOL
EIL
ERTL
FM
FRP
IEC
IEEE
IP
IS
Copper
Directorate General of Mines Safety
Direct On Line
Engineers India Limited
Electronics Regional test laboratory
Factory Mutual
Fiber Reinforced Plastic
International Electro-technical Commission
Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers
Ingress Protection
Indian Standard
Japanese Electro-technical Committee
JEC
KLPL
LCIE
NEMA
PESO
PO
PVC
RPM
Purchase Order
Poly Vinyl Chloride
Revolutions per Minute
Underwriter's Laboratories
Variable Frequency Drive
Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker
UL
VFD
VDE
Members:
Ms. S. Anand
Mr. Parag Gupta
Mr. M.K. Sahu
Mr. A.K. Chaudhary (Inspection)
Ms. N.P. Guha (Project)
--1
gzx Wes
ENGINEERS
w INDIA LIMITED
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 3 of 12
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
3.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4.0
OPERATING CONDITIONS
5.0
PERFORMANCE
6.0
CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
7.0
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
10
8.0
CRITICAL SPEEDS
10
9.0
PAINTING
10
10.0
11
11.0
CERTIFICATION
11
12.0
11
31
02-'
eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
2.1~,151~11
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 12
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, packing and supply of energy
efficient-High efficiency (IE2) three phase medium voltage squirrel cage induction motors.
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS
2.1
The squirrel cage induction motors and their components shall comply with the latest editions of
following standards issued by BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards) unless otherwise specified:
IS - 5
IS - 325
IS - 1076
IS - 1231
IS - 1271
IS - 2223
IS - 2253
IS - 2254
IS - 2968
IS - 4029
IS - 4889
IS - 6362
IS - 7816
IS - 8223
IS - 8789
IS - 9283
IS - 12065
IS - 12075
IS 12615
IS - 12824
IS - 13529
IS - 13555
IS - 14568
IS / IEC60079-0:
IS/IEC-60079-1:
IS/IEC60079-2 :
IS/IEC60079-7 :
IS/IEC 60034-1 :
IS/IEC-60034-5:
IS/IEC-60079-15:
5g-u
ENGINEERS
f&IJeg INDIA LIMITED
k31 --1
1.7E,, c-1,cnr1,711.3~11
IS/IEC 60034-8:
IS/IEC 61241:
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 12
2.2
In case of imported motors, standards of the country of origin shall be applicable if these
standards are equivalent or stringent than the applicable Indian Standards.
2.3
The motors shall also conform to the provisions of CEA regulations and other statutory
regulations currently in force in the country.
2.4
In case Indian Standards are not available, standards issued by IEC/ BS/ VDE/ IEEE/
JEC/NEMA or equivalent agency shall be applicable.
2.5
In case of any conflict between requirements specified in various applicable documents, the
most stringent one shall prevail. However, owner's decision in this regard shall be final and
binding.
The offered equipment shall be brand new with state of the art technology and proven field track
record. No prototype equipment shall be offered.
3.2
Vendor shall ensure availability of spare parts and maintenance support services for the offered
equipment at least for 10 years from the date of supply.
3.3
Vendor shall give a notice of at least one year to the end user of equipment and EIL before
phasing out the product/spares to ensure the end user for placement of order for spares and
services.
Ambient Conditions
Motors shall be suitable for operating satisfactorily in humid and corrosive atmosphere found in
refineries, petrochemical, fertilizer and metallurgical plants. Service conditions shall be as
specified in the motor data sheet. If not specifically mentioned therein, a design ambient
temperature of 40 C and an altitude not exceeding 1000 meters above mean sea Level shall be
taken into consideration.
4.2
4.3
The terminal voltage differing from its rated value by not more than + 6 % or
The frequency differing from its rated value by not more the + 3 % or
Any combination of (a) and (b)
Starting
a)
b)
c)
$'fg-ar fafai
e5
two,/, 151,19M,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo Undertaking)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 12
withstand time under hot conditions at 75% & 100% voltages, shall be minimum 1.4
times the starting time at the corresponding voltage.
d)
Unless otherwise specified, all motors shall be suitable for starting under specified load
conditions with 75 % of the rated voltage at the motor terminals.
e)
Motors shall be designed to allow the minimum number of consecutive starts indicated
in Table below:
Starts
No. of consecutive start-ups with initial temp. of the
motor at ambient level (cold)
No. of consecutive start-ups with initial temp. of the
motor at full load operating level (hot).
4.4
Direction of Rotation
Motors shall be suitable for either direction of rotation. In case unidirectional fan is provided for
motors, direction of rotation for which the motor is designed shall be permanently indicated by
means of an arrow. Directional arrow should be manufactured from corrosion resistant material.
When a motor is provided with bi-directional fans, a double-headed arrow should be provided.
Normally, clockwise rotation is desired as observed from the driving (coupling) end, when the
terminals UVW are connected to a power supply giving a terminal phase sequence in the order
UVW. Counter-clockwise rotation of the motor shall be obtained by connecting the power
supply to terminals so that the phase sequence corresponds to the reversed alphabetical
sequence of the terminal letters. Ample space shall be provided at the terminal box for
interchanging any two external leads for obtaining the reverse phase sequence.
5.0 PERFORMANCE
5.1
Motors shall be rated for continuous duty (Si), unless otherwise specified.
5.2
Unless specified, the starting current (as % rated current) shall be limited to maximum 600700% (based on number of poles and KW rating) as per IS 12615:2011, subject to IS tolerance
5.3
In particular cases, when the starting current is to be limited, care shall be taken such that the
design values of torque meets the load requirement while at the same time complying to clause
4.3 above of this specification. Unless otherwise specified the minimum pull-up torque of
motors, at rated voltage & frequency shall be minimum 50% of the rated full load torque.
5.4
In particular cases, when the starting with reduced voltage is specified, care shall be taken such
that the design values of torque meets the load requirement while at the same time complying to
clause 4.3 above of this specification.
5.5
Starting torque and minimum torque of the motor shall be compatible with the speed torque
curve of the driven equipment under specified starting and operating conditions.
In case where characteristics of driven equipment are not available while selecting the motor,
minimum starting torque shall be 110% of rated value for motors up to 75 kW and shall be 90%
of rated value for motors above 75 kW.
5.6
The breakdown torque at the rated voltage shall be not less than 175% of the rated load torque
with no negative tolerance. Unless otherwise agreed, the breakdown torque shall not exceed
300% of the rated load torque.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA GoN oi Undetak.91
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 12
In case of motors driving equipment with pulsating loads (e.g. reciprocating compressors,
crushers, ball mills) the minimum value of pull out torque at 75% of the rated voltage shall be
more than the peak value of pulsating torque and the current pulsation shall be limited to 40%.
5.7
Motors fed by variable frequency drive shall additionally meet the following requirements.
5.7.1 The motors shall be suitable for the current wave forms produced by the power supply including
harmonics generated by the drive. The necessary coordination by motor manufacturers with
drive manufacturers regarding harmonics generated by VFD shall be taken care and
incorporated in motor design suitably.
5.7.2 The motors shall be designed to operate continuously at any speed over the range as per process
requirement with minimum range as 10-100% of rated speed or as specified in data sheet. The
characteristics shall be baked on the application in terms of constant torque / variable torque as
per the driven equipment. Additional cooling fan shall be provided if required to limit the
temperature rise to specified limits, alternatively option of applying suitable de-rating may be
considered.
5.7.3 The motors shall withstand torque pulsation resulting from harmonics generated by the solid
state power supply.
5.7.4 The motors required to be transferred to DOL bypass mode shall be rated for specified
variations in line voltage and frequency.
5.8
The minimum values for performance characteristics of these motors shall be as given in the
tables 1, 2 & 3 of IS 12615-2011 for 1E2 motors, subjected to tolerance as per IS/IEC. Motor
meant for application with VFD, the efficiency value can be one class lower as per IS.
Windings
6.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be provided with class 'B' insulation as a minimum. In
case of motors with class 'F' insulation, the permissible temperature rise above the specified
ambient temperature shall be limited to those specified in the applicable Indian standards for
class 'B' insulation.
6.1.2 The winding shall be tropicalised. The windings shall preferably be vacuum impregnated.
Alternately the windings shall be suitably varnished, baked and treated with epoxy gel for
operating satisfactorily in humid and corrosive atmospheres.
6.1.3 Windings shall be adequately braced to prevent any relative movement during operation. In this
respect, particular care shall be taken for the stator windings for direct-on-line starting squirrel
cage motors. Insulation shall be provided between coils of different phases that lie together.
Core laminations must be capable of withstanding burnout for rewind at 350 C without damage
or loosening.
6.1.4 In case of motors driving equipment with pulsating loads, special care shall be taken for the
joints of rotor bars and end rings to avoid premature failures due to induced fatigue stresses.
6.1.5 The windings shall be connected in delta. However, for motors rated 2.2 kW and below, star
connection may be accepted. In case of motors with star-delta starting, the motor windings shall
be fully insulated for delta connection.
5Igur
fdaeg
---,,,,,,aw,ansmsn.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 8 of 12
6.1.6 The ends of the windings shall be brought out into a terminal box. These shall be terminated by
means of terminals mounted on an insulating base made of non-hygroscopic and non-flammable
material.
6.1.7 All motors shall be provided with six terminals and suitable links to connect them in star or in
delta except for motors rated up to and including 2.2 kW which may be accepted with three
terminals.
6.2
6.2.1 Unless otherwise agreed, the terminal box shall be located on the right hand side as viewed from
the driving (coupling) end. The terminal box shall have side cable entry from non-driving end.
However, as a special case, terminal box located on top may also be accepted, particularly for
hazardous area motors, in case manufacturer has only top mounted terminal box design which is
duly tested/certified by CIMFR and approved by PESO for installation in hazardous area. The
terminal box design shall allow rotation in steps of 90 C to facilitate cable entry from any
direction at site.
6.2.2 Terminal box cover shall be provided with handles to facilitate easy removal. However, for
terminal box covers weighing less than 5 kg., terminal box covers without handles can be
accepted.
6.2.3 The terminal box shall be provided entries for suitable cable glands corresponding to the size of
the specified cable. Crimp type tinned Copper lugs and nickel-plated brass (or aluminum if
specifically required), double compression type cable glands shall be supplied along with the
motors for the specified cable sizes for power and space heater cables.
6.2.4 For flameproof motors, terminal box can be provided in increased safety `Exe' execution.
6.2.5 The terminals, cable lugs, terminal box, cable entries and cable glands shall be suitable for the
maximum cables sizes as specified below for 2 pole, 4 pole or 6 pole motors:
Motor rating up to and including
2.2 kW and below
3.7 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
9.3 kW
11.0 kW
15.0 kW
18.5 kW
22.0 kW
30.0 kW
37.0 kW
45.0 kW
55.0 kW
75.0 kW
90.0 kW
110.0 kW
125.0 kW/132 kW
160.0 kW
6.2.6 Cable sizes for motors having synchronous speeds 750 RPM and below shall be as agreed
between the purchaser and manufacturer.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
rr fa2es
1.12,f elvostVO51,~11
6.3
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo Undertalong)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 9 of 12
6.3.1 The minimum degree of motor enclosures including terminal boxes and bearing housing shall
be IP-55 as per IS.
6.3.2 Motors for outdoor use shall be suitable for installation and satisfactory operation without any
protective shelter or canopy. Motor casing shall be provided with a suitable drain for removal of
condensed moisture except in case of flameproof motors (Type Ex d/Exde).
6.3.3
A11 internal and external metallic parts, which may come into contact with cooling air, shall be
of corrosion resistant material or appropriately treated to resist the corrosive agents, which may
be present in the atmosphere. Screws and bolts shall be of rust proof material or protected
against corrosion.
6.3.4 Unless otherwise agreed, motors shall have standard frame sizes (min.) for various output
ratings as stipulated in IS.
6.4
6.4.1
Motors shall have grease lubricated ball or roller bearings. In all cases, the bearings shall be
chosen to provide a minimum L-10 rating life of 5 years, (40, 000 hours) at rated operating
conditions
(The L-10 rating life is the number of hours at constant speed that 90% of a group of identical
bearings will complete or exceed before the first evidence of failure).
6.4.2 The bearings shall be adequate to absorb axial thrust produced by the motor itself or due to shaft
expansion. Motors designed to handle external thrust from the driven equipment shall be
supplied with a thrust bearing at the non-driving end.
6.4.3 In cases such as pumps for hot liquids where the driven equipment operates at high
temperatures, bearings shall be cooled by a shaft-mounted fan. This shall ensure efficient
ventilation of the bearing and disperse the heat transmitted from the driven equipment by
conduction or convection.
6.4.4 Bearings shall be capable of grease injection from outside without removal of covers with
motors in the running conditions. The bearing boxes shall be provided with necessary features
to prevent Loss of grease or entry of dust / moisture e.g. labyrinth seal/ oil seal/ V seal. Where
grease nipples are provided, these shall be associated, where necessary, with appropriately
located relief devices, which ensure passage of grease through the bearings.
6.4.5 Pre-lubricated sealed bearings may be considered provided a full guarantee is given for 4 to 5
years of trouble-free service without the necessity of re-lubrication.
6.5
Cooling System
All motors shall be self ventilated, fan cooled. Fans shall be corrosion resistant or appropriately
protected. They shall be suitable for motor rotation in either direction without affecting the
performance of the motor. If this is not possible for large outputs, it shall be possible to reverse
the fan without affecting the balancing of the motor.
For motors operating in hazardous area, the fans shall be of an anti-static non-sparking material.
Ogzrr
Mt
c-lecnrc'
ENG1NEERS
w INDIA LIMITED
411
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 10 of 12
6.6 Rotor
The rotor shall be of squirrel cage type, dynamically balanced to provide a low vibration Level
and long service life for the bearings. Die cast aluminum rotors for motors in hazardous areas
may be accepted provided the same are type tested and approved by competent authorities.
6.7
Shaft Extension
Motors shall be provided with a single shaft extension with key-way and full key. Motor shaft
shall be sized to withstand 10 times the rated design torque.
6.8
Lifting Hooks
A11 motors weighing more than 30 kg. shall be provided with lifting hooks of adequate capacity.
6.9
Earth Terminals
Two earth terminals located preferably on diametrically opposite sides shall be provided for
each motor. Necessary nuts and spring washers shall be provided for earth connection.
Anti-Condensation Heaters
All motors rated 30 kW and above shall be provided with 240 V anti-condensation heaters,
sized and located so as to prevent condensation of moisture during shutdown periods.
For motors with heaters installed in hazardous atmospheres (Zone - 1 or Zone - 2), such heaters
shall conform to the provisions of applicable Indian Standards and temperature classification
specified in the motor data sheet.
The heater leads shall be brought out, preferably, to a separate terminal box which shall be of
the same specification and grade of protection as the main terminal box.
A warning label with indelible red inscription shall be provided on the motor to indicate that the
heater supply shall be isolated before carrying out any work on the motor.
7.2
Name Plates
In addition to the motor rating plate, a separate number plate for motor tag number shall be
fixed in a readily visible position. This number shall be as per the motor data sheets.
f laZ5 la
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt o7 Indo Undertaking)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFIC1ENT MEDIUM
VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 11 of 12
All tests shall be carried out at manufacturer's shop under his care and expense.
10.2
The manufacturer shall submit all internal test records of the tests carried out by him on the
bought-out items, motor sub-assembly and complete motor assembly.
10.3
The manufacturer shall carry out the following routine and acceptance tests as per applicable
Standards/ITP on all the motors.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
i)
Visual check (Nameplate, terminal box location, terminal type, clearance, size, entries,
space adequacy & gland size, direction of rotation etc.)
Dimension check (shaft height etc.)
Cable glands, cable lugs size and no. of entries in terminal box.
Winding resistance
No load test & measurement of voltage, speed, current, power input
Measurement of starting torque, starting current, full load torque, breakdown torque
Reduced voltage starting & running
Insulation resistance before and after high voltage test
High voltage
Vibration
10.4
The manufacturer shall submit the following type test certificates (one sample from each
type/rating):
Full load test & measurement of voltage, current, power slip, power factor, bearing,
a)
noise
Efficiency & pf at 100%, 75% and 50% load
b)
Temperature rise test
c)
d)
Momentary overload test
e)
Vibration
f)
Noise Level
Over speed
g)
Measurement of starting torque, starting current, full load torque.
h)
10.5
For VFD fed motors, all tests as specified in the VFD specification shall be followed in addition
to the above.
11.0 CERTIFICATION
The motors and associated equipment shall have test certificates issued by recognised
independent test house (CIMFR/ CPRI/ ERTL/ BASEEFA/ LCIE/ UL/ FM/ KLPL or
equivalent). All indigenous motors shall conform to Indian standards and shall be certified by
recognised testing agencies. A11 motors (indigenous & imported) shall also have valid statutory
approvals (e.g. PESO, DGMS etc). as applicable for the specified location. All indigenous
fiameproof motors shall have valid BIS license and marking as required by statutory authorities.
12.0 PACKING AND DESPATCH
A11 the equipment shall be divided into several sections for protection and ease of handling
during transportation. The equipment shall be properly packed for transportation by ship/rail or
trailer. The equipment shall be wrapped in polythene sheets before being placed in crates/cases
to prevent damage to the finish. Crates/cases shall have skid bottom for handling. Special
notations such as `Fragile', `This nide up', `Center of gravity', Weighe, `Owner's particulars',
`PO Nos.' etc. shall be clearly marked on the package together with other details as per purchase
order.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
fg".2x
elvOrt'4,
13~1)
ENGINEERS
w INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt ot InOla Undertahmg)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 12 of 12
The equipment may be stored outdoors for long periods before installation. The packing shall
be completely suitable for outdoor storage in areas with heavy rains/high ambient temperature,
unless otherwise agreed.
2fai&
$11g-a
l
1.111,
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
ENGINEERS
G INDIA LIMITED
c.14.101J,I21.11
c:v1 4taictv(
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 10
rc1W1 34efv(ull
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ELECTRICS OF PACKAGE
EQUIPMENT
21.11.13
VB
Vk,T
UAPJMS
25.04.08
RS
IKG
JMS
VC
28.03.03
LS
AAN
VPS
SKG
03.04.97
VCB
VPS
SG
AS
04.06.86
CSM
VPS
GNT
RCPC
Standards
Com m ittee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared Checked
by
by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
k31 __I
$gZ;1T
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
fffl-eg
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 10
Abbreviations:
Alternating current
Bureau of Indian Standard
British Standards
Chief Controller of Explosives
Central Institute of Mines and Fuel Research
Cold Rolled Cold Annealed
Current Transformer
Direct current
Directorate General of Mines Safety
Factory Mutual
Galvanised Iron
High Rupturing Capacity
Indian Electricity
International Electrotechnical Commission
Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineer
Ingress Protection
Indian Standard
Laboratoire Central des Industries Electriques
Light Emitting Diode
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
National Electric Code
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
Oil Industry Safety Directorate
Per Unit
Power Distribution Board
Poly Vinyl Chloride
Continuous duty
Standard Wire Gauge
Underwriter's Laboratories
Volt
Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker
AC
BIS
BS
CCE
CIIVIFR
CRCA
CT
DC
DGMS
FM
GI
HRC
IE
IEC
IEEE
IP
IS
LCIE
LED
MCCB
NEC
NEMA
OISD
P.U.
PDB
PVC
S1
SWG
UL
V
VDE
Mr. U. A. Patro
Members:
Mr. B. R. Bhogal
Ms. S Anand
Mr. Parag Gupta
Mr. A. K. Chaudhary (Inspection)
Ms. N. P. Guha (Project)
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 10
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
3.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4.0
SITE CONDITIONS
5.0
6.0
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
7.0
CABLING SYSTEM
8.0
EARTHING SYSTEM
9.0
LIGHTING SYSTEM
10.0
10
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$1gzulaa&-g
1.11771 ef,rTIM,3,
7"ar,U
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 10
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
1.2
For the purpose of this specification, the term 'package equipment' or 'package' denotes the
complete integrated equipment to be supplied by the vendor comprising of all main and
auxiliary equipment and associated local panel(s). The package equipment may be mounted
on a common skid and/or installed on a common platform/area in the field, as specified
elsewhere. Unless otherwise specified, the local panel shall include the power distribution to
various loads along with the necessary controls, interlocks, indications and alarms. The local
panel may either be mounted on the equipment skid/platform or separately but not very far
from the main equipment.
1.3
It is not intended to cover all aspects of design but to indicate the basic requirements only.
Vendor shall ensure that the design and installation on the skid is carried out as per good
engineering practice, relevant codes and shall meet the requirements of safety, reliability,
ease of maintenance and operation, aesthetics, scope of future expansion and maximum
interchangeability of the equipment. Vendor shall acquaint himself with EIL standards,
specifications, inspection test plans and field testing procedures as deemed necessary for
proper execution of work.
1.4
Compliance with this specification and /or review of any of the vendor documents shall not
relieve the vendor of his responsibility and his contractual obligations with regard to the
completeness and satisfactory operation of the package.
All electrical equipment and the complete package shall meet the requirements of this
specification and enclosed data sheets, in addition to the relevant Publications and Codes of
Practice of Bureau of Indian Standards, EIL Standards, statutory regulations and good
engineering practices. Complete system must also conform to the latest revisions of the
following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
CEA Regulations
Fire Insurance Regulations
Petroleum Rules and any other regulations laid down by Chief Controller of
Explosives
The Factory Act and regulations laid down by Factory Inspectorate
Regulations laid down by local statutory authorities and Electrical Inspectorate
Oil Mines Regulations (For Projects under DGMS jurisdiction).
2.2
In case of imported equipments, standards of the country of origin shall be applicable if these
standards are equivalent or stringent than the applicable Indian standards.
2.3
Vendor shall provide all assistance required for obtaining approvals from statutory
authorities for materials, plant design/ drawings and complete installation.
2.4
Where Indian Standards do not exist, the relevant IEC/ BS/ VDE/ IEEE/ NEMA standards
shall apply. Any other international standard may also be followed provided it is equivalent
to or more stringent than the standards specified above.
2.5
In case of any contradiction between various referred standard / specification /datasheet and
statutory regulations, most stringent requirement shall prevail. However owner's decision in
this regard will be final and binding.
$.fgzrr laaj
eg
laIWR elvottlOth3~11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Intha Undertaking)
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 5 of 10
The offered equipment shall be brand new with state of art technology and proven field track
record. No prototype equipment shall be offered.
3.2
Vendor shall ensure availability of spare parts and maintenance support services for the
offered equipment at least for 15years from the date of supply.
3.3
Vendor shall give a notice of at least one year to the end user of equipment and EIL before
phasing out the product/ spares to enable the end user for placement of order for spares and
services.
In case of storage, handling or processing of flammable materials within the battery limits of
the package, area classification shall be carried out in line with IS: 5572, Indian Petroleum
Rules, OISD standard-113 and DGMS guidelines where applicable. Where specified, the
an 'Area Classification Drawing' indicating the zones of hazardous
vendor shall furnish
groups. A list of flammable materials handled along with
area and the applicable gas
their properties like flash point, ignition temperature, explosive limits etc. shall also be
furnished.
5.2
All the electrical equipment installed in hazardous areas shall be selected as per IS-5571,
where applicable, and shall meet the requirements of relevant IS, IEC or NEC Standards and
statutory regulations. However, electrical equipment for Zone-2 areas as a minimum shall be
Ex `e'/ Ex 'n' type as specified in data sheet, subject to the same being acceptable to the
concerned statutory authorities. Increased safety (Type Ex `el) equipment shall not be used in
zone-1 areas. Ordinary industrial electrical equipment (even though permitted for use in
Div.2 area as per NEC, USA) shall not be used in Zone-2 areas.
5.3
Electrical equipments for hazardous areas shall have test certificates issued by recognised
independent test house (CIMFR/BASEEFA/LCIE/PTB/UL/FM OR equivalent). All
indigenous equipment shall conform to Indian standards and shall be certified by Indian
testing agencies. All equipment (indigenous & imported) shall also have valid statutory
approvals as applicable for the specified locations.
5.4
Electrical equipment for hazardous areas shall, generally, be suitable for gas groups IIA and
IIB and temperature Class -T3 as applicable to the selected type of explosion protection. In
case of hydrogen or hydrogen-hydrocarbon mixtures having more than 30% hydrogen, the
gas group to be considered, shall be IIC.
5.5
All electric motors for agitators/mixers and metering pumps handling flammable materials
and oil sump pumps, shall be flameproof (Type Ex-de), irrespective of the area being
classified as Zone-2 or Zone-1.
5.6
In case the package equipment is to be located in a classified hazardous area, the same shall
be indicated in the data sheet. In such a case, the offered equipment/package shall conform to
whichever are the more stringent requirements, i.e. either due to materials being handled in
the package or hazardous location in which package is installed.
.31
ogur
ff5leg
1.112-, riecr,W,
InJa2F+1/
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Ind. Und,,tak,n9)
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 6 of 10
General Requirements
6.1.1
Specifications of all equipments/items, shall be furnished by the vendor for owner's review.
However, certain minimum requirements for the major equipment are highlighted in this
section.
6.1.2 All equipment and components shall be new and supplied by approved reputed
manufacturers. Equipment requiring specialised maintenance or operation shall be avoided
as far as possible and prototype equipment shall not be accepted. A11 equipment shall be
complete with all necessary weather and anticorrosion protection including tropicalization to
prevent damage due to climate, saline atmosphere, dust and corrosive vapours.
6.1.3 All equipment / material shall be protected for inland / marine transport, carriage at site and
outdoor storage during transit and at site. Vendor shall be responsible for any damage to the
equipment during transit. A11 packages shall be clearly, legibly and durably marked with
uniform block letters giving the relevant equipment/ material details. Each package shall
contain a packing list in a waterproof envelope.
6.1.4 All electrical components and equipment shall be sized to suit the maximum load under the
most severe operating conditions. Rated voltage and frequency for the equipment shall be as
indicated in enclosed data sheet.
6.1.5
All spares required for testing and commissioning the package shall be included along with
any special tools and tackles required for operation and maintenance.
6.2
6.3
6.3.1 This shall meet the requirements of data sheets and the following specific requirements.
6.3.2 Unless otherwise specified, the Power Distribution Board (PDB) may be incorporated as part
of the Local Panel. The PDB shall include necessary power distribution equipment as
applicable for the package equipment in addition to the associated controls, interlocks,
indications and alarms. A11 motor starters shall be Direct-on-line type unless specified
otherwise. In case of skid-mounted package equipment located in hazardous area, this panel
shall also be installed on skid unless specified otherwise to install elsewhere in a safe area
and the emergency stop push buttons to be provided near the equipment.
6.3.3 The panel shall be free standing, metal enclosed, dust and vermin proof type having
minimum IP-42 degree of protection as per IS:13947 (Part-1). Panels for outdoor locations
shall be weatherproof and supplied with a sheet steel kiosk or have internal and external
doors with a rain shelter. The panel shall be designed to ensure maximum safety during
operation, inspection, connection of cables and maintenance with energised busbars and
without any special precautions. Ample space shall be provided inside the panel for any
future addition of components in the panel. Power and control equipment shall be segregated
inside the panel as far as practicable. The maximum height of the operating handle/switches
shall not exceed 1800mm and the minimum height shall not be below 300mm.
_Jt4
ENGINEERS
Ogzu fM2- g INDIA LIMITED
INTUR exagt ,1,3,421.3)
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 7 of 10
6.3.4 The panel shall have an integral base frame and shall be sheet steel clad, fabricated out of 14
SWG CRCA sheet steel except that doors and covers may be of 16 SWG thickness.
Necessary stiffeners shall be provided on doors / covers to prevent buckling. Large size
doors and covers or those on which substantial relays/meters are mounted shall be fabricated
out of 14 SWG CRCA sheet steel. All doors shall be hinged type, and all covers, doors,
openings and gland plates shall be provided with neoprene gaskets. All hardware shall be
corrosion resistant. All bolts, nuts and washers shall be secured against loosening and shall
be made of galvanized, zinc passivated or cadmium plated high quality steel. Unless
otherwise specified, the panel shall be suitable for bottom cable entry. The gland plate and
cable glands shall be provided with the panel.
6.3.5 The panels, to be installed in a hazardous area, shall be of flameproof type Ex(d). All
hazardous area equipment (except motors) shall be provided with cast light metal alloy
enclosure.
6.3.6 Outgoing motor feeders shall be provided with switch, fuse, thermal overload relay with
single phasing preventor or Motor Protection Relay and contactors for operation / safety
isolation. All switches shall be load-break, heavy duty, air-break type with the operating
handle mounted on the compartment door. Load break switch or MCCB shall be provided as
main incoming switch complete with necessary mechanical interlocks, door interlock and
defeat mechanism. Motor duty switches of AC-23 duty are also acceptable for outgoing
motor feeders.
6.3.7 All fuses shall be non-deteriorating HRC cartridge, pressure fitted, link type. The contactors
shall be air-break having AC-3 duty rating. Power contactors shall be rated for 100% of the
maximum continuous current (e.g. rated current of motor) with a minimum rating of 16
Amperes with AC-3 duty. Contactor coils shall be suitable for 240V AC control supply.
6.3 .8 Thermal overload relays shall be three element, pos itive acting, ambient temperature
compensated type with adjustable setting range and built-in protection feature against single
phasing which can operate even with 50% rated current. The relays shall be manual reset
type with the reset push button provided on the cubicle door.
6.3.9 All indicating instruments shall be moving iron, flush mounting type of 72mm x 72mm
square pattern of at least 1.5 accuracy class. LEDs provided for indication shall be cluster
type with adequate brightness and minimum 2Nos LEDs chips per light. LEDs shall be
connected in parallel and each LED chip having diameter not less than 3mm.
6.3.10 All control/selector switches shall be rotary back connected type having a cam-operated
contact mechanism with knob type handle. Ammeter selector switches shall have contacts
with make before break feature and additional locking facility shall be provided where
required.
6.3.11 All motor feeders shall be provided with a STOP (red) push button and necessary START
(green) push button and control/interlock switches. STOP push buttons shall have stay put
feature and additional locking facility shall be provided where required.
6.3.12 Current transformer fed ammeter shall be provided for all motors, which may have variable
loading or are required for process control. Feeders of 30 Amperes rating and above shall be
provided with a CT and ammeter as a standard. The current transformers shall have an
accuracy class 1.0 and instrument security factor not greater than 5.
6.3.13 All auxiliary devices for control, indication, measurement and alarm such as push buttons,
control and selector switches, indicating lamps, metering instruments, annunciators etc. shall
be mounted on the front door of the panel. Components requiring frequent inspection shall
be easily accessible.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
~_it4
5fg-ar 02eg
14-1WR :12"41W 9513,70,1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A
Govt ol innia
undedak.9)
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 8 of 10
6.3.14 Control supply for the equipment shall normally be derived from an adequately sized
transformer in the panel connected across two phases.
6.3.15 Adequate number of potential-free contacts shall be provided in the control panel for any
remote control monitoring of the package equipment.
6.3.16 The panel shall be provided with an anti-condensation heater controlled through a switch
fuse and an adjustable thermostat.
6.3.17 Inside the panel, the wiring for power, control and signaling circuits shall be done with BIS
approved flame retardant PVC insulated copper conductors having 660/1100V grade
insulation. Power wiring shall be sized for the nominal rating of associated switch/contactor.
Minimum size of control wires shall be 1.5mm2 copper for control circuits having fuse rating
10 amperes or lesser. For control circuits with higher fuse rating, minimum 2.5mm2 copper
conductor shall be used. Wiring for AC and DC circuits shall have different colour coding.
Clamp type terminals shall be acceptable for direct termination of wires upto 1 Omm2 size.
For conductors larger than 10 mm2, bolted type terminals with crimping lugs shall be
provided. Each wire shall be terminated at a separate terminal. A minimum of 10% spare
terminals shall be provided on each terminal block. All incoming and outgoing wires from
the panel shall terminate on a suitable terminal strip/block. No such wire shall
terminate/emanate directly from a panel component. However, in case power supply
connections are to be looped, the loop wires are to be crimped together before fixing on
terminal strip, such that loop continuity is not lost in case wire is removed from terminal
strip.
6.3.18 An adequately sized earth bus shall be provided in the panel for connection to the main earth
grid. All non-current carrying metallic parts of the mounted equipment shall be earthed.
Doors and movable parts shall be earthed using flexible copper connections. The earth bus
shall be provided with alternate bands of yellow and green. All earth connection wires shall
be suitably colour coded.
6.3.19 Engraved nameplates shall be provided for all auxiliary devices mounted on the front of the
panel. Nameplate or polyester adhesive stickers shall be provided for each equipment inside
the panel.
6.3.20 All metal parts shall be thoroughly cleaned degreased and made free from rust. After
application of the primer, the panel shall be spray painted with two coats of final paint.
Colour shade of the final paint shall be 632 as per IS:5 unless otherwise specified. Powder
coating of panel shall also be acceptable.
6.3.21 At least one outgoing feeder of each rating and type shall be provided as spare in the PDB.
Unless otherwise specified, a single point power supply shall be provided by the owner
through an aluminium/copper conductor, PVC insulated, armoured cable terminated at the
Power Distribution Board/Local Panel. The vendor shall provide all power and control
cabling between the PDB/ Local panel and the package equipment.
31
Ogu f8tffleg
tatwm rtvcort to,~)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Intha Unclertaking)
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 9 of 10
7.2
Power and control cables for 415V system shall be of 1100V grade PVC insulation with
copper conductors up to 16mm2 and aluminum conductors beyond 16mm2, PVC inner
sheath, armouring and overall PVC sheath as per IS: 1554 (Part-I). The conductor size shall
be minimum 2.5mm2 copper. All power and control cables shall have extruded inner and
outer sheaths. Outer sheath of cables shall be black in colour and the minimum value of
oxygen index shall be 29 at 27+ 2 C. In addition, suitable chemicals shall be added into the
PVC compound of the outer sheath to protect the cable against rodent and termite attack.
Adequate derating factors shall be used for sizing the cables. At least one spare core shall be
provided in all control cables. All cable / wire shall be BIS approved.
7.3
All cables shall be heavy duty mining type, for all projects under DGMS jurisdiction. All
shall be covered with insulating material & efficiently protected from
such cables
mechanical damage and supported at sufficiently frequent intervals in a manner to prevent
damage to such cables. Cables and conductors where connected to motors and other
equipments shall be mechanically protected by securely attaching the metallic covering to
is efficiently sealed so as to
the apparatus and the insulating material at each cable end
prevent the diminution of its insulating properties.
7.4
All cabling on the equipment skid/platform shall be in GI cable trays/conduits. A11 cable
trays and accessories shall be prefabricated and hot dip galvanised. The minimum amount of
galvanising shall be 610g/m2 . All cables shall be identified close to their termination point by
cable number punched on 2mm thick aluminium straps securely fastened to each cable. In
case of control cables, all cores shall be identified at both ends by their terminal numbers
using PVC ferrules as per interconnection diagrams. A11 equipments shall be supplied with
double compression type nickel platedbrass cable glands and tinned copper lugs.
7.5
In case, PDB/Local Panel installed away from the equipment skid/platform, necessary cable
trenches/trays between panel and equipment shall be in owner's scope, unless otherwise
specified.
Earthing system design and installation shall generally be as per IS: 3043. One or more
number of G.I. earth plates shall be provided for the package equipment depending upon its
size. A11 metallic non-current carrying parts of electrical apparatus, current and potential
transformer secondaries, structural steel, vessels etc. shall be connected by at least two
distinct separate earth conductors to an earth plate. A11 earth plates shall be bonded together
and shall have the provision for interconnection to owner's main earth grid at two points.
Earth plates shall be of 360x80x1Omm size and shall be provided with adequate number of
tapped holes. Earth continuity bonding shall be provided across all pipe flange joints.
8.2
All hardware used for earthing installation shall be hot dip galvanised or zinc passivated. The
amount of galvanizing shall be min. 610 g/m2 . Specially provided bolts, lugs and spring
washers shall be used for all earthing connections of equipment.
8.3
Unless specified otherwise in data sheet, equipment earthing shall be as per standard
equipment earthing schedule.
8.4
Earthing connections to equipment shall be made by means of bolts, lugs and spring washers
provided specifically for this purpose.
k31llaf
Ogur laffleg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IF Govt of Intha Undertaking
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 10 of 10
General lighting for area in which package is to be installed shall be provided by purchaser,
unless specified otherwise in data sheet.
9.2
Any other lighting requirements such as Local panel lighting shall be provided by vendor.
Power for such local lighting shall be obtained from a suitable feeder in PDB/Local Panel.
All lighting circuits shall have provision for isolation in both phases and neutral for packages
to be installed in hazardous areas. In areas under DGMS jurisdiction, the lighting system
shall conform to special requirements stipulated in CEA regulations.
All equipment shall be tested and inspected at vendor's works before dispatch to ensure
compliance with the relevant specifications and agreed quality assurance/ testing plan. The
owner or his authorized representative may visit the works during manufacture of various
electrical equipment / materials to assess the progress of work as well as to ascertain that
only quality raw materials are used for the same. He shall be given full assistance to carry out
the inspection. Purchaser's representative shall be given minimum two weeks' advance
notice for witnessing the final testing. The minimum testing / inspection requirements for aIl
components /equipment shall conform to the requirements stipulated in applicable codes and
standards. Test certificates including test records and performance curves etc. shall be
furnished by the vendor.
10.2
Vendor shall submit the field testing procedures for purchaser's approval. Field tests as per
the approved procedures shall be performed on the electrical system/ equipment before its
being put into service. All test equipment required for this purpose shall be arranged by the
vendor, in case testing and commissioning at site is included in his scope, and test reports
shall be approved by the site-in-charge before acceptance of the complete package.
Aq peAcuddv
CD
c
03
oe
O.
(/)
D)
0 0.
cn
CD
0
co
Z
O <
JJ
JJ
G)
JJ
G)
penssi
Z OOZ 't0'OE
uo4enieweldw!
LOOZ 60'8Z
JJ
JJ
cn
17 1. 0Z '1. 0'0
-18-9
(1)(-)
o.
-o
<1)
crtz
dx
CD
44
. .
'--'
) '-'
5-' E'
!(.-.)nc-.)noi>ezi>
,...,, _
p,,cc
4. ,P-1
,aa'8,,=1-;~MAD 0,4 `<
>
m
m
tz>
>w
Cn
3"
7.
H in
(=r,
Aj,
n ,
y4
H Cr':
,--
o
n -.
o
'Z' AD
2.
.<
>
=h
er
'-
c":)'
AD
a...-1
croAD
,__, PD.-.)
Onv)
CD '- R"gD)s-dn5D??,-'61)
t-1 .--s=
Sw
(-)
Ic'
..,.'"
s-0
ep ,..
-t. j* 9. -
-cs ,, ,-C 4 co
.,,,_,,,..,.....
ci) . - , cl
c) ,
,--3
. , cp ,-0 ,,T,1
r,
.-,,.(-.40,0t
- .0-b n
'"_, co
:;:-:
E,'
=
n
..-t-4"0
cn
,y... - CI)
,-,
-OCIOn
'-'r+
Cl.,
'' '-' 0 -C"
CD
,
~
--
,
.
cD CL.
:::' ,2
ril
c)
,-,- CD
n
CIA
0
5.,(-DVDCD-r'100
..t
CD '-'
tri
oH
,...4,4.
'-'
'"Ch.r1)''' cp
cn
CD
~
7z:1
CD '
,E)
'"
WF
CIA rp
.-. v]
.lo
co
,. co
CD ril
.-: >e
E)'- , FD'
9,2.
1Z 0)
V)
o
n
iS-D.4o
o
"
cn
"
CD
5-
C")
4(4
5"Z
,H- i *-
n -c:
-i'5
94
CrOrpn
LD. CH
D
.--
c ..-bn
(-13(I) n 4'
c.) -F)- cl)
g- '-'' o n
51'.
H H 7:i 00
to 't,5,..
't.12.
't "t 't pZ
Z Z 44
,pcn
-c
AD
....,)
-d
,-+
'3A
9 -8- 9 '
;th
, R2
a,
_ 3..
... c,., szlHzi
ei)
cl.
rz" (..)
4) 3
. .:<., 4r: r) (D' O
-:
(")
-<
2,
1,,
o
CD
(-)
0. C)
c" = o ,)o~.-t-
.--,
- '
S:L
-r '-t
CD 0 C'-r (-)
,...;
(5 sH <9
(1)::.
-r -1 n
-_,-.
n
HH
r>
cr)
,--o- ,I,
7:
:Dt-zy
fw co
44
CD pD
n CFO
s)
cr
5
5
rj
45.
rri
rri
cir
n
-t.
0AQ
... ,.,
,a,
c/D
?":1
-''' 5 9 C) 9+ (%' 4. (D
C)
,- (-) 2 ,_,
CD r) :='-:
, -; (--)..,
.-',,,
,,,,,,,_
-1:1
?,3 -. P 0 .-05
(:)5rrl.P0 000
- > F;
o o
n
2
5,(1
.
9,,,,,,
,2.o
'-,
2,
)
-zo
o
orri
( 0
o o ,-i v, " CD "]
:8'
.,
-
cm CD..-1":1
,,,, ',',' (
'--i)' -g'
; (1-,
"? .c
") 'c,.. ''2 ,p,- n cpc
,(4
(-)
nnnnco
-rim
.71'r71-'8','
-0( r-' 4 n-ci sHmtrimm7,
,-dnnn
H
-ci
zJ ,H ,H
.1r-'2 l
r
.,
00
o
o 2:J
z
Inspection StandardsCommittee
sum3mitaaqqy
uldno 3 S
:adODSO'I
This InspectionandTest Plancoverstheminimumtestingrequirementsof Industrial typecontrol stations.
..,,
5:
I
'g
SUPPLIER
o
o
Supplier' s
Test
Records
lA
s-
ro co -z2;
,_,
r) cn CD
,-, cn c)
.-t
r-r-
Visual
Dimensions,Threads
Workmanship
PaintShade
Markingoneach piece forTagno.
etc.
Terminal sizes,Lugssize(whererequired)
Cable Gland size
Acceptance Tests:-
o
o
Final Inspection
IndustrialtypeControl
Station
Supplier's
TestRecords/
Independent
lab TC
-,
o
o
cs-
CD
Procedure
Material Inspection
Incomingmaterial like
Physical & Chemical Properties,Material
castings, Push Button,
Certificate, Accuracy, Makeetc.
terminals,glass,ammeter,
voltmeter, knob,switch,
etc
Inprocess Inspection
Visual,Dimension,Bill of water
.-
0 0
;'
4=.
C=
t,-) ti
i=:,
1,-.) t.) ~
SUB
SUPPLIER
ril
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
r=1n
i
cp-1
t=i
n
:
>
STAGE/ACTIVITY
rC'l
RECORD
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
Paintingand Packing
PaintingandPacking
Samples
Visual.
Suitableprotectiontoprevententryof
foreignmaterial.
Properpackingtopreventany
damageduringtransportation.
(D
rn
cn
<--;
cr
ris7.
cr
z
z
rs
ris
-tcs
cn
cn
r-ch
(")
Cr
cn
rD
'c7n
CD
cn
CD
":7
CID
'"1:1
cD
cn
os
et)
cn
cn
-1
-cs
,=c
C1)
cn
CD
CD
(1)
cn
Compilationof Inspectionreports,drawings,
etcasper VDR / PR
o ".
(1
9("D
CIC7 rD
t
o FD
rD
(')
CD
cn
i\.,
Final Document
submission
..
._.
Supplier' s
TestRecords
/ Inspection
Certificate
(IC)
Final data
folder
/Completenes
scertificate
cn
__,
.
DocumentationandIC
cn
.__,
Testrecords
Documentationand IC
-+)
CD
::.
c
cr,
Certificates
fromtesting
agencies
EIL/TPIA
Submissionof Certificates
SUPPLIER
_
.
.
..-
Lnt fili
; 7=
-i=,
iJ
SUB
SUPPLIER
IIV 113P16pAcloo
Z
o
r
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
paniesai
(/)
1-18-9
CHARACTERISTICS
*Aall
STAGE/ACTIVITY
Aq peAwddv
cr
cD
n.
(")
,
CD
mm
o.
1:
_13
-CJ
CJ
CD
7:1
Zo
0 <
co
4=,
O
panss!--au pu e pes!ned
o
.^:1I01-18-9
3NVId 1S
5: Er 5' 5
zt cn ,-1
,-1 ~"
-' tri
o
,
n
n
o
rd
qg
Z-
c-;
n
P)
-.4.AD
F
.,_ Cr
Y-3-
.-I <
= CD
5F
'-r19'4"'
co o
'''
co
Cn
CD
.._,
rD -.. LO ,,,
,E gl-":
,
crz
(1) H
`l) c4
cit:,.-,
n-,,,__.n
0
CD = 0 9 (:)
-,cp
-t-,n r>i<l
n , CC
cn
5"
':_ht:,,
os),) -c5,-.
(). = CD
,''4.1c4
CD 9 - C)
,<
cp
CrQ
=
.:h
..
C)
$2,)
R''
,-,
..
CIQ
_,
oo
a
rD
ro ,.c)
9,)
(c'D'
o
ED.
n"
"
v,
s),.-.4.)
(-)
1=0
Cl.
CD
cli
cn
rri
rii
,1
>
-I
44
z~ti
,-,:i
H
cr'
.11
ril
ar
n
9
-.
s2r)
0
-t
?.
n
.-3
tsaZ Ir1.13UN
C
c1 --1
'H 7:J
4
rrl Z ,.Z
.:,i cp ,_.]
' (-)
--3 tc.")
(-) -C't ''':'4 ":J
7zi ''''
/0 rd''' CD'' Z
r-, .c, .0 .0 r--, .-3
'cc5 4.--Inn
n'-'
rri
o-:
>
,H
.
0
CA
o
'a.
n ,....
CA
n
(
'-'"').
0 $=
(-)
ri-i
) tri
,:t.
t:, (-.,-t
,-,
-, '''
nonn
,-"
'" :
r, ,,,,- -, n
7- ff , - V.. s.
o
CM
rB)
-zi gp' .
cs. 1p.."c5 *
g .0-
.) C.)
CL
-.=
cD po C
r"
uolionilsuo3 Jo repawN
r-
suolmitaiqqv
uldnD DS
oc
co
o
adODS O'I
O
r)
o
...o
Cil
r)
CD
SUB
SUPPLIER
EOF INSPECTION
SUPPLIER
EIL/TPIA
----.
Z (1>
H
,..,
...1
-] -t
-I eD
ShaftNDT
<-,-
r2:. (t)
'--h
rp o ,-,
r) sw
,-rj 0 S2
0 "
ri;
-3
sz.,
up
CA
,,
con
,,..,
r)
CA
ril
e'')
:
CL
CD
-1
(1)
c)
(I)
co')
.-r
MotorAssembly
'i
Inprocess Inspection
.--.
C>
0
-;;',`:
f.J.)
(....)
-
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
.--..
C>
C>
c: ..
~
O
b
l-)
Material Inspection
Procedures
IN
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
z V)
0
'' -1.
CD
o
c)
o
ocp
1,
n,
''0
rw
).)
v)
o
o
If-,
rii
W
r.) y CD
0 -i
-d V)
,-t
- o
-1 cn -t
o
.
CD
u)
0
o
5
o
o..
(,)
c''
,-,
C>
n)
CA
t-,-
c)
...,
cp
o
t
::)
c)-
n)
.. o
',7-,
' -t.,.
P., crq
o eD
to..
o
.4)
<
0
-t.
A.)
Crt:7
CD
CL,
......,
CD
.)
-.-'
n9"
cr)
-.
o
pi CD
co
r)
(i)
5
CD
n)
--,
o
c)
....
o
o.
.'=e' .
'-'
s)
()
o R,
g- C)
:-,
,Cr ,5
o .--
"o <
''' ,s2:. 5. c5-;
F1') < -: -c
(-)
gr
, 0 rD
"
0 .ts-1.-P) CD
cp
< ,-t
o fW f22 (7)
`-'
S=0
PD -= tw ,)
Cfg g cm
CD
,..,
...---
k
- C cy, (/)
,,
-- , -. cp
',:,- CD
cn
to. crct CD
'
c/) 0 CD cD
`-'
,`L). o
1`') 5- (') C)
crq '7,.,' rD
CL cp
c4 c)
r-cc.)zzi
o cD
5,
ril
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
5
-,CD '-d(1)
c)
5 -0 r9
c) c4 . o
o ;:,,
,
,.
z-' E -.
sw,
CD
(D O CL, r) 0
o o ...... tz,, CL,
cn _,
C2
fo., ,..
cn,
n) :),
><
r)
CD
cr
CD
,-,.
o
94
'-''
o ..., , .., tz0
,--
crD)
o (D
-'' Du
-. CfQ o
A)
.-c,
crq. o ,
..:-- , o -o
''''
'',
..
9 ci)
n)
DU
f=0
a 1=L.
,-,. -0
.. .c.,
,... Gc? -t ct.
<
___, ..,
Qvu rbooP.,
)(1)
FD-,
"
,,,
cnL4
c.,
0 -t ,-,
'-'
''' -
'"1
cp 5 5.
")
Clci
C2'''s < "4"
4 E,
0 0j ,
-. CD Cf)
5,
o
CD - '
CM )
cp
cr
- <CD
Cl.
,... tD
u)
,-,
..-
H
ro
CD
co
CHARACTERISTICS
H , o- <, .7
5t:t, 0
o
e)
o., rt,
PD
.-s
s---'
o
,.j
o4
o
-,
o
4. z v,
o or
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
Final Inspection
4,
SCOP]E OF INSPECTION
SUB
SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
.nall101-18-9
un
0
-o
(1)
CD
g
cs
r)
CD
c) c)
o
.
-, 6
cl.,
'
E
v,
`r-c,
EIL/TPIA
C14
,,
CD
r2
,_," -1.,
,-s
z:
o
co 5
----
SUPPLIER
v) .5''
CD
CD
el.
V.1
..
.=:
E+, , ,
'"
-, c) v) ''-' ,..,
H .1.
c) ,-,-.
cr) c:) 'i--)
,=,.,
s2
r)."-)
C/D
CD
n g'n
CD
--CM
co
'-'
5
cA
-cs
7:J cp
p.
---..
CP:
'"H --
SUB
SUPPLIER
'
-,i
4
CD
s..-,
CD
CD
UD
.-ci)
H
`-<
1:,
4
,c-4
2,
0
cp
i-;
E.
iN.)
i...)
.4,.
U1
E OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
.., .
CHARACTERISTICS
z c4
0r
'^a21101-18-9
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
,o
-t
CA
g
SUB
SUPPLIER
SUPPLIER
EIL/TPIA
,---
0
0
c:
E OF INSPECTION
Testrecords
0
0
CompilationofInspectionreports,drawings,etc
asper VDR / PR
FinalDocumentsubmission
Documentationand IC
Supplier Test
Certificates/
Inspection
Certificate(IC)
Finaldata
folder
/Completeness
certificate
0
0
c :
Documentationand IC
CD
c_
e)7'
c_
ci>
s),)
c)'
cn
c.
a.
c)..
o
c
r)
cl.,
n)
s:)..
t
S=0
r)
-,-
-t
(")
li
CD
Cl.
.....
.
o
cn
-.......
cn
r)
o
o
cr CD
..::s.)
----;
rc,
r)
-.
CD
'!'s
r)
;)
'z's
.
CD
C)
...
C)
5.
-
'...
.,c)$
ro
cu
CD
~t
CD
...
Ci.
tD-Pcn
Cn
.-t
-)
,f .
..
0
CL,
s),)
sc,,..
sc,..
cin
f5
0 >
=
u)
-cs
co
CD
,-;''
"
cs.
cn
cr
ro
s),)
('--)
CD
CD
cn
.-:
CD
,-0
-,.
(D
c)
,-,.
CD
qA
CD
(1)
,-1
CD
AD
i \ -)
Visual.
Suitableprotectiontoprevententryof
foreignmaterial.
Properpackingtopreventany damage
duringtransportation.
AD
t.))
"
O\
.--,
Ch
::
PaintingofMotorFrames
0 nal{ L3-1000-00-9 oN
01
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
CHARACTERISTICS
C4
0 tn
11
NIVId IS3
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
Aq p aAw ddv
0.)
0 a
so.
m
o.) (4)
c
CD
0.
CD
0.
CD
6 CD
c-)
CD
A
7
CD
CD
C)
(f)
L. OZ10 . 91.
L OOZ Z 117Z
CD
CD
0
0
CD
41. 0Z *6040
p a nssi -e p ue p asha){
-I
E
0
>
<
>
Z
1-
gl)
C)
u)
m
-n >
0
z
9- nab Z01.- 1. 8- 9
ON NO LLVOI3133dSOINONVIS
co
co
PvelIP31A111A1
.0 4(7-
,7z2, El
(")
>
'-r1
rTi
rd
cA
H 1.,0
c4 6. =
a- -- - .
(-)
FD .
CD CD
C1/
=
5'
co
CD 7'
-'
AD
CM Fi .
=
0
=
=
i,-7. C"''
mh co
mmi
??
CD
AD
'0
'-<
O
a
=
AD 5
o -,.
--
>
co
O.
uct
AD
C " = CD
co
= AD En m cfp
'< '0 2
O 0 :R.
rd 0
cD C./) 0
AD
r- (44. v, F;
o
= -0 0
CD
C<- PD `I = 0 G0 0
-,.
md S
E.,
-
CM
e-+
pa
.-'---h
1
0
a.
-I
Pp
=
CR
co k.. (-)
Z Au
cD 01-. 0 w <
CD = m CD
.:.1. '7 i
AD TZ
0 =
F. , , . 9.
co an =` X
" D'
CD c
Cr ismD- DI.
..1.
cl,
.--
=r
=- 0
7dFcn C'"
C
co -
AD
FD s3-
CD
v)
PD) rri P
5. ,
AD
5- 5 5' ,
Crg
c, Fir (.1)
.... cf):1-
CD
CD
-r
cn
!ZI
co
Er,I CD rl C7 '71 cp
7d 0
cn .-t 0 -t-
P:J
,?
-1
AD
cr
5, oP
co
CD
E' mcn
.Z'. "
=
0 ='' 4-1 =
<
(-) =
0 --
4-3
F--> . , -0
.--, 1 . = IDD - AD
"
b- ; CP4 u
CD mt 0 -t-
r) <
n
cn
0 .-
,
,..1.) CA
cn -- '-) = 0
/2, 7.... CM e,
crq H a y CD
a, ,....3 Gig
c4D
-1
4- CI: P.4- 0 0
-8
Po ca,
1 -.. < .... = CD _
t/D
n < IDD CL 0
0 ,ty m
5>"
t- .
CL .1
r"
Crg
2 = v9 Q-0 0 c--t
,--,' ("")
0 0 m
ct 4. 6 .
"d -4
.
- -I
rn,
?-17
cr
co
..0)
c- l .
AD
fm,
- ,
Fr
rrl
0
-t
z-CD-) .
C./)
CD
'1
AD
'd
-0 cD
.. = 0
-, 5 0
t , -, -4 0 ,, =4
ig. ((i)-) (.7. P a
., 0,
=
H - =. , L,-
'6' . (I) (I
O
ml
r)
r)
> ci)
cd >
trdinnnno::i>to>
mi- -I
,t
(m.:Inn(-) to
= = -t =
o 4
.)
-
-, c,
ca. CZ
a t. rD
cD
. 0
t--4
=
CD
r.;
tri
=
r" .0 .0
E E-)"
Jam) asegoind
'17
(")
..-0- -AD0
t-`71
1AI
toaq qy
e
:su o
0. A9 21 L3 - 1. 000-00-8'oN
pani asal sly 6u IIV11311-1 60c100
rn
13
cn
0)
CD
N.)
0
0)
tCD
Cn
Cn
0 -I
-0
C4
5
o z
0 2
I p3
0
m
0
E -4
s
ADZ
r=r-r,
gneu Z0 - b8-9
4
eD
z
>
z
0
--1
m
cn
--1
a
ID
z
-n
-1 O
>x
0
m
g
0
i
0
X
Cn
"0
n)
(.0
0
Oa
0
a)
cn
m
c-)
I
E
m
v
Fa
-i
,
n
4
ril
n
m
g
z
g
i=1
This InspectionandTest Plancovers theminimumtesting & inspecti onrequi rementsof threephasemediumvoltagesquirrel cage inducti onmotors .
Material Test
Certificates /
Testrecords
1
1
1
1
TestRecord s
MotorAssembly
N"--:'
o
In Process I nspection
0
0
,
I
RE CORD
SCOPlEOF INSPECTION
SUB
SUPPLIER
EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
RawMaterial :
Body(castingor fabrication),
Rotorshaft,Core l aminations, Copper,
Insulationmaterial,Bearings,Terminals,
Cable boxes, Cableglands,etc .
1 --.
7::::+
Material I nspection
1....
2.0
3.0
CHARACTERISTICS
Proced ures
IN)
IA
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
SL
NO.
.4,
Motor(Type Tests)
.Q)
CA
CD
4. 2,
R z
ta. =
v, ,.
0
et
...,-
5
" ioc,co
0 g
o 5.
CD
c::"
.....
c,
C)
'-11
= =
0
.'" "
'17
o co
co
'"
.1
0
frw'o
n
=
R z
4=, 2,
o
ot.
1:1)
=
B',
trc
C/) (4
,-,
fa)
C/)
(4.) CD
co
='
CD
-1
AD
co
"
FL
co
MI
o
co
c/)
.--r =
C/)
,
t....) CD
0vt =
F'D
v)
-,
00
o
'"-.
-t 6
c ,
-,
ts
co co
5- g. -ti
CfQ
CT'
,-+ 0
p n
co
CD cr
,
Ej F)
(i)
/o
ci)
=.
P
cm
(c) =)
(c)
co ,---,
0. CO
,--rC)
:...,
gi (91 crg .
x 1)) ,?:,,"
A)
.-I
CD
,__)
,...r.
rD
$1)
., / ES.
F.D4'
;Cs
=
a
p
= tt
.--
0
=
0
- y)
tz) (4
'''' '0
co"
co
- -
g
'""
=
N.. =1
cD P 'ICI
(/)
RECORD
-,SI)
CD
q CfQ
a Fp' ,-,
,, ,, ...
'CS
::0 ...-. po
-
CD
f-F AD 0 CL
'0''
A)
=
Cr,.C
qD P
2
= 00
01. b
- onv)
CM
=
,-F =
r-t. $'3)7' 5 co - co
c4 (71)
cc)
< 0
XI " = c4 r) R - 5. co
0
7.0 a ? Fo0 ,--,
c/D
?
s:__.,
CL
V)
Pr 0
CD P .--,
..- N -1- ,----,
=
Al "
= cn .-- '
cA) lo CD Z
= o CD
i:1"
H
trq
R) (i)
CHARACTERISTICS
`.' "1 0
C
CL
PO
4
2-,
0
.-,
0PzJ
.5-,
'-'
0
H
0(,)
<
'8 e-9 S Cr
R n
Z
<
Z 5 a 7v r''' 5 <
. . ..... :-, p , ,..4_ (70" CD (:)
64 6-Q- c..) == a ci-.) -= -,Z
er ..C) ai
0 Cr
--1 = ="
'-'" '-'
SW
F4 CPP
= C)
...7..
7'
0 5L.,. <
0 <
Fi nal Inspecti on
r7
V)
,.....'
4.0
_4,
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
SL
NO.
SCOPlEOF INSPEC'LION
SUB
EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
SUPPLIER I
>
Cl)
-1
CHARACTERISTICS
STAGE/ACTIVITY
cn
th
Ci)
C)
r' -n
I 0Z
>
E
0
<
0 z
E '6
Cl)
-rri
D
m
9. nati Z0 1.- 1. 8- 9
SL
NO.
TION
SCOP1
SUB
SUPPLIER
EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
RECORD
100%
Packing li st/
Supplier' s
Records
Overspeed
Measurement of Starting Torque ,
Startingcurrent , full Load Torque ,
Pull outtorque byJEC *
CA
ort-
F.).
CD
rD
C
CD
cn
011
"
ta.
0
'..'
0 "10
':
FD
.--'
r-t-
Fij
e-... --..
pa o
.-i `'
100%
Final data
folder/
Completeness
certifi cate
Compilationof Inspectionreports,
drawings,etc .asper VDR / PR
:It
Reviewof Internal Test Reports
Testcertificate fromrecognized
testing laboratory forarea
classification.
BIScertificate for FLPmotorsand
accessori esasapplicable .
PESO approved certificates for
motorsand accessori esas
applicable .
Degree of protectionof enclosure
IC issuance
Conn=
Documentationand IC
CO
Documentationand IC
rA
Paintingand Packing
Visual
Suitableprotectiontoprevent entry
of foreignmaterial .
Properpackingtoprevent any
damage duringtransportationand
storage .
cD
i,....)
01
cp,
6.0
Painting
c
c)
0
v,
5.0
C
c/)
CD
C-
$1,
-0
co
cr
(4
co
C
0
C)
C)
'1
IDD
C)
CD
CD
0
-C
(4
0
-0
co
C)
-o
(/)
co
;I)
CD
0
C
CD
(4
C
CD
( CD
co
CD
co
a a.
CA
-0 co
o
5-:
co
"CI
0
C
0
AD
`CI
(1)
0
0
Cr
co
CD
CD
fao
co
co
CD
$11
cn
cu
CD
(74 rD
CD
co
(7) o
. 0
CD rn
0 CD
"1:23
4
0
IsJ
_
O
c4
CD
CrtD
r)
o
CD
CL.
pC1
PZI
CD
C)
CD
7t
AD AD
CD cl
CL
co 's
CD
CD
a
cn <
co
a.
'CS
"
"CS pa
o ,:-"'
0
CD
CD e-
O g
;7)
-F).
,C=r)
CD
CI.
'H. 0
CD
CD
CD
CO
C,
6"'
c,
t.,
c)
O
O
00
ry
cs,
STANDARD SPECFICATION NO.
'0N iewiod
.A9dL 3- 1000-00-8
7,,,
c cmc c ,.<
'.11
,.,zt ..Ti
c. -, ci) H '-'-. - CDC -o ...,-.
~ fl
- -1
.- r
9' cp
-3 C)
,=,.
ct r
ro
CD
.9_, Cm. -1 cA (,,-zr
po <7;
1,)
co
(I4 -t
0
(1)
.
co
C
0
t,t
0
C4
ct) C " r- cm v)
-i) c -t., e-1cp
p,, p2_, .5,.
4
,
rii
r.
- ,_, aro
o
D.
<
--3
'0 C.,
F).
CD
c
co
v)
'* ,-,-' '87 -,
.-s,
cm
0-
to >
>l
rn
rIrl
~ri
.<
(-)
o
5
to
cp '5Ci) .
cn
5'
-3
HH
til C
(...) 5_
0
cD
iiN)"- co (-) C C.
-t r)
, c,.,
--t
Ci) 0 (17 n ,>"- 5. H (D
r)
H (H
.D ,..-4C)
r)
Co
v) C)..,
co
0
C
0
0
<-P,-*
(-.)
cn
,_
,,, 5. .0, AD
.-,
'
eD
,-.
C'f.) .
AD CD
Olci 0
C
C .--.
s2
zJ,c
o
,-
-t
1:0
,---r'-
o tri
0 yH
C- cD
PD
..
L'
9
rc.
rD ,-,
Fo
5' 7,
ri
Ci) _
-. c)
Po
r) '"
,-,- 6
O
C
c)
`-<
-.
0
C
-, c, q --1 __, -) ,. ,. ,_ ()
t
5,- -3
AD
C
-t C +
-1
C.,Cf4"
cp
C v)
Cf4 rD 0
4 (4 '
,c) rri a 0,
p3 -0
co
,Th
v' c
'-.. 1P-, 0. -,-- 4
'" ,....
'.-1
,'..i. 'r.).
1
(1:1 ,.,
,..., iri g
ct)
r) co n
co0... --) (..)
CD
AD
c) -,-. up o
><
CD -t ,. C
..i
co 7c) t-' w) v,
"
2 ,8_. Fi)-'-c)
Cl. C1) AD
'0
ci)
o
P) ...
-j)- -. o
o" ,. r)
vp
C ,.0 cr' C cp
,- .-1 - (-) -
-t . -s
o tra c)
'0-'' rj
C Co :R.
ro
<
(1
9s4D
(,,
ril
0 C/") CD pt
CD
CIR
- eD
,.
R
-o
'') 5'
6"
g.
a)-' r)
cn. '')
,C1'-d'-d'td'-d'-d'-dZZZ4
..a
o
zb
5
:=,o-,
>
co
C
.
.0
rri
('$2-:',*
ril
c)
cir
-s
< " ,-1..1 .'t.t. t1 ! I , ! _,-9osn- ,,9,)
.
(
r
.
1)
_
,
?
:
1
)
,.
>
c
D
...
e: >
e.:71) '
CD
Cl.. cp
-,
,-,:3,
,,,
,
,,.(5,
E,
,
o
c
,
v,
-,5.
o
?
c)
,_,
,_t
o
C:
J
`
5
9
<
,
)
8
.
,
9
.,
,
-.
.
'"C) cs)
rri
H
=.
t=,,
"
7
"
o
n
.2> L4
-s
co
0C
C ".
r,
(-)
''' '""
r Tr
5 5 t CNC] n nto
rri
Hnnr(:1t nxHHHti tc
rr o
-,
(-)
(-)
0
1S3,1,
STANDARDSPECIFICATION NO.
InspectionStandardsCommittee
'AaRIS01-18-9
:suop.mnoacmy
-AaH
tJ
:adODSO'I
PO/PR / Standardsreferredthere in/Job specifications / Approved documents.
.,
Test Records
Test Records
Material Test
Certificates/
Test
Records/Thir
d Party Lab
certificates
100% forDrum
detailsand Sample
drums for balance
details
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SUB
SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
n
0
g
1
'
Finished Cable
,::'
Final Inspection
0,
4.0
(....)
.,--,
Inprocess Inspection
Inspection during
insulation,sheathing
.--,
C>
Incomingrawmaterial
likeCopper, Aluminum,
PVC,XLPE, Galvanized
Armour.
t>>
7::::,
Material Inspection
,0
0
c:'
Procedures
=,
QUANTUM OF
CHECK
If.)
C5
CHARACTERISTICS
tN)
--,
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
7Cln
0
Q..
C.I)
..8,
,...,,,
:i
CD
-ri
7ZJ
cp
CD n
r) .--
5'
r- cn
CD
cn
0
CD
0..
(1)
----
-s N
,-t
CD
Z
--__.
cn
-t
r)
c>r) -.
v)
r- cn
CD ...(j
n
ET.
-t-
a.--4--;
----,__,
ro
Cl.
,.,
.9,
o
"
Q.,
ri>
-t
IZS
CD
---,
'.
0
1
::$
<D
----...
.1 CD CD
.----.... ----..
E;i .
,4), ,a>""
-r- cp
CD
-----
."1:$
C1C7
li
..- .
-.
c>
c>
'E go'
rp
'zi -t
0
n
----0 (1)
,---
-Q
>
CI)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SUB
SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
Supplier's
Test Records
t-)
(= t1 ZS
(1)
cn
o
cn
cn
,,
,--,
cr
FD-.
1:0
v)
-4.
`...
E7D
CD
C/D '""
:P.
Conductor Resistance.
High Voltage
Partial Discharge(forXLPEonly)
Checkcalibrationstatusof all testing
equipment.
Dimensionchecksoverall dia,over/under
armour,thicknessof insulation,sheath,
copperscreen dimension,etc.
ConductorResistance
Insulationresistance /Volumeresistivity
High Voltagetests
Partial Discharge(for XLPE)
HotSet(for XLPE insulation)
TestsonConductorasapplicable
TestsonPVC/XLPEInsulation & Sheath *
Armour Galvanization- diptest
Volumeresistivity, Insulationresistance
Tensileandelon :ation(withouta:ein :)
test
applicable
as
Flammability
per
specification.
Accelerated waterabsorptiontestasper
NEMA(Electrical method ) #
Test forresistancetoUltraViolet
Radiation #
OxygenIndextestasperIS/IEC
Rodent & Termiterepulsioncheck
Drum length /surface finish check byrewinding
Test forcircuit integrity for firesurvival
cablesasperIEC(If applicable)
Cn
QUANTUM OF
CHECK
ll)
CD
e-.
s.....,
- $2,3
CD Cr
'-cS
r) ....
r> c
C) tI
i....)
Finished Cable(Routine
Tests)
CHARACTERISTICS
i-)
'AnfIS01-18-9
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
ri
l
n
o
x
,,
7:1
SupplierTC
& IC
0
CD
CD
cr
rD
DZ1.
1:$
rD
Co.
e+ rD
(,)
CD
ro
cr
-<
rrl
CD
CD
(7,
ro
(,)
cr
rt)
(1)
Final data
folder
/Completenes
scertificate
c:
CD
0
CD
E-4 0
-cs
-<
co
s:0
o
21,
r.)
rb
r)
'--3
CD
C/)
--
11
rit's
s:0
c7"
ro
t-+
F4
CD
<
?").
CD
ro
c",)"
CL,
er,
CD
CD
-6
cr cra
("D
Compilationof Inspectionreports,drawings,
etcasper
VDR
/ PR
("D
Test Records
r)
<1>
("D
1=1
x
cr
<
rD
CD
CD
o
E
o H
Final Documentsubmission
* r) *
Reviewof Routine,Acceptance,Typetest
reports.
IC issuance
(1)
01
0
9:7 \
,--,
CI1
Documentationand IC
i.)
Documentationand IC
Sample
Painting
Dielectric Retention.
Typetestson PVC insulationand Sheath
High Voltagetest(Water Immersion)
Dielectricpower factortestsas functionof
voltage,temperature.
(XLPEcables)
Heatingcycletest(XLPECables)
Im.ulsewithstand test(XLPEcables
Visual
Dimensions
Typetests** asperIS/IEC
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SUB
SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
QUANTUM OF
CHECK
CHARACTERISTICS
cn 0
4A.
b'l
Cableaccessories
C11
0
Finished Cable
(Typetests **)
-A.
0"
Z
C
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
C/)
CA
CD
CD
CD
cn
CD
ri)
CD
cn
t
CD
AD
ci)
13,7
c7
CD
r=0
>1:t
`LS
O
Q_
CD
CD
CD.
0
CD
CD
CD
'1:21
CD
c)
CD
,,cn1
o
-s
CD
0..
01.
Er.
>
-<
vs
co
CD
CD
CD
cn
CD
CD
CD
CD
r[,
v,
CD
'cn
CIA cp
"
{.D
1)
-s
CD
c.h
co
cn
SO
CD
r)
r)
t..)
t=1
ci)
STANDARDSPECIFICATIONNO.
.^all
ulel
ei
AND
7-51-0103 Rev. 5
FIXING DETAILS
400
50 I 50 I 50 I 50 I 50
25
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
50 I 50
Page 1 of 1
25
i
II
If
RCC STRUCTURE
.L
\i \
4.-1
STEEL
STRUCTURE
,,\./ V---, 4
1E1
'A v/Ar/ A
RN
rArArAv/AVA
1111
111111
NI MN
G.I. ANCHOR
BOLT 8 MM DIA
SEE
NOTE-1
10 MM THICK G.I.
EARTH PLATE (TYP.)
(SEE NOTE 2)
LOCK NUT & BOLT
0
SEE
NOTE-1
MI\ NM
AN%A AIWA
-I-
10
G.I. EARTH
STRIP
IUI
UPI
G.I. EARTH
PLATE
TYPICAL INSTALLATION
OF EARTH PLATE ON
R.C.C. STRUCTURES
TYPICAL INSTALLATION
OF EARTH PLATE ON
STEEL STRUCTURES
27.06.11
BP
4
Rev.
No.
31.01.07
BP
Prepared
by
Date
Purpose
RKS/AKJ
Checked
by
UAP
DM
VC
JMS
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
.7 el
1ge_11 taffleg
WM ,rameMMWM
STANDARD
EQUIPMENT
No.
7-51-0116 Rev. 6
EARTHING SCHEDULE
Page 1 of 1
TYPE OF EQUIPMENT
(SEE NOTE-1)
BUILDING COLUMNS
40 x 5 G.I. STRIP
40 x 5 G.I. STRIP
LOADING RACKS
40 x 5 G.I. STRIP
40 x 5 G.I. STRIP
AS SPECIFIED
AS SPECIFIED
10 MM
LIGHTING TRANSFORMER
16 MM
PIPE RACK
BONDING OF PIPE
NOTE:EARTH CONNECTIONS TO INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT FROM NEAREST EARTH PLATE / GRID MAY ALSO
BE DONE ALTERNATIVELY USING ALUMINIUM / COPPER CONDUCTOR PVC INSULATED CORE OF SIZE
NOT LESS THAN HALF THE CROSSSECTION OF RESPECTTIVE POWER CABLE TO EQUIPMENT
(MOTOR, PANEL ETC.). CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MADE USING CRIMP TYPE OF LUGS.
2.
6
5
Rev.
No.
Purpose
k/
BP
Prepared
SC
RKS/AKJ
Checked
by
by
BP
UAP
JMS
DM
VC
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
ala_it4
Ogar0154'dg
INSTRUMENTATION OF
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
,A Govt of Indla Undertaking)
PACKAGE UNITS
Ada
Page 1 of 58
fry
16.03.15
29.06.09
25.06.97
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
RG
RP
TGM
ND
RK
BRS
RB
AS
RK
RB
AKV
AK
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
$'1gal faiW
&
INDIA LIMITED
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 2 of 58
Abbreviations:
AARH
AC
AWG
CPU
CRCA
DCS
DPDT
DPST
DTM
DVD
EDDL
FDT
FF
FISCO
FNICO
HART
HIC
HMI
HT
110
IP
IU
LAS
LED
LT
MAWP
MCB
MCC
MR
NB
NC
NO
NPT
NPTF
NPTM
P&ID
PID
PLC
PTC
PTFE
PVC
RAM
RB
RTD
.
:.
.:
.
:.
:.
.:
:.
:.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:.
.
.
-.
.
.
-.
:.
.
.
:.
:.
:.
.
:.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
n31
Oe.11
tlf5ieg
IvIten eivtutzmatmissif
RTU
SOV
SPDT
TFT
TMR
UPS
URV
WC
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 58
sl ar Wes
g
43* ENGINEERS
NV, rieaxt
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of hrhA Unde,taong)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 4 of 58
CONTENTS
PART I
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
12
3.0
SPARES PHILOSOPHY
19
4.0
20
5.0
46
PART II
47
1.0
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
48
2.0
INSTALLATION
54
3.0
56
4.0
COMMISSIONING
58
ANNEXURES:
ANNEXURE I
ANNEXURE II
e1
ENGINEERS
Govt
Ind.
unciertakog)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 58
PART I
GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF
INSTRUMENTATION
$1g-ar
laf5teg
r.tea v/vore attow)i)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA GovtofIndia Undertaking)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 6 of 58
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
1.1.1
This specification together with the attachments covers the design and engineering of
instruments, control systems, accessories and materials, along with special test equipments,
where the supply is part of a package being supplied by vendor. This specification is general
and all instruments/systems included may not be required for the proposed package. The
scope shall be as defined in the scope of supply of Instrumentation.
1.1.2
The detailed scope of work, specific job requirements, exclusions, deviations, additions etc.
if any, will be indicated in Scope of Supply of Instrumentation and Job Specification of
Instrumentation included in the material requisition.
1.1.3
1.1.4
Vendor shall be fully responsible for design, material selection, sizing and selection of the
proper instruments for their system. The compliance to this specification does not absolve
the vendor of the responsibility towards contractual obligations with regards to
completeness, proper selection, satisfactory operation and easy maintenance of the unit.
1.1.5
All items, as offered, shall be field proven and should have completed trouble free
satisfactory operation for a period of minimum 6 months on the bid due date in the similar
application with the process conditions similar to those as specified in the purchaser's data
sheets. Items with proto-type design or items not meeting provenness criteria specified
above shall not be offered
1.1.6
In the event of any conflict between this specifications, data sheets, related standards, codes
etc., the vendor shall refer the matter to the purchaser for clarification and only after
obtaining the same should proceed with the manufacturing/engineering of the item in
question. DCS/ PLC is not included in this specification. Vendor shall refer specifications
attached separately in case DCS/ PLC is included in scope of supply.
1.2
Bids
1.2.1
Vendor shall provide the following information along with their offer:
Compliance to Complete Material Requisition/Tender.
Utility requirements including Power consumption and Instrument air supply
consumption. The offer shall indicate the power requirement for Uninterrupted Power
Supply (UPS), Non-UPS and DC power clearly indicating the locations for each.
Estimated heat load for the equipment located in control room.
Control room size and layout (Tentative)
1.2.2
Vendor shall clearly define the operational philosophy proposed, which shall be in line with
requirements specified in the job specification. Vendor shall also clearly indicate the
provision of control panels and control systems required for the package along with offer.
1.2.3
Documents like Instrument list and typical specifications and any other details if submitted
by vendor in their bid, shall not be reviewed and shall be retained for records only. All such
details shall be submitted by vendor only after the finalisation of P&ID (Piping and
Instrument Diagram) during detail engineering. No implication shall be admissible on the
Og.r..1101Wteg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of InOta UndettakIngt
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 7 of 58
basis of these documents and vendor shall be responsible for completeness and correctness
of the same with respect to Purchase Requisition/Tender.
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.3
1.3.1
Design and terminology shall comply, as a minimum, with the latest edition of following
codes, standard practices and publications, unless otherwise specified:
AGA
AG181
ASME
ANSI/FCI
API
ASME
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
tgz1T tte--'
eg
1.1F, eironeffoJosoi)
(A Go. of WO UndeffOk,o9)
MFC-14M
ASTM
BS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 8 of 58
EN 10204
IBR
IEC
IS
Indian
Standard
5
319
1239
1271
1554
2074
3624
5831
7358
8784
ISA
ISO 5167
ITK
ENGINEERS
k3
1
tif5lreg
.W1
03/1
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 9 of 58
NACE
NEC
NEMA
NFPA-496
OSHA
SAMA
1.4
1.4.1
Detailed drawings, data and catalogues required from the vendor shall be as per Vendor
Data Requirement attached elsewhere in the Material Requisition / Tender.
1.4.2
The minimum requirements expected from the various documents listed in Vendor Data
Requirement shall be as follows:
1.4.2.1
1.4.2.2
Instrument Index
Instrument Index lists out all instruments appearing on the P&ID without any exception. It
is a basic instrument document which is necessary for the smooth execution of a job and is
also a reference document after the completion of job. Instrument Index shall be prepared in
EIL Format. In case, any other format is used, it must contain all information as listed in
this format as a minimum.
1.4.2.3
1.4.2.4
ENGINEERS
51:4231a5teg
INDIA LIMITED
IAGoNatIWOUndfr,dkiO,
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 10 of 58
Following sizing calculations shall be applicable, in general, duly approved by the authority
indicated in Vendor's Standard Quality Plan;
Control valve including noise and velocity.
Pressure relief valves/pilot operated pressure relief valves/rupture disc/breather
valve/flame arrester.
Flow element including orifice plates, averaging pitot tubes, venturi, flow nozzle etc.
Utility consumption calculation including power supply (UPS/Non UPS), Instrument
air, steam for tracing, cooling water, nitrogen etc.
Cable sizing calculations for power cables.
Intrinsically safe loop calculation for proper selection of cables considering various
entity parameters.
Segment loading calculations.
Thermowell wake frequency calculations as pe ASME PTC 19.3 TW-2010
1.4.2.5 Utility Requirements
This document lists out the following information regarding utilities required by the vendor;
List of utilities required i.e. Power (UPS, Non UPS), Instrument air, Cooling water,
steam for tracing, Nitrogen etc.
Location and estimated/actual requirement at each location. The requirement shall be
listed as minimum/normal/maximum.
Incase of AC power, the In-rush current with duration and power factor shall also be
indicated for each location.
In case of cooling requirement of any instrument/equipment, vendor shall provide the
detail of pressure/flow requirement with location.
1.4.2.6 Nozzle Elevation for Level Instruments
Nozzle elevation for level Instruments represent the nozzle elevation, nozzle sizes and
rating, requirement of stand-pipes, type of level instrument etc. for all the vessels, columns,
exchangers and tanks.
1.4.2.7 Purchase Requisition (PR)
Purchase Requisition shall contain following information as a minimum but updated in line
with the finally accepted offer of the successful vendor including:Instrument specifications including detailed instrument data sheet and special
requirements, if any
Testing and Inspection requirements
Vendor data requirements
Other related documents like Standard Specifications, Quality Assurance requirements etc.
1.4.2.8 Functional Schematics
Functional Schematics details out the functionality of all the loops shown on the P&ID
including their correlation. The schematic shows all the hardware necessary to configure a
loop including their physical location, their interconnection and important software blocks as
applicable to make a loop complete. Similar loops may be combined under the same
functional schematic.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
tg-ar Oa&
erraretraJwom,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gort of intha Under/along)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 11 of 58
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Ogar
g tif5te
t412,, ,-trotte ott3O0A1
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 12 of 58
Instrument duct/tray trench drawing shows the routing of main instrument duct/tray trench in
the unit/plant. The drawing shall be prepared on plot-plan/ Equipment layout and shall show
the size, cross-section at various locations, general notes, symbols, reference drawings and
the control room entry.
1.4.2.18 Instrument Location Plans
Instrument Location Plans shall show the location of instruments, location of tapping points,
location of local panels, junction boxes, main cable trenches, instrument air distribution
scheme etc. These drawings are prepared on equipment layout drawings in 1:50 or 1:100
scale depending on density of instruments.
1.4.2.19 Instrument Cable Schedule
The instrument cable schedule shall show all instrument and power cables required for
complete instrumentation. The document shall show tag number, cable number, type, length
and size of cables, type of junction box, identity of local panel, control room panel/cabinet
location etc. The document shall also show the size of terminals considered for power
junction boxes and the dimensions of cable considered by the contractor.
The cable schedule document shall include all single & multi pair cables indicating
terminations of instruments, field junction boxes and respective termination in satellite rack
room cabinets. The instrument cable schedule shall be prepared on ElL format.
1.4.2.20 3D Modelling:
Whenever 3D modeling is included in package vendor's scope, it shall include the following
instrumentation items as a minimum:
Instrument Cable Duct.
Analyser shelter/ cabinet.
Local Control Panels.
Prefabricated Hook-ups
Gas Detectors
CCTV
Instrument Junction Boxes
Instrument Stanchions and Canopy
2.0
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
2.1
2.2
All instruments and equipments shall be suitable for use in a hot, humid and tropical
industrial climate in which corrosive gases and/or chemicals may be present. As a
minimum, all instruments and enclosures in field shall be metallic construction, dust proof
and weatherproof to IP-65 as per IS/IEC-60529 and secure against the ingress of fumes,
dampness, insects and vermin. All external surfaces shall be suitably treated to provide
protection against corrosive plant atmosphere.
2.3
n31
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Ifgar idtareg
1.1E'A 292tATUOT.AVA/
2.4
IA Govt of InOta
Undertak.ng)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 13 of 58
2.5
Statutory Approvals
Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all statutory approvals, as applicable, for
all instruments and control systems.
In addition, equipments/instruments/systems located in the hazardous area shall be
certified by the local statutory authorities for their use in the area of their installation. In
general following certification shall be given:
For all intrinsically safe/ FISCO/FINICO/ explosion proof/flameproof equipments/
instruments/systems or equipments with any other type of protection allowable as
per this package which are manufactured abroad and certified by any statutory
authority like Laboratorie Central Des Industries Electriques (LCIE), British
Approval Service for Electrical Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres (Baseefa),
Canadian Standards Association (CSA), Factory Mutual(FM), Underwriters
laboratories(UL) etc. for compliance to ATEX directives or other equivalent
standards. All these equipments/ instruments/systems shall additionally have the
approval of Petroleum and Explosives Safety Organisation (PESO)/ Chief
Controller of Explosives (CCE), Nagpur, if installed in INDIA and the same is
mandatory.
For all flame proof equipments manufactured locally (indigenously), the testing
shall be carried out by any of the approved test house like Central Institute of
Mining & Fuel research (CIMFR)/ Electronics Regional Testing Laboratory
(ERTL) etc. The equipment shall in addition bear the valid approval from
Petroleum and Explosives Safety Organisation (PESO)/ Chief Controller of
Explosives (CCE), Nagpur and a valid BIS license.
iii) For all intrinsically safe equipment manufactured locally (indigenously), the
testing shall be carried out by any of the approved test house like Central Institute
of Mining & Fuel research(CIMFR)/ Electronics Regional Testing
Laboratory(ERTL) etc. The equipment shall in addition bear the valid approval
from Petroleum and Explosives Safety Organisation (PESO)/ Chief Controller of
Explosives (CCE), Nagpur.
c) Approvals other than above shall neither be offered nor will these be acceptable.
2.6
Liquid
Steam
M3/11
kg/h
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
50Z:Eq
ENGINEERS
51gaf Weg
INDIA LIMITED
n oqR ,Neant CIA ,141,0,
PressureNacuum
Nm3/h
Gauge
kg/cm2g
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 14 of 58
mm of H2O
Vacuum
kg/cm2
mm of H2O
Temperature
Level
Analysis
ppm
Conductivity
micro siemens
Viscosity
mPa.s (cP)
2.7
Local control loops shall be avoided. In case these are unavoidable, these shall be electronic
field mounted manual loading station only.
2.8
Ranges for instruments shall be selected in general, such that in normal process operation
the indication is between 35% to 65% of the range i.e. middle 30% of the full working
range.
2.9
Field mounted direct actuated Flow and Temperature switches shall not be used. Instead,
transmitters shall be used along with flow element/temperature element. Process switches
shall not be considered unless its use is unavoidable and the same shall be subject to
purchaser's approval. In case switch has been considered, same shall be provided with
sealed micro switch contacts rated for the specified application. Also contacts shall be SPDT
type unless otherwise specified. Contacts used in intrinsically safe applications shall be
suitable for the application.
2.10
2.11
240V AC/110V AC
Analyzers
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
n31
ENGINEERS
Igar
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 15 of 58
In case 24 V DC is required for Input interrogation, relays and lamps, any other vendor
supplied instruments/ electronics), same shall be considered by the vendor using dual
redundant power packs (110 V AC to 24 V DC converter). 24 V DC feeders shall not be
provided by Purchaser unless indicated specifically in the job specifications.
All instruments, control systems (PLC and DCS) and analyser system shall be able to
operate at the following UPS specification:
Voltage level
Frequency
50 Hz 3 Hz
5 milli seconds.
Power feeders shall be supplied to the vendor at only one location. All further
distribution within the package shall be taken care of by the vendor. Number and size of
power feeders shall be informed during detail engineering. Vendor shall provide
adequate number and size of terminals and cable glands required.
d) Instrument power circuits shall be individually protected and isolated from fault with
the help of fuses and DPST switches. Power supply to the individual instrument shall
be disconnected with the help of DPST switch and protected with the help of fuses.
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB's) may be selected in place of switch fuse unit in case
protection is provided for overload protection.
2.12
Alarm Philosophy
Alarms shall be provided to give audible and visual warning of any process and
machine malfunction in the package.
All trips shall have a pre-trip warning alarm in addition to alarm at the trip condition.
Package alarms including pre-trip warning alarms and trip alarms (shutdown alarms)
shall be annunciated on the local panel as per approved P&ID.
Rotating equipments shall have the status indication provided on the local panel as per
approved P&ID.
e) 'Fail-safe' type with normally closed alarm contacts shall be used.
2.13
All line or equipment mounted instruments like control valves, pressure relief valves,
thermo-wells, orifice flanges, level instruments etc., installed on pipes and vessels under
IBR shall be certified by IBR or their authorized representative.
2.14
Location of process connections shall be from the side or from the top of the process
equipment but not from the bottom. This requirement is applicable to both pipes and vessels.
The location of lower side connection for level measurement when necessary shall be
extended inside the equipment with the approval of purchaser to prevent plugging due to dirt
or other suspended solids. In addition, the connections shall be short, vertical or horizontal
and without any pockets.
2.15
Material of construction of instruments shall be as per the material selection chart, attached
as Annexure I of this specification, as a minimum. However vendor is responsible to ensure
that the selected material is consistent with temperature, pressure, corrosion conditions and
other process requirements.
'
a
$T4Zif
my', twaxt ...5,...
ENGINEERS
laWeg
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt 07 Groba Undenak,r,g )
2.16
Field Transmitters
2.16.1
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 16 of 58
2.16.1.1 The field transmitters in all conventional loops shall be smart type only unless specified
otherwise. Field transmitters for flow, pressure, temperature, differential pressure and level
applications shall be yoke mounted type unless specified otherwise. Meter electronics used
for flow measurement etc. shall include all the associated items like pre-amplifier, converter,
transmitter, integrator, integral output meter etc.
2.16.1.2 Field transmitter shall be intrinsically safe and meter electronics shall be intrinsically safe, in
general. In case, intrinsically safe is not available from the approved vendor list enclosed
with this MR/tender, flameproof enclosure is acceptable. In case sensor/ pick up coil is
intrinsically safe, suitable barrier shall be provided and installed in flameproof enclosure.
2.16.1.3 These transmitters shall be 2 wire systems having 4 - 20 mA DC output with superimposed
digital signal having simultaneous analog and digital communication with HART
communication protocol, unless otherwise specified.
2.16.1.4 The transmitter shall be microprocessor based and it shall incorporate a non-volatile memory
which shall store complete configuration data of transmitter and sensor characterization. All
necessary signal conversions, including conversion to produce output with the required
protocol shall be carried out in the transmitter electronics. The configuration data of the
instruments shall be stored in a non-volatile memory such that this remains unchanged
because of power fluctuations or power off condition. In case vendor standard instrument
has battery backed RAM, vendor to ensure that battery drain alarm is provided as diagnostic
maintenance message.
2.16.1.5 Transmitter shall also run complete diagnostic subroutines and shall provide diagnostic
alarm messages for sensor as well as transmitter healthiness. In the event of detection
failure, the output shall be driven to a predefined value, which shall be field configurable.
2.16.1.6 Universal hand held configurator / terminal for the configuration and maintenance of
instruments with HART output shall be provided for all HART based smart instruments.
2.16.2
ENGINEERS
ttliteg
Og en
.AF,,,,AIA' AAJAA,A)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt Ind Undertaking)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 17 of 58
Internal software shall be configured by the vendor including the following information
such as serial number, Device Tag (Tag Number) and Process description
All instruments shall be capable of supporting incremental Device descriptor (DD) for
extra functionality and for software revisions in device memory.
Soft copy of the Device Descriptor (DD) files for configuring the FF device parameters
and common file format (CFF) files for integrating the device into the system shall be
provided by the bidder for offline configuration by System vendor immediately after
despatch.
Fieldbus based field indicator shall be able to indicate all signals available in the
fieldbus segment, selectively.
2.16.2.3 The fieldbus / devices provided shall be able to communicate with latest universal fieldbus
communicator.
2.16.3
Accuracy of transmitters (Pressure & Differential pressure), smart as well as fieldbus based
shall be as follows:
Type of Transmitter
Range of Transmitter
Direct
Direct
Diaphragm seal
Diaphragm seal
The accuracy is defined as the combined effect of repeatability, linearity and hysteresis.
2.16.4
Transmitter shall update the output at least 8 times a second unless otherwise specified.
Unless specified otherwise in purchaser's specification, transmitter response time shall be as
follows:
For transmitter range of 760 mm WC and above, the response time shall be equal to or
better than 500 milliseconds.
For transmitter range below 760mm WC, the response shall be equal to or better than 1
second.
The response time of the transmitter shall be considered as the sum of dead time and 63.2%
step response time of the transmitter.
2.16.5
Unless specified otherwise, the over-range/static pressure protection of the transmitter shall
be as follows;
Over range/ static pressure <N1>
Range of Transmitter
Pressure
(kg/cm2)
Pressure
Transmitter Differential
Transmitter (kg/cm2)
20
20
45
52
45
70
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
5/gZif 2151eg w
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Unclenaking)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 18 of 58
45
160
52
160
160
210
210
210
<N1> However if the Over range/ static pressure value specified above is less than the
maximum/ design pressure of service conditions, offered instrument shall be suitable for the
maximum/ design pressure.
2.16.6
Diaphragm seal DP transmitters in flow measurement with a DP of less than 250 mmWC
shall be avoided and alternate type of flow meters shall be provided for such cases suitable to
the process condition.
2.16.7 All transmitters shall have vent and drain facility and the same shall be provided with metallic
plugs. All the cable entries shall also be provided with metallic plugs.
2.17
Instrument Connections
2.17.1
The connections of instruments installed on vessels, tanks, standpipes and piping shall be as
per following EIL Standards.
7-52-0001
7-52-0002
2.17.2
Pneumatic instrument connections for signal and air supply shall be 1/4" NPT (F).
2.17.3
Electrical cable entry connection shall be 1/2" NPT (F)/ 3/4"NPT (F) as per the cable size.
Suitable cable gland shall be used.
2.17.4
63 AARH
Grooves of ring type joint flanges shall be octagonal as per ASME B 16.20 and
groove finish shall be as follows:
63 AARH
2.18
2.18.1
Air supply at pressure specified elsewhere shall be made available to the vendor at the
battery limit for distribution to the instruments.
2.18.2
Pneumatic Instruments shall operate on air supply of 1.4 kg/cm2g and shall have
transmission and output signal of 0.2 to 1.0 kg/cm2g.
15iF4TE?
Vligieg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of India Undertaking)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 19 of 58
2.18.3
Instrument air quality shall be as per ISA- S 7.0.01and free from corrosive, hazardous and
toxic contaminants.
2.19
2.19.1
2.19.2
2.19.3
3.0
SPARES PHILOSOPHY
3.1
Mandatory Spares
Unless specified otherwise, the following mandatory spares shall be provided by vendor.
3.1.1
3.1.1.1
Higher of 10% or minimum one of each type (range, type, material and rating ) of complete
instruments for commonly used instruments such as transmitter, gauges, temperature
elements, switches, probes.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Ifgzrr tlf5t-eg
1.1,1 evecnre aA,NmN,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Me Unde,fakng)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 20 of 58
3.1.1.2
For Control valve one set of packing and bonnet gasket with tag, one set of stem seal o-ring
for each actuator and piston o-ring additionally for each piston actuated valve, line bolting
(set of studs and nut) and set of gasket with each tag no.
3.1.2
Commissioning Spares
Vendor shall be responsible to supply all spares which are found necessary to replace while
performing pre-commissioning and commissioning activities and this includes system
oriented items (hardware / software).
3.1.3
Consumable spares
Vendor shall supply consumable spares for six months of normal operation.
3.1.4
Engineering Spares
3.1.4.1
For Control system, installed spare module of higher of 10% or minimum one of
input/output modules (including termination panels, if applicable) to enhance the system
functional requirements of control system.
3.1.4.2
3.2
4.0
4.1
4.1.1
Alarm Annunciator shall either be solid state type or microprocessor based programmable
type with plug in modules and integral power supply. Window display shall be back lighted
incandescent lamps or cluster LED type integral power supply. For window display with
back lighted incandescent lamps two numbers of incandescent lamps of minimum 5 watt
each shall be provided for each window. For cluster type LED display, the number of
LED's in the cluster matrix windows shall be sufficient to provide illumination level of at
least 150 lumens. The circuit shall be designed in such a way that removal/failure of one
lamp or LED from a window/ cluster shall not hamper functioning of that particular
window/display. The annunciator lamps shall be replaceable from the front of the enclosure
panel. In general, dedicated alarm logic module shall be used for each alarm input.
However, when micro processor based alarm Annunciator is offered failure of one
microprocessor shall not affect more than four alarm windows.
Intrinsically safe annunciator circuit, when used, shall have power supply unit in a safe area.
Annunciator alarm sequence shall be as per F3A of ISA.
$fgaf
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
tiaeg
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 21 of 58
The design of the alarm annunciator system shall be such that transient alarms of less than
330 milliseconds duration shall be automatically rejected.
4.2
Panel Design
4.2.1
All panels shall be supplied in pre-tubed/pre-wired condition and shall be completely tested
at manufacturer's works prior to dispatch.
4.2.2
Panels shall be free standing type. Panels with instruments mounted on the front shall be
fabricated from 3 mm thick cold rolled steel sheet. If the same is not available, 4 mm thick
hot rolled steel sheet shall be used. All other panels shall be fabricated from 2mm thick cold
rolled steel sheet. Angle iron framework shall use a minimum section of 50 x 50 x 4 mm
angle. Panel painting procedure shall include blast cleaning, grinding, chemical cleaning,
surface finishing by suitable filler and two coats of high grade lacquer with wet blasting
wherever required. Two coats of paint in the panel colour shall be provided for non-glossy
high satin finish. Final coat shall be given after assembly at site.
Unless otherwise specified, exterior/interior portion of all panels and closed cabinets shall
have a colour as per RAL-7035. Channel base shall be of black colour.
4.2.3
Panel shall be enclosed cubicle type with each section of typically 2100 mm high, 1200 mm
wide and 800 mm deep mounted on 100 mm channel base.
4.2.4
Enclosed cubicle panels shall have removable hinged doors for easy maintenance and
accessibility of the instruments. Doors shall be double leaved type with handle and shall be
provided with lock and key. Adequate illumination shall be provided inside the panel. All
light fittings shall be suitable for 240 V, 50 Hz AC. Power supply greater than 240 V shall
also not enter the control panel.
4.2.5
All cable entries to the panel shall be from panel bottom only using cable glands of adequate
size. Cable gland plate thickness shall be a minimum of 3 mm cold rolled cold annealed
(CRCA) as a minimum. All unused cable entries must be plugged.
4.2.6
Space heater shall be provided where condensation is expected. The space heater provided
shall be with temperature cut off and manual control.
4.2.7
The design of panel shall incorporate provision for expansion by installing adequate spare
capacity. Each panel shall be designed to accommodate the following additional equipment,
as a minimum:
20% of panel front/inside mounted instruments including lamps, push buttons,
switches, relays etc.
20% additional power feeders each provided with switch fuse assembly.
20% additional spare windows in alarm annunciators.
20% spare cable entry points.
4.2.8
Panel layout shall be designed considering ease of operation. No push button or hand switch
shall be located below 600 mm. Instrument mounting heights, in general, shall be as follows:
Electronic Instruments
Annunciators
c)
Bottom row
1100 mm
Middle row
1350 mm
Top row
1600 mm
1950 mm
700 mm
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
,r_Jt4
5"gar
faf51--eg
1.12M c'crg, ern ,1-45411
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 22 of 58
The internal panel layout shall be designed considering proper approach for instruments,
terminals and other accessories for maintenance, easy removal and online calibration. No
instrument, terminals, power distribution box etc shall be mounted on the panel side plates
inside the panel.
4.2.10
All lamps, status as well as alarm, shall be provided with lamp test facility. One single lamp
test push button shall be used for each panel. Logic for lamp test shall not be implemented
through relay logic in the panel.
4.2.11
Colour Scheme
Status Lamps
On/Open/Permissive
Green
Off/Close/Emergency
Red
Alarms
e)
Normal/Pre-trip alarms
Amber
Shutdown alarms
Red
Push/Pull buttons
On/Open
Green
Off/Close
Red
Red
4.2.12.1 The instrument air header shall be adequately sized with 1/2" branches, SS packless isolation
valves and shall be complete with suitable dual filter-cum-air reducing station.
4.2.12.2 Panel tubing from the bulk head to the panel instruments and instrument air supply to the
panel instruments shall be of 6 mm x lmm thick SS 316L tubing.
4.2.12.3 The tubing shall be laid in plastic slotted ducts. Panel air header and tube fittings shall be of
SS 316.
4.2.12.4 Each tube shall be identified at both the terminating ends.
4.2.13
Panel Wiring
4.2.13.1 Open terminals shall generally be avoided. Terminal strips shall preferably be mounted in an
enclosure. Fused terminal may be used wherever necessary. All terminals shall be of
mechanical screw clamp/screwless type with pressure plates as per the job specification.
Self-insulating crimping wire lugs shall be used for all terminations on terminal blocks,
whereas forked tongue type or lug with eyehole type shall be used for termination on
screwed terminals such as on relays, push buttons, lamp etc. Terminal blocks shall be rated
for 600 V.
4.2.13.2 A minimum of 1 mm multi stranded PVC insulated copper conductor shall be used in
general. All wiring shall be laid in the PVC troughs. No trough shall be more than 70%
full.
2
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
zroaretraarasso
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 23 of 58
Electrical Wiring
All the cabinets, consoles and panels shall be completely wired. Interconnections shall
preferably be done with the help of pre-tracked cables. Vendor may follow their standard
wiring practices, however the requirements specified herein must be complied.
All wiring shall conform to API RP 552- Transmission Systems. Different signal level
cables shall be routed with separation distances as recommended by code.
All wiring inside racks, cabinets, and back of the panels shall be housed in covered,
non-flammable plastic raceways arranged to permit easy assembly to various
instruments for maintenance, adjustments, repair and removal.
All wiring in the raceways shall be properly clamped. All incoming cable shall be
terminated by vendor at marshalling rack with cable glanding including supply of
cable glands. Total wiring cross-sectional area shall not exceed 50% of the raceway
cross sectional area.
Separate wiring raceways shall be used for power supply wiring, DC and low level
signal wiring, and intrinsically safe wiring. Parallel runs of AC and DC wiring closer
than 300mm shall be avoided.
Vendor can alternately offer prefabricated cables for interconnection between
different cabinets and panels.
Wire termination shall be done using self-insulating crimping lugs. More than two
wires shall not be terminated on one side of single terminal. The use of shorting links
for looping shall not be done.
g)
4.2.15
The metal parts of terminals shall be of high quality (pure electrolytic) copper and
shall be tin or nickel plated (of thickness up to 15 micron).
ENGINEERS
Ogar Weg
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 24 of 58
The spring material for all terminals shall be chrome nickel spring steel of high tensile
strength and of excellent corrosion resistance. All terminal / terminal blocks shall be
DIN Rail mounted type and shall be easily removable. The size of the terminal blocks
/ terminals of different types shall be consistent and identical.
All terminal blocks shall be mounted on suitable anodised metallic or plastic standoff.
f)
4.2.16
Terminal strips shall be arranged group-wise for incoming and outgoing cables
separately. Terminal blocks for intrinsically safe wiring shall be separate. 20% spare
terminals shall be provided, as a minimum, preferably in each terminal strip.
Following design philosophy shall be followed while deciding the internal layout of panels,
as a minimum;
Distance between terminal strip and
width
100mm (min.)+trough
strips
width
300mm (min.)
100mm (min.)
4.3.1
Local control panel for the package units shall be installed within the battery limit of the
package considering operational and maintenance requirements and accessibility. In case of
skid mounted packages, panel shall be located away from the skid.
In case local control panel is housed outdoor i.e. not in a local control room, it shall be
designed to meet IP-55 requirements. In addition, panel must be provided with a rain cum
sun shade/canopy.
4.3.2
Local control panel/panels shall be totally enclosed cubicles. Panel sizing shall be carried
out based on equipment being installed keeping in view the maintenance clearances and
easiness of operation. Although the panel dimensions shall be guided by the actual
requirements, typical dimensions shall be 2100 mm height x 1200 mm width x 1000 mm
depth. In any case, vendor shall not proceed with panel manufacturing before getting prior
approval from the purchaser.
4.3.3
Local control panels located in the hazardous area shall either be purged type or flame proof
Ex'd' or weather proof with Ex'd' components such as lamps, push buttons, switches etc. as
specified in job specification. In case pressurized panels are specified the same shall be
purged and pressurized as per NFPA 496 requirements to render space within the panel non
hazardous. For panels located in IEC Zone 2, hazardous area type Z purging shall be used
with a purge fail alarm in main control room. In case, panels are located in Zone 1, the
power shall be cut off on perssurisation failure as per x-purge requirements of NFPA-496.
An alarm shall be provided on local panel and a contact shall be provided for remote
annunciation, whenever the panel pressurization falls below 2.5 mm of H2O. A protective
device to protect the panel from over pressure must be provided.
faiteg
Lrr
.1771 eletnfr IN OW,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India undeoalong)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 25 of 58
4.3.4
Panel pressurisation with start-up panel purging scheme shall be fully automatic however it
shall be started manually from a push button. Solenoid valves and differential pressure
switch required for panel purging shall be flameproof, however other items like relays,
switches/pushbuttons, timers etc. shall be located in a flameproof housing. Other items like
valves, restriction orifice plates, dual filter regulators, pressure gauges, rotameters etc
required for pressurization shall also be located in the non-pressurized section of the panel.
4.3.5
It shall be possible to switch off incoming power to panel from panel front. All such power
on/off switches shall be flameproof type.
In addition, all those devices and terminals, which cannot be powered off from on/off
switches shall also be located inside flameproof enclosures.
4.3.6
All hinges, screws and other non-painted metallic parts shall be of stainless steel material.
4.3.7
All other requirements as specified in clause 4.2 of this specification shall also be applicable
for local control panels.
4.3.8
Whenever weatherproof local panel is provided by vendor for classified area, the Alarm
Annunciator shall be intrinsically safe and push button, lamps; selector switches shall be
flame-proof "Exd" type mounted on LCP. IS Barriers/ relays for IS alarm annunciator shall
be supplied by vendor along with IS annunciator and potential free non-flameproof contact
for the same shall be considered from the PLC / DCS/ control systems. The IS power supply
module for alarm annunciator shall be installed in a flameproof box in local panel by bidder.
For Lamps, wet contact shall be considered from the PLC/ control system and the lamp test
logic shall be realised in PLC/ control system. The Power supply distribution box inside the
Local Panel shall also be flame-proof "Exd'. IS PCs for display of loop powered indicators
shall be used in weather-proof local panels in case no. of tag local display more than Five
tags. The same IS PC can also be used for local display of vibration and temperature
monitoring system parameters at field instead of separate display unit at field. For 5 or less
number of tags for local indication, normal IS loop powered indicators shall be provided on
weather proof local panel.
Intrinsically Safe (IS) type with minimum 15" Display (Remote interactive PC terminal) unit
certified suitable for the hazardous area shall be mounted on the panel front of local control
panel of the package, wherever IS PC is considered. All local control panel mounted field
remote output indicators, wherever required as per approved P&IDs, shall be displayed in
this remote PC. Single serial interface (RS 485 with Modbus RTU protocol) corresponding
to these signals from control system shall be considered and vendor's scope shall include all
necessary converters, power supply module, connectors at both ends along with serial
communication cables for connecting to serial interface cards.
The PC terminal shall be equipped with necessary keyboard suitable for specified hazardous
area.
4.4
4.4.1
Local gauge board shall be used to install skid-mounted instruments like pressure gauges,
temperature gauges and transmitters.
4.4.2
Location of local gauge boards, when provided, shall be decided to allow easy access at the
rear and front for all instruments and accessories for maintenance and operation.
4.4.3
Gauge board shall be constructed from 3 mm stainless steel sheet with other necessary SS
supporting structure.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
1.117,enflz751..07-415.3,
IA Go, 01 Indo
undertakng)
6 - 52 -0052 Rev. 3
Page 26 of 58
4.4.4
Local gauge board shall be supplied with all instruments installed and completely in
tubed/wired condition before shipment.
4.4.5
All pressure transmitters and gauges shall be provided with block and bleed valves securely
fastened. Identification tags shall be securely fastened for easy identification. Wherever local
temperature indicator is required with temperature transmitter, Loop powered indicator shall
be provided.
4.5
Temperature Instruments
4.5.1
Thermowells
All temperature elements shall be provided with thermowells fabricated out of bar stock
of minimum SS 316 material as per EIL Standard 7-52-0035. The base of the
thermowells shall be chosen to fit the instrument without air gap for minimizing
measurement lag.
Built-up thermowells shall be used in low pressure and low velocity services like in
fired heaters and also where thermowell immersion lengths greater than 500 mm are
required.
Immersion length of thermowells shall be as follows:
Line Size
Immersion length
280 mm
320 mm
400 mm
In special applications, not covered above, vendor shall decide the immersion length
based on actual requirements. Immersion length is based on 200 mm length between
flange face and outer wall of pipe and 200 mm length between flange face and outer
wall of the vessel.
Any pipe line less than 4" nominal bore shall be blown to 4" size to install thermowell.
e) Thermowell flange and well material shall be as per material selection chart.
0 The vibration analysis shall be carried out as per PTC 19.3 TW:2010 (latest version)
and corrective measures shall be taken as necessary.
4.5.2
Temperature Gauges
Local temperature gauges shall be in general bimetallic type. The temperature bulb
shall be of stainless steel construction. The gauge connection shall be all angles
adjustable. Gas filled type shall be used when measuring range is beyond the limits of
Bimetallic gauge or thermowell length exceeds 550 mm or in applications involving
excessive vibrations. Mercury filled type temperature gauge shall not be used.
All local temperature gauges shall have 150 mm dial size. The bulb size shall be
selected to suit the thermowell.
Cases shall be minimum 304 SS and weatherproof to IP-65 as per IS/IEC-60529.
Temperature gauges shall have accuracy of 1% URV (upper range value).
e) Bimetallic type dial thermometers shall be avoided where excessive vibrations are
enoniinterett, clich ac reriprnrating rnmpreccor clicrharr Only filled type with
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Igar
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 27 of 58
capillary extension shall be used in such cases. Capillary tubing shall be a minimum of
304 SS with stainless steel flexible armouring, and PVC covering over armour. Filled
type gauges shall be manufactured as per relevant SAMA class.
f) Thermometer stem adjustable gland with union connection and bushing shall be
suitable for 1/2" NPTF connection.
4.5.3
Temperature Elements
a) For remote temperature indication/recording/control/switch etc., resistance temperature
detector (RTD) shall be used upto 400 deg C (operating) and above 400 deg C
(operating) thermocouples shall be used. Elements shall be spring loaded, mineral
insulated and shall have stainless steel sheath as a minimum.
Thermocouple assemblies shall be furnished with weatherproof screw type heads as per
EIL Standard 7-52-0036.
Thermocouples shall be as per IEC-60584-2 and shall have a wire size of 18 AWG for
single and 20 AWG for duplex thermocouples. These shall be magnesium oxide (MgO)
filled grounded type, unless necessary otherwise. The type of thermocouple shall be
selected based on temperature. The selection of type shall be as per following
guidelines:
Copper-Constantan (ISA-Type-T)
Chromel-Constantan (ISA-Type-E)
0 to 600C
Chromel-Alumel (ISA-Type-K)
600 to 1200C
600 to 1600C
Temperature Transmitter
Temperature transmitters shall have a built-in linearising function to produce an output
linear to temperature range.
The Temperature transmitters with RTD shall have an accuracy of 0.075% of URV as a
minimum for range above 350 C, 0.15% of URV for temperature range 350 C to 150
C and 0.25% for calibrated range below 150 C.
The Temperature transmitters with cold junction compensation for thermocouple shall
have an accuracy of 0.25% of URV as a minimum for range above 350 C, 0.5% of
URV for temperature range between 350 C to 150 C and 0.75% for calibrated range
below 150 C.
el
$fgar 0151-'eg
.
0
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 28 of 58
4.6
4.6.1
Burn out protection must be provided with temperature transmitters. Upscale or downscale
protection shall be decided based on its application to ensure fail-safe operation.
Pressure Instruments
Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauge dial shall be white with black figures. The dial face shall be marked
with pressure element material. Pointers shall have micrometer adjustment.
Pressure gauges shall be weatherproof with dial size of 150 mm and shall have features
like over range protection (at least 130% of max. operating pressure) and blowout
discs. Glass shall be shatter proof. Pressure gauge sensing element shall be of SS 316
and movement of SS 304, as a minimum.
Pressure gauges shall have an accuracy of 1% of URV as a minimum. Differential
pressures gauges, diaphragm seal pressure gauges and draft gauges may have an
accuracy of 2% of URV.
Over range protector and pulsation dampener, whenever used, shall be of SS 304, as a
minimum. Pulsation damepner shall be used for all pulsating services. It shall be
floating pin type, externally mounted and externally adjustable.
Pressure gauges with range 0-100 kg/cm 2g and more shall have safety type solid front
case.
Connection shall normally be 1/2" NPTM bottom.
Cases shall be minimum 304 SS and weatherproof to IP-65 as per IS/IEC-60529.
Ranges shall be so specified that the gauge normally operates in the middle third of the
scale and shall conform to IS-3624 standard dials, wherever possible.
Diaphragm seals shall be furnished where plugging of the element may occur or where
suitable material is not available in highly corrosive services. When chemical seals are
required, they shall be of the clean out type with flushing connection.
Where vibrations and pressure fluctuations are expected, glycerin filled type and
snubber shall be used.
k) Receiver pressure gauges for local transmitter output indication shall have 100 mm dial
with stainless steel element and 1/4" NPTM connection.
1) The pressure element shall be bourdon, diaphragm or bellows depending upon process
condition. Single diaphragm type Differential pressure gauges shall not be considered,
Instead double diaphragm type or bellows shall be considered.
4.6.2
t_7
Of5teS'
7- ) ENGINEERS
v INDIA LIMITED
Govt of India Undenakno
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 29 of 58
c) Diaphragm seal element with capillary shall be used for congealing, corrosive and
highly viscous services.
4.6.3
Pressure Switches
Process switches shall not be considered unless its use is unavoidable and the same
shall be subject to purchaser's approval
Pressure switches shall have either diaphragm or bellow type of process element with
SS 316 material of construction as a minimum. Switch type shall be sealed micro-type
with contact rating suitable for specific application. Also contacts shall be SPDT type
unless otherwise specified. Contacts used in intrinsically safe applications shall be
suitable as per the process condition.
Pressure switches shall be blind type with 1/2 NPTF process connection and shall be
operative in full-specified range. The switch differential shall be selected as per
operating conditions.
Pressure switches shall have repeatability of 0.5% of URV, as a minimum. Pressure
switch shall have over range protection of at least 130% of maximum working pressure.
The set pressure shall fall in the middle third (between 35% to 65%) of the adjustable
range in general. Set point shall be field adjustable.
4.7
Level Instruments
4.7.1
Level gauges
All gauge glasses shall be steel armoured reflex or transparent type with body and cover
material of forged carbon steel as a minimum and shall have tempered borosilicate glass
with asbestos or other suitable gasket. Transparent type of gauges shall be provided
with integral illuminators operating at 240 V 50 H z supply and shall be suitable for
electrical area classification specified. All gauge glasses must have a rating equal to or
more than the vessel design pressure and temperature.
Reflex type will be used for clean and colourless liquids, except liquids level interface.
For low temperature, low boiling point service, large chamber type will be used.
Transparent type will be used on acid, caustic, dirty or viscous, coloured liquids and
liquid interface. Transparent type with Mica or Kel-F shields shall be used for treated
water, boiler and condensate services, and for corrosive liquids, which will attack glass.
Tubular gauge glasses shall, in general, not be used in Hydrocarbon/hazardous services.
They may be used for non-hazardous services at ambient temperature and low pressures
(less than 10 kg/cm2g operating).
Large chamber gauges with frost shields shall be provided for cold services below 0 C.
Heating jacket shall be provided for viscous liquids with 1/2" flanged connection.
All gauges shall have top and bottom chamber connections, unless otherwise specified.
However side-side chamber connection is acceptable where nozzle installation is a
constraint. In addition each gauge shall be provided with ball check valves and pipe
union.
e) The visible range of level gauge shall be selected to cover the complete operating level
as well as measuring range of the other level instruments provided for the same
purpose. In general, the visible length and C to C distance of the top and bottom level
gauges shall be selected from the following:
Visible length
n31
idigte'g
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India OnctertaAng)
220
470
470
720
720
970
980
1230
1230
1480
1490
1740
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 30 of 58
For side-side level gauge C to C distance shall be 10 mm less than visible length.
0
4.7.2
For level gauging in very viscous, corrosive liquids, liquids with crystals and high
pressure service, float operated magnetic gauges with 2" (50 mm) flanged end
connections, shall be used. C to C length of single magnetic level gauge shall not be
more than 2500mm.
Level Transmitter
Guided Wave Radar type instruments with external cage and side-side connections
shall normally be used for level and for interface level measurement upto 2400 mm.
Guided wave radar inst shall have 3mm accuracy.
Differential pressure transmitter shall be used for level measurement above 2400 mm,
for services requiring purge or where liquid might boil in external portion.
Differential Pressure transmitters for use on corrosive or fouling service shall generally
be diaphragm wafer with extended filled capillary type. Flush or extended diaphragm
type differential pressure transmitter shall be considered for special applications only.
Diaphragm material shall normally be stainless steel or any other special alloy.
e) For sump levels, Guided wave radar or non- contact type radar level instrument shall be
used depending on the application within accuracy 3mm.
0
Generally for top mounted level transmitters, internal guided wave radar type
instruments shall be used for level measurement upto 3000mm. Above that non-contact
type radar shall be used.
Other Special types of level instruments like ultrasonic, hydrostatic, nucleonic, capacitance,
conductivity type shall be used as necessitated by application requirements.
4.7.4
For high pressure steam drum application at least one number conductivity type (Hydrastep
or equivalent) level instrument shall be provided. Also level gauges shall be of bi-color type
for such application.
4.7.5
4.8
.111
.
lagleg^w
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Govt of Indld uneenaw.ng )
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 31 of 58
Radar type transmitter shall be provided with 3 mm accuracy for storage tanks and 1
mm for custody transfer. Whenever 3.0 mm accuracy is required, process connection
on vessel/ tank/ equipment for non-contact radar gauge can be 4" with 4" Carbon Steel
/ Stainless Steel (depending on the pipe schedule requirement) still well. However
wherever 1.0 mm accuracy is required (e.g. in custody application), process
connection on vessel/ tank/ equipment for non-contact radar gauge shall be 8" with 8"
Carbon Steel / Stainless Steel (depending on the pipe schedule requirement) still well.
For viscous service, nozzle connection shall be 24".
Servo type instruments shall have 6" process connection with 6" diameter still well,
with accuracy 3 mm for storage tanks and 1 mm for custody transfer. Raising or
lowering of displacer for calibration shall be possible on-line with the design of stillwell.
The wetted material like float, displacer, tape, wire etc. shall generally be 316 SS.
The accessories for servo-controlled level gauge shall include isolation ball valves for
pressurized tanks and calibration/maintenance chamber for all tanks. Each calibration
chamber shall be provided with a viewable window of blast proof glass. The
calibration chamber can be either integral to the instrument or separate. Whenever
calibration chamber is separate i.e. not integral to the tank level instrument, the material
of construction of calibration chamber shall be stainless steel. The calibration chamber
shall also permit insertion / removal of displacer for maintenance without removing the
instruments.
f)
4.9
Servo and Radar type instruments shall be capable of providing serial output as per
vendor standard protocol or field bus protocol as per IEC-61158 in addition to analog
4-20 mA DC current output. These instruments shall also be capable of accepting input
from multi element tank temperature sensors (thermocouple/ RTD), water cut probes
and transmit the same as a part of serial signal from the transmitter. Multi-element tank
temperature sensors when used shall be provided with 3" stillwell and 3" process
connection.
Flow Instruments
The selection of flow measurement instruments shall be based on the requirement of
accuracy, repeatability, location, physical properties of the flowing fluids handled, pressure
drop and ease of maintenance.
In-line flow instruments shall have a direction of flow indication clearly marked and easily
visible in the final installed position.
Flow switches shall not be used without prior approval from the purchaser.
4.9.1
Orifice Plates
a) Flow measurement shall normally be carried out by using thin square edged concentric
orifice plate mounted between a pair of weld neck flanges of minimum 300 pounds
ANSI rating for line size 2" and above. Flange taps shall be used for line sizes upto 14"
while D-D/2 taps shall be used for line sizes more than 14". The material of the orifice
plates shall be normally 316 SS, as a minimum.
Quadrant edge or quarter circle orifice plates shall be used for highly viscous liquids
and for pipe Reynold number below 10,000.
af-aeltii
fg-ar eleage0,01jEtoteg
0.1,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
AGoo 0 Indo Unelettak.g)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 32 of 58
Conical entrance type of orifice plates shall preferably be used for very highly viscous
liquids upto throat Reynolds number of 250. These plates shall be fabricated as per
Flow Measurement Hand Book by RW Miller.
Vent and Drain holes shall be provided for bore dia above 25.4 mm.
b) Sizing of orifice plate shall be carried out in accordance with ISO-5167 (Latest
Edition). For orifice plates not covered in ISO 5167, sizing methods shall be ASME
MFC-14M (latest Edition) or AGA Report No. 3 or 'Flow measurement-Engineering
Handbook' by RW Miller.
Honed metering runs or integral orifice type transmitter shall be used in line size with
1.5" (40 mm) nominal diameter or below.
Upstream and downstream straight length shall be provided based on maximum d/D
ratio of 0.75, in general. Where it is difficult to meet this requirement, the actual d/D
ratio can be considered for reducing the straight length as permitted by the codes. Flow
straighteners are to be considered, where straight runs are difficult to achieve otherwise.
f) Meter taps shall be horizontal for liquids, condensible vapours and steam. The taps
shall be on top for gas, non-condensible vapour, or liquids which boil at or below the
maximum design ambient temperature at operating pressure. Where piping clearances
are a factor, taps may be located upto 45 degree below the horizontal center line for
condensible vapour and liquid. The taps may be located upto 60 degree from vertical
for gas, non-condensible vapour and steam.
4.9.2
Venturi Flowmeters
Venturi shall be designed and constructed as per ISO 5167-4 (Latest Edition) or ASME
MFC-3M.
The Venturi Flow element shall be classical, machined, non truncated type.
c) Impulse piping connection for venturi tubes shall be provided with 1/2" NPTF
connection, unless otherwise specified in the data sheet.
Venturi tube shall be forged/cast construction in general. However fabricated
construction shall also be acceptable, wherever allowed as per ISO-5167.
Venturi tube shall be provided with Annular chamber / Piezo-metric Ring. Material of
construction of Annular chamber / Piezo-metric Ring shall be same as material of
Venturi tube.
Material of construction of Venturi tube shall be SS316 as a minimum. Material of
construction for Throat, Divergent section and Convergent section shall also be SS316
as a minimum. Flanges shall be provided as per the material specified in the datasheet.
Flow calibration for those Venturi tubes, which are necessitated due to their installations
outside the limits as defined in ISO 5167 for D (Pipe Inside Diameter), beta and
Reynolds numbers shall be considered in the base quote
4.9.3
t31
2151-eg
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 33 of 58
suit line velocity profile. The sensor shall also incorporate a rear port for the
measurement of line static pressure.
Averaging pitot tube shall be of 3" flanged connection with isolation ball valve.
The insert retract mechanism shall be provided to allow on line removal and insertion
of the average Pitot tube under maximum pressure and flow condition.
Vibration analysis for each averaging pitot tube element shall be done for the indicated
flow condition to ensure that the averaging pitot tube is of sufficient thickness and
strength to withstand the vibration effects created due to Karman vortex shedding in the
fluid stream.
The free end of the averaging Pitot tube shall be pressure supported at the pipe wall.
However, for the large pipe sizes and where vibration analysis recommends the
requirement of end support, the end support/weld cap support shall be provided.
f) The offered averaging pitot tubes shall have 1% accuracy of actual value and
repeatability of 0.1% of actual value.
4.9.4
4.9.5
Flow meter electronics shall be microprocessor based and shall include pre-amplifier,
converter, transmitter electronics and integral output meter. The indication on the
output meter shall be digital with engineering units.
The mass flow meter shall be capable of computing field density and shall incorporate
temperature sensor flow fluid temperature measurement. Whenever required, the flow
meter electronics shall have capabi lity to compute vnliimPtri, flow rates.
ENGINEERS
$'1g-af f
aWeg
INDIA LIMITED
'e--1
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 34 of 58
The meter electronics shall be protected against transients induced by lightning and
power supply surges. Transient protection electronics shall preferably be provided in
the terminal block. The transient protection shall meet the requirements specified in
IEC-60587.
Unless specified otherwise in the job specification, the performance requirements for
the mass flow meter shall be as follows:
Flow meter accuracy:
The performance requirements specified above excludes the effect of zero stability of
the flow meter on these parameters.
Flow accuracy shall be maintained between the minimum and maximum flow. Where
only normal flow is specified, the maximum and minimum flows considered for the
purpose of sizing shall be:
Maximum flow = 1.4 times the normal flow
Minimum flow = 0.4 times the normal flow
When only maximum flow is specified minimum flow shall be considered as 0.2
times the maximum flow for sizing the meter.
The maximum pressure drop at meter maximum shall not exceed the allowable
pressure drop across the meter specified in the data sheet.
The meter shall be selected such that both accuracy and allowable pressure differential
across the meter are complied.
4.9.6
Ultrasonic flowmeter
Ultrasonic flow measurement shall be considered where non-intrusive flow measuring is
required.
The Ultrasonic flow meter shall be based on transit time technology.
The design used shall provide maximum reliability, maximum on-line performance and
minimum maintenance. It shall be immune to other impurities in the fluid stream.
Ultrasonic flow meters and the meter runs/flow conditioners shall be rated for the maximum
design pressure.
Spool piece type Ultrasonic flow meters shall have flanged end connections. Weld joints, if
any, shall be of radiographic quality.
Meter Sizing:
Selected meter size shall ensure that flow meter operates within 85% of their standard range
considering density and viscosity of the fluid. Extended range shall not be referred for the
meter selection.
Vendor to ensure the velocity in the Ultrasonic flow meter and meter run shall not exceed
maximum permissible velocity.
4.9.7
Target meters shall be considered for highly viscous hydrocarbon streams such as asphalt,
tar, polymers etc.
Oa&
.mom.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA ODA of loOla Underlaiong)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 35 of 58
4.9.8
Vortex meter shall be considered where high rangeability is the prime requirement.
4.9.9
Differential Pressure type flow transmitter shall meet all the requirements specified in clause
2.16.
4.9.10
Wedge flow meter shall be considered in slurry services or where powder deposits may form.
However, Diaphragm seal type DP transmitter shall be provided along with wedge flow
meter duly calibrated with both sensor and the transmitter.
4.10
Control Valves
4.10.1
Control valves shall normally be globe type. Other valve types like butterfly, ball, rotary
plug, angle or 3way etc., shall be selected as per service and process requirements.
4.10.2
Control valve sizing shall be carried out as per ISA S75-01. The valve shall permit upto
150% of normal flow or 110% of maximum flow, whichever is higher. In general, control
valves shall be sized so that the valve opening is as noted below:
At max. flow
At normal flow
At minimum flow
4.10.3
Flanged control valves shall be used. Body material, body rating and flange rating shall be
as per piping specifications. However body and flange rating shall be minimum 300#.
4.10.4
Minimum control valve body size shall be 1" in general. Reduced trims can also be
considered.
4.10.5
For globe valves trim characteristics shall be equal percentage type unless required
otherwise. Control valve plugs shall be heavy top guided for single seated valves. Cage
guiding may be used in clean applications.
4.10.6
Anti-cavitation trim shall be selected wherever cavitation is expected in the valve. For
flashing services and hardened trim shall be used and anti-cavitation trim shall not be
provided.
4.10.7
Noise from control valve during operation shall be limited to OSHA specified level or
better. The maximum allowable noise is 85 dBA SPL (Sound Pressure Level). Source
treatment for noise may be performed by using special trims like low noise trims, in case
noise exceeds the specified level. Other methods based on merit are also permissible.
4.10.8
Valve seat leakage shall be minimum class IV as per ANSI/FCI 70.2 unless tight shutoff
requirement is required as per the P&ID.
4.10.9
Flanged bolted type gland packing boxes shall be used. Packing shall normally be PTFE on
liquid and gas service up to 200C (design). Graphite/grafoil shall be used above
200C(design) temperature. Asbestos based packing material shall not be used.
4.10.10
Bellows seal shall be used where it is required to isolate the packing from the process fluid
or where no leakage to atmosphere can be tolerated like toxic, explosive and precious fluids.
4.10.11
Material used for trim shall be minimum SS 316, with guide bushing of hardened stainless
steel like 440 C, 17-4 PH. For higher pressure drops (more than 10 kg/cm 2) or erosive and
slurry services and in general for all steam services, flashing and cavitating services, plug
and seat shall be stellited.
71
6
ligfa0
11
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 36 of 58
Special cases may require 17-4 PH seat ring and 440 C solid plugs or other materials like
Hastelloy, Monel etc.
4.10.12 Valve actuator shall be pneumatic spring opposed diaphragm type, in general. Piston type
actuators may be used for very high shut off pressure requirements. Additional equipment
including volume bottle necessary to meet fail safe condition shall also be included in case
double acting piston type actuator is selected. In either case, actuator shall be able to
withstand maximum shut-off pressure (1.5 times of design pressure) with the minimum
instrument air pressure specified.
4.10.13
Whenever limit switches are specified as inductive proximity type, these shall meet
NAMUR (DIN-19234) requirements.
4.10.14
Solenoid valves, wherever used, shall be universal and continuous rated type with class H
coil insulation. These shall be SS body as a minimum.
4.10.15
Self-actuating regulators for flow, pressure and temperature shall be used where loads are
constant and requirements of precision and accurate controls are not stringent.
Green
Yellow
Red
Items like air volume tanks etc., supplied as an accessory along with the actuators, shall be
painted as per corresponding actuator.
4.11 ON-OFF VALVE
4.11.1 On-off valves shall have flanged end connections integral to the valve body. Top entry valve
design shall not be offered unless specifically indicated. Body rating of valve shall be
minimum 300g.
Whenever flangeless on-off valve body design is specified, following shall apply:
Wafer type or lug type body design for butterfly type on-off valves body size up to
6 inches.
Lug type body design for butterfly type of on-off valve body size more than 6
inches.
4.11.2 For on-off valves with fire safe design, flanged body construction shall only be acceptable.
4.11.3 For all services where full port valves are specified, following shall apply:
Port size shall be equal to line size for rating up to ASME Class 1500.
Port size shall not be less than one size than the line size for rating ASME Class
2500 and above.
4.11.4
For steam jacketed valves, the body and port size shall be one size lower than the on-off
valve end connections.
4.11.5
On-off valve body, bonnet, bottom flange, line flanges and other pressure containing
assemblies shall be of the same material of construction as specified for valve body.
$igar faaeg
eieaR?
4.11.6
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Inda UndertaI.9)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 37 of 58
4.11.7
Rotary type on-off valves like Ball valves, butterfly valves etc. shall have blow out proof
shaft guiding design.
4.11.8
Guide bushing shall be of a sufficiently hard material to resist side thrust on the plug or
shaft.
4.11.9
Vendor shall be responsible for trim design and selection of the on-off valve. However, it
must meet the following minimum requirements:
The valve characteristics shall be quick-opening (on-off) type.
Vendor shall select proper material pairs, surface finish, hardness and clearances to
avoid galling.
Valves operating under extreme temperature conditions, vendor shall consider
increased clearances at room temperature and seal welding of threaded seat rings
etc whenever required. Hard facing of trim including guide bushing shall be
considered for all valves operating at high temperatures (i.e. temperature more than
200C). For very low temperature application, material used shall have adequate
cold impact strength.
For all on-off valves including 3-way type of valves, stem and plug shall be
detachable and shall be attached together by suitable threaded design secured with
a pin to avoid plug rotation during operation.
4.11.10
Trim material and actuator colour shall be as specified for the control valve.
4.11.11
Leakage class of on-off valves shall be as specified in data sheet, where no class is
specified it shall be Class IV.
4.11.12
For on-off valves specified with Class VI / bubble tight (as per API) leakage class,
vendor shall select the soft seat (elastomer) material suitable for the process conditions
i.e., shut off pressure, maximum temperature and process fluid. Metal seated on-off
valves meeting the leakage class shall also be acceptable.
4.11.13
For application in vacuum service, vendor to provide inverted packing design suitable for
vacuum service. For pressure-cum-vacuum service, the on-off valve shall have dual
packing design suitable for the application. Dual packing design shall also be provided
for on-off valves in toxic service, with a facility to connect inert fluid between the
packings.
4.11.14
Valve actuator shall be designed to move the valve to the failure position as specified.
For failure position specified as 'fail-locked', vendor shall provide air reservoir with all
required accessories to meet the fail lock position of the valve.
4.11.15
Whenever double acting springless type of actuator is unavoidable, all accessories like
pilot valves, booster relays, non-return valve, pressure gauge, volume tank etc. shall be
provided to ensure desired action on air failure.
fel5reg
1.1,11 eiverenv,gdoei
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 38 of 58
4.11.16
The volume tank shall be of carbon steel construction and sized as per ASME Section
VIII with design pressure of 10kg/cm2g as a minimum. Each volume bottle shall be sized
for a minimum of 3 valve strokes
4.11.17
The actuator casings and diaphragms shall be designed for minimum twice the maximum
pneumatic operating pressure of the on-off valve.
4.11.18
Vendor shall be fully responsible for sizing and selection of correct actuator, while sizing
the actuator vendor shall consider minimum actuator thrust equal to two times (2) the
total force induced by shut off condition and the force required to overcome packing
friction.
4.11.19
Wherever the valves are indicated as fire safe, they shall be tested for fire safe as per BS
6755 (Part-2) when the valves are supplied with metal-to-metal seats and shall be tested
as per API 607 latest edition when the valves are provided with soft seats.
4.11.20
Wherever fire safe actuator and controls have been asked for, actuators and all
accessories such as solenoid valves, air volume bottles etc. shall meet the fire proof
requirement to ensure normal valve operation even during and after exposure to fire.
Vendor shall clearly define the schemes they propose to achieve the above requirements
and ensure that the proposed schemes shall meet the requirement in terms of type of
exposure and exposure time of the testing procedure given in BS 6755/API 607.
4.11.21
Vendor shall furnish type test certificate duly witnessed by third party inspection agency
like M/S LRIS,BV,DNV,TUV etc. for fire safe testing of valve, actuator and controls for
the offered models.
4.12
4.13
deter ?Wag
4.13.1
151 Wadi,
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 39 of 58
4.13.1.1 All pressure relieving devices shall be designed in accordance with ASME code for 'Boilers
and Pressure Vessels', API-521 and Indian Boiler Regulations. The pressure relief valve
sizing shall be as per API 520. For mixed phase fluids, sizing shall be as per Leung-Omega
method (or Diers) sizing shall be followed. The orifice sizing, area and designation, valve
size and rating shall be as per API RP 526.
4.13.1.2 Pressure relief valves shall be full nozzle full lift type except for thermal relief valves.
4.13.1.3 Conventional valves shall be specified for constant back pressure while bellows seal type
valves shall be specified for variable back pressure. Pilot operated pressure relief valves
shall be used when Back pressure is greater than 50% of set pressure or when the difference
between operating pressure and set pressure is within 10% of the set pressure.
4.13.1.4 Lifting lever shall be specified for steam, air or water above 65 degree service. Open bonnet
shall be used for steam service.
4.13.1.5 The percentage accumulation in case of pressure relief valves/safety valves shall be as
follows:
Steam Service
- ASME SEC I(steam generation/consumption)
3%
5%
10%
10%
21%
4.13.1.6 3/4" x 1" threaded (NPT) modified nozzle type valves with typically 0.38 cm 2 orifice size
shall be specified for thermal relief. However, if discharge is connected to flare or with
variable back pressure more than 10% of set pressure, 1D2 flanged valves as per API-526
as a minimum to be provided.
4.13.1.7 The body material shall, as a minimum, be as per piping specifications. Nozzle and disc
material shall be SS 316 as a minimum with machined stainless steel guide and spindle.
Whenever semi nozzle designs are unavoidable, body material shall be atleast same as
nozzle and disc material.
4.13.1.8 The spring material of pressure relief valves shall be as follows unless otherwise necessary
because of process conditions;
(-)29 C to 230 C
above 230C
Below ()29 C
ligodaalez
IA Govt
1.111,1
4.13.2
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
of India Undertaking)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 40 of 58
Rupture Disc
4.13.2.1 Rupture discs shall be reverse buckling type, in general and shall be supplied in pre-torqued
holder assembly, which shall fit inside the inner diameter of the bolt circle of standard
flanges. Disc material shall be compatible with the vessel contents and shall be consistent
with the bursting requirements. Inconel discs shall be used above 100C if compatible with
the process fluid.
4.13.2.2 When rupture disc is used upstream of a pressure relief valve, a pressure gauge shall be
provided on the downstream of the disc to indicate any rupture of the disc in addition to an
excess flow check valve. In addition combination capacity factor of 0.9 shall be used for
sizing unless the combination has been tested and approved for any other combination
capacity factor.
4.13.2.3 The bursting tolerance of the rupture disc shall be 5% of the specified bursting pressure or
less, unless otherwise specified.
4.13.2.4 Vendor shall consider 5 nos. rupture discs (1 for testing + 1 for installation + 3 nos. spare) of
the same specifications.
4.14
4.14.1
Interlock and Shutdown System shall be an independent system with its own dedicated
primary element except for orifice flow measurement. For orifice flow element, separate set
of tapping for each flow transmitter for shut down / interlock shall be considered.
4.14.2
The system shall be designed fail safe and shall meet the following requirements, as a
minimum:
All initiating contacts shall be close (except limit switches for which contact shall close
when the limit reaches) under normal conditions and shall open under abnormal
conditions.
All relays and solenoid valves shall be energised under normal conditions and shall deenergize under abnormal conditions.
c)
4.14.3
Each shutdown circuit and solenoid valve shall be provided with a switch-fuse unit
separately.
4.15
Vendor shall be fully responsible for the complete design of Anti surge/performance
control system (ASC) including selection of type of flow element, controller Algorithm,
type of explosion protection, type and operating timings of final control element. Vendor
shall guarantee the performance of machine with the offered ASC system. Wherever
required, ASC system shall be designed in such a way that it is capable of correcting the
Ogar tlf5leg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of India Undertaking)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 41 of 58
compressor operating point so as to avoid surge in order to protect machine from possible
damage, to minimize process upsets and to minimize recirculation.
ASC system shall typically consist of but not limited to flow element, flow transmitter,
differential pressure transmitter, ASC controller, control valve and other accessories as
felt necessary by the vendor.
Vendor shall supply all the hardware and software related to the operation and safety of
the equipment. This shall include but not limited to the following;
Design and operation of surge control loop scheme based on offered equipment
performance.
Supply of all hardwares in antisurge control loop including dedicated controller,
transmitters, measuring elements, final control element etc.
Fast response transmitter and control valve etc. as required.
Algorithm required for antisurge/ Performance control application.
The ASC shall be a dedicated single loop controller on proprietary Hardware Platform or
single/multi loop controllers of common hardware platform such as PLC. The single loop
controller shall be dedicated controller for each Anti-surge or Performance control
application/Tag. Dedicated panel mounted facia shall be provided. The ASC system
when provided on common hardware platform shall be with redundant configuration as
minimum viz-dual processor, dual input/output, redundant communication & dual power
supply system. The multiloop controller/system shall be dedicated for Antisurge/Performance applications/Tags of each machine/each machine tag. Unless specified
otherwise dedicated panel facia for each application shall be provided to mount on
hardwired console in control room
It should be able to accept 4-20 mA signal from field or from HIC at purchaser DCS or
at LCP as a manual override to anti-surge control system with bump less transfer.
k)
tia-eg
rir<Nt ...rwn.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of InOla Undertakmg)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 42 of 58
n-11
lig-aria5teg
Wren c-lecm,...71iII.1,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undo,'along)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 43 of 58
Vendor shall also provide necessary hardware and software for providing raw data to
conditioning monitoring system for each rack.
4.15.2.7 Vendor shall also supply one common laptop based configuration unit for the package unit
with required configuration software (refer clause 4.17) and hardware for configuration of
MMS system including the serial communication cable required between configuration unit
(laptop) & MMS monitors.
4.15.2.8 Key Phasor
Key phasor system shall be provided by vendor for performing analysis of vibration signals
to determine machine malfunctions. It shall consist of a proximity probe and transmitter,
extension cable etc. and other accessories to make the system complete. Vendor shall
provide necessary reference on the shaft to determine one-per-turn occurrence.
4.15.2.9 Vibration and Axial Displacement Monitoring
Monitors shall be four channel types and shall meet the following specifications as a
minimum:
Continuous channel monitoring with each channel input from one probe. Readout
scale shall read higher of the sensors.
Each channel shall have two independent alarm levels one for pre trip alarm and one
for each trip and that can be set continuously over measurement range. Two relay
contacts for each pre-trip alarm and trip alarm per channel shall be provided.
Broken sensor failure detection without causing shut down.
LED lamps on monitor front for each channel to indicate pre-trip alarm, trip-alarm and
circuit fault conditions.
e)
Selector switches on monitor front to read vibration/ displacement pre-trip alarm and
trip set points for each channel shall be provided.
Sensor shall be three wires RTD element of platinum having 100 ohms resistance at
0C.
The temperature sensor, cables, terminal heads, junction boxes etc. shall be capable of
withstanding the mechanical vibration and environment of a rotating machinery
atmosphere.
c)
k3u
$earfat51-eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt
of n 000 U cWntak.9)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 44 of 58
Selector switches on monitor front, to read temperature, pre-trip alarm and trip set
points for each channel shall be provided.
Analog output 4-20 mA DC isolated signals shall be provided for each channel
for remote indication, if specified.
4.15.2.11
Wherever MMS is not specified, vendor shall provide suitable transmitter for all the
vibration and axial displacement, temperature, key phasor to provide 4-20mA signal to
purchaser's control system.
4.15.3
4.15.3.1
Digital microprocessor based system mounted in standalone cabinet and located in rack room
shall be provided. Fault tolerant triple modular redundant (TMR) system shall be supplied
unless otherwise specified in Job Specification.
4.15.3.2
HMI for operator interface shall be supplied loose with all mounting accessories for mounting
this HMI in purchaser's hardwired console in general. This shall include all basic features of
governor to enable operator to do all control and monitoring operations from console itself
4.15.3.3
This shall include features like assignable speed range, adjustable speed set point, remote
speed set point input, digital speed indication, adjustable speed ramp, override for testing the
external over speed trip system etc.
4.15.3.4
It should be able to accept 4-20 mA signal from HIC at purchaser's DCS or LCP as a manual
override to governor and pass on the same, after a bump less auto / manual selection and
local / remote selector switches configured in speed governor (shall be possible through
HMI) to governor valve as manual control.
4.15.3.5
Vendor shall provide all hardware & software in the system (including the cable for serial
data communication from system to purchaser's DCS) for serial communication link for all
data transfer from governor to purchaser's DCS. This serial link shall be RS 422 / RS 485
with MODBUS RTU protocol, vendor shall furnish all details like pin configuration and tag
number wise MODBUS address mapping list etc. For smooth interfacing of this
communication link with DCS.
k31
lig-aria51-eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt O, India tinee11ak.9)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 45 of 58
4.15.6
Emergency switch shall be provided in the local panel/local. All such switches shall have a
protective cover to avoid inadvertent shutdown.
4.15.7
4.16
4.16.1
All system cabinets, marshalling racks and hardwired consoles shall be free standing and
enclosed cubicles type. All these items shall have bottom cable entry.
4.16.2
Cabinets shall be fabricated from cold rolled steel sheet (CRCA) of minimum 2.0mm
thickness suitably reinforced to prevent warping and buckling. Doors shall be fabricated out
of 1.6 mm thick CRCA sheet. Cabinets having modular construction and with basic frame
structure of heavy duty aluminium shall also be acceptable.
4.16.3
Cabinet/Console finish shall include sand blasting, grinding, chemical cleaning, surface
finishing by suitable filler and two coats of high-grade lacquer with sanding between coats.
Two coats of paint in the cabinet colour and a final coat after assembly at site, shall be given
for non-glossy high satin finish.
4.16.4
In order to remove dissipated heat effectively vent louvers backed by wire fly screen shall be
provided. Further, ventilation fans shall be provided wherever required. High temperature
annunciation shall be provided on operator console.
4.16.5
Illumination shall be provided for all cabinets by fluorescent lamps, which shall be operated
by door switch.
4.16.6
All cabinets/racks/consoles shall be adequately sized to avoid any congestion. Wiring shall
be done as per guidelines provided in clause 4.2.14 of this specification.
4.16.7
The height and colour of the cabinets shall be inline with other equipments being installed in
the control room.
4.17
$fg-af fafgrdg
tsflKa t'leage
5.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
I A Go, of India UndertaNng)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 46 of 58
7-52-0001
7-52-0002
7-52-0035
Thermowell
7-52-0041
7-52-0254
oi el
51gar015ieg
Wan
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt 01 Ind. Undenakmg)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 47 of 58
PART II
Oar
1#112,1 eiecnte
1.0
1.1
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Go of India Undellaktng)
,,o++1,
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 48 of 58
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
Vendor shall ensure and supply all erection hardware required for the installation of
complete instrumentation which form a part of the package unit. This includes items like
cables, cable glands, junction boxes, instrument valves and manifolds, mounting accessories,
impulse piping/tubing, pipe/tube fittings, pneumatic signal tubes, air line pipes and fittings,
filter regulators, steam/electrical tracing, insulation materials, cable duct and trays, conduits,
prefabricated canopies for instruments, identification tags, structural material required for
instrument supports and trays etc.
1.2
Clause 1.1 above broadly covers the items required for any typical plant, however vendor
shall supply all necessary items to make the installation and commissioning work complete
in all respect, irrespective of whether these have been explicitly included in their scope or
not.
1.3
Salient feature and minimum requirement for some of the main installation materials is
being described in the following paragraphs. For items for which no specification has been
provided, vendor may follow their own specifications and prevailing international standards.
1.4
Cables
1.4.1
All cables shall have PVC insulated primary insulation of cable shall be 85C Polyvinyle
Chloride type as per IS-5831 and inner and outer sheath of cable shall be flame retardant
made of extruded PVC Type ST-2 at 90C as per IS-5831. Oxygen index of PVC shall be
over 30% at 27 C+2 C and temperature index shall be over 250C. However, Polyethylene
(PE) insulation shall be provided in IIC area classification.
1.4.2
In general cables shall be flame retardant as per standard IEC 60332 Part 3 Cat.A. However,
cables with fire-safe valves shall be fire resistant also as per the following.
1.4.2.1
The insulation grade shall be 650 V/1100 V as a minimum and shall meet insulation
resistance, voltage and spark test requirements as per BS-5308 Part-II.
1.4.2.2
All cables shall be twisted and armoured. Armour over inner jacket shall be of galvanised
steel wire/flat as per IS-1554 part I.
1.4.3
For signal and control cables, inner jacket colour shall be black. Outer jacket colour shall be
light blue for intrinsically safe application and black for others. For thermocouple extension
cables the inner and outer jacket colour shall be as per IEC.
1.4.4
Maximum DC resistance of the conductor of the completed cable shall not exceed the
following:
12.3 ohms/km at 20C for cables with 1.5 mm2 conductor.
39.7 ohms/km at 20C for cables with 0.5 mm2 conductor.
1.4.5
The mutual capacitance of the pair or adjacent cores shall not exceed 250 pF/m at a
frequency of 1 kHz whereas the same shall not exceed 100 pF/m for PE insulated cables.
The capacitance between any core and screen shall not exceed 400 pF/ m at a frequency of 1
kHz.
1.4.6
L/R ratio of adjacent cores shall not exceed 40 [tH/Q for cables with 1.5 mm 2 conductor and
25 p,H / Q for cables with 0.5 mm 2 conductor.
1.4.7
The drain wire resistance including shield shall not exceed 30 ohms/km.
51g-al lagteg
.
IMIR712 12ERROA,Sn.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt Of India Undertaking)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 49 of 58
1.4.8
A pair of communication wire shall be provided for multipair/multitraid cables. Each wire
shall be 0.5 mm2 of plain annealed single or multi-strand copper conductor with 0.4 mm
thick 85C PVC insulation. Insulation shall be green and red colour coded.
1.4.9
1.4.10
Running length of the cable shall be printed on the outer sheath at least at every 5 metre
interval.
1.4.11
Signal Cables
Single pair shielded signal/alarm cables shall be used between field instruments and
junction boxes/local control panels.
Multipair individually and overall shielded signal/alarm cables shall be used between
junction boxes/local control panels and control room, in general.
The single pair and triad cables shall be of 1 5 mm 2 conductor size made of electrolytic
copper conductor of 7 strands with each strand of 0.53 mm diameter, multipair cables
with 0.5 mm2 conductor size shall have 16 strands of annealed electrolytic grade copper
conductor with each strand of 0.2 mm diameter, multi triad cable or multi pair cable
with 1 5 mm2 conductor shall have 7 strands with each strand of 0.53 mm diameter, as
per the job specification.
Shield shall be aluminium backed mylar/polyester tape bonded together with the
metallic side down helically applied with either side having 25% overlap and 100%
coverage. The minimum shield thickness shall be 0.05 mm in case of single pair/traid
and 0.075 mm incase of multipair/triad cable.
Drain wire shall be provided for individual pair and overall shield which shall be 0.5
mm2 multi stranded bare tinned annealed copper conductor. The drain wire shall be in
continuous contact with aluminium side of the shield.
All multi pair cables shall have 6 pair/12 pairs only while multitriad cable shall have 6
triads/8 triads only.
1.4.12
Control Cables
Single pair control cables shall be used between field mounted solenoid valves and
junction boxes/local control panels and shall meet the requirements specified in para
1.4.11 above.
Multipair control cables shall be used between junction boxes/local control panel and
control room mounted devices in general. These cables shall have only overall
shielding.
c) These control cables shall have 1.5 sq mm conductor size with 7 stranded conductors of
annealed electrolytic grade copper, with each strand of 0.53 mm diameter.
1.4.13
Fieldbus Cables
Fieldbus cables shall be 16AWG (1.31 mm 2) for trunk and 18 AWG (0.82mm 2 ) for
spur twisted in pair individually and overall shielded with aluminium mylar tape with
drain wire and armoured. Other parameters shall be as per Type A defined in IEC61158-2.
Fieldbus cables shall be single pair or two pairs.
Field bus cable shall be field proven for FF applications.
Fieldbus cable shall comply with H1 cable test specification FF 844.
e) Outer jacket color shall be orange with 3 longitudinal blue stripes for spur cables and
black stripes for trunk cables.
,..-e Oa&
t-,,05,0,,.,4,,
OgZrf
1.4.14
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India undertaking)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 50 of 58
1.4.17
1.4.18
Any other special cable required for instruments shall also be supplied as per the
requirement. Vendor shall ensure that these cables are armoured type and shall meet all other
requirements specified in para 1.4.1 through 1.4.10, as applicable.
1.5
Cable Glands
Vendor shall supply all cable glands required for glanding the above mentioned cables
at field instrument side, local control panel side, junction boxes side and at control room
side.
All cables glands shall be of nickel-plated brass and shall be double compression type
suitable for armoured cables.
Flame proof glands wherever required shall be supplied with Ex (d) certification.
PVC Cable shrouds shall be provided with all the cable glands.
1.6
n31
2151e
g
I NIR71 2.12M2 JP415.1,
ENGINEERS INSTRUMENTATION
INDIA UMITED
IA Govf of lixha Undertaking,
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 51 of 58
1.7.1
For Fieldbus segment, junction box shall be used for mounting the wiring/ terminal blocks to
terminate the trunk and spurs in the fieldbus networks.
Unless otherwise specified, vendor must use the following type of terminal blocks:
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
Surge protectors on the field side shall be provided whenever specifically mentioned in job
specification either within the FFJB or along with the instrument.
1.7.5
Sufficient spacing shall be provided inside the Junction Boxes for mounting of field barrier
assemblies, termination and routing of Trunk/ Spur cables to the barrier/Megablocks,
sufficient space shall be provided for installing terminator etc. inside the Junction Box.
1.7.6
For spur and trunk cables, 20 % addition cable entries must be provided. Unused entries
shall be plugged.
$2-41-
tif5ilegt
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt 0 India Undertaking)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 52 of 58
1.7.7
Each junction box shall be provided with sufficient entries with weatherproof, flameproof
plugs, as required. Trunk and spur entries shall be from the bottom.
1.8
1.9
Impulse Piping/Tubing
Vendor shall supply 1/2" OD x 0.065" thick ASTM A 269 TP 316 L stainless steel
seamless tubes as a minimum for impulse lines.
Where the pressure (operating) exceeds 70kg/cm2g or if piping is specified as impulse
line, seamless pipes of size '/2" NB of required thickness shall be supplied with material
as per piping class.
Seamless tubes shall have a hardness of max 80 RB as typical.
Steam tracing shall be 10 mm OD copper tubes of electrolytic grade copper.
e) Instrument air tubing shall be 6 mm SS316L.
1.10
1.11
=
Ogar Rift
1.12
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 53 of 58
Seamless galvanised, inside and outside, carbon steel pipes used for instrument air
distribution shall be as per IS 1239 class Heavy. In view of difficulty in bending such
pipes, elbows shall be used wherever bending is expected or A106 Gr B pipe shall be
supplied.
Galvanised forged screwed carbon steel screwed fittings of 2000 lbs rating fittings shall
be used.
c) Isolation valves on instrument air service shall be packless gland type full bore ball
valves. .
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
ENGINEERS
Ogal" fa5reg
lama viva,
,t
451 07-0 1,
INDIA LIMITED
A
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 54 of 58
Insulation of all in-line instruments like control valves, safety valves etc. shall be done
as per the line requirements. Also all direct equipment mounted instruments like level
gauge, displacer/float type instruments etc. shall be properly insulated as per insulation
requirements of the equipment on which these are installed.
The insulation with 25 mm dia. Sodium silicate inhibited ceramic fiber rope (fiber glass
/ SS wire braided) by spiral winding in position, wrapping the rope around piping so as
to cover the piping completely without leaving any gap, application of two layers of
self adhesive aluminum foil tape (min 0.1 mm thick) spirally wound over the rope
surface with the joints in two layers staggered. Ceramic fibre rope shall be of minimum
density 250 kg/m3 shall be made up of ceramic fibre insulation with other properties of
ceramic fibre rope confirming to 3.2.3 (1) of specification "6-44-0002 for hot
insulation" work.
Steam tracing shall be considered for instrument impulse line for cryogenic services
(i.e. operating temperature is less than 0 C).
2.0
INSTALLATION
2.1
Vendor shall be completely responsible for installation of all instruments within their battery
limit, in line with the installation standards (typical) furnished alongwith package
specification.
2.2
Whenever installation is beyond the scope of vendor/contractor, purchaser shall install the
instruments as per the details/documents/drawings provided by the vendor/contractor.
However, in such a case it must be ensured that complete installation materials shall be
supplied.
2.3
2.4
The capillary of all capillary type instruments shall be supported properly and shall be
protected against mechanical damage.
2.5
All pressure/differential pressure instruments shall be provided with block and bleed/ bypass, drain/vent valves etc as per the installation standards, and shall have accessibility.
2.6
All primary piping/tubing (impulse lines) shall have a slope of 1 in 12 on the horizontal run.
2.7
All welding shall be carried out as per the relevant codes with proper electrodes. Any testing
(non destructive) like DP test and radiography on root weld and final weld shall be carried
out as applicable. All consumables shall be part of vendor's scope of supply. Any pre/post
weld treatment as required by the relevant codes shall be carried out.
2.8
2.9
2.10
Instrument drain/vent connections shall be piped to safe area like oily water sewer or above
pipe racks to avoid accumulation of hazardous fluid in the plant atmosphere.
Igar la
leg
g
29-075,2 .770.1)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 55 of 58
2.11
2.12
All tubes/cables shall be properly laid on cable trays, which shall be supported at regular
intervals.
2.13
Separate routing or physical separation shall be maintained between signal, shut down and
power cables.
2.14
Wherever intrinsically safe system cabling is employed, the minimum separation of 150 mm
shall be adhered between IS (intrinsically safe) and non- IS signal cables.
2.15
The cases of instruments shall be earthed by earthing wire to the nearest earth bus bar for
safety reasons.
2.16
In case the cables are to be buried or laid in concrete trench the same shall be carried out by
vendor. In case civil work is carried out by purchaser, requirement of trenches shall be
provided with prior intimation to client.
2.17
Painting of angle trays, instrument supports and all structural supports shall be painted as
under :a) The surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned with brush and sand paper to
remove all scales. After cleaning, one coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer shall be
given conforming to IS-2074 and allowed to dry. One coat of final paint shall be
applied.
Second and final coats of paint of final colour shall be given before handing over the
plant/ commissioning.
2.18
2.18.1
The system as applicable shall be installed by the system vendor who would be responsible
for installation and termination of interconnecting cables in the system racks/cabinets. All
interconnecting cables shall be identified and the individual cores/wires shall be properly
identified using ferrules. Direct-cross ferruling method shall be used for identification.
2.18.2
All system communication cables shall be laid in covered GI (galvanised iron) trays away
from power cables. Prefabricated cables shall be avoided for interconnection if these are to
be routed out side the cabinets. If unavoidable these should be laid in covered GI trays.
2.18.3
All panels/cabinets shall be properly leveled and secured firmly with the base supporting
structure. However, the consoles and printer stands need not be secured to base structure.
2.18.4
Grounding
Each cabinet, console and other equipment supplied as a part of system shall have
earthling lugs which shall be secured to the 'AC mains earthing bus'.
All circuit grounds, shields and drain wires shall be connected to the 'system ground'
bus which is isolated from 'AC mains earth'. This bus shall typically be 25 mm wide
and 6 mm thick of copper.
The total resistance of system ground shall be less than 5 ohms unless otherwise
recommended by system manufacturer.
c) Safety barriers, if used, shall be secured to 'Safety ground' which shall have typically
ground resistance of less than 1 ohm. The bus shall be designed considering a fault level
of 0.5 A at 250V r.m.s. per barrier.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$tgar Mieg
t.A
F,t t-tv,,,,A,Afo, 0
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 56 of 58
2.18.5
3.0
3.1
All impulse lines shall be tested hydrostatically at 1.5 times the design pressure / maximum
operating pressure. Ensure that instrument and vessel/piping is isolated during this test.
3.2
3.3
After pressure testing, all these impulse lines shall be drained and dried with dry air for 15
minutes to remove any traces of moisture, oil and dust.
3.4
Instrument air lines shall be duly tested for any leak after pressurising and isolating the main
root valve by soap solution and bubbler unit. After isolation, the rate of fall in pressure shall
be less than 1 kPa for every 4.4 metre (1 psi for each 100 feet) of tubing for a test period of 2
minutes.
3.5
All instrument cables shall be tested for continuity and insulation. While meggering the
cables for insulation testing, ensure that all instruments and barriers are isolated at both ends.
The megger testing at site is not required to be carried out for the field bus cables and
thermocouple extension cables. However, for field bus cables and thermocouple extension
cables, the loop resistance and capacitance shall be checked by the contractor before and
after the completion of cable laying.
3.6
All instruments supplied by the vendor shall be calibrated using proper test equipment.
3.7
All instruments shall be calibrated for 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% and vice versa.
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
All displacer type level transmitters shall be calibrated with water or suitable fluids and
corrected for specific gravity.
3.12
All alarm and trip switches shall be calibrated over the entire range, finally set and checked
for alarm/trip points and reset points as per the alarm/trip set point schedule. After setting,
these shall be sealed.
3.13
All control valves, prior to stroke checking, shall be externally cleaned thoroughly. The full
stroke of valve shall be checked for opening and closing. Any adjustment required for
obtaining full stroke and reducing hysteresis shall be carried out. The hysteresis shall not be
more than 1% URV (upper range value) with positioners and 5% URV without positioners.
3.14
Solenoid valve shall be checked functionally for its operation and also compatibility with
respect to barrier.
3.15
Safety valves and relief valves shall be set/ tested by using dry air/nitrogen. Leakage if any
shall be removed by proper lapping of seat and disc.
3.16
elf ttai
eg
141FR ,I,CP1149,710.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt India UnOettak nngt
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 57 of 58
3.17
All special instruments like analyzer shall be checked and calibrated as per manufacturer's
instructions. Prior to testing, all analyzer sample lines shall be thoroughly cleaned by carbon
tetra chloride or any other cleaning liquid. After cleaning, these lines shall be thoroughly
purged with dry nitrogen.
3.18
3.19
The accuracy of overall loop shall be within 1% for electronic and 1.5% for pneumatic
loops.
3.20
After performing the calibration of all instruments, the entire loop shall be checked for
proper operation.
3.21
The entire shutdown scheme shall be simulated from the process trip switches/ control
system and the scheme shall be tested for its proper operation prior to start up of the unit.
3.22
If no instrument air is available vendor shall provide necessary nitrogen cylinders with
suitable regulators to carry out the above activity.
3.23
Testing Of Systems
3.23.1
All the system functions shall be checked thoroughly for proper functioning. These shall
include but not limited to the following tests:
The input signals shall be simulated by disconnecting the field wires for all inputs. Wherever
control room mounted Transmitters/Converters/Receiver switches are used, the functioning
of same shall also be checked.
3.24
Loop Checking
3.24.1
Loop checking shall be carried out by vendor, which shall include proper functioning and
interconnection of all items in the loop.
3.24.2
All input signals shall be generated in the field and corresponding reading shall be checked
at all corresponding displays.
All the outputs shall be checked in the field, by physical verification of valve stroke or
operation of solenoid valve/pick-up of electrical contactor.
Ogar faajeg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
,A Govt of Indo Unclertakow
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 58 of 58
3.24.3
After loop checking is completed, vendor shall connect back any terminals and connections
removed during loop checking.
3.24.4
For fieldbus loops the segment verification shall be carried out by DCS vendor. Any field
side modifications required shall be carried out by vendor.
4.0
COMMISSIONING
4.1
This activity shall be carried out in a systematic manner so as to avoid any accident to plant
and operating personnel.
4.2
During the plant start up all the instruments calibration, controller alignment, trip point
settings shall be trimmed so as to meet the operation requirements.
4.3
Prior to guarantee run of any package unit, the vital instruments as required by vendor have
to be recalibrated and the results recorded.
ENGINEERS
Ogar faiRegWf
INDIA
LIMITED
AMA' WORM)
IA
Go. of Indus Und.slung)
Annexure Ito
STANDARD SPECIFICATION NO.
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 5
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
Material selection chart defines the base material requirements for major instrument
items. The materials have been specified as per 'piping class' in which these
instruments are installed. Additional requirements like stelliting etc. shall be selected
based on process conditions.
1.2
1.3
For all instruments in sour service requiring NACE as per Piping class, all materials
of construction shall meet the requirements specified in NACE MR 01-03 latest
edition. In addition, any other requirements if specified in respective piping class,
shall also be complied.
1.4
Impulse pipe material shall be as per the corresponding piping class. However, for
Impulse tubing material shall be 316L SS, as a minimum. Better material shall be
selected wherever required.
1.5
This gives details of selection criteria for most of the common EIL Piping Classes.
However, variations may exist from these in jobs and also new piping classes may
arise. In those circumstances, the material selection shall be based on the relevant job
piping classes and evaluation of actual requirements.
1.6
For testing requirement like Radiography, IBR, NACE, Hydrogen testing, Post weld
heat treatment, etc shall be followed as per piping material specification for the
respective piping class.
fiPzrekgi:
:h ENGINEERS
iaReg
14917A 2120,1,61JAMI,
INDIA LIMI1B
D
una,isonsi
in Govt Of InOta
CONTROL VALVE
SL.
NO
1.
2.
3.
4.
PIPING CLASS
SS316
A216
Gr. WCB
SS316
SS316L
A216
Gr. WCB *
A216
Gr. WCB *
A216
Gr. WCB
SS 316L*
A216 Gr.
WCB *
A216 Gr.
WCB *
A216
Gr. WCB
SS 316L
*
SS 316L
*
SS 316
Inconnel
*
Inconnel
*
SS 316L
SS 316
SS 316
SS 3I6L
SS316
stellited
SS316
stellited
SS 321
SS316L
SS321
SS321
SS321
Stellited
SS 316
Stellited
SS 316
A352
Gr. LCB
A217
Gr. WC1
A217
Gr. WC6
A217
Gr. C5
A217Gr.
C12
A217Gr.
C12
A352
Gr. LC3
A351
Gr. CF8
A351
Gr. CF8
A351
Gr. CF3
A351
Gr.CF8
A351
Gr. CF8M
A351
GrCF3M
A351
GrCF3M*
A351
GrCF3M*
A351 Gr.
CFIOM
A351Gr.
CF8C
A351Gr.
CF8C
A351Gr
CF3
SS321
SS321
SS 316
stellited
SS 316
SS 316L
SS 316
SS 3I6L
SS 316L
stellited
SS316
SS 316L
SS 316
SS 316L
SS 316L
SS 316L
SS 3I6L*
SS 316
Inconnel
*
Inconnel
*
SS 316L
SS 321
SS 321
SS 347
Stellited
SS316L
SS 347
8.
9.
A4G, B4G
10.
D4G
A352
Gr. LC3
A351
Gr. CF8
A351
Gr. CF8
A351
Gr. CF3
A351
Gr. CF8
A351
Gr. CF8M
A351
Gr. CF3M
A351
Gr. CF3M*
A351
Gr. CF3M*
A351
Gr. CF1OM
A351Gr.
CF8C
A351Gr.
CF8C
A351Gr. CF3
15.
B18K, D18K
16,
AIM, BIM
AIN, BIN, B6N
A26N
D26N
B4K, B5K
21.
22
D25M
23.
AllK, B11K
Nozzle /
disc
A216
Gr. WCB
B25K
Body /
Bonnet
Trim
7.
Body
A352
Gr. LCB
A217
Gr. WC1
A217
Gr. WC6
A217
Gr. C5
A217 Gr. C12
Annexure I to
STANDARD SPECIFICATION NO.
6 -52 -0052 Rev3
Page 2 of 5
SS 316L
Stellited*
SS 316
Stellited
SS316
Stellited
SS316
Stellited
SS 321
SS321
SS 316
Stellited
SS 316L
Stellited
SS316
SS 316
SS 316L
SS 3I6L*
SS 316L
Stellited*
SS 304H
Stellited
SS 321
SS 347
Stellited
SS316L
SS 316L*
Bellow
SS316L
SS321
SS 316L
SS 316L
SS 316L
latitzieift ENGINEERS
itaieg W INDIA LIMITED
MOM evim2fenaae1oo
Annexure Ito
STANDARD SPECIFICATION NO.
6-52-0052 Rev3
Page 3 of 5
ORIFICE/SENIOR ORIFICE
S.
NO
Flange/Body
Plate
Body
Sensor
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316L
SS 316L*
SS 316*
SS 316L*
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316L
A350 GrLF2
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316L
A182
GrF1
AID, BID, B5D, DID,
A182
D2D, F2D
GrF11
A4F, B3F, B4F
A182
GrF5
A4G, B4G, D4G
A182
GrF9
AlH, B1H, D1H
A350
GrLF3
A1K, A2K, A3K, A22K, B1K, B2K, D2K A182
GrF304
B25K
A182
GrF304L
B18K, D18K
A182
GrF304
AIM, BIM
A182
GrF316
AIN, A26N*, B1N, B6N, D26N*
A182
GrF316L
A5A, B5A, D5A, F5A, F25A
A105
Note-1
B4K, B5K
A182
GrF304H
A70M, A74M, B70M, B74M
A182GrF321
SS316
SS316
SS316L
SS316
SS316
SS316L
SS 321
SS316
SS 321
SS316
SS316
SS316
SS321 or
Hastelloy-C
SS321 or
Hastelloy-C
SS316L
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316L
SS 316L
SS 316
SS 3I6L
SS316
SS316
SS316L
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316L
SS 316
SS321 or
Hastelloy-C
SS 316L
SS316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS321
SS316
D25M
A 1 82GrF347
SS347
SS316
AllK, B11K
A182GrF304L
SS316L
SS316
19.
FIELD TRANSMITTER
PIPING CLASS
SS316L with
gold plated
SS 316L
SS321 or
Hastelloy- C
SS316L with
gold plated
SS316L
ifft ENGINEERS
101
Itgar ial5tegW INDIA LIMITED
1.27121OMOOnaOarfl,
Annexure I to
STANDARD SPECIFICATION NO.
6-52-0052 Rev3
Page 4 of 5
THERMOWELL
S.
NO
LEVEL INSTRUMENT
PIPING CLASS
Flange
Well
Cage/ Chamber
A105
SS 316
A106
Gr. B
A105 *
SS 316L
A106 GrB*
A105
SS 316
A106 GrB
A350 GrLF2
SS 316
A333 Gr6
A182 GrF1
SS 316
A335 GrP1
A182 GrF11
SS 316
A335 GrP11
A182 GrF5
SS 321
A335 GrP5
A182 GrF9
SS 321
A335 GrP59
A350 GrLF3
SS 316
A333, Gr3
A182 GrF304
SS 316
A312 GrTP304
A182 GrF304L
SS 316L
A312 GrTP304L
B18K,D18K
A182 GrF304
SS 316
A312 GrTP304
AIM, BIM
A182 GrF316
SS 316
A312 GrTP316
A182 GrF316L
SS 316L
A312 GrTP316L
15.
B4K, B5K
A182 GrF304H
SS 304H
A312 GrTP304H
16
A182 GrF321
SS321
A312 GrTP321
D25M
A182 GrF347
SS347
A312 GrTP347
AUK, B11K
A182 GrF304L
SS316L
A312 GrTP304L
Eifilegyr
Annexure Ito
STANDARD SPECIFICATION NO.
6-52-0052 Rev3
Page 5 of 5
LEVEL GAUGE
SL.
NO
PIPING CLASS
Chamber
Cock
Body
Cock
Trim
PRESSURE, DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE AND VACUUM
GAUGE
Sensing
Diaphragm
Element
/ Socket
SS 316
SS 316
A105
A105
SS 316
A105*
A105*
SS
316L*
SS 316*
SS 316L*
A105
A105
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
A350
GrLF2
A182
GrF1
A182
GrF11
A182
GrF5
A182
GrF9
A350
GrLF3
A182
GrF304
A182
GrF304L
A182
GrF304
A182
GrF316
A182
GrF316L
A182
Gr. F304H
A350
GrLF2
A182
GrF1
A182
GrF11
A182
GrF5
A182
GrF9
A350
GrLF3
A182
GrF304
A182
GrF304L
A182
GrF304
A182
GrF316
A182
GrF316L
A182
GrF304
H
A182Gr
F321
Al 82Gr
F347
A182Gr
F304L
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS316
SS316
SS316
SS316
SS316
SS316
SS 321
SS 316
SS 321
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 321 or Hastelloy
or Inconel
SS 321 or Hastelloy
or Inconel
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 3I6L
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316L
SS 316
SS 321 or Hastelloy
or Inconel
SS 316L
SS 304H
SS 316
SS 316
SS321
SS 316
SS347
SS 316
SS316L
SS 316
SS 321 or Hastelloy
or Inconel
SS 347 or Hastelloy
or Inconel
SS 316L
A182Gr.
F321
A182Gr.
F347
A182Gr.
F304L
Notes:
* Material shall be hardness controlled and shall comply with NACE MR-0103 latest edition.
For Hydrogen service wetted part material for switches, transmitters shall be SS 316L gold
plated, base material Hastelloy shall be avoided
SS 316L, SS 316Ti are also acceptable in place of SS316.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
15IPZEC(ft
-- ENGINEERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
LIMITED
$ fliAegW7- INDIA
PACKAGE UNITS
IA Govt al India UncleMO.9)
ANNEXURE4I TO STANDARD
SPECIFICATION No.
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 9
ANNEXURE-Il
Format of Instrumentation Index
Format of Point Data Base
Format for Functional Schematics
Format For cable Schedule (Non-FF)
Format For cable Schedule (FF)
Format for Logic Diagram
Format for Electrical/Instrumentation interface
Format for FF instrument details
-F.
g
,1'
1 .;f,,
'. .
. 8 E ''
e ` .0
g....
o
4.
cjj
,.. 73
o -; 6
a.
a.
a
,..., i Z
'-' Z
1/..
i "6
1: - z
cn `,..4
Ca
'4
g
00
=1
e
26
ea T.
3 7.
2 wl
X
CD
-.?
0
a -
3 ea
6
z
rn
g
-at
o
;..,
-,-
...: es Z
a
c.:,
co) 6
as Z
es
C
I
0
.2i
o.
6
z
o6
z ,..C
72
a>
.
.5-.4 .sto.
fig g
t.T.7
o
o
to
0.
i
0
3
6,
6e
oz
a
E-
2...
2
:
512
00
F
0
9
REV.
>, ..m a)
_c g
DATE
E5 0
_0 -0
a)
.0
C .....
a)
- .-
2
0
0 I.i_
_J
13.)
Li
....-
0" 17
0 C
fp
0)
WX
2_' -0
a. 0
X
a) a)
>
co cr.
'-
m ...-c
3 m
Om
s._ c
.
o- 0
_o
a> 0c
r -.,
L
c3
o
>,
a c
c0
Dx
a)
C 1;1
m
0 -n-
O :'-'
E
x i62_
,_
0
E t)
z
0
I-
42)
0
0
0
-5
CY
>, .>
m r:
.c eL
I-- .0
_J
5
Lu
1 >,
m `i)
LI
as
ee
Z
E
z
Cr
i--.
z
0
C..)
ci
(I) 0
w =
u., 4Lu
-c
Z aill
E
4- X
0
11'
>, -,i,,,
C.
CD
0.
03
0 -..
).- 0
0- C
0
m .15
r e_.
_13
a) x
TAG NUMBER
AL
AH
ALL
AHH
REMARKS
0 Q)
CO -6
1- 0
0 C
> 0
0 0
n
0
-0
- W
'O.
c 0
O) 0
"f7) -6
0 0
-0 z0
-o 12
c 1-2
0 a.
w
o) ,-c_ q,
30 .c)
I-4.
0 0
C
03
..C- =
I- i
U3
LIN
cr)
AM.
EIL
OW
PLANT
UNIT
CLIENT
DRAWING NUMBER
FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC
SHEET 1 OF 1
REV
E
E
a)
C. 1.I.-
Q)
0, -0
0
DATE
REV.
>, a)
L_c 3
-.0 o
L.
..... ,
0
.c
-0
.....
a)
c ....
a
_I
I-J-J
c
a)
in
co >,
a)
i.. .0
a_
xc
a) 0
>
2) Ci,
1_
0
a)
3 c
Om
%._ c
6- 8
.0
0
0 c
-C --
c
0
>,
'0 C
C0
0 >,
-o
o .,,,,
C ,
0 -4-
0
1. aa)
E 1'
w
L Q)
v0
>n .>
CO
.
0..
-C
I
0
-..
......-.I
0
LLI
W
I >,
0
J3
Q0
0
E
Z=
(.1) a)
I:t .0
W".4.1
Z .0
Z.-.5 4-
Z CILLI CD
,._ X
0 g)
>, Z
L._ (0
ID=
0.
0 4-
L.
0
CL c
CD 15
4,
-C 4,
.....
:a
I
=
0
C.)
TAG NUMBER
AL
AH
ALL
AHH
REMARKS
o LE
L- X
0
Q)
CO .6
I-
0
C
>0
00
0 -
75.
C
0,
.(a) -6
a>
0
o
-0
c2
0 cl.
a)
0) ic0
R _a
o
I_ .....
-o o
c
to
:-E F In
I i c,>
In
Aill&D.
E-11 7
. ) ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED
NEW
DELI-II
PLANT
UNIT
CLIENT
DRAWING NUMBER
FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC
SHEET 1 OF 1
REV
k'
i
k'
cS
;
0
z
2
z es.
is
..
7,
!
7...,
Le
t,
s
Ei
'I'
"'
5 s .5
i&
,'1":/-
ti
..
mm
-,
te
&
P
3
o
3 k
,1E
x.
0
L'
5
a
.
.3-
ti
tij
i'
g
,
.
2
.
r ?.
i
1 fc
g
-e.:-..
4',
is
3
z
g
,
5
t
I 2 g
c. F
i i2
a
,_
z
1U
0 ui
aa
.7.- z 1 x
t,- ti
5
3 Z.
il
a u,
i1t
0.
E,
..4
CI
1-
-J _
<
I
I
0W
ZO
I
"
0
IX Ill
LLI Z
W
Z
(.9
ui
a_
>Ia.
0
_,
z
w
2-
.
Z E
'-:-''
o
o
i, t
r .
. E
,,,
V=
03g
.
z
5
. 4
.z
,
5
0
m
7
8
-.-.
"Co'
-n
c
=
5.
2
3
<
-
-0.
IV
E1
ti
-13
z m
M M
* c
X
0
rz
g
a,
t,
,,,
] o
x
z
0
>
r-
1.1
r
o
e
w
to
0
(1)
C7 co
CD
el.
rCD
32
5'
71
I1
--I
13
co
(J)
c3
=
-- - P 2
co
4
cigw wE
EP II-
cl)
-.=.
tla
3
P5
,
23
-1
e IF, I
1I
eI
f)
,
F, co
"'
z
P
--oz.
,
r.I.
--I
0
X
0
0a
cr
CD
--..
..... 0 g
.
, 5
-
z g.
o
1
X
0
0
.0
0
--i
ZF
p
z.,
.
>
0
;91
0
0
=
0
3
ID
CT
1
0
_1 c5
0
,<
-0
K
=I
m
0
o
-n
M
Z
Ti
_,.
o c
K
.r
. -n0) fi)
P..rt . 0- .7.CT
z
7.-1
Pg
I an5
53 z .
I, .
ga
11
1 I1 9
C
ig
1 3 -<
i 5g
0
ic
: 11p
Ii
,c
1 :
3r
1
zir 1
13
1
cn
co
zo
.-.
U)
0
=
Cn
a)
O
P"
CD
X
A
. ..
CD
Q.
C
CD
* X
-0 20
&
z CD-, z
p p
P
0
,-,
--I
11
;
q11
0)
K 3
F, a 2
(I
11
I 1
is I
M ,
fa .
CI
ZT
la 0 .r)
fi @
P a
F13
6
*
FT
z
0
(7-7 a
- o
f- =
xg
=
gE
=o:
2
z 0
..o
70
CD
3
a)
R-
S.'
9-
CA
1-
LU
z Z
cc
co
< 1..
0
LL
LL
ch
U
0
U
-J
a_
co
o
z0
re
<o.
2
Oo
lc
z6
<C
.1a..)
......
20
ce
8
.
2 re ci
8 0
2
1.- 0
0 ct
Lu
1
0
re
a.
W
0
re
Lu
-n
Co
CO
....
ct
W
_
1.1
W
11/ co
m
a o
<
<
u
z
0
t=
<
2
ga
w
0
0
0
re
<I a
m
w
LLI
F- i ,-Ill I- W
-J 0 -I
MZ M
<0 i-ii1 .:t
0
a
CI.
ui
0
<
0
Z
(X
<
Gz
2.c) m
0 2. -,
co
-,
0
0
(3j
M ix
III
I- Z
.-n
r.)
o-
IN
I
a-1
n4
cr
<-I
r4
rn
I
el
..-1
ni
V'
V'
IN
rfl
.1.
8g
ii
1g1
.i.
E
ci2 dc
LI
IIz
1/1
?
.....
-J
us
z
0
Z6
.13
9
23=
a>
_,O
-J
P.
a
2
o
w
0
<
0
m
0
1-<
l-
ui
_1
m
V
c.)
z
0
2
re
pl
Page 963 of 1744
co
us
0
CID
a. M
I
<
0
--'
0
ct
1_
z
o o
-,
O
Im
-)
P..
0
0
w
0
us
-J
m
a
0
0
z
o
<
I
o
m
u..
c:3,
us
so
au
La,
oi0
.2
o
0
o
2
I- I-
u
.
0
,
Fa'<
0
I
Z
Li
0
ci
z
0
L.L.,
,:i
0
g.
0
IX
_l
Z
I -1 -1
X
LA
_1
55
13
Z
0
a
,_
<4
14
z
L
C.,
_<
i'
w
d
I
E
II
<4
A
0
1....1
0
0
,-1
1-1-1
CI
co
x
-
cn
....
U
g
Z
0
II
I
I
0
0_
II
IX
U
V)
LA
1=1
M
64
U
II
l_D
0
_J
Ni
_J
.
P.
as
z
LA
C.)
)(n
cn _1
m ,:t
1a i
1- ix
ce, o
g
ra
,z
U 0
> 6
w O LA
1=1
ci
z
0
z
o
LD
Z
O0
1--
<
D
6I-
W6
0
< .=.)6
>u
IX -J
W<
o E
0
Z
Pi
CE
1 1
B
d
z
ea
0
Q
F-
Lez-v
JO M OIJOGI 914 01
ort x
SOS-Ii91 113
poqmwied ion 91DA/Jd pUD ADM mum otn UI visoxo pawl lou 'pommqxo 'pouooi 'po!doo 'p000poicloi oq ;ou
Jopuoi oto dq uomb IUDSUOD IJONIJM AUD
APodcud eta JD 9.19A00 ufqoop Dip puo buunuP ;NI
tog logy luouJooJBo 1190JdX9 9-19/A0JJOU ayl pUD pouool AIMMILLI 9JD 941 " alunn VION1 SH33NION3
89
z
2
.e
"6 .4,1
e
0
0
`6'
ro
z0
.<
toas
E
0.
0
0
0
o
S2
2t
z
E.
1
00
es.
0
00
Cl)
dz
1;'
pi
Page 965 of 1744
6.
"5 0
Z
0
0
a
E
LL
51.
_-.,
o cro
a
lia
0 (2. i3
F.
E 3 ...
a.
0
.
0
9
m
=
0
...
g
x
i-
0
r
LI
..c
15 m
v
I
c
-1
r4
-I
a
CD
.-
5
93
aa
0
0
XI
I
8
'
g
9.
a
g
>
or
g
0
a
5.
oa
0
0
t
i i
.5Z
co
5
*
a
5
a
gI 3
.
"-,
5
s .
8
3 .
ci
.
5
''
g
2,
.
a
a
a.
g
a
a s--
a
5
it
J
'8
8
4:
i
... ,c4--
. 0
5-
g
t
2
a
ca
g
2 II .
5
a'
id
-4
2,
cr
c
8a
Q :
,3",
a
.z
a0
1.
..c-I
2
-
a
5
8.
01
2
3
F
Z
cn
Z
o
Z
co
Z 8g3
It. 5
o.
8
ao
>
aa
a
.0.
0
8
g
e3
a.
P.
2
F.'
m
.
3z
00- 0
iii a:*
co
si
g
..
cr
'
'5
Fr;
a
tD
c
2m
a
%'
i I
co
s
i
gI
0
r...1
5...
5
a
3
E
0
$
if
,..e
2
9,,
co:
i
cii
a
3
c
C)
1
73
< 010
W s.
5'
a 2
:
CI
t
3f,
a
a
0
"..
en
73
3
a
e.
cr
8
1
a
F. E
5 0 .
3
5
c a
0
I 7
I
.
C
a
E
5
o
*
tocr
el
3,
a
5.
t
\Ia
5
0rj,
0 .E
-
m
o.
Z
?a;
t
o.
eo
5.
g
a
g.
a,
5'
0
a
0
v-
....
g
5
5"
Fi
o a
5 II
(1)
0
0
- .1!"
.,
2,
5
0
a
.
a
t"
a
a
a
O.
a
0
z
CT
a
a I
5
1
0
g
r5.-'
m5-'
n
Q.
5-. 0
P..
!.3,. a
ke
.
a
5
g
5
;
a 8
id
g:
g
5
-6-
a
ca.
t
,I.
m
-11
mXI
1
Z'
0o
-8
1
a
g
a ,
.0
g.- a
f(,
q
3
3g
.2.
-n
-n
t1
fi
i
2i
s
a
-2,
*
.:
.-
13.
q_ '
0
11
a
.a
...
=
II.'
5
0 ,
e73
8
i
;
?1
3
0
=',
It
co
-0a
q
-11
-11
LT
r-
0a
a
c
Y.
-n
-II
R
6
..
Z
0
Cn
-8
XI
o
o
7CI
.3
c;
.8
8
5
7
..<
3
eo
0a
*
.7 >
r.
a
ra
a
fro
=
a,
31 eitq
Oge-ff tifirdg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
f A Govt of India UnOntalong)
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 1 of 36
VA
$i
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
i di ei ch ch 5. el i
rag- TITRW ftrAmbrA.
30.06.15
24.11.09
22.04.98
Rev
Date
No
Purpose
t4R
SC
MA
MN
RP
TGM
ND
PM
RK
BRS
AS
Prepared Checked
by
by
Standards
committee
Convener
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
ENGINEERS
gen EttalegNmiir-/ INDIA LIMITED
-
Abbreviations:
AC
Baseefa
CPU
CSA
DC
DCS
DMR
DVD
EMI
ESD
EXIDA
FAT
FMEDA
HART
HW
HWC
IEEE
I/O
LAN
LCD
LCIE
LED
MIS
MTBF
MTTR
OPC
PC
P&ID
PID
PLC
PTB
PLC
RFI
SlL
TCP / IP
TMR
TUV
UHF
UPS
UL
VDU
VHF
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 2 of 36
Alternating Current
British Approval Service for Electrical Equipment in Flammable
Atmospheres
Central Processing Unit
Canadian Standards Association
Direct Current
Distributed Control System
Dual Modular Redundant
Digital Versatile Disc
Electromagnetic Interference
Emergency Shutdown System
Excellence in Dependable Automation
Factory Acceptance Test
Failure Modes, Effects and Diagnostic Analysis
Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
Hardware
Hardwired Console
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
Input / Output
Local Area Network
Liquid Crystal Display
Laboratorie Central Industries Electriques
Light Emitting Diode
Management Information System
Mean Time Between Failure
Mean Time to Repair
OLE for Process Control
Personal Computer
Piping and Instrumentation Diagram
Proportional, Integral and Derivative
Programmable Logic Controller
Physikalisch Technische Bundersanstalt
Programmable Logic Controller
Radio Frequency Interference
Safety Integrity Level
Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
Triple Modular Redundant
Technische Uberwachungs Vereine
Ultra High Frequency
Uninterrupted Power Supply
Underwriter's Laboratories
Video Display Unit
Very High Frequency
Members :
Mr. S Bhowal
Mr. M Nandi
Mr. R K Gupta
Ms. Rima Kundu
Mr. S Mahesh Kumar
Ms. N P Guha (Proj.)
fititeg
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt 01 India Undertalong)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 3 of 36
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
DEFINITIONS
3.0
SPARES PHILOSOPHY
12
4.0
14
5.0
31
6.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
35
7.0
SHIPPING
.36
8.0
REJECTION
36
ENGINEERS
LIMITED
sige.il 251eg. INDIA
Govt of Inca Undenaking)
el
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 4 of 36
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
1.1.1
This specification, defines the minimum functional requirements for the design, hardware,
software and firmware specifications, nameplate marking, testing and shipping of
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) designed for reliable, effective and optimum control
and monitoring of a process plant (hydrocarbon and non-hydrocarbon) and captive power
plant.
1.1.2
The related standards referred to herein and mentioned below shall be of the latest editions,
unless otherwise specified: -
API
BS
British Standards
EN 10204
IS/IEC
Transmission Systems
IS/1EC60529
IEC 60584-2
IEC 60617
IEC 60751
IEC 61000-4-3
IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 61000-4-5
IEC 61000-6-2
IEC 61508
rM
a
ENGINEERS
31
IA Govt o In Underlalang)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 5 of 36
IEC 61131
IEC 61511
IEC 61643-21 Low voltage surge protective devices - Part 21: Surge
protective devices connected to telecommunications and
signaling networks - Performance requirements and
testing methods
Lightning protection system components (LPSC) - Part 3:
Requirements for isolating spark gaps (ISG)
IEC 62561-3
IEEE 802.3
IS
Indian Standards
3043
ISA
ANSI/ISA
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
18.1
71.01
71.04
ISO
9241-5
k31
oaentapieg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of We Undertsk.0)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
9241-302
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.2
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 6 of 36
In the event of any conflict between this specification, data sheets, statutory regulations,
related standards, codes etc., the following order of priority shall govern:
a)
Statutory regulations
b)
c)
Standard Specifications
d)
Purchaser's data sheets specify the minimum acceptable functional requirements for
the programmable logic controllers. It shall be vendor's responsibility to select proper
hardware, software and firmware to meet the specified functional requirements,
keeping the integrity of functional blocks specified in the configuration diagram
attached with the Requisition.
b)
Purchaser's data sheets specify the scan time / cycle time and loading requirements.
Vendor shall be responsible for sizing and selecting their standard product i.e.
hardware, software and firmware to meet the requirements specified in the purchaser's
data sheets.
c)
Bids
1.2.1
Vendor's quotation shall be strictly as per the bidding instructions to vendor attached with
the Requisition. Vendor's quotation shall enumerate and include the detailed specification of
each subsystem and each module of programmable logic controller, detailed system
configuration, hardware and software capabilities, programming aids, display facilities and
other relevant information.
1.2.2
Whenever a detailed technical offer is required, vendor's quotation shall include the
following:
a)
b)
Detailed specification sheet for each sub-system. The specification sheet shall provide
information regarding hardware specifications, software specifications, redundancy
requirements, capacity, power consumption etc. of the programmable logic controllers
and its accessories. The material specifications and unit of measurement for various
items in vendor's specification sheets shall be to the same standards as those indicated
in purchaser's data sheets.
c)
ENGINEERS
zlf tlfilegW INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt. India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 7 of 36
d)
Proven references for each offered model in line with clause 1.2.4 of this specification
whenever specifically indicated in the purchaser's specifications.
e)
A copy of approval for flameproof enclosure, intrinsic safety etc whenever specified,
from local statutory authority, as applicable, like Petroleum and Explosives Safety
Organisation (PESO) / Chief Controller of Explosives (CCE), Nagpur or Director
General of Mines Safety (DGMS) in India along with:
f)
g)
h)
i)
Test certificate from recognised house CIMFR (Central Institute of Mines & Fuel
Research) / ERTL (Electronics Research and Test Laboratory) etc. for specified
protection class as per relevant Indian Standard for all Indian manufactured
equipments or for equipments requiring DGMS approval.
ii)
Certificate of conformity from agencies like LCIE, Baseefa, PTB, CSA, UL etc.,
for compliance to ATEX or other recognised standards for all equipments
manufactured outside India.
Deviations on technical requirements shall not be entertained. In case vendor has any
valid technical reason to deviate from the specified requirement, they must include a
list of deviations item wise, summing up all the deviations from the purchaser's data
sheets and other technical specification along with the technical reasons for each of
these deviations.
Certificate for specified sm requirement (e.g. SIL-3) from Independent Testing
Agency (e.g. TUV/EXIDA).
Catalogues giving detailed technical specifications, model decoding details and other
related information for each item / sub-system covered in the bid.
1.2.3
The equipment being offered / supplied shall be of latest proven version available in the
current manufacturing range.
1.2.4
The system hardware, software and firmware as offered, shall be field proven and should
have been operating satisfactorily for a period of minimum 6 months continuously on the
bid due date in the validly similar size and application specified in the purchaser's data
sheet. Items with prototype design shall not be offered or supplied.
1.2.5
The detailed scope of work, specific job requirements, exclusions, deviations, additions etc.
shall be indicated in the job specifications which shall be part of Requisition
1.2.6
Whenever specified, vendor shall furnish tested values of failure rates, probability of failure
on demand and test intervals for safety integrity level analysis.
1.2.7
All documentation submitted by the vendor including their quotation, catalogues, drawings,
installation, operation and maintenance manuals shall be in English language only.
1.2.8
Two year's operational spares for each sub-system and their accessories which shall
include the following as a minimum:
i) All type of electronic modules e.g. I/O modules, processor modules,
communication modules, power supply modules etc.
ii) All type of auxiliary items e.g. barriers / isolators, hardwired instruments,
annunciator modules, receiver switches, trip amplifiers, temperature element
converters etc.
ogar feta&
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 8 of 36
Any special tools and test equipments needed for the maintenance of PLCs and other
items being offered by vendor. Vendor must confirm in their offer if no special tools
or test equipments are needed for maintenance other than those specifically indicated
in purchaser's data sheet.
1.3
1.3.1
Detailed drawings, data, catalogues and manuals required from the vendor are indicated by
the purchaser in vendor data requirement sheets. The required number of prints and soft
copies shall be dispatched to the address mentioned, adhering to the time limits indicated.
1.3.2
Specification sheet for each sub-system, auxiliary instrument and bought out item.
b)
ii)
iii) Control room layouts e.g. console room, rack room and engineering room layout
with all dimensions in millimeters.
iv) Channel base frame drawings for console room, rack room and engineering
room.
v)
ENGINEERS
Oaeir kliaeg WI INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Ind. Undertaking)
2.0
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 9 of 36
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Any other drawings and documents specifically indicated in vendor data requirement
enclosed with the Requisition.
DEFINITIONS
The various terms used in this specification are defined as follows:
2.1
2.2
Accessible
A system feature that is viewable by and interactive with the operator and allows the
operator to perform user permissible control action e.g. set point change, auto-manual
transfers or on-off actions.
2.3
Assignable
A system feature that permits an operator to direct a signal from one device to another
without the need for change in wiring, either by means of switches or via other data entry
devices like keyboard commands to the system.
2.4
Configurable
The capability to select and connect standard hardware modules to create a system or the
capability to change functionality or sizing of software functions by changing parameters
without having to modify or regenerate software.
2.5
1/0
Input / Output with respect to process / operator.
2.6
ENGINEERS
2.7
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 10 of 36
2.8
Local Level
All those sub-systems, which directly interface with field devices shall be referred to as
local level.
2.9
Central Level
Operator Console and Programming Terminal, which present data acquired from local level
devices, shall be referred as Central Level.
2.10
Database
Database shall be defined as the information stored temporarily or permanently in the
system which can be accessed by various programs to meet all its functional requirements.
2.11
Loop Integrity
A system shall be said to have loop integrity if the failure of one component in the system/
sub-system does not affect more than one loop.
2.12
System Loading
System loading for a sub-system is defined as the percentage of time a sub-system spends in
carrying out various activities referred to the use of memory, CPU time and communication
capacity in the worst case of high sub-system operation out of the designed / designated
cycle time of the sub-system.
2.13
Redundancy
A system component shall be termed as redundant if it takes over automatically the
operation in the event of the failure of the main component without causing any interruption
in the system and upsetting the process. The repaired or replaced device shall be brought
in-line only through operator action without upsetting system operation.
2.14
Switchover Time
Time required for a back up instrument / system to come on-line automatically in case of the
failure of the main instrument / system.
2.15
2.16
(A Govt of India
undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 11 of 36
Scan time of a logic loops is the end-to-end response time of a sub-system and shall be
defined as follows:
The scan time for a logic loop shall be defined as the total time taken by a sub-system e.g.
programmable logic controller to read input from the input terminal, process input, execute
logic, updating logic output and write output at the output terminal for all the logics
configured within the subsystem.
2.17
User's Memory
Free memory space available after utilisation of memory required for system operation,
configuration and implementation of application and other system related functions for
implementation of user defined specific programs such as plant calculations, process
optimization or MIS (like free formatting of certain logs). The programs shall either be
written in high level language or system specific language.
2.18
Event
An event shall be defined as any action taken by the operator via operator keyboard or
switches on hardwired console like change of set point, change of control mode, start/stop of
motor, open/close of shut down valves, alarm acknowledge, etc.
2.19
Arranging events in the sequence of their occurrence in time with a specified time resolution
by a program is defined as sequence of event.
2.20
Sequence of event recorder, when specified, shall identify, store and print alarms with the
specified time resolution between two events. SER shall also transfer data to operator sub
system over communication sub system.
2.21
Real time trend shall be defined as a continuously progressing graphical record showing
updated parameter with most recent value and a past record of minimum of 10 minutes
without pressing any additional key for moving backward in time.
2.22
High-level communication network which serves various users within a plant and transfer
information for the purpose of unit / plant monitoring. This network is different than control
network and is generally realised using open communication protocol network e.g. OPC etc.
2.23
Tag
A Tag is a collection of attributes that specify either a control loop or a process variable, or a
measured input, or a calculated value, or some combination of these, and all associated
control and output algorithms. Each tag is unique.
ks-afaziei m
s i ENGINEERS
(A
LIMITED
Govt el We undertakm)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 12 of 36
3.0
SPARES PHILOSOPHY
3.1
The system including sequence of event recorder, hardwired instruments etc. shall meet the
following spare philosophy. This philosophy shall also be applicable for items like barriers,
relays, terminals, lamps, push buttons etc.
3.1.1
Mandatory Spares
Vendor shall include following mandatory spares in their scope of supply:
3.1.1.1
For a system with conventional and / or smart analog input / output, discrete (contact)
input / output, 20% spare input / output of each type shall be considered for
calculating I/O modules and all other related accessories.
b)
For all serial input / outputs to the system, 20% spare serial I/O ports of each type of
serial input / output shall be provided.
c)
20% spare accessories like relays, switches, lamps, fuses, circuit breakers, barriers,
isolators, terminals etc.
d)
The engineering spares shall be wired up to the field cable interface and shall be in
ready-to-operate condition when field cable is connected to spare assigned terminals.
e)
Spare pairs of the incoming cables shall be terminated on spare terminals in the
marshalling / barrier cabinets as applicable.
f)
The system shall be fully engineered considering 20% installed engineering spares
including processor loading.
The cabinets of the of the programmable logic controller system shall have 10%
usable spare space for installing additional I/O cards of each type in future and the
PLC processor shall have additional 10% capacity to handle these I/0's. In addition,
provision shall be kept for internal wiring of the same up to the I/O terminals.
b)
c)
Each operator console shall contain 20% usable spare group and related display
capability in addition to as specified in para 3.1.1.1 of this specification.
d)
The system shall have capability to extend its historical trending, logging and user's
memory by 20% to meet future expansion with/without adding additional memory
modules.
e)
ENGINEERS
INDIA UMITED
Ifgar 16101eu
101
f)
IA Govt of Me Undeftaloog)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 13 of 36
Usable spare space in cabinets to install 10% spare hardwired items like relays,
switches, lamps, fuses, circuit breakers, barriers, isolators, terminals etc. in future.
The system shall be provided with a minimum of 40% spare memory capacity, as
required for application program and data base to meet specified functional
requirements.
b)
It shall be possible to extend the memory by at least 20% over and above the actual
requirement at a later date.
Sufficient additional software capacity shall be available in the system to take care of
spares requirement as specified in para 3.1.1.1 and 3.1.1.2 of this specification to meet
all functional requirements as per para 4.0 of this specification.
b)
Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the offered system shall have software
licenses to cover all the tag numbers indicated in the Requisition, including installed
engineering spares and spare space indicated in clause 3.1.1.1 and 3.1.1.2 of this
specification.
Mandatory spares shall be ware-house spares and shall be supplied as loose items.
b)
Mandatory spare module of 5% or one module of each type, whichever is higher, must
be supplied for each type of modules being used excluding modules used in consoles,
servers, Personal Computers.
c)
For items like, Video Display Units, keyboards, disc drives, network components,
hardwired instruments like barriers, lamps, fuses and circuit breakers, complete item
limited to 5% or minimum one of each type shall be supplied as predefined mandatory
spare. But this shall not include hardware like hard discs, terminals.
51fgar 05i-eg
(Nrerf rieme dflanddid
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A GoN of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 14 of 36
4.0
4.1
Design Requirements
4.1.1
Programmable logic controller shall be microprocessor based system which shall be used to
execute all the process and safety shut-down logic of the plant. When specified, it shall also
execute plant interlock logics and sequence operation and analog control. Programmable
logic controller shall be an independent unit and shall not depend on any of its functionality
on any other system including Distributed Control System.
In case of common engineering database for DCS and PLC, engineering data for DCS and
PLC shall be segregated and the data access shall be through respective engineering stations
of DCS and PLC only. Such configuration shall meet the SIL3 compliance by third party
certifying agency like TUV/ EXIDA etc
Moreover, wherever exchange of safety parameters between the different PLC sub-systems
is required for interlock execution, separate communication network shall be provided
between these PLC sub-systems. For SIL certified PLCs, this communication network
between PLC nodes shall also be SIL certified.
4.1.2
The system shall be of modular construction and expandable in future by adding additional
modules which shall be easily accessible for maintenance and repair. The type of modules
shall be kept to the minimum possible in order to have interchangeability and low inventory.
4.1.3
System Availability
a)
The system shall be designed 'fault tolerant' as a minimum by selecting high grade
components of proven quality and proper design of system electronics.
Redundancy shall be provided, as a minimum, as per this specification to improve
system availability and reliability. Due considerations shall be given to the
environmental conditions particularly for field mounted sub-system, if specified in job
specifications, during system design.
b)
The system shall have a high MTBF value and shall have well proven record of
operating in hydrocarbon plants.
c)
The system shall be designed with 99.995% or greater availability. The availability
shall be defined as follows:
Availability = Mean time Between Failure (MTBF)
MTBF + Mean time to repair (MTTR)
For the purpose of calculations, consider mean time to repairs as four (4) hours unless
the manufacturer recommends higher value for MTTR. It is therefore necessary that:
i) Vendor covers all necessary spare parts in 2 years recommended operational
spares which shall be necessary to meet specified MTTR time.
4.1.4
4.1.4.1
ei 0QA,
41. ENGINEERS
RairduW INDIA LIMITED
lailerr ?Vesta allageni)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 15 of 36
b)
In addition to above, all such sub-systems shall also be able to operate satisfactorily in
case of air conditioning failure with ambient temperature of 50C and 90% nonThe
condensing humidity until the system safe operating limits are exceeded.
minimum period of continuous operation in such condition shall be 48 hours at least
once in a month without any damage or degradation of system performance. Vendor,
therefore, shall provide continuous temperature monitoring for each cabinet housing
items / equipments generating heat, such as system cabinets, barrier cabinets, relay
cabinets, consoles etc and also provide alarm for operator alert in case the safe
operating temperature limits are exceeded. For marshalling cabinets and Power
distribution cabinets, temperature monitoring through temperature switches is
acceptable.
c)
Chemical filters have been provided in the incoming air conditioning air to limit the
concentration of contaminants below following limits:
Contaminants
(Corrosive Gases)
Concentration
SOx
NOx
H2 S
C12
All sub-systems and system components shall be suitable for operating continuously
in the above mentioned corrosive environments.
4.1.4.2 Outdoor Installations
4.1.5
a)
b)
4.1.5.1 The system shall be internally protected against system errors and hardware damage
resulting from:
a)
b)
c)
4.1.5.2 All sub-systems and system components shall be capable of accepting various signal inputs
for its direct use while preventing noise errors due to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or
radio frequency interference (RFI) including nearby radio stations, hand held two way
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
,531Re_it.-1
ENGINEERS
/INDIA LIMITED
Ogar idiReg 'Voir
14iTZA ei7aw7maaarA)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 16 of 36
On-line Replacement
4.1.6.1 On-line replacement of any module of programmable logic controller shall be possible in
such a way that removal and addition of the module shall be possible and safe without
de-energising the system. Furthermore, there shall not be any interruption of the system and
process upset while replacing a faulty module in case of TMR, QUAD and dual redundant
PLCs.
4.1.6.2 Apart from system modules, power supply units shall be replaceable on-line without
disrupting the process and without affecting the system redundancies. It shall be possible to
hot swap any faulty system module without degrading the system safety or operation or
freezing the output status. The switchover to the healthy module shall be bumpless. The
swapped module shall take over the function of the failed module without any manual
programming.
4.1.7
Electrical Isolation
Galvanic or optical isolation shall be provided for all field signals. The isolation levels shall
be as follows:
Analog I/O channel to system ground
1500V AC
500V AC
4.1.8.1
Unless specifically indicated, the field devices are beyond the scope of this specification.
However vendor shall be fully responsible for integrating these devices with their system
including compiling and maintaining the engineering data base of these devices and
incorporating the data base into the Integrated Asset Management System (whenever
specified in the requisition).
Unless otherwise specified, all instruments in hazardous area shall be intrinsically safe
type. Other concepts shall be used when specified.
b)
For conventional instrumentation, entity concept shall be used for selecting proper
barriers / isolators.
faeieim ENGINEERS
r INDIA LIMITED
ages iiwiv
IA Govt o India Undertaking)
ele.re 0. 3.RM)
4.1.9
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 17 of 36
Repeat Signals
4.1.9.1 Unless otherwise specified in the job specifications, following philosophy shall be followed
for repeat signals:
a)
Whenever repeat signal/ contact outputs are required as per job specifications
following philosophy shall be followed:
i)
For intrinsically safe input, isolating barrier with dual output shall be utilized.
ii)
For Non-intrinsically safe input, isolator with dual output shall be utilized.
ii) For other contact inputs, repeat contact shall be provided using electro- magnetic
relays.
4.1.10
Surge Protection
4.1.10.1 Surge protection devices (SPD's) shall be provided on the system to limit the surge voltages
reaching beyond the safe limits, under normal, abnormal or lightning strike condition.
Unless otherwise specified, SPD's shall be provided at least at the following locations:
a)
All serial signal cables (UTP / STP / coaxial and not fibre optical) going from or to
control system and from one location to another outside the control building at both
control system end.
b)
All power incoming cable (110V AC, 110V DC, 240V AC, etc), UPS or non UPS, at
the power supply distribution cabinet.
4.1.10.2 The selection of type and rating of SPD shall be selected such that the introduction of this
device shall not change the characteristics or reliability of an application, whether it is for
the protection of power system, signal such as analog or communication signal, as
applicable. The SPDs shall comply with the requirements of IEC-61643-21.
4.1.11
The system shall be designed fault tolerant and shall utilize high quality components of
proven quality. Any single system fault shall not degrade the system safety or functionality
or affect operation. The system shall have certified Safety Integrity Level as per IEC-61508
/ 61511 as applicable and specified in job specification. Unless otherwise specified, it shall
meet the availability requirement specified in Clause 4.1.3 of this specification.
4.1.12
Unless otherwise specified in the requisition, the scan time of programmable controller shall
be of the order of 250 milliseconds for SIL certified PLCs. The scan time for standard NonSIL PLCs shall be of the order of 100 milliseconds. Scan time for a PLC shall be as defined
under para 2.16 of this specification. The PLC processor sizing shall be done considering
the PLC scan time for the units as mentioned in the requisition. Other activities like
diagnostics routines, output / dump of data to peripherals, development of sequence blocks
or any other activity which consume processor time shall also be accounted while
computing scan time. For SIL certified PLCs, this shall also be in line with SIL certification.
4.1.13
Operation of the PLC shall be completely unaffected by a momentary power loss of the
order of 20 milliseconds.
4.1.14
The system shall be programmed in principle as per the logic diagrams.. Owner / Consultant
reserve the right to revise or review the logic diagrams even after acceptance of any offer.
The programming language of offered PLC shall be as per IEC 61131.
4.1.15
Whenever the requirement of SIL is specified for the PLC, it shall meet the requirements of
SIL level specified and shall be certified by an independent body (e.g. TUV/EXIDA) for
complying requirements of 1EC-61508 / 61511 as specified. For shutdown application
requiring SIL certification, PLC shall always meet SIL 3 requirements.
0 el
Elt5taG
g41
Cr eknIsRaA3017.11
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
IA GON of India Undenak.9)
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
CONTROLLERS
Page 18 of 36
4.1.16 The system shall have extensive set of self diagnostics hardware and software for easy and
fast maintenance of PLC. Routine checks should run automatically at frequent intervals for
identifying any fault in software or hardware. Diagnostics shall be required at local as well
as console level.
4.1.17 Safety barriers shall be provided by the vendor for intrinsically safe input/output circuits
wherever specified. In such cases, the system shall be designed intrinsically safe based on
entity concept. The barriers shall be certified by a statutory authority like Baseefa, LC1E,
CSA, UL, PTB, CIMFR etc., for the use in the area classification as specified elsewhere in
the job specifications. The proper selection of the safety barriers shall be the vendor's total
responsibility. In case of smart transmitter, the entity parameters of the hand held terminals
shall also be considered while selecting proper barriers.
4.1.18
Unless otherwise specified all intrinsically safe barriers shall be 3 port isolating type only
providing isolation between;
i)
ii)
4.1.20
All Emergency (ESD) switches shall he hardwired and shall preferably be pull type with red
coloured knob. Control room mounted ESD switches shall be installed on hardwired
console.
4.1.20.1 The ESD switch contact shall be used in ESD system (PLC etc) for logic implementation
and event history.
4.1.20.2 Additionally, wherever specified in the requisition, ESD switches shall also directly trip the
final ESD element without any intermediate device. Where multiplication of ESD switch
contacts is necessary, fail safe relays shall be utilized.
4.2
System Configuration
4.2.1
General
a)
b)
Regardless of the action feature selected (except for single architecture), the failure of
single component shall not result in a failure of correctly executed safety function.
The degradation mode for the selected configuration e.g. 4-2-0 or 3-2-0 or 3-2-1-0,
etc. shall be documented in SIL certification report.
*igenkreg
c)
4.2.2
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
INDIA LIMITED FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
IA Govt of India Unden.k..9)
CONTROLLERS
ENGINEERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 19 of 36
In general, the PLC system shall comprise of various sub-systems as described in the
subsequent clauses of 4.2.
Input/Output subsystem
4.2.2.1 Each I/O module shall have its own processor. I/0 modules configured in redundant
configuration, shall have their processors properly synchronised.
4.2.2.2 Unless otherwise specified, system shall accept analog 4 20mA inputs and contact inputs.
The maximum number of Input/Output per I/O module shall be limited as per the following
table.
Maximum
Si.
Type of Configuration
No. of I/Os
No.
16
32
16
In case of PLC certified for SIL requirements, the maximum number of I/o's shall be
governed by the SIL certification applicable for specified SIL level.
4.2.2.3 Each I/0 shall be galvanically isolated from external control circuit by suitable means. The
minimum isolation level between I/0 and logic circuit shall be 1000 volts AC. External
isolators/ barriers / relays shall be provided for all inputs and outputs of the PLC.
4.2.2.4 Each I/O shall be protected against the reversal of polarity of the power voltage to I/O.
4.2.2.5 Each input shall be provided with filters to filter out any noise in the input line and contact
bouncing noise, as applicable.
4.2.2.6 All the inputs / outputs shall be double ended upto the I/O card i.e. two wires per input /
output and not with common return for all inputs/ outputs.
4.2.2.7 The interrogation voltage to the inputs and power supply for 2-wire instruments shall be
powered from separate redundant power supply / supplies and shall not be a part of PLC,
unless otherwise specified. This power supply shall be supplied at one point and shall be
distributed by the vendor.
4.2.2.8 a)
b)
Each I/O module channel status shall be represented on the operator console.
When specified, input module shall be capable of monitoring the input contacts for
any wire open fault and short circuit.
Input module shall be able to accept 4-20 mA DC input from smart transmitters (e.g.
4 20mA HART).
b)
The module shall have 16 bit A/D resolution accuracy of 0.25% of full scale over the
entire range, unless otherwise specified.
ENGINEERS
Ogeff teMeg W INDIA LIMITED
2i2,15reGA.39111,3)
India Undettaking)
(A Govt.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 20 of 36
APPLICABLE FOR
VOLTAGE
RATING
CURRENT
RATING
1.
110 V AC/ DC
0.5 A
24 V DC
2A
240 V AC
5.0 A
220 V DC /
110 V DC
0.2 A
'
Category - II
motors/pumps/compressor
All
unless otherwise
cards
output
specified.
Category - I
Category - II
c)
The category of contacts shall be specified in the Requisition. Each output shall be
short circuit proof and protected by fuse. Visual indication of fuse blown must be
provided for each module.
d)
When specified contact output module shall have monitored output features like wire
open and short circuit.
4.2.2.11 Where inputs or outputs have multiple field devices for the same measurement or device,
the corresponding inputs / outputs shall be configured in separate I/O modules.
4.2.2.12 Where single input signal is available for QUAD or TMR configuration, inputs shall be
multiplied to feed inputs to each input modules / channels.
4.2.2.13 PLC shall be provided with Auto I/O testing facility as a standard diagnostics features. PLCs
which do not have auto I/O testing facility, manual testing facility shall be provided to detect
any system fault. For manual testing, manual switches shall be provided to bypass each input
at a time and its effect on the output shall be monitored.
4.2.3
Processor System
4.2.3.1 The processor shall have capability to implement all the control functions required to
implement the logic scheme as logic/ladder diagram.
4.2.3.2 The size of the memory shall be sufficient for storage of the program instructions required
by the logic schemes and other functional requirements. Offer shall indicate the amount of
memory capacity occupied by the actual program and spare capacity available for future
program modifications or additions.
4.2.3.3 Memory shall be non-volatile. However in case volatile memory is provided, battery backup
shall be provided with a minimum of 3 months lifetime to keep the program storage intact.
A battery drain indication shall be provided at least one week before the battery gets drained.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
51ge_al EViegw INDIA LIMITED
el
,..,-e,mm.agt.0
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 21 of 36
4.2.3.4 Watchdog timer shall be a software device. The healthiness of processors shall be
continuously monitored by watchdog timer. Any hardware or software problem in the
processor system, which shall include, CPU, memory, power supply, communication
interface etc. shall cause the watch dog timer to report processor failure.
4.2.3.5 Wherever dual redundant processor is specified, redundancy shall be provided in such a way
that in case of failure of the main processor, the standby shall take over automatically. The
changeover shall be bumpless. Redundancy shall be provided for complete processor system
including processor, power supply and communication sub system.
4.2.3.6 In case of triple modular redundant system all the three processors shall execute the same
instructions/program and check their results and vote to correct any faulty result. The faulty
processor diagnostic shall be made available.
4.2.3.7 In case of Quad system, individual processor shall execute the same instructions/ programs
and check their results within same CPU module and majority vote to correct any faulty
result. The faulty processor diagnostic shall be made available.
4.2.3.8 Failure of a single processor in dual redundant, triple redundant system and two processors
in QUAD system shall not affect the system. In case of failure of complete processor system
i.e. both processors in case of dual configuration, two or more in case of triple redundant
system and more than two in case of QUAD system, outputs shall take failsafe state
automatically unless otherwise specified in the data sheets.
4.2.3.9 In case multiprocessor configuration is offered, the processors must be able to communicate
with each other over the interconnecting data link. Vendor must ensure that system
performance shall not be degraded by any means when such a system is offered.
4.2.3.10 It shall be possible to generate the first out alarm by the PLC in case where a group of
parameters are likely to trip a system.
4.2.4
4.2.4.1 The PLC console shall be used for programming, program storing, fault diagnostics and
alarm monitoring. Whenever specified, it shall also be possible to use this console for plant
operation. The functionality to operate as engineering / programming terminal or operator
terminal or both shall be as specified in the job specification.
4.2.4.2 It shall consist of at least one coloured 21" active matrix TFT type LCD display unit with
backlit LED and one programming / operating keyboard, mouse and printer. If laptop is
specified in the job specifications, the same shall be of 15" TFT type LCD display.
4.2.4.3 PLC console when used for plant operation shall also meet the functional requirements as
per clause 4.2.5 of this specification.
4.2.4.4 The keyboard shall be easy to operate with each key clearly identified.
4.2.4.5 All illegal entries shall be rejected by the terminal and shall be identified by warning signal
on VDU.
4.2.4.6 Manual forcing of any input or output contact connected to PLC shall be possible from
keyboard. Forced functions shall have an associated audit trail.
4.2.4.7 It shall be possible to modify, add or delete the application program on line without
affecting the outputs.
0 el
Ogai fafReg
(
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of lode Uric/Making)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 22 of 36
4.2.4.8 PLC Console shall display logic and/or ladder diagram indicating power flow and shall
show description and status of each contact. It shall also be possible to display process
alarms and diagnostic messages as and when they appear. Further it shall also be able to
display I/O map in a user defined format.
4.2.4.9 It shall be possible to print out the ladder/logic diagram on the dedicated PLC printer. The
printer in addition shall also print out:
a) The diagnostic messages as and when generated and diagnostic reports, when called
for.
b)
Process alarms connected to the programmable logic controller as and when they
appear and alarm report whenever initiated. The choice of printing alarms on this
printer shall be operator selectable from a key lock / password protected switch on
PLC console.
c)
The I/O maps showing status of all inputs and corresponding outputs in a user defined
format.
4.2.4.10 The PLC console shall be provided with self diagnostics feature which shall display error
messages and initiate an audible alarm if the fault is detected. Wherever specified, a
potential free contact for diagnostic group alarm shall be provided which shall be connected
to the hardwired alarm annunciator system.
4.2.4.11 The system shall be able to identify the failure at least up to the module level including I/O
system and redundant processor and report print out.
4.2.5
4.2.5.1 Where dedicated PLC operator console is specified, it shall be used for operation of plant,
fault diagnostics, alarm monitoring and report generation.
4.2.5.2 It shall consist of coloured 21" active matrix TFT type LCD display unit with backlit LED,
operator keyboard and printer unless specified otherwise.
4.2.5.3 At least two number cursor control devices shall be provided in addition to keyboard which
may include touch screen, mouse, track ball etc.
4.2.5.4 PLC operator console shall have complete graphic capability and shall be able to display
process dynamic graphics, overview and group view displays. It shall be possible to operate
the plant i.e. start and stop of rotating machinery, opening and closing of valves, PID
function etc. from dynamic graphics and group displays available on PLC operator console.
4.2.5.5 It shall be possible to monitor, historise and print out all process alarms, diagnostic alarms
and alarm reports.
4.2.5.6 The time stamping of all alarms shall be as per PLC processor time stamping or I/O module
stamping.
4.2.5.7 The system shall be able to store and display stored data wherever required. The minimum
storage capacity shall be for 30 days at 1 minute sample rate for all the inputs specified,
diagnostic alarms, process and first out alarms, manipulation data etc.
4.2.5.8 The system shall be able to generate shiftly, hourly, daily, weekly and monthly reports. The
log format shall be furnished during detailed engineering.
err
RA&
I.nen eleaxemr3rram)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Incite Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 23 of 36
4.2.5.9 The system shall be supplied with first out alarm generation capability. The resolution of
alarm shall be as per processor cycle time, as a minimum.
4.2.6
Communication Subsystem
4.2.6.1 The PLC communication subsystem shall be a digital communication bus that provides a
high speed data transfer rapidly and reliably between the processor, I/O sub-system, PLC
console and other devices connected in the PLC system.
4.2.6.2 Redundancy in PLC communication subsystem shall be provided as follows unless
otherwise specified:
a)
For single architecture, the communication subsystem between PLC processor and I/O
subsystem shall be single unless otherwise specified. This shall include single
communication bus and single interfaces/buffers.
b)
For dual I/O configuration, each I/O sub set shall have separate communication
interface and bus for connecting to PLC processors.
c)
For the triple redundant system, each processor shall have a separate set of PLC
communication subsystem.
d)
For the Quad systems each I/O subset shall have redundant communication interface
and bus for connecting to the redundant CPU modules.
e)
The communication subsystem between processor subsystem and PLC console shall
be dual redundant, consisting of two separate communication interfaces and two
buses, each one configured in redundant mode, unless this is only used as
programming aid.
4.2.6.3 In case of redundant PLC communication sub system, on the failure of the active device, the
redundant device shall take over automatically without interrupting the system operation.
Information about the failed device shall be displayed at local as well as on PLC console. It
shall be possible to manually switch over the communication from main bus / device to
redundant bus / device without interrupting any system function.
4.2.6.4 The mechanism used by the system for error checks and control shall be transparent to the
application information / program. Error checking shall be done on all data transfers by
suitable codes.
4.2.6.5 In general, PLC shall provide data in a well established protocol format preferably
MODBUS protocol.
Wherever remote I/O is specified in the requisition, it shall be redundant and SIL3 certified
(for SIL3 PLCs).Segregation for the remote I/O shall follow the same philosophy of group
wise PLC segregation specified in the requisition. Moreover, separate PLC in remote I/O
location with peer to peer communication with Host PLC through third party (TUV/ EXIDA
etc.) certified SIL3 redundant network is also acceptable for remote I/O requirement.
However, separate PLC shall be considered for each of the Remote I/O subsystem within
each location.
4.2.7
4.2.7.1
Unless specified otherwise, the programmable logic controller shall operate on uninterrupted
power supply (UPS). However the system shall be capable of operating satisfactorily at the
following power supply specifications:
ii
aeu
INTE'Ff tmecnTedg074,1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
Voltage
Frequency
Harmonic contents
Power interruption
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 24 of 36
4.2.7.2 The power supply system shall be supplied with dual PLC feeders each capable of handling
100% of the total power supply load requirements. In case of failure of one feeder,
redundant feeder shall supply the total load.
4.2.7.3 Each I/O rack shall be provided with redundant power supply system. The power supply for
the I/O racks shall be sized to take full load of the I/0 racks.
4.2.7.4 The processor rack shall be provided with separate power supply for each processor or
redundant power supply module for the processor rack such that failure of one power supply
does not affect the system operation.
4.2.8
Self Diagnostics
4.2.8.1 The system shall have an extensive set of self diagnostic routines which shall be able to
identify all permanent and transient system faults / failures at least up to module level
including redundant components and power supplies through detailed VDU displays and
report print out.
4.2.8.2
At the local level, failure of a module in any subsystem shall be identified by an individual
LED.
4.2.8.3 Diagnostic software shall have the capability to provide information about the failed
module/system either in the form of a system configuration display or provide information
in the form of a "statement".
4.2.8.4 Self diagnostic software shall have capability to detect faults which make the system
permanently close/open in the I/0 modules or I/0 signal conditioning modules (in case of
triple redundant system). This shall be achieved by automatically running the self diagnostic
software at cyclic intervals. However, system performance shall not be degraded during the
running of this diagnostic software.
4.2.8.5 System for the following functionalities shall be supplied when specified:
a)
b)
c)
4.2.8.6 System diagnostics shall be capable of identifying, locating and reporting the following
faults, as a minimum:
a)
Processor fault
b)
Communication fault
c)
d)
e)
W.
afaeleifr,
( ENGINEERS
INDIA 1JMITED
INDIA
idlileg
01Rn ertUn 4,1.390,71)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
g)
Memory fault
h)
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 25 of 36
Any other additional diagnostic alarm if available as a standard shall also be provided by
vendor.
4.2.8.7 Testing software shall be capable of detecting faults in case of normally closed system as
well as in normally open system.
4.2.8.8 Feedback must be provided in case of triple redundant system and QUAD system from the
output voter system to detect any latest faults of the system in addition to other diagnostic
software.
4.2.9
System Software
4.2.9.1 The system software shall include all programs for the PLC and PLC console which are
required to perform all the PLC functions including communication and self-diagnostics.
Whenever PLC is specified for shutdown application with Sit classification, the system
shall be designed and engineered in full compliance with the requirement of IEC-61511.
Whenever different functional logics are combined within a common PLC, the safety related
I/O's of each functionality shall be kept segregated within the system.
4.2.9.2 Logic program shall also be recorded on the external electronic media like DVD which shall
be delivered in duplicate together with the system.
4.2.9.3 The PLC programming language for implementation of logic operations shall be based on
the following representations:
a)
Logic diagrams -
b)
Ladder diagram -
c)
4.2.9.4 Diagnostic package and its related equipment and software shall be supplied. A list of
additional diagnostic packages available and the packages provided, including the
description and capabilities, shall be provided with separate quote, wherever asked.
4.2.9.5 It shall be possible to print out the ladder/logic diagram on a dedicated printer. The printer
shall also print out all diagnostic reports. The software package shall enable the owner to
modify/add/delete any part of program both on-line as well off-line and for documentation.
4.2.9.6 Software for the generation of various displays including dynamic graphics wherever
specified to be provided as per given below:
4.2.9.6.1 It shall be possible to display dynamic graphic of plant on the operator console VDU
screens. Graphic displays shall be field configurable only through PLC Console
(Programming terminal) with standard / user defined graphic symbols. Dynamic graphic
displays of different sections of the plant shall be displayed on different pages.
4.2.9.6.2 The system shall have graphic symbol library as per ISA-5.1 and 5.3. In addition standard
industrial symbols like distillation columns, heat exchangers, pumps, compressors, tanks etc.
shall also be provided as a standard.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
101 el
5lg-ar flf51--eg
caireR rreant ,751.3.741.1)
fru) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gout of India Undeftakmg)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 26 of 36
4.2.9.6.3 Graphic displays shall be interactive type through which it shall be possible to control the
process. It shall also be possible to send motor start/stop and shutdown valve open/close
commands, as specified in job specifications, from this display
4.2.9.6.4 It shall be possible to view the process variable and alarm points and view and change set
point value, manipulated variable, controller mode etc. from the graphic display. Also
rotating machinery (i.e. compressor / pump) status and valve status shall be displayed on the
graphic display with different colours.
4.2.9.6.5 Various colours used in the generation of graphics like colour of the process lines, utility
lines, Instrument signal lines and event modifier conditions shall be finalised during detailed
engineering. The colours used to identify event modified conditions shall generally be as
follows unless otherwise indicated during detailed engineering.
Red
Blue
Green
Flashing green :
4.2.9.6.6 It shall be possible to go from any graphic page to related graphic pages or any group view
or alarm summary in single key stroke using soft key function.
4.2.9.7 The software for printing alarms, system as well as process, and events on the PLC printer
must be provided. All alarms must be printed as and when they appear.
4.2.9.8 Software package for displaying I/O map showing status of inputs and corresponding output
providing tag numbers as per logic diagram shall be offered. The I/O map format shall be
user definable.
4.2.10
4.2.10.1 All type of power supplies shall be made available at one point. Further distribution of
power supply shall be in vendor's scope.
4.2.10.2 In general, all output contacts and solenoids shall be powered with 110V10% DC/
24V10% DC power supply. However, the actual interrogation voltages shall be as per job
specifications and logic diagrams.
4.2.10.3 The distribution network for interrogation voltage shall be designed such that a single fault
in any branch shall not cause trip of the logic other than where the fault has occurred.
4.2.10.4 Sequential starting of various load centres shall be provided whenever specified.
4.2.10.5 Power distribution network must use bus bars of adequate capacity with DPDT (Double
Pole Double Throw) switches and HRC (High Rupture Capacity) fuses in each branch
network. Vendor may select circuit breaker if short circuit characteristics do not match the
HRC fuse.
4.2.10.6 All cubicles lighting shall be on 240 V, 50 Hz AC normal power supply.
4.2.11
4.2.11.1 All PLC system cabinets shall be completely wired with all modules in place. Inside cabinet
wiring shall preferably be done using ribbon type pre-fabricated cables.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
OfiljeG
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 27 of 36
4.2.11.2 All the cabinets shall be free standing, enclosed type and shall be designed for bottom entry
of cables. Cabinet structure shall be sound and rigid. Cabinet shall be provided with remova
IS/IEC ble lifting lugs to permit lifting of the cabinets.
4.2.11.3 Cabinets shall be fabricated from cold rolled steel sheet of minimum 1.5 mm thickness for
sides and rear and 2 mm thickness for doors and suitably reinforced to prevent warping and
buckling. The rack/ rail mounting plates inside the cabinets shall be of 3 mm thickness.
Cabinets shall be thoroughly deburred and all sharp edges shall be grounded smooth after
fabrication. Cabinet frame shall be of 9 fold profiled CRCA or of Angle iron frame using
minimum section of 50 x 50 x 4 mm angle.
4.2.11.4 Cabinet painting procedure shall include blast cleaning, grinding, chemical cleaning, surface
finishing by suitable filler and two coats of high grade lacquer with wet blasting wherever
required. Two coats of paint in the panel colour shall be provided for non-glossy high satin
finish. Final coat shall be given after assembly at site. Colour of the panels shall be as per
Requisition.
4.2.11.5 Each cabinet shall be maximum 2100 mm high (excluding 100 mm channel base), 800 mm
wide and 800 mm deep, in general. Construction shall be modular preferably to
accommodate 19" standard racks. All cabinets shall be of same height.
4.2.11.6 Cabinets shall be equipped with front and rear access doors. Doors shall be equipped with
lockable handles and concealed hinges with pull pins for easy door removal.
4.2.11.7 In order to effectively remove dissipated heat from the cabinets, ventilation fans along with
vent louvers backed by wire fly screen shall be provided as required. Ventilation fans shall
be provided in all cabinets where the temperature rise with all doors closed and all internal
and external loads energised shall exceed 10 C above the ambient temperature. A
temperature element (resistance temperature detector or semiconductor type sensor) shall be
provided in each System cabinets and temperature switch as a minimum in each
marshalling/ PDB cabinet for temperature measurement. Ventilation fans shall be provided
in dual configuration, as a minimum.
Each fan shall have a separate dedicated assembly and shall be replaceable on-line without
shutting down any equipment/ cabinet/ console in part or in complete.
Ventilation fan assembly shall operate at 240V AC power supply. Each fan shall have its
own dedicated circuit breaker.
Each ventilation fan shall be fitted with a protection type finger guard. Whenever, the
numbers of cabinets are compacted (supplied in mechanical joined conditions), each cabinet
shall be provided with separate ventilation fan assembly.
The maximum noise level with all fans operating and cubicle doors open shall not exceed
85dBA.
Following signals and alarms shall be provided separately as follows:
i)
ii)
iii) A common high temperature and fan failure alarm in the PLC for each
marshalling / PDB cabinets for a group of maximum 10 cabinets as per the
requisition.
ENGINEERS
ED INDIA
LIMITED
Oae.ii faOleg
k-71
(A Govt of In Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 28 of 36
4.2.11.8 Internal illumination shall be provided for cabinets to ensure proper illumination level of 250
lux for performing maintenance activities.
Lamps shall be provided in each cabinet which shall be activated individually by door
operated switches. The lamps shall activate when door is opened and deactivate when the
door is closed. The door lock switches selected shall have undergone life cycle cyclic test of
at least 1000000 operations and test certificate for the same shall be provided from the
manufacturer. A manual over-ride switch shall be provided inside the cabinet which shall
keep the lamp (deactivated even when the door is open. Cabinets housing memories, which
are likely to be affected by fluorescent light, shall have incandescent lamps.
The cabinet lighting shall operate on 240V AC Non-UPS power supply.
4.2.11.9 Equipment within the cabinet shall be laid out in an accessible and logically segregated
manner. Cable glands shall be provided and supplied by vendor for incoming and outgoing
cables to prevent excessive stress on the individual terminals. All metal parts of the cabinet
shall be electrically continuous and shall be provided with a common grounding lug.
4.2.12
4.2.12.1 Control panels, if required, shall be non-graphic self supporting, free standing cubicle with
back doors made up of sectional steel panels. Each section shall be maximum 2100 mm
high, 1200 mm wide and 1000 mm deep and shall be mounted on 100 mm high channel
base. Care shall be taken to ensure that the face of the panel is truly flat and smooth.
4.2.12.2 Panels / hardwired console shall be fabricated from 3.0 mm thick cold rolled steel sheet.
Angle iron frame shall use a minimum section of 50x50x4mm angle.
4.2.12.3 Front of panel/console instrument nameplates shall be black laminated plastic with white
core. Nameplate shall be provided on the rear of the panel also for each instrument.
4.2.12.4 Document pocket / wallet shall be provided on the inner side of front and rear doors of each
cabinet and on the inner side of the door of each panel. Similar arrangement shall also be
made on the inner side of doors of console.
4.2.13
Wiring Requirements
4.2.13.1 All wiring shall conform to API RP 552- Transmission Systems. Different signal level
cables shall be routed with separation distances as recommended by this code.
4.2.13.2 All wiring inside racks, cabinets, and back of the panels shall be housed in covered, nonflammable plastic raceways arranged to permit easy assembly to various instruments for
maintenance, adjustments, repair and removal.
4.2.13.3 All wiring in the raceways shall be properly clamped. All incoming cable and outgoing
cables shall be terminated by vendor at marshalling rack. Total wiring cross-sectional area
shall not exceed 50% of the raceway cross sectional area.
4.2.13.4 Separate wiring raceways shall be used for power supply wiring, DC and low level signal
wiring, and intrinsically safe wiring. Parallel runs of AC and DC wiring closer than 300mm
shall be avoided.
4.2.13.5 Vendor can alternately offer prefabricated cables for interconnection between different
cabinets and panels.
4c
el
Ogar faf51-ag
ENGINEERS
INDIA UMITED
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 29 of 36
4.2.13.6 Wire termination shall be done using self insulating crimping lugs. More than two wires
shall not be terminated on one side of single terminal. The use of shorting links for looping
shall be avoided.
4.2.13.7 Terminal housing shall be strictly sized with considerations for accessibility and
maintenance. Minimum distance required between various components is listed below.
These distances are clear distances and are excluding the width of the raceways or any other
component / item mentioned herein. Following clearances should be considered:
a)
Distance between terminal strip and side of the cabinet parallel to the strip, up to 50
terminals, shall be minimum 50 mm.
b)
Distance between terminal strip and, top and bottom of the cabinet shall be minimum
75 mm.
c)
Distance between two adjacent terminal strips shall be minimum 100 mm.
d)
e)
Distance between cable gland plate and the bottom of the strip shall be minimum 300
MM.
4.2.13.8 All terminal / terminal blocks shall be DIN Rail mounted type and shall be easily
removable. The size of the terminal blocks / terminals of different types shall be consistent
and identical. All terminal blocks shall be mounted on suitable anodised metallic or plastic
stand-off.
4.2.13.9 No splicing is allowed in between wire/ cable straight run.
4.2.13.10 Terminal strips shall be arranged group-wise for incoming and outgoing cables separately.
Terminal blocks for intrinsically safe wiring shall be separate. 20% spare terminals shall be
provided, as a minimum, preferably in each terminal strip. Terminals shall be suitable for
wires up to 2.5 sq. mm base solid or stranded conductor in general. For power cables,
higher size terminals shall be used.
4.2.13.11 Cabinet and rack layout shall be made considering proper accessibility and maintenance.
4.3
Earthing
4.3.1
All system equipment such as marshalling cabinets, system cabinets and other powered
equipment shall be provided with following type of grounding system:
a)
b)
Both system earth and safety earth shall be totally separate from protective earth.
4.3.2
Earth metallic enclosure / cabinet / console etc. shall be provided with electrical earth
lug, as a minimum.
b)
Ifgar leffWeg
c)
4.3.3
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
INDIA LIMITED FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
ENGINEERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 30 of 36
Where multiple cabinets are multiplexed together, earth looping with permanent
shorting link cables shall be acceptable. Earthing connection wires as indicated in
Clause No.4.3.2(b) above shall be used for connecting multiplexed cabinets to
protective earth station / bus-bar.
System Earth
a)
System earth shall be totally noise free dedicated earthing system and shall be fully
isolated from electrical protective earth. This earth must be very high integrity system
and shall be used to ground zero volt references and signal cable grounds.
b)
System earth shall be less than one (1) ohm grounding system or as per vendor's
recommendation with its own dedicated earth pits. The earth pits shall be suitably
located outside the control room and away from any heavy noise plant equipment.
The earth pit design shall be as per IS-3043 code of practice for earthing. A minimum
of two (2) number of earth pits, in redundant configuration, shall be provided in each
Control room / SRR / Remote I0 cabinet location for System earth. In case number of
pits required to meet system earth resistance are more than one (1) number, the
number of system earth pits shall be two times the actual number of pits required to
meet the redundancy requirement specified above. All these system earth pits shall be
securely connected with each other to form a one homogeneous system earth grid.
4.4
c)
Each marshalling / system cabinet etc. shall be provided with system earth bus-bar
which shall be insulated from the metallic body frame. This bus-bar shall be used to
earth also signal zero volt references and signal cable screens. Terminals used for
termination of spare conductor pairs / cores of multi-pair signal / control cables shall
be connected to system earth bus-bar. Shorting links shall be used for spare terminal
looping.
d)
c)
The redundant System earth pits at each location shall be connected to the Electrical
protective earthing system through suitable surge isolation and protection device for
lightning equipotential bonding. These lightning surge isolation and protection
devices shall comply to the requirements of IEC 62561-3.
The PLC shall be required to be interfaced to the Distributed Control System bus whenever
specified. A suitable interface shall be offered in order to achieve the following functions:
a)
Display of all input points under alarm/first out alarm connected to PLC or generated
by PLC, continuous indication for analog signal on the main DCS operator console.
b)
c)
To receive certain operational commands from the operator console for the operation
of certain output devices connected to PLC
d)
In general, PLC shall provide data in a well established MODBUS protocol format.
The interface shall be dual redundant unless otherwise specified.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
015reg
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 31 of 36
The speed of data transfer shall be such that any change in I/O which is to be updated on the
operator console shall not exceed 3 second from the time event to update on the operator
console screen considering one second standard update rate in DCS operator console.
4.5
5.0
5.1
General
5.1.1
This specification defines the basic guidelines to vendor for factory testing and acceptance,
installation, commissioning and field acceptance of the complete PLC system. On the basis
of this specification, vendor shall submit their own detailed testing, installation,
commissioning and acceptance procedure. For hardware, the procedure shall include test
name, purpose of test, test equipment / set up, definition of input, test procedure, results
expected and acceptance criteria. Similarly for software, it shall include test name, details of
the method, list of tests, sequence of execution, results expected and acceptance criteria. For
PLC system with SIL 3 requirement, certificate for hardware & software (Like TUV/
EXIDA) shall be verified.
5.1.2
The testing and acceptance of the system shall be carried out on the approved testing
procedures and criteria based on this specification and vendor's standard testing
requirements and procedures.
5.2
5.2.1
Vendor shall test and demonstrate the functional integrity of the system hardware and
software. No material or equipment shall be transported until all required tests are
successfully completed and certified "Ready for Shipment" by the owner/consultant.
5.2.2
The purchaser reserves the right to be involved and satisfy himself at each and every stage
of inspection. The purchaser shall be free to request any specific test on any equipment
fge.fi Elf51-eg
I .1127r eleoAeON3Odsa3)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
f A Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 32 of 36
considered necessary by him although not listed in this specification, as a part of approval of
factory testing procedure. The cost of performing all tests shall be borne by the vendor.
5.2.3
Vendor to note that acceptance of any equipment or the exemption of inspection or testing
shall in no way absolve the vendor of the responsibility for delivering the equipment
meeting all the requirements specified in Requisition.
5.2.4
It shall be vendor's responsibility to modify and/or replace any hardware and modify the
software if the specified functions are not completely achieved satisfactorily during testing
and factory acceptance.
5.2.5
5.2.6
Vendor shall not replace any system component/module/sub-system unless it is failed. A log
of all failed components/modules in a sub- system shall be maintained which shall give
description of the failed component/module, effect of failure on the sub-system, cause of
failure and number of hours of operation before it failed. If malfunction of a
component/module in a sub-system repeats, the test shall terminate and vendor shall replace
the faulty component/module. Thereafter the test shall commence all over again. If even
after this replacement, the sub-system fails to meet the requirements, vendor shall replace
the full sub-system by the one meeting the requirements and the system shall be tested all
over again. If a sub-system fails during the test, which is not repaired and made operational
within four hours of active repair time after the failure, the test shall be suspended and
restarted all over again only after the vendor has replaced the device in the acceptable
operation.
5.2.7
Testing and FAT shall be carried out in two phases. The minimum requirements for testing
during these two phases shall be as follows:
5.2.7.1
Under the first phase, vendor shall perform tests at his works to ensure that all components
function in accordance with the specification for each type of test. A test report shall be
submitted for purchaser review within one week of completion of this test. Phase II testing
(witness inspection) shall start only after this.
All sub-systems shall undergo a minimum of 30 days (720 hours) burn-in period and this
can include FAT duration. Should there be a failure noted during FAT, this duration shall be
extended. It may include any such time for which the system has been kept powered on even
for system generation and Phase-I testing.
Following tests shall be performed by the vendor and reports shall be forwarded to
purchaser:
a)
Quality control test which shall be carried out to assure quality of all components
and modules in accordance with vendor's quality control and assurance
procedures.
b)
System pre-test which shall be physical check of all modules, racks, cabinets etc.
c)
System power-up test which shall test functionally all hardware and software. This
shall include testing of redundancy, System performance on power supply
variations, application software testing and system diagnostic verification.
5.2.7.2 The second phase of testing shall systematically, fully and functionally test all hardware and
software in the presence of purchaser representatives. All subsystems shall be
interconnected to simulate, as close as possible, the total integrated system. Following
minimum tests shall be carried out:-
ENGINEERS
ligar fat5eg INDIA LIMITED
1.1127i vwcnreoodOdvA)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 33 of 36
a)
Visual and mechanical testing, which shall be carried out in principle to assure
correct, proper, good and neat workmanship by the vendor This testing shall include
dimensional verification, Layout verification as per approved GA drawings,
Verification of Sheet thickness / Quality of painting (outer and inner) / Nameplates,
identifiers and tag plates / Adherence to ferruling philosophy / Dressing of wires /
prefabricated cables and clearances / Locks and handles as a minimum.
b)
Verification of Bill of Material. The Bill of material verification shall include both
hardware and software.
c)
Functional testing:
This shall include the simulation of each input and output to verify proper system response.
The testing as a minimum shall include:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Checking of scan time. Scan time verification shall be carried out during Factory
Acceptance Test based on the specified requirements considering discrete input by
given step change and Step input or slow ramp input (typical frequency of 4 cycles /
second) with amplitude corresponding to 16mA (4mA to 20mA or vice versa) for all
conventional analog and smart (HART) inputs from a signal generator. The scan time
values so observed shall be within 90% confidence level.
The inputs to the system shall be:
Step input i.e. 0 or 1 for all contact inputs. Step input can be generated by
wiring back a digital output configured for the purpose.
Step input or ramp input for all analog inputs. However, for PLC, the scan time
check with analog inputs shall only be for record purposes.
v)
vi)
System redundancy checks including correct changeover of the back-up unit in case
of failure of main unit.
vii)
System diagnostic checking for all subsystems on local level as well as on console,
including checking of the testing software for I/O modules/signal conditioning
modules, when specified.
5.2.8
ix)
x)
Simulation of power failure and system restart auto boot-up of system configuration
and program after power restoration.
Vendor shall notify the purchaser at least three (3) weeks prior to factory acceptance test. In
the event that representative arrives and the system is not ready for testing, vendor shall be
liable for back charges for any extra time and expenses incurred.
^ ENGINEERS
k.11
Ogem EtWeggl'
11, INDIA LIMITED
(A
?4,,ff
Govt
me undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 34 of 36
5.3
5.3.1
Vendor shall offer the services of an installation team which would install the equipment in
the control room, lay the interconnecting cables inside control room, check-out, test and
commission the system.
All technical personnel assigned to the site by the vendor shall be fully conversant with the
supplied system and software package, and shall have both hardware and software capability
to bring the system on line quickly and efficiently with a minimum of interference with
other concurrent construction and commissioning activities.
5.3.2
5.3.3
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Field Inspection
5.3.3.1 All equipments shall be inspected thoroughly by vendor after its receipt at site for
completeness and proper functioning. Vendor must initiate the remedial action, in case
unsatisfactory operation of any item is observed, with intimation to Engineer-in-charge.
5.3.3.2 Vendor must document all observations including details of any malfunction observed.
Items/ equipments requiring total replacement must document the reasons for the same.
5.3.4
Loop Checking
5.3.4.1 Loop checking shall be carried out by vendor including checking the interconnections,
configuration and overall system functioning.
5.3.4.2 Vendor's scope of work as a part of system installation and loop checking shall include
termination of field cables in the control room, checking of interconnection between
instrument/equipment, glanding, ferruling/tagging of interconnecting cables in control room,
ferruling of field cables in control room and performing overall loop performance check.
5.3.4.3 Vendor shall coordinate with the field contractor for smooth and proper loop checking. Any
discrepancy found during checking shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Complete loop checking shall be performed in his/her or his/her authorised representative's
presence.
5.3.4.4 The input signals shall be simulated by disconnecting/connecting the field wires for all field
switches connected to PLC. All field transmitters connected to control room shall be loop
checked at 0%, 50% & 100% of full scale (for both increasing and decreasing signals).
Wherever receiver cards are used, the set point shall be generated by giving the input signal
to receiver card. All outputs shall be checked in field, either for actual operation of solenoid
valve or actual pick-up of electrical contactor for rotary equipments. Shutdown schemes
shall be checked for proper functioning, configuration and actuation.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
511 Wei&
ENGINEERS
sigif fageg WV INDIA LIMITED
LIRA 292aAi as IrtClAI
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 35 of 36
5.3.4.5 After loop checking is completed, vendor shall connect back any terminals and connections
removed for loop checking.
5.4
System Acceptance
5.4.1
The owner shall provisionally takeover the system from vendor after System acceptance
test. System acceptance test shall be started only after the satisfactory performance of loop
checking and verification of all loop checking records by Engineer-in-charge.
5.4.2
The system acceptance test shall be carried out in the presence of owner's representative and
Engineer-in-charge or his authorised representative. The tests carried out in System
acceptance test shall be fully recorded and duly signed by all representatives participating in
the System Acceptance Testing.
5.4.3
Vendor shall carry out the following functional tests, as a part of system acceptance test, as a
minimum:-
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
5.5
6.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
6.1
Vendor shall comply fully with the general requirements of PLC system including logistic
support services, documentation, warranty, maintenance contract and shipping instructions.
Post Warranty Maintenance Contract
Vendor shall quote separately for post warranty maintenance contract after warranty period
for five years for the complete system as per commercial terms and condition of the
requisition and the type (i.e. comprehensive or non-comprehensive) of post warranty
maintenance shall be as specified in job specification. The personnel deployed during postwarranty maintenance shall have thorough knowledge of the system and at least two years
of experience on the maintenance of similar system. Any other conditions of contract
required by vendor shall be explained in the offer.
16iaziEqA6 ENGINEERS
tifift mwr INDIA LIMITED
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 36 of 36
7.0
SHIPPING
7.1
All the materials used for packing, wrapping, sealers, moisture resistant barriers and
corrosion preventers shall be of recognised brands and shall conform to the best standards in
the areas for the articles which are packed.
7.2
7.3
The packing shall be suitable for storing in tropicalised climate, the ambient conditions,
being specified in job specifications.
7.4
Shipment shall be thoroughly checked for completeness before final packing and shipment.
Vendor shall be responsible for any delay in installation or commissioning schedule because
of incomplete supply of equipments.
8.0
REJECTION
8.1
Vendor shall make his offer in detail with respect to every item of the purchaser's
specifications. Any offer not conforming to this shall be summarily rejected.
panoiddy
("
al
c
7' 03
0 o.
lD
O3
3
7 u)
CD
0
o a.
o.
0 co
CD
fD
C-
C)
io
co
01
0
co
031198132iaNVC13S1A321
cn
cn
-o
cn
cn
cn
m
0
z
0
zz
m
0
z
C
0
m
0
z
z
Cl)
ti'net' 6000-ZS-L
.oN altIVCINVIS
2"
3"
4"
2"
.oN aavaNvis
3"
3"
CLADDED EQUIPMENTS
FIRST BLOCK
VALVE
EQUIPMENT/STANDPI
PE CONNECTION
INSTRUMENT
CONNECTION
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
FLGD.
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
FLGD.
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
FLGD.
3" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
FLGD.
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
FLGD.
3" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
FLGD.
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
1 2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
CA
C4
4t
4t
V1
CA
n
xJ
C4
4k
C/1
2 " FLGD.
3/4" SCRD.
3" FLGD.
qt
'.
.:
2" FLGD.
'
cA
'
FLGD.
"
2" FLGD.
.-)
4" FLGD.
FLGD.
1:.
4" FLGD.
to
2" FLGD.
4" FLGD.
VI
FLGD.
4" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
4 t
4" FLGD.
4" FLGD
C7
* 1
o.r
4" FLGD
3"
4"
-.4
0.
,4
EQUIPMENT/STANDPIPE
CONNECTION
F'
UNCLADDED EQUIPMENTS
TYPE OF INSTRUMENTS
O
O
3" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
1 4" FLGD.(NOTE-1)
3" FLGD.
(NOTE-1)
4" FLGD.
1 3" FLGD.
r)
xJ
e.
CA
4t
01
CA
4k
CA
',
:
>::'
3" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
FLGD.
--4
FLGD.
D.
cA
r)
3" FLGD
4:
--11
CJ
7t
FLGD.
1
o
t
4t
c.,
4t
t
I
o
3" FLGD.
3"FLGD.
%" SCRD
C)
3" FLGD.
" SCRD
ZF:
...
C/1
2"FLGD.
3" FLGD.
lt
LA.>
..4..
STANDPIPE(RATING UP TO 600#)
3" FLGD.
c,
3"FLGD.
..e
t:C
''''
2 " FLGD
C4
tr.,
!"J
THERMOWELL ON EQUIPMENT
..I'C'
3" FLGD.
4,L
3" FLGD.
i-i
2 " FLGD
2 " FLGD
l'j
l...7
:-"
1:0
3" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
CA
C)
2 " FLGD
t,
>:....
2 " FLGD
....,
<
N.)
9
I.)
,...)
!'''
l....,
FLGD.
3" FLGD.
()
z
2" FLGD.
.L.,
CD
SF.
.:
C.4
8" FLGD.
',1
i..,7`
.1
Ch
24" FLGD.
l...J
.tit
0
CI
._,
;:s.,,-
3" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
8" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
8" FLGD.
6" FLGD
1,-)
9,
6" FLGD.
(BY INST)
8" FLGD.
6" FLGD.
6" FLGD
t,..)
J
24" FLGD.
Z
-<
t-.)
:I"
CI)
8" FLGD.
;:.:`,
7
l,..)
w
(BY INST)
6" FLGD.
6" FLGD.
N.)
r..)
INSTRUMENT
CONNECTION
6" FLGD.
6" FLGD.
EQUIPMENT/STANDPI
PE CONNECTION
t,..)
,.
6 " FLGD.
FIRST BLOCK
VALVE
2 ci)
oP
:4:,
t,)
P
7-4
t-1,
EQUIPMENT/STANDPIPE
CONNECTION
IIV-113ly 6pAdo0
TYPE OF INSTRUMENTS
CLADDED EQUIPMENTS
patuasai
UNCLADDED EQUIPMENTS
O
O
"oN C1211/CINV1S
0'told
, L3- L000-00-8 'ON ;e mod
.oN 021VONVIS
R')
4,(.44 t-)
ALL FLANGES/SW RATING SHALL BE AS PER PIPING SPECIFICATION UNLESS PROJECT SPECIFICATION REQUIRES MIN . 300#.
cm
It
IN CASE OF DIRECT MOUNTED FLANGED INSTRUMENTS AND WHERE FLANGEDTYPE FIRST ISOLATION VALVE ARE PROVIDED, BOLTING AND GASKETSSHALL BE IN PIPINGSCOPE.
INSTALLATION OFSTLL WELL OF TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENTS (SERVO, MECHANICALAND MULTIPOINT TEMPERATURE ELEMENT) ON TANKS ARE IN TANK VENDOR SCOPE.
patuasai sp.i6p
ii3 1q6uAdoo
Aq penoiddv
c
a SD gu
C a
7 0
0 w
= coa
CD
0.
cr m
m
CD
7:1
7
2
O
C)
zz
45.
0311SSI32i aNYCI3SIA3e1
NJ
z z
CO
0
O
C1311SSI3NCINVCI3SIA31:1
P `)
agnssial ONVCl3SIA321
0
z
-o
-a
cn
C)
z
C
C)
m
0
z
z
Cl)
ti"AON Z000-ZS-L
'oN
S3cIld NONOIIO3NNOO
ativaNVIS
2" FLGD
2" FLGD.
-t137,
n1
c
P
..:;"
-n
c)
P
2" FLGD
2" FLGD.
r
c-)
0
n1
h,
-;.',.7.
`11
C7
'(e'2)
;.,u.
c)
c
;.;,-,
L'..!
nn
,-, r
c)
p C7
1-;
.71
r-
w
-n
rC)
:7
r)
t-
...!
3
Is:
1
nn
rC)
0
w
.-1
nn
;:37
w
.:1
rC)
C7
P.
C
c
:37
3
E
a
'f=";
;:',,.'
3
C)
r
C)
ua
cc
l''
3 1
l'`.
'
.
;73',
:
;')..7.
ce,
a
C
El
u
-1
a ()
C) 20
V Z7
La
.11
on
,;,Z
P:,
P
(-,
C7
C)
r r r r =" c4
c c o
c)
i,-i x c)
Puuoc) *uu
r0
t!
E
u
-,1
C7
C)
w
1
nn
7.7
;..:'
;;;.7
.
3
.3
"
Ln
,1
2 P P.
cn C 0
-3 0 CI
... .
p
c
0
Qa
w
'
33!
..,
xi
C7
,,;.r
un
()
tr-
vu
r-
4
C
T
w
nn
n
70
C)
7
3
GO
C
(-.)
t'f<
r'
C)
?
.1
'"i.
n1
C7
rc
w
ni=1
Z7
C7
rC)
h6
r-c
3.,..t
L.,
-.6
rC)
C7
-.6
L..)
,
x
,,
::;.7
.
r
c
C)
C7
r-
W
.
-n
P2
P,
4, .":,:f.3
' on
.
"3:,
'
.
(J'i
,,
;;;Z,
cn
(..)
pD3
C7
;-...,:
r
c)
0
1",
!
nn
C7
7s
^':
cn
n
1`
65
r)
u'.3
hl
70
C7
*
.,'
LO
V
CA
c
,
c>
4t
/A
0,
c,
CD
4t
V
ci,
o
CD
4t
0,
c
,
CD
4L
PROCESS
CONNECTION
,.;
.11
tc.)
p
r"
C)
C7
r0
...
..;
...
;.. .c
aa
l'
-'i
C4
(::J
,-.
,
0 x
:.P
LO
,":3:
rC)
0
';',7
,
3
nn
c,
o
4t
11
/A
0,
'A" SCRD
!..,',.
LO
1..-
il
3
Go
70
P
w
.3:
n1
r-
CD
0
:37:
"Irl
V
cl,
o
'A" SCRD
rC)
P
__
c
P
r-
r-
Go
r)
Ln
LO
;;F:
;:r.
c,
o
4k
/A
0,
31770N/121111N3A
c)
P
-.
::...7
I.
-;:',7
r"
C
P
rc)
C)
Z.7
..
"T1
nn
.-
0
*
CD
u
r-
1
''.
W
n1
cn "< -in.
r- n 2 r- .
C) 7o ,,,
CJ 0
--3
* ...-,
''-!
.
n
70
C7
*
2
,,'
.
uo
.11
CA
.1
v
CA
o
c
,
4t
'A" FLGD
,',7,
Pc
C7
*
1:".C4
(-)
on
n
p0
C7
*
,; c: 65
PO tTi
rr
'A" SCRD*
%" BW
'A" SCRD
'A" SCRD**
'
A" FLGD
'A" SCRD
'A" FLGD
'A" SCRD
'A" FLGD
'A" FLGD
'A" SCRD
CD
on
r)
." ,'0
w
-1
rCD
C7
:',,.:
cc
.-4
Cb
t21
FIRST BLOCKINSTRUMENTS
VALVE
CONNECTION
."
2" FLGD.
r-
1":!
on
r)
X
C7
rn
>
a
1,1
'A" FLGD
E3
'-'
J.
113131AI MOTH
A" SCRD*
::37
,
...
.;.1'7
.
-ri
rCD
Z
-q
on
rn
PROCESS
CONNECTION
.-
CD
.....
;7;7
4k
V /A
CA 0,
CD c
CD
o
4t ,
00
CD
.noN Z000-Z9-L
2" FLGD
.oN a avaNvis
lewiod
0'AO/AL3-1000-00-8
3" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
1" FLGD
1" FLGD
..;Z
1" FLGD
'A" SCRD
1A
' " FLGD
-,1
rC)
C
C
0
C
C)
x
C
'"SCRD
'A" SCRD
'
1 'A" FLGD
.11
'
,
1
VALVE
0
-c,
3" FLGD+
I" FLGD
3" FLGD
"r1
t-'
FIRST BLOCK
za
2
C)
>
rrcc
m
2
-0
3" FLGD
?c1
--.
1" FLGD
u,
PROCESS
H
O
'A" SCRD
r
c)
0
3" FLGD
(BY INST)
-1
r,
c)
0
CONNECTION CONNECTION
3" FLGD
3" FLGD
0
0
3" FLGD
z
0
C)
>
c.)
t-1-1
H
ul
3" FLGD+
F--)'
>
rn
o
z
X
3" FLGD
cn
n
zi
'A" SW/BW
-.1:
.,7
'A" SCRD*
m
z
0 !
-3
(-)
zJ
CA
.
's7.
.1
INSTRUMENTS
.'-'
n1
K
c
c
P
c
Cl)
,.."7
:.
3" FLGD
e
ti,
p
0,
CO
.<
0
K
m-i
r)
2
r-
....
..,z
(BY INST)
C)
<n
=
,...,
C:
>
'A" SW/BW
H
5
w0
PO
1 1/4"FLGD
VALVE
CI
r
<
rn
3" FLGD
oa
a
FIRST BLOCK
r r1
X
rrl
(n
CD
rrl
<
rn
v)
`-0
m
7y
3" FLGD
<
C/)
CONNECTION
3 " FLGD
0
P:J
o
...
,.-
PROCESS
:',..'
vi
3" FLGD
'
3/4" SCRD*
I
CONNECTION
:
r
.
1A
' " SW/BW
,-ri
r0
P
3" FLGD
>
.-3
5'
z
3" FLGD
INSTRUMENTS
VALVE
o
O
?:'
3/4"SW/BW#
,;;Z:
6a
,;z
,;z
,'
(-)
x)
0
*
,
,7,.
O,
CD
C,
4
k
'A" SCRD
r)
l'iZ.!
C,
xt
/A
cs
C,
--
FIRST BLOCK
cr
H
Xi
C
K
tri
Z
H
3" FLGD
t,
..)
V2" SCRD
F
U
-to
3" FLGD.
>2=-7
z
o m2
0, cA rn
poz,
i
- r)
700H H
,r
c4
> g
c,, m z
a
c
X 0
t-r1
rri til0H
0 ..n >
> .:J'
C
c., ct'
h
0
:c
(4
rri H
-cn cn >
0 tr r-
'A" SCRD.
3" FLGD.
3 C.)
3"FLGD
r0
3" FLGD
t...,.
3" FLGD
7.
3" FLGD
Ca
3/4" FLGD
aa
3" FLGD
_
..:
(BY INST)
.......,
(4.
^ri
r
0
5?
3" FLGD.
SCRD.
cn
r)
XI
P
%"SW/BW#
1-,:z.!
cA
3" FLGD
:.',
INSTRUMENTS <5>
c)
Lo
3" FLGD
q m >n -3
M2Z"-j=
xJ -000 m
n
THERMOWELL
1):',.!
41.
AVERAGINGPITOT TUBE
r
m
cn
c
,-,
-t,
r
DIAPHGRAM SEAL
PRESSUREINSTRUMENTS
.e
.
to
FLOWMETER ++
P.
c)
0
ON
_PRESSUREINSTRUMENTS
<5>
DIAPHGRAM(CHEMICAL)
SEAL PRESSURE
..-
-4
3/4" SCRD**
z r-n1 0
(n r- Z (4
4c4Mm
Oa
'A" SCRD*
(4,
Y>rcxr)
'0
+ + * 4t *
CONNECTION
#009
FLOW METER
ORIFICE (DIAPHGRAMSEAL)
# 009 <
FLOW METER
ORIFICE
up
TYPEOF
INSTRUMENTS
WHERE PIPINGCLASS SPECIFIES
RUBBER/TEFLON LINED PIPES
INSTRUMENTS
CONNECTION
(FLGD ) <5>
3" FLGD
.oN auvaNvis
Oln-a-eifith ENGINEERS
azit 'Meg Ter INDIA LIMITED
1.11271MORMMORI)
STANDARD No.
THERMOWELL
IA Gm of India Underwonw
7-52-0035 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 3
cZ 34 mm
ct 1/2"NPT
r_
CHAIN
45 mm
I VT FLANGE
ID 11 mm
BORE TO BE CONCENTRIC
WITH 0.D. WITHIN 10% OF
WALL THICKNESS
18 mm
(1)
21-03-12
21-08-06
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
ter
Manoj
MN
TGM
Prepared
by
Checked
by
4--v"
RI5/J
DTh-'
S M)
PM
VJN
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - Al rights reserved
STANDARD No.
1511=4-a-eite,
ENGINEERS
DReg ie INDIA LIMITED
MET MaR
a51300,10
THERMOWELL
(A GOvl Of WM Undertgo001
7-52-0035 Rev. 3
Page 2 of 3
34 mm
q 1/2"NPT
CHAIN
r_
00 I's 1.0z"
Min
4!)
N
FOR OW TERMINATION
(ONLY FOR TEST THERMOWELL)
45 mm
1 1/7 FLANGE
ABM
6R
OD 21 mm
ID 7 mm
BORE TO BE CONCENTRIC
WRH O.D. WRMIN 10% OF
WALL THICKNESS
JO
NOTES -
21-03-12
21-06-06
Rev.
No.
16 mm
Date
Purpose
rtm.
Cit
MN
TOM
Prepared
by
Checked
by
SL MS
2116,-,)
p hi
PM
VJN
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
safteiela ENGINEERS
au WaveINDIA LIMITED BUILT-UP THERMOWELL
1.4.1
STANDARD No.
7-52-0035 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 3
0 34 mm
45 mm
WELD
FULL PENETRATION WELD
2' FLANGE
BORE TO BE CONCENTRIC
WITH O.D. WITHIN 10% OF
WALL THICKNESS
BAR STOCK
0 18 mm
21-03-12
21-08-08
Date
eanoj
MN
Prepared
by
TGM
Checked
by
R JMS
PM
VJN
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL AI rights reserved
5
ravage e5 J4o534)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undeftakong)
THERMOCOUPLE / RTD
ASSEMBLY
WITH THERMOWELL
STANDARD No.
7-52-0036 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 1
1/2" NPT
(NOTE-1)
CHAIN
UNION 1/2" NPT
(NOTE-2)
THERMOWELL
19-07-11
22-07-05
Date
Manoj
MN
Prepared
by
TAM"
AKG
Checked
by
RP/JS
PM
Stds. Committee
Convenor
DM
VJN
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-SS-4020-Rev.0
Page 1 of 3
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
(STRUCTURAL)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT
OWNER
PMC
JOB NO.
A702
02.02.16
AKS
AM
DCB
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-SS-4020-Rev.0
Page 2 of 3
S.NO
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
NO
REV
NO
NO OF
SHEETS
6-68-0021
7+23
6-68-0022
14
6-68-0033
16
6-82-0001
87
6-82-2700
37
6-68-0002
15
6-68-0003
13
6-68-0004
30
6-68-0062
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
NO
REV
NO.
NO. OF SHTS
6-65-0006
6-65-0013
6-65-0016
6-65-0017
12
6-65-0018
11
6-65-0019
10
6-65-0021
S.NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
8
9
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-SS-4020-Rev.0
Page 3 of 3
6-65-0027
6-66-0004
Specification No.
REV
NO.
NO. OF SHTS
PART-C (ARCHITECTURAL)
Title
Sl. No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
6-75-0001
07
6-75-0002
6-75-0003
6-75-0004
6
5
6
15
08
09
6-75-0005
09
6-75-0006
6-75-0007
5
5
09
15
6-75-0008
6-75-0009
5
5
08
06
6-75-0010
11
6-75-0011
10
6-75-0012
13
6-75-0013
10
(A Govt
STANDARD SPECIFIZATION
CIVIL-STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
India Undedaking)
6-68-0021
Rev.0
Page 1 of 7
W1
411-4
frl I
1W:4-R.
i
ch
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL - STRUCTURAL
wrzt
vcildiqu
(vaATF.tie.*. wrzt)
LUMP-SUM TURN-KEY WORKS
(L. S. T. K. WORKS)
3irdltichclIV
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
0 30.08.2013
Rev.
No
ISSUED AS SPECIFICATION
Date
Purpose
, '-'7
77)).
i, ilt
--/
4,L
GV
AS /
PKM
SC
DM
Standards
Standards
Prepared Checked Committee GM Bureau
Chairman
by
Convener
bY
Approved by
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
aele-i
tg-ar
fagreg
IN 2--k71,72 031,,,11
erl
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt <A India Undegoking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
CIVIL -STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
6-68-0021
Rev.0
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
AFC
BIS
DC
DCIM
EDB
EIL
GAD
LOI
LSTK
MTO
PC
RCC
VDR
VP
Mr PK Mittal
Members:
Mr S Debnath
Mr Rajanji Srivastava
Mr PJ Singh
Mr Samir Das
Mr VS Chhaya (Projects)
Mr Ravindra Kumar (Construction)
latade?
tif5ift
Merl
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt
Lindertahng )
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
CIVIL-STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
6-68-0021
Rev.0
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
2 .0
ANNEXURES:
ANNEX U RE-1
ANNEXURE-2
ANNEXURE-3
ANNEXURE-4
ANNEXURE-5
ANNEXURE-6
ANNEXURE-7
ANNEXURE-8
ANNEXURE-9
ANNEXURE-10
ANNEXURE-11
ANNEXURE-12
ANNEXURE-l3
ANNEXURE-14
ANNEXU RE-15
Wiel"
$figar Of5reg
5I,Frgr.1)
crqre
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undenalcng)
STANDC-,RD SPECIFICATIONS
CIVIL-STRUCTURAL
LSI K WORKS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
6-68-0021
Rev.0
Page 4 of 7
1.0 GENERAL
1.1
The design considerations given hereunder establish the minimum basic requirements for
civil-structural works for LSTK contracts.
This standard specification shall be read in conjunction with the Engineering Design Basis
document (EDB) issued for the Job and Standard Specification No. 6-68-0022 for Material &
Construction requirements.
All structures shall be designed for satisfactory performance and functions for which the same
are to be constructed.
Whenever any reference to BIS/ other code is made, the same shall be taken as the
latest revision (with all amendments issued there to) on the notified date of
submission of tender.
Apart from the codes mentioned in particular in the EDB document, all other relevant
codes related to the specific job under consideration and/ or referred to in the abovementioned codes, shall be followed wherever applicable. Reference to some of the
codes does not limit or restrict the scope of applicability of other relevant codes.
In case of any variation/ contradiction between the provisions of BIS codes and the
requirements given in EDB document, the provisions given in EDB document shall
have precedence over all others. In absence of relevant BIS codes, reference to
corresponding British or American codes may be made (in that order of preference).
All designs, detailing and construction shall strictly conform to the standards,
specifications and 'specific requirements' enclosed with the tender. Only if relevant
information is not available in these documents, reference to relevant BIS code shall be
made.
1.2
A Document Control Index [DC1, i.e. detailed list of drawings/ documents, including
specifications, standards, design philosophy (foundation & superstructure), general notes,
design calculations, design drawings, Bulk Material Take-off (Bulk MTO), bar bending
schedules (for RCC works) and fabrication drawings (for structural steel works)] indicating
the document/ drawing category (review or record as applicable) together with the scheduled
and actual date of submission of the documents, shall be submitted by the Contractor through
the Document Control Index Module (DCIM) and kept updated at all times in the DCIM for
review by Owner/ owner's representative.
1.3
The Bulk MTO document containing Cement, Re-bars (diameter-wise) and Structural Steel
(section-wise) shall be submitted within 45 days from the date of receipt of LOI. The same
shall be updated at 50% & 90% stages of engineering.
1.4
1.5
Document Control Index Module (DCIM) is a web application that lets suppliers/ contractors
manage their Document Control Index (DCI) through an interface, submit their documents for
review/ record and get the reviewed/ approved documents/ drawings.
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
5"eilazitil
ENGINEERS
CIVIL-STRUCTURAL
Ozd-ar 201e
-g
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of India Undertaking)
6-68-0021
Rev.0
LSTK WORKS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 5 of 7
Before proceeding with design and drawing preparation, the Contractor shall submit detailed
philosophy of design of various parts of (all) the structures and foundations (including
equipment foundations) along with explanatory sketches for review by Owner/ owner's
representative. Only after the approval (including review and incorporation of comments as
offered during the review) of the design philosophy, the Contractor shall submit any design
document and/ or drawing for review or record or issue the same for construction.
2.2
The Contractor shall carry out the structural design of all structures and prepare complete set
of civil and structural approved for construction (AFC) drawings needed for correct and
accurate construction. The design/ drawing shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
design philosophy prepared for the structure (including "Design Criteria" given in the EDB)
and architectural/ structural general arrangement and shall incorporate all the comments/
suggestions given by Owner/ owner's representative without any extra cost to the Owner and
without any implication on the time-schedule for completion of works.
2.3
Design and detailing of the structures and foundations shall fulfill all functional requirements
for which the same is intended and it shall be ensured that adequate accesses, clearances,
clearing of interferences, provision of cutouts, etc. have been provided to make the structure/
foundation fully operational.
2.4
Construction of units/ structures identified for design/ drawing review (as referred in Vendor
Document Requirement (V DR) attached in the bid document or DCI) by Owner/ owner's
representative shall not be taken up at the site till these documents are reviewed by Owner/
owner's representative and comments/ suggestions given by Owner/ owner's representative
are incorporated along with submission of compliance sheet indicating incorporation of all
comments. For all other foundations and structures the Contractor shall directly submit the
AFC drawings to Engineer-in-Charge and construction of such works shall be taken up
immediately. Design and drawings for such foundations/ structures shall also be
simultaneously submitted in DCIM for Owner/ owner's representative's record. In the event
Owner/ owner's representative offers any comment on documents/ drawings of record
category, it shall be ensured by the Contractor that these comments are duly incorporated in
the documents/ drawings and revised set of document/ drawing is issued to site for
construction and simultaneously submitted in DCIM for Owner/ owner's representative's
record.
2.5
Irrespective of the identified structures requiring review, the Contractor shall submit
complete set of design and drawings of all structure/ foundation systems.
!Oft:EY rs"
.,0,,) ENGINEERS
51g-err fdtA&G Nair INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt ttt Indm Undettaking)
e-A ,TeeA,M-15AE
2.6
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
CIVIL-STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
To facilitate an overall systematic review, the Contractor shall ensure the following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Structural design/ drawings for any structure/ foundation are submitted for review
only if referenced input (e.g. architectural drawing, equipment layout, piping general
arrangement drawing (GAD), equipment data sheet, vendor drawing, etc.) have been
reviewed by the concerned Owner's specialist in approval/ review Code-2 or Code-1
and are available in the DCIM on or before the date of submission of structural
design/ drawings.
Design and drawings of each independent building/ structure are submitted
simultaneously
Relevant checklist(s) duly filled-up, signed (by the approver of civil-structural design/
drawing) & stamped, shall accompany each deliverable of civil-structural document/
drawing submitted by the contractor. The checklist(s) are to be used as a guide while
performing the related activities. The same are attached as annexure. All points listed
therein are mandatory check point. Other points/ observations/ comments may be
added based on need and judicious discretion depending on the importance of
activity/ deliverables.
Soft copy of files created as input for computer analysis/ design are also part of the
respective design documents.
All re-submissions are accompanied with a compliance statement (a document stating
point-wise compliance to all comments by Owner/ owner's representative on previous
submission)
2.7
2.8
2.9
The accuracy/ correctness of all designs and drawings shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor and any delay/ loss/ damage to the Owner in respect of any mistake/ discrepancy/
anomaly in such designs and drawings shall be entirely borne by the Contractor.
2.10
Owner/ owner's representative reserves the right to review any/ all or none of the designs and
drawings. Review by Owner/ owner's representative shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for correct design and execution of the works.
2.11
Revision of any design/ drawing/ detailing shall not be permitted unless the same is
necessitated due to comments on review of such documents by Owner/ owner's
representative. Such revisions shall be restricted to incorporation of these comments only and
no new details shall be added in the drawings unless called for by comments during review.
All revised portion shall be clearly marked and clouded on the respective drawing for easy
Ogar laOteg
dir.,1
451,1057i,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
f A Govt A (AdA Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
CIVIL-STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
All fabrication/ erection drawings and bar bending schedules shall be prepared by the
Contractor and shall be directly issued through DCIM for construction to the work. Such
drawings together with design calculations for all splices, joints and gusset plates shall
simultaneously be reviewed by Owner/ owner's representative at site (Resident Construction
Manager). The Owner/ owner's representative at site at his discretion may review all or some
or none of these designs & drawings.
Wherever such review is carried out the same shall be restricted to the following:
a)
b)
c)
2.13
For analysis and design of structures, latest version of internationally accepted commercial
software viz. STAAD.PRO or equivalent are permitted.
In case software packages (commercially available or in-house developed) other than above
are intended to be used for analysis and design, the same shall be informed in writing to
Owner/ owner's representative. A validation report consisting of calculations and relevant
computer files containing input and detailed output (also refer clause 2.14) shall be submitted
by the Contractor through DCIM. Only after getting written approval from Owner/ owner's
representative, to this effect, such intended software be put to use for detailed analysis and
design.
2.14
The following minimum documentation shall be submitted through DCIM for computer aided
analysis and design as a part of structural analysis & design document:
a)
b)
c)
2.15
Contractor shall depute the concerned Civil-Structural design engineer to the review office of
Owner/ owner's representative as and when required for review of contractor's documents.
During such reviews involving computer aided analysis/ design/ drafting of structures, the
contractor shall make his own arrangement of Personal Computer (PC) in the form of Lap-top
in the premises of review office of Owner/ owner's representative. This is required to
expeditiously resolve all the comments including those involving the use of PC by contractor
in his submission. The contractor shall ensure that these PC's are fully operational along with
necessary software already loaded including the input/ output/ drawing files of the structures
being reviewed. The contractor shall revise and re-submit the analysis/ design and drawings
as required during review, through DCIM.
Reviewing of designs/ drawings is not obligatory on the part of Owner/ owner's
representative and complete correctness/ soundness of the designs/ drawings and their
execution at the site shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor irrespective of the
fact whether the same has been reviewed by Owner/ owner's representative or not. Any
defect observed during construction or till the defect liability period of works' shall be
rectified and removed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out whatever
modification or reconstruction is needed for the purpose, to the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Charge/ Owner without any extra cost and/ or time implication to the
Owner.
1.1TED
GENERAL CHECKLIST
1 ,111014,ml;
ANNEXURE-1
OF 6-68-0021
Page 1 of 2
Filled-up, signed (by the approver of civil-structural design/ drawing) & stamped
checklist shall accompany each submission of civil-structural document/ drawing by the
contractor:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
SI.
No.
1.
Contractor's
Response
Yes
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
I'MC Requirement
The submission is as per submission schedule as per
approved DC1.
The submission is as per submission sequence as per
approved DCI.
Basic documents prepared by the contractor (e.g. design
philosophy, specifications, standards, general notes, etc.) are
already approved.
Bulk MTO has been submitted.
All the referenced input (e.g. geotechnical recommendations.
architectural drawing, equipment layout, piping general
arrangement drawing (GAD), equipment data sheet, vendor
drawing, etc.) as applicable have been reviewed by the
concerned Owner's specialist in approval/ review Code-2 or
Code-1 and are available in the DC1M on or before the date
of submission of structural design/ drawings.
The design calculations being submitted herewith are
complete in all respects, thoroughly checked and confirm to
approved engineering design basis, relevant approved input
documents and applicable codes & standards, stamped
APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION, and signed
APPROVED by the Contractor's own responsible civil/
structural graduate (minimum) engineer (irrespective of the
fact that the same are prepared in the Contractor's own design
office or by an approved agency/ sub-contractor).
The drawings being submitted herewith are complete in all
respects, thoroughly checked and confirm to approved design
calculations, approved general arrangement, stamped
APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION, and signed
APPROVED by the Contractor's own responsible civil/
structural graduate (minimum) engineer (irrespective of the
fact that the same are prepared in the Contractor's own design
office or by an approved agency/ sub-contractor).
The documents/ drawing being submitted are complete with
respect to the whole structure.
In case this submission is for drawings only, the related
analysis & design have already been submitted.
Structure-wise quantity statements (showing anticipated,
released and balance quantities of concrete, structural steel
and piles) are updated & submitted.
In case this submission is of record category document/
drawing, similar review category documents/ drawings have
already been submitted.
Remarks
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
u Yes
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
aitlialeg
SI.
No.
13.
14.
GENERAL CHECKLIST
of .0. Vntl.rtike6ipl
PMC Requirement
In case this submission is of record category document/
drawing, the submitted document/ drawing incorporates
comments on the similar review category document/
drawing.
The accuracy/ correctness of all designs and drawings shall
be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and any delay/
loss/ damage to the Owner in respect of any mistake/
discrepancy/ anomaly in such designs and drawings shall be
entirely borne by the Contractor. Review by Owner/ owner's
representative shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for correct design and execution of the works
Date:
ANNEXURE-1
OF 6-68-0021
Page 2 of 2
Contractor's
Response
Remarks
Yes
Yes
Note:
Contractor to check & confirm that the submission meets the above requirements of
PMC and categorically tick Q mark in the "0 Yes" response.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
It
AN NEXURE-2
OF 6-68-0021
Page 1 of 1
Filled-up, signed & stamped compliance sheet shall accompany each re-submission of
civil-structural document/ drawing by the contractor:
Document No. :
Rev. No.:
Date of Submission:
Date of Review:
Review Code: 1
Sl.
No.
1.
Reference Clause
3 DR oV
PMC Comments
Contractor's Response
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
No comments.
Code 2
Code 3
Void.
er
5tga tialer.,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
CHECKLIST FOR
ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF
NORMAL FOUNDATIONS
ANNEXURE-3
OF 6-68-0021
Page 1 of 1
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
Tick Mark
as per Legend
SR.
NO.
Founding level/ depth of foundation with respect to HPP/ FGL/ NGL/ EGL/
FFL (strike out whichever is not applicable).
Size of pedestal:
a) type of anchor bolts
b) bolt spacing (with respect to clearance between the bolts)
C) edge distance of anchor bolts
d) depth of embedment of anchor bolts
10
11
12
13
Date:
Legend :
1,4 NA
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Ik
st g-aw
Page 1 of 1
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-4
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
,-)-
10
I1
12
Date:
Leeend :
NA
,:11ENGINEERS
077
,
,- Ofirec, INDIA LIMITED
Page 1 of 1
I Job No.:
L Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-5
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
Check for stability & uplift as per respective structure/ pit/ tank w.r.t. water
table at various stages of construction.
Date:
Legend :
NA
,31
`-tia_le-i
ENGINEERS
ogar laWeg INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Ind,. Undertaking,
Page 1 of 4
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-6
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
1.0
Availability of Inputs
1.1
1.1
1.3
1.4
Contour plan
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.0
Correctness of Inputs
2.1
2.2
el
Ogar 2154--eg
rtirefir ,iikairviati Jos.,
SR.
NO.
2.3
2.4
2 .5
2.6
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Ctoki of India Undertaking,
3.1
3.2
3.5
3.6
Tick Mark
as per Legend
3.4
Page 2 of 4
3.0
3.3
ANNEXURE-6
OF 6-68-0021
Loadings
~stn
5fga
SR.
NO.
3.6.1
1731,PT,1
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A C.A uf Inclo lindenalng)
ANNEXURE-6
OF 6-68-0021
Page 3 of 4
Tick Mark
as per Legend
3.6.6
Dead Load:
a) Self weight
b) Slab load
c) Brick load
d) Gutter/ Parapet load
Live/ Imposed load as per approved EDB for panels, ducts, cables etc. on
floor, roof canopy, passage, lobby & stair case:
a) Office Building
b) Administrative building
c) Substation building
d) Control room
Seismic Load as per approved EDB:
a) Method of Seismic Analysis (Seismic Coefficient/ Response
Spectra).
b) Importance factor (Mention Value).
c) Response reduction factor accordingly consideration of ductile
detailing (Mention Value).
d) Damping factor (Mention Value).
e) Type of soil.
f) Type of structure.
g) Time period for frame structure as per IS:1893.
Wind load for Shed type Building
a) Basic Wind Speed (Mention Value).
b) Probability Factor (k1) (Mention Value).
c) Terrain, Height, Structure Size Factor (k2) (Mention Value).
d) Topography Factor (k3 ) (Mention Value).
Blast load for Control Room shall be as per RRA report (Mention Blast
Pressure).
Load combination shall be as per approved EDB:
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
Foundation design.
3.12.1
3.12.2
3.12.3
3.12.5
3.12.6
3.12.7
3.12.8
3.12.9
4.0
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.1.4
dgar Hales
ele,r.mr,nrd
SR.
NO,
5.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undenakinc0
ANNEXURE-6
OF 6-68-0021
Page 4 of 4
Tick Mark
as per Legend
Date:
Legend :
NA
.0'itia,z1e1. .
s- lgar tfil&,-
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMIT-ED
UndertA
Page 1 of 1
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-7
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
SUB-STRUCTURE
SUPER-STRUCTURE
/
3
Compatibility between pedestal level & anchor bolts with base plate details.
Check whether correct limiting values of slenderness ratios for structural
elements (columns, beams, bracings, etc.) used in design.
Check whether correct effective lengths of structural elements (columns,
beams, bracings, etc.) used in design.
Check whether minimum 90% mass participation achieved (in both
horizontal directions) for calculating seismic forces.
10
11
12
13
14
Date:
Legend :
NA
51.4-4101g16.-;
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(;ost
Page 1 of 2
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-8
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
SUB-STRUCTURE
SUPER-STRUCTURE
Material of construction as per engineering design basis of the project and
departmental guidelines.
Check the application of equipment load (correction, magnitude & location).
'
Live load/ superimposed load considered for respective level/ floor, aircoolers, fire proofing load, etc. where applicable.
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
Whether loading due to one extra floor considered (for future expansion).
Check the estimation of seismic/ wind force to be applied at respective
level/ floor.
Check whether critical design forces from various likely load combinations
have been considered for the design of structural element/ foundation.
Identify critical areas where limiting beam sizes need to be provided for
avoiding any fouling.
Location of braced bay, co-ordinated with Piping. Bracing angle is within
30 & 60. Plan bracing considered.
Check the horizontal (transverse & longitudinal) deflections.
Check the capacity of overhead mono-rails & its location with extent (in &
outside plan dimensions) w.r.t. the respective equipment.
Verify whether all vertical & horizontal piping loads have been correctly &
completely taken care.
Equipment supporting arrangement - check fouling with bottom nozzle or
hood.
Arrangement of intermediate/ secondary beams to clear opening
requirements.
14
15
Compatibility between pedestal level & anchor bolts with base plate details.
16
17
18
19
/0
1I
Joint details:
a) reference standard no. is furnished
b) details for connections not available in standard are furnished
Compatibility between member sizes in General Arrangement
Reinforcement Details (in drawing).
Whether integrated analysis done with equipment/ piping.
&
ias eltq
Ogar taireg
ttl, 01,13, t
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
t
mt. ll+.ertak,,,,p
ANNEXURE-8
OF 6-68-0021
Page 2 of 2
Tick Mark
SR.
NO.
?,-)
-
23
24
as per Legend
Date:
Legend :
NA
1cI Ei ENGINEERS
,fit Ofireg ',pm, INDIA LIMITED
Page 1 of 2
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-9
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
FOUNDATION
SUPER-STRUCTURE
Layout and configuration of pipe rack conforming to piping inputs/
approved equipment layout.
Levels of pipe rack/ tiers conforming to piping inputs/ approved equipment
layout.
Whether load due to one extra tier considered (for future expansion) to be
confirmed by Piping/ PMC.
Location of expansion joints and braced bays coordinated with Piping
department.
Material of construction as per engineering design basis of the project,
including fire-proofing requirements.
Check the loading considered given by piping conforming to the
requirement of design basis, including for fire proofing where applicable.
Check consideration of friction/ anchor/ guide loads as per design basis and
as forwarded by piping.
Check the layout & loading of Air-coolers including supports required for
inlet & outlet piping.
Check the routing of electrical cable trays & instrument duct to be supported
on the pipe rack and their respective loading as per design basis.
Check the horizontal & vertical clearances at road/ railway crossings.
3
4
6
7
8
9
i0
I1
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
&
611faaeitAY16-1% ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IfgarttR.eg
'
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-9
OF 6-68-0021
Page 2 of 2
Tick Mark
as per Legend
24
15
16
27
28
29
Date:
Legend :
NA
el
J1
Ogar ttfReg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
;A Go, ot LJrvIelokr-gj
Page 1 of 1
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-10
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
SUB-STRUCTURE
SUPER-STRUCTURE
8
9
10
Date:
Legend :
NA
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
r31
51=
gZff la
Page
Tick Mark
as per Legend
SUB-STRUCTURE
SUPER-STRUCTURE
Check the system stability & dynamic analysis as per design basis/Job
specification.
Check the correctness in estimation of wind pressure corresponding to right
shape factor for exposed members.
Check the lateral load transfer from gallery to top of trestle.
Check the supporting arrangement of gallery for keeping proper provision
for expansion, check limiting vertical deflection.
1
2
3
4
1 of 1
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-11
OF 6-68-0021
The analysis & design shall conform to the erection scheme being adopted.
Date:
Legend :
NA
ENGINEERS
KR-e-g*iir). INDIA LIMITED
51
1 fa_Je-1
(o,1 inaxl
H1,7,
et,1
Page 1 of 1
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-12
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
I
,
...)
4
5
Date:
Legend :
,46ilfazie-if-,, ENGINEERS
5taar faiter; INDIA LIMITED
Go, ,
Page 1 of 1
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-13
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
,
..)
Date:
Legend :
NA
i~IGieiei
0011,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
f.k.1
irxtii,
Page 1 of 1
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-14
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
Date:
Legend :
INA
41
MD, ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Page 1 of 3
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO,
ANNEXURE-15
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
GENERAL
f
g
i
.1
1
m
2
a
b
mad ENGINEERS
Ogui tVe--E; INDIA LIMITED
,rtfia Undert*.)1
SR.
NO,
ANNEXURE-15
OF 6-.68-0021
Page 2 of 3
Tick Mark
as per Legend
t
u
v
.
retaining
liquid
construction
joints
for
Requirement of water bars at
structures furnished
Requirement of protective painting
Field note for sequence of construction, if adjoining foundations are at
different level
For pump foundations, following field note shall compulsorily be added in
foundation drawings:
"The pump discharge nozzle is facing towards North/East/West/South".
(appropriate direction shall be selected as per layout drawing, in case
discharge is upwards, direction of suction nozzle shall be specified)
ENGINEERS
31
INDIA
LIMITED
ligat rtA,PRI,
r;,:, 04 ,rea. Undertak.g,
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-15
OF 6-68-0021
Page 3 of 3
Tick Mark
as per Legend
Date:
Legend :
NA
ENGINEERS
ladtx-iew,
egKW INDIA LIMITED
of idW.1f,,1,1,,Sfe
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL-STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 1 of 14
litf4bral
fted-ff
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL - STRUCTURAL
4cr Trxr
wrzt
(vackr-fr.a*. wr71-)
LUMP-SUM TURN-KEY WORKS
(L. S. T. K. WORKS)
ilia-WA LTd Pa-liul
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
0 31.07.2013
ISSUED AS SPECIFICATION
GV
AS/RS
PKM
Standards
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
DM
Standards
GM Bureau
Chairman
ENGINEERS
ar fdtle-g',1.--/ INDIA LIMITED
Og-
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 2 of 14
Abbreviations:
1315
CPCIA
EIL
1.1SEG
IS
LSTK
OISD
PCC
PVC
RCC
STD
TMT
Convener:
Mr PK Mittal
Members:
Mr S Debnath
Mr Rajanji Srivastava
Mr PJ Singh
Mr Samir Das
Mr VS Chhaya (Projects)
Mr Ravindra Kumar (Construction)
IIkkjei
ENGINEERS
51garfdrge7, (314C.RFI INDIA LIMITED
,r.24,151
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 3 of 14
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
3.0
MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
4.0
3.1
General
3.2
Water
3.3
3.4
3.5
Cement
3.6
Steel
3.7
Brick
3.8
Stone
3.9
Admixtures
3.10
3.11
10
3.12
PVC Pipes
10
3.13
Wood/ Timber
10
3.14
11
3.15
FaL-G Masonry
11
3.16
Anti-termite Compounds
11
3.17
Poly-sulphide Sealants
11
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
11
4.1
Construction
11
4.2
Tolerances
12
4.3
14
$1=d-ar
tg
CH", ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Govt a, Irt.tha Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 4 of 14
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
The material and construction considerations given hereunder establish the minimum basic
requirements for reinforced cement concrete (RCC), structural steel and masonry structures/
works.
This specification shall be read in conjunction with the Engineering Design Basis (EDB) for
the Job and Standard Specification No. 6-68-0021 for General requirements.
Project specific civil-structural requirements as mentioned in the Engineering Design Basis
(EDB) shall supersede the any such requirements given in this standard specification.
1.2
All codes referred in this document pertain to BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards) publications
and bear prefix IS.
1.3
Whenever any reference to BIS code is made, the same shall be taken as the latest revision
(with all amendments issued there to) on the notified date of submission of tender.
1.4
Apart from the BIS codes mentioned in particular in the various clauses of this document, all
other relevant codes related to the specific job under consideration and/ or referred to in the
above-mentioned codes, shall be followed wherever applicable. Reference to some of the
codes in the various clauses of this document does not limit or restrict the scope of
applicability of other relevant codes.
1.5
In case of any variation/ contradiction between the provisions of BIS codes and the
requirements given hereunder, the provisions given in this document shall have precedence
over all others. In absence of relevant BIS codes, reference to corresponding British or
American codes may be made (in that order of preference).
All material and construction shall strictly conform to the enclosed standards, specifications
and 'specific requirements'. Only if relevant information is not available in these
documents, reference to relevant BIS code shall be made.
2.0
3.0
MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1
General
The minimum requirements of various materials to be used in Civil and Structural works are
as below:
3.2
Water
a)
Water used in construction for all Civil & Structural works shall be clean and free
from injurious amounts of oil, acids, alkalies, organic matters and/ or other harmful
substances which may be deleterious to concrete, masonry or steel. The p11 value of
water sample shall not be less than 6. Potable water will be considered satisfactory.
All requirements of IS:456 have to be met.
b.)
Tests on water samples shall be carried out in accordance with IS:3025 and these shall
fulfil all the guidelines and requirements given in IS:456.
(Mn,a) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Boot of India Undedalong,
c)
3.3.1
General
3.3.3
3.3.4
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 5 of 14
Water for curing shall be of the same quality as used for concreting and masonry
works.
3.3
3.3.2
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
a)
Coarse and Fine aggregates for Civil and Structural Works shall conform in all
respects to IS:383 (Specification for Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural
Sources for Concrete). Aggregates shall be obtained from an approved source known
to produce the same satisfactorily. Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring
(crushed or uncrushed) stones, gravel and sand or a combination thereof. These shall
be chemically inert, hard, strong, dense, durable, clean and free from veins, adherent
coatings, injurious amounts of alkalies, vegetable matter and other deleterious
substances such as iron pyrites, coal, lignite, mica, shale, sea shells etc.
b)
Aggregates which may chemically react with alkalies of cement or might cause
corrosion of the reinforcement shall not be used.
c)
Coarse Aggregates
a)
Coarse aggregates are the aggregates, which are retained on 4.75 mm IS Sieve. It
shall have a specific gravity not less than 2.6 (saturated surface dry basis).
b)
These may be obtained from crushed or uncrushed gravel or stone and may be
supplied as single sized or graded. The grading of the aggregates shall be as per
1S:383 or as required by the mix design, to obtain densest possible concrete.
Fine Aggregates
a)
Fine aggregates are the aggregates which pass through 4.75 mm IS sieve but not
more than ten percent (10%) pass through 150 micron IS sieve. These shall comply
with the requirements of grading zones I, II and III of IS:383. Fine aggregates
conforming to grade zone IV shall not be used for reinforced concrete works.
b)
Fine aggregates shall consist of material resulting from natural disintegration of rock
and which has been deposited by streams or glacial agencies, or crushed stone sand
or gravel sand. Sand from sea shores, creeks or river banks affected by tides, shall not
be used for filling or concrete works.
3.3.5
Storage of Aggregates
a)
Storage of all types of aggregates at the site of work shall be as specified in 1S:4082.
Aggregates shall in no case be stored near excavated earth or directly over ground
surface.
b)
Fine aggregates delivered at the site in wet condition or becoming wet due to rain or
any other means, shall not be used for at least 24 hours. For the use of such
aggregates the contractor shall adjust the water content in accordance with IS:2386 to
achieve the desired mix.
ogilfai56 ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
R(l
Govl ,PI IrOki Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
Page 6 of 14
The sand shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone sand or crushed gravel sand,
manufactured sand or a combination of any of these. The sand shall be hard, durable,
clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and shall not contain the
amount of clay, silt and fine dust more than specified in IS:2116.
b)
The sand shall not contain any harmful impurities such as iron pyrites, alkalis, salts,
coal or other organic impurities, mica, shale or similar laminated materials, soft
fragments, sea shells in such form or in such quantities as to affect adversely the
hardening, strength or durability of the mortar.
c)
The maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in the
sand, when tested in accordance with IS:2386, shall not be more than 5% by mass in
natural sand, or crushed gravel sand or crushed stone sand or manufactured sand. For
organic impurities, when determined in accordance with IS:2386, colour of the liquid
shall be lighter than that indicated by the standard solution specified in IS:2386.
Grading of Sand
The particle size grading of sand for use in mortars shall be within the limits as
specified below:
IS Sieve Designation
(IS:460 Part-1)
4.75 mm
2.36 mm
1.18 mm
600 micron
300 micron
150 micron
b)
3.4.4
6-68-0022
Rev.0
a)
a)
3.4.3
Percentage Passing
(by mass)
100
90 to 100
70 to 100
40 to 100
5 to 70
0 to 15
Reference to method
(IS:2386 Part-1)
In case of sand whose grading falls outside the specified limits due to excess or
deficiency of coarse or fine particles, this shall be processed to comply with the
standard by screening through a suitably sized sieve and/ or blending with required
quantities of suitable sizes of natural sand particles or crushed stone screening which
are by themselves unsuitable. The various sizes of particles of which the sand is
composed shall be uniformly distributed throughout the mass.
The method of sampling shall be in accordance with IS:2430. The amount of material
required for each test shall be as specified in relevant parts of IS:2386. All tests shall
be carried out in accordance with the relevant parts of IS:2386.
b)
e,r-o;)
ENGINEERS
5fgZir idfirdg 'OW INDIA LIMITED
[A l9v1
1771,-.1 ,1,1/2
3.5
111
India lindontakIng)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 7 of 14
Cement
Cement shall be as specified in the Engineering Design Basis.
3.6
Steel
3.6.1
General
All steel bars, sections, plates, and other miscellaneous steel materials, etc. shall be free
from loose mill scales, rust as well as oil, mud, paint or other coatings. The materials,
construction specifications such as dimensions, shape, weight, tolerances, testing etc, for all
materials covered under this section, shall conform to respective BIS codes.
3.6.2
Reinforcement Bars
Reinforcement shall be TMT (Thermo-mechanically treated) bars of minimum Grade
Fe500D (unless specified otherwise in the EDB/ Job Specifications), conforming to IS:1786
and bearing standard mark of the Bureau of Indian Standards.
Corrosion protection to reinforcement bars, if any shall be as specified in the EDB/ Job
Specification.
3.6.3
Structural Steel
Structural Steel shall be of minimum Grade E250A/E250B (unless specified otherwise in the
EDB/ Job Specifications) conforming to IS:2062 and bearing standard mark of the Bureau
of Indian Standards, excluding bars and rods of diameter/ thickness less than 6 mm and
structural (angle) below ISA 50x50x6.
3.6.4
3.6.5
Connection Bolts
Connection bolts shall be FISFG (High Strength Friction Grip) bolts of minimum Property
Class 8.8, material and installation shall comply to requirements of 1S:3757 and IS:4000
respectively. The acceptable methods of tightening the bolts in order of preference are listed
below:
a)
b)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
51g-ar til51-"
eg
1.1,7 ii-01,M1.3,1,-1.,
IA. Govt of
Undeffalong)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 8 of 14
c)
"Turn-of Nut" where tightening is by a standard impact wrench, by turning the nut 1/2
to 1/4 turn beyond the "snug" position. The snug position is that position where the
wrench begins to impact.
d)
"Manual Torque Control" where tightening is by hand wrench equipped with a torque
indicator and calibrated for the desired bolt tension.
All the bolts in a joint shall be tightened to a minimum tension value as per Table 3 of
IS:4000.
Properties of Bolt Class 4.6 wherever specified shall conform to IS:1367. Black hexagonal
nuts and washers wherever specified shall be as per IS:1363.
3.6.6
Anchor Bolts
Material for Anchor Bolts such as bars, washers, nuts, pipe sleeves and plates etc. shall be
as per relevant BIS codes mentioned in the EDB.
3.7
Brick
3.7.1
General
a)
All masonry' works shall be designed in accordance with IS:1077, IS:1905, IS:1597,
IS:2185, IS:4326, IS:12894 and other relevant IS Codes as applicable.
b)
c)
All external brick masonry walls shall be of minimum 230 mm thickness (except for
fire walls).
3.8
Stone
3.8.1
General
All Stones used for masonry works shall conform to the requirements of following BIS
codes:
a)
b)
c)
3.8.2
IS:1123
IS:1127
IS:1129
Quality of Stones
d)
Stones shall be hard, dense, strong, sound, durable, clean and uniform in colour.
These shall also be free from veins, adherent coatings, injurious amounts of alkalies,
vegetable matters and other deleterious substances such as iron pyrites, coal, lignite,
mica, sea shells etc. As far as possible, stones from one single quarry shall be used for
any one work. The strength of stones should be adequate to carry the imposed load
and shall meet all the requirements of IS:1905, taking into account the appropriate
crushing strength of stone and type of the mortar used. The percentage of water
absorption, when tested in accordance with IS:1124, shall not exceed 5%.
e)
The length of the stone shall not exceed 3 times the height. Width of stone on base
shall not be less than 1 50 mm and in no case exceed -1/4th thickness of the wall. Height
of the stone shall not be more than 300 mm.
3.9
Admixtures
3.9.1
General Requirements
a)
All concrete admixtures shall comply with the following Indian standards:
Ail.v ENGINEERS
oot
Oga taitr,*ar INDIA LIMITED
ih Govt of India Undeltalong)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 9 of 14
i.
IS:2645
ii.
IS:9103
3.9.2
b)
No admixture shall impair the durability of the concrete nor combine with the
ingredients to form harmful compounds, nor increase the risk of corrosion of
reinforcement. Use of admixtures shall not reduce the dry density of concrete. Once
the proportion of admixtures has been established, strict check shall be maintained
not to alter the proportions of ingredients and water-cement ratio of the Design Mix
during execution.
c)
The chloride contents in admixtures shall not exceed 2% by mass of the admixture or
0.03% by mass of the cement.
d)
Admixtures which do not meet the requirements stipulated in this document shall not
be used.
3.9.3
3.10
The permeability of the specimen with the admixture shall be less than half of the
permeability with a similar specimen without the use of these compounds. These
compounds shall be used in such proportion as recommended by manufacturer but in
no case it shall exceed 3% by weight of cement.
b)
The initial setting time of the cement with the use of these compounds shall not be
less than 30 minutes and final setting time shall not be more than 10 hours. Tests
shall be carried out in accordance with 1S:4031.
c)
Compressive strength of the specimen at 3 days shall not be less than 160 kg/cm2 nor
80% of the 3 days compressive strength of mortar cubes prepared with same cement
and sand only, whichever is higher. Similarly compressive strength at 7 days shall not
be less than 220 kg/cm' nor less than 80% of the 7 days compressive strength
prepared with the same cement and sand only, whichever is higher. The test to
determine the compressive strength shall conform to IS:403 I .
PVC water bars shall be used in reinforced concrete construction of liquid retaining
structures or any other structure to safeguard them from hydrostatic pressure and
water leakage and any relative movement between two parts of the structure due to
thermal loading shrinkage or differential movement of foundations. These shall be
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(:ot nt (nitia Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 10 of 14
preformed and shall provide a permanent water tight seal along the entire joint in the
poured concrete structures. These shall also be flexible enough to withstand
deflection/ displacements at joints arising due to variation of temperatures or
settlement of foundations.
Performance requirements of PVC water bars shall meet the requirements of
IS:12200. These shall be of an approved make and of ribbed/ serrated/ plain type with
a bulb at the centre. The thickness and width of water bars shall in no case be less
than 5 mm and 150 mm respectively. However, for concrete sections greater than 300
mm thick, the width of water bars shall not be less than 230 mm.
b)
3.11
PVC Pipes
PVC Pipes shall conform to the requirements of IS:4985.
3.13
Wood/ Timber
a)
Wood recommended for platforms of cold vessels or below cold vessels/ exchangers
shall be hard and shall be of group A, grade I, and shall have safe permissible stress of
7 N/mm' in compression, perpendicular to grains on outside location as per IS:883.
General characteristics like durability, treatability etc. shall conform to IS:883 and
IS:3629.
b)
Timber required to be used for form work shall be fairly dry before use. It should
maintain its shape during the use and even when it comes into contact with moisture
from the concrete. Storage of Wood/ Timber shall be as per the requirements of
IS:4082.
c)
For proper identification and selection of suitable timber for form work, following
codes shall be referred.
i. Classification of commercial timbers & their zonal distribution
ii. Specification for ballies for general purposes
iii.Specification for Ply wood for concrete shuttering work
IS:399
1S:3337
IS:4990
(4701,
- ENGINEERS
p*
3.14
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 11 of 14
: Grade C(5.0)
: Grade A(5.5) closed cavity
The nominal dimensions (length, height & width), density & compressive strength of solid
& hollow concrete block masonry units shall be in conformance to IS:2185 (Part-1)
corresponding to the above mentioned grades.
Concrete block masonry of following thicknesses shall preferably be used:
a) 100 mm thickness
b) 200 mm thickness
c) 400 mm thickness (fire walls)
3.15
FaL-G Masonry
Pulverise Fuel Ash Lime Gypsum (commonly known as FaL-G) units shall be of Class 5 as
per IS:12894, however quantity of Gypsum (80% purity tested as per IS:1288) shall be 5%.
The nominal dimensions (length, height & width), density & compressive strength of FaLG block masonry units shall be in conformance to IS:12894 corresponding to the above
mentioned class.
FaL-G masonry of using modular units shall be of 180 mm thickness.
3.16
Anti-termite Compounds
Chloropyrifos emulsifiable concentrates (1%) conforming to IS:8944 shall be used for
treatment of soil for protection of buildings against attack by subterranean termites.
3.17
Poly-sulphide Sealants
All Poly-sulphide Sealants shall conform to IS:12118. Test conditions and requirements
shall be as given in the above referred BIS code.
4.0
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
4.1
Construction
4.1.1
All concrete works shall be carried out as per the provisions of IS:456, IS:3370, IS:2974 and
other relevant BIS Codes. Concrete mix proportioning and design mix; sampling and
strength test of concrete, production and control of concrete, tolerances and placing of
reinforcement and for cover; transporting, placing, compacting and curing etc, inspection
and testing of structure (including requirement of non-destructive testing) shall be as
specified in IS:456.
4.1.2
Continuous concreting shall be clone for structures supporting dynamic equipment as per the
provisions of IS:2974.
4.1.3
The damp proof course shall be laid in two layers of equal thickness and each layer given
two coats of hot bitumen on top (grade VG 10 conforming to IS:73) at the rate of 1.7 kg/m2.
Dry sharp sand shall be sprinkled evenly over the top layer of bitumen before hardening.
4.1.4
Form work and stripping of form work shall be as per the provisions of IS: 456.
(oz-14 ENGINEERS
lear fafift INDIA LIMITED
IA Goa rn 111010 Undegakingl
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 12 of 14
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
Fabrication of all structural steel works shall be carried out as per the provisions of IS: 800/
IS:801/ IS:802/ IS:806 and other relevant BIS codes. Fabrication shall include cleaning,
straightening, cutting, bending, holding, bolting, welding, machining, painting, marking,
assembling, erecting, inspecting and testing etc. Welding procedure and welder qualification
shall be as per IS: 800 and/ or referenced BIS codes only.
4.1.8
Erection of all structural steel works including supply of plant & equipment, storing and
handling, setting out, field connections, field welding and security during erection shall
conform to IS:800/ IS:801/ IS:802/ IS:806.
4.1.9
All masonry works shall be carried out as per the provisions of IS:1597/ IS:2185/ IS:2212/
IS:4326 and other relevant BIS codes.
4.1.10
Construction of all other items of works shall conform to relevant Indian Standards and
sound engineering practices.
4.1.11
The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete safety pertaining to all construction
works.
4.2
Tolerances
4.2.1
The limits of dimensional tolerances for Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete Structures
shall be as follows:
a.
b.
iii.
Thickness
-12 mm to +50 mm
0.02 times the width
of footing in the
direction of deviation
but not more than 50
mm
0.05 times the
specified thickness
d.
e.
6mm
9 min
12 mm
+ 6mm
6 mm
9 mm
12 mm
6 mm
Deviation in squareness shall be measured taking the longer of two adjacent sides
as the base line. The shorter side shall not vary in its distance from a
5-1
11aelti. 4111* ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 13 of 14
perpendicular so that the difference between the greatest and shortest dimensions
exceeds 6mm. For this purpose, any error due to lack of straightness shall be
ignored. Squareness shall be checked with respect to the straight lines that are
most nearly parallel with the features being checked. When the nominal angle is
other than 90 degrees, the included angle between check lines shall be varied
accordingly.
f.
Deviation in twists shall be within a limit such that any corner shall not be more
than the limit given below from the plane containing other three corners:
i. Up to 600min wide and up to 6m in length : 6 mm
ii. over 600mm wide and for any length
: 12 mm
g.
Maximum deviation in flatness from a 1.5 m straight edge placed in any position
on a nominally plain surface shall not exceed 6mm.
42.2
4.2.2.1
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Notes:
I. Tolerance specified for out-ofplumbness should he read in conjunction with
Deviation in straightness.... ' & 'Difference in the erected positions.... '.
'II' is the column height in ',mi.
3. Tolerance limits as given under clause 4.2.2.1 above for steel structures are
applicable to concrete columns/ pedestals also.
4.1.2 1Trusses
a.
b.
z~r fairez--
03411,,) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
1A (Awl 11 India llotlertaktrop
c.
d.
e.
4.2.2.3
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 14 of 14
+10 mm
+5 mm
+1 /1200 of span of truss in mm or
20mm, whichever is less
d.
e.
4.3
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
Shift in the centre line of crane rail with respect to [web thickness of
centre line of web of gantry girder
girder(mm)+2mm] / 2
Shift of alignment of crane rail (in plan) with 15m m
respect to true axis of crane rail at any point
Deviation in crane track gauge with respect to true
gauge
i.
For track gauge up-to and including 15m
mm
ii.
For track gauge more than 15m
45+0.25(S-15)] subject to
maximum +10 mm, where S in
metres is true gauge
Difference in level between crane track rails
(across the bay) at
i.
Supports of gantry girders
15 mm
ii.
Mid span of gantry girders
20 mm
Relative shift of crane rail surfaces (at joint) in plan
2 mm
and elevation
Sitiazi
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
212Zfire ..3457,
17
-111ch
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 1 of 16
"trITOn 7-4
Wrzi
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
-,111
firwr afT9.449.
(111c:r)1611-1 TOTruff aT179)
PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE)
23.09.2013
02.05.2001
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
AJS
OY
l
3)41k
PKM
SC
DM
VK
ND
YPC
PKM
SC
RPM
SKP
SCJ
Prepared
by
MI
Standards
Checked Committee
by
Convenor
GM
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Llei
Igar tafgrdg
,12,
7,171,,F11
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE)
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 2 of 16
Abbreviations:
AS
:
ASTM :
BS
DFT
IS
OISD :
UL
QAP
Australian Standard
American Society for Testing & Materials
British Standard
Dry Film Thickness
Indian Standards
Oil Industry Safety Directorate
Underwriters' Laboratory
Quality Assurance Plan
Members :
Special Invitees:
Mr. P.P. Lahiri (SMMS)
Mr. Prasenjit Saha (SMMS)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undeftalong)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE)
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 3 of 16
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
.4
2.0
REFERENCES
3.0
DESIGN BASIS
4.0
5.0
SURFACE PREPARATION
6.0
7.0
APPLICATION METHOD
8.0
10
9.0
10
10.0
TESTING REQUIREMENTS
10
11.0
PAYMENT
11
ANNEXURES
ATTACHMENT
12-15
..16
k31
fg-Tx id5teg
14iRR
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Go vi of India Undeitaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE)
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 4 of 16
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements of passive fire protection of external steel
structures against hydrocarbon pool fire. Structural steel members shall be fire proofed for 2
hours such that the protected steel substrate temperature shall be restricted to 538C, whereas in
case of equipment skirts/ saddles/ supports the steel temperature shall be restricted to 427C.
Following fireproofing materials and systems have been covered in this standard:
a) Type-I : In-situ cement concrete of minimum M30 Grade (for application up to 1.8m
from grade level for steel structures)
b) Type-II: Spray applied vermiculite based lightweight cementitiuos concrete (for application
above 1.8m of grade level for steel structures)
c) Type-Ill: Spray applied vermiculite based lightweight cementitiuos concrete (for application
over equipment skirts/ saddles/ supports)
2.0
REFERENCES
3.0
DESIGN BASIS
Fire resistance of a material is defined by fire rating, evaluated through a fire test based on
applied thickness and time taken to reach the defined critical steel temperature. Fire rating
adopted in the present standard is based on UL-1709 rapid rise fire tests of protection materials
for structural steel, conducted by Underwriters Laboratory, USA. In this test, fire resistance of a
material is evaluated on a W10x49 steel column as per UL-1709 fire curve and fire rating is
published in a UL design number under XR category for thickness and time. In addition to the
fire rating, under this test, material for exterior use is also evaluated for accelerated ageing, high
humidity, salt spray, wet-freeze-dry cycling, acid spray, solvent spray etc.
eit4
051-eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov( of India Undertaking
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE)
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 5 of 16
c) Type-III : For equipment skirts/ saddles/ supports (which shall be protected for 2 hours from
reaching critical temperature 427C), 2 hours fire rating as per UL design is not
adequate as the UL-1709 test is based on 538C critical temperature. Therefore for
the required fire protection from reaching 427C, higher thickness shall be
necessary. For this, fireproof thickness corresponding to 3 hours fire rating as per
respective UL design number under UL-1709 (XR category) shall be adopted
subject to a minimum of 30mm.
4.0
Primer
Reinforcing system
Fireproof coating as per UL-1709
Curing
Water shed sealing at terminating edges/ metal joints
Weather barrier finish coat
b) In-situ cement concrete fireproofing system shall have following compatible components:
4.1
Primer
Reinforcing system
Cement concrete
Curing
Water shed sealing at terminating edges/ metal joints
Weather barrier finish coat
The material shall be factory-blended, supplied in single component pre-mixed dry form, nonflaking and non-dusting suitable for spray-application, with added mold and fungi inhibitor.
Material shall not contain asbestos & mineral wool and shall not contain more than 1% Sulphate
(expressed in SO3). The material shall be free from toxicity release when subjected to heat.
In addition to the UL-1709 certificate, the contractor shall supply test certificate covering the
information for the supplied batches of material as per Attachment-I.
Fire proofing materials shall be stored in well ventilated, dry place away from source of heat &
direct sunlight. Special storage requirements such as temperature, humidity, stacking height, etc.
as per manufacturer's specifications shall be ensured.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
05f-e'-g
17-11.eM cvemre as1J9gui,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Indo Untletlaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE)
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 6 of 16
4.2 Reinforcement (for both Vermiculite based cementitious and In-situ concrete)
4.2.1 Expanded Metal Steel Sheet/ Lath
Expanded metal steel sheet shall conform to IS:412, galvanized (having minimum zinc coating
of 250 g/m2) and shall weigh minimum 1.84 Kg/m2. Size of the mesh shall be 4.5x13.5mm.
4.2.2 Wire Fabric
Welded wire fabric to be used as reinforcement, shall conform to IS:1566 and shall be post weld
hot dipped galvanized having minimum zinc coating of 250 g/in' of uncoated wire surface.
Mesh size shall be 50mmx5Omm and thickness of wire shall be 2mm (Minimum).
4.2.3 Attachments
a) Mild Steel Tie Wire
MS Tie wires shall be minimum 16 SWG and galvanized (having minimum zinc coating of
100 g/m2).
b) Mild Steel Nuts
MS Nuts shall conform to IS:1367 and IS:2585.
c) Cover plates
Cover plates shall conform to IS:2062 Grade-A/ BR.
d) Cover blocks
Cover blocks shall be prepared in cement coarse sand mortar (1:3) with minimum
50mmx50mm size of thickness equal to half of the fireproofing thickness with MS Tie wire
of sufficient length protruding from them for tying with the wire fabric.
4.3 Curing Compounds (for both Vermiculite based cementitious and In-situ concrete)
Membrane curing may be used in lieu of moist curing with the permission of the
Engineer-in-Charge. Such compounds shall be compatible and applied to all exposed surfaces by
spraying or brushing as soon as possible after the material has set. Minimum film thickness of
such curing compounds shall be as per the recommendation of the manufacturer so as to obtain
an efficiency of 90% as specified by BS-8110. This film of curing compound shall be fully
removed from the surface after the specified curing period.
4.4 Water Shed Sealing at Terminating Edges/ Metal Joints (for both Vermiculite based
cementitious and In-situ concrete)
All termination of the fireproofing and steel junctions shall be sealed by non-bituminous
polysulfide or silicon rubber mastic sealant. The sealing compound shall be compatible and
approved by fireproofing material supplier.
4.5 Weather Barrier Finish Coat (for both Vermiculite based cementitious and In-situ
concrete)
a) Sealer Coat
A sealer coat of epoxy polyamide shall be applied over the fireproofing surface as a base for
the finish coat. The sealing compound shall be compatible and approved by fireproofing
material supplier.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
el
5fgaf fa5teg
(H10 2)-A)a)r, ,n1.3nliwii
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov) Al India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE)
b) Finish Coat
The finish coat shall be pre-qualified for coating system No. 1 of NORSOK Standard
M-501. Two coats of acrylic elastomeric or polyurethane coating shall be used as finish
coat. The sealing compound shall be compatible and approved by fireproofing material
supplier.
4.6 Water
taf51-1-dg
451 3,1,
11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE)
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 8 of 16
Metal sheet shall be kept in position true to line and face, and shall be attached firmly to
structural steel member by tack welding or with the help of clips and MS Tie wire at 300mm
centre to centre. Minimum lap of 75mm shall be provided wherever required, however laps
shall be avoided at bends. Metal sheet shall be supported with 3mm thick stiffener at the centre
in case depth of steel section exceeds 600mm. These stiffeners shall be placed at 600mm c/c
(maximum). Strands of the expanded metal steel sheet shall slope inwards & downwards.
5.4 Placement of Wire Fabric
Wire fabric shall be placed in the middle of coated material thickness. It shall be bent
confirming with outlines of finished encasement and rigidly secured in place by tie wire with all
the nuts or the cover blocks as the case may be. Minimum lap at ends and sides shall be 100mm
and lapped wire fabric shall be tied firmly.
6.0 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROOFING
6.1.2 The coating shall be non corrosive to the steel members & shall not be affected by
environmental conditions, whether natural or from local leaks, spillage or pollution. It shall also
be asbestos free.
6.1.3 The coating shall be able to withstand both thermal shock and impingement of water from fire
hoses and/or monitors.
6.2.2 Steel structures shall be fire proofed with concrete up to a minimum height of 1.8m from grade
for protection against mechanical damage or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. A suitable
slope of about 30 shall be provided at the junction of concrete and vermiculite based
cementitious fireproofing material to avoid accumulation of water.
6.2.3 Concrete shall be poured into well made forms properly oiled and made to correct dimensions.
Concrete shall be vibrated as necessary to ensure smooth surface, free from voids and
irregularities. Any defects, honeycomb etc. shall be made good by contractor at his own cost.
af-aeley
Ogzir
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt Al India Undertaking]
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE)
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 9 of 16
6.2.4 Self Compacting Concrete (SCC) conforming to EIL Specification No. 6-68-0019 can also be
used which do not require vibrators.
'e-1
5igal oienfre
25teg
14O771
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Covl of India Lindeflaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE)
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 10 of 16
7.1.5 Parameters like water quality, % water addition, wet density check at mixer discharge and spray
head, slump test and other operating parameters like air pressure etc. shall be checked during
application to ensure achievement of specified quality parameters.
7.1.6 Minimum thickness of fire proofing coating as specified under clause 3.1 shall be maintained.
7.1.7 Application of mixed vermiculite based cementitious coating shall not be carried out if the air
temperature or the temperature of the surface to be fire proofed is 4C or less. Provision shall be
made for adequate ventilation during and after application, until the coating is dry.
7.1.8 All patching of damaged fireproofing work shall be done by the contractor certified by the
fireproofing material vendor.
8.0 SCAFFOLDING & FORM WORK
8.1 The Contractor shall arrange all approaches, scaffolding, stair ways, ladder, working platform
etc, for carrying out the entire works safely. The working area shall be neatly maintained and all
the facilities required by Engineer-in-Charge for proper supervision of the work shall be
provided. In case, any special precaution is needed for the safety of the structure till the
completion of application, the Contractor shall make and provide all such arrangement to the
complete satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge and shall remove the same after completion of
works.
8.2 Form work shall be adequately supported and braced to protect against deformation on account
of vibration during the application. Forms shall be oiled, dampened and cleaned before use. All
other requirements pertaining to the form work shall be as per EIL specification No. 6-68-0004.
9.0 FINISHING AND JOINT SEALING
9.1 Weather Barrier Finish Coat
In-situ concrete/ Vermiculite based cementitious fireproof coating shall be protected from
weather damage by means of suitable coating. The weather barrier coat shall be applied after full
curing (after a gap of min 28 days) and drying of the fire proofing coating. A sealer coat of
epoxy polyamide @ 50-7511 DFT shall be applied over the fireproofing surface as a base for the
finish coat. The finish coat shall be UV resistant, suitable to withstand mechanical abrasion/ air
erosion, shall be pre-qualified for coating system No.1 of NORSOK Standard M-501. Two coats
of acrylic elastomeric or polyurethane coating shall be used as finish coat @ 100-125 DFT per
coat. Number of coats shall be increased in case desired DFT not achieved. The coating system
for finish coat shall be compatible and approved by fireproofing material vendor.
9.2 Water Shed Sealing at Terminating Edges/ Metal Joints
All termination of vermiculite based cementitious fireproofing and steel junctions shall be
sloped to shed water and sealed by non-bituminous polysulfide or silicon rubber mastic sealant
to prevent water ingress into the fireproofing from these joints. The sealing shall be applied by
cutting a U shaped groove approx 10mm deep and 10mm wide in to the fireproofing
immediately adjacent to the junction. The sealing compound shall be approved by fireproofing
material vendor.
10.0 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
10.1 For Vermiculite Based Cementitious Fireproof Coating
Test samples shall be taken during application of coating, which shall be tested for bulk density
and compressive strength as per applicable standards. Hardness of the finish surface after curing
shall be measured by Shore D Durometer.
Test results shall comply with the requirements as mentioned in Attachment-I.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Ogzir fai4feg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gov( of /flth..1 Uncieltakingi
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE)
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 11 of 16
Testing of specimens and their Acceptance criteria shall be as per EIL specification No.
6-68-0004.
11.0 PAYMENT
11.1 Payment shall be made on square metre (m2 ) basis measured at the periphery of the actual
finished work or as calculated from construction drawing whichever is less.
11.2 The rate quoted shall be inclusive of all labour, material, formwork, plant & tools etc. required
for the successful and satisfactory completion of work including curing, curing compound,
admixtures, all cleaning operations before and after the work, preparation of the surface as
specified, primer paint to MS nuts and affected surfaces of members due to welding and
applying the primer coat if recommend by the manufacturer compatible with the primer already
applied, finishing the surface smooth, painting the surface with sealer coat and weather barrier
finish coats & sealing the joints with sealing compounds, providing required access, working
platforms, props, scaffolding and other safety measures including their removal after
completion.
11.3 The rate shall also be inclusive of supplying and welding of nuts, wherever required on
Structural Steel and equipment skirts/ saddles/ legs/ supports and fixing of reinforcement with
nuts/ cover blocks by using tying wire, wrapping of tying wire around metal sheet for holding
the reinforcement over cover blocks, supplying and fixing of metal sheet/lath, wire fabric, cover
plates, stiffeners, cover blocks and other required accessories for satisfactory completion of the
work as specified and directed.
11.4 The rates quoted shall be inclusive of the tests specified and directed to establish the quality and
strength of materials.
$1g- ii fa51&
- g
(441,
!fl
.3tRNI)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undellaking,
INSULATION
(TYP.)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION NO
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 12 of 16
ANNEXURE-1
TANGENT LINE
SUPPORT RING
(BY VESSEL FABRICATOR)
REINFORCEMENT (TYP.)
(TYP.)
SUPPORT RING
(BY VESSEL FABRICATOR)
TANGENT LINE
30'
REINFORCEMENT (TYP.)
FIRE PROOF COATING
MATERIAL (TYP.)
/1
SUPPORT RING
TANGENT LINE
30'
FIRE PROOF COATING
MATERIAL (TYP.)
REINFORCEMEIIT (TYP.)
zi
Ifg211051
-eg
'
tam e1eDF
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
t15139-07i
ANNEXURE-2
INSULATION
INSULATION
b()
TANGENT
LINE
INSULATION
TANGENT
TANGENT
LEG SUPPORT
LINE
TOP OF
M.S. PLATE
M.S. PLATE
M.S. PLATE
REINFORCEMENT
AJ
REINFORCEMENT
FIRE PROOFING
OATING MATERIAL
(TYP.)
LEG SUPPORT
ALROUND (TYP)
3N
2N
PIPE LEG
TANGENT
TANGENT
LINE
LINE
REINFORCEMENT
FIRE PROOFING
COATING MATERIAL
(TYP.)
FIRE PROOFING
COATING MATERIAL
(TYP.)
TANGENT
LINE
REINFORCEMENT
COATING MATERIAL
(TYP.)
REINFORCEMENT
LEG SUPPORT
LEG SUPPORT
2N
R.S.JOIST (ISMB) LEG
PIPE LEG
VESSEL SHELL
M.S. NUTS
(BY VESSEL FABRICATOR)
(TYP)
(TYP.)
SECTION 1 1
Format Nn e-on-ooni-F1 RPv
SECTION 2-2
REINFORCEMENT
(TYP.)
SECTION 3-3
Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsprvrl
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Igaitrag
crire-n efeamedstarekru
ANNEXURE-3
FIRE PROOFING
COATING MATERIAL
REINFORCEMENT
(TYP.)
COVER BLOCKS
COVER BLOCKS
EXPANDED METAL
STEEL SHEET
ow
II
[ISECTIONS]
FIRE PROOFING
COATING MATERIAL
[CHANNELS]
EXPANDED METAL
STEEL SHEET
REINFORCEMENT
COVER BLOCKS
ANGLE BRACING
CHANNEL BOX
ENGINEERS
1 Elf5leb-w INDIA LIMITED
4-IER erearle 05139-0.1)
ANNEXURE -4
REINFORCEMENT
(TYP.)
w
1:1
FIRE PROOFING
COATING MATERIAL
WATER SHED
SEALING
(TYP.)
EXPANDED METAL
STEEL SHEET
tf
COVER BLOCKS
COVER BLOCKS
3THK STIFFENER FOR
MEMBER DEPTH >600
0 600c/c
[FOR CHANNELS]
[FOR ISECTIONS]
COVER BLOCKS
tf
tf
COVER BLOCKS
Fnrmat No
RPV n
$14-ar 25teg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Go11 of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
PASSIVE FIRE PROOFING
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 16 of 16
ATTACHMENT-I
A) FIREPROOFING MATERIAL DATA TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR TO
SPECIFY
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
CHARACTERISTICS
LIMITING
VALUES
STANDARDS
UL 1709
kg/m3
kg/m3
kg/cm2
kg/cm2
kPa
W/mK
gm/mm2
gm/mm2
400
700-800
25-40
20-25
500
Pass
40 min
0.19
0
0
0
0
Pass
<1%
ASTM E605
ASTM E761
ASTM D790
ASTM E736
ASTM E760
ASTM D2240
ASTM C177
ASTM E84
ASTM E84
ASTM E859
ASTM E937
ASTM G21
UNIT
UL design number
Manufacturer's certificate of
authorization submitted (in
case application by a
contractor other than
fireproofing material vendor)
Fireproofing material is
covered under UL follow up
service (products having UL
mark/ sticker on packing)
Loose material density
Applied dry density
Compressive Strength
Flexural strength
Bond Strength
Bond Impact
Hardness (Shore-D) 28 days
Thermal conductivity at 20C
Flame spread
Smoke development
Air erosion
Corrosion
Fungal Resistance
Sulphate content
(S03%)
CONTRACTOR
TO SPECIFY
XR
Date :
(Contractor's signature with seal)
aarn 122
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
51
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 87
WkcIT
3T4tT9' irq
26/02/2014
SM
RKD
SC
19/12/2012
SM
SM
RKD
DM
13/02/2008
AS
RK
SCB
VC
17/07/2007
AS
MPJ
VNP
VC
11/08/2005
MPJ
MPJ
VNP
VJN
Checked by
Standards
Comm ittee
Convenor
Rev
Date
Purpose
Prepared by
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 87
Abbreviations:
AERB
ANSI
BARC
BS
EIL
ELCB
EPC
EPCC
ESI
GCC
GM
GTAW
HOD
HSE
HV
IS
IE
JSA
LOTO
LPG
LSTK
MV
PPE
RCM
ROW
SCC
SLI
TBM
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Members :
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 87
CONTENTS
CLAUSE
TITLE
PAGE NO.
1.0
2.0
Scope
References
5
5
3.0
3.2
3.3
5
5
5
3.1.3
Indemnification
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.1.8
Awareness
Fire prevention & First-Aid
9
9
3.1.9
3.1.10
3.1.11
Documentation
Audit
Meetings
9
10
10
3.1.12
11
3.1.13
Penalty
11
3.1.14
Accident/Incident investigation
14
House Keeping
HSE Measures
3.3.1
Construction Hazards
3.3.2
Accessibility
14
15
15
16
3.3.3
16
3.3.4
Working at height
17
3.3.5
Scaffoldings
18
3.3.6
Electrical installations
19
3.3.7
Welding/Gas cutting
21
3.3.8
22
3.3.9
3.3.10
Occupational Health
Hazardous substances
22
23
3.3.11
23
3.3.12
3.3.13
3.3.14
3.3.15
3.3.16
3.3.17
3.3.18
Radiation exposure
Explosives/Blasting operations
Demolition/Dismantling
Road Safety
Welfare measures
Environment Protection
Rules & Regulations
23
24
24
24
25
25
26
Contd to page 4
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 87
4.0
3.3.19
Weather Protection
3.3.20
Communication
3.3.21
Confined Space Entry
3.3.22
Heavy Lifts
3.3.23
Key performance indicators
3.3.24
Unsuitable Land Conditions
3.3.25
Under Water Inspection
3.3.26
Excavation
3.4
Tool Box talks
3.5
Training & Induction Programme
3.6
Additional safety requirements for working Inside a running
3.7
Self Assessment and Enhancement
3.8
HSE Promotion
3.9
LOTO for isolation of energy source
Details of HSE Management System by Contractor
4.1
On Award of Contract
4.2
During Job Execution
4.3
During short listing of the sub-contractors
Records
5.0
Appendices
1.
Standards/Codes on HSE
2.
Details of First AID Box
3.
Types of Fire Extinguishers & their Appln.
4.
Indicative List of statutory Acts & Rules
5.
Construction Hazards and their mitigation
6.
Training subjects / topics
7.
Construction Power Board ( typ)
8.
List of HSE procedures
Attachments (Reporting Formats)
I.
Safety Walk through Report
II.
Accident/Incident Report
III.
Suppl. Accident/Incident Investigation Report
IV.
Near Miss Incident Report/Dangerous occurrence
V.
Monthly HSE Report
VI.
Permit for Working at height
VII.
Permit for Working in Confined Space
VIII.
Permit for Radiation work
IX.
Permit for Demolishing/ Dismantling
X
Daily Safety Checklist
XI
Housekeeping assessment & compliance
XII
Inspection of temporary electrical booth / installation
XIII
Inspection for scaffolding
XIV
Permit for erection / modification & dismantling of
scaffolding
XV
Permit for heavy lift/critical erection
XVI
Permit Energy Isolation & De-Isolation
XVI
Permit for Excavation
26
26
27
27
27
28
28
28
29
30
31
32
32
32
33
33
34
35
Appendix-A
Appendix-B
Appendix-C
Appendix-D
Appendix-E
Appendix-F
Appendix-G
Appendix-H
HSE-1 Rev.0
HSE-2 Rev.0
HSE-3 Rev.0
HSE-4 Rev.0
HSE-5 Rev.0
HSE-6 Rev.0
HSE-7 Rev.0
HSE-8 Rev.0
HSE-9 Rev.0
HSE-10 Rev.0
HSE-11 Rev.0
HSE-12 Rev.0
HSE-13 Rev.0
HSE-14 Rev.0
HSE-15 Rev.0
HSE-16 Rev 0
HSE-17 Rev 0
1.0
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 5 of 87
SCOPE
This specification establishes the Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) management
requirement to be complied by Contractors/Vendors including their sub-contractors/sub vendors
during construction.
This specification is not intended to replace the necessary professional judgment needed to
design & implement an effective HSE system for construction activities and the contractor is
expected to fulfill HSE requirements in this specification as a minimum. It is expected that
contractor shall implement best HSE practices beyond whatever are mentioned in this
specification.
Requirements stipulated in this specification shall supplement the requirements of HSE
Management given in relevant Act(s)/legislations, General Conditions of Contract (GCC),
Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) and Job (Technical) Specifications. Where different
documents stipulate different requirements, the most stringent shall apply.
2.0
REFERENCES
The document should be read in conjunction with following:
-
3.0
3.1
Management Responsibility
3.1.1
3.1.2
Management System
The HSE management system of the Contractor shall cover the HSE requirements &
commitments to fulfill them, including but not limited to what are specified under clause 1.0
and 2.0 above. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of its site specific HSE Plan from EIL /
Owner prior to commencement of any site works. Corporate as well as Site management of the
Contractor shall ensure compliance of their HSE Plan at work sites in its entirety & in true
spirit.
3.1.3
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 6 of 87
Indemnification
Contractor shall indemnify & hold harmless, Owner/EIL & their representatives, free from any
and all liabilities arising out of non-fulfillment of HSE requirements or its consequences.
3.1.4
Safety Steward
For every 250 workmen, one safety steward shall be deployed.
As a minimum, he shall preferably possess School leaving Certificate (of Class XII with
Physics & Chemistry etc.) and trained in fire-fighting as well as in safety/occupational
health related subjects, with minimum two year of practical experience in construction
work environment and preferably have adequate knowledge of the language spoken by
majority of the workers at the construction site.
b)
Safety Supervisor
For every 500workmen, one safety Supervisor shall be deployed.
As a minimum, he shall possess a recognized Degree in Science (with Physics &
Chemistry) or a diploma in Engg. or Tech. with minimum Two years of practical
experience in construction work environment and should possess requisite skills to deal
with construction safety & fire related day-to-day issues.
c)
(ii)
(iii)
Alternately
(i)
Person possessing Graduation Degree in Science with Physics & Chemistry and
degree or diploma in Industrial Safety (from any Indian institutes recognized by
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 7 of 87
AICTE or State Council of Tech. Education of any Indian State) with practical
experience of working in a building, plant or other construction works (as Safety
Officer, in line with Indian Factories Act, 1958) for a period of not less than five
years, may be considered as Safety Officer, in case Owner/Client of the project
agrees for /approves the same.
d)
HSE In-Charge
In case there is more than one Safety Officer at any project construction site, one of them,
who is senior most by experience (in HSE discipline), may be designated as HSE InCharge. Duties & responsibilities of such person shall be commensurate with that of
relevant statute and primarily to coordinate with top management of Client and contractors.
In case the statutory requirements i.e. State or Central Acts and / or Rules as applicable like
the Building and Other Construction Workers Regulation of Employment and Conditions
of Service- Act,1996 or State Rules (wherever notified), the Factories Act, 1948 or Rules
(wherever notified), etc. are more stringent than above clarifications, the same shall be
followed.
Contractors shall ensure physical availability of safety personnel at the place of specific
work location, where Hot Work Permit is required / granted. No work shall be started at
any of the project sites until above safety personnel & concerned Site Engineer of
Contractor are physically deployed at site. The Contractor shall submit a HSE organogram
clearly indicating the lines of responsibility and reporting system and elaborate the
responsibilities of safety personnel in their HSE Plan.
The Contractor shall verify & authenticate credentials of such safety personnel and furnish
Bio-Data/ Resume/ Curriculum Vitae of the safety personnel as above for EIL/Owners
approval, at least 1 month before the mobilization. The Contractor, whenever required,
shall arrange submission of original testimonials/certificates of their Safety personnel, to
EIL/Owner (for verification/scrutiny, etc.)
Imposition / Realization of penalty shall not absolve the Contractor from his/her
responsibility of deploying competent safety officer at site.
Adequate planning and deployment of safety personnel shall be ensured by the Contractor
so that field activities do not get affected because of non-deployment of competent &
qualified safety people in appropriate numbers.
3.1.5
Implementation, Inspection/Monitoring
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for planning, reporting, implementing and
monitoring all HSE requirements and compliance of all laws & statutory requirements.
The Contractor shall also ensure that the HSE requirements are clearly understood &
implemented conscientiously by their site personnel at all levels at site.
The Contractor shall ensure physical presence of their field engineers / supervisors, during
the continuation of their contract works / site activities including all material transportation
activities. Physical absence of experienced field engineers / supervisors of Contractor at
critical work spot during the course of work, may invite severe penalization as per the
discretion of EIC, including halting / stoppage of work.
Contractor shall furnish their annual Inspection Plan, with regard to project issues /subjects,
frequency and performers to EIL/Owner.
The Contractor shall regularly review inspection report internally and implement all
practical steps / actions for improving the status continuously.
3.1.6
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 8 of 87
The Contractor shall ensure important safety checks right from beginning of works at every
work site locations and to this effect format No: HSE-10 Daily Safety Check List shall
be prepared by field engineer & duly checked by safety personnel for conformance.
The Contractor shall carry out inspection to identify various unsafe conditions of work
sites/machinery/equipments as well as unsafe acts
on the part of
workmen/supervisor/engineer while carrying out different project related works.
Adequate records for all inspections shall be maintained by the Contractor and the same
shall be furnished to EIL/Owner, whenever sought.
The Contractor shall not carry-out work by engaging single worker anywhere without any
supervisor anytime during day or night.
To demonstrate involvement/commitment of site management of Contractor, at least one
Safety Walk through in a month shall be carried out by Contractors head of site (along
with his area manager/field engineers) and a report shall be furnished to EIL/Owner as per
format No: HSE-1 Safety walk through report followed by compliance for unsatisfactory
remarks.
As a general practice lifting tools/tackles, machinery, accessories etc. shall be inspected,
tested and examined by competent people (approved by concerned State authorities) before
being used at site and also at periodical interval (e.g. during replacement,extension,
modification, elongation/reduction of machine/parts, etc.) as per relevant statutes. Hydra,
cranes, lifting machinery, mobile equipments / machinery / vehicles, etc. shall be inspected
regularly by only competent / experienced personnel at site and requisite records for such
inspections shall be maintained by every contractor. Contractor shall also maintain records
of maintenance of all other site machinery (e.g. generators, rectifiers, compressors, cutters,
etc.) & portable tools/equipments being used at project related works (e.g. drills, abrasive
wheels, punches, chisels, spanners, etc.). The Contractor shall not make use of arbitrarily
fabricated derricks at project site for lifting / lowering of construction materials.
Site facilities /temporary. installations, e.g. batching plant, cement godown, DG-room,
temporary electrical panels/distribution boards, shot-blasting booth, fabrication yards, etc.
and site welfare facilities, like labour colonies, canteen/pantry, rest-shelters, motor
cycle/bicycle-shed, site washing facilities, First-aid centers, urinals/toilets, etc. should be
periodically inspected by Contractor (preferably utilizing HR/Admn. personnel to inspect
site welfare facilities) and records to be maintained.
3.1.7
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 9 of 87
The HSE committee of contractor shall observe individuals behavior for safe practices
adapted for utilization/execution of work for following as a minimum:PPE
Tools & equipment
Hazard Identification & control
House keeping
Confined space entry
Hot works
Excavation
Loading & unloading
Work At height
Stacking & storage
Ergonomics
Procedures
3.1.8
The Contractor shall promote and develop awareness on Health, Safety and Environment
protection among all personnel working for the Contractor.
Regular awareness programs and fabrication shop / work site meetings at least on monthly
basis shall be arranged on HSE activities to cover hazards/risks involved in various
operations during construction.
Contractor to motivate & encourage the workmen & supervisory staff by issuing /
awarding them with tokens/ gifts/ mementos/ monetary incentives / certificates, etc.
Contractor shall assess & recognize the behavioral change of its site engineers / supervisors
periodically and constantly motivate / encourage them to implement HSE practices at
project works
Fire prevention & First-Aid
3.1.9
The Contractor shall arrange suitable First-aid measures such as First Aid Box (Refer
Appendix-B for details), trained personnel/nurse (male) to administer First Aid, stand-by
Ambulance vehicle and
The Contractor shall arrange installation of fire protection measures such as adequate
number of steel buckets with sand & water and adequate number of appropriate portable
fire extinguishers (Refer Appendix-C for details) to the satisfaction of EIL/Owner.
The Contractor shall deploy trained supervisory personnel / field engineers to cater to any
emergency situation.
In case the number of workers exceeds 500, the Contractor shall position an Ambulance /
vehicle and nurse on round the clock basis very close to the worksite.
The Contractor shall arrange FIRE DRILL at each site at least once in three months,
involving site workmen and site supervisory personnel & engineers. The Contractor shall
maintain adequate record of such fire drills at project site
Documentation
The Contractor shall evolve a comprehensive, planned and documented system covering the
following as a minimum for implementation and monitoring of the HSE requirements and the
same shall be submitted for approval by owner/EIL.
HSE Organogram
Site specific HSE Plan
Safety Procedures, forms and Checklist. Indicative list of HSE procedures is attached as
Appendix :H
Inspections and Test Plan
Risk Assessment & Job Safety Analysis for critical works.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 10 of 87
The monitoring for implementation shall be done by regular inspections and compliance of
the observations thereof. The Contractor shall get similar HSE requirements implemented
at his sub-contractor(s) work site/office. However, compliance of HSE requirements shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor. Any review/approval by EIL/Owner shall not
absolve contractor of his responsibility/liability in relation to fulfilling all HSE
requirements.
3.1.10 Audit
The Contractor shall submit an Audit Plan to EIL/Owner indicating the type of audits and
covering following as minimum:
Internal HSE audits regularly at least on quarterly basis by engaging internal qualified
auditors (viz safety officers/Construction personnel having 5 years experience in
construction safety and Lead Auditor Course :OSHA 18001certification).
External HSE audits regularly at least on every six months by engaging qualified external
auditors (viz safety officers/Construction personnel having 10 years experience in
construction safety and Lead Auditor Course :OSHA 18001certification).
All HSE shortfalls/ non-conformances on HSE matters brought out during review/audit, shall be
resolved forthwith ( generally within a week) by Contractor & compliance report shall be
submitted to EIL/Owner.
In addition to above audits by contractor, the contractors work shall be subjected to HSE audit
by EIL/Owner at any point of time during the pendency of contract. The CONTRACTOR shall
take all actions required to comply with the findings of the Audit Report and issue regular
Compliance Reports for the same to OWNER/ EIL till all the findings of the Audit Report are
fully complied.
Failure to carry-out HSE Audits & its compliance (internal & external) by Contractor, shall
invite penalization.
3.1.11 Meetings
The Contractor shall ensure participation of his top most executive at site (viz. Resident
Construction Manager / Resident Engineer / Project Manager / Site-in-Charge) in Safety
Committee / HSE Committee meetings arranged by EIL/Owner usually on monthly basis
or as and when called for. In case Contractors top most executive at site is not in a
position to attend such meeting, he shall inform EIL/Owner in writing before the
commencement of such meeting indicating reasons of his absence and nominate his
representative failure to do so may invite very stringent penalization against the specific
Contractor, as deemed fit in Contract. The obligation of compliance of any observations
during the meeting shall be always time bound. The Contractor shall always assist
EIL/Owner to achieve the targets set by them on HSE management during the project
implementation.
In addition, the Contractor shall also arrange internal HSE meetings chaired by his top most
executive at site on weekly basis and maintain records. Such internal HSE meetings shall
essentially be attended by field engineers / supervisors (& not by safety personnel only) of
the Contractor and its associates. Records of such internal HSE meetings shall be
maintained by the Contractor for review by EIL/Owner or for any HSE Audits.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 11 of 87
The time frame for such HSE meeting shall be religiously maintained by one and all.
3.1.12 Intoxicating drinks & drugs and Smoking
The Contractor shall ensure that his staff members & workers (permanent as well casual)
shall not be in a state of intoxication during working hours and shall abide by any law
relating to consumption & possession of intoxicating drinks or drugs in force.
The Contractor shall not allow any workman to commence any work at any locations of
project activity who is/are influenced / effected with the intake of alcohol, drugs or any
other intoxicating items being consumed prior to start of work or working day.
Awareness about local laws on this issue shall form part of the Induction Training and
compulsory work-site discipline.
The Contractor shall ensure that all personnel working for him comply with No-Smoking
requirements of the Owner as notified from time to time. Cigarettes, lighters, auto ignition
tools or appliances as well as intoxicating drugs, dry tobacco powder, etc. shall not be
allowed inside the project / plant complex.
Smoking shall be permitted only inside smoking booths exclusively designated &
authorized by the Owner/EIL.
3.1.13 Penalty
The Contractor shall adhere consistently to all provisions of HSE requirements. In case of noncompliances and also for repeated failure in implementation of any of the HSE provisions,
EIL/Owner may impose stoppage of work without any cost & time implication to the Owner
and/or impose a suitable penalty.
The amount of penalty to be levied against defaulted Contractor shall be up to a cumulative
limit of
2.0% (Two percent) of the contract value for Item Rate or Composite contracts with an overall
ceiling of 1, 00, 00, 000 (Rupees One crore)
0.5% (Zero decimal five percent) of the contract value for LSTK, OBE, EPC, EPCC or Package
contracts with an overall ceiling of 10, 00.00.000 (Rupees ten crores)
This penalty shall be in addition to all other penalties specified elsewhere in the contract. The
decision of imposing stop-work-instruction and imposition of penalty shall rest with
EIL/Owner. The same shall be binding on the Contractor. Imposition of penalty does not make
the Contractor eligible to continue the work in unsafe manner.
The amount of penalty applicable for the Contractor on different types of HSE violations is
specified below:
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3
4.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 12 of 87
Penalty Amount
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Sl.
No.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 13 of 87
Penalty Amount
th
To be decided by EIL/Owner.
The Contractor shall make his field engineers/supervisors fully aware of the fact that they
keep track with the site workmen for their behavior and compliance of various HSE
requirements. Safety lapses / defects of project construction site shall be attributable to the
concerned job supervisor / engineer of the Contractor, (who remains directly responsible
for safely executing field works). For repeated HSE violations, concerned job supervisor /
engineer shall be reprimanded or appropriate action, as deemed fit, shall be initiated (with
an information to EIL & Owner) by the concerned Contractor.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 14 of 87
Contractor shall initiate verbal warning shall be given to the worker/employee during his first
HSE violation. A written warning shall be issued on second violation and specific training shall
be arranged / provided by the Contractor to enhance HSE awareness/skill including feedback on
the mistakes/ flaws. Any further violation of HSE stipulations by the erring individuals shall
call for his forthright debar from the specific construction site. A record of warnings for each
worker/employee shall be maintained by the Contractor, like by punching their cards / Gate
passes or by displaying their names at the Project entry gate. Warnings, penalizations,
appreciations etc. shall be discussed in HSE Committee meetings by site Head of the
Contractor.
3.1.14 Accident/ Incident investigation
All accidents / incidents shall be informed to EIL/Owner at least telephonically by Contractor
immediately and in writing within 24 hours on Format No. HSE-2 as applicable , by Contractor.
Thereafter, a Supplementary Accident / Incident investigation Report on Format No. HSE-3
shall be submitted to EIL/Owner within 72 hours. Near Miss incident(s),Dangerous
accidents/incident shall also be reported on Format No. HSE-4 within 24 hours. The accident/
incident shall be investigated by a team of Contractors senior Site personnel (involving Site-inCharge or at least by his deputy) for establishing root-cause and recommending corrective &
preventive actions. Findings shall be documented and suitable actions taken to avoid
recurrences shall be communicated to EIL/Owner. Owner/EIL shall have the liberty to
independently investigate such occurrences and the Contractor shall extend all necessary help
and cooperation in this regard. EIL/Owner shall have the right to share the content of this report
with the outside world.
3.2
House Keeping
The Contractor shall ensure that a high degree of house keeping is maintained and shall ensure
inter alia; the followings:
a)
All surplus earth and debris are removed/disposed off from the working areas to designated
location(s).
b) Unused/surplus cables, steel items and steel scrap lying scattered at different places within
the working areas are removed to identify location(s).
c) All wooden scrap, empty wooden cable drums and other combustible packing materials,
shall be removed from work place to identified location(s).
d) Roads shall be kept clear and materials like pipes, steel, sand, boulders, concrete, chips and
bricks etc shall not be allowed on the roads to obstruct free movement of men &
machineries.
e) Fabricated steel structural, pipes & piping materials shall be stacked properly for erection.
f) Water logging on roads shall not be allowed.
g) No parking of trucks/trolleys, cranes and trailers etc shall be allowed on roads, which may
obstruct the traffic movement.
h) Utmost care shall be taken to ensure over all cleanliness and proper upkeep of the working
areas.
i) Trucks carrying sand, earth and pulverized materials etc. shall be covered while moving
within the plant area/ or these materials shall be transported with top surface wet.
j) The contractor shall ensure that the atmosphere in plant area and on roads is free from
particulate matter like dust, sand, etc. by keeping the top surface wet for ease in breathing.
k) At least two exits for any unit area shall be assured at all times same arrangement is
preferable for digging pits / trench excavation / elevated work platforms / confined spaces
etc.
l) Welding cables and the power cable must be segregated and properly stored and used .The
same shall be laid away from the area of movement and shall be free from obstruction.
m) Schedule for upkeep/cleaning of site to be firmed up and implemented on regular basis
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 15 of 87
The Contractor shall carry-out regular checks (minimum one per fortnight) as per format No:
HSE-11 for maintaining high standard of housekeeping and maintain records for the same.
3.3
HSE Measures
3.3.1
Construction Hazards
The Contractor shall ensure identification of all Occupational Health, Safety & Environmental
hazards in the type of work he is going to undertake and enlist mitigation measures. Contractor
shall carry out Job Safety Analysis (JSA)/Risk Analysis specifically for high risk jobs/crtical
jobs like
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
p)
q)
r)
s)
t)
u)
v)
w)
x)
y)
z)
aa)
bb)
cc)
dd)
ee)
ff)
Working at height (+2.0 Mts height) for cold (incl. colour washing, painting, insulation
etc.) & hot works.
Work in confined space,
Deep excavations & trench cutting (depth > 2.0 mts.)
Operation & Maintenance of Batching Plant.
Shuttering / concreting (in single or multiple pour) for columns, parapets & roofs.
Erection & maintenance of Tower Crane.
Erection of structural steel members / roof-trusses / pipes at height more than 2.0 Mts. with
or without crane.
Erection of pipes (full length or fabricated) at height more than 2.0 Mts. height with Crane
of 100T capacity.
All lifts using 100T Crane plus mechanical pulling.
All lifts using two cranes in unison (Tandem Lifting).
Any lift exceeding 80% capacity of the lifting equipments (hydra, crane etc.).
Laying of pipes (isolated or fabricated) in deep narrow trenches manually or
mechanically.
Maintenance of crane / extension or reduction of crane-boom on roads or in yards.
Erection of any item at >2.0 Mts. height using 100T crane or of higher capacity
Hydrostatic test of pipes, vessels & columns and water-flushing.
Radiography jobs (in-plant & open field)
Work in Live Electrical installations / circuits
Handling of explosives & Blasting operations
Demolishing / dismantling activities
Welding / gas cutting jobs at height (+2.0 Mts.)
Lifting / placing roof-girders at height (+2.0 Mts.)
Lifting & laying of metallic / non-metallic sheet over roof/structures.
Lifting of pipes, gratings, equipments/vessels at heights (+2.0 Mts) with & without using
cranes
Calibration of equipment, instruments and functional tests at yards / work-sites.
Operability test of Pump, Motors (after coupling) & Compressors.
Cold or Hot works inside Confined Space.
Transportation & shifting of ODC consignments into project areas.
Working in charged/Live elect. Panels
Stress Relieving works (Electrically or by Gas-burners).
Pneumatic Tests
Card board blasting
Chemical cleaning
and take feedback from EIL/Owner. The necessary HSE measures devised shall be put in to
place, prior to start of an activity & also shall be maintained during the course of works, by the
Contractor. Copies of such JSAs shall be kept available at work sites by the Contractor to enable
all concerned carrying out checks / verification.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 16 of 87
A list of typical construction hazards along with their effects & preventive measures is given in
Appendix-E.
3.3.2
Accessibility
The Contractor shall provide safe means of access(in sufficient numbers) & efficient exit to
any working place including provisions of suitable and sufficient scaffolding at various
stages during all operations of the work for the safety of his workmen and EIL/Owner.
The Contractor shall implement use of all measures including use of life line, fallarresters, retractable fall arresters , safety nets etc. during the course of using all safe
accesses & exits, so that in no case any individual remains at risk of slip & fall during their
travel.
The access to operating plant / project complex shall be strictly regulated. Any person or
vehicle entering such complex shall undergo identification check, as per the procedures in
force / requirement of EIL/Owner.
Accessibility to confined space shall be governed by specific system / regulation, as
established at project site.
3.3.3
The Contractor shall ensure that all their staff, workers and visitors including their subcontractor(s) have been issued (records to be kept) & wear appropriate PPEs like nape strap
type safety helmets preferably with head & sweat band with cotton chin strap
(made of industrial HDPE), safety shoes with steel toe cap and antiskid sole, full body
harness (C marked and conforming to EN361), protective goggles, gloves, ear muffs,
respiratory protective devices, etc. All these gadgets shall conform to applicable IS
Specifications/CE or other applicable international standards. The Contractor shall
implement a regular regime of inspecting physical conditions of the PPEs being issued /
used by the workmen of their own & also its sub-agencies and the damaged / unserviceable
PPEs shall be replaced forthwith.
Owner/EIL may issue a comprehensive color scheme for helmets to be used by various
agencies. The Contractor shall follow the scheme issued by the owner/EIL and shall choose
any colour other than white (for Owner) or blue (for EIL) All HSE personnel shall
preferably wear dark green band on their helmet so that workmen can approach them for
guidance during emergencies. HSE personnel shall preferably wear such dresses with
fluorescent stripes, which are noticeable during night, when light falls on them.
For shot blasting, the usage of protective face shield and helmets, gauntlet and protective
clothing is mandatory. Such protective clothing should conform relevant IS Specification.
For off-shore jobs/contracts, contractor shall provide PPEs (new) of all types to EIL &
Owner's personnel, at his (contractor's) cost. All personnel shall wear life jacket at all time.
Contractor shall ensure procurement & usage of following safety equipments/ accessories
(conforming to applicable IS mark / CE standard) by their staff, workmen & visitors
including their subcontractors all through the span of project construction / precommissioning/ Commissioning:-
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
3.3.4
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 17 of 87
PPEs (Helmet, Spectacle, Ear-muff, Face shield, Hand gloves, Safety Shoes, Gum
boot)
Barricading tape / warning signs
Rechargeable Safety torch (flame-proof)
Safety nets (with tie-chords)
Fall arresters
Portable ladders (varying lengths)
Life-lines (steel wire-rope, dia not less than 8.0 mm)
Full body harness (double lanyard)
Lanyard
Karabiner
Retractable fall arresters (various length)
Portable fire extinguishers (DCP type) 5 kg capacity
Portable Multi Gas detector
Sound level meter
Digital Lux meter
Fire hoses & flow nozzles
Fire blankets / Fire retardant cloth (with eyelets)
Working at height
The Contractor shall issue permit for working (PFW) at height after verifying and
certifying the checkpoints as specified in the attached permit (Format No. HSE-6). He
shall also undertake to ensure compliance to the conditions of the permit during the
currency of the permit including adherence of personal protective equipments. Contractors
Safety Officer shall verify compliance status of the items of permit document after
implementation of action is completed by Contractors execution / field engineers at work
site. Job Safety Analysis (JSA) for specific works at height duly commented by
EIL/Owner, shall be kept attached with particular Permit for Work (PFW) at site for ready
reference & follow-up.
Such PFW shall be initially issued for one single shift or expected duration of normal work
and extended further for balance duration, if required. EIL/Owner can devise block-permit
system at any specific area, in consultation with project specific HSE Committee to specify
the time-period of validity of such PFW or its renewal. This permit shall be applicable in
areas where specific clearance from Owners operation Deptt. /Safety Deptt. is not
required. EIL / Owners field Engineers/Safety Officers/Area Coordinators may verify and
counter sign this permit (as an evidence of verification) during the execution of the job.
All personnel shall be medically examined & certified by registered doctor, confirming
their medical fitness for working at height. The fitness examination shall be done once in
six months.
In case work is undertaken without taking sufficient precautions as given in the permit, EIL
/Owner Engineers may exercise their authority to cancel such permit and stop the work till
satisfactory compliance/rectification is arranged made. Contractors are expected to
maintain a register for issuance of permit and extensions thereof including preserving the
used permits for verification during audits etc.
The Contractor shall arrange (at his cost) and ensure use of Fall Arrester Systems by his
workers. Fall arresters are to be used while climbing/descending tall structures or vessels /
columns etc. These arresters should lock automatically against the anchorage line,
restricting free fall of the user. The device is to be provided with a double security opening
system to ensure safe attachment or release of the user at any point of rope. In order to
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 18 of 87
avoid shock, the system should be capable of keeping the person in vertical position in case
of a fall.
3.3.5
The Contractor shall ensure that Full body harnesses conforming EN361 and having
authorized C marking is used by all personnel while working at height. The lanyards and
life lines should have enough tensile strength to take the load of the worker in case of a fall.
One end of the lanyard shall be firmly tied with the harnesses and the other end with life
line. The harness should be capable of keeping the workman vertical in case of a fall,
enabling him to rescue himself.
The Contractor shall provide Roof Top Walk Ladders for carrying out activities on sloping
roofs in order to reduce the chances of slippages and falls.
The Contractor shall ensure that a proper Safety Net System is used wherever the hazard of
fall from height is present. The safety net, preferably a knotted one with mesh ropes
conforming to IS 5175/ ISO 1140 shall have a border rope & tie cord of minimum 12mm
dia. The Safety Net shall be located not more than 6.0 meters below the working surface
extending on either side up to sufficient margin to arrest fall of persons working at different
heights.
In case of accidental fall of person on such Safety Net, the bottom most portion of Safety
Net should not touch any structure, object or ground.
The Contractor shall ensure positive isolation while working at different levels like in the
pipe rack areas. The working platforms with toe boards & hand rails shall be sufficiently
strong & shall have sufficient space to hold the workmen and tools & tackles including the
equipments required for executing the job. Such working platforms shall have mid-rails, to
enable people work safely in sitting posture.
Suitable scaffoldings shall be provided to workmen for all works that cannot be safely done
from the ground or from solid construction except such short period work that can be safely
done using ladders or certified (by 3rd party competent person) man-basket. When a ladder
is used, an extra workman shall always be engaged for holding the ladder.
The Contractor shall ensure that the scaffolds used during construction activities shall be
strong enough to take the designed load. Main Contractor shall always furnish duly
approved construction-design details of scaffold & SWL (from competent designers) free
of charge, before they are being installed / constructed at site. Owner/EIL reserves the right
to ask the Contractor to submit certification and or design calculations from his Head office
/ Design/ Engineering expert regarding load carrying capacity of the scaffoldings.
3.3.6
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 19 of 87
Electrical installations
All electrical installations/ connections shall be carried out as per the provisions of latest
revision of following codes/standards, in addition to the requirements of Statutory
Authorities and IE/applicable international rules & regulations:
-
Shall make Single Line Diagram (SLD) for providing connection to each equipments &
machinery and the same (duly approved by EIL/Owner) shall be pasted on the front face of
DBs (distribution boards) or JBs (Junction boxes) at every site. ( A typical Switch Board
Sketch is attached as Appendix -G )
b.
Ensure that electrical systems and equipment including tools & tackles used during
construction phase are properly selected, installed, used and maintained as per provisions
of the latest revision of the Indian Electrical/ applicable international regulations.
c.
Shall deploy qualified & licensed electricians for proper & safe installation and for regular
inspection of construction power distribution system/points including their earthing. A
copy of the license shall be submitted to EIL / Owner for records. Availability of at least
one competent (ITI qualified) / licensed electrician (by State Elec. authorities) shall be
ensured at site round the clock to attend to the normal/emergency jobs.
d.
All switchboards / welding machines shall be kept in well-ventilated & covered shed/ with
rain shed protection. The shed shall be elevated from the existing ground level to avoid
water logging inside the shed . Installation of electrical switch board must be done taking
care of the prevention of shock and safety of machine.
e.
No flammable materials shall be used for constructing the shed. Also flammable materials
shall not be stored in and around electrical equipment / switchboard. Adequate clearances
and operational space shall be provided around the equipment.
f.
Fire extinguishers and insulating mats shall be provided in all power distribution centers.
g.
Temporary electrical equipment shall not be employed in hazardous area without obtaining
safety permit.
h.
i.
All temporary installations shall be tested before energizing, to ensure proper earthing,
bonding, suitability of protection system, adequacy of feeders/cables etc.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 20 of 87
j.
k.
Multilingual (Hindi, English and local language) caution boards, shock treatment charts and
instruction plate containing location of isolation point for incoming supply, name &
telephone No. of contact person in emergency shall be provided in substations and near all
distribution boards / local panels.
l.
m. Regular inspection of all installations at least once in a month. (Ref. Format HSE-12).
3.3.6.2 The following features shall also be ensured for all electrical installations during construction
phase by the contractor:
Each installation shall have a main switch with a protective device, installed in an
enclosure adjacent to the metering point. The operating height of the main switch shall not
exceed 1.5 M. The main switch shall be connected to the point of supply by means of
armoured cable.
The outgoing feeders shall be double or triple pole switches with fuses / MCBs. Loads in a
three phase circuit shall be balanced as far as possible and load on neutral should not
exceed 20% of load in the phase.
The installation shall be adequately protected against overload, short circuit and earth
leakage by the use of suitable protective devices. Fuses wherever used shall be HRC type.
Use of rewirable fuses shall be strictly prohibited. The earth leakage device shall have an
operating current not exceeding 30 mA.
All connections to the hand tools / welding receptacles shall be taken through proper
switches, sockets and plugs.
All single phase sockets shall be minimum 3 pin type only. All unused sockets shall be
provided with socket caps.
Only 3 core (P+N+E) overall sheathed flexible cables with minimum conductor size of 1.5
mm2 copper shall be used for all single phase hand tools.
Only metallic distribution boxes with double earthing shall be used at site. No wooden
boxes shall be used.
All power cables shall be terminated with compression type cable glands. Tinned copper
lugs shall be used for multi-strand wires / cables.
Minimum depth of cable trench shall be 750 mm for MV & control cables and 900 mm for
HV cables. These cables shall be laid over a sand layer and covered with sand, brick & soil
for ensuring mechanical protection. Cables shall not be laid in waterlogged area as far as
practicable. Cable route markers shall be provided at every 25 M of buried trench route.
When laid above ground, cables shall be properly cleated or supported on rigid poles of at
least 2.1 M high. Minimum head clearance of 6 meters shall be provided at road crossings.
3.3.7
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 21 of 87
Under ground road crossings for cables shall be avoided to the extent feasible. In any case
no under ground power cable shall be allowed to cross the roads without pipe sleeve.
All cable joints shall be done with proper jointing kit. No taped/ temporary joints shall be
used.
All cables and wire rope used for earth connections shall be terminated through tinned
copper lugs.
In case of local earthing, earth electrodes shall be buried near the supply point and earth
continuity wire shall be connected to local earth plate for further distribution to various
appliances. All insulated wires for earth connection shall have insulation of green colour.
Separate core shall be provided for neutral. Earth / Structures shall not be used as a neutral
in any case.
ON/OFF position of all switches shall be clearly designated / painted for easy isolation in
emergency.
Contractor shall ensure that flash back arrestors conforming to BS: 6158 or equivalent are
installed on all gas cylinders as well as at the torch end of the gas hose, while in use.
All cylinders shall be mounted on trolleys and provided with a closing key. Empty &
filled-up gas cylinders shall be stored separately with TAG, protecting them from direct
sun or rain. Minimum 2 nos. of Portable DCP type fire extinguishers (10 kg) shall be
maintained at the gas cylinder stores. Stacking & storing of compressed gas cylinders shall
be arranged away from DG set, hot works, Elect. Panels / Elec. boards, etc
The burner and the hose placed downstream of pressure reducer shall be equipped with
Flash Back Arrester/Non Return Valve device.
The hoses for acetylene and oxygen cylinders must be of different colours. Their
connections to cylinders and burners shall be made with a safety collar.
At end of work, the cylinders in use shall be closed and hoses depressurized.
Cutting of metals using gases, other than oxygen & acetylene, shall require written
concurrence from Owner.
All welding machines shall have effective earthing at least at distinctly isolated two points.
In order to help maintain good housekeeping, and to reduce fire hazard, live electrode bits
shall be contained safely and shall not be thrown directly on the ground.
The hoses of Acetylene and Oxygen shall be kept free from entanglement & away from
common pathways / walkways and preferably be hanged overhead in such a manner which
can avoid contact with cranes, hydra or other mobile construction machinery.
Hot spatters shall be contained / restricted appropriately (by making use of effective fireretardant cloth/fabric) and their flying-off as well as chance of contact with near-by
flammable materials shall be stopped.
The Contractor shall arrange adequate systems & practices for accumulation / collection of
metal & other scraps and remnant electrodes and their safe disposal at regular interval so as
to maintain the fabrication and other areas satisfactorily clean & tidy.
All gas cylinders must have a cylinder cap on at all times when not in use.
3.3.8
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 22 of 87
3.3.9
The Contractor shall assign to his workmen, tasks commensurate with their qualification,
experience and state of health.
All lifting tools, tackles, equipment, accessories including cranes shall be tested
periodically by statutory/competent authority for their condition and load carrying capacity.
Valid test & fitness certificates from the applicable authority shall be submitted to
Owner/EIL for their review/acceptance before the lifting tools, tackles, equipment,
accessories and cranes are used.
The contractor shall not be allowed to use defective equipment or tools not adhering to
safety norms.
Contractor shall arrange non-sparking tools for project construction works in operating
plant areas / hydrocarbon prone areas.
Wherever required the Contractor shall make use of Elevated Work Platforms (EWP) or
Aerial Work Platforms (mobile or stationary) to avoid ergonomical risks and workmen
shall be debarred to board such elevated platform during the course of their shifting /
transportation.
Contractor shall ensure installation of Safe Load Indicator (SLI) on all cranes (while in use)
to minimize overloading risk. SLI shall have capability to continuously monitor and
display the load on the hook, and automatically compare it with the rated crane capacity at
the operating condition of the crane. The system shall also provide visual and audible
warnings at set capacity levels to alert the operator in case of violations.
The contractor shall be responsible for safe operations of different equipments mobilized
and used by him at the workplace like transport vehicles, engines, cranes, mobile ladders,
scaffoldings, work tools, etc.
The Contractor shall arrange periodical training for the operators of hydra, crane,
excavator, mobile machinery, etc. at site by utilizing services from renowned
manufacturers
Occupational Health
The contractor shall identify all operations that can adversely affect the health of its
workers and issue & implement mitigation measures.
For surface cleaning operations, sand blasting shall not be permitted even if not explicitly
stated elsewhere in the contract.
To eliminate radiation hazard, Tungsten electrodes used for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
shall not contain Thorium.
Workmen shall be made aware of correct methods for lifting, carrying, pushing & pulling
of heavy loads. Wherever possible, manual handling shall be replaced by mechanical lifting
equipments.
For jobs like drilling/demolishing/dismantling where noise pollution exceeds the specified
limit of 85 decibels, ear muffs shall be provided to the workers.
To avoid work related upper limb disorders (WRULD) and backaches, Display Screen
Equipments' workplace stations shall be carefully designed & used with proper sitting
postures. Power driven hand-held tools shall be maintained in good working condition to
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 23 of 87
minimize their vibrating effects and personnel using these tools shall be taught how to
operate them safely & how to maintain good blood circulation in hands.
The Contractor shall arrange health check up (by registered medical practitioner) for all the
workers at the time of induction. Health check may have to be repeated if the nature of duty
assigned to him is changed necessitating health check or doubt arises about his wellness.
EIL/Owner reserves the right to ask the contractor to submit medical test reports. Regular
health check-ups are mandatory for the workers assigned with Welding, Radiography,
Blasting, Painting, Heavy Lift and Height (>2m) jobs. All the health check-ups shall be
conducted by registered Medical practitioner and records are to be maintained by the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall ensure vaccination of all the workers including their families, during
the course of entire project span.
Hazardous, inflammable and/or toxic materials such as solvent coating, thinners, antitermite solutions, water proofing materials shall be stored in appropriate containers
preferably with lids having spillage catchment trays and shall be stored in a good ventilated
area. These containers shall be labeled with the name of the materials highlighting the
hazards associated with its use and necessary precautions to be taken. Respective MSDS
(Material Safety Data Sheet) shall be made available at site & may be referred whenever
problem arises.
Where contact or exposure of hazardous materials are likely to exceed the specified limit or
otherwise have harmful effects, appropriate personal protective equipments such as gloves,
goggles/face-shields, aprons, chemical resistant clothing, respirator, etc. shall be used.
The work place shall be checked prior to start of activities to identify the location, type and
condition of any asbestos materials which could be disturbed during the work. In case
asbestos material is detected, usage of appropriate PPEs by all personnel shall be ensured
and the matter shall be reported immediately to EIL/ Owner.
All personnel exposed to physical agents such as ionizing & non-ionizing radiation,
including ultraviolet rays or similar other physical agents shall be provided with adequate
shielding or protection commensurate with the type of exposure involved.
For Open Field Radiography works , requirements of Bhabha Atomic Research Centre
(BARC)/ Atomic Energy Regulatory Board (AERB) shall be followed.
The Contractor shall implement an effective system of control (as described in the AERB
regulations) at site for handling radiography-sources & for avoiding its misuse & theft.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 24 of 87
The contractor shall generate the Format No: HSE-8 Permit for radiation work before
start of work.
In case the radiography work has to be carried out at day time, suitable methodology to be
used so that other works, people are not affected.
Blasting operations shall be carried out as per latest Explosive Rules (Indian / International)
with prior permission. The Contractor shall obtain license from Chief Controller of
Explosives (CCoE) for collection, transportation, storage of explosives as well as for
carrying out blasting operations.
The Contractor shall prepare exclusive method statement (in cognizance with statutory
requirements) for diffusing unfired explosives, if any, at project site before carrying out
actual task. Nowhere blasting shall be carried out by the Contractor or its agency without
the involvement of competent supervisor and licensed blaster / shot blaster.
The contractor shall adhere to safe demolishing/ dismantling practices at all stages of work
to guard against unsafe working practices.
The contractor shall disconnect service lines (power, gas supply, water, etc.)/ make
alternate arrangements prior to start of work and restore them, if required as directed by
EIL/ Owner at no extra cost.
Before carrying out any demolition/ dismantling work, the contractor shall take prior
approval of EIL/Owner and generate the Format No.HSE-9. For revamp jobs in operating
plants where location of underground utilities is not known with certainty, the contractor
shall depute an experienced engineer for supervision and shall make adequate arrangements
for Fire fighting & First-Aid during the execution of these activities.
The Contractor shall arrange approved Job Safety Analysis (JSA) / Method Statement for
the specific demolition / dismantling task and corresponding action plan commensurate
with hazards / risks associated therein. In no case any activity related to demolition /
dismantling shall be carried out by the Contractor without engaging own supervision / field
engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure adequately planned road transport safety management system.
The vehicles shall be fitted with reverse warning alarms & flashing lights / fog-lights and
usage of seat belts shall be ensured.
The Contractor shall also ensure a separate pedestrian route for safety of the workers and
comply with all traffic rules & regulations, including maintaining speed limit of 20 kmph
or indicated by owner for all types of vehicles / mobile machinery. The maximum
allowable speed shall be adhered to.
In case of an alert or emergency, the Contractor must arrange clearance of all the routes,
roads, access. The Contractor shall deploy sufficient number of traffic controllers at project
site routes / roads/ accesses, to alert reversing movement of vehicles & machinery as well
as pedestrians.
Dumpers, Tippers, etc. shall not be allowed to carry workers within the plant area and also
to & from the labour colony to & from project sites.
Hydras shall only be allowed for handling the materials at fabrication/ storage yards and in
no case shall be allowed to transport the materials over project / plant roads.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 25 of 87
The Contractor shall not deploy any such mobile machinery / equipments, which do not
have competent operator and / or experienced banks-man / signal-man. Such machinery /
equipments shall have effective limit-switches, reverse-alarm, front & rear-end lights etc.
and shall be maintained in good working order.
The Contractor shall not carry-out maintenance of vehicles / mobile machinery occupying
space on project / plant roads and shall always arrange close supervision for such works.
For pipeline jobs, the contractor shall submit a comprehensive plan covering transportation,
loading / unloading of pipes, movement of side booms, movement of vehicles on the ROW,
etc.
Contractors shall arrange /install visible road signs, diversion boards, caution boards, etc
on project roads for safe movement of men and machinery.
A crche at site where 10 or more female workers are having children below the age of 6
years.
Adequately ventilated / illuminated rooms at labour camps & its hygienic up-keeping.
Reasonable canteen facilities at site and in labour camps at appropriate location depending
upon site conditions. Contractor shall make use of industrial variety of LPG cylinder &
satisfactory illumination at the canteens. Necessary arrangement for efficient disposal of
wastes from canteens & urinals /toilets shall also be made and regular review shall be made
to maintain the ambience satisfactorily hygienic & shall also comply with all applicable
statutory requirements.
Adequately lighted & ventilated Rest rooms at site (separate for male workers and female
workers).
Urinals, Toilets, drinking water, washing facilities, adequate lighting at site and labour
camps, commensurate with applicable Laws / Legislation.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 26 of 87
For pipeline jobs, top soil shall be stacked separately while making ROW through fields. This
fertile soil shall be placed back on top after backfilling.
For offshore construction barges, arrangements shall be made for safe disposal of human, food
& other wastes and applicable laws in this regard shall be followed.
3.3.18 Rules & Regulations
All persons deployed at site shall be knowledgeable of and comply with the environmental laws,
rules & regulations relating to the hazardous materials, substances and wastes. Contractor shall
not dump, release or otherwise discharge or disposes off any such materials without the express
authorization of EIL/Owner. An indicative list of Statutory Acts & Rules relating to HSE is
given under Appendix-D.
3.3.19 Weather Protection
Contractor shall take appropriate measures to protect workers from severe storms, rain, solar
radiations, poisonous gases, dust, etc. by ensuring proper usage of PPEs like Sun glasses, Sun
screen lotions, respirators, dust masks, etc. and rearranging/ planning the construction activities
to suit the weather conditions. Effective arrangement (without creating inconvenience to project
facilities & permanent installations) for protecting workmen from hailstorm, drizzle in the form
of temporary shelter shall be made at site.
3.3.20 Communication
All persons deployed at the work site shall have access to effective means of communication so
that any untoward incident can be reported immediately and assistance sought by them.
All health & safety information shall be communicated in a simple & clear language easily
understood by the local workforce.
For information to all, typical subjects that should be communicated are: Inside the company (Top to down)
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Quality Policy
HSE Policy contents
Environment Policy
HSE Objectives
Safety Cardinal Rules
HSE Target reached or missed
Praises & Warnings to personnel for HSE Management
Safety Walk Through Reports and safety defects / shortfalls (by management)
HSE Audit results
Revised Statutory Health & Safety provisions, if any
H & S publicity
Suggestions
Complaints
Compliances on safety defects / shortfalls
Suggestions
Proposals for changes & improvements
HSE Reports (including near-miss reports)
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 27 of 87
The contractor shall submit detailed rigging studies plan for EIL/ Owner approval prior to
lifting equipment which cannot be erected with a crane of approx. 100 MT capacity due to
constraints of its dimensions, location of foundation height, approach & weight.
Contractor shall generate the format no:HSE-15 Permit for heavy lift/critical erection
Prior to actual lifting activities, contractor shall check the validity of the crane inspection
certificate issued by statutory/ competent authority. This requirement shall also apply to all
rigging equipments utilized for the job.
The contractor shall, at all times, be responsible for all rigging activities.
The Contractor shall ensure medical fitness of all workmen who are engaged / involved in
erection of equipments, vessels etc. and such fitness checks shall be carried-out every six
months interval with the help of a registered medical practitioner & record shall be
maintained
Adequate safety measures such as positive barricading, usage of appropriate PPEs, permit
to work, etc. shall be taken during all heavy or critical lifts.
For lifting any material (irrespective of shape, size or volume), at any height, it is always
advisable to prepare a Plan of Erection (PoE) taking into consideration hazards & risks
associated therein this can enable people to put their own experiences of various natures
& side-by-side establish a practical method for risk-free erection / lifts. The contractor shall
prepare PoE & shall document the same, when risks are identified as medium or high
and the same shall be approved by its competent / qualified engineer.
Number of Safety Inductions carried-out at site (for workmen & staff members)
Number of HSE inspections carried out
Number of Safety Walk Through carried-out by site-head.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 28 of 87
Number of HSE shortfalls / lapses identified per contractor & closed-out in time.
Number of Safety Meetings conducted (in-house / with contractors)
Number of HSE Audits made (internal & external) vis--vis non conformances raised
Number of HSE Awareness / Motivational program conducted by contractors
Number of HSE Trainings conducted at site for supervisors & workmen
Study of Near miss case reported
Encouragements / Awards / Recognitions to workmen, job supervisors & field engineers.
Suggestions for improvement
Calculation of HSE statistics viz frequency rate, severity rate, LTA free manhours,etc
Analysis of incidents / accidents (nature, severity, types etc.)
Study of Incident / Accident with respect to :
Variety
Period of the year / project span
Timings of the incident / accident
Age profile of victims
Body parts involved
Penalty levied for causing incident / accident
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 29 of 87
The Contractor shall maintain sufficient angle of repose during excavation shall also
provide slope or suitable bench as decided by EIL / Owner.
The Contractor shall arrange battering or benching wherever required for preventing
collapse of edge of excavations.
The Contractor shall identify & arrange de-watering pump or well-point system to prevent earth
collapse due to heavy rain / influx of underground water.
The Contractor shall arrange protective fencing / barricading with warning signal around
excavated pits, trenches, etc. along with minimum 2 (two) entries, exits / escape ladders.
The Contractor must avoid underpinning / under-cutting to prevent collapse of chunk of earth
during excavation
The Contractor shall use stoppers to prevent over-run of vehicle wheels at the edge of
excavated pits / trenches.
The Contractor shall arrange strengthening of shoring & strutting proactively to avoid
collapse of earth / edges due to vehicular movement in close proximity of excavated areas / pits
/ trenches, etc.
3.4
Signature
Section
Remarks, in any
The topics during TBT shall include
-
The above record can be kept in local language, which workers can read. These records shall be
made available to EIL/ Owner whenever demanded.
3.5
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 30 of 87
Initial induction of workers into Construction oriented activities and appraising them about
the methodology of works and how to carry-out safely and the same should not be inter
mixed with Tool Box Talks or HSE Training. In this regard careful action should be made
& maintained for imparting HSE induction to every individual, irrespective of his
task/designation/level of employment, whereas, HSE Training should be imparted to
specific person/group of people who are to carry-out that specific task more than once for
example, Riggers must be trained for working at heights, welders must be trained for work
in confined space, fitters/carpenters, mesons must be trained for work at heights, etc.
Contractor shall conduct Safety induction programme on HSE for all his workers and
maintain records. The Gate Pass shall be issued only to those workers who successfully
qualify the Safety induction programme.
The Contractor shall brief the visitors about the HSE precautions which are required to be
taken before their proceeding to site and make necessary arrangements to issue appropriate
PPEs like Aprons, hard hats, ear-plugs, goggles & safety shoes etc., to his visitors. The
Contractor shall always maintain relevant acknowledgement from visitor on providing him
brief information on HSE actions.
Contractor shall ensure that all his personnel possess appropriate training to carry out the
assigned job safely. The training should be imparted in a language understood by them and
should specifically be trained about
-
The Contractor shall make regular program for conducting Safety Training on various
topics related to various activities & their safe-guarding utilizing experienced persons /
outside agency / faculty. A program for Safety Training (indicative list as per Appendix F)
shall be furnished by the Contractor in its HSE Plan .
For offshore and jetty jobs, contractor shall ensure that all personnel deployed have
undergone a structured sea survival training including use of lifeboats, basket landing, use
of radio communication etc. from an agency acceptable to Owner/EIL.
3.6
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 31 of 87
Contractor shall obtain permits for Hot work, Cold work, Excavation and Confined Space
from Owner in the prescribed format.
b)
The contractor shall monitor record and compile list of his workers entering the operational
plant/unit each day and ensure & record their return after completing the job.
c)
Contractors workers and staff members shall use designated entrances and proceed by
designated routes to work areas only assigned to them. The workers shall not be allowed to
enter units' area, tanks area, pump rooms, etc. without work authorization permit.
d)
Work activities shall be planned in such a way so as to minimize the disruption of other
activities being carried out in an operational plant/unit and activities of other contractors.
e)
The contractor shall submit a list of all chemicals/toxic substances that are intended to be
used at site and shall take prior approval of the Owner.
f)
Specific training on working in a hydrocarbon plant shall be imparted to the work force and
mock drills shall be carried out for Rescue operations/First-Aid measures.
g)
h)
Care shall be taken to prevent hitting underground facilities such as electrical cables,
hydrocarbon piping during execution of work.
i)
j)
Emergency evacuation plan shall be worked out and all workmen shall be apprised about
evacuation routes. Mock drill operations may also be conducted.
k)
Flammable gas test shall be conducted prior to any hot work using appropriate measuring
instruments. Sewers, drains, vents or any other gas escaping points shall be covered with
flame retardant tarpaulin.
l)
Respiratory devices shall be kept handy while working in confined zones where there is a
danger of inhalation of poisonous gases. Constant monitoring of presence of Gas/
Hydrocarbon shall be done.
m) Clearance shall be obtained from all parties before starting hot tapping, patchwork on live
lines and work on corroded tank roof.
n)
3.7
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 32 of 87
o)
Welding spatters shall be contained properly and in no case shall be allowed to fall on the
ground containing oil. Similar care shall be taken during cutting operations.
p)
The vehicles, cranes, engines, etc. shall be fitted with spark arresters on the exhaust pipe
and got it approved from Safety Department of the Owner.
q)
Plant air should not be used to clean any part of the body or clothing or use to blow off dirt
on the floor.
r)
Gas detectors should be installed in gas leakage prone areas as per requirement of Owner's
plant operation personnel.
s)
Experienced full time safety personnel shall be exclusively deployed to monitor safety
aspects in running plants.
3.8
HSE Promotion
The contractor shall encourage his workforce to promote HSE efforts at workplace by way of
organizing workshops/seminars/training programmes, celebrating HSE awareness weeks &
National Safety Day, conducting quizzes & essay competitions, distributing pamphlets, posters
& material on HSE, providing incentives for maintaining good HSE practices and granting
incentives / bonus for completing the job without any lost time accident.
3.9
Lock Out and Tag Out (LOTO) for isolation of energy source
Contractor shall follow the LOTO/Isolation procedure of owner for all energy source
isolations installed/under purview by /of owner ie. Brown field
For all the other energy source (not under purview of client/owner) i.e Green field
Contractor shall develop a system to ensure the isolation of equipments, pipelines, Vessel,
electrical panels from the energy source covering following as minimum:-
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 33 of 87
Only on confirmation of above the contractor will remove their lock and tag from the
isolation points and give instructions for energizing the same. Only the person carrying out
the task shall himself carry the key for the lock in /Lock out.
4.0
4.1
On Award Of Contract
The Contractor shall submit a comprehensive Health, Safety and Environment Plan or
programme for approval by EIL/Owner prior to start of work. The Contractor shall participate in
the pre-start meeting with EIL/Owner to finalize HSE Plans which shall including the
following:
-
4.2
to arrange workmen compensation insurance, registration under ESI Act, third party
liability insurance, registration under BOCW Act, etc, as applicable.
to arrange all HSE permits before start of activities (as applicable), like permits for hot
work, working at heights (Refer Format No. HSE-6), confined space (Refer Format No.
HSE-7), Radiation Work Permit (Refer Format No. HSE-8), Demolishing/ Dismantling
Work Permit (Refer Format No. HSE-9),Permit for erection/modification & dismantling of
scaffolding(Refer Format No:HSE-14), Permit for heavy lift/critical erection (Refer Format
No:HSE-15) ,Permit for energy Isolation & De-isolation (HSE-16) ,storage of chemical /
explosive materials & its use and implement all precautions mentioned therein. In this
regard, requirements of Oil industry Safety Directorate Standard No. Std -105 "Work
Permit Systems shall be complied with while working in existing Oil or Gas processing
plants. List of the persons involved shall be maintained as annexure to the work permit
issued for a particular activity.
to submit, timely, the completed checklist on HSE activities in Format No.HSE-1, Monthly
HSE report in Format No.HSE-5 (use of web based package (www.eil.co.in/conthse) is
compulsory wherever the facility is available else a hard copy is to be submitted), accident/
incident reports, investigation reports etc. as per EIL/Owner requirements. Compliance of
instructions on HSE shall be done by Contractor and informed urgently to EIL/Owner.
4.3
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 34 of 87
that his top most executive at site attends all the Safety Committee/HSE meetings arranged
by EIL/Owner and carries out safety walk through regularly. Only in case of his absence
from site that a second senior most person shall be nominated by him, in advance, and
communicated to EIL/Owner for performing the above tasks.
display at site office and at prominent locations HSE Policy, caution boards, list of
hospitals, emergency services available, safety signs like Men at work, Speed Limits,
Hazardous Area, various dos & donts, etc.
identify, assess, analyze & mitigate the construction hazards & incorporate relevant control
measures before actually executing site works. (HIRAC = Hazard Identification, Risk
Analysis and Control).
carryout audits/inspection (internal & external) at his works as well as sub contractor works
as per approved HSE plan/procedure/programme & submit the compliance reports of
identified shortfalls for EIL/Owner review.
arranging HSE training for site workmen (of his own & sub contractors) through internal or
external faculty at periodical intervals.
assistance & cooperate during HSE audits by EIL/Owner or any other 3rd party and submit
compliance report.
generate & submit of HSE records/report as per this specification.
carry-out all dismantling activities safely, with prior approval of EIL/Owner representative.
The Contractor shall ensure that Hot works and painting works do not continue at the
same place / location at project site for which chance or probability of fire incident
exists.
5.0
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 35 of 87
RECORDS
At the minimum, the contractor shall maintain/ submit HSE records in the following reporting
formats/:
Safety Walk Through Report
Accident/ Incident Report
Supplementary Accident/ Incident Investigation report
Near Miss Incident Report
Monthly HSE Report
Permit for working at height
Permit for working in confined space
Permit for radiation work
Permit for demolishing/ dismantling
Daily Safety checklist
House keeping Assessment & compliance
Inspection of temporary electrical booth/installation
Inspection for scaffolding
Permit for erection/modification &dismantling of scaffolding
Permit for heavy lift/critical erection.
Permit for Energy isolation and de-isolation.
Permit for Excavation
Inspection reports of Equipment/tools/tackles
Report of Toolbox talks
PPE issue report/register
Site inspection reports
Training records
HSE-1
HSE-2
HSE-3
HSE-4
HSE-5
HSE-5
HSE-7
HSE-8
HSE-9
HSE-10
HSE-11
HSE-12
HSE-13
HSE-14
HSE-15
HSE-16
HSE-17
*
As indicated in
specification
*
*
*
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 36 of 87
APPENDIX-A
(Sheet 1 of 2)
A.
IS CODES ON HSE
SP: 53
Safety code for the use, Care and protection of hand operated tools.
IS: 838
Code of practice for safety & health requirements in electric and gas welding
and cutting operations
IS: 1179
IS: 1860
Safety requirements for use, care and protection of abrasive grinding wheels.
IS: 3016
Code of practice for fire safety precautions in welding & cutting operation.
IS: 3043
IS: 3764
IS: 3786
Methods for computation of frequency and severity rates for industrial injuries
and classification of industrial accidents
IS: 3696
IS: 4083
IS: 4770
IS: 5121
IS: 5216 (Pt-I) Recommendations on Safety procedures and practices in electrical works
IS: 5557
IS: 5983
Eye protectors
IS: 6519
IS: 6994 (Pt-I) Industrial Safety Gloves (Leather & Cotton Gloves)
IS: 7293
IS: 8519
IS: 9167
Ear protectors
IS: 11006
IS: 11016
General and safety requirements for machine tools and their operation
IS: 11057
IS: 11226
IS: 11972
IS: 13367
IS: 13416
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 37 of 87
APPENDIX-A
(Sheet 2 of 2)
B.
Safety Glasses
Safety Shoes
Hand Gloves
BS 1651
Ear Muffs
Hard Hat
Goggles
ANSI Z 87.1
Face Shield
ANSI Z 89.1
Breathing Apparatus
BS 4667, NIOSH
ANSI Z 49.1
EN-361
Lanyard
EN-354
Karabiner
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 38 of 87
APPENDIX-B
DETAILS OF FIRST AID BOX
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SL.
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY
NO.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
6 Pcs.
6 Pcs.
6 Pcs.
4 Pkts.
4 Pkts.
1 Bottle
1 Bottle
1 Bottle
1 Piece
1 Spool
4 pcs.
1 No.
1 Dozen
1 Bottle
1 No.
1 Pkt.
1 Bottle
2 Nos.
5 Pcs.
1 Bottle
1 No.
2 Pkt.
1 Pkt.
1 Bottle
1 No.
1 No.
1 No. each
1 No.
1 No.
1 Bottle
1 No.
1 No.
4 Nos.
1 Piece
As decided at site
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 39 of 87
APPENDIX-C
TYPE OF FIRES VIS--VIS FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Fire
Extinguisher
Water
Fire
Foam
Originated
from
paper, clothes, wood
Inflammable liquids
like alcohol, diesel,
petrol, edible oils,
bitumen
Originated
from
gases like LPG,
CNG, H2
Electrical fires
LEGEND :
Dry Powder
can control
minor surface
fires
can control
minor surface
fires
Multi purpose
(ABC)
CO2
: CAN BE USED
: NOT TO BE USED
Note: Fire extinguishing equipment must be checked at least once a year and after every use by an
authorized person. The equipment must have an inspection label on which the next inspection date is
given. Type of extinguisher shall clearly be marked on it.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 40 of 87
APPENDIX-D
List of Statutory Acts & Rules Relating to HSE
-
The Gas Cylinder Rules and the Static & Mobile Pressure Vessels Rules
The Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and Condition of service)
Act
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 41 of 87
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Falling into pit
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
Personal injury
Earth Collapse
Suffocation/
Breathlessness
Buried
Contact with
buried electric
cables
Gas/ Oil
Electrocution
Explosion
Pipelines
Pit Excavation
beyond 3.0m
Same as above
plus
Flooding due to
excessive rain/
underground
water
Digging in the
vicinity of
existing Building/
Structure
Movement of
vehicles/
equipments close
to the edge of cut.
Can cause
drowning situation
Building/Structure
may collapse
Loss of health &
wealth
May cause cave-in
or slides.
Persons may get
buried.
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Provide guard rails/ barricade with warning
signal
Provide at least two entries/ exits.
Provide escape ladders.
Provide suitable size of shoring and strutting, if
required.
Keep soil heaps away from the edge equivalent to
1.5m or depth of pit whichever is more.
Don't allow vehicles to operate too close to
excavated areas. Maintain at least 2m distance
from edge of cut.
Maintain sufficient angle of repose. Provide
slope not less than 1:1 and suitable bench of 0.5m
width at every 1.5m depth of excavation in all
soils except hard rock.
Battering/benching the sides.
Obtain permission from competent authorities,
prior to excavation, if required.
Locate the position of buried utilities by referring
to plant drawings.
Start digging manually to locate the exact
position of buried utilities and thereafter use
mechanical means.
Prevent ingress of water
Provide ring buoys
Identify and provide suitable size dewatering
pump or well point system
Obtain prior approval of excavation method from
local authorities.
Use under-pining method
Construct retaining wall side by side.
Barricade the excavated area with proper lighting
arrangements
Maintain at least 2m distance from edge of cut
and use stop blocks to prevent over-run
Strengthen shoring and strutting
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 42 of 87
Rock by
excavation
blasting
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Same as above
plus
Frequent cave-in
or slides
Flooding due to
Hydro- static
testing
Improper
handling of
explosives
Uncontrolled
explosion
Rock excavation
by blasting
(Contd)
Scattering of
stone pieces in
atmosphere
Entrapping of
persons/ animals.
Misfire
Piling Work
Failure of piledriving
equipment
Noise pollution
Extruding
rods/casing
Working in the
vicinity of 'LiveElectricity'
(B)
CONCRETING
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
May cause severe
injuries or prove
fatal
Battering/benching of sides
Provide escape ladders
Air pollution by
cement
Handling of
ingredients
May affect
Respiratory System
Hands may get
injured
Protruding
reinforcement
rods.
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 43 of 87
Super-structure
(C)
REINFORCEMENT
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Earthing of
electrical
mixers,
vibrators, etc.
not done.
Falling of
materials from
height
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
Can cause
electrocution/
asphyxiation
Continuous
pouring by same
gang
Revolving of
concrete mixer/
vibrators
Same as above
plus
Deflection in
props or
shuttering
material
Passage to work
place
Cause tiredness of
workers and may
lead to accident.
Parts of body or
clothes may get
entrapped.
Shuttering/props
may collapse and
prove fatal
Curtailment and
binding of rods
Carrying of rods
for short
distances/at
heights
Checking of
clear distance/
cover with hands
Hitting projected
rods and
standing on
cantilever rods.
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Ensure earthing of equipments and proper
functioning of electrical circuit before
commencement of work.
Use hard hats
Remove surplus material immediately from work
place.
Ensure lighting arrangements during night hours
Insist on shift pattern
Provide adequate rest to workers between
subsequent pours.
Allow only mixers with hopper
Provide safety cages around moving motors
Ensure proper mechanical locking of vibrator
Avoid excessive stacking on shuttering material
Check the design and strength of shuttering
material before commencement of work
Rectify immediately the deflection noted during
concreting.
Ensure the stability and strength of passage
before commencement of work.
Do not overload and stand under the passage.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 44 of 87
(D)WELDING
AND GAS
CUTTING
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Falling of material
from height
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
May prove fatal
Transportation of
rods by trucks/
trailers
Welding radiates
invisible
ultraviolet and
infra-red rays
Improper
placement of
oxygen and
acetylene cylinders
Radiation can
damage eyes and
skin.
Leakage/ cuts in
hoses
Opening-up of
cylinder
Welding of tanks,
container or pipes
storing flammable
liquids
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Use helmets
Provide safety nets
Use red flags/lights at the ends
Do not protrude the rods in front of or by the side
of driver's cabin.
Do not extend the rods 1/3rd of deck length or
1.5m whichever is less
Use specified shielding devices and other PPE of
correct specifications.
Avoid thoriated tungsten electrodes for GTAW
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 45 of 87
(F) ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
AND USAGE
(*)
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Ionizing
radiation
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
Radiations may react
with the skin and can
cause cancer, skin
irritation, dermatitis,
etc.
Transpor-tation
and Storage of
Radiog-raphy
source
Same as above
Loss of Radio
isotope
Short circuiting
Same as above
Can cause
Electrocution or Fire
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Ensure Safety regulations as per BARC/AERB
before commencement of job.
Cordon off the area and install Radiation warning
symbols
Restrict the entry of unauthorized persons
Wear appropriate PPE and film badges issued by
BARC/AERB
Never touch or handle radiography source with
hands
Store radiography source inside a pit in an
exclusive isolated storage room with lock and
key arrangement. The pit should be approved by
BARC/AERB.
Radiography source should never be carried
either in passenger bus or in a passenger
compartment of trains.
BARC/AERB has to be informed before source
movement.
Permission from Director General of Civil
Aviation is required for booking radio isotopes
with airlines.
Try to locate with the help of Survey Meter.
Inform BARC/AERB (*)
Use rubberized hand gloves and other PPE
Don't lay wires under carpets, mats or door ways.
Allow only licensed electricians to perform on
electrical facilities
Use one socket for one appliance
Ensure usage of only fully insulated wires or
cables
Don't place bare wire ends in a socket
Ensure earthing of machineries and equipments
Do not use damaged cords and avoid temporary
connections
Use spark-proof/flame proof type field
distribution boxes.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 46 of 87
(G) FIRE
PREVENTION
AND
PROTECTION
TYPE OF
HAZARD
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
Overloading of
Electrical
System
Bursting of system
can occur which
leads to fire
Improper laying
of overhead and
underground
transmission
lines/cables
Can cause
electrocution and
prove fatal
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Do not allow open/bare connections
Provide all connections through ELCB
Protect electrical cables/equipment's from water
and naked flames
Check all connections before energizing
Display voltage and current ratings prominently
with 'Danger' signs.
Ensure approved cable size, voltage grade and
type
Switch off the electrical utilities when not in use
Do not allow unauthorized connections.
Ensure proper grid wise distribution of Power
Do not lay unarmoured cable directly on ground,
wall, roof of trees
Maintain at least 3m distance from HT cables
All temporary cables should be laid at least 750
mm below ground on 100 mm fine sand
overlying by brick soling
Provide proper sleeves at crossings/ intersections
Provide cable route markers indicating the type
and depth of cables at intervals not exceeding
30m and at the diversions/termination
In case a fire breaks out, press fire alarm system
and shout "Fire, Fire"
Keep buckets full of sand & water/ fire
extinguishing equipment near hazardous
locations
Confine smoking to 'Smoking Zones' only.
Train people for using specific type of fire
fighting equipments under different classes of fire
Keep fire doors/shutters, passages and exit doors
unobstructed
Maintain good housekeeping and first-aid boxes
(for details refer Appendix-B)
Don't obstruct assess to Fire extinguishers.
Do not use elevators for evacuation during fire.
Maintain lightening arrestors for elevated
structures
Stop all electrical motors with internal
combustion
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 47 of 87
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Improper
selection of Fire
extinguisher
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
It may not
extinguish the fire
(H)
VEHICULAR
MOVEMENT
Short circuiting
of electrical
system
Same as above
Can cause
Electrocution
Crossing the
Speed Limits
(Rash driving)
Personal injury
Adverse weather
condition
Same as Above
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Move the vehicles from dangerous locations
Remove the load hanging from the crane booms
Remain out of the danger areas.
Ensure usage of correct fire extinguisher meant
for the specified fire (for details refer AppendixC).
Do not attempt to extinguish Oil and electric
fires with water. Use foam cylinders/CO2/sand
or earth.
Maintain safe distance of flammable substances
from source of ignition
Restrict the distribution of flammable materials
to only min. necessary amount
Construct specifically designed fuel storage
facilities
Keep chemicals in cool and dry place away from
heat. Ensure adequate ventilation
Before welding operation, remove or shield the
flammable material properly
Store flammable materials in stable racks,
correctly labeled preferably with catchment
trays.
Wipe off the spills immediately
Don't lay wires under carpets, mats or door ways
Use one socket for one appliance.
Use only fully insulated wires or cables
Do not allow open/bare connections
Provide all connections through ELCB
Ensure earthing of machineries and equipments
Obey speed limits and traffic rules strictly
Always expect the unexpected and be a
defensive driver
Use seat belts/helmets
Blow horn at intersections and during
overtaking operations.
Maintain the vehicle in good condition
Do not overtake on curves, bridges and slopes
Read the road ahead and ride to the left
Keep the wind screen and lights clean
Do not turn at speed.
Recognize the hazard, understand the defense
and act correctly in time.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 48 of 87
(I)
PROOF
TESTING
(HYDROSTATI
C /PNEUMATIC
TESTING)
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Consuming
alcohol before
and during the
driving
operation
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
Same as above
Falling objects/
Mechanical
failure
Bursting of
piping
Collapse of
tanks
Tanks flying off
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Alcohol and driving do not mix well. Either
choose alcohol or driving.
If you have a choice between hitting a fixed
object or an on-coming vehicle, hit the fixed
object
Quit the steering at once and become a passenger.
Otherwise take sufficient rest and then drive.
Do not force the driver to drive fast and round the
clock.
Do not day dream while driving
Ensure effective braking system, adequate
visibility for the drives, reverse warning alarm..
Proper maintenance of the vehicle as per
manufacturer instructions
Prepare test procedure & obtain EIL/owner's
approval
Provide separate gauge for pressurizing pump
and piping/equipment
Check the calibration status of all pressure
gauges, dead weight testers and temperature
recorders
Take dial readings at suitable defined intervals
and ensure most of them fall between 40-60% of
the gauge scale range
Provide safety relief valve (set at pressure
slightly higher than test pressure) while testing
with air/ nitrogen
Ensure necessary precautions, stepwise increase
in pressure, tightening of bolts/nuts, grouting, etc.
before and during testing
Keep the vents open before opening any valve
while draining out of water used for hydro-testing
of tanks.
Pneumatic testing involves the hazard of released
energy stored in compressed gas. Specific care
must therefore be taken to minimize the chance
of brittle failure during a pneumatic leak test.
Test temperature is important in this regard and
must be considered when the designer chooses
the material of construction.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 49 of 87
(J)
WORKING AT
HEIGHTS
TYPE OF
HAZARD
(K) CONFINED
SPACES
Suffocation/
drowning
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
Unconsciousness,
death
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
A pressure relief device shall be provided, having
a set pressure not higher than the test pressure
plus the lesser of 345 KPa (50 psi) or 10% of the
test pressure.
The gas used as test fluid, if not air, shall be
nonflammable and nontoxic.
Provide guard rails/barricade at the work place
Use PPE like full body harness, life line, helmets,
safety shoes, etc.
Obtain a permit before starting the work at height
above 3 meters
Fall arrest and safety nets, etc. must be installed
Provide adequate working space (min. 0.6 m)
Tie/weld working platform with fixed support
Use roof top walk ladder while working on a
slopping roofs
Avoid movement on beams
Keep the work place neat and clean
Remove the scrap immediately
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 50 of 87
TYPE OF
HAZARD
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Check for presence of hydrocarbons, O2 level
Obtain work permit before entering a confined
space
Ensure that the connected piping of the
equipment which is to be opened is pressure
free, fluid has been drained, vents are open and
piping is positively isolated by a blind flange
(L)
HANDLING
AND
LIFTING
EQUIPMENTS
Presence of
foul smell and
toxic
substances
Ignition/ flame
can cause fire
Failure of load
lifting and
moving
equipments
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 51 of 87
(M)
SCAFFOLDI
NG,
FORMWOR
K
AND
LADDERS
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Overloading of
lifting
equipments
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
Same as above
Overhead
electrical wires
Can cause
electrocution and
fire
Failure of
scaffolding
material
Same as above
Material can
fall down
Persons working at
lower level gets
injured
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Safe lifting capacity of derricks and winches
written on them shall be got verified
The max. safe working load shall be marked on
all lifting equipments
Check the weight of columns and other heavy
items painted on them and accordingly decide
about the crane capacity, boom and angle of
erection
Allow only trained operators and riggers during
crane operation.
Do not allow boom or other parts of crane to
come within 3m reach of overhead HT cables
Hook and load being lifted shall preferably
remain in full visibility of crane operators.
Provide guard rails for working at height
Face ladder while climbing and use both hands.
Ladders shall extend about 1m above landing for
easy access and tying up purpose
Do not place ladders against movable objects and
maintain base at 1/4 unit of the working length of
the ladder.
Suspended scaffolds shall not be less than 500
mm wide and tied properly with ropes
No loose planks shall be allowed
Use PPE, like helmets, safety shoes,etc
Inspect visually all scaffolding materials for
stability and anchoring with permanent
structures.
Design scaffolding for max. load carrying
capacity.
Scaffolding planks shall not be less than 50X250
mm full thickness lumber or equivalent. These
shall be cleated or secured and must extend over
the end supports by at least 150mm and not more
than 300mm
Don't overload the scaffolds
Do not splice short ladders to make a longer one.
Vertical ladders shall not exceed 6m.
Remove excess material and scrap immediately
Carry the tools in a tool-kit bag only
Provide safety nets
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 52 of 87
(O)
PIPELINE
WORKS
(P)
GRIT
BLASTING
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
Can cause injury or
casualty
Lifting/ slipping
of material
Same as above
Erection/
lowering failure
Other
Same as above
Pollution in
neighboring
area, hit by grits
and high
pressure air
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Do not take rest inside rooms built for welding
machines or electrical distribution system.
Avoid walking on beams at height
Wear helmet with chin strap and full body
harness while working at height.
Use hand gloves and goggles during grinding
operations
Cover or mark the sharp and projected edges
Do not stand within the operating radius of
cranes
Do not stand under the lifted load
Stack properly all the materials. Avoid slippage
during handling
Control longer pieces lifted up by cranes from
both ends
Remove loose materials from height
Ensure tightening of all nuts & bolts
Do not stand under the lifted load
Do not allow any person to come within the
radii of the side boom handling pipes
Check the load carrying capacity of the lifting
tools & tackles
Use safe Load Indicators
Use appropriate PPEs
Wear gum boots in marshy areas
Allow only one person to perform signaling
operations while lowering of pipes
Provide night caps on pipes
Provide end covers on pipes for stoppage of pigs
while testing/ cleaning operations
Ensure the blasting is done in enclosed shed.
Keep safe distance while blasting operations.
Wear positive pressure blast hood or helmet
with view window, ear-muff/plug, gloves,
overall or leather coat /apron, rubber shoes.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 53 of 87
APPENDIX-F
TRAINING SUBJECTS / TOPICS
The Law & Safety Statutory Requirement / Applicable statutes / Duties of employer / employee
2.
Policy & Administration Why HSE? / Duties & Responsibilities of Safety Personnel at project
site / Effect of incentive on accident prevention
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Cranes & Other Lifting machinery Legal requirements vis--vis essential safety requirements.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Safety
lanyards / Life-
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 54 of 87
APPENDIX - G
CONSTRUCTION POWER BOARD( typ)
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 55 of 87
APPENDIX-H
LIST OF PROCEDURES (MINIMUM) TO BE FORMING PART OF HSE PLAN:A.
B.
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 56 of 87
HSE-1 REV 0
(Sheet 1 of 6)
SAFETY WALK-THROUGH REPORT
(Name & signature of walk through performer to be inserted at the bottom of each page)
Project
: _____________
Report no.
: ___________
Date
: _____________
Contractor
: ___________
Inspection by
:_____________
Owner
: ___________
Frequency
: Monthly
Job no.
: ___________
ITEM
1.
a)
HOUSEKEEPING
Waste containers provided and used
b)
c)
d)
e)
Other
2.
a)
b)
Goggles; Shields
Face protection
Satisafctory
/ Yes
Non
satisfactory/
No
Remarks
Action
Hearing protection
Foot protection
e)
Hand protection
f)
g)
h)
i)
Other
3.
EXCAVATIONS/OPENINGS
a)
b)
c)
Excavations barricaded
d)
e)
Other
Safety walk-through performer (Name & Signature)..
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 57 of 87
HSE-1 REV 0
(Sheet 2 of 6)
SL.
NO.
ITEM
4.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Other
5.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Adequate shoring
e)
Adequate access
f)
g)
h)
Other
6.
LADDERS
a)
b)
Top of landing
c)
Properly secured
d)
e)
Other
Satisafctory
/ Yes
Non
satisfactory/
No
Remarks
Action
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 58 of 87
HSE-1 REV 0
(Sheet 3 of 6)
SL.
NO.
ITEM
7.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Qualified operators
i)
Other
8.
a)
Proper instruction
b)
Safety devices
c)
Proper cords
d)
e)
Other
9.
a)
b)
c)
Licensed drivers
d)
Other
Satisafctory
/ Yes
Non
satisfactory
/No
Remarks
Action
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 59 of 87
HSE-1 REV 0
(Sheet 4 of 6)
SL.
NO.
ITEM
10.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
General neatness
f)
g)
Other
11.
FIRE PREVENTION
a)
c)
d)
e)
12.
ELECTRICAL
a)
b)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
f)
Satisafctory
/ Yes
Non
satisfactory
/No
Remarks
Action
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 60 of 87
HSE-1 REV 0
(Sheet 5 of 6)
SL.
NO.
14.
a)
b)
c)
15.
a)
b)
c)
d)
16.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
17.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
18.
a)
b)
ITEM
Satisafctory
/ Yes
Non
satisfactory
/No
Remarks
Action
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 61 of 87
HSE-1 REV 0
(Sheet 6 of 6)
SL.
NO.
ITEM
c)
d)
e)
f)
19.
HEALTH CHECKS
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
20.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Satisafctory
/ Yes
Non
satisfactory
/No
Remarks
Action
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 62 of 87
HSE-2 REV 0
(Sheet 1 of 3)
ACCIDENT / INCIDENT REPORT
(To be submitted by Contractor after every Incident / Accident within 24 hours to EIL/ Owner)
Report No.: ____________________________
Date:
______________________
Carpenter
Meson
Fitter
Helper
Gas cutter
Grinder
Welder
Electrician
Driver
Rigger
M/c.operator
Engineer
Manager
Other/specify
No formal education
Non-Matriculate
Matriculate
Graduate
Post- grad
Other/specify
NIL
2-5 yrs
5-10 yrs
11-15 yrs
Qualification
Job Experience
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 63 of 87
HSE-2 REV 0
(Sheet 2 of 3)
Demolition
Concrete carrying
Concrete pouring
Transportation of materials
Transportation
(manually)
materials (mechanically)
Scaffold preparation
Scaffold dismantling
Piling works
Welding
Grinding
Gas-cutting
Structural fabrications
Machine works
Hydro-testing works
Electrical works
Erection activities
Other/specify
of
What exactly the victim was doing just before the incident / accident? ....................................
.
.
Nature of injury:
Bruise or Contusion
Sprains or strains
Cut or Laceration
Burn
Absorption
Amputation
Inhalation
of
toxic
Poisonous fumes or gases
Fracture
or
Other/specify
Eyes
Throat
Fingers
Throat
Chest / Shoulder)
Leg (above ankle)
Multiple
Toes
Other/specify
Accident type:
Struck against
Struck by
caught in
caught under
caught in between
Rubbed or abraded
Vehicle accident
Contact
with
extremes)
Other/specify
(Temp./
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 64 of 87
HSE-2 REV 0
(Sheet 3 of 3)
...
_____________________________________________________________________________
Intimation to local authorities (Dist Collector / Local Police Station / ESI authority): Yes / No / NA.
If yes, to whom ..
Safety Officer
To
:
:
Contractor
Owner
RCM/Site-in-charge EIL (3 copies)
Divisional Head (Constn) through RCM
Project Manager, EIL, through RCM
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 65 of 87
HSE-3 REV 0
(Sheet 1 of 5)
Carpenter
Meson
Fitter
Helper
Gas cutter
Grinder
Welder
Electrician
Driver
Rigger
M/c.operator
Engineer
Manager
Other/specify
No formal education
Non-Matriculate
Matriculate
Graduate
Post- grad
Other/specify
NIL
2-5 yrs
5-10 yrs
11-15 yrs
Qualification
Job Experience
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 66 of 87
HSE-3 REV 0
(Sheet 2 of 5)
Demolition
Concrete carrying
Concrete pouring
Transportation of materials
Transportation
(manually)
materials (mechanically)
Scaffold preparation
Scaffold dismantling
Piling works
Welding
Grinding
Gas-cutting
Structural fabrications
Machine works
Hydro-testing works
Electrical works
Erection activities
Other/specify
of
What exactly the victim was doing just before the incident / accident? ....................................
.
.
Particular of tools & tackles being used and condition of the same after incident/accident:
.........................................
Description
of
Incident/Accident
(How
the
incident
was
caused):
.
Nature of injury:
Bruise or Contusion
Sprains or strains
Cut or Laceration
Burn
Absorption
Amputation
Inhalation
of
toxic
Poisonous fumes or gases
Fracture
or
Other/specify
Face
Eyes
Throat
Fingers
Throat
Chest / Shoulder)
Leg (above ankle)
Multiple
Toes
Other/specify
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 67 of 87
HSE-3 REV 0
(Sheet 3 of 5)
Accident type:
Struck against
Struck by
caught in
caught under
caught in between
Rubbed or abraded
Vehicle accident
Contact
with
extremes)
Other/specify
(Temp./
Name & Designation of person who provided First-Aid to the victim: --------------------------------------Name & Telephone number of Hospital where the victim was treated_________________________
Mode of transport used for transporting victim Ambulance / Private car / Tempo / Truck / Others
How much time taken to shift the injured person to Hospital________________________________
In case of FATAL incident, indicate clearly the BOCW Registration No. of the victim
/Company
Comments of Medical Practitioner, who treated / attended the victim/injured (attached / described
here)_____________________________________________________________________
What actions are taken for investigation of the incident, please indicate clearly (Video film /
Photography / Measurements taken etc..)
Hazardous
methods
or
procedures
inadequately
guarded
Environmental
hazards
(excess
noise/
space
constraint/
inadequate
ventilation
Poor housekeeping
Inadequate or improper
PPE
improper
illumination/Moving on oval
surface
Working on dangerous
equipment
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 68 of 87
HSE-3 REV 0
(Sheet 4 of 5)
Failure to secure
Horse-play
Inattention to surroundings
Failure in communication
drug
or
influence
alcoholic
Basic cause
Over confidence
Impulsiveness
over-exertion
Slow reaction
Others(specify)
Root cause
Inadequate Engg
Improper Design
Inadequate knowledge
Inadequate skill
Inadequate supervision
Substandard performance
Inadequate maintenance
Others(specify)
Loss of man days and impact on site works, (if any)
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 69 of 87
HSE-3 REV 0
(Sheet 5 of 5)
Remedial measures recommended by Safety Officer of Contractor for avoiding similar incident in
future
:
.
.
.
.
...
Intimation to local authorities (Dist Collector / Local Police Station / ESI authority): Yes / No / NA.
If yes, to whom ..
_____________________________________________________________________________
Safety Officer
(Signature and Name)
To :
:
Contractor
Owner
RCM// Site-in-charge of EIL (3 copies)
Divisional Head (Constn) through RCM
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 70 of 87
HSE-4 REV 0
Date: ______________________
Contractor: __________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
Incident reported by
Location
__________________________________________________________________________________
Brief description of incident
__________________________________________________________________________________
Probable cause of incident
__________________________________________________________________________________
Suggested corrective action
__________________________________________________________________________________
Steps taken to avoid recurrence
To
:
:
Yes
No
Owner
RCM/Site-in-charge EIL (3 copies)
Divisional Head (Constn) through RCM
Project Manager EIL, through RCM
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 71 of 87
FORMAT NO.
:
HSE-5 REV 0
MONTHLY HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT (HSE) REPORT
(To be submitted by each Contractor)
shall
ITEM
THIS
MONTH
CUMULATIVE
Fatal
Other LTA
Fatalities
Other LTI
Remarks, if any
Date:
Prepared by Safety Officer
(Signature and Name)
To : - OWNER
- RCM EIL (2 copies)
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 72 of 87
:
HSE-6 REV 0
PERMIT FOR WORKING AT HEIGHTS (ABOVE 2.0 METER)
(In duplicate to be issued daily for site and for office)
Permit No..
Name of Main Contractor
Name of work executing agency / sub agency / vendor:...
Date
Exact Location of work
Nature of work ..Duration of work (from) (to) .......
Number of workers covered within this permit
(List enclosed with name & gate pass numbers.)
Sl.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Status of compliance
(Yes / No)
Items / Subjects
Work areas / Equipments inspected
Work area cordoned off
Adequate lighting is provided
Precautions against public traffic taken
Concerned persons in & around have been alerted & cautioned
Hazards / risks involved in routine / non-routine task assessed and control
measures have been implemented at specific task
ELCB provided for electrical connection & found working
Ladder safely attached / fixed
Scaffoldings are checked and TAGs are found used correctly
Working platforms are provided and are found sound /safe for use
Safe access & egress arrangements (e.g. ladders, fall arresters, life-lines etc.)
are satisfactorily incorporated
a.
Openings on platform / floors are effectively cordoned / covered
b.
Use of following safety gadgets by people working at area under this permit, is
checked and found satisfactory Safety helmet
Safety harness (full body) with double lanyard
Safety Shoes
Safety gloves
Safety goggles
Housekeeping of work area found satisfactorily tidy / clean & clear
Adequate measures have been taken for works being continued at the ground
level, when simultaneous works are permitted overhead at that very location.
Materials are not thrown from heights on to ground
Medical examination of workers are made & found satisfactory
Responsible job engineer / supervisor found physically present at work spot for
overall administration of work as well as safety of people.
Above items have been checked & compliance has been found in place. Hence work is permitted to
start / continue at the above-mentioned location. Work shall not start till identified lapses are rectified.
Additional Precautions, if any .
..
Work Permit issued by
Contractor Engineer/RCM
Verification By
Contractor Safety Officer
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 73 of 87
HSE-7 REV 0
Y NR
water
flushed
&/or
steamed
Man ways open &
ventilated
cont. inert gas flow
arranged
adequately cooled
Y NR
sources
lighting
radiation
removed
proper
provided
Signature
Contractor's
Supervisor
Contractor's
Safety Officer
Time
From
To
Signature
Workman
Permit Closure :
was closed
stopped
(A)
Entry
(B)
(C)
Multilock
removed
key transferred
Ensured all men have come out Man-ways barricaded
Housekeeping done
Remarks, if any:
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 74 of 87
HSE-8 REV 0
RADIATION WORK PERMIT
Project
:
Name of the work
:
Name of site contractor :
Location of work
Source strength
Sr.No. :
Date :
Job No. :
Approved by Owner/EIL
The following items have been checked &compliance shall be ensured during currency of the
permit:
S. No.
Item description
Safety regulations as per BARC/AERB ensured while source in use/in transit & during
storage
Area cordoned off / safe working platform provided
Lighting arrangements for working during nights ensured
Warning signs/ flash lights installed
Cold work permit taken (if applicable)
PPEs like film badges, dosimeters used
Done
:Designation:
Permit extended up to
Date
Date:
Sign of issuing authority with
date (of site contractor)
Time
FORMAT NO.
Project
Name of the work
Name of contractor
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 75 of 87
:
HSE-9 REV 0
DEMOLISHING/DISMANTLING WORK PERMIT
:
Sr.No. :
:
Date :
:
Job No. :
Name of sub-contractor :
The following items have been checked &compliance shall be ensured during currency of the
permit:
S.
No.
Item description
Done
Not
Applicable
Permission is granted.
(Permit issuing authority)
Name
Date
:
:
Completion report :
Dismantling/ Demolishing is completed on _____________ Date at ____________ Hrs.
Materials/ debris transported to identified location
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 76 of 87
HSE-10 REV 0
DAILY SAFETY CHECKLIST
(To make use of before start of days work)
Project
Name of the work
Name of contractor
:
:
:
Sr.No. :
Date :
Job No. :
Sl.
No
1
2
3
4
Safety Helmets
Safety Shoes
Hand Gloves
Dust Musk
Sl.
No
6
7
8
9
Safety Goggles
10
PPEs
Compliance
(Yes / No)
PPEs
Compliance (Yes
/ No)
Face Shield
Full body harness
Fall Arrest System
Safety net
Horizontal life-line made
of steel wire, (dia not
less than 8.0 mm.)
(Serial No. 1 & 2 are compulsory for everyone. Specify & ensure use of other safety gadgets as required for the job)
Sl. No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Conditions
Access to work site / emergency escape clear
Soil / Loose earth kept away from excavated pit / slope / ladder provided
Electrical wire / welding lead lying entangled on ground / welding m/c. booth
accessible
Elevated work platform / open ends are protected
Ground area cordoned off before lifting works or erection at height / ground
area checked & cordoned-off before start of height works
Structural members / erected pipes / wooden boards/pieces etc. are safely
anchored at heights and are not likely to fall down on people when working
beneath
Rope ladders tied-up on tall steel structures, long before are removed to get
rid of their use
Any Other
Yes / No
Above conditions and PPE compliances are checked by undersigned and correct status are indicated after
verification
Inspected by
Contractor Engineer
Verification By
Contractor Safety Officer
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 77 of 87
HSE-11 REV 0
(Sheet 1 of 2)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
:
:
:
: Fortnightly
Subjects of Review
Sr.No. :
Date :
Job No. :
Satisafctory/
Yes
Non
satisfactory/No
Remarks
Action
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 78 of 87
HSE-11 REV 0
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Sl
No.
Subjects of Review
Satisafctory/
Yes
Non
satisfactory/No
Remarks
Action
Inspected by
Contractor Engineer
Verification By
Contractor Safety Officer
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 79 of 87
HSE-12 REV 0
SUBJECTS
Sr.No. :
Date :
Job No. :
Location:
OBSERVATION (YES /NO)
ACTION TAKEN
Inspected by
Contractor Engineer
Verification By
Contractor Safety Officer
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 80 of 87
HSE-13 REV 0
(Sheet 1 of 2)
INSPECTION FOR SCAFFOLDING
Project
Name of the work
Name of contractor
Sl.
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
:
:
:
Sr.No. :
Date :
Job No. :
Description
Yes
No
N.A
Actions
taken
Whether work permit is obtained to take up work at height above 1.5 Mts?
Whether atmospheric condition is stormy or raining and works at
heights have been permitted?
Whether steel pipes scaffoldings are used for units /off-site areas?
Whether scaffolding has been erected on rigid/firm/leveled surfaces /
ground? Whether foot-seals or base-plates are used beneath the uprights (vertical steel pipes)
Whether scaffold construction is as per IS specification with toe-board and
hand-rails (top-rail as well as mid-rail)?
Whether distance between two successive up-rights are less than 2.5 Mts
(height of scaffold & load carrying capacity governs the distance between
two uprights)
Whether all uprights are extended at least 900 mm above the top most
working platform (to enable fitting of handrails)?
Whether vertical distance of two successive ledgers is satisfactory?
(varying between 1.3 Mts. To 2.1 Mts)
Whether the peripheral areas of working at height are cordoned-off? (for
avoiding accident to people arising out of dropped / deflected materials)
Whether platform is provided? Is it safely approachable?
Whether end of scaffold platform / board are extended beyond transoms?
(125mm to 150 mm)
Whether CE / IS approved quality and worthy conditioned full-body safety
harness (with double lanyard & karabiners) are used while working at
heights?
Whether life-line of safety harness is anchored to an independent secured
support capable of withstanding load of a falling person?
Whether the area around the scaffold is cordoned off to prohibit the entry of
unauthorized person / vehicle?
Whether clamps used are of good condition, of adequate strength and free
from defects?
Whether ladder is placed at secured and leveled surface?
Whether water-pass and oil-spills are avoided around the scaffold structure?
Whether ladder is extended 1.5mts. above the landing point at height?
Whether more than one access/egress provided to the scaffold?
Whether ladder used are of adequate length and overlapping of short
ladders avoided?
Whether metallic ladders are placed much away from near-by electrical
transmission line?
Whether rungs of ladder are inspected and found in good order?
Whether fall-arresters provided on both the access/egress routes?
Whether diagonal (cross) bracings are provided at regular interval on the
scaffold?
Whether working platform on the scaffold has been made free from jolt
or gap?
Whether tools or materials are removed after completion of the days job at
heights?
Whether a valid Permit for Work (PFW) is obtained before taking up work
over asbestos or fragile roof?
Whether sufficient precaution is taken while working on fragile roof?
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 81 of 87
HSE-13 REV 0
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Sl.
No
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Description
Yes
No
N. A
Actions
taken
Inspected by
Contractor Engineer
Verification By
Contractor Safety Officer
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 82 of 87
HSE-14 REV 0
(sheet 1 of 2)
PERMIT FOR ERECTION / MODIFICATION & DISMANTLING OF SCAFFOLDING
Project
:
Sr.No. :
Name of the work
:
Date :
Name of contractor
:
Job No. :
Nature of activities
:
Duration: FromTo
SL.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
SUBJECTS / ITEMS
DONE
NOT
DONE
REMARKS
Names to be
noted
This permit for work shall be available at specific work location all the time.
After completion of work, permit shall be returned to safety cell of main contractor, without fail.
This Permit shall be issued maximum upto (Monday to Sunday).
Additional Precautions, if any
Inspected by
Contractor Engineer
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Verification By
Contractor Safety Officer]
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 83 of 87
HSE-14 REV 0
(sheet 2of 2)
Everyday Site working conditions & performance of workmen shall be assessed / checked by Contractor
Site Engr. and Safety Officer shall verify the same .
Name / Sign.
MONDAY
TUESDAY
WEDNESDAY
THURSDAY
FRIDAY
SATURDAY
Site
Engr.
Safety
Off.
SUNDAY
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 84 of 87
HSE-15 REV 0
:
:
:
:
Location of work
:
Equipment/Structure to be erected:
SL.
NO.
1)
Sr.No. :
Date :
Job No. :
Duration: FromTo
Name /Type of crane
:
Wt. of equipment/ structure to be erected :
Description of Item
Yes
8)
9)
10)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
COMPLIANCE STATUS
No
Not applicable
Remarks
Verification By
Contractor Safety Officer
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 85 of 87
HSE-16 REV 0
:
:
:
Sr.No. :
Date :
Job No. :
PERMIT VALIDATION
PERFORMING AUTHORITY
I hereby authorize the ..personnel(performer) The work and precautions will be carried out under my
to isolate the above equipment/energy source from all overall responsibility.(Testing/execution engineer)
sources of power and handover the equipment/energy
source for maintenance/repair.
Signature:
Date:
Issuing authority
Name:
Area Incharge/RCM
Signature:
Date:
Name:
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR CLEARANCE
1. Notify workers of intent to de- energize
2. Obtain lock,tag or locking/tagging devices
3. Shut down ,de energize, dissipate any
residual energies.
4. Apply lock ,tag and locking and/or tagging
devices
5. *Any other job specific precautions
6. Verify effectiveness of lockout by
attempting to restart.
7. Proper PPE is ensured
Signature:
Name:
Date:
Date:
Countersigned by Issuing authority
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 86 of 87
HSE-17 REV 0
Project
Name of the work
Name of contractor
:
:
:
Sr.No. :
Date :
Job No. :
Job Description
Size of excavation
:
:
Location:
COMPLIANCE STATUS
Yes
No
Not
applicable
SL.
Description of Item
NO.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
Remarks
Yes /
No
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 87 of 87
HSE-17 REV 0
PERMIT FOR EXCAVATION
(Sheet 2of 2)
NOTES: 1. Slopes or benches for excavation beyond 2.0M depth shall be designed & approved by Contractors site
head.
2. Excavated earth to be kept at least 1.5M away from edges
3. Safety helmets, Safety shoes or gum-boots, gloves, goggles, Face shield, Safety Harness shall be essential
PPEs.
4. Permit shall be made in duplicate and original shall be available at site of work.
5. Permit shall be issued for maximum one week only (Monday to Sunday)
6. After completion of works, permit shall be closed & preserved for record purpose
Validity period
From ____To ____
Working Time
From _____To _____
Initiator (site
Engr. of Main
Contractor)
Issuing authority
(Safety Officer
of Main
Contractor)
Review by EIL /
Owner (Remarks
with date
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Onfaelelift ENGINEERS
$agar &Reg w INDIA LIMITED
Go. of India Undertaking)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 1 of 37
tr4
R.1 TAcal ,
It cocil atildltil/
uct)c-I c4c61 7i1"4-4T3T1)
wre die -1W-414iffr tr4
Orrta)
litikEroT
04.07.2011
SM
17.10.2005
MPJ
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
jetk\)
MKG
SMt-- INI-P
SPS
Prepared Checked
by
by
VNP
Standards
Standards
C
Committee
Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Ifg-ar
afgft
NW,
eretlAF
JR17,".0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of India undenaking)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 2 of 37
Abbreviations:
AFC
BM
CI
CPT
GI
IRC
JB
MS
:
MT
NDT :
PCC :
PQR :
PT
:
PVC :
PWHT :
RCC :
:
RF
SPT
U/G
:
WBM :
WPS :
Members :
16iNazrei
Ifgzir 16115teg
1.11M
ENGINEERS
18, INDIA
LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undoflaking)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 3 of 37
CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION
S.NO
DOCUMENT NO.
PAGE NO.
1.
1 Soil Investigation
13.
2703 Rev 1
Excavation
2704 Rev 1
Backfilling
2705 Rev 1
2706 Rev 1
10
WBM Roads
2707 Rev 1
11
2708 Rev 1
12
2709 Rev 1
13
1 Micro Grading
2710 Rev 1
14
2740 Rev 1
1 Under Ground Piping (Carbon
Steel)
ITPS FOR STRUCTURAL WORKS
15
2741 Rev 1
21
2742 Rev 1
22
RCC(Super structure)
2743Rev 1
23
Flooring/Pavement
2745 Rev 1
24
1 Brick Work
2746 Rev 1
25
I Structural Works
2747 Rev 1
26
I Piling works
2748 Rev 1
27
16.
2702 Rev 1
Site Grading
2701 Rev 1
2771 Rev 1
28
Plastering
2772 Rev 1
29
2773 Rev 1
30
2774 Rev 1
31
Sanitary fittings
2775 Rev 1
32
I Water proofing
2776 Rev 1
33
2777 Rev 1
34
2778 Rev 1
35
I Roofing Accessories
2779 Rev 1
36
2799 Rev 1
37
1 Antitermite Treatment
28.
ei
ENGINEERS
o ar saoleGw INDIA LIMITED
lot
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 4 of 37
GENERAL NOTE
The enclosed ITP's shall be followed for the works to be performed by the contractor. The
provisions indicated for stagewise inspection by EIL/Owner are the minimum and the Engineer-InCharge may decide to increase Hold Points/ Witness Points. Activities for which ITP's are not
given, contractor to develop and get the same approved by EIL/Owner well before start of the work.
Contractor to submit required reporting formats and job procedures for each activity listed in ITP's
and submit to EIL/Owner for approval, well before commencement of the activity. If the contractor
has to deviate from the given ITP for a valid reason, he shall obtain prior written approval of
EIL/Owner. Contractor to carry out 100% examination of all activities.
LEGEND
HP
Hold Point ;
A point which requires witnessing/inspection/verification and acceptance by Owner/EIL
before any further processing is permitted.
The Contractor shall not process the activity/item beyond a Hold Point without written
approval by Owner/ElL except where prior written permission for further processing is
available.
Witness Point ;
An activity which requires witnessing/inspection/verification by Owner/EIL when the
activity is performed.
After proper notification has been provided (notification modalities and period shall be
finalized before hand), the Contractor is not obliged to hold further processing if
Owner/EIL is not available to witness the activity or does not provide comments before
the date notified. Basis of acceptance shall be as per relevant technical specification.
Rw
WC :
Responsibility for execution of the inspection/testing is with the Contractor; Owner/EIL only
verifies examination or testing done by the Contractor at important stages
71
falaltg
1.+10, evelgru
k
JKITVID
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt
of India Undertaking)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 5 of 37
ACTIVITY
Boundary markings and submission of
drgs./sketches
Review of calibration certificates of
instruments/ testing equipments
Field calibration, if any
CONTRACTOR
EIL
WC
WC
HP
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
el
$iga
&Reg
(Aln max?
LTA 3.7WRI)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Goa of India Undettalf mg)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 6 of 37
CONTRACTOR
EIL
WC
WC
HP
WC
WC
WC
S/Rw
WC
W/Rw
WC
WC
Rw
ACTIVITY
k31 eit
ligai 054-dg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaking)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 7 of 37
SL.
NO.
1.
2
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT C
-
WC
CAT B
S
WC
HP
HP
WC
WC
S*
S*
WC
WC
WC
WC
S/Rw
WC
W/Rw
WC
S*
S*
WC
Rw*
Rw*
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
t.11
el
Ifgzif faf5leg
ItiitdA MAIL = atiatall
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Lindo itaaind)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 8 of 37
SL.
NO.
1.
2.
9.
1
2
3
4
5
ACTIVITY
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT A
CAT B
CAT C
WC
HP
HP
Rw
WC
Layout checking
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
ei
tzarWA!laPeg
eadasr7
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov* of India Undedd(ong)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 9 of 37
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT A
3.
4.
CAT B CAT C
WC
WC
WC
HP
HP
HP
WC
WC
WC
W/Rw
S/Rw
Rw
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
ligar 215fies
I NWT 11XT2 MJ,71771)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govi of India Undertaking)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 10 of 37
ACTIVITY
SL.
NO.
3.
4.
11.
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B
CAT C
NOTE 1
Checking of material
WC
NOTE 1
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
HP
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
NOTE : 1)
CATC: Non plant buildings, technological buildings admn. Buildings, Gate house, security
rooms, etc
ei
1m 0151--eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertalong)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 11 of 37
SL.
NO.
1.
ACTIVITY
Review of calibration certificates of
instruments/ testing equipments
9.
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B
CAT C
WC
HP
Rw
WC
WC
WC
NOTE 1 NOTE 1
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
NOTE :
1)
CAT B:
Roads subjected to heavy loading, connected to main highway, main plant roads
CATC:
Balance Roads
31
5fgar
felgiegW
wren errenre =mom
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of Indta UndeftaNingt
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 12 of 37
13.
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B
WC
Note 1
WC
HP
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Berm preparation
WC
Final Inspection
WC
WC
Rw
fg-ZITEtaleg
(NTT 2.12SW C111JVP,11)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undeltaking)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 13 of 37
3.
4.
11 .
ACTIVITY
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B
NOTE 1
WC
CAT A
NOTE 1
WC
WC
HP
Rw
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
W/Rw
Rw
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
NOTE : 1)
CAT A: All Site fabricated steel storage tanks for process fluid /Hydrocarbon, floating roof,
tanks having capacity 600cum or 10m dia and 8 m height.
CAT B: Site fabricated steel storage tanks for Raw water, Fire water, waste water, DM water,
etc. and all tanks not covered under "CAT A"
eiel.
$fg-zir faPe-g
.,12,17i20,retinJaim)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov' of India Uncleflalongo
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 14 of 37
SL.
NO.
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT C
1.
2.
7.
WC
Rw
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Final inspection
WC
WC
Rw
err056
10112,7 elERPIE O, 3,1301)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A GoN of India Undenaking)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 15 of 37
ACTIVITY
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B
CATC
WC
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
HP
HP
WC
HP
HP
WC
HP
HP
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
HP
HP
A.
PRIOR TO FABRICATION
Incoming materials
Welding Filler Material Approval/Qualification
Review of Manufacturer's Test Certificates/
other documents
Testing, if any
4.
WPS/PQR
Review of proposed Procedure
Testing
5.
5a.
6.
WC
Rw
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
10.
WC
B.
1
WC
7.
Dimensional check
NOTE : 1)
WC
Rw
WC
Rw
CAT B: All pressure lines, Fire Water line, Cooling Water line, etc.
CATC: Balance Works
iftS
29een/2 maw.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt Al
India Undenalong)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 16 of 37
CONTRACTOR
ACTIVITY
EIL
CAT B
CAT C
2.
WC
WC
WC
WC
Baking of Electrodes
WC
WC
WC
PT/MT
WC
WC
WC
Procedure Review
WC
HP
HP
WC
WC
WC
HP
WC
HP
HP
WC
WC
HP
4.
S.
Radiography
Radiography)
marking
(for
Random
Radiography Interpretation
C.
3.
6
6a.
HP
CAT B: All pressure lines, Fire Water line, Cooling Water line, etc.
CATC: Balance Works
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
lfgai.,eroretm.vcroi)
lafReG
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 17 of 37
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B
CAT C
WC
WC
WC
WC
Note 1
Note 1
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
HP
HP
LAYING
Trench excavation and levels
Cleaning of pipe surface
Approval of wrapping/coating material
manufacturers
WC
4.
WC
5.
WC
6.
WC
Application of primer
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
HP
Rw
Holiday testing
WC
WC
HP
Rw
7.
8
13.
Peel test
NOTE : 1)
CAT B: All pressure lines, Fire Water line, Cooling Water line, etc.
CATC: Balance Works
ei
I
Q11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
1
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 18 of 37
ACTIVITY
EIL
CONTRACTOR
Lifting arrangement
WC
WC
CAT B
CAT C
WC
WC
WC
WC
Annex-2
Annex-2
Annex-1
Annex-1
E.
SYSTEM COMPLETION
1.
WC
WC
3.
System testing
WC
HP
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
CAT B: All pressure lines, Fire Water line, Cooling Water line, etc.
CATC: Balance Works
laf Re,
Ifgar tif5Itg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt
of India Undertaking)
1 a.
lb.
ACTIVITY
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 19 of 37
(Sheet 5 of 6)
ANNEXURE 1
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B
CAT C
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
WC
HP
Rw
Rw
Rw
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
HP
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
HP
MECHANICAL COMPLETION
RECORD (U/G Piping)
Clearance for flushing & testing
Mechanical clearance
- Conformity with drawing
- Material as per Specification
Welding & NDT clearance
- Material as per Specification
- Fit-up check record
- Visual check of completed welds
- PT/MT
- Radiography
- PWHT & hardness
- RF pad testing
Flushing & Pressure testing
WC
WC
Rw
- Primer application
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
Rw
- Holiday check
WC
Rw
Rw
Laying
- Trench leveling
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
WC
WC
CAT B: All pressure lines, Fire Water line, Cooling Water line, etc.
CAT C: Balance works
eit4
$1g7laRieg
,,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Ill Gout of India undenaking)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 20 of 37
(Sheet 6 of 6)
ANNEXURE 2
TIE-IN
SL.
NO.
K.
CONTRACTOR
EIL
FIT UP
WC
ROOT RUN DP
WC
FINAL RUN DP
WC
RADIOGRAPH REVIEW
WC
HP
PWHT HARDNESS
WC
Rw
RF PAD TESTING
WC
HP
WC
COATING, WRAPPING
WC
PEEL TEST
WC
HP
HOLIDAY TESTING
WC
HP
WC
WC
ACTIVITY
ENGINEERS
ligzil fatteg (7) INDIA LIMITED
elMrertInJWA)
ITP NO:
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 21 of 37
2741 Rev 1
PLAIN CEMENT CONCRETE
SL.
NO.
1.
2.
7.
ACTIVITY
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B
CAT C
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
S/Rw
Rw
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
Curing
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
CAT B :
CAT C :
ENGINEERS
I
an
ITP NO:
INDIA
LIMITED
Govt of India Undenaking)
Page 22 of 37
2742 Rev 1
CAT C
WC
HP
HP
Rw
WC
HP
HP
HP
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
WC
WC
2.
6-82-2700 Rev 1
NO.
1
testing equipments
NOTE NOTE 1
WC
HP
HP
NOTE
1
HP
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
WC
WC
S/Rw
Rw
Casting of cubes
WC
Curing
WC
Testing of cubes
WC
Removal of shuttering
WC
WC
WC
Rw
WC
Rw
18.
Rw
Rw
Rw
NOTE : 1)
For Incoming material Inspection please refer ITP no: 6-82-1010
CAT A: Critical foundations of equipments i.e compressors, reactors, columns, stacks, foundations
subjected to dynamic loading and any other foundation with RCC Quantity > 250 Cum in
single pour ,etc.
CAT B: Unit Pipe racks, plant buildings and other equipment foundations not covered in category A,
etc
CAT C: Non critical pipe racks(branch pipe, offsite pipe rack, etc) non plant buildings ,pipe sleepers,
manhole, catch pit and balance works.
Rw
$ligai lad&
ITP NO:
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of IntiA UndeMlong)
ENGINEERS
ARCHITECTURALWORKS WORKS
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 23 of 37
2743 Rev 1
REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE (SUPER STRUCTURE)
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CONTRA
CTOR
EIL
CAT A
CAT B
CAT C
WC
HP
HP
Rw
2.
WC
HP
HP
HP
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
Checking of layout
WC
WC
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
WC
HP
HP
HP
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Pour Card
WC
Rw
WC
Casting of cubes
WC
Curing
WC
Testing of cubes
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
3.
20.
iagj
eg
eirCIAT
Ent avitql
ITP NO:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Gout of India Unden.k.91
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 24 of 37
2745 Rev 1
RCC PAVEMENT/FLOORING
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B
WC
Rw
WC
HP
WC
WC
WC
NOTE 1
WC
HP
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
WC
Rw
fag&
err
1.72. 2970X2 an Jg0.1)
ITP NO:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 25 of 37
2746 Rev 1
BRICK MASONARY
SL.
NO.
1.
2.
ACTIVITY
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B
CAT C
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
Note 1
Note 1
Cleaning of surface
WC
Wetting/soaking of bricks
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Embedment of fixtures
WC
Curing
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
WC
LIf fdf51-eg
ITP NO:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Govt ol India Undettalongl
2.
3.
4.
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 26 of 37
2747 Rev 1
TURAL STEEL WORKS
ACTIVITY
NO
A
1.
C ONTRA
CTOR
EIL
CAT C
CAT A
CAT B
WC
HP
HP
WC
WC
S
Note 1
S
Note 1
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
W
HP
W
Rw
W
HP
W
Rw
Rw
W
HP
W
-
WC
WC
WC
Rw
S
S
Rw
Rw
-
WC
WC
S
S
S
S
Rw
WC
WC
S
S
S
S
WC
S /Rw
S/Rw
Rw
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
S
S
S
S
S
S
Rw
S
S
S
Rw
-S
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
S
S
Rw
Rw
Rw
Note 1
S
S
ei
Ifgar
EtRes
pan,
ITP NO:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
AGoot of India Undertaking)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 27 of 37
2748 Rev 1
PILING WORKS
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT A
CAT B
CATC
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
WC
WC
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
WC
HP
HP
HP
WC
WC
Pour Card
WC
HP
HP
Rw
Concreting, testing
WC
Casting of cubes/Testing
WC
10
WC
11
WC
12
WC
Rw
Rw
13
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
Isar tifgleg
ITP NO:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gout. of India Undertaking)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 28 of 37
2771 Rev 1
ANTITERMITE TREATMENT
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CNTRACO TOR
EIL
CAT B
WC
HP & Note 1
WC
3.
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
NOTE : 1)
ei
Igar faileg
efioloi3O1,3fRoff)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov/ of India Undeftalong)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 29 of 37
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B
CAT C
WC
2.
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
7.
WC
Curing
WC
WC
Rw
CAT B: Area requiring special finish (e.g pebble dash finish etc.)
CATC: Balance works.
..i
I
AA
ITP NO.:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Goof of India Undertaking)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 30 of 37
2773 Rev 1
DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B CAT C
WC
Note 1
Note 1
WC
WC
WC
Rw
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
NOTE : 1)
lailfaelei;;,
ENGINEERS
ITP NO.:
(A Govl
of India UndeftakM)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 31 of 37
2774 Rev 1
PAINTING (BUILDING WORKS)
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
EIL
CONTRACTOR
WC
CAT B
-
WC
Note 1
Note 1
HP
WC
Curing, if any
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
NOTE : 1)
CAT C
-
101
R5leg,
ITP NO.:
ENGINEERS
INDIA
LIMITED
IA Govi of India Undedalong)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 32 of 37
2775 Rev I
SANITARY FITTINGS
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B CAT C
WC
Note 1
Note 1
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
NOTE : 1)
lgar 256
ITP NO.:
Kt=Th\
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
fA Govt of India Undertaking)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 33 of 37
2776 Rev 0
WATER PROOFING (ROOF)
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B
NOTE : 1)
WC
WC
WC
WC
W
S
S/Note 1
WC
WC
S
S/Rw
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
MI
ITP NO.:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gov/ of India Undenaiong)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 34 of 37
2777 Rev 1
FALSE FLOORING AND FALSE CEILING
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B
FALSE FLOORING
5.
WC
Rw
WC
Note 1
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
WC
Note 1
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
FALSE CEILING
5.
NOTE : 1)
ii fdPittg
rivowe
051JVit5A)
ITP NO.:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Goo. of India Undertakingt
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 35 of 37
2778 Rev 1
UNDER DECK INSULATION
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B
WC
Note 1
WC
WC
WC
WC
Finishing
WC
WC
Rw
3.
4
NOTE : 1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
faigies
iliM12,171017i1)
ITP NO.:
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 36 of 37
2779 Rev 1
ROOFING ACCESSORIES
SL.
NO.
5
6
ACTIVITY
CAT B
CAT C
WC
HP/Note 1
HP/Note 1
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
NOTE :
1)
2)
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B: Important structures (e.g Compressor House, Ware house and Pump house etc.)
CAT C: Balance works.
k31
51gzir
1Wits
WWI
742&517 951,304f711
ITP NO.:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA GoN of India Undenakng)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 37 of 37
2799 Rev 1
LIGHTING WORKS (NON-PLANT BUILDINGS)
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
WC
Rw
ENGINEERS
401 el
Og eg tVregINDIA LIMITED
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0016 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 6
iiida
iiiicb 1-41-4RT
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL
FOR EARTHWORK IN SITE GRADING
SKC
NK
VDS
VJN
15.07.99
PKT
PCS
MMK
A SONI
29.12.89
RPB
RP
RPB
RCPC
Prepared
by
Checked
by
16.02.06
1
0
Date
DM
RPCS
23.05.11
Rev.
No
VK
ALOK
Purpose
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM
Standards
Committee (Engg)
Convenor
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 2 of 6
6-65-0016 Rev. 3
Abbreviations:
gm/cc :
Mr. R. B. Bhutda
Members:
n^l 1_J eI
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertak.9)
6-65-0016 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 6
CONTENTS
SCOPE
2.0
ORDINARY SOIL
3.0
SOFT ROCK
4.0
HARD ROCK
5.0
FILLING SOIL
6.0
1.0
/01
kje
ENGINEERS
LIMITED
Igaf
Emeg INDIA
wen errosrumarara)
(A Govt of India Undrtaking)
1.0
6-65-0016 Rev. 3
Page 4 of 6
SCOPE
This specification covers classification of soil for earthwork in excavation and filling for site
grading work. Method of field density for soil compaction, using soft rock and hard rock, is
also explained.
2.0
ORDINARY SOIL
2.1
2.2
3.0
SOFT ROCK
This is fissured / disintegrated rocky strata, boulders (volume less than 0.4 m 3 and more than
0.028 M3) and also which cannot be quarried/ excavated by using above manual tools but can
be quarried/ excavated manually by using crow bars is classified as soft rock. Soft rock shall
include all kinds of stiff and stratified rock, such as shales, thinly bedded philites, laterite hard
conglomerate, lime stone, sand stone and unreinforced cement concrete below ground level.
Soft rock may be quarried or split with crow bar or picks and can also be excavated by rippers,
dozers and other mechanical equipment, but without the aid of blasting. If required, light
blasting may be restored to, for loosening the materials, but this will not, in any way entitle the
material to be classified as "Hard Rock".
4.0
HARD ROCK
4.1
dolfaeitq
5'igar Elf5teg
WIER, 29M17
4.2
agi7P1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India
undertakm)
6-65-0016 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 6
4.3
4.4
5.0
FILLING SOIL
5.1
Ordinary soil used for filling shall meet requirements of clause 4 of Standard Spec. No. 6-650017, for Site Grading.
5.2
Use of soft rock for filling shall be determined based on compaction test of filling material.
Well graded soft rock with sufficient fines should make a good filling material. This shall be
tested in field for compaction and then density of compacted soils shall be determined. Test
patches shall be made in field using this material and number of passes of rollers determined
for each patch. A minimum of 3 test patches of 10m x 10m shall be made. Density of
compaction shall be determined in each patch. A density of 1.90 gm/cc or more shall be
acceptable.
5.3
Use of hard rock with soft rock and soil for filling shall be determined based on compaction
test of rock material to be used for filling. Test patches shall be made as in case of soft rocks
and number of rolls shall be determined for each test patch. Density of material in all test
patches shall be found, which should not be less than 2.0 gm/cc.
5.4
The decision of Engineer-in-Charge with regard to suitability of such materials shall be final.
6.0
6.1
Igar Elfgjeu
WWI 212MR7=309.31
6.2
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA GON Of
'ride undertaking)
6-65-0016 Rev. 3
Page 6 of 6
00- 111A
i OP46-,
1)73vd)
( 4O,
e-,Od,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK
CUTTING FOR SITE GRADING
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 12
(-11 d
x.115 +1 WziF
*Bid
wadd4i coid
Trr-i-w *Mr
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR SITE GRADING
AND ROCK CUTTING
FOR SITE GRADING
24.09.13
RBT
I)(S
RBB
23.05.11
ALOK
RKS
RBB
16.02.06
SIKC
NK
VDS
25.06.99
PKT
PCS
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
DM
VK
VJN
MMK
Standards
Committee
Convenor
DM
A SONI
GM
(Engg)
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
I ormat No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
fg-ar id5reg
rtecwaTaxgr.1)
IA Govt of India Unclettalong)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK
CUTTING FOR SITE GRADING
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 12
Abbreviations:
DGMS
gm/cc
IS
Indian Standard
NGL
Members:
$2ZIT faiAeg
Z
J44
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt Al India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK
CUTTING FOR SITE GRADING
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 12
CONTENTS
1.0
3.0 GENERAL
SCOPE
ei
ENGINEERS
$1g-elf legreg
,t-twt riecv,ent3tros.0
1.0
INDIA LIMITED
IA
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK
CUTTING FOR SITE GRADING
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 4 of 12
SCOPE
This specification and the method of measurements described thereon are applicable for earthwork
involved in Site Grading & Rock Cutting.
3.0 GENERAL
3.1
CONTRACTOR shall maintain adequate drainage facilities at SITE at all times during the execution
of work. Additional ditches, drains & such other temporary means to achieve this, over and above
what is shown in the drawings, shall be provided and maintained by CONTRACTOR at his own cost.
3.2
Adequate dewatering facilities like dewatering pumps and piping etc. shall also be provided by the
CONTRACTOR for this work, including dewatering during excavation etc. as required, at his own
cost.
Only soil considered suitable by the Engineer-in-charge shall be deployed for the construction and
that considered unsuitable shall be disposed off, as directed by Engineer-in-charge, at his own cost
and no claim for compensation will be entertained.
4.2
The CONTRACTOR shall give the samples of soil he proposes to use for filling, along with the
following characteristics of the samples, to Engineer-in-charge for approval, prior to collection and
use. The tests for these characteristics shall be done in a laboratory / test house as approved by
Engineer-in-charge.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Mechanical analysis or grain size analysis as per IS: 2720 Part IV.
Liquid limit as per IS: 2720 Part V.
Plastic limit as per IS: 2720 Part V.
Moisture density relationship as per IS: 2720 Part VII.
4.3
The soil used for filling shall be free from boulders, lumps, tree roots, rubbish or any organic
deleterious matter.
4.4
Soil having plasticity index less than 20 shall be used for filling purpose.
4.5
Soil having laboratory maximum dry density of less than 1.5 gms/cc shall not be used.
4.6
Care shall be taken to see that unsuitable waste material is disposed off in such a manner that there is
no likelihood of its getting mixed with the material, proposed to be used, for filling.
4.7
The work shall be so planned and executed that the best available soil are reserved for the top
portion of Embankments.
All trees having girth above 30 cms, which are not marked for preservation, shall be cut down and
their roots dug up to a depth of 1 metre from the existing ground level.
Ogarfett54eg
tenen
ENGINEERS
w' INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK
CUTTING FOR SITE GRADING
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 5 of 12
5.2
All holes or hollows produced by digging up roots shall be carefully filled with approved soil,
including all leads and lifts, rammed and compacted to obtain 90% of maximum laboratory dry
density of soil and levelled as directed.
5.3
5.4 Payment
Cutting of trees above 30 cms girth shall be paid per number. The rate quoted shall include cutting,
uprooting removing the trees within plant boundary as directed, including filling holes or hollows
produced by removal of roots etc. as per specifications.
6.0 CLEARING AND STRIPPING
6.1
All the areas, including depressions, where filling or cutting is to be carried out shall be cleared and
stripped completely of bushes, roots, vegetation, plantation trees, shrubs, trees upto 30 cms girth,
organic and other objectionable materials. All these shall be completely uprooted and virgin soil
exposed and not merely scrapped at the surface. The roots of trees of girth upto 30 cms shall be
removed to a minimum depth of 1M below existing ground level and holes, hollows filled up with
selected approved available soil within all leads and lifts and compacted to obtain 90% of laboratory
dry density of soil as per IS: 2720, Part VII and leveled as directed by Engineer-in-charge. All soft
patches must be worked out to remove soft soil and selected approved earth must be filled back and
the areas (areas coming under filling) compacted to obtain 90% of maximum laboratory dry density of
soil, as per IS: 2720 Part VII. The depth of stripping shall be generally 50 to 150 mm as decided by
Engineer-in-Charge.
6.2
Material obtained from clearing shall be stacked or disposed off as directed by Engineer-in-charge
within a lead as per directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
6.3 Payment
No separate payment shall be made for clearing, stripping and disposal of materials obtained from
clearing. This shall be considered as part of cutting work in areas of cutting and filling work in areas
of filling and the rates quoted under the respective items of
i. Earthwork in Excavation/ Cutting
ii Earthwork in filling (both with available earth & earth obtained from approved borrow areas),
shall be inclusive of clearing and stripping with all operations described above in clause no.6 in
respective areas of cutting and filling.
No separate payment shall be made for clearing, stripping and disposal of materials obtained from
clearing of borrow areas for earth. This shall be considered as part of filling work in area of filling and
the rate quoted under the respective items.
7.0 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION / CUTTING
7.1
After clearing and stripping of areas as specified above in clause No.6, spot levels at intervals and
pattern as decided by the Engineer-in-charge, shall be taken jointly by CONTRACTOR and Engineerin-charge. Excavation / cutting shall commence only after the levels are signed by the contractor as a
token of his acceptance.
7.2
Excavation/ cutting shall be carried out strictly as per the instruction of Engineer-in-charge.
7.3
If the contractor excavates/ cuts beyond the required level, additional quantity of earthwork shall not
be paid for. The excavation taken below the specified level shall be made good by filling with
approved material, to the required compaction, at Contractor's cost.
5fgarrem201--e-g
A2E1512 el5T
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK
CUTTING FOR SITE GRADING
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 6 of 12
7.4
The final bed and sides of excavation must be levelled, dressed and compacted. In case of areas under
excavation for site grading, the final surface shall be levelled, dressed and consolidated by means of
sheep foot / power driven rollers to obtain maximum compaction. However, no test control is required
in such areas.
7.5
Shoring and strutting shall be adopted only with the permission of Engineer-in-charge in writing.
Such shoring and strutting shall follow the necessary specification.
7.6
7.7 Payment
Payment for Excavation shall be on the basis of volume of excavation calculated on the basis of joint
level taken as per clause 7.1 and the final finished grade levels, the volume being calculated by the
Trapezoidal rule including dewatering, if required. Intermediate payment will be on the basis of
volume calculated based on spot levels taken during the time of the billing. Reference is also invited
to clause 7.3.
8.0 EARTHWORK IN FILLING
8.1
After clearing, stripping and consolidation of areas as specified in clause 6, spot levels at intervals and
pattern as decided by Engineer-in-charge shall be taken jointly by the CONTRACTOR and Engineerin-Charge and filling shall commence only after the levels are signed by the CONTRACTOR as a
token of his acceptance. Approved fill Material shall be spread in uniform layers not exceeding 30
cms in loose depth.
The contractor has to make his own approach and access roads from the borrow area to the
demarcated filling areas. While the CONTRACTOR may make use of such short cuts as may be
available to him for earth movement from borrow areas to the filling areas, the OWNER does not
guarantee any passage way or right of way for the CONTRACTOR's work other than available at site.
No claim shall also be admissible to the CONTRACTOR on account of his having to take longer
leads or routes for earth movement, than envisaged by him, either due to any road cuttings, nonavailability of routes, or any other grounds whatsoever.
In case total filling required in any area consists of soil both from borrow areas and available
approved excavated material from within plant area, then joint levels, shall be taken before
commencing filling with earth from borrow area.
However, earth available from borrow areas required for filling can be used only after the available
earth from excavation within demarcated area has been utilised and clearance to this effect obtained
from the Engineer-in-charge.
8.2
8.3
Successive layers of filling shall not be placed until the layer below has been thoroughly compacted
and tested to satisfy the requirements laid down in this specification.
8.4
Prior to rolling, the moisture content of material shall be brought to within plus or minus 2% of the
Optimum Moisture Content as described in IS: 2720 Part VII. The moisture content shall preferably
be on the wet side for potentially expansive soil.
8.5
After adjusting the Moisture Content as described in clause 8.4, the layers shall be thoroughly
compacted by either sheep foot roller or power driven roller or vibratory roller, as approved by
Engineer-in-charge, till the specified maximum laboratory dry density is obtained.
$fg-ar tt154-eg
elecnterniJnertai
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA God of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK
CUTTING FOR SITE GRADING
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 7 of 12
8.6
Each layer shall be tested in field for density and accepted by Engineer-in-charge, subject to achieving
the required density, before laying the next layer. A minimum of one test per 500m2 for each layer
shall be conducted.
8.7
If the layer fails to meet the required density, it shall be reworked or the material shall be replaced and
method of construction altered as directed by Engineer-in-charge to obtain the required density.
8.8
The filling shall be finished in conformity with the alignment, levels, cross-section and dimensions as
shown in the drawing.
Earthen embankment shall be filled 300mm more on both sides, where height is more than 1M and
this extra filling shall be dressed, after compaction, in conformity with alignment, level, cross-section
and dimension as shown in the drawing, to achieve proper compaction in the slope. No extra payment
shall be made in this regard.
8.9
Extra material shall be removed and disposed off as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
8.10 Tolerances
General site grading, including cutting and filling in depressions, shall be carried out to within up
down tolerance of +5 cms of final lines, grades and slopes.
8.11 Earth Work in Filling in Open Lined/Unlined Wells
For earth work in filling in open lined/unlined wells, only locally available coarse sand shall be used,
in layers of 500 mm thickness. Each layer shall be thoroughly wetted by sprinkling water, before next
layer is filled up. Filling shall be done upto 1 m depth below NGL as above. Layers from a depth of
lm below NGL, upto NGL, shall also comprise of locally available coarse sand and compacted with
suitable Mechanical / manual means, to obtain same level of compaction as required for filling above
NGL. Filling above NGL shall be done as per Cl. 8.1 to 8.10 above.
8.12 Payment
8.12.1 Payment for filling shall be made on cubic metre of volume calculated on the basis of cross section
plotted from the levels of ground, where filling is to be carried out and the levels reached after filling
is duly consolidated, volume being calculated by Trapezoidal method.
8.12.2 In case of simultaneous cut and fill operation, wherever specified, payment shall be made on the basis
of one composite rate for cutting and filling. All other details about measurement etc. remaining
same as above.
8.12.3 Payment for filling in open wells, lined or unlined, shall be made on the basis of volume calculated on
the basis of average area mult6iplied with depth of open well
8.12.4 No extra payment shall be made towards testing.
9.0 REMOVAL OF SURPLUS EARTH
9.1
Surplus earth and soil from excavation and general site grading shall be removed from the
construction areas to the area demarcated by the Engineer-in-charge.
9.2 Payment
Payment shall be made only for lead beyond initial lead from construction area. Rate shall include
loading, transportation, dumping, stacking the surplus earth and soil in the area demarcated by the
Engineer-in-charge.
Format No. 8-00-0001 -F1 Rev. 0
~anwt?~t
ligar
1.41-e'ReieceredkJeteri)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov! of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK
CUTTING FOR SITE GRADING
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 8 of 12
Payment shall be made on cubic metre basis of the difference of measurements of the volumes of the
excavation and the measurement of the filling with the excavated earth. However, the contractor's
entitlement to payment shall be restricted to the actual quantity of earth removed. Quantity generated
due to void in back filled volume of earth shall also be removed by the contractor at no extra cost and
this disposal of earth shall not be measured and paid under any item.
10.0 EXCAVATION IN ROCK
10.1
Blasting operations shall be carried out with the prior permission and in the presence of the Engineerin-charge or his authorised representative and during fixed time hours of the day. Blasting operations
shall be carried out as per Indian Explosive Rules 1983, amended up to date. The contractor shall have
a valid license from Controller of Explosives to carry out blasting operations as well as for obtaining
and storing the explosives as per Indian Explosive Rules (latest). All safety precautions such as
providing safety nylon netting etc. shall be carried out as per instructions of the Engineer-in-charge.
In case the contractor is not having a valid license from Controller of Explosives to carry out blasting
operations and storing / handling explosives as per Indian Explosives Rules (latest). The contractor
may engage an agency for blasting who is having valid license required to carry out blasting
operation. Prior to start of blasting operation, contractor shall submit all the relevant licenses required
for blasting operation to Engineer-in-Charge.
10.1.1 The contractor shall ensure that all workmen and the personnel at site except those who have actually
to light the fuse are evacuated from the unsafe area to be determined by the Engineer and warned by
loud speaker in local language to safe distance, not less than 200 metres at least 15 minutes before
firing time by sounding warning siren. The area shall be encircled by red flags. The contractor shall be
responsible for any accident to workmen, public or property due to blasting operation.
10.1.2 Gunpowder, gelatin and other safe explosives only shall be used wherever possible. Explosives with
nitroglycerine shall be used only under exceptional circumstances, with prior approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
10.1.3 All fuses shall be cut to the length required, before being inserted into the holes.
10.1.4 The no. of charges to be fired and the actual no. of shots heard shall be compared and the person
responsible must satisfy himself by examination that all the charges have exploded before work
people are permitted to approach the scene. The withdrawal of a charge, which has not exploded shall
under no circumstances be permitted, such charges shall be flooded with water and the hole marked
into a distinguishing manner. The next hole to be fired shall be at a distance of about 500 mm from
the unexploded hole and fired in the usual way.
The contractor or sub contractor or any of his competent authorised person shall be in charge of the
blasting operations and shall be held responsible for strictly observing the safety rules, particularly
applicable to blasting operations, in addition to other safety rules.
10.1.5 For blasting rocks with dynamite, the following general principles shall be observed.
In general, the following diameter of drills shall be used for different depth of boreholes.
From 1-2 metres
From 2-3.25 metres
From 3.25-4.75metres
25mm diameter
37-50mm diameter
50-65mm diameter
The boreholes should generally be not more than 1.5m deep and the distance apart should be from one
and a half to twice their depth.
el
fdWes
tairerf ererreart
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK
CUTTING FOR SITE GRADING
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 9 of 12
Cracks and fissures in the rock to be blasted shall be carefully studied to ascertain the best position for
the boreholes. The charge shall always be placed in a sound piece of rock, if possible not nearer than
300mm from the crack.
10.2 Rules for Blasting with Dynamite and other High Explosives
10.2.1 The Person-in-charge must show that he is thoroughly acquainted with the blasting operations and
that he understands the rules laid down herewith. He will be held responsible for any accident that
may occur. He must be a licenced blaster with a valid licence from DGMS.
10.2.2 Boreholes must be of such a size and uniform that the cartridges can easily pass down them.
10.2.3 The position of all holes to be drilled must be marked out with white paint and the person-in-charge
must take particular note of these positions.
10.2.4 The drilling operation after being finished, the person-in-charge must make a second inspection and
satisfy himself that the boreholes marked out by him have been drilled and cleaned properly.
10.2.5 The person-in-charge must prepare all charges necessary for boreholes.
10.2.6 Number of holes to be loaded and fired at one time shall be as per explosive rules. Boreholes must be
thoroughly cleared before a cartridge is inserted.
The loading is to be done by the person-in-charge himself and the position of the charge holes
carefully noted by him. Circular wooden tamping rods only to be used in charging holes with flat
bottom, (one cartridge at a time must be inserted) and cartridge gently pressed with the tamping rod.
10.2.7 Immediately before firing a blast, due warning must be given and the person-in-charge must see that
all the labours have retired to safety.
10.2.8 The safety fuses of the charged holes are to be lighted in the presence of the person-in-charge, who
must see that the fuses of the holes charged have properly ignited.
After the blast, the person-in-charge must carefully inspect the work and satisfy himself that all the
charges have exploded.
10.3 Misfires
10.3.1 Misfires are a source of great danger. If it is suspected that part of the blast to fire is delayed,
sufficient time shall be allowed to elapse before entering the danger zone. When fuse and blasting
caps are used, a safe time of at least an hour should be allowed.
10.3.2 None of the drillers are to work near these holes until the three following operations have been done
by the person-in-charge.
a.
The Person-in-charge should very carefully extract the tamping with a wooden scrapper and withdraw
the fuse with the primer and detonator attached, after which a fresh primer and detonator with fuse
should be placed in this hole and fired; or
b.
The hole may be cleared of 300mm of tamping and the direction then ascertained by placing a stick in
the hole. Another hole may then be drilled 150mm away and parallel to it: this hole to be then charged
and fired when the other charge should explode.
c.
t_71 LI
Og 0151-eg
(.7V-er
37;11,)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov) of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK
CUTTING FOR SITE GRADING
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 10 of 12
SZIf
E
g
ow?" 7:reenr7Ovi,grol)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK
CUTTING FOR SITE GRADING
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 11 of 12
softer material shall be laid along the centre of heaps, with the harder and more weather resisting
materials forming the casing on the sides and the top. Excavated rocks, which can be used in soling as
road metals or for making concrete aggregate shall be stacked separately, as directed by the Engineer.
All such works as mentioned above is deemed to have been taken into account while quoting for the
excavation and the contractor for the above works shall claim no extras.
All rock excavated from the pits shall be the property of the Owner.
10.4.11 Stock Piles
When the removal of material from excavation progresses at a faster rate or at different times than
placement in backfill is being accomplished, such excavated materials shall be stock piled at approved
locations adjacent to the work until their use is authorised.
10.4.12 Spoil Areas
Material excavated for the works, which is rejected as unsuitable or not required by the Engineer,
shall be disposed of in spoil areas as specified by the Engineer.
The spoil areas shall be left in a neat and sighty condition and sloped to drain properly as may be
directed by the Engineer.
10.5
Control Blasting
10.5.1 General
This specification lays down the requirements for control blasting for rock excavations wherever
required.
Wherever required by the Engineer, the rock blasting shall be controlled, so that vibration generated
during the blasting do not cause damage to the buildings and installation around built up areas.
Similarly the rock pieces should not fly off the pits and thus damage the buildings and installation
around. Apart from the general precautions mentioned in the preceding paragraphs, following
protective measures are suggested as guidelines. Tenderers are requested to carefully check the site
conditions and submit the details of the scheme they propose to adopt for controlling the blast.
10.5.2 Protective Measures
a.
b.
The blast hole shall be covered with 0.6 to 1.0 sqm. mild steel plate of minimum 6mm thickness.
c.
Reinforcement rod mesh, not less than 20mm dia at 150mm centres in both directions, shall be put
over the steel plates.
d.
Steel plate and reinforcements shall be inspected after every blasting operation and all twists shall be
removed before reuse, to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
e.
The thickness of the covering plate and the kind of dead weight shall be duly got approved from the
Engineer-in-Charge.
When blasting is necessary adjacent to partially or completely built structures, the contractor shall
take all precautions necessary to prevent flying rock from causing damage to the structures.
In no case shall blasting be allowed closer than 15m to any structure after concrete placing has started.
ei
WWI tif5teieqN,751eg
JPIT,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK
CUTTING FOR SITE GRADING
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 12 of 12
The contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by blasting, whether permanent or
temporary structure and shall replace or repair the structures at his own cost.
10.6
Classification of soil
If soil of any classifications other than that specified in the Schedule of Rates is met during
excavation, the decision of the Engineer-in-charge as to the classification of soil, levels of the strata of
different classifications and their locations shall be binding.
In above case, the total quantity of Excavation shall be computed from the measurement of the area
excavated. The hard rock and soft rock shall be measured separately from the relevant stacks and each
shall be reduced by fifty percent for voids, and paid under the relevant items. The balance, that is the
total quantity of excavation minus the reduced (for voids) quantity of excavation for rocks shall be
paid as soil as per the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge. However, the maximum payment shall be
limited to the volume of the area excavated, as approved by Engineer-in-charge.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
evemetrshAtstrtvt)
IA Govt of India
Undertangi
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
PAVEMENTS (UPTO WBM LAYER)
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 1 of 11
1-A.
ti chlY9-
Fa1:1411
(seri, At. 7i.
Hirictl
Tffib)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
PAVEMENTS (UPTO WBM LAYER)
Ca r
7
24.06.13
RBT
RS
12.03.08
GAURAV
RKS
NK
VC
11.04.01
RC
PCS
MMK
MI
15.11.99
RB
PCS
MMK
AS
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Rev.
No
Date
DM
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
254-eg
1.4FR
cwanc,
1,10,137.1)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
PAVEMENTS (UPTO WBM LAYER)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 2 of 11
Abbreviations:
cm
Centimeter
IRC
IS
Indian Standard
mm
Millimeter
P.1
Plasticity Index
WBM
Members:
0 el
Ogar 1af54eg
I 4117P1 t'ic,
nte Ag JERIn 11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA GoA of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
PAVEMENTS (UPTO WBM LAYER)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 3 of 11
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCES
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
10
7.0
PAYMENT
10
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
t.71 el
51g-ar tifleg
1.0
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
PAVEMENTS (UPTO WBM LAYER)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 4 of 11
SCOPE
This specification covers the material and construction details for earthwork in filling for
embankments, filling with sand/murrum, WBM sub-base, WBM base course and shoulders for
roads and flexible pavements.
2.0 REFERENCES
2.1
2.2
IS 2430:
IS: 2720
IRC: 19
IRC: 36
Specifications
Specifications for Road and Bridge Works Ministry of Surface Transport (Road Wing)
NOTE: -Latest Edition of all Codes, Standards and Specifications shall be followed.
3.0 CONSTRUCTION OF EMBANKMENTS SUBGRADE AND SHOULDERS
3.1
Materials
Only those materials, considered suitable by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be employed for the
construction and that considered unsuitable shall be disposed off as directed by Engineer-inCharge at contractor's cost and no claim for compensation will be entertained. The Contractor
shall give the samples of earth, he proposes to use for filling along with the following
characteristics of the sample to Engineer-in-Charge prior to collection and use, for approval.
i)
Mechanical analysis or gain size analysis as per IS: 2720 Part IV.
ii)
iii)
iv)
The material (soil) used for filling shall be free from boulders, lumps, tree roots, rubbish or
any organic deleterious matter.
Material (soil) having plasticity index less than 20 shall be used for filling purposes. Soil
having laboratory maximum dry density of less than 1.5gm/cc shall not be used. Care shall be
taken to see that unsuitable waste material is disposed off in such a manner that there is no
likelihood of its getting mixed with the materials proposed to be used for filling.
The work shall be so planned and e:ecuted such that the best available material (soil) is
reserved for the top portion of embankment.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
_11
ENGINEERS
Ogar fdWg
INDIA LIMITED
1.7271 eiem
c' 3,74,1)
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
3.2
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
PAVEMENTS (UPTO WBM LAYER)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 5 of 11
3.2.1 The area where filling is to be placed must be cleared of all loose material and virgin soil
must be exposed. Such exposed surface must be consolidated properly to obtain 95% of
maximum laboratory dry density of the soil as per IS: 2720 Part VIII. All soft patches must
be worked out to remove the soft soil and selected approved earth must be filled back and
compacted.
3.2.2 Payment for the removal of loose top soil as described in clause 3.2.1 above shall be
included in the item for earthwork in filling. No separate payment for consolidation of
exposed ground surface will be made. The rate quoted for the earth fill shall be inclusive of
the cost of clearing and stripping, consolidation, including watering, testing etc. of the
exposed ground.
3.2.3 Approved fill material shall be spread in uniform layers not exceeding 20 cm in loose
depth for embankment filling. Shoulder construction shall be so organised as to keep pace
with the construction of different layers of the pavement, which may require earth fill
thickness less than 20 cm. All clods, lumps etc. shall be broken before compaction.
3.2.4 In general the soil shall be spread uniformly over the entire width of embankment or
shoulder as the case may be. For large embankments, the spreading of soil shall be as
directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
3.2.5 Successive layers of filling shall not be placed until the layer under construction has been
thoroughly compacted to satisfy the requirements laid down in this specification.
3.2.6 Prior to rolling, the moisture content of material shall be brought to within plus or minus
2% of the optimum moisture content as described in IS: 2720 - Part-VIII. The moisture
content shall preferably be on the wet side for potentially expensive soils.
3.2.7 After adjusting the moisture content as described in Clause 3.2.6, the layers shall be
thoroughly compacted by means of 8-10T rollers or equivalent vibratory rollers till 95% of
maximum laboratory dry density for embankment and 97% of maximum laboratory dry
density for sub-grade as per IS:2720 Part VIII is obtained.
3.2.8 Each layer shall be tested in field for density and accepted by Engineer-in-Charge subjected
to achieving the required density before laying the next layer. A minimum of one test per
500m2 area for each layer shall be conducted.
3.2.9 All type of rollers that should be employed for compaction shall be as per direction of
Engineer-in-Charge.
3.2.10 If the layer fails to meet the required density, it shall be reworked or the material shall be
replaced and method of construction altered as directed by Engineer-in-Charge to obtain the
required density.
3.2.11 The filling shall be finished in conformity with alignment, levels, cross-sections and
dimensions as shown in the drawings.
3.2.12 Extra material shall be removed and disposed off as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
7-t-iraelei
dgar feifiteg
iarrra eira(refIRJW1.(11
3.3
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govf of Ind. Undenalf(A9(
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
PAVEMENTS (UPTO WBM LAYER)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 6 of 11
Tolerance
Embankment and shoulders for roads, units etc. shall be carried to within a tolerance of plus
minus 2.5 cm. from final lines but shall be to required grades and slopes.
Sand having Plasticity Index 6 (Max) shall be used for filling. Sand for filling shall preferably
be locally available sand, clean and free from any chemical or other impurities. Murrum for
filling shall be clean and well graded. Sand/Murrum shall not contain any vegetation, organic,
clayey or other material and shall be obtained from a source approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.2
Murrum/Sand shall be spread in layers not exceeding 15 cm in loose thickness over the areas.
Each layer shall be uniform in density, quality of material and ' moisture content before
compaction. The moisture content shall be within two percent of the optimum moisture
content as per IS: 2720 Part VIII.
4.2.1
4.3
Compaction of each layer shall be by mechanical means as per directions of Engineer-in-Charge. Only in accessible reaches shall be worked manually. Each layer shall be uniformly
compacted to obtain 85% relative density in case of sand and 95% of maximum laboratory dry
density in case of murram. If the material fails to achieve the required density, the layer shall
be reworked with necessary alteration in compaction, so that the required compaction is
obtained. A minimum of one test per 500 m2 area for each layer shall be conducted.
4.4
Subsequent layers shall be placed only after the layer already laid has been compacted to the
required density-and approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.5
The finished surface must be dressed to required grade and slope. Excess material must be
removed from compaction site, as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
Materials
5.1.1
5.1.1.1 The coarse aggregates shall be hard, crushed or broken stone metal from quarries approved by
Engineer-in-Charge, it shall be hard durable and free from flat elongated, soft and
disintegrated particles. It shall not have excess of dirt and other objectionable matter. The
quality, size and grading of the coarse aggregate shall be conforming to IRC: 19.
faziei
$'1g-Ii Rateg
?iV,
firednosrawii
a)
b)
c)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 7 of 11
The grading of the coarse aggregates for the sub-base course shall be as below:
Size Range
Sieve
Designation
(IS: 460)
% by weight
passing the sieve
90mm to 45mm
Grade-I
125mm
90mm
63mm
45mm
22.4mm
100
90-100
25-60
0-15
0-5
The grading of the coarse aggregate for the base course shall be as below:
Size Range
Sieve
Designation
(IS: 460)
by weight
passing the sieve
63mm to 45mm
Grade-2
90mm
63mm
53mm
45mm
22.4mm
100
90-100
25-75
0-15
0-5
d)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
PAVEMENTS (UPTO WBM LAYER)
60% (Maximum)
50% (Maximum)
ii)
40% (Maximum)
15% (Maximum)
50% (Maximum)
Screenings
5.1.2.1 Screening to fill voids in the course aggregates shall, as far as possible be the same material as
the course aggregates where it is decided by the Engineer-in-Charge to use other materials, the
same shall be predominantly non plastic materials such as kankar nodules gravel (other than
river-borne rounded aggregate) or murrum provided that the liquid limit and plasticity index
of such material is below 20 and 6 respectively and the fraction passing 75 micron sieve does
not exceed 10 percent.
fg-ar 051-eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
PAVEMENTS (UPTO WBM LAYER)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 8 of 11
Percentage by Weight
Passing the Sieve
13.2mm
100
11.2mm
95-100
5.6mm
15-35
180micron
0-10
This grading, however, shall not be mandatory, in case either murrum or gravel is used as
screening.
For procurement of quantities for course aggregates and screenings required for 100mm and
75mm compacted thickness of WBM sub base course and base course shall be as per the
IRC- 19
5.1.3
Binding Material
Binding material, to prevent revelling of WBM, shall consist of fine grained material
possessing P.I value up to 6.
Application of binding material shall not be necessary where murrum or gravel is used as
screenings.
Binding material shall be obtained from quarries/ sources approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
5.2
Laying of WBM
5.2.2.1 Immediately following the spreading of the coarse aggregates, it shall be compacted to full
width by rolling with either three wheeled power roller of 8 to 10 tonne weight or equivalent
vibratory roller true to the line and camber as shown in the drawing. The course shall not
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
rezlialfaaeg
,114,11 ,1313,70.4)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
fF GoN of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
PAVEMENTS (UPTO WBM LAYER)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 9 of 11
be rolled when the sub-grade is soft or yielding or the rolling causes a wave like motion in
the base course or sub-grade. When rolling develops irregularities that exceed 12mm when
tested with a 3 meter straight edge, the irregular surface shall be loosened and then
aggregate added to or removed from it as required and the area rolled until it gives uniform
surface conforming to the desired cross-section and grade. The surface shall also be
checked transversely by template and any irregularities corrected as above. The use of
murrum to make up depression shall not be permitted.
5.2.2.2 The rolling shall begin from edges with roller running forward and backward until the edges
have been firmly compacted. The rolling shall then progress gradually from edges to the
centre parallel to the centre line of the road lapping uniformly each preceding rear wheel
track by one half width and shall continue until the entire area of the course has been rolled
by the rear wheel. On the super elevated portions of road, the rolling shall commence from
the lower edge and progress gradually towards the upper edge of the road.
5.2.2.3 Rolling shall be discontinued when aggregate are thoroughly keyed and creating of stone
wheel of roller is no longer visible partially compacted with sufficient void space in them to
permit application of screenings. Slight sprinkling of water may be done if required.
5.2.3
Application of Screening
5.2.3 After the coarse aggregate has been rolled as described in Clause 5.2.2, screenings shall be
applied uniformly and gradually over the surface to completely fill the interstices. Dry rolling
shall be continued while the screenings are being spread so that the jarring effect of the roll
will cause them to settle into the voids of the coarse aggregates.
5.2.3.2 The screenings shall not be dumped in piles on coarse aggregate but shall be spread uniformly
in successive thin layers either by the spreading motion of hand shovels or by mechanic
spreaders.
5.2.3.3 The screenings shall be applied at a uniform and slow rate (in three or more applications so as
to ensure filling of all voids. Rolling and brooming shall continue with the spreading of the
screenings. Either mechanical brooms or hand brooms or both may be used. In no case shall
the screenings be applied so fast and thick as to form cakes or ridges on the surface
making the filling of voids difficult or preventing the direct bearings of the roller on the coarse
aggregates. The spreading, rolling and brooming of screenings shall be performed on sections
which can be completed within one day's operation and shall continue until no more
screenings can be forced into the voids of the coarse aggregates. Damp and wet screening
shall not be used under any circumstances.
5.2.3.4 The quantity of screenings used shall be such as to fill all voids in the water bound
macadam courses.
5.2.4
5.2.4.1 After spreading the screening, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water, swept and
rolled. Hand brooms shall be used to sweep the wet screenings into voids and to distribute
them evenly. The sprinkling, sweeping and rolling shall be continued and additional
screenings applied where necessary until the coarse aggregates are well compacted and grout
of screenings and water form a wave ahead of wheels of the roller. Care shall be taken to see
that the base of the sub-grade does not get damaged due to the addition of the excessive
quantity of water during the construction.
ogar temeg
1.112,1 217,
7,
7F JP05111
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
PAVEMENTS (UPTO WBM LAYER)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 10 of 11
5.2.7
After the WBM course is laid and compacted, the existing surface at side berms or shoulders
of the roadway must be scarified. Fresh quantity of approved earth must be spread in layers
for building up of berms upto the required level and scope.
The earth must be consolidated by at least three passes of an 8-10 tonne road roller. The edges
must be well compacted by suitable means to prevent edge slips and the work properly
trimmed and dressed.
7.0 PAYMENT
7.1
7.1.1 Payment for filling shall be made on cubic meter of volume calculated on the basis of cross
section plotted from the level of the ground surface prepared as described in clause 3.2
above and from where filling is to be carried out and the levels reached after filling and due
consolidation.
7.1.2 Rates for embankment, shoulder or fill formation shall include cost of breaking clods,
watering, consolidation, providing testing apparatus and testing the degree of consolidation,
providing and operating, including POL and operator charges of necessary road rollers and
other equipment, dressing and levelling of sides and top surfaces etc.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
51g-ar tlf5rdg
1.2M eiemirl?1,
1,0151,,i)
7.2
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
PAVEMENTS (UPTO WBM LAYER)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 11 of 11
Payment for sand/murrum filling shall be made on the basis of volume of fill, after
placement and compaction. The rate quoted shall include cost of sand/murrum, royalties,
transportation, handling, compacting, watering, testing at various stages, dressing, removal
of surplus material and any other work incidental to this.
7.3
Paying for laying WBM shall be made on square meter basis of each layer of WBM laid,
measured after consolidation and finishing. Rate shall include supply of all materials, royalty,
taxes, handling, transportation, spreading metal in layers, including screenings,
consolidation by power roller, binding with murrum or other approved binding material,
cost of carrying the material to work for all leads and lifts, providing and running roller
etc. complete as per specifications and satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
7.4
7.5
The payment clause indicated above are not applicable in case of LSTK Jobs
ENGINEERS
Ifgzx idtaljtu
INDIA LIMITED
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR CONCRETE PAVEMENT
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 10
-ftr-4-RT
(2141
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
tV"4--ALOK
RS
GG
SKC
VDS
PCS
RJAIN
MMK
RP
RPB
HVR
RCPC
Standards
Committee
GM
(Engg)
Standards
Bureau
23.05.11
20.01.05
15.7.98
31.3.82
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepare Checked
d by
by
Convenor
VK
DM
SKG
ASONI
Chairman
Approved by
If ar fad&
g
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gout of India undettaiong)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 2 of 10
Abbreviations:
BS
British Standard
IRC
IS
Indian Standard
MS
Mild Steel
PCC
RCC
WBM :
Mr. R. B. Bhutda
Members:
Og eir efinlanan.3n/anIO
tiOleg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
In Go..4 d India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 10
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
3.0
MATERIALS
4.0
5.0
EQUIPMENTS
6.0
7.0
8.0
FORMS
9.0
10.0
JOINTS
11.0
OPENING TO TRAFFIC
12.0
Itar(",,Mtafanaand,an
Eligtau
1.0
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 4 of 10
SCOPE
This specification establishes the requirements of material, laying and finishing of concrete
pavements.
2.0
IS: 1834
IS: 9214
6-65-0018
6-68-0002
6-68-0004
7-65-0404
In case of conflict between the Clauses mentioned in this Specification and those in above
Codes and Specifications, this Specification shall govern.
3.0
3.1
MATERIALS
Material for Cement Concrete viz. Cement, Sand, Coarse and Fine aggregate and water,
Reinforcements Bars, Embedment, Inserts and Admixture etc. shall be as described in EIL
Specification no. 6-68-0002.
3.2
4.0
4.1
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
4.2
Specification for Concrete mix, Mix Proportioning and Batching shall be as described in EIL
Specification no. 6-68-0004 and IS: 456.
5.0
EQUIPMENTS
All equipments like sub grade templates, hand tempers, vibrating screens, internal vibrators,
longitudinal floats, bridges, push brooms, straight edges, edging tools etc. shall be on the
worksite in first class working condition and shall have been inspected by the Engineer-inCharge before paving operations are permitted to start. Throughout the construction period,
the contractor shall maintain adequate equipment in first class working conditions to ensure
the proper execution of the work.
lafaleg W INDIAIndiaLIMITED
Oges
iafferr zietoreCOIJOCISal)
Undertaking)
(A Govt al
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 10
6.0
6.1
The area where concrete is to be placed must be cleared of all loose material and virgin soil
must be exposed. Such exposed surface must be consolidated properly to obtain 95% of
Maximum Laboratory Dry Density of the soil. All soft patches must be worked out to remove
the soft soil and selected approved earth must be filled back and compacted.
6.2
For areas, where pavement is to be laid on cutting / natural grade level, Sub grade shall be
thoroughly compacted to 95% of laboratory dry density as per IS: 2720 Part VIII. For filled
up areas, top 450 mm of the soil shall be compacted to 95% of laboratory dry density below
pavement in layers of 150 mm.
6.3
The difference between the sub grade levels of Type-I, Type-II and Type-III Concrete
pavements (due to difference in thickness of Type-I, Type-II and Type-III pavements) shall be
achieved by stripping the grade level and not by filling. Hence, site-grading level below
pavement shall be kept up to sub grade level of Type-II or Type-III as the case may be, to
avoid filling of smaller thickness at later stage.
6.4
The sub grade or sub base for laying of the concrete pavement shall comply with the following
requirements:
6.4.1
6.4.2
The uniformly compacted sub grade or base course shall extend at least 300mm on either side
of the area to be concreted.
6.4.3
6.4.4
The minimum modules of sub grade in wet condition, reaction obtained with a Plate Bearing
Test as per IS: 9214, shall be 6.0 Kg/cm2/cm.
6.4.5
Sub grade shall be prepared to the lines and grades to match with the slope of pavement as
shown on the drawings.
7.0
7.1
WBM under Type-1 Pavement (Ref. EIL Standard Drawing No. 7-65-0404)
WBM Base Coarse shall consist of 2 layers of WBM Gr.-II, each of 75mm compacted
thickness, as per IRC-19 and described in EIL Specification no. 6-65-0018.
7.2
PCC 1:5:10 under Type-II and Type-III Pavement (Ref. EIL Standard Drg. No. 7-65-0404).
73
PCC 1:5:10 in sub base layer shall be as described in EIL Specification no. 6-68-0004.
7.4
Sub Base layer shall be prepared to the lines and grades to match with the slope of pavement
as shown on the drawings.
7.5
No concrete shall be placed around manholes or other structures until they have been brought
to required grade and alignment. All sides of manholes / pits etc. shall have same elevation.
7.6
The sub base layer shall be in moist condition at the time of concrete placement.
2154eg
141,271AMIVLBIJ92,01)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 6 of 10
8.0
FORMS
8.1
All side Forms shall be of mild steel unless use of wooden sections is specially permitted. The
steel forms shall be of MS channel sections and their depth shall be equal to thickness of the
pavement. The sections shall have a length of at least 3.0m except on curves, where shorter
sections may be used. These forms should be provided with ample bracing and supports to
prevent the springing of the forms under the concrete pressure or thrust of machinery
operating nearby.
8.2
The forms should be in a sufficient number and they should not be removed until concrete has
hardened sufficiently.
8.3
In case wooden forms are permitted, these shall have minimum base width of 100 mm for
150mm or lesser thick slabs and 150mm for 200mm thick slabs.
9.0
9.1
Laying of Reinforcement
All reinforcement work shall confirm to IS: 456 and as described in EIL Specification no.
6-68-0004.
9.2
Mixing
Mixing shall be as described in EIL Specification no. 6-68-0004.
9.3
Placing
9.3.1
The place where concrete is to be poured should be clean and free from all loose dirt, wooden
pieces, dust, standing water etc.
9.3.2
9.3.3
Placing and vibration should not take totally more than 20 minutes from time of mixing.
Method of placing should be got approved by Engineer-in-Charge. Segregation during
carriage and placement should be avoided. If during carriage concrete segregates, it should be
remixed before placement.
9.3.4
9.3.5
To ensure bond and water tightness between old concrete surface and fresh concrete to be
placed, the surface should be cleaned and roughened by "initial green cut" by wire brushing or
chipping. The initial green may be done by wire brush after 6 hours of placing concrete in
order to facilitate the work. Chipping can be done only after 48 hours. A layer of cement
slurry with 1:1 mix (1 cement: 1 sand) should be poured to obtain a uniform coating on old
concrete. Immediately thereafter, the fresh concrete should be poured.
9.3.6
Concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use and shall be deposited on the
sub-grade in a single operation to the required depth and width of the pavement. Spreading
shall be as uniform as possible to avoid re-handling of concrete. Where however, a certain
amount of redistribution is necessary, it shall be done with shovels and not with rakes.
Concrete shall be vibrated with internal vibrators. Concrete shall be placed continuously until
completion of the part of the work between construction joints or as directed by Engineer-in-
Of51-ze
Ogeir
Mieg
WWI FIRIA0M3W1171)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ot india Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 7 of 10
Charge continuously until completion of the part of the work between construction joints or as
directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
9.3.7
9.3.8
9.3.9
Concrete shall be laid in panels as shown in the standard drawing or as directed by Engineerin-Charge.
9.4
9.4.1
Compaction
The surface of the pavement shall be compacted either by means of power driven finish
machine or a vibrating hand screed. For areas where width of the pavement is very small,
hand consolidation and finishing shall be done as follows:
9.4.1.1 Concrete as soon as placed, shall be struck off uniformly and screeted to the crown and crosssection shown on the plans and to such level above the base that when compacted and
finished, the pavement shall conform to the grade and cross-section indicated by the plans.
The entire surface shall then be tamped until a close-knit dense surface is obtained.
9.4.1.2 The Tamper shall rest on the side forms and shall be drawn ahead with a swing motion in
combination with a series of lifts and drops alternating with lateral shifts The aim of this
operation is compaction and screeding to the approximate level required. Subsequent tamping
should advance 75 mm at a time in the direction in which the work is proceeding and in final
stages, the tamping should be closer, about 12 mm at a time, until a level and dense surface is
obtained.
9.4.1.3 If so directed by Engineer-in-charge, hand operated vibrating tamper consisting of normal type
of hand tamper attached to a pneumatic or electric vibrating unit shall be used for compaction.
9.4.1.4 Segregated particles of coarse aggregate, which collect in front of the tamper, shall be thrown
outside the forms or thoroughly mixed by hand with a mass of concrete already on the base.
9.4.1.5 Compaction by tamping shall be carried on till the mortar in the mix just works up to the
surface. The surface shall be examined after compaction correction. If needed correction
shall be made by adding or removing concrete, followed by further compaction and finishing.
9.4.2
Floating
As soon as practicable, after concrete has been struck off and compacted, it shall be further
smoothened and compacted by means of a longitudinal float, 1200 mm long and 75 mm wide,
operated from a foot bridge.
0 el
ligz1T 'Meg
eietrw
10.271
9.4.3
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ol Inda Undotalong)
161.3,1011)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 8 of 10
Straight Edging
After floating is completed and excess water removed but while concrete is still plastic, the
slab surface shall be tested for trueness with a straight edge and rectified, if necessary.
9.4.4
Brooming
After belting and as soon as surplus water has risen to the surface, the pavement shall be given
a broom finish to produce corrugations of uniform appearance of not more than 1/16 inch in
depth.
9.4.5
Edging
Before the concrete has its initial set, the edges shall be carefully finished with an edger of the
radius required and pavement edge shall be left smooth and true to line.
9.5
Curing
Curing of concrete shall be as described in EL Specification no. 6-68-0004.
10.0
JOINTS
10.1
Wherever called for on the drawings, expansion joints, construction joints and sealing joints
shall be provided as per details indicated in the drawing and as directed by Engineer-inCharge.
10.2
Sealing of Joints
10.2.1 After the curing, the temporary seal or other intruded materials of all expansion and
contraction joints shall be removed completely and the slots filled with approved joint sealing
compound as conforming to IS: 1834, Type B. The filler material for Expansion and Sealing
joints shall be preformed fillers of Bitumen Impregnated Fiber, conforming to IS: 1838, Part-I.
10.2.2 The edges of the joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and primed with a thin bituminous paint,
which shall be allowed to dry before the sealing compound is applied.
10.2.3 The primer shall be applied with a brush. The compositjon of primer shall be as follows:
Name of Material
3.
Percent by weight
200-Penetration Bitumen
Blended
66
14
Solvent Naphtha
20
The bitumen shall be melted and fluxed with oil. When cold, solvent Naphtha shall be added.
BITUMINOUS emulsion shall not be used as primers. Care shall be taken to ensure that the
sealing compound is not heated above 200C and the temperature does not exceed 180C for
long periods.
Ogex tal
eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Ind. Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 9 of 10
10.2.4 Sealing compound shall be poured into the joint opening in such a manner that the material
will not be spilled on the exposed surface of the concrete. When required to prevent pick up
under traffic, the exposed surface of the sealing compound shall be dusted with hydrated lime.
11.0
OPENING TO TRAFFIC
11.1
Traffic shall not be allowed for a period of 28 days after laying of concrete in pavement.
11.2
Before opening the pavement to traffic, all joints shall be filled and trimmed or topped out as
required.
11.3
Sampling, testing and acceptance of concrete work shall be according to IS: 456-2000
12.0
12.1
12.1.1 Payment for plane and reinforced concrete in pavements shall be made on cubic metre basis of
the volume of the actual finished work done and shall be inclusive of cost of providing Forms,
Pockets, Chamfers, Fillets, Grooves, Cement wash, Curing by normal moist curing or using
curing compound etc. as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. The rates shall be deemed to include
complete cost of getting the respective mix designs approved, making and testing concrete
cubes and carrying out other tests including tests of various ingredients, as per specifications
and as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
12.1.2 No separate payment shall be made for any admixture used by the contractor for accelerating
or retarding the strength of concrete or for achieving specified workability / water tightness.
The rate quoted shall be deemed to be inclusive of all costs related to any such additive /
admixture.
12.1.3 The rate shall however be exclusive of reinforcement, metal inserts, pipe sleeves and any filler
material in expansion / sealing joints.
12.1.4 Where the strength of concrete mix (nominal or design mix) as indicated by tests, lies in
between the strengths of two grades given in Table-1 of EIL Specification No. 6-68-0004 and
it is accepted by owner/Engineer-in-charge, such concrete shall be classified as a grade
belonging to the lower of the two grades between which it lies. In case the cube strength
shows higher results than those specified for the particular grade of the concrete, it shall not be
placed in the higher grade nor shall the Contractor be entitled for any extra payment on such
account. The concrete giving lower strength than specified may be accepted at reduced rates
after satisfying the safety of the structure by checking it with tests as specified or rejected
entirely at the discretion of the Engineer-in Charge. The rejected concrete shall be dismantled
at no extra cost to the owner and no payment or extension of time shall be granted for the
concrete so rejected and the formwork and reinforcement used for the same. Cost of any
material supplied by the Owner free of cost shall be recovered from the contractor at double
the prevailing market rate. In case the concrete of lower strength can be improved by carrying
out some strengthening measures entirely at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge, then
Contractor shall carry out the said measures including all related tests at his own cost. If the
Contractor is able to make up the strength to the required grade by such improvement
measures to the entire satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge, payment shall be made for the grade
achieved. However, if the strength of concrete is not made up to the strength of required grade,
payment shall be made only for the lower strength if such concrete is accepted by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
OPTie?
ENGINEERS
eir fatae INDIA LIMITED
g
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 10 of 10
12.1.5 Deductions for openings, pockets etc. shall be as specified in relevant Indian Standard Codes.
12.2
Reinforcement
12.2.1 Payment for plain round mild steel reinforcement bars and high strength deformed steel bars
shall be on the basis of weight of bare steel, irrespective of any coating applied, in metric tons.
The weight of the bar shall be derived from the sizes and corresponding unit weights given in
hand book of Bureau of Indian Standards. Standard hook length, chairs, spacer bars and
authorised laps only shall be included in the weight calculated. Binding wire shall not be
weighed nor otherwise measured. Measurement for weight shall not include cutting allowance
etc.
12.2.2 Rate quoted for reinforcement shall include cost of supplying, decoiling, straightening,
cleaning, cutting, bending, placing, binding, welding if required, and providing necessary
cover blocks of concrete.
12.3
Joints
Payment for expansion joints, construction joints and sealing joints shall be made on running
metre basis. The rate shall include cleaning of joints, filler material and sealing with approved
compound, all material, labour etc. complete, as per drawing.
Ofazte
0?eir fat5leg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0021 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 5
aTTT 1111
"arffzfr
auf 317 Tft wrrktrT
1-1111, q
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PIPE CULVERTS
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING
/0/?`"//
3
AS
RK
16.02.06
SKC
NK
15.2.98
31.3.82
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
RC
Prepare
d by
RPB
Checked
by
DM
VDS
VJN
MMK
A SONI
HVR
Standards
GM
Committee (Engg)
Convenor
AK
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
ENGINEERS
LIMITED
og eir ofiteg w INDIA
(A Gait of India Undedabong)
ew.R,ou9.5.0
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PIPE CULVERTS
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0021 Rev. 3
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
ERC
IRC
IS
PVC
RCC
Mr. R. B. Bhutda
Members:
1511P-4eq
felf5rdg,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt d India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PIPE CULVERTS
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0021 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE
3.0 MATERIALS
lajtheT
eir Rift
MIOT eliTIWOA3^.1)
1.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PIPE CULVERTS
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0021 Rev. 3
Page 4 of 5
SCOPE
The scope of this specification covers RCC pipe culverts and ERC/ IRC crossings with RCC or PVC
pipes.
2.0
IS: 783
IS: 4985
NOTE:-
3.0
MATERIALS
3.1
All pipes must be new and perfectly sound, free from cracks, cylindrically straight and of standard
nominal diameter and length, with even texture. PVC Pipes shall be Class-I as per IS: 4985.
For pipe culverts, class of RCC pipe shall be NP3 / NP4 or as mentioned in the drawings.
3.2
The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's test certificate for acceptance of RCC/PVC pipes.
3.3
Spun yam for pipe joints shall be of best quality. It shall be free from dust etc.
4.0
4.1
The transportation of materials to the worksite and stacking shall be done in a manner to cause
minimum inconvenience to the traffic and other construction work.
4.2
The pipe shall be protected during handling against impact, shocks and free fall to avoid cracks and
damage.
4.3
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety and security of materials transported and
stacked in the field.
4.4
Earthwork
5.1
General
The laying and jointing of RCC pipes shall confirm to IS: 783.
The trench shall be checked for proper level, grade and alignment before lowering the pipes.
15iNTEq ENGINEERS
Ogeir 2151eu
5.2
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt. of India Undeftakong)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR PIPE CULVERTS
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0021 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 5
Lowering
The RCC pipe shall be lowered cautiously to prevent disturbance to the bed and sides of the trench.
The heavy RCC pipes shall be lowered by means of proper tripods, chain pulley blocks or as directed
by Engineer-in-charge. Great care should be taken to prevent sand etc. from entering the pipes.
5.3
Laying
5.3.1
5.3.2
The error of grade shall not be rectified by packing up earth underneath the pipe. If required, concrete
shall be used for packing.
5.3.3
The end of RCC pipes shall be kept closed to keep dirt, mud and foreign materials out. Adequate
provision shall be made to prevent floating of pipes in the event of flooding of trenches.
The body of RCC pipe, for its entire length, shall rest on an even bed in the trench.
5.4
5.4.1
Cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 sand) shall be slightly moistened and must on no account be soft or
sloppy and shall be carefully inserted by hand into the joint. The mortar shall than be punched and
caulked into the joint and more cement mortar added until the space of the joint has been filled
completely with tightly caulked mortar.
5.4.2
Any surplus mortar projecting inside the joint is to be removed and guarded against any damage. Sack
or gunny bags shall be drawn past each joint after completion.
5.5
Curing.
The Cement mortar joints in RCC pipes shall be cured at least for seven days.
5.6
Testing.
All joints in culvert pipelines shall be tested to a head of 1.5 m of water above the top of the highest
pipe, if required, by Engineer-in-Charge.
5.7
Payment
Payment shall be made on running meter basis, which includes supplying, transporting, lowering,
laying, jointing and curing, concreting around RCC pipes etc., all complete.
6.0
6.1
Lowering and laying of PVC pipes shall be done as per IS: 4985. The jointing of the pipes shall be
done by expanding one end after heating and using solvent cement.
6.2
Payment
Payment shall be made on running meter basis of PVC pipes, which includes supplying, transporting,
lowering, laying and jointing, concreting around PVC pipes etc., all complete.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
31
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 1 of 15
-1
wrzi
ffrr-
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
MATERIALS
21.08.14
UPDATED &REISSUED
19.06.09
AS
18.02.00
DPN
JUNE'94
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Ol/
PKm
S.CHANDA
SCH
VINAY
KUMAR
N. DUARI
SKP
SC JAIN
A. SONI
SKP
GPL
A. SONI
Standards
Comm ittee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved by
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$g-a-
larre,r eteentaarn.rosnet
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 2 of 15
Abbreviations:
API
ASTM :
BIS
BS
British Standard
DIN
IS
Indian Standards
PCC
PVC
RCC
Structural Standards
Committee
Convenor :
Members :
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
_11
I
c-fro,f,frwro,
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 3 of 15
CONTENTS
1 .0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCES
3.0
WATER
4.0
AGGREGATE
5.0
SAND
6.0
CEMENT
7.0
STEEL
8.0
BRICK
11
9.0
STONE
12
10.0
ADMIXTURES
12
1 1.0
14
12.0
BITUMEN/BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
14
13.0
PVC PIPES
15
14.0
WOOD/TIMBER
15
15.0
EPDXY COMPOUNDS
15
16.0
PAINT
15
17.0
ANTITERMITE COMPOUNDS
15
18.0
POLYSULPHIDE SEALANTS
15
$fgZEI 02-'
dg
awn 2v-,Fros,covI,
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
IA Govt ot Intha Undenakog)
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 4 of 15
1.0 SCOPE
1.1
This specification establishes and defines the requirements of various materials to be used in
Civil and Structural works.
1.2
Whenever any reference to BIS Codes is made, the same shall be taken as the latest revision
(with all amendments issued thereto) as on the date of submission of the bid.
1.3
Apart from the BIS Codes mentioned in particular in the various clauses of this specification,
all other relevant codes related to specific job under consideration regarding quality, tests,
testing and/ or inspection procedures shall be applicable. Reference to some of the Codes in
the various clauses of this specification does not limit or restrict the scope of applicability of
other referred or relevant codes.
1.4
In case of any variation/contradiction between the provision of BIS Codes and this
specification, the provision given in this specification shall be followed.
1.5
All materials shall be of standard quality and shall be procured from renowned sources/
manufacturers approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor, to get all materials/ manufacturers approved by the Engineer-in-Charge prior to
procurement and placement of order.
1.6
Whenever called for by the Engineer-in-Charge all tests of the materials as specified by the
relevant BIS Codes shall be carried out by the Contractor in an approved laboratory and test
reports duly authenticated by the laboratory, shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for
his approval. If so desired by the Engineer-in-Charge, tests shall be conducted in the presence
of the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized nominee.
1.7
Quality and acceptability of materials not covered under this specification shall be governed
by the relevant BIS Codes. In case BIS code is not available for the particular material, other
codes e.g. BS or DIN or API/ ASTM shall be considered. The decision of Engineer-in-Charge,
in this regard, shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
1.8
Whenever asked for, the Contractor shall submit representative samples of materials to the
Engineer-in-Charge for his inspection and approval. Approval of any sample does not
necessarily exempt the Contractor from submitting necessary test reports for the approved
material, as per the specification/relevant BIS Codes.
1.9
The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's test reports on quality and suitability of any
material procured from them and their recommendation on storage, application, workmanship
etc. for the intended use. Submission of manufacturer's test reports does not restrict the
Engineer-in-Charge from asking fresh test results from an approved laboratory of the actual
material supplied from an approved manufacturer/ source at any stage of execution of work.
1.10
All costs relating to or arising out of carrying out the tests and submission of test reports and
or samples to the Engineer-in-Charge for his approval during the entire tenure of the work
shall be borne by the contractor and included in the quoted rates.
1.11
Materials for approval shall be separately stored and marked, as directed by the Engineer-inCharge and shall not be used in the works till these are approved.
1.12
All rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site by the Contractor at his own
cost.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
411.271 ,r2L/R? ATI JACISAD
A Govt ot Indta
Undenaxngi
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 5 of 15
2.0 REFERENCES
As mentioned in the respective clauses.
3.0 WATER
3.1
Water used in construction for all civil & structural works shall be clean and free from
injurious amount of oil, acids, alkalies, organic matters or other harmful substances which
may be deleterious to concrete, masonry or steel. The pH value of water sample shall be not
lens than 6. Potable water shall be considered satisfactory. Underground water can also be
used with the prior approval of Engineer-in-Charge, if it meets all the requirements of IS:456.
3.2
Tests on water samples shall be carried out in accordance with IS:3025 and they shall fulfill
all the guidelines and requirements given in IS:456.
3.3
The Engineer-in-Charge may require the Contractor to prove, that the concrete prepared with
water, proposed to be used, shall have average 28 days compressive strength not lower than
90% of the strength of concrete prepared with distilled water.
3.4
The Engineer-in-Charge may require the Contractor to get the water tested from an approved
laboratory before starting the construction work and in case the water contains any oil/ organic
matter or an excess of acid, alkalies or any injurious amount of salts etc., beyond the
permissible maximum limits given in IS:456, the Engineer-in-Charge may refuse to permit its
use. In case the water is supplied by the owner, contractor shall get himself satisfied regarding
its quality before using the same in his works at his own expense. In case there is any change
in source of water, water samples shall be tested again to meet the specified requirements.
3.5
Water shall be stored in tin barrels, steel tanks or water-tight reservoirs made with bricks /
stone or reinforced concrete. Brick/ stone masonry reservoirs shall have RCC Base slab and
shall be plastered inside, with 1 part of cement and 4 parts of sand and finished with neat
cement punning. These reservoirs shall be of sufficient capacity to meet the water
requirement, at any stage of construction.
3.6
Water for curing shall be of the same quality as used for concreting and masonry works. Sea
water shall not be used for preparation of cement mortar, concrete as well as for curing of
plain/reinforced concrete and masonry works. Sea water shall not be used for hydrotesting and
checking the leakage of liquid retaining structures also.
4.0 AGGREGATE
4.1
General
4.1.1 Coarse and fine aggregates for Civil and Structural Works shall conform in all respects to
IS:383 (Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete).
Aggregates shall be obtained from an approved source known to produce the same
satisfactorily. Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring (crushed or uncrushed) stones,
gravel and sand or a combination thereof. These shall be chemically inert, hard, strong, dense
durable, clean and free from veins, adherent coatings, injurious amount of alkalies, vegetable
matter and other deleterious substances such as iron pyrites, coal, lignite, mica, shale, sea
shells etc.
4.1.2 Source and type of aggregates shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-Charge prior to
procurement. Change in source and type of aggregates, at later stage, shall not be generally
permitted; but under specific circumstances, Engineer-in-Charge can allow a change in source
and type of aggregate. Contractor shall produce necessary test certificates from approved
laboratories regarding the quality and suitability of the proposed aggregates and submit fresh
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
$'fg'-ar
ENQNEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ot Ind. UnderidMirg)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 6 of 15
mix design for approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Any such change, if permitted by the
Engineer-in-Charge, shall be without any time and cost implication to the owner.
4.1.3 Aggregates which may chemically react with alkalies of cement or might cause corrosion of
the reinforcement, shall not be used. If so desired by the Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor
shall carry out alkali reactivity tests and submit the results to him for approval.
4.1.4 The maximum quantities of deleterious materials in the aggregates as determined in
accordance with IS:2386 - Part II (Methods of Test for aggregates for concrete), shall not
exceed the limits defined in IS: 383. No special test is required to prove the absence of such
deleterious matters if the aggregates are from a known source with satisfactory prior data on
the properties of concrete made with them. In case of newly developed quarry sites, the
contractor shall submit necessary test results as per IS:383 and IS:2386 to the Engineer-inCharge prior to his acceptance and approval. The method of Sampling shall be in accordance
with the requirements given in IS:2430.
4.1.5 Coarse and fine aggregates shall be batched separately. All-in-aggregate shall be used only
where specifically permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Separate sieve analysis and grading curves shall be prepared by the Contractor for any/ all
batches of coarse and fine aggregates, and submitted to the Engineer-in- Charge, whenever
asked for, to ensure conformity with those submitted along with the mix design.
4.1.6 Whenever required by Engineer-in-Charge, the aggregates (coarse/ fine) shall be washed and/
or sieved by the contractor before use in the works to obtain clean and graded aggregate at no
extra cost to the owner.
4.1.7 Aggregates not in conformity with the specifications shall be rejected and the Contractor shall
immediately remove them from the site of work.
4.2
Coarse Aggregates
4.2.1 Coarse aggregates are the aggregates, which are retained on 4.75 mm BIS Sieve. It shall have
a specific gravity not less than 2.6 (saturated surface dry basis).
4.2.2 These may be obtained from crushed or uncrushed gravel or stone as per clause 3.1 and may
be supplied as single sized or graded. The grading of the aggregates shall be as per IS:383 or
as required by the mix design, to obtain densest possible concrete. For this purpose, the
contractor shall submit to the Engineer-in-Charge at least three sets of mix design and test
results, each with different gradings of coarse aggregates, proposed to be used. The
Engineer-in-Charge may allow "All-in-aggregates" to be used provided they satisfy the
requirements of IS:383.
4.3
Fine Aggregates
4.3.1 Fine aggregates are the aggregates which pass through 4.75 mm BIS sieve but not more than
ten percent (10%) pass through 150 micron BIS sieve. These shall comply with the
requirements of grading zones I, II and III of IS:383. Fine aggregates conforming to grade
zone IV shall not be used for reinforced concrete works.
4.3.2 Fine aggregates shall consist of material resulting from natural disintegration of rock and
which has been deposited by streams or glacial agencies, or crushed stone sand or gravel sand.
Sand from sea shores, creeks or river banks affected by tides, shall not be used for filling or
concrete works.
$gar fa2d
- g
1.11,1 etvm ,TA
4.4
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
IA Govt of Ind. UndettnO,ft9)
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 7 of 15
4.5
Storage of Aggregates
4.5.1
Storage of all types of aggregates at site of work shall be at contractor's expense and risk and
shall be stored as specified in IS:4082. Aggregates shall in no case be stored near to the
excavated earth or directly over ground surface.
4.5.2 The Contractor shall maintain sufficient quantities of aggregates, near to the place of work,
required for the continuity of the work. Each type and grade of aggregate shall be stored
separately on hard, farm surface having adequate slope for drainage of water.
4.5.3 Aggregates delivered at site in wet condition or becoming wet due to rain or any other means,
shall not be used for atleast 24 hours. The Contractor shall obtain prior approval of the
Engineer-in-charge for the use of such aggregates and shall adjust the water content in
accordance with IS:2386 to achieve the desired mix. In the absence of test results, and to allow
variation in mass of aggregates and water content on account of moisture content, the
Contractor can make suitable adjustment in the masses as per IS:456, for preparation of
nominal mix concrete only.
5.0 SAND
5.1
5.1.1 The sand shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone sand or crushed gravel sand or a
combination of any of these. The sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent
coatings and organic matter and shall not contain the amount of clay, silt and fine dust more
than specified in IS:2116.
5.1.2 The sand shall not contain any harmful impurities such as iron pyrites, alkalis, salts, coal or
other organic impurities, mica, shale or similar laminated materials, soft fragments, sea shells
in such form or in such quantities as to affect adversely the hardening, strength or durability of
the mortar.
5.1.3 Unless found satisfactory as a result of further tests as may be specified by the Engineer-inCharge, or unless evidence of such performance is offered which is satisfactory to him, the
maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in the sand, when tested
in accordance with IS:2386, shall not be more than 5% by mass in natural sand, or crushed
gravel sand or crushed stone sand. For organic impurities, when determined in accordance
with IS:2386, colour of the liquid shall be lighter than that indicated by the standard solution
specified in IS:2386.
5.1.4
Grading of Sand
The particle size grading of sand for use in mortars shall be within the limits as specified
below:
ENGINEERS
$1g-ar 02-eg canINDIA LIMITED
aiwn rttow,
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 8 of 15
PERCENTAGE
PASSING BY MASS
REF. TO
METHOD OF
4.75 mm
2.36 mm
1.18 mm
600 micron
300 micron
150 micron
100
90 to 100
70 to 100
40 to 100
5 to 70
0 to 15
IS:2386 (Part I)
In case of a sand whose grading falls outside the specified limits due to excess or deficiency of
coarse or fine particles, this shall be processed to comply with the standard by screening
through a suitably sized sieve and/or blending with required quantities of suitable sizes of
natural sand particles or crushed stone screenings which are by themselves unsuitable. Based
on test results and in the light of practical experience with the use of local materials, deviation
in grading of sand may be considered by the Engineer-in-Charge. The various sizes of
particles of which the sand is composed shall be uniformly distributed throughout the mass.
5.1.5
5.2
6.0 CEMENT
Cement to be used for civil and structural works shall be one of the following. Specific
requirement for the type of cement to be used shall be as shown in the drawings or as specified
in the contract or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
IS:269
IS:8112
IS:12269
IS:455
IS:1489 Pt.1
IS:1489 Pt.2
IS:3466
IS:6452
rst
5g-u Ofaies
vtvotrv ,151.7,7~
6.1
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of InOia Gneettalong)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 9 of 15
IS:8041
IS:8112
IS:12269
IS:12330
Storage at Site
6.1.1 The storage of cement (lifted from the Owner's godown or procured by the Contractor
himself) at the site of work shall be at contractor's expense and risk and shall meet the
requirements of IS:4082. The cement shall be stored above ground in a suitable weather tight
building or godown and in such a manner as to permit easy access for proper inspection and
also to prevent deterioration due to moisture. In the event of any damage occurring to the
quality of cement due to faulty storage or on account of negligence on the part of the
contractor, such damages shall be borne by the contractor himself.
6.1.2 A11 approved cement shall be arranged in batches with type, brand and date of receipt flagged
on them. A maximum of eight bags shall be stacked one over the other. Cement bags shall be
used in the same order as received from the manufacturer/ owner. The contractor shall
maintain a register, on day to day basis, giving the details of the receipt/ consumption, source
of supply and type of cement etc. The register shall always be accessible to the
Engineer-in-Charge for verification.
6.2
6.3
Rejection
The Engineer-in-Charge may reject at his discretion any cement, notwithstanding the
manufacturer's certificate or failing to meet the requirements of relevant BIS Codes for testing
of cement. He may similarly reject any cement which has deteriorated owing to inadequate
protection from moisture or due to intrusion of foreign matter or any other cause. Any cement
which is considered defective, shall not be used and shall be promptly removed from the site
by the contractor.
7.0 STEEL
7.1
General
All steel bars, sections, plates, and other miscellaneous steel materials, etc shall be free from
loose mill scales, rust as well as oil, mud, paint or other coatings. The materials, construction
specifications such as dimensions, shape, weight, tolerances, testing etc, for all materials
covered under this section, shall conform to respective BIS Codes. Steel sections shall be
conforming to IS:808 or IS:12778.
7.2
Reinforcement Bars
Reinforcement bars, to be used for civil and structural works shall be one of the following or
in combination thereof.
ajL
1.1,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A GAA 011AA. UndelAkA91
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 10 of 15
IS: 432
IS:1566
IS:1785
IS:1786
IS:6003
IS:13620
Structural Steel
Structural steel to be used for general structural purposes shall be one of the following or in
combination thereof.
Structural steel sections shall conform to following BIS Codes:
7.4
IS:1161
IS:1239
IS:2062
IS:4923
7.4.1
IS:412
IS:2062
IS:1363
IS:811
IS:1367
IS:2016
IS:2266
IS:2315
IS:2361
IS:1239
IS:2485
IS:3502
IS:3138
IS:3757
IS:4000
Anchor Bolts
Material for Anchor Bolts such as MS bars, washers, nuts, pipe sleeves and plates etc. shall be
as per relevant BIS Codes mentioned above.
7.5
Storage
The storage of all materials at site of work shall be at the contractor's expense and risk and
shall be done as per the requirements given in IS:4082. The contractor shall maintain the
proper records of receipt/consumption. The records shall always be accessible to the
Engineer-in-Charge for verification.
$'gu la2eg
1.71,
,(31 JP41.3,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Tool ol Incha Undertalong)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 11 of 15
The reinforcement bars, structural steel sections and other miscellaneous steel materials etc,
shall be stored in such a way as to avoid and prevent deterioration, corrosion, bending,
twisting and wrapping. In case of any damage occurring to the material on account of faulty
storage or negligence by the contractor, same shall be borne by the contractor himself.
7.6
7.7
Rejection
The Engineer-in-charge may reject at his discretion any material, not withstanding the
manufacturer's certificate or failing to meet the requirements of relevant BIS Codes for testing
of materials. He may similarly reject any material, which has deteriorated or corroded etc., due
to improper storage, handling or transport. Defective materials shall not be used and removed
from the site by the contractor at his own expense.
8.0 BRICK
8.1
General
Bricks for masonry works shall conform to IS:1077 - Specification for common burnt clay
building bricks and shall be of class 5.0 (with minimum compressive strength of 5.0 Nimm2 ).
Specific requirement for any other class of bricks shall be as shown in drawings or as
described in the contract for a particular site or type of work. Physical requirements, quality,
dimensions, tolerances etc. of common burnt clay building bricks shall conform to the
requirements of IS:1077.
Bricks shall be hand - moulded or machine moulded and shall be made from suitable soils.
The bricks shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners and shall be well burnt,
sound, hard, tough and uniform in colour. These shall be free from cracks, chips, flaws, stone
or humps of any kind.
8.2
8.3
Stacking of Bricks
Bricks shall be stored at site as per the requirements given in IS:4082 and shall not be dumped
at site. They shall be unloaded from trucks to a place on a levelled surface near to the work
site. They shall be stacked in regular tiers even as they are unloaded, to minimise breakages
and defacement of bricks. The supply of bricks shall be so arranged that as far as possible, at
$fg`z-z 2f5t-eg
(Att?rt ~treott,ivfOrs0
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
(A Govt of Indla Undertalong(
6-68-0002 Rev.4
MATERIALS
Page 12 of 15
least two days' requirements of bricks are available at site at any time. Bricks, of different
class, shall be stacked separately.
8.4
8.5
9.0 STONE
9.1
General
All Stones used for masonry works shall conform to the requirements of following BIS Codes.
Method of identification of natural building stones.
Recommendations for dimensions and workmanship of natural
building stones for masonry work.
Recommendations for dressing of natural building stones.
9.2
IS:1123
IS:1127
IS:1129
Quality of Stones
Stones shall be of approved quality, hard, dense, strong, sound, durable, clean and uniform in
colour. They shall also be free from veins, adherent coatings, injurious amount of alkalies,
vegetable matters and other deleterious substances such as iron pyrites, coal, lignite, mica, sea
shells etc. Unless otherwise approved, stones from one single quarry shall be used for any one
work. The strength of stones should be adequate to carry the imposed load and shall meet all
the requirements of IS:1905, taking into account the appropriate crushing strength of stone and
type of the mortar used. The percentage of water absorption, when tested in accordance with
IS:1124, shall not exceed 5 percent.
Stones normally used, shall be small enough to be lifted and placed by hand. The length of the
stone shall not exceed 3 times the height. Width of stone on base shall not be less than 150
mm and in no case exceed 3/4th thickness of the wall. Height of the stone shall not be more
than 300 mm.
9.3
Unloading/Stacking
The stones shall be unloaded from the trucks to a site near to the place of work as defined in
IS:4082 and shall be stacked on a firm ground having adequate stope for drainage. The supply
of stones shall be so arranged that as far as possible, at least two days' requirements of stone
are available at site at any time.
10.0 ADMIXTURES
10.1 General Requirements for Admixtures
10.1.1 All concrete admixtures shall in general comply with the following BIS Codes unless
otherwise stipulated in this Specification.
Specification for integral cement water proofing compounds.
Specification for other admixtures for concrete.
IS:2645
IS:9103
Copyright EILAll rights reserved
2Zff 22eg
rfroxtosi~o
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
lA Go, of Inclw Undertalong)
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 13 of 15
10.1.2 Generally, admixtures shall have ISI certification marks. However, even in case of BIS
certified admixtures, Engineer-in-Charge may require the Contractor to carry out and submit
any or all the tests (as specified in relevant BIS Codes), from BIS approved laboratories, over
and above the manufacturer's test certificate, before giving his final approval.
In case, admixtures certified by BIS are not available, the contractor shall submit to the
Engineer-in-Charge the type and/or proprietary brand of the admixture from only reputed
manufacturers along with necessary test certificates from BIS recognized/ BIS approved
laboratories or any other document directed by Engineer-in-Charge for the latter's final
approval. In such cases, names of at least two manufacturers shall be submitted to the
Engineer-in-Charge for his selection. In case, both the names are rejected, the contractor shall
submit a fresh list of two manufacturers for approval by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The Engineer-in-Charge may direct the contractor to submit test results as required by IS:2645
or IS:9103 for any admixture proposed to be used in the concrete in any approved laboratory
at his discretion at any stage of the work. The cost of any/all tests required to satisfy
compliance with this specification shall be borne by the Contractor.
In case of non-availability of any BIS code for testing and acceptability criteria, relevant
American, British or German Code shall be applicable.
10.1.3 Prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge shall be obtained while using water reducing
admixtures in the concrete (PCC/ RCC) or mortar. Other type of admixtures such as
accelerating admixtures, retarding admixtures or air entraining admixtures, shall not be used
unless specified on the design drawings or prior approval taken from the design approving
authority. Once approved, utmost care shall be exercised at site by the Contractor to maintain
the consistency in the quality of admixture and the concrete/ mortar so produced.
10.1.4 The suitability and effectiveness of any admixture shall be verified by trial with the designed
concrete mixes using cement, aggregates together with any other materials to be actually used
in the works as per the direction of Engineer-in-Charge. If two or more admixtures are to be
used simultaneously in the same concrete mix, the Contractor must submit necessary test
results from an approved laboratory to show their interaction and compatibility. Any/all tests
specified in BIS Codes shall be carried out only with the type of material and mix design, to
be actually used in the work site.
10.1.5 No admixture shall impair the durability of the concrete nor combine with the ingredients to
form harmful compounds nor increase the risk of corrosion of reinforcement. Use of
admixtures shall not reduce the dry density of concrete. Once the proportion of admixture has
been established, strict check shall be maintained not to alter the proportions of ingredients
and water-cement ratio of the Design Mix during execution.
10.1.6 The chloride contents in admixtures shall not exceed 2% by mass of the admixture or 0.03%
by mass of the cement.
10.1.7 Admixtures which do not meet the requirements stipulated in this specification shall be
rejected and shall not be used.
10.2 Water Proofing Compounds
10.2.1 Water proofing compounds shall be mixed with cement only.
10.2.2 The permeability of the specimen with the admixture shall be less than half of the
permeability with similar specimen without the use of these compounds. These compounds
shall be used in such proportion as recommended by manufacturer but in no case it shall
exceed 3% by weight of cement.
iI!K't t-t
112
2j g
1.1771
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
MATERIALS
IA SOvt of indla Undertaking)
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 14 of 15
10.2.3 The initial setting time of the cement with the use of these compounds shall not be less than 30
minutes and final setting time shall not be more than 10 hours. Test shall be carried out in
accordance with IS:4031.
10.2.4 Compressive strength of specimen at 3 days shall not be less than 160 kg/sq.cm nor 80% of
the 3 days compressive strength of mortar cubes prepared with same cement and sand only,
whichever is higher. Similarly compressive strength at 7 days shall not be less than 220
kg/sq.cm nor less than 80% of the 7 days compressive strength prepared with the same cement
and sand only, whichever is higher. The test to determine the compressive strength shall
conform to IS:4031.
10.3
Concrete Penetrating Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture shall be as per EIL Specification No. 668-0017.
Performance requirements of PVC water bars shall meet the requirements of IS:12200. These
shall be of approved make and of ribbed/ serrated/ plane type with a bulb at the centre. The
thickness and width of water bars shall be as per schedule of rates/ drawings but in no case the
thickness shall be less than 5 mm and width less than 150 mm. The joining of the water bars
shall be carried out by vulcanising strictly as per the manufacturer's specifications. Lapped
joints shall not be allowed under any circumstances.
IS:73
Specification of Paving Bitumen.
IS:1195
Specification for bitumen mastic for flooring.
IS:1322
Specification for Bitumen felts for water proofing and damp proofing.
Specification for Bituminous compounds for water proofing
IS:1834
and caulking purposes.
Specification for preformed fillers for expansion joint
IS:1838
in concrete pavements and structures.
IS:3037
Specification for bitumen mastic for use in water proofing of roofs.
Specification for bitumen primer for use in water proofing and damp proofing.IS:3384
IS:5871
Specification for Bitumen Mastic for Tanking and Damp proofing.
IS:7193
Specification for Glass fibre base coal tar pitch & bitumen felts.
IS:7198
Code of practise for damp proofing using bitumen mastic.
Specification for bitumen Mastic, Anti Static
IS:8374
and electrically conducting grade.
$g-21
- 22-dg
'
vovot(V.I,AtotAt
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
Unctettaking)
(A Govt ot
lnd
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 15 of 15
The type and grade shall be as shown on the drawings or as indicated in schedule of quantities
or as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Tests and acceptable criteria shall be as per relevant BIS
Codes.
13.0 PVC PIPES
PVC Pipes shall conform to the requirements of IS:4985.
14.0 WOOD/ TIMBER
14.1
Wood recommended for platforms of cold vessels or below cold vessels/ exchangers shall be
hard and shall be of group A, grade I, and shall have safe permissible stress of 7 N/mm2 in
compression, perpendicular to grains on outside location as per IS:883. General characteristics
like durability, treatability etc. shall conform to IS:883 and IS:3629.
14.2
Timber required to be used for formwork shall be fairly dry before use. It should maintain its
shape during the use and even when it comes into contact with moisture from the concrete.
Storage of Wood/Timber shall be as per the requirements of IS:4082.
For proper identification and selection of suitable timber for formwork, following codes shall
be referred.
Classification of commercial timbers and their zonal distribution
Specification for ballies for general purposes.
Specification for Ply wood for concrete shuttering work.
IS:399
IS:3337
IS:4990
Refer EIL Specification No. 6-79-0020 or the job specification whichever applicable.
ENGINEERS
INDIA IJMITED
Go of Inda UndenakIng)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
EARTHWORK
TIT-4W
rfrftMa
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 1 of 13
k 11
ki<1110-Ich Wr.4
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
r4-1)
wrzi
EARTHWORK
21.08.14
AJS
19.06.09
AS
22.01.02
R SOOD
AUG'94
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
PKM
SC
SCH
VINAY
KUMAR
N. DUARI
R SOOD
H MATHUR
GRR
H MATHUR
GP LAHIRI
A. SONI
Prepared Checked
by
by
Standards Standards
Comm ittee
Bureau
Convenor Chairman
Approved by
tg-r:fr
412m,.-rroor,off1.3o-tro.o
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENQNEERS
INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
A
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 2 of 13
Abbreviations:
CNS :
Mr. PK Mittal
Members :
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 3 of 13
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL
3.0
BACKFILLING MATERIAL
4.0
SETTING OUT
5.0
EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION
6.0
12
7.0
12
8.0
13
9.0
13
10.0
CLEAN UP
13
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Og-alf612ry dg
'
1.I0R 2.10 ,12 ,151,30215,
0
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 4 of 13
1.0 SCOPE
This specification deals with earth work in excavation and filling.
2.0 CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL
2.1
Ordinary Soil
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
Stiff heavy clay, hard shale or compact murrum requiring grafting tool and/ or pick
and shovel
Shingle and river or nallah bed boulders
Soling of roads, paths etc. and hard core
Macadam surface of any description (water bound, grouted tarmac etc.)
Lime concrete, stone masonry in lime or cement mortar below ground level
Soft conglomerate when the stone can be detached from the matrix with picks and
shovels
Soft Rock
This is fissured/ disintegrated rocky strata, boulders (volume more than 0.028 m3 and lens than
0.400 m3) and also which cannot be quarried/ excavated by using above manual tools but can
be quarried/ excavated manually by using crow bars is classified as soft rock. Soft rock shall
include all kinds of stiff and stratified rock, such as shales, thinly bedded philites, laterite hard
conglomerate, lime stone, sand stone and unreinforced cement concrete below ground level.
Soft rock may be quarried or split with crow bar or picks and can also be excavated by rippers,
dozers and other mechanical equipment, but without the aid of blasting. If required and
permitted, light blasting may be restored to, for loosening the materials, but this will not, in
any way entitle the material to be classified as "Hard Rock".
ar 22-
$11g-1..27122I2A2I2A~/
dg
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
IA Govt n11nGa Undertaking)
6-68-0003 Rev.5
EARTHWORK
Page 5 of 13
considered necessary such as quartzite, granite, basalt stones, reinforced cement concrete
(reinforcement to be cut through but not separated from concrete) below ground level and the
like.
2.3.3
2.3.4
Suitable Materials:
3.1.1 Back filling suitable material shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Additionally, they
shall be free from refuse, large stones or rocks or other material which might prevent proper
compaction or cause the compacted fill or embankment to perform inadequately or to have
insufficient stability or bearing capacity for the superimposed loads to which it is likely to be
subj ected.
3.1.2 Back filling of excavation in trenches, foundations and elsewhere shall consist of one of the
following materials as shown on drawing, or directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
i)
ii)
Soil
Selected earth from heaps or brought from borrow areas.
In case i) or ii) are not available, the Engineer-in-charge may approve use of any of the
following:
iii)
iv)
v)
Stone/ Gravel
Sand
CNS material.
3.1.3 The material shall be free from refuse, debris, roots, hard lumps and any other foreign organic
material.
3.2
Unsuit.,ble Materials
Unsuitable material shall include particles in excess of 75 mm size and that which is:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
gz.1122Cg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
h)
i)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 6 of 13
Dredged material
Material containing gypsum or other soluble salts.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the work in relation
to original points, lines* and levels* of reference and for the correctness of the levels,
dimensions and alignment of all parts of the work. If at any time during progress of the work
any error appears or arises in the position of level, dimension, or alignment of part of the
work, the Contractor at his own expense shall rectify such errors to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Charge. The checking of any line or level by the Engineer-in-Charge shall not in
any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities.
4.1.1 Tolerances*
The grade shall be properly shaped to the required elevations and parallel to the required
surface. The elevation of any point and the line of any edge or center of the earthworks shall
conform to that shown on the drawings within the tolerances stated below:
Tolerances from True Level
4.2
Basic Grading
- 25 mm
- 75 mm
Embankments
+75 mm
-0
+75 mm
- 75 mm
The Contractor shall lay out and construct one or more permanent bench marks in some
central place before the start of the work, from which all important levels for the excavations
will be set.
These permanent bench marks shall consist of masonry pillars with top neatly plastered and
leveled as per the directions of the Engineer-in-Charge. Bench marks shall be well connected
with triangular grid system or any other bench mark approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Excavation shall be carried out in any material met on the site to the lines, levels and contours
shown on the detailed drawings and the Contractor shall remove all excavated materials to
spoil heaps on site or transport for use in filling on the site or stack them for reuse as directed.
5.2
Excavated material shall not be deposited within 1.5 m from the top edge of the excavation.
5.3
The sides of the excavation may be cut sloping, or shored and strutted to hold the face of earth
as per site requirements and as directed by the Engineer-in- Charge.
5.4
Foundation pits/ trenches shall not be excavated to the full depth unless construction is
imminent. The last 15 cm depth of the excavation shall not be done until concreting work is
imminent. The full depth may at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge be excavated and the
bed covered with a 50 mm (minimum) thick (or as indicated on drawing) layer of lean
concrete 1:5:10 mix (1 cement : 5 coarse sand : 10 crushed stone aggregate) or as specified in
schedule of rates/ shown on drawing, after watering if required, and consolidating the bed.
5.5
If the bottom of any excavation has been left exposed by the Contractor and in the opinion of
the Engineer-in-Charge, that has become badly affected by the atmosphere or by water, then
the Contractor shall remove such portions of the deteriorated material as the Engineerin-Charge may direct and shall make good with lean concrete 1:5:10 mix (1 cement : 5 coarse
,41
$'g-ars
tt~ elvav,am~o
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
lA Govt of Ince Undettalong)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 7 of 13
sand : 10 crushed stone aggregate). All expenses for such additional concrete and excavation
shall be borne by the Contractor.
5.6
Where excavation is made in excess of the depth required, the Contractor shall, at his own
expense, fill upto required level with lean concrete 1:5:10 mix (1 cement : 5 coarse Sand : 10
crushed stone aggregates ) or as decided by Engineer-in-Charge.
5.7
The Contractor shall provide suitable drainage arrangement to prevent surface water from any
source entering the foundation pits at his own cost.
5.8
The Contractor shall make all arrangements for dewatering during excavation and subsequent
works, the accumulated water from any source (including subsoil water) in the excavated
pits/trenches and keeping the excavated pits/ trenches dry for subsequent works.
5.9
The Contractor shall make necessary arrangements for lighting, fencing and other suitable
measures for protection against risk of accidents due to open excavation.
5.10
Where the excavation is to be carried out below the foundation level of an adjacent structure,
the precaution to be taken such as under pinning, shoring and strutting etc. shall be determined
by the Engineer- in-Charge. No excavation shall be done unless such precautionary measures
are carried out as per directions of the Engineer-in-Charge. The payment for such
precautionary measures shall, however, be made separately.
5.11
Loose or soft bed ground encountered in excavation at the required depth shall on the
Engineers-in-Charge's instructions be excavated to a firm bed and difference made up to the
required level with lean concrete 1:5:10 mix (1 cement : 5 coarse Sand : 10 crushed stone
aggregates).
5.12
In those cases where during excavation, side slips occur for reasons not attributable to the
Contractor (e.g. side slips which take place on their own but not due to surcharge of earth kept
near the edge of excavation and cracking of excavation top strata due to clay drying out
leading to collapse of excavation sides), the Engineer-in-Charge shall admit payment at his
discretion.
5.13
5.14
The Contractor shall not undertake any concreting in foundation until the excavation pit/trench
is approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
5.15
The specification for earth work shall also apply to excavation in rock in general.
5.16
In case of hard rock requiring blasting, the prnvisions mentioned below shall be strictly
followed.
5.16.1 General
Where hard rock is met with and blasting operations are considered necessary, the Contractor
shall intimate about the same to the Engineer-in-Charge, and obtain his approval in writing for
resorting to blasting operation.
The Contractor shall obtain license from the district authorities for undertaking blasting work
as well as for obtaining and storing the explosive as per the Explosive Rules 2008, corrected
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Goot ol Indo Unceol;ng)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 8 of 13
upto date. He shall purchase the explosives, fuses, detonators etc. only from a licensed dealer.
He shall be responsible for the safe custody and proper accounting of the explosive materials.
The Engineer-in-Charge or his authorised representative shall have the access to check the
Contractor's store of explosive and his accounts.
In case where explosives are required to be transported and stored at site, relevant clauses of
the Explosive Rules, 2008 as amended subsequently, shall apply.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any accident to workmen, public or property, due to
blasting operations.
5.16.2 Precautions
Blasting operations shall be carried out under the careful supervision of a responsible
authorised and licensed blaster of the Contractor (referred subsequently as "blaster" only)
during specified hours, as approved in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge. The blaster shall be
fully conversant with the rules of blasting.
Proper precautions for safety of persons shall be taken. Red flags shall be prominently
displayed around the area to be blasted and all the people on the work except those who
actually light the fuses, shall withdraw to a safe distance of not less than 200 m from the blast.
Precautions as per Explosive Rules 2008 with amendment shall be followed.
5.16.3 Fuses
All fuses shall be cut to the lengths required before being inserted into the holes. Joints in
fuses shall be avoided. Where these are unavoidable, a semicircular niche shall be cut in one
piece of fuse about 2 cm. deep from the end and the end of other piece inserted into this niche,
and the two pieces then wrapped together with a string. All joints exposed to dampness shall
be wrapped with rubber tape. Fuse and detonators shall be kept separated from the explosives.
5.16.4 Blasting with Gun Powder
Blasting shall normally be done with gun powder. Dynamite, gelatine or any other high
explosive shall only be used in special cases with the written permission of the Engineerin-Charge.
In case of blasting with gun powder, the position of all bore holes to be drilled shall be marked
out in circles with white paint. The bore holes shall be jumped or drilled in the rock face. The
depth of bore hole shall be about the same as that of the line of least resistance and its size
shall be such that the cartridges can easily pass down to the bottom. The bore holes must be
dried before being charged and these shall be inspected by the Contractor's agent.
Gun powder may be used in the form of pellet blasting cartridges or as powder or granules.
Cartridges are provided with tapered central hole. One end of fuse is passed through the
narrow end of the hole and a sufficient length of the fuse is doubled back that when the fuse
is pulled, it is held tight in the tapered hole of the cartridge. Other cartridges are then inserted
in the fuse to make up the required charge. The cartridge along with the fuse is lowered down
in the bore hole, placed in position and gently filled and pressed home with dry hay or turf.
The rest of the bore shall then be filled with dry clay, which shall be tamped with copper or
brass rod until it becomes compact. Care shall be taken to avoid any possibility of an air space
around the fuse. The safety fuses shall be taken to the required distance so as to allow the
blasting to take place after the person lighting the fuse has withdrawn to a safe distance.
Where gun powder is used in the form of powder or granules it shall be introduced in the bore
hole by means of funnel or copper tube. The bore holes shall be loaded with two thirds of the
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
1.112,1 eKent, ,1,13~1
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 9 of 13
quantity of charge required, and safety fuse then directly introduced over the charge.
Remaining one third charge shall then be introduced, and gently filled and pressed home with
dry hay or turf. The rest of the bore hole shall be filled with dry clay in the same way as for
cartridges, and the safety fuse taken to the required distance.
The charges shall be fired by igniting the fuse. The number of charges to be fired and the
actual number of shots heard, shall be compared, and the Contractor's blaster shall satisfy
himself by examination that all the charges have exploded, before workmen are permitted to
approach the site. The charge which has not exploded, shall not be permitted to be withdrawn.
The tamping and charge shall be flooded with water and the holes marked with a red cross (X)
over it. Another hole shall be jumped at a distance of about 45 cm from the old hole and fired
in the usual way. This operation shall be continued, till the original and any subsequent
unfired charges are exploded.
5.16.5 Blasting with Dynamite or any other High Explosive
In case of blasting with dynamite or any other high explosive the position of all bore holes to
be drilled shall be marked out in circle with white paint. These shall be inspected by the
Contractor's blaster. Bore holes shall be of a size that the cartridge can easily pass down. After
the drilling operation, the blaster shall re-inspect the holes to see that the holes marked out by
him have been drilled. The Blaster shall then prepare all charges necessary for the bore holes.
The bore holes shall be thoroughly cleaned before a cartridge is inserted. Wooden tamping
rods (not pointed but cylindrical throughout) shall be used, in charging holes. Metal rods shall
never be used for tamping. One cartridge shall be first placed in the bore hole, gently pressed
and not rammed down. Other cartridges shall then be added as may be required to make up the
necessary charge for the bore hole. The top most cartridge shall be connected to the detonator
which shall in turn be connected to the safety fuse of required length.
The maximum of eight (8) bore holes shall be loaded and fired on each occasion. The charges
shall be fired successively and not simultaneously.
Immediately before firing a blast, due warning shall be given and the blaster shall see that all
persons have retired to a place of safety. The safety fuses of the charged holes shall be ignited
in the presence of the blaster, who shall see that all the fuses are properly ignited.
Careful count shall be kept by him and others of each blast as it explodes. After the blast the
blaster shall inspect the work and ascertain that all the charged holes have been exploded. In
case of misfired holes, the Blaster shall inspect the same after half an hour and mark red
crosses (X) over the holes. During this interval of half an hour, no body shall approach the
misfired holes. None of the drillers shall work near such holes, until one of the two following
operations has been done by the blaster.
a)
Either the Contractor's blaster shall very carefully (when the tamping is of damp clay)
extract the tamping with a wooden scraper and withdraw the fuse, primer and
detonator, after which a fresh detonator, primer and fuse shall be placed in the
misfired holes and fired.
OR
b)
The hole shall be cleaned for 30 cm of tamping and its direction ascertained by
placing a stick in the hole. Another hole shall then be drilled 15 cm away and parallel
to it. This hole shall be charged and fired. The misfired hole should also explode along
with the new one.
ry dg
ggar laffl
1.12, eIrcm1,1,1,3~,
ENGINEEFZS
INDIA LIMITED
fA Govf of hotha
undenak,,,g)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 10 of 13
Before leaving the work, the blaster of one shift shall inform another blaster relieving him for
the next shift, of any cases of misfire, and shall point out their positions denoted by red
crosses and also state the action, if any, to be taken in the matter.
The Engineer-in-Charge shall also be informed by the blaster of all cases of misfire, their
causes and steps taken in that connection.
5.16.6 Controlled Blasting (Explosive/ Non-explosive)
Whenever required by the Engineer-in-Charge, rock blasting shall be carefully controlled so
that vibrations generated during the blasting do not cause damage to the buildings and
installation around. Similarly, the rock pieces should not fly off and endanger the buildings
and installations around. Apart from the general precautions mentioned in the preceding
paragraphs, following protective measures and limits for use of explosive are suggested as
guidelines. Bidders are requested to carefully check the site conditions and submit details of
the scheme they propose to adopt for controlling the blast.
Following protective measures shall be adopted while carrying out blasting operations.
The hole shall be covered with mild steel plate of minimum 12 mm thickness.
Reinforcement rod mesh not less than 20 mm dia. at 150 mm centre in both directions shall be
placed over the steel plates.
Steel plate and reinforcement shall be inspected after every blasting operation and all twists
shall be removed before reuse to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Sand filled bags of 6 to 8 layers shall be placed over the mesh suitably covering the whole
region under blasting operation.
The thickness of covering plate and the kind of dead weight is to be duly approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
5.16.7 Hard rock requiring blasting as described under Clause 2.3.2 above, but where blasting is
prohibited for any reason(s) breaking up of rock can be done by using Hydraulic Splitter and
chemical substances of approved manufacturer mixed in an appropriate proportion. The
method involves drilling holes into rock and then inserting/ injecting hydraulic splitter/
chemical solvents into the holes. The breaking-up of rock takes place in a controlled fashion
without much noise and spark.
5.17
Excavation in areas where existing under ground cables are envisaged, to be carried out
carefully by manual means taking proper safety precautions.
The earth work machinery be deployed after ensuring from the trial pits that no cable is
crossing the proposed area of excavation.
$fg-2:11.
1.1V71 ttrarl +.1 SR1.1)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA I IMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
A Govt olind."-Undertakng)
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 11 of 13
trench, removal and disposal of surplus excavated soil within a lead of 100 m from
construction areas. The rate shall also include setting out and line out work required for the
excavation.
5.18.3 The following works shall not be measured separately and allowance for the same shall be
deemed to have been made in the description of main item:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
0
g)
h)
i)
j)
5.18.4 Special pumping other than what is included in 5.18.3 (h and i) and well point dewatering
where resorted to, shall each be measured separately, unless otherwise stated, in Kilo Watt
Hour against separate specific provision(s) made for the purpose.
5.18.5 The Contractor shall intimate to the Engineer-in-Charge as soon as different classification of
soils are met with. The measurements of various soil classifications then shall be worked out
by either of the following alternatives in the order of their decreasing importance.
a)
Joint levels shall be taken as to the levels of different soil classifications and volume
worked out on the basis of levels only.
b)
Where levels of different strata cannot be clearly marked and defined, the Contractor
shall stack different soils of various classifications separately for measurement
purpose and then dispose it off.
c)
If the quantum of work involved in (b) above is extensively large & time consuming,
then the total area may be divided into various zones and reasonably representative
samples as in (b) above may be taken and quantities of soils of various classifications
finalized for the entire zone based on the representative.
If soil of any classification other than that specified in the Schedule of Rates is met
with during excavation, the decision of the Engineer-in-Charge as to the classification
of soil, levels of the strata of different classifications and their location shall be
binding.
In above case, the total quantity of excavation shall be computed from the
measurement of the pit/ trench excavated. The hard rock and soft rock shall be
measured separately from the relevant stacks and each shall be reduced by fifty
percent for voids, and paid under the relevant items. The balance, that is the total
quantity of excavation minus the reduced (for voids) quantity of excavation for rocks
shall be paid as soft/ hard soil as per the direction of the Engineer-in-Charge
(However, the maximum payment shall be limited to the volume of the excavated pit/
trench as approved by Engineer-in-Charge).
31
51g-arft2es
IaRJf rirort."3.4)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
lA Govt ot Inda Unclertaking)
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 12 of 13
The shoring and strutting of the sides to withhold the face of excavation pits/trenches shall be
done when approved or directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
6.2
The shoring shall be of close or open timbering type depending upon the site requirements and
as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge whose decision shall be final and binding as to the type
of shoring to be used.
6.3
The arrangement of the shoring and strutting shall be sound and safe and shall be got approved
from the Engineer-in-Charge before installation. The approval shall not absolve the Contractor
of his responsibilities of safety and any other requirements of the contract.
6.4
The shoring and strutting shall be kept in position till all the relevant work in the excavated
area is completed and approved. It shall be dismantled and removed only after the permission
to do so is obtained from the Engineer-in-Charge.
6.5
The rate shall include all labour, materials, erection of the poling Boards, wales, struts, ballies
etc., fixing and keeping the same in position as required, dismantling and removing the same
after the work is over as directed.
7.0 BACK FILLING AROUND FOUNDATIONS AND IN PLINTH
7.1
Back filling around completed foundations, structures, trenches and in plinth shall be done to
the lines and levels shown on the drawings including any trimming of the surfaces, as may be
necessary. This shall be done with selected and approved earth from excavation or otherwise
with suitable materials described under Clause 3.1 as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Where sufficient suitable material is not available from the excavation, the
Engineer-in-Charge may direct to import suitable earth from other sources. The filling shall be
done in layers of thickness not exceeding 15 cm with watering, rolling and ramming by
manual methods/ mechanical compactors to grade and Level as shown on drawings to obtain
90% laboratory maximum dry density.
7.2
The Contractor shall not commence filling in and around any work until it has been permitted
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
7.3
Backfilling around liquid retaining structures and pipes shall be done only after approval of
the Engineer-in-Charge is obtained.
74
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
1.41,71 ?:1EISr2
IA
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 13 of 13
Surplus earth and soil from excavation shall be removed from construction area to the area
demarcated by the Engineer-in-Charge.
8.2
8.2.1 Payment shall be made only for the lead beyond initial 100 m from construction area. Rate
shall include re-excavation, loading, transportation, dumping, stacking or spreading (as per
directions of the Engineer-in-Charge) the surplus earth and the soil in the area demarcated by
the Engineer-in-Charge. Payment shall be made on cubic metre (m3) basis on the difference of
measurements of the volume of the excavated pits and the measurement of the back filling.
Quantity generated due to voids in back filled volume of earth shall also be removed by the
Contractor at no extra cost and this disposal of earth shall not be measured and paid under any
item.
8.2.2 In exceptional circumstances the Engineer-in-Charge may direct the Contractor to remove
surplus earth, concrete debris or any other waste material from site to the areas of disposal on
the basis of truck measurement. In such cases volume of material shall be calculated on the
basis of truck volume reduced by 30% for voids in case of soft/hard soils and 50% for soft/
hard rock. All other provisions of disposal such as spreading, levelling, grading shall apply in
this case also.
9.0 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND PERSONNEL
9.1
The Contractor shall protect all active utility lines shown on the drawings or encountered
during the excavation. If he damages those lines, the Contractor shall repair or replace them. If
existing utilities interfere with his work, the Contractor shall inform to the Engineer-in-charge
and secure written instructions for further action.
9.2
The Contractor shall barricade open holes and depressions which he creates or exposes as part
of this, and he shall post warning signs and lights on property adjacent to or with public
access. He shall operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as
otherwise required for safety.
9.3
The Contractor shall protect structures, utilities, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, washout, and other hazards created by his operations.
9.4
The Contractor shall plan and execute all aspects of the earthwork so that the safety of
personnel, the work and adjacent property is guaranteed and such that a minimum of
inconvenience is caused.
10.0 CLEAN UP
Upon completion nf work, the Contractor shall leave the project site clear nf debris and
surplus materials off plant limits in a manner meeting all location authority requirements.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
31
2154-eg
1.117n ,1,9,+1,111.3~)
IA
1-11"Ich
1
-
(=i
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
mKi
cnict-k
woircid
15th DEC 14
28th DEC 12
CDS
AJS
23rd NOV 07
YPC
PKM
APR,01
RPM7097
SCS
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
PKM
DM
SC
VK
VC
SCJ1151
MI
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$g-ar 22dg
,-,7721,72
Abbreviations:
ACI
ASTM :
BS
British Standards
G1
Galvanized Iron
IS
Indian Standard
ISO
PVC :
PolyVinyl Chloride
RCC :
SCC :
SWG :
Members :
31
f&JI 02
eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of InOia Undertaking)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 3 of 30
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
MATERIALS
3.0
GRADES OF CONCRETE
4.0
5.0
6.0
BATCHING
7.0
CONCRETE MIXING
8.0
9.0
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
11
10.0
SEPARATION JOINT
12
11.0
12
12.0
WATER STOPS
12
13.0
12
14.0
CURING
13
15.0
FIELD TESTS
13
16.0
19
17.0
FINISHING OF CONCRETE
19
18.0
21
19.0
FORM WORK
21
20.0
25
21.0
REINFORCEMENT
26
22.0
PAYMENT
28
Lii
Oales
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
in Govt or moO Underlaking)
1.0
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 4 of 30
SCOPE
This specification is applicable for Concrete Grade up to M60 and establishes the
requirements of materials, mix proportioning, placing, curing, etc. of all types of cast-in-situ
and precast concrete (ref. section 1.6) used in foundations, underground and above ground
structures, floors, pavements etc. Any special requirements as shown or noted on the
drawings shall supersede the provisions of this specification.
1.1
1.2
1.3
For Structural Steel works, EIL Specification No. 6-68-0006 & 0008 shall be applicable.
1.4
For Bipolar Concrete Penetrating Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture, EIL Specification No.
6-68-0017 shall be applicable.
1.5
For Self Compacting Concrete, EIL Specification No. 6-68-0019 shall be applicable.
1.6
1.7
In case of conflict between the clauses mentioned in this specification and those in the
Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS), this specification shall govern.
2.0
MATERIALS
2.1
Materials for concrete viz cement, Pozzolanas, Fly Ash, Ground Granulated Blast Furnace
Slag, Sand, Coarse aggregate, Water, etc. shall be as described in EIL Specification
No.6-68-0002.
2.2
Materials for all reinforcements, embedment, inserts, water bars etc. shall conform to EIL
Specification 6-68-0002.
2.3
Materials to be used as additive to concrete shall conform to EIL specification 6-68-0002 &
6-68-0017.
3.0
GRADES OF CONCRETE
Characteristic Compressive strength for different grades of concrete shall be as per Table- l .
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 5 of 30
TABLE 1
GRADES OF CONCRETE
Group
Grade Designation
Ordinary
Concrete
M1 0
M 15
M 20
M 25
M 30
M 35
M 40
M 45
M 50
M 55
M 60
Standard
Concrete
Specified Characteristic
Compressive Strength
of 150 mm cube at 28 days
(N/mm2)
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
Note: The characteristic strength is defined as the strength of material below which not
more than five (5) percent of the test results are expected to fall.
4.0
4.1
Unless otherwise noted on drawings, all lean/plain concrete shall be of Nominal Mix type
and reinforced concrete shall be of Design Mix type.
4.2
4.3
5.0
13~ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
14
,751
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
Grade designation.
Type of cement.
Maximum nominal size of aggregate.
Minimum cement content.
Maximum water cement ratio
Workability requirements.
Exposure condition as per Table 3 & Table 4 of IS:456
Maximum temperature of concrete at the time of placing.
Method of Placing.
The Engineer-in-Charge shall verify the strength of the concrete mix, before giving his
sanction of its use. However, this does not absolve the Contractor of his responsibility as
regards achieving the prescribed strength of the mix. If during the execution of the work,
cube tests show lower strengths than required, the Engineer-in-Charge shall order fresh trial
mixes to be made by the Contractor. No claim to alter the rates of concrete work shall be
entertained due to such changes in mix variations. Any variation in cement consumption
shall be taken into consideration for material reconciliation. Preliminary mix designs shall
be established well ahead of start of work.
5.1
Maximum Density
Suitable proportions of sand and the different sizes of coarse aggregates for each grade of
concrete shall be selected to give as nearly as practicable the maximum density as per clause
10.2.3 of IS 456. This shall be determined by mathematical means, laboratory tests, field
trials and suitable changes in aggregate gradation. The contractor shall ensure the same to
the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
5.2
Consistency
The concrete shall have a consistency such that it shall be workable in the required position
and when properly vibrated it flows around reinforcing steel, all embedded fixtures, etc.
5.3
Workability
"Workability of Concrete" shall be as per clause 7 of IS: 456.
5.4
Durability
For achieving sufficiently durable concrete, strong, dense aggregates, low water-cement
ratio and adequate cement content shall always be used. Workability of concrete shall be
such that concrete can be completely compacted with the means available. Leak-proof
formwork shall be used so as to ensure no loss of cement-slurry during pouring and
compaction. Cover to reinforcement shall be uniform. Concrete mix design shall always
take into account the type of cement, minimum cement content irrespective of the type of
cement and maximum water cement ratio and minimum grade of concrete conforming to
environmental exposure conditions (refer Table 3 of IS 456) as given in Table 5 of IS: 456.
Generally, following types of cement shall be used for Plain and Reinforced concrete works:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 7 of 30
Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement shall be used only for specific requirements depending
on environmental and process exposure conditions to which the structures may be subjected
to like high Sulphate concentrations, processes involving Sulphur handling etc.
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.5
6.0
BATCHING
Refer clause 10.2 of IS: 456.
7.0
CONCRETE MIXING
7.1
Ready Mixed Concrete supplied by Ready Mixed Concrete Plants or from on/off-site
batching plants (IS: 4926) shall be used for structural concrete.
All records and charts for the batching and mixing operations shall be prepared and
maintained by the contractor in accordance with IS: 4926 or as per the instructions of
Engineer-in-Charge.
In case Ready Mixed Concrete is not available, the mixing of concrete shall be strictly
carried out in an approved type of mechanical concrete mixer. The mixer shall be fitted with
water measuring devices. The mixing shall be continued until there is a uniform distribution
of the material and the mass is uniform in colour and consistency. If there is segregation
after unloading from the mixer, the concrete shall be remixed.
7.2
Mixer
7.2.1
Mechanical Mixers shall comply with IS: 1791 and 12119 and shall be maintained in
satisfactory operating condition. These shall be used only for producing lean/ plain concrete
and/ or nominal mix concrete wherever permitted.
3112zit4
5fg'-a- OW5
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
vtwat tnvowronJousvg,
7.2.2
Mixing Time
Mixing time shall be as indicated in the following Table-2. Excessive mixing requiring
additions of water shall not be permitted. Time shall start when all solid materials are
poured in the revolving mixer drum, provided that all of the mixing water shall be
introduced before one-fourth of the mixing time has elapsed. The Engineer-in-Charge may,
however, direct a change in the mixing time, if he considers such a change necessary.
TABLE-2
MINIMUM MIXING TIME FOR MIXERS
Capacity of mixer
2 m3 or less
Above 2 m3
7.3
Hand Mixing
Hand mixing of concrete shall not be permitted. However, for non-critical applications
namely foundations for crossovers, isolated operating platforms etc., using concrete upto
grade M20 and located at far away isolated places, this may be permitted by the Engineerin-charge as a special case. Mixing shall be carried out on a water tight platform and care
shall be taken to ensure that mixing is continued until the mass is uniform in colour and
consistency. No extra payment shall be made to the Contractor for mixing by hand or for
using extra cement due to hand mixing.
7.4
Additives
Additive in concrete shall be used only with the prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge
and shall comply with Cl. 5.5 of IS: 456. Any additive used for obtaining proper workability
or leak proofness of concrete or repair/rendering works of concrete due to non-conformance
to the specifications, shall not be measured and paid for. All costs relating to such usage
shall be borne by the Contractor.
8.0
8.1
General
The entire concrete placing programme including transportation arrangements, deployment
of equipment, layout, proposed procedures and methods, shall be submitted to the
Engineer-in-Charge 24 hours prior to concreting for approval. No concreting shall be
placed until his approval has been received. Approval of the Engineer-in-Charge for pouring
concrete shall be taken as 'conveyed', when the concrete pour card is signed by him.
8.1.1
Chuting
The use of long troughs, chutes and pipes for conveying concrete from the mixer to the
forms shall be permitted only on written authorization from the Engineer-in-Charge. In case
an inferior quality of concrete is produced by the use of such conveyors, the
Engineer-in-Charge may order discontinuance of their use and the substitution of a
satisfactory method of placing the concrete. Open troughs and chutes shall be equipped with
baffles and be in short lengths to avoid segregation. Chutes shall be designed so that the
concrete is, to some extent, remixed at the lower end by passing down through a funnel
shaped pipe or drop chute. Alternatively, they shall discharge into a storage hopper from
STANDARD SPECIFICATION"ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED & STRUCTURAL WORKS PLAIN &
IA Govt of lndo Undertakng)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 9 of 30
which the concrete shall be transported to the point of placing by wheel barrows or other
means. Where drop chutes are used, a sufficient number of these must be provided, so that
the concrete discharged from the chute is not required to flow laterally more than 1.0 metre.
Where a drop chute is swung from the vertical, the bottom two sections must be maintained
in a vertical position to avoid segregation. The addition of water at any point in the system
of transportation, to facilitate the movement of concrete shall not be permitted. All chutes,
troughs and pipes, shall be kept clean and free from coatings of hardened concrete by
thoroughly flushing them with water after each run; water used for flushing shall be
discharged clear of the structure.
8.1.2
Vibrators
8.1.2.3 In placing concrete in layers which are advancing horizontally as the work progresses, great
care shall be exercised to ensure adequate vibration, bonding and moulding of the concrete
between the succeeding batches.
8.1.2.4 The vibrator shall penetrate the layer being placed and also penetrate the layer below while
the under layer is still plastic to ensure good bond and homogeneity between the two layers
and prevent the formation of cold joints.
8.1.2.5
Care shall be taken to prevent contact of vibrators against all embedded reinforcing steel or
inserts. Vibrators shall not be allowed to come in contact with forms.
8.1.2.6 The use of form vibrators shall not be permitted for compaction of in-situ concrete without
specific authorization of the Engineer-in-Charge.
8.1.2.7 The use of surface vibrators of screed board type shall not be permitted for consolidation of
concrete under ordinary conditions. However, for thin slabs (of thickness less than 200mm)
surface vibration by such vibrators may be permitted, upon approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
8.1.2.8 Whenever vibration has to be applied externally, the design of formwork and the disposition
of vibrators shall be carefully planned to ensure efficient compaction and to avoid surface
blemishes.
8.2
Transportation
8.2.1
All concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit such as
formwork as rapidly as possible using suitable buckets, dumpers, pumps, transit mixers
containers or conveyors which shall be mortar leak tight. Care shall be taken to prevent the
segregation or loss of the ingredients and maintaining the required workability. For
structural concrete produced from Ready Mixed Concrete/ Batching Plants, concrete shall
be transported from the plants to the sites only by transit mixers and Delivery Ticket for
each delivery of concrete shall be maintained by the contractor.
k_31
fg-af 22-&-g
r=r,ort aff.pros-,0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 10 of 30
8.2.2
During hot or cold weather, concrete shall be transported in deep containers. Other suitable
methods to reduce the loss of water by evaporation in hot weather and heat loss in cold
weather may also be adopted. All equipment used for transporting and placing of concrete
shall be maintained in clean condition. All buckets, hoppers, chutes, dumpers and other
equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned after each use.
8.3
8.3.1
Before placing concrete, all soil surfaces upon which or against which concrete is to be
placed shall be well compacted and free from standing water, mud or debris. Soft or
yielding soil shall be removed and replaced, with lean concrete or with selected soils/sand
and compacted to the density as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. The surface of absorptive
soil (against which concrete is to be placed) shall be moistened thoroughly so that moisture
is not drawn from the freshly placed concrete. Similarly, for concrete to be placed on
formworks, all chippings, shavings and sawdust etc. shall be removed from the interior of
the forms before the concrete is placed.
8.3.2
Concrete shall not be placed until the formwork, the placement of reinforcing steel,
embedded parts; pockets etc. have been inspected and approved by the Engineer- in-Charge.
Any accumulated water on the surface of the bedding layer shall be removed by suitable
means before start of placement. No concrete shall be placed on a water covered surface.
8.3.3
Concrete shall be discharged by vertical drop only and the drop height shall not normally
exceed 1.5 metre throughout all stages of delivery until the concrete comes to rest in forms.
However, drop height can be relaxed by the Engineer-in-Charge as per the provisions given
under Cl. 8.1.1. For continuous concreting operation windows of suitable size shall be kept
in the formwork or chutes shall be used to avoid segregation of concrete.
8.3.4
Concrete shall be deposited as near as practicable in its final position to avoid rehandling.
Concrete shall be placed in successive horizontal layers. The bucket loads, or other units of
deposit, shall be placed progressively along the face of the layer with such over-lap as will
facilitate spreading the layer of uniform depth and texture with a minimum of hand
shoveling. Any tendency to segregation shall be corrected by shovelling coarse aggregates
into mortar rather than mortar on the coarse aggregates. Such a tendency for segregation
shall be corrected by redesign of mix, change in process or other means, as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
8.3.5
All struts, stays and braces (serving temporarily to hold the forms in correct shape and
alignment pending the placing of concrete at their locations) shall be removed when the
concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering their service unnecessary. These shall
not be buried in the concrete. Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted with vibrators and
fully worked around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures and into corners of formwork
before setting commences and shall not be subsequently disturbed. Methods of placing shall
be such as to preclude segregation and avoid displacement of reinforcement or formwork.
The formation of stone-pockets or mortar bondage in corners and against face forms shall
not be permitted. Should these occur, they shall be dug out, reformed and refilled to
sufficient depth and shape for thorough bonding as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Care
shall be taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement and embedded inserts or movement of
formwork.
8.3.6
Unless otherwise approved, concrete shall be placed in single operation to the full thickness
of foundation rafts, slabs, beams and similar members. Concrete shall be placed
continuously until completion of the part of the work between approved construction joints
or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
8.3.7
The method of placing and compaction employed in any particular section of the work shall
be to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
.311 .1
1&.11 1812-e'g
14.1R71 cl,ane' an,~71)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 11 of 30
8.3.8
During hot weather (atmospheric temperature above 40 degree Celsius) or cold weather
(atmospheric temperature below 5 degree Celsius, the concreting shall be done as per the
procedure set out in IS: 7861).
8.3.9
Concrete that has set standing and becomes stiffened shall not be used in the work.
8.3.10
Continuous Concreting
Where called out on the drawings, continuous concreting shall be done in a single operation
as per the requirements of IS: 456 and IS: 2974. Sufficient "Windows" shall be left in the
formwork for pouring & compaction of concrete and inspection. These windows shall be
fixed tight once the level of concrete reaches their levels.
8.3.11
Work in extreme weather conditions during hot or cold weather, the concreting shall be
done as per procedure set out in IS: 7861(Part 1) or IS: 7861 (Part2).
b)
8.4
8.4.1
Concreting shall not be started unless the electrical conduits, pipes, fixtures etc., wherever
required, are laid by the concerned agency. The Contractor shall afford all the facilities and
maintain co-ordination of work with other agencies engaged in electrical and such other
works as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
8.4.2
Before concreting, the Contractor shall provide, fabricate and lay in proper position all metal
inserts, anchor bolts, pipes etc. (which are required to be embedded in concrete members) as
per relevant drawings and directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
8.4.3
All embedment, inserts etc. shall be fully held and secured in their respective positions by
the concerned agencies to the entire satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge so as to avoid any
dislocation or displacement during the concreting operations. The Contractor shall take all
possible care during concreting to maintain these embedment/inserts in their exact locations.
9.0
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
9.1
9.2
In a column, the joint shall be formed about 100mm to 150mm below the Iowest soffit of the
beams framing into it. Concrete in a beam and slab shall be placed throughout without a
joint but if the provision of a joint is unavoidable, the joint shall be vertical and located
within 1/3 to 1/4 of the span, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
9.3
When stopping the concrete on a vertical plane in slabs and beams, an approved stop board
shall be placed with necessary slots for reinforcement bars. The construction joints shall be
keyed by providing a triangular or trapezoidal fillet nailed on the stop board. Inclined joints
shall not be permitted. Any concrete flowing through the joints of stop board shall be
removed soon after the initial set. When concrete is stopped on a horizontal plane, the
surface shall be roughened and cleaned after the initial set and a triangular or trapezoidal
groove shall be provided for keying with the new concrete later.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
er,r5r7,15,:ro,
IA
9.4
When the work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, such surface shall be
cleared of any foreign materials and roughened to expose the tips of the coarse aggregate.
This may be done by manual chipping of concrete, with a high pressure water jet or by any
other appropriate means as per Engineer-in-Charge's directions. It shall then be swept clean
and thoroughly washed and wetted before any new concrete is poured. Any set mortar or
concrete sticking to the exposed reinforcing rods in and around such joints shall be
thoroughly removed. The reinforcements shall be wire brushed and washed just before
pouring any cement slurry or mortar. For vertical joints neat cement slurry shall be applied
on the surface before it is dry. For horizontal joints the surface shall be covered with a layer
of mortar about 10 to 15mm thick composed of cement and sand in the same ratio as the
cement and sand in concrete mix. This layer of cement slurry or mortar shall be freshly
mixed and applied immediately before placing new concrete.
9.5
Where the concrete has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be removed by scrubbing the
wet surface with wire or bristle brushes, care being taken to avoid dislodgement of particles
of aggregate. The surface shall be thoroughly wetted and all free water removed. The
surface shall then be coated with neat cement slurry. On this surface layer of concrete not
exceeding 150mm in thickness shall first be placed and shall be well rammed against old
work, particular attention being paid to corners and close spots; work thereafter shall
proceed in normal way.
10.0
SEPARATION JOINT
10.1
Separation joint shall be obtained by using an approved Alkathene sheet stuck on the surface
against which concrete shall be placed. Adequate care shall be taken to cause no damage to
the sheet.
11.0
11.1
Expansion/ Isolation joints in structures shall be formed in the positions and to the shapes
shown in the relevant drawings. Joints shall be filled with joint filling material as stipulated
in the drawings/schedule of rates. Isolation joints shall be provided around all equipment
foundations, columns, pedestals, trenches etc. on grade.
12.0
WATER STOPS
PVC water stops as per EIL Specification No. 6-68-0002 for materials shall be accurately
cut, fitted and integrally joined as per manufacturer's specifications to provide a continuous,
watertight diaphragm at all points.
The water stops shall be located and embedded at expansion/contraction/ construction joints
as indicated in the drawings or directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Adequate provision shall be made for the support and protection of water stops during the
progress of the work. Damaged water stops shall be replaced and/or repaired as directed.
13.0
13.1
Newly placed concrete shall be protected, by approved means, from rain, sun and wind.
Concrete placed below the ground level shall be protected from falling earth during and
after placing. Surface shall be kept free from contact with such ground or with water
draining from such ground during placing of concrete for a period of at least 3 days, unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The ground water around newly poured
concrete shall be kept to an approved level by pumping or other approved means of drainage
and adequate steps shall be taken to prevent floatation and flooding. Steps shall be taken to
protect immature concrete from damage by debris, loading, vibration, abrasion, mixing with
IMr
31
s12
Rm1JPTA)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 13 of 30
deleterious materials that may, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, impair the strength
and/or durability of the concrete.
14.0 CURING
14.1
Concrete shall be cured by keeping it continuously moist wet for the specified period of time
to ensure complete hydration of cement and its hardening. Curing shall be started after 8
hours of placement of concrete in normal weather, and in hot weather after 4 hours. The
water used for curing shall be of the same quality as that used for making of concrete.
Curing shall be assured by use of an ample water supply under pressure in pipes, with all
necessary appliances such as hose, sprinklers etc. A layer of sacking, canvas, hessian, or
other approved material, which will hold moisture for long periods and prevent loss of
moisture from the concrete, shall be used as covering. Type of covering which would stain,
disfigure or damage the concrete, during and after the curing period, shall not be used. Only
approved covering shall be used for curing.
Exposed surfaces of concrete shall be maintained continuously in a damp or wet condition
for at least the first 7 days after placing of concrete.
The Contractor shall have all equipment and materials required for curing on hand and ready
to use before concrete is placed.
For curing the concrete in pavements, floors, flat roofs or other Level surfaces, the ponding
method of curing shall be used. For the first 24 hours after concreting, the concrete shall be
cured by use of wet sacking, canvas, hessian etc. The minimum water depth of 25mm for
ponding shall be maintained. The method of containing the ponded water shall be approved
by the Engineer-in-Charge. The ponded areas shall be kept continuously filled with water,
and leaks, if any, shall be promptly repaired. Areas cured by ponding method shall be
cleared of all debris and foreign materials after curing period is over.
Alternatively, membrane curing may be used in lieu of moist curing with the permission of
the Engineer-in-Charge. Such compounds shall be applied to all exposed surfaces of the
concrete by spraying or brushing as soon as possible after the concrete has set. Minimum
film thickness of such curing compounds shall be as per the recommendation of the
manufacturer so as to obtain an efficiency of 90% as specified by BS-8110. This film of
curing compound shall be fully removed from the concrete surface after the curing period
specified earlier. Engineer-in-Charge may not allow curing by curing compounds for those
surfaces where use of curing compound may be detrimental to application of future finishes
over the concrete. Impermeable membranes such as polyethylene sheeting closely covering
the concrete surface may also be used.
14.2
For concretes containing Portland pozzolana cement or Portland slag cement, the curing
period as given in Cl. 14.1 shall be doubled. Curing by ponding shall, however, commence
after the first 24 hours of concreting.
15.0
FIELD TESTS
15.1
Grading Test
Grading test on fine and coarse aggregates shall be carried out as per IS: 2386 at intervals
specified by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The mandatory tests and their frequencies shall be done as given in Table-3A & 3B below:
_11
Lir
1.741,R
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
c751...1.7051.11
TABLE 3A
(For Concrete prepared at site by using Mechanical mixers)
MANDATORY TESTS ON SAND & STONE AGGREGATES
S.
No
1.
TEST
MATERIAL
Sand
MIN. QTY OF
MATERIAL/
WORK FOR
CARRYING
OUT TEST
Field Test
20 m3
Field Test
20 m3
Field or Lab as 40 m3
decided
by
the
Engineer-in-Charge
FREQUENCY OF
TESTING*
3
Every 20 m or part
thereof or more frequently
as decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge
1) Every 40 m3 of fine
aggregate/sand required
in RCC works only
2) Every 80 m3 of fine
aggregate/ sand
required for other items
2.
Stone
aggregate
General visual
a) Percentage of
soft or deleterious inspection,
materials
laboratory test where
required by Engineer
-in-Charge or as
specified
b) Particle size
distribution
Field or lab. as
required by
Engineer-in-Charge
Laboratory
As
required For all quantities
by Engineerin-Charge
45 m3
45 m3
Si
2fjleg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IP Govt of inda
Undeft3M.9)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 15 of 30
TABLE 3B
(Refer Cl. 4.4 & 4.6.1 of IS:4926)
(For Ready Mixed Concrete supplied by Ready Mixed Concrete Plants
or from on/off-site Batching Plants)
MATERIALS TESTING REQUIREMENTS
S.
No
AGGREGATE
PROPERTY/
PARAMETER
1.
Grading
TYPE OF
AGGREGATE
ASSESSMENT
OF TYPICAL
PROPERTIES
AND HIGH
TEST RATE*
NORMAL
MONITORING
AND LOW
TEST RATE*
Sand/Fine
Weekly
Monthly
Coarse-Single
sized/ Graded
Weekly
Monthly
Weekly
3 Monthly
All Types
Weekly
3 Monthly
All Types
Monthly
6 Monthly
Sand
Weekly
Monthly
REQUIREMENT FOR
NORMAL MONITORING
AND LOW TEST RATE
Particle density
2.
3.
-Oven Dry
-Saturated Surface Dry
-Apparent
Absorption
All Types
Bulk Density
4.
- Loose
- Compacted
Last 4 results
0.04 percent
Last 4 results
0.04 percent
Last 4 results
75kg/m3
5.
Fines(Silt)
Content
Coarse
Monthly
3 Monthly
Last 10 results
<75 percent maximum
allowed
Aggregate Impact
Value
Coarse
As specified
As specified
7.
10 % Fines
Coarse
Yearly
Yearly
8.
Flakiness
Coarse
2 Weekly
6 Monthly
9.
Chloride Content
All Types
Weekly
6 Monthly
Last 3 results
< 0.01 percent
Coarse
Yearly/
Source Change
Yearly/
Source Change
Fine and
Coarse
5 Yearly/
Source Change
A11 Types
5 Yearly
Aggregate Abrasion
10. Value
(Los Angeles Method)
11.
Soundness
12 .
Potential Alkali
Aggregate
Reactivity Including
Petrography
13.
Petrographic
Description
Fine and
Coarse
(General)
*Note : The high or low test rates apply in accordance with the following conditions:
a) High test rate
i) To establish the typical characteristics of an aggregate, and
ii) When significant changes in properties occur outside the tolerances for low test rates
given.
b) Low test rate
i) When the typical characteristics of the aggregate have been established, and
ii) When subsequent tests lie within the tolerances for low test rates given
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
tafaj-dg
'
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
in GoN
undertakng)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 16 of 30
15.2
15.2.1
For structural quality concrete (excluding pavements, flooring etc.) at least one Slump Test
shall be made for every compressive strength test carried out. More frequent tests shall be
made if there is a distinct change in working conditions or if required by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
In case of Ready Mixed Concrete, provisions of IS: 4926 shall be followed.
15.2.2
For structural quality concrete for pavements & floorings, measurement of workability shall
be by determination of compacting factor. Value of compacting factor of 0.75 to 0.8 shall
generally be acceptable.
15.3
15.3.1
Samples from fresh concrete shall be taken as per IS: 1199 and cubes shall be made, cured
and tested at 28 days in accordance with IS: 516.
15.3.2
In order to get a relatively quicker idea of the quality of concrete, optional tests on beams
for modulus of rupture at 72+2 hours or at 7 days, or compressive strength tests at 7 days
may be carried out in addition to 28 days compressive strength tests. For this purpose, the
values shall be arrived at based on actual testing. In all cases, the 28 days compressive
strength specified in Table-1 shall alone be the criterion for acceptance or rejection of the
concrete in accordance with clause 15.3.9.
15.3.3
15.3.4
Frequency of Sampling
The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete for each grade shall be in accordance with
Table-4.
TABLE 4
(Refer Cl. 15.2.2 of IS:456)
FREQUENCY OF CONCRETE SAMPLING
Quantity of concrete in the work (m3)
Number of samples
1-5
6-15
16-30
31-50
51 & above
1
2
3
4
4 plus one additional sample for each
additional 50m3 or part thereof.
71
(5?..11 22eg
.it271 c,cm,C1,13,
1"41,
411
15.3.5
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 17 of 30
Test Specimen
Three test specimens shall be made for each sample for testing at 28 days. Additional cubes
may be required for various purposes such as to determine the strength of concrete at 7 days
or at the time of striking the formwork or to check the testing error. Additional samples may
also be required for testing samples cured by accelerated methods as described in IS: 9013.
The specimen shall be tested as described in IS: 516.
15.3.6
15.3.8
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation for each grade of concrete shall be calculated separately.
Standard deviation based on test results of samples:
a)
The total number of test samples required to constitute an acceptable record for
calculation of standard deviation shall be not less than 30. Attempts shall be made to
obtain the 30 samples, as early as possible, when a mix is used for the first time.
b)
For design of mix in the first instance, the value of standard deviation given in Table 8
of IS: 456, Amendment No. 4 may be assumed.
c)
Acceptance Criteria
1/431
af 02eg
$ig-
trt,,f v-tv,
prtav~11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
GoA of Inda Undettakinit
(For non overlapping consecutive compressive test result any one alternate set of four
samples shall be used for verification of compliance to clause no. 16.1.a of IS 456)
b) The strength determined from any test result is not less than the specified characteristic
strength less 0.3 N/mm2
Table-5
(Refer Cl. 16.1 & 16.3 of IS:456)
Characteristic Compressive Strength Compliance Requirement
Specified
Grade
M15 or above
NOTE : I) In the absence of established value of standard deviation, the values given in Table 8 of IS:456.
Amendment No. 4, may be assumed, and attempt should be made to obtain results of 30 samples as
early as possible to establish the value of standard deviation.
2) For concrete of quantity 30 m3 (where the number of samples to be taken is less than four as per the
frequency of sampling given in cl. 15.3.4, Table 4), the mean of test results of all such samples shall
be fck + 4 N/mm2, minimum and the requirement of individual test results shall be fck 2 N/mm2.
minimum. However, when the number of sample is only one as per Table 4, the requirement shall be
fck + 4 N/mm2.
<2m
> 4m
+ 1 Omm
+ 1 Omm
+ 10mm
- lOmm
- 20 mm
- 25mm
31 --1
Og-ar faWz
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 19 of 30
16.1
Inspection
To ensure that the construction complies with the design, an inspection procedure shall be
set up by the contractor and duly approved by the Engineer-in Charge covering materials
used, receipt of materials, their test results, records, workmanship and construction etc.
Contractor shall ensure that the surface which is to receive the grout is at proper level and so
are the openings for pockets as per Cl. 15.3.9.7 & 15.3.9.8.
16.2
16.3
Immediately after stripping the formwork, all concrete shall be carefully inspected and any
defective work or small defects either removed or made good before concrete has
thoroughly hardened.
Testing
In case of doubt regarding the grade or soundness of concrete used, either due to poor
workmanship or based on results of cube strength, compressive strength tests of concrete on
the basis of clause 17.4 of IS: 456 and/or load test as per clause 17.6 of IS: 456 shall be
carried out.
The Engineer-in-Charge shall be the final authority for interpreting the results of all tests
and shall decide upon the acceptance or otherwise. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge
shall be final and binding on the contractor. In case the results of the tests are unsatisfactory,
the Engineer-in-Charge may instruct the contractor to demolish and reconstruct the structure
or part thereof without any extra cost to the Owner.
16.4
16.5
Non-destructive Tests
Non-destructive tests using Ultrasonic Pulse Velocity and Rebound Hammer methods shall
be resorted to for checking the soundness of concrete placed and shall be as per the
directions of Engineer-in-Charge. The testing shall be based on IS: 13311, Part-1. However,
the Rebound Hammer test (IS: 13311, Part-2) shall only be used in combination with other
tests (Destructive or Non-Destructive) for checking the concrete quality.
17.0
FINISHING OF CONCRETE
17.1
On striking the formwork, all surface defects such as bulges, ridges and honey-combing etc.
observed shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer-in-Charge. The Engineer-in-Charge
may, at his discretion allow rectification by necessary chipping and packing or grouting with
concrete or cement mortar. However, if honey-combing or sagging is of such extent as being
undesirable, the Engineer-in-Charge may reject the work totally and his decision shall be
binding. No extra payment shall be made for rectifying these defects, demolishing and
reconstructing the structure. However, quantity of cement actually used for this purpose may
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
Govt ot
Indla lJnderldkng)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 20 of 30
be considered for reconciliation of materials. A11 burrs and uneven faces shall be rubbed
smooth with the help of carborundum stone.
The surface of non-shuttered faces shall be smoothened with a wooden float to give a finish
similar to that of the rubbed down shuttered faces. Concealed concrete faces shall be left as
from the formwork except that honey-combed surface shall be made good as specified
above. The top faces of slabs not intended to be covered shall be levelled and floated to a
smooth finish to the rises or falls shown on the drawings or as directed. The floating shall
not be executed to the extent of bringing excess fine materials to the surface. The top faces
of slabs intended to be covered with screed, granolithic or similar finishes, shall be left with
a rough finish.
17.2
17.2.1
Repair shall be made as soon as possible after the forms are removed and before the
concrete becomes too hard with prior permission from the Engineer-in-Charge, in writing.
Stone pockets, segregation patches and damaged areas shall be chipped out and the edges
undercut slightly to form a key. A11 loose material shall be washed out before patching. No
excess water shall be left in the cavity, but the concrete shall be damp. A good bond
between the patch and parent concrete shall be obtained by sprinkling dry cement on the wet
surface or by throwing mortar with force on to the wetted concrete, or by brush in a coat of
thick cement grout of about 1:1 (1 cement:1 sand) just before applying the patching
material. Before this has dried, the remainder of the patch shall be filled with mortar or
concrete, depending on the extent of the repair.
17.2.2
Cement concrete/mortar used in repair of exposed surfaces shall be made with cement from
the same source as that used in concrete and blended with sufficient amount of white
Portland cement to produce the same colour as in the adjoining concrete. The proportions of
ingredients shall be same as those used in parent concrete. The mortar shall be as dry as
possible and well compacted into the cavity. All filling shall be tightly bonded to the
concrete and shall be sound, free from shrinkage cracks after the filling has been cured and
dried.
17.2.3
For larger repairs to hardened concrete, necessary formwork bearing tightly at the edges of
the cavity shall be provided. Concrete shall be chipped out to a depth of at least 100mm and
preferably 150mm. Mortar shall be scrubbed into all surfaces with a wire brush before
placing the concrete. Damaged reinforcement shall be adequately spliced with new steel so
as to maintain the original strength. Additional reinforcement, if required in the patch, shall
be provided as per the instructions of Engineer-in-Charge.
17.2.4
17.2.5
Approved epoxy formulation for bonding fresh concrete used for repairs with already
hardened concrete shall be used by the Contractor if asked by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Epoxy shall be applied in strict accordance with EIL Specification 6-68-0056 and the
instructions of the manufacturer.
17.2.6
17.3
31
OgzIrl~:g
,7,n1c MIJ,
10-A
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 21 of 30
General
19.1.1
Forms for concrete shall be of plywood conforming to IS: 6461 (Part-5) or steel or as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and shall give smooth and even surface after removal
thereof.
19.1.2
19.1.3
Form work and its supports shall maintain their correct position and be to correct shape and
profile so that the final concrete structure is within the limits of dimensional tolerances
specified below, unless required otherwise, for functional/aesthetic reasons. The decision of
the Engineer-in-Charge shall be final and binding in this regard.
(a) Deviation from specified dimensions
of cross section of columns and beams.
- 5mm to +10mm
Dimensions in plan
-10mm to +50mm
ii)
Eccentricity
iii) Thickness
+6mm
+9mm
+12mm
+6mm
(d) Deviation in straightness or bow (deviation from specified line) for a single or
continuous member) e.g. beam, column or slab edge.
upto 3m
3m to 6m
6m to 12m
additional for every subsequent 6m.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
6mm
9mm
12mm
6mm
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
$gU 02eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
O> Go, ol india Undeflaloog)
(e) Deviation in squareness shall be measured taking the longer of two adjacent sides as the
base line.
The shorter side shall not vary in its distance from a perpendicular so that the difference
between the greatest and shortest dimensions exceeds 6mm. For this purpose, any error
due to lack of straightness shall be ignored. Squareness shall be checked with respect to
the straight lines that are most nearly parallel with the features being checked. When the
nominal angle is other than 90 degree, the included angle between check lines shall be
varied accordingly.
(f) Deviation in twist shall be within a limit such that any corner shall not be more than the
limit given below from the plane containing other three corners:
upto 600mm wide and upto 6m in length
over 600mm wide and for any length
: 6mm
:
12mm
(g) Maximum deviation in flatness from a 1.5m straight edge placed in any position on a
nominally plain surface shall not exceed 6mm.
(h) Tolerance in leveling of concrete surface at foundation/ :
pedestal top level where grouting is to be done
19.2
Form Requirement
19.2.1
The formwork shall be true, rigid and adequately braced both horizontally as well as
diagonally. The forms shall have smooth and even surface and be sufficiently strong to
carry, without deformation, the dead weight of the green concrete, working load, wind load
and also the side pressure exerted by the green concrete. As far as practical, clamps shall be
used to hold the forms together. Where use of nails is unavoidable minimum number of
nails shall be used. Projected part of nail shall not be bent or twisted for easy withdrawal.
19.2.2
Where through tie rods are required to be put to hold the formwork and maintain accurate
dimension, they shall always be inserted through a precast concrete block (of same mix
proportion as is to be used for concreting) with a through hole of bigger diameter. The
Precast block shall tightly fit against in inner faces of formwork. The holes left after the
withdrawal of tie rods shall be fully grouted with cement-sand mortar of same proportion as
that used for concrete. However, use of such precast block shall in no case impair the
desired appearance or durability of the structure. No such tie rods shall be used in any liquid
retaining or basement structure.
19.2.3
Tie wires shall be permitted only upon approval of the Engineer-in-Charge and shall be cut
off flush with the face of the concrete or counter sunk, filled and finished in the manner
specified in clause 17.
19.2.4
Form joints shall not permit any leakage. The formwork shall be strong enough to withstand
the effect of vibrations practically without any deflection, bulging, distortion or loosening of
its components.
19.2.5
Forms for beams and slabs (span more than 6.0m) shall have camber of 1 in 500 so as to
offset the deflection and assume correct shape and line after deposition of concrete. For
cantilevers, the camber at free end shall be 1/100th of the projected length. Where
architectural considerations and adjunctive work are critical, smaller form cambers shall be
adopted as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge.
1- 1
tg-ar02-eg
1.12",
t-f c-of t 013~ )
19.2.6
6-68-0004
Rev.6
Page 23 of 30
All vertical wall forms may be designed and constructed for the following minimum
pressure. The pressures listed in Table-6 are intended as guide only and the Contractor shall
ensure that the formwork is adequately strong and sturdy.
TABLE - 6
MINIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE FOR WALL FORMWORK
Pressure in KN/m2
Rate of pour in meter/hour
0.6
0.9
1.2
1.5
at 10 (in Celsius)
at 24 (in Celsius)
36.0
40.0
44.0
46.0
29.0
32.0
35.0
37.0
A11 horizontal forms shall be designed and constructed to withstand the dead load of the
green concrete, reinforcement, equipment, material, embedment and a minimum live load of
2.0 kN/m2.
19.3
Inspection of Forms
Temporary openings shall be provided at the base of column and wall forms and other
places necessary to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Before concrete is placed, all forms
shall be carefully inspected to ensure that they are properly placed, sufficiently rigid and
tight, thoroughly cleaned, properly treated and free from foreign material. The complete
form work shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before the
reinforcement bars are placed in position. When forms appear to be unsatisfactory in any
way, either before or during the placing of concrete, the work shall be stopped until the
defects have been rectified as per the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge.
19.4
19.5
19.6
Reuse of forms
Before reuse, all forms shall be thoroughly scrapped, cleaned, examined and when
necessary, repaired and retreated, before resetting. Formwork shall not be reused, if declared
unfit or un-serviceable by the Engineer-in-Charge.
19.7
$1g-zar
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
lafr-e-g
>37, oorooro
Forms and their supports shall not be removed without the approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge. Forms shall not be released until the concrete has achieved a strength
of at least twice the stress to which the concrete may be subjected at the time of removal.
The formwork shall be removed without shock and methods of form removal likely to cause
over stressing or damage to the concrete shall not be adopted. Supports shall be removed in
such a manner as to permit the concrete to uniformly and gradually take the stresses due to
its own weight.
In normal circumstances when average air temperature exceeds 15 degree Celsius during the
period under consideration after pouring of concrete and where ordinary Portland cement is
used, forms may generally be removed after expiry of following periods.
(a) Walls, columns and vertical faces of all
structural members
3 days.
7 days.
7 days.
14 days.
14 days.
21 days
(0 Cantilever Construction Formwork shall remain till structures for counter acting or
bearing down have been erected and have attained sufficient strength (minimum 14
days).
Notes:
i)
For other cements, the stripping time recommended for ordinary Portland cement shall
be suitably modified as per the instructions of the Engineer- in-Charge.
ii) The number of props left under, their sizes, supporting arrangement, and disposition
shall be such as to be able to safely carry the full dead load of the slab, beam or arch as
the case may be together with any live load likely to occur during curing or further
construction.
iii) Where the shape of the element is such that the formwork has re-entrant angles, the
form work shall be removed as soon as possible after the concrete has set, to avoid
shrinkage cracking occurring due to the restraint imposed.
iv) For rapid hardening cement, 3/7 of the above mentioned periods shall be considered
subject to a minimum of 16 hours.
v) For Portland pozzolana or low heat cement, 10/7 of the above mentioned periods shall
be considered.
19.8
Staging/Scaffolding
19.8.1
Staging/Scaffolding shall be properly planned and designed by the Contractor. Use of only
steel tubes is permitted for staging/scaffolding. The Contractor shall get it reviewed by
k311fo jti
I&Wg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of InOw Undettakingt
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 25 of 30
For smaller works or works in remote areas, wooden ballies may be permitted for
scaffolding/staging by the Engineer-in-Charge at his sole discretion. The contractor must
ensure the safety and suitability of such works as described under clause 19.8.1 above.
Form Work
Other things remaining same as per clause 19.0, formwork shall be of high quality. Care
shall be taken to arrange the forms so that the joints between forms correspond with the
pattern indicated in the drawings. The forms shall be butting with each other in straight
lines, the corners of the boards being truly at right angles. The joints between the forms shall
cross in the two directions at right angles. The size of forms shall be so selected as to exactly
match with the pattern of forms impression on the concrete face indicated in the drawings.
Maximum care shall be taken to make the form work watertight. Burnt oil shall not be used
for treatment of forms. The Contractor shall be permitted reuse of forms brought new on the
work place only if forms are properly cared for, stored and treated after each use.
The Engineer-in-Charge may, at his absolute discretion, order removal of any forms
considered unsuitable for use in the work.
20.2
Finishing
Repairing to exposed concrete work shall be avoided. Rendering and plastering shall not be
done. Minor repairing, if unavoidable shall be done as specified in clause 17.0 with the
written permission of the Engineer-in-Charge.
$fg-ar
arrrm
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
,r0571,
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 26 of 30
21.0
REINFORCEMENT
21.1
The Contractor shall develop the bar bending schedule for all RCC structures/ structural
parts at no extra cost to the Owner and shall get it reviewed by the Engineer-in-charge.
Reinforcement shall be cut and bent to shape as per dimensions shown in the bar bending
schedule/ drawings.
If protective fusion bonded epoxy coating is required to be applied on reinforcement bars,
the same shall be done as per IS: 13620. All repairs to applied protective coating required
due to mishandling and/ or bending of reinforcement bars shall also be done as per relevant
clauses of IS:13620.
21.2
21.3
ENGINEERS
fdiagOINDIA
LIMITED
sL1r
.IRTY e92,7,2 nA3vn3,1)
IA Govt ol Ineia Undertakingt
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 27 of 30
b) In case of thick rafts & pile caps having two or multi layers of reinforcement, the
vertical distance between the horizontal bars shall be maintained by introducing suitable
chairs, spacers, etc.
c) In case of columns and walls, the vertical bars shall be kept in position by means of
timber templates with slots accurately cut in them. The templates shall be removed after
the concreting has been done below it.
d) Exposed portions of reinforcement bars shall not be subjected to impact or rough
handling and workmen will not be permitted to climb on extending bars until the
concrete has attained sufficient strength so that no movement of the bars in the concrete
is possible.
21.4
21.5
Splicing/Overlapping
Only bars of full length shall be used as shown in the drawings. But where this cannot be
done, overlapping of bars shall be done as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The
overlapping bars shall be tied with two strands of 16 SWG black soft annealed binding wire.
The overlaps shall be staggered for different bars and located at points along the span where
neither shear nor bending moment is maximum.
21.6
Welded Joints
Welding of reinforcing bars shall not be permitted without the written permission of the
Engineer-in- Charge. Where welding of reinforcing bars is permitted, it shall be in
accordance with the recommendations of IS: 2751 and IS: 9417. Welded joints shall be
located at suitable staggered positions. Tests shall be made as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge to prove that the joints are of the full strength of the bars. Maximum
one welded joint shall be allowed per bar.
grg-a-
21.7
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
ON Go, of incha Unclertakingf
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 28 of 30
Testing Requirement
Permanent
Elongation (Stip)
ISO 15835
21.9
+ l Omm
+ 15mm
Substitution
When indicated diameter of reinforcement bar is not available, the Contractor shall use other
diameter of reinforcement bars on written approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
21.10
Tolerance to Cover
The actual concrete cover shall not deviate from the required nominal cover by + 10mm
measured over the steel reinforcement including links.
22.0 PAYMENT
22.1
22.1.1
Payment for plain and reinforced cement concrete (cast- in-situ) shall be made on cubic
metre basis of the volume of the actual finished work done or as per approved construction
drawings, whichever is less and shall be inclusive of providing pockets, openings, recesses
of all sizes, chamfers, fillets, grooves, separation/ expansion/ isolation/ construction/
movement joints, curing by normal moist curing or using curing compound etc. as directed
by Engineer-in-Charge etc. The rates shall be deemed to include complete cost of getting the
$fgzrr
02-eg
1.7,1twoxt,III~I)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 29 of 30
respective mix designs approved, making and testing concrete cubes and carrying out other
tests including tests of various ingredients, as per specifications and as directed by
Engineer-in-Charge. Payment shall, however, be separately made for tests on concrete cubes
done by accelerated methods of curing as defined in IS: 9013.
22.1.2
No separate payment shall be made for any additive/ admixture/ Plasticizer/ Fibres used by
the contractor for accelerating or retarding the strength of concrete or for achieving specified
workability. The rate quoted shall be deemed to be inclusive of all costs related to any such
additive/admixture/ Plasticizer/ Fibres.
22.1.3
The rate shall however be exclusive of reinforcement, metal inserts, pipe sleeves, formwork,
water stops and any filler material in expansion/isolation joints.
22.1.4
Where the strength of concrete mix as indicated by tests, lies in between the strengths of any
two grades given in Table-1 and it is accepted by the Owner/Engineer-in-Charge, such
concrete shall be classified as a grade belonging to the lower of the two grades between
which it lies. In case the cube strength shows higher results than those specified for the
particular grade of the concrete, it shall not be placed in the higher grade nor shall the
Contractor be entitled for any extra payment on such account. The concrete giving lower
strength than specified may be accepted at reduced rates after satisfying the safety of the
structure by checking it with tests as specified or rejected entirely at the discretion of the
Engineer-in- Charge. The rejected concrete shall be dismantled at no extra cost to the owner
and no payment or extension of time shall be granted for the concrete so rejected and the
formwork and reinforcement used for the same. Cost of any material supplied by the Owner
free of cost shall be recovered from the Contractor at double the prevailing market rate. In
case the concrete of lower strength can be improved by carrying out some strengthening
measures entirely at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge, then the said measures
including all related tests shall be carried out by Contractor at his own cost. If the Contractor
is able to make up the strength to the required grade by such improvement measures to the
entire satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge, payment shall be made for the grade achieved.
However, if the strength of concrete is not made up to the strength of required grade,
payment shall be made only for the lower strength if such concrete is accepted by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
22.1.5
Deductions for openings, pockets etc. shall be as specified in relevant parts of IS 1200.
22.1.6
Payment under continuous concreting item in the schedule of rates shall be made only where
the total quantity of concrete between two consecutive construction joints specifically
called-out on the drawings exceeds 250 cubic metres. For any foundation/structure
involving concrete quantity upto 250 cubic metres between two consecutive construction
joints shown on drawings, the concrete shall not be measured or paid for under this category
(i.e. continuous concreting), even though the same is required to be constructed in single
pour. The rate quoted against this item shall be inclusive of all extra cost related to labour,
shuttering, staging and making all other arrangements for such continuous casting e.g.
provisions for adequate movement and storage spaces, special gangways, scaffolding,
additional construction equipments, adequate lighting and supervision while the work
continues round the clock etc. The rate shall also be inclusive of all costs related to
concreting in any thickness, shape and position and at any height or depth so as to avoid any
cold joint between specified construction joints.
92e5
rn c.-1,rat 0,1,30,
11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Go, ol Ind. Underiakmgj
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 30 of 30
The rates shall be inclusive of any provision to be made or kept in the formwork for
providing dowels, inserts etc.
Superior quality formwork for exposed/architectural concrete work shall be measured and
paid separately under the relevant item in the schedule of rates.
22.2
Reinforcement
22.2.1
Payment for plain round mild steel reinforcement bars, high strength deformed steel bars
and epoxy coated reinforcing steel bar shall be on the basis of weight of bare steel
irrespective of any coating applied in metric tons. The weight of the bar shall be derived
from the sizes and corresponding unit weights given in IS:1786. Standard hook lengths,
chairs, spacer bars and authorized laps only shall be included in the weight calculated.
Binding wire shall not be weighed nor otherwise measured. Measurements for weight shall
not include cutting allowance etc.
22.2.2
Rate quoted for reinforcement shall include cost of supplying, decoiling, straightening,
cleaning, cutting, bending, placing, binding, welding (if required) and providing necessary
cover blocks of concrete.
22.2.3
Payment for a mechanical threaded coupler/ clamp shall be made by measuring the Lap
length of the respective rebar on which coupler/ clamp is used. The rate shall include supply
of complete assembly, fixing, testing etc. all complete.
22.3
22.3.1
Payment for PVC water bars shall be made on running metre (RM) basis of the water stops
provided in position. Rate shall include supplying cutting, fixing, jointing by vulcanising or
any other approved method, wastage, etc. complete.
22.3.2
Payment for filler materials in Expansion/Isolation joints shall be made on running metre
basis of the joint provided. For boards provided at expansion/isolation joints, the
measurement shall be made on square metre basis. Rate shall be inclusive of supply, cutting,
fixing, jointing, wastage etc. complete.
22.4
22.4.1
Payment for waterproof cement paint as per Cl. 18.0 shall be made separately on Sqm basis.
31
0231;:t2eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Intha Underlaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
VACUUM DEWATERING
CONCRETE SYSTEM
6-68-0062 Rev.3
Page 1 of 7
Trrw fqr-44-r
wrzi
fur-gm.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
'(4
ki41
I Ch Ch
21.08.14
29.01.10
06.04.00
AUG'94
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
, t,,, ,
VG
( i_.,---- c.
.CHANDA
L.PKM
NVK
PKM
SCH
DPN
RPM
SCJ
RS
SCK
GPL
VINAY
KUMAR
N. DUARI
MI
A. SONI
Standards
Prepared Checked Committee GM(E)
Convenor
by
by
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
$fgu
ENGINEERS
22e'g w INDIA LIMITED
tvraar ashrvom,
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
VACUUM DEWATERING CONCRETE
SYSTEM
6-68-0062 Rev.3
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
BIS
IS
Mr. P K Mittal
Members :
:
.71_it4
-mar Offleg
ENGINEEFZS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
VACUUM DEWATERING CONCRETE
SYSTEM
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 REFERENCES
3.0 MATERIAL
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT
6.0
11.0 CURING
14.0 PAYMENT
Silf-_itli I
.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ot InO. Undertaiong)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
VACUUM DEWATERING CONCRETE
SYSTEM
6 -68-0062 Rev.3
Page 4 of 7
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This specification defines the material, mixing, placing, curing, constructional and other
performance requirements for VACUUM DEWATERING CONCRETE SYSTEM for
concrete floor slab. Any other special requirements shown or noted on the drawings and
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge shall govern over the provision of this specification.
The PCC layer or other base course to provide base and to break the capillaries shall be as
per the drawings and governed by the relevant specifications.
1.2
Actual work shall be carried out in accordance with this specification and in consultation
with specialized firm undertaking the job to suit specific requirement at site such as rise and
fall of the floor slab, providing dowels for pedestals etc.
1.3
In case of conflict between clauses mentioned in this specification and those in any Indian
Standard, this specification shall govern.
2.0
REFERENCES
2.1
Materials
3.0 MATERIAL
All materials of construction like cement, aggregate, sand, water etc. shall conform to EIL
Specification No.6-68-0002.
4.0
GRADE OF CONCRETE
Only Design Mix Concrete shall be used. For other details like proportioning, batching,
mixing placing, curing etc. EIL Specification No. 6-68-0004 shall be followed unless
specified otherwise hereunder.
5.0
WATER-CEMENT RATIO
Water-cement ratio up to 0.55 shall be allowed to obtain better slump & workability. Actual
ratio shall be decided with the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Only measured quantity
of water shall be used in the mix.
6.0
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT
6.1
All works covered by this specification shall be carried out by an experienced agency
having sufficient expertise in vacuum dewatering concrete system. Only skilled and
experienced operators shall be employed for the purpose. Prior approval of the agency shall
be obtained from the Engineer-in-Charge before starting the work. All the equipment
including the form work shall be of approved and proven types suitable for the work
involved.
6.2
For best results, the form work must be placed atleast one day before the actual flooring.
The level must be checked and care must be taken to seal the bottom edges properly. A
simple test to check that the formwork is properly placed and fixed is that a man can
walk/jump on these channels without disturbing the level. These channels should be
covered with a thin layer of form oil for easy removal after the floor is laid.
ENGINEERS
$gz-jr fMt5 INDIA LIMITED
ATIZAI
242,,r 451,340,,
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
VACUUM DEWATERING CONCRETE
SYSTEM
6-68-0062 Rev.3
Page 5 of 7
Removal of channels should be done with extreme care so that the edges of the concrete
floors are not damages. The channels should be removed not earlier than 24 hours after the
floor is cast.
7.0
CONCRETE LAYING
Concrete laying pattern shall be decided in consultation with the Engineer-in-Charge and
with his approval. The maximum width of a slab strip shall not generally exceed 4 metres
and minimum number of construction joints shall be used. Alternate slab strips shall be
sequentially laid. Any damage to the already finished top surface shall be avoided. At
construction joints no overflow of mortar or slurry on the already hardened surface shall be
allowed while concreting the intermediate slab strip. Such construction joints shall be
marked with a thread in a straight line (unless otherwise shown on the drawings) while the
concrete is still green. Continuity of reinforcement shall be maintained while laying
concrete in slab strips unless otherwise shown on drawings. Edges at expansion joints shall
be protected and proper arrangement of shear-transfer shall be provided shown on drawings/
standards.
8.0
CONCRETE COMPACTION
8.1
8.2
Concrete should not be distributed with the needle / poker vibrator for a thickness upto
150mm.
8.3
Surface vibration should always start as soon as there is enough concrete infront of surface
vibrator. Two passes with the surface vibrator are required. There should always be a roll
of concrete of about 10-20mm in front of the leading beam along the entire length of the
vibrator. When the concrete has been placed and vibrated to a length of about 5 metres, the
second pass is carried out. The vibrator should be pulled at a speed of maximum 1
metre/min and without interruption to avoid linings on the surface.
9.0
9.1
Suction mats shall be spread over the levelled fresh concrete surface and shall be connected
by a suction hose to the vacuum pumps for dewatering of surplus water in the concrete.
During dewatering it shall be ensured that no cement/cement slurry is pumped out.
9.2
The vacuum dewatering must start within 30 minutes from the time of start of concrete
pouring.
9.3
The filter pads are placed in such a way that there is atleast 100mm fresh concrete visible
around the filter pads on all four sides. Filter pads should be overlapped with each other by
atleast 250mm.
9.4
Suction time may be adopted as 1-1.5 min per lOmm of concrete thickness or as directed by
Engineer-in-charge.
This shall be done after dewatering by using skim floater. After this, surface shall be
trowelled with minimum two passes of power trowel to achieve a wear resistant surface to
rfg`w 1C125
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Indo Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
VACUUM DEWATERING CONCRETE
SYSTEM
6-68-0062 Rev.3
Page 6 of 7
the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. However some guidelines are listed in10.2
below.
10.2
i.
Raking operation must be done diagonally in two directions over the concrete surface.
The concrete which is collected during raking is to be used for adjusting small surface
irregularities of the vacuum treated surface. Any irregularities to be maintained at this
stage only.
A11 four sides of the dewatered panel must be floated first and the remaining central
area is to be floated later.
iv.
Never use any cement paste, mixture of cement sand or fresh concrete for patch work.
v.
Normally two passes with the skim floater is required. The two passes should be
perpendicular to each other.
vi.
Troweling operation to be started after 30 minutes after final floating / when surface is
sufficiently dry.
11.0 CURING
Curing of concrete shall be done as described under EIL Specification No. 6-68-0004.
However, all care shall be taken to avoid any permanent stain on the surface. Any stain or
permanent marking on the top surface shall be removed by approved means.
12.0 APPROACH, WORKING PLATFORM & FORM WORK
The Contractor shall arrange all approaches, scaffolding, working platforms etc. for carrying
out the entire operation safely and in a work-man-like manner. The working area shall be
nearly maintained and all the facilities required by the Engineer-in-Charge for proper
supervision of the work shall be provided.
13.0
14.0 PAYMENT
This clause shall apply to Item Rate tender only.
14.1
Payment shall be made on cubic meter (m3) basis of actually finished work or as calculated
from the approved construction drawings, whichever is less. The reinforcement used shall
be measured and paid separately on weight basis.
31
Og-ar rirenr,any
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
in Gov,
Un~.9)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
VACUUM DEWATERING CONCRETE
SYSTEM
14.2
The rate quoted shall be inclusive of supply of all labour, material, power trowel, form
work, plant & tools, vibrators, skim floater etc. required for the successful and satisfactory
completion of work including curing and all cleaning operations before and after the work,
preparation of the surface, finishing the surface smooth after completion, providing required
access, working platforms, and other safety measures including their removal after
completion.
14.3
The rates quoted shall be inclusive of any test specified and directed to establish the quality
and strength of all materials and finished work including making good the floors as
specified complete. In case the average compressive strength of the cores does not show
improvement in strength as specified over normal cube compressive strength, the work shall
be classified as 'sub-standard' and the Engineer-in-Charge may accept the work at his sole
discretion and payment may be made to the Contractor at the normal reinforced concrete
rate for similar item of work either quoted elsewhere in the contract or deduced as extra item
as per general conditions of contract. However, under no circumstances, concrete of grade
Iower than that shown on the drawings shall be accepted.
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
51gu
f45
INDIA
LIMITED
I alWrf ri.em2 057,isn.1)
ASSEMBLIES
SHT. 1 of 7
10 12
16
18
20
24
27
30
250 300
450
450
550
600
650
750
850
115
155
170
190
210
230
255
285
315
TYPE I
280 336
498
504
610
666
722
831
TYPE III
430
486
648
654
910
966 1022
200
200
300
350
400
450
450
550
600
700
700
800
150
180
240
270
300
330
380
405
450
495
540
585
TYPE II
230
236
348
404
460
516
522
631
690
799
808
917
TYPEIV
380
386
498
554
760
816
822
1081 1140
200
250
400
400
450
550
550
650
700
800
850
950
95
115
155
170
190
210
230
255
285
315
345
370
TYPE 1
230
286
448
454
510
616
622
731
790
899
958
1067
TYPE III
380
436
598
604
810
916
922
150
150
250
250
300
350
350
450
500
550
600
650
150
180
240
270
300
330
360
405
450
495
540
585
TYPE II
180
186
298
304
360
416
422
531
649
708
767
TYPE IV
330
336
440
454
660
716
722
981
180
220
315
335
390
445
470
550
600
95
115
155
170
190
210
230
255
285
TYPE I
210
260
365
390
450
515
545
635
690
TYPE III
360
410
515
540
750
815
845
1085
150
150
200
200
250
275
300
350
375
425
450
500
150
180
240
270
300
330
360
405
450
495
540
585
TYPEII
180
190
250
255
310
345
375
435
465
525
560
620
TYPEIV
330 340
400
405
610
645
675
885
L
E
8c
III
BOLT DIA ( 0 ) IN MM
95
22
33
36
39
345
370
H
1281 1390 1499 1558 1667
M20
II
8c
IV
H
&
111
H
M25
II
&
IV
590
1
8c
III
735
815
315
345
370
780
845
935
H
M30
II
8c
IV
H
915
+9-4;
26.11.13
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
A. . SHARMA
VPS
AMARJEET
P.K.MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
VINAY KUMAR
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
N. DUARI
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Og-a OfZ5
2i2O5-feasl.smo.-0
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
ASSEMBLIES
SHT. 2 of 7
BOLT DIA
10
12
16
18
160
190
275
295
95
115
155
TYPE I
190
230
TYPEIII
340
L
E
20
IN MM
22
24
27
30
33
36
39
340
390
410
480
525
595
640
710
170
190
210
230
345
370
325
350
400
460
485
565
615
750
830
380
475
500
700
760
785
1015
150
150
150
150
180
225
225
275
300
350
350
400
150
180
240
270
300
330
360
405
450
495
540
585
TYPEII
180 190
200
205
240
290
300
390
450
460
520
TYPEIV
330
340
350
355
540
590
600
810
840
900
910
970
150
170
240
255
300
340
360
425
460
525
565
625
95
115
155
170
190
210
230
345
370
TYPE I
180
210
290
310
360
410
435
510
550
675
745
TYPEIII
330
360
440
460
660
710
735
960
1000
150
150
150
150
175
200
200
225
150
180
240
270
300
330
360
405
TYPEII
180
190
200
205
235
270
275
310
TYPEIV
330
340
350
355
535
570
575
255
285
315
8c
III
695
H
1280
M35
II
8c
IV
360
255
285
315
&
III
625
H
1075 1125
1195
275
300
325
495
540
585
375
410
445
825
860
895
M 40
II
&
IV
250
450
340
elie
0_
Ile
760
790
t'4,.
tata
il
TYPE I
TYPE II
o
K (NOMINAL BORE)
a.
TACK WELD
(TYP)
DETAILA
TYPE III
TYPE IV
26.11.13
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
(TYP)
YX1_
A.K: SHARMA
VPS
A1:4-AMARJEET
P.K.MITTAL
.ANTTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
V1NAY KUMAR
S.CHANDA
N. DUARI
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
ASSEMBLIES
SHT. 3 of 7
000r0000000>(>000
tri
0
.4.
in
in
(1) o o co
tO
ro
ro
ro
o csi 0 rO rO
00 00 N
.Cs1
II,
r,
o
.-
00
0
0
I-
.co
N
,-
l*,
'et
(1)
0
O
0>
1N.
.--
ct
in
CD
"Cr
O
0
Cf>
O
CO
0
O
00
U")
tO
ro
>L")
in
in
N
to
co
..0
K>
10
CDOCD000000t0
cla 1- I,) tn tn O O 0/ .- K>
N
O et N tn 10 N
r.
100
N
0
N
00
in
o
0>
Ll'
0
tn
10
...,
o
ir,
0
tt,
s,
0
cD
.--
0
11,
.4-
0
-
CD
Pf)
Sli
U)
et
Pr)
if,
ri)
et
c>
tf)
in
't
N.
N
..:1Csl
CO
10
a)
Pei
vi
0
10
CD
00
o
co
o
co
0
co
LI,
r
LI,
in
"."
O
CO
O
CD
CO
o
.-
0
in
*
0
co
in
>,"
et
.-
tn
ci,
00
O tn
iD
0
tn
11,
.-
in
(1)
Ch
If>
if>
0
P.
0
tf>
.--
tr)
rs.
(0
...
tn
N
tf,
it,
tn
tn
ci
rr
.--
tn
O
in
N
O
-rr
N
.1'
Lf>
-rt
u->
.--
00
tn
.*
1n
.-
O
0
If>
.-
t0
et
re,
o
o
*
o
1.")
0000000
CO O cn O t's1 in
1,
1 1,
1 .-I,>
o
1,>
cn
ro
.-er
rO
LO
.-
et
,-,
K>
--
et
I**)
.--
O
O
CD
O
O
>/)
10
-J
(,)
c."
r-
O
0
.0
O
.--
tn
N
If>
tn
in
N
ro
CI
O
Cs1
O
cn
O
O
.-
LO
to
co
0
00
N
.--
.-
tn
1,)
if>
CV
N
0/
0
tn
..-
C)
..-
00000000
lf> Lf> sl tn II, .- CO ..- N
-
0000
II, .- CO
.- N
SINGLE NUT
DOUBLE NUT
LENGTH
SLEEVE
MM
GRADE
OF
CONC.
LLI
a_
>I-
>
> X
0>i
0 ck;
I_ X
tn
C.1
=
cS
r..1
=
CD=
-:2-1-10CDM
>
>
>
6.3
=
>
>
>
t3
00L000NON
tn tn et to u, N CO -
CD
vi
tn
N
PO
co
Oc)
.-
.-
.--
1-
C1
.-
0000in
O oN1-.4- .N
u,
..,,
`""
000
tn
CD
11,
000030
lf> 0 J N O
vi 1D .in
ir,
00
O u,
el
.-
C'')
0
O
O
LO
.-
0
lo
CO
(C)
C`l
r`)
0,
r..
CO
in
N
.--
.-
0
co
to
oo>no
in
co in
et
u, -
0>
u,
0
O
>..>
vi
cep
0
CO
.N
.--
W")
tn
ceD
>")
co
>
eki
-..J
>
>
>
kr)
1+->
=
ci
't
I.r> ckS i
26.11.13
Rev.
Purpose
rf)
ck$
in
r.
O
tO
N
00000N0
tn 0 0 It in N 0
et
.- .- - in r. N
CO
.-
Date
CO
e>
0
N
No.
pr)
THREADED (T)
BOLTDIA ( 0 ) INMM
LO
in
O
..Csi
O
O
0/
03
DIMENSIONS
>0)
i.n
ro
'et
(c)
tr)
0
CO
(0
rO
000000000001000
O tn a> tn in O U:> O 10 0> in 1-- in ->1.
N) ti, N
a> -. N
N
r.
N
CO O N
1-
0 ifl 0 10 0 0 0 O in O to tn O O
O
,) N. et O in sl 11, co N. et N O O
co O N
tn
tt, N r... 0) N
N
CD N
....0 u, 0 >r) o o o 0 11, 0 tn 10 0 in
>n
r. <0
"zr
in
0 ,4. Lf> N U: ct 1... 14, co
a, CsI
N
0,"> LO N LD 00 N
O 11, 1.110 000000010000010
0 o ro rt 0 rn er 0 o ro vi 0 O co
N
a, N
N ll,
N (0
CO N
O tn
O .- O (o O O O O in O Qa in O O
tn ...a. N ro O O O tn ..d. N /") p. Lf> LID
CD
CO LNI
..- 11, N tn N N
cr> .1' .-
0
cD
-I
to
A.K. SHARMA
VPS
AMARJECT
P.K.MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
V1NAY KUMAR
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
N. DUARI
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
STANDARD No.
$'>gu2di
dg
It~ rlecnft
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
asidnenan
7-68-0417 Rev. 7
ASSEMBLIES
r.
ID
U)
0,
11)
N)
ch
U)
to
Co
N
lf)
N
.I
N
O
115
N
N
.-
U)
O
N
N
Io)
U)
.-
N
N
N
N)
0
N
O
el
N
.N
if)
.-
u)
.-
.N
U)
in
co
U>
.ir)
o
N
N
l'
U)
Ir)
0
N
N
.-
0
N
0)
V)
..-
0)
if)
.-
N)
C)
.-
Lf)
,n
U)
tn
o
CO
-
U)
U)
N
-
O
If)
...
.-
0
tD
0
N
II,
.-
tf)
0
CO
O
N)
N
O
It
O
0
0)
0
0
If)
U)
CO
.-
Lf>
CO
.-
O
0
0
N
...
If)
cl>
.-
O
N
if)
N
0
if)
./
tr)
,..,
in
U)
.-
U)
11)
ID
.--
O
N
O
u>
,t
O
l0
11,
O
N
0
O
1/5
O
Lf)
O
CD
.-
O
..1>
O
0
-
O
0
.-
O
..ct
-
LI,
N
-
O
N)
.-
O
co
U')
o
K>
._
.-
0
N
.-
0
oD
Ot
0
N
.-
CO
.-
o
._
c>
CO
CO
o
_
CD
-
tf)
U)
V)
CII,
i.c.)
O
Lf>
-.1.
tf>
N
U>
N
N
...
-,
if)
el
CD
Lf>
N)
r
r...
O
0
N
CD
l',"
U)
(0
0
11,
N)
Csi
N)
0
LI)
U)
0
O
I.)
Lf)
.-
u>
O
CD
.-
o
U)
o
cl
.-
c0
4C
0
0
CO
.1.
if)
CO
U)
0
t-
in
,,,r)
0
10
*
r-
0
11)
U)
0
.-
U)
.-
Lr>
,t
u>
U')
N)
0
.--
0
0
>,,
u,
0
CO
0
N
it)
et
10
0
.-
.--.
CD
..-
O
N
0
cf)
I
(D
11,
U)
ct
NI
Ni
0
0
C,)
0 0 0 tf>
t-ONN
NI
.I .-
0
co
0
CO
Lf)
(1)
O.0)
O
LN1
0
0
1A)
0
0
..J.
0
0
.-
0
CsI
0
in
N
o
co
O
cf)
li,
CO
03
,..-
0
0
N
0
Cf>
N
LO
tr)
In
.-
to
0
if)
.-
N)
N
tr)
,-,
0
u")
.-
CD
0
if)
,CD
t...
U")
CD
I,
-
lf)
n
--.,
N.
in
N
NI
0
c0
N
-
o
co
0
11)
"I
(1)
0
.N
0
CO
0
.-
o
o)
0
if)
0
..1
0
Lf)
--I
- -1
(.)
LLI
in
0
CO
if)
N
Lf)
t
*
0
tr,
CO
CO
CO
ttl
o)
I, U')
1f)
el
U)
Cr)
0
CD
4'
0
0
I.")
0
N)
c,)
r..
N
U)
U)
r>
N)
>
LLI
GRA DE
OF
CONC.
>
>
..>3
>
>
cks
=
>
II)
ek;
>- W 0 .<..,
I- 3 LIJ
M
(3 1-1L.Lj
N ix
CD rX 1""
0 Z Lij
FL..., 0 m LAL,0 Li
Z }- vt Z m
O
I- La . (.5 <
,_ > V) Z J
LLI
Lr>
u3
0
O
- o
If)
1-
O
U)
M)
N.
.-
U)
U")
0
cf)
o
co
II)
OD
0
U")
0
U")
_I
N
N
_I
_I
>
_
>
><
_I
7
)(
u)
o
.4-
kS
o o
N 14*/
0 0
N: cc;
O
U)
fl)
I-
LAJ11.
/Y 0 Z
<
0
.-
V>
w I CD
tr>
tf)
_1
<
Z
IZ
Y m > cr 0 0
I = w rC.>
Z
1- iLL
LO
l's
N
.-
W
C1 l
i:d
o L.i
I- 0 `-' ch_
1-cp
0
N
- -- cks
ci tri civi
cNINP,),4)
-4-
N
NI
ir)
z o o
(n ,,, ,-... o
L.,_
1.1i
>()
m)
a_ a.. o 1
....., a:,
> >
w
w=U) u. W
w
~1 = <
N
.-
u_
Lf>
,-
.-
>
m
= <
Ld
I< Ld
(x EC
0 0
Z
o_Z z
0
N)
K>
w wo
>
O <
-I
LLI V>
I-
a_
>0 m
4t L.d
tt,
I,)
0
cl
1,1
U)
.t
It)
.1.
DOUBLENUT
-2-
in
SINGLENUT
ir>
N
t
tr>
THREADED (T)
LENGTH
,
C
tr)
tO
ch
>c)
in
t3
t3
t-
cf)
csi
'd'
U>
tf)
cf)
MM
CO
ct.
CD
O )m 1
el
tn
in
in
if)
..4.
..-
O
o
CO
N
ot
pe)
O
.-
-.4-
O
te
ID
N
'cl
O
tD
O
o
tO
el'
N
Ni
N
t.')
o
CO
-
N
CO
U)
V &VI
BOLTDIA ( 0 ) INMM
U)
0
N
.-
U)
1,1)
DIMENSIONS
U)
O
met
cri
-J
O
0
-J
0
Z CO
LL
1Z
LAJ
-J
LAJ
Z <
(7) a
(;)
Li.)
LT)
-J
0
0
I-
U)
N
If)
tO
.-
Lf)
i()
,t
tl,
-
o
O
LI,
Lf)
0
Iff
.-
r-
0
0
1.0
)
w>
ir)
00
..,*
U)
.-
0
CD
TYPE OF BOLT
U)
,r,
ce>
(4,
cti
CO
C)
CO
(D
U)
o
00
ct
t.,)
LD
M35&M40
co
0
115
1,)
BOLTSSHALLBEMARKEDONTHEDRAWING ASUNDER
0
0
N
,0
n,
0.1
5. ANCHORBOLTSSHALLBESET ACCURATELYANDHELDIN
POSITION BY TEMPLATE BEFORE CONCRETING.
SHALL BE TACKWELDED
SHT. 4 of 7
LL
O
0
o
O o w ce
ZN
Z
<
I Z
< v)
M
w ce
<
N 0 <
-I
> <
-N
C.)
I
U;)
03
ci)
a;
-J
cs, <
26.11.13
6
Rev.
No.
Purpose
4t7a
A.K. HA 1AA
VPS
talfiLt.
AMARJEET
P.K.MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
VINAY KUMAR
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
N. DUARI
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
re3erved
ENGINEERS
51gz-z Wes INDIA LIMITED
lafwnetravtasksvsnitt
STANDARD No.
7-68-0417 Rev. 7
ASSEMBLIES
SHT. 5 of 7
GAP BETWEEN
SLEEVE & BOLT
SHALL BE FILLED
WITH GROUT
TYPE - VI
TYPE - V
lja
1E1
(NOMINAL BORE>
IuI
10
lil
6 THK.
SQ, Ft_
(NOMINAL BORE>
10
6 THK,
sQ. FL
2
C>
6 WELD ALROUND
ON BOTH SIDES DF le
SQ.
Al
P>
8 THK.
LTY
6 rnrn VELD
FL
SQ. Ft_
TYPE - VII
TYPE - VIII
TYPE - XII
TYPE - IX
26.11.13
6
Rev.
No.
Purpose
A.K: SHARMA
VPS
AMARJE
P.K.MITrAL
P.K.M AL
S.CHATURVEDI S.CHANDA
VINAY KUMAR
N. DUARI
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Copyright FIL - Al
I rights reserved
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
0
:11fadj
eg
Ii1127f eleamlE151~11
ASSEMBLIES
SHT. 6 of 7
r4)
cr)
Lr)
cv
N.
cr)
in
...-
in
(D
N
CO
0
N
N
rs'
u)
;:4
.-
?.e.
.-
00
(0
0
cl.
K..., io(*)
in
re>
in
(D
0
el
0
,.;
0
N
2,. .(
gz
.-
'
(1)
(1)
in
co
CO
o
O
oo
r...)
....
x
,-i;
in
P4')
.-
.-
U)
co
..*
o
.-
O
...;
co
O
0
(0
0
(.0
P,r)
(.0
11)
P')
N
N
O)
Lf)
rt)
.--
o
c,i
O)
N
.--
cr>
(.0
.-
o .?.',2,5
U)
O
.--
Lr>
,9.'
><
2,
.-
cn
0)
K>
.-
O
O
0
c
-.I-,
O
03
O
.-
.-
25
.-
O
0)
co
P.-.
Pf)
.-
re)
.O
(r,
N.
(.1
0
r4)
1D
c`l
O
(C>
o
re)
O
.-
O
tr)
O
0
o
O
0
Pr)
0
LO
-
O
csi
--
K>
cn
c.,1
cs.I
CNI
X
0
c,
o
O)
m)
CO
f4)
X
O
0
o
0,
cf P4)
MM
0
0
U)
(f)
0)
O
N
r4)
r-
O)
u)
co
,:t
r4)
,c1
re)
N
N
vt
N
.X
0
.-
Ln
C,
-CI
O
Lc)
-J
csi
LLI
O)
0
Csi
r4)
fe)
cv
,it
Lr,
(10
P,")
1!)
CO
(7)
LJ
_J /2
0 >CD I
in
kn
CV
o
I.
co
Lf)
<0
<
tn
O
.-.--
O)
co
.-
cm
CO
.-
re)
vt
in
11)
(C>
co
,-'
O
If)
,-
(D
0
vt
0
...1.-
._cc
.-..::
N
d
0
O
un
Pr>
74)
0
0
CO
r-
c,
"M
c
Purpose
In
N.
O)
N..
(..)
c
(/ )
.__
_
X
Date
Rev.
CO
OP VI )2
O
.--
O)
GRADE
OF
CONC.
26.11.13
o Lc)
o
--
r.
..4- ..;-.
to .=,
c,=>
>.
rn
(C>
000008
tn
un
cn
00
o
x
o
o
d-
O
d
X
in
O
0
.-
O
CO
00
.-
.-
co
..g
,- an
CV
O
.-
DOUBLE NUT
0
a)
co
.zIco
r_
;-r-5
(D
SINGLE NUT
co
cNi
Ns-
.:1
'.:1'
74,
1...)
c"CP,i
No.
Li,
THREADED
LENGTH
(T)
tO
K)
0
c0
N
oo
O
SINGLE NUT
0)
1,r)
o
O
in
DOUBLENUT
o
c.io
r4,
,d.
N.
cI
o
---
'. ,
tn
Cl
r.r)
DIMENSIONS
re)
THREADED
LENGTH
(T)
oO
A. SHARMA AMARJEET
VPS
P.K.14ITTAL
N. DUARI
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
STANDARD No.
faffleg
lai(2R oftmi2as7J,n.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
ASSEMBLIES
SHT. 7 of 7
NUT
NUT
WASHER
WASHER
BASE PLATE
GRDUT
BASE PLATE
GRDUT
CDNC. TOP
CONC. TDP
SEE DETAIL
Ol
SQ. PDCKET
ISMC
n
ISA--I
I I 1 I
11
11
(>
I
I
L_J 11. J
VIEW B - B
VIEW A A
TYPE X
(* AS PER DESIGN REQUIREMENT)
DETAIL -
(i)
TYPE - XI
26.11.13
26.03.09
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
A.K. SHARMA
VPS
AMARJE
P.K.MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
N. DUARI
VINAY KUMAR
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
STANDARD No.
je ENGINEERS
IND!A LIMITED
(~1 232215W 051.344.1)
HANDRAILS
7-68-0501 Rev. 7
Page 1 of 8
NOTES:
1. ALL HANDRAILS AND UPRIGHT SHALL BE AS PER RESPECTIVE TYPE.
2.
ALL FILLET WELDS OF 3mm (MINIMUM) THICKNESS SHALL BE CONTINUOUS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
3.
JOINTS IN HANDRAILS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT SUITABLE LOCATIONS, WELDED AND GROUND FLUSH.
4.
FOR ADDITIONAL TYPE OF UPRIGHT FIXING DETAILS REFER EIL STD. 7-68-0061.
5.
6.
7
6
16.12.2014
29.01.2010
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
V.P.SINGH
V ,-GOEL
V.P.SINGH
PK MITTAL
Prepared
Checked
by
by
ki\-"(
PK MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S CHANDA
VINAY KUMAR
N DUARI
Stds. Bureau
Stds. Committee
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
f'.nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsprvAri
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
$.7fg-a[OWg INDIA LIMITED
k31
HANDRAILS
7-68-0501 Rev. 7
1~, Cl~C11,14CM)
Page 2 of 8
200
V)
8 THK.
BASE PL.
VIEW 3-3
VIEW 2-2
n,-11
V3
ho
TUBULAR HANDRAIL
POST
11 II
FINISHED
FLOOR
LEVEL
V 2 II II
, II I
eiie
2N
5,
Niim
12 LUG(2N0S)
,2
250
1500(MAX.)
---(-P
P-
R=100
32 NB(M) TUBE
o
o
R=100
o
o
F.F.L.
If
16.12.2014
29.01.2010
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
V.P.SINGH
V.P.SINGH
t
V GOE L
SEC. 1-1
PK MITTAL
S CHANDA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
r.nnvrinht FII - All rinhts rpsprvAri
51g-a 02-eg
irrteR r-fecolrosi~f
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
HANDRAILS
7-68-0501 Rev. 7
Page 3 of 8
TYPE - II
CONC. / STEEL FACE-DISCONTINUOUS END OF HANDRAIL
25
1500(MAX.)
250
(MA X.)
1500(MAX.)
(TY P)
(TYP)
Ip
[1=1oeu_.
o
o
in
o
o
TOE PL. 100x5
50x50x6 THK. PL.
(TYP)
o
o
in
TOP OF GRATING
CHEQ. PL.
T.O.S.
v
5J
VIEW 6-6
VIEW 5-5
SECTION 4-4
(AT CORNER)
7
6
Rev.
No.
Frmat Nn
16.12.2014
29.01.2010
Date
R-no-rinn1-F4 RPV n
REVISED
REVISED
dc
dc
ISSUED AS STANDARD
S
. \r
V .P.SI GH
ISSUED AS STANDARD
V.P.SINGH
Purpose
Prepared
by
V- GOEL
PK MITTAL
Checked
by
PK MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S CHANDA
VINAY KUMAR N DUARI
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
r.nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsp,rvpd
04-a(~,eanc,o51.3~0
r fafje5
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
HAN DRAI LS
7-68-0501 Rev. 7
Page 4 of 8
TYPE - II
PIPE SHALL BE
GROUND TO SHAPE
PLATE
50x50x6 THK.
VIEW 7-7
7
6
16.12.2014
29.01.2010
Rev.
No.
Fnrmat Nn s-rin-n001-F4
Purpose
Date
RPV 0
V.P.SINGH
V.P.SINGH
1
.-dL
MITTAL
S CHANDA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
C.nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts re.sprv<441
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
raW5 INDIA LIMITED
,
1,7~.11
HANDRAILS
7-68-0501 Rev. 7
Page 5 of 8
TYPE - III
32 NB(M) TUBULAR
HAND RAILING
VIEW 9-9
SEE DETAIL
OF WALL PLATE
1500(MAX.)
LANDING
100
1500(MAX.)
14 0 HOLES
WALL
8mm THK.
PLATE
3mm MIN.
CONTINUOUS
12 0
EXPANSION
FASTNERS
FILLET WELD
120 0-8 THK.
WALL PLATE
VIEW 8-8
ELEVATION
16.12.2014
V.P.SINGH
29.01.2010
V.P.SINGH
Rev.
No.
Forrnat Nn
-a\.<
Date
R-nn-noni -F4 RPV
Purpose
Prepared
by
(Ari
PK MITTAL
Checked
by
PK NITTAL
S CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
C:nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rAsrtnind
STANDARD No.
g
$1gzx f8122,1~,n1.549,4)
(w.-rt
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
HAN DRAI LS
7-68-0501 Rev. 7
Page 6 of 8
TYPE - IV
1500
1500 MAX.
1500
o
o
u)
TOE PLATE
100x5 THK.
25 THK.
GRATING
1 Oj
HANDRAIL ON HORIZONTAL PLATFORM (STEEL)
SEC. 10-10
NOTE : HANDRAIL TYPE-IV SHALL BE USED OVER PIPE CROSS OVER AND LOW LEVEL PLATFORMS
SUCH AS FOR VALVE OPERATION ETC. AS MENTIONED IN STD 7-68-0562 & 0563.
(FOR DETAILSA
O REFER PAGE 8 OF 8)
16.12.2014
V.P
V.P.. INGH
29.01.2010
V.P.SINGH
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
V G EL
PK MITTAL
Prepared
Checked
by
by
PK MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S CHANDA
VINAY KUMAR
N DUARI
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
r.nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rps.rvpri
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
" INDIA LIMITED
0 .-a.OW5*10
r W.WaP,~71)
IA
-
HAN DRAI LS
7-68-0501 Rev. 7
Page 7 of 8
TYPE - IV
32 0 NB M
TUBE
DETAIL - `J
SEC. 1 1 -1 1
7
6
16.12.2014
29.01.2010
\;W\IV
V.P.SINGH
V.P.SINGH
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
G}
S CHANDA
GO L
PK MITTAL
PK MITTAL S.CHATURVEDI VINAY KUMAR N DUARI
Checked
by
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
nnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsprvpri
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
Og-af OW5 d INDIA LIMITED
IswfT 2,REO2osisoomf
HANDRAILS
7-68-0501 Rev. 7
Page 8 of 8
IIIV
J I
irm
32 NB(M)
TUBE
4V
tn
II
II
TOE PLATE
100x5 THK.
0.
OUTSIDE EDGE
OF MEMBER
VIEW 12-12
VT2
50 SQ.
6 THK. PL.
1
u)
DETAIL - (A)
CONNECTION DETAILS
(FOR TYPE II & IV)
NOTE : CHEQUERED PLATES / GRATINGS SHALL BE SUITABLY NOTCHED TO ACCOMMODATE THE TUBE
IN CASE OF BEAM MC100 OR MC125.
16.12.2014
VXINGH
())/16CjL
29.01.2010
V.P.SINGH
PK MITTAL
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared
Checked
by
by
PK
ITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S CHANDA
VINAY KUMAR
N DUARI
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
ennvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsprvpri
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
el
$'2,fir 215tg
lxvR2w, femi.-Tuqq)
STEEL STAIRS
7-68-0506 REV. 6
SHT. 1 of 6
- r 75x75x8
30,
NOSING
=4
71O-1=1-4111111111-11MFill..=.
-
-1111M-0.
IOW
ESA_
.E
1142..1=-
-1=1,-C =04//104/000. 7-
7-=-1.110 .1
MIN. 750
STRINGER SPAN
4000 MAX. FOR MC150
6000 MAX. FOR MC200
0 Lai
-J
0 CC
CNI
N
CC
W
ca
Nu,
CC
X o
rn
3
1
CONCRETE
BASE
SECTION 4-4
NOTES :1. FOR STAIRWAY/TREAD USE ELECTROFORGED GRATING TYPEII AS PER EIL STD NO 7-68-0697.
2. FOR CONNECTION DETAILS REFER SHEETS 3, 4, 5 AND 6.
3. STRINGER SHALL BE SUITABLY DESIGNED FOR OFFICE BUILDING, WARE HOUSES AND WORKSHOP.
4. FOR DETAIL OF INSERT PLATE `R1a REFER EIL STD. NO. 7-68-0056.
18.09.13
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
RVEDI D.a'"
MALHOTRA
PK MITTAL
VPS"
SPJoshl
P.K.MITTAL
Checked
by
V.CHATURVEDI
VINAYKUMAR
Stds. Coimlittee
Convenor
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Cnnvrinht FII - All rinhts mso.rvpri
0 el
Ig.ZIfdOteg
I KUM' t7e41,
Tr' 111,T9',Fe4i
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
STEEL STAIRS
7-68-0506 Rev. 6
SHT. 2 of 6
300
II
II
_7::
II
Ii
4i
J1
EL. 'A'
T.O.G/CH. PL
EL. `B'
T.O.G/CH. Pl.
r75x75x8
EL. 'C'
T.O.G/CH. PL/T.O.C.
1500
MAX.
STRINGER MC 150
OR MC 200
0
z
17
<
SECTION 1 -1
18.09.13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD
5
Rev.
No.
SPJoshl
P.K.IAITTAL
Prepared Checked
Date
PK IA AL
Purpose
by
by
VINAYKUMAR
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Committee
Convenor
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
STANDARD No.
60J:A ENGINEERS
Igai2Preg INDIA LIMITED
4-IreM 29-edifF C51.34,1,-A
STEEL STAIRS
7-68-0506 Rev. 6
SHT. 3 of 6
R.C.C. KERB
230
MIN.
230
MIN.
235
MIN.
230
MIN.
30 NOSING
CLEAT
L-75x75x8-150 LG.
F
U)
CLEAT
75x75x8-150 LG.
0
La
IA V)
J I0 E)l
= co INSERT PL.
Lo
END FLAT
R1 a
c_o
MC150 OR MC200
SECTION 2-2
SECTION 2-2
230
MIN.
230
MIN.
230
MOMEM MIN 1
MEM WM OWN I
11111114 IM1
111111.1111111111MME
01111 MINIM 1.
MOM. 111111 IMMO 11
IMII
1 MINI M.MIN == l
=MOM
I
1
MI
II
l
l
l
MINIM MIN M
MN NMI MIN
=MOM MOM Mae l
=MI
IN=
=MI MI= OM
=NM
i
IIII
MINI
M= l
i
l
MINN ONE
.I
I
1
MN 1MM l
l
i
gar
LX
L.d
ET=
....
"*".
; i
IIMII M MN MME 1
1== MIN
STRINGER BEAM
STRINGER BEAM
MC
CLEAT
CLEAT
VIEW 6-6
VIEW 5-5
STRINGER BEAM
MC150 OR MC200
STRINGER BEAM
CC
230
MIN.
17
III II-11 I
75
x-10
M16 BOLTS
I
1V
CLEAT
1-75x75x8
200 LG.
75x75x8-60 LG.
INSERT L-75x75x8
1000 LG. FOR 750MM
WIDTH
INSERT PL.
`R1
SECTION 3-3
Rev.
No.
Pnrmat Nn
Date
s-00-nnni-F4 R PV (1
Purpose
VIEW 7-7
SPJoshI
ikD. MALHOTRA
7
MAARVEDI
PK MITTAL
VPS
P.K.MITTAL
Prepared Checked
by
by
VINAYKUMAR
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Committee
Convenor
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
STANDARD No.
ei
5'gzil. itiMeg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
elecrAtT2.17,71.1.1)
STEEL STAIRS
7-68-0506 Rev. 6
SHT. 4 of 6
230
(MIN.)
230
(MIN.)
CC BEAM
O
230
0
Cs1
30 NOSING
230
(MIN.)
vg
MC150 OR MC200
0
evl
O
O
0.1
75x75x8
150 LG.
C:,
6 THK.
STIFFN. PL.
MC150 OR MC200
SECTION 3-3
SECTION 2-2
NIIIN WWI P
OM
MIS
1 UMW
MN1I
NM
MILO
MI MIN
MIOMNIN INMME
IMM
=MN
.M
lMO
11
M.IIIIM
MI=
II'
I MN
l=OM
I
1
1NM
WW1
OMB
ME
=MY
JIM
ENO
1
11111111
MIMI=
=MN NM IME I
LIMIMN .
: l
I
.1111 ,MNM
il
il
l
l
I
Il
l
l
-----
IMIIIIIIM
l
l
l
STIFFN. PL.
STRINGER
230
(MIN.)
STIFFN. PL
STRINGER
ANGLE CLEAT WELDED TO
STRINGER, BOLTED TO MB
30
230
(MIN.)
VIEW 8-8
VIEW 9-9
230
MIN.
---- MC150 OR
MORE
STRINGER
6 THK.
STIFFN. PL.
SECTION 3-3
VIEW 10-10
Rev.
No.
Format No
Date
Ft-nn-nnnt-F4 RPV
Purpose
PK MITTAL
VPS
SPJoshI
P.K.MITTAL
Prepared Checked
by
by
EDI D. MALHOTRA
SC
VINAYKUMAR
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Committee
Convenor
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
STANDARD No.
.e.]
ENGINEERS
eg INDIA LIMITED
$1gar Ofgr'
STEEL STAIRS
7-68-0506 Rev. 6
SHT. 5 of 6
MC150 OR
MC200
50x50x6
o ;i
SEC. 11-11
6 THK.
CHEQ. PL.
HANDRAILING
230
111111=11r
r'
STRINGER
BRACING
L-50x50x6
(APPROX.)
T 50x50x6
TYP. DET. OF CHEQ. PL. STEP
L-50x50x6 STIFFENING
BRACING TO BE PROVIDED
FOR STAIR WITH MORE
THAN 20 RISER
FULL STRENGTH
BUTT WELD FOR
FLANGES
8 THK. PL.
DETAIL A
SEC. 13-13
VIEW 12-12
6
5
Rev.
No.
Purpose
Date
n
vps
SPJoshl
NGH
P. .MITTAL
Prepared Checked
by
by
URVEDI D. MALHOTRA
V.CHATURVEDI
VINAYKUMAR
Stds. Committee
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
Ogar Orole-g INDIA LIMITED
(11,,J3re
Govt of Ind. UntlertakIng)
c7,1,14[hii!
STEEL STAIRS
7-68-0506 Rev. 6
(A
SHT. 6 of 6
229
230
135
L-75x75x8-120 LG.
60x60x6 THK. WASHER
WITH 22 0 HOLE AT CENTRE
_Ada
r4,
H
W.P.
M20 BOLT
REFERENCE EL.
SLOTTED HOLE 22x50 LG.
IN ANGLE CLEAT
150
160
DETAIL
219
230
4o
L 75x75x8-120 LG.
60x60x6 THK. WASHER
WITH 22 0 HOLE AT CENTER
o
3.
W.P.
M20 BOLT
REFERENCE EL.
SLOTTED HOLE 22x50 LG.
IN ANGLE CLEAT
255
100
DETAIL
/11
\t/
SPJoahI
Prepared Checked
Rev .
No.
Format Nn
CH
P.K.MITTAL
Date
A-no-norm -F4 RPV n
Purpose
by
by
RVEDI D. MALHOTRA
SW5
C
PK MITTAL
V.CHATURVEDI
VINAYKUMAR
Stds. Committee
Convenor
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM
STANDARD No.
ENCJNEFRS
INDIA IJMITED
(A Govt. ot Indlo Undertoking)
IAIRII VIONAVIII104KI
7-68-0507 Rev. 7
Page 1 of 3
T"
RUNG
I:24:2 \ DtLIS
INNNN
TOP
RUNG
EL.
SUPPORT
X2
EL.
SUPPORT
X1
O
O
O
LJ
1
0
z
0
0
o
o
OF RUNGS
re)
NOS.
N=
0
1,4)
EL.
SU P
o
O
SAFETY CAGE
LADDER HEAD
AT SIDE
EL.
--L
o
o
o
SUPPORT
X2
eouom
RUNG
(REFER SHT. 3 OF 3)
LOWER OR
INTERNED
HOOPS
7
6
Rev.
No.
UPTO 800
200 + e
260 + e
275 + e
28.11.13
06.11.08
Date
Purpose
SIttiV
VPS
S.P.JOSH1
A
AJmj
P.K.MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
VINAY KUMAR
V. CHATURVEDI
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
STANDARD No.
ENGNEERS
0111111~011111~111100
7-68-0507 Rev. 7
Page 2 of 3
800
800
FLAT
75x10
0
0
14,
TOP OF
GRATING/
CHEQ. PL.
EL. ON
SUPPORT
SECTION3_
x II
ZZ
400/
o
O
re,
TOE ANGLE/EDGE OF
PLATF RM MEMBER
0
CD
CD
REF. EL.
L()
NOS. OFRUNGS
o
re)
NOS. OF RUNGS
O
O
EL. ON
SUPPORT
SECTION
BOTTOM
RUNG
AONL
Rev.
No.
Fnrrnat Nn
Date
s-nn-nnni-F4 Rr.v
Purpose
vikft
VPS
S.P.JOSHI
AJS
P.K.MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR
S.CHANDA
V. CHATURVEDI
GM
Stds. Bureau
Cnairman
Approved by
STANDARD No.
ENGNEB5
NDIA UMITID
7-68-0507 Rev. 7
Page 3 of 3
TYPE OF ATTACHMENT
REMARKS
A1, A2
B1, B2
CONCRETE FLOOR
REFERENCE
ELEVATION
(TYP)
M.S. GRATING
TYPE - B1
TYPE - Al
TYPE - C1
WITHOUT
NUT
Ll 00x1 00x8
(TYP)
BOTTOM
_ff
NTGO M
WITHOUT
/ NUT
REFERENCE
ELEVATION
(TYP)
WITHOUT
GRATING
TYPE - A2
TYPE - C2
TYPE - B2
,;;r
11111
EL. X1
OR X2
CHEQ.
PLATE
TYPE - D1
TYPE - D2
TYPE - E
NOTE
100
24 0 HOLES FOR
M20 BOLTS
AJS
S.P.JOSHI
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
P.K.MITTAL
Date
Purpose
by
by
S.CHANDA
V. CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR
Rev.
No.
280 I, 280
560
(FREE)
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairmai
Convenor
Approved by
rnnv-inht Fll - All rk-.nts rPsArvPrI
3-1(bit
1
ENGINEERS
ti faw5
INDIA LIMITED
FOR R+L
LESS THAN 4.00M.
1
L
STANDARD No.
CIRCULAR PLATFORM
FOR
HOT VESSELS
FOR R+L= 4.0M.
TO LESS THAN 8.00M.
7-68-0552 Rev. 7
SHT. 1 of 8
1..,
L i oox i ooxs
L i oox100X8
L i oox, ooxs
E2
L 75X75X8
L 90X90X8
L i oox ioox8
ir
SEE DETAIL'L'
IN SHT. 8 OF 8
HANDRAIL
(REF. SHT. 8 OF 8)
(REFER SHT. 6 OF 8)
INTERMEDIATE PLATFORMS
(FOR e 10Orrirn)
ALL CONNECTIONS ARE BOLTED AS SHOWN
NOTES:-
DIMENSION X1 SHALL BE e+35 BUT NOT LESS THAN 85 IN THE PLATFORM WHERE BRACKET
TYPE- LB7/RB7 OR LB8/RB8ARE NOT USED
3. DIMENSION X1 SHALL BE e+45 BUT NOT LESS THAN 145 IN THE PLATFORM WHERE
BRACKET TYPELB7/RB7 OR LB8/RB8 ARE USED.
4. FOR FURTHER DETAILS REFER GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS.
5. FOR BRACKET DETAILS REFER STD.NO. 7-68-0553 AND FOR CLIP DETAILS REFER
STD. NO. 7-68-0557
6. SPLICING OF TOE ANGLE SHALL BE DONE ONLY IF IT IS ESSENTIAL.
7. ELECTROFORGED GRATING TYPEI SHALL BE AS PER EIL STD. NO. 7-68-0697.
8. FOR OTHER NOTES REFER SHT. 2 OF 8.
7
21.01.14
VPS
28.01.09
VPS
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
AJS
P. K. MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
V.CHATtIRVEDI
VINAY KUMAR
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
STANDARD No.
CIRCULAR PLATFORM
FOR
HOT VESSELS
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ot Intlta Undertakng)
7-68-0552 Rev. 7
SHT. 2 of 8
FOR R+ L=
FOR R+L= 4.0M.
FOR R+L= 8.0M.
LESS THAN 4.00M. TO LESS THAN 8.00M. TO 10.00M.
D
STD. 7-68 0507 SHT.1 OF 3
L 100X100X8
L i oox i oox8
L i oox100X8
fr
L 75X75X8
L 90X90X8
L i oox100X8
s,
400
(REFER SHT. 6 OF 8)
SEE DETAIL'L'
IN SHT. 8 OF 8
HANDRAIL
(REF. SHEET 8 OF 8)
SEE DETAIL
INTERMEDIATE PLATFORMS
(FOR e >100mm)
ALL CONNECTIONS ARE BOLTED AS SHOWN
NOTES:
CONTD. FROM SHT. 1 of 8
9.
21.01.14
28.01.09
Date
VPS
R.SOOD
Prepared Checked
Rev.
No.
AJS
Purpose
by
by
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
H. MATHUR
/
S.CHANDA
G.R. RAJAGOPALAN
Stds. Committee
Convenor
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
STANDARD No.
k_71
g2e5
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Chl.rwcn.)
HOT VESSELS
SHT. 3 of 8
FOR X
LESS THAN 2.00M.
L
fr
FOR X= 2.0M.
TO LESS THAN 5.00M.
FOR X= 5.0M.
TO 7.00M.
L i 00X100X8
Liooxiooxs
Liooxiooxs
Lioox iooxs
75X75X8
90X90X8
HEAD PLATFORMS
21.01.14
28.01.09
Rev.
No.
Fnrmat Nn
Date
8-no-nn01 -F4 RPV
Purpose
.Sk4j7
VPS
VPS
W)NAJS
P. K. MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHANDA
V.CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM
goi
$;fg-ar 92e5
1~ ~12 MIJ,
47.1)
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7-68-0552 Rev. 7
HOT VESSELS
SHT. 4 of 8
EL. T.T.L.
OF VESSEL
150
L=1400(MAX.)
800(MAX.)
200
(MIN.)
10
SEE DETAIL O WITH 'G'
TYPE BOLT
A,80 80
.... 1
'-0,,' ,L)
\s,
_n
IIr- -- 0
INSULATION
(e)
10
SEE DETAIL Q WITH 'G'
TYPE BOLT
4-200 HOLES
FOR M18 BOLTS
11,
u)
`-lir
i
IL
JL
__.__>.
'-' _
,IL_
REF EL
(T.O.S.)
MC150
75
125 80
10 THK. PL.(TYP)
/
EMI
300(MIN.)
EL. T.T.L.
OF VESSEL
150
SECTION 7-7
NOTE:
FOR DETAIL
7
6
28.01.09
Rev.
No.
Format Nn
Date
R-00-nnn1-F4 Rev n
Purpose
VPS
P. K. MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
V.CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
(m..) ENGINEERS
02-eg INDIA LIMITED
k_31
STANDARD No.
7-68-0552 Rev. 7
SHT. 5 of 8
L=2800(MAX.)
180 HOLES FOR M16 BOLTS
IN CLIP AND SLOTTED HOLES
IN MC150 SEE DET. 'S1'
10
SEE DETAIL (1) WITH 'G'
TYPE BOLT IN SHT. 8 OF 8
L4.
REF EL
(T.0.5.)
INSULATION
(e)
1 1
1 1
10 THK. PL.(TYP)
/
1 1
20
O.R.
SLOTTED HOLE
REFER DETAIL
OF VESSEL
DETAIL 'S1'
SLOTTED HOLE
(FOR DET. 'S1')
10 THK. PL.
(AT TOP OF CLIPS)
75
10 THK. PL.
150
SECTION 9-9
SECTION 8-8
21.01.14
VPS
28.01.09
VPS
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
AJS
P. K. MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
V.CHATURVCDI
VINAY KUMAR
GM
Chairman
Approved by
ENGINEERS
Og-affarZ5 INDIA LIMITED
(affen efrcowaildflsoff)
STANDARD No.
7-68-0552 Rev. 7
SHT. 6 of 8
L=1400(MAX.)
10
200
10
(MIN.)
SEE DETAIL C) WITH 'G'
TYPE BOLT IN SHT.8 OF 8
)25 25
o
REF. EL
(T.O.S.)
Ir
W.P.I
6 THK. STIFF. PL. (TYP)
MC150
10
8 THK. PL.
10
/ /
EL. T.T.L.
10
o
l0
18 9/ HOLES FOR
M16 BOLTS
6 THK. STIFF. PL. (TYP)
Iffifflims
SECTION 4-4 RB14 (LE31 4 OPP. HAND)
DIMENSIONS L,X AND Z SHALL BE AS PER
GEN. ARRANGEMENT DRAWING
11
.10
!
'
10 THK. PL.
SECTION 10-10
*SECTION 15-15
VIEW 16-16
21.01.14
28.01.09
Rev.
No.
Fnrmat Nn
Date
R-nn-0001-F4 Rpv n
Purpose
VPS
VPS
AJS
P. K. MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
V.CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
)1
,411
faffieg
STANDARD No.
7-68-0552 Rev. 7
SHT. 7 of 8
L=2800(MAX.)
EQ
EQ
SEE DETAIL 'Q' WITH 'G'
lYPE BOLT IN SHT. 8 OF 8
REF EL
(T.O.S.)
INSULATION
(e)
10 THK. PL(TYP)
MC125 TO BE PROVIDED (AS SHOWN)
WHEN 'P' IS MORE THAN 800
P
EL. T.T.L.
75
14
OF VESSEL
Lr4
300(MIN.)
10 THK. PL.
150
Z=0.R.+ e+ 1 20
SECTION 11-11
SECTION 5-5 RB15 (LE31 5 OPP. HAND)
DIMENSIONS X,Y,Z & L SHALL BE AS PER
GEN. ARRANGEMENT DRAWING
200 HOLE
FOR M18 BOLTS
90
SECTION: 12-12
90
o
rn
u)
N
crt
In
N
12 THK. PL
200
8 THK. PL.
SECTION 13-13
(BASE PLATE)
VIEW-F
SECTION 14-14
(CLIP)
21.01.14
28.01.09
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
AJS
VPS
P. K. MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
V.CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
(4.
44li
fd
l!") ENGINEERS
k.71
STANDARD No.
7-68-0552 Rev. 7
HOT VESSELS
SHT. 8 of 8
10
32 NB(M) PIPE
Tlf PL.
10 THK. PL.
FOR L 100X100X8
FOR L 90X90X8
50X6 FLAT
M12 BOLTS
M12 BOLTS
32 NB(M) PIPE
o
X
X
75X75X8
DETAIL'L'
(SPLICE)
0
CO
R=12
In
50X6 FLAT
50X6 FLAT
~Mi
REF. EL,
(T.O.G.) 1
DETAIL OF SLOTTED
HOLE IN TOE ANGLE
HANDRAIL
HALF HANDRAIL
BRACKET
INNER TOE
ANGLE LB
OUTER TOE
ANGLE LA
u-,
OF 020 HOLE ON
10
//
BKT AND
DETAIL'A'
_JEM
/111/~11/e
ffi ~1~
MEIMMIIM
M~~1
ffi~~
DETAIL'P'
DETAIL'Q'
NOTCH IN GRATING
7
21.01.14
28.01.09
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
5 Arn-v
VPS
AJt-\
VPS
P. K. MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI S.CHANDA
V.CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
5fg- r ~
-g
ef57.3,4cf.4)
r-wcol2
STANDARD No.
CIRCULAR PLATFORMS
7-68-0553 Rev. 7
OF HOT VESSELS
SHT. 1 of 5
1A
INSULATION
10
SHELL
OUTSIDE DIA.
ELEVATION 'X'
tr)
co
N
\\
/
/
35
L/2
L/2
I /
LB
SHELL
OUTSIDE DIA.
2 L
4,35 M IN .)
INSULATION
SUPPORT CLIP
10 THK.
10
GRATING
ELEVATION 'X'
-I
/ /
/ /
_/
/ /
/ /
/ /
/
,_
11
6
SUPPORT CLIP
10 THK.
1
35
6
* FOR VESSEL HAVING TEMPERATURE ABOVE + 230*C, SPECIAL BOLTS CONFORMING T0 ASTM A193 Gr. B7 & NUTS
CONFORMING T0 ASTM A194 Gr. 2H SHALL BE USED. FOR TEMP. BELOW 230*C, CARBON STEEL BOLTS CONFORMING
T0 IS:1363 SHALL BE USED.
TYPE LB
& RB1
NOTES:
1.
16.00
1485
37.42
1085
17.60
1585
39.72
1185
19.12
1685
42.06
1285
20.62
1785
44.38
1385
22.14
1885
46.72
1485
23.65
2.
3.
21.01.14
Rev.
No.
Fnrrnat Nn
\'\
VPS
AJF14..
VPS
P.K.MITTAL
Prepared
Date
R-on-nn01-F4 Rev n
Purpose
by
P.K.M AL
S CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUHAR
S CHANDA
V CHATURVEDI
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
k31
5fg-ar laWs
evramc,d51.1,10,,i)
STANDARD No.
CIRCULAR PLATFORMS
7-68-0553 Rev. 7
OF HOT VESSELS
SHT. 2 of 5
'F' INDICATES VIEWING FROM OUTSIDE TOWARDS THE CENTRE OF VESSEL FOR BRACKET ORIENTATION
W M12 BOLTS
35
5 0 80
GRATING
R F.
(T.O.S.)
V3
C1 5
TOE ANGLE AND
BKT. CONNECTED
WITH 'G' TYPE BOLT
SEE 7-68-0552 SHT.
8 OF 8
CLIP
SEE 7-68-0557
SHT. 1 OF 3
SLOTTED HOLE IN
WEB OF MC125
8 THK. PLATE
8 THK. PLATE
SEE DETAIL'A'
SECTION 2-2
34
/1 In
4111,
R=7
80
10
OF M12 BOLTS
SECTION 1 -1
SIMILAR SEC. 1A-1A EXCEPT BOLTS
BRACKET
002-
SECTION 3-3
'G' TYPE BOLT REF. SHT.
8 OF 8 STD. 7-68-0552
EFERENCE
AXIS
BRACKETS ORIENTATION
Rev.
No.
Date
DETAIL 'A'
Purpose
DETAIL 'B'
\J'kr/
VPS
AJS
VPS
P.K.MITTAL
Prepared
by
P. .MITTAL
S CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR
S CHANDA
V CHATURVEDI
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
5g-ar 02e5
frrr- e,c,cnW d51.3,47.1)
R
)35/(MIN.)
85 j,85 ,1401,1,
10
SHELL
OUTSIDE DIA.
cNi
STANDARD No.
CIRCULAR PLATFORMS
7-68-0553 Rev. 7
INSULATION
4A
10
LB
SHT. 3 of 5
GRATING
ELEVATION 'X'
(T.O.S.)
/ /
F
6-200 HOLES FOR
M18 BOLTS*
/ / /
co
4A
//
/ /
SUPPORT CLIP
/
R
e ,35 MIN.)
INSULATION
L/2
SHELL
OUTSIDE DIA.
LB
L/2
GRATING
ELEVATION 'X'
T.O.S.
/ /
/
/ /
/ /
/Lt
/
1F
/ /
/ / /
/ / /
6 THK. PLATE
/
!/
/
/ /
SUPPORT CUP
* FOR VESSEL HAVING TEMPERATURE ABOVE + 230'C, SPECIAL BOLTS CONFORMING TO ASTM A193 Gr. B7 & NUTS
CONFORMING TO ASTM A194 Gr. 2H SHALL BE USED. FOR TEMP. BELOW 230'C, CARBON STEEL BOLTS CONFORMING
TO IS:1363 SHALL BE USED.
TYPE LB 3 & RB3
TYPE LB4
&
RB4
NOTES:
1.
18.40
1435
40.60
1035
19.90
1535
42.60
1135
21.40
1635
45.00
1235
22.90
1735
47.30
1335
24.50
1835
49.60
1435
25.90
2.
3.
4.
VPS
VPS
Date
Purpose
No.
Rev.
Prepared
by
/ A
P.K.MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR
S CHANDA
V CHATURVEDI
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$)gu02e5
trf1eR~f2M1.3,1511)
STANDARD No.
CIRCULAR PLATFORMS
7-68-0553 Rev. 7
INSULATION
SHT. 4 of 5
4Bl
44
L/2
f LB
SHELL
OUTSIDE DIA.
OF HOT VESSELS
L/2
GRATING
/ //
ELEVATION
(T.O.S)
,/
MC 125
Xv 8 (TYP)
/ / /A,_
/
/
817
// '
/
i
~-r,A
\\_...
1
/
12 THK.
FACE lt
/ /
////
y
/7 /
SUPPORT CLIP
4C
INSULATION
10
L/3
1,
SHELL
45
GRATING
/ /
.frfr
OUTSIDE DIA. /
EL. 'X'
o
o
/
/
/z
/ /-41.\_
5N
8-330 HOLES
/
FOR M30 BOLTS
/7m16 THK.
/ / /
// ///
FACE
/\
/ /
4F
-8 (TYP)
MC125 (TYP)
(T.O.S)
SUPPORT CLIP
4,Cj
3000)
FOR VESSEL HAVING TEMPERATURE ABOVE + 230T, SPECIAL BOLTS CONFORMING TO ASTM A193 Gr. B7 & NUTS
CONFORMING TO ASTM A194 Gr. 2H SHALL BE USED. FOR TEMP. BELOW 230T, CARBON STEEL BOLTS CONFORMING
TO IS:1363 SHALL BE USED.
NOTES:
1.
60.40
63.10
65.80
68.50
71.20
73.90
76.60
2545
2645
2745
2845
2945
3045
83.80
86.50
89.20
91.90
94.60
97.30
2.
3.
4.
TO ARROW 'F'
LENGTH = L + 10 + 35
LB = LEFT BRACKET (FLANGE ON LEFT)
ABOVE WEIGHTS INCLUDE WEIGHT OF STIFFENERS
RB = RIGHT BRACKET (FLANGE ON RIGHT)
AND WEIGHT OF FACE PLATE
THIS STANDARD IS APPLICABLE FOR IMPOSED LOAD OF 3KN/SQM.
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
AJS
VPS
Prepared
by
P.K.MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR
S CHANDA
V CHATURVEDI
GM
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
r.nnvrinht Fil - All rinhts rpsprvprl
ENGINEERS
$'g-a[ faW5 INDIA LIMITED
STANDARD No.
CIRCULAR PLATFORMS
7-68-0553 Rev. 7
FORSEC. 5-5
OF HOT VESSELS
DIA
OUIER
OF
0.D
SHT. 5 of 5
R SEC. 5A-5
OF
SECTION 5-5
SEC. 5A-5A, SIMILAR EXCEPT AS NOTED
1*'0
GRATING
50
ESSEL O.D.
10
80
20
90 (SEC.4-4, 4A-4A)
SECTION 4-4
SIMILAR SEC. 4A-4A, 4B-4B & 4C-4C
EXCEPT BOLTS
BRACKETS ORIENTATION
'F' INDICATES VIEWING FROM OUTSIDE TOWARDS THE CENTRE OF VESSEL FOR BRACKET ORIENTATION
28.01.09
Prepared
Rev.
No.
Date
P.K.MITTAL
VPS
Purpose
by
P.K.MITTAL
VINAY KUMAR
S CHATURVEDI
S CHANDA
V CHATURVEDI
Stds. Bureau
Checked Stds. CommitteeGM
Convenor
Chairman
by
Approved by
C.nnvrinht Fil - All rinhtR rpsgwvw1
- lij 441,1JAUQU
Aq panoiddv
ueltu!eqo
neaJne spls
INO
JOU9AU00
eallmwoo .srAs
NV1Vd001"fil *l'O
VONVH3 S
tinw.vm .H
1Y1JJPI'X'd
103A11111YH3'S
Aq
Aq
paloaqo paiedaid
IHSOrd'S
fr
SdA
asodind
9Z
90'1. 1.0
N
Aad
r4)
.03sn 38 11VHS 91:S1 01 ON111210JNO3 S1108 1331S NO8dV3 '0.0Z M0138 "di131 d0J
Sd113 3H1 HIIM NO1133NN03 dOJ cosn 38 11VHS HZ .210 46L V V.11SV 01 ONIMOJNO3 SII1N ONV
L8 dO 61V 111-SV 01 ONIMOJNO3 S1108 1V133dS '3 .0Z+3A08V S38(11Vddr131 ON1AVH S13SS3A 210J 'S
'g0-99L 'ON 021VONV1S 2133321 S11V130 13)13V218 2103 '17
dO Z 133HS NO S1IV130 d3J3d '00 L <a 2103 '
'001. > a > Og >J0J 9-8 =V CINV 09 ,
a > 0 230d 94=V 'Z
(SS3N0101H1 NOI1V1f1SN1=a)001. >9 dOd anvn 38V L 30Vd NO
:S310N
(421? 'Z' L 3dA1 SdI10)
,821, 13)13V218
1HOld 80J
c.n
(zad
Z 3d/U
co
\ \
,X,
30N32333321
co
,X,
33N3213J3d
ld .)1H1 OL
(Led ? Len SI3)13V88 d0J)
(Les
3d).1
L 3dk1
,X,
3N J d
ld
)1HI O L
ldVd 1V3161C1N1-1).3 01
12:1Vd 1VOIN 03 01
Jo L '1HS
Sl3SS3A 10H
210d
Sd113 1210ddrIS IN210dBild
TAGd L990-89-L
.oN CldVGNVIS
C1311V\111 VICINI
S293NIDN3
(1.ShrLm?K.D...,y2lit)
27
,-gg1121
9rW9P
.1J
Aq panoaddv
uettu!eqo
wD
neaing 'sp}s
NYridOOYMI
VONVH3 S
JOUGAU00
aan!wwoo spis
anio" .H
10:13ASOIY113'S
1YILYITd
U ndd
alea
asodind
PG>109110 paiedoid
GOOS a
StY
oisords
S'
tf\
CldVCINV1S
90' CO
sv conssi Cl NV Cl3S1A32:1
C21VC1NV1S
'9Z
uN Wuu
'oN
nad
(9
L `9
3dAl SdI13)
NVid
:S31ON
(dA1) 31V1d *NH1
-V3SS'3I
pO
(P821 >i) "91 S13)13Vd8 2103)
Z ,o
2-3d).1
o
(4Eis
(43
9 3dAl
(du) S310H
31V1d *NH1 0 L
rs
,X,
3ON3213J38
o
O
S310H 00Z
31V1d NH1 9
.
4)
cn
31V1d )IH1 O L
(921
91 S13)I0V218 210J)
9-3dAl
L-3dAl
\C)
an
0
O
O
31V1d *)1H1 0
(dA1) S310H 00Z
oo
31V1d ')1H1 0
c
cn
tn
X "13
331,132133321
,X,
30N3213J321-4
1,3
31V1d >IH1 9
S .Aed LSS0-99-L
no
31V1d *NH1 9 -
lJYd 1nllCINI1A0 01
IdVd 1V3IN03 01
C Z '1HS
Sl3SS3A 10H
110d
Sd113 11:10ddflS 11210d11f1d
.oN adVaNVIS
(1
,
t51/belat...~
/12114)
Ir?W
03111N11
521331\119N3
L9P
q panwddv
uewneyo
neanig sps
IAJ 0
Aq
Aq
Jouanuo0
aaniwwoo sm paloaqo paiEdald
anawn .H
NYTIelOOMII TO
VONVH3 s
000S 21
IHSOrd'S
KI3A21111VHO'S
esoclind
Wukiod
N
nad
1.1.1.'9Z
90' I. I.'CO
(91 25' SL
t7
9
NVid
'01S SIH1 JO ( JO L '133HS) 9 )2 S'17 S310N 83338 0S1V *Z
01. L NVH1
SS31 38 10N 11VHS V 83A3MOH 01+9=V 'SNOI1V1f1SNI
dO S3SS3N>IDIH1 11V 210d C111VA 32IV SlIV130 3S3H1 *1
:310N
9 1. 3dAl
17
3dAl
;c4
o
ui
Cri
->c-- -4--
31Yld *)1H1 9
31rld *>11-11 9
(dA1) S310H 0
cn
(dA1) S310H 0
eO
cn
31V1d *)1H1 0 L
31V1d '>IH1 0
,X, '13
33N3d3J38
Cn
cn
"
cn
cn
X 13
33N3213J31
ts)
31Y1d ^>1H1
(Lea
*VIG 301sino
113HS
31Vld *)1H1
1-3dAl
9 1. 3c1A1
V
31V1d *)1H1 Z1
31V1d *)1H1 Z
(dA1) S310H 00
II
(dA1) S310H 00
(O
31rld )IH1 01
31Vld 'XH1 0
\
rs3
cn
4
cn
,X,
33N383d3d
X 13
33N383.1321
O
31V1d '>1H1 9
N)
VIO 3aisino
113HS
31V1d *AH1
llVd 1V3Id0N11A3 01
llYd 1V3IN03 01
'1HS
Sl3SS3A .LOH
dOd
Sd110 .1.2110ddlIS 1111110d1Y1d
Aed L990-29-L
.0N adVCINVIS
(.,,,euapun
VICINI
S2133NI9N3
9-2,142122gif
Ird.araliagieo.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
STANDARD No.
ELECTROFORGED GRATING
7-68-0697 Rev. 3
SHT.1 of 8
THE UNFUSED JOINTS ARE NOT IN EXCESS OF 5% OF THE TOTAL JOINTS AND ARE WELDED
BY SMAW/GMAW PROCESS
(b)
THE JOINTS ARE ABLE TO SUSTAIN A MINIMUM PULL OUT LOAD OF 1.2 TIMES THE ALLOWABLE
SHEAR CAPACITY OF THE CROSS MEMBER.
11. EVERY FIFTH MAIN MEMBER SHALL NECESSARILY BE WELDED TO THE END FLAT FROM (ONE SIDE)
HOWEVER, THE END MAIN MEMBER SHALL ALWAYS BE WELDED TO THE END FLATS.
12. OPENINGS UP TO 200mm DIA ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DRAWING THE SAME SHALL BE MADE AT SITE
DURING ERECTION OF PIPING.
13. REPAIR TO THE DAMAGED AREA OF GALVANIZED COATING DUE TO WELDING AFTER ERECTION SHALL BE
CARRIED OUT AS PER RECOMMENDED PRACTICE OF IS:11759 USING COLD GALVANIZING SPRAY PROCESS.
ORGANIC PAINT SYSTEM IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.
14. MAXIMUM LENGTH OF SINGLE CONTINUOUSLY SUPPORTED GRATING SHALL BE FIXED ON THE BASIS OF
HANDLING. HOWEVER PREFERABLY LENGTH OF GRATING SHALL BE RESTRICTED TO 4.2M.
16.02.15
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
JITENDER GUPTA
R.S.CHAUHAN
AMAIUk
VIKRAM GUPTA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RAJAN RIVASTAVA
S. CHANDA
PK MITTAL
S. CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
GI
fg-ar f&154-eg
IkiRR e-feake
0t1 JV0.N )
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
STANDARD No.
ELECTROFORGED GRATING
7-68-0697 Rev. 3
SHT.2 of 8
TABLE-1
USE OF GRATING TYPE AT VARIOUS LOCATIONS &
NET SAFE WORKING LOADS FOR GRATING TYPE-I & II
500 TO 800
900
1000
1100
1250
1400
APPLICATION
TYPE
2
EITHER OF w(UDL IN KN/m ) OR P(LINEAR LOAD IN KN/M)
1. EQUIPMENT PLATFORM
2. WALKWAY FOR CABLE
PIPE RACK
TRAY IN
3. OPERATING PLATFORM FROM
GRADE/SUPER STRUCTURE
4. APPROACHES
1. STAIRS
2. FLOOR GRATING FOR
a) COMPRESSOR HOUSE
b) TECHNOLOGICAL STRUCTURE
c) PIPE RACK WITH
VALVE / PIPE SUPPORTS
d) MAINTENANCE PLATFORM
II
9 .60
14.80
10.80
8.10
5.30
3.40
9.00
8.00
6.60
5.40
4.00
2.70
19.60
17.60
13.20
8.70
5.50
14.60
10.70
8.80
6.30
4.40
13.00
NOTE:- THE NET SAFE WORKING LOADS GIVEN ON TABLE-1 ARE BASED ON LIMITING VERTICAL
DEFLECTION OF SPAN/200 OR 6mm, WHICHEVER IS LESS.
= UDL IN KN/m2
16.02.15
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
t,4,14A-114'
JITENDER GUPTA
R.S.CHAUHAN
AMARJE
VIKRAM GUPTA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RAJAN SRIVASTAVA
S. CHANDA
PK MITTAL
S. CHANDA
Stds. Bureau
Stds. Committee
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
STANDARD No.
ELECTROFORGED GRATING
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7-68-0697 Rev. 3
SHT. 3 of 8
"A
0_
>-
''
111
17
X
tO
CNI
0
LJ-
MAIN
MEMBER
M1=1.=
incX Mi rDAIIWIrI TU
35 SPACING 0 30 c /c
z
Lai
CROSS
MEMBER
100
100
100
(REFER NOTE-11)
Z
W
DETAIL 'A'
0
0
0
0
100
100
100
rrA
l `13'
U,
w w
ce
.4(
0
(/)
Li FLAT 25x3
La
(i)
SECTION 1 1
E to0
E
C_)
1.
lz
CLEAR SPAN = 1b
CROSS MEMBER
MAIN MEMBER
DETAIL `B'
PLAN
* (REFER VIEW 4-4 IN SHEET 5 OF 8)
TABLE-2
WT. OF GRATING IN kg/m 2
(INDICATIVE ONLY, NOT FOR PAYMENT)
25x6
25x3
2.36
20.13
6mm SQUARE
TOTAL
TWISTED
BAR
2.54
25.03
PROPERTIES
WIDTH = 1053mm
C M4
Zxx
cm 3
MR
k gm
14.84
11.87
195.94
lxx
REMARKS
GRATING TYPE I
16.02.15
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
ivit,d4t0a.
JITENDER GUPTA
AMARJEE1
R.S.CHAUHAN
VIKRAM GUPTA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
it\L
2 )-/
RAJAN SRIVASTAVA
S. CHANDA
PK MITTAL
S. CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
igzEr Oatg
(A
STANDARD No.
ELECTROFORGED GRATING
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7-68-0697 Rev. 3
SHT.4 of 8
C
L_
E
E
M
75
75
75
MAIN
MEMBER
cD
X
II
CNI
L.
CI
CROSS
MEMBER
3
(REFER NOTE-11)
DETAIL - 'C'
0
cc
Q
II
m
w
75
75
t
LLI
I ED
f.f/
75
X
II
`f
i
I
't'
I
L.1
Zs'
FLAT 25x6
< 0
CY CJ
SECTION 2-2
E
E
co
II
E
E
CROSS MEMBER
MAIN MEMBER
xl
CLEAR SPAN = /b
PLAN
DETAIL - `D'
TABLE-3
WT. OF GRATING IN kg/m 2
(INDCATIVEONLY,OTFRPAYMENT)
PROPERTIES
WIDTH = 1056mm
25x6
8mm SQUARE
TWISTED BAR
TOTAL
lxx
cm4
Zxx
cm3
MR
kgm
36.92
6.14
43.06
24.2
19.4
319.69
REMARKS
GRATING TYPE - II
JITENDER GUPTA
16.02.15
R.S.CHAUHAN
Rev.
No.
Date
_tcr.
Purpose
AMARJEEt
VIKRAM GUPTA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
k-Y/
k
RAJAN SRIVASTAVA
PK MITTAL
S. CHANDA
S. CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
(+,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
riecAte 157 3,TC5Vi)
STANDARD No.
ELECTROFORGED GRATING
7-68-0697 Rev. 3
SHT.5 of 8
TWISTED BAR
8mm/6mm
CLAMP
5mm
ir;ATT
11")
uN
C- NMI
GRATING
/25x6 THK. M.S.
FLAT WITH 8 0
HOLES, TACK
WELDED TO STRL.
MEMBER
VIEW 3-3
VIEW 4-4
TWISTED BAR
cs1
GRATING
18 min.)
/
VIEW 4-4
GRATING FIXED WITH WELDING
(REFER NOTE-13)
WELD/CLAMP
TYP)
.5
O
ID
L (SPAN)
JITENDER GUPTA
R.S.CHAUHAN
Rev.
No.
Date
P44144 9'11-
Purpose
AMARJEET
VIKRAM GUPTA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RAJAH SRIVASTAVA
S. CHANDA
PK MITTAL
S. CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
GI ra..1t4
$'1gar 2154-eg
ereasWasTJacr.ii
STANDARD No.
ELECTROFORGED GRATING
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7-68-0697 Rev. 3
SHT.6 of 8
=111.11i===111111iM
11M111 1111=
MIIMINII 11111111
.IMINII MMIUM MININ!
-MMINIMMINIMM =11!
IN= 11M11IIII
1111111 111 =,
MOO INP21
M11111
111
111111
MINE M
WWI
NiM 1111111M111 4
GALVANISED
FLAT 25x6 ALROUND
& WELDED TO
GRATING FLAT
3
3
--------
IIM=111LIME==.11k111
MNIMIIIIINIII
11111111M111=
JOINIIIMIIIIIIIM
-111111111111111
MIIIIIIIIIMIlw /
MIIP" / 'IM W'
/
//
//
I
__I j
,
l
IIIIM111111111
AIMMIIIIII
__
11
MIIIIIMI
.41
JMNIIIIMIIIIIIII11.4, ,
...7 !"
MMINIIIIIIIIIIMMO
MINIEN= 1111111I
IMIIIIIIIIIIIIIIM
1111111111111111111
MIIII11111.===1M
WELDING SHALL BE
DONE ON ALL THE
FLATS AND BARS
----------------------
IMMim m
--------
GALVANISED
FLAT 25x6
BENT TO SHAPE
& WELDED TO
GRATING FLAT
I
All
1P2M
14M
WELDING SHALL BE
DONE ON ALL THE
FLATS AND BARS
CIRCULAR
RECTANGULAR
GALVANISED
FLAT 25x6 ALROUND
& WELDED TO GRATING FLAT
--k ----k
k ----1
IIINBENN ,
IIMMINN
IIINOMINLIM
11111MIN '
1 1111111111 51
..MMEIMERIMIEINEMEIMIRIMIMIIMIS
-7IMM
SI=IGISISEMSI.T-S1=IMIMMIE!SM
NMMEM
1111111111
1111=11,
104
MIMI
'
min
mom
SIM
UM
11111
SIM
In=
SUPPORTING MEMBER AS
AS PER DESIGN DWG OR
L-75x75x6 MINIMUM
BELOW GRATING
a=
aim
ams
.mon= ra.
Nonsm =oom
solimm
moomm =e
simimm =monom
imm mw =mimm
GALVANISED
FLAT 25x6 BENT TO SHAPE
& WELDED TO GRATING FLAT
INI7''
=M W/
1 1 1W ,
IMIll/
Illl ,
INI
101
INII
--"111111111111111 11P-
"IIMMEIMII
IM111 1
MLNI
ILMIni,
MIME
MEIN
1111Mral
Mil
IMIL
II1I
'MINIM
alll
AMINI
-41111MINIM
AMINIMMIL. ,,,,
..401111 ""
IIIIIIMINIM 1 ""' _.....11 011INI
SUPPORTING MEMBER AS
AS PER DESIGN DWG OR
L-75x75x6 MINIMUM
BELOW GRATING
illilMaGiallatiRGIGGEIRGIWOallORE
11111111111111 1111111111MIII
WELDING SHALL BE
DONE ON ALL THE
FLATS AND BARS
=lomii
WELDING SHALL BE
DONE ON ALL THE
FLATS AND BARS
CIRCULAR
RECTANGULAR
JITENDER GUPTA
16.02.15
R.S.CHAUHAN
Rev.
No.
Date
ilkemr144,11.411*
Purpose
AMARJEET
VIKRAM GUPTA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RAJAN SRIVASTAVA
S. CHANDA
PK MITTAL
S. CHANDA
Stds. Bureau
Stds. Committee
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
oi 6
514artaf5
(4.117
eirotetri.tmat+0
STANDARD No.
ELECTROFORGED GRATING
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7-68-0697 Rev. 3
SHT.7 of 8
STRINGER
oo
PROJECTION
CROSS MEMBER
MAIN MEMBER
14 0 HOLE
FOR M12 BOLTS
40x14
SLOTTED HOLE
FOR M12 BOLTS
(AS/IS:1367)
DETAIL- 'E'
VIEW 6-6
t
GALVANISED
END PL. 65x6
\ 31,
I
I
< FLAT 25x6*
SECTION 5-5
*ALL THE FLATS TO BE WELDED TO THE END FLATS
FULL WELDING AT
ALL FOUR CORNERS
ititiSSISSIMISMISSIMS
O
CN1
GALVANIZED 65X6TH K
I-
D-
70
45
746
996
PLAN
TYP. DETAIL OF GRATING TO BE USED AS TREAD FOR 750/1000 WIDE STAIRS
14144,),,,
3
JITENDER GUPTA
16.02.15
R.S.CHAUHAN
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
9P7
AMARJEET
VIKRAM GUPTA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RAJAN S ASTAVA
S. CHANDA
PK IAITTAL
S. CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
01
Igat fagteg
rirmre elsis4m.)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
,A
STANDARD No.
ELECTROFORGED GRATING
7-68-0697 Rev. 3
SHT.8 of 8
7_
94
10
OR
OR
TABLE-4
SECTION 9-9
SECTION 10-10
(TB=TRANSVERSE BOW)
(LB=LONGITUDINAL BOW)
PERMISSIBLE TOLERANCES
LOCATION
TOLERANCE (MM)
+0 / 5
WIDTH OF GRATING
+0 / 5
+1 / 0.5
0.4
BINDING:
TOP OF BINDING BAR ABOVE BEARING BAR
+0.5 / 0.5
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES
TOLERANCE (MM)
LOCATION
5 (OUT OF SQUARENESS OF
GRATING PANEL)
1:100
5 PER 1500 LENGTH OF
BEARING BARS
1:10
1:100
1:200
04.11.15
16.02.15
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
JITENDER GUPTA
R.S.CHAUHAN
AMARJEt
VIKRAM GUPTA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
S. CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
[(d+30) (m LAYERS)+140]
[(d+30)
(n
OUT OF 4mm
THK. M.S SHEET
OF DIA. 150
ROWS)+1101
ELECTRICAL
CABLE
ROAD CROSSING
ERC...(NO. AS
LAYOUT DWG.
.7
. ij
26
el
.
d/2
LEGEND:-
REFERENCE LEVEL
(REF. G.C. AREA DWG.)
d/2 I
30
0
if)
CI)
1.61
s(
016 BAR
TOP OF ERC,
CONCRETE BLOCK
(TYP)
DETAILS OF
VIEW-1
(SEE NOTE-6)
200
CABLE CROSSING
INDICATOR
1701
SECTION Y-Y
o
.,1
7
cal
0
FGL.
150
RCC
0
VIEW-1
6 2x25 50 REAR
WELD
6
I
"
*e
01
>
1786.
CABLE TRENCH
>J
SECTION X-X
SECTION X-X
(APPLICABLE FOR ERC & IRC)
0
0
1:c
REF. COORDINATE
LEVEL-A
--
cc
(S
LEVEL-A
LEVEL-B
REF. COORDINATE
LEVEL-B
X
X
REF. LINE
REF. LINE
0.
PLAN
PLAN
(REPRESENTATION ON AREA DRG.)
ENGINEERS
ligaf faRes w INDIA LIMITED
ei
raireff eiecorea51.54sr.rO
Rev.
No.
25.07.14
19.05.09
Date
Purpose
HV
SK
Prepared
by
S
RC/RKS
Checked
by
SC
NK
ND
Stds. Bureau
Stds. Committee
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
STANDARD No.
CABLE CROSSING UNDER ROAD
(P.V.C. PIPES)
7-65-0006 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
(/)
D>
cc
c:
/..
co
cro
<2
Cr0
< CO
c-
ET) r-
r-
7"
rn
2;
Co
CD
N7
cn
F4
Z 27
cn
pi
73
zA
r-
-n r 53 cr
n '
3
CD
3
3
A
4"..it
cw
CD "
)> 5; VD C/7 N7
=
-
4 CD p=
CD co
fri
X1 CD ea
2,- m0rn
-0 -13 I 0
>. 0
xi V) r
)4 0
-A
co Ej
S; :t "I
07 R
43
lE rn
=,
-(
rn
!9
c
ow
Co co
CD
-n m ri
17 ZE
rn
17
0 c4 -n t5
'
X -`
6 t5
(L)
mm0
F.
a ocrl
-A SR
rri
finn
c_ ZE
xi
CO 0
2r
m
<o3
r-
-0
a0,W-0
"
1
imb
0 I
In
r, rn0 )". rn ri
9 rn
rn pp, Fi iE I
= r3
ocn
rr--CD
iLre co
rn a co
rn =
o
-n
>.
m
(-)
g
o !-!1rn
mom
0 r- ? r
rn
rn
rn -n
27
rn Co Col 1/4"0 C5
rn CO m
cn CI
rn
m -A CO 3:
rn
ME . 5E
cim) P
r
211
rn
1) --I --I ). ol
.8 m CD 2:1 2
c,
* -a ---. z>
...
Z.47,
/5
01
,
2
o
gg
(!--1 c'zil
In
21I)
5
2 C:1
C C
MM
77
ri
ig .
5 5 \m
,
;3
_
m 2 "rirl
,R03 2 3 ,2- - ,-.sa1-1
gg
i d Ica
gggg
MX
E ri
:S
-61 C Z 71:1
r1
2 ,R1
co
E 32
:c1E0
9 12 g
rg g g g
en
600 MINIMUM
oz
2
-1
P.
T
O
cn
F.
<c 55 rn
7
0) .,_
ozzz
N
0
co
CD
0
0
91
m
r
0
0
.74
*
A
m
C
XI
.<
0
z
0
A
>
<
M
al
SA
>
-- M Cn
DJ
1
m
o
0
N
--,
I r- dp
J
,
i > 2
-ID
rn
."*.
0
I n
2= (I
FD o
- -1
o -1P
Z>
<z
04
c) cio
0 -n z
73 CD c) u)
E PI 7p
CO lE
::,
1 u) r -Ti
DJ
(.71
FYI
4> 4>
(7)
-n
0 F !..I
CD
mxI
..**%, -4
--I -a 1
>
cu 0 a)
c 0 cri
m CD ,
7,
co ). 0 ,ag, 72
co 2=
-o
m
rn 13 or) z (7)
> rn :4 > rn
>
0
-I
r C) z
Cn CO
0 il
c- :: c)
rn
o>
x u)
--/ a
rE
-9
r-
tn :rs cA N) 7-1 Z
U)
--I 3> 10 0 c--0 --1 --1 Y..
), :C C2 =15 r- C) DO :C 2 r0
-9 55 0
m 1-9
rn
01 > 2 c) 55 55 r0
co C:
(1) co c) u, Ul 2
-1 >
x -I m
,
-, 3> -I 1
(1) m :7 --I )7 )7
17.
m ,
0
5
r^-. c* m 0>
0 in
vZ>
>
0
c
0
PO
DJ 5
2E
x 0 w co C2 -0 ,1 c) c)
ci)
-9
mc)
__
)3
DJ -- u)
O
m
C W M CT) N
2
(j) 2 >
2:
4:.
)>
2=
7 7J
C)
<!-'
5;
-
-.
.--,
m
1 D> cri r- C) 77
-- )rr- 1-9 ) co r- 3: Si r5X/ P0gI
N)co
m2
). )0 co 2=
r- 17 m 3Z
c)
c)
1
<
-mO<>orn
-0 7:1K
A
m
to CA x Kr
-A cu DJ
-i 5 c) ). c:
m
m
>0z
rn
i
x 0 co
r
(.,, -0 -T3 xj Z
0 r- > m
xo _, fr1 r- cf)
Pa
cri
0m
r <-
0z
co
I2
-P. 0
rn
rn
z
0 I")
O
200 125
r-
71
600 MINIMUM
z
0
mom
Zzze,333
0>0
>0>
XJ,X1
crirai
E2-F
**N)
>0>u
rr-Oro
r.)
8'
R.;
F.;
cry
0
0
n V) 0 (./)
>>m
o
Z
1/4.1cn
z
0
Z>>
ozzz
0
v)
70
CD
ND
,to
99
-rn
.
g
2'.
g
rg
rt
al
ig
cn
8
al
r6
El
F.) P
o ?, = o
c-) *
c
M 0
-0
R;
.12
6
S.
le
6i 61
g
g
g,,
"
8
C-71
"
8
2 03
la/
71
ma
m r71
2 Pi
0
5 -0
-o
E p
rt- rn
M c?)I 1
tsi
cn
-^3
CZ
ry
E 711
g Le Eril
o
.
CI
-4
in
cn..t
VI
g,
(7
-r1
co V)
0 A)
CD
en
s.
Irn0-0>10
z v)Z
>F
-n - 0 -0
Z ICT9
<
(4)
V) _Ti m p
m
F
%...
0
co
I-0
r- z
>0
no
cow
cn
r- C)
-9
rn 20
D'
0 c
>7 o > c
o r z
>n >oz
<co,rxmco
mm
zor>m
mm>zmrv)
m
m r
0 v)
oz m c c)-nz
<o
2:7
m
o cn
m>
-0
(175
mo
-9
co mo
0o
o
rn
Eo c_ :c
$ ?); 4; (71 c)
ul 0
Cri
2 rC)
C,
0 -0 co -n -A
o
(/)
co
o
0
ri
Z 20 N3 23
rn :1 ),
o 0
-1
n
cn >
Z
>
2 m
OZ
__I XI
COrKOr
__ -A
rn rn
rZ
oj 5E
al co
rn 3:
r
m- IM
7JK
1 0 7:)><T=
xcno>
> _o 3 z
--r-j
0 5 3
m
m
-
cc._
>
>
r
M 0
-0 C:
c- 10 -A -A D.
i-T3-oclOmirm
rn rn --I CD 2 0 Er) (7.5 rco CD 3 1 m
Cf.)
0
1
L3
AS MENTIONED ON AREA DRG.
-h >
rAi
r
(SEE NOTE-6)
iKx,
>Z>
K
0>
X/ M
0
m o rn
z z z
com.rsi
0 . 0.
mono,
EF2F
cn>
r or o
* CA "
300
600 MINIMUM
A
r-
L50x50 x6
L40X40X5
FINISHED FLOOR LEVEL
REFERENCE LINE
OF UNIT
X
/0
U N IT FLOORIN G
_ Tr _r
F.G.L
L_
00
O >.<
L)
>
B.L OF DRAIN
12
AS PER LAYOUT
T10 @200c/c
lz.
25
25
< TYP
12
R.C.0 GRADE
SAME AS PAVEMENT / SEE NOTE-2
2
LEAN CONCRETE. 1:5:10
T10 EQUI SPACED
NOTES.75
1 00
300
100
75
a)
GRADE OF CONCRETE
b)
c)
25
7.5
LC)
LW
REFERENCE LINE
111111111111 1
11111111111111
TO ANGLE
FLAT 35X6
(375 LONG)
L 50x50X6
SECTION X-X
DETAIL - 'X'
JLIm4-1)
(A
1 1 .01 1 3
08.1 0.07
Rev.
Date
No.
DM
VC
Prepared
Checked
by
by
Purpose
STANDARD No.
UNIT DRAINAGE DETAILS
(RECTANGULAR DITCH DETAILS)
7-65-0272 Rev.4
Page 1 of 1
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
7ZI
CM
1
CO
-n
m
m
cn
.7c
1.3
m-C1
z 0
RI
rn
4=
C1
In
'
-0
rn 3 8
C1 31. cb
..1
-1
. 0
CO P - --.
< . F*4
In rn
X 2 0b
(A
0
-I
o
X
3).
-0
Z
73
A
(-)
r-
o
a
P
X
mm
Xi Z
31.
>c
/3 -a
D. 3''.
< <
RI RI
....i
RI RI
-1
-0 -0
"
0-
.7.
r..)
VI
x)
X
rn
-"I
=I
i.- X
m
XX
3<
1.
X In
o m
In rn
v ei)
rn
C
(15.
=
Zm
PC
I-
V)
0 .11/1
X
-0
D.
In
o o E
..., RI
m . ?(
xi
a a-cr c
o .c
I> X -13 "3
CO
rn
..
z m
2s.
-C Z
--/
cr) m
z .c
4 a,
VI V) 7:1 ....1
Cr/ .=
CI -13
RI -I -I m
70 =
3. o
=
A
VI
a CA 0 RI
rn
Z
>
r0
Z
03
x
rri
1=1 CI
Z
a -I
C
'a
=
rn m
X
.11 rn
73
.<
tai C
a
MI
rn
0
>z
r
r
0
rn
Ti
-4
-.I
fD
-1,3
ZCD
O
<
CD 0
m
a 17
m
z
m
Z
>
rn
rn
rn
:13
rn
rn
rn
rn
__.: - , m:
-< 0 X
x.
v, I-,--
VI S
a PP
.......
i..n
ar .......
(")
A A
-1 CJI
3I. -.
....1 c
0
A
.
m
0 -1
m
03 3.
413
m 1,1 -a
Z
-, (,)
!A
_0 n
pi
3>
..< F 00
-0 z
rn
-I Cn
v)
:-...
>C
2.,
-n 0
m
4. :b.
a
X a
T. -I
'O
aa
-......
A
Am
M
- m
44
X VI
03
_
F
tIr
v) ).
v,
P m VI
X =
-I
-,
30
mz
z c_
71 X
_ D
-u >
z
cn
-4 0
>
0
xi r"
-CI
0 3..0
CD
(A
-1 c-
44 rn
CO x
m
1,1
x 9
1-
x
z
In
...,
mi
0
rn
a
7J =
0
r<
2
SI.. ,....
V) `-'
7:1
71
rl ma3 ;31 0
K
= 7.'
MI
0 -
=
-0
0 m
X
-n
0
X/
X
X
4-)
ri IoA co
. s
32.
m
..-I xj
In
3"
(7 r-.1 VI
co =
o
-< X v) 2
a
i
p
r7, p 0 v x. VI
-.4
-0 rn
z
X xi
mxi
-9 "I 1-rn
f*
',u
(/) mc0
_4
co
0
,,, X
0 = 2 In
-.< -1
-T1 A. GI _I
IA
X 3P"
-I
co m
0
73 CA
; R.;
co 10
8 1 1
t' rn
v, *i=
_1 rn
=
RI p
al 1
:a M
3
(A
,i.p
:ivos m
-1
o.:3 E>C
5A
X
m"
E
Ern
mM
-.4 0
<
m
z 3
c
#
"ri
0
-M
z
w 3m
8
A
A 4! ...,
x7
gc
rn
,A
;
CI
r.r. > ; 2
p
,n
15El 12 gi
2C
Xl
ac V) 3.
73
- X
22
-=
-t
m
=. LA
--I
tn 3,,
1 xi co,
n o rn
X
..... WI rn
I.
X -.1 VI F
"0
0
0 Te.
/1 C
X
*=
-I =
e., 03
0
li
- t5=
,...
m ..<
rn X
C3
, x
-1
a
g
73
4 0
rn czt
-0 cy
in
"a
Z
3. ri".
Xg0
X
K3 D.
Y.' 0 C
IV C w
-0
,..4
F.
c7
r, .,
:...I
V)
(a
C14
C
it -4 z
--]
Isz -0-m
0 m ..17
X c , 0 31.
1.;:: ::
z
Cl)
0
17. X
t1
m
-u rcf)
C 1:I
ZE
-)
Fil.-1
XI
..c
In
'
K
m
Z
-.I
RI
F co
0
a
0V
CA
CD
I
MI .n
--1
Q1
.4:.
CI1
..1
0
70
a
X/ 0
X
,/
..--
(7: 0
()
In n
3'
XI
V)
0 -1:/ 0-)
73
m
Ts
I =
z
C)
Cl
4
-CI
m
CA
- 2
r: r.o
M C1
SV
53
VI
c ==
x
-o v)
--,
I> IA M 32.
0 rn
<0 a p
F3
(n
-43
-.1
0
-.1
m
I- -0 ..4 m a
0
G0
a
0 oo
.,
0
z a)
X
0 C rri
CP 0
"X ; m
I C." 0
-I 4.)
x
,1,. c)
2 F) ..,
0. VI 70 0
4 rn X -..1
0 >e, c)
0:: :1
4- c.)
:'
(.;{ C)
:
z
c z z a N
~zit4
ENGINEERS
$1g-ar 0154- g w INDIA LIMITED
1.~ cYrTK M13,4.1
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR FABRICATION AND
ERECTION OF PIPING
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 15
30.07.14
31.03.09
05.06.03
15.09.98
14.04.93
Rev.
No
AK
SC
VKB
SC
ND
RN
DM
BN
SKG
SH
BRB
NS
AS
AKG
BPV
GRR
AS
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Date
RN
ATD
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
RLJI ;Mes
1~1 C-1,9,1, 051 3W1,)
ENGINEEFZS
o INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt ol Indo Undertakngt
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 15
Abbreviations:
A.S.
:
ASME :
C.I.
:
C.S.
:
HMTD :
IBR
LTCS :
NACE :
NB
NDT :
P&ID :
PMI
S.S.
SMMS :
Alloy Steel
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
Cast Iron
Carbon Steel
Heat & Mass Transfer Division
Indian Boiler Regulations
Low Temperature Carbon Steel
National Association of Corrosion Engineers
Nominal Bore
Non Destructive Testing
Piping and Instrumentation Diagram
Positive Material Identification
Stainless Steel
Specialist Material & Maintenance Services
Convenor :
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
Mr. M. Ismaeel
Mr. Amrendra Kumar
Mr. G. Balaji
Mr. K.J. Harinarayanan (HMTD)
Mr. P P Lahiri / Mr. S. Ghoshal (SMMS)
Mr. S. Mukherjee (Construction)
Mr. K.V.K. Naidu (Projects)
OgLar
1>ffeR
zig
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Tool ol Ind2 Undertakin)
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 15
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
.4
3.0
BASIS OF WORK
4.0
FABRICATION
5.0
ERECTION
11
fffl
i
t
eg
.1"2-, 21,1,1,
151,41,411
1.0
ENGNEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertalong)
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 15
SCOPE
This specification covers general requirements of fabrication and erection of above ground
and trench piping systems at site. The specification covers the scope of work of Contractor,
basis of work to be carried out by Contractor and standards, specifications and normal
practice to be followed during fabrication and erection by the Contractor.
2.0
2.1
Transportation of required piping materials (as described in C1.2.1.1), pipe support (material
as described in Cl. 2.3) and all other necessary piping materials from Owner's storage point
or Contractor's storage point (in case of Contractor's scope of supply) to work site/shop
including raising store requisitions for issue of materials in the prescribed format &
maintaining an account of the materials received from Owner's stores.
2.1.1
Piping materials include the following but not limited to the same.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Specialty items like online filters, ejectors, sample coolers, steam traps, strainers, air
traps, springs, silencers, snubbers, steam and condensate manifolds, injection nozzles,
MOVs, sight glass, spray nozzles, integrated steam traps, hoses, hose couplings, etc.
i.
Online instruments like control valve, orifice flange, rotameter, safety valves,
restriction orifice, rupture disc, de-super heaters, corrosion probes, annubar, magnetic
flow meter, ultrasonic flow meter, Coriolis mass flow meters, venturi PG/PT/ Flow
transmitter, ejectors, static mixers, flame arrestors, thermal flow switches, prefabricated hook-ups etc.
j.
2.2
Shop & field fabrication and erection of piping in accordance with documents listed under
C1.3.0 i.e. 'BASIS OF WORK' including erection of all piping materials enumerated above.
2.3
Fabrication and erection of pipe supports like shoe, saddle, guide, stops, anchors, clips,
cradles, hangers, turn-buckles, supporting fixtures, bracket cantilevers, struts, tee-posts
including erection of spring supports, sway braces, dummy pipes, corrosion pads/protection
shields, low friction pads, clamps, special support, expansion bellows, steam and condensate
manifolds supports etc. Corrosion Pads/Protection shields, stiffeners and stiffening rings, if
not covered in the specifications/standards, shall be of the same material as of parent pipes.
ENGINEEFZS
dg INDIA LIMITED
Odi
GoN of Ind,a Underta.9)
.R27T
2.4
0,
1 J~1,
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 5 of 15
2.4.1
Fabrication of piping specials like special radius bends, reducers, mitres etc.
2.4.2
Fabrication of plain and threaded nipples from pipes as required during erection.
2.4.3
2.4.4
Fabrication of odd angle elbow like 60, 30 or any other angle from 90/45 elbows as and
when required.
2.4.5
Fabrication of flange, reducing flange, blind flange, spectacle blinds as and when required.
2.4.6
2.4.7
Grinding of edges of pipes, fittings, flanges etc. to match mating edges of uneven/different
thickness wherever required.
2.4.8
Fabrication of circular pipe for steam rings, fire water lines, utility lines.
2.4.9
2.4.10
2.4.11
Fabrication and welding of reinforcement pads at branch pipe locations wherever required.
2.4.12
Equipment nozzle reinforcement with pads, jacket & stiffeners wherever required.
2.4.13
2.4.14
Fabrication of chain operation arrangement for valves, wherever required. A11 material
required for this modification shall be supplied by Contractor.
2.4.15
Fabrication and erection in position of funnels required for OWS/ SS/ Condensate blow
down system as per direction of Engineer-in-charge.
2.4.16
Grinding/ finishing of uneven surfaces/ joints after welding. Internal grinding of welds of
orifice flanges to render smooth surface.
2.4.17
Tapping and drilling of holes in flanges, blind flanges, piping connections for jack screw, if
required.
2.4.18
2.5
2.6
Piping isometrics for main process/utility lines shall be provided to the Contractor.
Preparation of miscellaneous small bore isometrics with bill of materials for process and
utility lines (up to 11/2" size) like instruments & pump flushing / cooling, sample connection,
purging, pump casing vents & drains, pump Base plate drains, control valve drains / vent to
flare, instrument drains & vents, steam tracing (non-IBR) from steam supply stations up to
condensate recovery station, and lines specified as field routed within the Unit battery limit
ry
Ogz-drr 2fal-egI
1.1r7R Crt-LISTC 2/513,721,)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govl o Indu UnclettakIng)
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 6 of 15
as and when required are in Contractor's scope of work. Approval for these isometrics
prepared by the Contractor shall be taken from Engineer-in-charge before erection.
Small bore piping isometrics given by Owner shall be rechecked by Contractor before
erection and installation.
2.7
2.8
Spun concrete lining of the inside of pipes 3" NB & above including fittings and flanges as
required in accordance with specification.
2.9
Rubber lining inside pipes, fittings, flanges as and when required, in accordance with
specification.
2.10
Radiography, stress relieving, dye penetration, magnetic particle test etc. as required in
specification.
2.11
Performing PMI using alloy analyzers as per `Standard Specification for Positive Material
Identification at Construction Sites, 6-82-0002'.
2.12
Casting of concrete pedestals and Fabrication and erection of small structures/ platforms for
pipe supports and valve operation / attending some instruments, spectacle blinds etc.,
providing brackets, modification / extension of platforms, providing additional platforms /
ladders for improving / providing accessibility.
2.13
Providing insert plates with anchor fasteners in concrete structures / paved floors and repair
of platform gratings around pipe openings and providing suitable members for support
under the platform grating.
2.14
Making material reconciliation statement and return of Owner's supply left over materials to
Owner's storage.
2.15
Flushing and testing of all piping systems as per standard specification for inspection,
flushing and testing of piping systems (Specification No. 6-44-0013). The accessories
required for blinding the line like flange, blind flange, gasket (all sizes, type and rating),
stud-bolts, flexible hoses etc. are to be arranged by the Contractor. During flushing the
discharged water / air shall be drained / routed as directed by the Engineer In Charge.
2.16
Contractor shall prepare welding specifications for all weld joints where dissimilar welding
will be performed, and obtain approval from EIL.
2.17
Contractor to ensure meeting all requirements for carrying out work in shutdown/running
plant.
2.18
Pickling (as and when applicable) as per Job specification(s) for chemical cleaning of CS
suction piping of compressors, SS Piping, Weldments etc, as applicable.
2.19
Chemical Cleaning/ Hydro jet cleaning as per marked-up P&IDs with supply of chemicals,
consumables, DM water, equipments, boilers, coupons, tools & tackles and other testing
equipments required for the same.
31
ar
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
in Govt ot India Undertaloow
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 7 of 15
3.0
3.1
The complete piping work shall be carried out in accordance with the following:
3.1.1
"Approved for Construction" drawings and sketches issued by EIL to the Contractor - Plans
and/or Isometrics.
3.1.2
"Approved for Construction" drawings and sketches issued by Turn-key bidders to the
Contractor - Plans and/or Isometrics.
3.1.3
3.1.4
Drawings, sketches and documents prepared by Contractor duly approved by Engineer-inCharge (such as isometrics of small bore piping and offsite piping etc.).
3.1.6
3.1.7
a.
b.
c.
d.
Line list
e.
Piping support indices (only in offsite), if supports are not shown in plan.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Any other EIL or OTHER specifications attached with Piping Material Specification
or special condition of contract (such as standard for cement lining of pipe, standard
ofjacketed piping, standard for steam tracing, Dimensional Tolerances etc.)
j.
k.
Standard Spec for application of torque & hydraulic bolt tension for flange joints (676-0002) and its addendum, if any.
ASME B 31.3
Process Piping
b.
c.
IBR Regulations
d.
ASME Sec. IX
Og-ar fa2es
e.
NACE Std.
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 8 of 15
Note : A11 codes referred shall be latest edition, at the time of award of contract.
3.2
Deviations
Where a deviation from the "Basic of Work" and approved job procedure described above is
required or where the basis of work does not cover a particular situation, the matter shall be
brought to the notice of Engineer-in-Charge and the work carried out only after obtaining
written approval from him in each case.
4.0
FABRICATION
4.1
Piping Material
Pipe, pipe fittings, flanges, valves, gaskets, studs bolts etc. used in a given piping system
shall be strictly as per the "Piping Material Specification" for the "Pipe Class" specified for
that system. To ensure the above requirement, all piping material supplied by the Owner /
Contractor shall have proper identification marks as per relevant standards / EIL
specifications / Licensors specification. Contractor shall provide identification marks on left
over pipe lengths wherever marked up pipe lengths have been fabricated/erected. Materialtraceability is to be maintained for A.S., S.S., NACE, LTCS, material for Hydrogen service
and other exotic materials by way of transferring heat number, etc. (hard punching) as per
approved procedure. This shall be in addition to colour coding for all piping materials to
avoid mix-up.
For the purpose of common understanding the construction job procedure, to be submitted
by the Contractor, shall include proposal for
4.2
Dimensional Tolerances
Dimensional tolerances for piping fabrication shall be as per EIL Standard No. 7-44-0486.
The Contractor shall be responsible for working to the dimensions shown on the drawings.
However, the Contractor shall bear in mind that there may be variations between the
dimensions shown in the drawing and those actually existing at site due to minor variations
in the location of equipments, inserts, structures etc. To take care of there variations "Field
Welds" shall be provided during piping fabrication. An extra pipe length of 100 mm over
and above the dimensions indicated in the drawing may be left on one nide of the pipe at
each of the field welds. During erection, the pipe end with extra length at each field weld,
shall be cut to obtain the actual dimension occurring at site. Isometrics, if supplied may have
the field welds marked on them. However, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to
provide adequate number of field welds. In any case no extra claims will be entertained
from the Contractor on this account. Wherever errors / omissions occur in drawings and
Bills of Materials it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to notify the Engineer-in-Charge
prior to fabrication or erection.
4.3
IBR Piping
4.3.1
Contractor shall obtain approval for the piping systems falling under purview of IBR from
the statutory Indian Boiler Regulations (IBR) authority of the state where the plant is
5gU Offl g
1.1WR
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 9 of 15
situated. The Owner shall provide documentation for the IBR System. The Contractor shall
carry out the fabrications, erection and testing of this piping as per requirements of Indian
Boiler Regulations and to the entire satisfaction of the Local Boiler Inspector. The
Contractor shall also get the approval of IBR inspector for all fabrication and testing done
by him at his own cost. All certificates of approval shall be in proper IBR forms.
4.3.2
IBR Package for residual, field routed and site modified steam lines shall be prepared by the
Contractor. IBR approval for the same shall be in Contractor's scope, at his own cost.
4.4
Pipe Joints
The piping class of each line specifies the type of pipe joints to be adopted. In general,
joining of lines 2" and above in process and utility piping shall be accomplished by buttwelds. Joining of lines 1-1/2" and below shall be by socket welding/butt welding/threaded
joints as specified in "Piping Material Specifications". However, in piping 1-1/2" and below
where socket welding/ threaded joints are specified butt - welds may be used with the
approval of Engineer-in-Charge for pipe to pipe joining in long runs of piping. This is only
applicable for non-galvanized piping without lining.
Flange joints shall be used at connections to Vessels, Equipment's, Valves and where
required for ease of erection and maintenance as indicated in drawings.
4.5
4.6
Screwed Piping
In general, Galvanized piping shall have threads as per IS:554 or ANSI B2.1 NPT as
required to match threads on fittings, valves etc. All other piping shall have threads as per
ANSI B2.1, tapered unless specified otherwise.
Threads shall be clean cut, without any burrs or stripping and the ends shall be reamed.
Threading of pipes shall be done preferably after bending, forging or heat treating
operations. If this is not possible, threads shall be gauge checked and chased after welding
heat treatment etc.
During assembly of threaded joints, all threads of pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly
cleaned of cuttings, dirt, oil or any other foreign matter. The male threads shall be coated
with thread sealant and the joint tightened sufficiently for the threads to seize and give a
leakproof joint. Threaded joints to be seal-welded shall be cleaned of all foreign matter,
including sealant and made up to full thread engagement before seal welding.
4.7
Flange Connections
All flange facings shall be true and perpendicular to the axis of pipe to which they are
attached. Flanged bolt holes shall straddle the normal centerlines unless different orientation
is shown in the drawing.
Wherever jack screws are to be provided, drilling and tapping for the jack screws in the I
flange, shall be done as per EIL Standard before welding it to the pipe.
4.8
Branch Connections
31
fg-r;Ir fa2e5
14.2R ar a,
W,
7,1~1)
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 10 of 15
Branch connections shall be as indicated in the piping material specifications. For end
preparation, alignment, spacing, fit-up and welding of branch connections refer welding
specifications. Templates shall be used wherever required to ensure accurate cutting and
proper fit-up.
For all branch connections accomplished either by pipe to pipe connections or by using
forged tees the rates quoted for piping shall be inclusive of this work.
Reinforcement pads shall be provided wherever indicated in drawings/ specifications etc.
4.9
Bending
Bending shall be as per ASME B31.3 except that corrugated or creased bends shall not be
used.
Cold bends for lines 1-1/2" and below, with a bend radius of 5 times the nominal diameter
shall be used as required in place of elbows wherever allowed by piping specifications.
Bending of pipes 2" and above may be required in some cases like that for headers around
heaters, reactors etc.
The completed bend shall have a smooth surface, free from cracks, buckles, wrinkles,
bulges, flat spots and other serious defects. They shall be true to dimensions. The flattening
of a bend, as measured by the difference between the maximum and minimum diameters at
any cross-section, shall not exceed 8% and 3% of the nominal outside diameter, for internal
and external pressure respectively.
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
Galvanized Piping
Galvanized carbon steel piping shall be completely cold worked, so as not to damage
galvanized surfaces. This piping involves only threaded joints and additional external
threading on pipes may be required to be done as per requirement.
fg--a,r tral
e
-g
oloo,r1.,om,
4.14
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 11 of 15
Jacketed Piping
The Jacketing shall be done in accordance with EIL Specification or Licensors specification
as suggested in material specification or special condition of contract.
Pre-assembly of jacketed elements to the maximum extent possible shall be accomplished at
shop by Contractor. Position of jump-over and nozzles on the jacket pipes, fittings etc. shall
be marked according to pipe disposition and those shall be prefabricated to avoid damaging
of inner pipe and obstruction of jacket space. However, valves, flow glasses, in line
instruments or even fittings shall be supplied as jacketed.
4.15
4.16
Miscellaneous
4.16.1
Contractor shall fabricate miscellaneous elements like flash pot, seal pot, sample cooler,
supporting elements like turn-buckles, extension of spindles and interlocking arrangement of
valves, operating platforms as required by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.16.2
4.16.3
5.0
ERECTION
5.1
5.2
Piping Routing
No deviations from the piping route indicated in drawings shall be permitted without the
consent of Engineer-in-Charge.
Pipe to pipe, pipe to structure / equipments distances / clearances as shown in the drawings
shall be strictly followed as these clearances may be required for the free expansion of
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$1gul8M--eg
1.117R
+1,13,70,)
(A
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 12 of 15
piping / equipment. No deviations from these clearances shall be permissible without the
approval of Engineer-in-Charge.
In case of fouling of a line with other piping, structure, equipment etc. the matter shall be
brought to the notice of Engineer-in-Charge and corrective action shall be taken as per his
instructions.
5.3
Cold Pull
Wherever cold pull is specified, the Contractor shall maintain the necessary gap, as
indicated in the drawing. Confirmation in writing shall be obtained by the Contractor from
the Engineer-in-Charge, certifying that the gap between the pipes is as indicated in the
drawing, before drawing the cold pull. Stress relieving shall be performed before removing
the gadgets for cold pulling.
5.4
Slopes
Slopes specified for various lines in the drawings / P&ID shall be maintained by the
Contractor. Corrective action shall be taken by the Contractor in consultation with Engineerin-Charge wherever the Contractor is not able to maintain the specified slope.
5.5
5.5.1
Al1 Expansion joints / Bellows shall be installed in accordance with the specification and
installation drawings, supplied to the Contractor.
5.5.2
a.
Upon receipt, the Contractor shall remove the Expansion Joints/ Bellows from the
case(s) and check for any damage occurred during transit.
b.
The Contractor shall bring to the notice of the Engineer-in- Charge any damage done
to the bellows / corrugations, hinges, tie-rods, flanges/ weld ends etc.
c.
Each Expansion Joint / Bellow shall be blown free of dust / foreign matter with
compressed air or cleaned with a piece of cloth.
a.
For handling and installation of Expansion Joints, great care shall be taken while
aligning. An Expansion Joints shall never be slinged from bellows corrugations/
external shrouds, tie / rods, angles.
b.
An Expansion Joints / Bellow shall preferably be slinged from the end pipes / flanges
or on the middle pipe.
a.
b.
Expansion Joints stop blocks shall be carefully removed after hydrostatic testing.
Angles welded to the flanges or weld ends shall be trimmed by saw as per
manufacturer's instructions and the flanges or weld ends shall be ground smooth.
a.
The pipe ends in which the Expansion Joint is to be installed shall be perfectly aligned
or shall have specified lateral deflection as noted on the relevant drawings.
b.
The pipe ends / flanges shall be spaced at a distance specified in the drawings.
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
31
$1g-a,ffum
r 02eg
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 13 of 15
5.5.6
The Expansion Joint shall be placed between the mating pipe ends / flanges and shall be
tack welded/bolted. The mating pipes shall again be checked for correct alignment.
5.5.7
Butt-welding shall be carried out at each end of the expansion joint. For flanged Expansion
Joint, the mating flanges shall be bolted.
5.5.8
After the Expansion Joint is installed the Contractor shall ensure that the mating pipes and
Expansion Joints are in correct alignment and that the pipes are well supported and guided.
5.5.9
The Expansion Joint shall not have any lateral deflection. The Contractor shall maintain
parallelism of restraining rings or bellows convolutions.
5.5.10 Precautions
5.6
a.
For carrying out welding, earthing lead shall not be attached with the Expansion Joint.
b.
The Expansion bellow shall be protected from arc weld spot and welding spatter.
c.
Hydrostatic Testing of the system having Expansion Joint shall be performed with
shipping lugs in position. These lugs shall be removed after testing and certification
is over.
Flange Connections
While fitting up mating flanges, care shall be exercised to properly align the pipes and to
check the flanges for trueness, so that faces of the flanges can be pulled together, without
inducing any stresses in the pipes and the equipment nozzles. Extra care shall be taken for
flange connections to pumps, turbines, compressors, cold boxes, air coolers etc. The flange
connections to these equipments shall be checked for misalignment, excessive gap etc. after
the final alignment of the equipment is over. The joint shall be made up after obtaining
approval of Engineer-in-Charge.
Hydraulic bolt tensioning & torque tensioning shall be performed on flange joints as per the
requirements specified in "Standard Specification for application of Torque & Hydraulic
Bolt Tension for flange joints," 6-76-0002 and its addendum, if any.
Temporary protective covers shall be retained on all flange connections of pumps, turbines,
compressors and other similar equipments, until the piping is finally connected, so as to
avoid any foreign material from entering these equipments.
The assembly of a flange joint shall be done in such a way that the gasket between these
flange faces is uniformly compressed. To achieve this, the bolts shall be tightened in a
proper sequence. A11 bolts shall extend completely through their nuts but not more than 1/4".
Steel to C.I. flange joints, if any, shall be made up with extreme care, tightening the bolts
uniformly after bringing flange flush with gaskets with accurate pattern and lateral
alignment.
5.7
in-Charge, even if these are not shown in the drawings. The details of vents and drains shall
be as per piping material specifications / job standards.
Og'-ar
5.8
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 14 of 15
Valves
Valves shall be installed with spindle / actuator orientation / position as shown in the layout
drawings. In case of any difficulty in doing this or if the spindle orientation / position is not
shown in the drawings, the Engineer-in-Charge shall be consulted and work done as per his
instructions. Care shall be exercised to ensure that globe valves, check valves, and other unidirectional valves are installed with the "Flow direction arrow "on the valve body pointing
in the correct direction. If the direction of the arrow is not marked on such valves, this shall
be done in the presence of Engineer-in-Charge before installation.
Fabrication of stem extensions, locking arrangements and interlocking arrangements of
valves (if called for), shall be carried out as per drawings/ instructions of Engineer-inCharge.
5.9
Instruments
Installation of in-line instruments such as control valve, orifice flange, rotameter, safety
valves, restriction orifice, rupture disc, de-super heaters, corrosion probes, annubar,
magnetic flow meter, ultrasonic flow meter, Coriolis mass flow meters, venturi PG/PT/
Flow transmitter, ejectors, etc. and Shut Down Valves with fireboxes shall form a part of
piping erection work.
Fabrication and erection of piping upto first block valve / nozzle / flange for installation of
offline Instruments for measurement of level, pressure, temperature, flow etc. shall also
form part of piping construction work. The limits of piping and instrumentation work will be
shown in drawings / standards / specifications. Orientations / locations of take-offs for
temperature, pressure, flow, level connections etc. shown in drawings shall be maintained.
Flushing and testing of piping systems which include instruments mentioned above and the
precautions to be taken are covered in flushing, testing and inspection of piping (EIL Spec.
6-44-0013). Care shall be exercised and adequate precautions taken to avoid damage and
entry foreign matter into instruments during transportation, installation, testing etc.
5.10
5.11
5.12
Pipe Supports
Pipe supports are designed and located to effectively sustain the weight and thermal effects
of the piping system and to prevent its vibrations. Location and design of pipe supports will
be shown in drawings for lines 2" NB & above. For lines 11/2"NB & below Contractor
shall locate and design pipe supports in line with EIL Stds. In case of IBR Lines 1 1/2"NB &
below only indicative supporting shall be provided & detailing of such supports is in
Contractor's scope. Contractor shall obtain approval of Engineer - in - Charge on drawings
prepared by Contractor, before erection. However, any extra supports desired by Engineerin-Charge shall also be installed.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
1~1 ,i,cmtJ9-0,-.1)
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 15 of 15
No pipe shoe / cradle shall be offset unless specifically shown in the drawings.
Hanger rods shall be installed inclined in a direction opposite to the direction in which the
pipe move during expansion.
Preset pins of all spring supports shall be removed only after hydrostatic testing and
insulation is over. Springs shall be checked for the range of movement and adjusted if
necessary to obtain the correct positioning in cold condition. These shall be subsequently
adjusted to hot setting in operating condition. The following points shall be checked after
installation, with the Engineer-in-Charge and necessary confirmation in writing obtained
certifying that:
-
if
$1g-ar f8151eg
rlecne m,
1.17R
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
,K15 ,
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
INSPECTION, FLUSHING AND
TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS
6-44-0013 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 9
-crr-4Wr 19-*7-41
flzIT
f-49-k7
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
INSPECTION, FLUSHING AND
TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS
C 1
,11
4
01.07.13
27.08.07
05.06.03
15.09.98
Rev.
No
06.04.83
Date
Purpose
RN TD DM
RN
ATD
DM
VC
RN
DM
BN
SKG
SH
BRB
NS
AS
DB
DB
Prepared
by
Checked
by
SLG
RSB
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
rtg-ar tt154-eg
eietnre 0,7 JT7.11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undeilak.9)
6-44-0013 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
ASME :
IBR
PMI
ppm
SS
Stainless Steel
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
Mr. M. Ismaeel
Mr. Amrendra Kumar
Mr. G. Balaji
Mr. Ajay Shrivastava
Mr. K.J. Harinarayanan (HMTD)
Mr. P P Lahiri / Mr. S. Ghoshal (SMMS)
Mr. G.K. Iyer (Construction)
Mr. K.V.K. Naidu (Projects)
31
INSPECTION, FLUSHING AND
fg-a(.77nr taf*reg INDIA LIMITED TESTING
OF PIPING SYSTEMS
G" "'" Unde"'"g)
6-44-0013 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCES
3.0
INSPECTION
4.0
FLUSHING
5.0
PRESSURE TESTING
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
NIRY1 esreM7F
1.0
3,10.1)
6-44-0013 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 9
SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements for inspection, flushing and testing of
piping systems. However, testing of steam lines falling under IBR shall also be governed by
Indian Boiler Regulations.
Flushing and testing of all piping systems shall be witnessed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
2.0 REFERENCES
ASME B31.3
Process Piping
IBR
3.0 INSPECTION
During various stages and after completion of fabrication and erection, the piping system shall
be inspected by the Engineer-In-Charge to ensure that:
Proper piping material has been used.
PMI has been performed as per EIL specification '6-82-0002'.
Piping has been erected as per drawings and instructions of Engineer-In-Charge.
All supports have been installed correctly.
Test preparations mentioned in this specification have been carried out.
4.0 FLUSHING
Flushing of all lines shall be done before pressure testing.
Flushing shall be done by 'fresh potable water' or by 'dry compressed air wherever water
flushing is not desirable to clean the pipe of all dirt, debris or loose foreign material.
Required pressure for water flushing shall meet the fire hydrant pressure or utility water
pressure. For air flushing, the line/system shall be pressurized by compressed air at the
required pressure which shall be 3.5 kg/cm2g maximum. The pressure shall then be released
by quick opening of a valve, already in line or installed temporarily for this purpose. This
procedure shall be repeated as many times as required till the inside of the pipe is fully
cleaned.
In line instruments like control valves, orifice plates, rotameters, safety valves and other
instruments like thermowells which may interfere with flushing shall not be included in
flushing circuit.
The screens/meshes shall be removed from all permanent strainers before flushing.
Screens/meshes shall be reinstalled after flushing but before testing.
During flushing temporary strainers shall be retained. These shall be removed, cleaned and
reinstalled after flushing, but, before testing.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
faf5reg
1.11R, ti,Prel>1393,1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
G" In Unde"")
6-44-0013 Rev. 4
Page 5 of 9
In case any equipment such as column, vessel, exchanger etc. form part of a piping circuit
during flushing, this shall be done with the approval of Engineer-In-Charge. However,
equipments thus included in the circuit shall be completely drained and dried with compressed
air after flushing is completed.
During flushing discharged water/air shall be drained to the place directed by the Engineer-InCharge. If necessary, proper temporary drainage shall be provided by the contractor.
Care shall be taken during flushing so as not to damage/spoil work of other agencies.
Precautions shall also be taken to prevent entry of water/foreign matter into equipments,
electric motors, instruments, electrical installations etc. in the vicinity of lines being flushed.
The contractor shall carry out all the activities required before, during and after the flushing
operation, arising because of flushing requirements, such as but not limited to the following:
Dropping of valves, specials, distance pieces, inline instruments and any other piping part
before flushing. The flanges to be disengaged for this purpose shall be envisaged by the
contractor and approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. These flanges shall be provided with
temporary gaskets at the time of flushing.
After flushing is completed and approved, the valve distance pieces, piping specials etc. shall
be reinstalled by the contractor with permanent gaskets. However, flanges at equipment
nozzles and other places where isolation is required during testing, only temporary gaskets
shall be provided.
Records in triplicate shall be prepared and submitted by the contractor for each piping system
for the flushing done in the proforma provided/approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
5.0 PRESSURE TESTING
Pressure testing, in general shall be as per clause 345 of ASME B31.3, unless otherwise
specified, herein. Lines carrying highly hazardous/poisonous fluids must have a sensitive leak
test. For IBR lines, `IBR Regulations' shall also be followed.
5.1
Extent of Testing
With the exclusion of instrumentation, piping systems fabricated or assembled in the field
shall be tested irrespective of whether or not they have been pressure tested prior to site
welding or fabrication.
To facilitate the testing of piping systems, vessels and other equipments may be included in
the system with the prior approval of Engineer-In-Charge if the test pressure specified is equal
to or less than that for the vessels and other equipments.
Pumps, compressors and other rotary equipments shall not be subjected to field test pressure.
Lines which are directly open to atmosphere such as vents, drains, safety valves discharge
need not be tested, but all joints shall be visually inspected. Wherever necessary, such lines
shall be tested by continuous flow of fluid to eliminate the possibility of blockage. However,
such lines if provided with block valve shall be pressure tested up to the last block valve.
Seats of all valves shall not be subjected to a pressure in excess of the maximum cold working
pressure of the valve. Test pressure applied to valves shall not be greater than the
manufacturer's recommendation nor less than that required by the applicable code. Where
allowable seat pressure is less than test pressure, test shall be made through an open valve.
0
fg-zir tif5leg
rirane as ,sr...
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(>172R
Instruments in the system to be tested shall be excluded from the test by isolation or removals,
unless approved otherwise by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Restrictions which interfere with filling, venting, draining such as orifice plates etc. shall not
be installed unless testing is complete.
Control valves shall not be included in the test system. Where bypasses are provided test shall
be performed through the bypass and/or necessary spool shall be used in place of the control
valve.
Pressure gauges which are part of the finished system, but cannot withstand test pressure shall
not be installed until the system has been tested. Where piping systems to be tested are
directly connected at the battery limits to piping for which the responsibility rests with other
agencies, the piping to be tested shall be isolated from such piping by physical disconnection
such as valve or blinds.
5.2
ligaf
fdWeg
afIR'n ,eant Ng.)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt ol India uncieriakm)
For longer lines and vertical lines, two or more pressure gauges shall be installed at locations
decided by the Engineer-in-Charge.
For lines containing check valves any of the following alternatives shall be adopted for
pressure testing:
Whenever possible pressurize up-stream side of valve.
Replace the valve by a temporary spool and reinstall the valve after testing.
Provide blind on valve flanges and test the upstream and downstream of the line
separately and remove the blind after testing. At these flanges, temporary gaskets shall
be provided during testing and shall be replaced by permanent gaskets subsequently.
For check valves in lines PA" and below flapper or seat shall be removed during
testing (if possible). After completion of testing the flapper/seat shall be refitted.
Gas lines when hydrostatically tested shall be provided with additional temporary supports
during testing as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Piping which is spring or counter-weight supported shall be temporarily supported, where the
weight of the fluid would overload the support. Retaining pins for spring supports shall be
removed only after testing is completed and test fluid is completely drained.
When testing any piping system, air or steam of approximately 2 kg/ cm2g may be used as
preliminary test to detect missing gaskets etc. as this avoids the necessity of draining the line
to make repairs. However, steam shall not be used for this purpose, if the steam temperature is
more than the design temperature of the line.
For jacketed pipes testing of core pipes shall be done on individual pieces where the pipe is
continuously jacketed, before it is jacketed. The outer jacket shall be tested separately as a
system. For piping with discontinuous jacketing the core pipe and the jacket shall be tested as
separate continuous systems.
5.3
5.3.1
Testing Media
In general all pressure tests shall be hydrostatic using iron free water, which is clean and free
of silt. Maximum chloride content in water for hydrostatic testing for SS piping shall be 1520 ppm.
Air shall be used for testing only if water would cause corrosion of the system or overloading
of supports etc. in special cases as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
If operating fluid in the line is much lighter than testing fluid, the additional weight of testing
fluid may render piping supports (as designed) inadequate. This will call for additional
temporary supports. The typical examples are flare and vapor lines. It is preferable that
hydrostatic testing is avoided in such systems and instead pneumatic testing may be specified.
Where air/water tests are undesirable, substitute fluids such as gas oil, kerosene, methanol etc.
shall be used as the testing medium, with due consideration to the hazards involved. These test
fluids shall be specified in the line list given to the contractor.
ara_it.-7
fg-zrr lafj4-d'g
1.17",eiecnIe
5.3.2
SW{1,141
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
'A 6"
""d' Uncle"")
6-44-0013 Rev. 4
Page 8 of 9
Test Pressure
The hydrostatic/ pneumatic test pressure shall be as indicated in the line list or as per the
instruction of Engineer-in-Charge.
The selection of the piping system for one individual test shall be based on the following:
Test pressure required as per line list.
Maximum allowable pressure for the material of construction of piping.
Depending upon the above requirements and based on construction progress, maximum length
of piping shall be included in each test.
All gauges used for field testing shall have suitable range so that the test pressure of various
systems falls in 35% to 65% of gauge scale range. Pressure gage dial shall be minimum of 150
mm. Size of Bourdon shall not be less than 75% of nominal diameter of dial range. Gauge
shall be of a good quality and in first class working condition.
Prior to the start of any test or periodically during the field test programme, all test gauges
shall be calibrated using a standard dead weight gauge tester or other suitable approved testing
apparatus. Any gauge showing an incorrect zero reading or error of more than 2% of full
scale range shall be discarded .The Engineer-in-Charge shall check the accuracy of master
pressure gauge used for calibration. Calibration certificate shall be furnished for the pressure
gages.
5.4
Testing Procedure
All vents and other connections used as vents shall be left open while filling the line with test
fluid for complete removal of air. In all lines for pressurizing and depressurizing the system,
temporary isolation valves shall be provided if valved vents, drains do not exist in the system.
Pressure shall be applied only after the system / line is ready and approved by the Engineer-incharge.
Pressure shall be applied by means of a suitable test pump or other pressure source which shall
be isolated from the system as soon as test pressure is reached and stabilized in the system.
A pressure gauge shall be provided at the pump discharge for guidance in bringing the system
to the required pressure.
The pump shall be attended constantly during the test by an authorized person. The pump shall
be isolated from the system whenever the pump is to be left unattended.
Test pressure shall be maintained for a sufficient length of time not less than 10minutes. Test
pressure shall be released only after physical checking of all the joints and attachments are
completed, to permit thorough inspection of all joints and connections for leakage or signs of
failure. Any joint found leaking during a pressure test shall be retested to the specified
pressure after repair.
The pump and the piping system to be tested are to be provided with separate pressure
indicating test gauges.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
` It1-s
w ENGINEERS
$/tgal taWreg l
WWI eic,
tal 451 Jgsr.)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Care shall be taken to avoid increase in the pressure due to temperature variation during the
test.
5.4.2 Pneumatic Test
When testing with air, pressure shall be supplied by means of a compressor. The compressor
shall be portable type with a receiver, after cooler and oil separator.
Piping to be tested by air shall have joints covered with a soap and water solution so that the
joints can be examined for leaks.
All other details shall be same as per hydrotesting procedure (specified above).
5.5
Completion of Testing
After the hydrostatic test has been completed, pressure shall be released by opening the vents,
in a manner and at a rate so as not to endanger personnel or damage equipments.
All vents shall be opened before the system is to be drained and shall remain open till all
draining is complete, so as to prevent formation of vacuum in the system. After draining, lines
/ systems shall be dried by air. In services like dry air, ethylene etc., small traces of water can
cause problem. For such lines hot air drying is to be done after hydro-test.
After testing is completed the test blinds shall be removed and equipment / piping isolated
during testing shall be connected using the specified gaskets, bolts and nuts. These
connections shall be checked for tightness in subsequent pneumatic tests to be carried out by
the contractor for complete loop / circuit including equipments (except rotary equipments).
Pressure test shall be considered complete only after approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Defects, if any, noticed during testing shall be rectified immediately and retesting of the
system / line shall be done by the contractor at his cost.
5.6
Test Records
Records in triplicate shall be prepared and submitted by the contractor for each piping system,
for the pressure test done in the proforma provided/approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Records shall also be submitted for the PMI undertaken as per EIL Std. Specification No.
6-82-0002.
5fg-ar I~-3
dg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 10
lebri ch
iJA
TECHNICAL NOTES
FOR PIPES
25.09.14
31.12.13
04.07.08
15.03.00
04.04.94
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
SH'
UK
ATD('\:'
AK
SH
RN
SC
SC
RN
SC
DM
VC
RN
BRB
NS
AS
AKG
BPV
GRR
AS
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
rivvottt.1.5trool,
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 10
Abbreviations:
ANSI
API
ASME
ASTM
BHN
BIS
E.FS.W
E.R.W
HAZ
HIC
IBR
IGC
IS
LT
MR
NACE MR
NB
NPT
PMI
PR
SMYS
SS
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
Mr. M. Ismaeel
Mr. Amrendra Kumar
Mr. G. Balaji
Mr. K.J. Harinarayanan (HMTD)
Mr. P P Lahiri / Mr. S. Ghoshal (SMMS)
Mr. S. Mukherjee (Construction)
Mr. K.V.K. Naidu (Projects)
$
;fgW 21541+fV7R rwnrt ,151,70541,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govl of lodia Undeftalong)
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 10
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
IBR PIPES
3.0
ACCEPTABLE DEVIATIONS
4.0
HYDROSTATIC TEST
5.0
10
6.0
REFERENCES
10
2f5le'g
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govl ol lnaia
Undertakog)
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 10
1.0 GENERAL
1.1
A11 pipes and their dimensions, tolerances, chemical composition, physical properties, heat
treatment, hydrostatic test and other testing and marking requirements shall conform to the
latest codes and standards specified in the material requisition (MR). Supplier shall strictly
comply with MR/PR stipulations and no deviations shall be permitted. Post Order
Concession/Deviation Permit 5-0000-0180-F1 as mentioned in Cl. 5.18 of Specification for
Quality Management System Requirements from Bidders (6-78-0001) is not applicable.
1.2
Testing
1.2.1
Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the applicable material
specifications. Test reports shall also be furnished for any supplementary tests as specified in
the MR & Clauses 1.10 & 1.11.
1.2.2 Material test certificates (physical property, chemical composition & heat treatment report)
shall also be furnished for the pipes supplied.
1.2.3 PMI shall be performed as per the scope and procedures as defined in the spec for PMI at
Supplier's Works (6-81-0001).
1.2.4 Refer to specification nos. 6-81-0002 and 6-81-0003 for Inspection & Test plans for welded
pipes and seamless pipes respectively.
1.3
Manufacturing Processes
1.3.1
1.3.2 A11 longitudinally welded pipes should employ only automatic welding.
1.4
1.5
a.
Seamless and E.R.W. pipes shall not have any circumferential seam joint in a random
length. However, in case of E.FS.W pipe, in one random length one welded
circumferential seam of same quality as longitudinal weld is permitted. This weld
shall be at least 2.5 m from either end. The longitudinal seams of the two portions
shall be staggered by 90. Single random length in such cases shall be 5 to 7 m.
b.
Unless otherwise mentioned in the respective material code, E.FS.W pipes < 36" shall
not have more than one longitudinal seam joint and E.FS.W pipes
36" shall not
have more than two longitudinal seam joints.
1.6
Pipe with screwed ends shall have NPT external taper pipe threads conforming to
ASME/ANSI B1.20.1 up to 1.5" NB & IS 554 for 2" to 6" NB.
1.7
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 5 of 10
Pipe with beveled ends shall be in accordance with ASME B16.25. Weld contours shall be as
follows:
Wall Thickness
Material
Carbon Steel (Except
Low Temp. Carbon Steel)
Alloy Steel,
Stainless Steel &
Low Temp. Carbon Steel
Weld Contour
Up to 22 mm
Figure 2 Type A
> 22 mm
Figure 3 Type A
Up to 10 mm
Figure 4
> 10 mm & Up to 25 mm
Figure 5 Type A
> 25 mm
Figure 6 Type A
1.8
Galvanized pipes shall be coated with zinc by hot dip process conforming to IS 4736 / ASTM
A 153.
1.9
All austenitic stainless steel pipes shall be supplied in solution annealed condition. All types
of 321 or 347 stainless steel pipes shall be in a stabilized heat treated condition. Stabilizing
heat treatment shall be carried out subsequent to the normal solution annealing. Soaking time
& holding temp. for stabilizing heat treatment shall be 4 hrs & 900C respectively.
1.10
1.10.1 For all austenitic stainless steel pipes inter-granular corrosion test shall have to be conducted
as per following:
ASTM A262 Practice "B" with acceptance criteria of "60 mils/year (max.)".
OR
ASTM A262 Practice E with acceptance criteria of no cracks at 20X magnification and
microstructure to be observed at 250X magnification shall ensure the absence of any cracks/
fissures. When testing is conducted as per practice 'E' photograph of microstructure shall be
submitted for record.
1.10.2 When specifically asked for in MR for high temperature application of some grades of
austenitic stainless steel (eg.SS 309, 310, 316, 316H etc.) ASTM A262 Practice "C" with
acceptance criteria of "15 mils/year (max.)" shall have to be conducted.
1.10.3 For the IGC test as described in 1.10.1 & 1.10.2, two sets of samples shall be drawn from each
solution annealing lot; one set corresponding to highest carbon content and the other set
corresponding to the highest pipe thickness.
All welded pipes indicated as `CRY0' & `LT' in MR shall be impact tested per requirement
& acceptance criteria of ASME B31.3. The impact test temperature shall be -196C & -45C
for stainless steel and carbon steel respectively unless specifically mentioned otherwise in
MR.
1.12 NACE/HIC Requirements
1.12.1 Pipes under "NACE" category and those designated as "HIC1" shall meet the requirements
`51
1
5fga 02eg
1.11UR ertcnt ,TR,1-4.1)
ENGINEEFZS
INDIA LIMITED
Ift Govt of
UnciertaNingf
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 6 of 10
1.13
Specified heat treatment for carbon steel and alloy steel and solution annealing for stainless
steel pipes shall be carried out after weld repairs. Number of weld repairs at the same spot
shall be restricted to maximum two by approved repair procedure.
1.14
For black or galvanized pipes to IS 1239, the minimum percentage of elongation shall be
20%.
1.15
All 1Cr-V2Mo and 11/4Cr-1/4Mo seamless pipes shall be normalised and tempered.
1.16
For all welded alloy steel pipes with mandatory requirement of heat treatment and
radiography, radiography shall be performed after heat treatment.
1.17
For Hydrogen service pipes following special requirements shall also be met:
1.17.1 All carbon steel pipes having wall thickness 9.53 mm (0.375") and above shall be normalised.
Cold drawn pipes shall be normalised after the final cold draw pass for all thicknesses.
1.17.2 All alloy steel (Cr-Mo) pipes shall be normalised and tempered. The normalising and
tempering shall be a separate heating operation and not a part of the hot forming operation.
The maximum room temperature tensile strength shall be 100,000 psig.
1.17.3 For carbon steel Pipes, hardness of weld and HAZ shall be 200 BHN (max.). For alloy steel
Pipes, hardness of weld and HAZ shall be 225 BHN (max.).
1.17.4 For all austenitic stainless steels, the weld deposit shall be checked for ferrite content. A
Ferrite No.(FN) not less than 3% and not more than 10% is required to avoid sigma phase
embrittlement during heat treatment. FN shall be determined by Ferritescope prior to post
weld heat treatment.
1.17.5 For all Carbon steel and Alloy steel pipes with wall thickness over 20mm, Charpy-V Notch
impact testing shall be carried out in accordance with paragraph UG-84 of ASME Section
VIII, Div-1 for weld metal and base metal from the thickest item per heat of material and per
heat treating batch. Impact test specimen shall be in complete heat treated condition and
accordance with ASTM A370. Impact energies at 0Celsius shall average greater than 27J (20
ft-lb) per set of three specimens, with a minimum of 19J (15 ft-lb).
1.18
For dual grades of SS where specified, chemical composition and mechanical properties of
both grades specified shall be ensured.
2.0
IBR PIPES
2.1
IBR Documentation
2.1.1 Pipes under purview of IBR shall be accompanied with IBR certificate original in Form III-A
duly approved and countersigned by IBR authority/local authority empowered by the Central
Boiler Board of India(Photocopy of the original certificate duly attested by the local boiler
inspector where the supplier is located is the minimum requirement for acceptance) or Form
III-D [for well known pipe manufacturers as per IBR] signed by Manufacturer's authorized
representative. Well known pipe manufacturers, as recognized by IBR, shall submit a duly
attested copy of Form XVI-G along with Form
2.1.2 For materials 11/4Cr - V2Mo (ASTM A335 Gr.P11 / A691 Gr.11/4Cr), 21/4Cr - 1Mo (ASTM
A335 Gr.P22 / A691 Gr.21/4Cr) & 9Cr -1Mo-V (A335 Gr.P91/A691 Gr.91), Form III-A
approved by IBR shall include the tabulation of Et, Sc & Sr values for the entire temperature
range given below. Et, Sc & Sr values shall be such that throughout the temperature range
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
$R-ar 22-eg
1.177, rrmrr
an s~
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 7 of 10
E,/ 1.5
Sr / 1.5
SA
Sc
where ,
Allowable stress at the working metal temperature.
Yield point (0.2% proof stress at the working metal temperature)
The average stress to produce elongation of 1%(creep) in 100000 hrs at the
working metal temperature.
The average stress to produce rupture in 100000 hrs at the working metal
temperature and in no case more than 1.33 times the lowest stress to produce
rupture at this temperature.
SA
S,
Sr
SA (psi)
Temp(F)
Material
950
1000 1050
1100
6300 4200
2800
A691 Gr.11/4Cr 18900 18300 18000 17600 17300 16800 16300 15000 9900
6300 4200
2800
A335 Gr.P11
500
600
650
700
750
800
850
900
A335 Gr.P22 /
17900 17900 17900 17900 17900 17800 14500 12800 10800 7800 5100 3200
A691 Gr.21/4Cr
A335 Gr.P91/
28100 27700 27300 26700 25900 24900 23700 22300 20700 18000 14000 10300
A691 Gr.91
Note : SA values shall be as per the latest edition prevai ing.
2.2
For carbon steel pipes under IBR the chemical composition shall conform to the following:
Carbon (max)
Others (S, P, Mn)
0.25%
As prescribed in IBR.
The chemical composition as indicated in this clause is not applicable for pipes other than IBR
services.
3.2
Pipes of Grades SS317 of corresponding material are acceptable in place of Grades SS316 or
SS316(2.5 Mo min.).
3.3
Pipes of Grades SS317L of corresponding material are acceptable in place of Grades SS316L
or SS316L(2.5Mo min.).
3.4
Seamless pipes are acceptable in place of welded pipes except in the case of welded
SS321/SS321H pipes with nominal thickness greater than 9.53mm.
~_le7
e5
4.2
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Incha Undertalting)
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 8 of 10
Carbon Steel
Material Std.
b)
ASTM A530
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
ASTM A530
ASTM A530
c)
ASTM A530
ASTM A530
ASTM A999
ASTM B161
ASTM B165
ASTM B167
ASTM B407
ASTM B725
ASTM B517
ASTM B514
e)
Material Std.
d)
0141
-eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo UnclertaNngt
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 9 of 10
Material Std.
API 5L Gr.B
ASTM A671 Gr.CC65, 70 (C1.32)
ASTM A672 Gr.C60, 65, 70 (CI.12,22)
ASTM A671 Gr.CF60, 65, 66, 70 (C1.32)
ASTM A691 Gr.V2Cr, 1Cr, 11/4Cr, 21/4Cr,
SCr, 9Cr (C1.42)
b)
P = 2ST/D
S = 90% of SMYS
Except for API 5L Gr.B
S = 85% of SMYS
For API 5L Gr.B
T = Nominal Wall Thickness
D = O.D of Pipe
Material
Gr. 1
Material
Gr.2
Material
Gr.1
Material
Gr.2
Material
Gr.1
Material
Gr.2
100
80
155
130
230
190
3"
80
60
155
130
230
190
4"
80
50
155
130
230
190
6"
65
35
90
75
155
130
2"
c)
4.3
IS 1239
IS 1239
IS 3589
IS 3589
Hydrostatic pressure testing shall be performed using iron free water, which is clean and free
of silt. Maximum chloride content in water for hydrostatic testing for SS piping shall be 50
ppm.
OrcRes
1
.1,P+,,
M11 J457,01/
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 10 of 10
All pipes shall be marked in accordance with the applicable codes, standards and
specifications. In addition the purchase order number, the item code & special conditions like
"IBR", "CRY0", "NACE", "H2" etc. shall also be marked.
5.2
Pipes under "IBR","CRY0", "NACE" & "H2" shall be painted with one circumferential
stripe of colour red, light purple brown, canary yellow & white respectively for easy
identification. Width of stripe shall be 12mm for pipe sizes lens than 3" and 25mm for pipes
3" and above.
5.3
Paint or ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metal or metallic salts such as zinc, lead
or copper which cause corrosive attack on heating.
5.4
Pipes shall be dry, clean and free from moisture, dirt and loose foreign materials of any kind.
5.5
5.6
Rust preventive used on machined surfaces to be welded shall be easily removable with a
petroleum solvent and the same shall not be harmful to welding.
5.7
Both ends of the pipe shall be protected with the following material:
Plastic cap
Wood, Metal or plastic cover
Metal or plastic threaded cap
Plain end
Bevel end
Threaded end
5.8
Pipes may be provided with plastic push-fit type end caps/ steel caps without belt wire.
5.9
Steel end protectors to be used on galvanized pipes shall be galvanized. Plastic caps can also
be used as end protectors for galvanised pipe ends.
6.0 REFERENCES
6.1
6-81-0001:
6.2
6-81-0002:
6.3
6-81-0003:
6.4
6-79-0013:
Material requirements for carbon steel components used in sour service for
petroleum refinery environments
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
k31
,
$'1g-af
237,1,
17 ,
151 ,R,A)
6-44-0053 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 7
4ct-cb(Net cs)(Yi
f41
FU I 1T
CfrielChr
n1
AK
/RN
SH
AK
ATNNo
SC
25.09.14
SH
31.12.13
UK
04.07.08
RN
SC
DM
VC
01.11.00
RN
BRB
NS
MI
04.04.94
AKG
BPV
GRR
AS
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
RN
SC
Approved by
5gar fa2eg
1.1r, vomooJosnytt
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt
ot
InO. Undellakoog)
6-44-0053 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
AARH
ANSI
API
ASME
ASTM
AWWA
BHN
HIC
IBR
IGC
IS
MR
MSS
NACE MR
PMI
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
Mr. M. Ismaeel
Mr. Amrendra Kumar
Mr. G. Balaji
Mr. K.J. Harinarayanan (HMTD)
Mr. P P Lahiri / Mr. S. Ghoshal (SMMS)
Mr. S. Mukherjee (Construction)
Mr. K.V.K. Naidu (Projects)
k31-1
$gt-LIE
IM2--
1.41,1c,,DrO0,
13OO,-.0
6-44-0053 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
IBR REQUIREMENTS
3.0
ACCEPTABLE DEVIATIONS
4.0
5.0
REFERENCES
$fg-z1
- f d21 dg
'
.117,1 rfrforr onJO'SOff
ENQNEERS
INDIA LIMITED
in Goft of Indo Uncleflak,o9)
6-44-0053 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 7
1.0 GENERAL
1.1
All items, their dimensions, tolerances, chemical composition, physical properties, heat
treatment and testing etc. shall conform to the latest codes and standards specified in the
requisition. Supplier shall strictly comply with MR/PR stipulations and no deviations shall be
permitted. Post Order Concession/Deviation Permit 5-0000-0180-F1 as mentioned in Cl. 5.18
of Specification for Quality Management System Requirements from Bidders (6-78-0001) is
not applicable.
1.2
Testing
1.2.1
Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the relevant material
specifications. Test reports shall also be furnished for any supplementary tests as specified in
the requisition & Clauses 1.11, 1.12 & 1.15.
1.2.2 Material test certificates (physical property, chemical composition & heat treatment report)
shall also be furnished for the flanges supplied.
1.2.3 Positive Material Identification (PMI) shall be performed as per the scope and procedures as
defined in the `Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at Supplier's Works'
(No. 6-81-0001).
1.2.4 Refer to specification no. 6-81-0006 for Inspection and Test plans for flanges, spectacle blinds
& drip rings.
1.3
Ends of weld neck flanges shall be beveled to suit the schedule / thickness of matching pipe,
as specified in the requisition.
1.4
Bevel end details for welding neck flanges shall be as per ASME B16.25. Contour of bevel
end shall be as follows:
Material
Wall Thickness
Weld Contour
Carbon Steel (Except
Low Temp. Carbon Steel)
Alloy Steel,
Stainless Steel &
Low Temp. Carbon Steel
Upto 22 mm
Figure 2 Type A
> 22 mm
Figure 3 Type A
Upto 10 mm
Figure 4
Figure 5 Type A
> 25 mm
Figure 6 Type A
1.5
Bore of socket weld flanges & reducing blind flanges shall suit the outside diameter and
schedule / thickness of matching pipe.
1.6
Bore of slip on flanges shall suit the outside diameter of matching pipe.
1.7
Flange face finish shall be normally specified in the requisition as serrated finish, 125 AARH
etc. The interpretation for range of face finish shall be as follows:
Stock Finish
1000 1.1 in AARH max.
Serrated Finish/125 AARH
Serrations with 125 to 250gin AARH
63 AARH
32 TO 63 in AARH
Copyright EIL
+31
$'g-arWes
1.41771
051
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A
6-44-0053 Rev. 6
Page 5 of 7
1.8
Galvanized flanges shall be coated with zinc by hot dip process conforming to IS 4736 /
ASTM A153.
1.9
Ends of screwed flanges unless otherwise specified shall have taper threads as per
ASME/ANSI B1.20.1 (upto 1.5" NB) & IS 554 (for 2" to 6" NB).
1.10
For ring joint flanges, blinds and spacers the hardness shall be as follows:
Flange Material
1.11
Carbon Steel
140
1% Cr to 5%, 9% Cr
150
160
140
For ring joint flanges, blinds and spacers, the hardness shall be recorded in the test report.
All austenitic stainless steel flanges shall be supplied in solution annealed condition.
1.14
1.14.1 For all austenitic stainless steel flanges, blinds, drip rings & Fig.8 flanges intergranular
corrosion test shall have to be conducted as per following:
ASTM A262 Practice `B' with acceptance criteria of "60 mils/year (max.)".
OR
ASTM A262 Practice E with acceptance criteria of no cracks at 20X magnification and
microstructure to be observed at 250X magnification shall ensure the absence of any cracks/
fissures. When testing is conducted as per practice 'E' photograph of microstructure shall be
submitted for record.
1.14.2 When specifically asked for in requisition for high temperature application of some grades of
austenitic stainless steel (like SS309, 310, 316, 316H etc.) ASTM A262 Practice 'C' with
acceptance criteria of "15 mils/year" shall have to be conducted.
1.14.3 For the IGC test as described in 1.14.1 & 1.14.2 two sets of samples shall be drawn from each
solution treatment lot; one set corresponding to highest carbon content and the other
corresponding to the highest rating / thickness.
1.15
All types of 321 or 347 stainless steel flanges shall be in a stabilized heat treated condition.
Stabilizing heat treatment shall be carried out subsequent to the normal solution annealing.
Soaking temperature and holding time for stabilizing heat treatment shall be 900 C and 4
hours respectively.
t31
$gelE f22e5
el,ntetvrst,,cmt
ENGINEERS
1NDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ot Indo Undertaltng)
6-44-0053 Rev. 6
Page 6 of 7
1.16
For dual grades of SS where specified, chemical composition and mechanical properties of
both grades specified shall be ensured.
1.17
1.18
Dimensions for handle projection for Spacers & Blinds shall be as specified in EIL Std. 7-440166.
1.19
1.20
1.21
Ring Joint Fig-8 Flanges, Spacers & Blinds shall be female type only.
1.22
The handle for spacers & blinds for classes 900# & above shall be designed by the vendor.
The handle may be integral or attached to the line blank / spacer by welding. In case of
attachment by welding heat treatment & welding shall be in accordance with B31.3.
1.23
IBR Documentation
2.1.1 Flanges coming under the purview of IBR (Indian Boiler Regulations) shall be accompanied
with IBR Certificate original in Form III C duly approved and countersigned by IBR
authority/ local authority empowered by Central Boiler Board of India. Photocopy of original
certificate duly attested by the local boiler inspector where the supplier is located is the
minimum requirement for acceptance.
2.2
For carbon steel pipes under IBR the chemical composition shall conform to the following:
Carbon (max)
0.25%
Others (S, P, Mn)
As prescribed in IBR.
The chemical composition as indicated in this clause is not applicable for pipes other than IBR
services.
Blind Flanges and Spacers & Blinds if specified as plate materials are acceptable in forging
materials also in the corresponding material grades.
faaes
1.117,
1217-,5W.13tt0.11
6-44-0053 Rev. 6
Page 7 of 7
3.2
3.3
A11 items shall be legibly and conspicuously stamped in accordance with the requirements of
applicable ASME, API and MSS Standards. In addition, EIL item code, purchase order
number & special conditions like "IBR", "CRY0", "NACE" "H2" etc. shall also be stamped.
4.2
A11 items coming under the purview of "IBR", "CRYO" , "NACE" & "H2"(hydrogen) shall
be painted with one stripe of colour red, light purple brown, canary yellow & white
respectively for easy identification. Width of stripe shall be 25mm and it shall be painted
longitudinally across the complete thickness of flange other than hub.
4.3
Paint or ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metal or metal salts such as zinc, lead
or copper which cause corrosive attack on heating.
4.4
All items shall be dry, clean and free from moisture, dirt and loose foreign materials of any
kind.
4.5
All items shall be protected from rust, corrosion and mechanical damage during
transportation, shipment and storage.
4.6
4.7
4.8
Each size of flanges, blinds, etc. shall be supplied in separate packagings marked with the
purchase order number, item code number, material specification, size and rating.
5.0 REFERENCES
6-81-0001
6-81-0006
Inspection & test plan for flanges, spectacle blinds & drip rings
6-79-0013
7-44-0162
Standard for Spacers & Blinds 26" (150CL, 300CL & 600CL FF)
7-44-0164
7-44-0166
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
,,cnf1,151,Pqd,,)
-rEFW1
rc-R
6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 9
dcb-ilcb1
25.09.14
31.12.13
04.07.08
15/03/00
04/04/94
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
ATD4 SC
SH
.AK
jRN
UK
SH
AK
RN
SC
DM
VC
RN
BRB
NS
AS
AKG
BPV
GRR
AS
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Comm ittee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
RN
SC
Approved by
fg-;fr tfai
1.12R ,,c,.13,70.1/
6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
AARH
ANSI
API
ASME
ASTM
BHN
CS
DP
HAZ
HIC
IBR
IGC
IS
LT
MP
MR
MSS
NACE MR
NB
PMI
PO
PR
SMYS
SS
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
Mr. M. Ismaeel
Mr. Amrendra Kumar
Mr. G. Balaji
Mr. K.J. Harinarayanan (HMTD)
Mr. P P Lahiri / Mr. S. Ghoshal (SMMS)
Mr. S. Mukherjee (Construction)
Mr. K.V.K. Naidu (Projects)
7tn
5tgu faaeg
1.17,1 ,rcnr1,1111.~1/
6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
IBR REQUIREMENTS
3.0
ACCEPTABLE DEVIATIONS
4.0
5.0
REFERENCES
k71
Og'-ar 22-'dg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
G"
Unde""g)
6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 9
1.0 GENERAL
1.1
Chemical composition, physical properties, tests, dimensions and tolerances, heat treatment
and marking shall conform to the applicable latest codes / standards / specifications as
specified in the material requisition (MR). Supplier shall strictly comply with MR/PR
stipulations and no deviations shall be permitted. Post Order Concession/Deviation Permit 50000-0180-F1 as mentioned in Cl. 5.18 of Specification for Quality Management System
Requirements from Bidders (6-78-0001) is not applicable.
1.2
Testing
1.2.1
Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the material specifications. Test
reports shall also be furnished for any supplementary tests as specified in the MR, Clauses
1.7.8, 1.9, 1.10 & 1.11. Material test certificates (physical properties, chemical composition &
heat treatment report) shall also be furnished for fittings supplied.
1.2.2 Positive Material Identification (PMI) shall be performed as per scope and procedures defined
in the Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at Supplier's Works (6-810001).
1.2.3 Refer to specification no.6-81-0005 for Inspection and Test plan for forged, seamless and
welded fittings.
1.3
All fittings shall be seamless in construction unless otherwise specified. If fittings are
specified as welded, the same shall conform to clause 1.7.
1.4
Outside diameters and wall thickness (unless otherwise mentioned) of butt welded fittings
shall be in accordance with ASME B36.10 and ASME B36.19 as applicable.
1.5
For reducing butt weld fittings having different wall thicknesses at each end, the greater wall
thickness of the fitting shall be employed and inside bore at each end shall be matched with
the specified inside diameter.
1.6
Beveled ends for all fittings shall conform to ASME B16.25. Contour of bevel shall be as
follows:
Material
Carbon Steel (Except
Low Temp. Carbon Steel)
Alloy Steel,
Stainless Steel &
Low Temp. Carbon Steel
Wall Thickness
Weld Contour
Upto 22 mm
Figure 2 Type A
> 22 mm
Figure 3 Type A
Upto 10 mm
Figure 4
Figure 5 Type A
> 25 mm
Figure 6 Type A
1.7
Welded Fittings
1.7.1
A11 welded fittings shall be double welded. Inside weld projection shall not exceed 1.6 mm.
Welds shall be ground smooth at least 25 mm from the ends.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
1.11,1
051~,
6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 5 of 9
1.7.2 For fittings made out of welded pipe, the welded pipe shall be double welded type & shall be
manufactured with the addition of filler metal.
1.7.3 Welded tees shall not be of fabricated (stub-in) type.
1.7.4 All welded fittings shall be normalized & 100% radiographed by X-ray on all welds made by
fitting manufacturers & also on the parent materials.
1.7.5 Welded pipes employed for manufacture of fittings shall be made by automatic welding only.
1.7.6 Specified heat treatment for carbon steel & alloy steel fittings shall be carried out again after
weld repairs.
1.7.7 Irrespective of the material code requirement, all welded fittings indicated in the MR as
"Cryo"& "LT" shall meet impact test requirements of ASME B3I .3. The impact test
temperature shall be -196C & -45C for stainless steel & carbon steel respectively unless
specifically mentioned otherwise in the MR.
1.8
1.8.1
All stainless steel fittings shall be supplied in solution heat treated condition.
1.8.2 Solution annealing for stainless steel fittings shall be carried out again after weld repairs.
1.8.3 For all stainless steel fittings Inter Granular Corrosion (IGC) test shall have to be conducted as
per the following:
ASTM A 262 Practice "B" with acceptance criteria of "60 mils/year (max.)".
Or
ASTM A262 Practice E with acceptance criteria of no cracks at 20X magnification and
microstructure to be observed at 250X magnification shall ensure the absence of any cracks/
fissures. When testing is conducted as per practice 'E' photograph of microstructure shall be
submitted for record.
1.8.4 When specifically asked for in MR for high temperature application of some grades of
austenitic stainless steel (eg. SS309, 310,316,316H etc.) ASTM A 262 Practice "C" with
acceptance criteria of "15 mils/year" shall have to be conducted.
1.8.5 For the IGC test as described in Clauses 1.8.3 & 1.8.4, two nets of samples shall be drawn
from each solution treatment lot, one set corresponding to the highest carbon content and other
set to the highest fitting thickness.
1.8.6 For dual grades of SS where specified, chemical composition and mechanical properties of
both grades specified shall be ensured.
1.9
NACE/HIC Requirements
1.9.1 Fittings under "NACE" category or those designated as "HIC1" shall meet the requirements of
NACE MR-0103 unless otherwise specified.
1.9.2 Fittings made from plates and designated as "HIC1" shall meet the HIC requirements of EIL
specification 6-79-0013 unless otherwise specified.
1.10
Thickness/schedule lower or higher than specified for the finished product shall not be
accepted.
k31
5g"arfaidles
ENQNEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Rna" Unde"ng)
6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 6 of 9
For manufacturing of elbows from pipes, same size of pipe as that of elbow shall be used and
the nominal wall thickness of the starting pipes shall have positive tolerance only. However,
where the manufacturer has an established automatic/semi-automatic process for the
manufacture of elbows, the starting pipe may be permitted to be of Iower size with higher
schedule as required. Starting pipe of higher size than that of the elbow shall not be permitted.
1.11
The gasket contact surfaces of stub ends shall be flat with face finish specified in the
requisition. Interpretation on the specified face finish is as follows:
Serrations with 125 to 250 in AARH
125 AARH
1.12
Seamless stub ends shall not have any welds on the body. Stub ends shall be long pattern type.
1.13
Galvanized fittings shall be coated with zinc by hot dip process conforming to IS 4736 /
ASTM A153.
1.14
Threaded ends shall have NPT taper threads in accordance with ASME/ANSI B1.20.1 up to
1.5" NB & IS 554 from 2" to 6" NB.
1.15
Unless and otherwise specified in the MR, all socket welded and screwed fittings shall be in
accordance with ASME B16.11 to the extent covered in the specification except for unions
which shall be in accordance with MSS-SP-83.
1.16
Special fittings like weldolet, sockolet, sweepolet, latrolet, elbolet etc., the dimensions of
which are not covered in ASME, MSS-SP & EIL Standards, shall be as per manufacturer's
std. Contours of these fittings shall meet the requirements of ASME B31.3. Manufacturer shall
submit drawings / catalogues of these items for records after acceptance of offer.
1.17
Length of all long half couplings shall be 100 mm unless otherwise specified in the MR.
1.18
For reducers to manufacturers' standard, length of reducer shall not be less than 0.7D where D
is the outside diameter of the larger end.
1.19
All seamless pipes employed for manufacturing of fittings shall be required to have undergone
hydrostatic test to ASTM A 530. Welded pipes employed for manufacture of fittings shall be
tested as given below :
1.20
Test Criteria
P=2ST/D
S = 90% of SMYS.
T = Nom. Wall Thickness
D = 0.D. of Pipe.
ASTM B725
P=2ST/D
S = 85% of SMYS.
T = Nom. Wall Thickness
D = 0.D. of Pipe.
ASTM B725
ASTM B517
ASTM B517
ASTM B514
ASTM B514
The bevel ends of all butt weld fittings shall undergo 100% MP / DP test.
ENGINEEFZS
Odie`g cw INDIA LIMITED
Ii
1.177, 2:12.72 ,151~)
Unde"")
6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 7 of 9
1.21
1.22
All types of SS321 or SS347 fittings shall be in stabilized heat treated condition. Stabilizing
heat treatment shall be carried out subsequent to normal solution annealing. Soaking
temperature and holding time for stabilizing heat treatment shall be 900C and 4 hours
respectively.
1.23
For Hydrogen service fittings following special requirements shall also be met:
a. All carbon steel fittings having wall thickness 9.53 mm (0.375") and above shall be
normalised. Cold drawn fittings shall be normalised after the final cold draw pass for all
thicknesses. In addition, fittings made from forgings shall have Carbon- 0.35 % max. and
Silicon- 0.35 % max. The normalising heat treatment shall be a separate heating operation
and not a part of the hot forming operation
b. All alloy steel (Cr-Mo) fittings shall be normalised and tempered. The normalising and
tempering shall be a separate heating operation and not a part of the hot forming
operation. The maximum room temperature tensile strength shall be 100,000 psi.
c. For carbon steel fittings, hardness of weld and HAZ shall be 200 BHN (max.). For alloy
steel fittings, hardness of weld and HAZ shall be 225 BHN (max.).
d. For all austenitic stainless steels, the weld deposit shall be checked for ferrite content. A
Ferrite No.(FN) not lens than 3% and not more than 10% is required to avoid sigma phase
embrittlement during heat treatment. FN shall be determined by Ferritescope prior to post
weld heat treatment.
e. For all Carbon steel and Alloy steel fittings with wall thickness over 20mm, Charpy-V
Notch impact testing shall be carried out in accordance with paragraph UG-84 of ASME
Section VIII, Div-1 for weld metal and base metal from the thickest item per heat of
material and per heat treating batch. Impact test specimen shall be in complete heat treated
condition and accordance with ASTM A370. Impact energies at 0Celsius shall average
greater than 27J (20 ft-lb) per set of three specimens, with a minimum of 19J (15 ft-lb).
1.24
For all welded alloy steel fittings with mandatory requirements of heat treatment and
radiography, radiography shall be performed after heat treatment.
1.25
All 1Cr-0.5Mo & 1.25Cr-0.5Mo fittings shall be normalized and tempered. All 2.25Cr- 1 Mo,
5Cr-0.5Mo, 9Cr- 1 Mo & 9Cr- 1 Mo-V welded fittings shall be normalized and tempered.
1.26 Fitting material as per ASTM A234 Gr.WP5/WP9/WP91, wherever specified, shall be as per
'Cl.lt, unless otherwise specified.
1.27
Materials designated as structural steel grades like IS 2062, SA 36 etc. or similar specification
are not permitted for manufacture of fittings.
ENGINEERS
egIw INDIA LIMITED
Ofaj-
I MTA <7,7.1,711,~
'flnd" Unde""
)
6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 8 of 9
2.1.1 Fittings under the purview of "IBR" (Indian Boiler Regulations) shall be accompanied with
original IBR certificate in Form III-C duly approved and countersigned by IBR authority /
local authority empowered by Central Boiler Board of India. Photocopy of the original
certificate duly attested by the local boiler inspector where the supplier is located is the
minimum requirement for acceptance.
2.1.2 For materials 11/4Cr - 1/2Mo (ASTM A 234Gr.WP11 & ASTM A234 Gr.WP11W) & 21/4Cr 1Mo (ASTM A 234 Gr.WP22 & ASTM A234 Gr. WP22W) & 9Cr-lMo-V (A234 Gr.WP91/
A234Gr.WP91W),where fittings are manufactured from pipe, Form III-C approved by IBR
shall include the tabulation of Et, Sc, & Sr values for the entire temperature range given below.
Et, S & Sr values shall be such that throughout the temperature range
Et / 1.5
S, / 1.5
SA
Sc
Allowable stress at the working metal temperature.
Yield point (0.2% proof stress at the working metal temperature)
The average stress to produce elongation of 1%(creep) in 100000 hrs at
the working metal temperature.
The average stress to produce rupture in 100000 hrs at the working metal
temperature and in no case more than 1.33 times the lowest stress to
produce rupture at this temperature.
SA
E,
Sc
Sr
SA
Temp( F)
Material
A234Gr.WP11/
A234Gr.WP11W
A234Gr.WP22 /
A234Gr.WP22W
A234Gr.WP91/
A234Gr.WP91W
Note :
2.2
500
600
650
700
(psi)
750
800
850
900
950
1000
1050
1100
6300
4200
2800
7800
5100
3200
28100 27700 27300 26700 25900 24900 23700 22300 20700 18000 14000 10300
For carbon steel pipes under IBR the chemical composition shall conform to the following:
Carbon (max)
Others (S, P, Mn)
0.25%
As prescribed in IBR.
The chemical composition as indicated in this clause is not applicable for pipes other than IBR
services.
3.0 ACCEPTABLE DEVIATIONS
3.1
Seamless fittings are acceptable in place of welded fittings, however, welded fittings are not
acceptable in place of seamless fittings. Forged fittings are acceptable in place of wrought
aje- g
51g-ar fa
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 9 of 9
fittings. However, wrought seamless fittings are acceptable in place of forgings only in case of
swages.
3.2
Fittings of Grades SS317 of corresponding material are acceptable in place of Grades SS316
or SS316(2.5Mo min.).
3.3
4.0
4.1
Each fitting shall be legibly and conspicuously stamped in accordance with the requirements
of applicable standards along with special condition like "IBR", "Cryo", "NACE" and "H2"
etc.
4.2
Steel die marking with round bottom punch may be permitted on body of butt weld CS &
lower alloy steel fittings, but for SS & higher alloy steel fittings, the same should be marked
by electro-etching only.
4.3
Paint or ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metals or metal salts such as Zinc, Lead
or Copper which causes corrosive attack on heating.
4.4
Fittings shall be dry, clean and free of moisture, dirt and loose foreign materials of any kind.
4.5
Fittings shall be protected from rust, corrosion and mechanical damage during transportation,
shipment and storage.
4.6
Rust preventive used on machined surfaces to be welded shall be easily removable with a
petroleum solvent and the same shall not be harmful to welding.
4.7
Fittings coming under the purview of "IBR", "CRYO" , "NACE" & "H2"(hydrogen) shall be
painted with one circumferential stripe of colour red, light purple brown, canary yellow &
white respectively for easy identification. Width of stripe shall be 12mm for sizes less than 3"
and 25mm for sizes 3" and above. Stripe shall be located centrally for elbows, diagonally for
caps, at the larger end for reducing fittings, longitudinally for couplings and at one end near to
the bevel/socket/screwed end for other fittings.
4.8
Each end of fitting shall be protected with a wood, metal or plastic cover.
4.9
Each size of fitting shall be supplied in separate packaging marked with the purchase order
number, item code number, material specification, size and schedule / thickness / rating. For
small quantities, fittings of different sizes may be packed in separate packing size-wise and
there packing may be packed in a bigger package/ container clearly identifying the contents.
5.0 REFERENCES
6-81-0001
6-81-0005
6-79-0013
Oa&
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
6-44-0056 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 5
TECHNICAL NOTES
FOR GASKETS
21.03.13
23.07.07
15.06.98
30.12.92
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
z RN
kTD
DM
'(
yr UK
yrSH
RN
ATD
DM
VC
SH
BRB
BN
AS
AKG
BPV
GRR
AS
Prepared
by
Checked by
Standards Standards
Committee
Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Ogaf Rae
lg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undettatongt
6-44-0056 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
AARH :
BHN :
CS
Carbon Steel
MR
Material Requisition
PMI
RTJ
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
fgar fafgeg
,ania riroreaw+i,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Goof of India Undertaking)
6-44-0056 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
REFERENCES
$14-ar 051-eg
wren erecore 4513405141
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Goer of India Undertaking)
6-44-0056 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 5
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
All gaskets shall conform to the codes/standards and specifications given in the
requisition. Supplier shall strictly comply with MR/PR stipulations and no deviations shall
be permitted. Post Order Waiver/ Deviation format 5-0000-0180-F1 as mentioned in Cl.
5.18 of Specification for Quality Management System Requirements from Bidders (6-780001) is not applicable.
1.2
1.3
Testing
1.3.1
Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests for gaskets as per the standards
specified in the requisition.
1.3.2
Chemical composition and hardness of RTJ gaskets shall also be furnished in the form of
test reports on samples.
1.3.3
1.3.4
PMI shall be performed as per the scope and procedures defined in the Specification for
PMI at Supplier's Works (6-81-0001) for ring type joint gaskets.
1.3.5
Refer Specification no 6-81-0008 for 'Inspection & Test Plan for Gaskets'.
1.4
1.5
Filler material for spiral wound gaskets shall not have any colour or dye.
1.6
All spiral wound gaskets shall be supplied with Outer ring. Material of the outer ring shall
be CS unless otherwise specified in the MR.
1.7
For spiral wound gaskets, material of Inner Compression ring shall be same as Spiral Strip
material. In addition to the requirements as per code and as specified in the MR, inner
rings shall be provided for the following:
1.8
a.
b.
Hardness of metallic RTJ gaskets shall not exceed the values specified below unless
otherwise specified in MR:
Ring Gasket Material
Soft Iron
90
Carbon steel
120
ligar 215ieg
rrecryrens,mn.,
NIVM
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA G0A of Incha Uncterlaiong)
6-44-0056 Rev. 4
Page 5 of 5
5 Cr. 1/2 Mo
130
140
120
1.9
1.10
Gaskets of different types and sizes shall be placed in separate shipping containers and
each container clearly marked with the size, rating, material specification and item code.
1.11
All items shall be inspected and approved by EIL Inspector or any other agency
authorized by EIL.
1.12
Any additional requirements specified in the requisition, shall be fully complied with.
1.13
Non-metallic ring gaskets as per ASME B16.21 shall match flanges to ASME B16.5 upto
24" (except 22" size) and to ASME B16.47B above 24" unless specified otherwise. For
22" size, the matching flange standard shall be MSS-SP44 unless specified otherwise.
1.14
Spiral wound gasket as per ASME B16.20 shall match flanges to ASME B16.5 upto
24"(except 22"size) and to ASME B16.47B above 24" unless specifically mentioned
otherwise. For 22" size, the matching flange standard shall be MSS-SP44 unless specified
otherwise.
1.15 The following abbreviations have been used in the Material Requisition for Spiral Wound
Gaskets :
(I)
(0)
GRAFIL :
2.0
REFERENCES
6-81-0001
6-81-0008
6-78-0001
Inner Ring
Outer Ring
Grafoil Filler
Igar tif5leg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
6-44-0057 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 5
47 74
k:r *
64vd,N*1 -R-
TECHNICAL NOTES
FOR BOLTS AND NUTS
21.03.13
23.07.07
15.06.98
30.12.92
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
9'1A-)DM
RN STD
4, UK
4.7t5(H
RN
ATD
DM
VC
SH
BRB
BN
AS
AKG
BPV
GRR
AS
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
tg-ar 054-eg
1.71217 2T2a+re OP J73,A)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaking)
6-44-0057 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
ASME :
ASTM :
MR
Material Requisition
PMI
SS
Stainless Steel
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
,lecnr, am award)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt Of India Undertaking)
6-44-0057 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
ACCEPTABLE DEVIATIONS
3.0
REFERENCES
Ogar 0144-eg
1.417M el,a,Je
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undeilaking)
6-44-0057 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 5
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
The process of manufacture, heat treatment, chemical & mechanical requirements and
marking for all stud bolts, m/c bolts, jack screws & nuts shall be in accordance with the
codes/standards and specifications given in the requisition. The applicable identification
symbol in accordance with the material specification shall be stamped on each bolt and
nut. Supplier shall strictly comply with MR/PR stipulations and no deviations shall be
permitted. Post Order Waiver/ Deviation format 5-0000-0180-F1 as mentioned in Cl. 5.18
of Specification for Quality Management System Requirements from Bidders (6-78-0001)
is not applicable.
1.2
Testing
1.2.1
Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the relevant material
specifications.
1.2.2
Material test certificate shall also be furnished. (Heat Analysis, Product Analysis and
Mechanical Requirement)
1.2.3
PMI shall be performed as per the scope and procedures defined in the Specification for
PMI at Supplier's Works (6-81-0001).
1.2.4
Stress Rupture Test as detailed in ASTM A453 shall be carried out for all ASTM A453
bolting material irrespective of the temperature.
1.2.5
Refer Specification no 6-81-0007 for 'Inspection & Test Plan for Bolting Material'.
1.3
All bolting shall be as per ASME B 18.2.1 for studs, M/c bolts and jackscrews and ASME
B18.2.2 for nuts.
1.4
Threads shall be unified (UNC for 1" dia and 8UN for > 1" dia) as per ASME B1.1 with
class 2A fit for studs, M/c bolts and jackscrews and class 2B fit for nuts.
1.5
Stud bolts shall be threaded full length with two heavy hexagonal nuts unless otherwise
specified. Length tolerance shall be in accordance with the requirement of Table D2 of
Annexure-D of ASME B 16.5.
1.6
The nuts shall be double chamfered, semi-finished, heavy hexagonal type and shall be
made by the hot forged process and stamped as per respective material specification.
1.7
Heads of jackscrews and m/c bolts shall be heavy hexagonal type. Jackscrew end shall be
rounded.
1.8
Each size of studs & m/c bolts with nuts and jackscrews shall be supplied in separate
containers marked with size and material specifications. `CRY0' shall be marked
additionally in case `CRY0' is specified in the requisition.
1.9
All items shall be inspected and approved (stagewise) by EIL inspector or any other
agency authorized by EIL.
1.10
The heat treatment for stud bolts & nuts shall be as per code unless mentioned otherwise.
1.11
All austenitic stainless steel bolts, nuts, screws shall be supplied in solution annealed
condition unless specified otherwise in the material specification.
1.12
Any additional requirements specified in the requisition shall be fully complied with.
ENGINEERS
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR
31
$2-al faReg INDIA LIMITED
BOLTS AND NUTS
6-44-0057 Rev. 4
Page 5 of 5
1.13
Stud bolts, nuts & jackscrews shall be impact tested wherever specified in the material
specification and also where the material specification is indicated as "CRYO". For S.S.
nuts and bolts minimum impact energy absorption shall be 27 Joules and test temperature
shall be -196C unless mentioned otherwise. For other materials impact energy and test
shall be as per respective code.
1.14
1.15
When specified as galvanized, the studs, M/C bolts and nuts shall be 'hot dip zinc coated'
in accordance with requirements of 'class C' of `ASTM A 153'. As an alternative, electrogalvanizing as per IS 1573, 'Service Grade Number 2' is also acceptable.
1.16
All Stud Bolts of Bolt diameter size 1" and above shall be provided with three nuts
irrespective of whatever has been specified elsewhere in the MR.
1.17
2.0
ACCEPTABLE DEVIATIONS
2.1
3.0
REFERENCES
6-81-0001
6-81-0007
6-78-0001
ENGINEER.S
125 INDIA LIMITED
fa~ r-konrao.00r.0
6-44-0066 Rev. 2
Page 1 of 7
4-wich
23/09/14
30/06/09
22/04/04
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
PK
AK
Prepared
by
ATILk4>SI
k%Xiq
SH
RN
SC
SC
ND
SKG
MRC
Standards Standards
Bureau
Comm ittee
Checked
by Convenor Chairman
BRB
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
~'i7llloi2Jt
~ts rai
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Ind. undertakng)
6-44-0066 Rev. 2
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
AARH :
AISI
ASME :
ASTM :
BHN :
BW
DP
IBR
:
MOC
MP
PMI
Rc
:
SCRD
SS
SW
WN :
eDMS
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
Mr. M. Ismaeel
Mr. Amrendra Kumar
Mr. G. Balaji
Mr. K.J. Harinarayanan (HMTD)
Mr. P P Lahiri / Mr. S. Ghoshal (SMMS)
Mr. S. Mukherjee (Construction)
Mr. K.V.K. Naidu (Projects)
31
otettort
ENQNEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo Undertalung)
6-44-0066 Rev. 2
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
Page No.
Sr.No
Description
1.0
2.0
3.0
IBR REQUIREMENTS
4.0
ACCEPTABLE DEVIATIONS
5.0
DOCUMENTATION
6.0
7.0
8.0
ATTACHMENTS FOR MR
9.0
REFERENCES
31
$1g-ar ;125
1.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
lA Govt of Inow undenakow
6-44-0066 Rev. 2
Page 4 of 7
2.0
2.1
All Codes and Standards for manufacture, testing and inspection etc. shall be of latest
editions.
2.2
The material of construction shall be as per the data sheet; for parts not mentioned in the
datasheet, vendor shall guarantee the material used for the service conditions specified. For
flanged traps, MOC of end flanges shall correspond to the material specified in the data
sheet.
For welding of dissimilar materials required for trap assembly, welder qualification
procedure shall be done prior to welding.
2.3
The material composition, physical properties, heat treatment & mandatory test reports,
dimensions and tolerances shall conform to the applicable codes/standards/specifications as
specified in the requisition.
2.4
All traps shall be designed with back pressure up to 80% of upstream pressure unless
otherwise specified in the datasheet.
2.5
A1l traps shall have an integral strainer which can be serviced and its material shall be
SS304/SS316. However, Ball Float and Inverted Bucket traps may be supplied with
separate strainer of trap or line size, but vendor should quote composite price for the same.
Trap and strainer shall be supplied in assembled condition having strainer in the upstream.
This strainer shall be of Y-type having 40mesh size and material of construction for body
and internals shall be same as that of trap.
2.6
Thermodynamic traps shall have seat integral or seal-welded to the body & central entry
with respect to the disc. The seat and disc shall be differentially hardened to Rc 45-50 and
Rc 40-45 respectively maintaining a minimum difference of Rc 5 to ensure wear on the
disc.
2.7
Thermostatic traps shall be designed with subcool temperature setting as per data sheet. If
nothing is specified in data sheet, subcooling of 10 Deg C should be considered by default.
2.8
Upto 300 Class rating, Composite Impulse cum Thermodynamic type steam trap with two
integral strainers in place of Thermodynamic and Thermostatic trap is also acceptable.
2.9
Inverted bucket steam trap shall be of horizontal entry & exit type.
2.10
For flanged end traps, weld-on flanges are also acceptable. However, the type of flange
shall be WN.
31 --1
5R-a- 22eg
1411W7 el,c1N,III~I)
2.11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Intha Undeftakmg)
ASME B16.5
ASME B16.11
ASME B16.11
ASME B16.25
Bevel end details for BW steam traps shall be as per ASME B16.25. Contour of bevel end
shall be as follows :
Material
Wall Thickness
Weld Contour
Upto 22 mm
Figure 2 Type A
> 22 mm
Figure 3 Type A
Upto 10 mm
Figure 4
Figure 5 Type A
> 25 mm
Figure 6 Type A
Flanged end face finish shall be normally specified in the data sheet. The interpretation for
range of face finish shall be as follows:
Stock Finish
Serrated/Smooth Finish/125 AARH
Extra Smooth/63 AARH
2.14
6-44-0066 Rev. 2
Page 5 of 7
2.13
Ends shall be as specified in the data sheet. The applicable dimension standards are:
Flanged ends
SW ends
SCRD ends
BW ends
2.12
For traps with ring joint type flanged ends the hardness shall be as follows :
Min. Hardness of
Flange Groove (BHN)
140
Max. Gasket
Hardness (BHN)
90
1% Cr to 5% Cr, 9Cr
150
130
160
140
140
120
Flange Material
Carbon Steel
2.15
For traps with flanged ring type joint ends, the hardness shall be recorded in the test report.
3.0
IBR REQUIREMENTS
3.1
IBR Documentation
3.1.1
Traps coming under the purview of IBR (Indian Boiler Regulations) shall be accompanied
with IBR Certificate original in Form III C duly approved and countersigned by IBR
authority / local authority empowered by Central Boiler Board of India. Photocopy of
original certificate duly attested by the local boiler inspector where the supplier is located
is the minimum requirement for acceptance.
3.2
For carbon steel traps described as "IBR", chemical composition for all carbon steel
components shall conform to the following :
ENGINEERS
Oga~ INDIA LIMITED
?(
3 LIg
laIRR riragt,a,
13~)
Carbon (max.)
Others (S, P, Mn)
6-44-0066 Rev. 2
Page 6 of 7
4.0
ACCEPTABLE DEVIATIONS
4.1
4.2
Cast traps including strainer with integrally cast flanges are also acceptable in lieu of
equivalent forged material. All castings offered in place of forgings shall be radiographed.
4.3
4.4
For traps where capacity has been specified in the datasheet, and if the trap meets the
capacity requirement, in these cases trap of same type but of lower size is also acceptable.
End connection size and type shall be same as that specified in datasheet.
4.5
5.0
DOCUMENTATION
5.1
5.2
Detailed dimensioned cross section drawing with parts, materials, weight, etc. shall be
submitted through EIL eDMS for records/information.
6.0
6.1
IBR steam traps shall be hydrostatically tested as per IBR regulations (latest edition). Other
steam traps shall be hydrostatically tested to twice the design pressure for which the traps
are suitable. For air traps test pressure shall be 1.5 times the design pressure.
6.2
6.3
Positive Material Identification (PMI) shall be performed as per the scope and procedures
as defined in the `Standard Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at
Supplier's Works' (No. 6-81-0001).
6.4
Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the relevant material
specifications/requisition. Test reports shall also be furnished for hydrotest and any other
supplementary tests as specified in the requisition.
k31
fg-Lif02-eg
.~
ENQNEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ollndia UndettakIngt
6-44-0066 Rev. 2
Page 7 of 7
6.5
Material test certificates (physical properties, chemical composition & heat treatment
report) of the pressure containing parts shall be furnished for the steam traps supplied.
Material test certificates for the other parts shall also be furnished for verification during
inspection.
6.6
6.7
Refer Specification 6-81-0134 for Inspection & Test Plan for Steam Traps.
7.0
7.1
Vendor shall securely attach on the body a metal tag stamped with item code, Tag no. (If
mentioned in requisition), size, rating and special conditions like `IBR'. Wherever
nameplate is provided, marking can be done on the same.
7.2
Paint or ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metal or metallic salts such as zinc,
lead or copper which cause corrosive attack on heating. IBR traps shall be painted with red
stripes (25mm width).
7.3
A11 traps shall be dry, clean and free from moisture, dirt and loose foreign material of any
kind.
7.4
All items shall be protected from rust, corrosion and mechanical damage during
transportation, shipment and storage.
7.5
7.6
7.7
End protectors of wood / plastic to be used on flange faces shall be attached by at least
three bolts and shall not be smaller than the outside diameter of the flange. However
plastic caps for SW & SCRD end steam traps shall be press fit type. End protectors to be
used on bevelled end shall be securely and tightly attached.
8.0
ATTACHMENTS FOR MR
Format No 3-16-43-0094
9.0
REFERENCES
6-81-0001
6-81-0134
6-78-0001
k31
$gU1812 -g
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 9
RYI
ch 1-1 ch
u I 41
23.09.2014
SH
29.06.2009
PK
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
,RN D SC
RN
SC
Prepared Checked
by
by
ND
Standards Standards
Bureau
Com m ittee
Convenor Chairman
Approved by
IM2 g
aIIZ, rlecnW ast aamnl
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
lA Govt ol Indo Undertakng)
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
AARH
AISI
ASTM
BHN
BW
DP
FLGD
FN
H2
HAZ
IBR
MOC
MP
NACE
PMI
SCRD
SW
UNC
WN
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
Mr. M. Ismaeel
Mr. Amrendra Kumar
Mr. G. Balaji
Mr. K.J. Harinarayanan (HMTD)
Mr. P P Lahiri / Mr. S. Ghoshal (SMMS)
Mr. S. Mukherjee (Construction)
Mr. K.V.K. Naidu (Projects)
tg'-ar2f51dg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo UndellaMing)
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0
2.0
3.0
DOCUMENTATION
4.0
5.0
6.0
ACCEPTABLE DEVIATIONS
8 I
7.0
8.0
ATTACHMENTS FOR MR
9.0
REFERENCES
t-11
Og-ar a;es
1~1 tY,CD11,613~
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
in Govt of Indu Unclellalong)
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 9
All codes and Standards for manufacture, testing and inspection etc. shall be of latest editions.
2.2
The material of construction shall be as per the data sheet; for parts not mentioned in the data
sheet, vendor shall guarantee the material used for the service conditions specified.
For flanged strainers, MOC of end flanges shall correspond to the material specified in the
Data sheet.
For welding of dissimilar materials required for strainer assembly, welder qualification
procedure shall be done prior to welding.
2.3
The material composition, physical properties, heat treatment, mandatory test reports,
dimensions and tolerances shall confirm to the applicable codes/ standards/specifications as
specified in the requisition.
2.4
Design shall be based on EIL Std 7-44-0300 for temporary strainers, EIL Stds 7-44-0303/0304
for T-type permanent strainers and Manufacturer's std. for Y-type strainers.
2.5
Body
Flanges
Gaskets
Bolts & Nuts
2.6
ASME B16.9/B16.11
ASME B16.5/B16.47 Series B
ASME B16.20/B16.21
ASME B18.2.1 & B 18.2.2 respectively
Ends of body shall either be Flanged, BW, SW or Screwed as specified in the data sheet.
2.6.1 The ends for strainers shall correspond to the following standards:
ASME B16.5/B16.47 Series B
ASME B16.25
ASMEB16.11
ASME B16.11
FLGD
BW
SW
SCRD
2.6.2 Bevel end details for BW strainers shall be as per ASME B16.25. Contour of bevel end shall
be as follows:
Material
Carbon Steel (Except
Low Temp. Carbon
Steel)
Wall Thickness
Weld Contour
Upto 22 mm
Figure 2 Type A
> 22 mm
Figure 3 Type A
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
Wall Thickness
Upto 10 mm
Alloy Steel,
Stainless Steel &
Low Temp. Carbon Steel > 10 mm & Upto 25 mm
Weld Contour
Figure 4
Figure 5 Type A
Figure 6 Type A
> 25 mm
Flange face finish shall be normally specified in the strainer data sheet. The interpretation for
range of face finish shall be as follows:
1000 p in AARH max.
Serrations with 125 to 250 p in AARH
32 TO 63 in AARH
Stock Finish
Serrated/Smooth Finish/125AARH
Extra Smooth Finish/63 AARH
2.8
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 9
Material
2.7
For strainers with ring type joint flanged ends the hardness shall be as follows:
Min. Hardness of
Groove (BHN)
140
Max. Gasket
Hardness (BHN)
90
1% Cr to 5% Cr, 9% Cr
150
130
160
140
140
120
Flange Material
Carbon Steel
2.9
For strainers with flanged ring type joint ends, the hardness shall be recorded in the test report.
2.10
Ends of screwed strainers unless otherwise specified shall have taper threads as per
ASME/ANSI B1.20.1 (upto 1.5" NB) & IS 554 (for 2" to 6" NB).
2.11
All 2" and higher size Y type strainers shall be provided with 3/4" screwed plug for drain
connection. For less than 2" this shall be 1/2" size.
For Y type, SW end Strainers (size 1.5" & below) to MNF'STD, blind end is also acceptable
with threaded plug cover instead of flanged end. In this case, plug shall be of forged material
equivalent to body material.
2.12
For Y type strainers, cast strainers with integrally cast flanges and with end cover / blind
flange in cast/forged construction is acceptable.
2.13
2.14
Pressure drop calculations shall be furnished by vendor along with the offer, wherever
specified in the data sheet.
2.15
2.15.1 All Austenitic Stainless Steel items shall be supplied in solution annealed condition.
2.15.2 For all Austenitic Stainless Steel items Inter-granular Corrosion Test shall be conducted as per
following:
Og-ar
faaes
ENGINEEFZS
INDIA LIMITED
Ift Govt of InOla Undettakong)
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 9
0.25%
As per IBR regulations
2.16.2 Strainers coming under the purview of "IBR" (Indian Boiler Regulations) shall each be
duly approved by IBR
individually accompanied by original IBR certificate in Form
authority / local authority empowered by the Central Boiler Board of India. Photocopy of
original certificate duly attested by the local boiler inspector where the supplier is located is
the minimum requirement for acceptance.
2.17
In case of T-type strainer, body construction shall be `Seamless' unless otherwise specified in I
the data sheet.
2.18
2.19
Strainers with welded body shall be in normalized condition & 100 percent radiographed by
X-ray.
2.20
All alloy steel strainers with welded body construction shall be normalized and tempered &
100 percent radiographed by X-ray.
2.21
Weld joints shall be stress relieved as per the requirement specified in the Strainer MR
Attachment..
Strainers of Hydrogen service category shall meet the requirements as specified in clause 4.0
below.
2.24
Galvanized strainers shall be coated with zinc by hot dip process conforming to IS 4736 / I
ASTM A153.
Og-arld2- g
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of InOta Unclettakingt
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 9
2.25 Gaskets
2.25.1 Non-metallic gaskets shall conform to B16.21 (corresponding to B16.5) up to 24" and B16.21
(corresponding to B16.47 Series `B') beyond 24", unless otherwise specified.
2.25.2 Spiral wound gaskets shall conform to B16.20.
2.25.3 Ring type and spiral wound gasket shall be self-aligning type.
2.25.4 Ring Joint gasket shall Octagonal type and shall conform to B16.20.
2.26 Bolting
2.26.1 All bolts shall conform to B18.2.1, nuts to B18.2.2. Reference shall also be made to B16.5 for
studs.
2.26.2 Threads shall be unified (UNC for upto 1"dia and 8UN for > 1"dia) as per ANSI B.1.1 with
class 2A fit for studs and M/C bolts and class 2B fit for nuts.
2.26.3 Nuts for Bolts & Studs shall be the American Standard Hexagon Heavy Series.
3.0 DOCUMENTATION
3.1
3.2
Detailed dimensioned cross section drawing with parts, materials, weight, etc. shall be
submitted through EIL eDMS for records/information.
Method of Manufacture
4.1.1 All carbon steel strainers having wall thickness 9.53 mm and above shall be normalized.
Carbon content shall be limited to .35% max. and Silicon .35% max. The normalizing heat
treatment shall be a separate heat treatment operation and not a part of the hot forming
operation. Normalizing shall be done after final cold draw pass for all thicknesses if cold
drawn.
4.1.2 All alloy steel (Cr-Mo) strainers shall be normalized and tempered. The normalizing and
tempering shall be a separate heat treatment operation and not a part of the hot forming
operation. The maximum room temperature tensile strength shall be 100,000 psig.
4.2
Impact Test
4.2.1 For all carbon steels and alloy steels with wall thickness over 20 mm, Charpy-V Notch impact
testing shall be carried out in accordance with paragraph UG-84 of ASME Section VIII, Div-1
per heat of material and per heat treating batch. Impact test specimen shall be in accordance
with ASTM A370. Impact energies at 0 C shall average greater than 27J (20 ft-lb) per set of 3
specimens, with a minimum of 19J (15ft-lb).
4.3
For all austenitic stainless steels, the weld deposit shall be checked for ferrite content. A
ferrite No (FN) not lens than 3% and not more than 10% is required to avoid sigma phase
embrittlement during heat treatment. FN shall be determined by ferritescope prior to post weld
heat treatment.
4.4
Hardness of weld and HAZ shall be 200 BHN (max) for carbon steel and 225 BHN (max) for
alloy steel.
sig-ar
rircortom.3oor.o
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
in Govt ol indLe Undenak,o9)
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 8 of 9
A11 strainers shall be hydrostatically tested at the lower of twice the design pressure and 1.5
times the class rating as per ASME B16.5 at ambient temperature.
5.2
All BW joints shall be 100% Radiographed and Fillet welds shall be 100% DP/MP checked.
5.3
Positive Material Identification (PMI) shall be performed as per the scope and procedures as
defined in the `Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at Supplier's Works'
(No. 6-81-0001).
5.4
All welded Tees indicated in the MR as "Cryo" & "LT" shall meet Impact test requirements of
ASME B31.3. The Impact test temperature shall be (-)196C & (-)45C for Stainless Steel &
Low Temperature Carbon Steel respectively unless otherwise mentioned in the MR.
5.5
The stage wise inspection of non-IBR Strainers shall be done by EIL inspector before
despatch. EIL/Client's authorized representatives reserve full right to witness stagewise
inspection of all mandatory/applicable supplementary tests. However, for IBR items, the
tests/inspection shall be by IBR authority.
5.6
Material Test Certificates (Physical Properties, Chemical Composition and heat Treatment
Report) shall also be furnished.
5.7
Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the relevant material
specifications/requisition. Test reports shall also be furnished for hydrotest and other
supplementary tests as specified in the requisition.
5.8
Refer Specification 6-81-0133 for Inspection & Test Plan for Strainers.
6.2
Cast strainers with integrally cast flanges are also acceptable in lieu of equivalent forged
material. All castings offered in place of forgings shall be radiographed.
6.3
6.4
In the case of T type strainers, `Seamless' body is acceptable in place of "Welded" body.
`Welded' body shall not be acceptable in place of `Seamless'.
Each Strainer shall be legibly & conspicuously stamped on the body, in accordance with the
requirements of applicable standards along with special condition like IBR, CRYO, NACE,
H2 etc. Vendor shall also mark on the body the Location/Tag No. and Line Number
mentioned in MR attachment.
7.2
A11 items shall be dry, clean and free from moisture, dirt and loose foreign material of any
kind.
ENGINEERS
LIMITED
r laWs INDIA
$'g-a
1.1RA. vivaxt As..AlcA.1>
IA Govt 01 Ind. Undellaking)
2-1
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 9 of 9
7.3
All items shall be protected from rust, corrosion, and mechanical damage during
transportation, shipment and storage.
7.4
7.5
Paint or ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metal or metallic salts such as Zinc,
Lead or Copper which causes corrosive attack on heating.
7.6
Strainers under "IBR", "CRYO", "NACE" & "H2" shall be painted in Red, Light Purple,
Canary Yellow and sea green strips respectively for easy identification. Width of strip shall be
25 mm. Strainers coming under the purview of "IBR", "CRYO" , "NACE" &
"H2"(hydrogen) shall be painted with one circumferential stripe of colour red, light purple
brown, canary yellow & white respectively for easy identification. Width of stripe shall be
12mm for sizes less than 3" and 25mm for sizes 3" and above. Stripe shall be located one end
near to the bevel/socket/screwed/flanged end.
7.7
After testing, one coat of inorganic zinc silicate (minimum DFT 65 to 75 microns) shall be
applied as primer over the external surface for carbon steel / alloy steel strainers.
7.8
End protectors of wood / plastic to be used on flange faces shall be attached by at least three
bolts and shall not be smaller than the outside diameter of the flange. However plastic caps
for SW & SCRD end strainers shall be press fit type. End protectors to be used on beveled end
shall be securely and tightly attached.
8.0 ATTACHMENTS FOR MR
Format No.3-1643-0093:
9.0 REFERENCES
6-81-0001
6-81-0133
6-78-0001
STIFFENER OG
NOM
0
+0
C _2
1-)
2"
1
0
IIIIMMUMMIMMEM
ms
mm
waAllass SUMBA/
MIMMMIM/JIM
SEE DETAIL-1
1-
2/2
MMIMMWN/
.U.1,7.wmmm
3"
4"
D E H
SCH
154
160
168
170
171
51
80, XS
152
158
166
168
169
48
160
149
155
163
165
166
40
XXS
147
153
161
163
164
35
40, STD
177
183
192
198
61
80, XS
175
181
190
194
190
196
57
160
172
179
192
188
194
51
40, STD
194
204
211
213
214
76
80, XS
192
202
209
211
212
72
160
189
198
206
208
209
64
XXS
185
194
202
204
205
54
40, STD
232
242
250
264
266
100
80, XS
229
239
247
261
263
95
120
227
237
245
259
261
89
160
224
234
242
256
258
83
XXS
221
231
239
253
255
75
58
6X6
64
6X6
64
6X6
64
6X6
STIFFENER 0G
LOW
VISCOCITY
0 <y< 2
MIDIUM
VISCOSITY
00 2 4 y. 8
HIGH
VISCOSITY
0
y>
N.rr
OPEN
AREA%
0.097
8 MESH 22 SWG
62.2
TYPE 4
0.111
7 MESH 21 SWG
60.3
TYPE 3
0.202
4 MESH 18 SWG
65.3
TYPE 2
0.053
14 MESH 26 SWG
55.1
TYPE 5
0.053
14 MESH 26 SWG
55.1
TYPE 5
GASOLINE,
PROPANE
WATER
U-
MESH
SPECIFICATION
OPENING (IN)
SERVICE
MESH
DESIGNATION
NOTES:
1. THE MESH SPECIFICATIONS AS GIVEN IN THE TABLE ARE TO BE USED WHEN STRAINER
IS INTENDED TO BE USED AS PERMANENT STRAINER. IN CASE OF TEMPORARY STRAINER
THE MESH SPECIFICATION SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
FOR LINES UPTO 2 //2"
S.S STD. STOCK MESH 0.047" DIA WIRE X0.203 SQ.CLEAR OPENING-65.9 % OPEN AREA
FOR LINES 3"& ABOVE
S.S STD. STOCK MESH 0.08" DIA WIRE X0.253 SQ.CLEAR OPENING 57.6 % OPEN AREA.
2. MATERIAL AS PER LINE SPECIFICATION.
3/4"95
- SCREWED
PLUG
C
PCD (NO. OF BOLTS & BOLT DIMENSIONS
& MATERIAL TO SUIT SPEC.)
5
28.03.13
OfitiefithENGNEERS
4
23.07.07
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD
#1gailaRegyri
IDIA LIMMED Rev.
men, mew =mom
(A Govt. of India Undertaking)
Date
No.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F5 Rev. 0
fy UK
Wr i*./RN ATD
r
A DM
RN
ATD
DM
VC
Prepared
Checked
Stds. Committee
Convenor
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
by
by
Purpose
Approved by
STANDARD No.
7-44-0303 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 1
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
cp
)
7
C
C
0)
R . CO
CO
0 aCn
c3
0 co
'
7 0
0
CD
(/)
CD
0.
C)
0
7"
*
Cn
co
01
(.41
4
IT,
c..,
>
--f
71 rT1
171
LA
...,
(n (n
=n--71
s -0
M
0 0m
CO
,-)
rn
na
0-1
m
.c:7) 20
Z
0
I
ZEN
MU"-
bum
in -I
0
0
CY) NJ*
x
w
0 m
Mu'
0 0 _1
DM
co
Zm
mm
*r
v)
00
a ;-=
>
COW
w0
0
0 "4
Z
-10j
z00m
mZ
X (1-1-1
>
Q
0
0 > 0
- -r-> >
Z<
"0
'"1
MZz
13 in V),..
> 0 (nVn
"CI
2>
113
-
is,
CD
co
CD
CD
7.
O
co
C)
xl
VS
>0
0
--I
mm
i01"1
cn>
I 0
ZZ
02
-um
xpz,
mm
rN
0-1
Om
0:0
0
(A >
Nz
1.3
0
0)
CO
.1
4 0
0
CD
CO
0
CO
co co
co co
CO 0 0
(c)
CO
CA
(.4
O
O
(41
tO
(0
0
0
co
UI
co
UI
UI
-
O
0)
CO
D
CO
O
CA
4'
CD
co
1.3
.1
1.3
1.3
n)
4'
(A
O
0)
cn
0
.1
(0
K.)
0 0
CO
(0
0
CA
0
CD
CA
0
.1
co
co
cr) 0
CO
UI
CA
UI
.1
CO
O
0)
0)
4'
(44
0)
na
N
0 0
c.)
O
O
CD
CO
O
(41
0
CO
CA
1.3
N3
O
CA
0)
0)
0)
0)
CO
0
0)
(.7)
CA
CO
CA
CO 03
0) CD
-44
1.3
co
O
CO
0)
N
0
CO
Co
0)
(.4
cn
COD
0 CO
co
O (0
O CA
(c) co
cn Cn
N 0
O
-"cr
0) co
0
0)
co
0 co
0
co
Cn co
co
0 CO
0)
O
O
0)
n3
0)
0)
CA
co
o
W co co
0) co
0)
CT
CA
0)
'N1111
Aii
co cn
co co
co co
0
0)
a)
o)
0 0 co
0 0
NE. 1110.
ilr
0
cn 0) 0
O
co
O
CO
0)
(0
CA
co
cn
0
0
co
O
co
O
CA
CO
0)
co co
CO
n)
1.3
0) O
N
O
co
1.3
0
cr,
0)
O CO
cr)
(.1
0
CO
Isa
0
4. co
03
CO
CO
1Z)
m
0
co
0
O
Oa
CD
co
(c)
O
CIO
57.
V) 1-
rT1
A71
V)
m
V) m
f
_1 I
0' A
'75
'
di
.., -0
m
Z
0
-rn
0
0 _x
'6 'Oi
g =
_1
0
,
''-
xi
o
-0
''.--'
, rr1
_,,
,- '-"'
cf)
E3
O
C
,:-.. 7.1
o z
x rn
RI (11
m =i
a)
r)
01
cn
m
(Cl N
CO
ts)
rn
CO
0
CO
coc
CO
CO
ts)
m
BC
D)
>
z r-
N 1.3
ts)
0 0
oa 0
c.)) CL
cc
1.3
0
CO
CO
CO
CO
(o
(0
CD
CO
CO
CO
CT
ID
o3
CO
co
0
co
CO
1.3
0)
CA
(0
rq
C4
0 0
04
4 4 A
m
na
4 4m
na
CA
CA
01
9, P
n)
i,i
cn 01
-1 -1 I
0==
.4
4m
0
is,
0)
0)
0)
CD
of
(J/
cn
0
*
c-)
C)
n)
is,
0
*
0
cy)
co
0
0
,,,,
n)
_.
K>
-.
en
x
CO
0
..4
cn
*
0
-.
03
-.
(I)
*
0
n)
-.
CO
1.3
n) 0) co
co 0 cn
*
*
*
0 0 0 0
na
-.
0
-.
--.
(,)
(f) D Emm
1- m V)
v)ii
-0
-.
-.
00
,,,,
x
m x
m
m m
m m
0
n3
cn vi
= =
04 1\3
6-)
C
0
N3
V
co
0)
opp
-.
na -4
CO
V
OPPP
0 0 iv 1.3
4 5
0
>
0a 9,
03
s:
s:
Thzcnz
...1 Co -. (44 A
r
-. E C
4
E
M .. m
M
m
0 v) G)1 LI) v)
= = = I =
LI)
0
_.
-.
<
A 8
000
m -co co
Z .71
co
0
CD
cr
co
CD
CJ)
n3
cn 0
I-
A (.1*
1:.A' C)
0
co
v
co 0
cn. -'
9 a). c);o
-13
rZZ
Ri M
0 ^
0C
-IN 0 x
Co
).
*
-I
ro
x,
5 = PO ^E
m
05
ox A cn
00
0
OIL
VISCOSITY IN cP
o
xi ,
-0 g
0
CT
O
0
CO
0)
1)
0)
(0
UI
co
o)
0
xi
R'
N
0
oa
1.3
0
1.3
CO
co
CO
(A
Cm)
0)
tA
0)
0)
co
co
UI
co
o)
xi
(f)
(.1)
-o
-o m
Cl)
-0 5;
(/)
> --I
CD
co
o)
n
z
D. 0
0 m
R'
1,3
0
0
CD
01
c,4
co
co
co
co
co
0)
N
0
CI)
CO
co
CO
co
0)
Cr
O
to
co
O
co
0
zO
Z
Z0
7J co
>
cn
co
co
(0
CO
CD
13
(7,
0
cn
(CI
Co co
(41
n)
CO
cn
co
co
JO I
0 to
cA 1.) n)
cn
a> cn
a)
co
(0
co
0)
co
>
m
I
5>
co
1.3
(D
CD
CA
..a
a)
co
01
oo
x)
I
>-
(13
Co
co
0)
(D
CA
co
cA
cn
CO
CD
co
co co
0
(.4
CA
(.4
0
co 0
n.)
Ln 0
co
0 cn
CO
(41
to
co
A
0)
co
A
CA
ha
1.3
co
0)
(0
co
co
1,3
0
X
0 0
0
1.3
0 to
co
co co
0)
CO
CO
CO
co
1.3
0 (.4
co
co
co
ts.) n.)
co
cn
0 co
0
co
co
.1
0
I -1-
NO
(C)
CO
tO
(c)
CA
o)
0)
co
I
m
co
CA
N3
rso
0
0)
CA
n.)
CO
co
co
(.4
A
na
CA
(.4
0
0
0
(0
(0
0 0
4.)
CA
CO
co 1.)
1.3
o)
(,)
CO
co
0)
(.7)
CA
CO
..a
CO
n)
(41
co
0)
(.7)
CA
.1
na
0)
CO
co
cin
co
r.)
(D
(.1
1,3
n3
CA
(A
.4 co
co
C/2
co
0
co
0
0 co
co
(13
0.)
co
0
co
co
CO
_ C/2
I
0
rT1
a)
1 00
-11 0
xi 0
XI 0
0
X0
-41 0
y1
n0
o
al 0
a) 0
n0
73 0
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Ogar
7-44-0350 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
TYPE
TYPE
TEE EQUALLI,
REDUCING
o
3/4" u"
VC1
VF1
PLUG
(TYP)o
r,
3/4"
TEE EQUAL REDUCING
DF1
VP1
DC1
DP1
VC2
DC2
RED
VF2
DF2
EQUAL TEE
3/4"
VP2
lon
DP2
_L_L
ON LINE 1"-1 1/2"
VC3
3/4"(NOTE 2)
VF3
TEE EQUAL
REDUCING
DC3
(NOTE 2)
3/4 "4
TEE EQUAL
REDUCIN
DF3
DC7
DP3
VP3
DF7
ON LINE 3/4"-1 1/2"
DP7
DC4
DF4
VC4
DP4
VF4
200
VP4
TEE EQUAL/
REDUCING
\
in
3/4"
(NOTE 2) X 3/4"
VF5
!(NOTE 2)
VP5
TEE EQUAL
REDUCING
TEE EQUAL/
REDUCINIG
ON LINE 1.
-1 1/2"
(NOTE 2)
DC5
3/4"
DF5
DC8
(NOTE 2) x 3/4"
RED.
VP6
FITTING
TO FITTING
DF8
FITTING
TO FITTING
DP8
EQUAL TEE
DC6
DF6
01.09.14
Rev.
No.
Date
v<
Purpose
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RN / AT4k--{
SC
Stds. Committee
Convenor
SC
ND
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
gz;11. fafZs
2s17astg erti.rftotfit
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Govt of Incha Undeltak,og)
STANDARD No.
VENTS AND DRAINS
(ON LINES 2" AND ABOVE)
7-44-0351 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
TYPE
DRAIN
VENT
TYPE
D1
V1
VP 1
DP1
D2
V2
D3
DP3
V3
VP3
D4
V4
D5
V5
NOTES :
MIN.
1. DIMENSIONS INDICATED ARE VALID FOR 75mm (MAX) INSULN.
THICKNESS. FOR HIGHER INSULATION THICKNESS INCREASE
(NOTE 2)
DC9
DF9
DP9
DIMENSION AS REQUIRED
2. VALVES TO BE PROVIDED SHALL BE SIMILAR TO LINE ISOLATION
VALVE (LATE, BALL OR PLUG VALVE ETC., WITH FLGD, SW OR SCR'D
ENDS) UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN PMS.
BRANCHOFFS LIKE HALF CPLG(SW OR SCR'D)/SOCKOLET/WELDOLET
& END CONNECTIONS LIKE CAP/PLUG/FLANGE & BLIND FLANGE
SHALL BE AS PER PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS.
3. VENTS/DRAINS CAN BE PROVIDED ON FLAT SIDE OF
ECCENTRIC REDUCER ON SIZES 4" & ABOVE
4. LEGEND V=VENT, D=DRAIN, C=CAP, F= FLANGE, P=PLUG
DC10
3/4" (NOTE 2)
DF1 0
DP10
it
150
29.06.09
Rev.
No.
Date
d9.9vSH
Purpose
`>RN / ATD
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
SC
Stds. Committee
SC
ND
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
5sZrE faWS
I741M c4c,cni1 rfi13rf
STANDARD No.
WELLS INSTALLATION
1 '1/4" DIA. TAPS
( UP TO CLASS 600 )
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of rndia Undertaking)
7-44-0353 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 2
NOTE-2
NOTE-3
NOTE-2
NOTE-3
---
TYPE
TW-6
TYPE
TW-9
b(5
TYPE
TW 7
man
u1,1 1\tu
O
O
NOTE-2
NOTE-2
2tv
k.
,/,,.///,'",
"
NNN,NN ./,/%1
- 2-00 ------------TYPE
TW 8
4"
6"
630
LINE DIA.
NOTES:
1 BOLTS, NUTS AND GASKETS BY PIPING.
2 BRANCH F1TTING SHALL BE AS PER PMS
3 IF BRANCH FITTING IS A COUPLING,
fT SHALL BE OF SPECIAL LENGTH.
670
10"
670
12"
670
14"
670
16"
670
670
750
VESSELS
750
18"
No.
Rev.
8"
TYPE
TW-1 0
Purpose
SH
N /ATD
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
SC
Stds. Committee
SC
ND
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
C:nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpservpri
51 -a[ laWs
isrtuR GTO' +ffil 3,4-0,44
STANDARD No .
WELLS INSTALLATION
2" DIA. TAPS
(CLASS 900 & ABOVE)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
( A Govt of India Undertaking)
7-44-0353 Rev 4
Page 2 of 2
TYPE
1W-4
TYPE
TW-2
TYPE
TW-3
200
TYPE
TW-5
CLEARANCE
UNE DIA. MINIMUM
FOR REMOVAL
4"
630
NOTES:
1 BOLTS, NUTS AND GASKETS BY PIPING.
6"
630
6"
670
10"
670
14"
670
16"
670
18"
750
VESSELS
750
No
Date
Format Nn R-no-nnnr-r4
Purpose
670
4
Rev .
670
12"
SH
!.
$%
) /RN /ATDKb
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
SC
")\/
SC
ND
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
C.onvrinht Fli - All nnhts rp,.prvr-,(1
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7iF277 Cirm11 en1,5oat.o
PRESSURE TAPPINGS
(PA, PG, PC, PT, PIC ETC)
7-44-0354 Rev. 4
50THKINSU.
50THK INS
Page 1 of 1
INST.
INST.
3/4"
PIPING.
(NOTES 2&3)
RED COUPLING
3/4"
PIPING.
(NOTES 2&3)
PIPING.
(NOTES 2&3)
o_
PC-2
INST.
INST.
INST.
_L
PIPING.
(NOTES 2&3)
WAG
3/4"
PIPING.
(NOTES 2&3)
10
PC-4
PC-3
ON LINE 1"-1/2"
95 THK INSU.
PC-1
PC-5
ON LINE 1"
1
/2"
ON LINE 3/4''
PC-6
ON LINE 1"
INST.
PIPING.
3/4"
(NOTES 2&3)
PC 10
ii=6
.111
PC -1 1 ON LINE 2" & ABOVE
1
(FOR FLANGED VALVE)
(NOTES 2&3)
NOTE-3
PIPING
FOR
INST.
& ABOVE
NOTES :
1. THE INDICATED DIMENSIONS ARE MINIMUM WHICH ALSO COVER INSULATION TO THE EXTENT SHOWN ABOVE.
IN CASE OF HIGHER THICKNESS OF INSULATION THAN INDICATED THE DIFFERENCE SHALL BE ADDED IN THE
DIMENSIONS SHOWN ABOVE.
2. PRESSURE TAPPING SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH VALVE SIMILAR TO LINE ISOLATION VALVE (GATE, BALL OR PLUG VALVE ETC.,
WITH FLGD, S.W. OR SCR'D ENDS) UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN PMS, TEE(EQUAL OR REDUCING)/HALF COUPLING(S.W.
OR SCR'D)/STUB IN/SOCKOLET/WELDOLET SHALL BE AS PER PIPING MATERIAL SPECS. DOUBLE ISOLATION VALVE SHALL BE
USED FOR CLASS 900 & ABOVE.
3. IN CASE OF FLGD VALVES BOLTING & GASKET ON BOTH SIDES OF VALVE SHALL BE IN PIPING SCOPE
4. IN CASE OF TAPPING PROVIDED OTHER THAN INDICATED IN THIS STD FOR LAYOUT REASONS
DETAILED DIMENSIONS WILL BE CALLED OUT.
fri/AK
29.06.09
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
/ATDW
SC
SC
ND
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
NOTES
1 INPUT CODE-STA1/211.
X50
1S0
T
1yp
r--'
0
ro
hb ,i
1
3/4"
3/4"
- 3/4"
EL
.'''
6
0
. 4 4 4 '
1 Ow
3/4
3/4"
3/4-
pr
(A I N)
3/4:K
MIN)
3/4"
iP
c-i
in
3/4"
45
50
.
I'l)
SYMBOL OF REPRESENTATION
IN)
0
r;
(a) IN ISOMETRIC
1-
BLIND FLANGE
(TYP.)
III
r...,
FyJ
N
r.,
298
~
IP
y0
sT
STA-1-TYPE- III
STA- 1-TYPE-I
,I' IYPE'
150
MI
,f)
3/4"
i)
3/4"
,
. , 3/4"
.
3/4"
150
3/4" I
HEADER
DRIP LEG
3/4-
ip
)-.
44
r
11
3/4".
V 4
I
1
, 41
r
2
LINE FROM DRIP LEG TO STEAM TRAP
ASSEMBLY AND FROM STEAM TRAP TO
CONDENSATE RECOVERY (IF IT IS
RECOVERING) TO BE ROUTED AND
DIMENSIONED ON PIPING ARRGT. DWG.
Pir
,f 1 100
0
3/4:9.
to
150
e~ 3Q 0
3/4;r
. ii
TYPE-111
..1-SR._-1
-...
45
IN
1-.
STA-1 -TYPE-11
SO
STA 1 TYP E IV
-
#8iNzegthIENIGINERS
#fgarfaiRtmar
INDIA LIMITED
oar
asaiimo
PRIOR
15.12.15
REAFFIRMED
10.07.10
REAFFIRMED
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
SH
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
1"i- RN
SC
DM
SC
ND
STANDARD No.
7-44-0400 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 4
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
NOTES:
..--,
1. BRANCH CONNECTIONS EQUAL TEE
pAIN)
El,
,e....,
3/'r
r-,
,>1.1
, .--,
3,4,.-
3/
..)
z-S
,,
RE
2-
ER
.,,
,,,iv.
SYMBOL OF REPRESENTATION
(a)
IN ISOMETRIC
STA-3TYPE-1
111
STA-3TYPEIII
E .300
.31(PV
1. 0
IN)
EI
Ei-
,...,
,-
3/11.
7L
I
/,4 i
(b)
4N
... 4/4.'
1.-
.
.-
'
HEADER
DRIP LEG
.2-
3/4.
.
. 10le
IN
P'
IN)
IN ARRANGEMENT DRG.
/j
.-
Sop
St
cz
.'
.---
-,
z
LINE FROM DRIP LEG TO STEAM TRAP
ASSEMBLY AND FROM STEAM TRAP TO
CONDENSATE RECOVERY (IF IT IS
RECOVERING) TO BE ROUTED AND
DIMENSIONED IN PIPING ARRGT.DWG.
STA-3TYPEIV
30p r
STA-3TYPEI1
;
dr,
#5111areglikErsiaNEERs
4
Rev.
No.
15.12.15
10.07.10
Date
REAFFIRMED
REAFFIRMED
NJAK
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
17/ RN
SC
DM
Stds. Committee
'
C
ND
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
STANDARD No.
NOT S:
2 98
ON)
0 5%
.k
6 00
CI"
296
:a.
1 5
TO
3/4"
...n., '
3/4"
',41,?.."i
if)
3/4",
,r3/4"
,ir_1,
,01,-
.,,,j
5 t-
0
1 5
ApE
0
ri
0 OF
_ ,/ r
50
.10
ir 4111
3/4"
0A0
El-'
Giv
3 /4"
.,AO
3/ 4"
-,-ir
P IP
El"
it*f
sv
0 Or
...*.
505
.
GP
10
4)
1 50
150
15
OF
5SEE6IN
BLIND FLANGE,
(TYP.)
0 A0
, GI -
-.44-
>4;4:rt.,
1-''
..-* .,:
00
401,16
51.
,, OF
AP
ip
411
45.
SYMBOL OF REPRESENTATION
50
(a) IN ISOMETRIC
1 00
50
III
150
STA-2-TYPE-III
STA-2-TYPE-I
.21'19
1,1
rii
0
ij
3/4"
3/4"
ii..,.
5 04 ER
2 98
. 4'
3/4"
IP
'
5
60 0
0,0
G. -
......;.-
1 50
P
G
0
c-i
tog
OF
EA
f S
I..
g0
Of*
Q AVEL
,,d
....,..14
1,
sc GI -
0 8
, Or
i,
0 B
rl
P IPE
300
HEADER
DRIP LEG
, OF
29
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
,
OP
SGRA~OTE'3
..,
..
''',./...1&-2
...
STA-2-TYPE-IV
STA-2-TYPE-II
Ofitadath ENGINEERS
INDIA umITED
Oar BR!~
mown
WI ERIMIE
Format
No. 8-00-0001-F5 Rev. 0
Page 1527
of 1744
4
Rev.
No.
1 5.1 2.15
1 0.07.1 0
Date
REAFFIRMED
REAFFIRMED
TYPE-III
..41%'H
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RN
SC
DM
9\i'rj
SC
ND
STANDARD No.
STEAM TRAP ASSEMBLY
STA-2 (OPEN SYSTEM)
7-44-0400 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 4
NOTES:
2 98
6 QO
(.....,
N#
9-
'I
00
3/4",
'
or'3/"
IN)
r- Or
3/4"
0
PIP
"NO
sv
50
GRPQ
3/ 4"
0'
100
50
3/4"
....--,
H'
OF
.., 411
1,
c-s.-:
I,
4 50
...*,..0..
..1;..;:,
3/4"
150
OF
cvX
VY
io
1 50
El-'
..:r
3/4"
IN
MIN)
298
5e
?-K
GP/' 0
OR
PIP E
hl
BLIND FLANGE /,
(TYP.)
SYMBOL OF REPRESENTATION
(a) IN ISOMETRIC
150
1
11
STA -9TYPEIII
STA-9TYPEI
5 Au g
150
IN
E~ 250
3/4"
..,
045P
-,
...4%
4,",,.
'
, ...
50
rc G
)
I.'
P IP E
At
VC
, OR
IIf
1.
'1
Go
HEADER
DRIP LEG
50
..:,
. N.:
trr
--..->,.:'
'
vo,
0
5
# OR
ON)
PIP
OF
5C6
5Q
ri
I/
OF
. 'F'3/4"
GP
3/4"
3/4"
NI
3/4"
OP
3/4"
3/4"
O (M IN)
,G
5 EE
3Q0
J
H
''.-.
LINE FROM DRIP LEG TO STEAM TRAP
ASSEMBLY AND FROM STEAM TRAP TO
CONDENSATE RECOVERY (IF IT IS
RECOVERING) TO BE ROUTED AND
DIMENSIONED IN PIPING ARRGT.DWG.
lJ
t /
..---isl*A-9 TYPEIII
,_
STA-9TYPEIV
STA-9TYPEII
laigiZETM---ENGINERS
=WO
5.1 2. 1 5
15.12.15
REAFFIRMED
Pt)>"SH
AK
( 1% RN
10.07.10
REAFFIRMED
PK
RN
SC
Prepared
Checked
by
by
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
DM
Stds. Committee
.1SC
ND
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
STANDARD No.
7-44-0400 Rev. 5
Page 4 of 4
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
STANDARD No.
k5-1WIt4
$}2-arfa[A5
(MCRe-wmWas,Jwc.f)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(AGovt o1 Intlia lindertak,n9)
7-44-0403 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
fl
DIA
eld
0...4NOTE- 1
NOTE 1
NOTE-1
3/ 4"
TO STEAM TRAP
(NOTE-2)
MIN.100
(NOTE-4
3/4
3/
0
u-
-s
TO STEAM TRAP
(NOTE-2)
MIN.100
(NOTE-4
MIN.100
(NOTE-4
4gS49;
NOM LINE
DIA D
INCH
NOM DRIP
LEG DIA
d INCH
A
MM
3/4"
3/4"
125
100
1"
1"
125
100
1 1/2"
1 1/2"
125
125
2"
2"
75
150
3"
3"
75
150
4"
4"
75
175
6"
4"
75
175
8"
4"
75
175
10"
6"
75
175
12"
6"
75
175
14"
8"
75
175
16"
8"
75
175
18"
10"
75
175
20"
10"
75
175
12"
75
175
TO STEAM TRAP
(NOTE-2)
Al
MM
B
MM
NOTES :
1 . VALVE IS NOT REQUIRED IF STEAM TRAP ASSEMBLY IS INSTALLED WITHIN 3.OM OF DRIP LEG.
2. ALL PIPES, VALVES, FLANGES, FITTINGS, BRANCHOFFS ETC. SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH
PROJECT PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS.
3. THIS ARRANGEMENT MAY BE USED ONLY IN CASE OF SPACE CONSTRAINT. SUPPORTING ARRANGEMENT
SHALL BE REVIEWED IN DETAIL TO ENSURE THAT THERE IS NO FOULING BETWEEN SUPPORT PEDESTAL
AND BLIND FLANGE ASSEMBLY.
4. BOTTOM OF PIPE ELEVATION SHALL BE MINIMUM 600MM FROM GRADE. IN CASE OF RATINGS BEYOND
CLASS 600 AND SIZES BEYOND 8", BOTTOM OF PIPE SHALL BE FIXED TO ENSURE MINIMUM 1 OOMM
CLEARANCE FROM GRADE.
4
3
30.07.1 4
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
t,,
SH
AC
AK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
ATD
...."" RN
DM
Nc)
SC
VC
Stds. Bureau
Stds. Committee
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
5g-211 926
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertakng)
STANDARD No.
BUTT WELDING
END PREPARATION
7-44-0477 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
0.8-2.4mm
37 1/2421/2'
=22mm MAX.
20-+21/2'
1.6+0.8mm
OVER22mm
1
20'2/2'
1-1.61-0.8mm
(B) WALL THICKNESS OVER 22mm
(AS PER ASME B31.3)
NOTES :
1. SQUARE ENDS MAY BE USED FOR WALL THICKNESS LESS THAN 5mm
.+5'
2. PIPE ENDS SUPPLIED WITH BEVEL ANGLE OF 30 _cy NEED NOT BE BEVELED FURTHER.
23.09.14
29.06.09
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
AK
RN
PK
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RN /AT
SC
ND
Stds. Bureau
Stds. Committee
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
t~f exow zolJoor44)
7-44-0478 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
FrAa
ElE1
X MIN.
X MIN.
X MIN.
1.6mm APPROX.
t OR 6.4mm WHICHEVER
IS SMALLER
SLIP ON FLANGE
1.6mmAPPROX.
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
\*
,(1 SH
IC7
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
V-^N /ATD)
SC
SC
.-
ND
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
MreM elecnreill5101?1,N)
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
faigleg W INDIA LIMITED
Govt of India Undertaking)
7-44-0479 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
45'
0.8-2.4mm
V '$ A's
tc(min)
1.6 to 3.2mm
1.6 to 3.2mm
SECTION X AT CROTCH OF
RIGHT ANGLE BRANCH
SECTION Y AT FLANK
0.5T
min
tc(min)
45'
min.
1.6 to 3.2mm
0.8-2.4mm
0.8-2.4mm
1.6 to 3.2mm
1.6-3.2mm
45'MIN
SECTION Q AT BACK OF
SLOPING BRANCH
SECTION W AT FLANK OF
EQUAL BRANCH
SECTION Z AT CROTCH OF
SLOPING BRANCH
NOTES :1.
THIS TYPE IS TO BE USED WHEN BRANCH IS EQUAL TO OR ONE SIZE SMALLER THAN MAIN PIPE.
2.
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
SH
PK
RN
SC
Prepared
Checked
by
by
'SC
DM
ND
fafaitg
ramie anJvms+1
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
to Govt of India Undertaking)
7-44-0480 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
371/2*-1-21/2'
OR
0.8-1.6 mm
1.6 mm
1.6 mm
0.8-2.4 mm
X MAX
1.6-3.2 mm
t)p UK
511,,r--/SH
AC
RN
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared
Checked
by
by
ATD14\.n
RN
DM
DM
VC
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
faijiles
(.,rr rrrmir
C57.5,
10.1)
STANDARD No.
ENGINEER.S
INDIA LIMITED
( A Govt of India Undertaking)
7-44-0481 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
1.6 mm
0.8-1.6 mm
1.6+0.8 mm
FAPPROX. 1.6 3.2 mm
APPROX.3mm
SEQUENCE OF WELDS
> 'CJK
AC
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
RN
Checked
by
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
I ~f 27221517 C151.1,44.1)
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
1Ufa2a5 INDIA LIMITED
k.31
7-44-0482 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
NOTES :
1. THIS TYPE IS TO BE USED WHEN
BRANCH IS MORE THAN ONE SIZE
SMALLER OF MAIN PIPE.
tc(min)
1.6 TO 3.2 mm
SECTION Y AT FLANK
tc(min)
tc(min.)
1.6 to 3.2mm
1.6 to 3.2mm
1.6 to 3.2mm
SECTION Z AT CROTCH OF
SLOPING BRANCH
SECTION Q AT BACK OF
SLOPING BRANCH
31.12.13
*ryUK
15.11.08
AC
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
RN
yN"4
,7 H
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
DM
SC
VC
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
MM.! riemie
OW1170
STANDARD No.
BRANCH CONNECTION
ENGNEERS
ligar051-eg INDIA LIMITED
e..1
7-44-0483 Rev. 4
(BREAKING INTO)
Page 1 of 1
A=2d
10 0 TAPPED HOLE
FOR TESTING
MAIN PIPE
SYMBOL ON GADS
REINFORCEMENT PAD
SYMBOL ON ISOMETRICS
REINF.PAD
REINF. PAD
0 X THK.
0 X THK.\
NOTES :1. THIS TYPE IS TO BE USED WHEN BRANCH IS MORE THAN ONE SIZE SMALLER THAN MAIN
PIPE
2. THE REINFORCING PLATE SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM PIPE SPOOL OF THE SAME SCHEDULE
AND DIAMETER OF MAIN PIPE UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED
3. THE REINFORCEMENT PAD CALCULATIONS SHALL BE MADE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASME 831.3
OR IBR AS APPLICABLE
4. ALSO SEE STANDARD 7-44-0484
5. REFER STANDARD 7-44-0482 FOR WELDING DETAILS.
4
01.07.15
j SH
10.07.10
PK
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
,.- RN
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
SC
SC
DM
ND
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - At rights reserved
ENGINEERS
k31ifoJ i
fai5teg INDIA LIMITED
STANDARD No.
BRANCH CONNECTION
(NOT BREAKING INTO)
7-44-0484 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
10 0 TAPPED HOLE
FOR TESTING
REINF. PAD
0 x THK.
SYMBOL ON ISOMETRICS
NOTES :
1. THIS TYPE IS TO BE USED WHEN BRANCH IS EQUAL TO OR ONE SIZE SMALLER THAN MAIN PIPE
2. THE REINFORCEMENT PAD SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM PIPE SPOOL OF THE SAME SCHEDULE AND
DIAMETER AS MAIN PIPE UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.
3. THE REINFORCEMENT PAD CALCULATION SHALL BE MADE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASME 831.3 OR
IBR AS APPLICABLE.
4. ALSO SEE STANDARD 7-44-0483
5. REFER STANDARD 7-44-0479 FOR WELDING DETAILS.
SH
fv,AK
,/ RN
PK
RN
SC
Rev.
No.
SC
DM
ND
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Prepared
Checked
Date Purpose Convenor Chairman
by
by
Approved by
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
01
$'1g-a(44WR
r 02eg
23~1d50tn.)
STANDARD No.
TOLERANCES FOR
7-44-0486 Rev. 4
FABRICATION
Page 1 of 1
SECTION
(_)
31.12.13
15.11.08
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
UK
W
AC
SH
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
Ayl
DM
/R N
t-""
SC
VC
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
$1g-ar fa(Zs
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7-44-0487 Rev. 5
Page 1 of
E
11
6
10
5
4
9
3
2
8r-
1
7
0.866E
3xA
SIDE VIEW
END VIEW
....................................
....................................
....................................
COMPLETED REDUCER
NOTES
1. REDUCER SHALL BE FABRICATED OUT OF LINE PIPE.
2. ALL WELDS SHALL BE RADIOGRAPHED AS PER THE
PIPING CLASS NDT REQUIREMENTS.
3. THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN D1 & D2 SHALL NOT BE
MORE THAN 20" NOMINAL BORE.
23.09.14
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
MSH
AK
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
SC
SC
ND
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - AII rights reserved
INSTALLATION STANDARDS
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-IS-4020-Rev.0
Page 1 of 3
INSTALLATION STANDARDS
(STRUCTURAL)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT
OWNER
PMC
JOB NO.
A702
Bidders signature
and stamp
02.02.2016
AKS
AM
DCB
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
INSTALLATION STANDARDS
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-IS-4020-Rev.0
Page 2 of 3
PART-A (STRUCTURAL):
S.NO
TITLE
STANDARD NO.
REV NO.
NO. OF SHTS
1.
7-68-0417
2.
Handrail
7-68-0501
3.
Steel stair
7-68-0506
4.
7-68-0507
5.
7-68-0552
6.
7-68-0553
7-68-0557
8.
7-68-0697
STANDARD NO.
REV NO
NO OF
SHEETS
S.NO
TITLE
7-65-0006
7-65-0103
7-65-0207
7-65-0272
7-65-0403
7-65-0404
Standard No.
Revision
No. of
Sheets
PART-C (ARCHITECTURAL):
Title
Sl.
No.
01
7-75-0002
01
02
7-75-0003
01
03
Details of dado
7-75-0004
01
INSTALLATION STANDARDS
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-IS-4020-Rev.0
Page 3 of 3
Title
Sl.
No.
Standard No.
Revision
No. of
Sheets
04
7-75-0014
01
05
7-75-0015
01
7-75-0027
01
7-75-0028
01
06
07
08
7-75-0029
01
09
7-75-0031
01
10
7-75-0032
01
7-75-0036
01
7-75-0041
01
7-75-0043
02
11
12
13
14
False flooring
7-75-0049
03
15
7-75-0054
04
16
7-75-0060
01
17
7-75-0062
01
18
7-75-0063
01
19
7-75-0064
01
20
7-75-0065
02
21
7-75-0066
01
22
7-75-0068
03
23
7-75-0070
01
24
7-75-0071
01
25
7-75-0091
02
26
7-75-0093
04
Og-ar faWs
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Incha Undertak.g)
STANDARD No.
PIPE HANDRAIL
7-75-0036 Rev. 5
40x5mm MS
FLAT NOSING
TREAD FINISH
25x6mm, 250mm LONG MS
LUG WELDED TO NOSING FLAT
0 MIN. 500mm & EMBEDDED
IN RCC STEP
CEMENT MORTAR
32 0 N.B. (MEDIUM)
MS PIPE
WELDED
TO BALUSTERS
25x25mm MS SQUARE
BAR BALUSTERS OVER
EACH STEP
SECTION A-A
(FOR CAST INSITU CONCRETE TREAD)
NOSING
CEMENT MORTAR
KOTA/GRANITE/MARBLE
STONE
FINISH
TREAD FINISH
CEMENT MORTAR
50x50x100mm POCKET
FOR FIXING MS FLAT
SHOE FILLED WITH
CEMENT CONCRETE (1:3:6)
10MM
MINIMUM
40x40x6mm THK. MS
FLAT SHOE WELDED AT
BOTTOM OF BALUSTER &
INSERTED IN RCC STEP
SECTION A-A
12mm THICK
CEMENT PLASTER
DETAIL OF HANDRAIL
07.03.14
09.03.09
Date
Purpose
;SD
AG
Prepared
by
SD/JKB
Checked
by
JKB
S.CHATURVEDI S. CHANDA
N.DUARI
VINAY KUMAR
k92.4e-r
$1g-ar
(IfT7R rfecon' 057 J,10.1)
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7-65-0207 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 1
NOTE:
2 Nos. UFTING
HOOKS
CHEQUERED PLATE
1300
DETAIL - 1
OUTERDIAOF
PIPE+100(SQUAR
I,
;%:`
=
=
12000200 C/C1
50150 /15)100
150 50 1
50X8
DETAIL - 2
BAR BENDING SCHEDULE:
(TYP)
BOTH
FACES
PCC 1:5:10
DIA
BAR SHAPE
K1 cz= I (;
10 V S -- L
"..
145A
10 /
ELT35.0_11
10
0I
C1
11
(3)1 15001
I-153Q 1
10 IIf t [3C11
SECTION - A A
l
1.1
-7J
STAGGERED RUNGS
REFER STD.
No. 7-65-0211
b
Ld
r -- 2
..
1r)
ir
1 I lov
.'
REPRESENTATION
ON AREA DRG.
.... --
150
1200
150
1500
PLAN
V-1,4
3
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
>Y3\
JKU
RKS
SSM
DDB/RKS
Prepared
by
Checked
by
NK
ND
Stds. Bureau
Stds. Committee
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - AII rights reserved
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
at
i.WOrl, co,ortfooJosnf-O
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR STEEL/ ALUMINIUM
DOORS, WINDOWS &
VENTILATORS
1-1
6-75-0004 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 9
cp 4-111-1
1-1
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR STEEL/ALUMINIUM DOORS,
WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS
03.03.14
03.03.11
21.03.07
11.03.99
16.03.94
AG SSD
JK
GJK SD
JKB
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
VK
D.
MALHOTRA
SD
JKB
ARVIND
KUMAR
SD
MLB
SCJ
AS
JS
JS
AKG
AS
V.
CHATURVEDI
Standards
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
GM (Civil)
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
dg
fg`-ar Ofai
t~r elvervvc,rvIsr.lt
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of Indie Undertakingt
Abbreviations:
ASTM :
BS
:
IS
Mr. JK Bhagchandani
Members:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Ind Undertatongt
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 PRESSED STEEL DOOR/WINDOW FRAME
3.0 PRESSED STEEL DOOR SHUTTER
4.0 STEEL WINDOWS & VENTILATORS
5.0 ALUMINIUM GLAZED DOORS/WINDOW/VENTILATORS
6.0 MEASUREMENT & RATE
4
5
5
6
8
9
ENGINEERS
w INDIA
LIMITED
g-ar ;lfaies l
051 Jqtn.)
1.0 GENERAL
Reference shall be made to the following Indian Standards for further information etc. not
covered in the specification. In case of any conflict/contradiction the provisions of the
specification shall override.
IS 617 :
IS 733 :
IS 737 :
IS 1038:
IS 1081:
Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal (steel and aluminium)
doors, windows and ventilators.
IS 1285:
IS 1361 :
IS 1948 :
IS 2553 part-1:
IS 2835 :
IS 3548:
IS 3614 Part-1:
IS 3614 Part-2:
IS 4351 :
IS 5437 :
IS 6248 :
IS 7452 :
Specification for hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and
ventilators.
51g-a- 22-eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ol Undenak,n9)
k31
lMes
c,mr,M13,
1"CrA)
ENGINEERS
w INDIA LIMITED
(A Go. 01 Indo Unde(laktng)
The shutters shall be fixed to the door frame by means of 100 mm long heavy duty ball
bearing hinges @ 600mm maximum. Vision panel shall be provided in the shutters in
accordance with project drawings.
In case of partly glazed door shutter, Glass as specified shall be fixed with glazing clips and
solid drawn 10 mm x 10 mm, MS beading backed with putty and fixed by countersunk screws.
Necessary rebate for fixing the glass shall be provided by arranging the shutter bracing
accordingly.
The overall shutter shall ensure smooth operation, proper sizing and shaping as per drgs.
The shutters shall be provided with locking device, handle and other hardwares as specified.
Materials
OW-g
cfn .340.1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Where larger units are to be formed by coupling individual units, the mullions, transoms shall
be bedded in mastic to ensure weather tightness. Mastic shall be applied liberally to the
channels of the outside frame sections before assembly, and the two units being coupled shall
be drawn together tight with clamps, the mastic being squeezed out and cut off neatly when
the units shall be screwed together tight.
Where fixed glazing units are placed over openable units a push fit weather bar shall be
provided.
Before glazing, all opening parts shall be checked for their operational smoothness. The frame
shall be completely cleaned and bedding putty shall be placed in the rebate before glazing.
Glass then shall be cushioned into the bedding and shall be fronted with front putty in a
manner so as to enable the painting to be done up to the sight line. The back putty oozing out
over the glazing rebate shall be cut offsquare and smoothed down.
For panels exceeding 600 x 300 mm in size, glass shall be secured by special glazing clips
inserted in holes already provided in the steel sections, before applying the front putty.
For glazing of very large areas, rust proof steel beading with mitred corners shall be provided
with screws @ 10 cm. from each corner and @ 20 cm. apart from each other. Putty shall be
provided to the face of the bead in contact with glass, in addition to back putty.
Side hung shutters shall be connected to the frame by means of friction hinges. The handle for
side hung shutters shall be of pressed brass mounted on a steel handle plate welded to the
opening shutter frame and shall not be removable easily after glazing. The handle shall have a
two point nose which shall engage with a brass striking plate on the fixed frame in a slightly
open as well as in a fixed position.
Top hung shutters shall be provided with steel butt hinges welded to the fixed frame after
cutting a slot in it. Top hung casements shall be provided with peg stay of 3 holes of pressed
brass; 300 mm long which when closed shall be held tightly by the locking bracket fitted to
the fixed frame or to the window.
Before fixing the frames, the size of the opening shall first be checked and cleaned of all
obstructions. The positions of the unit in the reveal shall be taken off the drawings and shall be
marked on the reveal at the jambs using a plumb line.
In case of fixing with masonry, holes for fixing the lugs/hold fasts shall be cut at required
locations.
In case of concrete or stone, the frames shall be fixed by means of dash fasteners.
In case of masonry, the lugs shall be grouted in the holes with cement concrete, M-15 Grade
when fixing to steel work, mastic shall be applied to the Bill of the opening and the unit shall
be placed on it with the jambs and head buttered with mastic and the unit shall be fixed with
special fixing dips or with nuts and bolts.
The windows/ventilators shall be checked to ensure smooth operation, perfect level and
plumb.
All the steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned free of rust, mill scale, dirt, oil etc. by sand
and shot blasting and then finished with painting by priming with red oxide zinc chromate
primer conforming to IS:2074 and painting conforming to IS:1477 (Part II) or by hot dipped
galvanizing conforming to IS:1477 Part (I). Putty shall also be provided with painting in a
manner so as to seal the putty glass junction. Surfaces not meant for painting shall be cleaned
of any strains of paint.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
t-71
fg`Uf&Wg
1~1 ,,,Pr14,1~1,
6-75-0004 Rev. 6
Page 8 of 9
General
Aluminium glazed doors/window/ventilators shall be of specified sectional size, dimension
and profile as per drawing. Aluminium glazed doors shall be single shutter or double shutters
or with composite profiles (partly openable shutters, partly fixed glazed portion) as per
drawings.
Aluminium glazed windows shall be side hung/top hung/centre hung/sliding or with
composite profiles (partly openable partly fixed) as per the drawings.
5.2
Materials
All Aluminium sections shall be extruded sections of approved Manufacturers having
aluminium alloy as par IS: 733 and IS: 1285. Aluminium sections shall be anodised as per IS:
7088 or electrostatically powder coated to min. 25 microns as specified. The thickness of
anodizing/ powder coating shall be subjected to verification at site (on random basis) as
directed by Engineer- in- Charge with appropriate measuring instruments supplied by
contractor.
Glass used for glazing shall be of following types or as specified.
A.
B.
C.
5.5 mm thick transparent Sheet glass conforming to IS: 2835 (wt.7.2 kg/Esq.)
5.3 Workmanship
Frames shall be square and flat, the corner of the frame being fabricated to true right angles.
Details of construction of frames, shutters etc. shall be as per drawings.
Side hung window shutters shall be fixed to the frame with pivots, or aluminium alloy friction
hinges. For fixing the hinges, slots shall be cut in the fixed frames and the hinges inserted
inside may be riveted to the frame. The handles for side hung shutters shall be of cast
aluminium conforming to IS designation A-5-M of IS: 617 and shall be mounted on a handle
plate riveted to the opening frames. The handles shall have same finish as that of the window
sections. The handles shall have a two point nose which shall engage with an aluminium
striking plate on the fixed frame. The striking plate shall be finished in the same manner as for
the handle.
In case of top hung shutters aluminium alloy cast hinges and peg stays shall be provided.
Centre hung shutters shall be hung on the two pairs of cup pivots of aluminium alloy of IS
designation NS-4 of IS 737 and IS designation A-5-M of IS:617 or chromium/cadmium plated
brass/bronze cup pivots riveted to the outer and inner frames to permit to swing through an
angle of 85E . Cast aluminium (conforming to IS designation A-5-M of IS: 617) or
chromiumkadmium plated bronze spring catches shall be fixed in the centre of the top bar of
the shutter. The spring catch shall be secured to the frame by screwing/riveting to the frame
and shall close into aluminium catch plate riveted/welded to the outside of the outer shutter
frame bar. Aluminium or cadmium plated brass chord pulley wheel in an aluminium bracket
,
51
1
fg-ar
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
rtrax,m,~)
6-75-0004 Rev. 6
Page 9 of 9
shall be fitted at the sill of the shutter with Aluminium or galvanized/cadmium plated steel
screws.
Sliding windows shall be mounted on suitable two track or three track (as required) peripheral
frame of aluminium alloy.
The door shutters shall be fitted with pivots as specified.
The handles for doors shall be of Aluminium and as per design. The door shutters shall be
provided with locking device, floor spring, door closer and any other hardware as specified.
In case of composite Door/window/ventilator units, the units shall be coupled as per drawing.
Weather bar shall be provided whenever a coupling member is fitted over an external opening
shutter.
Glazing shall be fixed to the extruded sections by means of extruded aluminium beading.
Glass panes shall be provided with EPDM gasket/rubber lining before fixing.
The aluminium frames shall be fixed to the masonry by means of aluminium lugs fixed to the
frame (by counter sunk brass machine screws) and grouted with M-15 grade concrete in the
hole in the masonry as per drawing,
In case of concrete wall, the frames shall be fixed by 96 mm long, 12 mm dia metallic dash
fasteners. Any steel material coming in contact with aluminium shall be galvanized.
The windows/ventilators/doors shall be checked to ensure smooth operation, perfect level and
plumb.
Measurement & rates for item rate tender shall be on Sq.M basis as per item description.
Area shall be measured correct up to two places of decimal. Dimensions shall be measured
correct up to 0.5 cm.
A composite unit of various designations shall be first measured over all as a unit of
predominant designations and measurement for remaining designations shall be deducted from
the overall measurement of the composite unit in order to arrive at the quantities for various
designations. Mullions/Transoms/Coupling bars etc. at the meeting points of various
designations shall be equally distributed to all such designations for measurement and rates.
Rate shall include cost of all materials, specified hardwares, labour, erection, hoisting,
scaffolding, removal of scaffolding, protective measures, conveyance, handling,
loading/unloading, storing etc. required for proper completion of the item of work in
accordance with the specification.
A.11n
aar Meg
Greker teecran dnottaAl
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gard or India Undertakrng)
STANDARD No.
STEEL DOOR
(PRESSED STEEL)
DOUBLE SHUTTER
7-75-0071 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
R
QC
< FINISHED
K F BiR EVEL
ELEVATION
12X10 GROOVE IN
PLASTER FILLED WITH
POLYSULPHIDE SEALANT
BRICK WORK
D
10
}moo
z
La
ce
4354
104
CEMENT
PLASTER
SECTION 1 -1
LEGEND:
09.04.12
21.03.07
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
II"
DK
AMARJIT
Prepared
by
?fKD
JKB/SD
Checked
by
(Nail'.
JK
ARVIND KUMAR
\Ot
C\ WLsk
N AY KUMAR DUALH OTRA
V.CHATURVEDI
laitEJEth
ENGINEERS
gtir tatatwer INDIA LIMITED
low/
marewarrn)
IA GoA
at inda undatakm
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0027 Rev. 4
(WATER SERVICES)
Page 1 of 5
'VFW
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
UNDERGROUND & ABOVE GROUND
GI. PIPELINE SYSTEM
(WATER SERVICES)
10.07.12
12.03.08
15.07.98
1
0
Rev.
No
VK
KUMAR
DM
GAURAV
RK
NK
RC
PCS
MMK
ASoni
08.02.91
PCS
RB
RPB
RNS
31.03.82
HC
RPB
HVR
RCPC
Standards
Prepared
Checked
by
GM
(ENGG)
Date
Purpose
by
CornmitteeC
onvenor
VC
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
ale? i
azir faffleu v r
atb ENGINEERS
eRaWan
e INDIA LIMITED
6-65-0027 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
GI
Galvanised Iron
IS
Indian Standard
Kg/cm2 g
Members:
1512a
- ege ENGINEERS
(WATER SERVICES)
6-65-0027 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
SCOPE
2.0
3.0
MATERIALS
4.0
5.0
6.0
TESTING
7.0
PAYMENT
1.0
eia ea
$igzir 004eglar
l'"^e".""W"l)
1.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA UMITED
A Gan of India Undeilaiiinfil
6-65-0027 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 5
SCOPE
This specification covers the fabrication and erection of GI pipeline system, both underground
and above ground, including excavation, backfilling for the pipeline and testing of completed
system.
2.0
Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints are made on
threads.
Copper alloy gate, globe and check valves for water works purposes.
Mild steel Tubes, Tubular and other wrought steel fittings.
Mild steel Tubes, Tubular and other Wrought Steel fittings. Mild steel
Sockets, Tubular and other Wrought steel pipe fittings.
MATERIALS
All G.I. piping shall conform to IS: 1239 part I.
All gun metal valves shall conform to IS: 778 Class II.
c) All G.I. fittings shall conform to IS: 1239 Part II.
The schedule of pipes & fittings shall be as per schedule of items under respective works.
4.0
5.0
5.1
5.2
Flanged Joints
Flanged joints shall be made by painting the faces of the flanges with red lead and bolting up
evenly on all sides with compressed asbestos gasket as per piping material specification.
5.3
Valves
Flanged or screwed valves shall be installed in locations shown on the drawings as per
specification for screwed or flanged joints.
1611fflaTre?alla ENGINEERS
UNDERGROUND AND ABOVE
Itgar El5Itg lit INDIA LIMITEDGROUND G.I. PIPELINE SYSTEM
of India IMO edikng }
6.0
(WATER SERVICES)
6-65-0027 Rev. 4
Page 5 of 5
TESTING
All completed GI piping shall be hydrostatically tested to a test pressure equal to one and a
half times the working pressure, as per job requirement (Minimum test pressure shall be
6Kg/Cm2 g) and the test pressure shall be maintained without loss for at least 30 minutes.
Pipes or fittings which are found leaking shall be replaced and joints found leaking shall be
redone, without extra payment.
7.0
PAYMENT
7.1
Payment shall be made on running meter basis of finished pipeline with fitting after testing
etc. complete. No separate payment shall be made for earthwork in trenching and backfill,
road cutting etc. Payment for valves and flanges etc. shall be made as per schedule of items on
unit rate basis. The unions shall be provided at every 50 meter, unless otherwise stated in
schedule of items / construction drawing. Rates shall include all incidental work such as
transportation of all materials from Owners stores, custody, and fabrication and laying of GI
piping system.
7.2
Praikq e ENGINEERS
5 a fetfireg
WIL3TRAI
INDIA LIMITED
GON M A4a Undertaking)
We
ci I
-II y dI UF,
ificchliThl WE
4-11
1-1 ch
71
23.11.11
21.03.07
09.03.99
16.03.94
27.09.91
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Atek
JS/SD
SO
JKB
ARVIND
KUMAR
V.
CHATURVEDI
SD
MLB
SCJ
AS
JS
JS
AKG
AS
SD
SD
AKG
RNS
Prepared
by
Checked
by
VK
fl/'}
D. MALHOTRA
GB
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM (E)
Sallaae?ot ENGINEERS
efa-nr larilegit INDIA LJMITED
77411 erse.eo. ammii
Abbreviations:
ASTM :
BS
:
CISCA :
CRCA :
GI
:
IS
MS
:
NRC :
PVC :
RCC :
Mr. JK Bhagchandani
Members :
S5I12-ziet ENGINEERS
11g7 015reg "VW INDIA LIMITED
A Gm4 amen Underlax,ngi
6 - 75 -0010 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 11
CONTENTS
FALSE CEILING GRID SYSTEMS
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
10
8.0
11
1.0
1.1
1.1.1
Material
Main Runner
Main runner shall be of hot dipped galvanised steel and 'Ti shaped of 24 mm x 38mm
size and 0.30mm thickness with double rotary stitching, with baked polyester coating
(min. 25 microns) on the cap of the flange.
Cross Runner
Cross runner shall be of hot dipped galvanised steel and 'T' shaped of 24 mm x 38mm
size , 0.23mm thickness, 1200mm long and 24 mm x 38mm size , 0.23mm thickness,
600mm long with double rotary stitching, with baked polyester coating (min. 25
microns) on the cap of the flange.
C.
1.1.2
Perimeter Section
Material shall be same as runners. Sections shall be 22mm x 22mm size of 0 45mm
thickness. Exposed areas of all the metallic members shall be baked polyester coating
(min 25 microns).
Erection
Main Runners shall be placed at the spacing of max.1200 mm c/c. Cross runners shall be fixed
@ maximum 600mm c/c to obtain a grid of 600mm x 600mm. The grid shall be suspended by
means of min 2 6mm dia GI wire, 6mm thick GI cleat of 25mm x 25mm section, GI anchor
fasteners and level adjustors. Additional runners shall be provided wherever required (such as
along cut-outs for lighting/ A.C. fittings).
The overall grid system shall be rigid by self locking joints, in accordance with false ceiling
patterns, perfectly levelled and aligned at desirable height as per drawings.
1.2
1.2.1
The overall grid system shall be rigid, in accordance with false ceiling pattern, perfectly
levelled and aligned at desirable height.
6-75-0010 Rev. 5
rage 5 of 11
Erection
The specification for erection shall be the same as stated above in clause 1.1.2
1.3
1.3.1
Material
Main Runner
Main Runners shall be of extruded anodized (25 micron) aluminium Tee sections of
25 ram x 35 mm size, 2.5mm thick.
Cross Runner
Cross Runners shall be of extruded anodized (25 micron) aluminium Tee sections of
25 mm x 25 mm size, 2.5mm thick.
C.
1.3.2
Perimeter Section
Perimeter sections shall be of extruded anodized (25 micron) aluminium angle
sections of required size.
Erection
The grid system shall be assembled by interlocking the main and cross runners @ 600 mm
maximum both ways by means of Aluminium angle cleats. The Aluminium grid system shall
be suspended from the ceiling by means of 6 mm dia MS hooks. The MS hooks shall be fixed
to main runners @ 1200 mm maximum. Fixing of hooks to main runners shall be with 3 mm
thick MS flat clamps with leveling nut. The MS hooks shall be suspended from the ceiling by
slotting in 25 mm x 25mm x 3 thick MS angle, fixed to the stab by anchor fasteners.
2.0
2.1
2.2
aalleitft ENGINEERS
Obleedi/ INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt q 1 UN:lertacog)
6-75-0010 Rev. 5
Page 6 of 11
Tile sizes shall be 600mm x 600 mm x 12 mm and all four edges of the tiles shall be painted
with a coat of approved quality primer.
2.3
- 0.16 W/mk
Thermal Resistance.
c)
iii)
Fire Propagation
Fire Propagation
Index of performance
Gypsum boards shall be of specified thickness and of specified finish (painted with Plastic
Emulsion paint/ Laminated with 0.5mm thick lamination etc.). The Gypsum board shall be
screw fixed to the under side of false ceiling grid system with 12.5mm dia dry wall screw @
230 mm C/C by drilling machine, Joints in the board shall be finished flush with fillers,
finisher and primer as per manufacturer's recommendation to give a seamless finish.
3.0
3.1
General
Aluminium panel false ceiling system shall be installed by approved agency and shall be
perfectly levelled, aligned at desired height and in accordance with the false ceiling pattern as
per drawings. The system shall be with demountable areas to give access to service
installation.
3.2
All applicable state and municipal codes, laws and regulations regarding flammability and
smoke generation of interior finishes.
3.3
Material
All materials utilized for suspended ceilings shall be non-combustible or fire-rated to comply
with all applicable codes and standards.
lalezeigt ENGINEERS
3.4
6-75-0010 Rev. 5
Paca t of 11
3.5
Ceiling Panels:
Ceiling panels shall be minimum 0.7mm thick and of aluminium alloy AA
3105/3005/3003/5052 (as per ASTM 209M). Finishing of the panels shall be as
specified. The panels shall be square edged, perforated or non-perforated and of
following sizes as per drawings.
254/ 305mm x 1264mm
600mm x 600mm
B.
Suspension System:
The suspension system shall be in accordance with approved Manufacturer's standard
specification consisting of main runner profiles, hanger, perimeter profile etc.
The system also includes providing perimeter angles and slit openings for fixing supply/return
air grill, lighting fixtures, AC diffusers etc.
Reference shall be made to EIL standard no. 7-75-0043 for further details of the system.
4.0
4.1
Material
Underdeck insulation shall be of phenolic foam rigid slab of 25mm thickness and approx.
1000mm x 500mm size as specified and shall conform to IS: 13204. It shall have density of 32
kg / M3 and K Value 0.016 KCal/hr MEC as per BS 4370, Part 2. The insulation shall be
classified as ' Non Combustible ' as per BS 476, part 5 and ' Class I' for surface spread of
flame as per BS 476, part 7. It shall be prelaminated on both sides with kraft paper.
4.2
Workmanship
The entire soffit of slab and beams shall be thoroughly cleaned. Bituminous primer or zinc
chromate primer shall be applied evenly @ 0.5 kg/m2 over the entire surface. Hot bitumen or
CPRX adhesive shall then be applied on the insulation panel @ 1.5 kg/Sq.M. The panels shall
ISigiaeitt
ENGINEERS
i 11 iMeg Wir INDIA LIMITED
be pressed in position and further secured by dash fasteners and washers @ 250mm c/c all
around.
The underdeck insulation shall be fixed only after all fixtures like hooks, clamps, cleats etc.
for light fixtures, ducts etc. have been fixed in the ceiling.
5.0
5.1
Material
Polyisocyanurate foam (PIR) shall be rigid slabs of size 1000 x 500mm and thickness of
30mm conforming to IS: 12436 having density not less than 32 kg./Cu.M., thermal
conductivity (K- value) not more than 0.023 w/mk measured at 10 deg. C. The slabs shall be
covered on one side with glass fibre tissue/ Aluminium foil having 50mm overlap. The
insulation shall be classified as 'Non Combustible' as per BS 476, part 5 and 'Class I' for
surface spread of flame as per BS 476, part 7.
5.2
Workmanship
First, holes in R.C.C. slab/ beam shall be drilled and nylon rawl plugs of size 8 x 25mm shall
be inserted (5 nos. for each slab- One each at 4 corners and one at center). Entire R.C.0
surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, dirt and loose particles by wire brushing Then
a coat of bituminous primer @ 0.5 Litres/ Sq M shall be applied to bare R.C.C. surface and
allowed it to dry. After the primer has dried, cold adhesive CPRX shall be applied on R.C.C.
surface and to the two surface of each PIR panel and shall be pressed in position. The PIR
panels shall be secured in position with the help of G.I. screws (No. 8 x 75mm long) fixed into
rawl plugs and G.I washers. Facing side of the panels shall be the one covered with fibre
tissue/ Aluminium foil. The overlaps shall be covered with approved quality sealing
compound (MAS-94 or equivalent). Chicken wire mesh 24G x 19mm shall then be fixed to
G.I screws and tightened with lacing wire.
The underdeck insulation shall be fixed only after all fixtures like hooks, clamps, cleats etc.
for light fixtures, ducts etc. have been fixed in the ceiling.
6.0
6.1
Material
Pedestal Base Assembly
Powder coated pedestal assembly shall consist of a formed hot dip galvanized (60-80
micron) mild steel base plate with not less than 150mm x 150mm x 4 mm of bearing
area, mechanically riveted to a 32mm dia. of 2 mm thick CRCA steel pedestal
designed to engage the head assembly.
Pedestal Head Assembly
Zinc electroplated CRCA steel pedestal head assembly shall consist of 90mm x 90mm
x 4 mm thick profiled head, mechanically riveted to a 19 mm dia threaded bright rod,
15IR q Allak
- ENGINEERS
Undertaking)
fixed to pedestal by specially designed zinc electroplated steel forged adjusting nut for
leveling, locking and changing the height setting.
Stringers
Stringers shall be of hot dip galvanized (60-80 microns) steel, minimum 20mm x
32mm x 1.20mm thick CRCA steel.
Floor Panels
Floor panels shall be 600mm x 600mm size, minimum 35 mm thick powder coated
(40-60 micron) CRCA steel cementitious core panel (with hemispherical and reverse
cones) and 1 mm thick epoxy painted CRCA steel sheet on top. Top sheet shall be
finished with 2mm thick high pressure laminate or 2mm thick conductive PVC or as
per project specification. The inner empty core shall be injected with light weight fire
retardant non combustible cementitious compound. All edges of the panels shall have
conductive PVC trims.
Floor panels shall be capable of supporting following loading conditions when tested
as per CISCA test procedure.
Concentrated load of 675 Kg. with maximum allowable deflection of 2 5mm
and a factor of safety of 2.5.
Uniform load of 2025 Kg/ Square meter.
Fire rating of floor panels shall be class 0 & class 1 conforming to BS 476-part-6 (Fire
propagation) and BS 476-part-7 (Surface spread of flame).
E.
6.2
Accessories
All accessories such as outlet boxes and grommets as required, Panel lifters (at least
one for each building, one number for every 500 Square meter of access floor area)
etc. shall be provided in accordance with approved Manufacturer's recommendations.
Workmanship
The base floor and cavity between false flooring and base floor shall be properly cleaned and
made dust free and dry. The base cement concrete floor shall be treated with one component
polyurethane based coating.
Installation of false floor shall be coordinated with other agencies to maintain the integrity of
the installed system. All traffic on access floor shall be controlled by false floor installer. No
traffic but that of false floor installers shall be permitted on any floor area for 24 hours to
allow the pedestal adhesive to set and ensure alignment of the system is achieved. False floor
panels shall not be removed for 72 hours after their installation. Installation of the whole
system shall be done by approved agency in accordance with Manufacturer's
recommendations and as specified here-in.
False flooring pattern shall be as per approved drawing.
Pedestal base assembly shall be fixed to the base floor by fixing base plates to the base floor
by minimum 50mm x 8mm anchor fasteners (4 nos. for each plate).
The pedestal stud locations shall ensure the grid work as per flooring pattern which in general
shall be of 600 mm x 600 mm dimension. The length of the pedestal studs shall be such that
clear cavity between false flooring and base flooring is of desired depth. Additional pedestals
as needed to support panels where floor is disrupted by columns, walls and cutouts shall be
provided. Perimeter pedestal studs shall be provided along the periphery. Pedestal assemblies
including pedestal heads shall be weld-free construction, corrosive resistant and shall provide
an adjustment range of 25mm from the specified finished floor heights.
The threaded bright rod with the top head attachments shall be inserted into the studs and shall
be adjusted to obtain proper level of the finished floor panels by means of the adjustment nut.
The nut shall provide location lugs to engage the pedestal base assembly, such that deliberate
esIGNEERS
s'f?ta tataleg Vie INDIA LIMITED
(A con.
Incha undertsuro
action is required to change the height setting. Threaded rod shall provide a specially designed
anti-rotation device, such that when the head assembly is engaged in the base assembly, the
head cannot freely rotate.
The pedestal head shall have an anti vibration PVC cap for panel and stringer location.
Stringers shall support each edge of panel. The stringers shall have counter sunk holes at both
ends to accommodate bolting of M6 machine screws to the pedestal head assembly. Stringers
shall be individually and rigidly fastened to the pedestal with one machine screw for each end
of stringer. Bolts shall provide positive electrical contact between the stringers and pedestals.
Stringer grid shall ensure maximum lateral stability in all directions. All the field cut panels
shall be installed with an appropriate PVC end cap specially designed to accommodate the
stinger and arrest Panel beam movement and will ensure the integrity and stability of the
system.
Floor panels shall be placed over the stringer channels and bolted to pedestal head. All four
edges of panels shall be finished with black conductive 5mm wide PVC edge headings. These
edge beadings are glued and sealed in place to avoid detachment. Floor panels which are field
cut (at ends, Console/ Rack location etc.) shall be marked with positional numbering on the
underneath and the adjoining wall. The finished floor panels shall be perfectly levelled and
aligned without any gaps in between the panels. Each individual panel shall be removable for
the purpose of maintenance of the cavity. Panel shall be easily removed by one person with a
lifting device and shall be fully transferable and totally inter changeable and replaceable in
any of the 4 directions at 90 degrees increments, except where cut for special conditions.
Understructure shall be aligned such that all uncut panels are interchangeable and fit snugly
but do not bind when placed in alternate positions.
Necessary cut-outs shall be made in the panels for cable routing, control panel fixation etc. as
per drawing
Necessary ramps, slopes, steps etc shall be also provided for as per drawing with raised
access floor components as per approved manufacturer recommendations..
Around a control panel/rack, the residual space left out shall be filled up with cut panels of
uniform size as required to fully close the gap between the adjacent full panel and the control
panel base channel. In this case the part floor panel shall extend upto the full width of the base
channel and the cut size shall be determined accordingly. An additional structural steel
framework shall be provided along the cut out on which the edge of the floor panel shall rest
and over which the base channel of control panel shall be placed.
After completion of the floor and association services, tests shall be arranged to demonstrate
that the floor is electrically continuous and fully earth bonded. Points chosen for testing
shall include randomly selected pedestals, stringers tops and bottoms of panels, etc.
Reference shall be made to EIL standard no. 7-75-0049 for further details of the system.
7.0
7.1
MS Frame
MS frame for Partitioning & Panelling shall consist of horizontal & vertical members of
18SWG 52mm X 38mm MS sections. The members shall be welded to each other at
maximum 600mm c/c both ways. The frame shall be fixed to the floor/ceiling/wall with GI
roulette plug, screw and washers & 300mm maximum c/c. The members shall be provided
with one coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer.
The frame-work arrangement shall be in accordance with the pattern for partition including
doors/windows etc.
45110Zeilih
r ENGINEERS
L1I fagleg Neil INDIA 1JMITED
Gov/ al Inds. undertalung)
7.2
8.0
4olfaq_itai
$igur tifaileg
ENGINEERS
DADO DETAIL
INDIA LIMITED (WITH BRICK WALL AND RCC COLUMN)
e Tr37 eiLltrelvrl
IA Govt
of India
undertakpng)
STANDARD No.
7-75-0004 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
12 THICK
CEMENT MORTAR
(1 CEMENT : 3 SAND)/
TILE ADHESIVE FOR TILES
STONE/TILE DADO
CRC
STONE/TILE
FLOORING
FLOOR BASE
CEMENT MORTAR
(1 C EM : 4 SAND)/
TILE ADHESIVE FOR
TILES
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
SECTION A-A
CHAMFER OF TILES/STONE
AT 45' ANGLE
CHAMFER OF TILES/STONE
AT 45' ANGLE
RCC COLUMN
BRICK WALL
STONE/TILE DADO
PLAN
(DADO ON BRICK WALL)
PLAN
(DADO ON RCC COLUMN)
25.10.11
15.02.07
OW-W' Nat
AJS
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
JKB/SD
Checked
by
ARVIND KUMAR
V.CHATURVEDI
STANDARD No
Ind it
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Igtak9gleg
IHRT eiraat 41/ YMCA)
STEEL WINDOWS
SECTION DETAILS
7-75-0029 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
, -1
I
I
I
r
I
. co
I.,
_.-- J
I
. I
I
-- J
-._
I
I
I
L. -_.
ELEVATION
GLASS AS
SPECIFIED
F4B
2 THICK MS SHEET
FABRICATED BOX
PUTTY
GLASS AS
SPECIFIED
GLASS AS SPECIFIED
SECTION 4-4
SECTION 3-3
SHUTTER
FRAME F7D
COUPLING
MULLION K1113
GLASS AS
SPECIFIED
GLASS AS SPECIFIED
SHUTTER FRAME F7D
CENTRAL MULLION F4B
SASH BAR T 2
a
.;IW,/,/// 4;;.
OAMKOMM
rarrA/0
it oA a
S HINGE
SECTION 2-2
PUTTY
100X15X6 MS
LUGS 0 750 C/C
BRICK WALL
CEMENT PLASTER
10 trp-
MS SCREW
MASTIC
GLASS AS
SPECIFIED
CENTRAL
MULLION F4B
GLASS AS
SPECIFIED
ZZ/ZZ
/t)
4
0.10
WAS $
Fran-
wasAa
AWWM4
4 10 Yd
flown
taw
ice
0
mromn
a Watt .0%
et,
PUTTY
SHUTTER
FRAME F7D
SHUTTER
FRAME F7D
MS HINGE
WINDOW FRAME F7D
SECTION 1 -1
12.10.11
oxes-ke
SD
21.03.07
AMARJIT
JKB/SD
Rev
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
frfrARVIND KUMAR
% 2ThA
ojert
AWAY KUMAR D.MALHOTRA
V.CHATURVEDI
STANDARD No.
ei e
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$lgartiffleg
I Kew e1R1712051311-0-111
7-75-0063 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
CISTERN
FLUSH PIPE
CONCEALED TYPE
TILES/WALL
FNISH
III
URINAL
PARTITION
III
III
SPREADER
FLAT BACK
URINAL
BOTTLE
TRAP
BOTTLE
TRAP
TOP OF
PLATFORM
GRATING
SIDE ELEVATION
URINAL PARTITION
WASTE PIPE
0
0
to
300
300
URINAL
100 RAISED
PLATFORM
FLOOR TRAP
PLAN
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM
4
09.11.11
Rev.
No.
Date
Format Nn 8-00-0001-F4
Purpose
Rev 0
DKerie
AMARJR
Prepared
by
SD
JK
SD/JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
Checked
by
Stds. Committee
Convenor
VINAY KUMAR
Di/Al/107RA
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM (E)
OOZE'?ift
" ENGINEERS
Govt d n Undertak.9)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0006 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 7
wrzi
Irma. trrectrr t
ReR
fgrffbi
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR EARTHWORK
FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING
23.05.11
16.02.06
30.09.96
13.6.83
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
ALOK
VK
RK
SKC
NK
VDS
VJN
SM
PCS
MMK
A SONI
UCJ
RPB
RCPC
AK
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
GM
(Engg)
Approved by
DM
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
If arOfte 056
n elenkenaanorkl/
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0006 Rev. 3
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
IS
India Standard
RCC :
U/G :
Underground
Mr. R. B. Bhutda
Members:
Mf
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0006 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
3.0
MATERIAL
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
PAYMENT
iaeag
)+11e7. (9217R70173,10.1)
1.0
STANDARD S PECIFICATION
No .
6-65-0006 Rev. 3
Page 4
of 7
SCOPE
This specification deals with earthwork in trenches and pits (for valves, manholes, catch pits
etc.) for underground piping.
2.0
3.0
IS: 3764
NOTE:-
MATERIAL
All workmanship and materials shall conform to the provisions of IS: 1200 (Part-1) and IS:
3764.
4.0
4.1
Excavation
Plant, machinery and equipments for excavation shall be selected and deployed to provide
optimum mechanisation in excavation of trenches and pits. The selection for excavation and
earth movement machinery etc. shall take into account type of materials to be excavated,
method of excavation, prevailing weather conditions and type of transport to be used.
The excavation of area of cut shall be so timed that the bottom level is not exposed to the
deteriorating influence of the weather for longer duration.
Excavation and earth moving equipment shall be deployed such that minimum damage is
caused to the natural sub-soil structure of exposed formations.
The monitoring of soil deformations, ground water levels during and possibly after
construction work shall be taken into consideration.
In the event, when excavation works are carried out in the vicinity of structures of any
importance, the above monitoring shall be carried out within a distance, from the edge of the
excavation of 5 to 15 times the excavation depth, depending upon the subsoil conditions and
the stability of the neighboring structures.
4.2
Trenching work shall be carried out in all classes of soil including soft rock and excluding
hard rock and shall be for all depths.
4.3
The trench shall be cut true to the line and level as per drawings.
4.4
If the trench is excavated below the required level than that indicated in the drawing, the extra
depth shall be filled with concrete 1:5:10 or approved equivalent materials, as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge, at no extra cost to the owner.
4.5
In case of pressure piping, the trench shall be excavated generally as to provide a cover of
1000 mm or dia of pipe whichever is more. In case of gravity sewers/ pipes, the trench shall
be excavated to conform to invert levels as per drawings. However in certain cases, the pipes
may run at shallower levels or at deeper levels depending upon drawing, site condition etc.
- ENGINEERS
1611faeleift
RWOW O. M30.1)
IA Govt of /We
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0006 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 7
No rebate for lesser excavations, nor extra payment due to deeper excavations, shall be
admissible in those cases where pipeline laying rates are inclusive of earthwork items. The
rates quoted shall be deemed to cover all works connected with trenching, whether trenches
are with single pipeline or have multiple pipelines in common trenches including road cutting
and making good the same.
4.6
The width of the trench shall be sufficient to give free working space of personnel,
equipment, supports and ancillaries on each side of the pipe. The free working space shall
conform to IS: 783. Generally it shall not be less than 150 mm on either side or 1/3 dia of
outer diameter of the pipe, whichever is greater.
4.7
When pipelines are running parallel, whether the trenching shall be individual or common,
shall be decided by the Engineer-in-Charge and such decision shall be final and binding on
the contractor. No extra shall be payable for common excavations.
4.8
All earthwork involved in excavations of all types of manholes, catch pits, valve chambers,
inspection chambers, chambers for instrumentation tapping etc., which are coming on the
alignment of U/G piping or as defined by drawing as a part of U/G piping work, shall be paid
extra under Earth work in excavation, back filling and removal of surplus earth etc. under
relevant clauses of the SOR.
4.9
Aspects such as variations in the soil conditions and the geological structure, depth of
excavation, the existence of ground water and surface water, the type and extent of
excavation, the topography of site, the proximity of items such as roads, buildings and buried
services, construction traffic and activities near the excavation eg. stock piling shall be taken
into account when determining whether the sides of excavation should be free standing,
sloping or temporary supported.
Suitable drainage and / or dewatering system like Well Point method / Bore well method etc.
shall be provided to prevent or limit ingress of surface or sub surface water into excavation.
Serviceable materials intended for reuse should be used as soon as possible after excavation
otherwise they should be stock piled at a location beyond 1.5m from the top edge of the
excavation or beyond a distance equal to the depth of the excavation whichever is higher at a
location approved by the Engineer-in-charge. If excavated serviceable material is not possible
to be stacked within the limits specified above, due to some constraint, it shall be stacked
away at a location approved by Engineer-in-Charge and paid separately under relevant item.
Areas used for temporary stockpiling of excavated material shall be kept clean and orderly,
with excavated material kept by the side of road to avoid traffic movement. Excavated areas
shall be restored to their original condition before completion of works.
All types of shoring and strutting, wherever necessary, shall be adopted to with hold the face
of earth or cutting in slope, as per site requirements and direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
Supports shall be maintained such that the integrity of the sides of the excavation is not
impaired.
4.10
Any obstacle encountered during excavation shall be reported immediately to the Engineerin-Charge and shall be dealt with as instructed.
4.11
The contractor shall maintain all excavated trenches and pits, in a dry and trim condition.
4.12
Necessary barricading and protection of slopes against slips due to traffic movement shall be
provided to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge. Necessary warning flags and lights shall
be provided to caution traffic in the areas where trenches and/ or pits are provided.
4.13
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
(A
6-65-0006 Rev. 3
Page 6 of 7
In case of road cutting, all road material i.e. metal etc., shall be taken out carefully and kept
separately for reuse and road work shall be redone up to the original level, as it was prior to
cutting the road, with the excavated road materials after laying and testing of the pipeline,
within 10 days from the date of starting this work, at the cost of the contractor. The contractor
shall provide suitable warning signs and barricades to prevent accidents.
Contractor shall also provide reasonable bye pass at his own cost when a road is cut for laying
pipeline. Tankage dykes cut due to laying of the pipes, shall be redone conforming to the
original specifications, by the Contractor at his own cost. Secondary dykes, to take care of
any eventuality during construction, shall be provided by the Contractor at his own cost.
4.14
Dewatering shall be done in advance of the installation of the pipe to allow adequate
inspection of padding of the bottom, if required. Dewatering shall be continued throughout
during installation and backfilling.
The trench shall follow the gradient of pipeline as specified in the drawing. The contractor
shall keep the trench in good condition, until the pipe is laid and tested. No extra claim shall
be entertained due to its caving or setting down, either before or after the pipe is laid.
In case, pipe is lowered in caved trench and backfilled before being inspected by the
Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor shall re-excavate the trench for inspection and backfill it
at his own cost.
5.0
Backfilling
Trenches shall be back filled with suitable materials which should be compacted to the same
degree or better as the surrounding soils.
5.1
The soil used should be selected and approved by Engineer-in-Charge. Suitable material can
be extracted from available excavated material. The soil should be free from rubbish, grass,
organic matter, stones, building waste and Black Cotton Soil etc. It should be free from clods
and hard lumps. In case good soil is not available from excavated material for back filling,
trench shall be filled back with locally available coarse sand upto 30 cm. thick above the pipe
and rest of trench shall be filled back with excavated soil upto required level.'
5.2
The filling should commence only after approval of Engineer-in-Charge is obtained and after
the structures or pipes to be buried are tested and approved. Otherwise, if required, contractor
shall uncover buried portion and refill at his own cost.
Temporary excavation supports should be removed as back filling and compaction proceeds,
such that unacceptable movement of the supported ground does not occur.
Voids caused by extracted supports should be filled and compacted.
5.3
Filling should be done in layers. Each layer should be not more than 15 cm thick when loose
and should be well rammed, with necessary watering, to obtain at least 90% of maximum
laboratory dry density.
Compaction trials should be carried out on each soil type to be placed in backfill, in order to
confirm the type of machine and number of passes required to obtain optimum compaction
for given soil moisture contents. These trials should also be used to determine the variability
of the proposed fill material for different weather conditions.
Igar 251-eg
eiMIVOA3a0F,1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt
of India undenakm)
STANDARD S PECIFICATION
No .
6-65-0006 Rev. 3
Page 7 of 7
5.4
Care must be exercised to protect cables, pipes, joints, and other features from damage due to
backfilling and consolidation.
5.5
Filling should extend up to the level of original ground surface or as per drawing or as
directed by Engineer-in-Charge. The finished surface should be properly trimmed and
dressed. The adjoining area should be cleaned and no heaps of surplus earth should be left
out.
6.0
Unserviceable materials and serviceable materials not intended for re-use shall be removed
from the work site and disposed off at a location as approved by Engineer-in-charge.
The surplus earth is generated due to pipe laying, valve chambers, and manhole construction
etc. Surplus earth is also generated due to voids in the back filled volume of earth. The
removal of surplus earth shall include excavation, loading, transportation, dumping, stacking
or spreading, as per the directions of Engineer-in-charge.
7.0
PAYMENT
7.1
Unless specifically stated in the schedule of rates, no separate payment for earthwork in
excavation, backfilling, transportation, dewatering etc. shall be admissible and the payment
for the same is deemed to have been included in the relevant items of the contract.
7.2
In case payment for earthwork is specified separately in the Schedule of Rates, the payment
shall be based on the actual quantity of excavation, backfilling and transportation done, taking
into consideration the slopes authorised by the Engineer-in-Charge for excavation, volume of
backfilling calculated on the basis of excavation reduced by the volume of pipes.
7.3
In cases where hard rock excavation is involved, the matter shall be referred to Engineer-inCharge, before proceeding with the work.
5114-4a
alreg,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
STEEL WINDOWS/VENTILATORS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
STANDARD No.
7-75-0027 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
SPECIFICATIONS:
SECTION:
BEST QUALITY HOT ROLLED MILD STEEL SECTION CONFORMING TO IS:7452 SHALL BE
USED.
CONSTRUCTION:
FENESTRA JOINT:
HINGES:
PRESSED STEEL (HEAVY DUTY) HINGES SHALL BE INSERTED IN THE SLOTS CUT IN
THE OUTER FRAME FROM INSIDE. SIDE HUNG WINDOWS SHALL BE FITTED WITH
PROJECTING HINGES WITH ELECTRO GALVANISED STEEL PINS AND WASHERS TO
FACILITATE CLEANING OF GLASS PANES. TOP HUNG VENTILATORS SHALL BE
PROVIDED WITH PRESSED STEEL BUTT HINGES RIVETED TO OPENING SHUTTER AND
WELDED TO THE OUTER FRAME CUTTING SLOT IN IT.
FITTINGS:
SIDE HUNG WINDOWS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH HANDLES AND PEG STAYS OF
STEEL.
HANDLES SHALL HAVE A TWO POINT NOSE WITH A MILD STEEL BEVELLED STRIKING
PLATE RIVETED TO THE FIXED FRAME.
PEG STAYS SHALL HAVE THREE / FOUR DIFFERENT HOLES TO KEEP THE WINDOW
OPEN IN DIFFERENT POSITIONS UP TO A MAXIMUM OF 90 DEGREE.
HANDLE PLATES STAY, PEG STAY RESTS AND LOCKING BRACKETS SHALL BE OF
PRESSED STEEL AND SHALL BE RIVETED TO THE FRAME.
TOP HUNG VENTILATORS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH PEG STAYS OF BRASS OR STEEL.
COMPOSITES:
(A)4,,t
12.10.11
NM^
21.03.10
REAFFIRMED AS STANDARD
AMARJIT
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
SD
SD/JKB
Checked
by
JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
Stds. Committee
Convenor
VINO KUMAR
D.MALMOTRA
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Bureau
GM (E)
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright DL - All rights reserved
ag e,
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
ILIA LIMITED FOR PLASTERING & POINTING
Ig-ar 'Meg
6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 9
IA Gan of W. Undertaking)
tictitck
thrict) -F4fkkiri
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
PLASTERING & POINTING
05.04.12
21.03.07
10.03.99
16.03.94
27.09.91
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
D MALHOTRA
SD
JKB
ARVI D
KUMAR
V.
CHATURVEDI
SD
MLB
SCJ
AS
JS
JS
AKG
AS
SD
SD
AKG
RNS
Prepar Checked
ed by
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM(E)
laffraEga ENGINEERS
a-LIf laiilegire INDIA UNITED
fb
STANDARD SPECIFICATION No
6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
ASTM :
BS
:
IS
.IK Bhagchandani
Members :
tzrna
15itig
ENGINEERS
LIMITED
Igat igait3W
(A CAM of Indo Undenalono
STANDARD SPECIFICATION No
6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
MATERIALS
2.0
WORKMANSHIP
3.0
4.0
5.0
EXPOSED AGGREGATE
6.0
GYPSUM PLASTER
7.0
POINTING
8.0
1.0
5101-zidear, ENGINEERS
1.0
MATERIALS
1.1
Cement
6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Page 4 of 9
Cement shall conform to 'Technical Specification for Civil and Structural Works'
1.2
Sand
Sand for plaster and pointing shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone sand or crushed
gravel sand or a combination of any of these and shall conform to IS: 1542. Sand shall be
hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and shall not contain
any appreciable amount of silt, day bails or pellets. Sand shall not contain harmful impurities
such as iron pyrites, coal particles, lignite, mica shale etc in such form or in quantities as to
affect adversely the hardening, strength or durability of the mortar.
The maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in the sand shall
not exceed the following limits:
Clay, fine silt and fine dust when determined in accordance with IS 2386 (Part 2):
In natural sand or crushed gravel sand & crushed stone sand: Not more than 5% by
mass
Organic impurities when determined in accordance with IS 2386 (Part 2):
Colour of the liquid shall be lighter than that indicated by standard specified in IS
2386 (Part-2)
Grading of sand for use in Plaster shall conform to IS 1542 (as below)
13
IS sieve designation
Percentage passing
10mm
4.75mm
2.36mm
1.18mm
600 micron
300 micron
150 micron
100
95 to 100
95 to 100
90 to 100
80 to 100
20 to 65
0 to 50
Water
Water for plastering and pointing shall conform to ' Technical Specification for Civil and
Structural Works'.
1.4
Cement Mortar
Preparation of cement mortar shall conform to 'Technical Specifications of Civil and
Structural Work' unless otherwise mentioned.
1.5
$g
15044a ENGINEERS
ar
LIMITED
etReswWA
1.6
6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Page 5 of 9
Gypsum Plaster
Gypsum plaster (Calcium Sulphate Hemi-hydrate - CaSO4.1/2112 0) is obtained as a result of
calcinations of raw Gypsum (Calcium Sulphate Di hydrate - CaSO 4 .2H20), in an automatic
kettle under controlled temperature conditions. The material shall conform to IS 2542 (Part 1)1978 (for physical characteristics) and IS 2547 (Part 11)-1976 (for chemical characteristics).
2.0
WORKMANSHIP
2.1
2.2
Sequence of Operations
For external plaster, the plastering operations shall be started from the top floor and carried
downwards. For internal plaster, the plastering may be started wherever the building frame,
roofing, and brick work are ready.
The surfaces to be plastered, shall first be prepared as described in 'Preparation of background
surface' in clause no 2.1
The first under layer shall then be applied to ceilings. After the ceiling plaster is complete and
scaffolding for the same removed, plastering on wall shall be started.
After a suitable time interval as detailed under various types of plaster in subsequent paras,
depending upon the type of mortar, the secondary layers if required shall be applied. After a
further suitable time interval as detailed under various type of plaster in subsequent paras, the
finishing coat shall be applied first to the ceiling and then to the walls.
Plastering of cornices, decorative features, etc. shall be completed before the finishing coat is
applied. Unless otherwise specified corners and edges shall be rounded off to a radius of
25mm, such rounding off shall be complete along with the finishing coat to prevent any joint
marks showing out later.
2.3
Scaffolding/Staging
Scaffolding/staging for plastering/pointing shall be as per 'Technical Specification for Civil
and Structural Work'.
2.4
Damage Rectification
Any cracks, damages, any part of work which sound hollow when tapped or found damaged
150Zeit ENGINEERS
5g7015IitairINDIA LIMITED
6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Page 6 of 9
or defective otherwise shall be cut out in rectangular shape and redone as directed by
Engineer-in-charge.
2.5
3.0
3.1
Preparation of Mortars
The mortars of specified mix shall be used as per the specifications of 'Cement Mortar'
described in clause no. 1.4
3.2
Application of Plaster
3.2.1
3.2.2
Curing
Curing shall be started 24 hours after finishing the plaster. The plaster shall be kept wet for a
period of 7 days. During this period the plaster shall be suitably protected from all damages at
the contractor's expense by such means as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. The date of
vRn.re gmaiRm)
IA son 011odiaunoenakom
STANDARD SPECIFICATION No
6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Page 7 of 9
execution of plastering shall be marked on the plastering to ensure the proper duration of
curing.
4.0
4.1
Preparation of Mortar
The mortar of specified mix shall be used as per the specifications of cement mortar described
in clause no. 1.4.
4.2
Application of Plaster
Sand face plaster shall consist of 13 mm thick (1 cement: 4 coarse sand by volume) underlayer
and 7 mm thick (I cement:2 coarse sand, granule size 2 to 2.5mm by volume) top layer.
Application of plaster shall be as described in 'two coat plaster work' in clause no. 3.2.2.
The surface of the sand face plaster shall be finished rough with sponge or as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge.
4.3
Curing
Curing shall be described in clause 3.2
5.0
5.1
Preparation of Mortar
The morter of specified mix shall be used as per the specifications of cement mortar described
in clause no. 1.4. White and coloured marble chips shall be of 6 mm to 12mm size out of
Makrana/Ambaji, grade I or Dongri Chittor Brown/Rajnagar/Abu green grade-1 quality as
specified.Marble dust shall be obtained from crushing hard marble stone.
5.2
Application of Plaster
Exposed aggregate finish plaster shall consist of 12mm thick plain cement plaster underlayer
(1 cement: 4 coarse sand by volume) finished rough and 20 mm thick top layer. Underlayer
shall be applied in accordance with 'One layer plaster work' described in clause no. 3.2.1.
Top layer shall be 20 mm thick admixture of white cement and grey cement (mix. ratio 1:1 by
volume) mixed with white/coloured marble chips/pebbles of 6mm to 9mm nominal size as per
item description. Mix ratio shall be 1 cement: 1 marble chips/pebbles by volume. Marble dust
@ 15% by volume shall be added to the admixture. The pebbles to be used shall be well
washed and drained. The admixture shall be thrown wet on to the under layer while it is still
plastic using strong whipping motion at right angles to the face of the wall. One coat of neat
cement slurry @ 2.75 kg cement per square meter of area shall be applied on to the under
layer to receive the top layer. The whole plastering shall be laid in panels of maximum 1.2 M
x 1.2M or as per drawing with 12mm x 20mm grooves in between formed by holding
removable wooden batons of 12mmx x 25mm size over the under layer.
Loose mortar etc. on the top surface shall be cleaned/removed by brushing/washing/spraying
with water jet after initial setting of mortar.
5.3
Curing
Curing shall be as described in Clause no. 3.3
ORLEge ENGINEERS
5Ig7 ttlaieg WV INDIA LIMITED
6.0
GYPSUM PLASTER
6.1
Preparation of Mortar
6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Page 8 of 9
The powder (gypsum plaster) should be mixed with clean water preferably in clean plastic
buckets to avoid mixing with impurities, ensuring thorough mixing by help of mixing rod so
as to avoid formation of lumps and unmixed residues. The water to plaster ratio should be
maintained as per manufacturer's specification.
6.2
Application of Plaster
Gypsum plaster can be applied in thickness range of 3-25 mm. However, while applying
gypsum plaster in thickness excess of 12-13 mm, it has to be applied in layers of 10mm each.
Similar will be the application process for RCC columns. However, it is not recommended to
go beyond a thickness of 13mm for ceilings.
6.3
Curing
There is no requirement of curing. Gypsum plaster dries in 3 days, after which painting can be
done directly over the finished surface.
7.0
POINTING
Pointing shall be of the type specified such as flush, cut or weather struck, raised and cut etc.
7.1
7.2
Mortar
Mortar shall be in accordance with the specifications of cement mortar described in clause no.
1.4
7.3
7.4
Flush Pointing
The mortar shall be pressed into joints and shall be finished off flush and leveled. The edges
shall be neatly trimmed with trowel and straight edges.
7.5
lOtaele ENGINEERS
Itgar Wagmy INDIA LIMITED
7.6
6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Palle 9 of 9
7.7
Curing
Curing shall be as described in clause no. 3.3
8.0
8.1
c)
When only one face is plastered, full deduction shall be made from plaster if
width of reveal on plastered side is lesser. But if widths of reveal on both
sides are equal or more on un-plastered side, no deduction shall be made.
In case of openings of area above 3 Sq. M each, deduction shall be made for openings
but jambs, soffits, and sills shall be measured.
afaZrel e, ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
ar cam
"
A ,,,n undetaknqi
ng-
5i
7141
foR Trriw
Rev.
No
28.09.11
ISSUED AS STANDARD
SPECIFICATION
Date
Purpose
JK
SM
Prepared Checked
by
by
JK
VK
Standards
Committee GM (E)
Convenor
D.
MALHOTRA
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
lfrtne?
Slig"af Ealeg,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 2 of 13
Abbreviations:
ACP
ASTM
BS
ECBC
EPDM
IS
PVC
RCC
4-
Mr. JK Bhagchandani
Members:
larane ENGINEERS
$1g7jelfar ,
INDIA LIMITED
IA GOvt of India Undedaking )
6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 3 of 13
CONTENTS
GENERAL
2.0
3.0
WORKMANSHIP
11
4.0
DESIGN CRITERIA
11
5.0
DESIGN DATA
12
6.0
12
7.0
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
13
8.0
13
9.0
13
1.0
lati&re? neENGINEERS
Sigilf galAtgW-- INDIA LIMITED
G'A '"S"" 1
"en einwe ' j'anii
6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 4 of 13
1.0 GENERAL
The external facade works for a building shall be as per the detailed design of the external
facade using glass and metal in combination to provide required aesthetic view of the
building, perform desired functional parameters with respect to passive climate control and
provide structural stability to the system with respect to various structural loading condition
for which the building is designed including thermal and wind load. The external facade
system shall comprise of structural glazing system or/ and Aluminium composite Panel or
combination thereof as required by the design of facade. In certain cases, the external facade
system may solely comprise of large glass panel with stainless steel patchworks only without
use of any metal frame. Such facades shall be as per the proprietary design detail of the
suppliers. The structural glazing shall form uninterrupted, water, air and weather tight glazed
surface in accordance with the architectural elevation and layout drawings and specifications
and the entire system shall be erected as per the same. The glazed surface shall be formed by
framing system which shall be of structurally and mechanically designed technology for
fabrication and erection with grid sizes as approved. The horizontal members shall span in
length between vertical members. The perimeter of the frames shall be structurally integrated
to form air and water proof movement joint on all four sides of each panel with pressure
equalization chambers formed internally. Design and sealing of such joints shall ensure that
there is no penetration of rainwater through these joints under heavy wind pressures.
The fabrication and erection of the system shall comply with all relevant Indian Standards,
Code of Practice and technical literature relating to best practice pertaining to structural
glazing. The equivalent or higher International Standards may be used.
A specialized agency/ sub-contractor with proven track record to execute this job shall be
engaged for fabrication and erection of the system. Such an agency should have executed
similar jobs for multistoreyed buildings.
This specification is not applicable for suspended point fixed glazing with patch bolts and
shall be limited to the Semi unitized structural glazing system only.
2.0 STRUCTURAL GLAZING SYSTEM
The Structural Glazing System shall be Semi unitized structural glazing system punched/ strip
type window units and the same shall be fabricated as per design and approved drawings.
The system shall consist of frame supporting system, the framing system to support vision
panels (insulated glass) and spandrel panels either with monolithic glass ( single or double
glazed unit) or laminated sandwiched composite panel (ACP)/ openable top hung window
panels/ punched strip windows/ decorative capping to any shape & profile, smoke seal,
flashing including gaskets, sealants, necessary accessories, as part of the system on a
continuous framing supported between floors as detailed below and as per the specification for
external facade system.
The panels shall be supplied and fabricated with the specified glass on the secondary frame at
factory, the system shall be erected on extruded main frame & transom fixed on supporting
system at site as per approved shop drawings at all floor levels and for all heights.
The split framing semi unitized glazing system in case of punched windows with proposed
vision panel with either insulated/ monolithic glass shall have groove width of maximum 16
mm both in horizontal and vertical direction.
Tests for the materials involved in the system, including the field test on the erected system at
site as per the test criteria shall be as per this specification.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
g
Og nien e..n. ave.0
6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 5 of 13
A document on methodology for the materials and assembly (mock up & field test) supported
by the copy of relevant codes & Standards shall be as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge
prior to testing.
Protection of the system and materials till handing over to the owner, removal of the unwanted
materials, broken glass, screws, bolts, nuts, packing materials, debris etc regularly and keeping
the premises neat and clean at all times shall be the responsibility of the agency executing the
work.
The facade cleaning details shall be incorporated in the shop drawing submitted for approval.
The system shall be maintained by means of periodical inspection at site (bi-monthly) and
checking the system and materials involved in the system during the defects liability period of
one year to ensure that the system and all materials are free from any defects during this
period. Necessary guarantee for the entire external facade system to the specified period in an
approved format supported with back to back guarantee from the specialized material supplier
like glass, aluminium composite panel, gasket, sealant, hardware etc complete as directed by
Engineer- In- Charge shall be provided.
2.1
System Design
The pre-assembled aluminium semi unitized structurally glazed panel shall be designed with
continuous framed panels/ strip window/ punched window system with split mullion to any
shape and profile to withstand a minimum design wind pressure of 125 Kg/sq.m (Test
pressure shall be 1.5 times of the design wind pressure) conforming to IS 875-Part 3 and
lateral forces as per IS 1893 and fixed at horizontally/ vertically/ sloped/ curved position etc
as shown in the approved drawings by using aluminium extrusions, glass, spacer tape, gasket,
sealant etc as specified.
System design in total, including aluminium extruded frames, type & thickness of glass pane,
aluminium sleeves at connections, inserts, EPDM gaskets, adhesive tapes, sealant, supporting
system/ bracket including fastening and anchoring system & materials specified in the system
details as shown in the tender drawing shall be deemed as tentative and is meant to set out a
general outline of the proprietary system and minimum requirements/ properties of the system
and component parts. The method of fixing is subject to the approval of Engineer- In- Charge.
Since the external facade system in terms of design, materials, all fixing details, methodology
of execution are proprietary in nature, the onus of the design and performance requirements,
shop drawing, execution etc satisfying the design intent and specification of external facade
system including conducting the site survey prior to and after preparation of shop drawing and
accommodating the site conditions in the system at appropriate levels etc shall lies solely with
the agency executing the work.
The system shall be designed with maximum design wind pressure and lateral forces,
moments, stresses etc. Negative/ suction pressures if determined as per IS 875-Part 3 and
Lateral forces as per code IS 1893 (Latest Revision) shall make allowances as described in the
code for corner effects on the system. System shall be designed with air pressure equalization
chamber and concealed continuous gutter vertically and horizontally at all levels as self
drainage barrier to achieve water tightness besides providing EPDM gaskets on the frame and
EPDM gasket/ sealant on the external groove as air and water barrier.
The system shall be designed to withstand a design wind pressure specified above with selfbearing modular elements supported between floors in the case of structural glazing and split
mullion supported between sill & lintel/ beam in the case of punched windows, EPDM gaskets
on the frame and gasket/ sealant on the groove to prevent the system from air & water
penetration, double adhesive spacer tape, backer rod, sealant, supporting brackets (resistance
to design wind pressure), separator gaskets for bi-metallic corrosion, Pressure equalization
6frea_e",.ENGINEERS
sig-a
. o rtas*
INDIA LIMITED
atht hd"nde""i
6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 6 of 13
chamber in the system, built-in continuous internal drainage gutter for collection and facility
at lowest floor level to drain out penetrated water, in built adjustability to accommodate
thermal expansion, thermal movement and movement due to any other forces etc.
The system shall be designed with gasket/ sealant on the external groove with coloured
anodized aluminium holder all-round the panel to the required width and thickness as per
design as dead load support to the glass panel. Non staining sealant between glass &
aluminium holder all-round the panel shall be provided. Glazing the panel with child frame
shall be done only at factory at the controlled atmosphere to erect the panel on erected
extruded aluminium main member and transom with supporting system at site fixed on the RC
surface. Vertical in-situ glazing shall not be carried out during construction/ erection stage.
System shall be designed in such a way that the outer surface of insulated glass unit,
monolithic glass unit and aluminium composite panel shall be in the same plane or as per
approved drawing.
The system shall be designed to accommodate movement due to any force including the
movement resulting from the exterior skin temperature ranging from 15C to 85C, interior
skin temperature ranging from 15C to 30C and to accommodate the horizontal building
movement of 10 mm per panel & vertical movement of 20 mm between floors on the
aluminium framing system with support brackets, glass, gaskets and fastening devices. The
system shall be designed to accommodate the size and shape of the glass panels as per the
approved drawings including approved modifications as may be required during execution as
well as all other incidental forces and stresses likely to be experienced under service
conditions i.e. lateral force, dead weight and thermal expansion due to building movement
both vertical and horizontal etc.
The supporting system shall consists of brackets/ clamps, fastening straps, nuts, bolts, rivets,
washers and other fastening materials etc. Extruded sections shall be designed to
accommodate Insulated Glass Unit (IGU)/ monolithic (single) glass and aluminium composite
panel as per the approved shop drawings. Extruded aluminium sections shall be 63400 (119)
grade conforming to IS:8147, finished with AC25 grade architectural quality electrolytic
anodic coating of approved colour conforming to IS:1868.
2.2
Materials
2.2.1
Glass
The infill panels shall be factory made glazed unit of size as per the approved design. The
thickness of the glass shall be as specified in Job Specifications/ Schedule of Rates and as per
the ECBC envelope design criteria and the same shall be as under:
Minimum 8mm thick hard coated reflective toughened glass in approved colour. The glass
shall have a reflective coated surface. For the toughening of the glass the rolling direction
shall be parallel to the width of the glass. The glass shall be cut by machine only to
required size and the edges shall be ground smooth by dressing with corborandum file or
equivalent.
24mm thick (6mm + 12mm air gap + 6mm glass) assembly for both vision and spandrel
panel conforming to the minimum spectral parameters as specified. Spacer for insulated
glazing unit shall be aluminium extruded profile and finished with AC 25 grade
electrolytic anodic coating of black colour conforming to IS: 1868 and filled with dry
desiccant. Primary sealant shall be poly-isobutylene (P113) and secondary seal shall be
structural silicon sealant of approved make. Make and thickness of inner pane glass shall
be the same make as outer pane glass of Insulated Glass Unit / Double Glazed Unit.
lalfrae?
Ekteg:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Goa of Indui UndedAm9)
6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 7 of 13
Typical Technical Characteristics of single glazing clear AB (Azure Blue) 14 or equivalent are
given below:
Light Transmission
Reflection (OUT) %LR
Reflection (OUT) %ER
Absorbed %EA
Direct Transmission
Solar factor
Shading Co-efficient
U Value
14%
22%
19%
69%
12%
28%
32%
5.2%
14%
22%
20%
71%
10%
19%
22%
2.8%
The above data is provided as a reference to a specific type of glass. However, the glass shall
be selected based on its SHGC, U-Value and solar factor as specified in ECBC and shall fully
conform to that code.
2.2.2 Processing of Glass
Details of the processor and their facilities shall be approved by Engineer-In-Charge before
their procurement and execution. Laminated glazing unit shall be processed only by the
approved Processor. All glass panes used in the glazing shall be heat treated and heat soak
tested conforming to the relevant codes and standards. No tong marks shall be allowed in the
processed glass. Necessary test certificate shall be produced by the processor to confirm the
adherence of the parameters set out in the codes and standards for heat treated and heat soaked
glass. It shall be the responsibility of the agency executing the work to make sure that the
glass shall be processed as per specification and it shall be conforming to the criteria of the
respective codes and standards. The certificate from the glass processor shall be submitted that
the glass processing has been done as per specification and codal provisions have been
observed and such copy of codes shall be made available for verification of Engineer-InCharge.
Processor shall provide removable safety clips on each corner of glass and PVC button corks
on the surface of the glass as a safety measure prior to packing to avoid breakage of glass in
the corners during transit and this safety clip shall be retained till the glass is taken for glazing
in to the frame at factory. Glazed panel with broken or chipped off glass at the edges and with
any scratch on the surface of the glass shall not be allowed to use in the facade and if any such
damages are found in the glazed panel even after glazing/ erected in place shall be rejected
and shall be replaced with new one after the approval of installation methodology by
Engineer-In-Charge.
2.2.3 Gaskets
Ethylene Propylene Dinine Monomer (EPDM) gaskets as weather strip and barrier at
minimum 3 stages shall be provided with adequate fixing details to ensure water and air
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ankflea ENGINEERS
51gar lafalagWIV INDIA LIMITED
-enew-v-J0-'
e ndla Uric'''. NI
tightness. Weather strip shall be EPDM gaskets with hardness (5 second) shore A with a
typical value not less than 70, ultimate tensile strength of 70 (+/- 10%) kg/ sq.cm and ultimate
elongation of 250% (+/- 10%). The gaskets shall be of approved make.
2.2.4 Sealants
Silicon adhesive structural sealant having excellent properties of adhesion, elasticity, long life
(more than 10 years) and of approved make. Two part silicon shall be used having excellent
properties of adhesion, elasticity, long life (more than 10 years). The thickness and bite of
structural sealant shall be determined to withstand 3 times of the stress caused by the design
wind pressure and to ensure the same; the design calculation of sealant manufacturer shall be
submitted along with shop drawing. It shall be ensured by the agency executing the work that
the bite and thickness of sealant as designed & determined by calculation, verified and tested
by manufacture is followed in the shop drawing and the same shall be adopted for the glazing
at factory after the approval of shop drawing. The sealant and double adhesive spacer tapes for
glazing the panel shall be supplied and fixed as per specification at factory. Spacer tape shall
be open cell polyethylene of approved make. Jointing/ sealing of the glazed panel at factory
shall be done with non structural (weather) sealant/ non staining sealant of approved make
with polyurethane baker rods of approved make. Acetoxy sealant shall not be used for
structural glazing application.
2.2.5 System Supports
The supporting system shall be provided and fixed with brackets/ clamps including fastening
straps, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers etc as per design requirement and as per approved shop
drawings. Brackets/ clamps shall be of hot dip galvanized steel and fastening materials shall
be non - magnetic stainless steel 300 series - 316 grade of approved make. Galvanizing
thickness shall be in accordance with IS 2629 and 4759. Serrated plates or serrated washer
wherever required shall be provided as per the system requirement and as shown in the
approved shop drawing.
2.2.6 Smoke Seal
Smoke seal/ fire stop using extruded aluminium channel with cap shall be provided for
continuous structurally glazed framing system and in general the thickness of channel and cap
shall be 2 mm and to a width as required between transom and sill finish material and it shall
be 63400 (H9) grade conforming to IS: 8147, finished with AC25 grade architectural quality
electrolytic anodic coating conforming to IS 1868 of approved colour. Aluminium colour
anodized extruded channel shall be supported with the help of aluminium bracket as designed
and this bracket to be fixed on the wall/ RCC surface with necessary stainless steel anchor bolt
and fastener of approved make. This channel with cap shall be provided between sill finish
material and structural glazing member at sill level and between RCC member face and
structural glazing member at soffit level/ false ceiling. All the joints between the capping
channel and any other finish material at both sill and soffit level shall be sealed with
intumescent sealant of approved make. The gap on the vertical surface between the face of
column/ wall/ partition and structural glazed frame/ glass shall be closed by using extruded
aluminium channel with cap with chromotised finish aluminium bracket supported on the
column/ wall/ partition and in general the thickness of channel and cap as specified above of
approved matching colour to the mullion & transom.
2.2.7 Flashing
In addition to the smoke seal as specified above for horizontal gap between frame and sill
finish material, flashing shall be provided at all floor levels as part of the system (applicable
only for continuous structural glazing portion) made to profile as shown in the approved
drawings and the profile shall be made out of hot dip galvanized sheet 1.2 mm thick and
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
areTa ENGINEERS
Sigal ElliilesWINDIA LIMITED
Unn")
"vri eww-wc
galvanizing coating thickness shall be in accordance with IS 2629 & 4759. In general, the
flashing shall be provided to the entire length of structural glazing portion horizontally at all
floor levels and at terrace level with necessary anchoring system with stainless steel fastening
devices of approved make.
2.2.8 Insulation on Spandrel Panel
Rock wool Insulation- 50 mm thick - 64 kg / cum and having 'IC' value of 0.023 w/ M deg k
of approved make shall be provided conforming to IS - 8183/ BS 3958/ ASTM C 612 on the
spandrel panel area i.e. behind the ACP/ glass and for smoke seal at sill level. These wool
should be covered with black tissue factory pressed - 0.50 mm thick (Nominal Mass - 60 Kg/
cum) to conform non combustibility class - fire rating to BS 476 - Part 7 & IS 3808 and fixed
by using GI angle/ channel of required size as base and the wool shall be tied with 22 gauge
GI wire in criss-cross manner into galvanized angle/ channel to the structure and shall be
covered GI sheet tray of 1mm thick and all exposed surface shall be painted with 2 coats of
synthetic enamel paint over a coat of epoxy primer. Insulation shall be fixed to the main
aluminium frame work between mullion & transom on each side with the gap of 25 to 30 mm
from the inner surface of the glass (i.e. behind the spandrel panel glass area). All the edges
between powder coated GI tray and frame to be sealed with non staining weather silicon
sealant of approved make.
2.2.9 Top Hung Openable Window Hardware
Top/ side hung shutters shall be provided with operating hardware and as per details and
requirements of location to facilitate ventilation, cleaning/ maintenance of the glass. The
hardware shall be provided for the shutter with heavy duty self balancing stainless steel
friction hinges, corner transmission, detachable restrictor stay assembly and multi point
locking with heavy duty mechanism (minimum 9 points including corner locking point),
handle with key at centre of the transom having a ceremony. Handle/ ceremony shall be made
out of aluminium die cast with powder coat finish- 65 microns, matching to the transom
profile colour. The shutter frame shall be designed to accommodate the hinge, stay arm and
multi point lock, EPDM gaskets, fastening materials including all other necessary materials
etc. Hinge shall have thermoplastic asymmetric end cap to ensure weather tight sealing at the
ends.
Heavy duty self balancing stainless steel friction hinges, corner locking point and restrictor
stay arm assembly with release key of approved make and multi point lock (minimum 9 point)
and handle with key of approved make shall be considered. Shutter shall have a provision for
hold open option and to restrict the opening not more than 200 mm and to keep the vent
weather tight while closing the shutter. Gaskets shall be provided to ensure the air and water
tight including noise control while the shutter is closed in position and the gasket shall be
silicon synthetic rubber of required strength. Master key- 3 sets (floor wise) & Grand master
key - 3 sets (building wise) shall be provided for openable parts with necessary code engraved
on the keys.
2.2.10 Swing/ Openable Door
System design in total, shall have the provision to fix the sliding/ openable door (patch fittings
door) integrating with system with necessary structural supports cladded with specified
materials and necessary hardware etc all complete to necessitate fixing the doors as a part of
the over all system.
The openable double/ single leaf door with patch fittings, hold open heavy duty floor spring,
stainless steel handle, corner lock at both top and bottom of approved make shall be provided
wherever necessary as per design Stainless strip on the edges shall be provided to protect the
laminated exposed face.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
Ifraeltil
A LI MITED
kt,'"' ,INDI
A ondlillncle10-91
2.2.11
23
Visual Mock-up
A full scale visual mock-up with minimum 3 bays and for 2 floor height with combination of
vision, spandrel, spandrel on vision area, openable window, ACP cladding (if specified),
smoke seal and other special architectural features etc shall be set up to establish the actual
system design prior to proceeding with full scale production of the materials involved in the
system in case of faade design of a multistoried building in excess of four floors. A water test
shall be conducted on the installed visual mock up system (only water using hose real to the
specified pressure in the technical specification) and the test result of the system shall be
submitted for review. Any improvements required on the system based on the test result shall
be incorporated.
2.4
Test
Off-Site proto type Test:
Necessary shop drawings and design calculation shall be provided to carry out the full
scale off site proto type at an approved accredited laboratory based on the design criteria
set out in the specification and confirming to ASTM E 330 at any approved laboratory in
India and the test specimen shall be provided for minimum 3 bays and for 2 floor heights
with the combination of vision, spandrel and openable window with Glass/ ACP and any
other special features on the system as proposed to be installed and the specimen to be
tested to the design wind pressure of 125 kg/ sq.m (Testing pressure shall be 1.5 times of
the design wind pressure) conforming to IS 875 and the lateral displacement as specified
above. Fabrication at site shall commence only after the satisfactory completion of the
test and submission of test report to Engineer- In- Charge.
Field Test:
Field test at site on the installed glazing system shall be conducted as per the criteria set
out in the specification and as per the Methodology described in ASTM 501-2. Test shall
be carried out in the presence of Engineer- In- Charge. Methodology for carrying out the
test shall be submitted to Engineer- In- Charge for approval prior to testing. The results
shall be recorded and the reports shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-charge for
approval. If field test fails, the rectification methodology shall be submitted to correct the
defects as per the performance data set out in the specification and as per the
methodology described in the relevant code for the approval of Engineer- In- Charge.
Defects, if any noticed shall be rectified to the satisfaction of Engineer- In- Charge.
Sidraeiaa ENGINEERS
b,g-ar naitgWINDIA LIMITED
Ihdia U"nngi
2.5
3.0
WORKMANSHIP
The framing system and fixing arrangements to the RCC framed structure shall be with
aluminium brackets. All the joints in aluminium framing system and factory glazed panels
(also between metal sections and between glass and metal sections and between glass and
metal sections) as well as joints between aluminium frame with concrete and/ or masonry
meeting surrounds shall be fully sealed and made air, water and weather tight preventing
seepage of rain water under heavy wind pressures with provision of adhesive silicon sealant
and superior quality approved make EDPM gaskets. The EDPM gasket shall be free from any
contract or migration strain and shall be compatible with all substrates. Sealant and finishes,
which are likely to come in contact shall comply with provision of IS code. The EPDM gasket
shall be purpose made by approved manufacturer.
Space at each floor level between the external face of the building frame and the internal face
of the structural glazed spandrel panel shall be sealed air tight by horizontal barrier to prevent
passage of smoke/ fire, conditioned air from one floor level to another. There shall be
continuous seal for stopping fire and smoke between the structural glazing and the building
face in cavities formed in spandrel panels between the sill wall level at external edge of one
floor and RCC/ false ceiling of the lower floor. Fire rating of the stoppers between floors shall
be minimum 2 hours.
4.0
DESIGN CRITERIA
The fixing arrangement of factory formed infill glazed grid unitized framing system shall be
designed by the structural glazing agency to withstand all external forces due to worst
condition of wind loads as per IS code applicable for the region of the proposed buildings,
earthquake forces occurring in the zone as per the IS code, building frame movement forces
due to wind and earth-quake, outside temperature experienced during last 10 years.
The structural bite or contact dimensions of silicon adhesive structural sealant to the glass
required, that is the amount of silicon adhesive structural sealant (contact width and thickness)
required to support the glass externally and internally in the panel against action of the worst
condition of the external forces such as wind earthquake forces, building movement forces,
temperature forces including their combinations etc as well as to prevent penetration of rain
water under heavy wind conditions experienced during the last 10 years in the region. It shall
be designed in accordance with the requirement of the silicon adhesive structural sealant
manufacturer and supplier, mentioning the factor of safety obtainable as per the design. In any
case the factor of safety shall not be less than 1.5.
Framing system shall fulfill the design criteria/ specifications as under:
Vertical Mullions
taeJela ENGINEERS
UMITED
Ige egiegitr INDIA
(AG" I in " Undena'ng)
6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 12 of 13
Wind Load
150 kg/sq.m
(Entire system and each component including glass in edge
zones on each side of building corners shall be designed for
heavier wind suction as required by design code)
Seismic Load
As per IS codes
Deflections
Mullions
Transoms
R.C.C. Grade
- - ENGINEERS
lafraeige
OgZIT tetPleg Lir
_ INDIA LIMITED
^4"--esT--'
G't
Undea")
51gar
fib ENGINEERS
laWdg W INDIA LIMITED
9,enrutnavani)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS &
VENTILATORS
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 1 of 10
cik3)
ffikhr
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
UPVC DOORS, WINDOWS &
VENTILATORS
0
Rev.
No
07.11.11
ISSUED AS STANDARD
SPECIFICATION
Date
Purpose
Prepared Checked
by
by
Standards
Committee GM (E)
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
OPIZAgra ENGINEERS
UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS &
oaf we low INDIA LIMITED FOR
Abbreviations:
BIS
EPDM
IGBC
IS
Indian Standards
NBC
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
SHGC
UPVC
VCM
VOC
Mr. J.K.Bhagchandani
Members :
OWE?
.
s'g7 fararG
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS &
INDIA LIMITED
VENTILATORS
ENGINEERS
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 3 of 10
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
3.0
TERMINOLOGY
4.0
MATERIALS
5.0
CONSTRUCTION
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
WORKMANSHIP
10.0
OTHER REQUIREMENTS
10
11.0
MEASUREMENT
10
laraae?
Slg7
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov/ ol Inas Undeplaking).
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS &
VENTILATORS
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 4 of 10
1.0 GENERAL
This standard specification lays down the requirements for types, sizes, construction,
workmanship and methods for testing of UPVC profiled paneled door and windows used in
buildings .
The profile extrusions used in manufacturing of the door and windows covered in this
standard are UPVC sections.
IS 4669: 1968
IS 4905: 1968
IS 4985: 2000
IS 6307: 1985
IS 10428: 1983
IS 13360
IS 13360 (Part 3/ Sec 1): 1995 Part 3: Physical and dimensional properties- Sec 1:
determination of density and relative density of non-cellular
plastics.
IS 13360 (Part 5/ Sec 2): 1996 Part 5: Mechanical properties- Sec 2: Determination of tensile
properties- Test conditions for moulding and extrusion
plastics.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
saf=aire?
Sig,ar ooreG
.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
FOR
UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS &
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gout el India Undertalow
VENTILATORS
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 5 of 10
IS 13360 (Part 5/ Sec 4): 1996 Part 5: Mechanical properties- Sec 4: Determination of Izod
impact strength.
IS 13360 (Part 5/ Sec 24): 1999 Part 5: Mechanical properties- Sec 24: Determination of
impact resistance by the free fall dart method-Instrument
puncture test.
IS 13360 (Part 6/ Sec 17): 1997 Part 6: Thermal properties- Sec 17: Determination of
temperature of defection under load- Plastics and ebonite.
3.0
TERMINOLOGY
For the purpose of this standard, the definitions given in IS 10428, and the following shall
apply.
3.1
3.2
Compound
An intimate admixture of a polymer with all the materials necessary for the finished product.
3.3
Rework Material
A plastic from a processor's own production that has been reground, palletized, or solvated
after having been previously processed by moulding or extrusion.
3.4
Extrusion
A process in which heated or unheated plastic is forced through a shaping orifice (a die) in one
continuously formed shape, as in film, sheet, rod or tubing.
3.5
Fabrication
The manufacture of plastic products from moulded parts, rods, tubes, sheeting, extrusions or
other forms by appropriate operations such as punching, cutting, drilling and tapping including
fastening plastic parts together or to other parts by mechanical devices, adhesives, heat sealing
or other means.
3.6
Blister
An imperfection, a rounded elevation of the surface of a plastic, with boundaries that may be
more or less sharply defined, somewhat resembling in shape a blister on a human skin.
3.7
Pit
An imperfection, a small carter in the surface of the plastic, with its width of approximately in
the same order of magnitude as its depth.
3.8
Shrink Mark
An imperfection or a depression in the surface of a moulded material, where it has retracted
from the mould.
4.0
MATERIALS
4.1
Type
The material from which the profile is produced shall substantially consist of UPVC to which
may be added to those additives that are needed to facilitate manufacture of sound and durable
profile of good surface finish, mechanical strength and opacity under conditions of use. None
of the additives shall be used separately or together in quantities sufficient to constitute
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
SZilrEad ft ENGINEERS
FOR
UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS &
51g7 talWeg W INDIA LIMITED
IA GoA of India Linden...01
VENTILATORS
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 6 of 10
Rework Material
The manufacture shall use only its own clean rework material of the same compound and the
extruded profiles produced shall meet all the requirements of this specification.
5.0
CONSTRUCTION
5.1
5.2
satRise?
5Ig(zirtiReg
6.0
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS &
INDIA LIMITED
ENGINEERS
IA Go4 of India
unattaking)
VENTILATORS
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 7 of 10
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
Oft&
ENGINEERS
INDIA
LIMITED
FOR
UPVC
DOORS,WINDOWS &
fElIkteG,
IA Goat at India Undertaking)
VENTILATORS
7.4
7.5
7.5.1
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 8 of 10
Finish
The surface of shutters shall be smooth, straight and free from any visual defects such as pin
holes, blistering, colour bolts, cracking, pitting, shrink mark etc. The profile shall be uniform
in colour as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser. Defective spots shall be
duly repaired and finished to make them non-noticeable. All the four edges of door shutters
shall be square and free from twist and wrap.
Test
Necessary test certificates as per this clause shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-charge for
approval along with necessary relevant documentation before procurement of material at site.
Test Requirements for UPVC Profiles used for Door Shutters
When tested in accordance with IS: 13360, Annex B, D, E (as applicable) the profiles shall
have following properties:
Dimensional Stability: the shrinkage in the profile shall be less than 3 percent
Impact Resistance: The impact on profile shall neither result in cracking nor in
When tested in accordance with IS: 4020 (Parts 2,3,5,7,8,9,10,11,16- as applicable) the door
shutters shall comply to following properties:
Dimensions and Squareness: The length and width of door shutters shall be within
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
15iraatqaft ENGINEERS
INDIA
LIMITED
FOR
UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS &
sig-9 EllWreg VP
VENTILATORS
IA Geri of India undertaking)
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 9 of 10
(i) Buckling: The shutter shall not show any deterioration and the residual shall not be more
than 10mm after 15mins. of unloading. The internal deflection under a load of 400N (40
Kgf) should not be more than 100mm.
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
Glass Panels
Glass panels for glazing purpose shall be 6.3mm thick laminated glass conforming to IS:
2553, and shall have properly square corners and straight edges. It should meet the SHGC
standards specified by IGBC.
9.0
WORKMANSHIP
The profile and type of door, windows, ventilators (glazed, partly glazed/louvered, side
hung/top hung/fixed shutter, composite) shall be as per drawings.
The frame shall be fabricated to true right angles.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
LIMITED
FOR
UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS &
51g7 sapegwINDIA
IAA of India Undeptkpng)
VENTILATORS
15iliaattia
ENGINEERS
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 10 of 10
The frame shall be constructed of sections cut to size and mitred and fusion welded.
The side hung and top hung windows shall be fixed to outer frame with necessary hardware
and fittings as specified.
The handles and other hardware (hinges, towerbolts, aldrops and mortice lock) for doors shall
be of stainless steel and for windows shall be of stainless steel or zinc as approved by the
company.
In case of composite Door/window/ventilator units, the units shall be coupled as per drawing.
Weather bar shall be provided where ever coupling member is fitted over an external opening.
Drainage slots in all sections exposed to outside conditions shall be provided.
Glazing shall be bonded to the extruded sections using adhesive tape and then concealed with
proper beading. Glass panes shall be provided with EPDM gasket/rubber lining before fixing.
The outer frames of door and windows shall be fixed to masonry by means of PVC holdfasts
and grouted with M-20 grade concrete hole in the masonry as per drawing.
The windows/ventilators/doors shall be checked to ensure smooth operation, perfect level and
plumb.
10.0 OTHER REQUIREMENTS
UPVC material used for making of doors, windows and ventilators shall have recyclable
content.
Silicon sealant shall be provided in between gaps of walls and frame to prevent heat gain and
loss so as to reduce air conditioning requirement within the building. The sealant and
adhesives used in windows shall have low VOC contents.
The window or ventilator when casted in the wall shall be capable to keep away the
environmental pollutants, like sand, dust, smoke and noise. It should be suitably strengthened
to withstand strong winds without producing whistling and rattling sound. The windows shall
able to achieve U-value ratings as prescribed by IGBC.
11.0 MEASUREMENT
Measurement & rates for item rate tender shall be on Sq.M basis as per item description.
Area shall be measured correct upto two places of decimal. Dimensions shall be measured
correct upto 0.5 cm.
A composite unit of various designations shall be first measured overall as a unit of
predominant designations and measurement for remaining designations shall be deducted from
quantities for various
the overall measurement of the composite unit in order to arrive at the
designations. Mullions/Transoms/Coupling bars -etc. at the, meeting points of various
designations shall be equally distributed to all such designations for measurement and rates.
Rates shall include costs of all materials, specified hardware, labour, erection, hoisting,
scaffolding, removal of scaffolding, protective measures, conveyance, handling, loading/
unloading, storing etc. required for the proper completion of the item of work in accordance
with the specification.
si
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED WASH BASIN FIXING DETAIL
eiek
a
faVeg
WWI
eircrweanatrami
STANDARD No.
7-75-0064 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
550
MINIMUM
MIRROR
00
SOAP CONTAINER
TOWER RAIL
TAPS
0
10
CO
BOTTLE TRAP
WASTE PIPE
EMBEDED IN WALL
TILES/STONE FINISH
AS/SPECS.
GRATING
FLOOR TRAP
ELEVATION
MS BRACKETS
FLOOR TRAP
BELOW
WASH BASIN
TOWEL RAIL
PLAN
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM
09.11.11
21.03.07
REAFFIRMED AS STANDARD
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
DK 114".
.3/14
AllARJIT
Prepared
by
a>
MAY KUMAR
vxmmeam
ARVIND KUMAR
Checked
by
Stds. Committee
Convenor
D.MALHOWA
GM (E)
Stds Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright Et-All rights reserved
agra-e?ft ENGINEERS
azir 051eg itill INDIA LIMITED
114reff AMA? eln W
STANDARD No.
SKIRTING DETAIL
(WITH R.C.C. COLUMN)
7-75-0003 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
RCC COLUMN
CEMENT PLASTER
TILE ADHESIVE
TILE SKIRTING
TILE SKIRTING
RCC COLUMN
Ul
CHAMFER OF TILES
AT 45* ANGLE
PLAN
SECTION B-B
(TILE SKIRTING)
RCC COLUMN
CEMENT PLASTER
12 THICK CEMENT
MORTAR
(1 CEMENT : 3 SAND)
STONE SKIRTING
a
STONE SKIRTING
RCC COLUMN
en
I .
CHAMFER OF ST ONE
AT 45' ANGLE
'
PLAN
SECTION A-A
(STONE SKIRTING)
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM
4
25.10.11
D Kiev'
15.02.07
AMARJIT
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
JKALL.J103/5D
Checked
by
ARVIND KUMAR
\((/' C\11\
MAY KUMAR
2171nL
DMALNOTRA
V.CHATURVEDI
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR WOOD WORK
1511atzitte ENGINEERS
iaMegW INDIA
UMITED
. Gog. Inks linden:1mm
6-75-0003 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 8
co 19 co
1-1
- 4)
11 1
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
WOODWORK
C v,,,,A
15.03.12
flee")
21.03.07
SD
JKB
ARVIND
KUMAR
V.
CHATURVEDI
11.03.99
REAFFIRMED AS STANDARD
SD
MLB
SCJ
AS
16.03.94
.15
.15
AKG
AS
SD
SD
AKO
RNS
Rev.
No
JK41;,..-PD
SD
D. MALHOTRA
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
Date
Purpose
Prepared Checked
by
by
Standards
Committee GM (E)
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
ISRaela
ENGINEERS
s'fr
elertIleAelaw../
6-75-0003 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 8
Abbreviations:
ASTM :
BS
IS
Mr. JK Bhagchandani
Members :
5 I I=
ea Eq e. .A ENGINEERS
7.;.,.,-..,....,
IA Gent d AML
unantakm
6-75-0003 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 8
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 MATERIALS
lalfaag ie ENGINEERS
LII
01 fl aetriR tILTIOM/
6-75-0003 Rev. 5
Page 4 of 8
1.0 GENERAL
Reference shall be made to the following Indian Standards for any further information etc. not
covered in the specification. In case of any conflict/contradiction, provisions of specification
shall override.
IS 204 Part-I
IS 204 Part-2
IS 205
IS 208
IS 303
IS 848
IS 1003 Part-1
IS 1003 Part-2
IS 1341
IS 2202 Part-1
IS 2202 Part-2
IS 2209
IS 2338
IS 2835
IS 3087
IS 3097
IS 3564
IS 4021
IS 5437
45ifiS
tael
ligtar
tevreg
p
lasm Amami
ENGINEERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
INDIA LIMITED WOOD WORK
IA GAN a
MATERIALS
2.1
Timber
2.1.1
Teakwood
6-75-0003 Rev. 5
Page 5 of 8
.m Undeflak..01
IS 6315
2.0
STANDARD SPECIFICATION No
Teakwood shall be second class Indian Teakwood conforming to IS 4021 of good quality,
well seasoned and free from defects such as cracks, dead knots, sapwood etc. No individual
hard and sound knot shall be more than 15 sq.cm . in size and the aggregate area of such knots
shall not exceed 1.5% of the area of the piece. The timber shall be fairly close grained having
not less than 2 growth rings per cm. width in cross section.
2.1.2
Hard Wood
Hard wood shall be first class wood conforming to IS: 4021 of good quality, well seasoned
and free from defects such as dead knots, cracks, sapwood etc. No individual hard and sound
knot shall exceed 6 sq. Cm. in size with no dimension more than 50 mm and the aggregate
area of such knots shall not be more than 1% of the area of the piece. There shall not be less
than 5 growth rings per cm. Width in cross-sections.
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.2
Particle Board
Particle board shall conform to IS:3097 and shall be three layer flat pressed teakwood based
and of exterior grade (Grade-I), type-1, BWP type, bonded with phenol Formaldehyde
Synthetic resin conforming to IS:848.
2.3
2.4
Block Board
Block board shall conform to IS:2202 and shall be made of solid Core block board. Teak
wood beading of minimum 12mm thickness shall be fixed to the exposed edges of the boards.
ISillane?Ift
m ENGINEERS
real
s INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt al incha undenalorg)
2.5
6-75-0003 Rev. 5
Page 6 of 8
Veneers
2.6.1
Hinges
Hinges shall be of Extruded Aluminum Alloy or steel and butt type conforming to IS:205/
IS:1341. Size of hinges shall be minimum 125mm long. Maximum spacing of hinges shall
not exceed 600mm c/c.
2.6.2
Overhead hydraulic door closers shall be of heavy duty type and shall conform to IS:3564.
2.6.3
Floor mounted door closers shall be of heavy duty type and hydraulically operated and shall
conform to IS:6315.
2.6.4
Mortice Lock
Mortice locks shall be of chromium plated brass body and shall have 6 levers and pair of
handles of pressure die cast zinc alloy (satin finished). Mortice locks shall conform to
IS:2209.
2.6.5
Door Handles
Door handles shall be of pressure die cast zinc alloy and shall be chromium plated.
2.6.6
Aldrop
Aldrop shall be 300 mm long and minimum 18mm dia.
2.6.7
Tower Bolts
Door Stopper
Door stoppers shall consist of heavy duty rubber shoes spring loaded type with zinc alloy
pressure die cast chromium plated holders.
2.6.9
Glazing
15i12ZA
ENGINEERS
1g-,ar Meg vir INDIA UMITED
(A Govt 01 k7110 Underla n91
6-75-0003 Rev. 5
Page 7 of 8
Glass sheets for glazing shall be i) 4 mm thick plain glass (wt. 7.2 kg/m2) conforming
IS:2835, or ii) 5.5 mm thick toughened glass conforming to IS:5437 as specified .
Glass sheets shall be free from flaws, scratches, cracks, bubbles etc.
3.0
4.0
DOOR SHUTTERS
Door shutters shall be complete with all operational fittings & fixtures like hinges, overhead
hydraulic door closers, Tower bolts, Locking device, handles, door stopper etc.
4.1
The edges of the shutters shall either be painted with synthetic enamel paint or french
polished.
4.2
45ilftee ENGINEERS
7 OfAtalie NIAA LIMITED
6-75-0003 Rev. 5
Page 8 of 8
The shutter shall be painted with 2 coats of approved shade synthetic enamel paint or
polyurethane paint as specified over approved coat of primer.
4.3
4.4
5.0
&wag
faffleg
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
METAL SHEET
FLASHING DETAIL
7-75-0091 Rev. 0
Page 1 of 2
DETAILA
RIDGE PIECE
ROOF MONITOR
BIRD MESH
TURBO/AIR DRIVEN
ROOF EXTRACTOR
TRANSLUCENT SHEET
METAL SHEET ROOFING
STEEL TRUSS/PORTAL
AS/STRUCTURE
METAL SHEET
LOUVERS
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
METAL SHEET
LOUVERS
APPROACH
1ROAD LEVEL/HPP
TYPICAL SECTION
METAL SHEET
ROOFING
RIDGE PIECE
PLAIN SHEET
RIDGE PIECE
METAL
SHEET ROOFING
PLAIN SHEET
CORNER PIECE
(MINIMUM 200X200)
STEEL PURLIN
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
(GABLE END)
STEEL TRUSS
PORTAL
DETAIL-A
CORNER PIECE
FLASHING DETAIL
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM.
2. THIS STANDARD INDICATES VARIOUS ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES AND FLASHING DETAILS OF SHEDS.
PROVISION OF FEATURES (ROOF MONITOR, ROOF EXTRACTOR, TRANSLUCENT SHEET, LOUVERS) AND THEIR
SIZES, LOCATION ETC SHALL BE AS PER PROJECT DRAWINGS.
3. MATERIAL, THICKNESS AND OTHER DETAILS OF ROOFING, CLADDING, ACCESORIES (RIDGE FLASHING, CORNER
PIECE, EAVES PIECE, APRON PIECE AND OTHER FLASHING) AND BIRD MESH SHALL BE AS PER PROJECT
SPECIFICATION.
of
0
Rev.
No.
Purpose
S..::a
arD.IIALHOTRA
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Stds.Committee
GM
Stds. Bureau
Convenor TET-i= Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
triarae_Jei
514721 ft}
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
METAL SHEET
FLASHING DETAIL
7-75-0091 Rev. 0
Page 2 of 2
METAL SHEET
ROOFING
STEEL PURLIN
40 x 6 MS
FLAT WIND TIE
STEEL TRUSS/
PORTAL
STEEL COLUMN
75 (MINIMU
PLAIN SHEET
EAVES PIECE
STEEL TRUSS/
PORTAL
STEEL PURLIN
STEEL COLUMN
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
DETAIL-B
(ALTERNATIVE-1)
DETAIL-B
(ALTERNATIVE-2)
METAL SHEET
ROOFING
40 x 6 MS
FLAT WIND TIE
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
11111111111
4
3/413/41/.1
:
4
5
STEEL PURLIN
PLAIN SHEET
CORNER PIECE
(MINIMUM 200OC700)
BIRD MESH
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
DETAIL-C
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
PLAIN SHEET
FLASHING
z
PLAIN SHEET
APRON PIECE
METAL SHEET
ROOFING
METAL SHEET
ROOFING
STEEL PURLIN
STEEL TRUSS/
PORTAL
FLASH NG DETAIL
(VERTICAL CLADDING AND ROOF)
0
Rev.
No.
DETAIL-D
(APRON FLASHING DETAIL)
Purpose
SD
Prepared
by
Checked
by
JKDJ
S.CMIURVEDI D.MMI4O1RA
GM Stds. Bureau
Stds.Commateo ( CTRL
AR CH
Convenor
Chairman
GEO TECH)
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED GLAZED ALUMINIUM WINDOW
/A
Page 1 of 1
RCC BEAM/
LINTEL
CEMENT
PLASTER
SECTION 20919
SECTION 19428
r1
1
7-75-0015 Rev. 4
GLASS
0
SH
SH
SECTION 1 1
GLASS
S
ELEVATION
SECTION 19428
(F -FIX ED GLAZING)
(SH -SIDE HUNG SHUTTER)
SECTION 20916
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
GLASS
20899
20916
20899
19428
SECTION 19428
GLASS
SECTION 2-2
GLASS
INSIDE
SECTION 6-6
SECTION 19428
SECTION 20919
SECTION 7-7
CEMENT
GLASS
SECTION 19428
SECTION 20916
GLASS
BRICK WALL
CEMENT PLASTER
SECTION 20919
SECTION 19428
GLASS
SECTION 3-3
GLASS
SECTION 19428
SECTION 20916
SECTION 8-8
t
23.00
SECTION 9-9
t
0
0
63.00
3
SECTION.
NO.-20916
SECTION 20899
SECTION 19428
30.5
In
N
40.60
SECTION.
NO-20919
40.00
SECTION.
NO.-20899
SECTION.
NO.-19428
GLASS
SECTION 4
GLASS
SECTION 20899
SECTION 19428
21.03.07
Date
Purpose
AMARJIT
Prepared
by
JKB/SD
Checked
by
ARVIND KUMAR
lgaf
tiriliaeicti
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
iapeg
(Hen
STANDARD No.
SKIRTING DETAIL
7-75-0002 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
BRICK WALL
BRICK WALL
CEMENT PLASTER
CEMENT PLASTER
GROOVE IN PLASTER
TILE ADHESIVE
12 THICK CEMENT
MORTAR
(1 CEMENT : 3 SAND)
TILE SKIRTING
STONE SKIRTING
RECESSED BRICK
WALL AS REQUIRED
STONE FLOOR FINISH
FLOOR BASE
CEMENT MORTAR
(1 CEMENT: 4 SAND)
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
RECESSED BRICK
WALL AS REQUIRED
TILE FLOOR FINISH
FLOOR BASE
TILE ADHESIVE
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
SECTION AA
SECTION AA
BRICK WALL
CEMENT PLASTER
GROOVE IN PLASTER
12 THICK CEMENT
MORTAR
(1 CEMENT : 3 SAND)
STONE SKIRTING
BRICK WALL
RECESSED BRICK
WALL AS REQUIRED
STONE FLOOR FINISH
FLOOR BASE
CEMENT MORTAR
(I CEMENT: 4 SAND)
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
SKIRTING
SECTION AA
PLAN
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM
4
25.10.11
ornti,
SD
15.02.07
ARARAT
JKB/SD
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
4V
JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
\
4,
et1"')
Kt/
DA/ALHOTRA
V.CHATURVEDI
Rift
Iaaen riedneadJadral)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt al India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
FIRE CHECK/ FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 9
Wqr-41, Rg5rchtli
"FRIR
TiRW rcir1411
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
FIRE CHECK/ FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS, WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
06.01.16
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
AM
SD/JK
RajanTSrivastava
S.0 anda
AM
SM
JKB
OM
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
ligar Rift
vIrvniV as MOM
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Indta Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
ASTM
BS
BS EN
CBRI
EN
FD
FW
FP
GI
IS
NABL
PVC
SS .
UL
Standards Committee
Mr. Rajanji Srivastava
Convenor:
Members:
a(zieial111,_ ENGINEERS
Igar QCs
w INDIA LIMITED
rirovels JoarsO
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
GENERAL
CODES
TESTING & CERTIFICATION
MATERIALS
FIRE & SMOKE CHECK/ FIRE RESISTANT/ FIRE RATED DOORS (FDs)
FIRE CHECK/ FIRE RESISTANT / FIRE RATED WINDOWS (FWs) &
PARTITIONS (FPs)
INSTALLATION
DELIVERABLES BY THE CONTRACTOR
GUARANTEE
MEASUREMENT
4
4
4
5
5
8
9
9
9
9
lear Eaeg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 9
1.0 GENERAL
The Fire & smoke Check/ Fire resistant/ Fire rated Doors (hereinafter termed as FD),
Windows (hereinafter termed as FW) and Partitions (hereinafter termed as FP) shall not
collapse during the rated period of fire and shall provide safe access to the escape route and
Exit.
The FD, FW & FPs shall meet the specified requirement of fire resistance i.e. stability and
integrity.
2.0
CODES
The components and complete system of FD, FW and FPs shall conform to following codes as
applicable. In case of similar codes of different organizations (IS, BS, EN, BS-EN etc.),
conformity with any of the similar codes is acceptable.
BS:476, Part-4
BS:476, Part-7
BS:476, Part-20
BS:476, Part-22
BS EN 1363-1
BS EN 1363-2
BS EN 1364-1
BS EN 1634-1
BS:6206
EN:12600
BS EN 410
BS EN 13501-2
IS:12777
IS:3614, Part 2
The FD, FW & FPs shall be UL listed or in accordance with valid fire test certificate or test
report appropriate to the type and size of FD/FW/FPs from Central Building Research
Institute, India (CBRI) or NABL accredited state or central government Laboratories or
renowned National/International Test House/ Laboratories.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
dafaeJtq ENGINEERS
51gar 2154-e-g
INDIA LIMITED
MKT, e.rmI00JAecA 1
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 9
Test or Evaluation report etc. done by the Manufacturer himself shall not be considered for
this purpose.
The Contractor shall furnish prototype test certificate or test report (not older than 5 years)
from these laboratories.
The certification/ report shall include complete description of the components, dimensions and
hardware of FD, FW and FPs.
4.0 MATERIALS
All Materials shall conform to applicable IS or BS or EN or BS EN or ASTM standards and
shall be subjected to approval by Engineer-In-charge. Necessary documentation/ Test
certificates shall be furnished by the Contractor for such approval. The FD, FW & FPs shall be
fabricated only after approval of materials.
4.1
Glass
The thickness, size, brand and make of glass panels in glazed FD, FW and FPs shall be in
accordance with prototype test certificate or test report (refer clause 3.0) and shall be clear,
toughened, inter-layered having fire rating of minimum 120 minutes with respect to stability
and integrity. Glass shall have following properties:
Category
Impact resistance
Light transmission ratio
EW120
(in accordance with BS EN 13501-2 tested as per BS EN 1363-1,
BS EN 1363-2, BS EN 1634 -1 or BS 476, part 22)
Note:
Other categories of Glass having fire rating of minimum 120
minutes with respect to stability and integrity are also acceptable.
Minimum 2B2 category
(in accordance with EN 12600)
Minimum 85%
(In accordance with BS EN 410).
ogar taleg
laileateleaneandoes.1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 9
Each FD shall be provided with a small metal identification plate in suitable location
indicating Fire rating, name of the Manufacturer, date of installation and name/ approval of
Test house/Laboratory.
5.1
Shutter
Shutters shall be non-metallic and asbestos free type. They shall be composed of approved
quality Calcium Silicate boards (Material class: Non- combustible as per BS: 476, Part 4 or IS:
3614, Part 2) on both sides with Mineral wool insulation (density 48 Kg/ Cu. M.) in between
all as per the test report or test certificate.
The shutter composition shall have teak wood lipping around the periphery fitted with
intumescent fire seal in PVC casing as per the test report or test certificate.
D. Finishing
The Door frames shall be finished with approved quality fire resistant paint including primer
in desired colour to provide class I surface (surface spread of flame) conforming to BS: 476
part 7 or IS: 12777.
The Door shutters shall be faced with 4mm thick polished teak veneer of approved make and
colour & texture on both sides.
5.2
Fire Rating
Unless otherwise specified, the complete assembly of Doors shall be of 120 minutes fire rating
for stability and integrity (tested in accordance with BS: 476, Part-22 and IS: 3614, Part-2).
B.
Frame
Door frame shall be fabricated with minimum 1.6mm thick galvanized steel sheet pressed to
requisite profile as indicated in the test certificate or report. They shall be provided with
stiffeners for hardware/ lock mounting and other accessories.
C.
Shutter
Shutter frame shall be fabricated with minimum 1.2mm thick galvanized steel sheet pressed to
requisite profile with infill of mineral wool or any other proprietary insulation as indicated in
the test certificate or report.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
Igar 2P-ag INDIA LIMITED
101
el
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 9
They shall be provided with stiffeners for hardware/ lock mounting and other accessories.
D. Finishing
The Door frames and shutters shall be finished with powder coating (70 microns) in desired
colour.
5.3
5.4
Hardware
SS 304 grade double ball bearing hinges. (Or hinges as indicated in
test certificate or report).
"push to open" horizontal panic bar - single / double leaf panic exit
devices
Nos
As
required
1 No.
lt
di ENGINEERS
3.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 8 of 9
Openable locks/ trims for horizontal Panic Bars to operate panic bar
from outside with necessary screws as required. The lock and handle
should be an amalgamated single motion piece from the same
manufacturer as that of Panic Bar. This hardware shall be installed in
selective doors as per approved layout.
Heavy duty door closer
SS 304 grade twin rubber heavy duty Door Stopper with SS screws
SS 304 grade minimum 300mm long concealed flush bolt (in inactive
shutter of double shutter Doors)
4.
5.
6.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
2 Nos.
For internal fire doors opening to the rooms adjoining corridor (defined as escape route), the
doors need not have panic bar assembly and shall have the following Hardware as a minimum.
However any internal door placed directly on the escape route exclusive of any adjoining
room shall be provided with panic bar as specified above.
S. No
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hardware
SS 304 grade double ball bearing hinges. (Or hinges as indicated in test
certificate or report)
Heavy duty door closer
Heavy duty mortice lock (with D type handle on both face) in SS finish
along with necessary screws
SS 304 grade, finish twin rubber heavy duty Door Stopper with SS
screws
Nos.
As
required
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
6.0 FIRE CHECK/ FIRE RESISTANT/ FIRE RATED WINDOWS (FWs) & PARTITIONS
(FPs)
FWs & FPs shall be fixed, fully glazed with steel frame and shall be of proprietary design and
construction.
Materials, sizes, dimensions and profiles of various components shall be in accordance with
prototype test report.
Overall dimension of FWs & FPs shall not exceed the overall size as indicated in test
certificate or report.
A. Fire Rating
Unless otherwise specified, The complete assembly of Doors shall be of 120 minutes fire
rating for stability and integrity tested in accordance with either BS:476, Part-22 and IS:
3614, Part-2 or BS EN/ EN 1364-1.
B.
Frame
Window & Partition frame shall be fabricated with minimum 1.6mm thick galvanized
steel sheet pressed to requisite profile & size with Insulation across the frame and in the
hollow space of frames as indicated in the test certificate or report.
C.
lg-ar iMeu
Nren rwmrras3vmwn
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt
India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 9 of 9
Size of glass panels shall not exceed the dimensions indicated in the test certificate or
report.
Each Glass shall carry a non-removable marking with the name of the product & the
manufacturer inscribed on it.
D. Finishing
The door & shutter frame, other metallic components shall be finished with powder
coating (70 micron) in desired colour.
7.0 INSTALLATION
Shop drawings of the doors, windows and partitions in accordance with test certificate or report
shall be prepared and submitted for approval by the Engineer-In-Charge.
The shop drawings shall include all details of construction, anchoring, connections, fastenings
etc.
The FD/ FW/ FPs shall be installed in accordance with the approved drawings.
Installation of FDs shall ensure proper operation of the doors.
8.0 DELIVERABLES BY THE CONTRACTOR
Following documentation/ drawings shall be furnished by the Contractor.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
9.0 GUARANTEE
The FD/FW/FPs including all hardware shall be guaranteed for a period of 12 months from the
date of installation against any manufacturing defect.
In case of any such defect within the guarantee period, the defected part shall be replaced by the
Contractor.
10.0 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement of the FD/FW/FPs opening shall be in Sq. M. measuring the actual area
including the frames. The rate shall include complete assembly consisting of Frame, Shutter,
Hardware, Accessories and sealant etc. including installation.
$)g-affM-g
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Inda Undenaking)
7-44-0404 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
DETAIL B
NOTES 2,3
UNDER ROADS
NOTES-4,5
LENGTH BY FIELD
INSULATED LINES
UNDER ROADS
NOTE-2
PIPE SLEEVE
-b
300
300
y
IN CASE OF DETAIL 'A' ARRANGEMENT CHECK
SHALL BE MADE FOR ANCHOR FORCES ON
EARTHEN/CONCRETE DYKE WALLS.
6 THICK SPLIT
SEAL PLATE
SLEEVE(NOTE-1)
INSULATION NOT
REQUIRED INSIDE
SLEEVE UNDER
ROAD
50
1-2
TRACER
(WHERE APPLICABLE)
PIPE
SIZE
GRIND CORNERS
SLEEVE SIZE(NOTES-4,5)
DYKE
SCH/
THK.
ROAD
11/2"
6"
40
3"
2"
6"
40
3"
3"
8"
20
4"
4"
10"
20
6"
6"
12"
20
8"
8"
14"
10
10"
10"
16"
10
12"
12"
18"
10
14"
14"
20"
6.35mm
16"
16"
24"
6.35mm
18"
18"
24"
6.35mm
20"
20"
30"
6.35mm
22"
22"
30"
6.35mm
24"
24"
32"
6.35mm
26"
26"
36"
28"
36"
R ' VEIR-r
REll
do
30"
40"
do
32"
40"
do
36"
44"
do
40"
48"
do
42"
50"
do
44"
52"
do
46"
54"
do
48"
56"
do
DETAIL-A
300 10
6 THK. SEGMENTAL
PLATE WELDED TO PIPE
DETAIL-B
NOTES:
Purpose
INSULATION NOT
REQUIRED INSIDE
SLEEVE UNDER ROAD
(NOTE-3)
Date
BITUMEN IMPREGNATED
MINERAL WOOL
NOTE 2 & 3
Rev.
(WHERE APPLICABLE)
GRIND CORNERS
No.
STEAM TRACER
50X6 THK.
GUIDE PLATE
SH
itm152N
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
/AT1k.-(",
SC
ND
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - AII rights reserved
STANDARD No
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
1/45illadel
5g7 tameg
(A Govt 0/ India
PLINTH PROTECTION
WITH BUILDING DRAIN)
U a ng)
_J
7-75-0065 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 2
JL
ROAD
BUILDING
0
Et
BUILDING DRAIN
(TO BE CONNECTED TO MAIN STORM
WATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM AT
SUITABLE LOCATION AS PER STORM
WATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM DRAWING)
ROAD
KEY PLAN
RCC COLUMN FACE LINE
RCC
RAIN WATER PIPE
MS GRATING COVER
15 THICK PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER
WITH NEAT CEMENT FINISH
1000
/lastaifi
GROOVE
BRICK WORK
PCC 1:2:4
RAMMED EARTH
IIMEGRESIMia'
-tv
N' NA
fr N.
75
RAMMED EARTH
PCC 1:2:4
SECTION AA
co
BUILDING DRAIN
(SLOPE 1:500)
DRAIN
A
0 D
0
z
I
O
V
5c
RWP EMBEDDED
IN PCC
La
0-
25.10.11
Dion"
21.03.07
AMAMI'
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
RCC COLUMN
EXTERNAL FACE
OF WALL
Prepared
by
0S7D
JKB/SD
Checked
by
CAtbi-sA
VINAY KUMAR DMALHOTRA
JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
V.CHATURVEDI
STANDARD No.
Etleg
INDIALIMITED
INDIA
(A Govt of locha
under/41.19 i
PLINTH PROTECTION
(WITH BUILDING DRAIN)
7-75-0065 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 2
BUILDING DRAIN
40x6 MS FLAT
035 C/C
-op
RWP EMBEDDED
IN CONCRETE
r.
0
40x6 MS FLAT
EXTERNAL FACE
OF WALL
RCC COLUMN
PLAN
MS GRATING AS
PER DETAIL
SLOP
RAMMED
EARTH
BRICK WALL
10 DIA MS BAR LUG
0 500 C/C WELDED
TO ANGLE AND
EMBEDDED IN PCC
(1:3:6)
DETAIL
DETAIL
NOTES:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM.
WIDTH OF THE PLINTH PROTECTION SHALL BE 900mm AND X+300 MAXIMUM UNLESS OTHERWISE MENTIONED
IN BUILDING DRAWING.
PLINTH PROTECTION ALONG ANY PARTICULAR SIDE OF THE BUILDING SHALL BE OF CONSTANT WIDTH FOLLOWING
THE EXTERNAL WALL ALIGNEMENT IF NOT SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED/INDICATED IN BYILDING DRAWING.
MS DRAIN COVER SHALL BE PROVIDED OVER BUILDING DRAIN AT ALL APPROACHES UNLESS OTHERWISE
MENTIONED/INDICATED IN BUILDING DRAWING.
4
3
Rev.
No.
25.10.11
21.03.07
Date
Purpose
ta
Dicortso
MAW
Prepared
by
\r/iN
Checked
by
ArAND KUMAR
()Ilk.")
D.MALHOTRA
V.CMATURVEDI
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
OWE aENGINEERS
azit Meg
INDIA LIMITED
(mail)
t'lek07
STANDARD No
ROOF DRAINAGE
7-75-0068 REV. 4
AND WATERPROOFING
Page 1 of 3
RCC GUTTER
FINISHED WATER PROOFING
TREATMENT AS PER SPECIFICATION
RCC FLAT ROOF SLAB
RCC/BRICK PARAPET WALL
SLOPE
SLOPE
SECTION A-A
RCC FACIA
RCC GUTTER
RCC/BRICK PARAPET WALL
a-
0-
-J
L/)
rta
RIDGE LINE
SLOPE
(1:80 TO 100)
LAI
a_ o
0 co
LAI
0-
0
SLOPE
20.02.12
15.02.07
e5aSl:
AMARNT
JKB/SD
JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
e ere rr
V.CLIATURVEDI
Ofraze a ENGINEERS
ROOF DRAINAGE
INDIA LIMITED
fgar
Oft
I Ira Al -,17151.3ERFil
STANDARD No,
7-75-0068 REV. 4
AND WATERPROOFING
IA G OO olIndia Undertaking)
Page 2 of 3
CINDER CONCRETE LAID TO
SLOPE AND TOPPED WITH WATER
PROOFING TREATMENT AND
PROT E CTIVE CEM E NT PLASTER
AS PER SP E CIFI C AT IO N
RCC / BRICK PARAPET WALL
PROTECTIVE LAYER OF
C E M E NT CONCRETE WITH
CHICK E N MESH AS PER
SPECIFICATI O N
WATER PROOFING
C>. TR E ATM E NT AS PER
SPECIFICATION
CEMEN T CONCRETE AS P ER
SPECIFICATION LAID TO SLOPE
r TOP OF RCC SLAB
CEMENT PLAST E R
10 X 20
GROOV E FILLED
WITH PU SEALANT
PUTTY
jq
d,
c._
;l
WATER PROOFING
TREATMENT TURNED
INTO GROOVE
12 THICK
CEMENT PLASTER
RCC COLUMN
RCC GUTTER
RAIN WATER
PIPE COVER
RAIN WAT E R
PIPE SOCKET
D R I P CO U RSE
RAIN WATER PIPE
EMBEDDED IN CEMENT
CONCRETE
MINIMUM 300
300
DETAIL A
RAIN WATER PIPE
EMBEDDE D IN CEMENT
CONCRETE
CEMENT PLAST E R
RCC COLUMN
WIDE GROOV E
IN PLASTER
10
RCC GUTTER
ABOVE
EXTERNAL WALL
/\/
SECTIONAL PLAN CC
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM
4
20.02. / 2
15.02.07
,.)14SD
AMAR JI T
Pu:
JK B /5D
9\9vYer
.;."
JKB
VINAY K UM A R
D .MALHOTRA
V.CHATURV ED I
ARVIND KUMAR
(3 M ( E
A r,proved by
aar
eJ
fameg
.17en' efffeasTFc151,,roaf
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Goof of India undertalongj
7-75-0068 Rev. 4
AND WATERPROOFING
Page 3 of 3
RCC PARAPET WALL
12 THICK CEMENT PLASTER
10x20 GROOVE FILLED WITH PU
SEALANT PUTTY
12 THICK CEMENT PLASTER
WATER PROOFING TREATMENT
TURNED INTO GROOVE
PROTECTIVE LAYER OF
CEMENT CONCRETE WITH
CHICKEN MESH AS PER
SPECIFICATION
WATER PROOFING
TREATMENT AS PER
TENDER ON RCC SLAB
TOP OF RCC SLAB
z.4
I-
STANDARD No.
ROOF DRAINAGE
ec4._
A A 4
Po y
CEMENT CONCRETE AS
PER SPECIFICATION LAID
TO SLOPE
RCC FLAT ROOF SLAB
75x75 CEMENT CONCRETE FILLET
RCC BEAM
EXTERNAL WALL
12 THICK CEMENT PLASTER
EXTERNAL FINISH
SECTION BB
(PARAPET HEIGHT MORE THAN 450)
RCC PARAPET WALL
12 THICK CEMENT PLASTER
A.
A;
CEMENT CONCRETE AS
PER SPECIFICATION LAID
TO SLOPE
RCC FLAT ROOF SLAB
75x75 CEMENT CONCRETE FILLET
RCC BEAM
EXTERNAL WALL
12 THICK CEMENT PLASTER
EXTERNAL FINISH
SECTION BB
(PARAPET HEIGHT UP TO 450)
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM
4
20.02.12
21.03.07
REVISED, ISSUED
ISSUED AS STANDARD
AVON
AMARJIT
crprP,..
ARVIND KUMAR
V.NATIANEW
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
k31
fzdzir NR-e-g
(PPP erecoremdfriFil)
STANDARD No.
7-75-0093 Rev. 0
Page 1 of 4
REFER DETAILA
50 DIA SS PIPE
HANDRAIL
14 DIA SS BAR
CONNECTOR
REFER DETAILB
oi
Eli
32 DIA SS PIPE
VERTICAL POST
0
18 DIA SS PIPE
FLOOR FINISH
AS/SPECIFICATION
FINISHED FLOOR
20 DIA SS BARS
WELDED TO VERTICAL
POST
100 DIA X6
THICK SS INSERT
PLATE
4.
REFER DETAILC
SECTION A-A
200
50 DIA SS PIPE
HANDRAIL
TJ
14 DIA SS BAR
CONNECTOR
32 DIA SS PIPE
FOR VERTICAL POST
0
0
N
18 DIA SS PIPE
HANDRAIL
_
Ln
N
FINISHED FLOOR
ELEVATION
f4
02.11.15
ISSUED AS STANDARD
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RAJANJI SR
VA
S. CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Corwrinht Fll - All rinhts rasprvpri
Ill ei
ENGINEERS
STAINLESS STEEL TUBULAR
INDIA LIMITED
HANDRAIL
fg-ar Elf51-eg
STANDARD No.
7-75-0093 Rev. 0
REF DETAILA
50 DIA SS PIPE
HANDRAIL
32 DIA SS PIPE
FOR VERTICAL POST
WELDED TO THE
BASE PLATE
REF DETAILB
FLOOR FINISH
AS/SPECIFICATION
REF DETAILD
!
12 THK GROOVE
FINISHED FLOOR
IZA
100
SECTION BB
1200
50 DIA SS PIPE
HANDRAIL
14 DIA SS BAR
CONNECTOR
1 OC
a
0
0
0
18 DIA SS PIPE
HANDRAIL
FINISHED FLOOR
Page 2 of 4
ei
Weg
Wren eleaxedaJi.antn
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India UndeitakingI
STANDARD No.
7-75-0093 Rev. 0
Page 3 of 4
50 DIA STAINLESS
STEEL HANDRAIL
50x8 THICK
STAINLESS STEEL
PLATE BALUSTER ON
EVERY THIRD STEP
0
0
18 DIA STAINLESS
STEEL INTERMEDIATE
PIPE
FLOOR FINISH AS
PER SPECIFICATION
SECTION C-C
50 DIA STAINLESS
STEEL PIPE HANDRAIL
WELDED JOINTS
50 X 8 THICK
STAINLESS STEEL
PLATE BALUSTER ON
EVERY THIRD STEP
18 DIA STAINLESS
STEEL INTERMEDIATE
PIPE
STAIR FINISH AS
PER SPECIFICATION
NOSING
50X50X6 SS ANGLE
ELEVATION
STAINLESS STEEL (SS) HANDRAIL FOR STAIRS
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.
02.11.15
ISSUED AS STANDARD
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
RD c_01
SD/J1e4
Prepared
Checked
by
by
S. CHANDA
Stds. Bureau
Stds. Committee
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
Convriatit FIt - All rights rpsprvPri
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
STAINLESS STEEL TUBULAR
INDIA LIMITED
7-75-0093 Rev. 0
HANDRAIL
ICI
50 DIA SS PIPE
6 THICK SS SADDLE
PLATE
14 DIA SS
BAR CONNECTOR
50 DIA x 6 THICK
CAP PLATE
DETAIL A
Page 4 of 4
41)
mralrereaggrm
EOM I=
32 DIA SS PIPE
VERTICAL POST
80 DIA X 8 THICK SS
PLATE
FINISHED FLOOR
DETAIL D
32 DIA SS PIPE
VERTICAL POST
50 DIA SS PIPE
18 DIA SS PIPE
RAILING
14 DIA SS
BAR WELDED
TO SS PIPE
DETAIL B
6 THICK SS SADDLE
PLATE
14 DIA SS BAR
CONNECTOR
SECTION D-D
32 DIA SS PIPE
VERTICAL POST
20 DIA SS BARS
100 DIA X 6 THICK
CIRCULAR SS
INSERT PLATE
80 DIA X 8 THICK SS
PLATE
32 DIA SS PIPE
VERTICAL POST
4 NOS HILTI HSL BOLTS
CL OF INSERT PLATE
DETAIL C
SECTION E-E
(TYPICAL DETAILS)
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.
02.11.15
ISSUED AS STANDARD
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
RD
)),g1:0/J
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA
S. CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Convrinht RI - All rinhts rpsprvpd
klet ENGINEB2S
a
INDIA umiTED FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
tgzir
tinpieg
6-75-0001 Rev. 5
GENERAL
IA Gat of kW UficlertuknO
lItq cOdl
c
4
Page 1 of 7
Witil*f&C
ftfttvr -ER
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
GENERAL
15.03.12
21.03.07
11.03.99
REAFFIRMED AS STANDARD
16.03.94
Rev.
No
0.6
PD
SPECIFICATION
JK C---
)11t<
D. MALHOTRA
JKB
ARVIND
KUMAR
V.
CHATURVEDI
SD
MIS
SCJ
AS
JS
JS
AKG
AS
SD
SD
AKG
RNS
SPECIFICATION
Pumose
SD
eS---4
SD
SPECIFICATION
Date
)4?
Prepared Checked
by
by
Standards
Standards
Committee GM (E)
Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
laRaet.".,
" ENGINEERS
Saar Emden" INDIA LIMITED
(A Gent of India
unaenewnsi
Abbreviations:
ASTM :
:
BS
IS
Mr. JK Bhagchandani
Members :
laaineta ENGINEERS
Ogez
EVIegliW INDIA LIMITED
lawr efiewaaJelaa
t)
LAC of
Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR ARCHITECTURAL. WORKS
GENERAL
6-75-0001 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 DEFINITIONS
4.0 MANUFACTURER
6.0 MATERIALS
7.0 WORKMANSHIP
9.0 SUBMITTALS
10.0 MEASUREMENT
owieitift ENGINEERS
Igzirimegw: INDIA LIMITED
(A
1.0
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
GENERAL
6-75-0001 Rev. 5
Page 4 of 7
GENERAL
This specification establishes and defines various aspects of specifications of Architectural
works such as codes, references, manufacturer, conflicts and contradictions, materials,
workmanship, packaging, shipping, delivery and storage, testing, submittals and measurement
etc. and shall be applicable for all the Architectural specifications.
2.0
DEFINITIONS
2.1
Contractor
The party which carries out all or part of the design, engineering, procurement, construction,
commissioning or management of the Project. Contractor includes its approved
Manufacturers, Vendors, Suppliers, and subcontractor's. Requirements of this specification
shall be enforced at all levels of the Contractor's design, engineering, procurement,
construction process.
2.2
Subcontractor
The party which is engaged by the "Contractor" and carries out all or part of the design,
engineering, procurement, construction of the system (s).
2.3
2.4
Shall
Indicates a mandatory requirement.
2.5
Should
Indicates a strong recommendation to comply with the requirements of this document.
3.0
4.0
MANUFACTURER
Manufacturers listed for particular item in the specifications are the acceptable Manufacturers
for that particular item. Products by other Manufacturers which are of equal quality and
performance may be considered for approval upon review of information as required and
submitted to the competent authority. However the contractor to ensure that the time schedule
is adhered to in any case.
0 Gov, of loom
underrakow
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
GENERAL
6-75-0001 Rev. 5
Page 5 of 7
Product data sheet, specifications, performance data, installation instructions and other
recommendations of such listed or approved Manufacturers also form part of the
specifications subject to compliance with other requirements specified.
Materials, installation method and other requirements for execution of any item if required by
Manufacturer's installation instructions, recommendations and requirements shall also form
part of the specifications whether specified or not.
Specifications which are based on one particular manufacturer's product are for reference to
maintain the quality.
5.0 CONFLICTS & CONTRADICTIONS
Specifications, Scope of Work, Schedule of rates and drawings for a particular Tender shall be
read in conjunction with each other. In case of conflicts/contradictions amongst them, the
clarification shall be obtained from the Engineer- In- Charge whose decision shall be final &
binding. Following procedure shall be followed for the necessary clarification.
Item description shall prevail over specifications for item rate tenders when provisions
therein are different from those in specifications.
Whenever any requirement is not covered in item description but are covered in
specifications, the specifications shall be followed in addition to the requirements of
item description .No extra payment shall be made to the Contractor for executing such
item as per specification.
Whenever drawings call for requirements different from or additional to those in item
description and specification, the decision of the Engineer - In - Charge shall be
obtained in writing.
However no extra payment shall be made to the Contractor for executing any work
incorporating requirements additional to those in item description and specification
but covered in applicable drawings or standards attached to the tender.
6.0 MATERIALS
All materials shall be of standard quality conforming to the specifications & IS or equivalent
such as ASTM, BS etc and shall be obtained from the approved Manufacturer.
The Contractor shall get the samples of materials approved by the Engineer - In - Charge
before ordering & procurement. Such approved samples shall be properly marked/ identified
as approved sample and shall be kept as record for future reference. The Contractor shall
furnish necessary test certificates etc. as asked by the Engineer - In - Charge. Further to that he
shall get the materials tested from approved test house if and as asked by the Engineers - In Charge & submit the test certificate at his own cost for which no extra payment shall be made
to him.
The Engineer - In - Charge shall have the right to reject all or any of the materials intended to
be used and such materials shall be immediately removed from the site by the Contractor at
his own cost without any claim for compensation etc. due to such rejection.
7.0 WORKMANSHIP
Workmanship shall conform to the highest standards of construction practice. All work shall
be executed to the c mnplete satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge in regard to its qt ality and the
order in which it is carried out.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
PraaeLa ENGINEERS
tingleg leWA UMFIED
+NM eraereaslawai)
9.0
SUBMITTALS
If not mentioned otherwise, Contractor shall submit the following for various items.
9.1
Samples
Samples for all materials, components, accessories and complete range of finishing/ shades/
colours for verification as well as acceptance of pattern, colour and finish as applicable.
Samples shall be re-submitted until approved. Approved samples shall be retained to serve as
a basis for checking delivery to site and standard for subsequent work.
9.2
Test Certificates
All applicable tests as per relevant codes & standards shall be conducted by the Contractor at
no extra cost. Test Certificates shall be submitted for review/ approval of the Engineer-incharge.
9.3
Shop Drawings
Shop drawings indicating large scale details, lay-out, connections, anchoring, fastening,
bracing, finishes etc. as applicable for review/ approval.
ISit&Eggia ENGINEERS
li
9.4
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov1
umenamoi
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
GENERAL
6-75-0001 Rev. 5
Page 7 of 7
9.5
9.6
Maintenance manuals
10.0
MEASUREMENT
Mode of measurement is generally specified in each Specification. Whenever mode of
measurement is not specified, IS: 1200 shall be applicable.
IA
STANDARD No.
EUROPEAN TYPE WC
(FIXING DETAIL)
7-75-0062 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
TOILET PAPER
HOLDER
r
EUROPEAN
i]
TYPE WC
CISTERN
MS BRACKET
FLUSH PIPE WITH
BEND COMPLETE
S OR P TRAP
_ _1
SECTION AA
FLOOR TRAP COVERED
WITH GRATING
rAr
BIB COCK
00S
200
4/k
10MM DROP
IN FLOOR
EUROPEAN
TYPE WC
CISTERN
t.
STOP COCK
1300 MINIMUM
PLAN
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM
09.11.11 REVISED & REISSUED
3
Rev.
No.
Format Nn
Purpose
DAnst
mama
Prepared
by
JKB
SD/JKB
Checked
by
WRAY KUMAR
ARVIND KUMAR
Stds. Committee
Convenor
i 44.4
DMA/MOIRA
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM (E)
Sft
Ogar
ENGINEERS
cam' INDIA LIMITED
rA Goo of inaa unartarmg 1
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR SANITARY FITTINGS AND
FIXTURES
6-75-0009 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 6
03.0412
21.03.07
16.03.94
27.09.91
Rev.
No
2)VA
VK
SPECIFICATION
D MALHOTRA
SD
JKB
ARVIND
KUMAR
V
CHATURVEDI
SD
MLB
SCJ
AS
JS
JS
AKG
AS
SD
SD
AKG
RNS
Date
Purpose
Prepar Checked
ed by
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM(E)
ItitraZiaft ENGINEERS
6-75-0009 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 6
Abbreviations:
IS
BS
:
ASTM :
Indian Standards
British Standards
American Society for Testing and Materials
Mr. JK Bhagchandani
Members :
ssaceym INDIA
ENGINEERS
LIMITED
Ogar Wag NW
6-75-0009 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 6
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
04
04
2.0
SANITARY FITTINGS
3.0
04
4.0
05
5.0
URINALS
05
6.0
WASH BASINS
05
7.0
06
? P.9eg,
ar
INDIA LIMITED
Goo ptintla Und.ttokngi
1.0 GENERAL
Reference shall be made to the following Indian Standards for any further information etc. not
covered in the specification. In case of any conflict/contradiction provisions of specification
shall override.
IS :2556 Part 1-17
1 S :774
IS : 775
Specification for cast iron brackets and supports for wash basins and
sinks
IS :781
Specification for Cast copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop
valves for water services.
IS :2064
IS :2548 Part-I
IS :2548 Part-2
IS :2326
IS :7231
Specification for plastic flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals
IS :9758
Specification for flush valves and fittings for water closets and
urinals
1512ZIeTe ENGINEERS
efaniellgrageINDIA UMITED
IA Go, of Ina. Undertak.og,
Rate quoted for item rate tenders shall include providing and fixing water-closet and flushing
cistern with all accessories, breaking wall and floors and making good the same, all inlet and
outlet connections of cistern and water closet, finishing of solder joints, painting and testing of
all connections etc. complete.
4.0
5.0
6.0
WASH BASINS
This shall be flat back wash basin with one tap hole conforming to IS: 2556 Part-IV. Wash
basins shall be of one piece construction including a combined overflow and it shall be so
designed as to facilitate cleaning of the overflow. This shall be fitted on CI or MS brackets.
Brackets shall conform to IS: 775. The brackets shall be given two coats of synthetic enamel
paint or aluminium paint, over a coat of primer.
16i1PzIeT
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
0 Go, of Ina. UndenaM,^91
6-75-0009 Rev. 5
Page 6 of 6
The wall side shall be fixed well flushed with the plaster or wall and the joint if any, shall be
properly stopped with an elastomeric sealant. One CP brass pillar cock, PVC connecting pipe
with brass union, a CP brass bottle trap with union, CP brass chain and rubber PVC stopper,
2mm dia GI/ CPVC waste pipe shall also be supplied and fitted with the wash basin and
embedded in the wall. The pillar cock shall be water efficient low flow fixture and shall have
low flow rates with auto-stop facility, wherever specified, compliant to the norms laid down
by the National Building Code. The top of rim of the wash basin shall be fixed at 800 mm
above finished floor level, unless otherwise specified.
Rate for item rate tenders shall include provision and fixing of wash basin with all accessories,
providing stop cocks and pillar cocks, breaking and making good walls, fixing and making
inlet and outlet connections for stop cock, pillar cock and waste pipe, providing & fixing MS
brackets painted as mentioned above etc. complete.
7.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IoN melt
STANDARD No.
STEEL WINDOWS
FITTINGS AND FIXTURES
7-75-0032 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
STEEL FRAME
3 THICK MS FLAT
CUT/BENT TO SHAPE
NYLON WASHER
8 DIA MS BOLT
3 THICK BRASS
STRIKING PLATE
DETAIL AT A-A
DETAIL OF MS HINGE
STEEL FRAME
3 THICK 10 PROJECTED
BRASS STRIKING PLATE
RIVETED TO WINDOW
FRAME TO HOLD THE
HANDLE IN POSITION
4 DIA PIN
33
10 DIA MS FIXING SCREW
3 THICK MS
FABRICATED HANDLE
3 THICK BRASS
STRIKING PLATE
PVC WASHER
11 ROUND OR
SQUARE HOLE
DETAIL OF HANDLE
2 THICK MS
FABRICATED STAY
75
S;)
23.04.12
DK
21.03.07
MURAT
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
V/NAT KUMAR
JKB/SD
Checked
by
D KUMAR
Stds. Como-silo
Convenor
fl%-L
D.MALHOTRA
V.CHATURVEDI
GM (E)
Stds. Reread
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright
STANDARD No.
STEEL GATE
Wartak,
111INWEINWS
ED
.A God. of YANAArtelAsq)
7-75-0054 Rev. 4
Sheet 1 of 2
r
SPACE
FOR LOGO
40x80x3.2MM MS
RECTANGULAR HOLLOW
SECTION (OUTER FRAME)
80x40x3.2MM MS RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW SECTION MEMBERS
32x32x2.6MM MS
SQUARE HOLLOW
SECTION MEMBERS
ELEVATION
SECTION '1-1'
40x80x3.2MM
MS RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW SECTION
(OUTER FRAME)
32x32x2.6MM MS
SQUARE HOLLOW
SECTION MEMBERS
40x80x3.2MM MS
RECTANGULAR HOLLOW
SECTION (OUTER FRAME)
80x40x3.2MM MS
RECTANGULAR HOLLOW
SECTION MEMBERS
40x80x3.2MM
MS RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW SECTION
EQ
EQ
=1-111-
RCC COLUMN
PLAN AT 'A'
OUTER FRAME
OUTER FRAME
R.C.C. COLUMN
2 NOS. 6 THK. M.S.FLATS
WELDED TO INSERT PLATE
FABRICATED HOLLOW MS
CYLINDER MADE OF
5MM THK. M.S PLATE WITH
20MM INTERNAL DIA. FIXED
TO SHUTTER
M.S HOLD FAST,
25x6x200MM LONG
FABRICATED
HINGE ASSEMBLY
80x40x3.2MM
MS RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW SECTION
MEMBERS
DETAIL '3'
75x5OMM, 8 THK
M.S INSERT PLATE
NOTE:
DETAIL AT '4'
Date
Purpose
SUMEDHA
JKB
AMARJIT
SD/JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Stds. Committee
Convenor
cr\ iv ....
J IM AY KUMAR
D. MALHOTRA
V. CHATURVEDI
GM (E)
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
lregenrarED.
NM an/NM (A
STANDARD No.
STEEL GATE
Sheet 2 of 2
7-75-0054 Rev. 4
nACJA.I.LIVIIVI
tJ
/V13 ICGl. I PalNlolif-na
mCTPII
IC;h1i
MuEZERS
.,............,
.-- u
a
1'
2
0 a
CO an
el
..
DETAIL AT '5'
......
OMI
I,
..
ten=
near
00
. Aenn
itinitrai
Ai
n:
1111/1
.
i 4
44
411011 Aeranz4.7WM
11 LIMN'
II
0 0.
c
11.
MAORI
aiali
l r
"IL
1000
1900
40 (TYP.)
.
spacing
tflialli
RCC COLUMN
40x80x3.2MM MS
RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW SECTION
(OUTER FRAME)
40x80x3.2MM MS RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW SECTION (OUTER FRAME)
80x40x3.2MM MS RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW SECTION MEMBERS
32x32x2.6MM MS SQUARE
HOLLOW SECTION MEMBERS
75MM WIDE 6MM THICK
MS CLAMP
75MM DR 25MM THICK MS
WHEEL WITH BALL BEARING
20 DIA MS BOLT
50x50x6MM MS TEE BENT
TO SHAPE
DETAIL AT '6'
DETAIL AT '7'
40x40x6MM MS
ANGLE FOR
LOCKING
ARRANGEMENT
12 DIA HOLE
FOR LOCK
NOTE:
DETAIL AT '8'
20.03.12
21.03.07
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
SUMEDHA
SIA
"-
AMARJIT
Prepared
SD/JKB
Checked
by
by
JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
Stds. Committee
Convenor
\fr
..>
Y
KUMAR
D. MALHOTRA
CHATURVEDI
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
V.
GM (E)
Approved by
Copyright EIL -All rights reserved
aazieT
ENCINEERS
$fg-itir 00ft,INDIA LIMITED
GoN al incl. undePlaivngl
6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 15
13t^ 4-tiR41,
thricordb-r
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
WHITE WASHING, COLOUR
WASHING, DISTEMPERING, PAINTING
AND POLISHING
09.04.12
21.03.07
10.03.99
2
1
Rev.
No
2/ye-4
0 k 5412\\
VK
TS
D MALHOTRA
SD
JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
SD
MLB
SCJ
AS
16.03.94
JS
JS
AKG
AS
27.09.91
SD
SD
AKG
RNS
Date
Purpose
CHATURVEDI
Standards
Standards
Bureau
Prepared Checked Committee GM(E)
Convenor
Chairman
by
by
Approved by
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
swzra
Ig-.41fe9-eg,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov/ al India Undertaong
6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 15
Abbreviations:
IS
BS
:
ASTM :
Indian Standards
British Standards
American Society of Testing of Materials
Mr. JK Bhagchandani
Members :
az
aZra ENGINEERS
azz EIfaleg INDIA LIMITED
IA Go, of Inda Uncienalengj
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
WHITEWASHING
3.0
COLOURWASHING
4.0
DRY DISTEMPERING
5.0
6.0
7.0
10
8.0
11
9.0
11
10.0
12
11.0
14
12.0
15
150zre?
sga feifteg
,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
i^A Govt of lode Undertakogj
6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 4 of 15
1.0 GENERAL
Reference shall be made to the following Indian Standards for further information etc. not
covered in the specification. In case of conflict/contradictions provisions of the specification
shall override.
IS 6278
IS 2395
IS 712
IS 55
IS 63
IS 427
IS 428
IS 5411
IS 2338 Part-1 :
IS 2338 Part-2 :
IS 5410
IS 2524 Part-1 :
IS 2524 Part-2 :
IS 1477 Part-1 :
IS 1477 Part-2 :
IS 384
IS 486
IS 110
Ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler enamels for use over primers.
IS 426
IS 345
IS 3585
ISlifrzre? ENCJNEERS
basal. itiwegw INDIA LIMITED
6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 5 of 15
IS 110
Ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler for enamels for use over
primers.
IS 106
Ready mixed paint, brushing, priming for enamels, for use on metals.
IS 2395 Part-1 :
IS 2395 Part-2 :
All materials required for the execution of painting work shall be obtained direct from
approved manufacturers and shall be brought to the site in makers drums, bags etc. with seals
unbroken.
In case of ready mixed paints, thinning if necessary, the brand of thinner shall be as per
recommendations of the manufacturer.
Paint shall be applied by brushing or spraying. The brushing operations are to be adjusted to
the spreading capacity advised by the manufacturer. During painting, every time after the paint
has been worked out of the brush bristles, the bristles shall be opened up by striking the brush
suitably.
Spray machine used may be of high pressure type or low pressure depending on the nature and
location of work. After work, the brushes shall be completely cleaned of paint and shall be
hung in a thinner if intended to be used afterwards. The spray guns shall be cleaned
thoroughly after every break in work. The paint containers, when not used shall be kept close
and free from air.
After the finishing of work, the adjacent surfaces not intended to be washed/
distempered/painted/polished shall be thoroughly cleaned of all paint patches and shall be
finished in accordance with surface finishing of such surfaces.
2.0
WHITE WASHING
White washing in general shall conform to IS 6278.
2.1
Workmanship
2.1.1
Scaffolding
Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected in such a way that as far as possible no
part of scaffolding shall rest against the surface to be white/ colour washed. For white washing
of ceiling, proper stage scaffolding shall be erected.
2.1.2
Preparation of Surfaces
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, dust, mortar dropping and other foreign
matter before white wash is to be applied. Surfaces already white/colour washed shall be
broomed down to remove all dust, dirt, loose scales of lime wash or other foreign matters.
All damaged portions of the surface plaster shall be removed to full depth of plaster in
rectangular patches and plastered again after raking the joints in masonry properly. Such
portions shall be wetted and allowed to dry before any operation.
SSlIPZIeft, ENGINEERS
fetlatow INDIA LIMITED
IA GoN of ludo Undertaking)
6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 6 of 15
All holes, cracks, patches etc. not exceeding 0.1 sq. m. in area shall be made good with
material similar to that of the surface. Surfaces affected by efflorescence, moss, fungi, algae,
lichen etc. shall be treated in accordance with IS: 2395.
2.1.3 Preparation of White Wash
The fat lime conforming to IS: 712 shall be slaked at site and shall be mixed and stirred with
about 5 litres of water for 1 kg. of unslaked lime to make thin cream. This shall be allowed to
stand for a period of 24 hours and then shall be screened through a clean coarse cloth. 4 kg of
gum dissolved in hot water shall be added to each cubic metre of lime cream. Approved
quality ultramarine blue conforming to IS 55 @ 3 gram per kg. of lime shall also be added to
the solution. The whole solution shall be stirred thoroughly before use.
2.1.4 Application
White wash shall be applied with "MOONJ" brush to the specified number of coats. The
operation for each coat shall consist of stroke of the brush from the top to down wards,
another from the down to upwards over the first stroke, similarly one stroke horizontally from
right and another stroke from the left. Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next coat is
applied. The white washing on ceiling should be done prior to that on walls.
2.1.5 Protective measures
Surfaces of doors, windows, floors etc. which are not to be white washed shall be protected
from being splashed upon. Such surfaces shall be cleaned of white wash splashed if any.
COLOUR WASHING
Workmanship
Scaffolding
Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected in such a way that as far as possible no
part of scaffolding shall rest against the surface to be white/ colour washed. For white washing
of ceiling, proper stage scaffolding shall be erected.
3.1.2 Preparation of Surface
Surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, dust, mortar dropping and other foreign matter
before white wash is to be applied. Surfaces already white/colour washed shall be broomed
down to remove all dust, dirt, loose scales of lime wash or other foreign matters.
All damaged portions of the surface plaster shall be removed to full depth of plaster in
rectangular patches and plastered again after raking the joints in masonry properly. Such
portions shall be wetted and allowed to dry before any operation.
All holes, cracks, patches etc. not exceeding 0.1 sq. m. in area shall be made good with
material similar to that of the surface. Surfaces affected by efflorescence, moss, fungi, algae,
lichen etc. shall be treated in accordance with IS: 2395.
3.1.3 Preparation of Colour Wash
Sufficient quantity of colour wash enough for the complete job shall be prepared in one
operation to avoid any difference in colour. The basic white wash solution shall be prepared in
accordance with clause 2.1.3. Mineral colours of approved shade and quality not affected by
lime shall be added to the white wash solution in proportions as directed by Engg.in-charge.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
sfiftne?
047 oqteg,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
rA Goo of incia unaertskingl
6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 7 of 15
Solid lumps etc. in the colour powder shall be ground to fine powder, sieved and mixed evenly
and thoroughly to the white wash solution.
3.1.4
3.1.5
Protective Measure
Surfaces of doors, windows, floors etc. which are not to be white washed shall be protected
from being splashed upon. Such surfaces shall be cleaned of white wash splashed if any.
4.0
DRY DISTEMPERING
4.1
Workmanship
4.1.1
Scaffolding
Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected in such a way that as far as possible no
part of scaffolding shall rest against the surface to be white/ colour washed. For white washing
of ceiling, proper stage scaffolding shall be erected.
4.1.2
Preparation of Surface
The surface shall be thoroughly brushed free from dust, dirt, grease, mortar droppings, other
foreign matter and shall be made smooth by sand papering.
In case of distempering over existing distempered surface, the existing distempering shall be
scraped by steel scrapers leaving a clean surface.
All nails shall be removed. Pitting in plaster shall be made good with plaster-of-paris mixed
with dry distemper of colour to be used. The surface then shall be rubbed down again with a
fine grade sand paper and made smooth. A coat of distemper shall be applied over the patches.
The surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before the regular coat of distemper is allowed.
The surface affected by moss, fungus, algae, efflorescence shall be treated in accordance with
IS: 2395.
4.1.3
Priming Coat
A priming coat of whiting conforming to IS 63 shall be applied over the prepared surface. The
priming coat shall be prepared by mixing 2.5 kg. of whiting and one litre of glue solution
(prepared by mixing 250 gm. glue conforming to IS: 852 with boiling water) together and
placing it in a covered vessel with enough water to cover the mixture which shall be left to
cool until it becomes a jelly.
Priming coat shall be applied with "MOONJ" brush to the specified number of coats. The
operation for each coat shall consist of stroke of the brush from the top to down wards,
another from the down to upwards over the first stroke, similarly one stroke horizontally from
right and another stroke from the left. Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next coat is
applied. The white washing on ceiling should be done prior to that on walls.
ofrzey
51e-,4199:eg,
4.1.4
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
1.
GOA
o/
Undertaiong)
6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 8 of 15
Preparation of Distemper
The dry distemper of approved shade and quality conforming to IS: 427 shall be stirred slowly
in clean warm water using 0.6 litres of water per kg. of distemper. It shall be allowed to settle
for at least 30 minutes before applying. The mixture shall be well stirred before and during use
to maintain an even consistency.
4.1.5
Application of Distemper
After the priming coat has dried for at least 48 hours, the surface shall be lightly sand papered
and dusted off avoiding rubbing off of the priming coat. Prepared distemper shall then be
applied in minimum two coats with proper distemper brushes in horizontal strokes
immediately followed by vertical ones which together shall constitute one coat. The
subsequent coats shall be applied only after the previous coat has dried. The finished surface
shall be even and uniform without patches, marks, distemper drops etc. The application of a
coat in each room shall be finished in one operation. After each day's work, brushes shall be
thoroughly washed in hot water and hung down to dry.
4.1.6
Protective Measure
Surfaces of doors, windows, floors etc. which are not to be white washed shall be protected
from being splashed upon. Such surfaces shall be cleaned of white wash splashed if any.
5.0
5.1
Workmanship
5.1.1
Scaffolding
Same as in clause no. 2.1.1
5.1.2
Preparation of Surface
Preparation of surface shall in general be in accordance with clause no. 4.1.2 except that any
unevenness shall be made good by applying putty made of plaster of Paris mixed with water
including filling up the undulation and then sand papering the same after it is dry.
5.1.3
Primer Coat
The primer coat shall be alkali resistant primer or distemper primer and shall be of the same
manufacture as oil bound distemper.
If the wall surface plaster has not dried completely, alkali resistant primer otherwise distemper
primer shall be applied. The mixture of alkali resistant primer shall be prepared as per
approved manufacturer's instructions.
The application of primer coat shall be in accordance with 2.1.4
5.1.4
5.1.5
Application of Distemper
SW-Lie? ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt Al Intha Uneertaktom
6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 9 of 15
After the primer coat has dried for at least 48 hours, the surface shall be lightly sand papered
and dusted off avoiding rubbing off of the primer coat. Minimum two coats of distemper shall
be applied with brushes in horizontal strokes followed by immediate vertical strokes which
together shall constitute one coat. The subsequent coats shall be applied after at least 24 hours
between consecutive coats to permit proper drying of the preceding coat. The finished surface
shall be even and uniform without patches, brush marks drops etc. Application of a coat in
each room shall be finished in one operation. 14 cm double bristled distemper brushes shall be
used. After each day's work brushes shall be thoroughly washed in hot water with soap
solution and hung down to dry.
5.1.6
Protective Measures
Same as in clause no. 2.1.5
6.0
6.1
Workmanship
6.1.1
Scaffolding
Same as in clause 2.1.1
6.1.2
Preparation of Surface
Preparation of surface shall be in accordance with clause no. 2.1.2. The surface so prepared
shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water before the paint is applied.
6.1.3
Preparation of Paint
Waterproof cement paint of approved make shall be mixed with water and stirred to obtain a
thick paste which shall then be diluted to brushable consistency. The proportion of mixture
shall be as per manufacturer's recommendation. The paint shall be mixed in such quantity
which can be used up within an hour of mixing to avoid setting and thickening of the paint.
6.1.4
Application of Paint
The surface shall be treated with minimum two coats of waterproof cement paint. No less than
24 hours shall be allowed between two coats and subsequent coats shall be applied only after
the preceding coat has become hard to resist marking by subsequent brushing.
The finished surface shall be even and uniform in shade without patches, brush marks, paint
drops etc. Cement paints shall be applied with a brush with relatively short stiff hog or fibre
bristles.
6.1.5
Curing
Curing shall be started after the paint has hardened. Curing shall be done by sprinkling with
water two or three times a day. This shall be done between coats and for at least two days
following the final coat.
6.1.6
Protective Measure
Same as in clause in 2.1.5
larairefirm ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govi Al ^nda Underialong)
7.0
7.1
Workmanship
7.1.1
Scaffolding
6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 10 of 15
Preparation of Surface
Same as in clause 5.1.2 under specification of oil bound distempering.
7.1.3
Preparation of Paint
Plastic emulsion paint shall conform to IS 5411 (Part-1) and shall be of approved shade.
Preparation of paint shall be as per manufacturer's instructions.
7.1.4
Application of Paint
The paint mix shall be continuously stirred while applying for maintaining uniform
consistency. Number of coats shall be as specified. The painting shall be laid evenly and
smoothly by means of crossing and laying off. The crossing and laying off consists of
covering the area with paint, brushing the surface hard at first, then brushing alternately in
opposite direction 2 to 3 times and then finally brushing lightly in a direction at right angles to
the same. In this process, no brush marks, no hair marks no clogging of paint puddles shall be
permitted. The full process of crossing and laying off will constitute one coat. The paint shall
be applied by means of brush or roller.
Before starting painting with plastic emulsion paint, the prepared surface shall be treated with
two coats of primer consisting of cement, primer, whiting and plastic emulsion paint shall start
only after the preceding coat has become sufficiently hard to resist brush marking. Subsequent
coats of plastic emulsion paint shall also be started after the preceding coat is dried by
evaporation of water content.
The surface on finishing shall present a flat, velvety smooth finish, even and uniform shade
without patches, marks, paint drops etc.
7.1.5
Precautions
Brushes shall be quickly washed in water immediately after use and kept immersed in
water during break periods to prevent the paint from hardening on the brush. Old
brushes, if used shall be completely dried of turpentine/oil paints by washing in warm
soap water.
No oil base putties shall be used in filling cracks/holes.
C.
7.1.6
Washing of painted surface shall not be done within 3-4 weeks of application.
Protective Measures
Same as in clause 2.1.5
02-zre?
gar lageg)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Underlag)
6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 11 of 15
8.0
8.1
Material
It shall be an acrylic based textured wall coating consisting of quartz and silica aggregate,
inorganic pigments and other additives to form a crack free, flexible, tough, waterproof
coating.
8.2
Preparation of Surface
The surface to be coated shall be cleaned and all dirt, dust, grease and loose particles shall be
removed. Any old textured surface shall be removed with removing agent as per
manufacturer's instructions.
8.3
Application
Bonding agent and water shall be mixed first. Then the flakes/granules shall be added and
mixed thoroughly and kneaded till no lumps are found. The dough shall be left for 20-30
minutes before starting application. The bonding agent, flakes/granules and water shall be
mixed in different ratios for different finishes as per manufacturer's specifications.
The first application shall be by steel trowel. It shall be smoothened, if the specified finish
requires, by a plastic trowel.
9.0
9.1
Material
It shall be an acrylic based wall coating for exterior surfaces consisting of pure acrylic resin
and additives to form a crack free, flexible, tough, alkali resistant, UV resistant waterproof
coating.
9.2
Preparation of Surface
The surface to be coated shall be cleaned and all dirt, dust, grease and loose particles shall be
removed. Any old paint shall be removed with removing agent as per manufacturer's
instructions. The surface affected by moss, fungus, algae, efflorescence shall be treated in
accordance with IS: 2395.
9.3
Application
A primer coat of similar shade shall be applied as per manufacturer's specifications. The paint
shall be stirred to a uniform consistency. Two coats shall be applied over the primer coat by
brush or roller. Each coat shall be applied after the previous coat has dried completely. The
coverage of paint and application shall be strictly as per manufacturer's specifications.
10.0
10.1
Preparation of surface
Preparation of wood surface shall conform to IS: 2338 (Part-I) in general. All woodwork shall
be dry and free from any foreign matter. Nails shall be punched well below the surface. The
surface shall be smoothened off with abrasive paper used across the grain prior to painting,
with the grain prior to the staining. Any knots, resinous or bluish sap wood, cutting out of
which is not justified shall be covered with red lead conforming to IS: 103.
Plywood and block board shall be treated in the same manner as for wood work.
ailfrZie?
0g-elf lafgreg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Goal at
moo Uncieltahmg
6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 12 of 15
Particle board's surface shall be filled with a thin brushable filler and finished as for solid
wood.
10.2
Priming
Priming shall be in accordance with IS: 2338 (Part I and II). Dirt or any other extraneous
material on the surface shall be removed and the priming shall be applied by brushing.
Priming shall be done on all exposed and unexposed surfaces. Unless specified otherwise all
joinery work intended to be painted shall receive atleast 2 coats of primer. Type of primer
shall be in accordance with Table-1 and Table-2 of IS: 2338 (Part-II).
103
10.4
Application of Undercoat
Under coat shall be applied after the surface has been primed, stopped and filled, and rubbed
down to a smooth surface. Under coat may be brushed or sprayed. After drying the coat shall
be carefully rubbed down and wiped clean before the next coat is applied.
The type of undercoat shall be depending upon the finishing and in accordance with Table I
and Table-2 of IS: 2338 (Part II).
10.5
Finishing
The finishing paint shall be as specified and shall be applied either by the brush or by
spraying.
Reference shall be made to the Table-1 and Table-2 of IS: 2338 (Part-II)
10.6
10.6.1 Filling
Fillers shall be applied to prevent the excessive penetration of the finish to the surface for
obtaining a smooth finish. Fillers shall be conforming to IS: 345.
Fillers shall be heavily applied to the wood surface by hand, using hessian or jute rag across
the grain. It shall be rubbed when still wet to get better penetration. After 5-10 minutes it shall
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
1,51fazra
s'@-91a9lag,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
iA Gout at indu
undensong)
6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 13 of 15
be wiped off by hand across the grain followed by a light wipe with the grain. The filled
surface shall be dried preferably over night and smoothened with abrasive paper.
10.6.2 Staining
10.6.2.1 Spirit Stains
Spirit stains are solutions of spirit soluble dyes in Industrial methylated spirit.
10.6.2.2011 Stains
Oil stains are solutions of oil soluble dyes in linseed oil, but, usually consist of insoluble,
semi-transparent pigments ground in linseed oil and thinned with turpentine or other solvent.
10.6.2.3Preparation of Wood for Staining
Surface intended for staining shall be kept scrupulously clean and free from greasy finger
marks. It shall be prepared by careful smoothing with fine abrasive paper used in the direction
of the grain. Small cracks/nail holes shall be stopped with plastic wood/fine plaster of Paris.
The stopping shall be rubbed down with fine abrasive paper when hard and touched with a
thinned knotting before staining. In case of oil staining stopping shall be done after staining
using tinted putty or wood filler.
10.6.2.4Application of Stains
Stains shall be applied by brushing and wiping or by spraying. The stain shall be so thinned
that it can be applied fairly, liberally without over staining and over lapping.
10.6.3 Sealing
A suitable sealer shall be applied on the filled and sanded surface to prevent absorption by the
wood of the succeeding coats of finish and to seal stain and filler and thus preclude their
bleeding into the finish coat.
Sealer may be sprayed on taking care not to flood the surface and it shall be allowed to dry
hard. When fully dry the surface shall be sanded taking care not to cut through at corners and
edges. Dust shall be blown off and surface wiped with a clean rag.
10.6.4 Finishing
The stained surface shall be varnished, wax-polished or French polished as required after it is
dried.
10.6.4.1 Varnishing
Varnishing of wood and wood based material shall be in accordance with IS: 2338 (Part-I).
Surfaces to be varnished shall be prepared to produce a smooth, dry and matt surface and all
dust and dirt shall be removed from the surface.
The Varnish shall be applied liberally with a brush and spread evenly over a portion of the
surface with short light strokes to avoid frothing. It shall be allowed to flow out while the next
section is being laid in. Excess Varnish shall be scraped out of the brush and then the first
section be crossed, re- crossed and laid off lightly. The Varnish, once it has begun to set, shall
not be retouched. In case of any mistake, the Varnish shall be removed and the work shall be
started afresh.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA On, Al Inda Unclartakingl
6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 14 of 15
Where two coats of varnish are applied, the first coat shall be a hard drying under coating or
flatting varnish which shall be allowed to dry hard and then be flatted down before applying
the finishing coat. Sufficient time shall be allowed in between two coats.
When flat varnishing is used for finishing, a preparatory coat of hard drying undercoating of
flatting varnish shall first be applied and shall be allowed to harden thoroughly. It shall then
be lightly rubbed down before the flat varnish is applied. On larger areas, the flat varnish shall
be applied rapidly, and the edges of each patch applied shall not be allowed to set, but shall be
followed up whilst in free working conditions.
10.6.4.2French Polish
French polish shall conform to IS :348. Suitable pigments shall be added to get the required
colour.
The surface to be French polished shall be rubbed down to smoothness with sand paper and
shall be well dusted. Pores in the surface shall be filled up with fillers.
A pad of woollen cloth covered by a fine cloth shall be used to apply the finish. The pad shall
be moistened with polish and rubbed hard on the surface in a series of overlapping circles
applying the polish sparingly but uniformly over the entire area to give an even surface. A
trace of linseed oil may be used on the face of the pad for the purpose. The surface shall be
allowed to dry and the remaining coats applied in the same way. To finish off, the pad shall be
covered with a fresh piece of clean fine cloth, slightly damped with methylated spirit and
rubbed lightly and quickly with circular motions. The finished surface shall have a uniform
texture and high gloss.
11.0
11.1
General
Reference shall be made to IS :2524 and IS:1447.
11.2
Preparation of Surface
The surface, before painting, shall be cleaned of all rust, scale, dirt and other foreign matter
with wire brushes, steel wool, scrappers, sand paper etc. The surface shall then be wiped
finally with mineral turpentine which shall then be removed of grease etc. The surface then
shall be allowed to dry.
In case of GI surface, surface so prepared shall be treated with Mordant solution (5 litre for
about 100 sq.m.) by rubbing the solution generously with brush. After about half an hour, the
surface if required shall be retouched and washed down thoroughly with clean cold water and
allowed to dry.
11.3
ISIMileg ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
517 Hag
6 - 75 - 0007 Rev. 5
Page 15 of 15
1/43511Reiel
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
5e7,10Meg,
STEEL WINDOWS/VENTILATORS
USE OF SECTIONS
7-75-0028 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
SR. NO.
DESIGNATION
OF SECTION
F7D
F4B
T2
K 11 B
4.
USE
4
3
Rev.
No
STANDARD No.
12.10.11
21.03.07
Date
0
00-0001-F4 Rev 0
Purpose
Die.r..."
3.161/4;
VINAY KUMAR
AMARJIT
SD/JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Stds Committee
Convenor
D.MALHOTRA
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM (E)
<65x65x6(1YP.)
SEE DETAIL
L65x65x6
(TYP.)
NOTES:
illkilln....116.
IllialInEalliPanISIM.
NIMESEIIIMINW-111111111.0WitAlliglah.
allandlillSallIllalrAVAIIIIIMLIIIIIS
MIZIONEINOMIllrflI1111IrSAKIMMINIAlla
-NrilINSIMOMMINNENOW2111WAIMalliaLSOr
S'IMINIarearAnnalkes.
s'1110111111MHWailalleatamira
AllaSIEWSIWAIPASIara.
SIMISSAtirflara
"1111111PrellralWAWAIS411111121SIIL
III,
ShllrWaIIIIIIIFAISIIFSIS
, ,, ,
F.G L
AraerSisain
1111
1t11
1
1
11
LJ
I
L
I I I I
I LJ I
4 0
L50x50x6
TY P.
3000
3000
I
L
750
i OW.)
J
1
(TYP.)
L65x65x6
WELD
L50x50x6
F.G.L.
300 LONG 0 8 BOLT
THREADED UPTO THE NECK
CONC. BLOCK
750x600x750
CONC. BLOCK
(600x450x750)
4CA
el
ligalaMeg
1.31W1 qe5we6130/1R)
Format No. 0-00-0001-F5 Rev. 0
Page 1694 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undedaking)
3
2
Rev.
No.
28.05.12
22.08.06
Date
Anil
RBT/RRS
MANOJ RLT/UCJ
Prepared
by
R itgB
VK
2sw-"
DM
VJN
Stds.
Bureau
Stds.
Committee
GM(Engg)
Checked
Chairman
Convenor
by
Approved by
VDS
STANDARD No.
7-65-0403 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 1
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
fgeTr fdal
eg
Q`fe,gncf5Leiotr
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 7
iiiich 14-1411
24.06.13
19.02.08
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
RBT
RKS
MANAS
PPC /RKS
Prepared
by
Checked
by
DM
NK
VC
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
27f tcg
,I
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Intha UndeftakmOl
'U
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
c/c
center to center
GI
Galvanized Iron
IS
Indian Standard
LSTK :
mm
Millimeter
Meter
MS
Mild Steel
MT
Metric Ton
Members:
5fgareTFmrtfa&
og,zn41r,
To
ENGINEERS
INDIA
LIMITED
Govt of Ind. Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE
7.0 REINFORCEMENT
9.0 PAYMENT
$gar fafireg
INR
elegge
,TP415A
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govl of India Undettang)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 4 of 7
1.0
SCOPE
This specification specifies the requirements of chain link fence for security purposes. The
height of the fence shall be approximately 2.00M to the top of the chain link fencing at the
posts and approximately 2.5M in vertical height at the top line of barbed wire attached to
the cranked tops of the posts.
2.0
3.0
4.0
6-68-0001
6-68-0002
6-68-0003
6-68-0004
6-68-0006
7-65-0400
5.0
5.1
6.0
6.1
Pre Cast Cement concrete shall be of M25 grade for moderate environment exposure
condition and M30 grade for severe environment exposure condition with 20mm and
down size crushed stone aggregates conforming to IS : 383.
6.2
6.3
Necessary moulds shall be provided for casting the concrete posts and the same shall be
smooth finished with 1:3 cement sand mortar as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
1
01
1=g-ar tlfgrdg
25-2,7,7=37'45,i)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Indo Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 7
6.3
Necessary moulds shall be provided for casting the concrete posts and the same shall be
smooth finished with 1:3 cement sand mortar as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
7.0
REINFORCEMENT
7.1
8.0
8.1
Materials
8.1.1
8.1.2
Galvanized Wires
8.1.2.1
All steel wires shall be hot dipped galvanized wire and dia of the wire shall be 3.15mm.
over the galvanized coating.
8.1.2.2
8.1.2.3
The stirrup wire for securing the line wires to the concrete intermediate posts shall be
3.15mm diameter MS.
8.1.2.4
The tying wire for securing the chain link fencing to the line wire shall be 2.50mm
diameter MS.
8.1.2.5
Hair pin staples for fastening down the bottom of galvanized chain link fencing to the
concrete sill shall be of 3.15mm wire. The ends shall be bent outwards to secure
anchorage.
8.1.3
Cleats for eye bolts shall be of uniform size and shall consists of MS angle of 75 x 50 x
6mm.
8.1.4
8.1.4.1
The eye bolt strainer shall consist of bolts with welded eye sufficiently threaded and
fitted with a nut and waster.
8.1.4.2
Two-way eye bolt strainer shall have suitable ring nuts, fitted after wires have been
strained on one side.
8.1.5
Stretcher bar shall consist of MS flats 25mm x 4.75mm. They shall be secured to the
cleats by steel bolts.
8.1.6
Droppers for barbed wire shall be of M.S not less than 25mm x 4.75mm thick with
38mm x 4.85mm half round staples for fastening the barbed wire to them.
12-err 254-es
ENGINEERS ED
INDIA LIMIT
Icnen rirm
rtm3PCM11
IA Govt ol India Undellaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 6 of 7
8.1.7
Barbed Wire
8.1.7.1
Barbed wire shall conform to IS :278. The galvanized barbed wire shall be
manufactured from galvanized MS wire conforming to IS:280. The coating on the wire
shall be smooth and relatively free of lumps, globes or points, wires with excessive
roughness, blisters, Sal ammoniac spots shall be rejected. A galvanized steel barbed
wire of Type A-1 IS:278 shall be made from two strands of galvanised, twisted 2.5 mm
steel wire with 4 points of barbs. Each barb shall have two turns tightening around both
line wires making altogether four complete turns. The barbs shall be so finished that
four points are set and looked at right angles to each other.
8.1.7.2
Bracing of the rows of barbed wire shall be as shown in EIL Standard drawing.
8.1.7.3
The barbs shall have a length of not less than 13mm and not more than 18mm.
8.2
Erection
8.2.1
Straining posts shall be provided at all ends and corners of fences, at changes in
direction or acute variations in level and at intervals not exceeding 60m on straight
lengths of fence. Intermediate posts shall be spaced at regular intervals not exceeding
3M.
8.2.2
Struts shall be fitted to all straining posts behind the chain link fabric in the direction of
the line of fence.
8.2.3
8.2.3.1
There shall be four evenly spaced rows of line wire. The top wire shall be doubled,
making five line wires in all. The bottom wire shall be close to the ground.
8.2.3.2
Each line wire shall be strained tightly by means of eyebolt strainers or winders at each
straining point.
8.2.3.3
Each line wire shall be secured to each intermediate post by a wire stirrup passed
through a hole in the posts and secured to the line wire by three complete turns on each
side of the post.
8.2.3.4
The chain link fencing shall be strained between each pair of straining posts and secured
to each straining post by means of a Stretcher bar. One of the top line wires shall be
threaded through the appropriate adjacent rows of mesh, care being taken that no meshes
in the rows are bypassed by the line wire except where deviation is necessary at the
straining posts. The second top line wire shall be strained in front of the fencing. The
fencing shall be attached to the top and bottom line wire by wire ties spaced 150mm
apart and to the other line wires by wire ties spaced 450mm apart.
8.2.3.5
8.2.4
lgzrr fagrdg
tvecnre- a513913,
+1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 7 of 7
8.2.4.1
Three lines of barbed wire shall be provided as shown in drg. The wires shall be
attached by eye bolts to the cranked tops of the straining posts. On concrete intermediate
posts they shall be secured to cranked tops with stirrup wires. The barbed wire shall be
fitted with one droper at the centre of each bay, secured to the wires so that they cannot
be bunched together.
9.0
PAYMENT
9.1
Earthwork
Payment for earthwork shall be made on cubic meter basis
9.2
9.3
Reinforcement
Payment for reinforcement shall be made on MT basis including transportation of steel
to site of work, straightening, cleaning, cutting, bending to required shapes and lengths,
placing, binding with soft annealed wire as per drawings, specifications and instruction
of Engineer-in-Charge.
9.4
9.5
9.6
The payment clause(s) as described in this standard specification shall not be referred
/applicable for LSTK Jobs.
ENGINEERS
STEEL WINDOWS/VENTILATOR
INDIA LIMITED
(WITH LOUVERS)
IA Govl of India Undertaking;
STANDARD No
7-75-0031 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
R.C.C. LINTEL/
R.C.C. BEAM
CEMENT
PLASTER
WINDOW/VENTILATOR
FRAME F7D
18 GAUGE MS
SHEET LOUVERS
SASH BAR T2
WINDOW/VENTILATOR
FRAME F7D
treVA
CEMENT
PLASTER
GLASS
UL SSAS
A
SPECIFIED
BRICK
VERTICAL SECTION
WALL
VERTICAL SECTION
LOUVERED WINDOW/VENTILATOR
12.10.11
21.03.07
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
DK
.34 SD
JKB
AMARJIT
JKB/SD
Prepared
Checked
by
by
ARVIND KUMAR
Stds Committee
Convenor
WHAT KUMAR
CM (E)
D.MALHOTRA
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright L L - All rights reserved
sg-tirfaf5leg
li I
STANDARD No.
STEEL DOOR
(PRESSED STEEL)
SINGLE SHUTTER
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Page 1 of 1
R.C.C. BEAM/
R.C.C. LINTEL
12X10 GROOVE IN
PLASTER FILLED WITH
POLYSULPHIDE SEALANT
CEMENT PLASTER
11
7-75-0070 Rev. 4
B
C
SHUTTER
3 THICK MS FLAT
CONTINUOUS ALONG
VISION PANEL
18 SWG GI 'Z'
SECTION FIXED
TO FRAME
EPDM GASKET
ALL AROUND THE
GLASS
GLASS
0
II
II
II
II
0
0
I
I
I
I
SECTION 3-3
IF
II
II
II
II
II
II
III
880 TO 1180
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
20X20X3 MS ANGLE
WELDED TO BOTH
FACES OF FRAME
ELEVATION
SECTION 1 1
12X10 GROOVE IN
PLASTER FILLED WITH
POLYSULPHIDE SEALANT
BRICK WORK
0
79
10
A
tisivil 014 I
I
,.W
414
L5
'(?'
CEMENT
PLASTER
SECTION 2-2
LEGEND:
B. MS
09.04.12
21.03.07
Date
Purpose
PERIMETER OF SHUTTER.
18 SWG GI VERTICAL STIFFNER 0 200 C/C
(SPACING TO BE ADJUSTED FOR VISION PANEL).
SPRING LOADED HEAVY DUTY DOOR STOPPER.
3 THICK MS FLAT SPACER WELDED TO FRAME
AT 0 500 C/C.
40x150x3 THICK MS PAD WELDED TO FRAME
AT ALL HINGE & LOCK LOCATIONS.
N: SS 304 GRADE 19 DIA, 200 LONG HANDLE
ON BOTH SIDES.
0: 18 SWG GI MORTAR GUARD AT THE BACK OF
HINGES & LOCK.
P: 10 DIA SS 304 TOWER BOLT (250 LONG FOR
2100 HT. & 600 LONG FOR 2500 HT.).
'D' PROFILE EPDM GASKET ALONG FRAME REBATE
(FOR AIR TIGHT DOOR ONLY).
(mom
err&
AMARJIT
Prepared
by
JKS/SD
Checked
by
.111(C
16...
ARVIND KUMAR
CYK
PIA UMAR D.SAUK) TRA
V.CHATURVEDI
0
fgZIT
el
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
tafileg
272x172 ,Tf?nvil
7-75-0014 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
Nr
-.
II O
ELEVATION
(FFIXED GLAZING)
DOOR HANDLE
ALUMINIUM GLAZING CLIP
(SECTION NO.19377)-
L..,
3
SECTION 4-4
OPENABLE SHUTTER
PIVOT
6 GAP
F
k]
oom
R.C.C. LINTEL/
BEAM
CEMENT PLASTER
101.60x44.45x2 5
ALUMINIUM DOOR FRAME
(SECTION No.20102)
FiO
STANDARD No.
101.60x44.45x2.5
ALUMINIUM DOOR FRAME
(SECTION No.20102)
C)
50x44.50x2.5
ALUMINIUM SHUTTER FRAME
(SECTION No.19554)
PIVOT
ALUMINIUM BOTTOM RAIL
(SECTION NO.19584)
101.60x44.45x2.5
ALUMINIUM DOOR FRAME
(SECTION NO.20102)
50x44.50x2.5 ALUMINIUM
SHUTTER FRAME
(SECTION No.19554)
SECTION 5-5
RUBBER/EPDM GASKET
PIVOT
GLASS
47.62X44.45X2.8 ALUMINIUM
SHUTTER FRAME
(SECTION No.19502)
100x44.45x2
ALUMINIUM LOCK RAIL
(SECTION No.19564)
SECTION 2-2
SECTION 6-6
GLASS
150x44.45x3.10
ALUMINIUM BOTTOM RAIL
(SECTION No.19584)
101.60X44.45X2.5
ALUMINIUM FRAME
(SECTION NO.20057)
SECTION 1 1
SECTION 3-3
NOTES:
S ECTION 7-7
4
3
Rev.
No.
27.03.12
21.03.07
Date
Purpose
JKAFV"
AMARJIT
Prepared
by
JKB/SO
Checked
by
WHO KUMAR
ENGINEERS
0 el
51gzif laWg w INDIA LIMITED
Nr, 03,2r.,171Nom.I
iA
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR FLOOR FINISHING
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 15
TO- t
ucbiul
G-1 ct)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
FLOOR FINISHING
03.03.15
06.07.10
21.03.07
12.03.99
16.03.94
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
PKM
(Addn GM)
S CHANDA
VK
N DUARI
GB
JS
JKB
SD
JKB
ARVIND
KUMAR
V
CHATURVEDI
SD
MLB
SCJ
AS
JS
JS
AKG
AS
Prepared Checked
by
by
Standards
Committee GM (E)
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
lI
ligof fdfireg
'i7l ci el
4417R
ofoo, 7,1,7,140471
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undeftakingt
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 15
Abbreviations:
ASTM :
BS
British Standards
IS
PVC
Indian Standards
Polyvinyl Chloride
el
cZS
751
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 15
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
TILE WORK
10
9.0
10
10.0
12
11.0
PVC FINISH
13
12.0
14
13.0
15
14.0
15
al 056
Ifg
eive51,0b1.3421,111
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
1.0 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
Reference shall be made to the following Indian Standards for any further information etc. not
covered in this Specification. In case of any contlict/contradiction, provision of this
Specification shall override.
IS: 4971
IS: 1237
IS: 2571
IS: 4631
IS: 3462
IS: 5318
Code of practice for laying of flexible PVC sheet and tile flooring.
IS: 3461
IS: 1443
IS: 5491
IS: 4441
IS: 4443
IS: 1196
IS: 13753
Sub base concrete shall be provided prior to laying the specified floor finish wherever
indicated. Sub base concrete shall be provided on Ground floor slab and suspended floors
(before floor finishing) as per the drawings. The sub base concrete shall be of specified
thickness and shall be provided with zero or required slope as required. Floors in Verandahs,
Courtyards, Kitchens, Baths shall have slope ranging from 1:36 or 1:48 depending upon
locations and as indicated in drawings or as decided by the Engineer-in-charge. Floors in
water closet portions shall have slope of 1:30 or as decided by site-in-charge. On ground floor,
plinth masonry off-set shall be depressed accordingly to allow the base concrete to rest on it.
This base concrete shall normally be 1:3:6 (to achieve the required slope as described above);
however the mix shall be 1:2:4 wherever conduits, raceways, service pipes etc. are to be
embedded/ laid.
General
Cement concrete flooring shall consist of a sub-base, a base course and finishing layer of floor
finish.
2.2 Workmanship
2.2.1
Base Course
Base course shall be of cement concrete of specified mix and thickness.
The floor space on which base course is to be laid shall be cleaned, washed and divided into
square/ rectangular or as per designed panels to prevent cracks in the floor finish. No
dimension of the panels shall exceed 2 meters and the area of a panel shall not be more than 2
square meters. Base course shall be laid on alternate panels. The borders of the panels shall
0 el
Igaf fai5itg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
have mitred joints at the corners of the room and intermediate joints shall be in straight line
with panel joints.
The panels shall be bound by glass/PVC/stainless steel strips etc. as specified. These shall be
fixed in position with their top at proper level, giving slope wherever required.
The flooring shall butt against masonry of wall which shall not be plastered. When the base
course is to be laid on hardened base, the sub-base shall be roughened by steel wire brushing
and cleaned. Before laying the base course, neat and thick cement slurry @ 2 kg of cement per
square meter of area shall be brushed into the prepared sub base surface.
Cement concrete shall be placed in position and beaten with wooden plank and finished
smooth. Beating shall cease as soon as surface is found covered with cream of mortar.
Necessary slope shall be provided. The cement concrete mix shall be used within 30 minutes
of its preparation.
2.2.2
Floor Finishing
Finishing of the surface shall follow immediately after the completion of base course. The
base course shall be free of excessive moisture before starting the floor finishing. Use of dry
cement, cement sand mixture sprinkled on the surface to stiffen the concrete or absorb
excessive moisture shall not be permitted.
While the concrete is still green, cement @ 2 kg per square meter of floor area shall be mixed
with water to form thick slurry and spread over the surface. The cement slurry shall then be
properly processed and finished smooth without any trowel mark.
The junction of floor with wall plaster, cladding, skirting shall be rounded off uniformly upto
a radius of 25mm unless otherwise mentioned.
2.2.3
Curing
Each finished portion of floor, on completion shall be kept wet with ponding for a minimum
period of 10 days.
General
Cement concrete granolithic flooring shall consist of a sub-base, a base course and finishing
layer of floor finish.
3.2 Workmanship
Workmanship shall in general conform to IS: 5491.
3.2.1
71210
ligaf id15ift
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
,A Go, of
Undeft.ngl
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 6 of 15
and cleaned. Before laying the base course, neat and thick cement slurry @ 2 kg of cement per
square meter of area shall be brushed into the prepared sub base surface.
Cement concrete shall be placed in position and beaten with wooden plank and finished
smooth. Beating shall cease as soon as surface is found covered with cream of mortar.
Necessary slope shall be provided. The cement concrete mix shall be used within 30 minutes
of its preparation.
3.2.2
Floor Finishing
Finishing of the surface shall follow immediately after the completion of base course. The
base course shall be free of excessive moisture before starting the floor finishing. Use of dry
cement, cement sand mixture sprinkled on the surface to stiffen the concrete or absorb
excessive moisture shall not be permitted.
While the concrete is still green, cement 4. 2 kg per square meter of floor area shall be mixed
with water to form thick slurry and spread over the surface. The cement slurry shall then be
properly processed and finished smooth without any trowel mark.
The junction of floor with wall plaster, cladding, skirting shall be rounded off uniformly upto
a radius of 25mm unless otherwise mentioned.
3.2.3
3.2.4
Curing
Each finished portion of floor, on completion shall be kept wet with ponding for a minimum
period of 10 days.
General
Heavy duty Flooring shall consist of a sub-base, a base course and a finishing layer of floor
finish.
4.2 Workmanship
4.2.1
Base Course
Base course shall consist of one layer of cement concrete of specified mix and thickness laid
on sub-base in panels in accordance with clause no. 2.2.1.
4.2.2
Floor Finish
Finishing layer shall be of cement, hardener and stone aggregate mix of specified thickness
laid over the base course. Unless otherwise mentioned, one part of approved quality hardener
and four parts of cement by weight shall be mixed dry. This dry mixture shall be mixed with
stone aggregate 6mm nominal size or as otherwise specified in the ratio of I hardener and
cement mixture: 2 stone aggregate by volume. Just enough water shall then be added to the
mix.
The mixture so obtained shall then be laid on the base course within 2 to 4 hours of latter's
laying. It shall be firmly pressed into bottom concrete so as to have a good bond with it. After
the starting of initial setting, the surface shall be finished smooth and true with steel floats
without any float mark.
ll~iri~
IfgaT
Riieg
iNtZrl
AledAV,A.3ALTI I
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 7 of 15
The junction of floor with wall plaster, cladding, skirting shall be rounded off uniformly upto
a radius of 25mm unless otherwise mentioned.
4.2.4
Curing
Each finished portion of floor, on completion shall be kept wet with ponding for a minimum
period of 10 days.
Materials
5.1.1
5.1.2
Pigments
Pigments to be admixed with mortar or for grouting the joints shall conform to Table -1 of IS:
2114.
5.1.3
Cement Mortar
Cement mortar shall be of specified mix and thickness.
5.2 Workmanship
Workmanship shall in general conform to IS: 1443. The base on which tiles are to be laid shall
be cleaned of all dust, dirt and properly wetted by applying neat and thick cement slurry @ 2
kg of cement per square meter of area without allowing water pools. Cement mortar of
specified thickness shall then be spread over the base for two rows of tiles and 3-5 metres in
length. The mortar shall be laid in slope as per requirements and thickness of mortar shall not
be less than 10mm at any place. The top of the mortar shall be kept rough so that cement
slurry can be absorbed. Laying shall be from centre & proceed outwards in two directions at
900. Cut tiles of uniform sizes shall be laid along periphery, if necessary. Neat cement slurry
of honey like consistency @ 4.4 kg of cement per Square meter shall be spread over the
mortar bed for laying 20 tiles at a time. The tiles shall then be fixed in this grout one after the
other, each tile being gently tapped and properly bedded in line and level. The Joints shall not
exceed 1.5mm in width. After the day's work, the excess cement slurry on top and the joints
shall be cleaned with broom stick and washed before the slurry sets hard. Next day, the joints
shall be filled with the cement grout to match the shade of the tile.
Tiles along the periphery shall be continued under the wall plaster, skirting or dado.
For skirting/dado/risers on the brick masonry wall, the joints shall be raked out to a depth of at
least 15mm while the masonry is being laid. In case of concrete work, the surface shall be
hauled and roughened with wire brushes. The wall surface shall be uniformly and evenly
covered with backing of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand by volume) of specified
thickness. Before hardening of the cushioning mortar, back of each tile shall be covered with
a neat layer of cement slurry @ 4.4 kg of cement per square meter and edges with white
cement with or without pigment to match the shade of tiles and the tiles then shall be pressed
on the backing and tapped.
The tiles shall be corrected to proper planes with joints truly vertical in required pattern and
butt jointed. The fixing shall be done from bottom upward. The top of skirting and dado shall
be truly horizontal.
5.3
k5111a
- eAt
if
1ga 16Vieg
I.TR MTMI, JUM-Si
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 8 of 15
cement mixed with pigment to match the shade of the tiles. The same cement slurry then shall
be applied to the entire surface of the tiles in a thin coat to protect the surface from abrasive
damage and fill the pin holes that may exist on the surface.
The flooring shall be cured for 7 days by keeping it wet with ponding.
Grinding shall be commenced after a minimum period of 7 days when the tiles and the joints
are properly set. Grinding shall be done by machines. First grinding shall be done with
carborundum stones of 60 grade grit fitted in the machine. Water shall be profusely used
during grinding. When the chips show up and the floor has been uniformly rubbed, it shall be
cleaned with water baring all pin holes. It shall then be covered with a thin coat of grey/white
cement mixed with pigments to match with colour of the flooring. This grout shall be kept
moist for a week. Thereafter the second grinding shall be done with carborundum stone of 120
grit. Final grinding shall be done the day after the second grinding with carborundum stone of
320 grit using water in abundance. The floor shall be washed clean with water, oxalic acid
powder shall then be dusted at 33 gms/sq. m. on the surface rubbed with machine fitted
hessian bobs or rubbed hard with woolen rags. The floor shall then be washed clean and dried
with a soft cloth or linen. If any tile is disturbed or damaged, it shall be refitted or replaced
and properly jointed and polished.
6.0 CEMENT PLASTER SKIRTING
6.1
Material
Materials
7.1.1
Terrazzo Tiles
Terrazzo tiles shall be of specified thickness, texture and shade and shall generally conform in
all respects to IS: 1237. The tiles shall be factory made with 10mm down size stone
aggregates, white & ordinary cement mix (1 white cement : 6 ordinary cement by volume) and
pigments conforming to IS: 2114. Tablel.
7.1.2
Pigments
Pigments to be mixed with mortar or for grouting the joints shall conform to Table -1 of IS:
2114.
7.1.3
Cement Mortar
01
Ogar tif5leg
kritrOgt7 ,REPIRI
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt et ndo Undertaking)
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 9 of 15
specified thickness shall then be spread over the base for two rows of tiles and 3-5 metres in
length. The mortar shall be laid in slope as per requirements and thickness of mortar shall not
be less than 10mm at any place. The top of the mortar shall be kept rough so that cement
slurry can be absorbed. Laying shall be from centre & proceed outwards in two directions at
90. Cut tiles of uniform sizes shall be laid along periphery, if necessary. Neat cement slurry
of honey like consistency @ 4.4 kg of cement per Square meter shall be spread over the
mortar bed for laying required number of tiles at a time. The tiles shall then be fixed in this
grout one after the other, each tile being gently tapped and properly bedded in line and level.
The Joints shall not exceed 1.5mm in width. After the day's work, the excess cement slurry on
top and the joints shall be cleaned and washed before the slurry sets hard. Next day, the joints
shall be filled with the cement grout to match the shade of the tile.
Tiles along the periphery shall be continued under the wall plaster, skirting or dado.
For skirting/dado/risers on the brick masonry wall, the joints shall be raked out to a depth of at
least 12mm while the masonry is being laid. In case of concrete work, the surface shall be
hauled and roughened with wire brushes. The wall surface shall be uniformly and evenly
covered with backing of cement mortar 1:3 (I cement: 3 coarse sand by volume) of specified
thickness. Before hardening of the cushioning mortar, back of each tile shall be covered with
a neat layer of cement slurry @ 4.4 kg of cement per Square meter and edges with white
cement with or without pigment to match the shade of tiles and the tiles then shall be pressed
on the backing and tapped.
For vertical surfaces, the tiles shall be corrected to proper planes with joints truly vertical in
required pattern and butt jointed. The fixing shall be done from bottom upward. The top of
skirting and dado shall be truly horizontal.
7.3
ENGINEERS
r ICIWs
INDIA LIMITED
,1771471.751,1lIMN
(A
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 10 of 15
Materials
8.1.1
Tiles
A.
Ceramic Tiles
Ceramic tiles shall be of specified size, thickness and approved colour/ design/
texture, of first quality and shall conform to IS 13753.
B.
Vitrified Tiles
Vitrified tiles shall be of specified size, thickness and approved colour/ design/
texture, of first quality and shall conform to EN 176.
8.1.2
Pigments
Pigments to be admixed with mortar or for grouting the joints shall conform to Table -1 of IS:
2114.
8.2 Workmanship
The tiles shall be laid over a coating of specified adhesive (as per approved manufacturer's
specifications) laid on base floor/wall plaster. The joints of the tiles shall be cleaned off and
all dust and loose mortar removed. The joints then shall be flush pointed with cement paste
(white cement and pigment conforming to IS: 2114, Table-I) or any other joint fixing
compound as recommended by Tile Manufacturer matching the shade of tiles.
Tiles shall be laid as per desired pattern. Joints shall be uniform kept as thin as possible and in
straight lines. Cut tiles shall be permitted only in unavoidable cases as directed by EngineerIn- Charge.
The base on which tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned of all dust, dirt and properly wetted by
applying neat and thick cement slurry @ 3 kg of cement per Square meter of area.
For flooring, laying shall be generally from centre & proceed outwards in two directions at
90
For vertical surfaces, the tiles shall be corrected to proper planes with joints truly vertical in
required pattern and butt jointed. The fixing shall be done from bottom upward. The top of
skirting and dado shall be truly horizontal.
9.0 KOTA STONE
9.1
FINISH
Materials
The Kota Stone slabs shall be of selected quality and shade, hard, sound, dense, homogenous
in texture, free from cracks, decay, weathering and flakes. These shall be machine cut to the
requisite size and thickness and chisel dressed.
The slabs shall have the top (exposed) face polished before being brought to site. Before
starting the work, the contractor shall get the samples of slabs approved by Engineer-incharge.
9.2 Workmanship
9.2.1
Dressing of Slabs
Each slab shall be machine cut and rubbed to the required size and shape and fine chisel
dressed at all edges to full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be
in full contact with it. All angles and edges of the slabs shall be true, square and free from
chippings giving a plane and smooth surface.
0 el
Ogar fafreg
1.7T
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
751,0571
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 11 of 15
9.2.2
Preparation of Surface
Cement mortar of specified thickness and mix shall be laid over the base after making it
rough, cleaning & wetting thoroughly and applying neat and thick cement slurry @ 2 kg of
cement per square meter of area to receive the mortar. The mortar shall be laid for fixing one
slab at a time.
In case of skirting/ dado/ risers, the joints shall be raked out to a depth of at least 12mm in
masonry walls. In case of concrete surface, the surface shall be hacked and roughened with
wire brushes. The surface shall be cleaned thoroughly, washed with water and kept wet before
laying kota stone.
9.2.3
Laying
The slab shall be washed clean before laying.
A. Laying in floor
It shall be laid over cement mortar bedding, pressed, and tapped gently to bring it in level. It
shall be then lifted and laid aside. Top surface of the mortar then shall be corrected by adding
fresh mortar at hollows and depressions. The mortar then shall be allowed to harden and
cement slurry of honey like consistency @ 4.4.kg of cement per square meter shall be spread
over the mortar. The edges of the slabs shall be buttered with white cement with pigment
grout to match the shade of the slabs. The slabs shall then be gently placed in position and
tapped with wooden mallets till it is properly bedded in level. The joints shall be as fine as
possible. Surplus cement on the surface of the slab shall be removed. The slabs in flooring
shall continue under the plaster/skirting. The finished surface shall be true to levels and slopes
as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The slabs shall be laid in patterns as per drawings and size. Cut size may be used along
periphery as required. The joints shall be uniform and in perfect line.
B. Laying in skirting/ dado/ risers
The slabs shall be held in position by suitable temporary measure such as wooden/ bamboo
supports, temporary hook etc. as approved by Engineer-In- Charge. The outer face of the slabs
shall be checked for plane and plumb and corrected. The joints shall be as fine as possible and
shall be filled with neat cement paste/ grout with white cement and pigment to match the
colour of the slabs. The joints shall thus be left to harden and then the rear gap between the
slabs and backing surface shall be packed with cement mortar of specified mix and thickness.
Temporary supports shall be removed after the mortar filling in the gap has acquired sufficient
strength. The top line of the skirting/ dado/ risers shall be truly horizontal and joints truly
vertical.
Joints in treads and platforms shall be permitted only at curvature or when width/ length is
more than 0.6/ 2 metres respectively. Number of joints in each direction shall not be more than
one number for every 2 metres length beyond the initial 2 meter length.
9.3
M ENGINEERS
ig-ZifiaWeg ',II,INDIA LIMITED
q_.1
,i27S317
NA.,
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 12 of 15
Requirement
Method of test
Moisture absorption
After 24 hours
Immersion in cold water
Maximum 0.4%
by weight
IS: 1124
10.1.2 Pigments
Pigments to be admixed with mortar or for grouting the joints shall conform to Table -1 of IS:
2114.
10.2 Workmanship
10.2.1 Preparation of Surface
Preparation of surface shall be done in accordance with clause no. 9.2.2.
10.2.2 Laying
The slab shall be washed clean before laying. Due care shall be taken to match the grains of
slabs which shall be selected judiciously having uniform pattern of veins/ streaks or as
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
A. Laying in floor
It shall be laid over cement mortar bedding, pressed, and tapped gently to bring it in level. It
shall be then lifted and laid aside. Top surface of the mortar then shall be corrected by adding
fresh mortar at hollows and depressions. The mortar then shall be allowed to harden and
cement slurry of honey like consistency @ 4.4.kg of cement per square meter shall be spread
over the mortar. The edges of the slabs shall be buttered with white cement with or without
pigment grout to match the shade of the slabs. The slabs shall then be gently placed in position
and tapped with wooden mallets till it is properly bedded in level. The joints shall be as fine as
possible. Surplus cement on the surface of the slab shall be removed. The slabs in flooring
shall continue for not less than 10 mm under the plaster/skirting. The finished surface shall be
true to levels and slopes as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The slabs shall be laid in patterns as per drawings and size. Cut size may be used along
periphery as directed by Engineer-In-Charge. The joints shall be uniform and in perfect line.
B. Laying in skirting/ dado/ risers
The slabs shall be held in position by suitable temporary measure such as wooden/ bamboo
supports, temporary hook etc. as approved by Engineer-In- Charge. The outer face of the slabs
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
.5ilfaeJerf
fat s
NWil
ATI. MT.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Go, of ntha Undeffak,^9/
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 13 of 15
shall be checked for plane and plumb and corrected. The joints shall be as fine as possible and
shall be filled with neat cement paste/ grout with white cement and pigment to match the
colour of the slabs. The joints shall thus be left to harden and then the rear gap between the
slabs and backing surface shall be packed with cement mortar of specified mix and thickness.
Temporary supports shall be removed after the mortar filling in the gap has acquired sufficient
strength. The top line of the skirting/ dado/ risers shall be truly horizontal and joints truly
vertical.
10.3 Curing
The finished surface shall be cured for a minimum period of 7 days.
10.4
Material
Adhesive
Adhesive shall be neoprene based rubber adhesive of approved make as recommended by
PVC Manufacture.
11.2 Workmanship
The sub floor on which PVC finish is to be laid shall be prepared in accordance with PVC
Manufacturer's recommendation. The sub floor shall be made permanently smooth, firm, free
of cracks and dry. If required, suitable leveling compound of minimum 3 mm thickness shall
be applied over sub floor.
P.V.C. rolls/tiles shall be brought to the temperature of the area in which it is to be laid and
stacked suitably near the site in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
oaf 054-"eg
.Hr.,
711
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 14 of 15
Property
Values
Norms
Water Absorptions
0.5%
ASTM C 373
Scratch Resistance
>6
ASTM C 373
Chemical Resistance
Unaffected
ASTM C 650
Abrasion Resistance
>100
ASTM C 501
Breaking strength
400 kg/sq.cm
ASTM C 648
Density
12.2 Workmanship
Base and background surface over which the tiles are to be laid shall be prepared as per IS:
4443.
falgrarg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of ntl. Unne/takg)
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 15 of 15
Tiles shall be fixed on the prepared surface over a bitumen priming layer, bitumen mastic
layer and resin type chemical resistant mortar in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation. The bitumen shall conform to IS: 702 and laying of bitumen mastic shall
conform to IS: 1196.
Joints shall be allowed to set for 24 hours. The floor shall then be washed as per
manufacturer's specifications to totally remove all marks from tile surface.
13.0
13.1 Material
The epoxy floor and wall coating system shall generally consist of the following basic
components of composition and thickness as mentioned in the item descriptions:
13.1.1 Primer Coat
Primer coat shall be suitable for base surface and compatible with successive layers/ coating
over it for specified applications in accordance with the approved manufacturer's
recommendations.
13.1.2 Screed/ Underlayer
The screed/ underlayer (for flooring) shall consist of combination of fillers and hardeners and
shall be suitable and compatible for application of top/ finishing coat over it for specified
application in accordance with the approved manufacturer's recommendations.
13.1.3 Top/ Finishing Coat
Top/ finishing coat shall be applied over screed/ underlayer in case of flooring. For walls/
vertical surfaces, top/ finishing coat shall be applied over primer coat as recommended by
approved manufacturer. Top/ finishing coat shall be suitable for specified application.
13.2 Workmanship
Workmanship shall be in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.
14.0 MEASUREMENT AND RATE
Measurement and rate for flooring for item rate tenders shall be in Square meter in general
unless otherwise mentioned.
Length and breadth shall be measured before laying skirting, dado or wall plaster. No
deduction shall be made nor extra paid for voids not exceeding 0.20 sqm. Deductions for ends
of dissimilar materials or other articles embedded shall not be made for areas not exceeding
0.10 sqm.
The flooring done either with strips (in one operation) or without strips (in alternate panels)
shall be treated as same and measured together.
Itifazie? ie ENGINEERS
ai kV:tagNW INDIA LIMITED
wen train aw.sepai(
(A Govt Of
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR ROOF TREATMENT
moa undertaking)
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 9
0 3 t-1 -c1 I
imict) fdft4mi
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
ROOF TREATMENT
15.05.12
21.03.07
10.03.99
16.03.94
27.09.91
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
c\
61
SM
SD
JKB
ARVIND
KUMAR
V
CHATURVEDI
SD
MLB
SCJ
AS
JS
JS
AKG
AS
SD
SD
AKG
RNS
Prepared Checked
by
by
JK/11%)kiCt
) .,,--1
MIN
D MALHOTRA
Standards
Standards
Committee GM(E)
Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
laraag e ENGINEERS
1;4111 IEVeg lei INDIA LIMITED
Goat mind. undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION No
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
ASTM :
BS
:
IS
Oyez
agizie?te ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0 POLYURETHANE (PU) WATERPROOF COATING (TWO COMPONENTS)
5.0 GUARANTEE
lairaTAtft
ENGINEERS
Imien elemr7a.nrRI)
IA Gen d
unaeriakm
ROOF TREATMENT
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Page 4 of 9
1.0
1.1
Material
PU waterproof coating shall consist of 2 pack clear/pigmented Aliphatic Polyurethane as per
ASTM C836-95 using Polyether Polyols (Polyester or Castor oil based Polyols are not
acceptable with Iso-cynorate for rendering flame resistant characteristic. The 2 pack system
consisting of pigment and the solvent (Xylene/ Toulene, no filter) shall be mixed in definite
ratio by weight strictly as per approved Manufacturers specification for preparing the coating
for application. The coating shall have physical features like high resistance to impact,
abrasion and cracking, superior tensile strength (8 Kg/Sq. CM after 4 weeks at ambient
temperature) and perfectly smooth, dust free glossy finish retained at least up to 3 years. It
should also be resistant to acid, alkalies and have a very low water absorption rate (0.5 %
maximum at ambient temperature after 7 days).
The packs shall not be older than 9 months after the date of manufacture and packing.
1.2
Workmanship
1.2.1
Preparation of Surface
The roof surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with a wire brush and all foreign matter etc. shall
be removed. Well defined cracks on the surface shall be cut to "V" section, cleaned and filled
up with a paste of 2 component Polyurethane based crack filling compound and white cement
in a ratio of 1:2. The finished surface shall be perfectly dry and any dampness should be
allowed to evaporate. Potholes/depressions shall be filled up after removing weak cement
concrete/ cement plaster etc. with PCC(1 cement :1.2 coarse sand :3.5 stone aggregate of 6mm
& down size by volume,) laid over a coat of neat cement slurry @2.75 Kg of cement per Sq.M
of area, wherever required thus preparing smooth and properly sloped surface. Slope and
leveling of the existing surface shall be checked and if necessary, adequate slope shall be
provided by laying PCC laid over neat cement slurry as above for effective roof drainage.
Leak-prone areas shall also be identified and rectified by raking out existing water proofing
and filling up with PCC as directed by Engineer-In-Charge. The surface thus shall be prepared
smooth for receiving the waterproof treatment over it.
1.2.2
Primer Coat
It shall consist of 2 packs of Polyurethane. Primer coat shall be mixed in the ratio as per
Manufacturer's specification. A single coat of this primer shall be applied by brush over the
prepared bed as an adhesion coat.
The primer shall be allowed to dry for a minimum of 8 hours time before the successive
finishing coats of PU are applied.
1.2.3
Finishing Coat
The finishing coats shall consist of three successive pigmented sealing coats each of 2 packs
of Polyurethane mixed in the ratio as per Manufacturer's specification. Application shall be
with brush to a smooth and even finish. The overall dry film thickness shall be 1.5mm
0.1mm as per ASTM C898 in multiple coats or minimum covering capacity shall be 160 Gms/
Sq.M per coat.
Each coat shall be allowed to dry for minimum 12 hours before applying next coat. Care shall
be taken for quick application after mixing the 2 pack primer in view of short pot life of the
aande ENGINEERS
Sig:ar laWleg /liW INDIA LIMITED
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Pa e 5 of 9
mix and shall be full y consumed within the stipulated period as per Manufacturer's
specification (maximum 60 minutes at 30 deg C)
The PU coating shall be continued up the parapets/walls for a minimum of 150mm over the
finished roof surface. It shall be continued into rain water pipes by at least 100mm.
1.3
Protective Layer
The final coat of PU, when tacky, shall be sprinkled with 300 micron layer of clean sand. Over
this, plain cement concrete (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate of 6mm & down size
by volume) of 50mm minimum thickness mixed with cement based polymer modified
waterproofing compound shall be provided. The PCC layer shall be laid in panels of max.
1200 mm X 1200 mm size and shall be reinforced with 24 SWG chicken wire mesh (20mm x
20mm) as per IS 1556. Proper shuttering, tamping, curing etc shall be done. The top surface
shall be finished smooth in slope. Dummy square joints @ 300mm x 300mm shall be marked
on the top surface by pressing rope over finished surface. The joints between panels shall be
raked out neatly (after stipulated curing period) to a minimum 6mm X 6mm V groove and
filled up with an approved quality elastomeric compound sealant. Drain outlet shall be
provided for all spouts/rain water pipes by suitable rounding, filling and sloping and by
providing minimum 450 mm x 450mm khurras (rain water collecting pit, leveled down by
minimum 25mm from adjacent areas) in cement concrete (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone
aggregate of 6mm & down size by volume) at all drainage outlets.At the junction of the roof
and parapet or any other vertical surfaces, a fillet of 75mm radius shall be formed in cement
concrete (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate of 6mm & down size by volume).
2.0
2.1
Material:
The material shall consist of a single component, high solid content minimum 80%, highly
viscous liquid containing urethane polymers conforming to ASTM C 836. This single
component coating shall cure by reaction with atmospheric moisture to give a continuous film
in Aluminium/ silver colour which is rubbery and elastic. The cured coating shall have
physical features like high resistance to impact, abrasion and cracking, superior tensile
strength minimum 8Kg/ Sq. Centimeter after 4 weeks of drying and high resistance to ultra
violet rays.
The pack shall not be older than 9 months after the date of manufacture and packing. The
liquid shall not be diluted with water or any other solvent.
2.2
Workmanship
2.2.1
Preparation of surface
Preparation of surface shall be as described in Clause 1.2.1.
222
Primer coat
Urethane primer shall be applied on the perfectly dry prepared bed with a brush in a single
coat at coverage of 6-8 Sq M per litre.
The primer shall be allowed to dry for a minimum of 2 hours before applying the successive
finishing coats. If the drying time exceeds 48 hours, re-priming shall be done.
2.2.3
Finishing coats
la1151-ae?
ENGINEERS
umiTED
I N DIA
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Pa e 6 of 9
The first finishing coat of single component urethane shall be applied over the primer with
brush to a smooth and even finish. The overall dry film thickness shall be 0.5mm or minimum
coverage shall be 0.5 kg per Sq.M per coat.
The second and third coats shall be applied within 24 hours of application of the previous coat
when the previous coat is tacky at coverage of 0.5 Kg per Sq M to give a total dry film
thickness of 1.5 mm 0.1 mm as per ASTM 898.
Care shall be taken for quick application and the pack shall be consumed within the stipulated
period as per manufacturer's specification. Any skin formed on top of the opened pack shall
be removed before using the contents.
The water proof coating shall be continued up the parapet/ walls for a minimum of 150mm
over the finished roof surface. It shall be continued into rain water pipes by at least 100mm.
2.3
Protective Layer
Protective layer shall be provided as described in Clause 1.3.
3.0
3.1
Material
Bituminous membrane for waterproofing shall be 4mm thick prefabricated polymer (APPatactic polypropylene) modified and shall be reinforced with nonwoven Polyester and shall
have following properties. Test methods of all these properties shall be as per relevant ASTM
codes.
Thickness
Penetration at 25deg. C, 100g, 5 seconds
Softening point
Low Temp. Flexibility
Tensile strength
Longitudinal
Transverse
Elongation
Longitudinal
Transverse
Nail tearing resistance
Longitudinal
Transverse
Water absorption
3.2
Workmanship
3.2.1
Preparation of surface
4mm
25+_Smm
110 to 150 deg C
-2 deg C to -5 deg C
> 500N/ 5cm
> 500N/ 5cm
> 40%
> 40%
>= 130N
>= 130N
0.2% max.
Primer coat
One coat of bituminous solvent based primer of approved quality and conforming to IS: 3384
shall be cold applied @ 0.2-0.4 litre/Sq M over the entire area to be waterproofed including
vertical surfaces. The primer shall be allowed to be dry for minimum 24 hours.
15itaget ENGINEERS
12.3
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Page 7 of 9
3.3
Protective layer
Protective layer shall be provided as described in Clause 1.3. The plain cement concrete layer
shall be provided directly over membrane without sprinkling of clean sand.
4.0
4.1
Material
The EPDM membrane for waterproofing shall be a single-ply synthetic rubber membrane
made of Ethylene Propylene Diene Terpolymer mixed with carbon, oil, curing agents and
processing acids, calendared into large sheets and vulcanized. The membrane shall be 1.5mm
thick and shall have the following properties.
The EPDM standard membrane shall be a 100% cured unreinforced EPDM roofing membrane
made of a synthetic rubber Ethylene, Propylene, Diene Terpolymer. The sheet shall be made
of two plies of standard compound and shall be factory-assembled into large, fully vulcanized
seamless membranes. The membrane can be supplied in the following dimensions:
Specific weight
Length
Width
1170 kg/m3;
15.25 m; 30.5 m; 45.75 m; 61.00 m;
2.28 m; 3.05 m; 5.08 m; 6.10 m;
7.62 m; 9.15 m; 12.20 m; 15.25 m
Dimension of the membrane will be chosen in view of the dimensions, complexity of the roof,
the application method chosen and the experience of the installer.
The membrane complies with the following characteristics when tested in accordance with EN
13956 & ASTM D-4637 (Type I)
Tensile strength (both directions)
Elongation at break
Tear Resistance
Static loading
Dynamic indentation
Cold fold ability
Resistance to static loading
(EPS & concrete)
Resistance to impact EPS
Resistance to impact concrete
Joint peel resistance
Joint shear resistance
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
>= 8 N/mm2
>= 300%
>= 40 N
>= 25 kg (on soft and hard support)
>= 300 mm (hard support)
>= 2000 mm (soft support)
<= -45C
25 Kg
> 15 mm
> 10 mm
> 25 N/50mm
> 200 N/50mm
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Sara-LAM ENGINEERS
11
INDIALIMITED
4.2
Workmanship
4.2.1
Preparation of surface
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Page 8 of 9
ISORZIETOENGINEERS
laWg INDIA LIMITED
(0W elierrimasal
4.3
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Page 9 of 9
Protective layer
Protective layer shall be provided as described in Clause 1.3. The plain cement concrete layer
shall be provided directly over membrane without sprinkling of clean sand.
5.0
GUARANTEE
A Guarantee of minimum 10 years shall be provided against the performance of the finished
waterproofing system.
6.0
Igar
0563
,,an./
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7-75-0060 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
(FIXING DETAIL)
CISTERN
MS BRACKET
BIB COCK
FLUSH PIPE
FINISHED FLOOR
LEVEL
ORISSA PAN WC
FLOOR FINISH
SUNK BY
MINIMUM 10MM
=me,.
FILLED UP/SUNK
PORTION
//WWWWW,,,,WW,W.
4777/47..
SECTION A-A
BIB COCK w
0
--,,
SLOPE\
5717 a a
svO
10MM DROP
IN FLOOR
I.
0
ORISSA PA9-..b
W
CISTERN
,A
1200 MINIMUM
STOP COCK
PLAN
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM
4
3
Rev.
No.
FnrmAt Nn
Purpose
Drit
mow
Prepared
by
Clk Or/
0715111:
SD/JKB
Checked
by
JI(Ca
VINAY KUMAR
ARVIND KUMAR
Stds. Committee
Convenor
2ettfik
OMALHOTRA
V.CHATURVEDI
GM (E)
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
PENETRATING CORROSION
INHIBITING ADMIXTURE
IStatzeie ENGINEERS
10-ar Were INDIA LIMITED
INIMPIRPR =MOW
1:
ITTW
furre ;r4
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 1 of 14
kill
tioifficiich wrzi
Purpose
AJS
PKM
Prepared Checked
by
by
Cavvk
SC
VK
DM
Standards
Committee
Convenor
GM(E)
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Offitaelda EnoNEERs
IA Gcnet al MY
unertanto
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
PENETRATING CORROSION
INHIBITING ADMIXTURE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 2 of 14
ABBREVIATIONS:
AASHTO
ASTM
CPCIA
IS
Indian Standard
JIS
OPC
PPC
PSC
SRC
Mr. S. Chaturvedi
Members :
Mr. PK Mittal
Mr. S. Debnath
Mr. Rajan Srivastav
Mr. PJ Singh
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. MP Jain (Projects)
Mr. Ravindra Kumar (Construction)
inmaxeivelJelmil
IA Gat of So Limning)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
PENETRATING CORROSION
INHIBITING ADMIXTURE
648-0017 Rev.O
Page 3 of 14
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCES
3.0
SAMPLING
4.0
TESTING REQUIREMENTS
5.0
6.0
PACKAGING
11
12
13
149AITS
L MITED
113\1
Sil%
Ei
al India undertaking)
1A Gal
1.0
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
PENETRATING CORROSION
INHIBITING ADMIXTURE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 4 of 14
SCOPE
This specification prescribes the requirements and test methods including performance test for
evaluating the efficiency of Bipolar Concrete Penetrating Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture
(CPCIA) for protecting steel reinforcement embedded in concrete from corrosion. Nonconcrete penetrating, Nitrite & Nitrate corrosion inhibitors are excluded from the scope.
2.0
REFERENCES
2.1
Codes
ASTM-G1, ASTM-G3, ASTM-G109, ASTM-C1202, JIS-Z-1535, AASHTO T259, IS:2,
IS:101(Partl/Sec.5), IS:456, IS:1202, IS:1448, IS:1786, IS:9103, etc.
2.2
EIL Specifications
General Scope
Materials
6-68-0001 :
6-68-0002 :
3.0
SAMPLING
3.1
The representative samples of the material shall be drawn as per the table given below:
No. of containers (Lot)
Up to 50
51-100
101-300
301-500
501& Above
5
Plus 1 for every lot of 300 containers
4.0
TESTING REQUIREMENTS
4.1
The product shall comply with the requirements specified in Annexure-A (Short Term Tests)
and Annexure-B (Long Term Tests). Both the tests shall be conducted in an approved
laboratory.
4.2
Unless specified otherwise, all the tests under Indian tropical conditions shall be conducted at
room temperature 27 2C and relative humidity at 65 5 % in a well ventilated chamber
free from dust.
4.3
The contractor shall submit the Manufacturer Test certificate to the Engineer-in-Charge.
Approval for usage of product may be given after satisfactory Short Term test results as Long
Term test results would require a considerable time. However, the product shall also satisfy
the requirements of Long Term Tests. Recommendations from reputed organizations about the
product shall be an added advantage.
laitzmiakENarNaRs
UMETED
Ifgar
ElPitg var WA
loan !MR elJn
IA Govt S Wei Venting)
5.0
5.1
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
PENETRATING CORROSION
INHIBITING ADMIXTURE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 5 of 14
The CPCIA shall not cause harm to applicators by mean of inhalation or skin contact. All
precautionary measures shall be prescribed by the manufacturers along with instructions of
usage Application methodology shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
5.2
The waste shall be discharged in accordance with applicable Environmental laws of land.
5.3
CPCIA shall not degrade or damage the construction materials like concrete, aggregates, steel
reinforcement, formwork/shuttering.
6.0
PACKAGING
The product shall be supplied in air tight containers and following information shall be labeled
on each container:
Name of the material
Name of the manufacturer
Volume / weight of material
Specification number
e) Batch No. or Lot No. in bar code or otherwise
0 Month and year of manufacture
Ingredients & method of usage
Instructions for safe usage
1511WIzeak
_ ENGINEERS
sigar egie INDIA UMITED
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
PENETRATING CORROSION
INHIBITING ADMIXTURE
6-68-0017 Rev.)
Page 6 of 14
ANNEXURE-A
Characteristics
Requirements
Methods of Tests
Appearance
Visually
Odour
By smell
Skin irritation
No irritation
By applying on reverse of
the palm for 5 minutes.
Ph
As in supplied condition
1% dilution ,w/w
7.
pH meter /
Standard pH paper
9.0-11.0
9.0-11.0
Specific Gravity at 27 2C
1.04 - 1.06
IS 1448
10 - 20 sec.
IS: 101(Pt.1/Sec.5)
Modified accelerated
corrosion test based
on Japanese standard
JIS Z 1535
(Refer Appendix-I)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
PENETRATING CORROSION
INHIBITING ADMIXTURE
PR-atilt ENGINEERS
sig-ar
t latiegi lar INDIA UMITED
IA Gent a( Wd
1ftdeno.9)
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 7 of 14
ANNEXURE-B
LONG TERM TESTS
(Shall be performed in triplicate)
S.
No .
Characteristics
Requirements
Without CPCIA
With 1% CPCIA
45 mpy, max.
9 mpy, max.
25 Coulombs,
max.
0.50 Coulombs,
max.
0.025%, max.
Nil
profile
Chloride
Migration
properties of concrete (for all
types of cements viz. OPC, PPC,
PSC, SRC)
Chloride % in concrete at
30mm depth after 90 days.
Methods of Tests
Immersion Test
(Rebar weight loss test)
as per ASTM GI
(Refer Appendix-II)
Test for effect on
compressive strength
by addition of CPCIA
as per IS 9103
(Refer Appendix-III)
Electrochemical
polarization test
conducted on steel
rebars embedded in
concrete as per
ASTM-G 3 & IS 9103
(Refer Appendix-IV)
Chloride ion
penetration
(Salt ponding test)
as per IS:456
1650 Coulombs,
max.
1000 Coulombs,
max.
1550 Coulombs,
max.
1000 Coulombs,
max.
Electrical indication
of concrete ability to
resist Chloride Ion
Penetration (Rapid
Chloride Permeability
test) as per
ASTM C1202
Notes:
CPCIA* : The CPCIA shall be used as 1% w/w of cement or as recommended by the manufacturer
for conducting the tests mentioned in Annexure-B except Immersion test for 720 hrs. mentioned at
S.No.1 where it shall be used as 1% w/w of water or as recommended by the manufacturer.
Rebars conforming to IS: 1786 shall be used for testing purposes
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
ISIRIzet ENGINEER.S
gzir 1151d g isr INDIA UMITED
si
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
PENETRATING CORROSION
INHIBITING ADMIXTURE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 8 of 14
APPENDIX-I
Attach steel test pieces conforming to IS: 1786 (of size approx. 15mm dia and 12mm thickness drilled
from one side c/c to a dia of lOmm and a depth of 10 mm to hold the Aluminium pipe) after thorough
cleaning to white metal by using 1000 grade grit paper and subsequently polishing with 3/0 grade and
finally with 4/0 grade grit paper to the Aluminium pipe with the help of cello tape so that it is firmly
attached. The Aluminium pipe is then slid upwards till the test piece rests in the slot provided in the
rubber cork, as shown in the figure.
Alumirium Pita
Rubber
Stopper
Bottle Rubber Stopper
Rubber
Stopper
1000 rri 1We Mouth Glass Bottle
Test
Piece
REIN Water
IA Go (M MY mammon.,
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
PENETRATING CORROSION
INHIBITING ADMIXTURE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 9 of 14
APPENDIX-H
IMMERSION TEST (REBAR WEIGHT LOSS TEST)
(AS PER ASTM G 1)
TEST PROCEDURE
Take six pieces of Tor steel rebar conforming to IS: 1786 of size approx. 40 mm length and 10 mm
dia. Clean the rebar of any rust, mill scale etc., with the help of steel wire brush, till it has overall a
shining surface. Now clean all the six pieces with solvent such as Benzene/Acetone to remove any
loose rust /dust from the surface. Dry at 100 2 C for 15 minutes in an oven. Cool and take the
weights of all the six pieces and record it.
Take six transparent glass/plastic bottles of approx. 150+10 ml with air tight caps. Clean all the bottles
with tap water and then fill them with 100 ml of tap water so that the bottles are approx. three fourth
filled. In three of the six bottles, add CPCIA 1%, w/w or as recommended by the manufacturer of the
water in the bottle. Now put one cleaned and weighed rebar test piece completely immersed in
water/water + CPCIA, in all the six bottles and close the cap.
After 30 days (720 hrs.), take out all the six test pieces and put them in Clark solution (prepared by
dissolving 20 gins of Antimony Trioxide and 50 gins of Stannous Chloride in 1000 ml of Conc.
Hydrochloric acid, S.G. 1.18) so that corrosion products are dissolved. After complete removal of
corrosion products (in 5 minutes approximate), take out the test pieces and wash in running water and
finally with distilled water. Then wash the test pieces, with solvent such as Benzene/Acetone. Dry at
100 2 C for 30 minutes in an oven. Cool and take the weights of all the six pieces and record it.
Calculate the corrosion rate in mpy, by using the formula
Corrosion rate (mpy) = 534 (WI-W2) / DAT
Where WI -W2 is the weight loss in mg., D is the density of steel , A is the area in sq.inch and T is the
time of exposure in hrs
reark
Raw Water
Assembly without Corrosion Inhditor
ela
Raw water
with 1% (whie)CPCIA
Assembly with Corrosion Inhibitor
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL
& STRUCTURAL WORKS
sigar Wag's!, INDIA LIMITED
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
PENETRATING CORROSION
1510zEta ENGINEERS
KAM eiteVallatAli
IA
6-68-0017 Rev.O
Page 10 of 14
INHIBITING ADMIXTURE
APPENDIX-HI
TEST FOR EFFECT ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH BY ADDITION OF CPCIA
TEST PROCEDURE
Cast three concrete blocks of size 100mm x 100mm x 100mm each without and with CPCIA 1%
(w/w) of cement or as recommended by the manufacturer, by casting the concrete of M20 grade as per
Clause 6.2.3 of IS 9103.
The above casted blocks shall be demoulded after 24 hrs. These blocks shall be moist cured for 28
days. After completion of the curing period, the blocks of each type shall be tested for compressive
strength in compression testing machine (Universal Tensile Machine) and data recorded.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
PENETRATING CORROSION
INHIBITING ADMIXTURE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 11 of 14
APPENDIX-IV
BRIEF OUTLINES OF ELECTROCHEMICAL POLARIZATION TEST CONDUCTED ON
STEEL REBARS EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE (AS PER ASTM G 3)
TEST PROCEDURE
Cast three concrete cylinders, of size 75mm dia and 150mm length each without and with CPCIA 1%
(w/w) of cement or as recommended by the manufacturer, by casting the concrete of M 20 grade as
per Clause 6.2.3 of IS 9103, and placement of one cleaned rebar conforming to IS:1786 of size 375mm
length and 12mm dia (preferably cleaned by pickling in Hydrochloric acid 20% (v/v) approximately,
till surface shines and washed in running water) in each block .
The above casted blocks shall be demoulded after 24 hrs. These blocks shall be moist cured for 28
days.
After completion of the curing period, the blocks shall be subjected for Polarization test for 20 days as
per ASTM G-3 and observations recorded.
05d ze ak ENGINEERS
oig7men kilatalir
INDIA LIMITED
ereetweg awem
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
PENETRATING CORROSION
INHIBITING ADMIXTURE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 12 of 14
APPENDIX-V
0.75 In or 1
6 In
Cathode
4.5 In
Reber
ENGINEERS
UNITED
f
ILIA
OWN eiVellerna0
IA GOA al Si
tosnco
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
PENETRATING CORROSION
INHIBITING ADMIXTURE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 13 of 14
APPENDIX-VI
(Sheet 1 of 2)
BRIEF OUTLINES OF RESISTANCE OF CONCRETE TO MIGRATION OF
CHLORIDE ION TEST (AS PER AASHTO T259)
Part-A : Chloride Ion Penetration (Salt Ponding Test As per IS:456)
TEST PROCEDURE
Cast three concrete blocks of size 300mmx300mmx75mm each without and with CPCIA 1% (w/w) or
as recommended by the manufacturer, by using the concrete mix as under:
S.No.
v)
M 30 (Kg)
50
M 40 (Kg)
50
Coarse Sand
104
87
160
134
24
20
0.5*
0.5*
Material
53 Grade Cement
CPCIA
* as recommended by the manufacturer with each type of cement viz. Ordinary Portland
Cement, Portland Pozzolana Cement, Portland Slag cement, Sulphate resisting Cement
AASHTO T259 test (commonly referred to as the salt ponding test) is a long-term test for measuring
the penetration of Chloride ions into concrete. Three slabs of 75 mm thick and having a surface area of
300 mm square shall be casted. These slabs are moist cured for 14 days and then stored in drying room
at 50 percent relative humidity for 28 days. The sides of the slabs are sealed except for bottom and top
face. After the conditioning period, a 3% NaCI solution is ponded on the top surface for 90 days, while
the bottom face is left exposed to the drying environment (see figure below).
3% NaCI Solution
Sealed on _11,.
Sides
Concrete Sample
t 13 mm
1 _I75 mm
if
50% r.h.
atmosphere
At the end of this time (90 days) the slabs are removed from the drying environment and the Chloride
concentration of 10 mm thick slices is then determined (AASHTO T259).Two or three slices are taken
at progressive depth. The salt ponding test does provide a crude one-dimensional chloride ion ingress
profile. Test results should meet the requirements as stipulated in IS: 456.
OM-addle ENGINEERS
Ogza
W INDIA MOM
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
PENETRATING CORROSION
INHIBITING ADMIXTURE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 14 of 14
APPENDIX -VI
(Sheet 2 of 2)
v)
M 30 (Kg)
50
M 40 (Kg)
50
Coarse Sand
104
87
160
134
24
20
0.5*
0.5*
Material
53 Grade Cement
CPCIA
* as recommended by the manufacturer with each type of cement viz. Ordinary Portland
Cement, Portland Pozzolana Cement, Portland Slag cement, Su phate resisting Cement
As per ASTM C-1202, water-saturated concrete specimen is subjected to a 60 V applied DC voltage
for 6 hrs. using the apparatus shown in Figure below. In one reservoir is a 3.0% NaC1 solution and in
the other reservoir is a 0.3 M NaOH solution. The total charge passed is determined and this is used to
rate the concrete's resistance to chloride ion penetration.
60 V Power Supply
lafaad
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$1`fga1affle
g
I ani'M eiM/ReealaW511/
7-75-0066 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
RCC LINTEL
CEMENT PLASTER
A
750 TO 1000
4(:)
ill
411/
Si
4
F
Po
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
SECTION 2-2
ELEVATION
B
F
BRICK WORK
CEMENT
SECTIONAL PLAN 1 -1
LEGEND:
WOODEN FRAME OUT OF 125x65
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
J:
K:
L:
M:
N:
P:
09.11.11
21.03.07
REAFFIRMED AS STANDARD
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
DK friV.
*SD
MARDI
JKB/SD
Prepared
by
Checked
by
..1)(40^
\q-(2)n4
VINAY KUMAR D.MALHOTRA
ARVIND KUMAR
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Committee GM(E) Stds. BureaL
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
nonurinht Fl I - All nnhts reserved